JP2024069673A - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Abstract

[Problem] To provide a gaming machine that is easy to operate in amusement halls. [Solution] A gaming machine that performs a lottery based on the establishment of a starting condition, and can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state advantageous to a player when the lottery results in a jackpot result, includes special gaming state control means that can control to a special gaming state in which the frequency of establishment of the starting condition is higher than in a normal gaming state without controlling to a jackpot gaming state when the lottery results in a non-jackpot result that is not a jackpot result, an external terminal board having a plurality of external output terminals, and external output means that can transmit the status of the gaming machine to an external device using the external terminal board, and the external output means can not only transmit to an external device that a situation advantageous to a player has occurred when the gaming machine is controlled to a jackpot gaming state, but also can transmit to an external device that a situation advantageous to a player has occurred when the lottery results in a non-jackpot result and the gaming machine is controlled to a special gaming state. [Selected Figure] Fig. 134

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines (commonly referred to as "pachinko machines") and slot machine gaming machines (commonly referred to as "pachislot machines").

Conventionally, there are known gaming machines that hold a lottery to determine whether or not a jackpot will be awarded based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting hole (the establishment of a starting condition), and if the lottery results in a jackpot, a jackpot symbol is statically displayed on the display device, generating a jackpot game. In addition, many gaming machines have been proposed that, after the jackpot game ends, control the machine to a state more advantageous to the player than normal (a special game state in which the starting condition is established more frequently than in a normal game state) (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2016-26097 A

Conventional gaming machines are known to transmit information indicating the start of a jackpot game to an external device installed in the game hall. However, in recent years, gameplay has become more diverse, and the conventional configuration is unable to transmit sufficient information to the external device, making it difficult for the game hall to properly manage the gaming machine, which could cause operational problems.

The present invention was made in consideration of these circumstances, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that is easy to operate in gaming halls.

Effective solutions for achieving the above-mentioned objectives are shown below. The actions and other details will be explained as necessary. For ease of understanding, the corresponding configurations and other details will be shown in the embodiments of the invention as appropriate, but are not intended to be limiting.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention relates to a method for manufacturing a semiconductor device comprising the steps of:
In a gaming machine that can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state advantageous to a player when a lottery result is a jackpot result,
a special game state control means for controlling the game state to a special game state in which a frequency of a predetermined start condition being satisfied is higher than that of a normal game state without controlling the game state to the jackpot game state when the result of the lottery is a non-jackpot result other than the jackpot result;
an external terminal board having a plurality of external output terminal units;
An external output means capable of transmitting the status of the gaming machine to an external device using the external terminal board;
Equipped with
The external output means includes:
When the special game state is entered, it is possible to transmit to an external device that a situation advantageous to the player has occurred.
It is characterized by:

In the above configuration, the gaming hall where the gaming machine is installed can properly manage the gaming machine. This makes it possible to provide gaming machines that are easy to operate in the gaming hall.

In this way, the present invention can provide a gaming machine that is easy to operate in an amusement hall.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. FIG. 2 is a left side view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. This is an oblique view of the pachinko machine as seen from the front right. This is an oblique view of the pachinko machine seen from the front left. This is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from behind. This is a front view of a pachinko machine when the pressing operation part of the performance operation unit is in the raised position. This is an oblique view of the pachinko machine from the front right when the pressing operation part of the performance operation unit is in the raised position. This is an oblique view of a pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame open from the main frame and the main frame open from the outer frame. This is an exploded oblique view of a pachinko machine viewed from the front, disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main frame, and an outer frame. This is an exploded oblique view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, viewed from the rear. FIG. 2 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine. FIG. FIG. This is an oblique view of the outer frame from the front. This is a perspective view of the outer frame from the rear. This is an exploded oblique view of the outer frame disassembled into its main components as viewed from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the left and right outer frame assemblies of the outer frame, viewed from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the lower outer frame assembly of the outer frame, viewed from the front. 1A is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame, as viewed from the front and above, and FIG. 1B is an exploded perspective view of FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine. FIG. FIG. FIG. This is an oblique view of the door frame from the front right. This is an oblique view of the door frame from the front left. This is a perspective view of the door frame from the rear. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame disassembled into its main components as viewed from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame disassembled into its main components from the rear. 1A is a perspective view of a door frame base unit of a door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame base unit disassembled into its main components, viewed from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame base unit disassembled into its main components from the rear. (a) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of the door frame as viewed from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of (a) as viewed from the front and rear, (c) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of a conventional pachinko machine as viewed from the front, and (d) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of (a) as viewed from the rear. 34(a) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34(a) seen from the front, and FIG. 34(b) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34(a) seen from the rear. FIG. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the movable mechanism of the cylinder lock in Figure 34 (a) from the front, (b) is an explanatory diagram of the cylinder lock shown in a state rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise from the state in (a), and (c) is an explanatory diagram of the cylinder lock shown in a state rotated 90 degrees clockwise from the state in (a). (a) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit from the rear. (a) is an exploded oblique view of the ball feeding unit seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded oblique view of the ball feeding unit seen from the rear with the rear case and anti-tamper member removed. 1A is a perspective view of the fall cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the fall cover unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 2 is a front view of the fall cover unit with the lid member removed. 1A is an enlarged front view showing the handle unit and handle cover unit portions of the door frame, and FIG. 1B is an enlarged perspective view showing the handle unit and handle cover unit portions of the door frame. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit as seen from the front. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the front. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the rear. This is a cross-sectional view taken along line I-I in Figure 41 (a). 2 is a cross-sectional view taken along line A-A in FIG. 1. This is an oblique view of the tray unit of the door frame. This is an oblique view of the plate unit from behind. (a) is a cross-sectional view showing the key parts of the door frame cut horizontally at the location of the lower tray ball supply port, (b) is a cross-sectional view showing the key parts of a conventional door frame cut at the same location as (a), and (c) is a table comparing the number of game balls stored in the lower tray of this embodiment and the conventional product. This is an enlarged plan view showing the ball lending operation unit area in the tray unit of the door frame. 1A is a perspective view of the performance operation unit seen from the front with the performance operation button facing upward, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the performance operation unit of FIG. 1A seen from the back. This is an exploded oblique view of the performance operation unit, broken down into its main components, viewed from above and at the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the performance operation unit disassembled into its main components, viewed from below and in the front. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the performance operation unit when the performance operation unit is in a lowered position and the lifting spring lower retaining member is at the upper end of its movement position, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the performance operation unit when the performance operation unit has moved from the position of (a) to the raised position. This is a cross-sectional view of the performance operation unit when the performance operation unit is in a lowered position and the lifting spring lower holding member is at the downward end of its travel position. This is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship between the outer peripheral decorative board of the performance operation unit, the outer decorative board of the buttons, and the inner decorative board of the buttons in a plan view of the performance operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit. (a) is a front view of the dish unit in its normal state, and (b) is a front view of the dish unit when the performance operation unit is in the raised position. This is a plan view of a performance operation unit showing an example in which multiple contact detection bodies are provided in the performance operation unit of the performance operation unit. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic example of multiple contact detection bodies connected to one contact detection sensor main body, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic example of an example in which a switching section is provided between the contact detection sensor main body and multiple contact detection bodies in (a), and (c) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the plate unit's left plate decorative unit, right plate decorative unit, and performance operation unit, etc. can be moved forward and backward, and contact detection bodies are provided on the front and rear of the performance operation unit, etc. FIG. 1A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a decorative contact detection body, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic diagram of another embodiment of the performance operation unit. 1A is a front view of the left side unit of the door frame, FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the left side unit of the door frame from the front, and FIG. 1C is a perspective view of the left side unit of the door frame from the rear. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame left side unit seen from behind. This is a cross-sectional view taken along line U-U in Figure 62(a). (a) is a front view of the right side unit of the door frame, (b) is a right side view of the right side unit of the door frame, (c) is an oblique view of the right side unit of the door frame from the front, and (d) is an oblique view of the right side unit of the door frame from the rear. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame right side unit seen from behind. This is a cross-sectional view taken along line A-A in Figure 66(a). This is a cross-sectional view taken along line O-O in Figure 66(a). FIG. 1A is a right side view of the door frame right side unit, showing the two-color molded outer layer of the door frame in an opaque state, and FIG. 1B is a right side view of the door frame right side unit, showing the outer layer in a transparent state while leaving the inner layer intact in FIG. A front view showing each decorative substrate of the door frame. This is a plan view showing the decorative board in the part of the door frame's performance operation unit. A rear view showing each decorative substrate provided around the door window of the door frame. FIG. 2 is a front view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine. This is an oblique view of the main body frame from the front right. This is an oblique view of the main body frame from the front left. This is an oblique view of the main body frame from the rear. This is an exploded oblique view of the main body frame disassembled into its main components as viewed from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the main body frame disassembled into its main components and viewed from the rear. 1A is an enlarged oblique view showing the lower left corner of the front of the main body frame, and FIG. 1B is an enlarged oblique view showing the lower left corner of the front of the main body frame when the door frame is opened relative to the main body frame. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened and closed relative to the main body frame. FIG. 1A is a perspective view of the ball launcher in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the ball launcher as viewed from the rear. 1A is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit of the main frame seen from the front, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit seen from the rear. 1A is a perspective view of the dispensing unit in the main body frame seen from the front, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the dispensing unit seen from the rear. 1A is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into its main components as viewed from the front, and FIG. 1B is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into its main components as viewed from the rear. This is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit, cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the front-to-rear direction. (a) is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the fore-and-aft direction when the ball-removing movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along line A-A in (a). An explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the door frame foul cover unit and the lower full ball path unit. An explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls in the main body frame. 1A is a perspective view of a board unit of a main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the board unit as viewed from the rear. 1 is a perspective view of the board unit as viewed from below and rear. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit as viewed from the front, disassembled into its main components. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the rear. This is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut in the center in the left-right direction. 1A is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the locking unit as seen from the rear. 1A is a plan view of a main body frame, and FIG. 1B is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. This is an enlarged view showing the upper part of the main body frame in a perspective view seen from behind. 1A is a perspective view of the spherical tank with tank rails and the like assembled thereto, as viewed from above the front, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of FIG. 1A from below the front. 100(a) is an exploded perspective view seen from the front. FIG. An explanatory diagram showing the area through which game balls that overflow from the ball tank at the top of the main body frame circulate. An explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls that have overflowed from the ball tank at the top of the main body frame. An explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls into the bypass passage at the top of the main frame. 1 is an enlarged perspective view showing the main body frame from the rear of the hinge side, showing the tank rail and its surroundings. FIG. This is an oblique view showing an enlarged portion of the tank rail as viewed from behind of a pachinko machine equipped with a tank rail of a second embodiment. 106 in an assembled state together with a spherical tank, (b) is an oblique view of the tank rail etc. in (a) seen from the front, and (c) is an oblique view of the tank rail etc. in (a) seen from the rear. 107A is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like of FIG. 107 as seen from the front, and FIG. 107B is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like of FIG. 107 as seen from the rear. FIG. 107(a) is a cross-sectional view of the tank rail, etc., taken along the kerk line. An explanatory diagram showing a cross section of the flow of game balls within the tank rail of Figure 107. 13 is an enlarged perspective view of a main body frame including a tank rail and the like according to a third embodiment, showing the tank rail portion as viewed from the right rear. FIG. 13 is an enlarged perspective view of a main body frame including a tank rail and the like according to a third embodiment, showing the tank rail portion as viewed from the rear left. FIG. 1A is a rear view of the main body frame showing an enlarged view of the portion of the external terminal board, and FIG. 1B is a left side view of the main body frame showing an enlarged view of the upper portion. 113(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 113(b), and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 113(a). 114(b) is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged view of the tank rail and its vicinity in FIG. 114(b). 10A is a perspective view of the tank rail etc. of the third embodiment as viewed from the front, FIG. 10B is a perspective view of the tank rail etc. of (a) as viewed from the upper right rear, and FIG. 10C is a perspective view of the tank rail etc. of (a) as viewed from the lower right rear. 117 is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and other components of FIG. 116 as viewed from the front. 117 is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and other components of FIG. 116 as viewed from the rear. 1A is a front view of a board unit of another embodiment, FIG. 1B is an oblique view of the board unit of FIG. 1A seen from the front right, and FIG. 1C is an oblique view of the board unit of FIG. 1A seen from the front left. 119(a) is an oblique view of the board unit of FIG. 119(a) seen from the upper right rear, and FIG. 119(b) is an oblique view of the board unit of FIG. 119(a) seen from the lower right rear. 119(a) is an exploded oblique view of the substrate unit as viewed from the front. FIG. This is an exploded oblique view of the board unit of Figure 119(a) seen from behind. 119(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line K-K-I in FIG. 119(a), (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line C-K in (a), and (c) is a cross-sectional view taken along line K-K in (a). This is a bottom view showing the area behind the door frame in a pachinko machine equipped with the board unit of Figure 119(a). An explanatory diagram showing an example in which a guide piece is provided at the out ball discharge outlet of the out ball passage. 1A is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the out-sensor is detachable, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the out-sensor in FIG. (a) is an oblique view of the base unit of the third embodiment, with the power supply unit, dispensing control unit, and interface unit omitted, viewed from the front right, and (b) is an oblique view of the base unit of (a) viewed from the front left. 127 from the upper right rear, and FIG. 128 is a perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 127 from the lower right rear. 127A is a plan view of the substrate unit of FIG. 127, FIG. 127B is a cross-sectional view taken along line C-C in FIG. 127A, and FIG. 127C is a cross-sectional view taken along line S-S in FIG. This is a cross-sectional view taken along line C-C in Figure 129(a). This is an exploded oblique view of the board unit of Figure 127 viewed from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the board unit of Figure 127 seen from the rear. 128A is a perspective view of the ball path member of the base plate unit of FIG. 127 viewed from the front, and FIG. 128B is a perspective view of the ball path member of the base plate unit of FIG. 127 viewed from the back. An explanatory diagram showing the elimination of ball clogging in the board unit of Figure 127. 128 is an explanatory diagram showing the prevention of intrusion of linear illegal tools into the board unit of FIG. 127. 128 is an explanatory diagram showing how to remove dust from the board unit of FIG. 127. This is a front view of a game board in a pachinko machine, in which the center device and other parts are made opaque. FIG. 138 is an oblique view of the game board of FIG. 137 as seen from the front right. FIG. 138 is an oblique view of the game board of FIG. 137 as seen from the front left. This is a perspective view of the game board from behind. 4 is a schematic explanatory diagram of wiring from a function display unit on a main control board. FIG. This is a front view of the game board with the center gimmicks and other parts made transparent. This is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components as seen from the front. This is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. This is a front view of the game board with the front unit cut parallel to the surface of the game panel to reveal the game area where game balls circulate and the obstacle pins. 146 is an enlarged front view showing the left side of FIG. 145 . 146 is an enlarged front view showing the right side of FIG. 145 . 1A is a front view showing the right half of the front unit together with the panel board and the interference nails, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of FIG. 148, (a) is an exploded oblique view of the center right front plate seal and center right front plate as viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded oblique view of the center right front plate seal and center right front plate as viewed from the rear. This is an exploded oblique view of only the center right front plate in Figure 148, seen from the rear and seen from the front. 1A is a perspective view of the rear box-related configuration of the rear unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the rear box-related configuration of the rear unit as viewed from the rear. 151. FIG. 152(a) is an exploded perspective view of the rear box shown in FIG. 151 broken down into its main components as seen from the front, and FIG. 152(b) is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 151 as seen from the rear. 153A is an exploded perspective view of the rear box rear unit in FIG. 152 as seen from the front, and FIG. 153B is an exploded perspective view of (a) as seen from the rear. This is a front view of the game board showing the state in which the back-lower front decoration of the back-lower front performance unit and the back-lower rear decoration of the back-lower rear performance unit in the back unit have each moved to their raised positions. This is a front view of the game board showing that the back-lower front decorative body of the back-lower front performance unit in the back unit has moved to the center of the game area, the back-upper rear decorative body of the back-upper rear performance unit has moved above the back-lower front decorative body, and the back-lower rear decorative body of the back-lower rear performance unit has moved below the back-lower front decorative body. This is a front view of the game board showing the state in which the front left decorative body and the front right decorative body in the back-lower-front decorative body of the back-lower-front performance unit have moved to the open position, revealing the central decorative body. This is a front view of the game board showing the back-upper rear decorative body of the back-upper rear performance unit in the back unit moving to a lowered position, and the back-lower rear decorative body of the back-lower rear performance unit rising and abutting against the back-upper rear decorative body. This is a front view of the game board showing the state in which the front left decorative body and the front right decorative body of the back-lower-front decorative body of the back-lower-front performance unit have moved to the open position, revealing the central decorative body. This is a front view of the game board showing the state in which the back-upper front decorative body of the back-upper front performance unit in the back unit has moved to a lowered position while the back-upper rear decorative body of the back-upper rear performance unit has moved rear of the back-upper front decorative body, the back-down front decorative body of the back-down front performance unit has risen and moved below the back-upper front decorative body while the back-down rear decorative body of the back-down rear performance unit has risen and abutted against the back-upper rear decorative body behind the back-down front decorative body. 1 is a block diagram showing an outline of the control configuration of a pachinko machine. This is a front view of a game board of a second embodiment, showing the front unit cut parallel to the surface of the game panel to reveal the game area through which game balls circulate. 13A is a perspective view of a center device on a game board of a second embodiment as viewed from the front, and FIG. 13B is a perspective view of the center device on a game board of the second embodiment as viewed from the back. 162. (a) is an exploded oblique view of the right half of the center role in Figure 162, showing the center front right plate and ball guiding unit disassembled from the front, and (b) is an exploded oblique view of (a) seen from the back. (a) is a front view of the ball guiding unit in the center role in Figure 162, and (b) is a right side view of the ball guiding unit. 164, (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the C line in FIG. 164, (c) is a cross-sectional view taken along the S-SO line in FIG. 164, and (d) is a cross-sectional view taken along the T-TA line in FIG. 164. 164 , (a) is an exploded oblique view of the ball guiding unit in Figure 164 , viewed from the front right, and (b) is an exploded oblique view of the ball guiding unit in Figure 164 , viewed from the front left. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a process performed when the main control side is powered on; This is a flowchart showing the continuation of the main control side power-on processing in Figure 167. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a main control side timer interrupt processing. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a setting change process. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a setting value confirmation display process. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an error display process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of processing performed when the dispensing control unit is powered on. This is a flowchart showing the continuation of the power-on processing of the payout control unit in Figure 173. Following Figure 174, this is a flowchart showing the continuation of the processing when the dispensing control unit is powered on. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a dispensing control unit timer interrupt process. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of a peripheral control unit power-on process; 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt process. FIG. 13 is a front view of a game board according to a third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for special symbol and special electric device control processing (step S114). A flowchart showing the procedure for the first starting port passing processing (step S232). 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for a performance pre-determination process (step S245). A flowchart showing the procedure for the second starting port passing process (step S234). 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for special symbol process processing (step S238). 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal special symbol processing (step S280). 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for a hit determination process (step S305). Various tables showing a lottery table for low probability (A), a lottery table for high probability (B), a big win pattern determination table (C), an instant short win pattern determination table (D), and a small win pattern determination table (E). 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for a special symbol stopping symbol setting process (step S281). 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the variation pattern setting process (step S282). 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for special pattern change processing (step S283). 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for special symbol stop processing (step S284). 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for a relief count process (step S394). FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the transition of the game state. This is a specific example of the presentation in which the number of times the special symbol changes in a low probability state reaches 600 times. This is a specific example of a presentation when the ball enters the second starting hole while the count presentation is being executed. This is a specific example of how the lottery results in an immediate short win. 11 is a time chart showing a count suppression period. This is a time chart showing the period during which instantaneous short win patterns are invalid. This is a time chart showing the combined use of count suppression period A and instant short win pattern invalid period. 1 is a time chart showing the progress of the RTC performance. This is a time chart showing the progress of the presentation before and after the changing display of the special pattern reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600). This is a time chart showing the progress of the presentation when the conditions for starting the RTC presentation are met before the changing display of the special pattern reaches 600 times (rescue count counter = 600). This is a time chart showing the progress of the presentation when the conditions for starting the RTC presentation are met after the changing display of the special pattern reaches 600 times (rescue count counter = 600). This is a time chart showing the progress of the presentation before and after an immediate short hit occurs. This is a time chart showing the progress of the presentation when the conditions for starting the RTC presentation are met before an immediate short hit occurs. This is a time chart showing the progress of the presentation when the conditions for starting the RTC presentation are met after an immediate short hit occurs. 11 is a list of RAM clear conditions indicating operations to be performed when the power is turned on to execute the RAM clear. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a history display that can be displayed during a period in which setting values are changed or the display of setting values is confirmed. This is a time chart showing the behavior related to normal patterns when the power is turned on. This is a time chart showing the change in the game state when a RAM clear operation is performed during the time-saving state. This is a time chart showing the change in the game state when a RAM clear operation is performed during the execution of pattern fluctuations in which the display of special patterns in a low probability state reaches 600 times. 13 is a modified example of a RAM clear condition indicating an operation at power-on for executing a RAM clear. 11 is a time chart showing the change in the game state when the power supply to the main control board is cut off and then restored. 11 is a time chart showing the change in the game state when the power supply to the main control board is cut off, then restored and a setting key ON signal is input. This is a time chart showing the progress of the presentation when no game stop state occurs during the pattern change that results in an immediate short win. This is a time chart showing the progress of the presentation when a weak game stop state occurs during the execution of a pattern change that results in an immediate short hit. This is a time chart showing the progress of the presentation when a strong play stop state occurs during the execution of a pattern change that results in an immediate short hit. This is a time chart showing the progress of the presentation when a game stop state does not occur during the pattern change in which the display of the special pattern in a low probability state reaches 600 times. This is a time chart showing the progress of the presentation when a weak game stop state occurs during the execution of pattern fluctuation in which the display of the special pattern in a low probability state reaches 600 times. This is a time chart showing the progress of the presentation when a strong game stop state occurs during the execution of pattern fluctuation in which the display of the special pattern in a low probability state reaches 600 times. 13 is a lottery table and a symbol determination table according to a modified example. This is a time chart showing an immediate short hit during control of low probability time-saving state B. This is a time chart showing an instantaneous short hit during control of 100 low-probability time-saving states A, which are initiated upon a jackpot C. 2 is a block diagram showing the connection between the pachinko machine and external devices. FIG. This shows the situation when a pachinko machine transitions from a low-probability non-time-save state to low-probability time-save state B, and then transitions to low-probability time-save state C while in low-probability time-save state B. This shows the situation when a pachinko machine transitions from a low-probability non-time-shortening state to a low-probability time-shortening state C, and then transitions to a new low-probability time-shortening state C while in the low-probability time-shortening state C. FIG. This shows the situation when a pachinko machine transitions from low-probability time-saving state B to low-probability time-saving state A via a jackpot, and then transitions further to low-probability time-saving state C while in low-probability time-saving state A. 1 is a time chart showing the progress of the presentation when the power is turned on. A pattern determination table (A) for a normal hit in a modified example, and various tables showing a list of opening and closing patterns of the variable winning opening (B). 13 is a time chart showing the relationship between the game state and the opening and closing pattern of the variable winning opening. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the transition of the game state in a modified example. Various tables showing a lottery table (A) for low probability, a lottery table (B) for high probability, a big win pattern determination table (C), an instantaneous short win pattern determination table (D), and a small win pattern determination table (E) in a modified example. Various tables showing an instantaneous short win pattern determination table (A) during a non-time-saving state in a modified example, and an instantaneous short win pattern determination table (B) during a time-saving state. Various tables showing a lottery table (A) for low probability in a modified example, a lottery table (B) for high probability, a jackpot pattern determination table (C) for non-time-saving state, and a jackpot pattern determination table (D) for time-saving state. Various tables showing a pattern determination table (A) for a normal hit in a modified example, a list of opening and closing patterns of the variable winning port (B), an instantaneous short hit pattern determination table (C) for a non-time-saving state, and an instantaneous short hit pattern determination table (D) for a time-saving state. (a) An explanatory diagram showing the transition of the game state when the specific instant short win is not won in the drawing of the first special pattern, and (b) an explanatory diagram showing the transition of the game state when the specific instant short win is won in the drawing of the first special pattern. 13 is a time chart showing the change in the game state when the variable display of the first special pattern and the second special pattern can be executed simultaneously. This is a specific example of a presentation in which there is no change in the second special pattern while the first special pattern is being displayed in a changing state. This is a specific example of a presentation in which the display of a second special pattern begins to change while the display of a first special pattern is changing. 13 is a time chart showing the change in the game state when the start of the help mode L start presentation is delayed. This is a specific example of a presentation in which the start of the help mode L start presentation is delayed. An explanatory diagram showing the door frame top unit and performance operation unit that can be attached and detached from the door frame. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a determination target of an ID code. An explanatory diagram showing groupings of multiple LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board. An explanatory diagram showing groupings of multiple LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the door frame. This is a timing chart showing an example of a suggestion effect that is executed as an effect while the pattern is changing. 13 is a timing chart showing an example of a suggestion effect that is executed as an effect while the pattern is changing when there is a part whose ID code does not match the game board. 13 is a timing chart showing an example of a button effect A during execution of a rainbow effect. 13 is a timing chart showing an example of a button effect B while a rainbow effect is being executed. 13 is a timing chart showing an example of a button effect C during execution of a rainbow effect. 13 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where there is no operation of the effect operation unit during button effect B while a rainbow effect is being executed. 13 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where an anti-addiction display is executed after a simulated rainbow effect is executed. 13 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where the addiction prevention display is erased after the execution of a simulated rainbow effect. 13 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where the execution of a simulated rainbow effect is restricted. 13 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where LED illumination is confirmed when a simulated rainbow effect is being performed. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a game board with a rainbow single decorative part attached thereto. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a rainbow single decorative part. 13 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where a simulated rainbow effect is executed when a single rainbow decorative part is attached. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of a rainbow-only decorative part. FIG. This is a timing chart showing an example of executing a rainbow effect when there is an initial position error of the back upper front decorative body. 11 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where a rainbow effect is executed when a situation occurs in which the rainbow-patterned effect image on the effect display device cannot be viewed. 13 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where a rainbow effect is executed when the first to third abnormalities occur. 11 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where the first to third abnormalities occur during execution of a rainbow effect. 13 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where a confirmation period other than a simulated rainbow effect is set after power is turned on. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing the annular decorative portion. 13 is a timing chart showing an example of a rainbow effect using an annular decorative part.

[1. Overall structure of a pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 1 to 12. Fig. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, Fig. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and Fig. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. Fig. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the right front, Fig. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the left front, and Fig. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the rear. Fig. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the performance operation unit is in the raised position, and Fig. 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the performance operation unit is in the raised position, seen from the right front. Also, Fig. 10 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main frame, and an outer frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main frame, and an outer frame as viewed from the rear.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment comprises a frame-shaped outer frame 2 that is installed in an island facility (not shown) of a gaming hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front of the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, a main frame 4 that supports the door frame 3 so that it can be opened and closed and is attached to the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a game board 5 that has a game area 5a that is detachably attached to the main frame 4 from the front and is visible from the player's side through the door frame 3 and into which the player hits a game ball B (see Figure 89).

The outer frame 2 is formed into a rectangular frame that extends vertically when viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 includes a left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20 that are spaced apart from each other and extend vertically, an upper outer frame member 30 that connects the upper ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20, a lower outer frame assembly 40 that connects the lower ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20, an upper outer frame hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end of the upper surface of the upper outer frame member 30, and a lower outer frame hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the left end of the upper surface of the lower outer frame assembly 40.

The outer frame 2 is attached to the island equipment of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 support the main frame upper hinge member 510 and the main frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main frame 4 so that they can rotate coaxially, and the main frame 4 is attached so that it can be opened and closed forward around the left side when viewed from the front.

In addition, when the main frame 4 is closed, the door frame 3 has the lower outer frame assembly 40 which cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main frame 4 to form part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622, and the sound output to the rear of the main frame speaker 622 is phase-inverted and radiated forward, allowing the player to hear a deeper bass sound.

The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game balls B are dropped so that it can be seen from the front, stores the game balls B to be dropped into the game area 5a, and is equipped with a handle 195 that the player operates to drop the stored game balls B into the game area 5a. The door frame 3 also decorates the entire front of the pachinko machine 1.

The door frame 3 also has a performance operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player in addition to the handle 195. When a player-participation performance is being executed, the player can participate in the performance by operating the performance operation unit 301. This allows the player to enjoy the game not only by playing with the game ball B, but also by operating the performance operation unit 301.

The main body frame 4 comprises a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear part can be inserted into the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, a main body frame upper hinge member 510 and a main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 for mounting the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable and for mounting the door frame 3 so as to be openable and closable, a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 which reinforces the main body frame base unit 500, a ball launching device 540 for shooting game balls B into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall. It is equipped with a payout base unit 550 that receives the game balls B, a payout unit 560 that pays out the game balls B received by the payout base unit 550 to the player, a board unit 620 that has a power board 630 equipped with a power switch 630a that can turn on the power to the pachinko machine 1 as well as a payout control board 633, a back cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main frame base 501, and a locking unit 650 that locks the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the door frame 3 and the main frame 4.

The main frame 4 holds the game board 5 having a play area 5a where a game is played by hitting the game ball B, and is used to pay out the game ball B to the player and to eject the game balls B used in the game to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (towards the island equipment of the game hall). The main frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is removably stored inside from the front. The main frame 4 is attached to a frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front end on the left side of the front side so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3 is attached so that the open front side can be closed.

The game board 5 is made up of a game area 5a where the game ball B is thrown by the player, a front component 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a generally rectangular shape when viewed from the front, a plate-shaped game panel 1100 that is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and defines the rear end of the game area 5a, a board holder 1200 that is attached to the rear lower part of the game panel 1100, and a main control unit that is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 and has a main control board 1310 and a setting change board 1311. The game panel 1100 includes a display unit 1300, a functional display unit 1400 that displays the game status based on a control signal from a main control board 1310, a peripheral control unit 1500 (see FIG. 12) that is located on the rear side of the game panel 1100, a performance display device 1600 that is located in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and can display a predetermined performance image, a front unit 2000 that is attached to the front of the game panel 1100, and a rear unit 3000 that is attached to the rear of the game panel 1100. The rear unit 3000 includes various performance units that can perform movable performances and light-emitting performances depending on the game status.

The game area 5a of the game board 5 includes a plurality of obstacle nails N that come into contact with the game ball B and are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, as well as a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2004, a gate 2002, a second starting opening 2005, and a first large winning opening 2006 that provide a player with a predetermined privilege (e.g., the payment of a predetermined number of game balls B) when the game ball B is accepted or passed through. The obstacle nails N are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100. The general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2004, the gate 2002, the second starting opening 2005, and the first large winning opening 2006 are provided in the front unit 2000.

The player can shoot game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by operating the handle 195 of the handle unit 180. This allows the player to enjoy operating the handle 195 to shoot the game ball B so that it is accepted into or passes through the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2004, the gate 2002, the second starting opening 2005, and the first large winning opening 2006, etc., in the game area 5a.

In addition, the game board 5 can entertain the player by displaying a predetermined performance image on the performance display device 1600 according to the game state that changes when the game ball B is hit into the game area 5a, and by providing light-emitting and moving performances using the lower right unit 2400 and the rear front peripheral decorative unit 3200, rear upper front performance unit 3300, rear lower front performance unit 3400, rear upper rear performance unit 3500, rear lower rear performance unit 3600, etc. of the rear unit 3000.

[2. Overall structure of the outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to Figs. 13 to 18. Fig. 13 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, Fig. 14 is a rear view of the outer frame, and Fig. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. Fig. 16 is a perspective view of the outer frame seen from the front, and Fig. 17 is a perspective view of the outer frame seen from the rear. Fig. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled into its main components and seen from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in an amusement hall or the like on which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The outer frame 2 is formed into a rectangular frame that extends vertically when viewed from the front.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 comprises a left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20 that are spaced apart from each other laterally and extend vertically, an upper outer frame member 30 that connects the upper ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20, a lower outer frame assembly 40 that connects the lower ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20, an upper outer frame hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end of the upper surface of the upper outer frame member 30, and a lower outer frame hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the left end of the upper surface of the lower outer frame assembly 40.

When the main frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main frame 4 to form part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622, and can invert the phase of the sound output to the rear of the main frame speaker 622 and radiate it forward.

The outer frame 2 can detachably support the upper hinge assembly 50 of the main body frame 4. The upper hinge assembly 50 and the lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 can coaxially support the upper hinge member 510 and the lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4, and the main body frame 4 can be attached so that it can be opened and closed forward around the left side when viewed from the front.

[2-1. Left outer frame assembly and right outer frame assembly]
The left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Fig. 19. Fig. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the left outer frame assembly and the right outer frame assembly of the outer frame, respectively, disassembled and viewed from the front. The left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 each extend vertically and are arranged spaced apart from each other on the left and right. The left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20 coaxially support the upper main frame hinge member 510 and the lower main frame hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 so that they can rotate on the same axis, and attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed.

First, the left outer frame assembly 10 comprises a left outer frame member 11 that extends vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-to-rear direction, an upper left connecting member 12 that is attached to the upper end of the right side of the left outer frame member 11, and a lower left connecting member 13 that is attached to the lower end of the right side of the left outer frame member 11.

The left outer frame member 11 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed from an extruded aluminum alloy material. The left outer frame member 11 has a recess 11a that is flatly recessed to the right in the rear part of the left side surface, which is one of three equal parts in the front-to-rear direction, a bulge 11b that bulges to the right from the part on the right side surface opposite the recess 11a, and a hollow portion 11c that penetrates the bulge 11b vertically. The strength and rigidity of the left outer frame member 11 are increased by the recess 11a and the bulge 11b, and the weight is reduced by the hollow portion 11c.

The left outer frame member 11 also has multiple grooves extending vertically formed on both the left and right side surfaces. The multiple grooves on the left side surface are V-shaped, and the multiple grooves on the right side surface are semicircular. The left outer frame member 11 is formed in a symmetrical shape with the right outer frame member 21 of the right outer frame assembly 20 described below.

The upper left connecting member 12 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper left connecting member 12 is provided with a flat horizontal fixing portion 12a extending horizontally, a flat upper lateral fixing portion 12b extending upward from the middle in the front-to-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a, and a pair of flat lower lateral fixing portions 12c extending downward from both the front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing portion 12b on the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper left connecting member 12 is attached to the left outer frame member 11 by inserting the rear lower horizontal fixing part 12c into the hollow part 11c of the left outer frame member 11, abutting the horizontal fixing part 12a against the upper end of the left outer frame member 11, and further abutting the front and rear lower horizontal fixing parts 12c against the right side of the left outer frame member 11, and screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing part 12c from the outside of the left side of the left outer frame member 11. The upper left connecting member 12 is also attached to the upper outer frame member 30 by abutting the horizontal fixing part 12a against the underside of the left end side of the upper outer frame member 30, and inserting the upper horizontal fixing part 12b into the notch part 30a on the left side of the upper outer frame member 30, and screwing a screw into the upper outer frame member 30 through the horizontal fixing part 12a and the upper horizontal fixing part 12b.

The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 is provided with a flat horizontal fixing portion 13a extending horizontally, a flat upper lateral fixing portion 13b extending upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 13a, a flat lower lateral fixing portion 13c extending downward from a portion on the lower side of the upper lateral fixing portion 13b rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 13a, and a flat abutment portion 13d extending short to the right from the rear side of the upper lateral fixing portion 13b. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The left lower connecting member 13 is attached to the left outer frame member 11 by screwing a screw into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side of the left outer frame member 11 with the rear surface of the abutment portion 13d abutting against the front surface of the bulge portion 11b of the left outer frame member 11, the left side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b abutting against the right side of the left outer frame member 11, and the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a coinciding with the lower end of the left outer frame member 11. The left lower connecting member 13 is attached to the lower outer frame member 41 by screwing a screw into the lower outer frame member 41 through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c with the horizontal fixing portion 13a abutting against the upper surface of the left end side of the lower outer frame member 41 and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c inserted into the notch 41a on the left side of the lower outer frame member 41.

Next, the right outer frame assembly 20 comprises a right outer frame member 21 that extends vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-to-rear direction, an upper right connecting member 22 attached to the upper end of the left side of the right outer frame member 21, a lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower end of the left side of the right outer frame member 21, an upper hook member 24 attached to the upper part of the left side of the right outer frame member 21, and a lower hook member 25 attached to the lower part of the left side of the right outer frame member 21.

The right outer frame member 21 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed from an extruded aluminum alloy material. The right outer frame member 21 has a recess 21a that is flatly recessed to the left in the rear portion of the right side surface, which is one of three equal portions of the right side surface divided in the front-to-rear direction, a bulge 21b that bulges to the left from the portion of the left side surface opposite the recess 21a, and a hollow portion 21c that penetrates the bulge 21b vertically. The strength and rigidity of the right outer frame member 21 are increased by the recess 21a and the bulge 21b, and the weight is reduced by the hollow portion 21c.

The right outer frame member 21 also has multiple grooves extending vertically formed on both the left and right side surfaces. The multiple grooves on the right side surface are V-shaped, and the multiple grooves on the left side surface are semicircular. The right outer frame member 21 is formed symmetrically to the left outer frame member 11 of the left outer frame assembly 10.

The upper right connecting member 22 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper right connecting member 22 is provided with a flat horizontal fixing portion 22a extending horizontally, a flat upper lateral fixing portion 22b extending upward from the middle in the front-to-rear direction on the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a, and a pair of flat lower lateral fixing portions 22c extending downward from both the front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing portion 22b on the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper right connecting member 22 is attached to the right outer frame member 21 by inserting the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 22c into the hollow portion 21c of the right outer frame member 21, abutting the horizontal fixing portion 22a against the upper end of the right outer frame member 21, and screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from the outside of the right side of the right outer frame member 21 with the front and rear lower horizontal fixing portions 22c abutting against the left side of the right outer frame member 21. The upper right connecting member 22 is attached to the upper outer frame member 30 by abutting the horizontal fixing portion 22a against the lower surface of the right end side of the upper outer frame member 30, inserting the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b into the notch portion 30a on the right side of the upper outer frame member 30, and screwing a screw into the upper outer frame member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b.

The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (lower outer frame member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 is provided with a flat horizontal fixing portion 23a extending horizontally, a flat upper lateral fixing portion 23b extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 23a, a flat lower lateral fixing portion 23c extending downward from a portion on the lower side of the upper lateral fixing portion 23b rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 23a, and a flat abutment portion 23d extending short to the left from the rear side of the upper lateral fixing portion 23b. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The lower right connecting member 23 is attached to the right outer frame member 21 by screwing a screw into the upper horizontal fixing part 23b from the outside of the right side of the outer frame right member 21 with the rear surface of the abutment part 23d abutting against the front surface of the bulge part 21b of the right outer frame member 21, the right side of the upper horizontal fixing part 23b abutting against the left side of the right outer frame member 21, and the lower surface of the horizontal fixing part 23a coinciding with the lower end of the right outer frame member 21. The lower right connecting member 23 is attached to the lower outer frame member 41 by screwing a screw into the lower outer frame member 41 through the horizontal fixing part 23a and the lower horizontal fixing part 23c with the horizontal fixing part 23a abutting against the upper surface of the right end side of the lower outer frame member 41 and the lower horizontal fixing part 23c inserted into the notch 41a on the right side of the lower outer frame member 41.

The upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 are hooked by the outer frame hook 653 of the locking unit 650 in the main frame 4 described below. The upper hook member 24 has a flat mounting part 24a that extends vertically with a constant width in the front-to-rear direction and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and a flat hook piece part 24b that extends leftward from the front edge of the mounting part 24a and hooks the upper outer frame hook 653.

The lower hook member 25 has a flat mounting portion 25a that extends vertically with a constant width in the front-to-rear direction and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, a flat hook piece portion 25b that extends leftward from the front edge of the mounting portion 25a and to which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked, and an insertion hole 25c that penetrates the hook piece portion 25b in the front-to-rear direction and through which the lower outer frame hook 653 can be inserted.

[2-2. Upper outer frame member]
The upper outer frame member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Fig. 18. The upper outer frame member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20, which are spaced apart from each other on the left and right sides. The upper outer frame member 30 has a width in the front-to-rear direction substantially the same as that of the left outer frame member 11 and the right outer frame member 21 in the front-to-rear direction, a constant thickness in the up-down direction, extends in the left-to-right direction, and is made of wood. The upper outer frame member 30 is formed so that its length in the left-to-right direction is the same as that of the lower outer frame member 41 of the lower outer frame assembly 40, which will be described later.

The upper outer frame member 30 has cutouts 30a at the center of the front-rear direction on both the left and right sides, which penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction. The upper horizontal fixing part 12b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper horizontal fixing part 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are inserted and attached into the cutouts 30a at both left and right ends.

The upper outer frame member 30 also has a mounting step 30b at the left end, the top and front surfaces of which are recessed from the general surface. The upper outer frame hinge assembly 50, which will be described later, is attached to this mounting step 30b.

[2-3. Lower Outer Frame Assembly]
The lower frame assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Fig. 20. Fig. 20 is an exploded perspective view of the lower frame assembly of the outer frame when viewed from the front. The lower frame assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the left and right frame assemblies 10 and 20, which are spaced apart from each other on the left and right, and is used to close off the lower side of the door frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1 for decoration.

The lower outer frame assembly 40 comprises a lower outer frame member 41 that connects the lower ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20, which are spaced apart from each other on the left and right, and extends left and right; a box-shaped front panel member 42 that is disposed in front of the lower outer frame member 41, extends left and right along the lower outer frame member 41, and is open at the rear; a box-shaped rear panel member 43 that is attached to the rear side of the front panel member 42 and is attached to the top surface of the lower outer frame member 41, extends left and right, and is open at the front; and a ball-jamming prevention mechanism 44 formed at the left end of the top surface of the rear panel member 43.

The outer frame lower member 41 has a width in the front-to-rear direction that is approximately the same as that of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 in the front-to-rear direction, a constant thickness in the up-down direction, extends in the left-to-right direction, and is formed from wood. The outer frame lower member 41 is formed so that its length in the left-to-right direction is the same as that of the outer frame upper member 30 in the left-to-right direction.

The outer frame lower member 41 has cutouts 41a at the center of the front-rear direction on both left and right sides, which penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction. The lower horizontal fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are inserted and attached into the cutouts 41a at both left and right ends. This allows the lower ends of the left outer frame member 11 and the right outer frame member 21 to be connected to each other.

The outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the top surface and has a recess 41b into which the lower part of the back panel member 43 is inserted. The recess 41b extends left and right and extends from a position toward the rear of the center in the front-to-rear direction to the front end side. This recess 41b makes the volume of the back panel internal space 40a formed by the front panel member 42 and the back panel member 43 as large as possible.

The front panel member 42 has the same left-right length as the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a horizontally long rectangular box shape with a short front-to-back depth relative to its height, with the entire rear side open. The front panel member 42 closes the open rear side with the rear panel member 43, thereby forming the front panel internal space 40a that becomes part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 in cooperation with the rear panel member 43. The front panel member 42 has a long hole-shaped opening 42a on the front side near the right end that penetrates from front to back and extends left to right.

The rear panel member 43 has a length in the left-right direction that is slightly shorter than the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape with an open front. The rear panel member 43 has the front panel member 42 attached to its front surface, and cooperates with the front panel member 42 to form the interior space 40a of the panel, which is part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622. The rear panel member 43 has a cylindrical connecting tube portion 43a in the left-right center of the upper surface, which extends left-right and protrudes upward and communicates with the interior space 40a of the panel. The connecting tube portion 43a is inclined so that its upper end is located higher from the front end side, which coincides with the general upper surface of the rear panel member 43, toward the rear. In this embodiment, the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

The connecting tube portion 43a has a left-right length of approximately 1/3 of the length of the entire back panel member 43, and a front-rear depth slightly shorter than the depth of the entire back panel member 43. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front and rear ends are provided inside the connecting tube portion 43a. When the main body frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2, the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a is connected to the connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 of the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4, and is in communication with the internal space of the speaker unit 620a, forming an enclosure 624.

The ball trapping prevention mechanism 44 prevents the game ball B from being trapped between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 by retaining the game ball B at the left end of the upper surface of the rear panel member 43 at the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60.

The ball jamming prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end of the upper surface of the rear panel member 43, and includes a mounting portion 44a formed flat so that the outer frame lower hinge member 60 described later can be attached, a first discharge port 44b opening upward at the left end of the mounting portion 44a, a second discharge port 44c opening upward to the right of the first discharge port 44b in the mounting portion 44a, a standing wall portion 44d extending upward from the rear and right sides of the mounting portion 44a, and an upper end protruding portion 44e protruding forward from the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d and slanting so that the upper surface is positioned upward as it approaches the rear.

The first discharge opening 44b is formed at a position that coincides with the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 described later. The first discharge opening 44b and the second discharge opening 44c are formed to a size that allows the game ball B to pass through. The first discharge opening 44b and the second discharge opening 44c do not communicate with the front panel internal space 40a, and open to the rear surface of the front panel rear member 43. Therefore, the game ball B that enters the first discharge opening 44b and the second discharge opening 44c can be discharged to the rear of the front panel rear member 43.

If an illegal tool such as a piano wire is inserted through the gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the main frame lower hinge assembly 520 described below, the ball-biting prevention mechanism 44 can prevent the illegal tool from entering by using the standing wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the mounting portion 44a. Even if the tip of the illegal tool abuts against the standing wall portion 44d and bends upward, it will abut against the upper end protrusion portion 44e that protrudes forward at the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d, preventing further intrusion. Therefore, it is possible to prevent illegal acts from being performed through the outer frame lower hinge member 60.

However, if the rear end of the mounting portion 44a is provided with a vertical wall portion 44d, when the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, if a game ball B falls onto the mounting portion 44a for some reason, the vertical wall portion 44d will prevent the game ball B from moving rearward relative to the outer frame 2, making it easier for the game ball B to remain on the mounting portion 44a. If the game ball B remains on the mounting portion 44a, when the main frame 4 is closed relative to the outer frame 2, the game ball B will be pinched between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, causing a problem that the main frame 4 cannot be closed.

In contrast, the ball jamming prevention mechanism 44 of this embodiment allows game balls B that have fallen onto the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or onto the placement portion 44a to be discharged to the rear of the curtain board rear member 43 (rear of the outer frame 2) through the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the first discharge opening 44b, or through the second discharge opening 44c, thereby preventing game balls B from being caught between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4.

The lower outer frame assembly 40 includes a pair of guide members 45 spaced apart on the left and right sides of the upper surfaces of the front panel member 42 and the rear panel member 43, a flat grill member 46 that closes the opening 42a of the front panel member 42 from the rear, a port member 47 with two cylinders extending forward and backward that is attached inside the front panel member 42 to close the opening 42a by sandwiching the grill member 46, and a frame-shaped seal member 48 that is placed at the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a of the rear panel member 43.

The pair of guide members 45 are against which the lower end of the door frame 3 abuts when the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2. The guide members 45 are made of a low-friction material that has low friction resistance, making the lower end of the main frame 4 easier to slide on, facilitating opening and closing.

The grill member 46 is a strip-like plate extending in the left-right direction, and has multiple blades 46b spaced apart in the up-down direction. The blades 46b are inclined so that the front end is higher than the rear end (see FIG. 47). The grill member 46 allows ventilation between the inside of the front panel member 42 (the front panel internal space 40a) and the outside through the gaps between the blades 46b.

The port member 47 uses two cylinders to connect the interior space 40a of the panel (enclosure 624) to the front of the outer frame 2 through the gap between the blades 46b of the grill member 46. The port member 47 is made of two cylinders with a specified inner diameter and length, and can resonate and amplify the low-pitched sounds emitted backward (inside the enclosure 624) from the main frame speaker 622 using the principle of Helmholtz resonance, radiating rich low-pitched sounds to the front of the outer frame 2 (towards the player). In other words, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 is a bass reflex type, allowing the player to hear deep low-pitched sounds.

When the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2, the sealing member 48 is sandwiched and compressed between the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a and the lower end of the connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 on the main frame 4, and prevents sound from inside the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 from leaking out from between the connecting tube portion 43a and the connecting portion 621c.

According to the grill member 46 of this embodiment, the air vibrations emitted from the main frame speaker 622 to the outside from the inner space 40a of the fascia board can be directed by the inclined vane portions 46b through the lower cutout opening 295b of the handle cover 295 in the handle cover unit 290 diagonally upward and forward, into the front tube portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 in which the handle unit 180 is housed. As a result, when a player inserts his or her fingers inside the handle cover 295 (front tube portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) and rotates the handle 195 (the device for striking the game ball B), the main frame speaker 622 can be vibrated to send air into the front tube portion 291a, surprising the player and providing an unprecedented performance.

In addition, because the port member 47 is open toward the front, a portion of the sound pressure emitted from the port member 47 through the multiple blades 46b of the grill member 46 is emitted forward, so that the sound effects emitted from the port member 47 can be heard by players seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 and other players wandering around the gaming hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. This also attracts the attention of players, making it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

In addition, since the port member 47 is provided in the lower outer frame assembly 40 of the outer frame 2, the volume of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 provided in the main frame 4 can be increased, allowing for a deeper bass sound to be output, entertaining the player and preventing a decline in interest.

[2-4. Hinge assembly on outer frame]
The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Fig. 21. Fig. 21(a) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame when disassembled and viewed from above the front, and Fig. 21(b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) when viewed from below the front. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is used to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be hinged and rotatable. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 includes an outer frame upper hinge member 51 attached to the upper end of the recess 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, a locking member 52 attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51, and a mounting screw 53 that attaches the locking member 52 to the outer frame upper hinge member 51.

The outer frame upper hinge member 51 includes an upper fixing portion 51a that is a flat plate extending horizontally and is attached to the upper surface of the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, a flat forward extension portion 51b that extends forward from the front edge of the upper fixing portion 51a, a bearing groove 51c that extends from the middle of the right edge of the forward extension portion 51b toward the front and penetrates vertically, a flat horizontal fixing portion 51d that extends downward from the left edge of the upper fixing portion 51a, and a flat edge wall portion 51e that extends downward from the edge of the left edge of the forward extension portion 51b around the front edge to the part where the bearing groove 51c opens and is continuous with the horizontal fixing portion 51d. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 (described later) of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 within the bearing groove 51c.

The locking member 52 comprises a band-shaped locking body 52a extending forward and backward, an operating piece 52b protruding to the right from the rear end of the locking body 52a, an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic part 52c extending leftward from the rear end of the locking body 52a and then diagonally forward to the left, and a mounting hole 52d penetrating vertically near the rear end of the locking body 52a. The locking member 52 is made of synthetic resin. The locking member 52 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the forward extension part 51b of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 at a position rearward of the bearing groove 51c by means of mounting screws 53.

When the locking member 52 is attached to the upper hinge member 51, the locking body 52a can block the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end extends forward so that it can abut against the portion extending to the opening of the bearing groove 51c in the edge wall portion 51e of the upper hinge member 51. In addition, the tip of the elastic portion 52c extending leftward from the rear end of the locking body 52a abuts against the inner peripheral surface of the edge wall portion 51e of the upper hinge member 51. The locking member 52 is biased in a direction in which the front end rotates leftward around the mounting hole 52d by the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c. Therefore, in the normal state, the right side surface near the front end of the locking body 52a of the locking member 52 abuts against the edge wall portion 51e. In this state, a space capable of accommodating the upper body frame hinge pin 512 of the upper body frame hinge member 510 is formed in the bearing groove 51c in a portion forward of the lock body 52a.

By operating the operating piece 52b of this locking member 52, the locking body 52a can be rotated against the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c. By operating the operating piece 52b to rotate the locking body 52a in a direction in which its front end moves to the left, the locking body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the bearing groove 51c can be fully opened. This makes it possible to insert the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 into the bearing groove 51c or remove the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 from within the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Lower outer frame hinge member]
The lower outer frame hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Fig. 18. The lower outer frame hinge member 60 includes a flat horizontal portion 60a extending horizontally, a flat rising portion 60b rising upward from a portion on the left side of the horizontal portion 60a rearward of the center in the front-rear direction, a lower outer frame hinge pin 60c protruding upward from the front end of the horizontal portion 60a, and a discharge hole 60d penetrating the horizontal portion 60a from top to bottom and large enough for only one game ball B to pass through. The lower outer frame hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 60a of the lower outer frame hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoid with the left side as the base in a plan view. The lower outer frame hinge pin 60c is cylindrical and is formed in a truncated cone shape with a narrowed upper end above the vertical center. This lower outer frame hinge pin 60c is attached to a position on the left side near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. The discharge hole 60d is formed in the horizontal portion 60a so as to contact the central portion of the rising portion 60b in the front-to-rear direction and extend in an inverted U shape from the left side of the horizontal portion 60a to the right. This discharge hole 60d is formed to be approximately the same size as the first discharge opening 44b of the ball jamming prevention mechanism 44 in the lower outer frame assembly 40.

When assembled to the outer frame 2, the rear of the horizontal section 60a of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is placed on the mounting section 44a of the rear panel member 43 of the outer frame lower assembly 40, and is fixed to the rear panel member 43 with screws (not shown). The rising section 60b is attached to a portion of the right side surface of the left outer frame member 11, forward of the bulging section 11b, with screws (not shown). By inserting the lower outer frame hinge pin 60c into the lower outer frame hinge hole 521a in the lower main frame hinge assembly 520 of the main frame 4, the lower outer frame hinge member 60 can cooperate with the upper outer frame hinge member 51 to attach the main frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed.

In addition, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 60d coincides with the first discharge opening 44b of the ball jamming prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40. This allows the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a to fall (discharge) to the rear of the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge opening 44b. In more detail, when the main frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, the game ball B that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 rolls to the rear side where the gap is wider, as the gap between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 gradually narrows as the main frame 4 is closed, and can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. In this case, the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position that is approximately the same as the rear end of the main frame 4 when the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2 in a state where it is assembled into the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, game balls B that fall between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 can be easily prevented from rolling rearward beyond the main frame 4 by being discharged from the discharge hole 60d, and game balls B are less likely to become trapped in the area of the outer frame lower hinge member 60.

[3. Overall structure of the door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 22 to 30. Figure 22 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, Figure 23 is a rear view of the door frame, Figure 24 is a left side view of the door frame, and Figure 25 is a right side view of the door frame. Figure 26 is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the right front, Figure 27 is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the left front, and Figure 28 is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the rear. Figure 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into its main components and seen from the front, and Figure 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into its main components and seen from the rear.

The door frame 3 is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, with approximately the same size as the interior of the outer frame 2, and is attached to the interior of the outer frame 2 via the main frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed from the front. The door frame 3 closes the play area 5a of the play board 5 into which the game balls B are dropped so that it can be seen from the front, stores the game balls B to be dropped into the play area 5a, and is equipped with a handle 195 that the player operates to drop the stored game balls B into the play area 5a. The door frame 3 also decorates the entire front of the pachinko machine 1.

The door frame 3 comprises a door frame base unit 100, which has a rectangular, vertically extending outer shape when viewed from the front, a glass unit 160 that is removably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and closes the play area 5a of the play board 5 attached to the main frame 4 so that it can be seen from the front, a security cover 170 that is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear, a handle unit 180 that is attached to the front right corner of the door frame base unit 100, and a handle that covers the outer periphery of the handle unit 180. It comprises a cover unit 290, a tray unit 200 attached to the lower front of the door frame base unit 100, a left side unit 420 attached to the left front of the door frame base unit 100 above the tray unit 200, a right side unit 430 attached to the right front of the door frame base unit 100 above the tray unit, and a top unit 450 attached to the upper front of the door frame base unit 100 above the left side unit 420 and the right side unit 430.

The door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame base 101 having a door window 101a that is formed into a vertically extending square (rectangle) in front view and penetrates from front to back, a speaker duct 103 attached to the rear of the door frame base 101 in the lower right corner as seen from the rear, a door frame main relay board 104 attached to the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 near the right end as seen from the rear, a door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left of the door frame main relay board 104 as seen from the rear, a handle rear relay board 106 attached to the left of the door frame sub-relay board 105 as seen from the rear, a door frame relay board cover 107 that covers the door frame main relay board 104 and part of the door frame sub-relay board 105 from the rear, a handle rear relay board cover 108 that covers the handle rear relay board 106 from the rear, and a cable cover 109 that covers the wiring cable.

The door frame base unit 100 also includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear of the door frame base 101, an upper door frame hinge assembly 120 and a lower door frame hinge member 125 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, a cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, a ball supply unit 140 attached above the rear handle relay board 106 on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from behind.

The door frame reinforcement unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and provide it with rigidity. The upper door frame hinge assembly 120 and the lower door frame hinge member 125 are used to attach the door frame 3 to the main frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed. The cylinder lock 130 cooperates with the locking unit 650 of the main frame 4 to be used for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the main frame 4, and for locking and opening the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4.

The ball supply unit 140 is for supplying the game balls B in the upper tray 201 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main frame 4. The foul cover unit 150 is for guiding the game balls B (foul balls) that have been launched by the ball launching device 540 and have not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower tray 202, and for guiding the game balls B paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202.

The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear. The handle unit 180 has a handle 195 that can be rotated by the player, and the handle unit 180 is used to play a game in which the game ball B in the upper tray 201 is shot into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the ball launcher 540 by operating the handle cover unit 290 that covers the outer periphery.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. Figure 31(a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the rear. Figure 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into its main components as seen from the front, and Figure 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into its main components as seen from the rear.

The door frame base unit 100 is hingedly attached to the main frame 4 on the left side when viewed from the front, closing the front of the main frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed, while allowing the playing area 5a of the playing board 5 attached to the main frame 4 to be visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 is equipped with a flat door frame base 101 with a rectangular shape that extends vertically, and a speaker duct 103 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the lower right corner when viewed from the rear.

The door frame base unit 100 also includes a door frame main relay board 104 attached to the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 near the right end in rear view, a door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left of the door frame main relay board 104 in rear view in the lower rear side of the door frame base 101, a handle rear relay board 106 attached to the left of the door frame sub-relay board 105 in rear view in the lower rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame relay board cover 107 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covering the door frame main relay board 104 and part of the door frame sub-relay board 105 from the rear side, a handle rear relay board cover 108 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covering the handle rear relay board 106 from the rear side, and a cable cover 109 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covering the wiring cable.

The door frame base unit 100 further comprises a frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, an upper door frame hinge assembly 120 and a lower door frame hinge member 125 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, a cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, a ball supply unit 140 attached above the rear handle relay board 106 on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from behind.

This door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 180 and a handle cover unit 290 attached to the lower front corners, a tray unit 200 attached to the lower front surface of the door window 101a, a door frame left side unit 420 attached to the left outer front surface of the door window 101a, a door frame right side unit 430 attached to the right outer front surface of the door window 101a, and a door frame top unit 450 attached to the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

In addition, a glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from the rear, and a transparent security cover 170 is attached to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear.

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. The door frame base 101 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangle) with an outer shape extending vertically in front view. The door frame base 101 is provided with a door window 101a that penetrates from front to back and has an inner periphery shape extending vertically in front view. The upper side and both left and right sides that form the inner periphery of the door window 101a are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, respectively, and the lower side that forms the inner periphery is located at about 1/3 height in the vertical direction from the lower end of the door frame base 101. In this way, the door frame base 101 is formed in a frame shape as a whole by the door window 101a that penetrates from front to back. This door frame base 101 is integrally molded from synthetic resin.

The door frame base 101 is provided with a handle mounting surface 101b (see FIG. 42, etc.) formed in the lower right corner of the front surface when viewed from the front and inclined so that the left end side protrudes slightly forward more than the right end side, a cylinder insertion hole 101d that penetrates from front to back between the handle mounting surface 101b and the door window 101a and into which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 is inserted, and a ball feeding opening 101e that penetrates from front to front on the left side of the cylinder insertion hole 101d and the handle mounting surface 101b when viewed from the front and allows the entrance 141a and ball removal opening 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 to be exposed forward.

The door frame base 101 also has a lower tray ball passage port 101f that penetrates from front to back at a position to the left of the center in the left-right direction and at approximately the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b, allowing the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150 to face forward, an upper tray ball passage port 101g that penetrates from front to back adjacent to the lower edge of the door window 101a near the left end when viewed from the front, allowing the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 to face forward, and a glass unit mounting portion 101h that is recessed from the rear surface toward the front along the inner circumference of the door window 101a, into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted.

The door frame base 101 also has multiple vertical slits 101i formed in the lower left corner when viewed from the front (below the ball passage opening 101g for the upper tray) that penetrate from front to back. A speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the multiple slits 101i. When the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the multiple slits 101i have the speaker opening 211b of the tray unit base 211 in the tray unit 200 located in front of them, and the main body frame speaker 622 in the speaker unit 620a of the main body frame 4 located behind them, allowing sound from the main body frame speaker 622 to be emitted forward.

Furthermore, the door frame base 101 has a through hole 101j that penetrates from front to back below the door window 101a and above the handle mounting seat surface 101b. This through hole 101j is for inserting a wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame base unit 100 side and the tray unit 200 side, and is formed to match the through hole 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110 described later.

[3-1b. Speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. The speaker duct 103 is formed in a cylindrical shape and is attached to a portion where a plurality of slits 101i are formed on the rear side of the door frame base 101. When the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the rear end of the cylindrical portion of the speaker duct 103 is located in front of the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4. This allows the sound emitted (output) from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 to be guided forward without being diffused, and can be well guided to the front of the pachinko machine 1 (toward the player) through the plurality of slits 101i of the door frame base 101 and the speaker port 211b in the plate unit base 211 of the plate unit 200.

The speaker duct 103 also has a cable holder 103a on the rear surface below the cylindrical section, which holds the connection cable 503. The cable holder 103a is located to the left of the door frame relay board cover 107 when viewed from the front, and holds the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 so that it extends to the left end of the door frame 3.

[3-1c. Door frame main relay board, door frame sub relay board, handle rear relay board]
The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub-relay board 105, and the handle rear relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 32 and 33. The door frame main relay board 104 has an outer shape that extends vertically and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear lower part of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear. The door frame main relay board 104 serves to relay the connection between the handle rear relay board 106 and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and a part of the connection cable 503 (see Figures 82 and 83) extending from the main body frame 4 is connected to the door frame main relay board 104.

The door frame sub-relay board 105 has an inverted L-shape with a top part of a vertically extending rectangle joined to the right side of the top part when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so that the vertically extending part is adjacent to the left side of the door frame main relay board 104 when viewed from the rear. The door frame sub-relay board 105 is for relaying the connection between the handle decorative board 184 of the handle unit 180, the dish unit relay board 214 of the dish unit 200, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 of the door frame left side unit 420, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 of the door frame right side unit 430, the door frame top relay board of the door frame top unit 450, etc., and the interface board 635 of the main frame 4, and the remainder of the connection cable 503 extending from the main frame 4 is connected to it.

The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 so that the connection terminals protrude toward the rear. When the door frame base unit 100 is assembled, the door frame main relay board 104 and the parts of the door frame sub-relay board 105 that extend up and down are covered at the rear by the door frame relay board cover 107, and the remaining parts of the door frame sub-relay board 105 are covered at the rear by the fall cover unit 150.

The handle rear relay board 106 has an external shape formed in a rectangle extending left and right, and is attached to the rear of the handle mounting surface 101b below the ball feed opening 101e at the rear of the door frame base 101. The handle rear relay board 106 is used to relay the connection between the door frame main relay board 104 and the handle rotation detection sensor 189, handle touch sensor 192, single button operation sensor 194 of the handle unit 180, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. When the door frame base unit 100 is assembled, the rear side of the handle rear relay board 106 is covered by the handle rear relay board cover 108.

[3-1d. Door frame relay board cover, handle rear relay board cover, cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the handle rear relay board cover 108, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to Figs. 31 to 33. The door frame relay board cover 107 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to cover the rear side of the door frame main relay board 104 and part of the door frame sub-relay board 105 (parts extending up and down in an inverted L-shape). The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape with the front and left sides open when viewed from the front. When assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 covering the rear side are exposed inside the door frame relay board cover 107, and the connection cable 503 can be inserted inside from the open left side and connected to those terminals.

The handle rear relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the handle rear relay board 106. The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcement frame 114 in the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and is intended to cover the wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball dispensing operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape that extends left and right, and has openings near the left end of the front surface and in the center of the bottom surface in the left-right direction for passing the wiring cable through.

[3-1e. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcement unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. The door frame reinforcement unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat door frame base 101 and provide rigidity to the door frame base unit 100. The door frame reinforcement unit 110 comprises a left reinforcement frame 111 and a right reinforcement frame 112 which extend vertically and are arranged at a distance from each other on the left and right sides, an upper reinforcement frame 113 which extends horizontally and connects the upper ends of the left reinforcement frame 111 and the right reinforcement frame 112, an intermediate reinforcement frame 114 whose left end is attached at a position upward from the lower end of the left reinforcement frame 111 and extends to the right near the right reinforcement frame 112, a cylinder mounting frame 115 which connects the right end of the intermediate reinforcement frame 114 to the right reinforcement frame 112, and hook hook members 116 which are attached to the rear side of the right reinforcement frame 112 at a distance from each other on the left and right sides and to which door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 of the main frame 4 are hooked.

The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction and extend vertically for a length approximately equal to the vertical height of the door frame base 101. The right reinforcing frame 112 has multiple insertion holes that are spaced apart in the vertical direction and penetrate in the front-to-rear direction. The tips of the door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 are inserted into these insertion holes when the door frame 3 is closed against the main frame 4. The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the up-down direction and extends horizontally for a length approximately equal to the left-to-right width of the door frame base 101.

The intermediate reinforcement frame 114 extends left and right with a width wider than the width of the upper reinforcement frame 113. The intermediate reinforcement frame 114 has a rectangular cutout 114a cut downward from the upper end near the left end, and a through-hole 114b that penetrates from front to back near the right end. The cutout 114a is formed at a position that coincides with the upper tray ball passage port 101g of the door frame base 101, and the through-hole 114b is formed at a position that coincides with the through-hole 101j of the door frame base 101.

The cylinder mounting frame 115 is provided with a pair of rear pieces arranged at a distance from the left and right and formed as rectangular flat plates extending up and down when viewed from the front, a pair of side pieces extending forward in a flat plate shape from each of the opposing edges of the pair of rear pieces, and a flat front piece connecting the front end edges of the pair of forward extending pieces. This cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed into a convex shape that protrudes forward when viewed from above. The left rear piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 is attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, and the right rear piece is attached to the right reinforcing frame 112. The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of this cylinder mounting frame 115.

The hook members 116 are attached to the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 at the location of the insertion holes that penetrate from front to rear. These hook members 116 are hooked by the door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650.

The left reinforcement frame 111, right reinforcement frame 112, upper reinforcement frame 113, middle reinforcement frame 114, cylinder mounting frame 115, and hook member 116 that make up the door frame reinforcement unit 110 are formed by punching and bending metal plates using press molding. They are assembled with rivets.

The door frame reinforcement unit 110 is assembled so that the left reinforcement frame 111, the right reinforcement frame 112, and the top reinforcement frame 113 are aligned along the left, right, and top edges of the door frame base 101, and the middle reinforcement frame 114 is positioned below the door window 101a of the door frame base 101.

The door frame reinforcement unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 with a number of screws (not shown). When the door frame reinforcement unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the cutout portion 114a and the through portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcement frame 114 are aligned with the upper tray ball passage opening 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101, and the cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the cylinder insertion hole 101d of the door frame base 101.

[3-1f. Door frame upper hinge assembly]
The upper door-frame hinge assembly 120 of the door-frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. The upper door-frame hinge assembly 120 is attached to the upper left corner of the door-frame reinforcement unit 110 when viewed from the front. The upper door-frame hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be hinged and rotatable in cooperation with the lower door-frame hinge member 125. The upper door-frame hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door-frame reinforcement unit 110, a door-frame upper hinge pin 122 attached to the hinge bracket 121 so as to be movable in the up-down direction, a flange member 123 attached to the door-frame upper hinge pin 122, and a lock spring 124 that biases the door-frame upper hinge pin 122 to move upward.

The hinge bracket 121 has a flat mounting piece 121a that is rectangular when viewed from the front, and flat protruding pieces 121b that extend forward from the upper and lower sides of the mounting piece 121a. The mounting piece 121a of the hinge bracket 121 is attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110. The hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

The upper door frame hinge pin 122 is a cylindrical metal rod bent into an L-shape. When assembled to the upper door frame hinge assembly 120, the portion of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 that extends vertically penetrates from below near the front ends of a pair of protruding pieces 121b in the hinge bracket 121, with the upper end extending upward beyond the upper protruding piece 121b, and the portion that extends horizontally abuts against the underside of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper end of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 is rotatably inserted into the upper door frame hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge body 511 in the upper body frame hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4.

The flange member 123 is an E-ring, and is attached to the portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 between the pair of protruding pieces 121b. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape, and is placed around the portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 that extends upward and downward between the flange member 123 and the lower protruding piece 121b of the hinge bracket 121. The lock spring 124 biases the door frame upper hinge pin 122 upward via the flange member 123.

In the upper door frame hinge assembly 120, the upper door frame hinge pin 122 is biased upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 abuts against the underside of the lower protruding piece 121b, restricting further upward movement. In this state, the upper end of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 protrudes a predetermined amount above the top surface of the upper protruding piece 121b.

When the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is moved downward against the biasing force of the lock spring 124, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 can be moved downward as a whole, and the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 can be recessed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b. Therefore, the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 can insert the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 from below, and remove it downward. As a result, by inserting the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510, the upper left end of the door frame 3 when viewed from the front can be supported so as to be hinged and rotatable relative to the main body frame 4.

In addition, the upper door frame hinge assembly 120 has a portion of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 that extends vertically and is positioned coaxially with the lower door frame hinge pin 126 of the lower door frame hinge member 125 described below. This allows the upper door frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126 to hinge rotate the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 4 in a favorable condition.

[3-1g. Door frame bottom hinge parts]
The door-frame bottom hinge member 125 of the door-frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. The door-frame bottom hinge member 125 is attached to the lower left corner of the door-frame reinforcement unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door-frame bottom hinge member 125 cooperates with the door-frame upper hinge assembly 120 to attach the door frame 3 to the main frame 4 so as to be hinged and rotatable thereabout.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110 and has a flat mounting piece 125a that is rectangular when viewed from the front, a flat protruding piece 125b that extends forward from the bottom edge of the mounting piece 125a, and a door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see Figure 22, etc.) that protrudes downward from the underside near the front end of the protruding piece 125b.

The mounting piece 125a and protruding piece 125b of the lower door frame hinge member 125 are formed by bending a metal plate. The lower door frame hinge pin 126 is a cylindrical metal bar with a tapered chamfer on the outer periphery of the lower end. When assembled to the door frame base unit 100, this lower door frame hinge pin 126 is attached to a portion of the protruding piece 125b that is coaxial with the portion of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 of the upper door frame hinge assembly 120 that extends vertically.

This door frame lower hinge member 125 can support the door frame 3 to be hingedly rotatable relative to the main frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame lower hinge hole 522a of the main frame lower hinge assembly 520.

[3-1h. Cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 34 to 36. Figure 34(a) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of the door frame seen from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of (a) seen from the rear front, (c) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock in a conventional pachinko machine seen from the front, and (d) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of (a) seen from the rear. Figure 35(a) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of Figure 34(a) seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of Figure 34(a) seen from the rear. Figure 36(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the movable mechanism of the cylinder lock of Figure 34(a) from the front, (b) is an explanatory diagram of the cylinder lock shown in a state rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise from the state of (a), and (c) is an explanatory diagram of the cylinder lock shown in a state rotated 90 degrees clockwise from the state of (a).

The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and cooperates with the locking unit 650 of the main frame 4 to open and close the door frame 3 and the main frame 4, and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4. The cylinder lock 130 comprises a cylindrical cylinder body 131 that extends forward and backward, a keyhole 132 formed in the front end surface of the cylinder body 131, and a rotation transmission member 133 that is provided at the rear of the cylinder body 131 and rotates together with the rotation of a regular key inserted in the keyhole 132.

The cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 penetrates the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from the rear and has its rear end attached to the front piece. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape (more specifically, a conical cylinder whose diameter increases toward the rear) with an open rear, and has a pair of notches cut from the rear end toward the front at positions opposite each other across the central axis. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed so that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 can be inserted from the rear, and the rotation of the rotation transmission member 133 (the key inserted in the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 to rotate it by inserting a pair of protrusions of the transmission cylinder 654 into the pair of notches.

In more detail, the cylinder lock 130 is provided with a first cam member 134 that is provided at the rear end of the cylinder body 131 and rotates together with the rotation of a regular key inserted in the keyhole 132; a second cam member 135 that is rotatably attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 at a position below the cylinder body 131 around an axis in the front-to-rear direction; a band-shaped first arm 136 that is rotatably attached at its upper end to the right of the center of rotation of the first cam member 134 and at its lower end to the right of the center of rotation of the second cam member 135; and a band-shaped second arm 137 that is rotatably attached at its upper end to the lower position below the center of rotation of the first cam member 134 and at its lower end to the lower position below the center of rotation of the second cam member 135.

The cylinder lock 130 also includes a rear cover 138 attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 so as to cover the cylinder body 131, the first cam member 134, the first arm 136, and the second arm 137 from the rear, excluding the second cam member 135 (rotation transmission member 133), and rivets 139 that rotatably attach the upper and lower ends of each of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 to the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, respectively.

The first cam member 134 has the upper end side of the first arm 136 attached to the rear side, and the upper end side of the second arm 137 attached to the front side. The second cam member 135 is rotatably attached from the rear side by the cylinder mounting frame 115, and a rotation transmission member 133 is attached to the rear side across the front side of the cylinder mounting frame 115 so as to be able to rotate integrally with it. The second cam member 135 has the lower end side of the first arm 136 attached to the front side, and the lower end side of the second arm 137 attached to the front side forward of the first arm 136.

In each of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, the portion where the first arm 136 is attached and the portion where the second arm 137 is attached are separated by an angle of 90 degrees around the respective rotation axes. In addition, in each of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, the portion where the first arm 136 is attached is located farther from the center of rotation than the portion where the second arm 137 is attached.

The rear cover 138 is detachably attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 at its upper end with a screw (not shown), with the shaft 138a, which protrudes outward in a cylindrical shape from the lower end of both the left and right sides, engaged with the L-shaped engagement slit 115b of the cylinder mounting frame 115.

This cylinder lock 130 has a cylinder mounting frame 115, a cylinder body 131, a rotation transmission member 133, a first cam member 134, a second cam member 135, a first arm 136, and a second arm 137, all of which are made of metal.

When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the cylinder body 131 is approximately aligned with the front end of the cylinder insertion opening 440b of the door frame right side unit 430.

Here, we will explain the conventional cylinder lock 130A. As shown in Figures 34(c) and (d), the conventional cylinder lock 130A has a cylinder body 131 that penetrates the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115A from the rear and has its rear end attached to the front piece. This cylinder lock 130A has a rotation transmission member 133 provided on the axis of the cylinder body 131.

Next, the operation of the cylinder lock 130 of this embodiment will be described. In a conventional cylinder lock 130, as shown in Figures 34(c) and (d), a rotation transmission member 133 is provided on the axis of the cylinder body 131, whereas in the cylinder lock 130 of this embodiment, as shown in Figures 34(a) and (b), the rotation transmission member 133 is provided at a position spaced downward from the axis of the cylinder body 131.

In the normal state of this cylinder lock 130, as shown in FIG. 36(a), both upper and lower ends of the first arm 136 are attached to the right of the rotation center of each of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, and both upper and lower ends of the second arm 137 are attached to the lower of the rotation center of each of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135. With the use of a regular key, the cylinder body 131 can be rotated by 90 degrees in both the clockwise and counterclockwise directions from the normal state.

In this state, when the first cam member 134 is rotated counterclockwise via the cylinder of the cylinder body 131 with the key inserted in the keyhole 132, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 move upward. At this time, since the upper end side of the first arm 136 is attached to the right of the rotation center of the first cam member 134, a large force acts on the first arm 136 to rotate the second cam member 135 counterclockwise, whereas since the upper end side of the second arm 137 is attached below the rotation center of the first cam member 134, almost no force acts on the second arm 137 to rotate the second cam member 135 counterclockwise.

In this way, when the first cam member 134 rotates counterclockwise from the normal state, the force is transmitted mainly via the first arm 136, causing the second cam member 135 to rotate counterclockwise, and the rotation transmission member 133 to rotate together with the second cam member 135. The force acting upward due to the counterclockwise rotation of the first cam member 134 is proportional to the left-right distance between the portion where the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are attached to the first cam member 134 and the center of rotation of the first cam member 134. Therefore, as the first cam member 134 rotates counterclockwise from the normal state, the force acting upward in the first arm 136 becomes smaller, whereas the force acting upward in the second arm 137 becomes larger.

Therefore, when the rotation angle of the first cam member 134 in the counterclockwise direction from the normal state exceeds 45 degrees, the force acting upward on the second arm 137 becomes greater than that on the first arm 136, and the second cam member 135 rotates in the counterclockwise direction mainly via the second arm 137. Then, the key inserted in the keyhole 132 can be rotated in the counterclockwise direction up to an angle of 90 degrees from the normal state (see Figure 36 (b)).

When using the key to rotate the key counterclockwise 90 degrees from the normal state and then clockwise 90 degrees to return it to the normal state, the action is reversed.

On the other hand, when the first cam member 134 is rotated clockwise from the normal state via the cylinder of the cylinder body 131 by the key inserted in the keyhole 132, the first arm 136, the upper end of which is attached to the right of the center of rotation of the first cam member 134, moves downward, and the second arm 137, the upper end of which is attached below the center of rotation of the first cam member 134, moves upward. At this time, since the upper end of the first arm 136 is attached to the right of the center of rotation of the first cam member 134, a large force acts on the first arm 136 to rotate the second cam member 135 in the clockwise direction, whereas since the upper end of the second arm 137 is attached below the center of rotation of the first cam member 134, almost no force acts on the second arm 137 to rotate the second cam member 135 in the clockwise direction.

In this way, when the first cam member 134 rotates clockwise from the normal state, the force is transmitted mainly via the first arm 136, the second cam member 135 rotates clockwise, and the rotation transmission member 133 rotates together with the second cam member 135. The force that transmits the rotation of the first cam member 134 by the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 to the second cam member 135 is proportional to the left-right distance between the part where the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are attached to the first cam member 134 and the center of rotation of the first cam member 134. Therefore, as the first cam member 134 rotates clockwise from the normal state, the force of the first arm 136 that tries to rotate the second cam member 135 decreases, whereas the force of the second arm 137 that tries to rotate the second cam member 135 increases.

Therefore, when the rotation angle of the first cam member 134 in the clockwise direction from the normal state exceeds 45 degrees, the force tending to rotate the second cam member 135 from the second arm 137 becomes greater than that from the first arm 136, and the second cam member 135 rotates in the clockwise direction mainly via the second arm 137. Then, the key inserted in the keyhole 132 can be rotated in the clockwise direction up to an angle of 90 degrees from the normal state (see FIG. 36(c)).

When using the key to rotate the key 90 degrees clockwise from the normal state to return it to the normal state by rotating it 90 degrees clockwise, the above process is reversed.

In this way, according to the cylinder lock 130 of this embodiment, the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 are connected by the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 that are attached at a 90 degree angle from each other to transmit rotation, so that no matter what rotation position the first cam member 134 (the key inserted in the keyhole 132) is in, rotation can be transmitted by at least one of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 to rotate the second cam member 135 (rotation transmission member 133), allowing for good locking and unlocking of the door frame 3 and the main frame 4.

In addition, according to the cylinder lock 130 of this embodiment, the axis of the rotation transmission member 133 (the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4) can be set at a different position relative to the axis of the cylinder body 131 by transmitting rotation using the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 as a rotation transmission mechanism. This makes it possible to change the position of the cylinder body 131 in the door frame 3 to any position without changing the locking unit 650. This allows the cylinder body 131 (keyhole 132) to be located in a position that does not interfere with the decoration of the door frame 3, making it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 with a highly decorative door frame 3.

In addition, as described above, even if the position of the cylinder body 131 is changed in the door frame 3, there is no need to change the locking unit 650 in the body frame 4, so the locking unit 650 can be reused, and the increase in costs associated with the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

However, in the conventional cylinder lock 130A, the rotation transmission member 133 is provided at the rear of the cylinder body 131, so that a fraudster who knows this configuration may insert a tool from the front to the rear of the cylinder body 131 and use the tool to fraudulently rotate the rotation transmission member 133, opening the door frame 3 and committing a fraudulent act. In contrast, in the cylinder lock 130 of this embodiment, the rotation transmission member 133 is provided at a position away from the axis (rear) of the cylinder body 131. Therefore, even if a tool is inserted at the rear of the cylinder body 131 to rotate the rotation transmission member 133, the rotation transmission member 133 cannot be rotated because the rotation transmission member 133 is not present at that position, and fraudulent acts by opening the door frame 3, the main body frame 4, etc. can be prevented.

Furthermore, in the cylinder lock 130, the second arm 137 connects portions of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 that are spaced apart by a rotational angle of 90 degrees relative to the first arm 136. Therefore, even if the portions of either the first arm 136 or the second arm 137 attached to the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 are positioned on a line connecting the center of the first cam member 134 and the center of the second cam member 135, the other of the first arm 136 or the second arm 137 connects the portions that are furthest from the line connecting the center of the first cam member 134 and the center of the second cam member 135. Therefore, even if one of the first arm 136 or the second arm 137 is positioned at the dead center of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 and cannot transmit the rotation from the first cam member 134 to the second cam member 135, the other of the first arm 136 or the second arm 137 can transmit the rotation from the first cam member 134 to the second cam member 135. This means that there is no significant resistance to the rotation of the first cam member 134, and the key inserted in the keyhole 132 can be rotated smoothly, making it easy to lock and unlock, and also preventing the key inserted in the keyhole from being forcibly rotated, preventing damage to the key.

In addition, the rotation of the key inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted to the rotation transmission member 133, which is located at an eccentric position, by two arms, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137. Therefore, even if one arm is damaged for some reason, the rotation can be transmitted by the remaining arm, making it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 with a highly reliable cylinder lock 130.

In addition, the rotation of the key inserted in the keyhole 132 is transmitted to the rotation transmission member 133, which is located at an eccentric position, by the smooth rod-shaped (strip-shaped) first arm 136 and second arm 137. If the rotation were transmitted by a gear, there would be a risk that the gear would rotate and rotate the rotation transmission member 133 by catching the tip of a tool on the teeth of the gear. However, by making the first arm 136 and second arm 137 into a rod-shaped arm with a smooth surface, it is possible to prevent the tip of a tool from getting caught on the first arm 136 or second arm 137. This makes it possible to prevent the rotation transmission member 133 from being rotated by moving the first arm 136 or second arm 137. This reliably prevents the door frame 3 or main frame 4 from being unlocked by unauthorized operation of the locking unit 650.

In the cylinder lock 130 of this embodiment, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are used as a rotation transmission mechanism for transmitting the rotation of the first cam member 134 to the second cam member 135. However, this is not limited to this, and other mechanisms may be used, such as a rotation transmission mechanism using multiple gears, a rotation transmission mechanism using gears and rack gears, a rotation transmission mechanism using sprockets and chains, or a rotation transmission mechanism using pulleys and belts.

[3-1i. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 37 and 38. Figure 37(a) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit seen from the back. Figure 38(a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit seen from the back with the rear case and the anti-tampering member removed. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main frame 4, and can extract the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray 202 by operating the upper tray ball extraction button 222.

The ball supply unit 140 comprises a box-shaped front cover 141 having an entrance 141a penetrating in the front-to-rear direction through which the game balls B are supplied from the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200, and a ball ejection port 141b opening below the entrance 141a, and a rear cover 142 that closes the rear end of the front cover 141 and is box-shaped with an open front and has a ball supply port 142a for supplying the game balls B that enter through the entrance 141a of the front cover 141 penetrating in the front-to-rear direction to the ball launching device 540; The ball removal member 143 is supported rotatably around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front covers 141 and has a partition 143a that separates the entrance 141a and the ball removal port 141b at the rear of the front covers 141; a ball delivery member 144 is supported rotatably around an axis extending in the up-down direction between the front covers 141 and the rear covers 142 and delivers the game balls B on the partition 143a of the ball removal member 143 one by one to the ball supply port 142a of the rear cover 142; and a ball delivery solenoid 145 that rotates the ball delivery member 144.

As shown in the figure, when viewed from the front, the ball feeding unit 140 has a ball feeding member 144 disposed to the right of the entrance 141a, a ball extracting member 143 disposed to the left of the ball feeding member 144, and a ball feeding solenoid 145 disposed to the right of the ball feeding member 144.

The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 has an arc-shaped slit 141c formed concentrically with the center of rotation of the ball extracting member 143 to the left of the ball extracting opening 141b when viewed from the front, and the operating rod 143c of the ball extracting member 143 described later extends forward from this slit 141c. In addition, the upper side of the front cover 141 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 141a, and is formed so that when the door frame 3 is assembled, the rear side closes the rear-open portion of the ball feeding guide path 241b and the upstream end of the ball extracting guide path 241c of the rear base 241 in the upper tray ball extracting unit 240.

The ball removal member 143 comprises a partition section 143a which is located below the entrance 141a between the entrance 141a and the ball removal opening 141b and whose upper surface becomes lower toward the ball feeding member 144, a pivoting rod section 143b which extends downward from the end of the partition section 143a opposite the ball feeding member 144 and is bent in an L-shape from near the middle in the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball removal opening 141b, with its lower end supported for rotation around an axis extending in the front-to-rear direction, a rod-shaped operating rod 143c which protrudes forward from the upper end of the rotating rod section 143b, and a weight section 143d which protrudes from the side of the rotating rod section 143b below the operating rod 143c in the opposite direction to the partition section 143a. The operating rod 143c of the ball removal member 143 is formed to protrude forward through an arc-shaped slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 37(a)). The operating rod 143c abuts against the upper end (upper surface) of the operating transmission part 242b of the upper tray ball removal slider 242, which moves downward by pressing the upper tray ball removal button 222 of the tray unit 200 through the ball feed opening 101e of the door frame base 101.

The ball feeding member 144 has a cutoff portion 144a that is fan-shaped in plan view and is centered on the rotation axis, which extends vertically toward the entrance 141a and the partition portion 143a of the ball removal member 143, a ball holding portion 144b that is recessed in an arc shape from the rear end of the cutoff portion 144a toward the rotation axis, and a rod-shaped shaft portion 144c that extends downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 144b. The cutoff portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b in the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angle range of approximately 180° centered on the rotation axis. In addition, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 is sized to be able to hold one game ball B. The ball feeding member 144 rotates around the rotation axis when the shaft portion 144c, which is positioned eccentrically to the rotation axis, is moved left and right by the drive of the ball feeding solenoid 145.

This ball feeding member 144 is adapted to rotate between a supply position in which the blocking portion 144a faces the direction of the partition portion 143a and the ball holding portion 144b faces in a direction communicating with the ball supply port 142a, and a holding position in which the ball holding portion 144b faces the direction of the partition portion 143a. When the ball feeding member 144 is in the supply position, the game ball B held in the ball holding portion 144b is supplied to the ball launching device 540 from the ball supply port 142a, and the game ball B that has entered the partition portion 143a from the entrance 141a is prevented from moving toward the ball holding portion 144b (ball supply port 142a) by the blocking portion 144a, and remains on the partition portion 143a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 144b faces the partition portion 143a, and the end of the ball holding portion 144b on the rod portion 144c side closes the ball supply port 142a, and only one game ball B on the partition portion 143a is held in the ball holding portion 144b.

The ball feeding unit 140 also includes a ball feeding actuating rod 146 whose tip swings up and down when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (energized), and a ball feeding crank 147 which rotates around an axis extending in the front-to-rear direction due to the movement of the tip of the ball feeding actuating rod 146 swinging up and down, and which rotates the ball feeding member 144 around an axis extending in the vertical direction.

The ball feeding operating rod 146 is provided with an iron plate 146a at a portion below the ball feeding solenoid 145. The ball feeding operating rod 146 extends left and right, and the end (right end) opposite the ball feeding crank 147 is attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending forward and backward. When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the iron plate 146a of the ball feeding operating rod 146 is pulled toward the ball feeding solenoid 145 (upward) by the generated magnetic force, and the left end side close to the ball feeding crank 147 rotates upward around the right end. After that, when the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears and the weight of the iron plate 146a acts, rotating the left end side close to the ball feeding crank 147 downward around the right end, returning to the original state. As a result, the ball feeding actuating rod 146 is caused to swing up and down at its left end (tip) closest to the ball feeding crank 147 by the ball feeding solenoid 145.

The ball delivery crank 147 is equipped with an engagement portion 147a that extends in the left-right direction and can engage with the tip of the ball delivery operating rod 146 that moves up and down, an axle portion 147b that is located on the opposite side of the engagement portion 147a that engages with the ball delivery operating rod 146 and is rotatably supported around an axis that extends in the front-to-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and a transmission portion 147c that extends upward from the axle portion 147b and engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 144c (see Figure 38 (b)) that protrudes downward from a position eccentric to the rotation center of the ball delivery member 144.

This ball feeding unit 140 can rotate the ball feeding crank 147 around an axis extending forward and backward via the ball feeding actuating rod 146 by moving the tip (left end) of the ball feeding actuating rod 146 upward by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145.

When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normally), the ball feeding actuation rod 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip is positioned downward, and in this state, the ball feeding member 144 is positioned in the feeding position. When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding actuation rod 146 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position. In other words, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B, and when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is deactivated (OFF state), the game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball launcher 540 side. The drive of the ball delivery solenoid 145 in this ball delivery unit 140 is controlled in synchronization with the drive control of the delivery solenoid 542 by the launch control unit 633b (see FIG. 160) of the payout control board 633.

The ball feeding unit 140 is also configured to apply a moment of rotation in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front by the ball removal member 143, which is rotatably supported by a pivot, or the weight portion 143d. However, the rotation of the ball removal member 143 is restricted by the actuation rod 143c protruding forward of the ball removal member 143 coming into contact with the upper end of the actuation transmission portion 242b of the upper tray ball removal slider 242, which is operated by pressing the upper tray ball removal button 222 of the tray unit 200. Therefore, under normal conditions, the partition portion 143a of the ball removal member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball removal opening 141b to separate them, and the game ball B does not enter the ball removal opening 141b side.

When the player presses the upper tray ball removal button 222 of the tray unit 200 downward, the upper tray ball removal slider 242 slides downward together with the actuation transmission part 242b, and the actuation rod 143c also moves downward relatively as the actuation transmission part 242b moves downward. When the actuation rod 143c moves downward together with the actuation transmission part 242b, the ball removal member 143 rotates in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the partition part 143a moves from between the entrance 141a and the ball removal opening 141b to release the partition. As a result, the game ball B that entered from the entrance 141a falls to the ball removal opening 141b side, and is discharged from the ball removal opening 141b to the ball removal guide path 241c of the upper tray ball removal unit 240 in the tray unit 200, and can be discharged (supplied) to the lower tray 202 via the lower tray ball supply opening 211c.

The upper tray ball removal slider 242, which is formed with the actuation transmission part 242b against which the actuation rod 143c of the ball removal member 143 abuts, is biased upward by a spring. Therefore, even if a game ball B is supplied forcefully onto the partition part 143a, the impact can be absorbed by the spring via the actuation rod 143c, preventing damage to the ball removal member 143 etc., and preventing the game ball B from bouncing off the partition part 143a.

The ball feeding unit 140 has a rectangular mounting recess 142b (see FIG. 38(b), etc.) that is recessed forward and to the upper right when viewed from behind the ball supply port 142a in the rear cover 142, and an anti-tampering member 148 is attached within the mounting recess 142b. The anti-tampering member 148 of the ball feeding unit 140 is formed from a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is attached removably from the rear side within the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142.

The anti-tampering member 148 has an outer shape in a rectangular shape extending left and right when viewed from the front, and is provided with an upper piece 148a and a lower piece 148b that are separated vertically at approximately the center in the vertical direction a certain distance to the left from the right side, and an inclined portion 148c that is formed in a C-chamfered shape at the tip side (right end side when viewed from the front) of the opposing sides of the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b. The upper piece 148a of the anti-tampering member 148 is bent so that the right end when viewed from the front protrudes backward with respect to the general surface of the anti-tampering member 148. The lower piece 148b extends on the same plane as the general surface of the anti-tampering member 148. As a result, the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b form a V-shaped groove that widens toward the right when viewed from the top.

When the tamper-proof member 148 is attached to the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142, the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b is in communication with the inside of the ball supply port 142a.

According to this fraud prevention member 148, when a fraudulent game ball B with a string attached is shot from the upper tray into the game area 5a by the ball launcher 540 via the ball feeding unit 140, and the string attached to the fraudulent game ball B is manipulated to move the fraudulent game ball B into or out of the first starting hole 2004, etc., the momentum of the fraudulent game ball B shot (shot) by the ball launcher 540 causes the string attached to the fraudulent game ball B to be inserted between the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b, and the string can be cut by the narrow V-shaped area formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b, thereby preventing fraudulent activities using a fraudulent game ball B with a string attached.

[3-1j. Foul Cover Unit]
The foul cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 39 and 40. Figure 39(a) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit seen from the back. Also, Figure 40 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the cover member removed. The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the right side of the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that has been launched by the ball launching device 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower tray 202, and also guides the game ball B that has been paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202. As shown in the figure, the fall cover unit 150 comprises a shallow box-shaped unit body 151 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and open at the front, and a flat cover member 152 attached to the front of the unit body 151.

The foul cover unit 150 has a through ball passage 150a that penetrates from front to back at the upper left corner when viewed from the front and connects the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610 of the main frame 4 to the upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit 200, and a full ball receiving port 150b that opens toward the rear on the lower right side when viewed from the front of the through ball passage 150a and can connect to the lower full payout passage 610b of the lower full ball path unit 610 of the main frame 4.

The foul cover unit 150 also has a foul ball receiving port 150c that opens upward on the right side of the full ball receiving port 150b when viewed from the front and receives game balls B (foul balls) that have been launched by the ball launcher 540 of the main frame 4 but have not reached the play area 5a, and a ball discharge port 150d that opens forward near the lower right corner when viewed from the front and discharges game balls B received in the full ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c forward and is connected to the lower tray ball supply port 211c of the tray unit 200.

Furthermore, the foul cover unit 150 is provided with a storage passage 150e that is formed by the unit body 151 and the cover member 152 between the full ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c and the ball discharge port 150d, and has a width sufficient to store a predetermined amount of game balls B.

The through ball passage 150a is formed across both the unit body 151 and the lid member 152. The full ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c are formed in the unit body 151. The ball discharge port 150d is formed in the lid member 152. The storage passage 150e is formed by the unit body 151 and the lid member 152.

The fall cover unit 150 also includes a flat movable piece 153 that forms part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e and has a lower end that is rotatably attached to the unit body 151 and the cover member 152, a full tank detection sensor 154 that detects the rotation of the movable piece 153 in a direction away from the storage passage 150e, and a spring 155 that biases the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

When the lower tray 202 of the tray unit 200 is filled with game balls B and game balls B are no longer discharged from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower tray 202 side, this foul cover unit 150 can store a certain number of game balls B in the storage passage 150e. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the weight of the game balls B causes the movable piece 153 to rotate so that the upper end of the movable piece 153 moves in a direction away from the storage passage 150e against the biasing force of the spring 155, and this rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. As a result, it can be determined that the lower tray 202 is full of game balls B, so when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects that the lower tray 202 is full, any further payout of game balls B is stopped and the fact is notified to the player or the attendant of the game hall, and the player can be prompted to clear the full tank of the lower tray 202.

The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear of the unit body 151 below the through ball passage 150a, and is provided with a door opening/closing abutment 150f against which the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 of the lower full ball path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 of the main body frame 4 (described later) can abut (see FIG. 90). The door opening/closing abutment 150f is inclined so that it moves forward as the rear surface faces downward. When the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 abuts against this door opening/closing abutment 150f, the payout passage opening/closing door 613 can be rotated to open the downstream ends (front openings) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b.

[3-2. Glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 29 and 30. The glass unit 160 is inserted from the rear into the glass unit mounting portion 101h and removably mounted so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. When the door frame 3 is closed against the main body frame 4, this glass unit 160 makes the playing area 5a of the playing board 5 mounted on the main body frame 4 visible from the player side (front) and closes the front of the playing area 5a.

The glass unit 160 comprises a frame-shaped glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner circumference of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be attached to the glass unit attachment portion 101h, two transparent glass plates 162 that close the inside of the glass frame 161 and have their outer circumferences attached to the glass frame 161, and a pair of glass unit attachment members 163 that are rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100 for attaching the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101.

The glass frame 161 has a pair of mounting pieces 161a extending outward in a flat shape from a position lower than the upper left and right corners when viewed from the front, and a band-shaped locking piece 161b protruding downward from the lower end and extending along the lower edge. The mounting pieces 161a of the glass frame 161 can abut against the protruding portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163. The locking piece 161b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcement frame 114 of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 (see Figure 96). The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front and rear ends of the glass frame 161, respectively, and are spaced apart from each other in the front and rear so that a space is formed between them (see Figure 96).

The glass unit mounting member 163 has a disk-shaped base 163a that is rotatably attached around an axis that extends forward and backward on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a rod-shaped protrusion 163b that protrudes from the base 163a in a direction perpendicular to the axis of rotation. The glass unit mounting member 163 is rotatably attached to the outside of the two upper corners of the four corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101.

To attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first rotate the glass unit attachment member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 so that the protruding portion 163b is positioned above the base portion 163a. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, insert the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcement frame 114 of the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and then abut the front end of the glass frame 161 against the rear surface of the glass unit attachment portion 101h of the door frame base 101. Then, rotate the glass unit attachment member 163 so that the protruding portion 163b is positioned below the base portion 163a, and abut the protruding portion 163b against the rear surface of the attachment piece 161a of the glass frame 161. This allows the glass unit 160 to be attached to the door frame base 101.

To remove the glass unit 160 from the door frame base 101, the above steps can be reversed. This allows the glass unit 160 to be attached and detached to the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

In the glass unit 160, when the protrusion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is in a rotational position located below the base 163a, the protrusion 163b restricts the rearward movement of the glass frame 161. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 163, the protrusion 163b will not rotate to a position where it is above the base 163a. Therefore, the restriction on the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 will not be released naturally, and the glass unit 160 will not come off the door frame base 101 naturally.

[3-3. Crime prevention cover]
The security cover 170 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 29 and 30. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the rear surface of the glass unit 160, and is made of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 170 includes a flat body portion 171 having an outer periphery formed into a predetermined shape, a flat rear projection 172 that protrudes rearward along the outer periphery of the body portion 171, and a pair of locking pieces 173 that are spaced apart on the left and right, protrude forward beyond the body portion 171, and are capable of being locked to the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The main body 171 of the security cover 170 is formed so that its lower end protrudes downward below the lower end of the glass unit 160 when attached to the door frame base unit 100. The upper end of the main body 171 is formed in a shape that conforms to the lower end of the play area 5a of the play board 5 when assembled to the pachinko machine 1. In more detail, the upper end of the main body 171 is formed in a shape that conforms to a part of the inner rail 1002, the out guide portion 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005 of the component 1000 described below, and is formed so as not to protrude into the play area 5a when assembled to the pachinko machine 1.

The rear protrusion 172 is formed around almost the entire outer periphery of the main body 171. Therefore, the security cover 170 is formed by the main body 171 and the rear protrusion 172 into a shallow box shape that is open to the rear, and has high strength and rigidity. The rear protrusion 172 also protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 that is different from the outer periphery of the main body 171. The rear protrusion 172 protruding rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 is formed so as to fit along a part of the outer rail 1001 of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 when assembled into the pachinko machine 1.

When assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the rear protrusion 172 is not formed in the area located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 on the game board 5. As a result, game ball B (game ball B launched by the ball launcher 540) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not come into contact with the rear protrusion 172 of the security cover 170, and does not hinder the shooting of game ball B into the game area 5a.

The pair of locking pieces 173 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (speaker duct 103 and cable cover 109). This allows the security cover 170 to be easily attached and detached to the door frame base unit 100.

When the security cover 170 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 171 abuts against the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161), and the rear projection 172, excluding the portion projecting rearward from the bottom edge of the main body 171, is inserted into the security recess 1009 of the component 1000. In addition, the security cover 170 is in a state in which the rear projection 172 projecting rearward from the bottom edge of the main body 171 projects rearward beyond the front surface of the component 1000 so as to contact the bottom surface of the component 1000. As a result, the area between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is bent in a complex manner by the rear projection 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000, so even if someone tries to insert an illegal tool such as a piano wire into the game area 5a through the gap between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000 from below the front of the game board 5, it will be blocked by the rear projection 172 and the security recess 1009, preventing the illegal tool from entering the game area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit and handle cover unit]
The handle unit 180 and the handle cover unit 290 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 41 to 47. Figure 41(a) is an enlarged front view showing the parts of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the parts of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame. Figure 42 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit disassembled and seen from the front, and Figure 43 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit disassembled and seen from the rear. Figure 44 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and seen from the front, and Figure 45 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and seen from the rear. Figure 46 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line E-I in Figure 41(a). Figure 47 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A in Figure 1. Note that Figure 46 shows a cross-sectional view of only the door frame 3, with the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 omitted.

The handle unit 180 of this embodiment is attached to the door frame base unit 100 and the tray unit 200 together with a handle cover unit 290 that covers the outer periphery, and can be operated by the player to shoot the game ball B in the upper tray 201 into the game area 5a of the game board 5.

First, the handle unit 180 will be described. The handle unit 180 includes a handle base 181, the rear end of which is attached to the handle mounting surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via a handle cover base 291 of a handle cover unit 290 described later, a handle 195 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181, a plurality of handle guides 196 attached to the rear side of the handle 195 and guided by the handle cover base 291 described later, a disk-shaped cover base 183 attached to the handle base 181 so as to cover the center of the front end side of the handle 195, a handle decoration board 184 attached to the front side of the cover base 183 and having a plurality of LEDs 184a mounted on the front surface, and a handle front lens 185 attached to the cover base 183 so as to cover the front side of the handle decoration board 184.

The handle unit 180 also includes an inner base 186 that is attached to the front of the handle base 181 behind the handle 195, a shaft member 187 that has the handle 195 attached to its front end and is rotatably attached by the inner base 186 and the handle base 181 and has a drive gear portion 187a on its outer periphery, a transmission gear 188 that meshes with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a handle rotation detection sensor 189 that has a detection shaft 189a that rotates integrally with the transmission gear 188 and is sandwiched between the handle base 181 and the inner base 186.

The handle unit 180 further includes a handle return spring 190, one end of which is attached to the handle base 181 and the other end of which is attached to the handle 195, biasing the handle 195 to return to its initial rotation position (the end of rotation in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front), and an auxiliary spring 191, one end of which is attached to the inner base 186 and the other end of which is attached to the transmission gear 188, biasing the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front via the transmission gear 188.

The handle unit 180 also includes a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, a single button 193 whose tip end protrudes outward from the left side of the outer circumferential surface of the front end of the handle base 181 when viewed from the front and whose base end is attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending forward and backward, and a single button operation sensor 194 attached to the handle base 181 and detects the pressing operation of the single button 193.

The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 has a cylindrical base 181a extending forward and backward, a disk-shaped front end 181b protruding radially from the front end of the base 181a, and three grooves 181c recessed from the outer circumferential surface of the cylindrical base 181a and extending axially, and formed at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer diameter of the base 181a of the handle base 181 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the rear cylinder 291c of the handle cover base 291 in the handle cover unit 290. The three grooves 181c are formed at positions corresponding to three protrusions 291d of the handle cover base 291 described later. Therefore, with the three grooves 181c aligned with the three protrusions 291d, the base 181a can be inserted into the rear cylinder 291c of the handle cover base 291, and by inserting the protrusions 291d into the three grooves 181c, the handle base 181 cannot rotate relative to the handle cover base 291.

The handle 195 is equipped with a disk-shaped central hub portion 195a, multiple (three in this example) spoke portions 195b extending radially outward from the central hub portion 195a at intervals in the circumferential direction, an annular outer ring portion 195c connecting the tips of the multiple spoke portions 195b, two slits 195d extending in an arc around the rotation axis (shaft member 187) and penetrating the central hub portion 195a in the front-rear direction, and a locking protrusion 195e protruding rearward from a position inside the rotation center of the slits 195d and locking the other end of the handle return spring 190. The outer diameter of the central hub portion 195a is approximately the same as the outer diameter of the general outer surface of the handle of a conventional pachinko machine.

When the handle 195 is in a free state (not rotating), the three spoke parts 195b of the handle 195 extend horizontally to the left from the central hub part 195a, and two spoke parts 195b extend from the center in the clockwise and counterclockwise directions at angles of 120 degrees each. The three spoke parts 195b extend to such a length that a gap is formed between the central hub part 195a and the outer ring part 195c into which the player's fingers can be inserted.

The outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195 is provided coaxially with the center of the central hub portion 195a. The outer ring portion 195c is formed in a circular ring shape with a constant cross-sectional shape with the U-shaped radius side facing forward.

The handle 195 is formed to be entirely translucent, and is partially plated with an electrically continuous plating from the central hub portion 195a to the outer circumferential ring portion 195c. This allows the handle touch sensor 192 to detect the touch of the handle 195 even when only the outer circumferential ring portion 195c is touched. Therefore, the game ball B can be shot in by turning the outer circumferential ring portion 195c.

The handle guide 196 has a U-shaped guide portion 196a that opens toward the center of the handle 195, and a flat mounting stay 196b that extends from the front end of the guide portion 196a toward the center. The three handle guides 196 have the mounting stay 196b attached to the rear side of the spoke portion 195b of the handle 195 so that the guide portion 196a is located behind the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195. The handle guide 196 is restricted from moving in the front-rear direction by inserting a guide piece 291g of the handle cover base 291 (described later) into the inside of the guide portion 196a.

The cover base 183 is formed in a disk shape with a smaller diameter than the outer diameter of the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195, and has three mounting bosses 183a protruding rearward from the rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183a penetrate the slits 195d of the handle 195 from the front and are attached to the front surface of the handle base 181. Since the mounting bosses 183a of the cover base 183 penetrate the slits 195d of the handle 195, the mounting bosses 183a come into contact with the circumferential ends of the slits 195d, thereby restricting the rotation angle of the handle 195. In this example, the handle 195 can be rotated within a range of a rotation angle of approximately 120 degrees.

The handle decoration board 184 is equipped with a total of 10 LEDs 184a (full-color LEDs) in a triple concentric arrangement: one in the center, three at regular intervals around the circumference in the middle, and six at regular intervals around the circumference. These LEDs 184a are divided into five groups: one in the center, three in the middle, two at the top left of the circumference, two at the top right of the circumference, and two at the bottom of the circumference (see Figure 72). This handle decoration board 184 is equipped with a 24-bit LED driver 184b with a unique address for illuminating each LED 184a. This LED driver 184b can control up to 24 systems, and controls a total of 15 systems, with three systems for each group, so that the 10 LEDs 184a divided into five groups can each be illuminated in full color.

Although not shown, this handle decoration board 184 is connected to a wiring cable consisting of four wires: two power lines (one of which is a ground line) that supply power to drive the LEDs 184a and LED driver 184b, one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 184b with the peripheral control board 1510. When the LED driver 184b of this handle decoration board 184 receives a command addressed to that address from the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control board) via the control signal line, it can cause the 10 LEDs 184a, divided into five groups, to emit light with the appropriate color and intensity for each group in accordance with the command.

As such, since this handle decoration board 184 has an LED driver 184b, it is possible to individually (here, by group) control the light emission of a greater number of LEDs 184a than the number of wires that make up the connected wiring cable, thereby reducing the number of wires and simplifying the configuration related to the electrical wiring.

The front surface of the handle front lens 185 bulges forward in a round shape and is translucent. Inside the handle front lens 185, a lens member is provided that is three-dimensionally formed from a transparent material. This handle front lens 185 can be illuminated and decorated by appropriately illuminating the LED on the front surface of the handle decoration board 184.

The handle rotation detection sensor 189 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 195 is rotated, the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of this detection shaft 189a. Therefore, when the handle 195 is rotated to change the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the driving force of the launch solenoid 542 in the ball launcher 540 described later changes according to that internal resistance, and the game ball B can be shot into the game area 5a with a strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 195.

The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the handle unit 180, and when the player touches the handle 195, it detects the static electricity acting from the player and detects the player's contact with the handle 195. Then, when the handle touch sensor 192 detects the player's contact and the handle 195 is rotated, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is accepted, and the drive of the launch solenoid 542 is controlled with a strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 195, allowing the game ball B to be shot into the ball.

Therefore, even if a player tries to rotate the handle 195 in some way to shoot game ball B into the game area 5a without touching the handle 195, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the player's contact, so the launch solenoid 542 is not driven and game ball B cannot be shot into the game area 5a. This makes it possible to prevent players from playing by rotating the handle 195 in a way that is different from the intended way, and reduces the burden (stress) placed on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

The single-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the pressing of the single-shot button 193 by the player. When the single-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the single-shot button 193, the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 stops the operation of the firing solenoid 542. Therefore, when the player presses the single-shot button 193 while rotating the handle 195, the firing of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotation of the handle 195, and by releasing the pressing of the single-shot button 193, the game ball B can be shot into the game area 5a again with the same hitting strength before the single-shot button 193 was operated.

Next, the handle cover unit 290 will be described. The handle cover unit 290 includes a handle cover base 291 that covers the outer periphery of the handle unit 180 behind the handle 195 and has its rear end attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101, an inner 292 that covers the outer periphery of the handle cover base 291 and has its rear end attached to the dish unit main body 252 of the dish unit 200, a ring-shaped handle cover decorative board 293 that is provided on the front side of the inner 292 and has multiple LEDs 293a mounted on the front side, a ring-shaped board cover 294 that covers the handle cover decorative board 293 from the front, and a handle cover 295 that covers the outer periphery of the inner 292 and has its rear end attached to the dish unit main body 252 of the dish unit 200.

The handle cover base 291 is provided with a cylindrical front tube portion 291a that extends forward and backward with an inner diameter approximately equal to the inner diameter of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195, a middle wall portion 291b that extends from the rear end of the front tube portion 291a so that the inner diameter decreases as it extends forward, a cylindrical rear tube portion 291c that penetrates the middle wall portion 291b and extends forward and backward with an inner diameter that allows the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 to be inserted, and multiple (here, three) ridges 291d that protrude inward from the inner circumference of the rear tube portion 291c and extend forward and backward, and are provided at positions corresponding to the groove portions 181c of the handle base 181 in the circumferential direction.

The handle cover base 291 also includes a flange portion 291e that extends outward from a portion rearward of the front end of the outer periphery of the front tube portion 291a, a cylindrical outer tube portion 291f that protrudes forward from the middle of the flange portion 291e to the same position as the front end of the front tube portion 291a, a guide piece 291g that protrudes outward from the front tube portion 291a between the front end of the front tube portion 291a and the flange portion 291e, and an opening 291h that penetrates the lower portion of the front tube portion 291a.

The middle wall 291b of the handle cover base 291 extends from the rear end of the front tube 291a to the center of the front-rear direction in a circular arc shape with a cross section that bulges outward. The rear end of the rear tube 291c is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101. This rear tube 291c is formed to the same length as the base 181a of the handle base 181, and the base 181a of the handle base 181 is inserted inside. The three protrusions 291d correspond to the three grooves 181c of the handle base 181, and by inserting them into the grooves 181c, the handle base 181 can be made non-rotatable relative to the flange 291e. The outer tube 291f extends forward from a position outside the center of the flange 291e in the radial direction. This handle cover base 291 has multiple triangular ribs in the circumferential direction that connect the front surface of the flange portion 291e and the outer peripheral surface of the outer cylinder portion 291f.

The guide piece 291g protrudes from the outer periphery of the front tube portion 291a from the center between the outer periphery of the front tube portion 291a and the inner periphery of the outer tube portion 291f to a position close to the front tube portion 291a. The guide piece 291g extends in the circumferential direction over a length in the range of approximately 110 degrees, and three guide pieces are provided in the circumferential direction at intervals of 10 degrees. By inserting the rear end side of the guide portion 196a of the handle guide 196 in the handle unit 180 rearward of the guide piece 291g through between the guide pieces 291g and rotating the handle 195, the guide piece 291g can be positioned within the U-shaped guide portion 196a, and the movement of the guide portion 196a (handle 195) in the front-rear direction can be restricted.

The opening 291h penetrates the front tubular portion 291a with a length in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front tubular portion 291a to near the flange portion 291e and a size in the circumferential direction within an angle range of approximately 90 degrees.

The inner 292 has an annular base 292a with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front tube 291a of the handle cover base 291 and an outer diameter larger than the flange 291e, a leg 292b extending rearward from the outer periphery of the base 292a, and a plurality of (four in this case) notches 292c cut out from the rear end of the leg 292b to the vicinity of the base 292a and spaced apart in the circumferential direction. The front tube 291a of the handle cover base 291 is inserted into the base 292a from the front, and the base 292a is positioned behind the flange 291e. The leg 292b extends in a curved shape that bulges outward, and its rear end is attached to the dish unit main body 252 of the dish unit 200. The notches 292c are provided at the top and bottom and the left and right parts of the leg 292b.

The handle cover decorative board 293 is formed in a circular shape with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front cylinder part 291a of the handle cover base 291 and the same outer diameter as the flange part 291e. The handle cover decorative board 293 is equipped with 12 LEDs 293a and an LED driver 293b with a unique address for illuminating each LED 293a. The 12 LEDs 293a (full color LEDs) are arranged in a row with intervals in the circumferential direction. These 12 LEDs 293a are divided into six groups, two on the lower left, two on the left, two on the upper left, two on the upper right, two on the right, and two on the lower right from the center (see Figure 72). The LED driver 293b can control up to 24 systems, and controls a total of 18 systems, with three systems for each group, so that the 6 groups of 10 LEDs 293a can each be illuminated in full color.

Although not shown, this handle cover decorative board 293 is connected to a wiring cable consisting of four electric wires: two power lines (one of which is a ground line) that supply power to drive the LEDs 293a and the LED driver 293b, one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 293b with the peripheral control board 1510. When the LED driver 293b of this handle cover decorative board 293 receives a command addressed to that address from the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control board) via the control signal line, it can make the 12 LEDs 293a, divided into six groups, emit light with the appropriate color and intensity for each group in accordance with the command.

The board cover 294 has an annular front plate 294a with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front cylinder 291a of the handle cover base 291 and an outer diameter approximately the same as the outer diameter of the base 292a of the inner 292, and a cylindrical side plate 294b with the outer peripheral edge of the front plate 294a extending rearward. The front plate 294a of this board cover 294 is located between the flange 291e of the handle cover base 291 and the handle cover decorative board 293, and the side plate 294b extends to the base 292a of the inner 292.

The handle cover 295 has a front hole 295a at its front end with an inner shape the same as the outer diameter of the outer cylinder portion 291f of the handle cover base 291, and is formed in a spindle-shaped (snow-hollow or bowl-shaped, etc.) cylinder that bulges toward the rear, and has multiple (four in this case) notched openings 295b cut from the rear end toward the front in the circumferential direction. The handle cover 295 is formed to cover the outer periphery of the inner 292, and the multiple notched openings 295b are formed to match the notches 292c. The rear end of the handle cover 295 is attached to the dish unit main body 252 of the dish unit 200 via the inner 292.

The handle cover 295 is molded in two colors using synthetic resins with different colors and translucency (light transmittance). More specifically, the handle cover 295 is molded in two colors using two types of resin, an inner layer 3a and an outer layer 3b, and a part of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b and appears on the outer surface, forming a circular or radial pattern. In other words, the circular or radial pattern appearing on the surface of the handle cover 295 is the inner layer 3a, and the circular or radial pattern is connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (see Figure 71 (a)). When molding the handle cover 295, the inner layer 3a may be injection molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection molded first.

As shown in FIG. 46 etc., when the handle unit 180 and handle cover unit 290 of this embodiment are assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the part of the handle unit 180 rearward of the handle 195 is inserted inside the front tube part 291a of the handle cover base 291, and the handle 195 and the handle front lens 185 are positioned forward of the handle cover unit 290. The rear end of the handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 with the part closing the rear end of the rear tube part 291c of the handle cover base 291 of the handle cover unit 290 sandwiched between them.

The handle 195 of the handle unit 180 has a central hub portion 195a rotatably supported by the handle base 181. The handle 195 is also rotatably supported by the handle cover unit 290 via a handle guide 196 attached to the rear side of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the central hub portion 195a. The rear end side of the guide portion 196a of the handle guide 196 is inserted (locked) between the front cylinder portion 291a and the outer cylinder portion 291f of the handle cover base 291, and between the flange portion 291e and the guide piece 291g, and is rotatably supported with movement in the front-rear direction (axial direction) restricted.

The handle 195, and the handle cover base 291, inner 292, board cover 294, and handle cover 295 in the handle cover unit 290 are formed to be translucent, and by illuminating the LED 293a of the handle cover decorative board 293, the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195 can be illuminated and decorated, and the inside of the handle cover base 291 (front tube portion 291a), the handle cover 295, etc. can also be illuminated and decorated.

The handle cover unit 290 has matching notched openings 295b and notched portions 292c in the handle cover 295 and inner 292, so when viewed from the outside, it appears as if there are holes on both the left and right sides and on the bottom that communicate with the inside of the front tube portion 291a of the handle cover base 291. This can ease the player's mental anxiety about sticking their hand (fingers) into the inside of the front tube portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 through between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195.

The upper cutout opening 295b of the handle cover 295 (upper cutout 292c of the inner cover 292) is closed by the right plate decorative unit 275 and the right door frame unit 430.

In the handle cover unit 290 of this embodiment, the inside of the front tube portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 into which the rear side of the handle unit 180 is inserted is connected to the lower cutout portion 292c and cutout opening 295b of the inner 292 and the handle cover 295 through the opening 291h (see FIG. 47). As a result, even if liquid such as a drink or game ball B enters the front tube portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 through the gap between the central hub portion 195a and the outer circumferential ring portion 195c of the handle 195, it can be discharged downward of the handle cover unit 290 through the lower opening 291h, the cutout portion 292c, and the cutout opening 295b.

In addition, if liquid or game balls B enter the cutout openings 295b on both the left and right sides of the handle cover 295, they can be discharged downward from the lower cutout opening 295b through the gap between the front tube portion 291a and the leg portion 292b of the inner 292.

As shown in Fig. 47, the opening 291h of the handle cover base 291, the lower cutout 292c of the inner 292, and the lower cutout opening 295b of the handle cover 295 are provided on an extension line of the inclination direction of the blades 46b of the grill member 46 in the lower outer frame assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. This allows the wind (wind pressure) discharged diagonally upward and forward from the grill member 46 via the blades 46b due to vibration of the main frame speaker 622 to enter the front tube portion 291a through the opening 291h, the cutout 292c, and the cutout opening 295b. Therefore, when a player inserts his or her fingers inside the handle cover 295 (front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) and rotates the handle 195 (the device for striking the game ball B), the main frame speaker 622 vibrates to send air into the front cylinder portion 291a, surprising the player and providing an unprecedented performance.

Furthermore, because the handle cover 295 has a cutout opening 295b, when opening the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4, the right cutout opening 295b can be hooked with a finger and pulled, and can be used as a handle when opening the door frame 3, etc.

In addition, because the handle 195 is plated up to the outer ring portion 195c, the handle touch sensor 192 can detect the touch of the handle 195, and the game ball B can be shot even when only the outer ring portion 195c is touched.

In addition, because the handle cover 295 has a cutout opening 295b, the rotational position of the handle 195 can be easily fixed by gripping the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195 and the cutout opening 295b with the fingers, and the game ball B can be continuously shot into the game area 5a with a constant force even without continuously twisting the hand. In this way, the handle 195 can be rotated in a variety of ways to shoot the game ball B, so a pachinko machine 1 can be provided that allows the player to select a shooting operation that is suitable for the player.

The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle mounting surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via a handle cover unit 290 (handle cover base 291). The handle mounting surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined so that the right end is located further back than the left end in a plan view, and faces outward (toward the open side). Therefore, the handle unit 180 attached via the handle cover base 291 is also inclined outward in a plan view (in other words, its tip is inclined toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line perpendicular to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). This makes it easy for the player to grip the handle 195 of the handle unit 180, and allows the player to rotate the handle without any discomfort.

In this way, according to the handle unit 180 and the handle cover unit 290 of this embodiment, a handle 195 having a disk-shaped central hub portion 195a, multiple spoke portions 195b protruding radially from the central hub portion 195a, and an annular outer peripheral ring portion 195c connecting the tips of the multiple spoke portions 195b is provided at the lower right corner of the door frame 3, which is provided so as to be openable and closable around the left side as an axis and which closes the play area 5a of the play board 5 so as to be visible from the front. The handle 195 has a disk-shaped central hub portion 195a, multiple spoke portions 195b protruding radially from the central hub portion 195a, and an annular outer peripheral ring portion 195c connecting the tips of the multiple spoke portions 195b. A cylindrical handle cover unit 290 extends rearward from the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. Because the handle cover unit 290 is provided, a handle 195 and handle cover unit 290 of a never-before-seen form can be seen in the area where the handle is provided in conventional pachinko machines, making a strong impact on the player and strongly attracting the player's interest, while also increasing the player's desire to play with this pachinko machine 1, making it easier for players wandering around the game hall in which this pachinko machine 1 is installed to select this pachinko machine as the pachinko machine to play on.

In addition, the player's fingers can be inserted into the handle cover unit 290 (the front tube portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) through the gap between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195. When the player operates the handle 195 to shoot the game ball B into the play area 5a, the player grasps the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195, and the player's fingers are inserted into the handle cover unit 290. This gives the player a different sensation when operating the handle 195 than the handles of conventional pachinko machines, and the player can be entertained by the new sensation of shooting the game ball B, preventing a decline in interest.

When the player operates the handle 195 and causes a sound effect to be output from the main frame speaker 622 mounted on the speaker unit 620a in the base unit 620A of the main frame 4, the vibration of the main frame speaker 622 causes the air in the enclosure 624 formed by the speaker box 623 to vibrate, and the vibration of the air in the enclosure 624 is released forward as sound pressure (sound wind) through the fascia internal space 40a and port member 47 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 in the outer frame 2 which is connected to the enclosure 624. At this time, the multiple blade portions 46b of the grill member 46 provided at the front end of the port member 47 can guide the sound pressure (sound wind) from the main frame speaker 622 into the handle cover unit 290 (inside the front tube portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) through the cutout opening 295b of the handle cover 295 and the opening 291h of the handle cover base 291, and the sound pressure can stimulate the fingers of the player who is operating the handle 195 with their fingers inserted into the handle cover unit 290 through the gap between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. Therefore, by supplying sound pressure from the port member 47 through the cutout opening 295b and the opening 291h to the player's fingers inserted into the handle cover unit 290 according to the game status in the game area 5a, it is possible to surprise the player, give them a sense of an upcoming opportunity, or change the amount of handle operation, which not only entertains the player but also prevents them from becoming bored and reduces a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, sound pressure (sound wind) from the main frame speaker 622 can be supplied into the handle cover unit 290 (front tube portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) through the cutout opening 295b and the opening 291h, making it possible to cool the inside of the handle cover unit 290 and making the environment around the player's fingers operating the handle 195 more comfortable, thereby relieving stress on the player and preventing a decline in interest in the game.

As described above, the sound pressure (sound wind) emitted forward from the port member 47 provided in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2, which is different from the door frame 3 in which the handle 195 and the handle cover unit 290 are provided, is guided by the multiple blades 46b of the grill member 46 to stimulate the fingers of the player who is operating the handle 195 with his/her fingers inserted into the handle cover unit 290 through the gap between the central hub portion 195a and the outer ring portion 195c. Therefore, compared to a case in which a vibration device is provided in the handle 195, there is no damage to the various sensors (handle rotation detection sensor 189, handle touch sensor 192, single button operation sensor 194, etc.) and bearing mechanism provided in the handle 195, and it is possible to make the handle unit 180 less likely to be damaged, and it is possible to avoid causing discomfort to the player due to damage to the handle unit 180, and to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, because the handle 195 has a central hub portion 195a, spoke portions 195b, and an outer peripheral ring portion 195c, the handle 195 has an appearance similar to that of a steering wheel of an automobile, and therefore, even though the appearance is significantly different from that of the handles of conventional pachinko machines, it is possible for the player to intuitively recognize that the operation of the handle 195 is the same as that of conventional pachinko machines. Therefore, even a player who has seen this pachinko machine 1 for the first time can operate the handle 195 of this pachinko machine 1 without confusion, making it easier for the player to select this pachinko machine 1 as the pachinko machine to play without hesitation.

In addition, the cutout opening 295b and the opening 291h are provided on the downward facing portion of the outer circumferential surface of the handle cover unit 290, where the player can insert his/her fingers between the central hub portion 195a and the outer circumferential ring portion 195c of the handle 195. When looking inside the handle cover unit 290 (the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) from the front, the lower portion of the handle cover unit 290 can be seen through the opening 291h and the lower cutout opening 295b. This gives the cylindrical handle cover unit 290 a sense of openness, reducing the player's anxiety about inserting his/her fingers into the handle cover unit 290, and allowing the player to operate the handle 195 without hesitation.

In addition, the handle cover unit 290 has a through-hole cutout opening 295b and an opening 291h on the outer peripheral surface facing downward, and the port member 47 of the outer frame 2 (lower outer frame assembly 40) is opened toward the front. Therefore, even if liquid such as a drink or game balls B enters the handle cover unit 290, it can be discharged downward from the lower cutout opening 295b and opening 291h, and liquid discharged downward from the cutout opening 295b and opening 291h is less likely to enter the port member 47.

Furthermore, the handle 195 has a central hub portion 195a, spoke portions 195b, and an outer peripheral ring portion 195c, and multiple cutout openings 295b are provided in the handle cover 295 of the handle cover unit 290, whose front end has the same diameter as the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. This allows the handle to be grasped and operated by hand using the central hub portion 195a in the same way as the handle of a conventional pachinko machine, operated using only the spoke portions 195b, operated like a steering wheel of a car using the outer peripheral ring portion 195c, operated by placing fingers on the outer peripheral ring portion 195c and the cutout openings 295b, or operated by pinching the inside and outside of the handle cover unit 290 with fingers across the outer peripheral ring portion 195c, thereby providing a pachinko machine 1 that allows a variety of operations to be performed to shoot game balls B (handle operations). Therefore, depending on the game status and the player's condition, the player can shoot the game ball B into the game area 5a in a way that is easy for the player to operate, making it possible to prevent the player from becoming bored and allowing the player to enjoy the operation of shooting the game ball B, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

The operating position of the handle 195 can be fixed by gripping the outer circumferential ring portion 195c and the cutout opening 295b of the handle 195 with fingers, or by straddling the outer circumferential ring portion 195c and pinching the inside and outside of the handle cover unit 290 with fingers. Therefore, in addition to handle operations similar to those of conventional pachinko machines, handle operations that are not possible with conventional pachinko machines can also be performed, providing the player with a variety of handle operations that make handle operation enjoyable and less likely to bore the player.

In addition, because the diameter of the front end of the handle cover unit 290 is the same as the diameter of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195, the handle cover unit 290 extends rearward from the outer peripheral ring portion 195c, giving the appearance that the handle cover unit 290 is integrated with the handle 195, resulting in a pachinko machine 1 that looks good and is capable of attracting the attention of players.

In addition, because the diameter of the front end of the handle cover unit 290 is the same as the diameter of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c, it is possible to prevent the vertical dimension of the handle cover unit 290 from becoming larger than necessary, and by preventing the handle cover unit 290 from compressing the play area 5a (door window 101a) upward, it is possible to prevent the play area 5a from becoming narrower, allowing the play area 5a to be relatively larger, and the large play area 5a makes the pachinko machine 1 stand out, resulting in a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing and strongly attracts the attention of players.

Furthermore, by appropriately illuminating the LEDs 293a of the handle cover decorative board 293, the handle cover unit 290 (the inside of the front tube portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and the handle cover 295) and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195 can be illuminated and decorated. Therefore, even when the player is operating the handle 195, the illuminated decoration of the handle cover 295 and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c is not blocked by the player's hand, making the handle cover 295 and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c stand out, and providing a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the player's attention.

In addition, the handle 195 is provided in the lower right corner of the door frame 3 on the side opposite the hinge side, and the cutout opening 295b is provided in the part of the outer peripheral surface of the handle cover 295 of the handle cover unit 290 facing the right side, so that the cutout opening 295b can be used as a handle when opening and closing the door frame 3. Therefore, there is no need to provide the door frame 3 with a handle that would make it look unattractive, and the appearance of the door frame 3 can be improved.

The handle cover unit 290 (handle cover base 291) supports the outer circumferential ring portion 195c (handle guide 196) of the handle 195 so that it can rotate in the circumferential direction, and has a flange portion 291e and a guide piece 291g that restrict movement in the front-rear direction. Even if the outer circumferential ring portion 195c of the handle 195 is pulled forward, the guide piece 291g etc. can restrict the forward movement of the outer circumferential ring portion 195c. Therefore, the outer circumferential ring portion 195c and the spoke portion 195b connecting the outer circumferential ring portion 195c and the central hub portion 195a are not deformed, and damage to the handle 195 can be prevented.

In addition, the handle touch sensor 192 detects that the player is touching the handle 195, and then accepts the operation of the handle 195 to shoot the game ball B. Therefore, the game ball B can be shot even if the handle 195 is operated while touching only the spoke portion 195b or the outer ring portion 195c. This allows the pachinko machine 1 to perform a variety of shooting operations (handle operations) as described above, and also prevents the game ball B from being shot when the player is not touching the handle 195. This prevents the handle from being operated using tools, and reduces the burden on the game hall.

[3-5. Overall configuration of the plate unit]
The dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 48 and 49. Figure 48 is a perspective view of the dish unit of the door frame, and Figure 49 is a perspective view of the dish unit from behind. The dish unit 200 is attached to a portion below the door window 101a on the front side of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. The dish unit 200 includes an upper dish 201 for storing game balls B to be shot into the game area 5a, and a lower dish 202 arranged below the upper dish 201 and capable of storing game balls B supplied from the upper dish 201 and the foul cover unit 150.

The plate unit 200 comprises a plate base unit 210 having an upper plate 201 and attached to the front of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, a plate decoration unit 250 having a lower plate 202 attached to the front of the plate base unit 210, and a performance operation unit 300 attached to the front of the plate decoration unit 250 and the plate base unit 210 and operable by the player.

The dish base unit 210 comprises a flat dish unit base 211 extending left and right, an upper dish main body 212 attached to the upper front part of the dish unit base 211 and having an upper dish 201, a mounting base (not shown) attached to the right of the upper dish main body 212 and protruding forward, a dish unit relay board (not shown) attached to the right of the mounting base, a ball lending operation unit 220 attached to the top surface of the mounting base, an upper dish pre-ball removal unit (not shown) attached below the mounting base, and an upper dish post-ball removal unit 240 attached to the rear of the upper dish pre-ball removal unit.

The dish decoration unit 250 comprises a lower dish body 251 which is attached to the lower front part of the dish unit base 211 and has a lower dish 202, a dish unit body 252 which is attached to the front part of the dish unit base 211 so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251, a lower dish ball removal unit 260 which is attached to the underside of the lower dish body 251, and a left dish decoration unit 270 and a right dish decoration unit 275 which are attached to the upper front part of the dish unit body 252, spaced apart from each other on the left and right.

The performance operation unit 300 is equipped with a performance operation section 301 that can be operated by the player, which includes a touch operation section 302 that can be operated by the player through touch and a press operation section 303 that can be operated by the player through pressing. The performance operation unit 300 is equipped with a performance operation section cover unit 310 with a spherical outer surface, an operation section base 315 that is housed within the performance operation section cover unit 310 and attached to the front of the plate decoration unit 250, a circular performance operation section outer periphery decoration board 320 attached to the top surface of the operation section base 315, an outer periphery board cover 325 that covers the top of the performance operation section outer periphery decoration board 320, and an operation section relay board unit 330 attached to the rear side of the operation section base 315.

The performance operation unit 300 also includes a performance operation unit unit 350 that can protrude upward from the performance operation unit cover unit 310 and is provided with a performance operation unit 301, a performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 that is attached to the operation unit base 315 and supports the performance operation unit unit 350 so that it can be raised and lowered, and a protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 that adjusts the upward protruding force of the performance operation unit unit 350 by the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360.

The tray unit 200 bulges forward as a whole, with the performance operation unit 300 positioned in the left-right center so that the top surface of the performance operation unit 301 faces diagonally upward and forward, with the upper tray 201 positioned to the left of the performance operation unit 300 on the top surface, the ball lending operation unit 220 positioned to the right of the performance operation unit 300, and the lower tray 202 positioned below the upper tray 201 and to the left of the performance operation unit 300.

[3-5a. Upper plate]
The upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 48 and 49. The upper tray 201 is formed by a tray unit base 211 and an upper tray body 212, and is formed in a container shape that is open upward and bulges forward more on the left side than the center when viewed from the front. The upper tray 201 (upper tray body 212) bulges forward most at about 1/3 of the left end to the right side relative to the left-right width of the door frame 3. The upper tray 201 has a guide passage portion 201a (see Figure 73) whose front end retreats backward as it moves from the most bulging portion to the right when viewed from the front, and whose depth in the front-back direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The entire bottom surface of the upper tray 201, including the guide passage portion 201a, is inclined so that the right end side is lower, and the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a when viewed from the front is recessed below the ball lending operation unit 220.

When assembled to the tray unit 200, the upper tray 201 has a bottom surface that is inclined downward from a position lower than the upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit base 211 to a position slightly lower than the outer diameter of the game ball B relative to the upper end of the upper tray ball feed port (not shown). This allows the game ball B released forward from the upper tray ball supply port 211a to be received and stored within the upper tray 201, and the received game ball B can be supplied from the right end side of the guide passage section 201a through the upper tray ball feed port to the ball feed unit 140 side.

The induction passage section 201a is equipped with a metal earth fitting that is electrically grounded (earthed) in the pachinko machine 1, and when the game ball B comes into contact with it (rolls), the static electricity charged to the game ball B can be removed.

[3-5b. Bottom plate]
The lower tray 202 of the tray unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 48 and 50. Figure 50(a) shows the main part of the door frame cut horizontally at the lower tray ball supply port. FIG. 1B is a cross-sectional view showing the main part of the conventional door frame taken along the same line as in FIG. 1A, and FIG. 1C is a cross-sectional view showing the bottom plate of the conventional door frame taken along the same line as in FIG. 11 is a table comparing the number of game balls stored in the tray unit 200 and the number of game balls stored in the tray unit 200. The lower tray 202 is disposed below the upper tray 201 and to the left of the center in the left-right direction of the tray unit 200 (door frame 3) when viewed from the front. The lower tray 202 is formed of a lower tray body 251 and a tray unit base 211. The lower tray 202 is formed in a container shape capable of storing game balls B, and has a bottom wall that penetrates vertically and receives game balls B. It is provided with a lower dish ball removal hole 202a through which B can be discharged. The lower tray ball removal hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is closed and openable by the lower tray ball removal cover 265 of the lower tray ball removal unit 260.

The lower tray 202 is formed into a roughly rectangular shape that extends left and right when viewed from above, with the front end on the left side protruding further forward than the right side from the center in the left-right direction. The lower tray 202 has a lower tray ball removal hole 202a that penetrates from top to bottom, located near the front end near the right end. The lower tray 202 is inclined so that the bottom surface is lower toward the lower tray ball removal hole 202a. When assembled into the tray unit 200, the lower tray ball removal hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is located below the performance operation unit 300, to the left of the front of the lower tray ball supply port 211c.

When the lower tray ball removal hole 202a is closed, the lower tray 202 can store the game ball B released forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c, and by opening the lower tray ball removal hole 202a, the stored game ball B can be discharged below the tray unit 200 (e.g., to a cash box). Also, when the lower tray ball removal hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is open, the lower tray ball removal hole 202a is positioned in front of the lower tray ball supply port 211c, so that the game ball B released forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c can be quickly discharged downward from the lower tray ball removal hole 202a by moving the shortest distance.

Here, in a conventional pachinko machine, as shown in FIG. 50(b), a lower tray ball ejection hole 202b of the lower tray 202 is provided in front of the central axis of the lower tray ball supply port 211j of the tray unit base 211 in the tray base unit 210, which is connected to the ball ejection port 150d of the far cover unit 150. The lower tray ball supply port 211j is cylindrical and extends straight forward so that the game ball B released forward from the ball ejection port 150d goes straight toward the lower tray ball ejection hole 202b. This allows the game ball B released forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211j to be quickly discharged downward from the lower tray ball ejection hole 202b by moving the shortest distance.

However, if the lower tray ball supply port 211j is used to guide the game ball B straight toward the lower tray ball removal hole 202b, and the lower tray ball removal hole 202b is closed by the lower tray ball removal cover 265, there is a risk that the game balls B will be concentrated in the area to the right of the center of the lower tray 202, since the lower tray ball removal hole 202b and the lower tray ball supply port 211j are located near the right end of the lower tray 202. If the game balls B concentrated in the right area of the lower tray 202 block the front of the lower tray ball supply port 211j, the game balls B will no longer be released from the storage passage 150e of the far cover unit 150 to the lower tray 202 side, which may activate the full tank detection sensor 154 and determine that the lower tray 202 is full, even though there is still room in the left area of the lower tray 202.

In contrast, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50(a), the left side wall (ball guide portion 213) of the lower tray ball supply port 211c is inclined so that it extends diagonally forward to the left, as will be described in detail later. In more detail, the left side wall of the lower tray ball supply port 211c is inclined diagonally forward to the left at the location directly behind the lower tray ball removal hole 202a, so that the distance between the left side wall and the front of the tray unit base 211 is a distance that allows at least one game ball B to circulate.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50, the lower tray ball removal hole 202a is moved to the left of the central axis (line shown by the dashed dotted line) of the rear end of the lower tray ball supply port 211c (ball release port 150d).

As a result, by moving the lower tray ball removal hole 202a to the left, the lowest part of the lower tray 202 (the part of the lower tray ball removal hole 202a) moves to the left, thereby reducing the concentration and accumulation of game ball B on the right side of the lower tray 202 when the lower tray ball removal hole 202a is closed. Furthermore, even if multiple game balls B are stored in the lower tray 202 from the lower tray ball removal hole 202a and reach the rear end of the lower tray 202 (the front of the tray unit base 211), the left side wall of the lower tray ball supply port 211c extends diagonally to form a gap between the rear end of the lower tray 202 and the rear end of the lower tray 202 through which game balls B can flow. Therefore, game balls B released from the foul cover unit 150 (ball release port 150d) or the upper tray ball removal unit 240 (ball removal guide path 241c) toward the lower tray ball supply port 211c can be guided along the diagonally extending left side wall to the left side of the lower tray 202 and released, allowing game balls B to be properly stored throughout the entire lower tray 202.

This prevents the full tank detection sensor 154 from activating and reporting a full tank even when there is sufficient space remaining in the lower tray 202 to store game balls B, allowing more game balls B to be stored in the lower tray 202.

[3-5c. Dish base unit]
The dish base unit 210 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 48 and 49. The dish base unit 210 comprises a flat dish unit base 211 attached to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and extending left and right, an upper dish main body 212 attached to the upper front surface of the dish unit base 211 and having an upper dish 201, and a dish unit relay board 214 attached to the rear surface of the dish unit base 211 near the lower right corner.

The dish base unit 210 also includes a ball lending operation unit 220 attached to the upper front part of the dish unit base 211, an upper dish pre-ball removal unit (not shown) attached to the front part of the dish unit base 211 below the ball lending operation unit 220, and an upper dish post-ball removal unit 240 attached to the rear side of the dish unit base 211 behind the upper dish pre-ball removal unit.

[3-5c-1. Dish unit base]
The dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 48 and 49. The dish unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and is formed in a flat plate shape (a shallow box shape with an open rear) extending left and right across the entire width of the door frame base 101.

The dish unit base 211 is provided with an upper dish ball supply port 211a that penetrates from front to back near the upper left corner when viewed from the front and extends cylindrically to the rear, a speaker port 211b that penetrates from front to back below the upper dish ball supply port 211a and has a punched metal attached to the front, a lower dish ball supply port 211c that penetrates from front to back at the lower part toward the left of the center when viewed from the front and extends cylindrically to the rear, a notch 211d that is cut out in the right wall of the part that extends cylindrically to the rear of the lower dish ball supply port 211c to a size that allows the game ball B to pass through, and an upper dish ball delivery port (not shown) that penetrates from front to front on the upper right side of the lower dish ball supply port 211c when viewed from the front and extends vertically, with the upper part located at the right end of the upper dish main body 212.

When assembled to the door frame 3, the upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit base 211 has a front end that opens into the rear wall of the upper tray 201, and a cylindrical rear end that passes through the upper tray ball passage port 101g of the door frame base 101 from the front and connects to the front end of the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. This allows the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 to be supplied (paid out) into the upper tray 201 through the upper tray ball supply port 211a.

When assembled to the door frame 3, the lower tray ball supply port 211c has a front end that opens into the rear wall of the lower tray 202, and a cylindrical rear end that penetrates the lower tray ball passage port 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side and connects to the front end of the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game ball B circulating in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 is supplied into the lower tray 202 through the lower tray ball supply port 211c. In addition, the downstream end of the ball removal guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the upper tray ball removal unit 240 is connected to the cutout portion 211d formed in the cylindrically extending portion of the lower tray ball supply port 211c. As a result, by operating the upper tray ball removal button 222, the game ball B stored in the upper tray 201 is discharged from the lower tray ball supply port 211c into the lower tray 202 via the upper tray ball supply port, the entrance 141a and ball removal port 141b of the ball supply unit 140, the ball supply guide path 241b and ball removal guide path 241c of the upper tray post-ball removal unit 240, and the cutout portion 211d.

When assembled to the tray base unit 210, the upper tray ball supply port 211a is located in front of the ball receiving port (not shown) of the rear base 241 in the upper tray ball removal unit 240, and the game ball B in the upper tray 201 is supplied from the ball receiving port of the upper tray ball removal unit 240 to the ball supply guide path 241b.

In addition, the dish unit base 211 of this embodiment has a ball guide section 213 that guides the game ball B supplied into the lower dish 202 to a position far from the lower dish ball removal hole 202a. The ball guide section 213 guides the game ball B guided from the upper dish 201 by the ball removal guide path 241c to a position far from the lower dish ball removal hole 202a of the lower dish 202 (the left part of the lower dish 202). As shown in FIG. 50 (a), this ball guide section 213 forms a part of the inner wall of the lower dish ball supply port 211c. In detail, the ball guide section 213 forms a left inner wall that faces the right inner wall where the ball removal guide path 241c opens in the inner wall of the cylindrically formed lower dish ball supply port 211c, and is inclined so as to move leftward as it moves from the rear end side to the front end side. Due to the inclination of the left inner wall (ball guide section 213), a distance (gap) is formed between the front surface of the dish unit base 211 (rear end of the lower dish 202) of the dish unit base 211 at the portion directly behind the lower dish ball removal hole 202a, allowing at least one game ball B to pass through. As a result, when the game ball B that has passed through the ball removal guide section 241c from the upper dish 201 abuts against the ball guide section 213 from the right, it is guided to the left front by the inclination of the ball guide section 213, and the game ball B can be guided to the left end side of the lower dish 202, away from the lower dish ball removal hole 202a in the lower dish 202. In other words, the ball guide section 213 can guide the game ball B to a position far from the lowest portion of the lower dish 202 (lower dish ball removal hole 202a).

However, as shown in Figure 50 (b), the lower tray ball supply port 211j in a conventional pachinko machine (also referred to as a conventional product) extends straight in the front-to-rear direction, so when the game ball B guided by the ball removal guide path 241c abuts against the left inner wall of the lower tray ball supply port 211j, it bounces to the right and rolls forward, and is not sent to a position far from the lower tray ball removal hole 202b in the lower tray 202, but is instead stored in the right-hand area of the lower tray 202 where the lower tray ball removal hole 202b is located. Therefore, in conventional products, game balls B (shown by the two-dot chain line in Figure 50 (b)) tend to accumulate in the area to the right of the center in the lower tray 202. If game balls B concentrated in the right area of the lower tray 202 block the front of the lower tray ball supply port 211j, game balls B will no longer be released from the storage passage 150e of the fall cover unit 150 toward the lower tray 202, which may activate the full tank detection sensor 154 and result in the lower tray 202 being determined to be full even though there is still room in the area to the left of the lower tray 202.

In contrast, in this embodiment, as described above, since it has the ball guide section 213, the game ball B that has circulated through the ball removal guide section 241c can be guided to the left area in the lower tray 202. Also, even if multiple game balls B are stored in the lower tray 202 from the area of the lower tray ball removal hole 202a and reach the rear end of the lower tray 202 (the front of the tray unit base 211), the game ball B released from the foul cover unit 150 (ball release port 150d) or the upper tray ball removal unit 240 (ball removal guide path 241c) to the lower tray ball supply port 211c side can be guided to the left side in the lower tray 202 through the space between the left side wall (ball guide section 213) of the lower tray ball supply port 211c and the rear end of the lower tray 202, and the game balls B can be stored throughout the entire lower tray 202. Therefore, even if there is sufficient space remaining in the lower tray 202 to store game balls B, it is possible to avoid the full tank detection sensor 154 being activated and reporting that the tank is full, and more game balls B can be stored in the lower tray 202.

And, to support the above-mentioned effects, the inventors of the present application counted the number of game balls B stored in each lower tray 202 when the full tank detection sensor 154 was activated for the product of this embodiment and the conventional product. The game balls B were counted 10 times for each. The results, as shown in the table of FIG. 50(c), showed that in every count, the lower tray 202 of this embodiment (product of this embodiment) stored a significantly larger number of game balls B than the conventional product, and it was confirmed that, on average, it was possible to store approximately 40% more game balls B than the conventional product.

[3-5c-2. Upper plate body]
The upper tray body 212 of the tray base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 48 and 49. The upper tray body 212 is attached to the front of the tray unit base 211 and cooperates with the tray unit base 211 to form the upper tray 201. The upper tray body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) with an open top and rear. The upper tray body 212 extends left and right, and the left side bulges forward more than the center of the left and right sides when viewed from the front. The front end of the upper tray body 212 retreats backward from the most forward bulging part toward the right side when viewed from the front, and the depth in the front-to-rear direction is formed to a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The bottom surface of the upper tray body 212 is inclined so that the right end is the lowest. The upper part of the upper tray body 212 near the right end is closed.

When the upper tray body 212 is assembled to the tray unit 200, the section that is closed at the top near the right end is attached so that it fits under the ball lending operation unit 220. In addition, the upper tray body 212 has a performance operation unit attachment section 212a formed in the middle of the upper part in the left-right direction, and a part of the performance operation unit 300 is attached to this performance operation unit attachment section 212a.

[3-5c-3. Dish unit relay board]
The dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 is intended to relay the connection between the door frame sub-relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100 and the dish left decorative board 273, dish right decorative board 278, and operation unit relay board 332. The dish unit relay board 214 is attached near the lower right corner of the rear surface of the dish unit base 211. When attached to the dish unit base 211, the rear surface of this dish unit relay board 214 faces the rear side of the dish unit base 211.

[3-5c-4. Ball lending operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the tray base unit 210 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 51. FIG. 51 is a plan view showing an enlarged portion of the ball lending operation unit in the tray unit of the door frame. This ball lending operation unit 220 is for discharging game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray 202, lending a predetermined number of game balls B to the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 after inserting cash or a prepaid card into a ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1, displaying the remaining amount of cash or a prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine, returning the cash or a prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine minus the amount of the lent game balls B, adjusting the volume, and adjusting the amount of light.

The ball lending operation unit 220 comprises a base section 221 attached to the upper front part of the tray unit base 211, an upper tray ball removal button 222 located near the left end of the top surface of the base section 221, a translucent disk-shaped ball lending operation base 223 located to the right of the upper tray ball removal button 222 on the top surface of the base section 221, a ball lending button 224 located on the front left side of the ball lending operation base 223, a return button 225 located on the front right side of the ball lending operation base 223, a ball lending display section 226 located on the lower rear part of the ball lending operation base 223, a volume adjustment button 227 located in front of the ball lending button 224 on the outside of the base section 221, and a light intensity adjustment button 228 located to the left of the volume adjustment button 227.

The upper tray ball removal button 222 protrudes upward in a cylindrical shape from the top surface of the base portion 221, and can be moved downward when the player presses it. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape, with the character "ball" (ball) printed on the top surface. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball lending display portion 226 is composed of three 7-segment LEDs and one bullet-shaped LED, and can be clearly seen by the player through the transparent ball lending operation base 223 when illuminated.

The ball lending operation unit 220 can eject game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray by pressing the upper tray ball removal button 222. In addition, when cash or a prepaid card with a remaining balance is inserted into the ball lending machine and the ball lending button 224 is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper tray 201. When the return button 225 is pressed, the cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine is returned minus the amount of the lent game balls B. The ball lending display unit 226 displays the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine. In addition, the ball lending display unit 226 displays an error code when the ball lending machine breaks down.

The volume adjustment button 227 is for adjusting the volume of music, voice, sound effects, and other sound effects output from the top center speaker and top side speaker of the door frame 3 and the low-pitched main frame speaker 622 of the main frame 4. This volume adjustment button 227 is shaped like a gourd, with two circles combined. The volume adjustment button 227 has the letter "+" in the center of one (upper) circle and the letter "-" in the center of the other (lower) circle, and the area between the two circles has a design that looks like sound is coming from a speaker. The volume adjustment button 227 is shaped so that the diameter of the circle on the "+" side is larger than the diameter of the circle on the "-" side. Pressing the "+" side of this volume adjustment button 227 increases the volume, and pressing the "-" side decreases the volume.

The light intensity adjustment button 228 is used to adjust the light intensity of the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, and the brightness of the display screen of the performance display device 1600. This light intensity adjustment button 228 is shaped like a gourd with two circles combined. The light intensity adjustment button 228 has the letter "+" in the center of one (upper) circle and the letter "-" in the center of the other (lower) circle, and there is an image of a light bulb between the two circles. The light intensity adjustment button 228 is shaped so that the diameter of the circle on the "+" side is larger than the diameter of the circle on the "-" side. Pressing the "+" side of this light intensity adjustment button 228 makes it brighter, and pressing the "-" side makes it darker.

The volume control button 227 and the light control button 228 are different colors (for example, the volume control button 227 is white and the light control button 228 is black) to prevent players from confusing them.

When adjusting the volume or light intensity using the touch operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 301, when a player-participation performance that requires the operation of the performance operation unit 301 is not being performed, the performance operation unit 301 is operated appropriately to display a setting menu for adjusting the volume or light intensity, etc. on the performance display device 1600, and an item to be adjusted is selected, and then the contact operation unit 302 is operated to change the volume or brightness of the light intensity, etc., which takes time and effort to adjust the volume or light intensity. In contrast, according to this embodiment, the volume adjustment button 227 and the light intensity adjustment button 228 can be operated to directly adjust the volume and light intensity, and a pachinko machine 1 can be provided that simplifies the effort required for adjusting the volume and light intensity and allows adjustments to be made in a short time.

[3-5c-5. Upper tray ball removal unit]
The upper tray pre-ball removal unit and the upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 in the tray base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figure 49. The upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 cooperates with the ball delivery unit 140 to discharge the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray 202 when the upper tray ball removal button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed.

The upper tray ball removal unit 240 comprises a rear base 241 attached to the rear surface of the tray unit base 211 so as to close the upper tray ball supply port from the rear, an upper tray ball removal slider 242 attached to the front surface of the rear base 241 so as to be able to slide vertically, a spring (not shown) that biases the upper tray ball removal slider 242 upward, and a rear cover 244 attached to the rear side of the rear base 241.

The rear base 241 is equipped with a ball receiving opening (not shown) that protrudes upward from the portion where the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is slidably attached and opens toward the front, through which the game ball B can pass, a ball feed guide path 241b that guides the game ball B received in the ball receiving opening downward on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then backward, and a ball removal guide path 241c that guides the game ball B downward from a position lower than the ball feed guide path 241b on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then guides it to the right when viewed from behind.

When assembled to the tray base unit 210, the ball receiving port is formed at the downstream end (right end when viewed from the front) of the guide passage section 201a of the upper tray 201, in a position that opens forward through the upper tray ball supply port of the tray unit base 211. When assembled to the door frame 3, the ball supply guide path 241b is formed so that the entrance 141a of the ball supply unit 140 is located at the rear of the lower part. This allows the game ball B supplied to the upper tray 201 to enter the entrance 141a of the ball supply unit 140 through the ball receiving port and the ball supply guide path 241b.

The left and right extending portion of the ball removal guideway 241c protrudes further to the right as viewed from the rear than the portion where the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is slidably attached, is inclined so that the right end as viewed from the rear is lower, and opens to the right side as viewed from the rear. The rear side of the left and right extending portion of the ball removal guideway 241c is closed by the rear cover 244. When assembled to the door frame 3, the upper part of the portion extending vertically below the ball supply guideway 241b is located in front of the ball removal opening 141b of the ball supply unit 140, and is formed so that the right end as viewed from the rear of the portion extending left and right is connected to the cutout portion 211d of the lower tray ball supply opening 211c in the tray unit base 211. As a result, the game ball B discharged from the ball ejection port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is released into the lower tray 202 from the lower tray ball supply port 211c via the ball ejection guide path 241c and the notch portion 211d.

The upper plate ball removal slider 242 is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is equipped with an actuation receiving part (not shown) that protrudes forward from the upper left corner, and an actuation transmission part 242b that protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the actuation receiving part. The actuation receiving part has a flat upper surface. The actuation transmission part 242b is inclined so that its upper surface is positioned downward as it moves rearward, and its lower surface extends horizontally to connect with the rear end of the upper surface.

When the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the actuation receiving part protrudes forward through the tray unit base 211 from the rear side, and the lower end of the upper tray ball removal button 222 abuts against the upper surface of the actuation receiving part. In addition, when the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the actuation transmission part 242b protrudes rearward from the rear base 241, and the actuation rod 143c of the ball removal member 143 of the ball feeding unit 140 abuts against the upper surface.

The spring has an upper end attached to the rear base 241 and a lower end attached to the upper tray ball removal slider 242, and biases the upper tray ball removal slider 242 upward. Therefore, the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is positioned at the upper end of its movement due to the biasing force of the spring, and can move downward by resisting the biasing force of the spring.

The upper tray ball removal unit 240 positions the upper tray ball removal slider 242 at its upper end of movement due to the spring force, and positions the upper tray ball removal button 222 at its upper end of movement via the actuation receiving part of the upper tray ball removal slider 242. In addition, because the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is positioned at its upper end of movement due to the spring force, the actuation rod 143c abutting the upper surface of the actuation transmission part 242b is prevented from moving downward, and the partition part 143a of the ball removal member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball removal opening 141b, separating the two.

Therefore, when the upper tray ball removal button 222 is not pressed, the entrance 141a and the ball removal port 141b are partitioned in the ball feeding unit 140, and the game ball B sent from the upper tray 201 to the ball receiving port can be sent from the entrance 141a and the ball feeding member 144 through the ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540 side.

On the other hand, when the upper tray ball removal button 222 is pressed downward against the spring force, the upper tray ball removal slider 242 moves downward, and the operating rod 143c of the ball removal member 143, which is in contact with the upper surface of the operating transmission part 242b of the upper tray ball removal slider 242, can move downward, and the ball removal member 143 rotates due to the load of the weight part 143d of the ball removal member 143, and the partition part 143a retreats from between the entrance 141a and the ball removal opening 141b. As a result, the game ball B that entered the entrance 141a from the upper tray 201 through the ball receiving opening and the ball delivery guide path 241b is discharged forward from the ball removal opening 141b that opens below the entrance 141a. Then, the game ball B discharged forward from the ball discharge port 141b passes through the ball discharge guide path 241c and is guided from the notch 211d into the lower tray ball supply port 211c, and is then released from the lower tray ball supply port 211c into the lower tray 202, and the game ball B in the upper tray 201 is discharged into the lower tray 202.

When the downward pressure on the upper tray ball removal button 222 is released, the upper tray ball removal slider 242 moves upward due to the spring force, the upper tray ball removal button 222 rises, and the ball removal member 143 rotates due to the operating rod 143c abutting the operating transmission part 242b, so that the partition part 143a is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball removal opening 141b, returning to the original state.

In this way, the upper tray ball removal unit 240 can feed the game ball B in the upper tray 201 to the ball launching device 540 via the ball feeding unit 140, or discharge it to the lower tray 202.

[3-5d. Plate decoration unit]
The plate decoration unit 250 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 22 to 48. The plate decoration unit 250 has a lower plate 202 and is attached to the front of the plate base unit 210, and the performance operation unit 300 is attached from the front in the center in the left-right direction. The plate decoration unit 250 decorates almost the entire plate unit 200.

The plate decoration unit 250 comprises a lower plate body 251 attached to the lower front part of the plate unit base 211 and working together with the plate unit base 211 to form the lower plate 202, a plate unit body 252 attached to the front part of the plate unit base 211 so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251, a lower plate ball removal unit 260 attached to the underside of the lower plate body 251, and a left plate decoration unit 270 and a right plate decoration unit 275 attached to the upper front part of the plate unit body 252, spaced apart from each other on the left and right.

[3-5d-1. Lower plate body]
The lower dish body 251 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 48 and 50. The lower dish body 251 cooperates with the dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 to form the lower dish 202. The lower dish body 251 extends left and right and is formed in a container shape (dish shape) with an open top and rear. This lower dish body 251 is attached to the left side of the center in the left and right direction at the bottom of the front of the dish unit base 211 so that the open rear is closed.

The lower dish main body 251 is formed in a generally rectangular shape extending left and right when viewed from above, with the front end on the left side protruding further forward than the right side from the center in the left-right direction. A lower dish ball removal hole 202a that penetrates vertically is formed near the front end of the right end of the lower dish main body 251 when viewed from above. The bottom surface of the lower dish main body 251 is inclined so that it is lower toward the lower dish ball removal hole 202a. The lower dish ball removal hole 202a is closed by the lower dish ball removal cover 265 of the lower dish ball removal unit 260 so that it can be opened and closed.

When the lower dish body 251 is assembled to the dish decoration unit 250, the outer periphery and part of the bottom surface are covered by the dish unit body 252. Furthermore, when the lower dish body is assembled to the dish unit 200, the bottom surface is located lower than the lower dish ball supply port 211c of the dish unit base 211, and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is located in front of the lower dish ball supply port 211c. This allows the game balls B released forward from the lower dish ball supply port 211c to be stored.

[3-5d-2. Dish unit body]
The dish unit main body 252 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 48 and 49. The dish unit main body 252 is attached to the front of the dish unit base 211 in the dish base unit 210 and decorates the front of the dish unit 200. The dish unit main body 252 bulges out so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward at the upper side, and bulges out so that the left side in the left-right direction protrudes forward at the lower side. The dish unit main body 252 is also curved such that the top surface is lowest at the center in the left-right direction. The dish unit main body 252 is formed in a box shape that is open to the rear.

The plate unit body 252 has upper side bulges 252a that bulge forward from both the left and right ends toward the center in the left-right direction at the top and extend downward and are spaced apart on the left and right, and a lower front decorative part 252b that bulges forward on the left side of the center in the left-right direction at the bottom to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251.

The left and right upper side bulges 252a have a left plate decorative unit 270 and a right plate decorative unit 275 attached to their front faces.

The dish unit main body 252 has a lower dish opening 252d that penetrates from front to back between the upper left side bulge 252a and the lower front decorative portion 252b. The lower dish opening 252d is large enough for the player's fingers to be inserted, and is formed so that it becomes wider from top to bottom as it moves to the left. The lower dish opening 252d is formed into a cylindrical shape that extends from front to back by the lower dish main body 251 and the underside of the upper left side bulge 252a.

Furthermore, although not shown in the figure, the dish unit main body 252 is formed between a pair of upper side bulges 252a in the left-right center and is equipped with a performance operation unit mounting portion to which the performance operation unit 300 is attached. The performance operation unit mounting portion is formed with a width of approximately 1/3 of the left-right width of the dish unit main body 252.

When assembled to the dish unit 200, the dish unit main body 252 is formed to entirely cover the front surface of the dish base unit 210, with the speaker port 211b facing forward through the lower dish opening 252d.

[3-5d-3. Bottom tray ball removal unit]
The lower tray ball removal unit 260 in the tray decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 27 and 50. The lower tray ball removal unit 260 is attached to the underside of the lower tray body 251, and is for storing game balls B in the lower tray 202 and discharging game balls B from the lower tray 202 by opening and closing the lower tray ball removal hole 202a.

The lower tray ball removal unit 260 is equipped with a lower tray ball removal button 263 and a lower tray ball removal cover 265 that opens and closes the through hole by operating the lower tray ball removal button 263.

When the lower tray ball removal unit 260 is assembled to the tray decoration unit 250, the lower tray ball removal button 263 is aligned with the front surface of the lower front decorative part 252b of the tray unit main body 252, and the lower tray ball removal lid 265 closes the lower tray ball removal hole 202a. In this normal state, the lower tray ball removal hole 202a is closed by the lower tray ball removal lid 265, and game balls B can be stored in the lower tray 202.

In the normal state, when the lower tray ball removal button 263 is pressed backward, the lower tray ball removal cover 265 moves and the lower tray ball removal hole 202a opens, allowing the game ball B in the lower tray 202 to be ejected below the tray unit 200 through the lower tray ball removal hole 202a.

When the lower tray ball removal lid 265 is moved by pressing the lower tray ball removal button 263, the lower tray ball removal lid 265 remains in the moved position, the lower tray ball removal hole 202a is maintained in an open position, and the game balls B in the lower tray 202 can be continuously discharged downward.

To close the lower tray ball removal hole 202a from this state, press the lower tray ball removal button 263, which is set back from the front of the lower front decorative part 252b, backward and then release the pressure, and the lower tray ball removal cover 265 returns to its normal position, closing the lower tray ball removal hole 202a. This allows the game ball B to be stored in the lower tray 202.

[3-5d-4. Left plate decorative unit and right plate decorative unit]
The left dish decorative unit 270 and the right dish decorative unit 275 in the dish decorative unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figure 48 etc. The left dish decorative unit 270 and the right dish decorative unit 275 are attached to the upper part of the front surface of the upper side bulge 252a of the dish unit main body 252. The left dish decorative unit 270 and the right dish decorative unit 275 are disposed on the upper part of the dish unit 200 and decorate both the left and right sides of the performance operation unit 300.

The left dish decorative unit 270 comprises a semi-cylindrical left dish decorative body 271 that extends left and right and is translucent, a left dish decorative lens 272 that is translucent and passes through the left dish decorative body 271, and a left dish decorative board 273 that is provided behind the left dish decorative lens 272 and has multiple LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The left decorative body 271 extends in a curved shape, moving forward and downward as it moves from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the top of the upper left side bulge 252a. The left decorative body 271 is formed in a shape resembling a twisted semicylinder, with a semicircular arc that bulges forward and whose central axis extends diagonally to the upper left at the left end and from left to right at the right end. This left decorative body 271 is formed in a milky white color.

The left dish decorative lens 272 extends in the longitudinal direction, coinciding with the front surface of the left dish decorative body 271. The multiple LEDs mounted on the left dish decorative board 273 are full-color LEDs, and when illuminated, can illuminate and decorate the left dish decorative body 271.

When assembled to the door frame 3, the left end of the left decorative unit 270 is continuous with the bottom end of the door frame left side unit 420. Since the left decorative unit 270 does not have ribs along the length of the left decorative body 271, when the multiple LEDs on the left decorative board 273 are illuminated, the entire front of the left decorative body 271 can be illuminated and decorated in a generally uniform manner, giving the appearance of embedded fluorescent lights.

The right-hand plate decorative unit 275 comprises a translucent right-hand plate decorative body 276 that is semi-cylindrical and extends to the left and right, a translucent right-hand plate decorative lens 277 that passes through the right-hand plate decorative body 276, and a right-hand plate decorative board 278 that is provided behind the right-hand plate decorative lens 277 and has multiple LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The right plate decorative body 276 extends in a curved shape, moving forward and downward as it moves from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the top of the upper right side bulge 252a. The right plate decorative body 276 is formed as a semicircular arc that bulges forward, with the central axis extending diagonally to the upper right at the right end and the central axis extending left and right at the left end, giving it the shape of a twisted semicylinder. This right plate decorative body 276 is formed in a milky white color.

The right-hand decorative lens 277 extends in the longitudinal direction of the right-hand decorative body 276, coinciding with the front surface of the right-hand decorative body 276. The multiple LEDs mounted on the right-hand decorative board 278 are full-color LEDs, and when illuminated, can illuminate and decorate the right-hand decorative body 276.

When assembled to the door frame 3, the right end of the plate right decorative unit 275 is continuous with the lower end of the door frame right side unit 430. Since the plate right decorative unit 275 does not have ribs in the middle of the longitudinal direction of the plate right decorative body 276, when the multiple LEDs on the plate right decorative board 278 are illuminated, the entire front of the plate right decorative body 276 can be illuminated and decorated in an approximately uniform manner, giving the appearance of embedded fluorescent lights.

When assembled to the door frame 3, the left dish decorative unit 270 and the right dish decorative unit 275 protrude upward from the front end of the upper side bulge 252a of the dish unit main body 252 of the dish decorative unit 250, forming a step between the upper side bulge 252a and the left dish decorative unit 270 and the right dish decorative unit 275. This allows the player to hook his/her fingers using the step between the left dish decorative unit 270 and the right dish decorative unit 275 and the upper side bulge 252a, and can be used as a finger rest when leveling the game balls B in the upper dish 201 or operating the performance operation unit 301 described later. In addition, the step between the left dish decorative unit 270 and the right dish decorative unit 275 and the upper side bulge 252a can prevent the game balls B on the upper side bulge 252a from leaking forward.

[3-5e. Overall configuration of the production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the performance operation unit 300 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 52 to 56. Fig. 52(a) is a perspective view of the performance operation unit seen from the front with the performance operation button facing upward, and (b) is a perspective view of the performance operation unit of (a) seen from the back. Fig. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation unit disassembled into main components and seen from the front above, and Fig. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation unit disassembled into main components and seen from the front below. Fig. 55(a) is a cross-sectional view of the performance operation unit in a state where the performance operation unit is in a lowered position and the lift spring lower holding member is at the upper end of the movement, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the performance operation unit in a state where the performance operation unit has moved from the state of (a) to the upper position. Fig. 56 is a cross-sectional view of the performance operation unit in a state where the performance operation unit is in a lowered position and the lift spring lower holding member is at the lower end of the movement.

The performance operation unit 300 is provided in the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction, and serves to decorate the plate unit 200. When a player-participation performance is executed, the player can operate the performance operation unit 300 to participate in the performance. The performance operation unit 300 is attached to the plate base unit 210 and the plate decoration unit 250.

The presentation operation unit 300 is equipped with a presentation operation section 301 that can be operated by the player. The presentation operation section 301 is composed of a touch operation section 302 that can be operated by the player through touch, and a pressure operation section 303 that can be operated by the player through pressing, and can accept operations by the player and move (vibrate) the presentation operation section 301, allowing the player to participate not only in the operation of shooting the game ball B, but also in the presentation during the game. The presentation operation section 301 has the touch operation section 302 provided above the pressing operation section 303. The presentation operation section 301 has the touch operation section 302 and the pressing operation section 303 formed in a circular shape with a diameter that is approximately 5/8 the outer diameter of the presentation operation unit 300.

The performance operation unit 300 is equipped with a spherical performance operation cover unit 310 that is provided on the front of the dish unit 200 in the center of the left-right direction, an operation unit base 315 to which the performance operation cover unit 310 is attached on the outside and which is attached to the front of the dish decoration unit 250, a performance operation outer peripheral decoration board 320 that is provided on the upper surface of the operation unit base 315 and is equipped with multiple LEDs 320a for illuminating and decorating the upper part of the performance operation cover unit 310 (unit upper cover 312), an outer peripheral board cover 325 that is attached to the operation unit base 315 so as to cover the performance operation outer peripheral decoration board 320 from above, and an operation unit relay board unit 330 that is attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 315.

The performance operation unit 300 also includes a performance operation unit 350 having a performance operation unit 301, a performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 that raises and lowers the performance operation unit 350, and a protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 that adjusts the protruding force of the performance operation unit 350. The performance operation unit 350 is arranged so that it can advance and retreat upward from the top surface of the performance operation unit cover unit 310 by the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360.

[3-5e-1. Production operation section cover unit]
The performance operation unit cover unit 310 of the performance operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 53 to 56. The performance operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the performance operation unit attachment part of the dish unit main body 252 of the dish decoration unit 250 via the operation unit base 315. The performance operation unit cover unit 310 decorates the outer periphery of the performance operation unit 300 (the periphery of the performance operation unit 350) at the center of the left-right direction of the dish unit 200.

The performance operation unit cover unit 310 comprises a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 that is open upward and backward, and a circular unit upper cover 312 that is provided above the unit lower cover 311 and has an insertion opening 312a through which the performance operation unit 301 is inserted. The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape so as to cover the front and bottom of the operation unit base 315. The unit upper cover 312 is formed so as to be continuous with the outer surface of the unit lower cover 311. In other words, the performance operation unit cover unit 310 has an outer surface that is formed in a roughly spherical shape. Incidentally, the performance operation unit cover unit 310 in this embodiment is spherical in shape with a diameter of 216 mm.

The performance operation section cover unit 310 is attached in an inclined state so that the axis of the annular unit upper cover 312 is positioned forward as it moves upward. In this embodiment, it is inclined at an angle of approximately 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line.

When assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the performance operation unit cover unit 310 becomes the front end of the door frame 3, and the distance from the front of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit lower cover 311 is approximately 1/2 the overall width of the door frame base 101 in the left-right direction.

At least the unit top cover 312 of the performance operation unit cover unit 310 is translucent, and can be illuminated and decorated by the illumination of multiple LEDs on the performance operation unit outer periphery decorative board 320 described below.

When assembled to the tray unit 200, the front end of the performance operation unit cover unit 310 protrudes further forward than the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202. The performance operation unit cover unit 310 is also connected so that the left tray decorative body 271 and the right tray decorative body 276 extend outward from both the left and right sides of the unit bottom cover 311. This makes the performance operation unit 300 stand out, and the integrated decoration gives it a good appearance.

[3-5e-2. Operation unit base]
The operation unit base 315 of the performance operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 53 to 56. The rear side of the operation unit base 315 is attached to the performance operation unit mounting portion 212a of the upper tray body 212 in the tray base unit 210. The front and bottom of the operation unit base 315 are covered by the unit bottom cover 311, and the top is covered by the unit top cover 312 and the performance operation unit 301. The operation unit base 315 is formed in the shape of a container with an open top.

The operation unit base 315 comprises a main body 315a, which is a roughly cubic box-shaped body with an open top, and a flange 315b, which extends outward from the top end of the main body and has a circular outer periphery. The main body 315a houses the performance operation unit 350. The main body 315a also has a pair of guide shafts 362 and the lower end of a central shaft 366 of the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 in the performance operation unit 350, which will be described later, attached to its bottom wall. The main body 315a also rotatably supports the lower end of an adjustment screw 384 of the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 on the upper surface of its bottom wall. Furthermore, the board base 331 of the operation unit relay board unit 330 is attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the main body 315a.

The performance operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320 is placed on the upper surface of the flange portion 315b. In addition, a circular outer peripheral board cover 325 is attached to the flange portion 315b so as to sandwich the performance operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320. The unit upper cover 312 is attached to the outer peripheral board cover 325.

When the operation unit base 315 is assembled to the performance operation unit 300, the upper surface of the flange portion 315b is positioned approximately flush with the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311.

[3-5e-3. Operation unit relay board unit]
The operation unit relay board unit 330 of the performance operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 53 to 56. The operation unit relay board unit 330 is attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 315. The operation unit relay board unit 330 includes a board base 331 attached to the rear surface of the main body 315a in the operation unit base 315, an operation unit relay board 332 attached to the rear surface of the board base 331, and a board cover 333 attached to the board base 331 so as to cover the operation unit relay board 332 from the rear.

The operation unit relay board 332 relays the connection between the performance operation unit outer decorative board 320 (front decorative board 321 and rear decorative board 322), the button outer decorative board 355, the vibration motor 356, the contact detection sensor main body 358, the button middle decorative board 364, the operation button lifting drive motor 367, the pressure detection sensor 373, the lifting detection sensor 374, the protruding force detection sensor 375, and the protruding force adjustment drive motor 381 and the dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210.

[3-5e-4. Production operation unit]
The performance operation unit 350 in the performance operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 53 to 56. The performance operation unit 350 is provided so as to face the outside from the insertion port 312a of the unit upper cover 312 in the performance operation unit cover unit 310, and can function as the touch operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303.

The performance operation unit 350 comprises a bottomed, cylindrical button body 351 with a closed top end, a disk-shaped contact detector 352 attached to the top of the button body 351, a cylindrical button sleeve 353 inserted into the button body 351 from below, a disk-shaped button base 354 attached to the bottom end of the button sleeve 353 and supported by the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 so that it can be raised and lowered, and a circular outer button decorative board 355 located above the button base 354 and with multiple LEDs 355a mounted on its top surface.

The performance operation unit 350 also includes a vibration motor 356 arranged between the button body 351 and the button sleeve 353, a motor cover 357 that attaches the vibration motor 356 to the button sleeve 353, and a contact detection sensor body 358 that is connected to the contact detection body 352 and attached to the outer periphery of the button sleeve 353.

The button body 351 is formed entirely transparent. The button body 351 has a disk-shaped upper surface portion 351a that curves to bulge upward, a cylindrical tubular portion 351b that extends downward from the outer periphery of the upper surface portion 351a, and a locking portion 351c that protrudes downward from the lower end of the tubular portion 351b. The upper surface portion 351a is formed in a shape that constitutes a part of a sphere having the same diameter as the spherical surface of the performance operation unit cover unit 310. This upper surface portion 351a is decorated with a circular shape that is formed with a diameter of about 1/2 the outer diameter. The outer diameter (diameter) of the upper surface portion 351a (tubular portion 351b) is about 5/8 of the diameter of the performance operation unit cover unit 310. The length (height) of the tubular portion 351b is about 5/8 of the diameter of the upper surface portion 351a. Four locking portions 351c are provided at equal intervals around the circumference of the cylindrical portion 351b. The locking portions 351c are locked to the button base 354. In this embodiment, the button body 351 has a diameter of approximately 127 mm.

The contact detector 352 has a circular outer circumference and is formed in a dish shape with a certain width inside bulging upward from the outer circumference. The contact detector 352 is formed below the circular decoration on the upper surface 351a of the button body 351, bulging obliquely upward and with a flat inner surface. This makes the contact detector 352 look like a part of the decoration of the button body 351. The contact detector 352 has a flat downward extension piece 352a that extends downward from both left and right ends of the outer periphery and the rear end. The contact detector 352 is attached to the lower surface of the upper surface 351a of the button body 351. The contact detector 352 is formed of punching metal. The capacitance of the contact detector 352 relative to the entire area is suppressed by the multiple holes in the punching metal, preventing erroneous detection. In addition, because the contact detector 352 is made of punched metal, light from the LED 364a on the button interior decorative substrate 364 located below can be transmitted upward, allowing the center of the top surface 351a of the button body 351 to be illuminated and decorated in good condition.

The contact detector 352 is connected to an external electrode terminal of the connector in the contact detection sensor main body 358. This allows the contact detector 352 to function as a sensor electrode for detecting capacitance, and to detect contact or approach of a detectable object (a player's hand) with the top or side surface of the button main body 351. In other words, the contact detector 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358 allow the button main body 351 to function as the contact operation unit 302.

The button sleeve 353 has a cylindrical sleeve body 353a that extends vertically, and an annular flange portion 353b that extends outward from the lower end of the sleeve body 353a. The button sleeve 353 is formed to be transparent throughout. The outer diameter of the sleeve body 353a is approximately 4/7 of the inner diameter of the button body 351, and its length is approximately the same as the length of the cylindrical portion 351b of the button body 351. The button sleeve 353 allows light from the multiple LEDs 355a of the button outer decorative board 355 to pass upward through the flange portion 353b.

The button base 354 is disk-shaped with a diameter approximately equal to the outer diameter of the button body 351, and is attached to the bottom end of the button body 351 so as to close the open bottom end of the button body 351. The button base 354 has a pair of guide holes 354a that penetrate vertically at positions symmetrical with respect to the center, a central hole 354b that penetrates vertically at the center, and a pair of guide pins 354c that protrude from the inner surface of the central hole toward the center. The guide shafts 362 of the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 are slidably inserted into the pair of guide holes 354a. The central hole 354b is formed with an inner diameter large enough to allow the lifting cam member 371 to pass through. The pair of guide pins 354c face each other on the same axis and are attached rotatably around the axis.

The button base 354 extends downward and further has a flat detection piece 354d that is detected by a pressure detection sensor 373 of the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360. The button base 354 has the locking portion 351c of the button body 351 locked to its outer circumferential surface. The button base 354 is guided so that it can be raised and lowered in the vertical direction by a pair of guide shafts 362 being inserted into a pair of guide holes 354a. The button base 354 is also moved in the vertical direction by a pair of guide pins 354c being guided by the cam portion 371a of the lifting cam member 371. The upper ends of a pair of lifting springs 365 of the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 abut against the bottom surface of the button base 354, and the button base is biased upward by the pair of lifting springs 365.

The button exterior decorative substrate 355 has multiple LEDs 355a mounted on its top surface. The multiple LEDs 355a are arranged in a row on two concentric circles. In more detail, the multiple LEDs 355a are provided in a portion slightly outside the sleeve body 353a of the button sleeve 353 and in a portion near the center of the width of the flange portion 353b. By appropriately illuminating the LEDs 355a of the button exterior decorative substrate 355, the portion on the top surface of the button body 351 outside the contact detector 352 and the side (circumferential surface) of the button body 351 can be illuminated and decorated.

The vibration motor 356 has an eccentric weight attached to its rotation shaft, and can generate vibrations by rotating the weight. The vibration motor 356 is arranged so that its rotation shaft extends in the left-right direction. In other words, the vibration motor 356 is arranged so that its rotation shaft extends in a direction perpendicular to the forward and backward movement direction of the performance operation unit 301. The vibration motor 356 is also provided on a straight line passing through a pair of guide shafts 362 that guide the performance operation unit 301 (performance operation unit 350) in the up-down direction. This allows the vibrations from the vibration motor 356 to be transmitted well to the performance operation unit 301. The vibrations caused by the vibration motor 356 can also reduce the impact on the pair of guide holes 354a (pair of guide shafts 362).

The contact detection sensor body 358 is a capacitance sensor. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the contact detection sensor body 358 has a sensor IC having a surge protection circuit, a transmission circuit, a detection smoothing circuit, a comparison circuit, etc., an output circuit, a constant voltage circuit that supplies power to the sensor IC and the output circuit, a sensor electrode, and a connection connector. The contact detection sensor body 358 can detect the capacitance of the sensor electrode inside. In addition, the connection connector of the contact detection sensor body 358 has an external electrode terminal connected to the sensor electrode, and the external electrode terminal is connected to the contact detection body 352. In other words, the contact detection sensor body 358 can make the contact detection body 352 function as an external sensor electrode. The contact detection sensor body 358 detects the capacitance with the sensor electrode and outputs an ON signal when the capacitance exceeds a predetermined capacitance set by an external resistor. In this embodiment, the contact detection sensor body 358 outputs an ON signal when the capacitance exceeds a predetermined capacitance, but it may also output a signal in multiple stages depending on the magnitude of the capacitance.

In the present embodiment, the performance operation unit 350 is provided with a contact detector 352 on the underside of the upper surface 351a of the button body 351, which is made to function as a sensor electrode for detecting capacitance by the contact detection sensor body 358, and can detect the contact or approach of a detectable object (a player's hand) to the upper surface of the button body 351 through the contact detector 352. In addition, the contact detector 352 of the performance operation unit 350 has a plurality of downward extension pieces 352a extending downward, so that it can detect the contact or approach of a detectable object (a player's hand) to the side of the button body 351 with the performance operation unit 350 protruding upward. For this reason, the performance operation unit 350 can make the button body 351 function as a contact operation unit 302 with the contact detector 352 and the contact detection sensor body 358.

This performance operation unit 350 is supported by the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 so that it can be raised and lowered in the vertical direction. When the performance operation unit 350 is moved to the lowest position (normal state), the upper surface 351a of the button body 351 coincides with the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312 of the performance operation unit cover unit 310, making the performance operation unit 300 look like a single sphere. When the performance operation unit 350 is moved upward from the normal state by the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360, the upper surface 351a of the button body 351 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312, and can function as the pressing operation unit 303 by pressing downward against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365.

In more detail, when the performance operation unit 350 is in the state where it has been moved to the lowest position (normal state), it will not move any further downward even if it is pressed, and it is in a state where pressing operations cannot be performed. In this normal state, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is detected by the pressing detection sensor 373 of the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360. Then, when the performance operation unit 350 is moved upward from the normal state by the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 leaves the pressing detection sensor 373 and becomes undetectable. Then, when the upper surface of the performance operation unit 350 is pressed downward and the performance operation unit 350 is lowered to the lower end of movement against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is detected by the pressing detection sensor 373. This detects the pressing operation of the performance operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303).

In addition, the performance operation unit 350 covers the upper side of the contact detection body 352 made of punched metal with the button body 351, so that when operating the contact operation unit 302, the player touches the smooth, spherical upper surface of the button body 351, and the player does not directly touch the surface of the punched metal with the unevenness caused by the multiple holes, allowing the player to smoothly operate the contact operation unit 302. In addition, because the contact detection body 352 is covered with the button body 351, it is possible to give the contact operation unit 302 any tactile sensation by forming fine unevenness or multiple streaks on the surface (top surface) of the button body 351, which increases the design freedom for the contact operation unit 302 and provides a pachinko machine 1 that is more entertaining to players.

In the above, the button body 351 is transparent, but this is not limiting, and the button body 351 may be opaque or semi-transparent, so that the lower side is difficult to see through. This makes it difficult to see the contact detector 352 made of punched metal through the button body 351, improving the appearance of the performance operation unit 350. Furthermore, if the button body 351 is opaque, it is preferable that it be translucent. This allows the button body 351 to be illuminated and decorated by light from the LED 355a of the outer button decorative board 355 and the LED 364a of the inner button decorative board 364 provided below, and the player can be entertained by the illumination of the button body 351.

[3-5e-5. Performance operation unit lifting mechanism]
The performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 in the performance operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 53 to 56. The performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 is attached to the operation unit base 315 and can lift and lower the performance operation unit 350. The performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 comprises a lifting mechanism base 361 having an approximately circular outer periphery and attached within the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315 below the performance operation unit 350; a pair of cylindrical guide shafts 362 arranged symmetrically about the central axis of the lifting mechanism base 361, with their lower ends attached to the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315 and their upper ends extending upward through the operation unit base 315 and the button base 354; a disk-shaped upper base 363 connecting the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 and having an outer periphery smaller than the inner diameter of the button sleeve 353; and a button decorative board 364 attached to the upper surface of the upper base 363 and equipped with a plurality of LEDs 364a capable of emitting light upward.

The performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 also includes a pair of lifting springs 365 through which a pair of guide shafts 362 are inserted, respectively, and which urge the button base 354 upward, and a central shaft 366 that passes vertically through the center of the lifting mechanism base 361 and the button base 354, with its lower end attached to the bottom wall of the main body 315a and its upper end attached to the upper base 363.

The performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 further comprises an operation button lifting drive motor 367 attached to the underside of the lifting mechanism base 361 so that its rotation shaft protrudes upward, a spur gear-shaped lifting drive gear 368 attached to the rotation shaft of the operation button lifting drive motor 367, a spur gear-shaped driven gear 369 meshing with the lifting drive gear 368 and rotatably attached to the upper side of the lifting mechanism base 361, and a lifting cam drive gear member 370 rotated by the driven gear 369 and rotatably attached with the central shaft 366 inserted therethrough.

The performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 also includes a lifting cam member 371, the lower end of which is connected to the lifting cam drive gear member 370 and the central shaft 366 is inserted through which the lifting cam member 371 is rotatably attached, and which lifts and lowers the button base 354 by rotating, and a disk-shaped gear cover 372 attached to the upper side of the lifting mechanism base 361 so as to cover the lifting drive gear 368, the driven gear 369, and the lifting cam drive gear member 370 from above.

The performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 also includes a pressure detection sensor 373 attached to the lifting mechanism base 361 that detects the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303, a lifting detection sensor 374 attached to the lifting mechanism base 361 that detects the lifting of the performance operation unit 350 by detecting the rotational position of the lifting cam drive gear member 370 (lifting cam member 371), and a protruding force detection sensor 375 attached to the lifting mechanism base 361 that detects the lifting of the lifting spring lower holding member 385 of the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 to detect the protruding force of the performance operation unit 350.

The lifting mechanism base 361 includes a base body 361a formed in a disk shape, a plurality of legs 361b protruding downward from the base body 361a, and a pair of through holes 361c penetrating the base body 361a and through which the lifting spring 365 can pass together with the pair of guide shafts 362. The base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361 is formed to have an outer diameter that is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the main body 315a in the operation unit base 315. The base body 361a has a driven gear 369, a lifting cam drive gear member 370, a gear cover 372, a pressing detection sensor 373, and a protruding force detection sensor 375 attached to its upper surface. The base body 361a also has an operation button lifting drive motor 367, a lifting detection sensor 374, and a protruding force adjustment drive motor 381 attached to its lower surface. The lower ends of the legs 361b of the lifting mechanism base 361 are attached to the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315. This forms a space in which the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 is disposed between the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315 and the base main body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361. The pair of through holes 361c are provided in the base main body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361 at positions that are half the diameter of the base main body 361a forward and backward from the center.

The pair of guide shafts 362 pass through a pair of through holes 361c provided at a distance of half the diameter of the base body 361a from the center forward and backward in the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361. The central shaft 366 passes through the center of the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361. The pair of guide shafts 362 and central shaft 366 have their respective lower ends attached to the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315, and their respective upper ends attached to the upper base 363. The pair of guide shafts 362 and central shaft 366 are formed from metal rods.

The upper base 363 has an outer diameter that is approximately half the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361. The upper base 363 has a lower protrusion that protrudes downward. By abutting the lower protrusion of the upper base 363 against the upper protrusion of the gear cover 372, a space capable of accommodating the lifting cam member 371 can be formed between the upper base 363 and the lifting mechanism base 361.

The button middle decorative board 364 has multiple LEDs 364a mounted on the top surface that are full-color LEDs. The button middle decorative board 364 can illuminate and decorate the center of the top surface of the button body 351 by appropriately illuminating the multiple LEDs 364a.

The pair of lift springs 365 are coil springs, and each has a guide shaft 362 inserted therethrough. The lower ends of the pair of lift springs 365 abut against the lift spring lower holding member 385 of the ejection force adjustment mechanism 380, and the upper ends abut against the button base 354.

The lifting/lowering cam driving gear member 370 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that protrudes upward from the gear portion 370a and is connected to the lower end of the lifting/lowering cam member 371, and a lifting/lowering detection piece 370c that protrudes downward from the gear portion 370a in a cylindrical shape and has two opposing notches that are detected by the lifting/lowering detection sensor 374. The lifting/lowering cam driving gear member 370 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

The lifting cam member 371 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 through the center. The lifting cam member 371 penetrates the gear cover 372, and is provided between the upper base 363 and the lifting mechanism base 361. The lifting cam member 371 is provided with a pair of cam portions 371a that are spaced 180 degrees apart in the circumferential direction on the cylindrical outer periphery and protrude outward. The pair of cam portions 371a guide the guide pin 354c of the button base 354.

The cam portion 371a includes a first cam 371b extending perpendicular to the axis near the bottom end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, a second cam 371d extending upward parallel to the axis from one end of the first cam 371b, and a third cam 371e extending upward in a spiral shape from the end of the first cam 371b opposite the second cam 371d (see FIG. 55, etc.). The second cam 371d and the third cam 371e extend upward to the same height, and adjacent cam portions 371a are spaced apart by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 354c of the button base 354.

The lifting cam member 371 also has a connected portion 371f at its lower end that connects to the connecting portion 370b of the lifting cam drive gear member 370.

The lifting/lowering cam member 371 is formed so that the second cam 371d of the cam portion 371a extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b when the lifting/lowering cam member 371 is rotated in a counterclockwise direction in a plan view. By rotating, the lifting/lowering cam member 371 can guide the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 with the cam portion 371a, and can raise and lower the button base 354 (performance operation unit 350) that is biased upward by the lifting spring 365.

The gear cover 372 has a through hole through which the lift spring 365 and the lift cam member 371 can pass. The gear cover 372 also has an upper protrusion that protrudes upward at a location facing the lower protrusion of the upper base 363. By abutting the upper protrusion against the lower end of the lower protrusion of the upper base 363, the gear cover 372 can form a space between the upper base 363 and the lift mechanism base 361 that can accommodate the lift cam member 371.

The pressure detection sensor 373 detects the pressure operation of the performance operation unit 350 (pressure operation unit 303) by detecting the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 in the performance operation unit 350. When the performance operation unit 350 is moved to the lowest position (normal state), the pressure detection sensor 373 constantly detects the detection piece 354d of the button base 354. When the performance operation unit 350 is moved upward by the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 from the normal state, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is separated, and this pressure detection sensor 373 becomes non-detecting. When the top surface of the performance operation unit 350 is pressed downward and the performance operation unit 350 is lowered to the lower end of its travel against the force of the lift spring 365, the pressure detection sensor 373 detects the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 and can detect the pressing operation of the performance operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303).

The lifting/lowering detection sensor 374 detects the lifting/lowering detection piece 370c of the lifting/lowering cam drive gear member 370, thereby detecting the rotational position of the lifting/lowering cam member 371 via the connected part 371f, which is connected to the connecting part 370b of the lifting/lowering cam drive gear member 370.

The protruding force detection sensor 375 detects the detection piece 385d of the lift spring lower holding member 385 in the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380.

The performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 can support the performance operation unit unit 350 so that it can be raised and lowered via the button base 354 using a pair of guide shafts 362 arranged in front and behind, and can urge the performance operation unit unit 350 upward via the button base 354 using a pair of lifting springs 365. In addition, the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 can raise and lower the performance operation unit unit 350 (performance operation unit 301) relative to the performance operation unit cover unit 310 by rotating the lifting cam member 371 using the operation button lifting drive motor 367. In addition, the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 can appropriately illuminate multiple LEDs 364a mounted on the button middle decorative board 364, thereby illuminating and decorating the central part of the upper surface of the button body 351.

In the normal state, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is engaged with the engaging portion 371c provided on the lower end side of the lifting cam member 371 of the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 (see FIG. 55(a)). In this normal state, the performance operation unit 350 is located at the downward movement end via the button base 354, and even if the performance operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) is pressed downward, the performance operation unit 350 does not move downward. Therefore, in the normal state, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is not detected. Also, in the normal state, the surface (top surface) of the unit upper cover 312 in the performance operation unit cover unit 310 and the top surface of the button body 351 in the performance operation unit 350 are aligned, and the performance operation unit cover unit 310 and the button body 351 form a single sphere.

In the normal state (when the performance operation unit 350 is in the lowered position), when the operation button lift drive motor 367 rotates the lift drive gear 368 in a counterclockwise direction in a plan view, the lift cam drive gear member 370 rotates in a counterclockwise direction in a plan view via the driven gear 369 meshing with the lift drive gear 368, and the lift cam member 371 connected to the lift cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the lift cam member 371 rotates in a counterclockwise direction, the cam portion 371a visible from the front in FIG. 55(a) moves to the right, and the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 rolls from the locking portion 371c to the left of the locking portion 371c on the first cam 371b, and the button base 354 moves slightly downward against the biasing force of the lift spring 365 via the guide pin 354c.

When the guide pin 354c, which rolls relatively leftward along the first cam 371b as the lifting cam member 371 rotates, is positioned from the left end of the first cam 371b toward the second cam 371d, the second cam 371d extends upward perpendicularly to the first cam 371b, so that the guide pin 354c moves upward along the second cam 371d due to the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, and the button base 354 rises together with the guide pin 354c, and the performance operation unit 350 is in the raised position. In this state, the detection piece 354d is separated from the pressure detection sensor 373, so that the pressure detection sensor 373 is in a non-detecting state.

The lifting spring lower holding member 385 of the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380, to which the lower end of the lifting spring 365 abuts, can be moved to various positions in the vertical direction by the protruding force adjustment drive motor 381, as will be described in detail later. The amount of compression of the lifting spring 365 can be changed depending on the vertical position of the lifting spring lower holding member 385, so that the performance operation unit 350 can be protruded to the raised position with a protruding force according to the amount of compression of the lifting spring 365.

When the performance operation unit 350 is in the raised position, as shown in FIG. 55(b), the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is in contact with the second cam 371d of one cam portion 371a and the third cam 371e of the remaining cam portion 371a. In this state, the operation button lifting drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

When the performance operation unit 350 is in the raised position, the upper surface of the button base 354 abuts against the lower surface of the upper base 363, restricting further upward movement of the button base 354. Also, when the performance operation unit 350 is in the raised position, the entire performance operation unit 350 (performance operation unit 301) moves upward, and the upper surface 351a of the button main body 351 protrudes upward beyond the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312.

When the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) of the performance operation unit 350 is pressed downward with a force stronger than the force of the lifting spring 365, the performance operation unit 350 moves downward against the force of the lifting spring 365, and the button base 354 comes into contact with the gear cover 372. When the button base 354 comes into contact with the gear cover 372, the button base 354 moves to the lowered position, and together with the button base 354, the performance operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) also moves to the lowered position.

In this way, when the button base 354 abuts against the gear cover 372, the detection piece 354d protruding downward from the button base 354 is detected by the pressure detection sensor 373, and the pressure on the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) of the performance operation unit is detected.

To return the performance operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) from the raised position to the lowered position, the operation button lifting drive motor 367 rotates the lifting cam member 371 in a counterclockwise direction in a plan view. In FIG. 55(b), the third cam 371e that abuts against the upper left of the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 moves to the right (towards the guide pin 354c). As a result, the third cam 371e presses the guide pin 354c downward, and the button base 354 moves downward against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 via the guide pin 354c.

When returning the performance operation unit 350 to the lowered position, the lift spring lower holding member 385 is moved downward by the thrust force adjustment drive motor 381 of the thrust force adjustment mechanism 380 to reduce the compression of the lift spring 365 (see FIG. 56). This weakens the force of the lift spring 365 that urges the performance operation unit 350 upward, and the force acting on the third cam 371e of the lift cam member 371 via the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is also weakened, reducing the load on the operation button lift drive motor 367 that rotates the lift cam member 371 and reducing damage (breakage) of the operation button lift drive motor 367. In addition, an inexpensive motor with low torque can be used as the operation button lift drive motor 367.

When the guide pin 354c moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e toward the first cam 371b as the lift cam member 371 rotates, the downward movement of the button base 354 stops and the guide pin 354c rolls along the first cam 371b. After that, when the guide pin 354c reaches the position of the locking portion 371c halfway along the first cam 371b, the guide pin 354c is inserted into the upwardly recessed locking portion 371c by the biasing force of the lift spring 365, and the rotation of the lift cam member 371 by the operation button lift drive motor 367 is stopped, and the performance operation unit 350 returns to its original lowered position.

In the above, an example was described in which the operation button lifting drive motor 367 rotates the lifting cam member 371 counterclockwise in the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 to move the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 from the first cam 371b (locking portion 371c) to the second cam 371d, causing the button base 354 (button body 351) to protrude from the lowered position to the raised position in one go. However, in the normal state in which the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is locked to the locking portion 371c of the lifting cam member 371 and the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) is moved to the lowered position, the operation button lifting drive motor 367 may rotate the lifting cam member 371 in the clockwise direction in a plan view. Incidentally, the lifting distance of the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) by the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 in this embodiment is about 40 mm.

When the lifting cam member 371 is rotated clockwise in the normal state, the guide pin 354c moves from the first cam 371b to the third cam 371e, and the guide pin 354c moves upward along the third cam 371e due to the biasing force of the lifting spring 365. Then, when the rotation of the lifting cam member 371 is stopped when the guide pin 354c is in a position halfway along the third cam 371e, the upward protrusion of the button body 351 can be stopped at any position between the lowered position and the raised position. Then, by protruding the button body 351 to a position above the lowered position, it becomes possible to press the button body 351 downward against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, and the button body 351 can function as the pressing operation unit 303.

When the third cam 371e is used to protrude the button body 351 upward, it is desirable to move the lift spring lower holding member 385 of the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 downward to weaken the biasing force of the lift spring 365. This reduces the load on the rotation of the lift cam member 371 (operation button lift drive motor 367) and makes the button body 351 feel lighter when pressed.

In this way, the amount of protrusion of the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) can be changed depending on the rotational position of the lifting cam member 371, so by varying the amount of protrusion of the button body 351 depending on the game status (for example, depending on the lottery result of the special pattern that is drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting hole 2004 or the second starting hole 2005), it is possible to suggest to the player the degree of expectation for the game.

In addition, at least one shallow recess in which the guide pin 354c can be engaged may be provided midway on the third cam 371e of the lifting cam member 371. This allows the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) to be stably protruded to a position with the same protrusion amount, preventing variation in the amount of protrusion. Furthermore, if a recess is provided at least at one location midway on the third cam 371e, the guide pin 354c can be engaged in the recess, eliminating the need to keep the lifting cam member 371 stopped rotating by the operation button lifting drive motor 367, and reducing the load on the operation button lifting drive motor 367.

[3-5e-6. Ejection force adjustment mechanism]
The protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 in the performance operation unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 53 to 56. The protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 is a lifting spring 365 that urges the performance operation unit 350 upward. By changing the amount of compression of the operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303), the force (projecting force) with which the operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) projects upward can be changed. It is provided between the bottom wall of the main body portion 315 a of the lifting mechanism base 361 and the base main body 361 a of the lifting mechanism base 361 .

The protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 includes a protruding force adjustment drive motor 381 attached to the underside of the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361, a spur gear-shaped pinion gear 382 attached to the rotating shaft of the protruding force adjustment drive motor 381, a transmission gear 383 meshed with the pinion gear 382 and rotatably attached to the underside of the base body 361a, a spur gear-shaped gear portion 384a meshed with the transmission gear 383, and a screw portion 384b extending downward from the gear portion 384a in a cylindrical shape and having a spiral groove formed on the outer periphery, an adjustment screw 384 through which the central shaft 366 is inserted and rotatably supported, and a lifting spring lower holding member 385 meshed with the screw portion 384b of the adjustment screw 384, through which a pair of guide shafts 362 pass and against which the lower ends of a pair of lifting springs 365 abut.

The protruding force adjustment drive motor 381 is attached to the underside of the base body 361a so that a gap is formed between the motor and the underside of the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361. The protruding force adjustment drive motor 381 has a rotating shaft that protrudes into the gap between the motor and the base body 361a.

The adjustment screw 384 is formed to a length that extends from the bottom wall of the main body portion 315a of the operation unit base 315 to the base main body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361. The screw portion 384b of the adjustment screw 384 is formed in a cylindrical shape with a diameter larger than that of the gear portion 384a.

The lift spring lower holding member 385 has a main body portion 385a extending forward and backward, a screw hole 385b that penetrates the center of the main body portion 385a vertically and screws into the screw portion 384b, spring holding recesses 385c that are provided at both the front and rear ends of the main body portion 385a and are recessed downward to accommodate the lower end of the lift spring 365, and a flat detection piece 385d that extends upward from the front end of the main body portion 385a. The lift spring lower holding member 385 has a guide shaft 362 that penetrates each of the pair of spring holding recesses 385c at the center. The detection piece 385d is detected by the protruding force detection sensor 375 of the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360.

When the pinion gear 382 is rotated by the protruding force adjustment drive motor 381, the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 can rotate the adjustment screw 384 around the central shaft 366 via the transmission gear 383 and the gear portion 384a. Then, by rotating the adjustment screw 384 by the protruding force adjustment drive motor 381, the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 can move the lifting spring lower holding member 385 in the vertical direction by the screw hole 385b that meshes with the screw portion 384b.

When the lift spring lower holding member 385 is moved upward, the lower end of the lift spring 365 held in the spring holding recess 385c moves upward, and the amount of compression of the lift spring 365 increases. On the other hand, when the lift spring lower holding member 385 is moved downward, the lower end of the lift spring 365 held in the spring holding recess 385c moves downward, and the amount of compression of the lift spring 365 decreases (see FIG. 56). In other words, when the lift spring lower holding member 385 is moved upward, the biasing force of the lift spring 365 biasing the performance operation unit 350 upward can be increased, and when the lift spring lower holding member 385 is moved downward, the biasing force of the lift spring 365 biasing the performance operation unit 350 upward can be decreased. This allows the upward protruding force of the performance operation unit 350 to be adjusted by the lift force adjustment mechanism 380.

The detection piece 385d of the lift spring lower holding member 385 is detected by the protruding force detection sensor 375 when the lift spring lower holding member 385 is raised to the highest position. In other words, the detection piece 385d is detected by the protruding force detection sensor 375 when the lift spring 365 is in the state where the amount of compression is greatest. As a result, when the lift spring lower holding member 385 is being moved upward by the protruding force adjustment drive motor 381, if the protruding force detection sensor 375 detects the detection piece 385d, the upward movement of the lift spring lower holding member 385 by the protruding force adjustment drive motor 381 is stopped, thereby preventing further compression of the lift spring 365 and preventing damage to the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380.

As described above, the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 can appropriately adjust the protruding force of the performance operation unit 350, so that when the performance operation unit 350 is in the lowered position and the contact detector 352 detects contact or approach of a detected object (for example, a player's finger, etc.) to the button body 351, and the performance operation unit lift mechanism 360 is used to protrude the performance operation unit 350 to abut against the detected object, the vertical position of the lift spring lower holding member 385 can be appropriately selected to vary the protruding force of the button body 351. This makes it possible to vary the strength of the force exerted on the player's finger, etc. when the button body 351 protrudes upward, so that when the button body 351 strongly abuts, the player can be made to think that something good is going to happen, and the player's expectations for the game can be increased. Therefore, the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 can make the protruding force of the button body 351 stronger or weaker depending on the game status (for example, depending on the lottery result of the special pattern that is drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting hole 2004 or the second starting hole 2005), thereby indicating to the player the degree of expectation for the game.

By the way, as a method of changing the spring's biasing force, it is possible to change the biasing force by applying a twist to the spring. However, in order to protrude the performance operation unit 350, it is necessary to use a compressed spring (compression coil spring), and if the biasing force is changed by applying a twist to the compression coil spring, an excessive stress different from that in the original use acts on the compression coil spring, which may cause the internal structure to deteriorate early and be damaged. In contrast, in the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 of this embodiment, the protruding force (bias) of the performance operation unit 350 is adjusted by changing the compression amount of the lifting spring 365 by moving the lifting spring lower holding member 385 in the vertical direction, so that excessive stress is not applied to the lifting spring 365, and the early deterioration of the lifting spring 365 can be reduced, and the performance operation unit 350 can be protruded stably for a long period of time.

[3-5e-7. Function of the Production Operation Unit]
Next, the operation of the performance operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 57 and FIG. 58. FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship of the performance operation unit outer periphery decorative board, the button outer decorative board, and the button inner decorative board in a plan view of the performance operation unit seen from the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit. FIG. 58(a) is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, and (b) is a front view of the plate unit when the performance operation unit unit is in the raised position. The performance operation unit 300 is formed in a spherical shape as a whole, and is provided with a performance operation unit 301 that can be operated by a player on the upper surface. The performance operation unit 301 is composed of a contact operation unit 302 that can be operated by contact or approach of the player's hand, etc., and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed. The contact operation unit 302 is provided on the upper part of the pressing operation unit 303 (button body 351).

The performance operation unit 300 is assembled to the tray unit 200 with the protruding direction of the pressing operation part 303 (performance operation part unit 350) that can protrude upward tilted so that the upper part is located forward with respect to the vertical direction. In other words, the center of the performance operation part 301 is located forward of the apex of the spherical performance operation unit 300. This makes it easier for a player seated in front of this pachinko machine 1 to see the performance operation part 301.

In the normal state, the performance operation unit 300 has the pressing operation section 303 (performance operation unit 350) in the lowered position, and the curved upper surface of the button body 351 of the performance operation unit 350 coincides with the spherical surface of the performance operation unit cover unit 310. In addition, in the normal state, even if the pressing operation section 303 is pressed downward, the pressing operation section 303 (performance operation unit 350) does not move downward. Therefore, in the normal state, the performance operation unit 300 appears to the player as simply a spherical decorative object, making it difficult for the player to recognize that it can be operated.

As shown in FIG. 57, the performance operation unit 300 has the performance operation unit outer periphery decorative board 320 arranged under the unit upper cover 312 that surrounds the outer periphery of the pressing operation unit 303 (performance operation unit 350), and the annular button outer decorative board 355 arranged inside the outer edge of the pressing operation unit 303, and the button middle decorative board 364 arranged further inside. The performance operation unit 300 is arranged outward from the button middle decorative board 364 in the order of the button outer decorative board 355 and the performance operation unit outer periphery decorative board 320. The button middle decorative board 364 and the LED 355a inside the button outer decorative board 355 are arranged under the contact detector 352, but the contact detector 352 is made of punching metal and has translucency, so the light from them can be transmitted upward (to the player side) well.

The performance operation unit 300 can illuminate and decorate the annular unit upper cover 312 using the LEDs 320a on the performance operation outer peripheral decorative board 320. In addition, the LEDs 355a on the button outer decorative board 355 can illuminate and decorate the periphery and outer peripheral surface of the top surface of the button body 351. Furthermore, the LEDs 364a on the button middle decorative board 364 can illuminate and decorate the central part of the top surface of the button body 351.

The multiple LEDs 320a on the outer decorative board 320 of the effect operation unit, the multiple LEDs 355a on the outer decorative board 355 of the button, and the multiple LEDs 364a on the inner decorative board 364 of the button are each arranged in a row on a circumference, so that by sequentially emitting light in the circumferential direction, the player can see a light-emitting effect in which light rotates around the center of the pressing operation unit 303. In addition, the multiple LEDs 320a, LEDs 355a, and LEDs 364a are arranged in a concentric circle, so that the player can see a light-emitting effect in which light spreads from the center of the pressing operation unit 303 to the outside, or a light-emitting effect in which light converges from the outside to the center of the pressing operation unit 303.

In the normal state, as shown in FIG. 58(a), the presentation operation unit 300 is in a lowered position with the pressing operation unit 303 (presentation operation unit 350) flush with its upper surface against the surface of the unit upper cover 312. In this state, pressing the pressing operation unit 303 is not possible. On the other hand, the contact operation unit 302 can allow contact operations depending on the player participation type presentation being executed.

In the normal state where the pressing operation unit 303 (operation operation unit 350) is not protruding, the performance (player participation type performance) may be, for example, to display a performance image on the performance display device 1600 encouraging the player to touch the top surface of the performance operation unit 300, or to output voice or sound effects. Then, when the contact detector 352 detects contact (or approach) with the button body 351, the performance proceeds to the next stage. When contact is detected, the button body 351 is illuminated and decorated by the LED 355a on the outer button decoration board 355 or the LED 364a on the inner button decoration board 364, so that the player can recognize that the touch operation has been accepted, and a feeling of operation of the touch operation unit 302 may be given. At this time, the light color, light emission brightness, light emission pattern, etc. of the button body 351 may be used to suggest to the player the degree of expectation for the game (for example, the occurrence of a favorable game state in which the player has an advantage, such as a "jackpot" game).

Alternatively, when the contact detector 352 detects contact (or proximity) with the button body 351, the vibration motor 356 may be driven to vibrate the button body 351. This provides a sense of operation to the contact operation unit 302, making the player more aware that the contact operation has been accepted. At this time, the vibration motor 356 may be caused to give strong vibrations, weak vibrations, or vibrations with a predetermined rhythm, to suggest to the player the degree of expectation for the game.

In addition, in the normal presentation (player participation presentation), a presentation image encouraging the player to touch the top surface of the presentation operation unit 300 is displayed on the presentation display device 1600, and voice, sound effects, etc. are output, and then when the contact detector 352 detects contact of the player (hand or fingers) with the top surface of the button body 351, the presentation operation unit lifting mechanism 360 causes the button body 351 (presentation operation unit 350) to protrude upward (pop up) due to the biasing force of the lifting spring 365. In more detail, when the operation button lifting drive motor 367 rotates the lifting cam member 371 in a counterclockwise direction in a plan view in a normal state, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 comes off the cam portion 371a (first cam 371b), and the force of the pair of lifting springs 365 causes the performance operation unit 350 (button body 351, pressing operation unit 303) together with the button base 354 to vigorously protrude upward and reach the raised position (see FIG. 55(b)). In this raised position state, the upper surface of the button body 351 is located significantly above the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312, and the button body 351 protrudes upward. And, by the button body 351 protruding upward as described above, the fingers touching the button body 351 are pushed upward together with the button body 351, which can greatly surprise the player and strongly attract the player's interest.

Then, the presentation transitions to one in which the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) is pressed, and the player enjoys pressing the pressing operation unit 303. In more detail, when the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) is in the raised position and the button body 351 is pressed downward against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, the button body 351 (presentation operation unit 350) moves downward, and the top surface of the button body 351 becomes flush with the top surface of the unit upper cover 312, and the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is detected by the press detection sensor 373. This detects the pressing of the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303), and the presentation is changed in response to the pressing operation, allowing the player to enjoy a player-participation presentation.

During the above-mentioned performance, the protruding force (momentum) of the button body 351 may be increased or decreased by using the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380, so that the strength of the protruding force may suggest to the player the degree of expectation for the game. In addition, when the button body 351 pops up or is pressed, the button body 351 may be vibrated by the vibration motor 356.

In a performance in which the performance operation unit 350 is protruded, the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) may be protruded upward when the contact detector 352 detects that the player's fingers, etc. have approached within the movement range (protruding range) of the upwardly protruding button body 351. This causes the button body 351 to come into contact with the player's fingers, etc., and gives an impact, surprising the player and strongly attracting the player's interest. Even in this case, the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 may be used to increase or decrease the protruding force of the button body 351, so that the strength of the protruding force can suggest to the player how much he or she is looking forward to the game.

In addition, in a performance in which the performance operation unit 350 is protruded, when the contact detector 352 detects that the player's fingers, etc., have approached within a predetermined distance of the protruding button body 351, outside the protruding range of the upwardly protruding button body 351, the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) may be protruded upward. This allows the wind pressure generated by the protruding button body 351 to hit the player's fingers, etc., surprising the player and strongly attracting the player's interest. Even in this case, the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 may be used to increase or decrease the protruding force of the button body 351, so that the strength of the wind pressure hitting the player's fingers, etc., can suggest to the player how much he or she is looking forward to the game.

Furthermore, as an effect of protruding the effect operation unit 350, the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) may be protruded upward regardless of the detection of the player's finger or the like by the contact detector 352. In this case, if the button body 351 is protruded with a strong protruding force by the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380, the button body 351 protrudes forcefully and generates a sound (protruding sound), so that the protruding sound can surprise the player. Also, if the button body 351 is protruded with a weak protruding force by the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380, the button body 351 protrudes quietly, making it difficult for the player to notice the protrusion of the button body 351, and the player can be surprised by the button body 351 protruding without his realizing it.

As an effect after the effect operation unit 350 (button body 351) is protruded, the force of the lifting spring 365 may be weakened by the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380, and an effect may be executed in which the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) is pressed in the same way as a general press button. Alternatively, the force of the lifting spring 365 may be increased by the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380, and an effect may be executed in which the player is forced to press the button body 351 with a strong force.

In addition, after the performance operation unit 350 (button body 351) is protruded, a performance may be executed in which the protruding button body 351 is touched. At this time, since the contact detector 352 has a downward extension piece 352a that extends downward, the side of the button body 351 may be touched. At this time, it is also preferable to increase the biasing force of the lift spring 365 by the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380, so that the protruding button body 351 can be made difficult to move and the button body 351 (touch operation unit 302) can be easily touched.

In the above, an example of the effect of protruding the effect operation unit 350 is shown in which the effect operation unit lifting mechanism 360 rotates the lifting cam member 371 counterclockwise using the operation button lifting drive motor 367, moving the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 from the first cam 371b (locking portion 371c) to the second cam 371d, causing the button base 354 (button body 351) to protrude from the lowered position to the raised position in one go, but this is not limiting.

For example, in the normal state in which the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is engaged with the engagement portion 371c of the lifting cam member 371 and the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) is moved to the lowered position, the lifting cam member 371 can be rotated clockwise in a plan view by the operation button lifting drive motor 367 to move the guide pin 354c from the first cam 371b to the third cam 371e, and the rotation of the lifting cam member 371 can be stopped midway through the third cam 371e, so that the button body 351 stops protruding upward at a position between the lowered position and the raised position. At this time, the lifting spring lower holding member 385 of the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 is moved downward to weaken the biasing force of the lifting spring 365.

In this way, even if the third cam 371e of the lift-down cam member 371 causes the button body 351 to protrude partway, the button body 351 can be pressed and can function as the pressing operation unit 303, allowing the player to enjoy a player-participation type presentation. In this case, the amount by which the button body 351 protrudes upward can be varied depending on the rotational position of the lift-down cam member 371, so that the degree of expectation for the game can be suggested depending on the amount by which the button body 351 protrudes, entertaining the player.

Furthermore, as a performance in which the protruding performance operation unit 350 (button body 351) is pressed, after the performance operation unit 350 is protruding, the lift spring lower holding member 385 is moved downward to minimize the compression of the lift spring 365. As a result, the force of the lift spring 365 is in the weakest state, so that the performance operation unit 350 can be pressed with a light (weak) force, improving the operability of the pressing operation and making the pressing operation enjoyable. Also, as a performance in which the performance operation unit 350 (button body 351) is pressed, the lift spring lower holding member 385 may be placed at an appropriate position in the vertical direction to set the force of the lift spring 365 to any strength between the strongest and the weakest, depending on the result of the lottery for the special pattern drawn. This allows the player to press the performance operation unit 350 firmly or lightly, so that the player can be entertained by the difference in the operating force of the performance operation unit 350, and a wider variety of performances can be presented, making it less likely that the player will become bored.

In addition, as a presentation using the presentation operation unit 300, multiple threshold levels may be set according to the capacitance of the contact detector 352 so that contact of the player's fingers, etc. with the contact operation unit 302 (button body 351) can be detected at multiple contact stages (approach stages), and the presentation may be changed according to each stage. In other words, focusing on the fact that the capacitance of the contact detector 352 increases as the player's fingers, etc. approach the button body 351 (contact detector 352), multiple threshold levels may be set for the magnitude of the capacitance to detect it in multiple stages and to use it in the presentation. Specifically, for example, by dividing the stage into a stage where the player's fingers are more than a predetermined distance away from the button body 351, a stage where the player's fingers are not touching the button body 351 within a predetermined distance from the button body 351, and a stage where the player's fingers are touching the button body 351, and changing the presentation according to each stage, it is possible to present a variety of presentations to the player with just one contact detection sensor body 358, making it less likely for the player to become bored and preventing a decline in interest.

In the above embodiment, the normal state of the performance operation unit 300 is shown in FIG. 55(a) with the performance operation unit 350 (button body 351) in the lowered position and the lift spring lower holding member 385 moved upward. However, this is not limited to this, and the performance operation unit 350 may be in the lowered position and the lift spring lower holding member 385 moved downward as shown in FIG. 56(a). As a result, in the normal state, the lift spring 365 is not strongly compressed, so that early deterioration (fatigue) of the lift spring 365 can be suppressed. In addition, the biasing force of the strongly compressed lift spring 365 can suppress early deterioration (fatigue) of the button base 354 and the lift spring lower holding member 385.

In this way, the presentation operation unit 300 of this embodiment can be used for various patterns of player participation presentations, allowing players to enjoy a wide variety of presentations, preventing players from becoming bored and reducing a decline in interest.

The performance operation unit 300 has a circular (two arcs combined) performance operation unit outer periphery decorative board 320 on the top of the spherical performance operation unit cover unit 310, and a contact detection sensor body 358 is provided on the performance operation unit unit 350, which rises and falls inside the performance operation unit outer periphery decorative board 320. In addition, a button middle decorative board 364, which is fixed in position, is provided inside the button sleeve 353 of the performance operation unit 350. This contact detection sensor body 358 is provided with a sensor electrode for detecting capacitance, so when the performance operation unit 350 is moved from the lowered position to the raised position, the contact detection sensor body 358 (sensor electrode) approaches the performance operation unit outer periphery decorative board 320 and the button middle decorative board 364, and the capacitance of the sensor electrode changes due to the approach of the performance operation unit outer periphery decorative board 320 and the button middle decorative board 364, which may cause the contact detection sensor body 358 to make a false detection.

Therefore, a conductive shield (e.g., punched metal, metal plate, expanded metal, wire mesh, metal wire, metal foil, etc.) connected to ground (GND) may be provided between the performance operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, and between the button inner decorative board 364 and the contact detection sensor main body 358. As a result, even if the distance between the contact detection sensor main body 358 and the performance operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320 or the button inner decorative board 364 changes by moving the performance operation unit unit 350 up and down, the shield connected to ground (GND) does not change the distance from the contact detection sensor main body 358 between the contact detection sensor main body 358 and the performance operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320 or the button inner decorative board 364, and can reduce the effect of the change in capacitance due to the approach of the performance operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320 or the button inner decorative board 364, and can prevent erroneous detection in the contact detection sensor main body 358.

[3-5f. Another embodiment of the plate unit]
Next, the plate unit 200 of an embodiment different from the above will be described mainly with reference to Figs. 59 to 61. Fig. 59 is a plan view of a performance operation unit showing an example in which a plurality of contact detection bodies are provided in the performance operation unit of the performance operation unit. Fig. 60(a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which a plurality of contact detection bodies are connected to one contact detection sensor main body, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which a switching unit is provided between the contact detection sensor main body and the plurality of contact detection bodies in (a), and (c) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the plate left decoration unit, the plate right decoration unit, and the performance operation unit of the plate unit are made movable in the forward and backward directions and the contact detection bodies are provided on the front and rear sides of the performance operation unit. Fig. 61(a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a contact detection body having decorative properties, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing another embodiment of the performance operation unit. Note that in Figs. 59 to 61, the same components as those described above are given the same reference numerals.

59, the contact detector 352 is divided into a left contact detector 390L and a right contact detector 390R on the lower side of the button body 351 of the performance operation unit 350, and the left contact detector 391L and the right contact detector 390R are connected to the left contact detector 390L and the right contact detector 390R, respectively. According to this embodiment, when a player moves his/her finger from the left side to the right side on the upper surface of the button body 351, when the player's finger is positioned on the left side of the button body 351, the capacitance of the left contact detector 390L changes and the left contact detector 391L becomes detected, while the capacitance of the right contact detector 390R does not change and the right contact detector 391R remains undetected. When the player's finger or the like moves to the center of the button body 351, the capacitance of both the left contact detector 390L and the right contact detector 390R changes, causing both the left contact detector body 391L and the right contact detector body 391R to detect. Furthermore, when the player's finger or the like moves to the right side of the button body 351, the capacitance of the left contact detector 390L returns to its original state, causing the left contact detector body 391L to become undetectable, while the capacitance of the right contact detector 390R changes, causing the right contact detector body 391R to remain detected.

In this way, the movement of the player's fingers, etc. can be detected by the combination of detection/non-detection by the left contact detection body 390L and the right contact detection body 390R of the left contact detection sensor main body 391L and the right contact detection sensor main body 391R, and the pattern of changes. This makes it possible to detect a wider variety of contact operations, and to present the player with a player-participation presentation that allows a wider variety of contact operations to be performed on the contact operation unit 302, while also making the player-participation presentation of operating the contact operation unit 302 even more enjoyable. Furthermore, by adding more contact detection bodies, it becomes possible to detect even more complex movements.

The embodiment shown in FIG. 60(a) is an example in which multiple contact detectors 393 are connected to one contact detector sensor main body 392. According to this embodiment, with multiple contact detectors 393 provided at multiple different locations, one contact detector sensor main body 392 can detect contact with a human body or the like at any of the contact detectors 393.

For example, by distributing multiple contact detectors 393 on the inside (underside) of the button body 351, when the player's fingers or the like touch any part of the surface of the button body 351, the contact can be detected by any of the contact detectors 393, thereby improving the detection accuracy of contact with the contact operation unit 302.

In addition, multiple contact detectors 393 may be provided in areas of the pachinko machine 1 that should not be touched by the player (for example, areas where the player may be injured, areas where other players may be inconvenienced, areas where fraudulent activity may occur, etc.), and when any of the contact detectors 393 detects a human body or the like, a warning or alert may be issued.

The embodiment shown in FIG. 60(b) is an example in which a switching unit 394 is provided between one contact detection sensor main body 392 and multiple contact detection bodies 393, which connects only one of the contact detection bodies 393 to the contact detection sensor main body 392. According to this embodiment, the switching unit 394 switches the connection to one of the multiple contact detection bodies 352, making it possible to detect contact with a human body or the like only at the desired location (contact detection body 352). Examples of the switching unit 394 include "one that switches using a switching circuit using a relay or transistor," "one that switches using other electronic circuits," and "one that switches in response to the movement of a movable member (for example, the movable left plate decoration unit 270, right plate decoration unit 275, and performance operation unit 300 as shown in FIG. 60(c))."

For example, in the presentation operation unit 301 (touch operation unit 302), multiple contact detectors 393 may be distributed and when a player participation type presentation is performed in which the player touches the parts detected by each contact detector 393 in order, the contact detectors 393 connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 may be switched in the touch order by the switching unit 394 to detect whether or not the player's fingers or the like have made contact with the contact detector 393. This makes it possible to present the player with a highly game-like player participation type presentation using multiple contact detectors 393, entertaining the player and preventing a decline in interest.

Also, as shown in FIG. 60(c), if the left plate decorative unit 270, the right plate decorative unit 275, and the performance operation unit 300 can be moved forward and backward, a first contact detector 393a can be provided on the front side of the performance operation unit 300, and a second contact detector 393b can be provided on the rear side of the left plate decorative unit 270, the right plate decorative unit 275, and the performance operation unit 300. When the performance operation unit 300 etc. is to be protruded forward, the first contact detector 393a can be connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 by the switching unit 394, and when the performance operation unit 300 etc. is to be retreated, the switching unit 394 can be switched to connect the second contact detector 393b to the contact detection sensor main body 392.

As a result, when the performance operation unit 300 etc. is protruded (moved) forward, the first contact detector 393a detects contact or approach of the player and stops the forward movement of the performance operation unit 300 etc. This makes it possible to prevent the performance operation unit 300 etc. from unnecessarily pressing against the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, and to avoid causing discomfort to the player.

On the other hand, when the performance operation unit 300 etc. is projected forward, a gap may be formed on the rear side of the performance operation unit 300 etc., and if the performance operation unit 300 etc. is moved back to the initial position with the player's fingers etc. inserted in the gap, the player's fingers etc. may be pinched and injured. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the performance operation unit 300 etc. that has been moved forward is moved backward, the switching unit 394 switches so that the second contact detection body 393b is connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392. Then, when the second contact detection body 393b detects the player's fingers etc., the performance operation unit 300 etc. is stopped moving backward, and the player is notified of the instruction to remove the fingers etc. from the rear side of the performance operation unit 300 etc., and the performance operation unit 300 etc. is moved backward only when the second contact detection body 393b is not detected, and the performance operation unit 300 etc. is returned to the initial state. This prevents players from being injured due to gaps behind the performance operation unit 300, etc., and improves the safety of the pachinko machine 1.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 61(a), the contact detector 395 that detects contact with the player's fingers or the like has a star-shaped outer shape to provide decorativeness (design). The shape of the decorative contact detector 395 is not limited to a star shape, but may be a circle, a polygon, a geometric pattern, a shape imitating a specific character, a shape imitating a specific item, a shape imitating a specific logo, a picture frame, or the like. As a result, the contact detector 395 visible through the transparent button body 351 has decorativeness (design), so the contact detector 395 itself can improve the appearance of the button body 351 and therefore the pachinko machine 1, and a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players can be provided.

In addition, while the above embodiment shows the contact detector 352 formed from punched metal, this is not limited to this, and the contact detector may be formed from metal plate, expanded metal, wire mesh, metal wire, plating, metal vapor deposition, foil stamping, etc., and the same effects as those described above can be achieved. It is preferable that the contact detector is provided on the back side of a transparent surface member so that it is not directly touched by the player's fingers, etc. This prevents wear on the contact detector and also makes the surface member smooth to the touch.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a button-inside decorative board 364 (LED 364a) is provided below the contact detector 352, but this is not limited to the above. As shown in FIG. 61(b), a contact detector 397 may be provided below a transparent surface member 396, and a decorative body 398 may be provided below that. This allows the decorative body 398 to be visible through the surface member 396 and the contact detector 397, thereby enhancing the decorativeness of the performance operation unit on which the surface member 396 is provided, and improving the appearance of the pachinko machine 1.

In the embodiment of FIG. 61(b), the contact detector 397 is formed by metal deposition, and under normal conditions, the metallic luster of the contact detector 397 makes the decorative body 398 below it invisible. However, when contact with the surface member 396 is detected, the decorative body 398 is illuminated by an LED provided below the contact detector 397, so that the decorative body 398 can be seen through the surface member 396 and the contact detector 397.

The contact detector 352 may be formed so as to be unnoticeable to the player. Examples of unnoticeable contact detectors include "those formed from transparent materials" and "those formed so as to be seen as one with the decoration of the surface member of the button body, etc." As a result, the performance operation unit 301 in which the contact detector 352 is provided cannot recognize the contact detector 352, and the player is given the illusion that the contact of fingers, etc. is not detected or touched. For example, when a predetermined player participation performance is executed and the player's fingers, etc., contact or approach the button body 351, the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 causes the button body 351 to protrude upward, and the player is first aware of the presence of the contact detector 352 (touch operation unit 302), which greatly surprises the player and entertains the player, thereby preventing a decline in interest.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 420 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 62 to 65. Figure 62(a) is a front view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit seen from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit seen from the back. Figure 63 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit seen from the front, and Figure 64 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit seen from the back. Figure 65 is a cross-sectional view cut along the line U-U in Figure 62(a). The door frame left side unit 420 is attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 200, and decorates the left outer side of the play area 5a when viewed from the front.

The door frame left side unit 420 comprises a door frame left side base 421 attached to the left outer side of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, a door frame left side upper decorative board 422 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame left side base 421 and having a plurality of first LEDs 422a arranged vertically at regular intervals on the front surface, and a door frame left side upper decorative board 422 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the door frame left side base 421 and having a plurality of first LEDs 423a arranged vertically at regular intervals on the front surface. The door frame includes a lower left side decorative board 423 attached to the left side of the door frame, an upper left side reflector 424 attached to the left side base 421 of the door frame so as to cover the front side of the upper left side decorative board 422 of the door frame, a lower left side reflector 425 attached to the left side base 421 of the door frame so as to cover the front side of the lower left side decorative board 423 of the door frame, and a left side decorative body 426 attached to the left side base 421 of the door frame so as to cover the front sides of the upper left side reflector 424 and the lower left side reflector 425.

The door frame left side unit 420 also includes an upper left side light guiding member 427 that guides light forward from the first LED 422a on the upper left side decorative board 422 of the door frame, a middle left side light guiding member 428 that guides forward light from the first LED 423a above the vertical center on the lower left side decorative board 423 of the door frame, and a lower left side light guiding member 429 that guides forward light from the first LED 423a below the vertical center on the lower left side decorative board 423 of the door frame.

The door frame left side base 421 is formed in a box shape that extends vertically and is open to the front. The door frame left side base 421 is two-color molded with synthetic resins of different colors and translucency (light transmittance). In detail, the door frame left side base 421 is two-color molded with two types of resin, an inner layer 3a and an outer layer 3b, like the above-mentioned handle cover 295, and a circular or radial pattern is formed by a part of the inner layer 3a penetrating the outer layer 3b and appearing on the outer surface. In other words, the circular or radial pattern appearing on the surface of the door frame left side base 421 is the inner layer 3a, and the circular or radial pattern is connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (see FIG. 71(a)). When molding the door frame left side base 421, the inner layer 3a may be injection molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection molded first.

The door frame upper left side decorative board 422 is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically. On the front surface of the door frame upper left side decorative board 422, multiple first LEDs 422a are mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and second LEDs 422b are mounted two by two, vertically aligned between the first LEDs 422a. In addition, the door frame upper left side decorative board 422 is mounted with a 24-bit LED driver 422c with a unique address for illuminating the first LEDs 422a and second LEDs 422b.

This door frame upper left side decorative board 422 is equipped with a total of 12 full-color LEDs, including four first LEDs 422a and eight second LEDs 422b. The first LED 422a, which has second LEDs 422b on both the top and bottom, is located in the center (the center between) the second LEDs 422b. At least the second LEDs 422b are wide-angle top-view type LEDs that can irradiate light within a 130-degree angle range centered on an optical axis perpendicular to the front surface.

As shown in Figure 72, on the decorative board 422 on the upper left side of the door frame, the four first LEDs 422a are divided into two sets, the top two and the remaining two. The eight second LEDs 422b are divided into three sets, the top two, the third to fifth three from the top, and the sixth to eighth three from the top. The LED driver 422c can control up to 24 systems, and controls the two sets of four first LEDs 422a and the three sets of eight second LEDs 422b with three systems per set, for a total of 15 systems, so that they can each emit full color light.

Although not shown, this door frame upper left side decorative board 422 is connected to a wiring cable consisting of four electric wires: two power lines (one is a ground line) that supply power to drive the first LED 422a, the second LED 422b, and the LED driver 422c, one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 422c with the peripheral control board 1510. When the LED driver 422c of this door frame upper left side decorative board 422 receives a command addressed to that address from the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control board) via the control signal line, it can make the four first LEDs 422a divided into two groups and the eight second LEDs 422b divided into three groups emit light with the appropriate color and intensity for each group in accordance with the command.

The door frame left side lower decorative board 423 is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically, with the right side formed unevenly. On the front surface of the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, multiple first LEDs 423a are mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and second LEDs 423b are mounted two by two, vertically lined up between the first LEDs 423a. In addition, the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 is equipped with a 24-bit LED driver 423c with a unique address for illuminating the first LEDs 423a and second LEDs 423b.

This door frame lower left side decorative board 423 is equipped with a total of 18 full color LEDs, including six first LEDs 423a and 12 second LEDs 423b. The first LED 423a, which has second LEDs 423b on both the top and bottom, is located in the center (the center between) of the second LEDs 423b. At least the second LEDs 423b are wide-angle top-view type LEDs that can irradiate light within an angle range of 130 degrees centered on an optical axis perpendicular to the front surface.

As shown in Fig. 72, in the door frame lower left side decorative board 423, the six first LEDs 423a are divided into three groups, with two in each group starting from the top. The twelve second LEDs 423b are divided into four groups: the first to third three from the top, the fourth to sixth three from the top, the seventh to ninth three from the top, and the tenth to twelfth three from the top. The LED driver 423c can control up to 24 systems, and controls the three groups of six first LEDs 423a and the four groups of twelve second LEDs 423b with three systems per group, for a total of 21 systems, so that they can each emit full color light.

Although not shown, this door frame left side lower decorative board 423 is connected to a wiring cable consisting of four electric wires: two power lines (one is a ground line) that supply power to drive the first LED 423a, the second LED 423b, and the LED driver 423c, one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 423c with the peripheral control board 1510. When the LED driver 423c of this door frame left side lower decorative board 423 receives a command addressed to the address from the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control board) via the control signal line, it can make the six first LEDs 423a divided into three groups and the twelve second LEDs 423b divided into four groups emit light with the appropriate color and intensity for each group in accordance with the command.

The upper left side reflector 424 has a through hole 424a that penetrates from front to back at a position corresponding to the second LED 422b mounted on the upper left side decorative board 422 of the door frame, and a cylindrical retaining tube 424b that extends from front to back at a position corresponding to the first LED 422a. The upper left side reflector 424 is formed so that the rear end around the through hole 424a abuts against the front surface of the upper left side decorative board 422 of the door frame, and the periphery of the front side of the through hole 424a is formed in a dish shape that widens toward the front. This allows the light from the second LED 422b to be diffused widely forward.

The retaining tube 424b of the upper left side reflector 424 holds the cylindrical light guide shaft 427a of the upper left side light guide member 427 described later in a straight line in the front-rear direction. This retaining tube 424b is provided in the center between the through holes 424a. As a result, in the light guide shaft 427a of the upper left side light guide member 427 that protrudes forward through the retaining tube 424b, light from the second LED 422b of the upper left side decorative board 422 of the door frame that is exposed from the through holes 424a on both the top and bottom sides is irradiated with an equal amount of light from both the top and bottom sides to the light guide shaft 427a, thereby preventing the shadow of the light guide shaft 427a from being cast on the back side of the left side decorative body 426 of the door frame.

The upper left side reflector 424 also has a mounting hole in the center (on the center line) between the through holes 424a for mounting to the left side door frame base 421. This prevents the shadow of the head of the screw inserted into the mounting hole from being projected onto the back side of the left side door frame decorative body 426.

The left side lower reflector 425 has a through hole 425a that penetrates from front to back at a position corresponding to the second LED 423b mounted on the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, and a cylindrical retaining tube 425b that extends from front to back at a position corresponding to the first LED 423a. The left side lower reflector 425 is formed so that the rear end around the through hole 425a abuts against the front surface of the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, and the periphery of the front side of the through hole 425a is formed in a dish shape that widens toward the front. This allows the light from the second LED 423b to be diffused widely forward.

The retaining tube 425b of the left-side lower reflector 425 is inserted with the cylindrical light guide shaft 428a of the left-side middle light guide member 428 and the cylindrical light guide shaft 429a of the left-side lower light guide member 429, which will be described later, to hold the light guide shaft 428a and the light guide shaft 429a straight in the front-rear direction. This retaining tube 425b is provided in the center between the through holes 425a. As a result, in the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428 and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429, which protrude forward through the retaining tube 425b, the light from the second LED 423b of the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 facing through the through holes 425a on both the top and bottom sides is irradiated with an equal amount of light from both the top and bottom sides onto the light guide shaft portion 428a and the light guide shaft portion 429a, preventing the shadow of the light guide shaft portion 428a and the light guide shaft portion 429a from being cast on the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426.

The lower left side reflector 425 also has a mounting hole in the center (on the center line) between the through holes 425a for mounting to the left side door frame base 421. This prevents the shadow of the head of the screw inserted into the mounting hole from being projected onto the back side of the left side door frame decorative body 426.

The door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed in a milky white color with translucency. The door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed in a shape in which a semicircular arc bulges forward and extends up and down. As a result, the door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed in a semitubular shape that is open to the rear. This door frame left side decorative body 426 has multiple openings 426a that penetrate forward and backward at regular intervals in the vertical direction along the center of the width in the left and right direction. The multiple openings 426a are provided at positions corresponding to the retaining tube 424b of the left side upper reflector 424 and the retaining tube 425b of the left side lower reflector 425. The respective tips of the light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427, the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428, and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429 are inserted from the rear into these openings 426a. This door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed from a synthetic resin with a higher light transmittance than the door frame left side base 421. In addition, the door frame left side decorative body 426 further has a decorative part 426b that is recessed in an arc shape to avoid the multiple openings 426a and extends along the center of the width in the left-right direction.

The left-side upper light guide member 427 has four cylindrical light guide shafts 427a extending forward and backward, and a runner 427b connecting the lower ends of the four light guide shafts 427a, and is made of a transparent material. The four light guide shafts 427a are provided at regular intervals up and down to correspond to the four retaining tubes 424b of the left-side upper reflector 424. The light guide shafts 427a extend forward and backward with a diameter approximately equal to the inner diameter of the retaining tubes 424b. Each light guide shaft 427a penetrates the retaining tube 424b of the left-side upper reflector 424 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 426a of the left-side door frame decoration 426, so that the tip surface is in a state of being flush with the surface of the left-side door frame decoration 426. This left side upper light guide member 427 can guide light from the first LED 422a on the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 forward using the light guide shaft 427a and radiate it outward from the tip, allowing the opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 to be brightly illuminated.

The left side center light guide member 428 has three cylindrical light guide shafts 428a extending forward and backward, and a runner portion 428b connecting the lower ends of the three light guide shafts 428a, and is made of a transparent material. The three light guide shafts 428a are provided at regular intervals vertically to correspond to the upper three retaining tubes 425b of the left side lower reflector 425. In addition, the light guide shafts 428a extend forward and backward with a diameter approximately the same as the inner diameter of the retaining tube 425b. Each light guide shaft 428a penetrates the retaining tube 425b of the left side lower reflector 425 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426, so that the tip surface is in a state of being aligned with the surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426. This left side center light guide member 428 can guide light from the first LED 423a on the left side lower decorative board 423 of the door frame forward through the light guide shaft 428a and radiate it outward from the tip, allowing the opening 426a of the left side door frame decorative body 426 to be brightly illuminated.

The left-side lower light guide member 429 has three cylindrical light guide shafts 429a extending forward and backward, and a runner portion 429b connecting the lower ends of the three light guide shafts 429a, and is made of a transparent material. The three light guide shafts 429a are provided at regular intervals vertically to correspond to the three retaining tubes 425b on the lower side of the left-side lower reflector 425. In addition, the light guide shafts 429a extend forward and backward with a diameter approximately the same as the inner diameter of the retaining tubes 425b. Each light guide shaft 429a penetrates the retaining tube 425b of the left-side lower reflector 425 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426, so that the tip surface is in a state of being aligned with the surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426. This left-side lower light-guiding member 429 can guide light from the first LED 423a on the left-side lower decorative board 423 of the door frame forward through the light-guiding shaft 429a and radiate it outward from the tip, allowing the opening 426a of the left-side door frame decorative body 426 to be brightly illuminated.

In this embodiment, the door frame left side unit 420 has the circular or radial patterned parts of the door frame left side base 421 formed in the same color as the circular or radial patterned parts of the handle cover 295, and the parts outside the circular or radial pattern of the door frame left side base 421 formed in the same color as the parts outside the circular or radial pattern of the handle cover 295.

In this embodiment, the portion of the door frame left side unit 420 above the center in the vertical direction protrudes slightly forward more than the portion below, and the lower end is gently curved to the right. The upper end of this door frame left side unit 420 is located above the door window 101a and below the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, and the lower end is located below the door window 101a and above the speaker port 211b in the dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210. The upper part of the door frame left side unit 420 is located on the left outer side of the door frame top unit 450. When assembled to the door frame 3, the door frame left side unit 420 decorates the left outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, making it look like a cylindrical fluorescent lamp is embedded in it.

According to the door frame left side unit 420 of this embodiment, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 are provided at a position some distance behind the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426, so that the light from the second LED 422b and the second LED 423b mounted thereon is sufficiently spread out and irradiated onto the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426, allowing the door frame left side decorative body 426 to be uniformly illuminated and decorated.

In addition, the light from the first LED 422a on the upper left side decorative board 422 of the door frame and the first LED 423a on the lower left side decorative board 423 of the door frame, which are located away from the front surface of the left side decorative body 426 toward the rear, can be guided (guided) forward by the light guiding shaft 427a of the upper left side light guiding member 427, the light guiding shaft 428a of the middle left side light guiding member 428, and the light guiding shaft 429a of the lower left side light guiding member 429, so that the opening 426a of the left side decorative body 426 of the door frame can be illuminated brightly in a spot-like manner compared to other areas.

In addition, the first LED 422a on the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame and the first LED 423a on the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, the light guiding shaft portion 427a of the upper left side light guiding member 427, the light guiding shaft portion 428a of the middle left side light guiding member 428 and the light guiding shaft portion 429a of the lower left side light guiding member 429 are arranged in the center between two adjacent second LEDs 422b and second LEDs 423b. As a result, the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a are irradiated with an even amount of light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b on both sides, so even if the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a are projected from behind onto the door frame left side decorative body 426, the shadows become difficult to see, and the door frame left side decorative body 426 can be illuminated and decorated in an even, planar manner.

Furthermore, the door frame left side decorative body 426 has a decorative part 426b that extends along the center of the width in the left-right direction so as to connect the multiple openings 426a. As a result, even if the shadows of the light guide shafts 427a, 428a, and 429a are projected onto the door frame left side decorative body 426 by the light from the second LED 422b and the second LED 423b, the shadows of the light guide shafts 427a, 428a, and 429a can be made less noticeable because the decorative part 426b is located at the location where the shadows are projected, and the appearance of the luminous decoration of the door frame left side decorative body 426 can be improved.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
Next, the door frame right side unit 430 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 66 to 70. Figure 66(a) is a front view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame, (b) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit, (c) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit seen from the front, and (d) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit seen from the back. Figure 67 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit seen from the front, and Figure 68 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit seen from the back. Figure 69 is a cross-sectional view taken along line A-E in Figure 66(a). Figure 70 is a cross-sectional view taken along line O-O in Figure 66(a). The door frame right side unit 430 is attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 200, and decorates the right outer side of the play area 5a when viewed from the front.

The right-side door frame unit 430 includes a right-side door frame base 431 attached to the right outer side of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, an upper right-side door frame decorative board 432 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the right-side door frame base 431 and having a plurality of first LEDs 432a arranged vertically at regular intervals on the front surface, a lower right-side door frame decorative board 433 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the right-side door frame base 431 and having a plurality of first LEDs 433a arranged vertically at regular intervals on the front surface, a right-side door frame reflector 434 attached to the right-side door frame base 431 so as to cover the front sides of the upper right-side door frame decorative board 432 and the lower right-side door frame decorative board 433, and a right-side door frame decorative body 435 attached to the right-side door frame base 431 so as to cover the front side of the right-side door frame reflector 434.

In addition, the door frame right side unit 430 is equipped with an upper right side light guiding member 436 that guides light forward from the first LED 423a on the upper right side decorative board 432 of the door frame, and a lower right side light guiding member 437 that guides light forward from the first LED 433a on the lower right side decorative board 433 of the door frame.

Furthermore, the door frame right side unit 430 is provided with a door frame right side left side decorative body 438 that is attached to cover the left side of the door frame right side base 431 and has multiple decorative holes 438a that penetrate left and right in a predetermined shape, a right side left lens 439 that is provided between the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side base 431 and has a translucent decorative part 439a that is fitted to close the decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438, a door frame right side right side decorative body 440 that is attached to cover the right side of the door frame right side base 431 and has multiple decorative holes 440a that penetrate left and right in a predetermined shape, and a right side right lens 441 that is provided between the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 and the door frame right side base 431 and has a translucent decorative part 441a that is fitted to close the decorative hole 440a of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440.

The door frame right side base 431 extends vertically with a generally constant width on both sides. The rear end of the door frame right side base 431 extends vertically over its entire height, and the front end extends downward from the top end in a generally straight line to near the center in the vertical direction, where it curves rearward and extends diagonally backward, then curves vertically near the bottom and extends vertically to the bottom end.

The door frame right side base 431 has a number of reflector parts 431a recessed from the left and right side surfaces and extending forward to the front end at the height where the decorative hole 438a on the left side decorative body 438 on the right side of the door frame and the decorative hole 440a on the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame (decorative part 439a on the right side left lens 439 and decorative part 441a on the right side right lens 441) are provided. These reflector parts 431a have their rear ends inclined toward the side surfaces, which are inside the decorative parts 439a and 441a, and their bottom surfaces are curved.

The door frame right side base 431 has a reflector portion 431a that corresponds to the decorative hole 438a and decorative hole 440a (decorative portion 439a of the right side left lens 439 and decorative portion 441a of the right side right lens 441) provided rearward of the center in the fore-and-aft direction in the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and door frame right side right side decorative body 440, and the front portion excluding the portion inside the decorative portion 439a and decorative portion 441a penetrates in the left-right direction (it is recessed from the left and right side surfaces and connected to each other).

These reflector parts 431a of the door frame right side base 431 reflect the light irradiated rearward from the third LED 432c of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the third LED 433c of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, described below, in the left and right directions, causing the decorative part 439a of the right side left lens 439 and the decorative part 441a of the right side right lens 441 to emit light and be decorated (see Figure 70, etc.).

The door frame right side upper decorative board 432 is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically. On the front surface of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, multiple first LEDs 432a are mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and second LEDs 432b are mounted two by two between the first LEDs 432a. In addition, on the rear surface of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, multiple third LEDs 432c are mounted at intervals in the vertical direction. Furthermore, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 is equipped with a 24-bit LED driver 432d with a unique address for illuminating the first LED 432a, second LED 432b, and third LED 432c.

This door frame upper right side decorative board 432 is equipped with a total of 16 full-color LEDs: four first LEDs 432a, eight second LEDs 432b, and four third LEDs 432c. The first LED 432a, which has second LEDs 432b on both the top and bottom, is located in the center (the center between) the second LEDs 432b. At least the second LED 432b and third LED 432c are wide-angle top-view type LEDs that can irradiate light within an angle range of 130 degrees centered on an optical axis perpendicular to the front surface.

As shown in Figure 72, on the decorative board 432 on the upper right side of the door frame, the four first LEDs 432a are divided into two sets, the top two and the remaining two. The eight second LEDs 432b are divided into three sets, the top two, the three from the third to fifth from the top, and the three from the sixth to eighth from the top. Furthermore, the four third LEDs 432c are divided into two sets, the top two and the remaining two.

The door frame upper right side decorative board 432 is divided into two sets of first LEDs 432a, three sets of second LEDs 432b, and two sets of third LEDs 432c, so that each of the first LEDs 432a, second LEDs 432b, and third LEDs 432c is illuminated in full color, for a total of 21 systems, with three systems per set. In contrast, the LED driver 432d of the door frame upper right side decorative board 432 can control up to 24 systems, so in addition to the 21 systems mentioned above, it controls a total of 24 systems, including the upper set of three third LEDs 433c, which are divided into two sets on the door frame lower right side decorative board 433, which will be described later.

Although not shown in the figure, a wiring cable consisting of four wires is connected to this decorative board 432 on the upper right side of the door frame. The wiring cable consists of two power lines (one of which is an earth line) that supply power to drive the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, the third LED 432c, the two third LEDs 433c on the decorative board 433 on the lower right side of the door frame, and the LED driver 432d, one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 432d with the peripheral control board 1510. When the LED driver 432d on the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame receives a command addressed to that address via a control signal line from the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control board), it can, in response to that command, cause the four first LEDs 432a divided into two groups, the eight second LEDs 432b divided into three groups, the four third LEDs 432c divided into two groups, and the two third LEDs 433c in the upper group of the two groups on the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame to emit light of the appropriate color and intensity for each group.

The door frame right side lower decorative board 433 is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically. On the front surface of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, multiple first LEDs 433a are mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and second LEDs 433b are mounted two by two between the first LEDs 433a. In addition, on the rear surface of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, multiple third LEDs 433c are mounted at intervals in the vertical direction. Furthermore, the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 is equipped with a 24-bit LED driver 433d having a unique address for illuminating the first LED 433a, second LED 433b, and third LED 433c.

This door frame lower right side decorative board 433 is equipped with a total of 22 full-color LEDs: six first LEDs 433a, 12 second LEDs 433b, and four third LEDs 433c. The first LED 433a, which has second LEDs 433b on both the top and bottom, is located in the center (the center between) the second LEDs 433b. At least the second LED 433b and third LED 433c are wide-angle top-view type LEDs that can irradiate light within an angle range of 130 degrees centered on an optical axis perpendicular to the front surface.

As shown in Figure 72, on the door frame right lower decorative board 433, the six first LEDs 433a are divided into three groups, with two in each group starting from the top. The twelve second LEDs 433b are divided into four groups: the first to third LEDs from the top, three from the fourth to sixth LEDs from the top, three from the seventh to ninth LEDs from the top, and three from the tenth to twelfth LEDs from the top. Furthermore, the four third LEDs 433c are divided into two groups, the top two and the remaining two.

This door frame right side lower decorative board 433 is divided into three sets of the first LED 433a, four sets of the second LED 433b, and two sets of the third LED 433c, so that each of the first LED 433a, second LED 433b, and third LED 433c is illuminated in full color, for a total of 27 systems, with three systems per set. In contrast, the LED driver 433d of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 can only control a maximum of 24 systems, so in the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, the upper set of three systems of the third LED 433c, which is divided into two sets, is controlled by the LED driver 432d of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, and the remaining 24 systems (all of the front first LED 433a and second LED 433b, and the lower two of the rear third LED 433c) are controlled by the LED driver 433d of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433. This helps prevent an increase in the number of LED drivers.

Although not shown, this door frame right side lower decorative board 433 is connected to a wiring cable consisting of four electric wires: two power lines (one is a ground line) that supply power to drive the first LED 433a, the second LED 433b, the two lower third LEDs 433c, and the LED driver 433d, one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 433d with the peripheral control board 1510. Then, when the LED driver 433d of this door frame right side lower decorative board 433 receives a command addressed to the address from the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control board) via the control signal line, it can make the six first LEDs 433a divided into three groups, the twelve second LEDs 433b divided into four groups, and the two third LEDs 433c in the lower group of the two groups emit light with appropriate colors and intensities for each group in response to the command.

The right side reflector 434 has a through hole 434a that penetrates from front to back at a position corresponding to the second LED 432b of the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame and the second LED 433b of the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame, and has a cylindrical retaining tube 434b that extends from front to back at a position corresponding to the first LED 432a and the first LED 433a. The right side reflector 434 is formed so that the rear end around the through hole 434a abuts against the front of the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame and the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame, and the periphery of the front side of the through hole 434a is formed in a dish shape that widens toward the front. This allows the light from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b to be diffused widely forward.

The holding tube 434b of the right side reflector 434 holds the light guide shaft 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436 and the light guide shaft 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437 (described later) straight in the front-rear direction by inserting them. This holding tube 434b is provided in the center between the through holes 434a. As a result, in the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a that protrude forward through the retaining tube 434b, the light from the second LED 432b on the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame and the second LED 433b on the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame that are exposed through the through holes 434a on both the top and bottom sides is irradiated with an equal amount of light from both the top and bottom sides onto the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a, preventing the shadow of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a from being cast on the back side of the door frame right side decorative body 435.

The right side reflector 434 also has a mounting hole in the center (on the center line) between the through holes 434a for mounting to the door frame right side base 431. This prevents the shadow of the head of the screw inserted into the mounting hole from being projected onto the back side of the door frame right side decorative body 435.

The door frame right side decorative body 435 is formed in a milky white color with translucency. The door frame right side decorative body 435 is formed in a shape in which a semicircular arc bulges forward and extends up and down. As a result, the door frame right side decorative body 435 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is open to the rear. This door frame right side decorative body 435 has multiple openings 435a that penetrate forward and backward at regular intervals in the vertical direction along the center of the width in the left-right direction. The multiple openings 435a are provided at positions corresponding to the retaining tube 434b of the right side reflector 434. The respective tips of the light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436 and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437 are inserted from the rear into these openings 435a. This door frame right side decorative body 435 is formed of a synthetic resin with a higher light transmittance than the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440. The door frame right side decorative body 435 has the same light transmittance as the door frame left side decorative body 426. In addition, the door frame right side decorative body 435 further has a decorative part 435b that is recessed in a circular arc shape to avoid the multiple openings 435a and extends along the center of the width in the left-right direction.

The right-side upper light guide member 436 has four cylindrical light guide shafts 436a extending forward and backward, and a runner portion 436b connecting the lower ends of the four light guide shafts 436a, and is made of a transparent material. The four light guide shafts 436a are provided at regular intervals from the top of the right-side reflector 434 to correspond to the four retaining tubes 434b. The light guide shafts 436a extend forward and backward with a diameter approximately equal to the inner diameter of the retaining tube 434b. Each light guide shaft 436a penetrates the retaining tube 434b of the right-side reflector 434 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 435a of the door frame right-side decorative body 435, so that the tip surface is in a state of being flush with the surface of the door frame right-side decorative body 435. This right-side upper light-guiding member 436 can guide light from the first LED 432a on the door frame right-side upper decorative board 432 forward through the light-guiding shaft 436a and radiate it outward from the tip, allowing the opening 435a of the door frame right-side decorative body 435 to be brightly illuminated.

The right side lower light guide member 437 has six cylindrical light guide shafts 437a extending forward and backward, and a runner portion 437b connecting the lower ends of the six light guide shafts 437a, and is made of a transparent material. The six light guide shafts 437a are provided at regular intervals from the bottom of the right side reflector 434 to correspond to the six retaining tubes 434b. The light guide shafts 437a extend forward and backward with a diameter approximately equal to the inner diameter of the retaining tubes 434b. Each light guide shaft 437a penetrates the retaining tube 434b of the right side reflector 434 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435, so that the tip surface is in a state of being flush with the surface of the door frame right side decorative body 435. This right-side lower light-guiding member 437 can guide light from the first LED 433a on the door frame right-side lower decorative board 433 forward through the light-guiding shaft 437a and radiate it outward from the tip, allowing the opening 435a of the door frame right-side decorative body 435 to be brightly illuminated.

The door frame right side left side decorative body 438 is formed in a plate shape extending vertically, and has multiple decorative holes 438a penetrating in the left-right direction in a predetermined shape (radial pattern shape). The door frame right side left side decorative body 438 is formed in a shape whose front end side follows the rear end of the door frame right side decorative body 435. The door frame right side left side decorative body 438 is two-color molded with synthetic resins of different colors and translucency (light transmittance). In detail, the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 is two-color molded with two types of resin, the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b, like the above-mentioned handle cover 295 and the door frame left side base 421, and a part of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b and appears on the outer surface, forming a circular or radial pattern. In other words, part of the circular and radial patterns that appear on the surface of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 are the inner layer 3a, and the circular and radial patterns are connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (see Figure 71 (a)). When molding the door frame right side left side decorative body 438, the inner layer 3a may be injection molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection molded first.

The right-side left lens 439 is formed in a flat plate shape along the inner (right) surface of the door frame right-side left side decorative body 438, and has a decorative part 439a that protrudes to the left and fits into the decorative hole 438a of the door frame right-side left side decorative body 438 from the inside (right side). When fitted into the decorative hole 438a, the surface of the decorative part 439a matches the outer (left) surface of the door frame right-side left side decorative body 438 (see Figure 70). This right-side left lens 439 is formed from a synthetic resin with a higher light transmittance than the door frame right-side left side decorative body 438. The decorative part 439a of the right-side left lens 439 is located to the left of the reflector part 431a in the door frame right-side base 431, and can be illuminated and decorated with light from the third LED 432c of the door frame right-side upper decorative board 432 and the third LED 433c of the door frame right-side lower decorative board 433.

The right side left lens 439 is formed in the same color as the inner layer 3a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. As a result, in the assembled state, the decorative part 439a exposed through the decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 looks the same as the radial pattern part molded in two colors in the door frame right side left side decorative body 438, making it difficult to distinguish from the part of the decorative part 439a that is illuminated and decorated by the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c.

The right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame is formed in a plate shape extending vertically, and has multiple decorative holes 440a that penetrate in the left-right direction in a specific shape (radial pattern shape). The right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame also has a cylinder insertion opening 440b into which a cylindrical part having a keyhole 132 at the front end of the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted. The right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame is formed so that the vertical direction is approximately the same as the overall height of the door frame 3. The right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame also has a shape that follows the rear end of the right side decorative body 435 on the right side of the door frame, from the top end to the cylinder insertion opening 440b.

The door frame right side right side decorative body 440 is molded in two colors using synthetic resins with different colors and translucency (light transmittance). In detail, the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 is molded in two colors using two types of resin, the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b, like the handle cover 295, the door frame left side base 421, and the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. A part of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b and appears on the outer surface, forming a circular or radial pattern. In other words, a part of the circular or radial pattern appearing on the surface of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 is the inner layer 3a, and the circular or radial pattern is connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (see Figure 71 (a)). When molding the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, the inner layer 3a may be injection molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection molded first.

The right lens 441 on the right side is formed in a flat plate shape along the inner (right) surface above the cylinder insertion opening 440b of the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame, and has a decorative part 441a that protrudes to the right and fits into the decorative hole 440a of the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame from the inside (left side). When fitted into the decorative hole 440a, the surface of the decorative part 441a matches the outer (right) surface of the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame (see Figure 70). This right lens 441 on the right side is formed of a synthetic resin with a higher light transmittance than the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame. The decorative part 441a of the right lens 441 on the right side of the door frame is located to the right of the reflector part 431a on the right side base 431 of the door frame, and can be illuminated and decorated with light from the third LED 432c on the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame and the third LED 433c on the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame.

The right lens 441 on the right side is formed in the same color as the inner layer 3a of the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame. As a result, in the assembled state, the decorative part 441a exposed through the decorative hole 440a on the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame looks the same as the part with the radial pattern molded in two colors on the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame, making it difficult to distinguish from the part of the decorative part 441a that is illuminated and decorated by the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c.

In this embodiment, the door frame right side unit 430 has the circular or radial patterned parts on the left side decorative body 438 on the right side of the door frame and the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame formed in the same color as the circular or radial patterned parts on the handle cover 295 and the left side base 421 of the door frame, and the outer parts of the circular or radial pattern on the left side decorative body 438 on the right side of the door frame and the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame are formed in the same color as the outer parts of the circular or radial pattern on the handle cover 295 and the left side base 421 of the door frame.

In this embodiment, the portion of the right door frame unit 430 above the center in the vertical direction protrudes further forward than the portion of the left door frame unit 420 on the opposite side at the same height. This right door frame unit 430 is formed at approximately the same height as the door frame 3 from its top end to its bottom end. The upper portion of the right door frame unit 430 is located on the outer right side of the door frame top unit 450.

When assembled to the door frame 3, the door frame right side unit 430 decorates the right outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and the door frame right side decorative body 435 appears to have a cylindrical fluorescent lamp embedded in it.

The door frame right side unit 430 protrudes forward from the top to about half its height, forming a screen. This makes it difficult for players seated in front of the pachinko machine installed adjacent to the right side of the island equipment in the gaming hall to see inside the door window 101a (play area 5a). Therefore, because the door frame right side unit 430 is formed like a screen, it can block the line of sight of nearby players, making it difficult for other players to see the entire play area 5a, and by making it difficult for players to feel like they are being watched by other players, other players can play without feeling embarrassed.

According to the door frame right side unit 430 of this embodiment, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 are provided at a position some distance behind the front surface of the door frame right side decorative body 435, so that the light from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b mounted thereon is sufficiently spread out and is irradiated onto the back side of the door frame right side decorative body 435, allowing the door frame right side decorative body 435 to be uniformly illuminated and decorated.

The door frame right side unit 430 also guides (guides) light forward from the first LED 432a on the upper right side decorative board 432 of the door frame and the first LED 433a on the lower right side decorative board 433 of the door frame, which are located away from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative body 435 toward the rear, by the light guiding shaft portion 436a of the upper right side light guiding member 436 and the light guiding shaft portion 437a of the lower right side light guiding member 437, allowing the opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435 to emit light in a spot-like manner that is brighter than other areas.

Furthermore, the door frame right side unit 430 can illuminate the third LED 432c of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the third LED 433c of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, and can illuminate and decorate the decorative part 439a of the right side left lens 439 fitted in the decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the decorative part 441a of the right side right lens 441 fitted in the decorative hole 440a of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 through the reflector part 431a of the door frame right side base 431. In addition, since it is possible to illuminate and decorate a part of the left and right sides of the screen-shaped door frame right side unit 430 (the parts of the decorative part 439a and the decorative part 441a), it is possible to make the present pachinko machine 1 stand out to other players, and it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

In addition, according to the door frame right side unit 430 of this embodiment, the first LED 432a and the second LED 432b on the front side of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the first LED 433a and the second LED 433b on the front side of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 illuminate and decorate the door frame right side decorative body 435 at the front end side, and the third LED 432c on the rear side of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the third LED 433c on the rear side of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 illuminate and decorate the door frame right side left side decorative body 435 behind the door frame right side decorative body 435. 8 and the right side decoration 440 on the right side of the door frame are illuminated, so that the presence of the upper decoration board 432 on the right side of the door frame and the lower decoration board 433 on the right side of the door frame can prevent the light from the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, the first LED 433a, and the second LED 433b from illuminating the left side decoration 438 on the right side of the door frame and the right side decoration 440 on the right side of the door frame on the rear side, and from illuminating the right side decoration 435 on the front side of the door frame. This allows the right side decoration 435 of the door frame and the left side decoration 438 on the right side of the door frame and the right side decoration 440 on the right side of the door frame on the rear side to be illuminated and decorated completely independently, so that a pachinko machine 1 can be provided that can present a more effective illumination performance to the player.

In addition, the door frame right side unit 430 has the first LED 432a of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the first LED 433a of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, and the light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436 and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437, located in the center between the two adjacent second LEDs 432b and second LEDs 433b. As a result, the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a are irradiated with an equal amount of light from the second LEDs 432b and second LEDs 433b on both sides, so that even if the shadows of the light guide shaft portions 436a and 437a are projected from behind onto the door frame right side decorative body 435, the shadows are difficult to see, and the door frame right side decorative body 435 can be illuminated in a uniform, planar manner.

Furthermore, the door frame right side unit 430 is configured so that the door frame right side decorative body 435 has a decorative part 435b that extends along the center of the width in the left-right direction so as to connect the multiple openings 435a. As a result, even if the shadows of the light guide shaft parts 436a and 437a are projected onto the door frame right side decorative body 435 by the light from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b, the shadows of the light guide shaft parts 436a and 437a can be made less noticeable because the decorative part 435b is located at the location where the shadows are projected, and the appearance of the luminous decoration of the door frame right side decorative body 435 can be improved.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 29 and 30. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper front surface of the door frame base unit 100 so as to be sandwiched between the upper portions of the left and right side units 420, 430.

The door frame top unit 450 comprises a door frame top base 451 that is attached above the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, a top upper cover 452 that is attached to the door frame top base 451 so as to cover both the left and right sides and the upper front surface of the door frame top base 451, a door frame top decorative body 453 that is attached to the front end of the top upper cover 452, and a door frame top bottom plate (not shown) that connects the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453 to the lower end of the door frame top base 451.

The door frame top unit 450 also includes a door frame top central decorative board 455 that is attached to the front center of the top upper cover 452 behind the door frame top decorative body 453 and has multiple LEDs mounted on the front surface, a door frame top left decorative board 456 that is attached to the left of the door frame top central decorative board 455 on the front surface of the top upper cover 452 behind the door frame top decorative body 453 and has multiple LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a door frame top right decorative board 457 that is attached to the right of the door frame top central decorative board 455 on the front surface of the top upper cover 452 behind the door frame top decorative body 453 and has multiple LEDs mounted on the front surface (see Figure 72).

The door frame top unit 450 also includes a pair of top center speakers (not shown) provided on the front of the door frame top base 451, a pair of top side speakers (not shown) provided on both the left and right outer sides of the pair of top center speakers, a top lower cover 465 attached to the underside of the door frame top decorative body 453 so as to cover the front of the top center speaker and the top side speaker, a door frame top relay board (not shown) attached near the right end of the front of the door frame top base 451, and a door frame top plate 468 attached to the top upper cover 452 so as to cover the upper part of the door frame top base 451.

The door frame top base 451 extends left and right with a length that is approximately the same as the distance between the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side unit 430. The top upper cover 452 protrudes forward in a semicircular arc shape in a plan view, and has an opening 452a that is cut out significantly from the rear end toward the front. This opening 452a is closed by the door frame top plate 468.

The door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a milky white color with translucency. In a plan view, the door frame top decorative body 453 extends left and right in a semicircular arc shape along the front end of the top upper cover 452. The door frame top decorative body 453 is also formed with a semicircular arc on the front side so that the center in the vertical direction protrudes forward. As a result, the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a semitube shape that is open to the rear.

The door frame top central decorative board 455 is formed in the shape of a strip extending to the left and right. The door frame top central decorative board 455 has multiple LEDs 455a mounted on the front surface, which are full-color LEDs. This door frame top central decorative board 455 can illuminate and decorate the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately illuminating the multiple LEDs 455a.

The door frame top left decorative board 456 is formed in the shape of a strip extending to the left and right. The door frame top left decorative board 456 has multiple LEDs 456a mounted on the front surface, which are full-color LEDs. This door frame top left decorative board 456 can illuminate and decorate the left portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately illuminating the multiple LEDs 456a.

The door frame top right decorative board 457 is formed in the shape of a strip extending to the left and right. The door frame top right decorative board 457 has multiple LEDs 457a mounted on the front surface, which are full-color LEDs. This door frame top right decorative board 457 can illuminate and decorate the right portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately illuminating the multiple LEDs 457a.

The pair of top center speakers are spaced apart on the left and right. The pair of top center speakers are full-range speakers that output sounds such as voice and music over a wide frequency range. The pair of top side speakers are tweeters that output high-frequency sounds such as voice and music.

The top lower cover 465 is made of a punched metal plate with numerous through holes. Sound output from the top center speaker and top side speakers is emitted forward and downward through the top lower cover 465.

The door frame top relay board is intended to relay the connection between the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, the door frame top right decorative board 457, the top center speaker, and the top side speaker and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame top plate 468 closes the opening 452a of the top upper cover 452, and its front end is engaged with the top upper cover 452 while its rear end is attached to the door frame base unit 100.

When assembled to the door frame 3, the door frame top unit 450 decorates the upper outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. The door frame top unit 450 is connected so that both the left and right ends of the door frame top decorative body 453 sink from the front to a position rearward of the inside of the upper part of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435. The door frame top unit 450 can also output sounds such as voice and music to the player through a pair of top center speakers and a pair of top side speakers.

[3-9. Door frame decoration]
Next, the decoration (exterior) of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 22 to 28 and Figure 71. Figure 71(a) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit, showing the two-color molded outer layer of the door frame in an opaque state, and (b) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit, showing the outer layer in (a) in a transparent state while leaving the inner layer as it is. As shown in the figures, the door frame 3 has a substantially rectangular door window 101a extending vertically in the center when viewed from the front, which is closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of a glass unit 160. The door frame 3 has its outer periphery surrounded by the left dish decorative body 271 and right dish decorative body 276 of the dish unit 200, the unit top cover 312 and button body 351 of the performance operation unit 300, the left door frame decorative body 426 of the left door frame side unit 420, the right door frame decorative body 435 of the right door frame unit 430, and the top door frame decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450.

The left dish decoration 271, right dish decoration 276, left door frame decoration 426, right door frame decoration 435, and top door frame decoration 453, which surround the outer periphery of the door window 101a, are formed in a semi-tubular shape, allowing the player to see a decoration that looks as if the entire periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by fluorescent lights.

In the door frame 3, the left dish decorative board 273, the right dish decorative board 278, the performance operation unit outer periphery decorative board 320, the upper left door frame decorative board 422 and the lower left door frame decorative board 423, the upper right door frame decorative board 432 and the lower right door frame decorative board 433, the central door frame top decorative board 455, the top left door frame decorative board 456, and the top right door frame decorative board 457 are arranged behind or below the left dish decorative body 271, the right dish decorative body 276, the unit top cover 312, the left door frame decorative body 426, the right door frame decorative body 435, and the top door frame decorative body 453, which surround the outer periphery of the door window 101a. By appropriately illuminating the LEDs of these decorative boards, it is possible to illuminate the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a, or to show the player a light-emitting performance as light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

A spherical performance operation unit 300 with a diameter larger than the front-to-back distance of the upper tray 201 is attached to the left-to-right center of the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3. This increases the visual impact of the large spherical performance operation unit 300 being located in the center of the tray unit 200, and makes the performance operation section 301 (touch operation section 302 and pressing operation section 303) of the performance operation unit 300 stand out.

In addition, in the normal state, the top surface of the button body 351 serving as the performance operation unit 301 is flush with the top surface of the unit upper cover 312 so as to form a single sphere, making it difficult for the player to recognize that the performance operation unit 301 (button body 351) is operable, and the performance operation unit 300 consisting of a giant sphere makes it possible for the player to recognize at a glance that the pachinko machine 1 is different from other pachinko machines, strongly attracting the player's interest and increasing the appeal to the player, making it easier for the player to select this pachinko machine 1 as the machine to play.

In addition, in the dish unit 200, the center (centre) of the performance operation section 301 of the performance operation unit 300 is positioned forward of the apex of the spherical performance operation unit 300, so that the top surface of the performance operation section 301 (the touch operation section 302 and the pressing operation section 303) faces the head (face) of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, for a player who recognizes that the giant sphere located in the center of the dish unit 200 is the performance operation section 301, the entirety of the performance operation section 301 can be easily seen, making the performance operation section 301 appear larger. In addition, the player can be made to strongly desire to operate the giant spherical presentation operation unit 301, which can heighten the player's anticipation for the execution of a player-participation type presentation in which the player operates the presentation operation unit 301, and when a player-participation type presentation is executed, the player can be made to actively operate the presentation operation unit 301, which can allow the player to enjoy the player-participation type presentation by operating the presentation operation unit 301, thereby preventing a decline in interest.

Next, as shown in Figures 2 to 5, the exterior of the door frame 3 in this embodiment has multiple circular and radial patterns on its outer surface. In Figure 71, the door frame right side unit 430 is shown as an example of part of the exterior of the door frame 3.

More specifically, the multiple circular and radial patterns on the exterior surface of the door frame 3 are formed by two-color molding using two types of synthetic resin with different colors and translucency (light transmittance). The patterned exterior portion of the door frame 3 is two-color molded using two types of resin, the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b, and the circular and radial patterns are formed by part of the inner layer 3a penetrating the outer layer 3b and appearing on the outer surface.

For example, taking the door frame right side unit 430 as an example, as shown in Figure 71 (a), if a honeycomb pattern is applied to the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b is made opaque, the honeycomb pattern of the inner layer 3a will be visible in the circular pattern areas, and the opaque outer layer 3b will be visible in areas other than the pattern, resulting in an exterior appearance that emphasizes the circular and radial patterns.

In contrast, as shown in Figure 71 (b), if the outer layer 3b is made transparent, the honeycomb pattern applied to the inner layer 3a becomes visible through the outer layer 3b, and the circular and radial patterns become relatively difficult to see. In other words, the exterior has an appearance in which the honeycomb pattern applied to the inner layer 3a is emphasized.

In FIG. 71, the decorative part 441a fitted into the decorative hole 440a of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, which is molded in two colors as part of the exterior, is a part of the right lens 441 on the right side and is a separate member from the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, so even if the outer layer 3b is made transparent, the pattern of the decorative hole 440a (decorative part 441a) does not change.

In this way, according to this embodiment, the main components that make up the exterior of the door frame 3 are formed by two-color molding, so by appropriately selecting and combining the colors and light transmittance of the materials (synthetic resins) used for the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b, the appearance can be greatly changed without changing the shape.

Therefore, for example, when making minor changes, the exterior of the pachinko machine 1 can be changed at no cost by making the outer layer 3b transparent so that the pattern of the inner layer 3a can be seen.

Alternatively, the colors of the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b can be changed for each production lot, and pachinko machines 1 from different lots can be shipped to the same gaming hall and installed in the island equipment, giving them a colorful feel and increasing their appeal to players.

In the above embodiment, two-color molding is shown, but this is not limited to this, and multi-color molding such as three-color molding or four-color molding may also be used. Specifically, in the above embodiment, a two-color molded right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame is combined with a right lens 441 on the right side to form the exterior, but three-color molding may be used in which the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame and the right lens 441 on the right side are integrally formed.

In addition, in the above embodiment, circular and radial patterns are shown, but this is not limited to this and patterns of various shapes may be formed.

In this way, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the decorative bodies such as the handle cover 295, the door frame left side base 421, the door frame right side left side decorative body 438, and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, which are provided on the outside of the door window 101a through which the play area 5a in the door frame 3 faces forward, are two-color molded (multi-color molded) using two synthetic resins with different light transmittances, and the polka dot decoration is applied by this two-color molding. Therefore, the decorative body is formed into the desired shape and the desired decoration is applied to the decorative body at the same time, so there is no need to form the decorative body into the desired shape and then apply the desired decoration by painting, etc., as with the decorative bodies of conventional pachinko machines, and this eliminates the effort required for decoration and suppresses increases in costs.

In addition, since the decoration of the decorative body is formed by two-color molding, the appearance (outer appearance) of the decorative body can be easily changed by changing the color of the synthetic resin used. In detail, when forming a polka dot decoration by two-color molding, if the inner layer 3a constituting the inside of the polka dot circle and the outer layer 3b constituting the outside of the circle are formed with the same color but with different light transmittance, the polka dot circle becomes difficult to see because the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b are the same color, and the appearance looks as if the polka dot decoration is not applied. On the other hand, if the inner layer 3a constituting the inside of the polka dot circle is white and the outer layer 3b constituting the outside of the circle is pink, the polka dot circle becomes clearly visible due to the difference in color between the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b, and the appearance looks like a white polka dot decoration on a pink background. In this way, by appropriately selecting the light transmittance (including color) of the synthetic resin used when forming the decorative body, the appearance of the decorative body can be easily changed, and the cost of changing the appearance can be suppressed.

As described above, when forming the decorative body, the appearance of the decorative body can be easily changed by appropriately selecting the light transmittance (including color) of the synthetic resin used. Therefore, if the combination of synthetic resins used is changed for each production lot and different lots of this pachinko machine 1 are shipped to the same game hall and installed in a row in an island facility, the island facility can be made to have a colorful feel, which can make a strong impact on players wandering around the game hall, and a pachinko machine 1 with high appeal that can attract players can be provided.

Furthermore, at the area outside the door window 101a where the play area 5a of the door frame 3 faces forward, decorative elements such as a handle cover 295, a left side base 421 of the door frame, a left side decorative element 438 on the right side of the door frame, and a right side decorative element 440 on the right side of the door frame, each of which has a decoration molded in two colors using a number of synthetic resins with different light transmittances, are provided, so that the outside of the door window 101a can be decorated with these decorative elements to improve its appearance.

In addition, the outer layer 3b of the two-color molded decorative body is made of a synthetic resin with a lower light transmittance than the remaining inner layer 3a, making it difficult to see the inner layer 3a through the outer layer 3b. In comparison, the boundaries of the decoration (polka dot pattern) made up of the inner layer 3a become clearly visible, making the decoration clearly visible.

In addition, since the light transmittance of the outer layer 3b is lower than that of the remaining inner layer 3a, it is possible to make it difficult to see the inner layer 3a through the outer layer 3b. Therefore, in the initial model, the outer layer 3b has a low light transmittance so that the inner layer 3a cannot be seen through from the outside, and when changing the model, a synthetic resin with a high light transmittance is used for the outer layer 3b so that the inner layer 3a can be seen through, which can greatly change the way the decoration of the decorative body is viewed, and the appearance (decoration) can be easily changed without changing the shape of the decorative body.

As described above, the outer layer 3b with low light transmittance makes it difficult to see the inner layer 3a, so a pattern (a pattern based on shape, or a pattern based on painting, printing, sticker attachment, etc.) is applied to the surface of the inner layer 3a. In the initial model, the opaque outer layer 3b with low light transmittance prevents the pattern of the inner layer 3a from being seen through the outer layer 3b, and when a model change is made, a transparent synthetic resin is used for the outer layer 3b, so that the pattern of the inner layer 3a can be seen through. This allows the appearance (decoration) of the decorative body to be significantly changed without changing the shape of the decorative body, and helps to prevent increases in costs associated with model changes.

Furthermore, the third LED 432c on the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame and the third LED 433c on the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame that can emit light are provided on the inside of the left side decorative body 438 on the right side of the door frame and the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame, and the inner layer 3a is formed of a synthetic resin with a higher light transmittance than the others, so that the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c provided on the inside of the left side decorative body 438 on the right side of the door frame and the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame are illuminated. This allows the inner layer 3a (polka dot area) of the decorations formed on the surface of the left side decorative body 438 on the right side of the door frame and the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame to be brightly illuminated, and by illuminating the outside of the door window 101a overlooking the play area 5a, it is possible to improve the appearance and allow the player to enjoy the illuminated decorations of the left side decorative body 438 on the right side of the door frame and the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame, preventing a decline in the player's interest.

In addition, depending on the light transmittance of the outer layer 3b, the outer layer 3b can also be illuminated and decorated by the light from the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c that is irradiated onto the outer layer 3b through the inner layer 3a, so that the entire left side decorative body 438 on the right side of the door frame and the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame can be illuminated and decorated, making the left side decorative body 438 on the right side of the door frame and the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame look beautiful and creating a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that strongly attracts the interest of players.

As described above, the decorations of the left side decoration 438 on the right side of the door frame and the right side decoration 440 on the right side of the door frame are formed by two-color molding (multicolor molding) of multiple synthetic resins with different light transmittances, so that the decorations visible when the LEDs (light-emitting means) such as the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c are not lit can be made different from the decorations visible when the LEDs are lit, depending on the number of layers to the surface and the difference in light transmittance of the synthetic resins used, and the change in decoration can strongly attract the interest of the player. In more detail, for example, if a hole of a predetermined shape is formed in the part of the inner layer 3a covered by the outer layer 3b, only the part exposed to the surface of the inner layer 3a can be seen when the LEDs are not lit. On the other hand, when the LED is illuminated, the light from the LED is directly irradiated to the outer layer 3b without passing through the inner layer 3a at the portion where the hole is formed in the inner layer 3a, so that the shape of the hole in the inner layer 3a is visible on the surface of the outer layer 3b, and the portion exposed on the surface of the inner layer 3a and the portion of the hole are visible, and the decoration is different from when the LED is not illuminated. Alternatively, for example, if the inner layer 3a is yellow and the outer layer 3b is blue, when the LED is illuminated in yellow, only the portion of the inner layer 3a in the surface decoration is illuminated. On the other hand, when the LED is illuminated in green (or white), both the portion of the inner layer 3a and the portion of the outer layer 3b on the surface are illuminated, so that the portion of the decorative body that is illuminated and decorated can be changed depending on the color of the light emitted by the LED. In this way, the decoration of the decorative body can be changed by the illumination of the LED, which strongly attracts the interest of the player and entertains the player. Furthermore, by making the LEDs light up depending on the game status, the changes in the decoration of the ornamental body can suggest to the player the arrival of an opportunity or a change in the hitting operation (for example, "hit to the right"), etc., providing a pachinko machine 1 capable of a variety of presentations.

In addition, the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435, which are provided on both the left and right outer sides of the door window 101a (play area 5a), have different amounts of protrusion in the front-to-rear direction, so that the impression (appearance) of the pachinko machine 1 when viewed from the front left and the front right can be made to differ. Therefore, even if a player wanders around the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed passes in front of the pachinko machine 1 once, when he approaches the pachinko machine 1 from the other side, the appearance will be different from when he last wandered around, which will attract the interest of the pachinko machine 1. This makes it possible to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing, capable of attracting players wandering around the game hall to choose a pachinko machine 1 to play.

[3-10. LED placement and system on door frame]
Next, the arrangement and control system of each LED provided in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Fig. 72 and Fig. 73. Fig. 72 is a front view showing each decorative board of the door frame, and Fig. 73 is a plan view showing the decorative board of the part of the performance operation unit of the door frame. As shown in Fig. 72, the door frame 3 is provided with a handle 195 in the lower right corner when viewed from the front, which the player rotates to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5. This handle 195 has a central hub portion 195a, three spoke portions 195b extending outward from the central hub portion 195a, and an annular outer peripheral ring portion 195c connecting the tips of the spoke portions 195b, and has an appearance similar to that of a steering wheel of an automobile.

The front side of the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195 is covered by the handle front lens 185, and a handle decoration board 184 with multiple LEDs 184a mounted on the front surface is provided between the handle front lens 185 and the central hub portion 195a. In addition, a handle cover decoration board 293 with multiple LEDs 293a mounted on the front surface is provided behind the outer circumferential ring portion 195c of the handle 195.

The handle decoration board 184 has a total of 10 LEDs 184a (full color LEDs) mounted in triple concentric circles: one in the center, three at regular intervals around the circumference in the middle, and six at regular intervals around the outer periphery. These LEDs 184a are divided into five groups: one in the center, three in the middle connected by dashed lines in FIG. 72, and two at the top left of the outer periphery, two at the top right of the outer periphery, and two at the bottom of the outer periphery, all connected by dashed lines. These five groups of LEDs 184a are controlled by an LED driver 184b in 15 systems, and each group of LEDs 184a can emit full color light of the appropriate color.

On the other hand, 12 LEDs 293a are arranged in a row on the handle cover decorative board 293 with intervals in the circumferential direction. These 12 LEDs 293a are divided into six groups, as connected by dashed lines in Figure 72, with two at the bottom left, two on the left, two at the top left, two at the top right, two on the right, and two at the bottom right. These six groups of LEDs 293a are controlled by an LED driver 293b in 18 systems, and each group of LEDs 293a can emit light in a full range of appropriate colors.

In this way, because the handle 195 is provided with the handle decoration board 184 and the handle cover decoration board 293, the player can see light-emitting effects such as light rotating around the handle 195, light-emitting effects concentrating toward the center of the handle 195, and light-emitting effects spreading toward the outside of the handle 195. In addition, the LEDs 293a of the handle cover decoration board 293 can be used to illuminate and decorate the outside and inside of the handle cover 295.

As shown in the figure, the door frame 3 has a roughly rectangular door window 101a extending vertically in the center when viewed from the front, which is closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160. The door window 101a of the door frame 3 is surrounded all around by the left dish decorative body 271 and right dish decorative body 276 of the dish unit 200, the performance operation unit 300, the left door frame decorative body 426 of the left door frame unit 420, the right door frame decorative body 435 of the right door frame unit 430, and the top door frame decorative body 453 of the top door frame unit 450.

The left dish decoration 271, right dish decoration 276, left door frame decoration 426, right door frame decoration 435, and top door frame decoration 453, which surround the outer periphery of the door window 101a, are formed in a semi-tubular shape, allowing the player to see a decoration that looks as if the door window 101a is surrounded almost entirely by fluorescent lights.

As shown in Figure 72, in this door frame 3, the left decorative board 273 behind the left decorative body 271 that surrounds the outer periphery of the door window 101a, the right decorative board 278 behind the right decorative body 276, the upper left decorative board 422 and the lower left decorative board 423 behind the left side decorative body 426, the upper right decorative board 432 and the lower right decorative board 433 behind the right side decorative body 435, the central door frame top decorative board 455, the top left decorative board 456 and the top right decorative board 457 behind the top decorative body 453 are arranged facing forward.

In more detail, the left dish decorative board 273 is equipped with four LEDs 273a mounted on the front in a row in the left-right direction, and an LED driver (not shown) for illuminating the LEDs 273a and the LEDs 273a on the right dish decorative board 278 described below. These four LEDs 273a are divided into two sets, two on the left and two on the right, as connected by a dashed line in Figure 72. These two sets of LEDs 273a are controlled by an LED driver in six systems, and each set of LEDs 273a can emit light in a full range of appropriate colors.

The right plate decorative board 278 is equipped with four LEDs 278a mounted on the front in a row running left to right. These four LEDs 278a are divided into two sets, two on the left and two on the right, as connected by the dashed line in Figure 72. These two sets of LEDs 278a are controlled by the LED driver of the left plate decorative board 273 in six systems, and each set of LEDs 278a can emit light in the full range of appropriate colors.

The door frame upper left side decorative board 422 is equipped with four first LEDs 422a mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction, eight second LEDs 422b mounted in pairs vertically between the first LEDs 422a, and an LED driver 422c for illuminating the total of 12 first LEDs 422a and second LEDs 422b. The first LEDs 422a and second LEDs 422b are mounted on the front surface. The four first LEDs 422a on the door frame upper left side decorative board 422 are divided into two sets of the top two and the remaining two, as connected by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 72. The eight second LEDs 422b are also divided into three sets of the top two, the three from the third to the fifth from the top, and the three from the sixth to the eighth from the top, as connected by a dashed line in FIG. 72. The four first LEDs 422a divided into two groups and the eight second LEDs 422b divided into three groups are controlled by an LED driver 422c in 15 systems, and each group of the first LEDs 422a and second LEDs 422b can emit light in a full range of appropriate colors.

The door frame left side lower decorative board 423 is equipped with six first LEDs 423a mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction, twelve second LEDs 423b mounted in pairs between the first LEDs 423a, and an LED driver 423c for emitting light from a total of 18 first LEDs 423a and second LEDs 423b. The first LEDs 423a and second LEDs 423b are mounted on the front. The six first LEDs 423a are divided into three groups, two of which are arranged in order from the top, as shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 72. The twelve second LEDs 423b are divided into four groups, three from the first to third from the top, three from the fourth to sixth from the top, three from the seventh to ninth from the top, and three from the tenth to twelfth from the top, as shown by the one-dot chain line in FIG. 72. The six first LEDs 423a divided into three groups and the twelve second LEDs 423b divided into four groups are controlled by an LED driver 423c in 21 systems, and the first LEDs 423a and second LEDs 423b of each group can emit light in a full range of appropriate colors.

The door frame right side upper decorative board 432 is equipped with four first LEDs 432a mounted on the front surface at regular intervals in the vertical direction, eight second LEDs 432b mounted on the front surface in a row between the first LEDs 432a, and four third LEDs 432c mounted on the rear surface at intervals in the vertical direction. The door frame right side upper decorative board 432 is also equipped with an LED driver 432d for emitting light from a total of 16 first LEDs 432a, second LEDs 432b, and third LEDs 432c, and two third LEDs 433c on the door frame right side lower decorative board 433. The four first LEDs 432a are divided into two groups, the upper two and the remaining two, as connected by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 72. In addition, the eight second LEDs 432b are divided into three groups, the top two, the third to fifth three, and the sixth to eighth three, as shown by the dashed line in FIG. 72. Furthermore, the four third LEDs 432c are divided into two groups, the top two and the remaining two, as shown by the dashed line in FIG. 72. The two groups of first LEDs 432a, the three groups of second LEDs 432b, the two groups of third LEDs 432c, and the upper group of the two groups of third LEDs 433c on the lower right side decorative board 433 of the door frame are controlled by the LED driver 432d in 24 systems, and each group of the first LEDs 432a, second LEDs 432b, third LEDs 432c, and third LEDs 433c can emit light in full color in an appropriate color.

The door frame right side lower decorative board 433 is equipped with six first LEDs 433a mounted on the front surface at regular intervals in the vertical direction, twelve second LEDs 433b mounted on the front surface in pairs vertically aligned between the first LEDs 433a, four third LEDs 433c mounted on the rear surface at intervals in the vertical direction, and an LED driver 433d for illuminating the first LEDs 433a, the second LEDs 433b, and the two lower third LEDs 433c. The six first LEDs 433a are divided into three groups, with two in each group starting from the top, as connected by a two-dot chain line in Figure 72. Also, the 12 second LEDs 433b are divided into 4 groups, as shown by dashed lines in FIG. 72, consisting of 3 LEDs from the top, 1st to 3rd, 3 LEDs from the top, 4th to 6th, 3 LEDs from the top, 7th to 9th, and 3 LEDs from the top, 10th to 12th. Furthermore, the 4 rear third LEDs 433c are divided into 2 groups, consisting of the top 2 LEDs and the remaining 2 LEDs, as shown by dashed lines in FIG. 72. The 3 groups of 6 first LEDs 433a, the 4 groups of 12 second LEDs 433b, and the lower group of 2 third LEDs 433c are controlled by the LED driver 433d in 24 systems, and the first LEDs 433a, second LEDs 433b, and third LEDs 433c of each group can emit light in full color in an appropriate color.

In this embodiment, the upper left side decorative board 422 and the lower left side decorative board 423 of the door frame provided on the left side of the door window 101a, and the upper right side decorative board 432 and the lower right side decorative board 433 of the door frame provided on the right side of the door window 101a are formed in an asymmetric shape with the center of the door window 101a in the left-right direction as the boundary. In addition, the upper left side decorative board 422 and the lower left side decorative board 423 of the door frame and the upper right side decorative board 432 and the lower right side decorative board 433 have different shapes in the front-to-back direction.

The door frame upper left side decorative board 422 and lower left side decorative board 423 and the door frame upper right side decorative board 432 and lower right side decorative board 433 have the same number of first LEDs 422a, second LEDs 422b, first LED 423a, second LED 423b, and first LEDs 432a, second LED 432b, first LED 433a, second LED 433b mounted on their respective front surfaces, and are arranged symmetrically (systems connected by dashed lines and dashed double-dot lines in Figure 72). This makes it easy to create data for the lighting patterns of the LEDs to create light-emitting effects.

The door frame top center decorative board 455 is equipped with six LEDs 455a mounted on the front with spaces between them in the left-right direction, and an LED driver (not shown) for illuminating the LEDs 455a, the LEDs 456a on the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the LEDs 457a on the door frame top right decorative board 457. The six LEDs 455a are divided into three groups of two from the left, as connected by dashed lines in Figure 72. The six LEDs 455a divided into three groups are controlled by the LED driver in nine systems, and each group of LEDs 455a can emit light in a full range of appropriate colors.

The door frame top left decorative board 456 has four LEDs 456a mounted on the front, spaced apart in the left and right directions. The four LEDs 456a are divided into two sets, two on the left side and two on the right side, as connected by the dashed line in Figure 72. The two sets of four LEDs 456a are controlled in six systems by the LED driver on the door frame top center decorative board 455, and each set of LEDs 456a can emit light in a full range of appropriate colors.

The door frame top right decorative board 457 has four LEDs 457a mounted on the front, spaced apart in the left and right directions. The four LEDs 457a are divided into two sets, two on the left side and two on the right side, as connected by the dashed line in Figure 72. The two sets of four LEDs 457a are controlled in six systems by the LED driver of the door frame top center decorative board 455, and each set of LEDs 457a can emit light in a full range of appropriate colors.

According to the door frame 3 of this embodiment, the light from the first LED 422a on the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, the first LED 423a on the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, the first LED 432a on the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, and the first LED 433a on the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame is guided by the light guiding shaft portion 427a of the upper left side light guiding member 427, the light guiding shaft portion 428a of the middle left side light guiding member 428, the light guiding shaft portion 429a of the lower left side light guiding member 429, the light guiding shaft portion 436a of the upper right side light guiding member 436, and the light guiding shaft portion 437a of the lower right side light guiding member 437 to the opening 426a of the left side decorative body 426 of the door frame and the opening 435a of the right side decorative body 435 of the door frame, and is irradiated outward (forward). This allows the player to see a bright, dot-like light emission effect on the front of the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435, and the player can be taken aback by the dot-like, sparkling light emission effect that has not been seen in previous pachinko machines.

In addition, in the door frame 3, the LED 273a of the left dish decorative board 273, the LED 278a of the right dish decorative board 278, the second LED 422b of the upper left side decorative board 422 of the door frame, the second LED 423b of the lower left side decorative board 423 of the door frame, the second LED 432b of the upper right side decorative board 432 of the door frame, the second LED 433b of the lower right side decorative board 433 of the door frame, the LED 455a of the top center decorative board 455 of the door frame, the LED 456a of the top left decorative board 456 of the door frame, and the LED 457a of the top right decorative board 457 of the door frame can be appropriately illuminated, which surround the outer periphery of the door window 101a, making it possible to illuminate the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a, or to show the player an illuminated effect as light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

In other words, in the door frame 3, the LED system connected by the two-dot chain line in Figure 72 can be used to create a lighting effect that emits spot light on the front of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435, and the LED system connected by the one-dot chain line in Figure 72 can be used to create a lighting effect in which the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 emit light in a planar manner (surface emission).

In addition, according to the door frame 3, the light from the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a is guided by the light guiding shaft portion 427a, the light guiding shaft portion 428a, the light guiding shaft portion 429a, the light guiding shaft portion 436a, and the light guiding shaft portion 437a to the front end inserted into the opening 426a of the left side decorative body 426 of the door frame and the opening 435a of the right side decorative body 435 of the door frame, and is irradiated forward from there, so that the areas of the opening 426a and the opening 435a can be brightly spot-lit with high luminance compared to the general surfaces of the left side decorative body 426 of the door frame and the right side decorative body 435 of the door frame. In this case, since the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435 are positioned outside the door window 101a facing the game area 5a, even if the opening 426a of the door frame left side decoration 426 and the opening 435a of the door frame right side decoration 435 are illuminated with high brightness, the glare does not make it difficult to see inside the game area 5a as seen through the door window 101a, and the game ball B, performance images, decorations, etc. in the game area 5a can be clearly seen through the door window 101a.

In addition, according to the door frame 3, the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435 are protruded forward from the door window 101a (play area 5a), and the openings 426a and 435a that emit high-intensity spot light are provided at the ridges (on the vertical line connecting the front ends that protrude forward in an arc shape in a plan view) of the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435 that protrude forward, so the spot light is not irradiated to the rear side (door window 101a side). Therefore, the spot light emitted from the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435 is reflected toward the player by the glass plate 162 provided in the door window 101a, and the inside of the play area 5a behind the door window 101a is not difficult to see, and the high-intensity spot light can attract the attention of other players to this pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, according to the door frame 3, the spot light emitting portion is provided on the left side door frame decoration 426 and the right side door frame decoration 435, which protrude forward outside the door window 101a in the door frame 3, so that the spot light emitting portion is located at approximately the same position as the vicinity of the outer periphery of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, even if a player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, the player will not block the spot light because the spot light emitting portion is located outside the player. As a result, when the left side door frame decoration 426 and the right side door frame decoration 435 are made to emit spot light, the high-brightness spot light is visible to other players who are not seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, so the presence of the pachinko machine 1 can be appealed to other players, which can strongly attract the interest of players, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made to be highly appealing, capable of attracting players who are wandering around the game hall to choose a pachinko machine to play.

It is preferable that the surface LEDs (second LED 422b, second LED 423b, second LED 432b, second LED 433b) on both sides of the spot LED (first LED 422a, first LED 423a, first LED 432a, first LED 433a) for spot-illuminating the front of the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435 belong to the same system. As a result, the surface LEDs on both sides of the light guide pin (light guide shaft 427a, light guide shaft 428a, light guide shaft 429a, light guide shaft 436a, and light guide shaft 437a) that guides the light of the spot LEDs are in the same lighting state, so that the same amount of light is irradiated from both sides of the light guide pin at the same time, making it even more difficult to see the shadow of the light guide pin on the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 73, the door frame 3 is provided below the touch operation section 302 in the performance operation section 301 of the performance operation unit 300, and is equipped with a circular performance operation section outer periphery decorative board 320 with 31 LEDs 320a mounted on the upper surface. This performance operation section outer periphery decorative board 320 is equipped with two LED drivers for illuminating the 31 LEDs 320a. The performance operation section outer periphery decorative board 320 is divided into two parts, a front decorative board 321 and a rear decorative board 322.

Eighteen of the 31 LEDs 320a are mounted on the front decorative board 321 of the outer decorative board 320 of the performance operation unit. Of the 18 LEDs 320a on the front decorative board 321, six are spaced apart on a circumference close to the inner circumference, three are spaced apart on a circumference midway between the inner and outer circumferences, and the remaining nine are spaced apart on a circumference close to the outer circumference.

The remaining 13 LEDs 320a are mounted on the rear decorative board 322 of the outer decorative board 320 of the performance operation unit. Of the 13 LEDs 320a on the rear decorative board 322, four are provided with twos spaced apart near both ends of the arc on a circumference close to the inner circumference, three are provided with twos spaced apart on a circumference midway between the inner and outer circumferences, and the remaining six are provided with threes spaced apart near both ends of the arc on a circumference close to the outer circumference.

The 18 LEDs 320a on the front decorative board 321 are divided into 9 groups, as shown in Fig. 73, with the six on the inner circumference divided into three groups of two in the circumferential direction, the three on the middle circumference divided into three groups of one each, and the nine on the outer circumference divided into three groups of three in the circumferential direction. The 18 LEDs 320a on the rear decorative board 322 are divided into 7 groups, as shown in Fig. 73, with the four on the inner circumference divided into two groups of two near both ends, the three on the middle circumference divided into three groups of one each, and the nine on the outer circumference divided into two groups of three near both ends. In other words, the 31 LEDs 320a on the outer peripheral decorative board 320 of the performance operation unit are divided into 16 groups. These 16 groups of LEDs 320a are controlled by two LED drivers in 48 systems, and each group of LEDs 320a can emit light in a full range of appropriate colors.

With this decorative board 320 around the outer periphery of the effect operation unit, the 31 LEDs 320a (48 systems) can be appropriately illuminated to show the player light-emitting effects such as rotating light in the effect operation unit 301, light-emitting effects where light is concentrated in the center, and light-emitting effects where light spreads outward.

Furthermore, according to the door frame 3, a door frame left side decorative body 426 of the door frame left side unit 420 and a door frame right side decorative body 435 of the door frame right side unit 430 are provided on the outside of one side and the other side of the door window 101a facing the game area 5a, which extend up and down along the door window 101a so that the amount of protrusion in the front-to-rear direction differs from each other. Behind each of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435, there is a door frame left side upper decorative board 422 on which a plurality of first LEDs 422a and second LEDs 422b are mounted, a door frame left side lower decorative board 423 on which a plurality of first LEDs 423a and second LEDs 423b are mounted, and A door frame right side upper decorative board 432 on which a number of first LEDs 432a and second LEDs 432b are mounted, and a door frame right side lower decorative board 433 on which a number of first LEDs 433a and second LEDs 433b are mounted are provided. In addition, a light guide shaft portion 427a of a left side upper light guide member 427, a light guide shaft portion 428a of a left side middle light guide member 428, a light guide shaft portion 429a of a left side lower light guide member 429, and a light guide shaft portion 436 of a right side upper light guide member 436 are provided, which guide the light from the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a to the vicinity of the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 and irradiate it forward. Since the first LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b of the left side upper decorative board 422, the left side lower decorative board 423, the right side upper decorative board 432, and the right side lower decorative board 433 are provided, the left side decorative body 426 and the right side decorative body 435 can be illuminated in a planar manner (surface illumination) by illuminating the first LED 422a, the first LED 422b, and the second LED 422c of the left side upper decorative board 422, the left side lower decorative board 423, the right side upper decorative board 432, and the right side lower decorative board 433. 3a, when the first LED 432a and the first LED 433a are illuminated, the light irradiated forward is guided by the columnar light guiding shaft 427a, light guiding shaft 428a, light guiding shaft 429a, light guiding shaft 436a, and light guiding shaft 437a to the vicinity of the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435, and then radiated forward from their front ends (front end faces), allowing the areas corresponding to the tips of the light guiding shaft 427a, light guiding shaft 428a, light guiding shaft 429a, light guiding shaft 436a, and light guiding shaft 437a on the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 to be illuminated in a dot-like manner (spot illumination).

Therefore, by appropriately illuminating the first LED 422a and the second LED 422b, the first LED 423a and the second LED 423b, the first LED 432a and the second LED 432b, and the first LED 433a and the second LED 433b on the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, and the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame which are provided outside the play area 5a (door window 101a) can be illuminated. The entire right side decorative body 435 can be decorated with a surface-like light, parts of the left side decorative body 426 and the right side decorative body 435 can be decorated with point-like light, or the entire left side decorative body 426 and the right side decorative body 435 can be decorated with a surface-like light while parts of them can be decorated with point-like light, allowing players to see a variety of light-emitting effects, preventing players from getting bored and keeping them entertained, preventing a decline in interest in the game.

In this case, the system in which the multiple first LEDs 422a, second LED 422b, first LED 423a, and second LED 423b of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 are separated is symmetrical to the system in which the multiple first LEDs 432a, second LED 432b, first LED 433a, and second LED 433b of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 are separated, and the multiple first LEDs 422a, first LED 423a, first LED 432a, first LED 433a and the multiple second LEDs 422b, second LED 423b, second LED 432b, second LED 433b are in different systems, so that the first LED 422a, second LED 422b, first LED 423a, second LED 423b on the door frame left side decorative body 426 side and the first LED 432a on the door frame right side decorative body 435 side are in different systems. When creating data for the lighting patterns of D432a, the second LED 432b, the first LED 433a, and the second LED 433b, for example, it is possible to reuse data for the left side door frame decoration 426 as data for the right side door frame decoration 435, or to make the data flow similar for the left side door frame decoration 426 and the right side door frame decoration 435. This makes it possible to simplify the work required to create lighting pattern data, and makes it easier to build more complex lighting pattern data (with the same creation time). This allows players to see a variety of lighting patterns and a variety of lighting effects with high performance effects, and provides a pachinko machine 1 that can provide sufficient performance effects for the lighting effects in the left side door frame decoration 426 and the right side door frame decoration 435 on both the left and right outer sides of the door window 101a.

In addition, the two second LEDs 422b, 423b, 432b, and 433b arranged between the first LED 422a, 423a, 432a, and 433a are in the same system, so that the two second LEDs 422b, 423b, 432b, and 433b arranged to sandwich the first LED 422a, 423a, 432a, and 433a (light guide shaft portion 427a, light guide shaft portion 428a, light guide shaft portion 429a, light guide shaft portion 436a, light guide shaft portion 437a) are always lit at the same time, and therefore the light guide shaft portion 427a, light guide shaft portion 428a, light guide shaft portion 436a, light guide shaft portion 437a, light guide shaft portion 436 ... By irradiating light from both sides of the light axis portion 429a, the light guide axis portion 436a, and the light guide axis portion 437a, the shadows of the light guide axis portion 427a, the light guide axis portion 428a, the light guide axis portion 429a, the light guide axis portion 436a, and the light guide axis portion 437a caused by the light from the second LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b become lighter and less visible, making it possible to make the shadows of the light guide axis portion 427a, the light guide axis portion 428a, the light guide axis portion 429a, the light guide axis portion 436a, and the light guide axis portion 437a projected onto the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 less visible, allowing the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 to be illuminated and decorated in a uniform, planar manner.

The left door frame decoration 426 and the right door frame decoration 435, which are illuminated and decorated in a surface by the second LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b, can illuminate and decorate the areas corresponding to the front ends of the light guide shaft 427a, the light guide shaft 428a, the light guide shaft 429a, the light guide shaft 436a, and the light guide shaft 437a in a point-like manner by the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a. This allows players to see illumination effects that could not be seen in previous pachinko machines, such as surface illumination and partial point illumination, and can strongly attract the interest of players with illumination effects that emit bright point illumination, and can startle players with illumination effects that emit bright point illumination, which have not been seen in previous pachinko machines. This makes it possible to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to players.

Furthermore, the door frame upper left side decorative board 422 and lower left side decorative board 423 on one side (left side) in the left-right direction and the door frame upper right side decorative board 432 and lower right side decorative board 433 on the other side (right side) are asymmetrical in shape, so that the door frame upper left side decorative board 422, lower left side decorative board 423, upper right side decorative board 432, and lower right side decorative board 433 can be distinguished at a glance, making it possible to avoid making mistakes when assembling the door frame upper left side decorative board 422, lower left side decorative board 423, upper right side decorative board 432, and lower right side decorative board 433 during the assembly work of the pachinko machine 1, improving the ease of assembly and suppressing increases in costs.

[3-11. Identification of decorative substrate]
Next, the identification of various decorative boards on which LEDs are mounted in this pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Fig. 74, using the door frame 3 as an example. Fig. 74 is a rear view showing each decorative board provided around the door window of the door frame. Here, the following boards provided around the door window 101a in the door frame 3 are described in detail, taking as examples the left dish decorative board 273, the right dish decorative board 278, the upper left door frame decorative board 422, the lower left door frame decorative board 423, the upper right door frame decorative board 432, the lower right door frame decorative board 433, the top center door frame decorative board 455, the top left door frame decorative board 456, and the top right door frame decorative board 457.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, a white board is used for the decorative board on which the LEDs are mounted, and non-white LED drivers, connection connectors, etc. that are attached to the decorative board are attached to the rear side of the board. This allows the light from the LEDs mounted on the front side of the decorative board to be reflected forward, making the front decorations more brightly illuminated and decorative, while also making the decorative board less noticeable from the front (player side).

The white decorative board may be coated with a white solder resist (protective material), or the board material itself may be white.

Since the pachinko machine 1 has many decorative boards, a different identification section 7 is provided on the rear surface of each decorative board to make it easy to identify each one (see Figure 74). This identification section 7 has a character identification section 7a with characters such as kanji, kana, alphabet, symbols, numbers, model numbers, etc., and a color identification section 7b with different colors (shown in Figure 74 with different shades of shading).

In more detail, the character identification section 7a has the characters "lower left" on the left side decorative board 273, "lower right" on the right side decorative board 278, "upper left" on the upper left side decorative board 422 of the door frame, "lower left" on the lower left side decorative board 423 of the door frame, "upper right" on the upper right side decorative board 432 of the door frame, "lower right" on the lower right side decorative board 433 of the door frame, "upper middle" on the top center decorative board 455 of the door frame, "upper left" on the top left decorative board 456 of the door frame, and "upper right" on the top right decorative board 457 of the door frame.

The color identification portion 7b is a different color for each decorative board and is applied across almost the entire front surface of the rear surface. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 74, the color identification portion 7b is applied partially, not across the entire rear surface, so as not to interfere with the soldering of LEDs and other components mounted on the decorative board.

The identification portion 7 is applied to the decorative substrate by printing (silkscreen printing), attaching a sticker, applying paint, etc.

In the above, the decorative board provided around the door window 101a in the door frame 3 has been described as an example, but identification units 7 such as character identification unit 7a and color identification unit 7b may also be provided on various decorative boards provided on the handle unit 180, the performance operation unit 300, the game board 5, etc.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the identification unit 7 is shown to have both the character identification unit 7a and the color identification unit 7b, but this is not limited to this, and it may be the character identification unit 7a only, or the color identification unit 7b only.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the decorative board on which the LEDs are mounted is provided with an identification section 7 (character identification section 7a and color identification section 7b), so decorative boards of similar shapes can be easily distinguished, preventing the wrong decorative board from being installed during assembly work and improving the workability of assembly.

In addition, with the pachinko machine 1, the identification unit 7 is provided on the rear surface of the decorative board, so the front side of the decorative board can be made as white as possible, and the light from the LEDs mounted on the front side of the decorative board can be reflected forward by the front side of the decorative board, allowing the decorative objects in front to be more brightly illuminated and decorated, while also making the decorative board less noticeable from the front (player's side), improving its appearance.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1, the color identification portion 7b as the identification portion 7 is applied over almost the entire decorative board, so that it is possible to recognize whether or not the decorative board is the desired one (desired color) just by looking at a part of the decorative board. Therefore, even if multiple types of decorative boards are overlapping during assembly, etc., the desired decorative board can be easily found as long as a part of the decorative board is visible, and the effort required for assembly can be simplified.

In addition, according to the pachinko machine 1, the color of the color identification portion 7b is different for each decorative board, so that when preparing the decorative boards required for one pachinko machine 1 during assembly, if there is a decorative board with the same color identification portion 7b, it is easy to recognize that the same decorative board has been prepared in duplicate. Or, if there is not enough color in the color identification portion 7b of the prepared decorative board, it is easy to recognize that there is a decorative board that has not been prepared. Therefore, when preparing the decorative boards required for the assembly of the pachinko machine 1, it is easy to recognize that an excess decorative board has been prepared or that the prepared decorative board is insufficient, so that it is possible to reliably prepare only the necessary amount of decorative boards, and it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 easy to set up during assembly. Therefore, the assembly work of the pachinko machine 1 can be performed smoothly, and the time required for assembly can be shortened to suppress an increase in costs.

In addition, according to the pachinko machine 1, the rear surface of the decorative board is provided with a character identification section 7a as an identification section 7 for distinguishing it from other boards, so that an operator can easily tell which part the decorative board belongs to by reading the characters on the character identification section 7a, and the same effect as described above can be achieved.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1, the front and rear of each decorative board are white, and an identification part 7 is provided on the rear, so that even if the decorative body provided in front of the decorative board is highly transparent, the decorative board is less noticeable from the front (player's side), improving the appearance of the decorative body, and the white front of the decorative board makes it possible to reflect the light from the LED forward, allowing the decorative body to emit light more brightly, and the highly effective light-emitting performance entertains the player and prevents a decline in interest.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1, functional components such as LED drivers are provided on the rear surface of the decorative substrate and are not visible from the front (player side), which makes it possible to avoid the poor appearance caused by the functional components being visible through the decorative body, and improves the appearance of the decorative body (gaming machine). Furthermore, since the functional components are not visible by being provided on the rear surface of the decorative substrate, there is no need to color the functional components white (or yellow) so that they are not noticeable, and the functional components can be used as is, which eliminates the effort of coloring the functional components and suppresses increases in costs associated with the pachinko machine 1.

[3-12. Function and effect of door frame]
According to this embodiment, the switching unit 394 is used to switch between a contact detection body 393 provided at a desired location where it is desired to detect the approach or contact of a player and the contact detection sensor main body 392, for a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 provided at different locations in the pachinko machine 1. When a player approaches or touches the contact detection body 393 at the desired location, the capacitance of the contact detection body 393 changes, and the change in capacitance can be detected by the contact detection sensor main body 392 connected to the contact detection body 393. As a result, the approach or contact of the player to the desired location can be detected, and predetermined control can be executed by control means such as the main control board 1310, peripheral control board 1510, peripheral control unit 1511, and performance display control unit 1512 in response to detection by the contact detection sensor main body 392. On the other hand, when the switching unit 394 connects the contact detection body 393 at the desired location to the contact detection sensor main body 392, the connection between the contact detection body 393 at other locations and the contact detection sensor main body 392 is cut off. Therefore, even if the capacitance of the contact detection body 393 at other locations changes when the player approaches or touches the other locations, the change in capacitance of the contact detection body 393 is not detected because the contact detection body 393 has been cut off by the switching unit 394, and only the capacitance of the contact detection body 393 at the desired location can be reliably detected, preventing erroneous detection.

In this way, the contact detector 393 connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 is appropriately selected and switched by the switching unit 394 for multiple contact detectors 393 installed at different positions, so that it is possible to detect the capacitance of multiple contact detectors 393 with one contact detection sensor main body 392, and the number of channels required for detecting the approach or contact of the player in the control means such as the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control unit 1511, and the performance display control unit 1512 can be reduced, and the number of channels that can be used for performance can be relatively increased. Therefore, since it is possible to control more performance means (for example, movable decorations, luminous decorations, performance display devices, etc.) by the control means, a more diverse performance can be presented to the player by increasing the number of performance means, making it less likely for the player to get bored and allowing the player to fully enjoy the game, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, by providing contact detectors 393 at multiple locations on the pachinko machine 1 that should not be touched by the player, and by connecting the contact detectors 393 provided at the desired locations to the contact detection sensor body 392 by a switching unit 394 depending on the game status, it is possible to detect the player's approach to or contact with the desired locations and to cause the control means, such as the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control unit 1511, and the performance display control unit 1512, to issue a specified warning or alarm. This makes it possible to monitor a wide area of the pachinko machine 1 with one contact detection sensor body 392 while relatively increasing the number of channels that can be used for performance, and to achieve the same effect as described above.

In addition, since the capacitance of multiple contact detectors 393 is detected by one contact detection sensor body 392, each contact detector 393 and the contact detection sensor body 392 are located apart, so the sensor body containing electronic components such as a sensor IC and output circuit can be located in a location that is difficult for players to see, improving the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 and increasing its appeal to players.

Furthermore, since the contact detection sensor main body 392 is provided with connection terminals for electrically connecting multiple contact detection bodies 393, the capacitance of the contact detection body 393 can be detected by the contact detection sensor main body 392 simply by connecting the wiring from the contact detection body 393 to the connection terminal of the contact detection sensor main body 392, which simplifies the process of assembling the pachinko machine 1 and suppresses any increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, the contact detection sensor main body 392 is provided with a connection terminal in advance, and the contact detection sensor main body 392 and the contact detection body 393 can be connected simply by connecting the wiring from the contact detection body 393 to the connection terminal of the contact detection sensor main body 392. This reduces the number of parts compared to when a conductive member is brought into contact with the sensor electrode of the contact detection sensor main body 392 and connected to the contact detection body 393 via the conductive member, thereby reducing the cost of the pachinko machine 1 and eliminating the need to design the layout of the conductive member for connecting to the contact detection body 393. This increases the freedom of arrangement of the contact detection body 393 and the contact detection sensor main body 392, making it easier to realize a pachinko machine 1 that achieves the above-mentioned effects.

In addition, a switching unit 394 is provided for switching the contact detector 393 connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392, and the contact detector 393 to be detected can be selected by the switching unit 394. For example, when a player-participation type presentation is performed in which multiple contact detectors 393 are distributed and the multiple distributed contact detectors 393 are touched in a predetermined order, the switching unit 394 switches the contact detector 393 connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 at the timing when the player touches the contact detectors 393 in order, so that it is possible to detect whether the player touched the contact detectors 393 in the correct order. This makes it possible to realize a highly game-like player-participation type presentation with a single contact detection sensor main body 392, and a pachinko machine 1 that is more entertaining to players can be provided.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, in the presentation operation unit 300 in the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3, when the player's fingers approach or come into contact with the button body 351 in the presentation operation unit 350 that can be operated by the player by pressing it, the player approaches the contact detector 352 made of a punched metal plate whose player side is covered by the button body 351, and the capacitance of the contact detector 352 changes. Since the capacitance of this contact detector 352 is detected by the contact detection sensor body 358, it is possible to detect the change in capacitance of the contact detector 352, and therefore it is possible to detect the approach or contact of the player to the button body 351 (presentation operation unit 350) via the contact detector 352.

In this way, when the approach or contact of the player to the performance operation unit 350 is detected using the contact detector 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, a predetermined performance is output to the player side through the contact detector 352 and the button main body 351 by the performance means such as the button outer decorative board 355, the vibration motor 356, the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360, the button inner decorative board 364, and the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380, so that the player can be entertained by the performance and the decrease in the player's interest in the game can be suppressed. At this time, when the player approaches or contacts the performance operation unit 350, a predetermined performance is output, so that the performance operation unit 350 can function as a non-contact operation unit or a contact operation unit by the contact detector 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358. Furthermore, because the presentation operation unit 350, which functions as a non-contact operation unit and a contact operation unit, can be pressed by the player when it is extended, a variety of presentation operations such as non-contact operations, contact operations, and pressing operations can be performed with the presentation operation unit 350, making it easier to realize a pachinko machine 1 with an appearance that differs from conventional pachinko machines equipped with operation buttons that can only be pressed, and by differentiating it from other pachinko machines, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

In addition, a predetermined effect is output to the player in response to the detection of the capacitance of the contact detector 352 by the contact sensor main body 358. Since the capacitance differs depending on the distance between the contact detector 352 (button main body 351) and the player, it is possible to set multiple capacitance thresholds and output different effects for each threshold. Therefore, it is possible to detect the time (distance) from when the player approaches the button main body 351 (effect operation unit 350) to when the player makes contact in multiple stages, and by outputting effects according to each stage, it is possible to present a wider variety of effects to the player, making it less likely for the player to become bored and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, since the contact detection sensor main body 358 that detects the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 is located away from the contact detection body 352, the contact detection sensor main body 358, which has electronic components such as a sensor IC and an output circuit, can be located in a part of the performance operation unit 350 that is difficult for the player to see, improving the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 and increasing its appeal to players.

In addition, as described above, the operation unit can perform a variety of presentation operations such as non-contact operations, contact operations, and pressing operations. By implementing a player-participation type presentation that allows the player to operate the presentation, it is possible to allow the player to enjoy a variety of presentation operations, making it less likely for the player to become bored, and allowing the player to enjoy the player-participation type presentation, which can prevent the player's interest in the game from declining.

Furthermore, since the contact detector 352, whose capacitance is detected by the contact sensor main body 358, is a punched metal made of a metal plate with multiple holes formed therein, the multiple holes can reduce the capacitance of the contact detector 352 when the player is not approaching or touching the button main body 351, thereby preventing erroneous detection by the contact sensor main body 358. Therefore, by appropriately selecting the number, size, arrangement, etc. of the multiple holes, it is possible to increase the area of the contact detector 352 while suppressing an increase in capacitance, and therefore the range in which the contact detector 352 detects the approach or contact of the player to the button main body 351 (performance operation unit 350) can be widened. This allows the contact detector 352 to be enlarged to widen the detection range, so if the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) that the player can press is enlarged as in the above embodiment, and the contact detector 352 is made the same size as the upper surface 351a of the button body 351, when the player is required to approach or touch the performance operation unit 350 (button body 351) due to the execution of a player-participation type performance, the contact detector 352 covered by the button body 351 is as large as the upper surface 351a of the button body 351, so the movement distance for the player's fingers to approach or touch the performance operation unit 350 is shortened, and the performance operation unit 350 can be operated quickly, making it difficult to miss the operation timing in the player-participation type performance and allowing the player to reliably participate in the player-participation type performance, and the performance can entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, because the contact detector 352 is made of punched metal, the light emission effects from the LEDs 364a of the button decorative board 364, which acts as an effect means and is provided on the opposite side of the contact detector 352 from the player side, can be output to the player side through multiple holes formed in the contact detector 352, ensuring that the player can enjoy the light emission effects and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, since the touch detector 352 is provided on the presentation operation unit 350 (button body 351) that can be operated by pressing, the presentation operation unit 350 can be reinforced by the touch detector 352 made of punched metal, which is a metal plate with a certain degree of strength and rigidity, and the presentation operation unit 350 is less likely to deform or break even if the player presses or hits the presentation operation unit 350 (button body 351) hard when performing a pressing operation. Therefore, since the touch detector 352 makes it difficult to damage the presentation operation unit 350, the player can press the presentation operation unit 350 without any worries, and the player can enjoy the player-participation type presentation in which the presentation operation unit 350 is operated, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, the contact detector 352 is made of punched metal, and compared to a case in which the contact detector 352 is made of expanded metal processed from a metal plate of the same thickness, the thickness of the contact detector 352 can be made thinner. This makes it easier to secure space for the contact detector 352, makes it easier to install the contact detector 352, and increases the degree of freedom in design, making it easier to design a pachinko machine 1 that is more appealing to players.

In addition, because the contact detector 352 is made of punched metal, the plate thickness is consistent compared to expanded metal, making it easy to process the contact detector 352 into a desired three-dimensional shape by pressing. This makes it easier to make the contact detector 352 into an optimal shape for detecting the player's approach to or contact with the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350), and ensures the realization of the above-mentioned effects.

In addition, in the performance operation unit 350, the button body 351 covers the player side of the contact detector 352, so the button body 351 prevents the player from directly touching the contact detector 352, which is made of punched metal with multiple holes formed therein. This prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable when touching the contact detector 352 with multiple holes formed therein, and allows the button body 351 to be operated without feeling strange in player participation performances that use the button body 351 as the operation unit, allowing the player to enjoy the performance and preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, because the player side of the contact detector 352 made of punched metal is covered by the button body 351, the multiple holes formed in the contact detector 352 do not become contaminated with dust, food, drink, or other contaminants, making cleaning much easier and reducing the burden on the gaming hall that installs the pachinko machine 1 as an easy-to-clean pachinko machine 1.

In addition, presentation means such as the button outer decorative board 355, vibration motor 356, presentation operation unit lifting mechanism 360, button inner decorative board 364, and protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 are provided on the opposite side of the contact detector 352 from the player side, making it possible to output a specified presentation to the player side through the contact detector 352 and the button body 351.When the contact detection sensor body 358 detects the player's approach or contact with the button body 351 (presentation operation unit 350), a specified presentation is output through the multiple holes formed in the contact detector 352 and the transparent button body 351, so that the player's attention can be strongly attracted to the presentation operation unit 350, and the presentation output through (via) the presentation operation unit 350 can be enjoyed reliably, preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, since the presentation means such as the button outer decorative board 355, vibration motor 356, presentation operation unit lifting mechanism 360, button inner decorative board 364, and protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 are arranged on the opposite side of the contact detector 352 from the player side, the presentation means are covered by the contact detector 352, and the contact detector 352 (presentation operation unit 350) and presentation means can be compactly arranged. This makes it easier to arrange the presentation operation unit 350 and presentation means that achieve the above-mentioned effects in the desired location on the pachinko machine 1, making it easier to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is appealing and can be differentiated from other pachinko machines.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, when a player approaches or touches the performance operation unit 350 (button body 351) that is provided in the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3 so as to be movable up and down, the capacitance of the contact detector 352 of the performance operation unit 350 changes, so that the capacitance of the contact detector 352 can be detected by the contact detection sensor body 358 to detect the approach or contact of the player to the performance operation unit 350. When the contact detection sensor body 358 detects the approach or contact of the player to the performance operation unit 350, the performance operation unit 350 protrudes upward due to the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 of the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360. Therefore, when the performance operation unit 350 protrudes when the player is not in contact with the performance operation unit 350, it abuts (collides) with the player, and when the performance operation unit 350 protrudes when the player is in contact with the performance operation unit 350, a performance by a physical force such as pushing the player can be presented to the player. Therefore, it is possible to make a strong impact on the player with a performance that has not been seen in previous pachinko machines, strongly drawing the player's attention to the performance operation unit 350 and ensuring that the player notices the protrusion of the performance operation unit 350.

When the performance operation unit 350 is protruded, if the lift spring lower holding member 385 of the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 is moved in the direction (upward) toward the upper end side of the lift spring 365, the compression of the lift spring 365 becomes stronger and the biasing force can be increased, and if it is moved in the direction (downward) away from the upper end side of the lift spring 365, the compression of the lift spring 365 becomes weaker and the biasing force can be reduced. By moving the lift spring lower holding member 385 to an appropriate position, the biasing force of the performance operation unit 350 by the lift spring 365 can be changed. In this way, since the performance operation unit 350 can be protruded with various protruding forces, the variety of performances by physical forces can be increased, the player can be less likely to get bored, and the player can enjoy the performance by the protrusion of the performance operation unit 350, which can suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, the thrust force of the presentation operation unit 350 is changed according to the game state, so that when a player approaches or touches the presentation operation unit 350 with a strong force, a strong impact is given to the player, making the player feel strongly that something good is about to happen (for example, the occurrence of a favorable game state that gives the player an advantage), increasing anticipation for the game and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, since the performance operation unit 350 is a pressing operation unit 303 that can be operated by pressing, when a player-participation type performance is executed, the player can be made to press the performance operation unit 350, thereby making it possible for the player to participate in the player-participation type performance, and thus making the player enjoy pressing the performance operation unit 350 and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, since the performance operation unit 350 can be operated by pressing, for a player who places his/her fingers on the performance operation unit 350 (the upper surface of the button body 351) so that he/she can press it at any time, when a player-participation performance is executed in which the performance operation unit 350 is pressed, the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 causes the performance operation unit 350 to protrude, allowing the player to quickly recognize the start of the player-participation performance without being notified of the start of the player-participation performance by performance images, sounds, etc., and this increases the player's desire to press the performance operation unit 350, making the player-participation performance even more enjoyable.

Furthermore, because the performance operation unit 350 is protruded by the force of the lifting spring 365 in the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360, the performance operation unit 350 can be protruded easily and forcefully compared to a case in which the performance operation unit 350 is protruded using a drive motor, making it easier to achieve the above-mentioned effects.

The contact sensor body 358 detects the capacitance of the contact detector 352 to detect the approach or contact of the player to the performance operation unit 350. Since the capacitance of the contact detector 352 varies depending on the distance between the performance operation unit 350 and the player, multiple capacitance thresholds can be set, and the performance operation unit 350 can be protruded with a different protruding force for each threshold. Therefore, the contact sensor body 358 can detect the distance from the approach of the player's fingers to the performance operation unit 350 in multiple stages, and by protruding with a protruding force according to each stage, a more diverse performance can be presented to the player, making it less likely for the player to get bored and suppressing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, when the player approaches or touches the performance operation unit 350, which is arranged to be movable forward and backward by popping up the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3 by executing a player participation type performance, the capacitance of the contact detector 352 provided on the back side of the button body 351 that the player touches on the performance operation unit 350 changes. On the other hand, the contact detection sensor main body 358 provided away from the contact detector 352 on the performance operation unit 350 detects the capacitance of the contact detector 352, and can capture the change in capacitance of the contact detector 352 due to the approach or contact of the player, so that it can detect the approach or contact of the player to the button body 351 of the performance operation unit 350, and the contact detection sensor main body 358 can detect the player by capacitance. Then, when the contact detection sensor body 358 detects the movement of the performance operation unit 350 forward or backward (pressing) by the player, a predetermined performance is executed by the performance means such as the performance operation unit outer decorative board 320, the button outer decorative board 355, the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360, the button inner decorative board 364, the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380, and the performance display device 1600. In other words, a predetermined performance is executed when the player moves the performance operation unit 350 forward or backward or approaches or touches the performance operation unit 350, so that the player can be entertained by the performance and the decrease in the player's interest in the game can be suppressed.

At this time, when the player approaches or touches the performance operation unit 350, a performance is executed, so that the performance operation unit 350 (button body 351) can be made to function like a performance operation unit (non-contact operation unit, contact operation unit). On the other hand, when the player moves the performance operation unit 350 forward or backward (presses), a performance is executed, so that the performance operation unit 350 can be made to function like a performance operation unit (pressing operation unit). As a result, the player can perform a variety of performance operations, so by executing a player-participation type performance that allows the player to operate the performance, it is possible to enjoy a variety of performance operations, making it difficult for the player to become bored, and it is possible to allow the player to enjoy the player-participation type performance, which can suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

The player is detected by the capacitance of the contact detector 352 provided near the part of the button body 351 of the effect operation unit 350 that the player touches (below the upper surface 351a). The capacitance of the contact detector 352 varies depending on the distance between the contact detector 352 (button body 351) and the player, so it is possible to provide multiple capacitance thresholds for executing a predetermined effect and execute a different effect for each threshold. Therefore, it is possible to detect the distance from the approach of the player's fingers to the effect operation unit 350 to contact in multiple stages, so that by presenting effects according to each stage, a wider variety of effects can be presented to the player, making it less likely for the player to get bored and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, a predetermined effect is executed when the contact detector 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358 detect the player, so that the effect can impart a sense of operation to the effect operation (non-contact operation, contact operation) using the contact detector 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, allowing the player to enjoy the effect operation even more.

Furthermore, since the device is equipped with a performance operation unit 350 that can be advanced and retreated (pressed) by the player, and a contact detector 352 and a contact detection sensor main body 358 that can detect the player's approach or contact with the performance operation unit 350, it is possible to request the player to perform a variety of operations in a player-participation type performance, such as an operation to advance and retreat the performance operation unit 350 (pressing operation) or an operation to approach or touch the performance operation unit 350 with a finger (non-contact operation, contact operation). The various operations can increase the player's motivation to participate in the player-participation type performance, making it easier for the player to participate in the player-participation type performance. And, when the player participates in the player-participation type performance, the various operations using the performance operation unit 350, the contact detector 352, and the contact detection sensor main body 358 can prevent the player from getting bored, and can enjoy the player-participation type performance, thereby suppressing a decline in the player's interest.

In addition, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 of the performance operation unit 350 can be locked so that it cannot move forward or backward by engaging the locking portion 371c of the lifting cam member 371 in the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360, so that the performance operation unit 350 can be prevented from moving or swinging on its own by keeping the performance operation unit 350 unable to move forward or backward using the guide pin 354c and the lifting cam member 371 until a performance is performed that moves the performance operation unit 350 forward or backward. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the player feeling distrustful or uneasy due to the performance operation unit 350 moving or swinging on its own, and to make the performance by the performance operation unit 350 more enjoyable.

Furthermore, in the performance operation unit 350, the contact detection sensor main body 358 is arranged at a position away from the contact detector 352, so that the contact detection sensor main body 358, which contains electronic components such as a sensor IC and an output circuit, can be arranged in a location that is difficult for the player to see, improving the appearance of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, since the contact detector 352 for detecting capacitance and the contact sensor main body 358 having a sensor IC and output circuit that detects the capacitance of the contact detector 352 are separate, the shape and material of the contact detector 352 can be selected appropriately regardless of the contact sensor main body 358. This allows the contact detector 352 to be made to optimally correspond to the shape, form, and specifications of the button main body 351 of the performance operation unit 350, and ensures the realization of a pachinko machine 1 that provides the above-mentioned effects.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, in the performance operation unit 300 of the door frame 3, when a player approaches or touches the button body 351 or surface member 396 covering the button outer decorative substrate 355, the button inner decorative substrate 364, or the decorative body 398 with his/her fingers, the capacitance of the contact detector 352 or contact detector 397 provided between the button body 351 or surface member 396 and the button outer decorative substrate 355, the button inner decorative substrate 364, or the decorative body 398 changes, and in response to this change, a predetermined performance is executed in which light is irradiated toward the player by the button outer decorative substrate 355, the button inner decorative substrate 364, or the decorative body 398. Therefore, the light irradiated toward the player can strongly attract the player's attention to the button outer decorative substrate 355, the button inner decorative substrate 364, or the decorative body 398, and the executed performance can entertain the player. In this case, the contact detector 352 or contact detector 397 provided between the button body 351 or surface member 396 and the outer button decorative substrate 355 or inner button decorative substrate 364 or decorative body 398 is formed to conform to the decorative portion provided on the button body 351 or surface member 396, giving the player the illusion that the contact detector 352 or contact detector 397 is part of the decorative portion, making it impossible for the player to recognize that the contact detector 352 or contact detector 397 is intended to detect the player.

In this way, since the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 cannot be recognized by the player, even if the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 blocks part of the button outer decorative board 355, the button inner decorative board 364, or the decoration 398 (effect), the player will not be bothered by the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397, and even if the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 is placed in front of the button outer decorative board 355, the button inner decorative board 364, or the decoration 398, the presence of the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 will not cause the player to feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the effect of the button outer decorative board 355, the button inner decorative board 364, or the decoration 398 can be shown to the player in good condition, entertaining the player and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, by detecting the approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like to the button body 351 or surface member 396 by the contact detector 352 or contact detector 397, an effect is executed in which light is irradiated towards the player from the button outer decorative substrate 355, button inner decorative substrate 364 or decorative body 398, which are covered by the button body 351 or surface member 396. This makes it possible to make the button body 351 or surface member 396 function like the effect operation unit 301 (contact operation unit 302), and gives the player the feeling of operating through light. Therefore, for example, when a player participation type performance is executed, the player's fingers or the like approach or contact the button body 351 or the surface member 396, and when the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 detects the approach or contact of the fingers or the like, a performance is executed by the button outer decorative board 355, the button inner decorative board 364, or the decorative body 398, allowing the player to participate in the player participation type performance and to enjoy the player participation type performance.

Furthermore, since the contact detector 352 or contact detector 397 detects the player's approach to or contact with the button body 351 or surface member 396, it is possible to vary the presentation provided by the button outer decorative board 355, button inner decorative board 364, or decorative body 398 depending on the distance between the button body 351 or surface member 396 and the player's fingers, etc., so that the presentation provided by the button outer decorative board 355, button inner decorative board 364, or decorative body 398 can be changed depending on the movement (position) of the player's fingers, etc., allowing the player to see a more diverse presentation, which makes it less likely for the player to become bored, and prevents the player's interest from declining.

In addition, the change in capacitance of the contact detector 352 or contact detector 397 is detected, and when the player approaches or touches the button body 351 or surface member 396, the capacitance of the contact detector 352 or contact detector 397 located between the button body 351 or surface member 396 and the button outer decorative board 355, button inner decorative board 364, or decorative body 398 changes, so that the approach or contact of the player's fingers, etc. to the button body 351 or surface member 396 can be easily detected, and the pachinko machine 1 that provides the above-mentioned effects can be reliably realized.

In addition, since the change in capacitance is detected by the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397, the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 397 can be made of a conductive material. For example, if the contact detector 397 is made of a metal vapor deposition film, the vapor deposition film can be made thin to make it transparent, and if the vapor deposition film is made thick to give it a metallic luster, it can be made to look like part of the decoration. Alternatively, if the contact detector 352 and the contact detector 395 are made of punched metal with a design shape such as a star or heart shape, the contact detector 352 and the contact detector 395 can be made to look like part of the decoration. In this way, the contact detector 352, the contact detector 395, and the contact detector 397 can be made unrecognizable to the player, and the above-mentioned effects can be reliably achieved.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, in the performance operation unit 300 of the door frame 3, the capacitance changes when the player's finger or the like approaches or touches the transparent button body 351 covering the upper side (surface side), and this change causes the contact detector 395 etc. (including contact detector 352, left contact detector 390L, right contact detector 390R, contact detector 393, contact detector 397, etc.) to present a predetermined performance by the performance presentation means such as the button outer decorative board 355, vibration motor 356, performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360, button inner decorative board 364, protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380, and performance display device 1600, are formed into a predetermined outer peripheral shape with a design, so that the contact detector 395 itself can decorate the pachinko machine 1, making it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that looks good and has a high appeal to players. In addition, the front side of the contact detector 395 etc. is covered with the transparent button body 351, and a predetermined effect is presented by the effect presenting means through the button body 351 and the contact detector 395 etc. in response to a change in the capacitance of the contact detector 395 etc. due to the approach of the player's finger etc. to the contact detector 395, so that the button body 351 can function as the effect operation unit 301. And, since the contact detector 395 etc. visible through the button body 351 has design, the effect operation unit 301 appears to have design, so that the pachinko machine 1 can have a strong impact on the player as a pachinko machine 1 equipped with the effect operation unit 301 not found in previous pachinko machines, and can be a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can be differentiated from other pachinko machines. Also, as mentioned above, the design of the contact detector 395 etc. can make a strong impact on the player, which can make the player take a strong interest in the contact detector 395 etc. (button body 351) and heighten the player's anticipation for operating the button body 351 (performance operation unit 301). In addition, when a player-participation performance in which the player operates the button body 351 is executed, the player can enjoy operating the button body 351, and the player's interest can be prevented from declining.

In addition, the contact detector 395, etc., which detects the approach or contact of the player's fingers, etc., to the button body 351, is formed into an outer circumferential shape with a design, so that at first glance, some players may not notice the presence of the performance operation unit 301 (button body 351) for presenting a performance by the performance presentation means. Therefore, when a player-participation type performance in which the performance operation unit 301 is operated is executed, the player is prompted to approach or touch the button body 351, and it is possible to make the player realize for the first time that the button body 351 is the performance operation unit 301 by the contact detector 395, etc., which gives the player an element of surprise and makes the player-participation type performance more enjoyable. Alternatively, when a player-participation type effect is executed by operating the effect operation unit 301, if the player approaches or touches the button body 351 with a finger or the like without knowing that it is the effect operation unit 301, the capacitance of the contact detector 395, etc. changes and an effect is presented by the effect presentation means, which can surprise the player and entertain the player with the presented effect, preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, because the effects are presented by the effect presentation means in response to changes in capacitance in the contact detector 395, etc., it is possible to easily detect the approach or contact of the player's fingers, etc., with the button body 351 covering the contact detector 395, etc., and it is easy to realize a pachinko machine 1 that achieves the above-mentioned effects. Also, because the effects are presented in response to changes in capacitance in the contact detector 395, etc., it is possible to detect the time (distance) from when the player's fingers, etc., approach to the button body 351 covering the contact detector 395, etc., to when they make contact in multiple stages, so by presenting effects according to each stage, it is possible to present a wider variety of effects to the player, making it less likely for the player to become bored and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, because the outer periphery of the contact detector 395, etc. is formed into a predetermined shape, even if inorganic materials such as punched metal, expanded metal, or wire mesh are used as the conductive contact detector 395, etc., it is possible to impart design to the contact detector 395, etc., prevent the contact detector 395, etc. from deteriorating the appearance, and make the contact detector 395, etc. stand out, making it easier to realize a pachinko machine 1 that achieves the above-mentioned effects.

In addition, because the outer periphery of the contact detector 395 and the like is formed into a predetermined shape, it is possible to construct a design that has a unique design without forming the contact detector 395 and the like into a three-dimensional shape. Therefore, the contact detector 395 and the like can be made into a planar shape or a simple three-dimensional shape, and the manufacturing costs of the contact detector 395 and the like can be reduced.

Furthermore, since the surface side of the contact detector 395, etc. is covered with the transparent button body 351, dirt such as dust and food and drink does not adhere to the contact detector 395, etc., and the effort required for cleaning can be reduced. In more detail, since the contact detector 395, etc. is made of uneven material such as punched metal, dirt such as dust and food and drink easily adheres to the unevenness, and cleaning the dirt is time-consuming. However, since the surface side of the contact detector 395, etc. is covered with the button body 351, even if the contact detector 395, etc. is made of uneven material such as punched metal, the button body 351 can prevent dirt from adhering, and the easy cleaning reduces the burden on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

In addition, the surface side of the contact detector 395, etc. is covered with the transparent button body 351 to prevent the player from touching the contact detector 395, etc. Therefore, if a material that enhances the design, such as a metal deposition film or foil stamping, is used as the contact detector 395, etc., it is possible to prevent early wear due to the player's touch, and the durability of the contact detector 395, etc. can be increased.

Furthermore, the surface side of the contact detector 395 etc. is covered with the transparent button body 351, and as described above, the transparent button body 351 prevents the player from directly touching the contact detector 395 etc., making it possible to use contact detectors 395 etc. that are unpleasant to the touch or that may cause discomfort to the player. This increases the freedom in the materials used for the contact detector 395 etc., and allows the contact detector 395 etc. to be formed from materials suited to needs.

In addition, when the capacitance of the contact detector 395 etc. is changed by bringing the player's finger etc. close to or into contact with the button body 351 covering the contact detector 395 etc., a predetermined effect is presented to the player via the button body 351 and the contact detector 395 etc., and the effect presented via the button body 351 and the contact detector 395 etc. allows the player to intuitively recognize that the player has brought the finger etc. close to or into contact with the button body 351, allowing the player to enjoy the movement of the finger etc.

In addition, effects are presented to the player via the button body 351 and the contact detector 395, etc., and effects presented to the player via the button body 351 and the contact detector 395, etc. are executed when the player's fingers, etc. approach or touch the button body 351, which covers the contact detector 395, etc., so that the button body 351 can function like a touch operation unit, and the presented effects can give the player a sense of operation, allowing the player to enjoy operations using the button body 351 (player-participation effects).

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, in order to operate the button body 351 of the effect operation unit 350, which is capable of multiple operations, the player approaches or touches the button body 351 with his/her fingers, etc., and when the contact detector 352 (contact detection sensor body 358) detects the entry of the fingers, etc. into the detection area, a light emission effect is executed in which light is irradiated to the player through the button body 351 by the emission of the multiple LEDs 355a on the button outer decorative board 355 and the multiple LEDs 364a on the button inner decorative board 364, an effect in which the player's fingers, etc. that are in contact through (via) the button body 351 by the vibration motor 356, an effect in which the button body 351 is protruded upward by the effect operation unit lifting mechanism 360, and an effect in which an impact, push-up, wind pressure, etc. are applied to the player through (via) the button body 351, etc. are executed, so that the button body 351 can function as the contact operation unit 302, and the player can be entertained. At this time, effects such as light, vibration, impact, pushing up, and wind pressure are given to the player through the button body 351, so that the effects can surprise and entertain the player, increasing the player's motivation to operate the button body 351. Then, when the player's fingers or the like are in contact with the button body 351, the button body 351 functions as the pressing operation unit 303 by appropriately moving the fingers or the like to press the button body 351 downward, so that the player can enjoy a variety of performance operations through the contact operation by the contact detector 352 detecting the approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like and the pressing operation of the button body 351, making it difficult for the player to become bored and preventing a decline in interest.

The detection means for detecting the approach or contact of the player's fingers, etc., is composed of the contact detector 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, and the contact detector 352 is provided near the back surface of the top surface 351a of the button main body 351. Therefore, even if the contact detection sensor main body 358, which is provided with a detection circuit, is located on the flange portion 353b of the button sleeve 353, away from the top surface 351a of the button main body 351, the contact detector 352 can detect the approach or contact of the player's fingers, etc., on the top surface 351a of the button main body 351, and the same effect as above can be achieved.

Furthermore, since the detection means for detecting the approach or contact of the player's fingers, etc., is configured with the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, the contact detection sensor main body 358, which is provided with a detection circuit, can be positioned on the flange portion 353b of the button sleeve 353 away from the top surface portion 351a (contact detection body 352) of the button main body 351, so that the contact detection sensor main body 358 can be positioned in an inconspicuous location, improving the appearance of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, the back (bottom) of the button body 351 is provided with an outer button decorative board 355, an inner button decorative board 364, and a performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360, which makes it easier for the player to experience effects such as light, vibration, impact, upward pressure, and wind pressure through the button body 351, achieving the same effects as described above.

[4. Overall configuration of the main body frame]
The overall configuration of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 75 to 81. Figure 75 is a front view of the main body frame in the pachinko machine, and Figure 76 is a rear view of the main body frame in the pachinko machine. Figure 77 is a perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the right front, Figure 78 is a perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the left front, and Figure 79 is a perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the rear. Figure 80 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into its main members as seen from the front, and Figure 81 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into its main members as seen from the rear.

The main frame 4 holds the game board 5 having a play area 5a where a game is played by hitting the game ball B, and is used to pay out the game ball B to the player and to eject the game balls B used in the game to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (towards the island equipment of the game hall). As shown in the figure, the main frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is removably stored inside from the front. The main frame 4 is attached to a frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front end on the left side of the front side so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3 is attached so that the open front side can be closed.

The main body frame 4 is provided with a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, a main body frame upper hinge member 510 attached to the upper end of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, which is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and to which the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached, and a main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 attached to the lower end of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, which is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 and to which the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached.

The main frame 4 also includes a main frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side of the main frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, a ball launching device 540 attached to the lower front side of the main frame base unit 500 for shooting game balls B into the game area 5a of the game board 5, an inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 attached along the upper and left sides of the rear side of the main frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, a payout unit 560 attached to the rear side of the payout base unit 550 for paying out game balls B to the player, a board unit 620 attached to the lower rear side of the main frame base unit 500, a back cover 640 attached to the rear side of the main frame base unit 500 so as to be openable and closable, and covering the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main frame base 501, and a locking unit 650 attached to the right side of the main frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, for locking the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the door frame 3 and the main frame 4.

The main frame base unit 500 includes a main frame base 501 that is formed into a vertically extending rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front, a connection cable guide member 502 that guides a connection cable 503 for connecting to the door frame 3 side, and a game board lock member 505 that detachably holds the game board 5.

The dispensing base unit 550 includes a dispensing base 551 attached to the rear of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500, a ball tank 552 attached to the dispensing base 551, a box-shaped tank that extends left and right and is open upward, a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and extends leftward in a groove-like shape that is open upward, a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, a second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, spaced apart from the first rail cover 554 to the left when viewed from the front, a ball straightening member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, and a ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553.

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guiding unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a serpentine manner, a payout device 580 that pays out the game balls B guided by the ball guiding unit 570 one by one based on instructions from the payout control board 633, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides the game ball B that has passed through the payout device 580 downward, and a lower full ball path unit 610 that guides the game ball B that has passed through the upper full ball path unit 600 toward the door frame 3 or the board unit 620.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, a dispensing control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the main frame base 501, a number of door frame hooks 652 that protrude forward from the unit base 651 and can engage with the door frame 3, a number of outer frame hooks 653 that protrude rearward from the unit base 651 and can engage with the outer frame 2, a transmission cylinder 654 that moves the door frame hooks 652 or the outer frame hooks 653 up and down, a lock spring 655 that urges the door frame hooks 652 downward and the outer frame hooks 653 upward, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that moves the outer frame hooks 653 downward.

[4-1. Main frame base unit]
The main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 75 to 83. Figure 82(a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the lower left corner of the front of the main body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the lower left corner of the front of the main body frame when the door frame is opened relative to the main body frame. Figure 83 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened or closed relative to the main body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 has its rear portion inserted into the outer frame 2 from the front, and holds the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

The main frame base unit 500 is equipped with a main frame base 501 that is formed into a vertically extending rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front, a connection cable guide member 502 that is attached to the lower left corner of the front surface of the main frame base 501 and guides the connection cable 503, and a game board lock member 505 that is rotatably attached to the lower front surface of the main frame base 501 around an axis that extends forward and backward and that detachably holds the game board 5.

The main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500 is equipped with a base main body 501a that is formed into a vertically elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, a game board insertion opening 501b that penetrates the base main body 501a from a position slightly below the top end to a height of about 3/4 of the total height and through which the game board 5 is inserted from the front, a game board placement section 501c that forms the bottom edge of the game board insertion opening 501b and on which the game board 5 is placed, and a game board restriction section 501d that protrudes upward from the left-right center of the game board placement section 501c and restricts the left-right and rearward movement of the bottom end of the game board 5.

The main frame base 501 also has a launcher attachment section 501e, which is recessed rearward on the lower right side of the game board placement section 501c on the front surface of the base main body 501a, for attaching the ball launcher 540; a cylinder insertion opening 501f, which penetrates the launcher attachment section 501e from front to back on the right side of the game board placement section 501e when viewed from front, through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted; a circular speaker opening 501g, which penetrates the game board placement section 501c from front to back on the lower left side of the game board placement section 501c when viewed from front, and which allows the main frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a in the board unit 620 to face forward; a cable attachment recess 501h, which is recessed rearward below the speaker opening 501g and extends left and right, and in which the connection cable guide member 502 is attached, and a cable insertion opening 501i, which penetrates the cable attachment recess 501h from front to front at the upper right end when viewed from front.

The main frame base 501 further includes a plate-like extension extending rearward from the right side of the game board insertion opening 501b in the base main body 501a when viewed from the front, a locking unit 650 is attached to the right side, a rear extension portion 501j to the rear end of which the rear cover 640 is rotatably attached, and an upper hinge attachment portion 501k and a lower hinge attachment portion 501l formed near both the upper and lower ends of the left end when viewed from the front on the rear surface of the base main body 501a for attaching the main frame upper hinge member 510 and the main frame lower hinge assembly 520.

In addition, the main frame base 501 is provided with a door frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 4, which is attached to the front surface of the base body 501a below the cylinder insertion port 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted. When the door frame 3 is opened (opened) relative to the main frame 4, the door frame opening switch is released and the opening of the door frame 3 can be detected. The detection signal from the door frame opening switch is input to the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 633. In addition, the main frame base 501 is provided with a main frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, which is attached to the rear surface of the base body 501a below the position where the door frame opening switch is attached. When the main frame 4 is opened (opened) relative to the outer frame 2, the body frame opening switch is released and the opening of the main frame 4 can be detected. The detection signal from the main frame open switch is input to the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 633.

A game board locking member 505 is attached to the main frame base 501 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending forward and backward, below the game board placement portion 501c on the front side and to the right of the speaker opening 501g. The game board locking member 505 can restrict the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b, thereby making it possible to attach and detach the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b.

The cable mounting recess 501h of the main frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l to a position below the portion where the game board locking member 505 is attached, to the right of the speaker opening 501g. The cable mounting recess 501h is formed to a size that can accommodate the connection cable guide member 502, and the right end side of the connection cable guide member 502 can be attached rotatably around an axis that extends vertically.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main frame base unit 500 comprises a flat guide body 502a extending left and right, a pair of band-shaped frame pieces 502b that protrude forward from both the upper and lower sides of the guide body 502a and extend further to the right than the right end of the guide body 502a, a cylindrical mounting shaft 502c that connects the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and a number of through holes 502d that penetrate the guide body 502a from front to back at both the upper and lower ends and are arranged in a row in the left and right direction.

The connection cable guide member 502 has a left-right length that is slightly shorter than the left-right length of the cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501, and is formed to a size that can be accommodated within the cable mounting recess 501h. The connection cable guide member 502 is attached so that the mounting shaft 502c can rotate around an axis that extends vertically near the right end within the cable mounting recess 501h. This allows the connection cable guide member 502 to rotate (hinge rotate) so that the left end side protrudes forward.

This connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503. The connection cable 503 is made up of multiple wiring cords, one end of which is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620, and the opposite end of which is connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3.

Next, the effect of the connection cable guide member 502 will be described. As shown in FIG. 83 etc., the connection cable guide member 502 is attached to the main frame base 501 so that its end (right end) opposite the side (left side) where the door frame 3 is hinge-rotatably attached in the left-right direction is rotatable around an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3.

The connection cable 503 connecting the interface board 635 of the main frame 4 to the door frame main relay board 104 and door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3 is attached to the guide body 502a by being fastened together with the guide body 502a by a cable tie 504 inserted through a pair of through holes 502d at the same left-right position out of the multiple through holes 502d formed on both the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a, with the side connected to the interface board 635 abutting against the front surface of the guide body 502a so as to extend from the right to the left of the guide body 502a of the connection cable guide member 502.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main frame 4 is located behind the main relay board 104 and the sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 and closed against the main frame 4 (see FIG. 83(a)). In this state, the connection cable 503 extends leftward from the connection cable guide member 502, then bends back in front of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l, passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3, and extends into the door frame relay board cover 107. The cable holder 103a of the door frame 3 is positioned to the left of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502.

In this state, when the door frame 3 is hingedly rotated so as to open relative to the main frame 4, the left end of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connection cable 503 that is attached to the door frame 3, and the connection cable guide member 502 rotates around the attachment shaft 502c at the right end. In this case, in this embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is formed to satisfy α/2 ≧ β (preferably α/3 ≧ β) (see FIG. 83(b)).

The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is 0 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed (when the opening angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degrees). The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 increases as the door frame 3 is opened and the opening angle α increases, but once the opening angle α exceeds a certain value (e.g., approximately 90 degrees), the increase stops. In this embodiment, the maximum opening angle β is set to less than 45 degrees.

In this way, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward of the main body frame base 501. As a result, the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, and the connection cable 503 can be prevented from dangling between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

When closing the open door frame 3, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively backward, so that the left end of the connection cable guide member 502 is pressed backward by the connection cable 503, and the connection cable guide member 502 rotates around the attachment shaft 502c so that the left end moves backward. At this time, since the connection cable guide member 502 is open at an opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connection cable guide member 502 does not hinder the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be closed smoothly. In addition, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is not pinched between the door frame 3 and the main frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed, and it is possible to prevent malfunction of the connection cable 503.

When the door frame 3 is closed relative to the main frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded back 180 degrees, so that the folded back portion of the connection cable 503 can be given a fold. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened and the 180 degree folded portion of the connection cable 503 changes to open, the fold acts on the connection cable 503 to close it. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, the fold prevents the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction, and also guides the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) in the closing direction, allowing the door frame 3 to be closed smoothly.

Furthermore, on the door frame 3 side, the folded connection cable 503 is held by the cable holder 103a at a position closer to the central axis (axis core) of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126 than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed relative to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a can pull the tip side of the connection cable guide member 502 toward the central axis (axis core) of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126.

In addition, in this embodiment, the angle between the tangent to a circle passing through the center of rotation of the connection cable guide member 502, centered on the central axis (axis) of the upper hinge pin 122 and the lower hinge pin 126, and the portion (pressing portion) protruding rearward on the central axis (axis) side of the upper hinge pin 122 and the lower hinge pin 126 of the speaker duct 103 from the cable holder 103a, and the front surface of the main body frame 4 is configured to be 45 degrees or less. As a result, when the door frame 3 is closed against the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts against the connection cable 503, so that the tip side of the open connection cable guide member 502 can be pressed in the closing direction via the connection cable 503, and therefore the connection cable guide member 502 can be closed smoothly as the door frame 3 moves in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be closed reliably. In addition, the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502, which rotates (opens and closes) in conjunction with the opening and closing of the door frame 3, can be set to 45 degrees or less, so that when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable guide member 502 can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, achieving the same effect as described above.

[4-2. Main body frame upper hinge member]
The main body frame upper hinge member 510 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 80 and 81. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501k in the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2, and also rotatably attaches the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3.

The main frame upper hinge member 510 comprises an upper hinge body 511, which is a horizontally extending flat plate material with its rear portion bent downward into an L-shape, and a main frame upper hinge pin 512 which protrudes upward from the front end of the upper hinge body 511 in a cylindrical shape and is journaled by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. The upper hinge body 511 has a door frame upper hinge hole 511a which penetrates the main frame upper hinge pin 512 in the horizontally extending portion in the vertical direction on the left side when viewed from the front, and which journals the door frame upper hinge assembly 120.

The upper hinge member 510 of the main frame is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501k of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500 by bending the upper hinge body 511 downward and extending vertically. The upper hinge pin 512 of the main frame upper hinge member 510 is inserted into the bearing groove 51c of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 of the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and journaled. The upper hinge hole 511a for the door frame allows the upper hinge pin 122 of the upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 to be rotatably inserted from below into the upper hinge hole 511a for the door frame of the upper hinge body 511.

This upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame cooperates with the lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame to allow the main body frame 4 to be hingedly rotatably attached to the outer frame 2, and also allows the door frame 3 to be hingedly rotatably attached to the main body frame 4.

[4-3. Main body frame lower hinge assembly]
The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 80 and 81. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to a lower hinge attachment portion 501l in the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and has the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 rotatably attached thereto.

The main frame lower hinge assembly 520 includes a lower hinge first body 521, which is a horizontally extending flat plate material with its rear portion bent upward into an L-shape, and a lower hinge second body 522, which is disposed above the lower hinge first body 521 and is a horizontally extending flat plate material with its rear portion bent upward into an L-shape. The main frame lower hinge assembly 520 includes a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second body 522 disposed at a distance above the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first body 521, and a vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second body 522 abuts against the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the lower hinge first body 521.

The lower hinge first body 521 has an outer frame lower hinge hole 521a that penetrates vertically near the front end of the horizontally extending portion and into which the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. The outer frame lower hinge hole 521a is formed coaxially with the main frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main frame upper hinge member 510.

The second lower hinge body 522 is provided with a lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame that penetrates vertically near the front end of the horizontally extending portion and into which the lower hinge pin 126 of the lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above, and a restricting piece 522b that extends upward from a position rearward of the lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame on the left side of the horizontally extending portion and restricts the rotation range of the door frame 3. The lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame is formed coaxially with the upper hinge hole 511a for the door frame in the upper hinge body 511 of the upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame.

The main frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500 at the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first body 521 and the lower hinge second body 522. The main frame lower hinge assembly 520 cooperates with the main frame upper hinge member 510 to mount the main frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be hinged rotatable, and also mount the door frame 3 to the main frame 4 so as to be hinged rotatable.

[4-4. Main body reinforcement frame]
The main body frame reinforcement frame 530 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 80 and 81. The main body frame reinforcement frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame reinforcement frame 530 has a cross-sectional shape in a plan view that is U-shaped with the right side open, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In this embodiment, the main body frame reinforcement frame 530 is formed from an extruded metal profile.

The main body frame reinforcement frame 530 has two left position restriction members 531 attached to the rear of the section extending rightward from the front end, spaced apart vertically, to restrict the forward and vertical movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501.

The main body frame reinforcement frame 530 has a groove 530a that is open to the right and extends vertically on the front side, which is formed in a U-shape with the right side open in a plan view. When the door frame 3 is closed on the main body frame 4, the rear left end of the left reinforcement frame 111 of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 in the door frame 3 is inserted into this groove 530a. By inserting the left reinforcement frame 111 into the groove 530a, the gap between the main body frame reinforcement frame 530 and the left reinforcement frame 111 becomes serpentine in a plan view, which prevents an illegal tool from being inserted inside from the left side of the pachinko machine 1. The main body frame reinforcement frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and prevents an illegal tool from being inserted into the main body frame 4 (game board 5) from the left side through the gap between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

[4-5. Ball launcher]
The ball launcher 540 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 84 and the like. FIG. 84(a) is a perspective view of the ball launcher in the main body frame seen from the front, and FIG. 84(b) is a perspective view of the ball launcher seen from the back. The ball launcher 540 is attached to the lower front part of the main body frame base unit 500, and is for shooting the game ball B stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 in the door frame 3 into the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4. The ball launcher 540 can shoot the game ball B with a strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 in the lower right corner of the front of the door frame 3.

The ball launching device 540 is equipped with a flat launching base 541 attached to the launching device mounting portion 501e of the main frame base 501 in the main frame base unit 500, a launching solenoid 542 consisting of a rotary solenoid attached to the rear surface of the right part of the launching base 541 when viewed from the front and whose rotation axis extends forward through the launching base 541, a striking hammer 543 whose base end is attached to the rotation axis of the launching solenoid 542, and a launching rail 544 attached to the front surface of the launching base 541 so as to extend diagonally upward to the left from near the tip of the striking hammer 543 and along which the game ball B can roll.

The ball launching device 540 is designed so that game ball B is supplied from the ball supply unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the right end of the upper surface of the launching rail 544. When the handle 195 is rotated while game ball B is being supplied to the right end of the upper surface of the launching rail 544, the launch solenoid 542 is driven with a strength corresponding to the angle of rotation, and the game ball B is hit by the striking mallet 543. The game ball B hit by the striking mallet 543 is guided through the launching rail 544 to the outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 and is hit into the play area 5a.

If the hit game ball B does not reach the play area 5a due to factors such as the hitting strength of the game ball B, it will fall between the launch rail 544 and the game board 5 (outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002) into the foul ball receiving port 150c of the lower foul cover unit 150, pass through the foul cover unit 150, and be discharged into the lower tray 202.

[4-6. Payment base unit]
The dispensing base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figure 85. Figure 85 (a) is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit of the main body frame seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit seen from the rear. The dispensing base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L-shape and is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500.

The dispensing base unit 550 is equipped with a dispensing base 551 attached to the rear side of the main frame base 501 in the main frame base unit 500. The dispensing base 551 includes a top plate portion 551a extending left and right with a substantially constant width in the front-to-rear direction, a left side plate portion 551b extending long downward from the left side of the top plate portion 551a as viewed from the front with a width substantially the same as that of the top plate portion, a right side plate portion 551c extending short downward from the right side of the top plate portion 551a as viewed from the front with a width substantially the same as that of the top plate portion 551a, a back plate upper portion 551d extending downward from the rear side of the top plate portion 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c, and a left side plate portion 551b extending long downward from the left side of the top plate portion 551a as viewed from the front with a width substantially the same as that of the top plate portion 551a. The base 551 is provided with a left back plate 551e extending from a position forward of the rear edge of the left back plate 551b to the right at a substantially constant width to the vicinity of the bottom end, an inner plate 551f extending rearward from the right edge of the left back plate 551e to the same position as the rear edge of the left side plate 551b, a bottom plate 551g extending rightward from the front of the lower edge of the left side plate 551b to the same position as the right edge of the left back plate 551e, and a connecting plate 551h connecting the right edge of the bottom plate 551g and the lower edge of the inner plate 551f. The dispensing base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a box shape that is open forward and inward of the L shape.

The payout base 551 has a top plate 551a that extends left and right with a length approximately equal to the left-right width of the game board insertion opening 501b of the main frame base 501, and a left side plate 551b that extends up and down with a length approximately equal to the up-down height of the game board insertion opening 501b. The front ends of the top plate 551a, left side plate 551b, and right side plate 551c of the payout base 551 are attached to the rear side of the main frame base 501.

The dispensing base 551 also has a shallow recessed portion that is open to the rear and extends vertically, and is formed by the left side plate portion 551b, the left back plate portion 551e, and the inner plate portion 551f, to which the dispensing unit 560 is attached. The dispensing base 551 also has a rear cover attachment portion 551i that protrudes to the right at the top of the right side of the inner plate portion 551f when viewed from the front, and to which the rear cover 640 is attached.

The payout base unit 550 comprises a ball tank 552 which is attached to the top surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551, is box-shaped and opens upward, and is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 above the part of the payout base 551 which extends left and right, and is a tank rail 553 which is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 above the part which extends left and right, and is a groove-like shape which is open upward and extends to the left.

The dispensing base unit 550 also includes a first rail cover 554 attached midway in the left-right direction at the top end of the tank rail 553, a second rail cover 555 attached to the top end of the tank rail 553 at a distance to the left of the first rail cover 554 when viewed from the front and extending to the left end of the tank rail 553, a ball straightening member 556 attached to the top end of the tank rail 553 between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, and a ball stop member 557 attached to the bottom end of the tank rail 553 near the left end when viewed from the front.

The ball tank 552 is formed with a length in the left-right direction that is approximately half the left-right width of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551, and a length in the front-to-rear direction that is shorter than the front-to-rear depth of the top plate portion 551a. The ball tank 552 is attached to the top surface of the top plate portion 551a at a position toward the right in the left-to-right direction. The bottom surface of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the left end is lower. The left end of the ball tank 552 is connected to the tank rail 553.

The tank rail 553 is attached to the top surface of the top plate 551a of the payout base 551 near the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction. The tank rail 553 is formed in a shape in a plan view that extends diagonally from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552 to the left and rear so that the depth in the front-to-rear direction changes from a depth several times the outer diameter of the game ball B to a depth of approximately one, and then extends straight to the left with a depth in the front-to-rear direction slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lower, and the left end of the bottom surface opens downward with a size slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper end opening of the guide passage 570a in the ball guide unit 570 of the payout unit 560.

The upper end of the tank rail 553, which extends straight to the left, is inclined at a steeper angle to the horizontal than the bottom so that the left end is lower at a height slightly greater than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate 551a so that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left roughly coincides with the rear edge of the top plate 551a. The tank rail 553 also has a first rail cover 554, a second rail cover 555, a ball straightening member 556, and a ball stopping member 557 attached to the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left.

The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper end of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are intended to prevent the front-to-rear depth of the upper end of the tank rail 553 from expanding or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B inside the tank rail 553.

The ball straightening member 556 is attached between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 553, with the end on the first rail cover 554 side rotatable around an axis extending in the front-to-rear direction. The ball straightening member 556 is equipped with a straightening piece 556a that protrudes into the tank rail 553 and extends in the left-to-right direction (see FIG. 91). This straightening piece 556a slows down the flow of game balls B on the upper tier of game balls B circulating in two tiers, and straightens them so that they flow in a single tier on the downstream side, preventing balls from clogging even if the height inside the tank rail 553 becomes low.

The ball stopping member 557 is attached to the underside of the tank rail 553 near the left end when viewed from the front, so that it can slide left and right. By sliding it to the left, the opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 can be closed, preventing game balls B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the downstream payout unit.

The payout base unit 550 further includes an external terminal board 558 attached to the left of the ball tank 552 when viewed from the front on the upper surface of the portion extending to the left and right of the payout base 551. The external terminal board 558 is for making an electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island equipment of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Although not shown, the external terminal board 558 includes an earth connection portion facing the game board insertion port 501b side of the main frame base 501. An earth wire extending from the game board 5 side is connected to the earth connection portion.

[4-7. Overall configuration of the dispensing unit]
The overall configuration of the dispensing unit 560 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 86 and 87. Figure 86(a) is a perspective view of the dispensing unit in the main body frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the dispensing unit as seen from the rear. Figure 87(a) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into its main components as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into its main components as seen from the rear. The dispensing unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the back panel left portion 551e of the dispensing base 551 of the dispensing base unit 550.

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guiding unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a serpentine manner, a payout device 580 that is arranged below the ball guiding unit 570 and pays out the game balls B guided by the ball guiding unit 570 one by one based on instructions from the payout control board 633, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides the game ball B that has passed through the payout device 580 downward, and a lower full ball path unit 610 that guides the game ball B that has passed through the upper full ball path unit 600 toward the door frame 3 or the board unit 620.

The ball guiding unit 570 supplies the game balls B aligned in a row by the tank rail 553 to the payout device 580. The payout device 580 has a payout passage 580a through which the game balls B supplied from the ball guiding unit 570 can flow, and a ball removal passage 580b that branches off from the middle of the payout passage 580a. Under normal conditions, the payout device 580 releases game balls B from the payout passage 580a to the upper full ball path unit 600 side based on instructions from the payout control board 633, and releases game balls B from the ball removal passage 580b to the upper full ball path unit 600 side when the ball removal lever 593 is operated.

The upper full ball path unit 600 separates and guides downward the game balls B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game balls B released from the ball removal passage 580b. The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game balls B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the door frame 3 side via the upper full ball path unit 600, and guides the game balls B released from the ball removal passage 580b to the base unit 620 side.

[4-7a. Ball Guidance Unit]
The ball guiding unit 570 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 86 and 87. The ball guiding unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper rear surface of the left part 551e of the back plate of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, and serves to receive the game ball B from the tank rail 553 and guide the game ball B to the payout device 580.

The ball guide unit 570 is equipped with a box-shaped guide unit base 571 that is open to the front and has a meandering guide passage 570a through which game balls B can flow, a flat guide passage front cover 572 that closes the front side of the guide unit base 571, a movable piece member 573 that is movable by game balls B flowing through the guide passage 570a, and a ball out detection sensor 574 that detects the presence or absence of game balls B in the guide passage 570a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573 (see Figure 91).

The ball guidance unit 570 has a vertically extending rectangular shape in front view of the guidance unit base 571 and the guidance passage front cover 572. The guidance passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the guidance unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the upper end to the center of the height of the guidance unit base 571, then bends to the right, and extends downward in a serpentine manner while repeatedly folding back between the left and right width of the guidance unit base 571, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the guidance unit base 571.

The guide passage 570a is formed so that its depth in the front, back and right directions and its width in the left and right directions are slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game balls B in the direction in which the game balls B flow, allowing the game balls B to be guided in a single line.

The ball guide unit 570 has a movable piece member 573 attached near the top so that it can move forward and backward into the guide passage 570a. More specifically, the upper part of the movable piece member 573 is attached so that it can rotate around an axis extending forward and backward at the outer right part of the guide passage 570a when viewed from the front, and is formed so that a part of the lower end protrudes into the guide passage 570a due to its own weight. When the game ball B abuts against the part of this movable piece member 573 that protrudes into the guide passage 570a, the protruding part is pushed by the game ball B and retreats from the guide passage 570a to a state where it no longer protrudes.

The ball cut detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573 when a part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guide passage 570a, and detects the movable piece member 573 when a part of the movable piece member 573 retracts from the guide passage 570a and does not protrude. Therefore, the ball cut detection sensor 574 is in a detection state when a game ball B is present in the guide passage 570a, and is in a non-detection state when a game ball B is not present in the guide passage 570a.

When the ball guiding unit 570 is assembled to the main frame 4, the upstream end of the guide passage 570a is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guide passage 570a is connected to the upstream end of the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580. Since the guide passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 that guides the game ball B extends in a serpentine shape, the guide passage 570a extends longer than the total height of the ball guiding unit 570, and many game balls B can be stored in the guide passage 570a. In addition, the ball guiding unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of game balls B in the guide passage 570a by the ball cut detection sensor 574, and can detect the presence or absence of game balls B in the ball tank 552 via the guide passage 570a.

[4-7b. Dispensing device]
The payout device 580 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 86 to 89. Figure 88 is a rear cross-sectional view of the payout device of the payout unit cut at the center of the payout blade in the front-to-rear direction. Figure 89(a) is a rear cross-sectional view of the payout device cut at the center of the payout blade in the front-to-rear direction when the ball removal movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along line A-A in (a). The payout device 580 is detachably attached from the rear to the underside of the ball guide unit 570 on the rear surface of the left part 551e of the back plate of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550.

The payout device 580 is equipped with a payout device main body 581 that is box-shaped and open to the rear, has a payout passage 580a through which game balls B can flow, and a ball removal passage 580b that branches off from the middle of the payout passage 580a, a flat payout device rear cover 582 that closes the payout device main body 581 from the rear, and a shallow box-shaped payout device front cover 583 that is attached to the front of the payout device main body 581 and is open to the rear.

The dispensing device 580 also includes a dispensing motor 584 attached to the rear surface of the dispensing device main body 581 and having a rotating shaft protruding between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583, a spur gear-shaped drive gear 585 attached to the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584, a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 586 meshing with the drive gear 585 and rotatably attached by the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583, a spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 587 meshing with the first transmission gear 586 and rotatably attached by the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583, and a second transmission gear 588. The device is equipped with a dispensing gear member 588 having a spur gear-shaped dispensing gear 588a meshing with the delivery gear 587 and a plurality of detection pieces 588b extending outward from the dispensing gear 588a, which is rotatably attached between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583, a dispensing blade 589 having a plurality of blade pieces 589a that rotate integrally with the dispensing gear member 588 between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear cover 582 and protrude into the dispensing passage 580a, and a blade rotation detection sensor 590 that is attached to the rear side of the dispensing device main body 581 and detects the detection piece 588b of the dispensing gear member 588.

The payout device 580 further includes a payout detection sensor 591 that detects the game ball B and is attached to the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a, a ball removal movable piece 592 that is attached to the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 at the location where it branches off from the payout passage 580a so as to be capable of opening and closing the ball removal passage 580b, and a ball removal lever 593 that can be held in a position where the ball removal movable piece 592 closes the ball removal passage 580b and is attached to the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction.

The payout device 580 is shaped like a rectangle extending vertically in a plan view. The payout device 580 is shaped so that its left-right width is greater to the right when viewed from the front than the left-right width of the ball guiding unit 570.

As shown in Fig. 88, the upstream end of the dispensing passage 580a of the dispensing device 580 opens upward at a position toward the left of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the rear, and the downstream end opens downward at a position near the right end in the left-right direction. The dispensing passage 580a extends diagonally downward from the top for about 1/3 of the total height, gradually moving leftward as it moves downward from the upstream end, then bends slightly diagonally downward to the right, and then bends at about 1/3 of the left-right width and extends downward approximately vertically toward the center (rotation axis) of the dispensing blade 589. Then, above the center of the payout blade 589, it bends to the right when viewed from behind at a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, then extends downward in an arc concentric with the payout blade 589 so that a gap slightly larger than the game ball B is formed between it and the outer periphery of the payout blade 589, and then extends vertically downward to the downstream end at a position to the right of the center of the payout blade 589 when viewed from behind.

In the dispensing passage 580a, a dispensing detection sensor 591 is located below the dispensing blade 589 and directly above the downstream end.

The ball removal passage 580b extends diagonally downward from the upstream end of the dispensing passage 580a, branches off at a point where it bends to the right, extends vertically along the left edge as viewed from the rear to the bottom end, and opens downward near the left end of the bottom surface as viewed from the rear.

The payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 are provided with a main body guide wall 581a and a rear cover guide wall 582a, which are formed so as to be continuous with the left side walls of the payout path 580a and the ball removal path 580b in the rear view, and which face each other and protrude backward and forward from the side where the ball removal movable piece 592 is attached at the part where the payout path 580a and the ball removal path 580b branch off, and which are formed so as to be continuous with the left side walls of the payout path 580a and the ball removal path 580b in the rear view. The main body guide wall 581a and the rear cover guide wall 582a are formed at a position on the left side of the part in the rear view that branches off from the ball removal path 580b in the payout path 580a and extends to the right in the rear view at a position about 1/3 of the height from the top. The main body guide wall 581a and the rear cover guide wall 582a are curved so as to be recessed diagonally upward to the left in the rear view, and are formed mainly to constitute the side walls of the ball removal path 580b. The ball removal movable piece 592 rotates between the main body guide wall 581a and the rear cover guide wall 582a.

The payout motor 584 is attached to the right side of the payout passage 580a in the payout device main body 581 when viewed from the rear, at the point where it extends diagonally downward from the upstream end. The drive gear 585, first transmission gear 586, second transmission gear 587, and payout gear member 588 are disposed in front of the payout device main body 581, and the front side is covered by the payout device front cover 583. The payout gear member 588 has three flat detection pieces 588b extending outward, spaced circumferentially at angular intervals of 120 degrees.

The payout blade 589 is disposed between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582. The payout blade 589 is provided with three blade pieces 589a extending outward in a flat plate shape, spaced at an angle of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The blade pieces 589a extend from the top of the payout passage 580a toward the rotation axis and then extend to the right when viewed from the rear, and protrude into the payout passage 580a so that the distance between the blade pieces 589a and the side wall of the payout passage is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The payout blade 589 is provided with a ball storage section 589b between the three blade pieces 589a, which is recessed toward the center in an arc with a radius slightly larger than the radius of the game ball B. This ball storage section 589b is capable of storing only one game ball B. As a result, the vane 589 can restrict the game ball B in the payout passage 580a from moving downstream of the vane 589 by using the vane piece 589a, and can move the game ball B contained in the ball container 589b downstream by rotating in a clockwise direction when viewed from the rear.

The dispensing gear member 588 and the dispensing blade 589 are attached to the dispensing device rear cover 582 and the dispensing device front cover 583 so that they can rotate together on the same axis. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is located to the left of the rotation axis of the dispensing gear member 588 when viewed from the rear. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 detects the detection piece 588b of the dispensing gear member 588, which rotates together with the dispensing blade 589, to detect the rotation of the dispensing blade 589.

The upper end of the ball removal movable piece 592 is attached rotatably around an axis extending forward and backward at the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a. The ball removal movable piece 592 is bent in an L-shape and is attached so that the recessed side faces into the dispensing passage 580a. The ball removal movable piece 592 is formed so that its depth in the forward and backward directions is smaller than the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, and it can protrude into the ball removal passage 580b or retract out of the ball removal passage 580b through the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a.

The ball removal lever 593 is attached to the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 so that it can slide up and down on the left side when viewed from the rear near the upper end of the ball removal movable piece 592. A part of the ball removal lever 593 protrudes rearward through the payout device rear cover 582, and it can be slid by operating the protruding part. When the ball removal lever 593 is positioned at the lower end, the lower part can abut against the ball removal movable piece 592, and the rotation of the ball removal movable piece 592 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the rear can be restricted, and the ball removal passage 580b can be closed by the ball removal movable piece 592. When the ball removal lever 593 is positioned at the upper end, the ball removal movable piece 592 can be rotated outside the ball removal passage 580b, and the ball removal passage 580b can be opened (see FIG. 89).

When the ball removal lever 593 is raised to make the ball removal movable piece 592 rotatable, the game balls B that were strung together upstream of the ball removal movable piece 592 will flow over the ball removal movable piece 592 and down the ball removal passage 580b. At this time, since the ball removal passage 580b extends in a straight line from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a, the game balls B that have flowed down from the upstream of the payout passage 580a will flow straight down the ball removal passage 580b, and since the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b is connected to the island equipment side, there is nothing to suppress the flow of the game balls B, such as the payout vane 589, so the game balls B will flow down faster than the payout passage 580a.

In this way, when the ball removal movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down the ball removal passage 580b at a high speed, so that the game ball B hits the lower end of the ball removal movable piece 592 protruding into the ball removal passage 580b with great force. However, since the ball removal movable piece 592 can move outside the inner surface of the ball removal passage 580b through between the main body side guide wall 581a of the payout device main body 581 and the rear cover side guide wall 582a of the payout device rear cover 582, the ball removal movable piece 592 moves outside the ball removal passage 580b due to the force of the hit. Therefore, the ball removal movable piece 592 is not pinched between the wall surface of the ball removal passage 580b and the game ball B, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from applying a strong force to the ball removal movable piece 592, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in durability or damage to the ball removal movable piece 592 due to the collision of the game ball B.

As a result, the ball removal movable piece 592 is less likely to be damaged, and more game balls B can be discharged more quickly to the island equipment downstream of the ball removal passage 580b, which reduces the time required for replacement and maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 and reduces the burden on the game hall.

In addition, when the ball removal movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball removal movable piece 592 moves to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b through the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, which is spaced narrower than the game ball B. Therefore, when the game ball B comes into contact with the ball removal movable piece 592 protruding into the ball removal passage 580b and the ball removal movable piece 592 moves outward through the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, even if the game ball B moves to the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a together with the ball removal movable piece 592, only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward by the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, which is spaced narrower than the game ball B.

The game ball B is prevented from moving outward between the main body guide wall 581a and the rear cover guide wall 582a, causing the game ball B to separate from the ball removal movable piece 592, and the subsequent movement of the ball removal movable piece 592 is due to inertial force, so no strong force acts on the ball removal movable piece 592, making it less likely to be damaged, and the game ball B will not fly out of the ball removal passage 580b from between the main body guide wall 581a and the rear cover guide wall 582a, ensuring that the game ball B can flow downstream of the ball removal passage 580b.

[4-7c. Upper full ball path unit]
The upper full ball path unit 600 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 86 and 87. The upper full ball path unit 600 is attached from the rear to the lower side of the payout device 580 at the rear lower part of the left part 551e of the back plate of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550. The upper full ball path unit 600 is for guiding the game balls B released downward from the payout device 580 to the lower full ball path unit 610. The upper full ball path unit 600 is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front.

The upper full tank ball path unit 600 comprises a box-shaped upper full tank base 601 that is attached to the dispensing base 551 and has an open rear side, a box-shaped upper full tank cover 602 that is attached to the rear side of the upper full tank base 601 and has an open front side, and a dispensing device pressing member 603 that is rotatably attached near the top end of the upper full tank cover 602 and can press the dispensing device 580 upward. The upper full tank base 601 protrudes to the right from the right edge when viewed from the front, and has a rear cover mounting portion 601a for mounting the rear cover.

In addition, the upper full ball path unit 600 is made up of an upper payout ball receiving passage 600a that opens upward near the left end of the upper surface when viewed from the front and extends downward along the left side from the bottom to a position at a height of about 2/3 of the total height, an upper ball storage passage 600b that is connected to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a, extends to the right to the right when viewed from the front, about 3/4 of the total width, and extends downward from the bottom to a height of about 1/6 of the total height, and a lower ball storage passage 600b that extends downward from the left side of the center of the left-right direction of the upper ball storage passage 600b when viewed from the front. It is equipped with an upper normal dispensing passage 600c that extends toward the upper side and opens downward at the bottom surface, an upper full tank dispensing passage 600d that is adjacent to the upper normal dispensing passage 600c, extends downward from the right side as viewed from the front from the center of the left-right direction of the upper ball storage passage 600b, and opens downward at the bottom surface, and an upper ball removal passage 600e that opens upward near the right end as viewed from the front on the top surface, extends downward approximately vertically, and then opens downward near the right end of the bottom surface (see Figure 91).

On the underside of the upper full ball path unit 600, from the left side when viewed from the front, the upper normal payout passage 600c, the upper full payout passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e are lined up in order and open downward. When the upper full ball path unit 600 is assembled to the payout unit 560, the upstream end of the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a opens directly below the downstream end of the payout passage 580a in the payout device 580, and the upstream end of the upper ball removal passage 600e opens directly below the downstream end of the ball removal passage 580b in the payout device 580. As a result, the game ball B released (paid out) from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 passes through the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b, and is released downward from either the upper normal payout passage 600c or the upper full payout passage 600d. In addition, the game ball B released downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580 is released downward through the upper ball removal passage 600e.

[4-7d. Lower full ball path unit]
The lower full ball path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 86 and 87. The lower full ball path unit 610 is placed on the bottom plate portion 551g of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, and is attached to the lower portion of the upper full ball path unit 600. The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game ball B released downward from the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or to the base unit 620 side. The lower full ball path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side is lower, and the rear end extends upward.

The lower full ball path unit 610 is equipped with a lower full base 611 having a lower normal payout path 610a, a lower full payout path 610b, and a lower ball removal path 610c, extending in the front-to-rear direction and opening upward, a lower full cover 612 attached to the upper side of the lower full base 611, a payout path opening/closing door 613 attached rotatably around an axis extending in the front-to-rear direction to the front end of the lower full base 611 and capable of opening and closing the downstream end openings of the lower normal payout path 610a and the lower full payout path 610b, and a closing spring 614 that biases the payout path opening/closing door 613 in the direction of closing the downstream end openings of the lower normal payout path 610a and the lower full payout path 610b.

The lower full-tank ball path unit 610 has, on the upper surface of the part extending upward at the rear end, the lower normal dispensing path 610a, the lower full-tank dispensing path 610b, and the lower ball removal path 610c, lined up from the left when viewed from the front, with their upstream ends opening upward. The lower normal dispensing path 610a and the lower full-tank dispensing path 610b extend forward lined up side by side, and open forward at the front end of the lower full-tank ball path unit 610. The lower full-tank dispensing path 610b extends forward slightly lower than the lower normal dispensing path 610a. The lower ball removal path 610c extends forward along the right side of the lower full-tank dispensing path 610b when viewed from the front, and opens to the right halfway in the fore-and-aft direction.

The dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 is rotatably attached at a position between the front end openings of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full dispensing passage 610b. This dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 is biased in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front by a closing spring 614, and in the normal state, it closes the front end openings (downstream end openings) of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full dispensing passage 610b. The dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 has an operating protrusion 613a that protrudes forward. The operating protrusion 613a is formed in a short arc shape centered on the rotation center of the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 when viewed from the front, and the front end surface is inclined so as to protrude forward as it approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. This operating protrusion 613a is formed so as to abut against the door opening/closing abutment portion 150f of the fall cover unit 150 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed against the main body frame 4.

When the lower full ball path unit 610 is assembled to the payout unit 560, the lower normal payout passage 610a, the lower full payout passage 610b, and the lower ball removal passage 610c, which open upward at the upper rear end, are located directly below the downstream ends of the upper normal payout passage 600c, the upper full payout passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e of the upper full ball path unit 600, respectively. As a result, the game ball B released downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c flows through the lower normal payout passage 610a, the game ball B released downward from the upper full payout passage 600d flows through the lower full payout passage 610b, and the game ball B released downward from the upper ball removal passage 600e flows through the lower ball removal passage 610c.

When the lower full ball path unit 610 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front ends (downstream ends) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b open immediately after the through ball passage 150a and the full ball receiving port 150b of the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. The downstream end of the lower ball removal passage 610c opens to face the ball removal guide section 627 that opens to the left in the base unit 620b of the board unit 620.

In the normal state (when the door frame 3 is closed relative to the main body frame 4), the lower full ball path unit 610 rotates in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front against the biasing force of the closing spring 614 as the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 abuts against the door opening/closing abutment portion 150f of the fall cover unit 150. As a result, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b are open, and are connected to the through ball passage 150a and full ball receiving port 150b of the fall cover unit 150.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened relative to the main frame 4, the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 moves away from the door opening/closing abutment 150f of the fall cover unit 150, and the payout passage opening/closing door 613 rotates in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front due to the biasing force of the closing spring 614, and the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b can no longer move forward from their respective front end openings. As a result, even if the door frame 3 is opened relative to the main frame 4, the game balls B will not spill out of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b.

[4-7e. Flow of game ball B in the payout unit]
Next, the flow of game balls B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 91. FIG. 91 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls in the main body frame. When the payout unit 560 is assembled to the main body frame 4, it is attached to the rear surface of the payout base 551. In the normal state, the ball removal lever 593 of the payout device 580 is located at the lower end, and the ball removal path 580b branching off from the payout path 580a is closed at the branching portion. In addition, in the lower full ball path unit 610, the payout path opening and closing door 613 is in the open state.

The ball tank 552, which is open upward, is supplied with a predetermined number of game balls B from the game hall island equipment in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, for example, based on detection of ball exhaustion by the ball exhaustion detection sensor 574 of the ball guide unit 570. The game balls B supplied and stored in the ball tank 552 are sent, aligned in a row by the tank rail 553, through the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 into the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580. When the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game balls B cannot move (flow down) downstream of the payout blade 589, and multiple game balls B are retained upstream of the payout blade 589.

Then, the game ball B in the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573, and the ball cut detection sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573. This indicates that the game ball B is stored at least in the passage between the movable piece member 573 and the payout blade 589.

In this state, when the payout motor 584 rotates the payout blade 589 in a clockwise direction when viewed from the rear, the game ball B stored in the ball storage section 589b moves in a clockwise direction when viewed from the rear, and is released downstream of the payout blade 589 in the payout passage 580a. The game ball B released from the payout blade 589 (ball storage section 589b) is then detected by the payout detection sensor 591 and is then sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball passage unit 600.

Under normal conditions, the game ball B sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600 flows through the upper ball storage passage 600b and down to the upper normal payout passage 600c located directly below the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a. The game ball B that flows down to the upper normal payout passage 600c then passes through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610 and the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and is released into the upper tray 201 from the upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit base 211 in the tray unit 200.

When many game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the upper tray 201 becomes full of game balls B, it becomes impossible to release the game balls B forward from the upper tray ball supply port 211a, so the game balls B paid out from the payout device 580 become stuck in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610, and as more game balls B are paid out, they also become stuck in the upper normal payout passage 600c of the upper full ball path unit 600, which is connected upstream to the lower normal payout passage 610a. When the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with game balls B and more game balls B are paid out, the game balls B begin to accumulate in the upper ball storage passage 600b, which is connected to the upper normal payout passage 600c on the upstream side, and begin to flow down the upper full payout passage 600d, which is adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

The game ball B that flows down to the upper full payout passage 600d passes through the lower full payout passage 610b of the lower full ball path unit 610 and is received by the full ball receiving port 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3. The game ball B received by the full ball receiving port 150b is then released into the lower tray 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball release port 150d, and the lower tray ball supply port 211c of the tray unit base 211. This allows the game ball B to be automatically paid out to the lower tray 202 when the upper tray 201 is full of game balls B and more game balls B are paid out.

When the lower tray 202 is full of game balls B and further game balls B cannot be released forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c, if more game balls B are dispensed, the game balls B will be retained and stored in the storage passage 150e of the far cover unit 150 upstream of the lower tray ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 moves and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the player is informed by voice (e.g., "Please remove the balls!") that the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 are full of game balls B, and the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is temporarily stopped until the full tank detection sensor 154 is no longer in detection mode.

When the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 are to be discharged from the pachinko machine 1 during maintenance or replacement, the ball removal lever 593 of the payout device 580 is slid upward from the lower end position to the upper end position. After that, the lower end side of the ball removal movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B and rotates in a clockwise direction when viewed from the rear, and the ball removal movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a and is pushed out to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b. This allows the game ball B to enter the ball removal passage 580b branching off from the payout passage 580a, and the game balls B on the upstream side are released downward through the ball removal passage 580b.

At this time, at the area of the ball removal movable piece 592, the game ball B flowing down hits the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a more strongly than the ball removal movable piece 592, making the ball removal movable piece 592 less likely to be damaged.

The game ball B released downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580 passes through the upper ball removal passage 600e of the upper full ball path unit 600 and the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610, and is released from the downstream end opening of the lower ball removal passage 610c to the ball removal guide section 627 of the base unit 620, and then passes through the discharged ball receiving section 628 and the ball discharge port 629 to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 (the island equipment side of the game hall).

[4-8. Board unit]
The board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 92 to 96. Fig. 92(a) is a perspective view of the board unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and Fig. 92(b) is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from the rear. Fig. 93 is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from the rear and below. Fig. 94 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit as seen from the front, with each main component disassembled, and Fig. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit as seen from the rear, with each main component disassembled. Fig. 96 is an enlarged side cross-sectional view of the lower part of the pachinko machine cut in the center in the left-right direction. The board unit 620 is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500 below the game board placement section 501c, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 so as to cover part of the speaker unit 620a from behind, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to cover part of the payout control unit 620d from behind.

The speaker unit 620a comprises a speaker cover 621 attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 in the main frame base unit 500 below the game board placement section 501c, a main frame speaker 622 attached facing forward near the left end of the rear surface of the speaker cover 621 when viewed from the front, and a container-shaped speaker box 623 attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main frame speaker 622 and open forward.

The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction and is equipped with a circular speaker mounting portion 621a that is formed of multiple slits that penetrate from front to back near the left end when viewed from the front and extend up and down, a front recessed portion for space 621b that is recessed so as to bulge forward from the rear on the right side of the speaker mounting portion 621a when viewed from the front, and a connection portion 621c that protrudes downward from the underside of the front recessed portion for space 621b, extends in the left-right direction, and opens diagonally downward toward the rear.

The main frame speaker 622 is attached from the rear side to the speaker mounting portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 facing forward. The connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that its lower end coincides with the upper end of the connection tube portion 43a of the rear panel member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. The main frame speaker 622 is a cone-type speaker that mainly outputs low-pitched sounds.

The speaker box 623 is formed in the shape of a container that is open to the front, with the part behind the main frame speaker 622 protruding rearwards the most, and is formed so that the protrusion rearwards becomes smaller in a stepped manner as it moves to the right as viewed from the front. This ensures that there is sufficient space behind the speaker box 623 to the right of the center as viewed from the front, allowing the base unit 620b, power supply unit 620c, etc. to be placed. The speaker box 623 is formed to cover (close) the entire rear surface except for the connection part 621c of the speaker cover 621.

The speaker unit 620a, together with the speaker cover 621 and the speaker box 623, forms part of an enclosure 624 that contains the sound output rearward from the main frame speaker 622. This enclosure 624 has a front recess 621b for space that bulges forward to the right of the speaker mounting part 621a in the front view of the speaker cover 621, so even though the speaker box 623 is formed in a stepped shape so that the amount of protrusion rearward decreases as it moves to the right, a sufficiently large space is secured to the right of the main frame speaker 622.

When the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2, the speaker unit 620a has the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 connected to the connection tube portion 43a so as to sandwich the seal member 48, and the space behind the main frame speaker 622 is connected to the inner space 40a of the curtain board of the outer frame 2. Therefore, a large enclosure 624 can be formed behind the main frame speaker 622 by the speaker cover 621, speaker box 623, curtain board front member 42, and curtain board rear member 43, and sound outputted to the rear of the main frame speaker 622 can be outputted (radiated) forward from the opening 42a of the curtain board front member 42.

In more detail, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the main frame speaker 622 (part of the enclosure 624) extends to the right when viewed from the front with a relatively wide depth and is connected to the lower frame assembly 40 via the connection part 621c and the connection tube part 43a. Therefore, the sound output rearward from the main frame speaker 622 can be transmitted to the lower frame assembly 40 without attenuating the low-frequency range in particular, and the transmitted low-frequency range can be resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47 and radiated forward from the opening 42a of the front panel member 42.

In this case, the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the front panel member 42 is radiated in an inverted phase, so that it resonates to amplify the sound output from the front of the main frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker port 211b of the dish unit 200, and a loud sound with deep bass can be output even if the diameter of the main frame speaker 622 is small.

In other words, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 is a bass reflex type, allowing the player to hear deep bass sounds. This allows the player to hear a rich bass sound from the sound output from the front of the main frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker port 211b of the platter unit 200, and the sound output from the rear of the main frame speaker 622 and radiated from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2.

The speaker unit 620a has a through hole 621d formed in the speaker cover 621, penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position between the lower part of the speaker mounting part 621a and the front recess for space 621b, and a through tube 623a formed in the speaker box 623, which extends cylindrically and penetrates in the front-rear direction, communicating with the through hole 621d. When assembled to the speaker unit 620a, the through hole 621d and the through tube 623a communicate with each other and are independent of the enclosure 624. The connection cable 503 is inserted into the through hole 621d and the through tube 623a.

The base unit 620b of the board unit 620 includes a front base 625 that is attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 so as to cover a portion of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a rear base 626 that is attached to the rear side of the front base 625 and has a power supply unit 620c attached to its rear surface.

The base unit 620b is formed by the front base 625 and the rear base 626 in cooperation with each other, and includes a ball removal guide section 627 that receives the game ball B released from the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full-ball path unit 610 and guides it to the right when viewed from the front, a discharged ball receiving section 628 that opens upward to the right when viewed from the front downstream of the ball removal guide section 627 and receives the game ball B discharged downward from the game board 5, and a ball discharge port 629 that discharges the game ball B that has passed through the ball removal guide section 627 and the discharged ball receiving section 628 downward.

The upstream end of the ball removal guide section 627 opens to the left at the top of the left side when viewed from the front, and the downstream end opens to the left end side of the discharged ball receiving section 628. When assembled to the main body frame 4, the ball removal guide section 627 faces so that the opening of the upstream end coincides with the downstream end opening of the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610, and can receive the game ball B released from the lower ball removal passage 610c and guide it to the discharged ball receiving section 628.

The discharged ball receiving section 628 is open upward and extends left and right. The bottom surface of the discharged ball receiving section 628 is connected to the bottom surface of the ball removal guide section 627 at the left end when viewed from the front, and is inclined so that it becomes lower as it goes to the right.

The base unit 620b guides game balls B removed from the ball tank 552 and game balls B discharged from the game board 5 to the right as viewed from the front using the ball removal guide section 627 and discharged ball receiving section 628, and then discharges them downward from the ball discharge port 629, making it easier to ensure a wider space to the left of the center as viewed from the front. This makes it possible to make the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a wider, allowing the player to hear a sound with richer bass than conventional pachinko machines.

The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 includes a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b, and a power supply board cover 631 attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630.

The payout control unit 620d includes a box-shaped payout control board box 632 that is detachably attached to the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board 633 (see FIG. 96) housed in the payout control board box 632. The payout control board 633 controls the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to a payout command from the main control board 1310 of the game board 5 or the like, by pressing the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the tray unit 200, or the like. The payout control board box 632 is formed so that it leaves a trace of opening and closing. This makes it possible to detect any illegal modifications to the payout control board 633, thereby enhancing the deterrent effect against illegal acts.

The interface unit 620e includes a board base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620a, an interface board 635 attached to the rear surface of the board base 634, and an interface board cover 636 attached to the board base 634 so as to cover the rear side of the interface board 635.

The board base 634 is attached to the rear of the speaker box 623 at the part that protrudes furthest to the rear, behind the main frame speaker 622. One end (main frame 4 side) of the connection cable 503 is connected to the interface board 635. The interface board 635 is connected to the power supply board 630, payout control board 633, main control board 1310, peripheral control board 1510, etc., and is also connected to the CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends to the right of the board base 634 (interface board 635) when viewed from the front, so as to cover part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. Back cover]
The rear cover 640 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 75 to 81. The rear cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 that is inserted from the front into the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 and attached. The right side of the rear cover 640 in a front view is attached to the rear end extending vertically of the rear extension part 501j of the main body frame base 501 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending vertically, and the left side is attached to the rear cover attachment part 551i of the payout base 551 and the rear cover attachment part 601a of the upper full ball path unit 600.

The rear cover 640 is formed in a shape such that the right side of a flat plate extending vertically and horizontally is bent forward when viewed from the front, and is formed so that when assembled to the main body frame 4, the rear surface is positioned approximately on the same plane as the rear surface of the upper part 551d of the back plate of the payout base 551. The rear cover 640 has multiple slits 641 formed therein that penetrate from front to back and extend vertically. In this embodiment, the rear cover 640 is formed from a transparent synthetic resin, and the inside of the main body frame 4 can be seen from the rear of the pachinko machine 1.

[4-10. Locking unit]
The locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Fig. 97. Fig. 97(a) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit seen from the rear. The locking unit 650 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, and locks between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3, and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2.

The locking unit 650 is equipped with a unit base 651 that is attached to the right side of the rear extension 501j of the main frame base 501 and extends vertically, a number of door frame hooks 652 that protrude forward from the unit base 651 and can engage with the door frame 3, a number of outer frame hooks 653 that protrude rearward from the unit base 651 and can engage with the outer frame 2, and a transfer cylinder 654 that protrudes forward from the lower front end of the unit base 651 and moves the door frame hooks 652 or outer frame hooks 653 up and down depending on the direction of rotation.

The locking unit 650 also includes a lock spring 655 that urges the door frame hook 652 downward and the outer frame hook 653 upward, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that protrudes forward from a position above the transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651 and slides downward to move the outer frame hook 653 downward.

When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the main frame 4, the multiple (three) door frame hooks 652, the transmission cylinder 654, and the outer frame unlocking lever 656 protrude forward from the front surface of the main frame base 501. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion opening 501f of the main frame base 501, and by closing the door frame 3 against the main frame 4, the front end of the transmission cylinder 654 engages with the rotation transmission member 133 of the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3, and the rotation of the key inserted in the keyhole 132 is transmitted and rotated.

The locking unit 650 has multiple (three) door frame hooks 652 that engage with the hooking member 116 of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and multiple (two) outer frame hooks 653 that engage with the upper hooking member 24 and lower hooking member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 in the outer frame 2.

When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, a key that corresponds to the keyhole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and rotated counterclockwise as viewed from the front, the multiple door frame hooks 652 move upward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the door frame 3 is unlocked from the main frame 4. On the other hand, when the key is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front, the multiple outer frame hooks 653 move downward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the main frame 4 is unlocked from the outer frame 2. When the door frame 3 is open from the main frame 4, sliding the outer frame unlocking lever 656 downward causes the multiple outer frame hooks 653 to move downward, and the main frame 4 is unlocked from the outer frame 2. In this way, the lock between the main frame 4 and the door frame 3, or between the main frame 4 and the outer frame 2, can be unlocked.

When locking between the main frame 4 and the door frame 3, or between the main frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the hooks for the door frame 652 and the hooks for the outer frame 653 are inclined so that the tips become thinner, so that when the door frame 3 is closed against the main frame 4, or the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2, the hooks for the door frame 652 and the hooks for the outer frame 653 move downward or upward to overcome the hooking member 116, the upper hooking member 24, and the lower hooking member 25, and then are locked by the biasing force of the locking spring 655.

[4-11. Detailed configuration of the upper part of the main body frame]
Next, the detailed configuration of the upper part of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 98 to 105. Figure 98(a) is a plan view of the main body frame, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along line B-B in (a). Figure 99 is an enlarged view of the upper part of the main body frame in a perspective view seen from the rear. Figure 100(a) is a perspective view seen from the front and above in a state in which the ball tank is assembled with the tank rail, etc., and (b) is a perspective view of (a) seen from the front and below. Figure 101 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of Figure 100(a). Figure 102 is an explanatory diagram showing the area through which game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame flow. Figure 103 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame. Figure 104 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls to the bypass passage in the upper part of the main body frame. Figure 105 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in a perspective view of the main body frame seen from the rear of the hinge side.

As described above, the main body frame 4 is made up of a frame-shaped main body frame base 501 whose rear portion can be inserted into the outer frame 2 and which is detachably and hinge-rotatably attached to the outer frame 2 by the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, and which can support the outer periphery of the game board 5; an inverted L-shaped payout base 551 attached along the upper and left edges of the rear side of the main body frame base 501 when viewed from the front; a ball tank 552 attached to the payout base 551, which is box-shaped (container-shaped) and extends left and right, and is open upward; and a tank 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552, which is groove-shaped and opens upward, and extends leftward. The tank rail 553 includes a first rail cover 554 attached to a portion of the upper end of the tank rail 553, a second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, spaced to the left of the first rail cover 554 when viewed from the front, a ball straightening member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, a ball stopper member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and a payout device 580 attached to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 behind the payout base 551 for paying out game balls B to the player.

The ball tank 552 has a bottom wall 552a that is shaped like a rectangle extending in the left-right direction when viewed from the top, with the left side slanted lower when viewed from the front, a front wall 552b and a rear wall 552c that extend upward from the front and rear edges of the bottom wall 552a, respectively, and a left wall 552d and a right wall 552e that extend upward from the left and right edges of the bottom wall 552a, respectively, and is formed like a container with an open top. The ball tank 552 stores game balls B supplied from island facilities such as an amusement hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

The spherical tank 552 also has an overflow section 552f that is cut out from above in the front wall 552b and is formed lower than the remaining outer periphery upper edge. This overflow section 552f is formed over a length of approximately 3/4 of the left-right length of the front wall 552b, from the end side of the left side wall 552d of the front wall 552b to the end side on the opposite side (the right side wall 552e side).

The right end (upstream side) of the tank rail 553 is connected to the inside of the ball tank 552 in front view, and the downstream side extends to one side (left side) in the left-right direction so as to move away from the ball tank 552. The tank rail 553 has a gutter-shaped main guide section 553a that extends from the upstream area to the downstream end at the bottom and is formed so that only one game ball B can flow in the width direction perpendicular to the flow direction of the game ball B. The main guide section 553a is inclined so that it becomes lower as it approaches the left side when viewed from the front. In addition, the main guide section 553a is formed in a crank shape that extends from the right end side to a position that is about 1/10 of the total length in the left-right direction in a plan view, parallel to the axis extending from the right end side to the left in the left-right direction, and then extends diagonally from the right end to a position that is about 4/10 of the total length in the left-right direction so as to move backward as it moves to the left, and then extends from there to the left end in a parallel manner to the axis extending in the left-right direction. In the main guide section 553a, the tank rail 553 has a section that extends parallel to the axis extending from the left end to the right in the left-right direction, and extends to the upper end with the same width, and the upper end of this section is closed by attaching the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball straightening member 556 to the upper end. In addition, in the section where the upper side is closed, the tank rail 553 is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows becomes lower toward the downstream end (left end), and at the downstream end, it is formed at a height (slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B) that allows only one game ball B to flow.

The tank rail 553 extends from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed above the main guide section 553a, and has a bulging section 553b that bulges out wider than the width of the main guide section 553a so that multiple game balls B are lined up in a width direction perpendicular to the flow direction of the game balls B, and narrows in width from the upstream end to the downstream side to match the width of the main guide section 553a. This bulging section 553b allows multiple game balls B that were wide in the width direction on the upstream side to be aligned so that the width becomes the width of one game ball B as they move downstream. The bulging section 553b is also formed so that the width becomes narrower as it moves from the upper end side to the lower main guide section 553a. As a result, the tank rail 553 can align multiple game balls B flowing through the bulging section 553b in a line in the width direction as they move downstream and downward.

The bulge 553b of the tank rail 553 has a three-dimensional curved shape with the center of curvature located on the inner side. The bulge 553b has a curved center located above the main guide 553a, so that the tank rail 553 has a slightly chamfered corner at the boundary between the main guide 553a and the bulge 553b. The bulge 553b is also curved with a larger curvature downstream than upstream. For this reason, the game ball B circulating through the three-dimensionally curved bulge 553b has a reaction force acting in various directions depending on the position of the abutting bulge 553b, which suppresses the occurrence of ball jamming in the bulge 553b. In more detail, if the bulging portion 553b is formed into a shape that extends in a constant direction, a reaction force always acts on the game ball B circulating inside the bulging portion 553b from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b in a constant direction, and the reaction force is difficult to disperse, so the game ball B inside is always pushed in a constant direction, making it difficult for the game ball B to escape and making it easier for ball jamming to occur. On the other hand, since the bulging portion 553b is a three-dimensional curved surface, the direction of the reaction force acting from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b varies depending on the position of the game ball B, and the pushing direction of the multiple game balls B circulating inside is dispersed, making it easier for the pushed game balls B to escape and making it easier for ball jamming to occur.

The tank rail 553 is made of a transparent material and is configured so that the inside can be seen from the outside. As a result, even if ball jamming occurs in the tank rail 553, the state of the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, so the location of the ball jam can be quickly identified. Therefore, ball jamming in the tank rail 553 can be quickly resolved, so that the interruption of play due to ball jamming can be shortened as much as possible, and the decrease in the player's interest in the game due to the interruption of play can be suppressed. In addition, since the tank rail 553 is transparent, the rear side (back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main frame 4 can be seen from the rear through the tank rail 553, so when a malfunction occurs in the movable performance unit of the game board 5, the state of the transmission mechanism such as the drive motor, gears, and belts can be confirmed with the game board 5 attached to the main frame 4, and the same effect as above can be achieved.

The main frame 4 is provided in front of the ball tank 552, extends in the front-rear direction, and extends outward (leftward) from the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 on the same side as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction (left side when viewed from the front). It is equipped with an overflow surface portion 501m whose rear end side is at the same height as the overflow portion 552f and inclined so that the front end side is higher in order to return the game balls B that have overflowed forward from the ball tank 552 to the ball tank 552, and a bypass passage 552g that extends rearward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 at the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m to above the bulge portion 553b whose upper side is open on the tank rail 553, inclined so that the rear end side is lower, and inclined so that the side away from the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction (left side) is lower, and guides some of the game balls B that have overflowed from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m.

The main frame 4 is provided with a discharge section 551j, which is provided on the opposite side of the left wall 552d of the ball tank 552 on both the left and right outer sides of the bypass passage 552g, with a width in the left and right direction greater than the outer diameter of the game ball B and a bottom surface lower than the upper open portion of the tank rail 553, an external terminal board 558, which is provided on the opposite side of the bypass passage 552g across the discharge section 551j and at a position lower than the overflow surface portion 501m, and has multiple electric wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring can be connected from the rear, and a terminal cover 551k which covers the upper side of the multiple electric wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal board 558) and has an upper surface extending horizontally at a position higher than the overflow surface portion 501m.

The overflow surface 501m is formed on the main frame base 501. The overflow surface 501m extends rearward in a flat plate shape from a position two to four times the outer diameter of the game ball B lower than the upper edge of the rear surface of the base main body 501a, which is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. The overflow surface 501m is formed with a length in the left-right direction that is about 1/3 of the left-right length of the main frame base 501, and the left end when viewed from the front is located to the right of 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction from the left end of the main frame base 501. The overflow surface 501m is formed with a height from the front end to the rear end that is about 1/2 the outer diameter of the game ball B. When the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2, a gap of about twice the outer diameter of the game ball B is formed between the overflow surface 501m and the outer frame upper member 30.

The main frame base 501 is arranged on both the left and right sides of the overflow surface 501m, and has flat left and right step portions 501n and 501o that extend approximately horizontally at the same height as the front end of the overflow surface 501m, and a plurality of ribs 501p that extend in the front-rear direction on both the left and right outer sides of the left and right step portions 501n and 501o with their upper ends higher than the left and right step portions 501n and 501o, and are arranged in a row in the left and right direction at intervals narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The left step portion 501n is formed so that its left-right length is shorter than its front-rear length. The left step portion 501n is also inclined so that its rear right corner is slightly lower than the horizontal plane when viewed from the front. The right step portion 501o is formed so that its left-right length is longer than its front-rear length. The right step portion 501o is also inclined so that its rear left corner is slightly lower than the horizontal plane when viewed from the front.

The multiple ribs 501p of the main frame base 501 are formed higher than the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and when the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2, the gap between the outer frame 2 and the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 is formed at a height narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B.

When the main frame base 501 is assembled to the main frame 4, in a front view, the right end of the overflow surface 501m is aligned with the right end of the overflow section 552f of the spherical tank 552 in the left-right direction, the left end of the overflow surface 501m is aligned with the left end of the bypass passage 552g in the left-right direction, and the right end of the right step 501o is aligned with the right side wall 552e of the spherical tank 552 in the left-right direction.

The bypass passage 552g is formed integrally with the spherical tank 552. In the following, the container-like area surrounded by the bottom wall 552a, the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, the left side wall 552d, and the right side wall 552e is also simply referred to as the spherical tank 552. The bypass passage 552g has a passage surface 552h that extends leftward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the spherical tank 552 in a flat plate shape, with the front end at the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the rear end inclined so as to be lower, and a weir portion that extends upward from the end edge of the passage surface 552h opposite the left side wall 552d to the same height as the left side wall 552d. The left end side (the weir portion 552i side) of the rear end edge of the passage surface 552h of the bypass passage 552g in a front view extends rearward to the same position as the rear wall 552c of the spherical tank 552, and extends obliquely so as to move forward from the left end side toward the right end side. Note that the left-right inclination of the passage surface 552h of the bypass passage 552g may be horizontal.

When assembled to the main frame 4, the rear end of the bypass passage 552g extends along the front end of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends in a crank-like shape in the left-right direction and that extends diagonally to the left-right direction. In other words, the rear end of the bypass passage 552g extends diagonally to the left-right direction. As a result, the flow direction of the game ball B guided rearward by the bypass passage 552g changes from the diagonal rear end to a direction perpendicular to the diagonal rear end. The diagonally extending rear end of the bypass passage 552g extends approximately parallel to the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 (the flow direction of the game ball B in the tank rail 553). Therefore, the game ball B is released from the rear end of the bypass passage 552g in a direction approximately perpendicular to the flow direction (width direction) of the tank rail 553, so that the game ball B from the bypass passage 552g can be received at the wide portion of the tank rail 553. In addition, the game balls B are supplied from the bypass passage 552g into the tank rail 553 in a direction approximately perpendicular (perpendicular) to the flow direction of the game balls B, which makes it difficult for the game balls B from the bypass passage 552g to cause ball clogging in the tank rail 553.

The bypass passage 552g extends diagonally in the left-right direction so that its rear end moves rearward as it approaches the downstream side of the tank rail 553. Therefore, when the game ball B is released from the bypass passage 552g toward the tank rail 553, the rear end that extends diagonally allows the game ball B to be released toward the upstream side, where the tank rail 553 is wider, rather than the downstream side, where the tank rail 553 is narrower. By releasing the game ball B into the wider area, it is possible to prevent ball jamming within the tank rail 553.

In addition, the portion of the tank rail 553 where the game ball B is guided by the bypass passage 552g corresponds to the rear of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 and the outside of the left portion of the rear wall 552c when viewed from the front. Game balls B that pass under the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 (the ceiling side of the opening 552k) from inside the ball tank 552 flow through this portion. For this reason, in the portion behind the bypass passage 552g on the tank rail 553, the height of multiple game balls B stacked vertically does not exceed the height of the ceiling of the opening 552k (the height of the wall of the tank rail 553). Therefore, a space (empty space) can be secured downstream of the ball tank 552 on the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the bypass passage 552g, allowing game balls B to be stacked upwards, so that game balls B guided rearward by the bypass passage 552g can be reliably received by the tank rail 553, and game balls B will not spill rearward from the tank rail 553.

The spherical tank 552 has a flat guide surface portion 552j that extends downward to the right from a position slightly lower than the overflow portion 552f on the left side wall 552d on the inside surrounded by the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, and the left side wall 552d. The guide surface portion 552j extends in the front-rear direction from the front wall 552b to the rear wall 552c. In addition, the guide surface portion 552j is formed in such a shape that, in a front view, the right edge extends obliquely rearward from a position at about 1/3 of the total length of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction from the left end of the front wall 552b to a position at about 1/9 of the total length of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction from the left end of the front wall 552b to a position at about 1/2 of the total length of the front-to-rear direction from the front wall 552b to the left side wall 552d, and then extends parallel to the left side wall 552d to the vicinity of the rear wall 552c, and from there extends parallel to the rear wall 552c with a constant width in the front-to-rear direction from the left end of the rear wall 552c to a position at about 1/3 of the total length of the rear wall 552c in the left-to-right direction.

The spherical tank 552 has an opening 552k formed so as to penetrate the area surrounded by the right end edge of the guide surface portion 552j formed in the above-mentioned shape in a plan view and the straight line connecting the end of the right end edge on the front wall 552b side and the end on the rear wall 552c side in the vertical direction. In addition, the spherical tank 552 has flat flange portions 552l extending outward in the left-right direction and in the vertical direction on the same plane as the front wall 552b at the front end side of the right side wall 552e and the front end side of the weir portion 552i of the bypass passage 552g. The height of the upper edge of the part of the front wall 552b excluding the overflow portion 552f and the upper edge of the two flange portions 552l of the spherical tank 552 is higher than the upper edge of the left side wall 552d and the rear wall 552c (the upper surface of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o of the main body frame base 501).

When the spherical tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are assembled together, the upstream end (the right end in front view) of the tank rail 553 is connected to the opening 552k of the spherical tank 552. In addition, the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553, which extends left and right in a crank shape in a plan view, and the portion extending straight left and right to the left of that portion are located (protruding) rearward from the spherical tank 552. The rear end edge of the left bypass passage 552g of the left side wall 552d of the spherical tank 552 is located at the front end of the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553, which extends left and right in a crank shape in a plan view.

The discharge section 551j is formed on the upper surface of the dispensing base 551. When assembled to the main body frame 4, the discharge section 551j extends rearward from the rear side of the flange section 552l on the left side of the spherical tank 552 as viewed from the front to the tank rail 553, so that the discharge section 551j lowers in a stepped manner from a height lower than the bypass passage 552g to the same height as the bottom wall 552a of the spherical tank 552, and then extends leftward along the tank rail 553 to a position higher than the upper end of the tank rail 553 (a position near the center in the left-right direction of the second rail cover 555), and then extends rearward.

The external terminal board 558 has a number of electric wire connection terminals 558a attached to the rear surface in a line in the left-right direction. The electric wire connection terminal 558a is a one-touch terminal whose grip opens by operating a lever to grip the tip of an electric wire. When assembled to the main body frame 4, the external terminal board 558 is disposed in front of the area where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball straightening member 556. The terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal board 558 (the multiple electric wire connection terminals 558a) is formed on the upper surface of the dispensing base 551. The upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is formed at approximately the same height as the upper end of the flange portion 552l of the ball tank 552.

Next, the effect of the upper part of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described. First, as shown by the white arrows in FIG. 102, the overflow surface 501m, the left stage 501n, the right stage 501o, and the bypass passage 552g are inclined so that the rear ends of the overflow surface 501m and the bypass passage 552g are lower, and the rear right corner of the left stage 501n and the rear left corner of the right stage 501o are lower. In addition, the bottom wall 552a and the tank rail 553 (main guide section 553a) of the ball tank 552 are inclined so that the left end is lower when viewed from the front. In addition, the guide surface 552j of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the right end side opposite the bottom wall 552a is lower.

And when the amount of game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 increases due to supply from the island equipment, they can first flow out to the outside (front) of the ball tank 552 over the overflow section 552f, which is the lowest part of the outer periphery upper edge, and the game balls B that overflow from the ball tank 552 can escape to the overflow surface section 501m, and the game balls B that flow out from the ball tank 552 to the front overflow surface section 501m can be returned to the ball tank 552 by the inclination of the overflow surface section 501m (see Figure 103). Therefore, since it is possible to prevent any further increase in the game balls B in the ball tank 552, it is possible to suppress the game balls B from pressing against each other strongly in the ball tank 552 (increase in ball pressure), and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of clogging (so-called ball jamming) due to the game balls B interlocking with each other in the ball tank 552.

In addition, since the bypass passage 552g is provided, as shown in FIG. 104, the game balls B that have overflowed from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the bypass passage 552g. This makes it possible to avoid the game balls B that have accumulated on the overflow surface portion 501m from exerting a strong backward pressure on the game balls B in the ball tank 552, and prevents the game balls B from clogging in the ball tank 552. In addition, since the game balls B can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the bypass passage 552g, it is possible to prevent the game balls B that have overflowed from the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501m from spilling outside (rear side) of the main body frame 4. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a malfunction in which the game balls B that have spilled outside the main body frame 4 are pinched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, making it impossible to open or close the main body frame 4.

Furthermore, some of the game balls B that have overflowed from the ball tank 552 onto the overflow surface 501m can be guided downstream of the tank rail 553 by the bypass passage 552g, and the game balls B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a certain position along the left side away from the ball tank 552. This allows the flow (pressure) of the game balls B sent to the tank rail 553 by the bypass passage 552g to be directed downstream of the tank rail 553, preventing the game balls B from pushing against each other too strongly inside the tank rail 553 and preventing the game balls B from clogging.

In addition, at the outer circumferential upper edge of the ball tank 552, the height of the remaining upper edge other than the overflow section 552f is made higher than the overflow section 552f, so that the upper edge of the left side wall 552d on one side of the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g is higher than the overflow section 552f, that is, the rear end of the overflow surface section 501m. As a result, the game balls B that overflow from the ball tank 552 over the overflow section 552f and overflow into the overflow surface section 501m and flow from the overflow surface section 501m to the bypass passage 552g are blocked by the left side wall 552d on one side of the ball tank 552, so that it is possible to prevent the game balls B from returning from the bypass passage 552g to the ball tank 552 side, and it is possible to prevent the game balls B on the bypass passage 552g side from pressing against the game balls B in the ball tank 552 and causing clogging of the game balls B in the ball tank 552.

Furthermore, as described above, the upper edge of the left side wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g is higher than the rear end of the overflow surface 501m (passage surface 552h on which the game ball B rolls in the bypass passage 552g), so that the game ball B can be prevented from overflowing from the ball tank 552 into the bypass passage 552g without passing through the overflow surface 501m. This prevents the game ball B from flowing in from the side (ball tank 552) into the bypass passage 552g, so that the flow of the game ball B in the bypass passage 552g can be made to flow in a constant direction from the overflow surface 501m on the front end side to the tank rail 553 on the rear end side, and the pressure of the game ball B guided from the bypass passage 552g to the tank rail 553 can be made to be in a constant direction. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from being pushed against each other and getting caught in the tank rail 553 due to the pressure being applied to the game balls B being in different directions, and it is possible to prevent the game balls B from becoming clogged.

In addition, the bottom of the tank rail 553 is provided with a main guide section 553a that extends to the downstream end, so that when the game balls B in the tank rail 553 reach the main guide section 553a, they are lined up in a row in the left-right direction, so that the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be aligned and the game balls B can be reliably guided to the downstream payout device 580. In addition, the portion of the tank rail 553 where the upper side is open is provided with a wide bulge section 553b that allows multiple game balls B to be lined up, so that the game balls B released from the rear end of the bypass passage 552g can be reliably received, and the above-mentioned effects can be reliably achieved.

In addition, the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 extends from the upstream end to the portion closed at the top, and narrows in width from the upstream end to the downstream side to match the width of the main guide portion 553a, so that as the multiple game balls B move downstream in the bulging portion 553b, they can be aligned in a line in the width direction. In addition, the portion closed at the top of the tank rail 553 is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game balls B flow decreases toward the downstream end, so that the multiple game balls B that were stacked in multiple layers in the height direction on the upstream side (ball tank 552 side) can be aligned in a line by circulating them downstream through the portion closed at the top of the tank rail 553. Therefore, the tank rail 553 can guide the multiple game balls B in a line aligned in a line to the downstream side (payout device 580 side).

Furthermore, since it is equipped with the overflow surface portion 501m and the bypass passage 552g, it is possible to store a certain number of game balls B therein, and since the tank rail 553 is equipped with the bulge portion 553b, the volume inside the tank rail 553 can be increased, so that in combination with the ball tank 552, more game balls B can be stored.

In addition, on the opposite side of the ball tank 552 with the bypass passage 552g and the discharge section 551j in between, there is an external terminal board 558 with multiple wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring is connected, and a terminal cover 551k covering the upper side of the multiple wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal board 558). Therefore, the wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k can be placed far away from the ball tank 552 to which the game balls B are supplied from the island equipment. Therefore, even if the game balls B supplied from the island equipment bounce or are supplied with force at the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface section 501m, it is difficult for them to reach (contact) the wire connection terminals 558a, etc., and there is no problem such as a short circuit or disconnection of the electrical wiring due to the game balls B contacting them.

In addition, since the multiple electric wire connection terminals 558a face rearward and the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is higher than the overflow surface 501m, even if the game ball B supplied from the island equipment to the ball tank 552 bounces off the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface 501m, it is difficult for it to land on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k. Even if the game ball B does land on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, it is difficult for it to fall from the rear side, making it easier to avoid the occurrence of the above-mentioned problems.

Furthermore, the game ball B returned from the overflow surface portion 501m to the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is sent to the upstream side of the ball tank 552 (to the right in FIG. 103) due to the inclination of the guide surface portion 552j. This makes it possible to prevent the game ball B on the guide surface portion 552j from pressing downstream against the game ball B in the ball tank 552, and makes it possible to prevent clogging of the game ball B in the ball tank 552.

In addition, even if the game ball B supplied to the ball tank 552 from the island equipment bounces off the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface 501m and lands on the left step 501n or right step 501o on both sides of the overflow surface 501m, as shown in Figure 103, the slope of these parts can guide the game ball B to the overflow surface 501m or the bypass passage 552g, preventing malfunctions caused by the game ball B spilling outside the main frame 4.

In addition, because the game balls B pass under the guide surface portion 552j when they flow from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553, the guide surface portion 552j can regulate the amount (height) of game balls B stacked on the upper side of the tank rail 553 so that it does not exceed the lower surface of the guide surface portion 552j. Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 (guide surface portion 552j) on the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the bypass passage 552g, space (empty space) can be secured in which game balls B can be stacked on the upper side, and game balls B guided by the bypass passage 552g can be reliably received.

Furthermore, since the multiple electric wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k are positioned in front of the portion of the tank rail 553 whose upper side is closed, even if the game ball B falls rearward from the terminal cover 551k, the game ball B will not be received by the tank rail 553, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from affecting the game ball B inside the tank rail 553 and causing a malfunction.

[4-12-1. Second embodiment of tank rail etc.]
Next, the second embodiment of the tank rail 553 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 106 to 110. Fig. 106 is a perspective view showing an enlarged portion of the tank rail when a pachinko machine equipped with the tank rail of the second embodiment is viewed from the rear. Fig. 107(a) is a plan view showing the tank rail of Fig. 106 assembled together with the ball tank, (b) is a perspective view of the tank rail of (a) viewed from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the tank rail of (a) viewed from the rear. Fig. 108(a) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail of Fig. 107 disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail of Fig. 107 disassembled and viewed from the rear. Fig. 109 is a cross-sectional view of the tank rail of Fig. 107(a) cut along the kerk line. Fig. 110 is an explanatory view showing the flow of game balls in the tank rail of Fig. 107 in cross section. A second embodiment of a tank rail 553A, which is different from the above, has, in addition to the tank rail 553A, a first rail cover 554A, a second rail cover 555A, and a ball straightening member 556A, which differ from the tank rail 553, first rail cover 554, second rail cover 555, and ball straightening member 556 of the above embodiment, and similar configurations are described using the same symbols.

The tank rail 553A in this embodiment straightens the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 and delivers them to the ball guiding unit 570 of the payout unit 560. This tank rail 553A extends to the left in the shape of a groove that is open upward. A first rail cover 554A is attached to the tank rail 553A so as to close the upper end side, a second rail cover 555A is provided to the left of the first rail cover 554A when viewed from the front, and a ball straightening member 556A is provided on the upper side of the second rail cover 555A. A ball stopper member 557 capable of preventing the flow of game balls B is attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553A.

As shown in FIG. 107(a) and other figures, the tank rail 553A has a serpentine portion 553c that snakes back and forth downstream of the bulge portion 553b. This serpentine portion 553c can suppress the flow speed of the game balls B. The first rail cover 554A is attached upstream of the serpentine portion 553c (toward the ball tank 552).

The second rail cover 555A extends in the left-right direction from the first rail cover 554A to the downstream end (left end in front view) including the serpentine portion 553c at the open upper end side of the tank rail 553A. The second rail cover 555A has a plate-shaped cover portion 555a that closes the upper end of the tank rail 553A, a pair of protective walls 555b that extend upward from both front and rear ends upstream of the left-right center of the cover portion 555a, and an opening 555c that penetrates the cover portion 555a between the pair of protective walls 555b. The pair of protective walls 555b are formed in a serpentine shape following the serpentine portion 553c at the portion where the serpentine portion 553c of the tank rail 553A is provided. The rectifying piece 556a of the spherical rectifying member 556A described later is inserted into the opening 555c so as to penetrate from above.

The ball straightening member 556A has an upstream end that extends forward and backward and is attached so as to be rotatable around an axis. The ball straightening member 556A is provided between a pair of protective walls 555b above the cover portion 555a of the second rail cover 555A, and has a flat straightening piece 556a that penetrates the opening 555c of the second rail cover 555A and protrudes into the tank rail 553A. This ball straightening member 556A abuts from above against the game balls B stacked in multiple layers in the tank rail 553A, making it easier to break up the layers of game balls B and align them in a row, and also prevents the uppermost game ball B from moving quickly downstream, preventing ball biting on the downstream side of the tank rail 553A.

According to the tank rail 553A of this embodiment, in the assembled state, the ball straightening member 556A is located between a pair of protective walls 555b of the second rail cover 555A and below the upper end of the protective wall 555b. This prevents the electric wire (shown by a broken line in FIG. 106) connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a of the external terminal board 558 provided on the front upper side of the part where the ball straightening member 556A is attached in the tank rail 553A from contacting the ball straightening member 556A from above. However, if the electric wire connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a contacts the ball straightening member 556A from above, the weight of the electric wire may prevent the ball straightening member 556A from rotating upward even if the game ball B abuts against the straightening piece 556a of the ball straightening member 556A, and the ball straightening member 556A may not be able to fully exert its straightening effect on the game ball B. In contrast, in this embodiment, a pair of protective walls 555b of the second rail cover 555A can prevent the electric wire connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a from coming into contact with the ball straightening member 556A, so that when a game ball B comes into contact with the straightening piece 556a of the ball straightening member 556A, the ball straightening member 556A can rotate upward, fully exerting the straightening effect and preventing ball jamming or ball clogging within the tank rail 553A.

In addition, since the tank rail 553A is provided with a serpentine portion 553c, the flow speed of the game balls B can be suppressed by the serpentine portion 553c. However, in the tank rail 553A, where the height narrows toward the downstream side, if the upper game balls B among the game balls B stacked in multiple layers move downstream first, ball biting is likely to occur. In contrast, in this embodiment, as described above, the flow speed of the game balls B can be suppressed by the serpentine portion 553c, so that the upper game balls B can be prevented from moving downstream first, and the occurrence of ball biting can be reduced.

As described above, the protective wall 555b of the second rail cover 555A prevents the electric wires from coming into contact with the ball straightening member 556A, preventing ball clogging. This allows the tank rail 553A to be positioned near a terminal board (e.g., external terminal board 558) or control board to which many electric wires are connected, or allows the terminal board or control board to be positioned near the tank rail 553A to which many electric wires are connected, providing a pachinko machine 1 with a high degree of freedom in the positioning of the tank rail 553A (ball tank 552), terminal board, etc.

[4-12-2. Third embodiment of tank rail etc.]
Next, the third embodiment of the tank rail 553 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 111 to 118. Fig. 111 is a perspective view showing an enlarged view of the tank rail portion of the main body frame equipped with the tank rail of the third embodiment as viewed from the right rear. Fig. 112 is a perspective view showing an enlarged view of the tank rail portion of the main body frame equipped with the tank rail of the third embodiment as viewed from the left rear. Fig. 113(a) is a rear view of the main body frame showing an enlarged view of the external terminal board portion, and Fig. 113(b) is a left side view of the main body frame showing an enlarged view of the upper portion. Fig. 114(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line D-D in Fig. 113(b), and Fig. 114(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line C-C in Fig. 113(a). Fig. 115 is an explanatory view showing an enlarged view of the vicinity of the tank rail in Fig. 114(b). Fig. 116(a) is a perspective view of the tank rail etc. of the third embodiment as seen from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the tank rail etc. of (a) as seen from the upper right rear, and (c) is a perspective view of the tank rail etc. of (a) as seen from the lower right rear. Fig. 117 is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail etc. of Fig. 116 as seen from the front, and Fig. 118 is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail etc. of Fig. 116 as seen from the rear.

The tank rail etc. of the third embodiment is the same as the tank rail etc. of the first embodiment described above (ball tank 552, tank rail 553, first rail cover 554, second rail cover 555, ball straightening member 556, and ball stopping member 557), with the addition of a protective cover 559 that covers the ball straightening member 556 from above. Components similar to those described above will be described with the same reference numerals.

The tank rails etc. of this embodiment include a ball tank 552 that is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551, is box-shaped and extends left and right, and is open upward, and a tank rail 553 that is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 above the part of the dispensing base 551 that extends left and right, is open upward, and extends leftward in a groove shape.

The ball tank 552 is formed with a length in the left-right direction that is approximately half the left-right width of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551, and a length in the front-to-rear direction that is shorter than the front-to-rear depth of the top plate portion 551a. The ball tank 552 is attached to the top surface of the top plate portion 551a at a position toward the right in the left-to-right direction. The bottom surface of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the left end is lower. The left end of the ball tank 552 is connected to the tank rail 553.

The tank rail 553 is attached to the top surface of the top plate 551a of the payout base 551 near the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction. The tank rail 553 is formed in a shape in a plan view that extends diagonally from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552 to the left and rear so that the depth in the front-to-rear direction changes from a depth several times the outer diameter of the game ball B to a depth of approximately one, and then extends straight to the left with a depth in the front-to-rear direction slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lower, and the left end of the bottom surface opens downward with a size slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper end opening of the guide passage 570a in the ball guide unit 570 of the payout unit 560.

The upper end of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left is inclined at a steeper angle to the horizontal than the bottom surface so that the left end is lower at a height slightly greater than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a so that the rear end of the portion that extends straight to the left approximately coincides with the rear edge of the top plate portion 551a.

In the bottom surface of the tank rail 553, a portion extending straight to the left (a portion in which the height decreases toward the downstream side) is formed with a plurality of openings 553d through which garbage, dust, etc. in the tank rail 553 can be dropped. These openings 553d are provided in the portions below the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball straightening member 556 described later. The openings 553d open toward the bottom and rear of the tank rail 553, extend to the left and right, and are formed to a size that does not allow the game ball B to pass through. When the game ball B is present in the tank rail 553, a part of the game ball B can be directly seen from the rear through the openings 553d. In addition, the game ball B in the tank rail 553 can be touched through the openings 553d with the fingers or a thin stick of the operator. This allows the ball clogging that occurs in the portion to be eliminated through the openings 553d. In addition, through the opening 553d, the ball straightening member 556 can be lifted via the game ball B in that area, allowing the operation of the ball straightening member 556 to be confirmed.

The tank rail, etc. is provided with a first rail cover 554 that is to the left of the ball tank 552 and closes a predetermined range of the upper part of the tank rail 553 from the right end to the left of the part that extends leftward at a substantially constant depth in the front-to-rear direction on the tank rail 553, a second rail cover 555 that closes the upper part of the tank rail 553 from a part spaced apart from the first rail cover 554 to the left end, a ball straightening member 556 provided in a part between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 553, a ball stop member 557 provided near the left end of the underside of the tank rail 553, and a protective cover 559 that covers the upper part from midway in the left-right direction of the first rail cover 554 to midway in the left-right direction of the second rail cover 555, straddling the ball straightening member 556.

The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper end of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 prevent the front-to-rear depth of the upper end of the tank rail 553 from expanding or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B inside the tank rail 553.

The spherical straightening member 556 is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 so that the end on the first rail cover 554 side can rotate about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. The spherical straightening member 556 has a straightening piece 556a that protrudes into the tank rail 553 and extends in the left-right direction (see FIG. 114(a) etc.).

In the tank rail 553, the game balls B stacked vertically are aligned in one layer, but when the number of stacked game balls B is reduced from two layers to one layer, if the game balls B in the upper layer try to overtake the game balls B in the lower layer, the game balls B may become interlocked with each other and become stuck (so-called ball jamming). In contrast, in the ball straightening member 556 of this embodiment, when the game balls B flow in two layers, upper and lower, inside the tank rail 553, the game balls B on the upper layer abut against the straightening piece 556a, slowing down the flow of the game balls B and preventing them from overtaking the game balls B on the lower layer. As a result, the game balls B on the lower layer move downstream first, and the game balls B on the upper layer move behind them, allowing the game balls B to be aligned in one layer. At this time, the game ball B on the upper tier presses against the straightening piece 556a from below, causing the ball straightening member 556 to move so that the straightening piece 556a moves upward, and its own weight presses the game ball B on the upper tier downward. The vertical swing of the ball straightening member 556 (straightening piece 556a) encourages the game ball B on the upper tier to move downward, and prevents ball clogging in that area of the tank rail 553 (the area that becomes lower in height the further downstream).

The ball stopping member 557 is attached to the underside of the tank rail 553 near the left end when viewed from the front, so that it can slide left and right. By sliding it to the left, the opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 can be closed, preventing game balls B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the downstream payout unit.

The protective cover 559 has a band-shaped top plate portion 559a extending left and right, a flat rear plate portion 559b extending downward from a part of the rear edge of the top plate portion 559a, a flat front plate portion 559c extending downward from the front and left edges of the top plate portion 559a, and a flat guide plate portion 559d extending forward from the front plate portion 559c. The top plate portion 559a and the guide plate portion 559d are inclined so that the left end side is lower. The guide plate portion 559d is formed so that the left side of the top plate portion 559a wraps around from the front side to the left, and the rear end of this portion coincides with the rear end of the top plate portion 559a in the front-to-rear direction.

When this protective cover 559 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the top plate portion 559a is positioned to cover the upper part from the middle of the first rail cover 554 in the left-right direction to the middle of the second rail cover 555 in the left-right direction, forming a space between it and the ball straightening member 556, allowing the ball straightening member 556 to swing up and down. The rear plate portion 559b extends to a position lower than the upper end of the tank rail 553 so as to cover the rear of the ball straightening member 556.

The right end of the front plate portion 559c extends further to the right than the top plate portion 559a, and extends along the tank rail 553 to the ball tank 552. The guide plate portion 559d protrudes forward from the front plate portion 559c at a length greater than the diameter of the game ball B at the portion forward of the top plate portion 559a, and is formed so as to be able to guide the game ball B to the left. The guide plate portion 559d is inclined more gently than the upper end of the tank rail 553. The front end of the guide plate portion 559d forms a small gap between the rear surface of the payout base 551 and the guide plate portion 559d, into which the game ball B cannot enter.

When the protective cover 559 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, it can prevent contact with the ball straightening member 556 from the outside. The operation of the ball straightening member 556 can be checked by inserting a thin rod into the opening 553d of the tank rail 553 to make contact from below, or by pushing the game ball B in the tank rail 553 upwards through the opening 553d with an operator's finger or the like, thereby lifting it up via the game ball B.

In addition, the protective cover 559 can guide the game ball B, which for some reason has entered the rear of the external terminal board 558, to the left by the guide plate portion 559d, so that it can be discharged outside from the left side surface of the main body frame 4.

In this embodiment, the ball tank 552, tank rail 553, first rail cover 554, second rail cover 555, ball straightening member 556, and protective cover 559 are made of transparent materials, so that the game ball B in the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside.

In addition, the upper part of the tank rail 553 is covered with the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the protective cover 559, which prevents dirt, dust, and the like from entering the tank rail 553 from above.

In addition, since the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the protective cover 559 cover the top of the tank rail 553, it is not possible to touch the ball straightening member 556 or the game ball B from above. Therefore, if dirt or dust is attached to the game ball B, it is necessary to remove the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the protective cover 559, but in this embodiment, it is meaningful to provide multiple openings 553d at the bottom of the tank rail 553. In more detail, if dirt or dust is attached to the ball straightening member 556 or the game ball B in the tank rail 553, it is possible to touch the game ball B inside through the opening 553d and shake the ball straightening member 556 through the game ball B, so that the dirt or dust attached to the game ball B can be dropped. Then, the dirt or dust dropped from the game ball B can be discharged to the outside through the opening 553d.

However, in the main frame 4, a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends to the left at a substantially constant depth in the fore-and-aft direction is provided behind the external terminal board 558. Therefore, when the electric wire connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a of the external terminal board 558 contacts the ball straightening member 556 from above, the weight of the electric wire may prevent the ball straightening member 556 from rotating upwards even if the game ball B abuts against the straightening piece 556a of the ball straightening member 556, and there is a risk that the ball straightening member 556 will not be able to fully exert its straightening effect on the game ball B.

In addition, since the wire connection terminal 558a of the external terminal board 558 is connected to an electric wire with the coating stripped from the tip, if a game ball B remains behind the external terminal board 558 for some reason, there is a risk that a short circuit will occur due to the remaining game ball B if the electric wire is not connected (inserted) properly into the wire connection terminal 558a.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the protective cover 559 covers the top of the ball straightening member 556, so that the protective cover 559 can prevent the electric wire connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a from coming into contact with the ball straightening member 556. As a result, when a game ball B comes into contact with the straightening piece 556a of the ball straightening member 556, the ball straightening member 556 can rotate upward, fully exerting its straightening effect and preventing the occurrence of ball jamming or ball clogging in the tank rail 553.

However, if the electric wire comes off the external terminal board 558 for some reason and the tip of the wire comes into contact with the game ball B present behind the external terminal board 558, a short circuit occurs and the game hall computer cannot receive the necessary information, resulting in an error in the counting at the game hall. In contrast, according to this embodiment, since the guide plate portion 559d is provided on the protective cover 559, the game ball B that has entered the rear of the external terminal board 558 for some reason can be guided to the left and discharged outside from the left side surface of the main body frame 4. This makes it possible to prevent the game ball B from remaining behind the external terminal board 558, thereby preventing the occurrence of a short circuit caused by the remaining game ball B. Therefore, by preventing a short circuit of the electric wire, it is possible to reliably receive the necessary information in the game hall computer (hall computer), and it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can suppress the occurrence of counting errors in the game hall.

In addition, according to this embodiment, the guide plate portion 559d of the protective cover 559 causes the game ball B to be discharged to the left side of the main body frame 4, which prevents the game ball B from coming into contact with the various electric wires and wiring provided on the rear side of the main body frame 4, causing problems such as disconnection or short circuit.

[4-13. Another embodiment of the board unit]
Next, a board unit 620A of another embodiment (second embodiment) different from the above will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 119 to 124. Fig. 119(a) is a front view of the board unit of another embodiment, (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) seen from the right front, and (c) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) seen from the left front. Fig. 120(a) is a perspective view of the board unit of Fig. 119(a) seen from the upper right rear, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of Fig. 119(a) seen from the lower right rear. Fig. 121 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit of Fig. 119(a) seen from the front, and Fig. 122 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit of Fig. 119(a) seen from the rear. Fig. 123(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the Ki-Ki line in Fig. 119(a), (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the Cou-K line in Fig. 119(a), and (c) is a cross-sectional view taken along the Ke-Ke line in Fig. 119(a). Figure 124 is a bottom view showing the area behind the door frame in a pachinko machine equipped with the board unit of Figure 119(a).

The board unit 620A of this embodiment replaces the board unit 620 described above and is attached to the lower rear surface of the main frame base unit 500. In the board unit 620A of this embodiment, the configuration of the base unit 660 is significantly different from the base unit 620b of the board unit 620 described above. Here, the same reference numerals are used for configurations similar to those of the board unit 620 described above, and detailed explanations are omitted.

The board unit 620A includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500 below the game board placement section 501c, a base unit 660 attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 so as to cover part of the speaker unit 620a from behind, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 660, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to cover part of the payout control unit 620d from behind.

The base unit 660 includes a front base 661 attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, a rear base 662 attached to the rear side of the front base 661 and having a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear surface, an out-ball passage 663 provided between the front base 661 and the rear base 662, through which game balls B discharged downward from the game board 5 flow, an out sensor 664 for detecting game balls B flowing through the out-ball passage 663 one by one, a ball removal guide section 627 that receives game balls B discharged from the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 and guides them to the right when viewed from the front, a ball removal discharge passage 665 provided behind the out ball passage 663 in the rear base 662, through which game balls B guided by the ball removal guide section 627 flow, and a passage wall member 666 attached to the rear base 662 to close the rear side of the ball removal discharge passage 665.

The front base 661 is formed in a box shape that is long from side to side and open to the front. The rear base 662 has a flat partition wall portion 662a that extends left and right at a roughly constant height in the vertical direction, with an out ball passage 663 and a ball removal guide portion 627 formed in front of the partition wall portion 662a, and a ball removal discharge passage 665 formed on the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a. The rear base 662 is formed in a box shape that is open to the rear on the side rear of the partition wall portion 662a.

The base unit 660 has a front base 661, a rear base 662, and a passage wall member 666 formed from transparent materials. Therefore, the ball removal guide section 627, the out ball passage 663, and the ball removal discharge passage 665 are also formed transparent. Therefore, the inside of the ball removal guide section 627, the out ball passage 663, and the ball removal discharge passage 665 can be clearly seen from the top and bottom of the base unit 660, making it easy to check for ball blockages, etc.

The out ball passage 663 is formed in front of a flat partition wall portion 662a that extends left and right at a substantially constant height in the vertical direction of the rear base 662, with the front end open, and the open front end is closed by the front base 661.

The out-ball passage 663 has a ball discharge receiving section 663a that opens upward at approximately the center of the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 1 and extends left-right, an out-ball straightening section 663b that straightens the game balls B received by the ball discharge receiving section 663a into a line while causing them to snake widely left-right, a downward guide section 663c that guides the game balls B straightened into a line by the out-ball straightening section 663b downward, and an out-ball discharge port 663d that opens downward at the lower end of the downward guide section 663c and discharges the game balls B downward from the underside of the base unit 660. The out-ball discharge port 663d of the out-ball passage 663 is provided behind the outer frame 2 (see FIG. 124).

The ball discharge receiving portion 663a of the out ball passage 663 is formed so that its depth in the front-to-rear direction is approximately 2.5 times the outer diameter of the game ball B. The ball discharge receiving portion 663a is inclined at a gentle angle so that the right end is lower.

The out ball straightening section 663b is inclined at a gentle angle from a position to the right of the right end of the ball discharge receiving section 663a toward the bottom of the ball discharge receiving section 663a so that the left end is lower. In addition, the depth of the out ball straightening section 663b in the front-to-back direction narrows as it moves downstream (leftward), and near the downstream end below the ball discharge receiving section 663a, the depth is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B. In addition, the part of the out ball straightening section 663b to the left of the right end of the ball discharge receiving section 663a becomes lower in height as it moves downstream (leftward), and near the downstream end, the height is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B. This allows the game balls B to be aligned in a row in the out ball straightening section 663b.

The lower guide portion 663c extends downward from the downstream end of the out-ball straightening portion 663b, which is below the ball discharge receiving portion 663a, and is curved in a small crank shape backward in the middle of the vertical direction so that the front wall is on the same plane as the rear wall (partition wall portion). As a result, the downstream end of the lower guide portion 663c (out-ball discharge port 663d) is located behind the front surface of the partition wall portion 662a of the rear base 662. The out sensor 664 is provided upstream of the cranked portion of this lower guide portion 663c. This lower guide portion 663c is curved so that the cranked portion does not have a portion extending horizontally, so that even if the game ball B passes through the out sensor 664 and hits the cranked portion, it will not jump up to the upper out sensor 664 side, and it is possible to prevent one game ball B from being detected twice by the out sensor 664.

The out sensor 664 uses a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch that is highly durable and has a long lifespan, since the game ball B passes through it frequently.

The ball removal guide section 627 is located to the left of the ball discharge receiving section 663a in the out ball passage 663. The upstream end of the ball removal guide section 627 opens to the left at the top of the left side when viewed from the front, and the downstream side bends backward and extends to the rear side of the partition wall section 662a of the rear base 662, and is connected to the upstream end of the ball removal and discharge passage 665 (see Figure 123 (a) etc.).

The ball ejection passage 665 is formed on the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a of the rear base 662. The ball ejection passage 665 is formed in the rear base 662 in a state where it is open to the rear, and its rear end side is closed by a passage wall member 666. The rear end of this ball ejection passage 665 is located about one outer diameter of a game ball B forward of the rear end of the rear base 662. In other words, a gap of at least one game ball B is formed between the ball ejection passage 665 and the power supply board 630 of the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the rear base 662.

The upstream end (left end) of this ball removal and discharge passage 665 is connected to the downstream end of the ball removal and guide section 627, and has a horizontal guide section 665a that extends to the right of the ball discharge receiving section 663a at the same inclination as the ball discharge receiving section 663a of the out ball passage 663, a vertical guide section 665b that extends vertically downward from the downstream end (right end) of the horizontal guide section 665a to the underside of the rear base 662, and a ball removal and discharge port 665c that opens downward at the downstream end (lower end) of the vertical guide section 665b. The ball removal and discharge port 665c is located slightly rearward of the out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663 (see Figure 124).

The ball ejection passage 665 also has multiple protrusions 665d that protrude inward alternately at regular intervals in the vertical direction on the left and right inner walls of the vertical guide section 665b. The ball ejection passage 665 allows the game ball B flowing through the vertical guide section 665b, which extends vertically downward, to alternately come into contact with the multiple protrusions 665d, thereby causing the game ball B to flow down in a zigzag pattern, thereby suppressing an increase in its flow speed, and suppressing the speed of the game ball B discharged downward from the ball ejection outlet 665c.

This ball removal and discharge passage 665 is a simple L-shaped passage consisting of a horizontal guide section 665a and a vertical guide section 665b, so that when the ball removal lever 593 is operated to discharge the game balls B in the ball tank 552, many game balls B can be smoothly guided and discharged.

According to the board unit 620A of this embodiment, the game ball B that is shot into the game area 5a and discharged from the game board 5 is received by the ball discharge receiving portion 663a of the out ball passage 663, and then detected by the out sensor 664 and discharged to the island equipment side of the game hall. On the other hand, in order to discharge (remove) the game ball B in the ball tank 552, etc., the game ball B discharged to the ball removal passage 580b side by operating the ball removal lever 593 of the payout device 580 is discharged to the island equipment side of the game hall through the ball removal guide portion 627 and the ball removal discharge passage 665, which are separate and independent from the out ball passage 663. As a result, only the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 can be detected by the out sensor 664 provided in the out ball passage 663, so that only the game balls B discharged from the game board 5 can be accurately counted. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can calculate an accurate payout rate (ball payout rate) of game balls B based on the number of game balls B (safe balls) counted by the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580 and the number of game balls B (out balls) counted by the out sensor 664.

The number of game balls B (number of out balls) counted by the out sensor 664 is the sum of the number of game balls B that have been shot into the game area 5a and received by the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2004, the gate 2002, the second starting opening 2005, the first large winning opening 2006, the second large winning opening 2007, etc., and discharged from the game board 5, and the number of game balls B that have been shot into the game area 5a and then received by the out opening 1008 without being received by any of the winning openings, and is the number of game balls B shot into the game area 5a (number of shot balls).

Note that the payout rate (ball output rate) changes depending on the game status, so the payout rate within a specified period (for example, per unit time, per specified time, per day, etc.) is calculated as follows: "Number of payouts within a specified period ÷ Number of out balls within a specified period = Payout rate within a specified period."

In addition, according to this embodiment, the base unit 620A of the main frame 4 to which the game board 5 is detachably attached is provided with an out ball passage 663 through which the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 flows, and the game ball B flowing through the out ball passage 663 is detected by an out sensor 664. Since the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 can be detected, there is no need to provide the game board 5 with an out ball detection unit that detects "out balls," and the configuration of the game board 5 can be simplified to reduce costs.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, a gap larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B is formed between the rear end of the ball ejection passage 665 and the power supply board 630 of the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the rear base 662. This means that the out ball passage 663 and the ball ejection passage 665 are located away from the power supply board 630 and the payout control board 633, etc., and this reduces the impact on the power supply board 630 and the payout control board 633, etc., of electrical noise caused by static electricity and induced currents generated by the flow of many game balls B through the out ball passage 663 and the ball ejection passage 665, resulting in a pachinko machine 1 that is less likely to malfunction due to the flow of game balls B.

In addition, according to this embodiment, the game ball B, whose flow speed has been suppressed by the out ball straightening section 663b of the out ball passage 663, is detected by the out sensor 664. This makes it possible to weaken the impact on the out sensor 664 caused by the flow of the game ball B, thereby reducing the risk of the out sensor 664 being worn out and damaged early.

Furthermore, if the payout rate (ball payout rate) per predetermined time calculated from the number of safe balls per predetermined time and the number of out balls per predetermined time is displayed so that it can be seen by the player, the player will want many game balls B to be paid out, so if the displayed payout rate is high, the player will immediately recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is likely to pay out many game balls B, making it easier to select the pachinko machine 1 to play on. Furthermore, if the payout rate is displayed so that it can be seen by the player, if a player commits a fraudulent act that pays out many game balls B, the displayed payout rate will be higher than normal, making it easier for other players and staff at the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed to notice the fraudulent act, which will make the player hesitate to commit the fraudulent act, resulting in a pachinko machine 1 that has a high deterrent effect against fraudulent acts.

In addition, if the payout rate calculated from the number of safe balls and the number of out balls is displayed in a position that is not visible to the player, amusement hall staff can see it and detect fraudulent activity for the same reasons as above. Also, when performing maintenance on the pachinko machine 1, if the displayed payout rate is different from the normal value, this may be due to a malfunction within the pachinko machine 1 (e.g., obstructing nails N, main control board 1310, payout control board 633, relay board, connectors, wiring cables, various sensors, etc.), making it possible to respond to the malfunction early and reducing the burden on the amusement hall.

Furthermore, since an out sensor 664 is provided in the out ball passage 663 through which game ball B discharged from the game board 5 flows, there is no need to provide a structure (e.g., an out ball detection unit) for detecting game ball B discharged to the game board 5, which reduces the cost of the game board 5 and makes it possible to secure space on the game board 5 for the structure for detecting the game ball B being discharged. By providing a presentation device in the secured space, a pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) can be made that provides more entertainment for players.

In addition, since the ball ejection/discharge passage 665 has a vertical guide section 665b with multiple protrusions 665d protruding alternately, the speed at which the game balls B flow through the vertical guide section 665b can be reduced, thereby preventing damage to the ball ejection/discharge passage 665 caused by the impact of the circulating game balls B, and damage to the island equipment of the game hall that receives the game balls B discharged from the ball ejection/discharge passage 665.

In addition, a meandering out-ball straightening section 663b is provided in the out-ball passage 663, and a vertical guide section 665b with multiple protrusions 665d is provided in the ball removal and discharge passage 665, which can suppress the circulation speed of the game balls B, thereby reducing the electrical noise emitted from the game balls B circulating in the out-ball passage 663 and the ball removal and discharge passage 665. This reduces the impact on the power supply board 630 and payout control board 633, which are located nearby, and allows the pachinko machine 1 to malfunction less due to the circulation of game balls B.

In addition, because the out ball discharge port 663d and the ball ejection discharge port 665c of the out ball passage 663 and the ball ejection discharge passage 665 are open downward, the game balls B are ejected downward from the out ball passage 663 and the ball ejection discharge passage 665, so that the game balls B are less likely to collide with other pachinko machines or walls installed behind the pachinko machine 1 in the island equipment, and damage to other pachinko machines or walls can be avoided. In addition, because the game balls B are ejected downward from the out ball passage 663 and the ball ejection discharge passage 665, the ejected game balls B are less likely to scatter, and it is possible to easily collect the game balls B ejected from the out ball passage 663 and the ball ejection discharge passage 665 on the island equipment side.

Furthermore, a base unit 660 having a ball ejection passage 665 and an out ball passage 663 is provided below the portion of the main frame 4 where the game board 5 is attached. This means that the game ball B that has been shot into the game area 5a can be handed over to the out ball passage 663 of the base unit 660 simply by ejecting it downward on the game board 5. This allows the configuration for ejecting the game ball B on the game board 5 to be simple (easy) in configuration, thereby reducing the cost of the game board 5.

In addition, since the ball ejection/discharge opening 665c of the ball ejection/discharge passage 665 and the out-ball ejection opening 663d of the out-ball passage 663 are located behind the outer frame 2, it is possible to prevent the game balls B discharged from the ball ejection/discharge passage 665 or the out-ball passage 663 from colliding with the outer frame 2. This prevents the game balls B flowing with force through the ball ejection/discharge passage 665 or the out-ball passage 663 from colliding with the outer frame 2, which would damage the outer frame 2, and it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is less likely to be damaged.

In addition, since the ball ejection/discharge opening 665c of the ball ejection/discharge passage 665 and the out ball ejection opening 663d of the out ball passage 663 are located behind the outer frame 2, there is no need to advance the part (out receiving part, bucket, etc.) that collects the game balls B on the island equipment side to a position overlapping with the outer frame 2, which reduces the effort required to install the pachinko machine 1 and the effort required to move the pachinko machine 1.

[4-13a. Another embodiment of ball ejection in the base unit]
Next, another embodiment of the ball discharge in the above-mentioned substrate unit 620A will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 125 and Fig. 126. Fig. 125 is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which a guide piece is provided at the out-ball discharge port of the out-ball passage. Fig. 126(a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the out sensor is removable, and Fig. 126(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the state in (a) with the out sensor removed.

The embodiment shown in FIG. 125 has a guide piece 667 for guiding the game ball B rearward provided at the out ball outlet 663d at the downstream end of the out ball passage 663 in the base unit 660. In more detail, in this embodiment, near the downstream end of the out ball passage 663, there is a junction 663e that joins with the ball removal and discharge passage 665. The junction 663e opens downward, and its open end serves as the out ball outlet 663d (ball removal and discharge outlet 665c). The guide piece 667 protrudes rearward a short distance from the front wall of the out ball outlet 663d.

According to the embodiment of FIG. 125, the game ball B discharged downward from the out ball discharge port 663d abuts against the guide piece 667, so that the discharge direction of the game ball B can be directed diagonally downward and rearward. As a result, when the present pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island equipment of an amusement hall, it is possible to easily release the game ball B toward the part (out receiving part, bucket, etc.) for collecting the game ball B that is located behind the front of the island equipment (within the island equipment), and it is possible to reliably collect the game ball B on the island equipment side.

In addition, according to the embodiment shown in FIG. 125, since the induction piece 667 can direct the release direction of the game ball B diagonally downward toward the rear, even if the out-ball outlet 663d of the out-ball passage 663 is located close to the position directly below the play area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 (close to the front side of the island equipment), the game ball B can be reliably received by a bucket or the like in the island equipment. Therefore, since it is possible to arrange the out-ball passage 663 (out-ball outlet 663d) as far forward as possible, the space behind the out-ball passage 663 in the main body frame 4 can be made wider, and since the out-ball passage 663 is farther away from the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, etc., the influence of electrical noise due to static electricity and induced currents generated by the flow of many game balls B through the out-ball passage 663 on the power supply board 630 and the payout control board 633 can be reduced, and a pachinko machine 1 with fewer malfunctions due to the flow of game balls B can be obtained.

Next, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 126, the out sensor 664 is detachably attached from below to the out ball discharge port 663d in the out ball passage 663. In this embodiment, a sensor mounting recess 663f is formed at the downstream end of the downward guide section 663c in the out ball passage 663, and is open downward to accommodate the out sensor 664, and a sensor cover 668 is provided to restrict the downward movement of the out sensor 664 accommodated in the sensor mounting recess 663f.

The sensor mounting recess 663f is formed at the lower end of the lower guide section 663c, which is connected to the downstream end of the out-ball straightening section 663b in the out-ball passage 663 of the base unit 660. In this embodiment, the base unit 660 is also formed from a transparent material, and the inside of the out-ball passage 663 can be seen from the top and bottom of the base unit 660.

The sensor cover 668 has a main body 668a that extends longer than the sensor mounting recess 663f and has a base end that is rotatably attached to the base unit 660, a through hole 668b that passes through the game ball B at a position that coincides with the detection hole of the out sensor 664 housed in the sensor mounting recess 663f in the main body 668a, and a resiliently deformable locking claw 668c that is provided on the opposite side of the base end of the main body 668a.

The base end of the sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached to the outer side of the sensor mounting recess 663f on the base unit 660, opposite the out ball straightening section 663b. The locking claw section 668c of the sensor cover 668 is locked to a locking section 663g provided on the outer side of the out ball straightening section 663b side relative to the sensor mounting recess 663f on the base unit 660.

The sensor cover 668 is rotated so that the locking claw portion 668c moves upward with the out sensor 664 housed in the sensor mounting recess 663f so that the detection hole of the out sensor 664 coincides with the out ball passage 663, and the locking claw portion 668c is locked with the locking portion 663g to close the sensor cover 668. The main body portion 668a abuts against the underside of the out sensor 664, restricting the downward movement of the out sensor 664, and the out sensor 664 can be attached to the base unit 660 (see FIG. 126 (a)). In this state, the through hole 668b of the sensor cover 668 coincides with the detection hole of the out sensor 664, and the game ball B that has flowed through the out ball passage 663 is detected by the out sensor 664 and then discharged downward through the through hole 668b. The through hole 668b of the sensor cover 668 also serves as the out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663.

When replacing (removing) the out sensor 664, the locking claw portion 668c of the sensor cover 668 is operated to elastically deform the locking claw portion 668c and release it from the locking portion 663g. Then, the sensor cover 668 is rotated around the base end side of the main body portion 668a so that the locking claw portion 668c moves downward, and the main body portion 668a of the sensor cover 668 moves away from the underside of the out sensor 664, and the out sensor 664 can be removed from the sensor mounting recess 663f (see FIG. 126(b)).

As shown in FIG. 126(b), in this embodiment, when the sensor cover 668 is rotated open, a certain amount of gap is created between the bottom end of the sensor cover 668 and the top end of the object at risk of contact, as indicated by the two-dot chain line (e.g., the top surface of the outer frame lower assembly 40 in the outer frame 2, the top end of the connecting tube portion 43a of the rear panel member 43, etc.), or between the sensor cover 668 and the bottom end of the main body frame 4. As a result, even if the main body frame 4 is opened or closed relative to the outer frame 2 while the sensor cover 668 is open, the sensor cover 668 will not come into contact with the object at risk of contact, and damage to the sensor cover 668 can be prevented.

According to the embodiment shown in FIG. 126, the out sensor 664 detects all game balls B that are inserted into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and so there is a risk that the out sensor 664 will wear out quickly and become damaged as many game balls B are circulated. However, as described above, the out sensor 664 can be attached and detached from below by opening the sensor cover 668, so that the out sensor 664 can be easily replaced.

In addition, according to this embodiment, even if the main frame 4 is opened and closed relative to the outer frame 2 while the sensor cover 668 is open, the sensor cover 668 does not come into contact with objects that may come into contact with the outer frame 2 or the like, and damage to the sensor cover 668 can be prevented. In detail, the sensor cover 668 supports the out sensor 664 from below, but since many game balls B come into contact with the out sensor 664 from above, there is a risk that the locking claw portion 668c of the sensor cover 668 will come off due to vibrations caused by the contact of many game balls B, causing the sensor cover 668 to open. If the sensor cover 668 opens during play and the out sensor 664 falls downward, the out sensor 664 will no longer detect the game ball B even though the game ball B has been shot into the play area 5a, and the occurrence of an abnormality will be reported by the main control board 1310, etc. When this abnormality is reported, the game hall staff will open the main frame 4 from the outer frame 2 to check for the abnormality, but because there is a gap between the bottom end of the open sensor cover 668 and objects that may come into contact with it, such as the outer frame 2, the main frame 4 can be opened without the sensor cover 668 coming into contact with objects that may come into contact with it, preventing damage to the sensor cover 668.

Furthermore, according to the embodiment of FIG. 126, the base end side of the sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached to the base unit 660 at the outer portion opposite the out ball straightening portion 663b in the sensor mounting recess 663f, and since the base unit 660 is transparent, the inside of the out ball passage 663 can be clearly seen from below by opening the sensor cover 668 and removing the out sensor 664. Therefore, when the game ball B becomes stuck in the out ball passage 663, the inside of the out ball passage 663 can be seen from the outside, so that the location where the game ball B is stuck can be identified at a glance, and the jam of the game ball B can be quickly resolved.

In addition, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the upper surface of the door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 is formed so as to be substantially flush with the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30 in the outer frame 2, so that the pachinko machine 1 can be turned upside down and stood upright, and it is easy to replace the out sensor 664 by opening and closing the sensor cover 668, and to check inside the out ball passage 663 and the ball removal and discharge passage 665 from the bottom side through the transparent base unit 660, etc.

In addition, according to this embodiment, even if the out sensor 664 is damaged, the out sensor 664 can be easily replaced, so that a game that was interrupted due to damage to the out sensor 664 can be resumed early, which reduces the player's frustration caused by the interruption of the game and prevents a decline in interest. It also prevents a decline in the operating rate of this pachinko machine 1, and reduces the burden on the game hall.

Furthermore, one end of the sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached to the base unit 660. Therefore, even if the sensor cover 668 is opened when replacing the out sensor 664, the sensor cover 668 is suspended from the base unit 660 and will not fall off, preventing the sensor cover 668 from being lost.

In addition, the sensor cover 668 that holds the out sensor 664 from below is attached rotatably around an axis in the front-rear direction (horizontal direction) at an outer portion near the out ball passage 663 through which many game balls B flow in the base unit 660. Therefore, the distribution of the downward force applied to the sensor cover 668 through the out sensor 664 due to the flow of the game balls B is large on the side (one end side) that is rotatably attached to the base unit 660, and relatively small on the side (other end side) of the locking claw portion 668c that is locked to the locking portion 663g of the base unit 660. Therefore, even if a downward force acts on the sensor cover 668 through the out sensor 664 as many game balls B pass through the out sensor 664, most of it can be received on the one end side that is rotatably attached, so that the locking at the locking claw portion 668c on the other end side is less likely to be released, and the sensor cover 668 can be reduced from opening and causing the out sensor 664 to fall off.

[4-14. Third embodiment of substrate unit]
Next, the board unit 700 of the third embodiment, which is different from the above, will be described in detail with reference to Figures 127 to 136. Figure 127(a) is a perspective view of the board unit of the third embodiment, with the power supply unit, the dispensing control unit, and the interface unit omitted, as seen from the right front, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) as seen from the left front. Figure 128(a) is a perspective view of the board unit of Figure 127 as seen from the upper right rear, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) as seen from the lower right rear. Figure 129(a) is a plan view of the board unit of Figure 127, (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the line C-C-C in (a), (c) is a cross-sectional view cut along the line S-S-C in (a), and Figure 130 is a cross-sectional view cut along the line C-S-C in Figure 129(a).

Figure 131 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit of Figure 127 when disassembled and viewed from the front, and Figure 132 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit of Figure 127 when disassembled and viewed from the rear. Figure 133 (a) is an oblique view of the ball path member of the board unit of Figure 127 when viewed from the front, and (b) is an oblique view of the ball path member of the board unit of Figure 127 when viewed from the rear. Figure 134 is an explanatory diagram showing the elimination of ball jams in the board unit of Figure 127. Figure 135 is an explanatory diagram showing the prevention of the intrusion of linear illegal tools in the board unit of Figure 127. Figure 136 is an explanatory diagram showing the removal of debris in the board unit of Figure 127.

The board unit 700 of the third embodiment differs from the board unit 620 and board unit 620A described above only in the configuration of the base unit 710, and is otherwise identical in configuration. Therefore, here, the same components as those of the board unit 620 and board unit 620A described above are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions are omitted. Also, in Figures 127 to 136, the power supply unit 620c, dispensing control unit 620d, and interface unit 620e are not shown.

The board unit 700 of this embodiment is attached to the lower rear surface of the main frame base unit 500 in place of the board unit 620 or board unit 620A. The board unit 700 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500 below the game board placement section 501c, a base unit 710 attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 710, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d from the rear.

This board unit 700 is equipped with a first ball path 701 through which game balls B released downward from the game board 5 can flow, a second ball path 702 that is provided behind the first ball path 701 and through which game balls B released downward from the game board 5 can flow, a first ball sensor 703 that detects game balls B flowing through the first ball path 701, a second ball sensor 704 that detects game balls B flowing through the second ball path 702, and a ball removal path 705 through which game balls B released from the lower ball removal path 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 flow. The first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 each have an entrance that opens upward, and the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 detect game balls B one by one and then discharge them downward.

In this embodiment, the game ball B received in the out port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021, and the second sub-out port 2022 on the game board 5 is configured to circulate through the first ball path 701, and the game ball B received in the general winning port 2001, the first starting port 2004, the second starting port 2005, the first large winning port 2006, and the second large winning port 2007 on the game board 5 is configured to circulate through the second ball path 702. In other words, the out balls are configured to circulate through the first ball path 701, and the safe balls are configured to circulate through the second ball path 702, so that the number of all out balls can be counted by the first ball sensor 703, and the number of all safe balls can be counted by the second ball sensor 704. As a result, if fraudulent activity is committed against a winning hole (winning hole sensor) such as the general winning hole 2001, the first starting hole 2004, the second starting hole 2005, the first large winning hole 2006, and the second large winning hole 2007 on the game board 5, the number of safe balls on the game board 5 side will differ from the number of safe balls counted by the second ball sensor 704, making it possible to detect fraudulent activity against a winning hole.

In further detail, the base unit 710 of the board unit 700 comprises a front base 711 attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover a portion of the speaker box 623 from the rear, a rear base 712 attached to the rear side of the front base 711 and having a power supply unit 620c attached to its rear surface and a ball removal passage 705, a ball path member 713 provided between the front base 711 and the rear base 712 and having a first ball path 701 and a second ball path 702, a security cover 714 provided on the front base 711 and the rear base 712 so as to be able to be opened and closed in order to eliminate clogging of the game ball B in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 and to prevent the intrusion of illegal tools, a passage wall member 715 attached to the rear side of the rear base 712 and closing the rear end side of the ball removal passage 705, and a frame relay board 716 attached to the rear side of the rear base 712. In the base unit 710, the front base 711, rear base 712, ball path member 713, and passage wall member 715 are made transparent.

The front base 711 is formed in a box shape that is long from side to side and open to the rear and upward. The ball path member 713 is housed inside the front base 711 from the rear. The front base 711 closes the front end side of the first ball path 701 of the ball path member 713 with the front wall. The front base 711 has a ball receiving opening 711a that opens long in the left-right direction in the upper peripheral wall portion, and a resolution opening 711b that opens at a position from the left-right center to the right of the lower peripheral wall portion. When the front base 711 houses the ball path member 713 inside, the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 of the ball path member 713 face upward from the ball receiving opening 711a. In addition, the front base 711 supports the security cover 714 on the front end side of the resolution opening 711b so that it can rotate around an axis extending in the left-right direction.

The rear base 712 is formed in a box shape that is long from side to side and open to the rear. The rear base 712 closes the rear end side of the second ball path 702 of the ball path member 713 with its front wall. The rear base 712 has a ball removal path 705 that receives the game ball B released from the lower ball removal path 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610, guides it to the right when viewed from the front, and then guides it downward and discharges it. The ball removal path 705 is provided in the box-shaped rear base 712 and is entirely open to the rear. The rear end side of the ball removal path 705 is closed by the path wall member 715. The part of the ball removal path 705 of the rear base 712 that is located above the speaker box 623 (the part on the left end side when viewed from the front) penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the front end side is closed by the front base 711 and the rear side is closed by the path wall member 715.

The rear base 712 also has a first discharge guide section 712a that receives the game ball B that has flowed through the first ball path 701 of the ball path member 713, guides it backward, and then discharges it downward, and a second discharge guide section 712b that receives the game ball B that has flowed through the second ball path 702 of the ball path member 713, guides it backward, and then discharges it downward. The inlet sides of the first discharge guide section 712a and the second discharge guide section 712b protrude forward from the front wall of the rear base 712, and the inlet of the first discharge guide section 712a opens forward, while the inlet of the second discharge guide section 712b opens upward. The outlets of the first discharge guide section 712a and the second discharge guide section 712b are provided at the same position in the front-to-rear direction. The rear side of the first discharge guide section 712a and the second discharge guide section 712b is open backward from the front wall, and the rear end side is closed by the passage wall member 715.

In the rear base 712, the outlets of the ball removal passage 705, the first discharge guide section 712a, and the second discharge guide section 712b are located to the left of the release opening 711b of the front base 711 when viewed from the front, and are arranged in order from left to right. The outlet of the ball removal passage 705 is wider forward at the front end and narrower rearward at the rear end than the outlets of the first discharge guide section 712a and the second discharge guide section 712b (see FIG. 128(b)). In other words, the outlet of the ball removal passage 705 is larger (wider) in the front-to-rear direction than the outlets of the first discharge guide section 712a and the second discharge guide section 712b.

The ball path member 713 is inserted from the rear into the box-shaped front base 711 and housed therein. The ball path member 713 has a first ball path 701 and a second ball path 702. The ball path member 713 has a left wall portion 713a extending vertically downward from the upper end at the right end, an upper left shelf portion 713b sloping downward from the lower end of the left wall portion 713a toward the right, a stepped wall portion 713c extending vertically downward from the right end of the upper left shelf portion 713b, an upper right shelf portion 713d sloping downward from the lower end of the stepped wall portion 713c toward the right, a straightening wall portion 713e extending diagonally downward to the left from the right end of the upper right shelf portion 713d, and a straightening wall portion 713e extending diagonally downward to the right from the lower end of the straightening wall portion 713e. It has a lower shelf 713f that rises to the right from a position separated to the right of the upper right shelf 713d and extends further to the right than the upper right shelf 713d, a right wall 713g that extends vertically upward from the right end of the lower shelf 713f to approximately the same height as the upper end of the left wall 713a, an upper wall 713h that extends leftward from the upper end of the right wall 713g to the same position as the right end of the upper right shelf 713d, and a U-shaped groove wall 713i that is connected to the left end of the upper wall 713h and opens upward. The left end of the groove wall 713i is located to the right of the center of the upper right shelf 713d in the left-right direction.

The ball path member 713 also has an upper lower wall portion 713j extending leftward from the lower end of the straightening wall portion 713e, a middle wall portion 713k extending vertically upward from the left end of the upper lower wall portion 713j to the lower surface of the upper left shelf portion 713b, a eaves portion 713l extending leftward from the middle of the left side of the middle wall portion 713k, a hanging wall portion 713m extending vertically downward from near the left end of the lower shelf portion 713f, and a lower lower wall portion 713n extending leftward from the lower end of the hanging wall portion 713m in parallel with the upper lower wall portion 713j. The portion of the lower lower wall portion 713n located below between the lower end of the straightening wall portion 713e and the left end of the lower shelf portion 713f is cut out at the top and bottom to a size that allows the game ball B to pass through.

Furthermore, the ball path member 713 has a plurality of blocking ribs 713o that extend downward from the undersides of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the upper wall portion 713h and are spaced apart in the left-right direction. The ball path member 713 also has a flat partition wall portion 713p that divides the space surrounded by the left wall portion 713a, the upper left shelf portion 713b, the step wall portion 713c, the upper right shelf portion 713d, the straightening wall portion 713e, the lower shelf portion 713f, the right wall portion 713g, the groove wall portion 713i, the upper lower wall portion 713j, the middle wall portion 713k, the hanging wall portion 713m, and the lower lower wall portion 713n into front and rear portions.

The ball path member 713 also has a number of notches 713q in the upper left shelf portion 713b, the upper right shelf portion 713d, and the lower shelf portion 713f, which are recessed from the front and rear ends of each of the notches 713q toward the partition wall portion 713p. Each of the notches 713q is arranged so that when assembled to the board unit 700, a gap smaller in the front-to-rear direction than the radius of the game ball B is formed between the front base 711 and the rear base 712, and dirt and dust in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 can be discharged downward through the gap.

The ball path member 713 is provided in a region between the flow straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f on the front surface of the partition wall portion 713p, and has multiple guide protrusions 713r extending to the left and right.

Furthermore, the ball path member 713 has a front sensor accommodating section 713s that is surrounded by the upper lower wall section 713j, the hanging wall section 713m, and the lower lower wall section 713n in front of the partition wall section 713p and accommodates the first ball sensor 703, and a rear sensor accommodating section 713t that is surrounded by the upper lower wall section 713j, the hanging wall section 713m, and the lower lower wall section 713n in rear of the partition wall section 713p and accommodates the second ball sensor 704.

The first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 are housed in the front sensor housing 713s and the rear sensor housing 713t so that the detection holes of the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 are located below the area between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, that is, with the detection holes facing right. Although not shown in the figure, the wiring cables extending from the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 extend leftward from the front sensor housing 713s and the rear sensor housing 713t beyond the middle wall portion 713k.

The ball path member 713 has a first ball guide section 713u that is provided on the underside of the lower wall section 713n at a position forward of the partition wall section 713p, and that protrudes downward and is open to the rear. When the first ball guide section 713u is assembled to the board unit 700, the right half of the rear end side is closed by the front face of the rear base 712, and the left half faces the inlet side of the first discharge guide section 712a of the rear base 712. The first ball guide section 713u can guide the game ball B that flows downward from between the straightening wall section 713e and the lower shelf section 713f in front of the partition wall section 713p to the right and then to the rear, and deliver it to the first discharge guide section 712a of the rear base 712.

On the other hand, behind the partition wall 713p in the ball path member 713, below the portion of the lower wall 713n that opens downward (the portion of the detection hole of the second ball sensor 704 housed in the rear sensor housing 713t), there is an inlet that opens upward to the second discharge guide section 712b of the rear base 712. This allows the game ball B that flows downward from between the straightening wall section 713e and the lower shelf section 713f behind the partition wall section 713p to be handed over to the second discharge guide section 712b of the rear base 712.

The right end of the upper left shelf 713b is located slightly to the right of the left end of the resolution opening 711b in the front base 711. The right end of the upper right shelf 713d is located to the right of the right end of the resolution opening 711b in the front base 711. The left end of the lower shelf 713f is located to the left of the left end of the resolution opening 711b in the front base 711. Therefore, the upper part directly above the resolution opening 711b of the front base 711 is covered by the straightening wall 713e. The upper left shelf 713b, the upper right shelf 713d, and the lower shelf 713f are inclined in a straight line. On the other hand, the straightening wall 713e is inclined in a curved line, and is curved so that the left end side faces vertically downward. The distance (height) between the flow straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f is inclined to become narrower toward the left so that the left end is at a height that allows one game ball B to pass through. The flow straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f can straighten multiple game balls B in a line and guide them downward.

As described above, the gap between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f is formed so that the vertical dimension narrows as it moves to the left (the downstream direction of the flow of the game balls B). Therefore, depending on the amount of game balls B in circulation, there is a risk that multiple game balls B may get caught between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, causing ball jamming (see FIG. 134). Since the straightening wall portion 713e is located above the release port 711b, if ball jamming occurs between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, the security cover 714 is opened to open the release port 711b, and a rod-shaped tool is inserted between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f from below through the release port 711b and the notch portion 713q of the lower shelf portion 713f, and the ball jamming can be resolved by poking the game balls B that have gotten caught with the tool.

The lower shelf 713f is provided with a notch 713q for clearing ball jams and allowing dirt and dust to fall downward, so there is a risk that a linear illegal tool such as a piano wire or a catheter could be inserted from below through the notch 713q into the upper part of the lower shelf 713f (the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702), and the tip of the illegal tool could be extended upward from the ball path member 713 (the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702), allowing a fraudulent act to be committed against the game board 5 located above. The insertion of such illegal tools is not limited to the lower shelf 713f, and there is a similar risk in the upper left shelf 713b and upper right shelf 713d, where the notch 713q is provided.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the lower surface of the upper wall portion 713h are provided with a plurality of flat blocking ribs 713o spaced apart in the left-right direction and extending downward, so that even if the tip of a linear illegal tool tries to move along the lower surfaces of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the upper wall portion 713h, it abuts against the blocking rib 713o and can prevent the tip from moving, thereby preventing further insertion of the illegal tool (see FIG. 135). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the execution of illegal acts on the game board 5 through the ball path member 713 (the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702), and it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall where the present pachinko machine 1 is installed, and it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that has a high deterrent effect against illegal acts.

In addition, in the areas to the right of the middle wall 713k in the upper right shelf 713d and the upper left shelf 713b, the lower and left and right sides are closed off by the flow straightening wall 713e, the upper lower wall 713j, and the middle wall 713k, which do not have the notch 713q. Therefore, unauthorized tools cannot be inserted from below through the notch 713q in the corresponding areas of the upper right shelf 713d and the upper left shelf 713b, and unauthorized acts cannot be performed through the notch 713q in those areas.

As described above, the ball path member 713 has multiple notches 713q on the upper left shelf portion 713b, the upper right shelf portion 713d, and the lower shelf portion 713f, so that dirt and dust can be discharged downward through the notches 713q (see FIG. 136). Dirt and dust discharged downward through the notches 713q located above the front sensor housing portion 713s and the rear sensor housing portion 713t on the upper left shelf portion 713b is contained in the space surrounded by the straightening wall portion 713e, the upper lower wall portion 713j, and the middle wall portion 713k. This prevents dirt and dust from adhering to the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 contained in the front sensor housing portion 713s and the rear sensor housing portion 713t.

In addition, a wiring cable is connected by a connector to the left end side of the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 housed in the front sensor housing section 713s and the rear sensor housing section 713t, and the wiring cable and the connector protrude to the left from the front sensor housing section 713s and the rear sensor housing section 713t. In other words, the wiring cable and the connector of the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 protrude to the left beyond the middle wall section 713k. In this middle wall portion 713k, the eaves portion 713l extends to the left from the upper portion of the front sensor housing portion 713s and the rear sensor housing portion 713t on the left side surface, so that dirt and dust that falls downward through the cutout portion 713q formed in the upper left shelf portion 713b is guided to the left by the inclination of the eaves portion 713l and is prevented from falling onto the wiring cables and connectors of the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704, which protrude leftward beyond the middle wall portion 713k, thereby avoiding the occurrence of problems caused by dirt, etc.

The base unit 710 forms a first ball path 701 by the left wall portion 713a, upper left shelf portion 713b, step wall portion 713c, upper right shelf portion 713d, straightening wall portion 713e, lower shelf portion 713f, right wall portion 713g, groove wall portion 713i, first ball guide portion 713u on the front side of the partition wall portion 713p in the ball path member 713, and the first discharge guide portion 712a of the rear base 712, and forms a second ball path 702 by the left wall portion 713a, upper left shelf portion 713b, step wall portion 713c, upper right shelf portion 713d, straightening wall portion 713e, lower shelf portion 713f, right wall portion 713g, groove wall portion 713i on the rear side of the partition wall portion 713p in the ball path member 713, and the second discharge guide portion 712b of the rear base 712.

The security cover 714 is formed in a flat plate shape, and is attached near the front end of the resolution opening 711b of the front base 711 in a state in which the front end side can rotate around an axis in the left-right direction. The security cover 714 also has an elastic locking part 714a at the rear end side that is locked to the rear base 712. As shown in FIG. 130, when the security cover 714 is locked to the rear base 712 with the elastic locking part 714a locked horizontally, the resolution opening 711b is closed, and when the security cover 714 is unlocked and rotated so that the rear end side is positioned downward and is locked vertically, the resolution opening 711b is opened. In other words, the security cover 714 can open and close the resolution opening 711b.

The security cover 714 can close the elimination opening 711b of the front base 711 by closing it, so that it is possible to prevent a linear illegal tool from being inserted into the ball path member 713 (the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702) through the elimination opening 711b. In addition, when a ball jam occurs between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f of the ball path member 713, the security cover 714 can open the elimination opening 711b of the front base 711 by opening it, so that a rod-shaped tool can be inserted between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f from below through the elimination opening 711b and the notch portion 713q of the lower shelf portion 713f to eliminate the ball jam of the game ball B. This ball jam elimination work is performed with the main body frame 4 open forward relative to the outer frame 2.

When the release port 711b is open (vertical), the lower end (the end on the elastic locking portion 714a side) of this security cover 714 is located below the height (here, the height shown by the dashed line in FIG. 130) of the object at risk of contact (here, the connecting tube portion 43a of the back panel member 43 in the outer frame 2). Therefore, even if the main frame 4 is opened forward relative to the outer frame 2 to release the ball jam of the game ball B in the ball path member 713 and then the main frame 4 is closed relative to the outer frame 2 with the security cover 714 open, the open security cover 714 abuts against the object at risk of contact (the connecting tube portion 43a of the back panel member 43), and the main frame 4 cannot be closed. This makes it possible to avoid forgetting to close the security cover 714, and ensures that the security cover 714 is closed, thereby enabling the security cover 714 to exert its security function.

In addition, in this embodiment, if the security cover 714 opens for some reason while the main frame 4 is closed relative to the outer frame 2, opening the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2 in this state will cause an object that may be in danger of coming into contact with the open security cover 714 from the front. However, since the front end of the security cover 714 is attached so as to be rotatable about an axis in the left-right direction, when an object that may be in danger of coming into contact with the security cover 714 comes into contact with the security cover 714 from the front, the security cover 714 rotates in the closing direction. This allows the main frame 4 to be opened without the security cover 714 getting caught on an object that may be in danger of coming into contact, thereby preventing damage to the security cover 714 or the object that may be in danger of coming into contact.

In addition, in this embodiment, the security cover 714 is designed to remain closed because it is rare for game balls B to become stuck between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f. Therefore, the elastic locking portion 714a is set to lock tightly so that the security cover is difficult to open.

The passage wall member 715 is attached to the rear side of the rear base 712, and closes the rear end side of the ball removal passage 705, which is open to the rear. The passage wall member 715 also closes the portion of the rear base 712 that is open to the rear at the outlet side of the first discharge guide section 712a and the second discharge guide section 712b, and can discharge the game balls B that have circulated through the first discharge guide section 712a and the second discharge guide section 712b downward. Furthermore, the passage wall member 715 and the rear base 712 sandwich the frame relay board 716, and cover the rear side of the frame relay board 716.

The frame relay board 716 is sandwiched between the rear base 712 and the passage wall member 715. The frame relay board 716 is for relaying the connection between the handle touch sensor 192, the single button operation sensor 194, the first ball sensor 703, and the second ball sensor 704 of the door frame 3 and the main control board 1310.

As shown in FIG. 129(a), the base unit 710 of this embodiment has the upper left shelf 713b and a part of the upper right shelf 713d of the ball path member 713 facing upward from the ball receiving port 711a of the front base 711, and can receive all game balls B released downward from the game board 5. The game balls B that fall to the upper left shelf 713b or the upper right shelf 713d through the ball receiving port 711a roll to the right and flow down from the right end of the upper right shelf 713d onto the lower shelf 713f. The game balls B that flow down to the lower shelf 713f roll to the left on the lower shelf 713f. At this time, if multiple game balls B are stacked up and down on the lower shelf 713f, they are broken up by the upper straightening wall 713e so that they are lined up as they move to the left.

The game ball B that rolls leftward on the lower shelf 713f falls downward from the left end of the lower shelf 713f, and if it is forward of the partition wall 713p, it is detected by the first ball sensor 703 housed in the front sensor housing 713s, passes through the first ball guide 713u, and is discharged downward through the first discharge guide 712a of the rear base 712. On the other hand, if it is behind the partition wall 713p, it is detected by the second ball sensor 704 housed in the rear sensor housing 713t, and is discharged downward through the second discharge guide 712b of the rear base 712.

In this way, in the base unit 710 of this embodiment, the game ball B flows through separate paths in front of and behind the partition wall portion 713p of the ball path member 713 and is discharged downward, with the first ball path 701 being the side in front of the partition wall portion 713p and the second ball path 702 being the side behind the partition wall portion 713p. Therefore, the game ball B that falls forward of the partition wall portion 713p of the ball path member 713 from the game board 5 flows through the first ball path 701 and can be discharged downward after being detected by the first ball sensor 703. On the other hand, the game ball B that falls backward of the partition wall portion 713p of the ball path member 713 from the game board 5 flows through the second ball path 702 and can be discharged downward after being detected by the second ball sensor 704.

The base unit 710 can also discharge game balls B released from the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full-tank ball path unit 610 to remove game balls B from the ball tank 552, etc., downward through the ball removal passage 705 of the rear base 712. Game balls B discharged downward from the first discharge guide section 712a (first ball path 701), second discharge guide section 712b (second ball path 702), and ball removal passage 705 of the base unit 710 are delivered to a section (out receiving section, bucket, etc.) on the island equipment side that collects game balls B.

According to the base unit 710 in the board unit 700 of this embodiment, multiple notches 713q are provided in the upper left shelf portion 713b, the upper right shelf portion 713d, and the lower shelf portion 713f, so that dirt and dust can fall through the notches 713q and be removed from the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702, thereby preventing dirt and the like from interfering with the flow of the game ball B and suppressing the occurrence of ball clogging, etc.

In addition, since the front base 711, rear base 712, ball path member 713, and passage wall member 715 are made transparent, by opening the door frame 3 forward relative to the main body frame 4 and removing the game board 5 from the main body frame 4, it is possible to easily check from above the base unit 710 (substrate unit 700) whether or not game ball B is stuck in the ball path member 713 (first ball path 701 and second ball path 702). In addition, in the area where the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f of the ball path member 713 align the game balls B in a row, a notch portion 713q is provided in the lower shelf portion 713f. Therefore, if balls become jammed between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, by opening the main body frame 4 forward relative to the outer frame 2 and opening the security cover 714, a rod-shaped tool can be inserted from below between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f through the release opening 711b and the notch portion 713q, and the ball jam can be released using the tool.

Furthermore, a downwardly opening release port 711b is provided below the flow straightening wall portion 713e in the lower shelf portion 713f, and a security cover 714 is provided to close the release port 711b. As a result, the ball jam can be released through the release port 711b as described above. In addition, by keeping the release port 711b closed by the security cover 714 under normal conditions, it is possible to prevent linear illegal tools from being inserted into the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702 from the release port 711b, and a pachinko machine 1 with a high deterrent effect against illegal activities can be provided.

In addition, the security cover 714, which opens and closes the release opening 711b, is opened and closed by rotating it around a left-right axis at the front end. Therefore, if an attempt is made to close the main frame 4 to the outer frame 2 while forgetting to close the security cover 714, the security cover 714 will come into contact with an object that may be in danger of contact (the connecting tube portion 43a of the rear panel member 43), making it impossible to close the main frame 4. This makes it possible to make the user aware that the security cover 714 has been left closed, and allows the security cover 714 to be closed reliably, thereby enabling the security cover 714 to exert its security function.

Furthermore, the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the lower surface of the upper wall portion 713h are provided with a plurality of flat blocking ribs 713o spaced apart in the left-right direction and extending downward, so that even if the tip of a linear illegal tool tries to move along the lower surface of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the upper wall portion 713h, it abuts against the blocking rib 713o and the tip movement is prevented, and further insertion of the illegal tool can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the execution of illegal acts on the game board 5 through the ball path member 713 (the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702), and it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall where the present pachinko machine 1 is installed, and it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that has a high deterrent effect against illegal acts.

In addition, as described above, the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 are configured to form a complex distribution path that meanders and cranks due to the first discharge guide portion 712a and the second discharge guide portion 712b of the rear base 712 and the ball path member 713, so that even if a linear illegal tool is inserted from the exit side of the first discharge guide portion 712a or the second discharge guide portion 712b, the intrusion can be prevented by the complex path, and the intrusion of the illegal tool into the game board 5 through the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 can be prevented.

In addition, since the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 can detect (count) all game balls B released from the game board 5, there is no need to provide a structure (e.g., an out ball detection unit) for detecting game balls B discharged onto the game board 5, which reduces the cost of the game board 5 and makes it possible to secure space on the game board 5 for the structure for detecting the game balls B being discharged. By providing a presentation device in the secured space, the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) can be made more entertaining to players.

In addition, because out balls circulate along the first ball path 701 and safe balls circulate along the second ball path 702, by comparing the number of safe balls counted on the game board 5 with the number of safe balls counted by the second ball sensor 704, it is possible to determine whether or not fraudulent activity is occurring on the game board 5, thereby providing a pachinko machine 1 that has a high deterrent effect against fraudulent activity.

Furthermore, if the payout rate (ball payout rate) per predetermined time calculated from the number of safe balls per predetermined time and the number of out balls per predetermined time is displayed so that it can be seen by the player, the player will want many game balls B to be paid out, so if the displayed payout rate is high, the player will immediately recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is likely to pay out many game balls B, making it easier to select the pachinko machine 1 to play on. Furthermore, if the payout rate is displayed so that it can be seen by the player, if a player commits a fraudulent act that pays out many game balls B, the displayed payout rate will be higher than normal, making it easier for other players and staff at the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed to notice the fraudulent act, which will make the player hesitate to commit the fraudulent act, resulting in a pachinko machine 1 that has a high deterrent effect against fraudulent acts.

In addition, if the payout rate calculated from the number of safe balls and the number of out balls is displayed in a position that cannot be seen by the player, amusement hall staff can see it and detect fraudulent activity for the same reasons as above. Also, when performing maintenance on the pachinko machine 1, if the displayed payout rate is different from the normal value, this may be due to a malfunction within the pachinko machine 1 (e.g., obstructing nails N, main control board 1310, payout control board 633, relay board, connectors, wiring cables, various sensors, etc.), making it possible to respond to the malfunction early and reducing the burden on the amusement hall.

In addition, since the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 are separate from the ball removal passage 705 for discharging the game balls B in the ball tank 552, the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 do not count the game balls B that have been removed. Therefore, the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 can accurately count only the game balls B that have been released from the game board 5.

In the above embodiment, out balls flow through the first ball path 701 and safe balls flow through the second ball path 702, but this is not limited to the above. Safe balls may flow through the first ball path 701 and out balls may flow through the second ball path 702, or game ball B discharged from the game board 5 may flow through either the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702 regardless of whether it is a safe ball or an out ball.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the release opening 711b is opened and closed by rotating the security cover 714, but this is not limited to this, and the release opening 711b may be opened and closed by sliding it back and forth or left and right.

In the above embodiment, a single partition wall portion 713p is used to separate the game ball B released downward from the game board 5, so that it is discharged through one of two ball paths separated at the front and rear of the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702. However, this is not limited to this, and it is also possible to have three or more ball paths separated at the front and rear by multiple partition wall portions, and to discharge the game ball B released from the game board 5 downward through one of the ball paths.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 137 to 147. Fig. 137 is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine with the center gadgets and the like made opaque. Fig. 138 is a perspective view of the game board in Fig. 137 seen from the right front, Fig. 139 is a perspective view of the game board in Fig. 137 seen from the left front, and Fig. 140 is a perspective view of the game board seen from the back. Fig. 141 is a schematic explanatory diagram of the wiring from the function display unit in the main control board. Fig. 142 is a front view of the game board with the center gadgets and the like made transparent. Fig. 143 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into main components and seen from the front, and Fig. 144 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into main components and seen from the back. Fig. 145 is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the front unit is cut parallel to the surface of the game panel to reveal the game area in which the game balls circulate and the obstacle nails. 146 is an enlarged front view showing the left side of FIG. 145, and FIG. 147 is an enlarged front view showing the right side of FIG.

The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a into which a game ball B is inserted by a player operating the handle 195 of the handle unit 180. The game area 5a is provided with a general winning opening 2001, a gate 2002, a variable winning opening 2003, a first starting opening 2004, a second starting opening 2005, a first large winning opening 2006, and a second large winning opening 2007, which provide a player with a predetermined privilege (e.g., the payment of a predetermined number of game balls B) by receiving or passing a game ball B. This game board 5 is for playing an entertaining game in which the handle 195 is operated to strike the ball and the ball B is circulated within the game area 5a so that the ball B is received by or passes through the general winning opening 2001, the gate 2002, the variable winning opening 2003, the first starting opening 2004, the second starting opening 2005, the first large winning opening 2006, and the second large winning opening 2007, etc., within the game area 5a.

The game board 5 comprises a front component 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a generally rectangular external shape when viewed from the front, a plate-shaped game panel 1100 that is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and defines the rear end of the game area 5a, and a number of magnetic sensors 1050 (see FIG. 160) that detect magnetic fields that act illegally within the game area 5a. A number of obstacle nails N (see FIG. 145 to FIG. 147, etc.) that come into contact with the game ball B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion of the front of the game panel 1100 that is within the game area 5a.

The game board 5 also includes a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear of the game panel 1100, and a main control unit 1300 attached to the rear of the board holder 1200 and having a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 160, etc.) that controls the game content that is played by shooting the game ball B into the game area 5a.

The game board 5 also includes a function display unit 1400 that displays the game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 and is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player, a peripheral control unit 1500 that is located on the rear side of the game panel 1100, a performance display device 1600 that is located in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and is capable of displaying a predetermined performance image, a panel relay board (not shown) that is located on the rear side of the game panel 1100 and relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, a front unit 2000 that is attached to the front of the game panel 1100, and a rear unit 3000 that is attached to the rear of the game panel 1100.

The performance display device 1600 is provided on the rear side of the rear unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is provided on the rear side of the performance display device 1600.

The front unit 2000 comprises a plurality of (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 which are always open and capable of receiving game balls B that have been shot into the game area 5a, a gate 2002 which is provided at a predetermined position within the game area 5a and which detects the passage of game ball B, a variable winning opening 2003 which is capable of receiving game ball B depending on the result of the lottery for the normal pattern which is drawn when game ball B passes through gate 2002, a first starting opening 2004 and a second starting opening 2005 which are provided at a predetermined position within the game area 5a and which are always open and capable of receiving game ball B, and a variable winning opening 2006 which is provided at a predetermined position within the game area 5a and which is always open and capable of receiving game ball B, and a first large prize winning opening 2006 that can receive the game ball B depending on the lottery result of the first special pattern or the lottery result of the second special pattern drawn by receiving the game ball B into the opening 2005; a second large prize winning opening 2007 that is provided at a position different from the first large prize winning opening 2006 and can receive the game ball B depending on the lottery result of the first special pattern or the lottery result of the second special pattern drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting opening 2004 or the second starting opening 2005; and a plurality of magnetic sensors 1050 (see FIG. 160) that detect magnetic fields acting fraudulently within the game area 5a.

In addition, the front unit 2000 further includes a first sub-outlet 2021 and a second sub-outlet 2022, each of which is provided at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and is always open to receive the game ball B.

Furthermore, the front unit 2000 is made up of a start port unit 2100 which is attached directly above the bottom end of the play area 5a in the left-right center of the play area 5a and has a first start port 2004, a side unit 2200 which is provided along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the start port unit 2100 as viewed from the front and has four general winning ports 2001, an upper left side unit 2300 which is provided slightly above the left side of the side unit 2200 as viewed from the front, and a second start port 2003 which is provided to the right of the start port unit 2100 as viewed from the front, which is the lower right corner of the play area 5a as viewed from the front, as viewed from the front. 05 and second sub-outlet 2022; a frame-shaped center device 2500 that is located above the starting port unit 2100, side unit 2200, and lower right unit 2400 and slightly above the center of the play area 5a when viewed from the front, and that has a variable winning port 2003, a first large winning port 2006, a second large winning port 2007, and a first sub-outlet 2021; and a gate member 2600 that is located to the left of the center device 2500 near the center of the play area 5a in the vertical direction, and that has a gate 2002.

The front unit 2000 is located on the right side of the play area 5a and includes a specific obstacle nail group 2700 consisting of multiple obstacle nails N.

The rear unit 3000 comprises a rear box 3010, which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100 and is box-shaped with an open front and a square opening 3010a in the rear wall, a rear box rear unit 3030 which is detachably attached to the rear wall of the rear box 3010 by a lock slider 3020, and a rear board unit 3040 which is located behind the rear box rear unit 3030 and attached to the rear wall of the rear box 3010.

The rear unit 3000 also includes a rear ball guide unit 3100 that is provided at the bottom near the front end of the rear box 3010 and through which the game ball B guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 circulates, a rear front peripheral decoration unit 3200 that is provided near the front end of the rear box 3010, a rear upper front performance unit 3300 that is provided at the top of the rear box 3010 and at approximately the same position in the front-to-back direction as the rear front peripheral decoration unit 3200, a rear lower front performance unit 3400 that is provided at the bottom behind the rear front peripheral decoration unit 3200 in the rear box 3010, a rear upper rear performance unit 3500 (see Figure 155, etc.) that is provided behind the rear upper front performance unit 3300 in the rear box 3010, and a rear lower rear performance unit 3600 that is provided behind the rear lower front performance unit 3400 in the rear box 3010.

[5-1. Previous constituent members]
The front component 1000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 143 and 144. The front component 1000 is formed to be transparent as a whole. The front component 1000 has an outer shape of a substantially square in front view, an inner shape of a substantially circular shape penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the inner circumference of the inner shape defines the outer circumference of the game area 5a. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape from the lower end on the left side of the center in the front view to the upper right diagonal direction in the clockwise circumferential direction, passing the upper end of the center in the front left direction in the front view, an inner rail 1002 that is disposed inside the front component 1000 along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the front left direction to the upper left diagonal direction in the front view, and an out guide portion 1003 that is formed at the lowest position of the game area 5a on the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 in the front view and is inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

The component 1000 also includes a lower right rail 1004 that slopes linearly from the right end of the out guide section 1003 when viewed from the front to near the right side of the component 1000, with the right end being slightly higher; a right rail 1005 that extends from the right end of the lower right rail 1004 along the right side of the component 1000 to below the upper end of the outer rail 1001, with the upper part curved inward of the component 1000; and a collision stop section 1006 that connects the upper end of the right rail 1005 to the upper end of the outer rail 1001 and comes into contact with the game ball B that rolls along the outer rail 1001.

The component 1000 is also provided with a backflow prevention member 1007 that is rotatably supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and can rotate only between a closed position in which it extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 to close the gap with the outer rail 1001, and an open position in which it rotates clockwise when viewed from the front to open the gap with the outer rail 1001, and is biased by a spring (not shown) to return to the closed position.

Furthermore, the front component 1000 is provided with an outlet 1008 that penetrates from front to back at the rear end of the out guide section 1003, at the lower center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front within the frame. The game ball B guided rearward by the out guide section 1003 is discharged through the outlet 1008 to the rear of the front component 1000 (game panel 1100).

In addition, the front component 1000 is provided with security recesses 1009 recessed rearward from the front end in each of the following locations: outside the portions near the lower ends of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that extend approximately vertically; below the out guide portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004; and outside the right rail 1005. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed against the main body frame 4, the security recesses 1009 receive rear protrusions 172 protruding rearward from the security cover 170 on the door frame 3 that are inserted therein. As a result, the area between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is bent in a complex manner by the rear protrusion 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000, so even if someone tries to insert an illegal tool such as a piano wire into the game area 5a through the gap between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000 from below the front of the game board 5, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 172 and the security recess 1009, preventing the illegal tool from entering the game area 5a.

The component 1000 also has a notch 1010 that is cut upward from the bottom end at the bottom left corner when viewed from the front. This notch 1010 coincides with the notch 1122 of the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b of the lower full ball path unit 610 penetrate the notch 1010 and the notch 1122 and face forward.

Furthermore, the component 1000 is provided with a function display unit mounting portion 1011 formed in the upper left corner when viewed from the front, to which the function display unit 1400 is attached, and a stamp attachment portion 1012 formed in the lower left corner.

Also, the front component 1000 is almost entirely transparent, allowing the game panel 1100 and rear unit 3000 located at the rear to be viewed from the front.

[5-2. Game Panel]
The game panel 1100 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 143 and 144. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1000, and the front unit 2000 and the rear unit 3000 are attached to it. The game panel 1100 includes a flat panel board 1110 whose outer periphery is formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and made of transparent synthetic resin, and a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 that holds the outer periphery of the panel board 1110, is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, and has the rear unit 3000 attached to its rear surface. A plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (see Figure 145, etc.).

The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed from a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The thickness of this panel plate 1110 is thinner than the panel holder, and is set to the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that is sufficient to hold the obstacle nails N planted on the front side and the front unit 2000 attached. In this embodiment, the panel plate 1110 is formed from a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel plate 1110 is at the lowest position within the play area 5a, and the position corresponding to the outlet 1008 of the front component 1000 is recessed upward from the bottom end. The panel plate 1110 also has multiple openings 1112 that penetrate from front to back and are used to attach the front unit 2000.

The panel plate 1110 also has a number of positioning holes 1113 formed as round holes and short long holes penetrating from front to back, and a number of engagement steps 1114 formed with a thin plate thickness and spaced apart in the left-right direction at the upper and lower edges (see FIG. 148). The positioning holes 1113 are for positioning with the panel holder 1120 by inserting protruding pins (not shown) of the panel holder 1120. The engagement steps 1114 are for removably attaching to the panel holder 1120 by engaging with an engagement claw (not shown) or engagement piece (not shown) of the panel holder 1120.

The panel plate 1110 has a large opening 1112 for mounting the center device 2500, which is offset above the center when viewed from the front. This makes the panel plate 1110 frame-shaped, and the width perpendicular to the flow direction of the game balls B (circumferential direction of the frame) when viewed from the front is wide enough to line up multiple game balls B on the left, right, and lower sides, excluding the area above the center, and narrow enough that multiple game balls B cannot be lined up on the upper side.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 has an external shape that is roughly rectangular and large enough to encompass the panel plate 1110, and is thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this embodiment). The panel holder 1120 is made of transparent synthetic resin (e.g., thermoplastic synthetic resin). This panel holder 1120 has a holding step (not shown) that is roughly the same size as the panel plate 1110 and recessed from the front side to the rear side, and a through hole 1121 that penetrates the holding step in the front-to-rear direction and is roughly the same size as the game area 5a.

The panel holder 1120 also has a notch 1122 cut upward from the bottom end at the bottom left corner when viewed from the front. This notch 1122 is formed to match the notch 1010 of the previous component 1000, so that when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b of the lower full ball path unit 610 penetrate the notch 1010 and the notch to face forward.

Furthermore, the panel holder 1120 is formed with an out recess 1123 that extends upward from the lower end to a position corresponding to the out port 1008 and is recessed from the rear surface toward the front. The out recess 1123 has an upper portion that communicates with the out port 1008.

Although not shown, the panel holder 1120 includes a plurality of protruding pins that protrude forward from the holding step and are inserted into a plurality of positioning holes 1113 in the panel plate 1110, three engagement claws that are disposed outside the holding step and elastically engage with engagement steps 1114 at the upper and lower left inclined portions of the panel plate 1110, and a pair of engagement pieces that protrude upward from the lower outer side of the holding step and respectively engage with the two engagement steps 1114 at the lower edge of the panel plate 1110. The panel holder 1120 can be detachably attached to the panel plate 1110 in a state where it is housed in the holding step by engaging the engagement steps at the lower edge of the panel plate 1110 with the engagement pieces from the front diagonally above, and then moving the upper part of the panel plate 1110 backward to elastically engage the engagement steps 1114 at the upper and lower left inclined portions with the engagement claws. At this time, the protruding pin of the panel holder 1120 is inserted into the positioning hole 1113 of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate 1110 is positioned at a predetermined position relative to the panel holder 1120.

This game panel 1100, together with the front component 1000 attached to the front side, is formed transparent, so when assembled to the game board 5, the boundaries of the game area 5a are less clearly visible, giving the player a sense of openness, and although the actual size of the game area 5a does not change, the game area 5a appears larger (wider) to the player.

In addition, because the game panel 1100, along with the front component 1000, is made transparent, the light from the performance display device 1600, front unit 2000, rear unit 3000, etc. can be reflected or refracted forward (towards the player) to appear as if it is emitting light, further enhancing the overall decorativeness of the game board 5.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
The board holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 143 and 144. The board holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with an open top and front, and the bottom surface is inclined so that it becomes lower toward the center in the left-right direction. The board holder 1200 has an ejection part 1201 that is cut out from the front end toward the rear at the center in the left-right direction of the bottom surface. When assembled to the game board 5, this board holder 1200 covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the bottom and rear, and the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 is attached to the rear surface.

When the board holder 1200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the discharge section 1201 is located directly above the discharged ball receiving section 628 of the base unit 620b in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. This allows it to receive all game balls B discharged to the rear of the game panel 1100 through the outlet 1008, and game balls B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and rear unit 3000, and discharge them downward from the discharge section 1201 formed on the bottom surface to the discharged ball receiving section 628 or the out ball passage 663 (see Figure 123). The game balls B discharged to the out ball passage 663 are detected (counted) one by one by the out sensor 664.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 141, 143, 144, etc. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 (see Figure 160) that controls the game content and the payout of game balls B, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200.

The main control board box 1320 is composed of a cover body and a base body. The cover body and the base body are made of polycarbonate resin and are molded transparently. The main control board 1310 can be accommodated in the internal space formed by the cover body and the base body. Since the cover body and the base body are molded transparently from polycarbonate resin, the state of the front side and the back side of the main control board 1310 (whether or not unauthorized modification has been performed, or whether or not an unauthorized IC is installed) can be confirmed from the outside of the main control board box 1320. In addition, the main control board box 1320 has multiple sealing mechanisms corresponding to the cover body and the base body, respectively. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism must be destroyed in order to open the main control board box 1320, and traces of the opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left. Therefore, by observing the traces of opening and closing, unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be detected, enhancing the deterrent effect against unauthorized acts on the main control board 1310.

The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635, the peripheral control board 1510, etc. The main control board 1310 is also connected to the function display unit 1400, the general prize opening sensor 3001, the first start opening sensor 3002, the gate sensor 2601, the second start opening sensor 2401, the first large prize opening sensor 2525, the second large prize opening sensor 2561, the variable prize opening solenoid 2522, the first large prize opening solenoid 2524, the second large prize opening solenoid 2563, the magnetic sensor 1050, etc.

The setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 is equipped with a setting key switch 1311a that can change and check the setting value of the pachinko machine 1, a setting change button 1311b that can select and change the setting value, and a setting change permission lamp 1311c that indicates the state in which changing the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is permitted. The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is connected to the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 (inter-board connection) (the connectors SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 may be electrically connected via a harness). By this connector connection (inter-board connection), the signal from the setting key switch 1311a and the signal from the setting change button 1311b are electrically connected to the main control board 1310. The vertical distance dimension of the right and left sides of the setting change board 1311 is approximately the same as the vertical distance dimension of the right and left sides of the main control board 1310, and the horizontal distance dimension of the setting change board 1311 is shorter than the horizontal distance dimension of the main control board 1310, and the center line passing through the midpoints of the right and left sides of the main control board 1310 coincides with the center line passing through the midpoints of the right and left sides of the setting change board 1311.

The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is arranged along the right side of the setting change board 1311 with the center of its vertical distance dimension on the center line, and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 is arranged along the left side of the main control board 1310 with the center of its vertical distance dimension on the center line. A setting key switch 1311a having a setting key cylinder into which a setting key is inserted and turned is arranged below the center line of the setting change board 1311, a setting change button 1311b having a pressing operation portion is arranged above the center line of the setting change board 1311, and a setting change permission lamp 1311c that can emit light in a single color (for example, red) is arranged on the center line of the setting change board 1311 and to the upper left of the setting key switch 1311a (below the left of the setting change button 1311b). A setting display 1310g consisting of a single seven-segment LED display with a decimal point (so-called dot) is located above the center line of the main control board 1310 and near the connector MSCN, a base monitor 1310h consisting of a row of six seven-segment LED displays with a decimal point (so-called dot) is located below the center line of the main control board 1310 from the center to the right side, and a RAM clear switch 1310f with a push button is located near the center of the bottom side of the main control board 1310.

In this embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is in the OFF state as the initial position when the setting key is ready to be inserted into the socket formed in the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a (for example, the position where the longitudinal direction of the rectangular socket runs vertically). When the setting key cylinder is in the initial position, the setting key can be inserted into the socket and can be removed from the socket. Note that in this embodiment, the depth dimension of the setting key switch 1311a is adopted so that even if the main body frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2 with the setting key inserted into the socket, the setting key and the components of other pachinko machines (or components of the island equipment of the game hall) installed in a row facing each other on the island equipment of the game hall will not interfere with each other and will not be damaged.

The setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position to perform the first ON operation, thereby setting the setting key switch 1311a to the setting key ON, and this setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. In addition, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation, thereby setting the setting key switch 1311a to the determination key ON, and this determination key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise to return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), and the setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise to return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the decision key is turned ON to the original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. In this embodiment, the two completely different functions of the setting key ON function and the decision key ON function can be realized by the setting key switch 1311a alone, depending on the direction in which the setting key ring is rotated, and the setting key ON operation and the decision key ON operation can be performed together by the setting key switch 1311a alone.

Although the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, the pressing operation portion of the setting switching button 1311b, and the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f are exposed through openings formed in the cover body of the main control board box 1320, a wire intrusion prevention portion is molded into the cover body for each of these openings to prevent a wire or the like from entering through the "gaps" formed in the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, the pressing operation portion of the setting switching button 1311b, and the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f and their corresponding openings to tamper with the setting change board 1311 and the main control board 1310. The setting display 1310g and base monitor 1310h are housed in an internal space formed by the cover body and base body and cannot be touched at all, but because the cover body is molded transparent as described above, the setting value displayed by the setting display 1310g and the number of balls displayed by the base monitor 1310h can be seen through the cover body.

In order to prevent unauthorized modification, the wiring pattern through which the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, the wiring pattern through which the decision key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, the wiring pattern through which the OFF signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, and the wiring pattern through which the signal from the setting switching button 1311b is transmitted are formed so as not to come close to each other (separated from each other) on the setting change board 1311, and the connection to the terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 (the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310) is also formed so as to be spaced apart, and on the main control board 1310 The wiring patterns through which various signals from the setting key switch 1311a are transmitted (i.e., the wiring pattern through which the signal of the setting key ON of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, the wiring pattern through which the signal of the decision key ON of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, and the wiring pattern through which the signal of the OFF of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted) and the wiring pattern through which the signal from the setting switching button 1311b is transmitted are also formed so as not to approach each other (separated from each other), and the wiring patterns through which the signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is transmitted are also formed so as not to approach each other (separated from each other).

The setting key switch 1311a, setting change button 1311b, and setting display 1310g are briefly described below. First, the case where the setting value is changed is briefly described, followed by the case where the current setting value is displayed for confirmation. Note that the setting key is an important key that can be used to change the setting value as well as to confirm the current setting value, so only a limited number of people, including the arcade manager, are permitted to possess it, and it is limited to two or three people.

When changing the setting value, when the power is turned on for the pachinko machine 1 or when power is restored after a power outage (a momentary power outage), the main frame 4 must be opened from the outer frame 2, the setting key must be inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder must be rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key switch 1311a to the setting key ON, and the "predetermined setting value change permission condition" must be met. In other words, the person who actually changes the setting value must first confirm that the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on (the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), and then open the main frame 4 from the outer frame 2, and then insert the setting key into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and rotate it 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation to turn the setting key switch 1311a to the setting key ON, thereby turning on the power for the pachinko machine 1. The above-mentioned "predetermined setting value change permission condition" may further include a condition that the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated to input an operation signal. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when power is restored after a power outage (a momentary power outage), the main body frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key ON, and the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated. When the "predetermined setting value change permission condition" is satisfied, the setting value can be changed.

A person who changes the setting of a setting value must first make sure that the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on (the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), then open the main body frame 4 from the outer frame 2, and then insert the setting key into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, rotate the setting key cylinder clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation, thereby setting the setting key switch 1311a to setting key ON. Next, the power switch 630a (see Figure 7) is operated to power on the pachinko machine 1. This causes a setting key ON signal to be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a displays the current setting value (the value among setting values 1 to 6 set at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned on for the first time) stored in a specific area of its built-in RAM on the setting display 1310g, and switches the setting change permission lamp 1311c from an off state to an on state.

When a person who changes the setting value presses the pressing operation part of the setting switch button 1311b, a detection signal from the setting switch button 1311b of the setting change board 1311 is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Each time a person who changes the setting value presses the pressing operation part of the setting switch button 1311b, the main control MPU 1310a increases the current setting value by one based on the detection signal from the setting switch button 1311b of the setting change board 1311. When it reaches the maximum setting value of 6, it returns to the initial value of 1, increases by one again, and controls the setting value to be displayed on the setting display 1310g.

When a person who changes the setting value decides on a setting value, he or she rotates the setting key cylinder 120 degrees counterclockwise (i.e., rotates the setting key switch 1311a 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF) to turn it OFF, and then rotates it another 60 degrees counterclockwise) to turn the setting key switch 1311a to the decision key ON state. This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a stores the changed and decided setting value in a specific area of the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a.

In addition, when the setting key cylinder is rotated 120 degrees counterclockwise (i.e., the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), the decision key ON signal may be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. In this case, the setting value is displayed on the setting display 1310g by pressing the pressing operation part of the setting switch button 1311b, and then the setting value can be decided and the setting key can be removed from the setting key cylinder simply by turning the setting key switch 1311a OFF, improving operability.

The person who changes the setting value turns off the setting key switch 1311a by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise to return it from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the decision key was turned on to its original position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a switches the setting display 1310g from a state in which the setting value is displayed to a state in which it is not displayed, and switches the setting change permission lamp 1311c from a state in which it is lit to a state in which it is turned off.

The person who wishes to change the setting value removes the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and closes the main body frame 4 against the outer frame 2, completing the work of changing the setting value.

When checking and displaying the currently set setting value, when the power is turned on for the pachinko machine 1 or after the power is restored after a power outage (a momentary power outage), the main frame 4 must be opened from the outer frame 2, the setting key must be inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion hole of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder must be rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key switch 1311a to the setting key ON state, and the "predetermined setting value display permission condition" must be met. In other words, a person who actually checks and displays the currently set setting value must first check that the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (a state in which power has been restored after a power outage or momentary power outage), and then open the main frame 4 from the outer frame 2, and then insert the setting key into the setting key cylinder insertion hole of the setting key switch 1311a and rotate it 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key switch 1311a to the setting key ON state.

A person who checks and displays the currently set setting value must first check that the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (a state in which power has been restored after a power outage or momentary power outage), then open the main frame 4 from the outer frame 2, and then insert the setting key into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and rotate it 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key switch 1311a setting key ON. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a displays the current setting value (the value that is set among setting values 1 to 6 at the time the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned on for the first ON operation) stored in a specific area of its built-in RAM on the setting display 1310g. At this time, the setting change permission lamp 1311c remains off, and even if a person who wants to confirm and display the currently set setting value presses the pressing operation part of the setting switch button 1311b, the setting value does not change at all in response to this pressing operation, and the content displayed on the setting display 1310g does not change either.

When the person who checks and displays the currently set setting values has finished checking the currently set setting values, they turn the setting key switch 1311a OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON back to its original position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF). This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

The main control MPU 1310a switches the setting display 1310g from displaying the setting value to not displaying it.

The person who wishes to confirm and display the currently set setting value removes the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and closes the main body frame 4 against the outer frame 2, completing the work of confirming and displaying the currently set setting value.

As described above, the predetermined setting value change permission conditions require that, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or after power is restored following a power outage (a momentary power outage), the main body frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, a setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation to turn the setting key ON. Meanwhile, the predetermined setting value display permission conditions require, as described above, that, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or after power is restored following a power outage (a momentary power outage), the main body frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, a setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation to turn the setting key ON. In this way, the predetermined setting value change permission condition and the predetermined setting value display permission condition have a common requirement in that the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key ON. However, they differ in that the predetermined setting value change permission condition requires "when power is restored," while the predetermined setting value display permission condition requires "after power is restored."

Here, to briefly explain the setting values, the "setting values" can change the probability for determining whether or not a jackpot has been won by lottery, the probability for determining whether or not a small jackpot has been won by lottery, the probability for determining whether or not a jackpot has been won by lottery when transitioning from a special probability mode to a normal mode, the allocation rate to areas that are advantageous to the player, etc., and the probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player (i.e., the number of game balls B that the player can acquire can be increased) is preset. In this embodiment, setting values 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 are prepared in advance as setting values, and the probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player from setting value 1 to setting value 6 is preset. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 selects various tables (e.g., a jackpot determination table in which the ratio of jackpot determination values indicating that a jackpot has been won is specified, a jackpot pattern determination table in which the ratio of determination values for determining a jackpot pattern is specified, a small jackpot determination table in which the ratio of small jackpot determination values indicating that a small jackpot has been won is specified, a small jackpot pattern determination table in which the ratio of determination values for determining a small jackpot pattern is specified, a normal time transition determination table in which the ratio of determination values for transition determination from a probability change to a normal time is specified, etc.) used in various lottery determinations associated with the set values, or selects various tables (e.g., an allocation table in which the allocation time is specified, a block that manages the drive of an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, etc.) used in various lottery determinations associated with the set values. In the various tables used in various lottery determinations associated with the set values, various determination values are allocated at a predetermined ratio. In addition, the various tables used in the various lottery judgments are set so that at least some of the values are different from each other, and the various tables used in the various allocation rates are set so that at least some of the values are different from each other, and some are set so that the values are different based on the relationship between a table corresponding to a block that manages the drive of one electric drive source and a table corresponding to a block that manages the drive of another electric drive source. In addition, the above-mentioned setting values are six setting values (integers) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 6, but the range may be smaller or larger than this. For example, it may be four setting values (integers) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 4, or it may be eight setting values (integers) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 8.

As described above, the setting display 1310g not only displays the setting value, but also checks the contents of its own built-in RAM when the main control MPU 1310a restores power to determine whether there is an abnormality, and if it determines that there is an abnormality and the main control side power cut processing does not end normally when the power is cut off, it displays an error message to inform the user that there is an abnormality (or that the contents stored in its own built-in RAM are unreliable). In this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error message.

Next, to briefly explain the base monitor 1310h, the base monitor 1310h displays the number of game balls B that have been collected by the outlet 1008 provided in the game area 5a that is partitioned and formed on the game board 5, out of the game balls B that have been launched into the game area 5a. Of the game balls B that have been launched into the game area 5a, the game balls B that have been collected by the outlet 1008 are detected by the out sensor 664 (see FIG. 160, etc.), and this detection signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a via the panel relay board.

The main control MPU 1310a counts the number of game balls B collected by the outlet 1008, stores the counting result (total number) in a specific area of its built-in RAM, and displays it on the base monitor 1310h.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned to the determination key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a was turned ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, and this determination key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, the setting key switch 1311a may also be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a was turned ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a' can be turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON back to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), and the setting key switch 1311a' can be turned ON as the decision key, and this decision key ON signal can be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 (the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a' may be described as "variant embodiment of the decision key (1)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF) and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, a decision key button having a press operation portion may be provided on the setting change board 1311. In this case, the pressing operation part of the decision key button is exposed through an opening formed in the cover body of the main control board box 1320 corresponding to the decision key button, and a wire intrusion prevention part is molded into the cover body for the opening so that a wire or the like cannot be inserted through the "gap" formed between the pressing operation part of the decision key button and the corresponding opening to modify the setting change board 1311 and the main control board 1310. When the pressing operation part of the decision key button is pressed, this operation signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Based on the detection signal from the decision key button, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the pressing operation part of the decision key button is pressed, and can determine that the decision key is not ON when the pressing operation part of the decision key button is not pressed.

The position where the decision key button is arranged on the setting change board 1311 may be near the setting key switch 1311a or near the setting switch button 1311b. On the cover body of the main control board box 1320, stickers with the names of the buttons printed on them are attached at positions corresponding to the decision key button and the setting switch button 1311b so that the decision key button and the setting switch button 1311b are not confused (the names of the buttons may be molded on the cover body instead of stickers). In addition, in order to prevent the decision key button and the setting switch button 1311b from being confused, a button with a cover covering the pressing operation part of either the decision key button or the setting switch button 1311b (the cover needs to be opened to press the pressing operation part) may be used, a pressing operation part with a different color may be used, the outer shape or the pressing operation part of the decision key button and the setting switch button 1311b may be different, or another type of switch that does not have a pressing operation part may be used as the decision key button. Examples of other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation part as the decision key button include various switches such as a toggle switch with a lever, a slide switch with a slide part, a rotary switch with a rotation operation part, a rocker switch, a touch switch, etc. In addition, when the decision key button and the setting switching button 1311b are provided on the setting change board 1311, in order to prevent unauthorized tampering, the wiring pattern to the decision key button and the wiring pattern to the setting switching button 1311b are formed so as not to approach each other (separated from each other) on the setting change board 1311, and the connection to the terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 (the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310) is also formed so as to be separated from each other, and also on the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern to which the detection signal from the decision key button is transmitted and the wiring pattern to which the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b is transmitted are formed so as not to approach each other (separated from each other). Also, if a confirmation key button is provided on the setting change board 1311, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON (the form of the confirmation key button (which may include the form of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "variant form of the confirmation key (2)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is turned 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to return it to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), and then turned another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, thereby making the setting key switch 1311a the determination key ON. This determination key ON signal is transmitted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 13 of the main control board 1310. 10a, but instead, a detection signal from a handle touch sensor 192 in the handle unit 180, which detects whether or not the palm or fingers are touching the handle 195, and a detection signal from a single button operation sensor 194, which detects whether or not the player wants to forcibly stop the shooting of the game ball B, may be branched in the payout control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, and it may be determined whether or not the decision key is ON based on these detection signals. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the palm or fingers are touching the handle 195 based on the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192, but can determine that the decision key is not ON when the palm or fingers are not touching the handle 195, and/or can determine that the decision key is ON when the shooting of the game ball B is forcibly stopped based on the detection signal from the single button operation sensor 194, but can determine that the decision key is not ON when the shooting of the game ball B is not forcibly stopped (the aspect of the handle touch sensor (which may include the aspect of the single button operation sensor) may be described as "variant embodiment of the decision key (3)").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned to the decision key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key was turned ON back to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, instead of this, a firing reference pulse from a firing timing control circuit provided in the firing control unit 633b of the dispensing control board 633 described later is branched in the dispensing control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 633, and the presence or absence of the decision key ON can be determined based on these firing reference pulses. The firing reference pulse is a reference pulse that allows 100 game balls B to be shot per minute toward the game area 5a, and is generated based on a clock signal from an oscillator circuit. In this case, when the firing reference pulse is input from the payout control board 633, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON, whereas when the firing reference pulse is not input, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is not ON (the form of the firing reference pulse may be described as "variant embodiment of the decision key (4)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), and then turned another 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it ON for the second time, thereby setting the setting key switch 1311a to the decision key ON. This decision key ON signal is sent from the setting change board 1311 to In the past, the signal was input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but if a distance measuring sensor capable of detecting the movement of a player seated opposite the pachinko machine 1 is provided on the game board 5 and the detection signal from this distance measuring sensor is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via a relay board, the detection signal from this distance measuring sensor may be branched in the relay board and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the relay board, and the presence or absence of the decision key ON may be determined based on this detection signal. The distance measuring sensor detects the movement of a player by transmitting light emitted by a light emitting unit through a transparent glass plate 162 of a glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 and reflecting on the arm or hand of the player within a predetermined distance dimension, and the reflected light passes through the transparent glass plate 162 again and is received by a light receiving unit. In this case, when the main control MPU 1310a receives a detection signal from the distance sensor via the relay board, it determines whether or not there is motion based on this detection signal, and if it determines that there is motion, it can determine that the decision key is ON, whereas if it determines that there is no motion, it can determine that the decision key is not ON (the aspect of the distance sensor is sometimes referred to as "variant embodiment of the decision key (5)").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the setting key ON state by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position to perform the first ON operation, and this setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Also, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the determination key ON state by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation, and this determination key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Also, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to return from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by rotating the key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and the setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise to return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the decision key is turned ON to the original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the setting key switch 1311a may be provided with a serial output circuit that can serially output information conveying the setting key ON, decision key ON, and OFF to the outside as serial information. This improves security against signals from the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key switch 1311a on which this serial output circuit is provided was provided on the setting change board 1311, but instead, it may be provided on the main control board 1310 or on the dispensing control board 633. When the serial information outputted from this serial output circuit is inputted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a can determine from the received serial information whether it conveys the setting key ON, the decision key ON, or the decision key OFF (the embodiment of the setting key switch 1311a having a serial circuit may be described as "variant (6) of the decision key").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position to perform the first ON operation, thereby setting the setting key switch 1311a to the setting key ON state, and this setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Also, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation, thereby setting the setting key switch 1311a to the determination key ON state, and this determination key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Also, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder counterclockwise by 60 degrees to turn it OFF, and the setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder clockwise by 60 degrees to return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the decision key is turned ON to the original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), and this OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the setting key switch 1311a may be provided with a pulse output circuit that can output information conveying the setting key ON, decision key ON, and OFF as a pulse signal to the outside. This can improve security against signals from the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key switch 1311a on which this pulse output circuit is provided is provided on the setting change board 1311, but instead, it may be provided on the main control board 1310 or the dispensing control board 633. For example, the pulse width of the pulse signal output from this pulse output circuit is set to 1 ms if the information conveys the setting key ON, the pulse width is set to 3 ms if the information conveys the decision key ON, and the pulse width is set to 5 ms if the information conveys the OFF. When the pulse signal output from this pulse output circuit is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a can determine from the input pulse signal whether the information conveys the setting key ON, the decision key ON, or the OFF (the embodiment of the setting key switch 1311a having a pulse output circuit may be described as "variant (7) of the decision key").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position to perform the first ON operation, thereby setting the setting key switch 1311a to the setting key ON, and this setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation, thereby setting the setting key switch 1311a to the decision key ON, and this decision A setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to the original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF). The setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to return it from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the decision key is turned ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), thereby turning the setting key switch 1311a OFF. This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, the voltage level of the setting key ON signal, the decision key ON signal, The voltage level of the ON signal and the voltage level of the OFF signal may be set to an intermediate potential (e.g., a potential of 2V to 3V out of a range of 0V to 5V) between the setting change board 1311 and the main control board 1310, and a comparator circuit may be provided in the main control board 1310. The comparison results of the comparator circuit may be input to the main control MPU 1310a, so that the main control MPU 1310a may determine the ON/OFF state of the setting key ON signal, the ON/OFF state of the decision key ON signal, and the ON/OFF state of the OFF signal. This improves security for signals from the setting key switch 1311a (the embodiment of the setting key switch that uses an intermediate potential may be referred to as "variant embodiment of the decision key (8)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key was turned ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, a decision key button having a press operation portion may be provided on the dispensing control board 633. In this case, the pressing operation part of the decision key button is exposed through an opening formed in the cover body of the dispensing control board box 632 corresponding to the decision key button, and a wire intrusion prevention part is molded into the cover body for the opening so that a wire or the like cannot enter through the "gap" formed between the pressing operation part of the decision key button and the corresponding opening to modify the dispensing control board 633. When the pressing operation part of the decision key button is pressed, this operation signal is input from the dispensing control board 633 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the pressing operation part of the decision key button is pressed based on the detection signal from the decision key button, and can determine that the decision key is not ON when the pressing operation part of the decision key button is not pressed.

The position where the decision key button is placed on the dispensing control board 633 may be near the error release switch having a pressing operation unit described later. On the cover body of the dispensing control board 633, stickers with the names of each button printed on them are attached at positions corresponding to the decision key button and the error release switch so that the decision key button and the error release switch are not confused (instead of stickers, the names of each button may be molded on the cover body). In addition, in order to prevent the decision key button and the error release switch from being confused, a button with a cover that covers the pressing operation unit of either the decision key button or the error release switch (the cover needs to be opened to press the pressing operation unit) may be used, a pressing operation unit with a different color may be used, the outer shape or the pressing operation unit of the decision key button and the error release switch may be different, or another type of switch that does not have a pressing operation unit may be used as the decision key button. Other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation part as the decision key button include, for example, various switches such as a toggle switch with a lever, a slide switch with a slide part, a rotary switch with a rotation operation part, a rocker switch, a touch switch, etc. In addition, when the decision key button and the error release switch are provided on the dispensing control board 633, in order to prevent unauthorized tampering, the wiring pattern to the decision key button and the wiring pattern to the error release switch are formed so as not to approach each other (separated from each other) on the dispensing control board 633, and the connection to the terminal of the connector of the dispensing control board 633 (the terminal of the connector of the main control board 1310) is also formed so as to be separated from each other, and in the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern to which the detection signal from the decision key button is transmitted and the wiring pattern to which the detection signal from the error release switch is transmitted are also formed so as not to approach each other (separated from each other). In addition, if a confirmation key button is provided on the dispensing control board 633, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON (the form of the confirmation key button (which may include the form of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "variant form of the confirmation key (9)").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key was turned ON back to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF) and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, instead of this, a signal from an error release switch having a pressing operation unit on the dispensing control board 633 may be branched in the dispensing control board 633 and input via the dispensing control board 633 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the presence or absence of the decision key ON may be determined based on this signal. As described above, the error release switch is for releasing the error displayed on the error LED display, and when the system of the pachinko machine 1 has completed startup after power is restored (the power-on processing of the various control boards has been completed and interrupt processing is being performed) and the state of the pachinko machine 1 is such that no error has occurred, the pressing operation part of the error release switch is not operated at all. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the pressing operation part of the error release switch is operated based on a signal from the error release switch, and can determine that the decision key is not ON when the pressing operation part of the error release switch is not operated based on a signal from the error release switch. This can improve security with respect to the presence or absence of the decision key being ON (the form of the error release switch may be described as "variant embodiment of the decision key (10)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to return it to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), and then turned another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, thereby setting the setting key switch 1311a to the decision key ON. This decision key ON signal is sent from the setting change board 1311 to the main control board 1310. The error reset switch is input to the main control MPU 1310a, but instead of this, the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 may monitor the logic of the signal from the error reset switch having a push operation part on the payout control board 633 in the port input process of the payout control unit power-on process described later, create a command, send the created command in the command transmission process of the payout control unit power-on process described later to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 that received this command may determine whether the decision key is ON. As described above, the error reset switch is for resetting the error displayed on the error LED indicator, and when the system of the pachinko machine 1 has completed startup after power recovery (the power-on process of various control boards has been completed and interrupt processing is being performed), and no error has occurred in the state of the pachinko machine 1, the push operation part of the error reset switch is not operated at all. Therefore, in the frame command receiving process in the main control timer interrupt process described below, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the dispensing control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit is operated based on a signal from the error release switch and receives a command to that effect, while it can determine that the decision key is not ON when the dispensing control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit is not operated based on a signal from the error release switch and receives a command to that effect. This improves security in relation to whether the decision key is ON or not (mode 2 of the error release switch may be described as "variant embodiment of the decision key (11)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), and then turned another 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it ON for the second time, thereby making the setting key switch 1311a the decision key ON. This decision key ON signal is set In the past, the operation signal was input from the constant change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead, a RAM clear switch 1310f can be provided on the dispensing control board 633, and the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f can be input to the dispensing control MPU of the dispensing control board 633, and also branched in the dispensing control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 633, and the main control MPU 1310a can determine whether the decision key is ON or not based on the operation signal input. As described below, when the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated when power is restored (more precisely, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f), or when a setting change is made that can change and determine the setting value (when the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change process described below), the main control MPU 1310a always clears a specified area of the RAM built into it (the area of the entire RAM excluding a specific area). Therefore, since the main control MPU 1310a always clears a specified area of its built-in RAM by turning on the pachinko machine 1 while the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, the RAM clear switch 1310f can be used as a confirmation key, and the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the confirmation key is ON when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed based on an operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633, while it can determine that the confirmation key is not ON when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed based on an operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633. This improves security in relation to whether the confirmation key is ON or not.

The pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the dispensing control board 633 is exposed through an opening formed in the cover body of the dispensing control board box 632 corresponding to the RAM clear switch 1310f, and a wire intrusion prevention portion is molded into the cover body so that a wire or the like cannot be inserted through the "gap" formed between the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f and the corresponding opening to tamper with the dispensing control board 633.

The position where the RAM clear switch 1310f is arranged on the dispensing control board 633 may be near the error release switch having a push operation unit described later. On the cover body of the dispensing control board 633, stickers with the names of each button printed on them are attached at positions corresponding to the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch so that the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch are not confused (the names of each button may be molded on the cover body instead of these stickers). In addition, in order to prevent the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch from being confused, a button with a cover covering the push operation unit of either the RAM clear switch 1310f or the error release switch (the cover needs to be opened to operate the push operation unit by pushing it) may be used, a push operation unit with a different color may be used, a RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch with a different external shape or a push operation unit with a different shape may be used, or another type of switch that does not have a push operation unit may be used as the RAM clear switch 1310f. Examples of other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation part as the RAM clear switch 1310f include various switches such as a toggle switch with a lever, a slide switch with a slide part, a rotary switch with a rotation operation part, a rocker switch, and a touch switch. In addition, when the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error reset switch are provided on the dispensing control board 633, in order to prevent unauthorized tampering, the wiring pattern to the RAM clear switch 1310f and the wiring pattern to the error reset switch are formed so that they are not close to each other (separated from each other) on the dispensing control board 633, and the connection to the terminal of the connector of the dispensing control board 633 (the terminal of the connector of the main control board 1310) is also formed so as to be separated from each other, and in the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern through which the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is transmitted and the wiring pattern through which the detection signal from the error reset switch is transmitted are also formed so that they are not close to each other (separated from each other). In addition, if a RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the dispensing control board 633, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON (the form of the RAM clear switch (which may include the form of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as a "variant of the decision key (12)").

In the above-described embodiment, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), and then turned another 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it ON for the second time, thereby setting the setting key switch 1311a to the decision key ON. This decision key ON signal is sent from the setting change board 1311 to the main control board 13 10, the signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a, but instead, a RAM clear switch 1310f can be provided on the dispensing control board 633, and the dispensing control MPU of the dispensing control board 633 can monitor the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f in the port input processing of the dispensing control unit power-on processing described below, create a command, and send the created command to the main control board 1310 in the command sending processing of the dispensing control unit power-on processing described below.The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 which receives this command can determine whether the decision key is ON or not. As described below, when the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated when power is restored (more precisely, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f), or when a setting change is made that can change and determine the setting value (when the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change process described below), the main control MPU 1310a always clears a specified area of the RAM built into it (the area of the entire RAM excluding a specific area). Therefore, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, the main control MPU 1310a will always clear a specified area of its built-in RAM, so the RAM clear switch 1310f can be used as a confirmation key, and in the frame command receiving process in the main control timer interrupt processing described below, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the confirmation key is ON when the payout control MPU determines that the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f has been operated based on an operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633 and receives a command to that effect, while the payout control MPU can determine that the confirmation key is not ON when the payout control MPU determines that the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f has not been operated based on an operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633 and receives a command to that effect. This improves security depending on whether the Enter key is ON or not (RAM clear switch mode 2 (which may include the setting key switch 1311a' mode) may be referred to as "Decision key variation (13)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned to the determination key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key was turned ON to the original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform the second ON operation, and the setting key switch 1311a can be turned to the determination key ON. This determination key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the bulb out detection sensor 574, or the dispensing detection sensor 591 is input to the dispensing control board 633. The signal is input to the main control MPU, and is branched in the dispensing control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 633, and the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether the decision key is ON or not based on these detection signals, or the dispensing control MPU of the dispensing control board 633 may monitor the logic of the detection signals from the full tank detection sensor 154, the bulb out detection sensor 574, or the dispensing detection sensor 591 in the port input processing of the dispensing control unit power-on processing described below, and create a command, and send the created command to the main control board 1310 in the command sending processing of the dispensing control unit power-on processing described below, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 which receives this command may determine whether the decision key is ON or not. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON (the configuration of the dispensing unit (which may include the configuration of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "variant embodiment of the determination key (16)").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2 based on a detection signal from the main frame opening switch, but can determine that the decision key is not ON when the main frame 4 remains open against the outer frame 2. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (the form of the main body frame opening switch (which may include the form of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "variant form of the decision key (17)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting of the setting value must close the main body frame 4 against the outer frame 2 to turn on the decision key, and after turning on the decision key, must open the main body frame 4 against the outer frame 2 again, remove the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and close the main body frame 4 against the outer frame 2 again.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON back to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF) and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the door frame 3 is opened relative to the main frame 4 based on a detection signal from the door frame opening switch, and can determine that the decision key is not ON when the door frame 3 remains closed relative to the main frame 4. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (the door frame opening switch (which may include the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "variant (17) of the decision key"). In this case, the person who changes the setting of the setting value must open the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 4 in order to turn on the decision key, and after turning on the decision key, must close the door frame 3 again relative to the main frame 4, remove the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and close the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2.

In the above embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 is turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), and then turned another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, thereby making the setting key switch 1311a the determination key ON, and this determination key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the setting key switch 1311a may be provided on the main control board 1310 (the aspect of the setting key switch may be described as "variant example of the determination key (18)").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 is turned 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to return to the original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF) to turn it OFF, and then turned another 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it ON for the second time, thereby turning the setting key switch 1311a to the determination key ON, and this determination key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, the setting key switch 1311a is provided on the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by rotating it from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key ON to the initial position, and this OFF signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, so that the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the OFF signal is input, and can determine that the decision key is not ON when the OFF signal is not input. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a ON (setting key switch mode 2 (which may include the setting key switch mode 1311a') may be described as "decision key variation (19)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON back to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF) and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, a decision key button having a press operation portion may be provided on the main control board 1310. In this case, the pressing operation part of the decision key button is exposed through an opening formed in the cover body of the main control board box 1320 corresponding to the decision key button, and a wire intrusion prevention part is molded into the cover body for the opening so that a wire or the like cannot be inserted through the "gap" formed between the pressing operation part of the decision key button and the corresponding opening to tamper with the main control board 1310. When the pressing operation part of the decision key button is pressed, this operation signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the pressing operation part of the decision key button is pressed based on the detection signal from the decision key button, and can determine that the decision key is not ON when the pressing operation part of the decision key button is not pressed.

The position where the decision key button is arranged on the main control board 1310 may be near the RAM clear switch 1310f. On the cover body of the main control board box 1320, stickers with the names of each button printed on them are attached at positions corresponding to the decision key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f so that the decision key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f are not confused (the names of each button may be molded on the cover body instead of stickers). Also, in order to prevent the decision key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f from being confused, a button with a cover covering the pressing operation part of either the decision key button or the RAM clear switch 1310f (the cover needs to be opened to press the pressing operation part) may be used, a pressing operation part with a different color may be used, the outer shape or the pressing operation part of the decision key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f may be different, or another type of switch that does not have a pressing operation part may be used as the decision key button. Other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation part as the decision key button include, for example, various switches such as a toggle switch with a lever, a slide switch with a slide part, a rotary switch with a rotation operation part, a rocker switch, and a touch switch. In addition, when the decision key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f are provided on the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern to the decision key button and the wiring pattern to the RAM clear switch 1310f are formed so that they do not approach each other (are separated from each other) on the main control board 1310 in order to prevent unauthorized tampering. In addition, when the decision key button is provided on the main control board 1310, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (the setting key button mode 2 (which may include the setting key switch 1311a' mode) may be described as "variant of the decision key (20)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key was turned ON back to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF) and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead, the presence or absence of the decision key ON may be determined based on an operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f to which the main control MPU 1310a is input. As described below, when the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated when power is restored (more precisely, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f), or when a setting change is made that can change and determine the setting value (when the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change process described below), the main control MPU 1310a always clears a specified area of the RAM built into it (the area of the entire RAM excluding a specific area). Therefore, since the main control MPU 1310a always clears a predetermined area of its built-in RAM by turning on the pachinko machine 1 while the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, the RAM clear switch 1310f can be used as a decision key, and the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f, and can determine that the decision key is not ON when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633. This improves security in relation to whether the decision key is ON or not. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON (RAM clear switch mode 3 (which may include the setting key switch 1311a' mode) may be described as "variant of the decision key (21)"). Note that the period during which the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed is limited to when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is input to the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 as described later, so if the RAM clear switch 1310f is configured to also function as an error release switch described later, the payout control board 633 does not need an error release switch.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to return it to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), and then turned another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, thereby making the setting key switch 1311a the decision key ON. This decision key ON signal is transmitted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control board 1310. However, instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a to which detection signals from the gate sensor 2601 of the gate 2002, various sensors of various winning ports (for example, the general winning port sensor 3001, the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2401, the variable winning port sensor 2526, the first large winning port sensor 2525, the second large winning port sensor 2561), and the out sensor 664 of the main frame 4 are input may be input and determine whether or not the decision key is ON based on these detection signals. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a ON (the aspects of the various sensors (which may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "various determination key modifications (22)"). In this case, the person changing the setting value must open the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 4 and send a game ball B to the gate 2002, to the various winning holes, or to the outlet 1008 in order to turn on the decision key.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), and then turned another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, thereby making the setting key switch 1311a the decision key ON. This decision key ON signal is then transmitted to the setting change board 1311. to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead, when the main control MPU 1310a controls the drive of an electric drive source such as a stepping motor, a DC motor, a solenoid, etc. to control the operation of the movable body (gimmick), and determines the original position or operating position of the movable body (gimmick) based on a detection signal from an optical sensor (photo sensor, distance sensor, etc.), the main control MPU 1310a may determine the presence or absence of the decision key ON based on the detection signal from the optical sensor. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a ON (the aspect of the optical gadget sensor (which may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "variation example of the decision key (23)"). In this case, the person changing the setting must open the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 4 and move the movable body (part) so that the optical sensor can detect the original position, operating position, etc. of the movable body (part).

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key was turned ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a, which receives an input of a detection signal from a magnetic sensor 1050 that detects unauthorized magnetism within the play area 5a, may determine whether or not the decision key is ON based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON (the form of the magnetic sensor (which may include the form of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as a "variant of the determination key (24)"). In this case, the person changing the setting value must bring a magnet from the front of the pachinko machine 1 toward the front of the game board 5 in order to set the determination key to ON.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is turned 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to return it to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), and then turned another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, thereby making the setting key switch 1311a the determination key ON. This determination key ON signal is transmitted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 13 of the main control board 1310. 10a, but instead of this, if a vibration sensor is provided on the game board 5 to detect fraudulent behavior by shaking or hitting the pachinko machine 1 to change the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a defined on the game board 5 to enter various winning holes or gates (gate 2002) provided on the game board 5, the main control MPU 1310a may determine the presence or absence of fraudulent behavior based on a detection signal from the vibration sensor and may also determine the presence or absence of the determination key ON based on the detection signal from the vibration sensor. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is set ON (the mode of the vibration sensor (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as a "variation example of the determination key (25)"). In this case, the person changing the setting value must shake or hit the pachinko machine 1 to turn on the decision key.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON to the original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), and then turned another 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it ON for the second time, thereby setting the setting key switch 1311a to the decision key ON. This decision key ON signal is transmitted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control board 1 Instead, if a radio wave sensor is provided on the game board 5 or the payout device 580 to detect fraudulent acts of illegally acquiring game balls B by irradiating radio waves to the pachinko machine 1 to cause malfunctions of various sensors of various winning slots provided on the game board 5 or various sensors provided on the payout device 580, the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not there is fraudulent acts based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor, and may also determine whether or not the determination key is ON based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is set ON (the form of the radio wave sensor (which may include the form of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "variant embodiment of the determination key (26)"). In this case, the person changing the setting value must irradiate the pachinko machine 1 with radio waves in order to turn on the decision key.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to return it to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), and then turned another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, thereby setting the setting key switch 1311a to the decision key ON. This decision key ON signal is sent from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MP of the main control board 1310. Instead, a detection signal from the pressing detection sensor 373 that detects the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 350 and a detection signal from the contact detection sensor main body 358 that detects the contact of the touch operation unit 302 of the performance operation unit 350 may be input to the peripheral control board 1510, branched in the peripheral control board 1510 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether the decision key is ON or not based on these detection signals. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a ON (the aspect of the performance operation button unit (which may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as a "variant of the decision key (27)").

In the above embodiment, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are housed in the internal space of the main control board box 1320, which is composed of a cover body and a base body. However, the setting change board 1311 may be housed in a separate setting change board box and arranged around or adjacent to the main control board box 1320. In the main control board box 1320, the cover body and the base body are crimped with a one-way screw or the like of the crimping part. This crimping part is a sealing mechanism, and is provided in multiple parts. The main control board box 1320 can be closed by crimping the cover body and the base body with a one-way screw or the like of the crimping part using one sealing mechanism, and then, in order to open the main control board box 1320, the sealing mechanism needs to be destroyed. In other words, the cover body cannot be removed from the base body unless the sealing mechanism is destroyed. Such a structure of the main control board box 1320 can also be applied to the structure of the setting change board box. In this case, the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the pressing operation part of the decision key button are exposed through the openings formed in the cover body of the main control board box 1320 corresponding to each of them, but a wire intrusion prevention part is molded in the cover body so that a wire or the like cannot be intruded through the "gaps" formed in the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the pressing operation part of the decision key button and the openings corresponding to each of them to modify the setting change board 1311. Note that, as the structure of the setting change board box, unlike the structure of the main control board box 1320 described above, if the cover body is configured to be opened or closed from the base body, a setting change board cover body opening/closing switch that can detect the opening of the cover body may be provided on the base body. In this case, the detection signal from the setting change board cover body opening/closing switch may be configured to be directly input to the main control board 1310, or may be configured to be (indirectly) input to the main control board 1310 via the setting change board 1311. The above-mentioned predetermined setting value change permission conditions can include a case where the cover body is opened from the base body based on a detection signal from the opening/closing switch for the setting change board cover body (the aspect of the setting change board box may be described as a "variant of the decision key (28)").

In the above-described embodiment, the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 are configured to be connected to each other, and in order to prevent unauthorized modification, a wiring pattern for transmitting a signal of the setting key ON of the setting key switch 1311a, a wiring pattern for transmitting a signal of the decision key ON of the setting key switch 1311a, a wiring pattern for transmitting a signal of the setting key switch 1311a OFF, and a wiring pattern for transmitting a signal from the setting switching button 1311b are provided. The wiring for the setting change board 1311 and the setting change board 1311 are formed so that they are not close to each other (are spaced apart from each other), and the connection to the terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 (the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310) is also formed so as to be spaced apart. Also on the main control board 1310, a wiring pattern for transmitting various signals from the setting key switch 1311a (i.e., a wiring pattern for transmitting a signal of the setting key ON of the setting key switch 1311a, a wiring pattern for transmitting a signal of the enter key of the setting key switch 1311a, The wiring pattern through which the ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted and the wiring pattern through which the OFF signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted and the wiring pattern through which the signal from the setting switching button 1311b is transmitted were formed so as not to be close to each other (separated from each other), but either of the wiring pattern through which the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted and the wiring pattern through which the decision key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted may be connected to another connector provided on the main control board 1310 separately from the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 (inter-board connection) via another connector provided on the setting change board 1311 separately from the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311, and the other connector provided on the setting change board 1311 and the other connector provided on the main control board 1310 may be electrically connected via a harness (the manner of wiring pattern routing may be described as "variation example (29) of the decision key").

Also, the above-mentioned modified enter key configurations (1) to (29) may be appropriately selected and combined to adopt the above-mentioned modified enter key configurations (the selected combination of modified configurations may be referred to as "modified enter key configuration (30)").

In addition, the above-mentioned setting values can change the probability for determining whether or not a big win has been obtained by lottery, the probability for determining whether or not a small win has been obtained by lottery, the probability for determining whether or not a big win has been obtained by lottery when transitioning from a probability change to a normal time, the allocation rate to an area that is advantageous to the player, etc., and the probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player (i.e., the number of game balls B that the player can obtain can be increased) is preset. In this embodiment, setting value 1, setting value 2, setting value 3, setting value 4, setting value 5, and setting value 6 are prepared in advance as setting values, and the probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player from setting value 1 to setting value 6 is preset. Incidentally, although there are multiple setting values ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 6 in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, there are also other pachinko machines that have a single setting value in which the probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player is preset. That is, there are game specifications in which the probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player exists as multiple preset values, such as the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, and settings need to be changed, and there are game specifications in which the probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player exists as a single preset value, and settings do not need to be changed at all. However, if the hardware configuration of the main control board 1310 is redesigned according to such game specifications, and the hardware configuration of the setting change board 1311 is redesigned or not used, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 will depend on the game specifications, and the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 will have similar or different hardware configurations depending on the game specifications. Therefore, there is a need for a main control board 1310 and a setting change board 1311 that can be used in common without being dependent on the game specifications, that is, without changing the design of the hardware configuration.

For example, in game specifications where the probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player is preset to a single set value and no setting changes are required, there is no need to use the set value as the probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player, so this can be addressed by changing the design of the software to assign set value 1, set value 2, set value 3, set value 4, set value 5, and set value 6 as follows:

For example, the main control MPU 1310a can use these as setting values to set multiple actual machine confirmation operation patterns (allowing for variation in the method of starting the pachinko machine 1 after clearing the RAM) after clearing a specified area (an area of the entire RAM excluding a specific area) contained within the main control MPU 1310a itself. In this case, for the operation of the movable body (gimmick object) that is the subject of control by the main control MPU 1310a and the lighting of light-emitting objects such as lamps and LEDs, actual machine confirmation operation pattern 1 that specifies "all operations (movement of movable body (gimmick object), lighting of light-emitting objects)" is assigned as setting value 1, actual machine confirmation operation pattern 2 that specifies "movement of movable body (gimmick object)" is assigned as setting value 2, actual machine confirmation operation pattern 3 that specifies "lighting of light-emitting objects" is assigned as setting value 3, and actual machine confirmation operation pattern 4 that specifies "detailed operation of movable body (gimmick object) (variable movement speed, movement over the entire operating area, movement over other structures and other movable objects)" is assigned as setting value 4. A real machine confirmation operation pattern 4 is assigned which specifies "operations such as checking interference with moving objects (reel objects), operation order with other moving objects (reel objects)" as a setting value 5, a real machine confirmation operation pattern 5 is assigned which specifies "lighting of light-emitting object 1 port unit (lighting of light-emitting object by a predetermined output port unit (i.e., one output port) of the main control MPU 1310a)" as a setting value 5, and a real machine confirmation operation pattern 6 is assigned which specifies "no operation" as a setting value 6 (the change setting of the real machine confirmation operation after RAM clearing may be described as "variation example (1) based on a common hardware configuration"). Note that the main control MPU 1310a performs the real machine confirmation operation after RAM clearing by repeatedly performing the main control side timer interrupt processing described later, thereby operating the moving object (reel object) and lighting the light-emitting object such as a lamp or LED. The peripheral control board 1510 which receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a can operate the moving object (reel object) which is the object to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 and lighting the light-emitting object with the contents (real machine confirmation operation pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. By changing the settings for the actual machine verification operation after the RAM is cleared, it is possible to provide a variety of methods for starting up the pachinko machine 1 after the RAM is cleared.

Also, for example, it can be used as a setting value that can set multiple times from the end of the pattern change to the start of a demonstration (a demonstration performance performed in a player waiting state). In this case, a time setting pattern 1 that specifies "10 seconds" is assigned as a setting value 1, a time setting pattern 2 that specifies "15 seconds" is assigned as a setting value 2, a time setting pattern 3 that specifies "20 seconds" is assigned as a setting value 3, a time setting pattern 4 that specifies "25 seconds" is assigned as a setting value 4, a time setting pattern 5 that specifies "30 seconds" is assigned as a setting value 5, and a time setting pattern 6 that specifies "35 seconds" is assigned as a setting value 6 (the manner of changing the time from the end of the pattern change to the start of a player waiting state may be described as "variation example (2) based on a common hardware configuration"). In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 that receives a setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a can start a demonstration at a time (time setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. By changing the time setting between when the pattern changes and when the player waits, it is possible to vary the time between when the pattern changes and when the demonstration begins.

Also, for example, it can be used as a setting value that can set multiple contents of the demonstration (demo performance performed in a player waiting state) performed after the end of the pattern change. In this case, demo performance setting pattern 1 that specifies "comical performance" is assigned as setting value 1, demo performance setting pattern 2 that specifies "comical performance, movable body (gimmick) operation performance" is assigned as setting value 2, demo performance setting pattern 3 that specifies "serious performance" is assigned as setting value 3, demo performance setting pattern 4 that specifies "serial performance, movable body (gimmick) operation performance" is assigned as setting value 4, demo performance setting pattern 5 that specifies "period drama-style performance" is assigned as setting value 5, and demo performance setting pattern 6 that specifies "period drama-style performance, movable body (gimmick)" is assigned as setting value 6 (the mode of changing the contents of the demo performance may be described as "variation example (3) due to common hardware configuration"). In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a can perform a demonstration with a demo performance (demo performance setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. Depending on how you change the settings for the content of this demo performance, you can add variety to the content of the demo performance that takes place after the pattern changes have finished.

Also, for example, it can be used as a setting value that can set multiple default volumes adjusted by a volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510. The volume adjustment switch can be rotated to increase or decrease the volume from the default volume. In this case, volume setting pattern 1 that specifies "volume 1" is assigned as setting value 1, volume setting pattern 2 that specifies "volume 2" is assigned as setting value 2, volume setting pattern 3 that specifies "volume 3" is assigned as setting value 3, volume setting pattern 4 that specifies "volume 4" is assigned as setting value 4, volume setting pattern 5 that specifies "volume 5" is assigned as setting value 5, and volume setting pattern 6 that specifies "volume 6" is assigned as setting value 6 (the aspect of changing the default volume may be described as "variant (4) based on the common hardware configuration"). Note that the volume is set to increase from setting value 1 to setting value 6. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives a setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a sets the default volume to a volume (volume setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. The default volume of "Volume 1" assigned to setting value 1 may be muted when the volume adjustment switch is moved in the direction to decrease the volume (moved in the opposite direction to increase the volume) and is adjusted to the minimum volume by completing the movement to the minimum volume end, or may be a volume that can be recognized when standing in front of the pachinko machine. The default volume of "Volume 6" assigned to setting value 6 may be the maximum volume when the volume adjustment switch is moved in the direction to increase the volume (moved in the opposite direction to decrease the volume) and is adjusted to the maximum volume by completing the movement to the maximum volume end, or may be a volume that is a predetermined percentage of the maximum volume (e.g., 85%). This aspect of changing the default volume setting allows for variation in the default volume adjusted by the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510.

It can also be used as a setting value that allows multiple settings for the volume of error notification sounds for various malfunctions, goto, errors, and other error notifications. The various error notification sounds cannot be adjusted by operating the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 (i.e., they are not dependent on it), and while setting them to maximum volume makes it easier for game parlor staff and other attendants to notice the pachinko machine that is emitting the error notification sound, it may be unpleasant to players playing other pachinko machines. Therefore, there is also a demand for something that allows the volume of the various error notification sounds to be adjusted. In this case, the error notification sound volume setting pattern 1 that specifies "error notification sound volume 1" is assigned as the setting value 1, the error notification sound volume setting pattern 2 that specifies "error notification sound volume 2" is assigned as the setting value 2, the error notification sound volume setting pattern 3 that specifies "error notification sound volume 3" is assigned as the setting value 3, the error notification sound volume setting pattern 4 that specifies "volume 4" is assigned as the setting value 4, the error notification sound volume setting pattern 5 that specifies "error notification sound volume 5" is assigned as the setting value 5, and the error notification sound volume setting pattern 6 that specifies "error notification sound volume 6 (maximum volume)" is assigned as the setting value 6 (the manner of changing the volume of the error notification sound may be described as "variation example (5) based on the common hardware configuration"). Note that the volume of the error notification sound is set to increase from the setting value 1 (a volume that is not muted and allows the error notification sound to be recognized when standing in front of the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound) to the setting value 6 (a maximum volume that allows the error notification sound to be fully recognized even when several meters away from the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound). The peripheral control board 1510, which receives a setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, controls the emission of an error alert sound at a volume (error alert volume setting pattern) that corresponds to the setting value included in the setting change command. Depending on the manner in which the volume of the error alert sound is changed, it is possible to provide variation in the volume of the error alert sound when an error is notified.

It can also be used as a setting value that can set multiple default luminances for light-emitting bodies such as lamps and LEDs. The luminance of the light-emitting body that is the object of control by the main control MPU 1310a can be increased or decreased from the default luminance. In this case, a default luminance setting pattern 1 that specifies "luminance 1" is assigned as the setting value 1, a default luminance setting pattern 2 that specifies "luminance 2" is assigned as the setting value 2, a default luminance setting pattern 3 that specifies "luminance 3" is assigned as the setting value 3, a default luminance setting pattern 4 that specifies "luminance 4" is assigned as the setting value 4, a default luminance setting pattern 5 that specifies "luminance 5" is assigned as the setting value 5, and a default luminance setting pattern 6 that specifies "luminance 6" is assigned as the setting value 6 (the mode of changing the default luminance may be described as "variant (6) based on a common hardware configuration"). The main control MPU 1310a adjusts the luminance of the light-emitting body by repeatedly performing the main control side timer interrupt processing described later, thereby lighting, blinking, gradation points, etc. of the light-emitting body. The peripheral control board 1510, which receives a setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, can adjust the brightness of the light-emitting element that is the target of control by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the default brightness (default brightness setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command, and can turn on, blink, or set a gradation point for the light-emitting element. Depending on the manner in which the content of the default brightness is changed, it is possible to provide variation in the default brightness of light-emitting elements such as lamps and LEDs.

It can also be used as a setting value that can set multiple luminances of light-emitting elements such as lamps and LEDs in error notifications of various malfunctions, stumbles, and errors. For the lamps controlled by the main control MPU 1310a, an error notification luminance setting pattern 1 that specifies "error notification luminance 1" is assigned as a setting value 1, an error notification luminance setting pattern 2 that specifies "error notification luminance 2" is assigned as a setting value 2, an error notification luminance setting pattern 3 that specifies "error notification luminance 3" is assigned as a setting value 3, an error notification luminance setting pattern 4 that specifies "error notification luminance 4" is assigned as a setting value 4, an error notification luminance setting pattern 5 that specifies "error notification luminance 5" is assigned as a setting value 5, and an error notification luminance setting pattern 6 that specifies "error notification luminance 6 (maximum luminance)" is assigned as a setting value 6 (the aspect of changing the luminance of the light-emitting element in the error notification may be described as "variation example (7) based on a common hardware configuration"). The lamp brightness is set to increase from setting value 1 (the lamp brightness is low, but the error notification can be recognized when standing in front of the pachinko machine, even if the lamp is not turned off) to setting value 6 (maximum brightness). The main control MPU 1310a adjusts the brightness of the light-emitting body in the error notification by repeatedly performing the main control side timer interrupt processing described later, and turns on, blinks, or sets a gradation point of the light-emitting body. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a can adjust the brightness of the light-emitting body that is the target of control by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the error notification brightness (error notification brightness setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command, and turns on, blinks, or sets a gradation point of the light-emitting body. Depending on the manner of changing the brightness of the light-emitting body in the error notification, it is possible to provide variation in the brightness of the light-emitting body such as a lamp or LED in the error notification.

The various setting values assigned to the above-mentioned common hardware configuration variants (1) to (7) are displayed on the setting display 1310g when a predetermined setting value display permission condition is met in the setting value confirmation display process performed by the main control MPU 1310a (described later), but they may also be displayed on the setting display 1310g at all times from when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on until it is powered off (the manner of displaying the setting values may be referred to as "common hardware configuration variant (8)").

Furthermore, any one of the variations (1) to (8) based on the common hardware configuration described above may be appropriately selected and adopted for the determination key variation (30) described above.

The above-mentioned predetermined setting value change permission conditions required that when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when power is restored after a power outage (a momentary power outage), the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key ON. When the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f, the main control MPU 1310a clears all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area in the main control side power-on process described later, and then proceeds with the game by performing interrupt permission settings, etc. Also, when the above-mentioned predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied when the power is restored to the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process in the main control side power-on process described later to clear all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area, and then proceeds with the game by setting interrupt permission, etc. In other words, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f, if the above-mentioned predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied when the power is restored to the pachinko machine 1, in either case, the main control MPU 1310a clears all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area in the main control side power-on process described later, and then proceeds with the game by setting interrupt permission, etc. Therefore, as the above-mentioned predetermined setting value change permission condition, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when power is restored after a power outage (a momentary power outage), the main body frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key ON, and the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f may also be pressed (sometimes referred to as a "variant of the predetermined setting value change permission condition").

In addition, the above-mentioned predetermined setting value display permission condition requires that when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or after a power outage (a momentary power outage that causes a momentary power outage) is restored, the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key ON. When this predetermined setting value display permission condition is met, the main control MPU 1310a displays the current setting value that is set on the setting display 1310g in the setting value confirmation display process that is performed as one process of the main control side timer interrupt process described later. In addition, as described above, the RAM clear switch 1310f requires that the pressing operation part is pressed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and the period during which it is pressed is limited. Therefore, as the above-mentioned predetermined setting value display permission condition, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when power is restored after a power outage (a momentary power outage that causes a momentary power outage), the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key ON, and the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f may not be pressed (sometimes referred to as "a modified example of the predetermined setting value display permission condition"). In this case, when the modified example of the predetermined setting value display permission condition is established, the main control MPU 1310a does not perform the setting value confirmation display process as one process of the main control side timer interrupt process described later, but performs it before the initial setting and start-up setting of the built-in WDT in the main control side power-on process described later, and then performs the interrupt permission setting and the like to proceed with the game. In addition, when the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting value confirmation display processing after a predetermined modified setting value display permission condition is met, the interrupt permission setting has not yet been made, so the main control MPU 1310a does not perform the main control side timer interrupt processing, and does not read the detection signal from the main frame open switch for detecting the opening of the main frame 4 from the outer frame 2, and the setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a when the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF) to perform the first ON operation, turning the setting key switch 1311a into the setting key ON state, and stores these in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as input information described later. Therefore, when a variation of a predetermined setting value display permission condition is met and the setting value confirmation display process is performed, the main control MPU 1310a reads a detection signal from the main body frame opening switch to detect the opening of the main body frame 4 from the outer frame 2, and a setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a.

By adopting both the above-mentioned modified example of the predetermined setting value change permission condition and the above-mentioned modified example of the predetermined setting value display permission condition, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when power is restored after a power outage (a momentary power outage that causes a momentary power outage), the main body frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key ON. When the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process in the main control side power-on process described later, clears all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area, and then proceeds with the game by setting interrupt permission, etc., whereas when the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed, the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting value confirmation display process in the main control side power-on process described later, and then proceeds with the game by setting interrupt permission, etc. By adopting this mode, when the main control MPU 1310a starts the game, the setting value confirmation display process is never performed. In other words, when the main control MPU 1310a starts the game by setting interrupt permission, etc., it never displays the currently set setting value on the setting display 1310g. The main control MPU 1310a counts the number of game balls B collected by the out ball passage 663 of the main frame 4 through the outlet 1008 provided in the game area 5a partitioned and formed on the game board 5 in a ball counting process of the main control side power-on process described later, and outputs the counted number of game balls B collected by the outlet 1008 to the base monitor 1310h in a port output process of the main control side power-on process described later, and displays the number of game balls B collected by the outlet 1008 on the base monitor 1310h. Therefore, the current setting value displayed by the setting display 1310g may be displayed on the above-mentioned base monitor 1310h (sometimes referred to as a "variant example of the method of using the base monitor"). As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can use the base monitor 1310h to display the current setting values that have been set during the period from when power is restored until when game progress begins by setting interrupt permission, etc., and once power is restored and game progress begins by setting interrupt permission, etc., the number of game balls B that have been collected by the outlet 1008 (out ball passage 663 of the main body frame 4) can be displayed, eliminating the need to provide a setting display 1310g and contributing to cost reduction.

In addition, any one of the above-mentioned variations of the predetermined setting value change permission conditions, the above-mentioned variations of the predetermined setting value display permission conditions, and the above-mentioned variations of the method of using the base monitor may be appropriately selected and adopted as the above-mentioned variation of the decision key (30).

In addition, any one of the above-mentioned variations of the predetermined setting value change permission conditions, the above-mentioned variations of the predetermined setting value display permission conditions, and the above-mentioned variations of the method of using the base monitor may be appropriately selected and adopted in the variations (1) to (8) based on the above-mentioned common hardware configuration.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 137 etc. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a. When assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the function display unit 1400 can be seen from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3. This function display unit 1400 uses multiple LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display the game status (game situation), the lottery results for normal symbols, the lottery results for special symbols, etc.

Although detailed illustrations are omitted, the function display unit 1400 is equipped with a status indicator consisting of three LEDs that display the game status, a normal pattern display consisting of two LEDs that display the lottery results of the normal pattern drawn when game ball B is received by gate 2002, and a normal hold display consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of holds related to the reception of game ball B by gate 2002.

The function display unit 1400 also includes a first special pattern display consisting of eight LEDs that displays the result of the drawing of the first special pattern drawn by the reception of the game ball B into the first starting port 2004, a first special reserved number display consisting of two LEDs that displays the reserved number related to the reception of the game ball B into the first starting port 2004, a second special pattern display consisting of eight LEDs that displays the result of the drawing of the second special pattern drawn by the reception of the game ball B into the second starting port 2005, and a second special reserved number display consisting of two LEDs that displays the reserved number related to the reception of the game ball B into the second starting port 2005.

Furthermore, the function display unit 1400 is equipped with a round display consisting of five LEDs that displays the number of times (number of rounds) that the opening and closing pattern of the first large winning opening 2006 and the second large winning opening 2007 is repeated when the lottery result of the first special pattern or the lottery result of the second special pattern is a "win" or the like.

This functional display unit 1400 can display the number of reserved items, designs, etc., by turning on, off, blinking, etc. the LEDs provided as appropriate.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 144 and the like. The peripheral control unit 1500 is provided behind the performance display device 1600 provided behind the rear box 3010 of the rear unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 160) that controls the performance presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board box 1520 that houses the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling light emission performance, sound performance, movable performance, and the like, and a performance display control unit 1512 for controlling performance images.

The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the performance operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, the performance display device 1600, etc. (see Figure 160).

The peripheral control unit 1500, which will be described in detail later, is attached to the rear side of the set plate 1650, which attaches the performance display device 1600 to the rear box 3010.

[5-7. Performance display device]
The performance display device 1600 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 143 and the like. The performance display device 1600 is disposed in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and is disposed behind the game panel 1100. The rear unit 3000 is attached via the rear box 3010 and the set plate 1650. The performance display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the rear box 3010, which will be described in detail later. The effect display device 1600 is attached to the front of the set plate 1650 that is attached to the game board 5 (see Figs. 151 to 153). It can be seen from the front (player's side) through the frame of 2500.

The performance display device 1600 is a 15-inch full-color LCD display device with white LEDs as a backlight, and is installed in a portrait orientation. The performance display device 1600 is connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and can display specified still images and videos.

[5-8. Overall structure of the table unit]
The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 143 and 144. The front unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front, with its front end protruding forward beyond the front surface of the game panel 1100 and its rear end protruding into the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100.

The front unit 2000 has a plurality of (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 that are always open and can receive the game ball B that has been shot into the game area 5a, a gate 2002 that is provided at a predetermined position within the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B, a variable winning opening 2003 that can receive the game ball B depending on the result of the lottery for the normal pattern that is drawn when the game ball B passes through the gate 2002, and a first starting opening 2004 and a second starting opening 2005 that are provided at a predetermined position within the game area 5a and are always open and can receive the game ball B. It is equipped with a starting opening 2005, a first large prize opening 2006 that can receive the game ball B depending on the lottery result of the first special pattern or the lottery result of the second special pattern drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting opening 2004 or the second starting opening 2005, and a second large prize opening 2007 that is provided at a position different from the first large prize opening 2006 and can receive the game ball B depending on the lottery result of the first special pattern or the lottery result of the second special pattern drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting opening 2004 or the second starting opening 2005.

In addition, the front unit 2000 further includes a first sub-outlet 2021 and a second sub-outlet 2022, each of which is provided at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and is always open to receive the game ball B.

Multiple (four in this example) general winning openings 2001 are located on the left side of the horizontal center in the lower part of the play area 5a. The gate 2002 is located near the left end of the play area 5a when viewed from the front, at a height slightly lower than the vertical center. The variable winning opening 2003 is located to the upper right of the gate 2002. The first starting opening 2004 is located directly above the outlet 1008, which is at the bottom end in the horizontal center of the play area 5a. The second starting opening 2005 is located to the right of the first starting opening 2004 in the lower part of the play area 5a and above the first starting opening 2004. The first large winning opening 2006 is located directly above the variable winning opening 2003 at a height of about 3/4 from the bottom in the play area 5a. The second large prize opening 2007 is located slightly higher than 3/4 of the height from the bottom of the play area 5a and close to the right end of the play area 5a.

The first sub-outlet 2021 is located between the second large prize opening 2007 and the left end of the play area 5a. The second sub-outlet 2022 is located to the right of the second starting opening 2005.

The front unit 2000 is equipped with a start port unit 2100 which is attached directly above the bottom end of the play area 5a in the left-right center of the play area 5a and has a first start port 2004, a side unit 2200 which is arranged along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the start port unit 2100 when viewed from the front and has four general winning ports 2001, an upper left side unit 2300 which is arranged slightly above the left side of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front, and a lower right unit 2400 which is arranged to the right of the start port unit 2100 when viewed from the front, which is the lower right corner of the play area 5a when viewed from the front, and has a second start port 2005 and a second sub-out port 2022.

The front unit 2000 is located above the starting hole unit 2100, the side unit 2200, and the lower right unit 2400, and is located slightly above the center of the play area 5a when viewed from the front. It is equipped with a frame-shaped center device 2500 having a variable winning hole 2003, a first large winning hole 2006, a second large winning hole 2007, and a first sub-out hole 2021, a gate member 2600 having a gate 2002, and a specific obstacle nail group 2700 located on the right side of the play area 5a and consisting of a plurality of obstacle nails N.

The lower right unit 2400, details of which will be described later, is capable of receiving game balls B received in the second large prize opening 2007, and is equipped with a pseudo large prize opening 2402 that has a larger opening than the second large prize opening 2007, and a pseudo outlet 2404 that ejects game balls B that are not received in the pseudo large prize opening 2402 to the rear of the game panel 1100.

[5-8a. Starting unit]
Next, the starting port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to Fig. 145 etc. The starting port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 is disposed directly above the outlet 1008 near the lower end of the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a, and is attached from the front to the game panel 1100. The starting port unit 2100 has a first starting port 2004 that is always open upward and has a width that allows only one game ball B to be received.

When the starting port unit 2100 is attached to the game panel 1100, the first starting port 2004 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 and opens upward, and is located directly below the center in the left-right direction of the center device 2500. In more detail, the first starting port 2004 of the starting port unit 2100 is located directly below the central release section 2513a of the stage 2513 in the center device 2500 when assembled to the game board 5. This ensures that the game ball B released from the central release section 2513a of the stage 2513 is received by the first starting port 2004 with a high probability.

When attached to the game panel 1100, the start port unit 2100 can guide the game ball B received in the first start port 2004 to the rear of the game panel 1100 and deliver it to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. The game ball B delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 is detected by the first start port sensor 3002 and then discharged downward.

[5-8b. Side unit]
Next, the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 145 and the like. The side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 extends along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the starting hole unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The side unit 2200 has four general winning holes 2001 that are open so as to be able to receive the game ball B at all times. The four general winning holes 2001 of the side unit 2200 are arranged in a circular arc shape along the inner rail 1002. Each of the four general winning holes 2001 opens upward.

When the side unit 2200 is assembled to the game board 5, the four general winning openings 2001 protrude forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. This side unit 2200 can guide the game ball B received in the general winning openings 2001 to the rear of the game panel 1100 and deliver it to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. The game ball B delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001 and then discharged downward.

[5-8c. Upper left side unit]
Next, the upper left side unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to Fig. 145 etc. The upper left side unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 is attached to the gaming panel 1100 from the front so as to contact the inner rail 1002 to the left of the side unit 2200 within the gaming area 5a. The upper left side unit 2300 has a shelf portion 2301 that is inclined so as to be lower to the right.

When the upper left side unit 2300 is assembled to the game board 5, the shelf portion 2301 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. The upper left side unit 2300 can guide the game ball B that has flowed down the left side of the center device 2500 to the right side below the center device 2500 by the shelf portion 2301.

[5-8d. Lower right unit]
Next, the lower right unit 2400 of the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Fig. 147 etc. The lower right unit 2400 of the front unit 2000 is disposed in the game area 5a to the right of the start port unit 2100 as viewed from the front, which is the lower right corner as viewed from the front, and is attached from the front to the front of the game panel 1100. This lower right unit 2400 includes a second start port 2005, a second sub-out port 2022, and a second start port sensor 2401 (see Fig. 149 etc.) that detects the game ball B received in the second start port 2005.

The lower right unit 2400 also has a pseudo large prize opening 2402 that extends left and right across the entire width in the left-right direction, a pseudo large prize opening sensor 2403 that detects the game ball B received in the pseudo large prize opening 2402, and a pseudo out opening 2404 that is provided below the left end of the pseudo large prize opening 2402. The pseudo large prize opening 2402 and the pseudo out opening 2404 open forward. The pseudo large prize opening 2402 opens larger (wider) left and right than the second large prize opening 2007. Incidentally, in this embodiment, the width of the pseudo large prize opening 2402 in the left-right direction is about 170 mm, which is wider than the maximum width of a normally used large prize opening, which is 135 mm.

The lower right unit 2400 also includes a pseudo large prize opening door 2405 that can be opened and closed to close the pseudo large prize opening 2402, and a pseudo large prize opening solenoid 2406 (see FIG. 149, etc.) that opens and closes the pseudo large prize opening door 2405. The pseudo large prize opening door 2405 is a flat plate extending in the left-right direction, and its lower edge is supported so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the horizontal direction.

In the lower right unit 2400, the second start opening 2005 is located directly above the pseudo big prize opening 2402, to the right of the pseudo out opening 2404, and the second sub-out opening 2022 is located adjacent to the right of the second start opening 2005.

When assembled to the game board 5, the lower right unit 2400 has a left end located near the right side of the outlet 1008 and a right end close to the right rail 1005, and is formed long enough to cover most of the top of the lower right rail 1004 in the left-right direction.

The lower right unit 2400 has a flat base plate 2407 that can abut against the front surface of the game panel 1100, and a partition 2410 that protrudes forward from the base plate 2407 and can form a space (pseudo game area 2010) independent of the game area 5a. The base plate 2407 and the partition 2410 are made of a transparent material. The second start hole 2005, the second sub-out hole 2022, the pseudo large prize hole 2402, and the pseudo out hole 2404 are provided so as to penetrate the base plate 2407, and the pseudo large prize hole sensor 2403 is provided on the rear side of the base plate 2407. The pseudo large prize hole 2402 and the pseudo out hole 2404 are provided inside the partition 2410.

The partition 2410 is made up of a bottom wall 2411 that extends left and right over the entire width and is inclined so that the right end is higher, a first standing wall 2412 that extends upward from the right end of the bottom wall 2411, a right inclined wall 2413 that extends diagonally from the upper end of the first standing wall 2412 to the lower left, a right lateral wall 2414 that extends horizontally from the lower end of the right inclined wall 2413 to the first standing wall 2412, a second standing wall 2415 that is spaced to the left of the right lateral wall 2414 and extends upward from a position at the same height as the lower end of the right lateral wall 2414 beyond the first standing wall 2412, and a second standing wall 2416 that is spaced to the left of the right lateral wall 2414 and extends upward from the position at the same height as the lower end of the right lateral wall 2414. The wall portion 2415 has a left inclined wall portion 2416 that extends diagonally downward and to the right from a portion at the same height as the upper end of the first standing wall portion 2412 to the same height as the lower end of the second standing wall portion 2415, a left lateral wall portion 2417 that extends horizontally from the lower end of the left inclined wall portion 2416 to the left of the second standing wall portion 2415, an inclined wall portion 2418 that extends diagonally downward and to the left from the left end of the left lateral wall portion 2417 to the same position as the left end of the bottom wall portion 2411, and a third standing wall portion 2419 that extends downward from the lower end of the inclined wall portion 2418 to a position lower than the left end of the bottom wall portion 2411.

The bottom wall portion 2411 is formed to be approximately one game ball B shorter than the left-right length of the lower right rail 1004. The left-right distance between the first upright wall portion 2412 and the second upright wall portion 2415 is slightly shorter than the left-right length of the second large prize opening 2007. The distance between the bottom end of the right inclined wall portion 2413 and the bottom end of the left inclined wall portion 2416 is approximately half the left-right length of the second large prize opening 2007.

The second starting hole 2005 and the second sub-out hole 2022 are located in the area between the second upright wall 2415 and the inclined wall 2418 in the left side wall 2417. The pseudo large prize hole 2402 is located directly below the right side wall 2414, the left side wall 2417, and the inclined wall 2418, and opens forward in a shape where the area along the inclined wall 2418 is cut out obliquely from a horizontally long rectangle. The pseudo out hole 2404 is located adjacent to the area where the bottom wall 2411 and the third upright wall 2419 intersect.

The lower right unit 2400 also has a flat lower right decorative part 2431 that closes the front end of the triangular frame formed by the first vertical wall part 2412, the right inclined wall part 2413, and the right lateral wall part 2414, a flat lower right left decorative part 2432 that closes the front end of the triangular frame formed by the second vertical wall part 2415, the left inclined wall part 2416, and the left lateral wall part 2417 and extends forward of the second starting port 2005 and the second sub-out port 2022, and a lower right middle decorative part 2433 that is provided in the center between the lower right right decorative part 2431 and the lower right left decorative part 2432 and protrudes forward from the base plate 2407 in the shape of a downward arrow (see FIG. 137, etc.).

The lower right unit 2400 is further provided at the rear of the base plate 2407 and has a lower right decorative board 2434 mounted on the front surface with multiple LEDs that can independently illuminate and decorate the pseudo large prize opening 2402, the lower right right decorative part 2431, the lower right left decorative part 2432, and the lower right middle decorative part 2433.

In addition, the lower right unit 2400 has translucent decorative stickers affixed to the front of each of the pseudo big prize door 2405, the lower right right decorative part 2431, the lower right left decorative part 2432, and the lower right center decorative part 2433.

The lower right unit 2400 is installed in the lower right corner of the game area 5a in a state where the game ball B cannot flow to the right and lower sides when assembled to the game board 5. Around the upper parts of the right inclined wall part 2413, the second standing wall part 2415, and the left inclined wall part 2416, the front surface of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 is exposed forward, and a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in the corresponding parts. In addition, the part between the first standing wall part 2412 and the second standing wall part 2415 is located below the second large winning hole 2007 in the center role 2500. The upper end of the second standing wall part 2415 is located near the lower end of the attacca left wall part 2568 in the center role 2500 described later, and the right side of the second standing wall part 2415, that is, the inside of the partition part 2410, is a space (pseudo game area 2010) independent of the game area 5a.

When the lower right unit 2400 is assembled to the game board 5, the second starting hole 2005 is located slightly to the right of directly below the right release passage 2565 of the center device 2500, and the lower end (left end) of the inclined wall portion 2418 is located lower than the first starting hole 2004. The front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is exposed forward above the second starting hole 2005, the second sub-out hole 2022, and the inclined wall portion 2418, and a number of obstacle nails N are also planted in these areas.

Furthermore, when the lower right unit 2400 is assembled to the game board 5, the pseudo outlet 2404 is located approximately one game ball B away from the outlet 1008 to the upper right. Also, the pseudo big prize opening sensor 2403 can be seen from the front through a transparent base plate 2407, etc.

The lower right unit 2400 can guide the game ball B received in the second starting port 2005 to the rear of the game panel 1100, detect it with the second starting port sensor 2401, and then discharge it downward. Also, the lower right unit 2400 can guide the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2022 to the rear of the game panel 1100, and then discharge it downward.

The lower right unit 2400 has a pseudo large prize opening 2402 and a pseudo outlet 2404 inside the partition 2410 (pseudo game area 2010). The inside of this partition 2410 is formed so that only game balls B received in the second large prize opening 2007 can circulate.

In the normal state of the lower right unit 2400, the pseudo large prize opening door 2405 is in an upright position, and the pseudo large prize opening door 2405 closes the pseudo large prize opening 2402 so that it cannot receive the game ball B. In this state, the game ball B supplied to the inside of the partition 2410 (the pseudo game area 2010) passes in front of the pseudo large prize opening door 2405 that closes the pseudo large prize opening 2402, flows down onto the bottom wall 2411, rolls to the left along the slope of the bottom wall 2411, is prevented from rolling further to the left by the third upright wall 2419, and is received by the pseudo outlet 2404 that opens forward at that location. The game ball B received by the pseudo outlet 2404 is not returned to the game area 5a, but is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and then discharged downward.

In the lower right unit 2400, the bottom wall portion 2411 is provided close to the lower right rail 1004, and the pseudo outlet 2404 is provided close to the outlet 1008, so that the game ball B that rolls to the left on the bottom wall portion 2411 and is received by the pseudo outlet 2404 can be given the illusion to the player that it is actually rolling along the lower right rail 1004 and being received by the outlet 1008.

When the pseudo large prize opening door 2405 that closes the pseudo large prize opening 2402 is energized through the pseudo large prize opening solenoid 2406, the pseudo large prize opening door 2405 rotates around the lower edge so that the upper end moves forward, depending on the lottery results of the first special pattern and the second special pattern drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting opening 2004 or the second starting opening 2005, and protrudes forward from the base plate 2407 (game panel 1100) so that the upper end is positioned slightly higher than the lower end and the rear is lower. In this state, the pseudo large prize opening 2402 is able to receive the game ball B. When the pseudo large prize opening 2402 is in a state where it can receive the game ball B, the game ball B flows down to the front of the pseudo large prize opening 2402, where it comes into contact with the pseudo large prize opening door 2405 that protrudes forward, and is guided backward by the inclination of the pseudo large prize opening door 2405 and is received by the pseudo large prize opening 2402.

The pseudo large prize opening 2402 extends leftward to the lower portion of the right release passage 2565, which is used to release balls that are not accepted by the second large prize opening 2007 downward from the center device 2500. Therefore, when the pseudo large prize opening 2402 (pseudo large prize opening door 2405) is opening and closing, if game ball B is released downward from the right release passage 2565, the player is given the illusion that game ball B has also been accepted by the pseudo large prize opening 2402.

In addition, since it also extends leftward to the area directly below the second starting opening 2005 and the second sub-outlet 2022, when the pseudo large prize opening 2402 is opening and closing, game ball B that is not accepted by the second large prize opening 2007 but is released downward from the right release passage 2565 of the center device 2500 and accepted by the second starting opening 2005 or the second sub-outlet 2022 can be made to look as if it is being accepted by the pseudo large prize opening 2402.

The game ball B received in the pseudo large prize opening 2402 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, detected by the pseudo large prize opening sensor 2403, and then discharged downward. The pseudo large prize opening sensor 2403 can be seen by the player even through the open pseudo large prize opening 2402. Because the pseudo large prize opening sensor 2403 can be seen, the player is given the illusion that the pseudo large prize opening 2402 is a real large prize opening.

This pseudo large prize opening sensor 2403 is used to execute a predetermined effect by detecting game ball B, and to open and close the pseudo large prize opening door 2405 by counting the number of game balls B. By opening and closing the pseudo large prize opening door 2405 depending on the number of game balls B received by the pseudo large prize opening 2402, it is possible to more easily create the illusion that the pseudo large prize opening 2402 is a real large prize opening.

The lower right unit 2400 of this embodiment has a pseudo large prize opening 2402 that is wider and longer on both sides than the maximum width of 135 mm of a normally used large prize opening, giving the player the illusion that the machine is equipped with a large large prize opening never seen in any other pachinko machine before, making a strong impact on the player and making it easier for players to actively select this pachinko machine 1 as the pachinko machine to play, thereby increasing the appeal to players.

In addition, according to the lower right unit 2400, a right side wall portion 2414, a left side wall portion 2417 and an inclined wall portion 2418 are provided above the pseudo large prize opening 2402, which is larger in the left-right direction than the second large prize opening 2007, so that the game ball B is received by the pseudo large prize opening 2402 through the gap between the right side wall portion 2414 and the left side wall portion 2417 (between the right inclined wall portion 2413 and the left inclined wall portion 2416), which are spaced apart by approximately half the distance of the second large prize opening 2007 in the left-right direction. This allows multiple game balls B accepted by the second large prize opening 2007 to be concentrated in a small area and directed toward the pseudo large prize opening 2402, giving the player the illusion that a greater number of game balls B are being accepted by the pseudo large prize opening 2402 than the game balls B accepted by the second large prize opening 2007, providing great entertainment to the player and preventing a decline in interest.

[5-8e. Center role]
Next, the center gadget 2500 in the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 143 to 150. Figure 148(a) is a front view showing the right half of the front unit together with the panel board and the obstacle nails, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) seen from the front. Figure 149(a) is an exploded perspective view of the center right front plate seal and the center right front plate in Figure 148 seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the center right front plate seal and the center right front plate in Figure 148 seen from the rear. Figure 150 is an exploded perspective view of only the center right front plate in Figure 148 seen from the rear, seen from the front.

The center gadget 2500 of the front unit 2000 is located in the play area 5a, above the starting unit 2100 and slightly above the center when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front of the panel plate 1110 of the play panel 1100. The center gadget 2500 is formed in a transparent frame shape, and the performance display device 1600 provided behind the play panel 1100 and the various performance units provided in the back unit 3000 can be seen from the front.

The center device 2500, details of which will be described later, is equipped with a variable winning opening 2003 that opens and closes to accept the game ball B depending on the result of the lottery for the normal pattern drawn by the passage of the game ball B through the gate 2002, and a first large winning opening 2006 and a second large winning opening 2007 that open and close to accept the game ball B depending on the result of the lottery for the first special pattern and the result of the lottery for the second special pattern drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B through the first starting opening 2004 and the second starting opening 2005.

The frame-shaped center device 2500 has a portion (part of the peripheral wall portion 2501) that protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 all around, so that the game ball B that is shot into the game area 5a cannot enter the frame.

The center role 2500 has a frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 (also called a center frame) extending in the front-rear direction, a flat flange portion 2502 protruding from the outer periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and abutting the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and a flat support portion 2503 protruding from the inner periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501. When assembled to the game board 5, the peripheral wall portion 2501 extends rearward to a position where its rear end coincides with the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. In addition, the peripheral wall portion 2501 is formed in a shape that follows the inner periphery of the opening 1112 in the panel plate 1110 into which the center role 2500 is inserted. When assembled to the game board 5, this peripheral wall portion 2501 can prevent the game ball B from entering from the outside of the center role 2500 to the inside of the frame.

The thickness of the flange portion 2502 and the support portion 2503 is formed to be thinner than the thickness of the panel plate 1110 (1/4 to 1/5 the thickness of the panel plate 1110). The flange portion 2502 and the support portion 2503 protrude from the peripheral wall portion 2501 at the same position in the front-to-rear direction. Therefore, the distance from the rear surface of the support portion 2503 (flange portion 2502) to the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1110.

The support parts 2503 are provided partially on the inner circumference of the peripheral wall part 2501. The support parts 2503 are provided in the parts of the peripheral wall part 2501 where the flange part 2502 does not protrude, and reinforce the peripheral wall part 2501. The end edges of the support parts 2503 protruding from the peripheral wall part 2501 are formed in a shape that follows the front shape of the peripheral wall part 2501 or in a straight line, so that the support parts 2503 are not noticeable. The amount of protrusion of the support parts 2503 from the peripheral wall part 2501 is within the range from the thickness of the support parts 2503 to the thickness of the panel board 1110 (1 mm to 10 mm), so that the support parts 2503 are not noticeable to players while still providing a reinforcing effect.

The center gadget 2500 is provided with a warp entrance 2511 that is open to allow the game ball B in the game area 5a to enter, at a portion on the left side of the peripheral wall 2501 when viewed from the front and forward of the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), a warp exit 2512 that is open in the frame behind the front surface of the game panel 1100 and allows the game ball B that entered the warp entrance 2511 to be released, a stage 2513 that can release the game ball B released from the warp exit 2512 into the game area 5a after rolling it in the left-right direction, and a stage cover 2515 that is provided to cover the top of the stage 2513 (see FIG. 146, etc.). The stage cover 2515 prevents the game ball B from entering the frame of the center gadget 2500 from outside by bouncing the game ball B that bounces on the stage 2513 back toward the stage 2513.

The stage 2513 of the center role 2500 is curved with a recessed center in the left-right direction, and is formed in a wavy (W-shaped) shape such that the position corresponding to directly above the first starting hole 2004 of the starting hole unit 2100, that is, the approximate center position in the left-right direction when the center role 2500 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, is slightly higher than both the left and right sides. This stage 2513 is inclined so that the part (center release part 2513a) that is slightly higher than both the left and right sides in the left-right center and the lowest part on both the left and right sides (side release part 2513b) are lower toward the front, and the game ball B can be released into the game area 5a from these parts.

When the center device 2500 is assembled to the game board 5, the elevated portion in the center of the stage 2513 in the left-right direction (the central release section 2513a) is located directly above the first starting hole 2004 of the starting hole unit 2100. As a result, when a game ball B is released from the central release section 2513a in the center of the stage 2513, it is received by the first starting hole 2004 with an extremely high probability.

[5-8e-1. First Attacker]
The center role 2500 is provided with a first attacker section 2520 having a variable winning opening 2003 and a first large winning opening 2006 above the warp entrance 2511 on the left outer side of the frame-shaped peripheral wall section 2501. The first attacker section 2520 of the center role 2500 is provided with a variable winning opening door 2521 that closes the variable winning opening 2003 in an openable and closable manner, a variable winning opening solenoid 2522 (see FIG. 160, etc.) that is energized according to the lottery result of the normal pattern drawn by the passage of the game ball B through the gate 2002 to operate the variable winning opening door 2521, and a variable winning opening sensor 2526 that detects the game ball B received in the variable winning opening 2003.

The first attacker section 2520 also includes a first large prize opening door 2523 that closes the first large prize opening 2006 in an openable and closable manner, a first large prize opening solenoid 2524 (see FIG. 160, etc.) that is energized in response to the results of the lottery for the first special pattern or the second special pattern drawn by the reception of a game ball B into the first start opening 2004 or the second start opening 2005 to operate the first large prize opening door 2523, and a first large prize opening sensor 2525 that detects the game ball B received into the first large prize opening 2006.

Furthermore, the first attacker section 2520 is equipped with a transparent flat center left front panel 2527 located in front of the variable winning opening 2003, the first large winning opening 2006, and the left second guide passage 2532 (see Figure 137, etc.).

The center gimmick 2500 has a first attacker section 2520 above the warp entrance 2511 on the left outer side of the frame-shaped peripheral wall section 2501. The first attacker section 2520 has a variable winning opening 2003 and a first large winning opening 2006.

The variable winning opening 2003 is provided above the warp entrance 2511, and opens to the left in front of the flange portion 2502 that extends outward from the left side of the peripheral wall portion 2501, approximately near the center in the vertical direction of the center gimmick 2500. In addition, the first large winning opening 2006 opens upwards directly above the variable winning opening 2003, with a width slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B.

The variable prize opening door 2521 is supported so that its lower end can rotate around an axis extending forward and backward, and when it is in an upright position (normal position), it can close the variable prize opening 2003 so that it can receive the game ball B. When electricity is applied to the variable prize opening solenoid 2522, the variable prize opening door 2521 rotates so that its upper end moves to the left, and the variable prize opening 2003 can be placed in a position (open position) in which it can receive the game ball B. When the variable prize opening 2003 is in the open position, the upper end side of the variable prize opening door 2521 is higher than the lower end side and is inclined to be lower to the right, so that the game ball B that flows down from above and abuts against the upper surface of the variable prize opening door 2521 can be guided to the right variable prize opening 2003.

The game ball B received in the variable winning opening 2003 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and after being detected by the variable winning opening sensor 2526, it is handed over to the back ball guide unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 and discharged downward.

The first large prize opening door 2523 is a flat plate that is inclined so that it is lower to the left, and is arranged so that it can move forward and backward from the front surface of the flange portion 2502. In the normal state, the first large prize opening door 2523 protrudes forward from the flange portion 2502, making it impossible for game balls B to be received by the first large prize opening 2006. In this state, game balls B that have flowed down above the first large prize opening door 2523 are guided to the left by the inclination of the first large prize opening door 2523, and flow through the left second guide passage 2532.

When the first large prize opening solenoid 2524 is energized, the front end of the first large prize opening door 2523 retreats rearward from the front surface of the flange portion 2502, making it possible for the first large prize opening 2006 to receive a game ball B. In this state, the game ball B received by the first large prize opening 2006 flows down in front of the flange portion 2502, is detected by the first large prize opening sensor 2525 provided at a height between the first large prize opening 2006 and the variable prize opening 2003, and is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 directly above the variable prize opening 2003. The game ball B is then handed over to the rear ball guide unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000 and discharged downward.

[5-8e-2. Left guide passage group]
The center role 2500 is provided in front of the flange portion 2502 on the left outer side of the peripheral wall portion 2501, and is provided with a left guide passage group 2530 consisting of a plurality of passages (two in this case) through which the game ball B can pass. In other words, the left guide passage group 2530 consisting of a plurality of passages (two in this case) through which the game ball B can pass is provided between the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center role 2500 and the inner rail 1002. Therefore, when the game ball B is hit so that it passes through the left side of the center role 2500, the game ball B is always formed to pass through the left guide passage group 2530.

When assembled to the game board 5, the left guide passage group 2530 is located below and to the left of the upper end of the inner rail 1002, at a height of about 2/3 from the bottom of the game area 5a. The left guide passage group 2530 has a height in the vertical direction that is about three times the diameter of the game ball B. The left guide passage group 2530 is formed so that the game ball B in circulation can be seen in good condition.

The left guide passage group 2530 is composed of a left first guide passage 2531 that contacts the inner rail 1002, and a left second guide passage 2532 that is provided to the right of the left first guide passage 2531. The left first guide passage 2531 and the left second guide passage 2532 are separated by a passage wall 2533 that protrudes forward from the flange portion 2502.

The first large winning opening 2006 is provided downstream of the entrance of this left second guide passage 2532. Therefore, if you want to receive game ball B into the first large winning opening 2006, you need to perform a shooting operation so that game ball B enters the left second guide passage 2532.

[5-8e-3. Right guide passage group]
Furthermore, the center role 2500 is provided with a right guide passage group 2540, which is provided in the upper right corner and consists of a plurality of (here, two) passages through which the game ball B can flow. When assembled to the game board 5, the right end (the end of the upper right corner of the center role 2500) of the right guide passage group 2540 is approximately in contact with the inner peripheral edge of the game area 5a (the right rail 1005 near the impact stopper 1006 of the front component 1000), and the game ball B hit to the upper right side of the center role 2500 is always formed to pass through the right guide passage group 2540.

The right guide passage group 2540 has a vertical length of approximately 1/7 of the total height of the game area 5a. This right guide passage group 2540 allows the circulating game balls B to be seen in good condition.

The right guide passage group 2540 is provided on the right outer side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center role-piece 2500, and is composed of a right first guide passage 2541 that is separated from the peripheral wall portion 2501, and a right second guide passage 2542 that is provided to the right of the right first guide passage 2541. The entrances of the right first guide passage 2541 and the right second guide passage 2542 are separated from each other on the left and right.

The right first guide passage 2541 extends rearward from the front of the gaming panel 1100 at a location directly below the entrance, then extends downward, and then extends forward from the front of the gaming panel 1100 at a position to the left of directly below the entrance, with its exit opening diagonally to the lower right. The right second guide passage 2542 extends downward from the entrance, then bends to the right, and its exit opens diagonally to the lower right, lined up to the right of the exit of the right first guide passage 2541. In other words, the right first guide passage 2541 and the right second guide passage 2542 are twisted so that the left and right cross.

The right guide passage group 2540 is located above the space forming portion 2550 (specific obstacle nail group 2700) when the center device 2500 is assembled to the game board 5. The right end of the entrance of the right first guide passage 2541 is located directly below the lower end of the impact stopper 1006 of the front component 1000, and is formed so that most of the game balls B that come into contact with the impact stopper 1006 enter the right first guide passage 2541.

The game ball B that enters the right first guide passage 2541 is released to the side closer to the right peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center role 2500, and enters the first guide area 2711 of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 described later. On the other hand, the game ball B that enters the right second guide passage 2542 is released to the side closer to the right rail 1005, and enters the second guide area 2712 of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 described later. As will be described in detail later, the game ball B that enters the second guide area 2712 is more likely to be accepted by the first sub-outlet 2021 provided downstream, so when the game ball B enters the right second guide passage 2542, it is more likely to be accepted by the first sub-outlet 2021 than when it enters the right first guide passage 2541.

The right guide passage group 2540 is provided with a flow detection sensor 2543 capable of detecting game balls B flowing through the right first guide passage 2541 (see FIG. 144). As a result, for example, in a game situation in which the player is to "hit to the right," when the number of game balls B detected by the flow detection sensor 2543 per hour is equal to or less than a predetermined number, it is possible to encourage the player to "hit to the right" in order to make the game situation more enjoyable, or to instruct the player to hit with a strength that prevents the ball from entering the right second guide passage 2542 and being received by the first sub-outlet 2021.

[5-8e-4. Space forming part]
The center role 2500 includes a space forming section 2550 provided below the right guide passage group 2540, and a second attacker section 2560 provided below the space forming section 2550 (see FIG. 147, etc.). The space forming portion 2550 is provided between the peripheral wall portion 2501 and the right rail 1005, and is formed at a height of about half the total height of the play area 5a. The second attacker portion 2560 is It has a second large prize opening 2007 and a first sub-out opening 2021, and is located in the lower right corner of the center gimmick 2500.

In the space forming portion 2550, a flange portion 2502 extending to the right from the peripheral wall portion 2501 extends to a position close to the right rail 1005 when assembled to the game board 5. The space forming portion 2550 of the center role 2500 has a right wall portion 2551 protruding forward from the right side of the flange portion 2502, a guide wall portion 2552 protruding forward from the flange portion 2502 and extending downward and to the right from a lower portion of the space forming portion 2550 in the peripheral wall portion 2501, and an opening portion 2553 penetrating the flange portion 2502 from front to rear in a portion between the right wall portion 2551 and the peripheral wall portion 2501 and the guide wall portion 2552.

The right wall portion 2551 extends along the right rail 1005 so as to form a small gap between the right rail 1005 when assembled to the game board 5. The right wall portion 2551 also has a notch 2551a near the top that penetrates from left to right. The guide wall portion 2552 is provided so that a gap of approximately three times the diameter of the game ball B is formed in the left-right direction between the bottom end (right end) and the right wall portion 2551.

The opening 2553 extends vertically over almost the entire height of the space forming portion 2550. The side of this opening 2553 closer to the peripheral wall portion 2501 and the guide wall portion 2552 is a constant distance from the peripheral wall portion 2501, and the side closer to the right wall portion 2551 moves further away from the right wall portion 2551 as it extends downward. In other words, in the space forming portion 2550, the side closer to the peripheral wall portion 2501 and the guide wall portion 2552 of the flange portion 2502 extends vertically to the right from the peripheral wall portion 2501 and the guide wall portion 2552 with a constant width, and the side closer to the right wall portion 2551 of the flange portion 2502 extends vertically so that it becomes wider to the left as it extends downward.

When assembled into the game board 5, some of the multiple obstacle nails N planted on the front of the game panel 1100 are inserted from the rear into the opening 2553. The multiple obstacle nails N inserted into the opening 2553 are a specific obstacle nail group 2700 planted in a specific gauge arrangement, as will be described in detail later. In other words, the space forming portion 2550 of the center gimmick 2500 forms the space in which the specific obstacle nail group 2700 is arranged.

The space forming portion 2550 also has a number of rear ridges 2554 that bulge forward from the flange portion 2502 and extend left and right, and are spaced apart in the front-to-rear direction. The rear ridges 2554 are arranged in a staggered manner in the front-to-rear direction at positions corresponding to the multiple front ridges 2555d of the center right front plate 2555 described below. This allows the game ball B flowing down in front of the flange portion 2502 in the space forming portion 2550 to flow down in a meandering manner in the front-to-rear direction by the front ridges 2555d and the rear ridges 2554.

Furthermore, the space forming portion 2550 has a transparent flat center right front plate 2555 that covers the area from the front end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 to the front end of the right wall portion 2551, and a light-transmitting center right front plate seal 2556 that is affixed to the front surface of the center right front plate 2555 (see FIG. 149, etc.). The center right front plate 2555 extends upward to the upper end of the right guide passage group 2540, and closes the front side of the right guide passage group 2540.

The center right front panel 2555 has a plurality of first storage sections 2555a that penetrate from front to back and each of which accommodates the heads of a plurality of obstacle nails N (set nail sections 2701), a second storage section 2555b that penetrates from front to back and accommodates the head of one obstacle nail N, a peeling hole 2555c that penetrates from front to back at the location where the center right front panel seal 2556 is attached, and a plurality of protrusions 2555d that bulge rearward from the rear surface and extend left and right and are spaced apart in the front to back direction. The center right front panel 2555 is attached so that it cannot be removed from the center role 2500 unless the center role 2500 is removed from the game panel 1100.

The first storage section 2555a is provided in the shape of an elongated hole that surrounds and contacts the heads of the multiple obstruction nails N (set nail section 2701) that it contains, forming a certain gap with respect to the circumferential line. In this embodiment, one first storage section 2555a is formed to a size that can accommodate the heads of two obstruction nails N, and the center of the first storage section 2555a is different (eccentric) from the center of the obstruction nail N. The second storage section 2555b is formed concentrically with the obstruction nail N. These first storage section 2555a and second storage section 2555b are provided in positions that correspond to the obstruction nails N of the specific obstruction nail group 2700 described later.

The gap between the front end (head) of the obstacle nail N in the first storage section 2555a and the second storage section 2555b is preferably in the range of 1 mm to 3 mm, and more preferably in the range of 1.5 mm to 2.5 mm. If the gap is smaller than this range, the obstacle nail N may be affected and bent when the center right front panel 2555 expands or contracts due to environmental changes, and it may be difficult to accommodate the front end of the obstacle nail N in the first storage section 2555a and the second storage section 2555b when assembling the game board 5, which may increase costs due to the labor involved. In addition, if the gap is larger than this range, the degree of bending of the obstacle nail N when it is bent due to the impact of the game ball B hitting it, etc., may exceed the allowable range, making it difficult to circulate the game ball B in the intended flow.

This makes it possible to restrict the movement of the heads of the obstacle nails N stored in the first storage section 2555a and the second storage section 2555b, thereby preventing the obstacle nails N from being deformed (bent) due to impacts caused by the flow (contact) of the game balls B or some other external impact, and reduces the unintended flow of the game balls B. It also allows the game balls B to flow in a stable state in the specific obstacle nail group 2700, making it possible to continuously exert the effect of the specific obstacle nail group 2700, and allowing the player to enjoy the movement of the game balls B in the specific obstacle nail group 2700 and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, as described above, the first storage section 2555a and the second storage section 2555b of the center right front panel 2555 can suppress deformation of the obstructing nails N, thereby reducing the effort required for the amusement hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed to maintain the obstructing nails N.

In addition, when assembled to the game board 5, the front of the first storage section 2555a and the second storage section 2555b are closed by the center right front panel seal 2556 attached to the front surface of the center right front panel 2555, so that the obstacle nails N whose heads are stored in the first storage section 2555a or the second storage section 2555b cannot be touched from the front. This makes it possible to prevent the obstacle nails N from being bent by a tool or the like during maintenance, or from being intentionally bent. In addition, if the obstacle nails N whose heads are stored in the first storage section 2555a or the second storage section 2555b are bent through the center right front panel seal 2556, the traces remain on the center right front panel seal 2556, making it easier to notice defects in the obstacle nails N.

When the center right front plate seal 2556 is attached to the front surface of the center right front plate 2555, a rod-shaped member such as a wire can be inserted from the rear side into the peeling hole 2555c, and the rod-shaped member can be used to press the center right front plate seal 2556 forward from the rear, thereby causing a part of the center right front plate seal 2556 to be rolled up forward from the center right front plate 2555. Then, by an operator pulling the rolled-up part of the center right front plate seal 2556, the center right front plate seal 2556 can be easily removed (peeled off) from the center right front plate 2555. This improves the ease of work, such as re-attaching the center right front plate seal 2556 during manufacturing and sorting work at the time of disposal.

This peeling hole 2555c is provided in front of the triangular area surrounded by the game panel 1100, the peripheral wall portion 2501, the guide wall portion 2552, and the closing wall portion 2566 when assembled into the game board 5, so that it is possible to prevent a linear illegal tool such as a piano wire from being inserted through the peeling hole 2555c into the rear side of the game panel 1100 or the area where the game ball B is circulated, thereby preventing illegal acts.

In addition, the peel-off hole 2555c is hidden from the front by attaching the center right front plate sticker 2556 to the front surface of the center right front plate 2555, which prevents the peel-off hole 2555c from spoiling the appearance and makes it difficult for players to notice the existence of the peel-off hole 2555c, making it difficult for players to plan fraudulent acts using the peel-off hole 2555c.

The multiple front ridges 2555d are provided at positions corresponding to the multiple rear ridges 2554 bulging out from the flange portion 2502. These front ridges 2555d are provided so that they are staggered vertically relative to the rear ridges 2554. This allows the game ball B flowing down in front of the flange portion 2502 in the space forming portion 2550 to flow down in a meandering manner in the front-to-back direction by the front ridges 2555d and rear ridges 2554.

[5-8e-5. Second Attacker Section]
The second attacker section 2560 of the center role 2500 has a second large winning opening 2007 that is long in the left-right direction and opens upward, and a first sub-out opening 2021 provided on the right side of the second large winning opening 2007. The right end of the second large winning opening 2007 is located at a position slightly less than twice the diameter of the game ball B to the right from the right end (lower end) of the guide wall section 2552, and the left end is located at a position about 1/3 from the right of the total width in the game area 5a. The second large winning opening 2007 is provided at a position higher than the upper end of the stage cover 2515. The right wall of the first sub-out opening 2021 is continuous with the right wall section 2551 of the space forming section 2550.

The second attacker section 2560 also has a second large prize opening sensor 2561 that detects the game ball B received in the second large prize opening 2007, a flat second large prize opening door 2562 that can open and close the second large prize opening 2007 by moving back and forth, and is inclined so as to be lower to the left, and a second large prize opening solenoid 2563 that is energized according to the lottery results of the first special pattern and the second special pattern drawn by the reception of the game ball B in the first starting opening 2004 or the second starting opening 2005, to open and close the second large prize opening door 2562.

The second attacca section 2560 also has an attacca passage 2564 that is located above the second large winning opening door 2562 in front of the flange section 2502 and allows game balls B to flow to the left, a right release passage 2565 that extends downward from the left end of the attacca passage 2564 to the left of the second large winning opening 2007 and allows game balls B to be released downward, and a closing wall section 2566 that protrudes forward from the flange section 2502, forms part of the ceiling wall of the attacca passage 2564, and extends leftward from the lower end of the guide wall section 2552 to the peripheral wall section 2501.

The attacca passage 2564 extends downward to the left at a height slightly greater than the diameter of the game ball B, with the ceiling wall being composed of a part of the peripheral wall 2501 and the closing wall 2566, and the floor wall being composed of the second large prize winning gate 2562. In this attacca passage 2564, a plurality of rear protrusions 2564a are provided at the attacca passage 2564 portion of the flange 2502, which protrude forward and extend vertically, and are spaced apart in the left-right direction, and a plurality of front protrusions (not shown) are provided at the attacca passage 2564 portion of the center lower right front panel 2572, which will be described later, which protrude backward and extend vertically, and are spaced apart in the left-right direction so as to alternate with the rear protrusions 2564a. The multiple front and rear ridges 2564a allow the game ball B to flow leftward in the attacca passage 2564 while meandering back and forth, and the flow speed can be suppressed.

The right release passage 2565 extends vertically downward with a left-right width slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball B. The outlet of the right release passage 2565 is provided at a height between the stage 2513 and the upper end of the stage cover 2515. The right release passage 2565 has a right wall formed by the attacca left wall portion 2568, and a left wall formed by a part of the peripheral wall portion 2501.

Furthermore, the second attacca section 2560 has an attacca right wall section 2567 that protrudes forward from the flange section 2502 to the right of the second large prize opening door 2562, extends downward from a position higher than the right end of the second large prize opening door 2562 and slightly lower than the right end of the closing wall section 2566, an attacca left wall section 2568 that protrudes forward from the flange section 2502 to the left of the second large prize opening door 2562 and extends downward from a position lower than the left end of the second large prize opening door 2562, a right shelf section 2569 that extends lower to the left from the bottom end of the attacca right wall section 2567, a left shelf section 2570 that extends lower to the right from near the top end of the attacca left wall section 2568 to form a gap in the left-right direction between the right shelf section 2569, and a middle wall section 2571 that is provided in the center between the left shelf section 2570 and the right shelf section 2569.

The second large prize opening 2007 is defined in the left-right direction by the attacca right wall portion 2567 and the attacca left wall portion 2568. In other words, the left-right width between the attacca right wall portion 2567 and the attacca left wall portion 2568 is the left-right width of the second large prize opening 2007. Incidentally, in this embodiment, the left-right width of the second large prize opening 2007 is 131 mm.

The attacca left wall 2568 extends downwards beyond the lower end of the attacca right wall 2567, and its lower end is bent slightly to the right. When assembled to the game board 5, the upper end of the second standing wall 2415 of the lower right unit 2400 is close to the lower end of the attacca left wall 2568, making it impossible for the game ball B to pass between the left and right sides. The lower ends of the right shelf 2569 and the left shelf 2570 are located above the lower end of the attacca left wall 2568. Between the lower end of the right shelf 2569 and the middle wall 2571, and between the lower end of the left shelf 2570 and the middle wall 2571, second large winning hole sensors 2561 are provided, respectively. When assembled to the game board 5, the middle wall 2571 is located directly above the lower right middle decorative part 2433 of the lower right unit 2400.

The second attacca section 2560 further has a transparent flat center lower right front panel 2572 that closes the front of the space formed by the attacca passage 2564, the right discharge passage 2565, and the attacca right wall section 2567, the attacca left wall section 2568, the right shelf section 2569, and the left shelf section 2570 (see FIG. 137, etc.).

In the normal state of the second attacker section 2560, the front end of the second large prize opening door 2562 protrudes forward beyond the front surface of the flange section 2502, closing the second large prize opening 2007 so that it cannot receive game balls B. The second large prize opening door 2562, which closes the second large prize opening 2007 so that it can be opened and closed, is formed as a flat plate extending left and right and front and rear, making it difficult to see when viewed from the front and difficult to tell whether it is open or closed.

In this normal state, game ball B that is hit into the right side of the center device 2500 and flows down the right guide passage group 2540 and the space forming portion 2550 (specific obstacle nail group 2700) flows down between the guide wall portion 2552 and the right wall portion 2551 to the second attacker portion 2560 side. At this time, game ball B that flows down along the right wall portion 2551 is received by the first sub-outlet 2021 with a high probability. Game ball B received by the first sub-outlet 2021 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and handed over to the back ball guide unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and then discharged downward.

If a game ball B is not accepted by the first sub-outlet 2021 and flows down onto the second large prize opening door 2562, it will roll to the left inside the attacca passage 2564 while snaking back and forth along the multiple front and rear protrusions 2564a, and then enter the right release passage 2565 from the left end of the second large prize opening door 2562, and will be returned to the game area 5a from the bottom end (exit) of the right release passage 2565.

When assembled to the game board 5, the second attacca section 2560 of the center device 2500 is located directly above the lower right unit 2400, and the upper end of the second standing wall section 2415 of the lower right unit 2400 is close to the lower end of the attacca left wall section 2568, which constitutes the right wall of the right release passage 2565. This prevents the game ball B from passing between the right release passage 2565 and the right side of the second standing wall section 2415. In other words, an area (pseudo game area 2010) that cannot be entered from the right release passage 2565 or game area 5a is formed to the right of the second standing wall section 2415.

In other words, a pseudo-game area 2010 is formed, which is partitioned by the front surface of the game panel 1100, the partition 2410 of the lower right unit 2400, and the attacca left wall portion 2568, the right shelf portion 2569, and the left shelf portion 2570 of the second attacca portion 2560. Only game balls B received in the second large winning opening 2007 can circulate in this pseudo-game area 2010.

When the second large prize opening solenoid 2563 is energized in response to the lottery results of the first special symbol or the second special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first start opening 2004 or the second start opening 2005, the second large prize opening door 2562 moves back and the second large prize opening 2007 becomes able to receive the game ball B. At this time, the game ball B circulating through the attacca passage 2564 and the game ball B that has flowed down from the space forming portion 2550 to the second large prize opening 2007 are received by the second large prize opening 2007.

The game ball B received by the second large prize opening 2007 rolls on the right shelf section 2569 or the left shelf section 2570, and is then detected by the second large prize opening sensor 2561 and released into the pseudo game area 2010 below. In this second attacker section 2560, two second large prize opening sensors 2561 are arranged on the left and right, so that even if many game balls B are received by the second large prize opening 2007 in a short period of time, they can be detected without any delay.

According to the center gadget 2500 of this embodiment, the center right front plate 2555 is provided with a first storage section 2555a that stores the heads of the multiple obstacle nails N of each set nail section 2701 that constitutes the specific obstacle nail group 2700, so that the heads of the obstacle nails N can be restricted from moving, and the obstacle nails N can be prevented from being deformed (bent) due to the impact of the flow (contact) of the game ball B or some external impact. This reduces the flow of the game ball B down in an unintended flow, allows the game ball B to flow in a stable state in the specific obstacle nail group 2700, and allows the action and effect of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 to be continuously exerted, and allows the player to enjoy the movement of the game ball B in the specific obstacle nail group 2700 and prevents a decline in interest.

In addition, according to the center role 2500, the second large prize opening door 2562, which closes the second large prize opening 2007 so that it can be opened and closed, is a flat plate extending in the left-right direction and the front-back direction, and the second large prize opening door 2562 is moved forward and backward to open and close the second large prize opening 2007. Therefore, when viewed from the front, the second large prize opening door 2562 can be made difficult to see, and the existence of the second large prize opening 2007 can be made difficult to notice. This makes it possible to make the pseudo large prize opening 2402 (pseudo large prize opening door 2405) provided below the second large prize opening 2007 relatively conspicuous, so that the interest of the player can be strongly attracted to the pseudo large prize opening 2402, and a strong illusion can be created that the pseudo large prize opening 2402 is a real large prize opening. Therefore, the machine gives the player the illusion that it has a large winning hole that has never been seen in a pachinko machine before, which can have a strong impact on the player, and it can also make it easier for players to actively choose this pachinko machine 1 as the pachinko machine to play, thereby increasing its appeal to players.

Furthermore, according to the center role 2500, the support portion 2503 protruding inward is provided in a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the flange portion 2502 is not provided, so that the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be reinforced. This makes it possible to prevent the peripheral wall portion 2501 from being deformed or damaged even if the game ball B abuts against the outside of the portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the support portion 2503 is provided. In addition, because the support portion 2503 can increase the strength of the center role 2500, the center role 2500 can be removed from the injection molding die without being deformed.

In addition, the transparent support portion 2503 protrudes slightly from the inner circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and is partially provided around the entire circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501, so that the support portion 2503 can reduce interference with the visibility of the decorative body of the rear unit 3000 provided at the rear and the performance image of the performance display device 1600, etc.

Furthermore, by providing the support portion 2503, there is a portion where the flange portion 2502 protruding outward from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is not provided, so that in the portion of the gaming panel 1100 (panel board 1110) close to the support portion 2503, the obstacle nails N can be planted as close as possible to the peripheral wall portion 2501. This allows the playing area with multiple obstacle nails N within the playing area 5a to be as wide as possible, resulting in a pachinko machine 1 that allows players to enjoy playing as they intended.

In addition, the peripheral wall portion 2501 has a shape similar to the inner peripheral shape of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110, the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is on the same plane as the rear surface of the panel plate 1110, and the support portion 2503 is provided on approximately the same plane as the front surface of the panel plate 1110. This makes the support portion 2503 less noticeable to the player, and makes it appear as if the center gimmick 2500 is integrated with the panel plate 1110.

Furthermore, since the support portion 2503 is provided on a part of the circumference of the center role device 2500, the inside of the frame of the center role device 2500 can be made wider than when the support portion 2503 is provided around the entire circumference, and the display screen of the performance display device 1600 provided at the rear can be made easier to see. In other words, if it is desired to make the non-circulating area (inside the frame) partitioned by the peripheral wall portion 2501 (center frame) of the center role device 2500 look larger, the support portion 2503 may be provided on a part of the circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501. Alternatively, it is preferable that the support portion 2503 extends to an extent that it does not overlap with the display screen of the performance display device 1600 provided at the rear when viewed from the front.

[5-8f. Gate member]
Next, the gate member 2600 in the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 143 and 144. The gate member 2600 of the front unit 2000 is disposed on the left side of the center role 2500 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. More specifically, the gate member 2600 is disposed slightly below the center of the game area 5a in the vertical direction, and below the variable winning hole 2003 of the center role 2500. The exit of the left guide passage group 2530 of the center role 2500 is disposed directly above the gate member 2600. In addition, the warp entrance 2511 of the center role 2500 opens toward the left at the lower right of the gate member 2600.

The gate member 2600 has a gate 2002 through which a lottery for a normal symbol is performed to open and close a variable winning opening 2003 when a game ball B passes through, and a gate sensor 2601 for detecting that the game ball B has passed through the gate 2002. In this embodiment, the detection hole for detecting the game ball B in the gate sensor 2601 is the gate 2002.

[5-8g. Specific obstacle nail group]
Next, the specific obstacle nail group 2700 among the multiple obstacle nails N planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 145 and 147. The specific obstacle nail group 2700 is provided on the right side of the game area 5a, upstream of the second large winning hole 2007. The specific obstacle nail group 2700 of this embodiment is provided in the space formed by the space forming portion 2550 of the center role 2500.

The specific obstacle nail group 2700 has a plurality of nail groups 2701 each consisting of a plurality of obstacle nails N arranged adjacent to each other, and the nail groups 2701 are arranged at intervals that allow a single game ball B to pass through. In this embodiment, the nail group 2701 is composed of two obstacle nails N.

The specific obstacle nail group 2700 is arranged so that the areas (gaps) between the multiple nail groups 2701 that are spaced apart are arranged in a predetermined pattern, making it possible to guide the game ball B by the multiple nail groups 2701. As a result, the specific obstacle nail group 2700 forms a guidance area 2710 that can guide the game ball B from a specific position to a desired position with a predetermined probability.

The guidance area 2710 formed by the specific obstacle nail group 2700 can guide the game ball B to a desired position with a predetermined probability. The guidance area 2710 is composed of a first guidance area 2711 and a second guidance area 2712 provided to the right of the first guidance area 2711. The first guidance area 2711 is capable of guiding the game ball B from the exit of the right first guide passage 2541 in the right guide passage group 2540 to a position from the center of the guide wall portion 2552 to the left side. The second guidance area 2712 is capable of guiding the game ball B from the exit of the right second guide passage 2542 in the right guide passage group 2540 to a position from the center of the guide wall portion 2552 to the right side.

The first induction area 2711 and the second induction area 2712 formed by the specific obstacle nail group 2700 are arranged in an arc shape with the center in the vertical direction bulging to the right. In detail, in the first induction area 2711 and the second induction area 2712, in the multiple nails 2701 forming the outside of the arc, the multiple nails 2701 forming the inside of the arc are arranged so that the arc is tangent to the straight line connecting the nails 2701 near the upper end and the lower end. In other words, the first induction area 2711 and the second induction area 2712 are formed so that the width in the left-right direction is the distance of two game balls B. Since the first induction area 2711 and the second induction area 2712 extend in an arc shape, the vertically extending portion is reduced, making it easier to make the game ball B meander in the left-right direction.

In addition, the multiple nail sections 2701 that form the first guiding area 2711 and the second guiding area 2712 are arranged so that the nail section 2701 located below between two nail sections 2701 spaced apart from each other on the left and right is located to the right (farther from the center of the arc) of the center between the two upper nail sections 2701. This makes it difficult for the game ball B to move outward from each of the first guiding area 2711 and the second guiding area 2712.

Furthermore, the multiple nails 2701 forming the first guiding area 2711 and the second guiding area 2712 are arranged so that the gaps between the multiple nails 2701 arranged in an arc shape are positioned higher toward the right row. In other words, among the multiple nails 2701 forming the walls on both the left and right sides of the first guiding area 2711 and the second guiding area 2712, the right nails 2701 in a pair in the left-right direction are arranged so that the right nails 2701 are higher. This makes it easier to make the game ball B meander left and right.

The guidance area 2710 by the specific obstacle nail group 2700 can guide the game ball B downward in a zigzag manner in the left-right direction by using multiple set nails 2701 arranged at intervals. This can suppress and slow down the flow speed of the game ball B compared to an area where obstacle nails N are planted in a general arrangement, and can delay the flow time (arrival time) of the game ball B to a specified position. In addition, by forming two obstacle nails N into a set in the set nail section 2701, the number of collisions between the obstacle nails N and the game ball B can be increased compared to a configuration with only one obstacle nail N, and the effect of delaying the fall of the game ball B is increased.

In the guidance area 2710, the multiple nails 2701 are spaced apart in the vertical direction, so that the guided game ball B may move to the left or right outside through the space. In other words, the game ball B may move from the first guidance area 2711 to the second guidance area 2712, from the second guidance area 2712 to the first guidance area 2711, from the first guidance area 2711 to the left outside, or from the second guidance area 2712 to the right outside.

The game ball B guided to the bottom end by the first guide area 2711 and the second guide area 2712 comes into contact with the guide wall 2552 and flows down between the guide wall 2552 and the attacca right wall 2567 (above the second large prize opening door 2562 or inside the second large prize opening 2007).

The game ball B that moves from the first guiding area 2711 to the left outside flows down between the specific obstacle nail group 2700 and the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center role 2500 while meandering in the front-to-back direction due to the multiple rear ridges 2554 provided on the flange portion 2502 and the multiple front ridges 2555d provided on the center right front plate 2555. Then, it abuts against the guiding wall portion 2552 and flows down between the guiding wall portion 2552 and the attacca right wall portion 2567 (above the second large prize opening door 2562 or inside the second large prize opening 2007).

The game ball B that moves from the second guiding area 2712 to the right outside will flow down between the specific obstacle nail group 2700 and the right wall portion 2551, meandering in the front-to-back direction due to the multiple rear ridges 2554 provided on the flange portion 2502 and the multiple front ridges 2555d provided on the center right front plate 2555. It will then flow down to the first sub-outlet 2021, or between the guiding wall portion 2552 and the attacca right wall portion 2567 (above the second large prize opening door 2562 or inside the second large prize opening 2007).

As a result, when the game ball B enters the right second guide passage 2542 in the right guide passage group 2540, it will flow through the second guide area 2712, and when the game ball B moves from the second guide area 2712 to the right outside, it may be accepted by the first sub-outlet 2021. In other words, in this embodiment, in the right guide passage group 2540, the right second guide passage 2542 has a higher probability of accepting the game ball B into the first sub-outlet 2021 than the right first guide passage 2541. Therefore, the player can perform a hitting operation such that the game ball B enters the right first guide passage 2541. In other words, when "hitting to the right", hitting the ball more strongly makes it easier for the game ball B to enter the right first guide passage 2541 close to the impact stopper 1006, so there is no need to hit the game ball B with fine adjustments, and the hitting operation can be performed easily.

Incidentally, in the specific obstacle nail group 2700, if the set nail section is made up of only one obstacle nail N, the other obstacle nail N that is paired with the obstacle nail N to form a gap through which the game ball B can pass will be the obstacle nail N in all directions that form gaps with the obstacle nail N as the center. In other words, one obstacle nail N will be responsible for forming gaps in all directions. As a result, if the obstacle nail N bends, the gap will widen in one direction and narrow in the opposite direction, so that the deformation of one obstacle nail N will greatly change the probability of guiding the game ball B through the guiding area 2710, making it difficult to circulate the game ball B in a stable state. In addition, when the obstacle nail N bends, it will be necessary to adjust the obstacle nail N provided in all directions so that the gaps are the desired distance, which will require a lot of maintenance work.

In contrast, when the set nail section 2701 is made up of multiple obstacle nails N as in this embodiment, the adjacent obstacle nails N are responsible for forming gaps in the direction of a certain obstacle nail N in the set nail section 2701, so that the direction in which a certain (one) obstacle nail N is responsible for forming a gap can be limited to only some directions, and the number of obstacle nails N that are paired to form a gap can be reduced. As a result, even if one obstacle nail N of the set nail section 2701 is bent, the affected gap area is small, so that the change in the guiding probability of the game ball B by the guiding area 2710 can be suppressed. In addition, when a certain obstacle nail N is bent, it is only necessary to adjust the gap with the obstacle nail N in some directions to the desired distance, and the maintenance effort can be reduced compared to the case of adjusting the gap in all directions.

When the specific obstacle nail group 2700 of this embodiment is assembled to the game board 5, the heads of the obstacle nails N are inserted and accommodated in the first accommodation section 2555a and the second accommodation section 2555b of the center right front panel 2555. The set nail section 2701, which is made up of multiple obstacle nails N, is accommodated in the first accommodation section 2555a so that the heads of the obstacle nails are surrounded.

As a result, in the specific obstacle nail group 2700, the obstacle nail N is stored in the first storage section 2555a or the second storage section 2555b of the center right front board 2555, which makes it possible to restrict the movement of the head of the obstacle nail N. This makes it possible to prevent the obstacle nail N from being deformed (bent) due to impact from the flow (contact) of the game ball B or some kind of external impact, and reduces the game ball B from flowing down in an unintended flow. It also makes it possible to circulate the game ball B in the specific obstacle nail group 2700 in a stable state, allowing the action and effect of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 to be continuously exerted, and the movement of the game ball B in the specific obstacle nail group 2700 can be enjoyed, preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, as described above, in the specific obstacle nail group 2700, the heads of the obstacle nails N are accommodated in the first storage section 2555a and the second storage section 2555b of the center right front panel 2555, which suppresses deformation of the obstacle nails N, thereby reducing the effort required for maintenance of the obstacle nails N by the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

In addition, in the specific obstacle nail group 2700, the first storage section 2555a and the second storage section 2555b that store the heads of the obstacle nails N are closed by the center right front plate seal 2556 attached to the front surface of the center right front plate 2555, so the obstacle nails N cannot be touched from the front. This makes it possible to prevent the obstacle nails N from being bent by a tool or the like during maintenance, or from being intentionally bent. In addition, if an obstacle nail N in the specific obstacle nail group 2700 is bent from the front, a trace of this remains on the center right front plate seal 2556, making it easier to notice any defects in the obstacle nails N.

The specific obstacle nail group 2700 also has the function of distributing the incoming game balls B to either the first sub-out port 2021 or the second large winning port 2007. This function is important as it affects the payout rate. In game halls, any nail adjustment is prohibited. Therefore, in the specific obstacle nail group 2700 of this embodiment, as described above, the center right front plate 2555 cannot be removed unless the center gimmick 2500 is removed from the game panel 1100, and the front side of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 is covered by the center right front plate 2555 and the center right front plate seal 2556, so that no nail adjustment can be made.

In the above embodiment, the multiple nail groups 2701 forming the specific nail group 2700 are shown to be composed of two nails N, but this is not limited to this and may be composed of three or more nails N. When the nail group 2701 is composed of three or more nails N, the multiple nails N may be arranged in a line or in a polygonal shape such as a triangle, square, pentagon, or hexagon.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the guiding area 2710 by the specific obstacle nail group 2700 is shown to be composed of two areas, the first guiding area 2711 and the second guiding area 2712, but this is not limited to this and it may be composed of one area or three or more areas.

According to the specific obstacle nail group 2700 of this embodiment, the flow speed of the game ball B can be suppressed and delayed, so that, for example, in the second attacker section 2560 provided downstream, the second large winning opening 2007 is opened and closed in a short time so that the game ball B can be received according to the lottery result of the first special pattern or the lottery result of the second special pattern (for example, "small win"), even if the player tries to hit the game ball B so that it reaches the second large winning opening 2007 at the timing when it can be received, the specific obstacle nail group 2700 makes it difficult for the game ball B to reach the second large winning opening 2007 at the desired timing, making it difficult to find the timing to hit the game ball B. This makes it possible to impart a level of difficulty to the operation of hitting the game ball B, which can arouse the player's sense of fulfillment in the game and make him enjoy it, thereby suppressing a decline in interest. In addition, in the above case, it is possible to make it difficult for the second large winning opening 2007 to receive game ball B, thereby suppressing an increase in the burden on the gaming hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

In addition, according to the specific obstacle nail group 2700, the circulation speed of the game ball B is suppressed by planting multiple obstacle nails N, so the cost of the configuration can be reduced compared to when it is constructed from synthetic resin components, and the increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

[5-8h. Pseudo-game area]
Next, the pseudo game area 2010 formed in front of the game panel 1100 by the front unit 2000 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 147 etc. The pseudo game area 2010 is independent of the game area 5a. This is an area where only a specific game ball B can be distributed. In detail, only the game ball B received by the second large winning port 2007 (a so-called dead ball that no longer affects the game) can be distributed. The pseudo game area 2010 is provided on the same plane as the game area 5a.

The pseudo game area 2010 has an exposed portion of the front of the flat game panel 1100 with the game area 5a in front, a plurality of obstacle nails N planted in the exposed portion of the game panel 1100, a pseudo large prize opening 2402 that can be opened and closed depending on the lottery result of the first special pattern and the second special pattern drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first start opening 2004 and the second start opening 2005, and a pseudo outlet 2404 that discharges the game ball B that is not received into the pseudo large prize opening 2402 to the rear of the game panel 1100. In other words, the pseudo game area 2010 has a plurality of obstacle nails N, the pseudo large prize opening 2402 as an entrance that can receive the game ball B, and the pseudo outlet 2404 that discharges the game ball B, and has a configuration similar to that in the game area 5a.

The pseudo-play area 2010 is formed by the game panel 1100, the partition 2410 of the lower right unit 2400, and the second attacka section 2560 of the center gadget 2500. The pseudo-play area 2010 is partitioned at the top by the right shelf 2569, left shelf 2570, and middle wall 2571 of the second attacka section 2560. The pseudo-play area 2010 is partitioned at the right end by the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000 and the first standing wall 2412 of the partition 2410. The pseudo-play area 2010 is partitioned at the left end by the attacka left wall 2568 of the second attacka section 2560, the second standing wall 2415 of the partition 2410, the left side wall 2417, the inclined wall 2418, and the third standing wall 2419. The pseudo play area 2010 is separated at its lower end by the bottom wall portion 2411 of the separating portion 2410.

The pseudo game area 2010 is between the second attacker section 2560 and the pseudo big prize opening 2402, with the front of the game panel 1100 exposed forward, and multiple obstacle nails N are planted in that area.

The second large prize opening 2007, which is a supply source of game balls B to the pseudo game area 2010, is opened and closed by a second large prize opening door 2562. This second large prize opening door 2562 is formed in a flat plate shape that moves back and forth in the front and back directions, so that the second large prize opening door 2562 is difficult to see from the player's side. The pseudo game area 2010 is provided on the same plane as the game area 5a, and the parts that separate it from the game area 5a (such as the partition part 2410 and the left wall part 2568 of the attacca of the center role 2500) are formed transparent, and multiple obstacle nails N are planted in the exposed parts of the game panel 1100, so that the player can have the illusion that the pseudo game area 2010 is part of the game area 5a.

The pseudo large prize opening 2402 provided in the pseudo play area 2010 is longer in the left-right direction than the second large prize opening 2007 provided above. In this embodiment, the second large prize opening 2007 has a left-right size of 131 mm, and the pseudo large prize opening 2402 has a left-right size of 170 mm. This pseudo large prize opening 2402 opens forward, so the pseudo large prize opening door 2405 that allows the pseudo large prize opening 2402 to be opened and closed faces forward when the pseudo large prize opening 2402 is closed (normal state), making the pseudo large prize opening door 2405 noticeable to players.

For this reason, when a player looks at this pachinko machine 1, the pseudo large prize opening 2402 stands out more than the second large prize opening 2007, giving the player the impression that the machine is equipped with a larger prize opening than any other pachinko machine has ever seen, strongly catching the player's attention.

In the pseudo game area 2010 of this embodiment, in the normal state, the pseudo large prize opening door 2405 is in an upright state, and the pseudo large prize opening door 2405 closes the pseudo large prize opening 2402 so that it cannot accept game ball B. Also, in the normal state, the second large prize opening 2007 is closed by the second large prize opening door 2562, so that game ball B that is shot to the right side of the center device 2500 and flows down to the second large prize opening door 2562 rolls to the left on the second large prize opening door 2562 and is released into the game area 5a through the right release passage 2565. Therefore, in the normal state, game ball B does not circulate within the pseudo game area 2010.

When the second large prize opening door 2562 moves back from the normal state in response to the lottery results of the first special pattern and the second special pattern drawn when game ball B is received by the first start opening 2004 or the second start opening 2005, game ball B can be received by the second large prize opening 2007. In this state, when game ball B is received by the second large prize opening 2007, the game ball B is detected by the second large prize opening sensor 2561 and is then supplied to the pseudo game area 2010.

Then, the game ball B supplied to the pseudo game area 2010 flows down while abutting against a number of obstacle nails N planted in the forward exposed portion of the game panel 1100. At this time, if the pseudo big prize opening 2402 is closed by the pseudo big prize opening door 2405, the game ball B supplied into the pseudo game area 2010 passes in front of the pseudo big prize opening door 2405, flows down onto the bottom wall 2411, rolls to the left along the slope of the bottom wall 2411, and is prevented from rolling further to the left by the third upright wall 2419, and is discharged to the rear of the game panel 1100 through the pseudo out opening 2404 that opens forward at that portion. In other words, it is discharged from within the pseudo game area 2010.

The pseudo outlet 2404 of the pseudo play area 2010 is located close to the right side of the outlet 1008, giving the player the illusion that the game ball B received in the pseudo outlet 2404 is actually received in the outlet 1008. This gives the player the illusion that the pseudo play area 2010 is part of the play area 5a.

Therefore, the game in which game ball B passes in front of the pseudo large prize opening 2402 in the pseudo game area 2010 can be mistaken as the game in which game ball B passes through a large prize opening in a conventional pachinko machine, and the player can be disappointed when game ball B is not accepted by the pseudo large prize opening 2402. On the other hand, since game balls B accepted by the second large prize opening 2007 are circulated in the pseudo game area 2010, even if game ball B is not accepted by the pseudo large prize opening 2402, a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out by acceptance by the second large prize opening 2007. As a result, game ball B is paid out even though game ball B was not accepted by the pseudo large prize opening 2402, so the player can feel that he has won, and the player can be entertained and a decline in interest can be suppressed.

When the pseudo large prize opening 2402 is opened or closed, the large pseudo large prize opening door 2405 that is visible from the front opens and closes, so that the player can instantly notice that the pseudo large prize opening 2402 is ready to receive a ball. This allows the player to perform an operation to hit the game ball B aimed at the right side of the center device 2500 (so-called "right hit") so that the game ball B can be received by the pseudo large prize opening 2402. The pseudo large prize opening 2402 may be opened and closed as a kind of advance notice, or as a signal to instruct the player to "hit right". This pseudo large prize opening 2402 can only be entered by "hitting right", so it is easy for the player to understand intuitively.

For this reason, for example, before the second large prize opening 2007 becomes available, the pseudo large prize opening 2402 may be opened and closed to allow the player to perform a "right hit." This makes it easier for the game ball B hit to the right to reach the second large prize opening 2007 when the second large prize opening 2007 becomes available, making it more entertaining for the player and preventing a decline in interest.

When the pseudo large prize opening 2402 is also opened and closed during a "big win" game in which the second large prize opening 2007 opens and closes in a predetermined opening and closing pattern, a large number of game balls B can be supplied to the pseudo game area 2010 in a short period of time through the second large prize opening 2007, and as a large number of game balls B circulate within the pseudo game area 2010, the player can enjoy the movement of the game balls B and the game within the pseudo game area 2010. At this time, when the pseudo large prize opening 2402 opens and closes, the game ball B is received by the large pseudo large prize opening 2402, which greatly entertains the player and prevents a decline in the player's interest.

In this embodiment, the pseudo large prize opening 2402 is larger in the left-right direction than the second large prize opening 2007, but above the pseudo large prize opening 2402, a right side wall portion 2414, a left side wall portion 2417, and an inclined wall portion 2418 are provided, and a game ball B that passes between the right side wall portion 2414 and the left side wall portion 2417 (between the right inclined wall portion 2413 and the left inclined wall portion 2416) is received into the pseudo large prize opening 2402. The distance between the right side wall portion 2414 and the left side wall portion 2417 is approximately half the left-right distance of the second large prize opening 2007. Therefore, since the multiple game balls B accepted by the second large prize opening 2007 are concentrated in a small area and head toward the pseudo large prize opening 2402, the player is given the illusion that a greater number of game balls B are being accepted by the pseudo large prize opening 2402 than the game balls B accepted by the second large prize opening 2007, which greatly entertains the player and prevents a decline in interest.

The pseudo big prize opening 2402 of this embodiment does not pay out game ball B or grant a special prize to the player by receiving game ball B. Therefore, the pseudo big prize opening 2402 can be opened and closed in opening and closing patterns not seen in the big prize openings of conventional pachinko machines (for example, 3-3-7 beats, minuet, waltz, bossa nova, swing, 8 beats, 16 beats, background music or the tempo of a specified piece of music, etc.), which can be enjoyed by the player.

In addition to the obstacle nails N, a windmill W may be provided in the pseudo play area 2010. The presence of the windmill W in the pseudo play area 2010 makes it even more realistic, and makes it difficult to distinguish between the pseudo play area 2010 and the play area 5a.

[5-8i. Flow of game balls within the game area]
Next, the flow of the game ball B in the play area 5a will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 145 to 147. When assembled on the play board 5, the center role 2500 is provided in the approximate center of the play area 5a. In the play area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement on both the left and right outer parts and the lower part of the center role 2500. In addition, a windmill W that rotates when the game ball B comes into contact with it is provided on the left side of the center role 2500 and above the side upper left unit 2300.

First, on the left side of the center role 2500, the left guide passage group 2530, the gate 2002, and the side left upper unit 2300 are arranged at intervals from above, and multiple obstacle nails N are planted between them and above the left guide passage group 2530. The multiple obstacle nails N planted above the left guide passage group 2530 are arranged so that game balls B are collected above the entrance to the left second guide passage 2532. As a result, when game ball B is hit to the left of the center role 2500, it can be circulated to the left second guide passage 2532 with a higher probability than the left first guide passage 2531. The game ball B that has circulated through the left second guide passage 2532 will circulate downward while approaching the center role 2500, and will flow down to the left of the variable winning opening 2003 with a high probability.

Near the entrance of the left second guide passage 2532, there is provided a first large prize opening 2006 that is normally closed by the first large prize opening door 2523 to prevent acceptance, and a game ball B that enters the left second guide passage 2532 rolls and flows down on the first large prize opening door 2523. When the first large prize opening door 2523 is retracted in response to the lottery results of the first special pattern or the second special pattern drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B into the first starting opening 2004 or the second starting opening 2005, if the game ball B enters the left second guide passage 2532, there is a high probability that it will be accepted into the first large prize opening 2006.

The game ball B received in the first large prize opening 2006 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 even after being detected by the first large prize opening sensor 2525 installed below, and is discharged downward via the rear ball guide unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000. When the game ball B is detected by the first large prize opening sensor 2525, a bonus of a predetermined number of game balls B is awarded.

The multiple obstacle nails N planted between the left guide passage group 2530 and the gate 2002 are arranged so that they are gathered directly above the gate 2002, below the variable winning opening 2003. This allows a certain degree of probability for a game ball B to pass through the gate 2002 when it is hit to the left of the center device 2500. The gate 2002 is arranged so that the game ball B flows downward on both the outer left and outer right sides of the gate 2002.

When the game ball B passes through the gate 2002, a lottery for a normal symbol is executed. If the lottery result for the normal symbol is a "normal win", the variable winning port 2003 is ready to receive the game ball B for a predetermined time. When the variable winning port 2003 is ready to receive, the variable winning port door 2521 rotates to the left, so that the game ball B that has circulated through the left second guide passage 2532 is received by the variable winning port 2003 with a high probability. The game ball B received by the variable winning port 2003 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, detected by the variable winning port sensor 2526, and then handed over to the back ball guide unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 and discharged downward. When the game ball B is detected by the variable winning port sensor 2526, a bonus is given in which a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out.

Between the gate 2002 and the upper left side unit 2300, a warp entrance 2511 and a windmill W are provided from above. The warp entrance 2511 opens to the left in the peripheral wall 2501 of the center gimmick 2500. The windmill W is located between the center gimmick 2500 and the inner rail 1002, closer to the center gimmick 2500.

The multiple obstacle nails N planted between the gate 2002 and the windmill W are positioned so that a game ball B that flows through the gate 2002 and the outer right side of the gate 2002 mainly flows down the part to the right of the center of the windmill W. Therefore, a game ball B that flows through the gate 2002 and the outer right side of the gate 2002 can enter the warp entrance 2511 with a certain degree of probability. On the other hand, a game ball B that flows through the outer left side of the gate 2002 will not enter the warp entrance 2511.

The game ball B that enters the warp entrance 2511 passes through a warp passage and is supplied from the warp exit 2512 that opens into the frame of the center role 2500 to the stage 2513 provided near the lower end of the center part in the left-right direction of the center role 2500. The game ball B supplied to the stage 2513 rolls left-right on the stage 2513 and is released so as to flow back into the game area 5a from either the central release section 2513a or the side release section 2513b.

The central release section 2513a of the stage 2513 is located directly above the first starting opening 2004 in the left-right center of the play area 5a, so that the game ball B released from the central release section 2513a is accepted by the first starting opening 2004 with a high probability. The game ball B released from the side release sections 2513b on both the left and right sides of the central release section 2513a is accepted by the first starting opening 2004 with a certain degree of probability.

The game ball B received in the first starting hole 2004 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, then handed over to the rear ball guidance unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000, where it is detected by the first starting hole sensor 3002 and discharged onto the board holder 1200. When the game ball B is detected by the first starting hole sensor 3002, a lottery for a first special symbol is held and a special bonus is awarded, such as a predetermined number of game balls B being paid out.

The game ball B that is released from the stage 2513 and is not received by the first starting port 2004 is received by the outlet 1008 and discharged outside the game area 5a. The game ball B that is received by the outlet 1008 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 by the out guide section 1003 and then discharged downward.

There is a high probability that a game ball B that has flowed to the right of the center of the windmill W will flow down onto the multiple obstacle nails N on the upper tier of multiple obstacle nails N that are arranged in two tiers, one above the other, diagonally along the bottom edge of the center device 2500. Game balls B that pass through the right side of the windmill W and do not flow down onto the multiple obstacle nails N on the upper tier will flow down onto the multiple obstacle nails N on the lower tier. On the other hand, game balls B that have flowed to the left of the center of the windmill W will flow down onto the shelf 2301 of the upper left side unit 2300, roll the shelf 2301 to the right, and then flow down onto the multiple obstacle nails N on the lower tier.

A game ball B that flows to the right of the center of the windmill W and flows down to the upper side of the multiple obstacle nails N that are lined up diagonally is guided to the center (first start opening 2004) of the left-right direction of the play area 5a below the center device 2500, and may be accepted by the first start opening 2004. In addition, since a gap is provided on the upper side where the multiple obstacle nails N are lined up diagonally so that one game ball B can pass through, the game ball may flow down onto the side unit 2200 through the gap and may be accepted by the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200. A game ball B that is not accepted by the general winning opening 2001 or the first start opening 2004 is discharged from the outlet 1008 to the outside of the play area 5a.

On the other hand, if a game ball B flows down to the lower row of multiple obstacle nails N that are arranged diagonally on the left side below the center device 2500, it is guided by the multiple obstacle nails N to the center of the play area 5a in the left-right direction, and is not accepted by the first starting hole 2004 but is accepted by the outlet 1008 and discharged from the play area 5a. On this lower side, there are multiple gaps along the way that allow one game ball B to pass through, so there is a possibility that the game ball B may pass through the gaps and be accepted into the general winning hole 2001 provided in the side unit 2200.

The game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, then handed over to the rear ball guide unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000, where it is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001 and discharged downward. When the game ball B is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001, a bonus is awarded in which a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out.

Next, on the right side of the center role 2500, the right guide passage group 2540, the space forming section 2550, the specific obstacle nail group 2700, the second attacker section 2560, and the lower right unit 2400 are arranged in this order from the top. The space forming section 2550 between the right guide passage group 2540 and the second attacker section 2560 is provided with the specific obstacle nail group 2700 consisting of multiple obstacle nails N.

In the game board 5 of this embodiment, when the game ball B is hit with enough force to enter the upper part of the part of the upper edge of the peripheral wall part 2501 of the center role 2500 that becomes lower from near the center in the left-right direction toward the right, the game ball B flows through either the right first guide passage 2541 or the right second guide passage 2542 of the right guide passage group 2540.

A game ball B that is hit relatively hard toward the right side of the center role 2500 hits the impact stop 1006 and enters the right first guide passage 2541 of the right guide passage group 2540. On the other hand, a game ball B that is hit relatively weakly toward the right side of the center role 2500 rolls to the right on the upper surface of the upper end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center role 2500 and enters the right second guide passage 2542 of the right guide passage group 2540.

The game ball B that enters the right first guide passage 2541 is detected by the flow detection sensor 2543 and is released downward from the side closer to the peripheral wall 2501 between the peripheral wall 2501 of the center device 2500 and the right rail 1005. The game ball B that passes through the right first guide passage 2541 then enters the first guide area 2711 of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 arranged in the space forming part 2550, and flows down while meandering left and right within the first guide area 2711. The game ball B that flows through the first guide area 2711 comes into contact with the guide wall 2552 and flows diagonally downward and to the right along the guide wall 2552.

The multiple nails 2701 constituting the walls on both the left and right sides of the first induction area 2711 form a gap between them in the vertical direction through which one game ball B can pass, and the game ball B may move through the gap to the left or right outer side (second induction area 2712) of the first induction area 2711. The game ball B that moves from the first induction area 2711 to the left outer side flows down to the induction wall section 2552 through between the specific obstacle nail group 2700 and the peripheral wall section 2501. At this time, the game ball B flows down while meandering in the front-back direction due to the multiple rear protrusions 2554 of the flange section 2502 and the multiple front protrusions 2555d of the center right front plate 2555. The game ball B that flows down to the induction wall section 2552 flows diagonally downward and to the right along the induction wall section 2552. The game ball B that moves from the first induction area 2711 to the right outer side flows through the second induction area 2712.

On the other hand, the game ball B that enters the right second guide passage 2542 is released downward from the side closer to the right rail 1005 between the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center device 2500 and the right rail 1005. Then, the game ball B that passed through the right second guide passage 2542 enters the second guide area 2712 of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 arranged in the space forming portion 2550, and flows down while meandering in the left and right direction within the second guide area 2712. The game ball B that flows through the second guide area 2712 abuts against the guide wall portion 2552 and flows diagonally downward and to the right along the guide wall portion 2552.

The multiple nails 2701 constituting the walls on both the left and right sides of the second induction area 2712 form a gap between them in the vertical direction through which one game ball B can pass, and the game ball B may move to the left outer side (first induction area 2711) or right outer side of the second induction area 2712 through the gap. The game ball B that moves from the second induction area 2712 to the left outer side flows through the first induction area 2711. The game ball B that moves from the second induction area 2712 to the right outer side passes between the specific obstacle nail group 2700 and the right rail 1005 or the right wall portion 2551, and flows down to the area between the induction wall portion 2552 and the right wall portion 2551. At this time, the game ball flows down while meandering in the front-back direction due to the multiple protrusions 2554 of the flange portion 2502 and the multiple protrusions 2555d of the center right front plate 2555. The game ball B that moves from the second guide area 2712 to the outside right is likely to be received by the first sub-outlet 2021 and discharged outside the game area 5a. The game ball B received by the first sub-outlet 2021 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and then discharged downward via the rear ball guide unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000.

The game ball B guided by this specific group of obstacle nails 2700 has a slower flow rate than a portion where obstacle nails N are planted in a general gauge arrangement, and flows down at a slower rate even at the same height.

A game ball B that has passed through the specific obstacle nail group 2700 (space forming portion 2550) and has not been accepted into the first sub-outlet 2021 enters the attacca passage 2564 provided above the second large prize opening 2007 of the second attacca portion 2560 from between the guide wall portion 2552 and the attacca right wall portion 2567. In the normal state, the second large prize opening door 2562 advances to close the second large prize opening 2007 so that it cannot be accepted, and the game ball B that has entered the attacca passage 2564 rolls to the left on the top surface of the second large prize opening door 2562, and then is released downward through the right release passage 2565. Within this attacca passage 2564, the game ball B rolls to the left while snaking back and forth due to the rear protrusion 2564a of the flange portion 2502 and the front protrusion of the center lower right front plate 2572.

The game ball B released downward from the right release passage 2565 of the second attacker section 2560 flows down while abutting against multiple obstacle nails N planted between the right lower unit 2400 (left side wall section 2417). Then, with a certain probability, it is accepted into the second starting port 2005, which is always open upward below the right release passage 2565. Also, although the probability of acceptance into the second starting port 2005 is lower, there is a certain probability that it is accepted into the second sub-out port 2022, which is open to the right of the second starting port 2005.

The game ball B received in the second start port 2005 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, detected by the second start port sensor 2401, and then discharged downward. When the game ball B is detected by the second start port sensor 2401, a lottery for a second special pattern is held and a bonus such as a predetermined number of game balls B being paid out is awarded. The game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2022 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and then discharged downward.

The game ball B that is released from the right release passage 2565 and is not received by either the second starting port 2005 or the second sub-outlet 2022 rolls diagonally downward and to the left on the inclined wall portion 2418 of the lower right unit 2400, and is then discharged from the outlet 1008 outside the game area 5a.

When the second large prize opening door 2562 retracts in response to the result of the lottery for the first special pattern or the result of the lottery for the second special pattern drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B into the first start opening 2004 or the second start opening 2005, the game ball B circulating through the attacca passage 2564 of the second attacca section 2560 is accepted into the second large prize opening 2007 with a high probability. The game ball B accepted into the second large prize opening 2007 is supplied into the pseudo game area 2010 after being detected by one of the two second large prize opening sensors 2561 provided below. When the game ball B is detected by the second large prize opening sensor 2561, a bonus of a predetermined number of game balls B being paid out is awarded.

The game ball B supplied from the second large prize opening 2007 into the pseudo play area 2010 flows down while abutting against a number of obstacle nails N planted in the pseudo play area 2010. When the pseudo large prize opening 2402 is closed by the pseudo large prize opening door 2405, the game ball B flows down through the front of the pseudo large prize opening door 2405 onto the bottom wall 2411, rolls to the left along the slope of the bottom wall 2411, and is then received by the pseudo out opening 2404. The game ball B received by the pseudo out opening 2404 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and then discharged downward.

When game ball B is circulating in the pseudo game area 2010, if the pseudo large prize opening door 2405 is rotated forward by the peripheral control board 1510 in response to the lottery results of the first special pattern or the second special pattern drawn by the acceptance of game ball B into the first start opening 2004 or the second start opening 2005, there is a high probability that the game ball B will come into contact with the pseudo large prize opening door 2405 and be accepted into the pseudo large prize opening 2402 at the rear. The game ball B accepted into the pseudo large prize opening 2402 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and detected by the pseudo large prize opening sensor 2403, and then discharged downward. A predetermined performance can be executed by the detection of game ball B by the pseudo large prize opening sensor 2403.

As a performance using the pseudo large prize opening 2402, when the second large prize opening 2007 is open according to the lottery result of the first special pattern drawn or the lottery result of the second special pattern drawn (for example, according to "big win", "small win", etc.), the pseudo large prize opening 2402 is opened by the peripheral control board 1510 for the performance. At that time, since the peripheral control board 1510 can know the timing of opening the second large prize opening 2007, the degree to which the pseudo large prize opening 2402 picks up the game ball B can be adjusted by the peripheral control board 1510. By utilizing this property, when the pseudo large prize opening 2402 picks up a lot of game balls B, it can be suggested that a high probability state (so-called probability state) will be entered after the "big win". Conversely, when there are many misses at the pseudo large prize opening 2402, it can be suggested that a low probability state (so-called normal probability state) will be entered after the "big win". Furthermore, the state of such missed opportunities can also suggest probability settings (usually six levels, from 1 to 6).

In this way, in this embodiment, even if game ball B is shot to the right of the center device 2500 under normal conditions, it can only be accepted by the second starting port 2005, which grants a special bonus, and there is no possibility that it will pass through the gate 2002 or be accepted by the general winning port 2001 or the first starting port 2004. Therefore, a shooting operation can be performed that causes game ball B to flow to the left side of the center device 2500.

In more detail, the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn by the reception of a game ball B into the first starting port 2004 and the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by the reception of a game ball B into the second starting port 2005 have a longer special variable time for informing the player of the lottery result of the special symbol than the lottery result of the first special symbol. Therefore, since it takes longer to consume the reserved number for the lottery result of the second special symbol, the number of lottery results of the second special symbol executed by the second starting port 2005 is smaller even if the number of game balls B received per unit time for the first starting port 2004 and the second starting port 2005 is the same. Also, even if a game ball B is received into the second starting port 2005, the number of game balls B paid out is one. For this reason, under normal circumstances, even if game ball B is shot into the right side of the center device 2500, it can only be accepted by the second starting hole 2005, and even if it is accepted by the second starting hole 2005, only one game ball B is paid out as a bonus, making it easier for players to shoot game ball B into the left side of the center device 2500.

In addition, in this embodiment, when game ball B is accepted by the first large winning opening 2006 or the second large winning opening 2007, a bonus of many game balls B is awarded. To enable game ball B to be accepted by the first large winning opening 2006 or the second large winning opening 2007, it is necessary to have the first starting opening 2004 or the second starting opening 2005 accept game ball B, and to draw a first special pattern or a second special pattern that will enable them to be accepted.

For this reason, under normal circumstances, the player can perform an operation to shoot game ball B so that game ball B flows down the left side of the center device 2500 so that game ball B can be received by the first starting opening 2004. This allows the player to enjoy the original gameplay of the pachinko machine 1 by seeing the movement of game ball B guided by multiple obstacle nails N, and also heightens the player's anticipation for game ball B being received by the first starting opening 2004.

When game ball B is accepted into first start opening 2004 and a "win" (for example, a "small win", "medium win", "big win", etc.) is selected as the lottery result for the first special pattern, first large prize opening 2006 or second large prize opening 2007 opens and closes, allowing game ball B to be accepted into first large prize opening 2006 or second large prize opening 2007. This allows the player to enjoy the operation of shooting game ball B into the game ball, while also increasing the anticipation of game ball B being accepted into first large prize opening 2006 or second large prize opening 2007.

Specifically, when the first large winning opening 2006 becomes available, a hitting operation can be performed so that the game ball B flows to the left side of the center device 2500. On the other hand, when the second large winning opening 2007 becomes available, a hitting operation ("right hit") can be performed so that the game ball B flows to the right side of the center device 2500.

When ball B is shot into the right side of the center device 2500, a right guide passage group 2540 consisting of a right first guide passage 2541 and a right second guide passage 2542, and a guide area 2710 consisting of a first guide area 2711 and a second guide area 2712 by a specific obstacle nail group 2700 are provided on the right side of the center device 2500. Since the ball B is more likely to be received by the second sub-outlet 2022 depending on the guide passage through which it flows, the strength of the ball B can be adjusted so that the ball B flows through the desired guide passage (here, the right first guide passage 2541), allowing the player to enjoy the operation of shooting the ball B.

In addition, the second large prize opening 2007 is more open in the left-right direction than the first large prize opening 2006, so that the player can recognize at a glance that the second large prize opening 2007 is capable of accepting more game balls B in a short period of time. As a result, when the second large prize opening 2007 becomes available, the player can immediately change the shooting operation so that the game ball B flows to the right side of the center device 2500, thereby increasing the player's anticipation for the acceptance of the game ball B into the second large prize opening 2007 and preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, when game ball B is received in the second large prize opening 2007, game ball B is supplied into the pseudo game area 2010 in which a pseudo large prize opening 2402 having a larger opening than the second large prize opening 2007 is provided, thereby increasing the anticipation of game ball B being received in the pseudo large prize opening 2402 and allowing the player to enjoy the movement of game ball B in the pseudo game area 2010, thereby preventing a decline in interest.

[5-9. Overall configuration of the back unit]
The overall configuration of the rear unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 143 and 144. The rear unit 3000 includes a general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects a game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 and guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and a first starting opening sensor 3002 that detects a game ball B received in the first starting opening 2004 and guided to the rear of the game panel 1100. The general winning opening sensor 3001 and the first starting opening sensor 3002 are provided in the rear ball guide unit 3100.

The rear unit 3000 comprises a rear box 3010, which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100 and has a box shape with an open front and a square opening 3010a in the rear wall, a rear box rear unit 3030 which is detachably attached to the rear wall of the rear box 3010 by a lock slider 3020, and a rear board unit 3040 which is located behind the rear box rear unit 3030 and attached to the rear wall of the rear box 3010.

The rear unit 3000 also includes a rear ball guide unit 3100 that is provided at the bottom near the front end of the rear box 3010 and through which the game ball B guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 circulates, a rear front peripheral decorative unit 3200 that is provided near the front end of the rear box 3010, a rear upper front performance unit 3300 that is provided at the top of the rear box 3010 at approximately the same position in the front-to-back direction as the rear front peripheral decorative unit 3200, a rear lower front performance unit 3400 that is provided at the bottom behind the rear front peripheral decorative unit 3200 in the rear box 3010, a rear upper rear performance unit 3500 (see Figure 155, etc.) that is provided behind the rear upper front performance unit 3300 in the rear box 3010, and a rear lower rear performance unit 3600 that is provided behind the rear lower front performance unit 3400 in the rear box 3010.

[5-9a. Back box related]
Next, the configuration of the rear box 3010 in the rear unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 151 to 153. Figure 151(a) is a perspective view of the rear box of the rear unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the rear box of the rear unit as viewed from the rear. Figure 152(a) is an exploded perspective view of the rear box of Figure 151 as viewed from the front, with main members disassembled, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) as viewed from the rear. Figure 153(a) is an exploded perspective view of the rear box rear unit of Figure 152 as disassembled, with the rear box rear unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) as viewed from the rear.

The rear unit 3000 includes a box-shaped rear box 3010 that opens forward, a rear box rear unit 3030 that is attached to the rear wall of the rear box 3010, and a rear board unit 3040 that is provided behind the rear box rear unit 3030 and attached to the rear side of the rear box 3010. The rear box rear unit 3030 is detachably attached to the rear box 3010 by a lock slider 3020.

The rear box 3010 is box-shaped with an open front and a rectangular opening 3010a penetrating the rear wall, a mounting surface 3010b provided at the bottom of the opening 3010a on which the rear box rear unit 3030 (set plate 1650) is placed, two fixing grooves 3010c recessed upward from the inside of the frame at the top of the opening 3010a, and a locking mechanism 3010d provided below near the center in the left-right direction of the mounting surface 3010b, to which a lock slider 3020 is attached so as to be able to slide left and right.

The opening 3010a of the rear box 3010 is formed in a rectangular shape with an aspect ratio of 3:4 when viewed from the front. The opening 3010a is formed to have approximately the same size in the left-right direction as the rear wall of the rear box 3010 in the left-right direction. The opening 3010a is also provided in a position that is offset (eccentric) upward from the center of the rear box 3010 in the up-down direction. The opening 3010a is formed to have the same size as a 19-inch liquid crystal display device.

The upper fixed piece 1651 of the set plate 1650 in the rear box rear unit 3030 is inserted from below into the two fixing grooves 3010c of the rear box 3010. In addition, the lower fixed piece 1652 of the set plate 1650 can be inserted from the rear into the lock mechanism part 3010d of the rear box 3010 with the lock slider 3020 slid to the left in rear view. With the lower fixed piece 1652 of the set plate 1650 inserted into the lock mechanism part 3010d, if the lock slider 3020 is slid to the right in rear view, the lock slider 3020 can prevent the lower fixed piece 1652 from moving backward.

The rear box 3010 also has a flat fixed piece 3010e extending outward from the front end. This fixed piece 3010e is attached to the gaming panel 1100 with its front surface abutting the rear surface of the gaming panel 1100. The rear box 3010 has bosses and mounting holes formed at appropriate positions for mounting the rear ball guide unit 3100, etc.

Furthermore, the rear box 3010 is provided with a pair of pivot supports 3010f on the rear surface that can rotatably support the shaft 3041a of the rear substrate unit 3040 around an axis extending in the vertical direction, and a locking portion 3010g that is provided on the rear surface on the opposite side in the left-right direction from the pair of pivot supports 3010f and that locks the locking claw 3041b of the rear substrate unit 3040.

The rear box rear unit 3030 is removably attached to the rear wall so as to close the opening 3010a of the rear box 3010 from the rear. The rear box rear unit 3030 is composed of a performance display device 1600 capable of displaying a predetermined performance image, a set plate 1650 to which the performance display device 1600 is attached on the front side and which is attached to the rear box 3010, and a peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear surface of the set plate 1650 and which houses the peripheral control board 1510.

The performance display device 1600 is a 15-inch liquid crystal display device with an aspect ratio of 3:4.

The set plate 1650 is formed in a rectangular, flat plate shape with the same size as the opening 3010a of the rear box 3010. The set plate 1650 has two upper fixing pieces 1651 that protrude upward from the upper edge at a distance in the left-right direction, and one lower fixing piece 1652 that protrudes downward from near the center of the lower edge in the left-right direction. The two upper fixing pieces 1651 are inserted into the fixing groove 3010c of the rear box 3010. The lower fixing piece 1652 is inserted into the locking mechanism part 3010d of the rear box 3010.

The set plate 1650 also has a frame-shaped LCD mounting section 1653 on the front side that is open toward the front. The LCD mounting section 1653 is formed to a size corresponding to the performance display device 1600, and the performance display device 1600 is fitted in and attached from the front. In this embodiment, when viewed from the front, the center of the LCD mounting section 1653 coincides with the center of the set plate 1650. The set plate 1650 is formed to be transparent. This allows the inside of the rear box 3010 to be viewed from the rear through the set plate 1650.

The peripheral control unit 1500 is composed of a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 160, etc.) having a peripheral control unit 1511 and a performance display control unit 1512, and a peripheral control board box 1520 that houses the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the set plate 1650 so that the upper edge of the peripheral control board box 1520 is positioned slightly lower than the upper edge of the set plate 1650. As a result, when the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the set plate 1650, an area with a height of approximately 1/3 of the total height of the set plate 1650 is formed between the lower end of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the lower end of the set plate 1650.

The rear board unit 3040 comprises a board box 3041 that is L-shaped when viewed from the front and thin from front to back, and a panel relay board and a performance drive board (not shown) housed within the board box 3041. The board box 3041 has two shafts 3041a on the outer edge of the part extending up and down in the L shape that are rotatably supported by the shaft support part 3010f of the rear box 3010. The board box 3041 also has a locking claw 3041b at the tip of the part extending left and right in the L shape that locks into the locking part 3010g of the rear box 3010.

This rear board unit 3040 is attached to the rear side of the rear box 3010, straddling the opening 3010a (rear box rear unit 3030). When assembled to the game board 5, the L-shaped portion of the rear board unit 3040 that extends vertically is located to the left of the peripheral control unit 1500 when viewed from the rear. In addition, the L-shaped portion of the rear board unit 3040 that extends horizontally is located between the lower end at the rear of the set plate 1650 and the lower end of the peripheral control unit 1500.

This rear board unit 3040 can be opened at the rear of the rear box rear unit 3030 by releasing the engagement between the locking portion 3010g and the locking claw 3041b and rotating the locking claw 3041b rearward around the shaft portion 3041a, and the rear box rear unit 3030 can be detached from the rear box 3010 without removing it from the rear box 3010.

In this embodiment, an opening 3010a large enough to mount a 19-inch LCD display device is provided on the rear wall of the rear box 3010, and a set plate 1650 is attached to the opening 3010a, while a 15-inch performance display device 1600 is attached to the front side of the set plate 1650. This allows the performance display device 1600 to be directly attached to the opening 3010a of the rear box 3010 when the performance display device 1600 is 19 inches in size, and when the performance display device 1600 is smaller than 19 inches, it can be attached to the opening 3010a of the rear box 3010 via a set plate 1650 that corresponds to the size of the performance display device 1600. Therefore, it is possible to mount a performance display device 1600 of a different size by simply changing the set plate 1650 while leaving the rear box 3010 as it is. In other words, in conventional pachinko machines, the design of the back box 3010 is changed when the model is changed, but in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the back box 3010 can be used as a common part even when the model is changed, thereby reducing the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, since the performance display device 1600 is attached to the rear box 3010 via the set plate 1650, when it is necessary to change the position of the performance display device 1600 due to design changes, etc., this can be easily accommodated by changing only the set plate 1650, thereby reducing the costs associated with design changes, etc.

In the above embodiment, the set plate 1650 is transparent, but it is not limited to this, and may be colored, such as colored transparent or colored opaque. If the set plate 1650 is visible from the player's side, it is preferable to use an opaque color, including black. This can prevent the player from seeing inside the island equipment or seeing light from behind, which could lead to the pachinko machine 1 looking bad. In this case, by making the set plate 1650 black, even if the set plate 1650 is visible from the player's side, it is possible to make the set plate 1650 less noticeable, so that the performance display device 1600 and other decorations in the pachinko machine 1 can be made more noticeable, making it easier to fully demonstrate the performance effects they provide.

[5-9b. Back ball guidance unit]
Next, the back ball guiding unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to Fig. 143 etc. The back ball guiding unit 3100 is provided in the lower part near the front end inside the back box 3010. The back ball guiding unit 3100 has a general winning hole sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning hole 2001, a first starting hole sensor 3002 that detects the game ball B received in the first starting hole 2004, and a magnetic sensor 1050 that can detect illegal magnetism acting on the game board 5 (see Fig. 160 etc.).

The back ball guide unit 3100 has a discharge passage that receives the game ball B that has been received by the general winning port 2001, the variable winning port 2003, the first starting port 2004, the second starting port 2005, the first large winning port 2006, the second large winning port 2007, the first sub-out port 2021, and the second sub-out port 2022 and guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and guides it to near the center in the left-right direction of the lower end, and then discharges it downward.

[5-9c. Back front edge decoration unit]
Next, the rear front peripheral decoration unit 3200 in the rear unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 143 etc. The rear front peripheral decoration unit 3200 is attached near the front end inside the rear box 3010. The rear front peripheral decoration unit 3200 includes a rear front peripheral decoration body 3201 formed in a ring shape along the periphery of the play area 5a when assembled to the play board 5, and a rear front peripheral decoration board (not shown) on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted to light up and decorate the rear front peripheral decoration body 3201.

The back-front peripheral decorative body 3201 is formed in a shape that resembles a sumo ring. The back-front peripheral decorative body 3201 is formed to be translucent, and can be illuminated with light from an LED mounted on the back-front peripheral decorative board.

This back-front peripheral decoration unit 3200 allows the back-front peripheral decoration 3201 to decorate the periphery of the play area 5a in a ring shape, improving the appearance of the play area 5a. In addition, by making the back-front peripheral decoration 3201 luminous, the periphery of the play area 5a can be luminous in a ring shape, strongly drawing the player's attention to the play area 5a.

In addition, the rear front peripheral decorative body 3201 is divided into multiple parts in the circumferential direction, and each part can be individually illuminated and decorated using multiple LEDs on the rear front peripheral decorative board, allowing the player to see an illumination effect in which light rotates in the circumferential direction, entertaining the player and preventing a decline in interest.

[5-9d. Backstage Production Unit]
Next, the back upper front performance unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 143 etc. The back upper front performance unit 3300 is provided at approximately the same position as the back front peripheral decorative unit 3200 in the front-to-back direction at the top of the back box 3010. The back upper front performance unit 3300 includes a back upper front decorative body 3310 that is rectangular and long in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, a back upper front decorative board (not shown) that is provided behind the back upper front decorative body 3310 and has multiple LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a back upper front lifting unit (not shown) that raises and lowers the back upper front decorative body 3310.

The upper back front decorative body 3310 is arranged so that sumo rankings such as "yokozuna", "ozeki", and "sekiwake" are lined up from the left, and each ranking can be illuminated independently by the LEDs on the upper back front decorative board. The upper back front decorative body 3310 is formed to a length that crosses the front of the performance display device 1600 in the left-right direction.

The back-upper front decorative body 3310 is attached so that it can be raised and lowered, and can be raised and lowered by the back-upper front lifting unit. The back-upper front decorative body 3310 can be raised and lowered within a range of approximately the same height as the height of the back-upper front decorative body 3310. In the normal state, this back-upper front decorative body 3310 is in a raised position where it has moved to the uppermost position. In this state, when assembled to the game board 5, the center in the vertical direction when viewed from the front is located at approximately the same height as the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and is located at the top of the game area 5a. Most of the back-upper front decorative body 3310 can be seen through the frame of the center role 2500, and the remaining part can be seen through the panel board 1110 of the transparent game panel 1100 and the transparent center role 2500.

This back-upper front decorative body 3310 can be moved downward from its normal raised position to its lowered position by the back-upper front lifting unit. When in the lowered position, the vertical center of the back-upper front decorative body 3310 is located at approximately the same height as the upper end of the left guide passage group 2530 in the center gimmick 2500 (see Figure 159). When in the lowered position, almost the entire back-upper front decorative body 3310 can be seen through the frame of the center gimmick 2500.

According to this back-upper front performance unit 3300, the numbers on the back-upper front decoration 3310 can be illuminated and decorated independently, so for example, it is possible to perform an illumination performance in which after all the numbers have been illuminated and changed, only one number is illuminated and the change stops. In this way, when a high-ranking number is illuminated and decorated, the player can be made to think that their chance has arrived, increasing anticipation for the game and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, the back-upper front decorative body 3310 can also indicate to the player the likelihood of a favorable gaming state (e.g., a "jackpot" game) occurring that gives the player an advantage, based on the ranking of the illuminated and decorated rankings. As a result, when the illuminated and decorated changing number of numbers on the back-upper front decorative body 3310 starts, the player can be made to feel anxious and excited depending on whether the change will stop at the desired ranking, entertaining the player and preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, when the back-upper front decorative body 3310 is moved from the raised position to the lowered position by the back-upper front lifting unit, the back-upper front decorative body 3310 moves toward the center of the game area 5a and blocks the upper part of the front of the performance display device 1600, so that the player's attention can be strongly attracted to the back-upper front decorative body 3310 and the player can focus on the back-upper front decorative body 3310. This ensures that the light-emitting performance using the back-upper front decorative body 3310 as described above can be shown to the player, entertaining the player and preventing a decline in interest. In addition, when the light-emitting performance as described above is performed in the lowered position rather than in the raised position, it is possible to enhance the sense of premium for the player, and therefore to further increase the reliability of the indication of the degree of expectation by the light-emitting performance, thereby increasing the expectation for the game and preventing a decline in interest.

[5-9e. Backstage front performance unit]
Next, the back lower front performance unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 143 etc. The back lower front performance unit 3400 is provided at the bottom inside the back box 3010, behind the back front peripheral decorative unit 3200. The back lower front performance unit 3400 includes a back lower front decorative body 3410 that is long in the left-right direction, a back lower front decorative board (not shown) that is provided behind the back lower front decorative body 3410 and has multiple LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a back lower front lifting unit (not shown) that lifts and lowers the back lower front decorative body 3410.

The lower back front decorative body 3410 can be illuminated by a number of LEDs mounted on the lower back front decorative board. The lower back front decorative body 3410 can be raised and lowered between the lowest lowered position and the highest raised position by the lower back front lifting unit. The lower back front decorative body 3410 is formed to a length that crosses the front of the performance display device 1600 in the left-right direction.

The lower front decorative body 3410 has a base decorative body 3411 that is long from side to side, a central decorative body 3412 that is located in the center of the base decorative body 3411 in the left-right direction, and a front left decorative body 3413 and a front right decorative body 3414 that are located in front of the center of the base decorative body 3411 in the left-right direction so that they can cover the central decorative body 3412 from the front (see Figure 156, etc.).

The base decorative body 3411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape that resembles a rope and has translucency. The central decorative body 3412 is circular when viewed from the front, and the characters "Osaka" (sake cup) are formed in relief. The central decorative body 3412 is rotatable around an axis that extends in the front-rear direction from the center by a drive motor (not shown).

The front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 are positioned so that they are in contact with each other, and are provided so that they can move away from each other in the left and right direction. The front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 are each translucent. The front left decorative body 3413 has the character "heaven" formed in relief. The front right decorative body 3414 has the character "rising" formed in relief.

In the normal state, the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 are located in a closed position close to each other, hiding the central decorative body 3412 located at the rear from being visible from the front. The front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 can be moved from the normal state to an open position in which they are separated from each other in the left and right directions. In this open position, the central decorative body 3412 located at the rear can be seen from the front through the gap between the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414.

In the normal state of the back-lower front performance unit 3400, the back-lower front decorative body 3410 is located in the lowered position. Also, in the normal state, the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 are located in the closed position, and the central decorative body 3412 is not visible from the front. When assembled to the game board 5, the back-lower front decorative body 3410 in the normal state has its center in the vertical direction located at a height slightly higher than the side left upper unit 2300, its lower end located at approximately the same height as the lower end of the center role 2500, and its upper end located at a height slightly lower than the warp entrance 2511. A part of the back-lower front decorative body 3410 in the normal state is visible through the frame of the center role 2500, and the remainder is visible through the panel board 1110 of the transparent game panel 1100 and the transparent center role 2500.

The back-lower front decorative body 3410 can be moved from a lowered position to an elevated position by the back-lower front lifting unit. When the back-lower front decorative body 3410 is in the elevated position, its upper end is located at a height slightly lower than the back-upper front decorative body 3310 in the elevated position (see Figure 154). In other words, when in the elevated position, the center in the vertical direction of the back-lower front decorative body 3410 is located at approximately the same height as the first large winning opening 2006. In addition, the back-lower front decorative body 3410 can move the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 between the open position and the closed position at any position (height) between the lowered position and the elevated position.

With this back-lower front performance unit 3400, when the back-lower front decorative body 3410 is moved upward from its lowered position, it moves toward the center of the game area 5a and blocks part of the performance display device 1600, strongly attracting the player's attention and drawing their attention to the back-lower front decorative body 3410.

In addition, when the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 are moved from the closed position to the open position, the central decorative body 3412 located at the rear becomes visible (appears), and the appearance of the central decorative body 3412 makes the player think that something good is going to happen, increasing anticipation for the game and preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, since the back-lower front decorative body 3410 allows the central decorative body 3412 to rotate around a front-to-rear axis, when the front-left decorative body 3413 and the front-right decorative body 3414 are moved to the open position to reveal the central decorative body 3412, rotating the central decorative body 3412 gives the player a strong feeling that something good must be about to happen, further increasing the player's sense of expectation and preventing a decline in interest. Also, since the central decorative body 3412 can be rotated, when the central decorative body 3412 appears visible, the player can be excited and thrilled depending on whether or not the central decorative body 3412 rotates, entertaining the player.

In addition, the back-lower-front performance unit 3400 can show the player a variety of moving performances by appropriately combining the raising and lowering of the back-lower-front decorative body 3410 as described above, the appearance of the central decorative body 3412 by the movement of the front-left decorative body 3413 and the front-right decorative body 3414, and the rotation of the central decorative body 3412, thereby making it less likely for the player to become bored and preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, in addition to the movable performance of the back-lower-front decorative body 3410 as described above, the back-lower-front performance unit 3400 also allows for light-emitting performance using multiple LEDs on the back-lower-front decorative board, allowing players to see a wider variety of performances, entertaining them and preventing a decline in interest.

[5-9f. Backstage Production Unit]
Next, the back upper rear performance unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 will be described. The back upper rear performance unit 3500 is provided at the top of the back box 3010, behind the back upper front performance unit 3300. The back upper rear performance unit 3500 includes a back upper rear decorative body 3510 (see FIG. 155, etc.) that is long in the left-right direction, a back upper rear decorative board (not shown) that is provided behind the back upper rear decorative body 3510 and has multiple LEDs mounted on the front, and a back upper rear lifting unit (not shown) that raises and lowers the back upper rear decorative body 3510.

The upper back decorative body 3510 is translucent and can be illuminated by a number of LEDs mounted on the upper back decorative board. The upper back decorative body 3510 is arranged so that it can be raised and lowered between the highest raised position and the lowest lowered position by the upper back lifting unit. Furthermore, the upper back decorative body 3510 is arranged behind the lower back decorative body 3410.

The upper back decorative body 3510 is formed in a shape that resembles the upper half of a championship cup, with the character "Excellent" formed in relief in the center in the left-right direction. The upper back decorative body 3510 can form one large championship cup by abutting the lower back decorative body 3610 at its lower end (see Figure 157, etc.). The upper back decorative body 3510 is approximately the same height as the upper back decorative body 3310.

In the normal state of the rear upper performance unit 3500, the rear upper decorative body 3510 is located in the raised position. In this state, the rear upper decorative body 3510 is located behind the rear upper front decorative body 3310 in the raised position, and cannot be seen from the front.

When the back-upper rear decorative body 3510 is moved to the lowered position by the back-upper rear lifting unit, the lower end of the back-upper rear decorative body 3510 is located at approximately the center height in the vertical direction of the game area 5a. When the back-upper rear decorative body 3510 is moved downward from the raised position, it is located in front of the performance display device 1600. In this state, if the back-upper front decorative body 3310 or the back-down front decorative body 3410 has not moved in front of the back-upper rear decorative body 3510, the back-upper rear decorative body 3510 can be seen through the frame of the center gimmick 2500.

According to the back-upper rear performance unit 3500, the back-upper rear decorative body 3510 can be raised and lowered to appear visible from the front, so the appearance of the back-upper rear decorative body 3510 can surprise the player, entertaining the player and preventing a decline in interest. In addition, the back-upper rear decorative body 3510 can be abutted against the back-down rear decorative body 3610 to form one large decoration, making a strong impact on the player and making the player think that their chance has arrived, preventing a decline in interest.

[5-9g. Backstage Production Unit]
Next, the back-down rear performance unit 3600 of the back unit 3000 will be described. The back-down rear performance unit 3600 is provided behind the back-down front performance unit 3400 in the lower part of the back box 3010. The back-down rear performance unit 3600 includes a back-down rear decorative body 3610 (see FIG. 155, etc.) that is long in the left-right direction, a back-down rear decorative board (not shown) that is provided behind the back-down rear decorative body 3610 and has multiple LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a back-down rear lifting unit (not shown) that raises and lowers the back-down rear decorative body 3610.

The rear decorative body 3610 is translucent and can be illuminated by a number of LEDs mounted on the rear decorative board. The rear decorative body 3610 can be raised and lowered between the lowest lowered position and the highest raised position by the rear lifting unit.

The lower back decorative body 3610 is formed in a shape that resembles the lower half of a championship cup, with the character "prize" formed in relief in the center in the left-right direction. The lower back decorative body 3610 can form one large championship cup by abutting the upper back decorative body 3510 at its upper end (see Figure 157, etc.). The lower back decorative body 3610 is approximately the same height as the lower back front decorative body 3410.

In the normal state of the rear-down performance unit 3600, the rear-down decorative body 3610 is located in the lowered position. In this state, the rear-down decorative body 3610 is located behind the front-down decorative body 3410 in the lowered position, and cannot be seen from the front.

When the back-down rear decorative body 3610 is moved to the raised position by the back-down rear lifting unit, the back-down rear performance unit 3600 is located at a height where the upper end of the back-down rear decorative body 3610 is approximately in contact with the lower end of the back-up rear decorative body 3510 in the raised position. When the back-down rear decorative body 3610 is moved upward from the lowered position, it is located in front of the performance display device 1600. In this state, if the back-up front decorative body 3310 or the back-down front decorative body 3410 has not moved in front of the back-down rear decorative body 3610, the back-down rear decorative body 3610 can be seen through the frame of the center role piece 2500.

According to the back-down rear performance unit 3600, the back-down rear decorative body 3610 can be raised and lowered to appear visible from the front, so the appearance of the back-down rear decorative body 3610 can surprise the player, entertaining the player and preventing a decline in interest. In addition, the back-down rear decorative body 3610 can be abutted against the back-up rear decorative body 3510 to form one large decoration, making a strong impact on the player and making the player think that their chance has arrived, preventing a decline in interest.

[5-10. Effects on the game board]
Next, the main effects on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 154 to 159. Figure 154 is a front view of the game board showing the state in which the back-down front decoration of the back-down front performance unit in the back unit and the back-down rear decoration of the back-down rear performance unit in the back unit are moving to the raised position. Figure 155 is a front view of the game board showing the state in which the back-down front decoration of the back-down front performance unit in the back unit has moved to the center of the game area, the back-up rear decoration of the back-up rear performance unit has moved to the top of the back-down front decoration, and the back-down rear decoration of the back-down rear performance unit has moved to the bottom of the back-down front decoration. Figure 156 is a front view of the game board showing the state in which the front left decoration and the front right decoration of the back-down front decoration of the back-down front performance unit in the state of Figure 155 have moved to the open position and the central decoration has appeared.

Also, FIG. 157 is a front view of the game board showing the state in which the back-upper rear decorative body of the back-upper rear performance unit in the back unit has moved to a lowered position, and the back-down rear decorative body of the back-down rear performance unit has risen and abutted against the back-upper rear decorative body. FIG. 158 is a front view of the game board showing the state in which the front-left decorative body and the front-right decorative body of the back-down front decorative body of the back-down front performance unit have moved to the open position and the central decorative body has appeared in the state of FIG. 157. FIG. 159 is a front view of the game board showing the state in which the back-upper front decorative body of the back-upper front performance unit in the back unit has moved to a lowered position, and the back-upper rear decorative body of the back-upper rear performance unit has moved to the rear of the back-upper front decorative body, and the back-down front decorative body of the back-down front performance unit has risen and moved to the lower side of the back-upper front decorative body, and the back-down rear decorative body of the back-down rear performance unit has risen and abutted against the back-upper rear decorative body behind the back-down front decorative body.

In the game board 5 of this embodiment, the front component 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a, the game panel 1100 that defines the rear end side of the game area 5a, the starting port unit 2100, the side unit 2200, the upper left side unit 2300, the lower right unit 2400, the center role 2500, and the gate member 2600 are formed almost entirely transparent, so that in the normal state, as shown in FIG. 142, the rear front peripheral decoration 3201 of the rear front peripheral decoration unit 3200 in the rear unit 3000 located behind the game panel 1100, the rear upper front decoration 3310 of the rear upper front performance unit 3300, and the rear lower front decoration 3410 of the rear lower front performance unit 3400 can be clearly seen through them, and the performance image displayed on the performance display device 1600 can be clearly seen through the frame of the center role 2500.

In more detail, the rear front peripheral decorative body 3201 of the rear front peripheral decorative unit 3200 is arranged in a ring shape along the periphery of the play area 5a, and can be seen through the transparent play panel 1100 and the center role 2500. The rear upper front decorative body 3310 of the rear upper front performance unit 3300 is located above the upper end of the performance display device 1600, at an elevated position where the center in the vertical direction is approximately the same height as the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and most of it can be seen through the frame of the center role 2500, while the remaining part can be seen through the transparent game panel 1100 and the transparent center role 2500.

The lower back front decorative body 3410 of the lower back front performance unit 3400 is located in a lowered position near the bottom end of the performance display device 1600, with the center in the vertical direction being slightly higher than the upper left side unit 2300, and a portion of it can be seen through the frame of the center gimmick 2500, while the remainder can be seen through the transparent game panel 1100 and the transparent center gimmick 2500. The front left decorative body 3413 and front right decorative body 3414 of the lower back front decorative body 3410 are located directly above the stage 2513 of the center gimmick 2500. The performance display device 1600 can be seen well within the frame of the center gimmick 2500 through the square area between the upper back front decorative body 3310 and the lower back front decorative body 3410.

In addition, the back-upper rear decorative body 3510 of the back-upper rear performance unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 is located behind the back-upper front decorative body 3310 and cannot be seen from the front. Also, the back-down rear decorative body 3610 of the back-down rear performance unit 3600 is located behind the back-down front decorative body 3410 and cannot be seen from the front.

Depending on the results of the lottery for the first special pattern or the second special pattern, which is drawn when game ball B is received in first start opening 2004 or second start opening 2005, the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200, back upper front performance unit 3300, back lower front performance unit 3400, back upper rear performance unit 3500, and back lower rear performance unit 3600 of the back unit 3000 perform a predetermined moving performance or light-emitting performance. In addition, the game board 5 performs a performance using game ball B (here, a so-called dead ball that no longer affects the game) in the lower right unit 2400 of the front unit 2000.

Specifically, for example, the back unit 3000 can be used to perform movable performances as shown in Figures 154 to 157. First, as shown in Figure 154, the back-lower front decorative body 3410 of the back-lower front performance unit 3400 and the back-lower rear decorative body 3610 of the back-lower rear performance unit 3600 are moved together to their respective raised positions. This causes the back-lower front decorative body 3410, which crosses the performance display device 1600, to move upwards, cutting across the performance display device 1600, so that the player's attention can be drawn to the back-lower front decorative body 3410, making the player think that something good is going to happen.

Incidentally, in FIG. 154, when only the back-down front decorative body 3410 is moved upward, the back-down rear decorative body 3610 in the lowered position becomes visible from the front. However, since this back-down rear decorative body 3610 is formed to be paired with the back-up rear decorative body 3510, if only the back-down rear decorative body 3610 is visible, it may look incomplete and unnatural, which may deteriorate the appearance of the play area 5a. Also, when the back-down rear decorative body 3610 is visible, its incomplete shape may cause some players to think that it is to be combined with other decorative bodies, and when a joint movable performance with the back-up rear decorative body 3510 described below is performed, the impact on the player may be reduced, and a sufficient performance effect may not be obtained.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the back-down rear decorative body 3610 is moved upward together with the back-down front decorative body 3410, so that the back-down rear decorative body 3610 can remain hidden, preventing the appearance of the play area 5a from being poor and making it difficult to notice the presence of the back-down rear decorative body 3610, allowing the full effect of the joint movable presentation with the back-up rear decorative body 3510 described below to be fully realized.

Next, from the state shown in FIG. 154, as shown in FIG. 155, the back-bottom front decorative body 3410 is moved to the center of the play area. At this time, for the same reason as above, the back-bottom front decorative body 3610 is moved together with the back-bottom front decorative body 3410 so that the back-bottom front decorative body 3410 is positioned forward. In addition, the back-upper rear decorative body 3510 is moved to a position between the back-upper front decorative body 3310 and the back-bottom front decorative body 3410, and the back-down rear decorative body 3610 is moved below the back-down front decorative body 3410.

As a result, the front of the performance display device 1600 is almost completely covered by the back-upper rear decorative body 3510, the back-lower front decorative body 3410, and the back-lower rear decorative body 3610, which creates a strong impact on the player and makes them feel that something good is going to happen. In this state, the back-upper rear decorative body 3510 and the back-lower rear decorative body 3610, which together form one decoration (here, a championship cup), are vertically separated from each other, but because the back-lower front decorative body 3410 is located between them, the player is given the illusion that the middle of the championship cup, which is long vertically, is hidden by the back-lower front decorative body 3410, which helps to avoid an unsightly appearance.

Then, from the state shown in FIG. 155, as shown in FIG. 156, the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 of the back lower front decorative body 3410 are moved from a closed position close to each other to an open position farther apart from each other, causing the central decorative body 3412 to visibly appear between the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414. In this way, the new appearance of the central decorative body 3412 on the back lower front decorative body 3410 strongly makes the player think that a favorable gaming state (for example, a "jackpot" gaming state) in which the player has an advantage will occur, increasing anticipation for the favorable gaming state and preventing a decline in interest.

When the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 are moved to the open position, they may be moved gradually or may be opened and closed repeatedly. This keeps the player on edge and entertained as they wait for the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 to open and reveal the central decorative body 3412.

In the state shown in FIG. 156, the central decorative body 3412 of the lower front decorative body 3410 may be rotated. In this way, the rotation of the central decorative body 3412 can convince the player that a favorable gaming state (e.g., a "jackpot" gaming state) in which the player has an advantage will occur, increasing the player's anticipation for the favorable gaming state and preventing a decline in interest.

Next, from the state shown in FIG. 156, the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 of the back lower front decorative body 3410 are moved to the closed position as shown in FIG. 155, and then, as shown in FIG. 157, the back lower front decorative body 3410 is moved to the lowered position, and the back upper rear decorative body 3510 and the back lower rear decorative body 3610 are each moved to the center in the vertical direction so that they abut (combine) with each other. As a result, a large championship cup appears in the center of the play area 5a, so that the player can be convinced that a favorable play state (for example, a "jackpot" play state) that gives the player an advantage will occur, and the player's expectations for the favorable play state can be increased, preventing a decline in interest.

Then, from the state shown in FIG. 157, the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 of the underside front decorative body 3410 are moved from the closed position to the open position as shown in FIG. 158. This makes it possible to strongly convince the player that a favorable gaming state (e.g., a "jackpot" gaming state) in which the player has an advantage will occur, thereby increasing the player's anticipation for the favorable gaming state and preventing a decline in interest.

In the state shown in FIG. 158, the central decorative body 3412 of the lower front decorative body 3410 may be rotated. This allows the player to recognize that a favorable gaming state (e.g., a "jackpot" gaming state) in which the player has an advantage has occurred, increasing the player's anticipation for the favorable gaming state and preventing a decline in interest.

In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 154, the first action is to move the back-upper front decorative body 3410 (back-down rear decorative body 3610) to the raised position, but this is not limited to this. For example, as shown in FIG. 159, the back-upper front decorative body 3310 may be moved to the lower position, and the back-upper rear decorative body 3510 may be moved to the rear of the back-upper front decorative body 3310 together with the back-upper front decorative body 3310, and the back-down front decorative body 3410 may be moved to the lower side of the back-upper front decorative body 3310, and the back-down rear decorative body 3610 may be moved to the rear of the back-down front decorative body 3410 together with the back-down front decorative body 3410. Alternatively, the back-down front decorative body 3410 may be moved to the center of the play area 5a together with the back-down rear decorative body 3610. These actions can also produce the same effects as those described above.

In this way, on the game board 5 of this embodiment, the series of effects as described above are executed according to the lottery results of the first special symbol and the second special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting hole 2004 and the second starting hole 2005, respectively, and can be entertaining for the player. Also, the series of effects progresses to the end or ends midway depending on the lottery results of the first special symbol and the second special symbol drawn, and by showing it in multiple stages, it is less likely that the player will tire of it.

In addition, in the game board 5 of this embodiment, the movable effects described above can be appropriately combined with light-emitting effects, and can also be combined with effect images (display effects) displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600. As a result, by appropriately combining light-emitting effects, display effects, etc., a variety of patterns of effects can be presented to the player, making it difficult for the player to become bored, and the player can be entertained by various effects, preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, in the game board 5 of this embodiment, the above-mentioned moving effects are executed in response to the lottery results of the first special pattern and the second special pattern drawn by the reception of the game ball B into the first starting hole 2004 and the second starting hole 2005, but this is not limited to this, and they may be executed in response to the detection of the game ball B by the pseudo big prize opening sensor 2403. This allows the player to enjoy the moving effects even during a favorable game state (for example, a "big win" game state) that gives the player an advantage, making it difficult for the player to become bored and preventing a decline in interest.

6. Control Configuration
Next, the control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 160 and the like. FIG. 160 is a block diagram showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine in outline. The main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4, as shown in the figure, and each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls the game operation (progress of the game). The peripheral control board 1510 is equipped with a peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 1310, and a performance display control unit 1512 that controls the display of performance images on the performance display device 1600 based on commands from the peripheral control unit 1511. The payout control board 633 is equipped with a payout control unit 633a that controls the payout of the game ball B, and a launch control unit 633b that controls the launch of the game ball B by rotating the handle 195.

[6-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game is not shown in detail, but includes a main control MPU 1310a, which is a microprocessor that includes a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands and a RAM that temporarily stores data, a main control I/O port as an input/output device (I/O device), a main control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, a main control solenoid drive circuit for driving various solenoids, a RAM clear switch for completely erasing information stored in the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a, a setting display 1310g for displaying setting values and displaying errors, and a base monitor 1310h for displaying the number of game balls B collected by the outlet 1008 provided in the game area 5a partitioned and formed on the game board 5. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the main control MPU 1310a also includes a watchdog timer that monitors its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud.

The main control MPU 1310a has built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") and built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"), as well as a watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in WDT") that monitors its operation (system) and functions to prevent fraud.

The main control MPU 1310a also has built-in non-volatile RAM. This non-volatile RAM pre-stores a unique ID code that is assigned a unique code (a code that exists only once in the world) by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a to identify the individual. Once this ID code is assigned, it cannot be rewritten even using an external device, as it is stored in the non-volatile RAM. The main control MPU 1310a is capable of retrieving the ID code from the non-volatile RAM and referencing it.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a also has a built-in circuit that is forcibly reset by hardware when it is affected by electrical noise (hereinafter referred to as the "built-in reset circuit"). The built-in reset circuit monitors the contents of a specified register of the main control MPU 1310a, and if the register changes to an inconsistent content, it forcibly resets the main control MPU 1310a as being affected by electrical noise. Such a forced reset by the built-in reset circuit cannot be disabled by controlling it with a user program. For this reason, when the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, it is reset without executing the main control side power off processing described later, and the main control side power on processing described later is executed again. In this case, since the main control side power off processing is not executed, as described later, a checksum (sum value) error will always occur in the main control built-in RAM, and the contents of the main control built-in RAM will be completely erased (cleared). Furthermore, even if the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the built-in reset circuit of the main control MPU 1310a does not output a reset signal to the dispensing control board 633, so only the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) is restarted, and the dispensing control board 633 remains in an activated state.

The main control MPU 1310a also has a built-in hardware random number circuit (hereinafter referred to as the "main control built-in hardware random number circuit") that uses hardware to update the jackpot determination random numbers used to determine whether or not a jackpot game should be generated, among various random numbers related to the game. This main control built-in hardware random number circuit generates random numbers within a predetermined numerical range (in this embodiment, a numerical range of 0 as the minimum value and 65535 as the maximum value is preset), and is configured so that the predetermined value is not fixed as the initial value (i.e., the initial value is not fixed), and a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit first selects one value within a predetermined numerical range as the initial value, and then rapidly extracts other values within the predetermined numerical range without overlapping based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a (the clock signal output from a crystal oscillator (not shown) provided separately from the main control MPU 1310a), and when all values within the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, it again extracts one value within the predetermined numerical range, and rapidly extracts other values within the predetermined numerical range without overlapping based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. The main control built-in hard random number circuit repeatedly performs such rapid lottery selection, and the main control MPU 1310a sets the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time when it obtains the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit as the random number for determining a jackpot.

The main control input circuit does not have a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information input to its various input terminals, which are detection signals from the various sensors, and does not have a reset function. For this reason, the main control input circuit is configured as a circuit that does not receive a system reset signal from a main control system reset (not shown). In other words, the main control input circuit is configured as a circuit in which information based on detection signals from the various sensors input to its various input terminals is not reset by a main control system reset, and various signals based on that information are output from its various output terminals.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 detects a game ball B received in the first start port 2004, a second start port sensor 2401 detects a game ball B received in the second start port 2005, a general prize port sensor 3001 detects a game ball B received in the general prize port 2001, a gate sensor 2601 detects a game ball B that has passed through the gate 2002, and a game ball B received in the first large prize port 2006. Detection signals from the first large prize opening sensor 2525, the second large prize opening sensor 2561 that detects the game ball B received in the second large prize opening 2007, the out sensor 664 that detects the game ball B discharged from the game board 5, the magnetic sensor 1050 that detects illegal magnetism within the game area 5a, and the vibration sensor that detects vibrations acting on the game board 5, etc., are input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

In addition, the detection signals from the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switching button 1311b provided on the setting change board 1311 are input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

The detection signal from the door frame opening switch and the detection signal from the main frame opening switch are input to the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 633 (i.e., directly, without passing through the dispensing control input circuit and dispensing control output circuit described below), and are then input to the input terminals of the specified input ports of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

The detection signals from the out sensor 664, the first start opening sensor 3002, and the second start opening sensor 2401 are input directly to the main control board 1310, without going through other boards, and are input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit. In contrast, the detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the gate sensor 2601, the first large winning opening sensor 2525, the second large winning opening sensor 2561, the magnetic sensor 1050, and the vibration sensor are input indirectly to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board, and are input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a control signal from the output terminal of its specified output port to the main control solenoid drive circuit, thereby outputting the respective drive signals from the main control solenoid drive circuit to the variable winning port solenoid 2522, the first large winning port solenoid 2524, and the second large winning port solenoid 2563 via the panel relay board, i.e. indirectly, or outputting the respective drive signals from the output terminal of its specified output port to the status indicator, normal pattern indicator, normal reserve indicator, first special pattern indicator, first special reserve number indicator, second special pattern indicator, second special reserve number indicator, and round indicator of the function display unit 1400 directly, i.e. without going through other boards. Also, based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of its specified output port to the setting change permission lamp 1311c of the setting change board 1311.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information related to the game (game information) to the payout control board 633 by outputting various information related to the game (game information) from the output terminal of the specified output port, outputs a signal (power failure clear signal) to the power failure monitoring circuit by outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) from the output terminal of the specified output port, and outputs a launch permission signal that conveys permission to launch game ball B from the output terminal of the specified output port to the payout control board 633. The logic of this launch permission signal that conveys permission to launch is set to launch permission logic when launch is permitted, and is set to launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) that is the inverse of the launch permission logic when launch is not permitted. The logic of the firing permission signal is configured by hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function so that the initial value (default) is set to firing stop logic (firing non-permission logic) which is the inversion of the firing permission logic from when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (when power is restored) until the firing permission signal setting process in the main control timer interrupt process described below is started.

In this embodiment, the first start opening sensor 3002, the second start opening sensor 2401, the variable winning opening sensor 2526, the gate sensor 2601, the first large winning opening sensor 2525, the second large winning opening sensor 2561, and the out sensor 664 use non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switches, whereas the general winning opening sensor 3001 uses a contact type ON/OFF operation mechanical switch. This is because the game ball B frequently enters or passes through the first start opening 2004, the second start opening 2005, the variable winning opening 2003, and the gate 2002, so the first start opening sensor 3002, the second start opening sensor 2401, and the gate sensor 2601 also frequently detect the game ball B. For this reason, the first start opening sensor 3002, the second start opening sensor 2401, the variable winning opening sensor 2526, and the gate sensor 2601 use proximity switches that are highly durable and have a long lifespan.

In addition, when a favorable game state (such as a "jackpot" game) occurs that is advantageous to the player, the first large winning hole 2006 is opened and the game ball B enters the hole frequently, so the first large winning hole sensor 2525 also frequently detects the game ball B. For this reason, a proximity switch with high durability and a long life is used for the first large winning hole sensor 2525. In addition, since the game ball B shot into the game area 5a is collected in large quantities by the out hole 1008 provided in the game area 5a that is partitioned and formed on the game board 5, the out sensor 664 also frequently detects the game ball B. For this reason, a proximity switch with high durability and a long life is used for the out sensor 664. In contrast, the general winning hole 2001, into which the game ball B does not enter frequently, is not frequently detected by the general winning hole sensor 3001. For this reason, a mechanical switch with a shorter life than a proximity switch is used for the general winning hole sensor 3001. Furthermore, regardless of whether game balls B frequently enter the general winning hole 2001, a highly durable and long-life proximity switch may be used.

The main control MPU 1310a also transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payouts to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to the control of game presentations and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I/O port. Note that, when the main control MPU 1310a receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633, which will be described in detail later, it formats these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 1511.

The main control board 1310 is supplied with various voltages from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, which will be described in detail later. The power supply board 630, which supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310, is equipped with an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as "capacitor") as a backup power source to supply power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined period of time even when the power is cut off. This capacitor allows the main control MPU 1310a to store various information in RAM during power off processing even when the power is cut off. This stored information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of this RAM clear switch is also output to the dispensing control board 633.

The main control board 1310 is also provided with a power outage monitoring circuit. This power outage monitoring circuit monitors drops in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 630, and when these voltages fall below the power outage warning voltage, it outputs a power outage warning signal as a power outage warning. This power outage warning signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a via the main control I/O port, and is also output to the dispensing control board 633, etc.

[6-2. Dispensing control board]
The payout control board 633, which controls the payout of game balls B, is equipped with a payout control unit 633a which performs various controls related to payout, a launch control unit 633b which controls launch using the launch solenoid 542 and controls ball supply using the ball supply solenoid 145, an error LED indicator which displays the status of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch having a push operation unit for releasing an error displayed on the error LED indicator, and a ball removal switch which, during maintenance, discharges the game balls B in the ball tank 552, tank rail 553, ball guidance unit 570, and payout device 580 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (upper tray 201) and initiates the ball removal operation.

[6-2a. Dispensing control unit]
The dispensing control unit 633a, which performs various controls related to dispensing in the dispensing control board 633, is equipped with a dispensing control MPU, which is a microprocessor with built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands and RAM for temporarily storing data, a dispensing control I/O port as an I/O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether the dispensing control MPU is operating normally, a dispensing motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the dispensing motor 584 of the dispensing device 580, and a dispensing control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to dispensing are input. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the dispensing control MPU also has built-in functions for preventing fraud.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 in a serial manner via the payout control I/O port, and receives the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from the main control board 1310 via the payout control I/O port. In addition, it also receives detection signals from the full tank detection sensor 154, the ball out detection sensor 574, the payout detection sensor 591, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590.

The detection signals from the ball out detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570, the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input to the payout control input circuit and input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I/O port.

In addition, the detection signals from the door frame opening switch, which detects the opening of the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 4, and the main frame opening switch, which detects the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, are input to the dispensing control input circuit and input to the dispensing control MPU via the dispensing control I/O port.

In addition, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the fall cover unit 150, the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 of the dispensing device 580, the detection signal from the dispensing detection sensor 591 of the dispensing device 580, the power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310, and the error release signal from the error release switch are input to a specified input port of the dispensing control MPU via the dispensing control input circuit.

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 to the payout motor 584 via the payout control I/O, outputs a signal for displaying the status of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED indicator to the error LED indicator via the payout control I/O port, transmits commands for indicating the status of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310 in a serial manner via the payout control I/O port, and outputs the number of game balls B actually paid out to the external terminal board 558 via the payout control I/O port. This external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the gaming hall side. This hall computer monitors the player's play by grasping the number of game balls B paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and game information of the pachinko machine 1, etc.

The error LED display (not shown) is a segment display that displays alphanumeric characters, figures, etc. to indicate the status of the pachinko machine 1. The error LED display may display and notify the user of the following: For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it notifies that it is "normal", when the number "0" is displayed, it notifies that it is a "connection abnormality" (specifically, that an abnormality has occurred in the electrical connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633), when the number "1" is displayed, it notifies that it is a "ball out" (specifically, that there is no game ball B in the payout device 580 based on the detection signal from the ball out detection sensor 574), when the number "2" is displayed, it notifies that it is a "ball stuck" (specifically, that a game ball B is stuck between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589 based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, making it difficult for the payout blade 589 to rotate), and when the number "3" is displayed, it notifies that it is a "counting switch error" (specifically, that the payout detection sensor 59 When the number "5" is displayed, it indicates a "retry error" (specifically, the number of retries for the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit). When the number "6" is displayed, it indicates a "full" state (specifically, the tank is full with game balls B stored in the fault cover unit 150 based on a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154). When the number "7" is displayed, it indicates a "CR not connected" state (the electrical connection has been cut somewhere between the payout control board 633 and the CR unit). When the number "9" is displayed, it indicates a "stocking" state (specifically, the number of game balls B that have not yet been paid out has reached a preset number).

The ball loan request signal for game ball B from the ball loan button 224 and the prepaid card return request signal from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit serially transmits a signal specifying the number of game balls B to be loaned in accordance with the ball loan request signal to the payout control board 633, and this signal is received by the payout control I/O port and input to the payout control MPU. The CR unit also updates the remaining balance of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of game balls B loaned, and outputs a display signal of the remaining balance to the ball loan operation unit 220, and this signal is input to the ball loan display section 226 of the ball loan operation unit 220 and displayed.

[6-2b. Launch control section]
The launch control unit 633b performs launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and ball delivery control by the ball delivery solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the launch control unit 633b includes a launch control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to launch are input, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular intervals, a launch timing control circuit that outputs a launch reference pulse for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a based on this clock signal, a launch solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the launch solenoid 542 based on this launch reference pulse, and a ball delivery solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball delivery solenoid 145 based on the launch reference pulse. The launch timing control circuit generates a launch reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit so that 100 game balls B are launched per minute toward the game area 5a and outputs it to the launch solenoid drive circuit, and also generates a ball delivery reference pulse that is a predetermined number times the launch reference pulse and outputs it to the ball delivery solenoid drive circuit.

In relation to the handle unit 180, the detection signals from the handle touch sensor 192, which detects whether the palm or fingers are touching the handle 195, and the single button operation sensor 194, which detects whether the player will forcibly stop shooting the game ball B, are input to the launch control input circuit and then to the launch timing control circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board are electrically connected, the detection signals are input to the launch control input circuit as a CR connection signal and then to the launch timing control circuit. The launch permission signal from the main control board 1310, which conveys permission to shoot the game ball B, is input to the launch control input circuit and then to the launch timing control circuit. The signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, which electrically adjusts the strength with which the game ball B is shot toward the play area 5a according to the rotation position of the handle 195, is input to the launch solenoid drive circuit.

Unless launch condition 1 is met, that is, the palm or fingers are touching the handle 195 based on a detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192, launch condition 2 is met, that the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board are electrically connected based on a CR connection signal, and launch condition 3 is met, that the launch of game ball B is permitted based on a launch permission signal from the main control board 1310, the launch timing control circuit will not output a launch reference pulse to launch game ball B toward the play area 5a. For example, the launch solenoid drive circuit will not output a drive signal to the launch solenoid 542 and game ball B cannot be launched.

Based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the launch solenoid drive circuit outputs a drive current to the launch solenoid 542 to launch the game ball B toward the game area 5a with a launch strength corresponding to the rotation position of the handle 195, triggered by the input of the launch reference pulse. On the other hand, the ball delivery solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball delivery solenoid 145, triggered by the input of the ball delivery reference pulse, to receive one game ball B stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 into the ball delivery unit 140, and sends the received game ball B to the ball launch device 540 by stopping the output of the constant current, triggered by the end of the input of the ball delivery reference pulse. In this way, the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit to the launch solenoid 542 is variably controlled, while the drive current output from the ball delivery solenoid drive circuit to the ball delivery solenoid 145 is controlled to be constant.

In this embodiment, the launch control unit 633b, which controls launch by the launch solenoid 542 and ball delivery by the ball delivery solenoid 145, is provided on the payout control board 633, but it may also be configured to be provided on the power supply board 630. In this case, the launch permission signal from the main control board 1310 may be configured to be input directly to the power supply board 630, or may be input to the power supply board 630 via the payout control board 633, or may be input to the power supply board 630 via a relay board (not shown).

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 160, the peripheral control board 1510 is equipped with a peripheral control unit 1511 that controls the performance based on commands from the main control board 1310, and a performance display control unit 1512 that controls the drawing of the performance display device 1600 based on control data from this peripheral control unit 1511.

[6-3a. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1511 which controls the performance on the peripheral control board 1510, although detailed illustration is omitted, is equipped with a peripheral control IC in which a CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, SATA controller, and various I/O interfaces are integrated onto a single semiconductor chip, a peripheral control ROM which stores various processing programs and various commands, a sound source IC which produces high-quality sound, and a sound ROM which stores sound information such as music, voice, and sound effects referenced by the sound source IC.

The peripheral control IC has multiple parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc. integrated on a single semiconductor chip, and when it receives various commands from the main control board 1310, the CPU of the peripheral control IC transmits game board side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, flashing signals, or gradation lighting signals to the color LEDs, etc., provided on each decorative board of the game board 5 from the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board to each decorative board of the game board 5 based on these various commands, and transmits game board side drive data for outputting drive signals to the drive motors that operate the various presentation units provided on the game board 5 from the serial I/O port for the game board decoration drive board to the drive motor or drive solenoid of the game board 5. The door side drive light emission data, which is composed of door side drive data for outputting drive signals to the vibration motor 356, operation button lift drive motor 367, and protrusion force adjustment drive motor 381, etc., provided on the door frame 3, and door side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, flashing signals, or gradation lighting signals to the color LEDs, etc., provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3, is transmitted from the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive board to the door frame 3 side, control data (display commands) indicating the screen to be displayed on the performance display device 1600 is transmitted from the serial I/O port for the display control unit to the performance display control unit 1512, and a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM is output to the sound source IC.

The detection signals from the contact detection sensor body 358, the pressure detection sensor 373, the lift detection sensor 374, and the protrusion force detection sensor 375 of the performance operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control IC.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC also receives a signal (operation signal) from the performance display control unit 1512 indicating that the performance display control unit 1512 is operating normally, and monitors the operation of the performance display control unit 1512 based on this operation signal.

The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on control data (sound commands) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, and controls the top center speaker, top side speaker, and main frame speaker 622 of the main frame 4, etc., which are provided on the door frame 3 and main frame 4, so that music and sound effects corresponding to various performances are played. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch protruding backward from the peripheral control board box in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed. In this embodiment, by sending audio signals (e.g., 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo signal, 2.1ch surround signal, or 4.1ch surround signal, etc.) as sound information to the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main frame speaker 622 for low tones on the main frame 4, it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound performance) than before.

In addition to the built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built into the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the peripheral control unit 1511 also has an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown), and the CPU of the peripheral control IC uses the built-in WDT and the external WDT together to diagnose whether its own system is out of control.

The display commands output from the CPU of this peripheral control IC to the performance display control unit 1512 are sent via a serial input/output port, and in this embodiment, the bit rate (the amount of data that can be sent per unit time) is set to 19.2 kilobits per second (bps). On the other hand, the initial data, door frame side light flashing command, game board side light flashing command, movable body drive command, etc., output from the CPU of the peripheral control IC to the game board 5 side are sent via multiple serial input/output ports different from the display commands, and in this embodiment, the bit rate is set to 250 kbps.

[6-3b. Performance display control unit]
The performance display control unit 1512 controls the drawing of the performance display device 1600. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the performance display control unit 1512 includes a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data, a VDP (short for Video Display Processor) that controls the display of the performance display device 1600, an image ROM that stores various data of the screen displayed on the performance display device 1600, and an image RAM to which the various data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied.

This display control MPU has built-in parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc., and controls the VDP based on control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to control the drawing of the performance display device 1600. When the display control MPU is operating normally, it outputs an operation signal to the peripheral control unit 1511 to inform the same. The display control MPU also receives an execution signal from the VDP, and performs interrupt processing when the output of this execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

The display control ROM stores a variety of programs for generating screens to be drawn on the performance display device 1600, as well as schedule data corresponding to control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511, and non-resident area transfer schedule data corresponding to the control data (display commands). The schedule data is configured by chronologically arranging screen data that specifies the screen configuration, and specifies the order in which the screens are drawn on the performance display device 1600. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by chronologically arranging non-resident area transfer data that specifies the order in which the various data stored in the image ROM is transferred to the non-resident area of the image RAM. This non-resident area transfer data specifies the order in which the various data are transferred from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in advance for the screen data to be drawn on the performance display device 1600 according to the progress of the schedule data.

The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP, and then extracts the screen data following the first screen data from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in chronological order in the schedule data one by one from the display control ROM, starting from the first screen data, and outputs it to the VDP.

When the VDP receives screen data output from the display control MPU, it extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data, generates drawing data to be displayed on the performance display device 1600, and outputs this generated drawing data to the performance display device 1600. When the performance display device 1600 does not accept screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an execution signal to the display control MPU to inform the display device 1600 of this. The VDP uses a line buffer system. This "line buffer system" is a system in which one line's worth of drawing data that draws the left and right directions of the performance display device 1600 is stored in a line buffer, and the one line's worth of drawing data stored in the line buffer is output to the performance display device 1600.

The image ROM stores a large amount of sprite data, and its capacity is large. When the capacity of the image ROM becomes large, that is, when the number of sprites to be drawn on the performance display device 1600 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored, and this affects the speed at which data is drawn on the performance display device 1600. Therefore, in this embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM, which has a fast access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from this image RAM. Note that the sprite data is the base data, which is the data before the sprite is expanded into bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

Now, to explain what a "sprite" is, a "sprite" is an image that is displayed as a unit on the performance display device 1600. For example, when displaying various people (characters) on the performance display device 1600, the data for drawing each person is called a "sprite." As a result, when displaying multiple people on the performance display device 1600, multiple sprites are used. In addition to people, the houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be treated as a single sprite. These sprites are drawn on the performance display device 1600 after their placement on the screen and their hierarchical relationship when sprites overlap (hereinafter referred to as the "sprite overlapping order") are set.

A sprite is made up of multiple rectangular areas of 64 pixels each. The data used to draw these rectangular areas is called a "sprite character." Small sprites can be represented using one sprite character, while relatively large sprites such as people can be represented using a total of six sprite characters arranged, for example, 2 x 3. Even larger sprites such as backgrounds can be represented using even more sprite characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be specified arbitrarily for each sprite.

The performance display device 1600 is driven by a main scan that sets the display state of each pixel in one direction along the pixels, from left to right when viewed from the front, and a sub-scan that repeats the main scan in a direction that intersects with the one direction. When the performance display device 1600 receives one line of drawing data output from the performance display control unit 1512, it outputs the data to each of the pixels in one line in a main scan from left to right when viewed from the front of the performance display device 1600. When the output of one line is completed, the performance display device 1600 moves to the line directly below as a sub-scan, and when the drawing data for the next line is input in the same way, it outputs the data to each of the pixels in one line in a main scan from left to right when viewed from the front of the performance display device 1600 based on the drawing data for the next line.

[7. Game Contents]
The game contents of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 145 to 147. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the player rotates the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 arranged in the lower right corner of the front of the door frame 3, and the game ball B stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 is shot into the upper part of the game area 5a through between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5, and a game with the game ball B is started. The game ball B shot into the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center role 2500 depending on the shooting strength. The shooting strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the rotation amount of the handle 195, and the more it is rotated clockwise, the stronger the ball can be shot, and a maximum of 100 game balls B can be shot continuously in one minute, that is, at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

In addition, within the game area 5a, multiple obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions on the front of the game panel 1100, and when the game ball B comes into contact with the obstacle nails N, the flow speed of the game ball B is suppressed and various movements are imparted to the game ball B, allowing the player to enjoy its movements. In addition to the obstacle nails N, within the game area 5a, a windmill W that rotates when the game ball B comes into contact with it is provided above the upper left side unit 2300 and to the left of the center role 2500.

When a game ball B is shot into the top of the center role 2500 and enters the left side of the highest part of the outer periphery of the center role 2500 as viewed from the front, it will come into contact with multiple obstacle nails N and flow through either the left first guide passage 2531 or the left second guide passage 2532 of the left guide passage group 2530 of the center role 2500. Near the entrance of the left second guide passage 2532, there is a first large prize opening 2006 that is normally closed by the first large prize opening door 2523 to prevent it from being accepted, and the game ball B that enters the left second guide passage 2532 rolls and flows down on the first large prize opening door 2523.

The game ball B that has flowed through the left guide passage group 2530 is released above the gate 2002, and after hitting a number of obstacle nails N planted between the left guide passage group 2530 and the gate 2002 on the left and right sides of the variable winning opening 2003, which is normally closed by the variable winning opening door 2521, there is a certain probability that the ball will pass through the gate 2002.

When game ball B passes through this gate 2002 and is detected by gate sensor 2601, a normal lottery is held on main control board 1310, and if the lottery result for the normal symbol drawn is a "normal win," variable winning port 2003, which is closed by variable winning port door 2521, opens for a predetermined time (e.g., 0.3 to 10 seconds), allowing game ball B to be accepted into variable winning port 2003.

In this embodiment, the variable winning opening 2003 is provided in a position close to the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center device 2500, so there is a higher probability that the ball will be accepted by the variable winning opening 2003 if it is circulated through the left second guide passage 2532 rather than the left first guide passage 2531. Then, when a game ball B is accepted by the variable winning opening 2003, a predetermined number (e.g., 1 to 5 balls) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633.

In this embodiment, in the normal lottery that is performed when game ball B passes through gate 2002, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery to the indication of the lottery result for the normal pattern (for example, 0.01 to 60 seconds, also called the normal variable time). This indication of the lottery result for the normal pattern is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The variable winning port 2003 opens after the normal variable time has elapsed.

If game ball B passes through gate 2002 between the time when game ball B passes through gate 2002 and the time when the lottery result for the normal pattern is suggested, the suggestion of the lottery result for the normal pattern cannot begin, so the start of the suggestion of the lottery result for the normal pattern is reserved until the previous suggestion of the lottery result for the normal pattern has ended. Also, the number of reserved lottery results for the normal pattern is limited to four, and any more than this are discarded rather than reserved, even if game ball B passes through gate 2002. This prevents the burden on the game hall from increasing due to the accumulation of reserved results.

At the location of this gate 2002, game ball B flows down either the gate 2002, the outer left side of gate 2002, or the outer right side of gate 2002. Game ball B that flows down below gate 2002 enters warp entrance 2511 that opens into the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center device 2500. In this embodiment, due to multiple obstacle nails N planted in the area between gate 2002 and windmill W, game ball B that passes through the outer right side of gate 2002 enters warp entrance 2511 with a high probability.

Then, game ball B that enters the warp entrance 2511 is supplied to stage 2513 from warp exit 2512. Game ball B supplied to stage 2513 rolls back and forth on stage 2513 and is released forward from the center in the left-right direction. When game ball B is released into game area 5a from central release section 2513a in the center of stage 2513, there is a high probability that it will be accepted by first starting opening 2004, since central release section 2513a is located directly above first starting opening 2004.

When a game ball B is received in the first starting hole 2004, a predetermined number (e.g., three) of game balls B are dispensed from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, and the main control board 1310 draws a lottery for a first special symbol (e.g., "miss," "small hit," "2R jackpot," "5R jackpot," "15R jackpot," "probability change (probability change) hit," "time reduction (time reduction) hit," "probability change time reduction hit," "probability change without time reduction hit," "second jackpot," etc.). If the result of the lottery for the first special symbol drawn is anything other than "miss," a favorable game state in which the player is advantageous is generated. The result of the lottery for the first special symbol drawn is then suggested to the player over a predetermined time period (e.g., 0.1 to 360 seconds, also called the special change time).

In this embodiment, if a game ball B is received by the first starting port 2004 during the period from the start of the special lottery due to the reception of a game ball B by the first starting port 2004 until the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn is suggested (special variable time), the suggestion of the lottery result of the first special symbol cannot start, so the start of the suggestion of the lottery result of the first special symbol is suspended until the suggestion of the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn earlier is completed. The number of reserved lottery results of the first special symbol that are reserved is limited to four for each first starting port 2004, and for any more than this, the lottery result of the first special symbol is not reserved but discarded even if a game ball B is received by the first starting port 2004. This prevents the burden on the game hall from increasing due to the accumulation of reserved results.

The game ball B released into the game area 5a from the stage 2513 of the center device 2500 may be received by the first starting hole 2004 of the starting hole unit 2100.

If the game ball B that flows down to the left side of the center device 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2511, it may be pushed toward the center in the left-right direction by the shelf 2301 of the upper left side unit 2300 or the obstacle nails N, and may be accepted into the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200, or the first starting opening 2004 of the starting opening unit 2100, etc. Then, when the game ball B is accepted into the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633.

On the other hand, when a game ball B is shot into the upper part of the center device 2500 in the play area 5a and enters to the right of the highest part of the peripheral wall part 2501 of the center device 2500, it passes through either the right first guide passage 2541 or the right second guide passage 2542 of the right guide passage group 2540 of the center device 2500, and is released into the space forming part 2550 in which the specific obstacle nail group 2700 is planted.

The right guide passage group 2540 of the center role 2500 is composed of a right first guide passage 2541 whose entrance opens near the impact stopper 1006, and a right second guide passage 2542 whose entrance opens at a distance to the left of the entrance of the right first guide passage 2541. As a result, if the game ball B is hit with enough strength to hit the impact stopper 1006 (so-called right hit), it will enter the right first guide passage 2541, and if the game ball B is hit with enough strength not to hit the impact stopper 1006 (somewhat weaker strength than right hit), it will enter the right second guide passage 2542 with a high probability. In other words, the game ball B hit to the upper right side of the center role 2500 will flow through either the right first guide passage 2541 or the right second guide passage 2542 depending on the hitting strength.

In this embodiment, the game ball B that has flowed through the right first guide passage 2541 is released into the first guide area 2711 of the specific obstacle nail group 2700, and the game ball B that has flowed through the right second guide passage 2542 is released into the second guide area 2712 of the specific obstacle nail group 2700.

The game ball B released into the specific obstacle nail group 2700 flows down while meandering left and right along the guidance area 2710. As a result, the flow speed of the game ball B is suppressed in the area of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 compared to the normal area.

In the first induction area 2711 and the second induction area 2712, the game ball B may deviate from the induction area 2710, and if it deviates from the second induction area 2712 to the right, there is a high probability that it will be accepted by the first sub-outlet 2021 located below. If the game ball B is accepted by the first sub-outlet 2021, it is discharged outside the game area 5a without having the opportunity to be accepted by the second large prize opening 2007 or the second starting opening 2005 located downstream.

In this embodiment, the ball is configured to be accepted by the first sub-outlet 2021 with a higher probability if it is circulated through the right second guide passage 2542 rather than the right first guide passage 2541. This allows the player to perform an operation to shoot the game ball B so that the game ball B flows through the right first guide passage 2541 during a "right hit". In other words, during a "right hit", the player is prompted to perform an operation to rotate the handle 195 greatly so that the game ball B is shot with enough strength to abut against the impact stopper 1006, making it easier to enjoy the original gameplay of the pachinko machine 1 with a relatively easy shooting operation.

The game ball B that circulates through the specific obstacle nail group 2700 (space forming portion 2550) and cannot be received by the first sub-out port 2021 passes between the guide wall portion 2552 and the attacca right wall portion 2567 and enters the second attacca portion 2560. In a normal state, the second large prize winning port 2007 provided in the second attacca portion 2560 is closed by the second large prize winning port door 2562 so that it cannot receive the game ball B. Therefore, the game ball B that passes between the guide wall portion 2552 and the attacca right wall portion 2567 flows down onto the second large prize winning port door 2562, rolls to the left on the second large prize winning port door 2562 (attacca passage 2564), and is then released downward from the second attacca portion 2560 through the right release passage 2565.

The second starting port 2005 is provided below the right release passage 2565, and the second sub-outlet 2022 is provided to the right of the second starting port 2005, and the inclined wall portion 2418 of the right lower unit 2400 is provided to the left of the second starting port 2005. In addition, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted between the outlet of the right release passage 2565 and the second starting port 2005, the second sub-outlet 2022, and the inclined wall portion 2418. Therefore, the game ball B released downward from the right release passage 2565 is received by the second starting port 2005 with a certain probability. In addition, the game ball B released downward from the right release passage 2565 is received by the second sub-outlet 2022 with a lower probability than the second starting port 2005. The game ball B received by the second sub-outlet 2022 is discharged outside the game area 5a.

Then, the game ball B that is released downward from the right release passage 2565 and is not received by the second starting port 2005 or the second sub-outlet 2022 flows down onto the inclined wall portion 2418, rolls diagonally downward and to the left along the inclination of the inclined wall portion 2418, and is released to the left at a position below the first starting port 2004 and is received by the outlet port 1008.

In other words, under normal conditions, when game ball B is shot to the right side of the center device 2500 ("right hit"), only the second starting port 2005 has the opportunity to receive game ball B. This allows the player to actively perform a shooting operation that causes game ball B to circulate on the left side of the center device 2500 under normal conditions, and also gives a sense of premium to the right side of the center device 2500 ("right hit").

When the game ball B shot into the right side of the center device 2500 is received by the second starting hole 2005, a predetermined number (e.g., 1) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, and the main control board 1310 draws a lottery for a second special pattern (e.g., "miss," "small hit," "2R jackpot," "5R jackpot," "15R jackpot," "probability change (changed probability) hit," "time reduction (time reduction) hit," "probability change time reduction hit," "probability change without time reduction," "second jackpot," etc.). If the result of the lottery for the drawn second special pattern is anything other than "miss," a favorable game state in which the player is at an advantage is created. The result of the drawing of the second special symbol during the non-time-saving state is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (e.g., 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as the special variation time) that is longer than the variation time of the drawing result of the first special symbol. On the other hand, in the time-saving state, both the variation time of the drawing result of the first special symbol and the variation time of the second special symbol are shortened compared to the non-time-saving state, and the result of the drawing of the second special symbol during the time-saving state is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (e.g., 0.1 to 10 seconds) that is shorter than the variation time of the drawing result of the first special symbol. In this way, in the non-time-saving state, the variation time of the first special symbol, which is mainly displayed as a variable, is a predetermined time shorter than that of the second special symbol, and in the time-saving state, the variation time of the second special symbol, which is mainly displayed as a variable, is a variable time shorter than that of the first special symbol.

In this embodiment, if a game ball B is received by the second starting port 2005 during the period from the start of the special lottery due to the reception of a game ball B by the second starting port 2005 until the lottery result of the drawn second special symbol is suggested (special fluctuation time), the suggestion of the lottery result of the second special symbol cannot start, so the start of the suggestion of the lottery result of the second special symbol is suspended until the suggestion of the lottery result of the previously drawn second special symbol is completed. The number of reserved lottery results of the second special symbol that are reserved is limited to four for each second starting port 2005, and for any more than this, the lottery result of the second special symbol is not reserved but discarded even if a game ball B is received by the second starting port 2005. This prevents the burden on the game hall from increasing due to the accumulation of reserved results.

The special variation time of the lottery result of the second special pattern drawn by the reception of the game ball B into the second starting hole 2005 is set longer than the special variation time of the lottery result of the first special pattern drawn by the reception of the game ball B into the first starting hole 2004. As a result, since it takes longer to consume the reserved number of the lottery result of the second special pattern, even if the number of game balls B received per unit time for the first starting hole 2004 and the second starting hole 2005 is the same, the number of lottery results of the second special pattern executed by the second starting hole 2005 is smaller. Therefore, even if the game ball B is shot into the right side of the center role 2500 in a normal state, there is a possibility that only the second starting hole 2005 will be accepted, and the frequency of the lottery result of the second special pattern being executed is low, so that the player can be actively made to perform a shooting operation such that the game ball B circulates on the left side of the center role 2500.

As described above, depending on the result of the drawing for the first special pattern or the result of the drawing for the second special pattern, which is drawn when game ball B is received by first starting opening 2004 or second starting opening 2005, first large winning opening 2006 or second large winning opening 2007 opens or closes in a predetermined opening/closing pattern, making it possible to receive game ball B.

When the first large winning opening 2006 is ready to receive, the first large winning opening 2006 is located in the left second guide passage 2532 on the left side of the center device 2500, so the player can perform a throwing operation so that the game ball B flows through the left second guide passage 2532. When the first large winning opening 2006 is in an open state in which it can receive the game ball B, if the game ball B that has entered the left second guide passage 2532 is received by the first large winning opening 2006, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633.

On the other hand, when the second large winning opening 2007 is available, since the second large winning opening 2007 is located below the right side of the center device 2500, the player can perform a throwing operation so that the game ball B flows along the right side of the center device 2500. When the second large winning opening 2007 is in an open state in which it can receive the game ball B, if the game ball B that has entered the attack passage 2564 of the second attack section 2560 from between the guide wall section 2552 and the attack right wall section 2567 is received by the second large winning opening 2007, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633.

In this way, when the first large winning opening 2006 or the second large winning opening 2007 is capable of accepting game ball B, it is possible to have a large number of game balls B paid out by having the first large winning opening 2006 or the second large winning opening 2007 accept the game ball B, thereby entertaining the player and preventing a decline in interest in the game.

In this embodiment, when the result of the lottery for the first special symbol or the result of the lottery for the second special symbol is, for example, a "small win", the second large winning opening 2007 opens and closes in a short time so that the game ball B can be received (for example, a small win rush). At this time, even if you try to shoot the game ball B into the second large winning opening 2007 at the timing when the second large winning opening 2007 opens and can receive the game ball B, it is difficult to find the right timing to shoot the game ball B because a specific obstacle nail group 2700 that can delay the flow speed of the game ball B is provided upstream of the second large winning opening 2007. This imparts a level of difficulty to the operation of shooting the game ball B, which makes the game more rewarding to play and entertains the player, thereby suppressing a decline in interest. In addition, in the above case, it is possible to make it difficult for the second large winning opening 2007 to receive game ball B, thereby suppressing an increase in the burden on the gaming hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

In addition, if the result of the drawing for the first special symbol or the result of the drawing for the second special symbol is a "jackpot", after the second large winning opening 2007 has been opened to receive the game ball B, if either a predetermined time (e.g., 20 to 40 seconds) has elapsed, or a predetermined number of game balls B (e.g., 10) have been received by the second large winning opening 2007, the opening and closing pattern (one opening and closing pattern is called one round) that closes the opening to receive the game ball B is repeated a predetermined number of times (predetermined number of rounds). For example, if there is a "2R jackpot", this is repeated two rounds, if there is a "5R jackpot", five rounds, if there is a "15R jackpot", 15 rounds, respectively, creating an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player.

In addition, after the jackpot game ends, there are "wins" that change the probability of drawing the first special symbol or the second special symbol of the "jackpot" ("probability win"), or change the display time of the presentation image suggesting the result of the drawing of the first special symbol or the second special symbol ("time-saving win").

If the result of the drawing for the first special symbol or the result of the drawing for the second special symbol (for example, the result of the drawing for the second special symbol) is a "second jackpot," the first big prize winning slot 2006 or the second big prize winning slot 2007 becomes capable of receiving the game ball B in a predetermined pattern, and then ST (Special Time) is generated as an advantageous game state. This ST maintains the state of a special chance or time reduction for a specific number of predetermined fluctuations.

In this embodiment, below the second large prize opening 2007, there is a pseudo game area 2010 in which only the game ball B accepted by the second large prize opening 2007 can circulate. The game ball B accepted by the second large prize opening 2007 is detected by the second large prize opening sensor 2561 and then enters the pseudo game area 2010. The game ball B that enters the pseudo game area 2010 flows down while abutting against a plurality of obstacle nails N planted in the pseudo game area 2010, and when the pseudo large prize opening 2402 can accept the game ball B, the game ball B is accepted by the pseudo large prize opening 2402. On the other hand, when the pseudo large prize opening 2402 cannot accept the game ball B, the game ball B passes in front of the pseudo large prize opening 2402 and is discharged from the pseudo outlet 2404 without being returned to the game area 5a.

This pseudo large prize opening 2402 is capable of receiving game ball B in a predetermined opening and closing pattern, for example, when the second large prize opening 2007 is capable of receiving game ball B in a predetermined opening and closing pattern due to a "jackpot" or the like as described above. This pseudo large prize opening 2402 is provided to be larger and more conspicuous than the second large prize opening 2007, so that many of the game balls B received by the second large prize opening 2007 are received by the pseudo large prize opening 2402, which keeps the player from getting bored during "jackpot" play and keeps the player entertained, thereby preventing a decline in the player's interest.

In this embodiment, the lottery results for the first special symbol and the second special symbol are suggested by the function display unit 1400 and the performance display device 1600. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest the lottery results for the special symbols (the lottery results for the first special symbol and the lottery results for the second special symbol). The lottery results for the special symbols are suggested by the function display unit 1400 by repeatedly turning on and off multiple LEDs and flashing them for a predetermined period of time, and then the combination of lit LEDs suggests the lottery results for the special symbols.

On the other hand, the performance display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and the lottery result of the special symbol is suggested as a performance image. The performance image suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol on the performance display device 1600 displays three picture rows consisting of multiple pictures lined up in the left-right direction, and changes each picture row, stops the displayed picture rows in sequence, and stops and displays each of the three picture rows so that the pictures of the stopped and displayed picture rows form a combination corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol. If the lottery result of the special symbol is other than "miss", after the three picture rows stop and each picture is stopped and displayed, a confirmation image suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed on the performance display device 1600, and an advantageous game state (for example, "small win" game, "big win" game, etc.) according to the lottery result of the special symbol is generated.

The time indicating the result of the special pattern lottery on the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (special change time)) is different from the time indicating the result of the special pattern lottery on the performance display device 1600 (the time until the pattern row changes and the final image is displayed), and is set to a longer time on the function display unit 1400.

In addition to displaying a performance image suggesting the result of the lottery for the special symbol by the performance display device 1600, the peripheral control board 1510 can also perform a player participation type performance in which the touch operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 301 in the performance operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 are operated according to the result of the lottery for the special symbol drawn. In the player participation type performance, the pressing operation unit 303 can be raised and made more prominent by the operation button lift drive motor 367, and the player can enjoy the player participation type performance by operating the performance operation unit 301.

In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 can appropriately use the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3, the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5, the performance display device 1600, the lower right unit 2400, and the rear front peripheral decorative unit 3200, rear upper front performance unit 3300, rear lower front performance unit 3400, rear upper rear performance unit 3500, and rear lower rear performance unit 3600 of the rear unit 3000 to perform light-emitting performances and display performances, etc., allowing players to be entertained by various performances and preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, in a player-participation type presentation in which the player operates the touch operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303, if the player makes a mistake or fails to perform an operation that should be performed, the peripheral control board 1510 notifies the player so that the player can perform the correct operation.

[8. Second embodiment of the game board]
Next, the game board 5A of the second embodiment in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 161 to 166. Fig. 161 is a front view of the game board of the second embodiment, in which the front unit is cut parallel to the surface of the game panel to reveal the game area in which the game balls circulate. Fig. 162(a) is a perspective view of the center role in the game board of the second embodiment, as seen from the front, and Fig. 162(b) is a perspective view of the center role in the game board of the second embodiment, as seen from the back. Fig. 163(a) is an exploded perspective view of the right half of the center role in Fig. 162, in which the center front right plate and the ball guiding unit are disassembled and seen from the front, and Fig. 163(b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) seen from the back. Fig. 164(a) is a front view of the ball guiding unit in the center role in Fig. 162, and Fig. 164(b) is a right side view of the ball guiding unit. Fig. 165(a) is a cross-sectional view cut along the sous line in Fig. 164, (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the se line in Fig. 164, (c) is a cross-sectional view cut along the so-so line in Fig. 164, and (d) is a cross-sectional view cut along the ta line in Fig. 164. Fig. 166(a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball guiding unit in Fig. 164 as seen from the right front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball guiding unit in Fig. 164 as seen from the left front.

The game board 5A of the second embodiment differs only in the configuration of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 and part of the front unit 2000. The other parts have the same configuration as the game board 5 of the first embodiment, and detailed explanations of the parts with the same configuration will be omitted.

The game board 5A of the second embodiment has three normal winning holes 2001. Also, in the game board 5A, instead of the gate 2002, the second starting hole 2005 of the lower right unit 2400 in the game board 5 is the normal winning hole 2008, and the variable winning hole 2003 of the game board 5 is the second starting hole 2005 that opens and closes depending on the lottery result of the normal pattern drawn by the reception of the game ball B into the normal winning hole 2008. Furthermore, in the game board 5A, instead of the specific obstacle nail group 2700, a ball guiding unit 2580 capable of guiding the game ball B is provided.

Due to the above differences, in the second embodiment of the game board 5A, the variable winning hole sensor 2526 of the game board 5 is replaced with a second starting hole sensor, and the second starting hole sensor 2401 of the game board 5 is replaced with a normal winning hole sensor.

The center device 2500 of the game board 5A has a ball guiding unit 2580 that is provided in the space forming section 2550 between the right guide passage group 2540 and the second attacker section 2560 and can guide the game ball B that has flowed through the right guide passage group 2540, and a flat center right front panel 2590 that extends vertically from the upper end of the right guide passage group 2540 to the upper end of the second attacker section 2560 so as to cover the front of the ball guiding unit 2580.

The space forming portion 2550 of the center device 2500 of the game board 5A has an opening 2553 that penetrates in the shape of a long rectangle in the vertical direction in the flange portion 2502 that extends to the right from the peripheral wall portion 2501, and a lower right first passage 2550a and a lower right second passage 2550b that are provided below the opening 2553 and through which the game ball B guided by the ball guide unit 2580 flows.

The lower right first passage 2550a and the lower right second passage 2550b are formed in a crank shape, extending downward from an entrance, then to the right, and then downward again. The lower right second passage 2550b is provided to the right of the lower right first passage 2550a. The lower right first passage 2550a and the lower right second passage 2550b are open at the front and are closed by the center right front panel 2590. When assembled to the game board 5A, the lower right first passage 2550a and the lower right second passage 2550b are located approximately in the vertical center of the game area 5a.

A space is formed between the lower right first passage 2550a and the lower right second passage 2550b and the second attacker section 2560, exposing the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and a number of obstacle nails N are planted in the corresponding portions of the panel plate 1110.

The lower right second passage 2550b opens downward directly above the first sub-outlet 2021. This makes it more likely that a game ball B released downward from the lower right second passage 2550b will be accepted by the first sub-outlet 2021 than that from the lower right first passage 2550a. Since game balls B that have passed through the right second guide passage 2542 of the right guide passage group 2540 and the second guide passage 2580b of the ball guide unit 2580 flow through this lower right second passage 2550b, in order to reduce the probability of game ball B being accepted by the first sub-outlet 2021, the player can be made to actively perform a shooting operation to enter the right first guide passage 2541. Therefore, when "hitting to the right," hitting the ball harder makes it easier for the game ball B to enter the right first guide passage 2541, which is closer to the impact stopper 1006, so there is no need to make delicate adjustments when hitting the game ball B, making it easier to perform the hitting operation.

[8-1. Ball Guidance Unit]
The ball guiding unit 2580 guides the game ball B that has flowed through the right first guide passage 2541 and the right second guide passage 2542 of the right guide passage group 2540 separately in a state where it can be seen from the front. The ball guiding unit 2580 has a first guide passage 2580a that guides the game ball B from the right first guide passage 2541, and a second guide passage 2580b that guides the game ball B from the right second guide passage 2542. The second guide passage 2580b is provided on the right side of the first guide passage 2580a. The first guide passage 2580a and the second guide passage 2580b can guide the game ball B downward while swinging it in the left-right and front-back directions in a state where it can be seen.

The first guide passage 2580a of the ball guide unit 2580 has an entrance that opens toward the front near the upper end, and an exit that opens diagonally downward toward the front at the lower end. The second guide passage 2580b has an entrance that opens toward the front at a position slightly lower than the entrance of the first guide passage 2580a, and an exit that opens diagonally downward toward the front at the lower end.

The ball guiding unit 2580 is composed of a left passage member 2581 provided with a first guide passage 2580a that is open to the right, a right passage member 2582 attached to the right side of the left passage member 2581 and provided with a second guide passage 2580b that is open to the right, and a flat passage closing plate 2583 attached to the right side of the right passage member 2582. The ball guiding unit 2580 is formed to be transparent.

The left passage member 2581 has a flat side wall portion 2581a extending front-to-rear and up-down, and a plurality of inclined portions 2581b that protrude to the right from the right-facing surface of the side wall portion 2581a, are inclined so that one side in the front-to-rear direction is lower, and are provided at intervals in the up-down direction. The plurality of inclined portions 2581b are provided at intervals in the up-down direction to allow the game ball B to flow, and are provided so that the lower sides are alternately different between the top and bottom. In addition, the plurality of inclined portions 2581b are provided so that the upper end of the lower inclined portion 2581b extends outward in the front-to-rear direction beyond the lower end of the upper inclined portion 2581b, at an interval allowing the game ball B to flow.

In addition, the left passage member 2581 has a vertical wall portion 2581c extending upward from the upper end of each inclined portion 2581b, further upward than the upper inclined portion 2581b, and a top wall portion 2581d extending upward from the upper end of the vertical wall portion 2581c.
Top wall portion 2581d extends in the front-rear direction substantially parallel to upper inclined portion 2581b of inclined portion 2581b from which upright wall portion 2581c stands. Top wall portion 2581d extends in the front-rear direction up to near the lower surface of inclined portion 2581b further above upper inclined portion 2581b, forming a gap between top wall portion 2581d and inclined portion 2581b further above upper inclined portion 2581b.

Furthermore, the left passage member 2581 has a plurality of first protrusions 2581e protruding to the right from the portion between the vertically spaced inclined portions 2581b in the side wall portion 2581a, and a plurality of first protruding pieces 2581f protruding to the right from the portion between the lower end of the inclined portion 2581b and the vertical wall portion 2581c in the side wall portion 2581a. The first protrusions 2581e are provided at a position corresponding to the vicinity of the center of the inclined portion 2581b in the front-to-rear direction, and are flat and extend parallel to the lower inclined portion 2581b, and are formed in a triangular shape with a tapered tip. The first protrusions 2581f extend vertically, with the lower end contacting the upper surface of the inclined portion 2581b, and the upper end inclining so as to be lower to the right.

In the left passage member 2581, the uppermost inclined portion 2581b is inclined so that the rear end is lower, and the upper end side extends upward in an arc shape to form the lower side of the entrance of the first guide passage 2580a. In addition, the lowermost inclined portion 2581b is inclined so that the front end is lower, and is located further rearward than the front end of the upper inclined portion 2581b, forming the lower side of the exit of the first guide passage 2580a. In addition, the lowermost top wall portion 2581d does not extend beyond the upper end of the vertical wall portion 2581c. The left passage member 2581 of this embodiment is provided with eight inclined portions 2581b.

The right passage member 2582 has a flat side wall portion 2582a that closes the first guide passage 2580a that is open to the right, and multiple first protrusions 2582b that protrude to the left from the left-facing surface of the side wall portion 2582a. When assembled into the ball guide unit 2580, the multiple first protrusions 2582b are provided in pairs in the front-rear direction on one inclined portion 2581b of the left passage member 2581, with the first protrusion 2581e between them. The upstream side of the first protrusion 2582b protrudes to the left in a triangular shape, and the downstream side of the first protrusion 2581e protrudes to the left in a trapezoid shape with the upstream end side inclined and extending downstream to the vicinity of the vertical wall portion 2581c.

The right passage member 2582 also has a plurality of inclined portions 2582c that protrude to the right from the surface of the side wall portion 2582a facing right, are inclined so that one side in the front-to-rear direction is lower, and are spaced apart in the vertical direction. The plurality of inclined portions 2582c are spaced apart in the vertical direction to allow the game ball B to flow through, and are spaced apart so that the lower sides alternate between the top and bottom. The plurality of inclined portions 2582c are also spaced apart so that the upper end of the lower inclined portion 2582c extends outward in the front-to-rear direction beyond the lower end of the upper inclined portion 2582c, at a distance allowing the game ball B to flow through.

In addition, the right passage member 2582 has a vertical wall portion 2582d extending upward from the upper end of each inclined portion 2582c, further upward than the upper inclined portion 2582c, and a ceiling wall portion 2582e extending upward from the upper end of the vertical wall portion 2582d.
Top wall portion 2582e extends in the front-rear direction substantially parallel to upper inclined portion 2582c of inclined portion 2582c from which upright wall portion 2582d stands. Top wall portion 2582e extends in the front-rear direction up to near the lower surface of inclined portion 2582c further above upper inclined portion 2582c, forming a gap between top wall portion 2582e and inclined portion 2582c further above upper inclined portion 2582c.

Furthermore, the right passage member 2582 has a plurality of second protrusions 2582f protruding to the right from the portion between the vertically spaced inclined portions 2582c in the side wall portion 2582a, and a plurality of second projections 2582g protruding to the right from the portion between the lower end of the inclined portion 2582c and the vertical wall portion 2582d in the side wall portion 2581a. The second projections 2582g are provided at a position corresponding to the vicinity of the center of the inclined portion 2582c in the front-to-rear direction, and are formed in a flat plate shape extending parallel to the lower inclined portion 2582c and in a triangular shape with a tapered tip. The second projections 2582g extend vertically, with the lower end contacting the upper surface of the inclined portion 2582c, and the upper end inclining so as to be lower to the right.

In the right passage member 2582, the uppermost inclined portion 2582c is inclined so that its rear end is lower, and its front end forms the lower side of the entrance to the second guide passage 2580b. The lowermost inclined portion 2582c is inclined so that its front end is lower and is located further rearward than the front end of the upper inclined portion 2582c, forming the lower side of the exit of the second guide passage 2580b. The lowermost top wall portion 2582e does not extend beyond the upper end of the vertical wall portion 2582d. The right passage member 2582 of this embodiment is provided with eight inclined portions 2582c.

The passage closing plate 2583 has a flat side wall portion 2583a that closes the second guide passage 2580b that is open to the right, and multiple second protrusions 2583b that protrude to the left from the surface facing left of the side wall portion 2583a. When assembled to the ball guide unit 2580, the multiple second protrusions 2583b are provided in pairs in the front-rear direction on one inclined portion 2582c of the right passage member 2582, with the second protrusion 2582f between them. The upstream side of the second protrusion 2582f of the second protrusion 2583b protrudes to the left in a triangular shape, and the downstream side of the second protrusion 2582f protrudes to the left in a trapezoid shape with the upstream end side inclined and extending downstream to the vicinity of the vertical wall portion 2582d.

In the ball guiding unit 2580 of this embodiment, when the game ball B enters the first guide passage 2580a through the right first guide passage 2541 of the right guide passage group 2540, it rolls backward by the inclined portion 2581b of the left passage member 2581. Above the inclined portion 2581b, the first protrusion 2581e protrudes from the left, and two first protrusions 2582b of the right passage member 2582 protrude from the right, in front of and behind the first protrusion 2581e. As a result, the game ball B is guided leftward by the first protrusion 2582b, then guided rightward by the next first protrusion 2581e, and further guided leftward again by the next first protrusion 2582b, and rolls while snaking (swinging) left and right to the rear end (bottom end) of the inclined portion 2581b.

Then, the game ball B flows down from the bottom end of the inclined portion 2581b along the vertical wall portion 2581c onto the lower inclined portion 2581b. At this time, the game ball B guided to the left by the first protruding portion 2582b is guided to the right by the first protruding piece portion 2581f protruding to the right, and flows down to the lower inclined portion 2581b. This prevents the game ball B from flowing vertically down from the upper inclined portion 2581b to the lower inclined portion 2581b.

The game ball B that flows down the lower inclined portion 2581b rolls forward according to the inclination of the inclined portion 2581b. Above this inclined portion 2581b, the first protrusion 2581e protrudes from the left, and two first protrusions 2582b of the right passage member 2582 protrude from the right, one behind the first protrusion 2581e. As a result, the game ball B guided to the right by the rear first protruding piece 2581f is guided to the left by the first protrusion 2582b, then guided to the right by the next first protrusion 2581e, and further guided to the left again by the next first protrusion 2582b, rolling while snaking (swaying) left and right to the front end of the inclined portion 2581b. Then, as it flows downward from the front end of the inclined portion 2581b, it is guided to the right by the first protruding piece 2581f on the front side and flows further down onto the lower inclined portion 2581b, and the above-described movement of the game ball B is repeated until it reaches the exit of the first guide passage 2580a.

In addition, in the ball guide unit 2580, when the game ball B enters the second guide passage 2580b through the right second guide passage 2542 of the right guide passage group 2540, it rolls backward due to the inclined portion 2582c of the right passage member 2582. In this second guide passage 2580b, as in the first guide passage 2580a, the game ball B flows down while swaying left and right and front and rear. In more detail, above the inclined portion 2582c of the right passage member 2582, a second protrusion 2582f protrudes from the left, and two second protrusions 2583b of the passage closure plate 2583 protrude from the right, in front and behind the second protrusion 2582f. As a result, the game ball B is guided to the left by the second protrusion 2583b, then guided to the right by the next second protrusion 2582f, and then guided to the left again by the next second protrusion 2583b, rolling while snaking (swaying) left and right to the rear end (bottom end) of the inclined portion 2582c.

Then, the game ball B flows down from the bottom end of the inclined portion 2582c along the vertical wall portion 2582d onto the lower inclined portion 2582c. At this time, the game ball B guided to the left by the previous second protrusion portion 2583b is guided to the right by the second protruding piece portion 2582g protruding to the right, and flows down to the lower inclined portion 2582c. As a result, the game ball B does not flow vertically down from the upper inclined portion 2582c to the lower inclined portion 2582c.

The game ball B that flows down the lower inclined portion 2582c rolls forward according to the inclination of the inclined portion 2582c. Above this inclined portion 2582c, the second protrusion 2582f protrudes from the left, and two second protrusions 2583b of the passage closing plate 2583 protrude from the right, one behind the second protrusion 2582f. As a result, the game ball B guided to the right by the rear second protrusion 2582g is guided to the left by the second protrusion 2583b, then guided to the right by the next second protrusion 2582f, and further guided to the left again by the next second protrusion 2583b, rolling while snaking (swinging) left and right to the front end of the inclined portion 2582c. Then, as it flows downward from the front end of the inclined portion 2582c, it is guided to the right by the second protruding piece 2582g on the front side and flows further down onto the lower inclined portion 2582c, and the above-described movement of the game ball B is repeated until it reaches the exit of the second guide passage 2580b.

In this way, according to the ball guidance unit 2580 of this embodiment, the game ball B that has passed through the right guide passage group 2540 can be made to flow down while swaying (snaking) left and right and front and back, and then released downward, so that the residence time (flow time) of the game ball B at the same height can be made longer compared to when the game ball B is made to flow down vertically or through a spiral passage. This makes the circulation speed of the game ball B relatively slow, making it easier for the player to see the game ball B, and allowing the player to enjoy the movement of the game ball B and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, with the ball guiding unit 2580, the game ball B is caused to flow down while swaying (snaking) left and right and forward and backward, which causes the game ball B to move in a more complex manner than if it were flowing down a spiral passage. This allows the player to be entertained by movements of the game ball B that have not been seen in previous pachinko machines, and helps to prevent a decline in interest.

Furthermore, since the left side of the ball guiding unit 2580 faces the inside of the frame of the center device 2500, by looking through the inside of the frame of the center device 2500, it is possible to clearly see the game ball B circulating in a zigzag motion in the back and forth direction in the ball guiding unit 2580, allowing the player to enjoy the movement of the game ball B.

In addition, according to the ball guiding unit 2580, the flow speed of the game ball B can be suppressed and delayed, so that the same effect as the above-mentioned specific obstacle nail group 2700 can be achieved. In detail, for example, depending on the lottery result of the first special pattern or the lottery result of the second special pattern drawn by the reception of the game ball B into the first starting hole 2004 or the second starting hole 2005 (for example, the lottery of "small win"), the second large winning hole 2007 of the second attacker section 2560 provided below the ball guiding unit 2580 is opened and closed in a short time so that the game ball B can be received (for example, small win rush), and the player performs the driving operation of the game ball B so that the game ball B reaches the second large winning hole 2007 at the timing when the second large winning hole 2007 becomes available for reception. In this case, even if you try to shoot game ball B at that timing, it can be difficult to time it so that you can shoot game ball B because a ball guide unit 2580 capable of slowing down the flow speed of game ball B is provided upstream of the second large winning opening 2007. This makes it possible to impart a degree of difficulty to the operation of shooting game ball B, which can make the game more rewarding for the player and make the player enjoy it, thereby preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, according to the ball guiding unit 2580, a gap is formed between the inclined portion 2581b and the top wall portion 2581d, and between the inclined portion 2582c and the top wall portion 2582e, so that when a ball becomes clogged inside the first guiding passage 2580a or the second guiding passage 2580b, the ball can be removed by inserting a thin rod-shaped member through the gap.

In addition, according to the ball guiding unit 2580, the left passage member 2581, the right passage member 2582, and the passage closing plate 2583 form a first guide passage 2580a and a second guide passage 2580b that guide the game ball B. Therefore, compared to a case in which a passage is formed using multiple obstacle nails N, the flow path is not deformed (the obstacle nails N are deformed) by the flow of the game ball B, and the game ball B can be guided in a stable state.

[8-2. Center right front panel]
The center right front panel 2590 of the game board 5A is formed in a transparent flat plate shape, and is attached to the right outer front end of the frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center role 2500 so as to cover the front between the upper end of the right guide passage group 2540 and the upper end of the second attacker portion 2560. The center right front panel 2590 covers the front of the right guide passage group 2540 and the space forming portion 2550 (including the ball guiding unit 2580).

The center right front plate 2590 has, at its lower part, a number of first storage sections 2590a that penetrate from front to back and each store the heads of a number of obstacle nails N, a second storage section 2590b that penetrates from front to back and stores the head of one obstacle nail N, and a peeling hole 2590c that penetrates from front to back.

The first storage section 2590a and the second storage section 2590b store the heads of multiple obstacle nails N that are planted in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, the front of which is exposed, between the lower right first passage 2550a and the lower right second passage 2550b and the second attacker section 2560.

The first storage section 2590a is provided in the shape of an elongated hole that surrounds and contacts the heads of the multiple (not shown, but in this embodiment, two or three) obstructing nails N that it contains, forming a certain gap with respect to the circumferential line. As a result, the center of the first storage section 2590a is different (eccentric) from the center of the obstructing nail N. The second storage section 2590b is formed concentrically with the obstructing nail N. These first storage section 2590a and second storage section 2590b are provided in positions that correspond to the obstructing nails N planted between the lower right first passage 2550a and the lower right second passage 2550b and the second attacker section 2560.

This makes it possible to restrict the movement of the heads of the obstacle nails N stored in the first storage section 2590a and the second storage section 2590b, thereby preventing the obstacle nails N from being deformed (bent) due to impacts caused by the flow (contact) of the game balls B or some kind of external impact, reducing the unintended flow of the game balls B and allowing the game balls B to circulate in a stable state, allowing the player to enjoy the movement of the game balls B and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, as described above, the first storage section 2590a and the second storage section 2590b of the center right front panel 2590 can suppress deformation of the obstructing nails N, thereby reducing the effort required for the amusement hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed to maintain the obstructing nails N.

The peeling hole 2590c of the center right front plate 2590 is provided in the mounting boss for mounting the center right front plate 2590 to the main body of the center role 2500, and is provided coaxially with the mounting hole of the mounting boss. When a sticker for decoration or protection is to be attached to the front surface of the center right front plate 2590, this peeling hole 2590c can be used to insert a rod-shaped member such as a wire from the rear side with the sticker attached, and press the sticker forward from the rear with the rod-shaped member, thereby causing a part of the sticker to roll up forward from the center right front plate 2590. Then, the sticker can be easily removed (peeled off) from the center right front plate 2590 by the worker pulling the rolled-up part of the sticker. This improves the workability of re-attaching stickers during manufacturing and sorting work at the time of disposal.

This peeling hole 2590c is provided at the mounting boss, so even if someone tries to insert a linear illegal tool such as a piano wire through the peeling hole 2590c into the rear of the game panel 1100 or the area where game balls B are distributed, when it is assembled to the game board 5, the rear is closed by the mounting screw, making it possible to prevent the illegal tool from being inserted and thus preventing illegal acts.

If a sticker is attached to the front of the center right front panel 2590, the sticker can make the peeling hole 2590c less visible from the front, preventing the peeling hole 2590c from making the game look unsightly. It also makes it more difficult for players to notice the existence of the peeling hole 2590c, making it more difficult for players to plot fraudulent acts using the peeling hole 2590c.

In addition, if a sticker is attached to the front of the center right front panel 2590, when assembled to the game board 5, the front side of the first storage section 2590a and the second storage section 2590b can be closed by the sticker attached to the front of the center right front panel 2590, so that the obstacle nails N whose heads are stored in the first storage section 2590a or the second storage section 2590b cannot be touched from the front. This makes it possible to prevent the obstacle nails N from being bent by a tool or the like during maintenance, or from being intentionally bent. In addition, if a sticker is attached, if an obstacle nail N whose head is stored in the first storage section 2590a or the second storage section 2590b is bent through the sticker, a trace of the bending will remain on the sticker, making it easier to notice a defect in the obstacle nail N.

[9. Relationship between the present invention and the embodiment]
The center right front panel 2555 of the center device 2500 in the game board 5 of this embodiment corresponds to the retaining plate of the present invention, the first storage section 2555a and the second storage section 2555b of the center right front panel 2555 in this embodiment correspond to the storage sections of the present invention, and the protrusion section front 2555d of the center right front panel 2555 in this embodiment corresponds to the protrusion of the present invention.

[10. Characteristic Effects of the Present Embodiment]
According to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when the game ball B enters the specific obstacle nail group 2700 consisting of multiple obstacle nails N in the game area 5a of the game board 5, the game ball B can be guided along the specified guide area 2701 (the first guide area 2711 or the second guide area 2712) with a predetermined probability. In this specific obstacle nail group 2700, two obstacle nails N are at least configured by multiple set nail parts 2710, each set of set nail parts 2710, and a gap through which the game ball B can pass is provided between the multiple set nail parts 2710. Therefore, one obstacle nail N of the set nail part 2710 does not form a gap through which the game ball B can pass in the direction in which the remaining obstacle nails N are adjacent, so that it is only responsible for forming a gap in the direction in which the remaining obstacle nails N are not adjacent. In other words, in the set nail part 2710, the direction in which the gap through which the game ball B can pass is responsible for forming in one obstacle nail N can be a part of the direction. Therefore, even if one of the obstructing nails N of the set nail portion 2710 is bent, the number of gaps affected is small compared to the number of gaps formed between the set nail portion 2710 and its paired set nail portion 2710, so that it is possible to prevent the flow of the game ball B from changing significantly, making it easier to circulate the game ball B in a stable state through the desired intended flow path.

At this time, the first storage section 2555a of the center right front plate 2555 stores the front end of each of the obstacle nails N of the multiple set nail parts 2710 that constitute the specific obstacle nail group 2700, and the second storage section 2555b of the center right front plate 2555 stores the front end of a single obstacle nail N that constitutes the specific obstacle nail group 2700. In the set nail part 2710, the front ends of two obstacle nails N planted close to each other are stored in one first storage section 2555a, and since two obstacle nails N planted close to each other are difficult to bend in the direction in which they approach each other, by surrounding the parts of them in the direction in which they are not close to each other as a set with the first storage section 2555a, it is possible to make the obstacle nails N difficult to bend in either direction. On the other hand, the front end of one obstacle nail N planted alone is stored in the second storage section 2555b, so that the second storage section 2555b makes it difficult for the obstacle nail N to bend. For this reason, the obstacle nails N of the multiple group nail sections 2710 that make up the specific obstacle nail group 2700 and individual obstacle nails N are accommodated in the first storage section 2555a and the second storage section 2555b of the center right front panel 2555. Even if an impact is applied to the obstacle nail N due to contact with a game ball B or contact with a tool during maintenance, the front end of the obstacle nail N abuts against the peripheral wall of the first storage section 2555a or the second storage section 2555b, preventing further movement and making it difficult for the (multiple) obstacle nails N to bend. As a result, the flow of the game ball B through the multiple obstacle nails N (specific obstacle nail group 2700) can be maintained in the intended original state (at the time of shipment). Therefore, the multiple first storage sections 2555a and second storage sections 2555b of the center right front panel 2555 make it difficult for the multiple obstacle nails N that make up the specific obstacle nail group 2700 to bend, allowing the game ball B to circulate in a stable and intended flow, and the specific obstacle nail group 2700 can continue to guide the game ball B with a predetermined probability, while ensuring that the specific obstacle nail group 2700 can achieve its intended effect, allowing the performance envisioned by the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 to be maintained for a long period of time.

In addition, since the specific obstacle nail group 2700 is composed of multiple set nails 2710 or individual obstacle nails N, the number of obstacle nails N planted can be relatively increased, and the game ball B can abut against a larger number of obstacle nails N. Therefore, by increasing the number of times that the game ball B abuts against the obstacle nails N, it is possible to further suppress the circulation speed of the game ball B and change the circulation direction of the game ball B to various directions, so that the movement of the game ball B can be made more enjoyable and a decrease in the player's interest in the game can be suppressed.

Furthermore, the center right front plate 2555 is provided with multiple protrusions 2555d protruding backward, and when the game ball B abuts against the protrusions 2555d of the center right front plate 2555, the flow speed of the game ball B can be slowed down or the flow direction of the game ball B can be changed, so that the player can see a more diverse movement of the game ball B, which entertains the player and prevents a decline in interest. Also, unlike the obstacle nails N, the protrusions 2555d of the center right front plate 2555 do not bend, so the flow of the game ball B due to the multiple protrusions 2555d can be stably maintained, and the performance envisioned by the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 can be maintained for a long time.

In addition, since the center right front panel 2555 is provided with a front protrusion 2555d, the front protrusion 2555d of the center right front panel 2555 can perform a function similar to that of an obstacle nail N, such as slowing down the flow speed of the game ball B or changing the flow direction, and since the front end of the obstacle nail N is accommodated in the accommodation portion of the center right front panel 2555, the center right front panel 2555 is provided near the front end of the play area 5a, so that the center right front panel 2555 can be extended to a portion of the play area 5a where it is difficult to plant an obstacle nail N, and the front protrusion 2555d can be provided in that portion. This allows the game ball B to move in the same way as the obstacle nails N by providing the front protrusion 2555d instead of the obstacle nails N in areas where obstacle nails N cannot be planted in conventional pachinko machines or in areas outside the specific obstacle nail group 2700, allowing the player to enjoy the movement of the game ball B over a wider range and preventing a decline in the player's interest.

In addition, a second large prize opening 2007 is provided downstream of the specific obstacle nail group 2700, which opens and closes to accept game ball B depending on the progress of the game (the lottery results for the first special pattern and the lottery results for the second special pattern). Since game ball B can be made to abut against many obstacle nails N in the specific obstacle nail group 2700, it is possible to delay the circulation of game ball B. Therefore, when game ball B is guided by the specific obstacle nail group 2700, it can be made to reach the second large prize opening 2007 provided downstream with a delayed arrival time compared to the normal multiple obstacle nails N. This makes it more difficult to time the shooting of game ball B aimed at the second large prize opening 2007, and the desired level of difficulty can be imparted to the operation of shooting game ball B. At this time, as described above, the obstacle nails N of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 are made difficult to bend by the center right front plate 2555, so that the specific obstacle nail group 2700 can continue to guide the game ball B with a predetermined probability, and the shooting operation can be reliably made to have the desired degree of difficulty, and the difficulty of the shooting operation as the performance assumed by the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 can be maintained for a long time. As a result, the player's motivation for the shooting operation can be aroused, the shooting operation of the game ball B can be enjoyed, and a sense of accomplishment can be given by the game ball B being accepted by the second large winning opening 2007, and a decrease in the interest of the player can be suppressed. Also, as described above, since the specific obstacle nail group 2700 can impart a degree of difficulty to the shooting operation, it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball B to be accepted by the second large winning opening 2007, and by suppressing the opportunity for payout due to the acceptance of the game ball B by the second large winning opening 2007, an increase in the burden on the game hall in which the present pachinko machine 1 is installed can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the first storage section 2555a and the second storage section 2555b of the center right front plate 2555 have a gap between the front end of the obstacle nail N stored therein, even if the center right front plate 2555 expands or contracts due to environmental changes such as temperature and humidity, the gap can absorb the change in position between the first storage section 2555a or the second storage section 2555b and the obstacle nail N due to expansion or contraction. Therefore, even if the center right front plate 2555 expands or contracts, it is possible to avoid the multiple obstacle nails N being bent or the center right front plate 2555 being damaged by resistance from the multiple obstacle nails N. As a result, by making the center right front plate 2555 larger, the above-mentioned action and effect can be achieved even if the change in the distance from one end to the other end becomes large due to expansion and contraction, so the center right front plate 2555 can be made larger, and the multiple obstacle nails N of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 planted in a wide range in the play area 5a can be reliably made difficult to bend. Therefore, the specific obstacle nail group 2700 can guide the game ball B to the downstream second large winning hole 2007 with a predetermined intended probability, and the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball B due to the intended flow of the game ball B, suppressing a decline in interest, and the flow of the game ball B due to the specific obstacle nail group 2700 can be stably maintained, allowing the performance envisioned by the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 to be exerted for a long time. For example, this large center right front plate 2555 can be one whose height is in the range of 1/3 to 3/3 of the height of the play area 5a and whose left and right width is in the range of 1/10 to 10/10 of the width of the play area 5a.

In addition, the multiple first storage sections 2555a and second storage sections 2555b of the center right front panel 2555 are designed to have gaps between the front ends of the multiple obstacle nails N of the specific obstacle nail group 2700, making it easier to insert the front ends of the multiple obstacle nails N that have been planted into the corresponding first storage section 2555a and second storage section 2555b when assembling the game board, and by making assembly easier, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, since the center right front plate seal 2556 that closes the first storage section 2555a and the second storage section 2555b is attached to the front surface of the center right front plate 2555, the obstructing nail N whose front end is stored in the first storage section 2555a or the second storage section 2555b cannot be touched from the front. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the obstructing nail N from being bent by a tool or the like during maintenance, or from being intentionally bent. In addition, in this case, if the obstructing nail N whose front end is stored in the first storage section 2555a or the second storage section 2555b is bent through the center right front plate seal 2556, the trace remains on the center right front plate seal 2556, making it easier to notice the defect in the obstructing nail N.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when multiple game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 in the door frame 3 are supplied to the lower tray 202 through the ball removal guide path 241c of the tray unit base 211, the game balls B enter the storage passage 150e from the right side near the front end of the lower tray ball supply port 211c, which opens forward of the storage passage 150e of the far cover unit 150 for supplying game balls B that cannot be stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray 202 from the rear, and roll to the left side on the opposite side. On the left side opposite to the lower tray ball supply port 211c, a ball guide section 213 is provided that is inclined so that it moves to the other side as it moves forward, so that the game ball B from the ball removal guide path 241c rolls along the ball guide section 213, and the game ball B can be rolled to the other side in the left and right direction far from the lower tray ball removal hole 202a by easily rolling along the periphery of the lower tray 202, which is the high part on the bottom surface of the lower tray 202, and the supplied game ball B can be prevented from immediately reaching the lower tray ball removal hole 202a. As a result, the game ball B can be rolled so as to circle toward the lowest lower tray ball removal hole 202a in the lower tray 202, so that the game ball B can be stored evenly in each direction centered on the lower tray ball removal hole 202a, and it is difficult for the game ball B to accumulate near the lower tray ball supply port 211c of the storage passage 150e. In other words, since it is possible to reduce clogging of the lower tray ball supply port 211c of the storage passage 150e (ball removal guideway 241c) with game balls B at an early stage when there is still room to store game balls B in the lower tray 202, it is possible to store as many game balls B as possible without the player having to level the lower tray 202. Therefore, when the player is in an advantageous game state such as a "jackpot" game, it is possible to reduce the frequency of guidance to discharge the game balls B in the lower tray 202 into a money box, etc., so that it is less likely to be annoyed to the player and a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

In addition, the left side of the lower tray ball supply port 211c of the storage passage 150e is inclined as a ball guide section 213 so that it moves to the other side as it moves forward. Therefore, even if multiple game balls B accumulate in the lower tray 202 up to the front of the lower tray ball supply port 211c of the storage passage 150e, a gap through which the game balls B can flow can be formed between the accumulation of the game balls B and the ball guide section 213. Therefore, game balls B that cannot be stored in the upper tray 201 and are sent to the lower tray 202 through the gap, as well as game balls B from the ball removal guide path 241c, can be sent to the left part of the lower tray 202, and as many game balls B as possible can be stored in the lower tray 202.

In addition, the center of the lower tray ball supply port 211c, which opens toward the front of the storage passage 150e, is positioned to the right of the center of the lower tray ball removal hole 202a of the lower tray 202. Compared to the case where the left-right center of the outlet of the storage passage 150e and the center of the lower tray ball removal hole 202a are aligned (see FIG. 50(b)), it is possible to widen the area to the right of the lower tray ball removal hole 202a in the lower tray 202, so that the number of game balls B stored in the lower tray 202 when the game balls B are stored in the lower tray 202 until they block the lower tray ball supply port 211c of the storage passage 150e can be increased. Therefore, by combining this with the effect of the ball guiding section 213 as described above, it is possible to store as many game balls B as possible without the player having to level the lower tray 202, and it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is easier to achieve the above-mentioned effect.

In the conventional pachinko machine 1 as shown in FIG. 50(b), even if there is room for storing game balls B in the lower tray 202, the vicinity of the lower tray ball supply port 211j becomes clogged with game balls B, making it impossible to supply game balls B to the lower tray 202. As a result, even though there is still room in the lower tray 202, the full tank detection sensor 154 turns ON, and the payout of game balls B stops. Then, depending on the player, the payout is stopped even though there is room in the lower tray 202, which may cause distrust and reduce interest. Or, even if there is room in the lower tray 202, if a guide is executed to open the lower tray ball removal hole 202b and move game balls B to the money box, it may feel annoying and reduce interest. In contrast, according to this embodiment, as described above, as many game balls B as possible can be stored in the lower tray 202 until it is nearly full without the player having to level it out, so when the player looks at the lower tray 202 when payout is stopped, he or she can immediately recognize that there is no room left in the lower tray 202 and that it is full. This allows the player to open the lower tray ball removal hole 202a and move the balls to the dollar box without any resistance, and also allows the player to recognize that many game balls B have been paid out, entertaining the player and preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when game balls B become stuck in the tank rail 553 of the payout base unit 550 in the main frame 4 (when so-called ball jamming occurs), the game balls B can be broken down and the ball jam removed by touching the stuck game balls B from the outside through one of the multiple openings 553d penetrating the bottom (main guide section 553a) of the tank rail 553. Therefore, since ball jamming in the tank rail 553 can be easily removed, the interruption time of the game can be shortened as much as possible, reducing the discomfort caused to the player by the interruption of the game and suppressing the decline in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, a ball straightening member 556 capable of swinging up and down is provided on the upper part of the tank rail 553, so that when the game balls B are circulated while the ball straightening member 556 is in contact from above with the game balls B stacked up and down on the tank rail 553, the height of the game balls B stacked up and down changes, and the change in height causes the ball straightening member 556 to swing up and down. By swinging the ball straightening member 556 up and down, resistance is applied to the upper game balls B that are in contact with the ball straightening member 556, preventing them from moving downstream faster than the lower game balls B, and they can be moved downward to cut into the row of lower game balls B lined up in a row, preventing the game balls B from interlocking with each other. In addition, when the ball straightening member 556 moves downward, it hits the upper game ball B downward, causing the upper game ball B to collapse and breaking up the game balls B stacked up and down, which can prevent the game balls B from getting stuck and can reduce interruptions to play due to ball jamming as much as possible, preventing a decrease in interest due to interruptions to play.

Furthermore, as described above, by circulating the game balls B within the tank rail 553, the game balls B can be struck from above downward by the ball straightening member 556, which makes it possible to remove dirt, dust, etc. adhering to the game balls B by striking them, and also makes it easier to vibrate the tank rail 553 and discharge the dirt, dust, etc. within the tank rail 553 downward through the opening 553d. Therefore, since the dirt, dust, etc. within the tank rail 553 can be reduced as much as possible, it is possible to make it difficult for balls to become clogged due to dirt, dust, etc., and the same action and effect as described above can be achieved.

In addition, at least one of the multiple openings 553d is provided below the area where the ball straightening member 556 is provided, making it less likely for balls to become clogged due to dirt, dust, etc. in the area below the ball straightening member 556 on the tank rail 553, and providing a pachinko machine 1 that is more likely to achieve the above-mentioned effects.

In addition, since multiple openings 553d having the above-mentioned effect are provided in the tank rail 553 in the direction in which the game ball B is guided, no matter where the ball jam occurs in the tank rail 553, the ball jam can be cleared through the opening 553d in the nearest position, and a pachinko machine 1 can be provided that can reliably achieve the above-mentioned effect.

Furthermore, because the opening 553d is designed to extend long in the guiding direction of the game ball B, the opening of the opening 553d can be made relatively large, making it easier to discharge dirt, dust, etc. downward from the game ball B rolling on the bottom of the tank rail 553. Therefore, dirt, dust, etc. inside the tank rail 553 can be reduced as much as possible, making it easier to realize a pachinko machine 1 that achieves the above-mentioned effects.

In addition, because the opening 553d is designed to open downward and backward, it is possible to make the opening 553d large enough to be accessible from the outside while preventing the game ball B from passing through and preventing its rolling (circulation), making it easier to realize a pachinko machine 1 that achieves the above-mentioned effects.

Furthermore, because the opening 553d is open downward and toward the rear, the game balls B inside can be easily seen through the opening 553d by simply looking from behind without having to look inside from below. Therefore, even if the tank rail 553 is opaque, the location where the ball jam has occurred can be easily identified, and the ball jam can be easily cleared, making it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that reliably achieves the above-mentioned effects.

In addition, at least one opening 553d is provided in the tank rail 553 below the ball straightening member 556, so that when multiple game balls B are filled in the tank rail 553, the ball straightening member 556 can be pushed upward through the multiple game balls B by touching the game balls B from the outside through the opening 553d and pushing them upward. At this time, by checking the upward movement of the ball straightening member 556, it is possible to check whether the ball straightening member 556 is in a state where it can swing, and the ball straightening member 556 can reliably exert the above-mentioned alignment effect of the game balls B, thereby suppressing ball clogging. In addition, since the state of the ball straightening member 556 can be easily checked through the opening 553d, it is possible to improve the workability during maintenance and reduce the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

In addition, a transparent protective cover 559 is provided that covers the top of the tank rail 553 while allowing the ball straightening member 556 to swing up and down. This makes it possible to prevent dirt, dust, etc. from entering the tank rail 553 from above, providing a pachinko machine 1 that can reliably achieve the effects described above.

Furthermore, because the protective cover 559 that covers the ball straightening member 556 and the tank rail 553 is transparent, the state of the ball straightening member 556 can be seen from the outside through the protective cover 559, making it easy to check the condition of the ball straightening member 556. Also, because the state inside the tank rail 553 can be seen through the protective cover 559, when a ball blockage occurs, the location of the blockage can be easily found. This reduces the effort required for maintenance and ensures the above-mentioned effects.

As described above, by hitting the game ball B from above to below with the ball straightening member 556, it is possible to remove dirt, dust, etc. that is attached to the game ball B, and the opening 553d allows the dirt, dust, etc. inside the tank rail 553 to be discharged to the outside, so that game balls B with as little dirt, dust, etc. as possible can be supplied to the payout device 580, and the occurrence of malfunctions caused by dirt, dust, etc. in the payout device 580 can be reduced.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, in the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4, a ball tank 552 in which a plurality of game balls B are stored is provided adjacent to the external terminal board 558558 to the right of which an electric wire with the tip coating removed is connected from the rear, and a tank rail 553 that aligns and guides the game balls B from the ball tank 552 to the payout device 580 extends in the left-right direction below and behind the external terminal board 558, and a ball straightening member 556 that swings up and down and can collapse the game balls B stacked on top of this tank rail 553 is provided. And, a protective cover 559 is provided that has a top plate portion 559c that covers a part of the upper part of the tank rail 553 and the upper part of the ball straightening member 556, and a guide plate portion 559d that is forward and below the top plate portion 559c and can guide the game balls B outward to the left. As a result, the guide plate portion 559d of the protective cover 559 is located between the top plate portion 559c above the tank rail 553 and the external terminal board 558, at a position lower than the top plate portion 559c.Therefore, the electric wire connected to the external terminal board 558 and hanging down to the rear can be spanned like a bridge between the top plate portion 559c and the external terminal board 558, and a gap can be formed below the electric wire at the guide plate portion 559d through which the game ball B can flow. Therefore, even if the electric wire connected to the external terminal plate 558 from the rear hangs down to the top plate portion 559c of the protective cover 559, a vertical gap through which the game ball B can flow can be secured in the guide plate portion 559d between the top plate portion 559c and the external terminal plate 558, so that the guidance of the game ball B to the left by the guide plate portion 559d is not hindered by the electric wire, and the guide plate portion 559d of the protective cover 559 can guide the game ball B near the external terminal plate 558 outward to the left, away from the external terminal plate 558, thereby reliably removing the game ball B from behind the external terminal plate 558 and preventing the game ball B from accumulating in the vicinity of the external terminal plate 558. Therefore, even if the electric wire connected to the external terminal board 558 becomes unplugged because the electric wire is not fully inserted into the external terminal board 558 or is pulled backward for some reason, the tip of the unplugged electric wire does not come into contact with the game ball B because there is no game ball B in the vicinity of the external terminal board 558 that the tip of the wire would come into contact with, and a short circuit of the electric wire can be avoided. By avoiding a short circuit of the electric wire, the necessary information can be reliably received by the game hall computer (hall computer), and a pachinko machine 1 can be provided that can suppress the occurrence of counting errors in the game hall.

In addition, the ball straightening member 556 and at least a portion of the upper part of the tank rail 553 are covered by the top plate portion 559c of the protective cover 559. Even if the electric wire connected to the external terminal board 558 becomes detached from the external terminal board 558 for some reason, the top plate portion 559c can prevent the tip of the detached electric wire from coming into contact with the game ball B inside the tank rail 553. This prevents the electric wire from shorting out due to contact with the game ball B, and provides the same effect as described above.

In addition, as described above, since it is possible to prevent short circuits in the electrical wires, it is possible to ensure that the necessary information is received by the hall computer and prevent errors in counting due to short circuits in the electrical wires, and therefore it is possible to avoid maintenance due to the occurrence of such errors, thereby reducing the burden on the gaming hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Furthermore, since the guide plate portion 559d of the protective cover 559 guides the game ball B outward to the left, even if the game ball B flows down onto the protective cover 559 for some reason, the game ball B can be made to fall outward in the left-right direction of the game machine, and the game ball B can be prevented from falling to the rear of the game machine. Therefore, since the game ball B does not come into contact with the electric wire hanging down at the rear of the pachinko machine 1, there is no risk that the game ball B will get caught and become stuck on the electric wire hanging down at the rear, or that the electric wire will come loose from the external terminal board 558 due to the game ball B coming into contact with the electric wire, and the occurrence of malfunctions due to the game ball B getting stuck on the rear of the pachinko machine 1 or the electric wire coming loose from the external terminal board 558 can be reduced.

Meanwhile, in the tank rail 553, the game balls B stacked vertically are aligned in one layer, but when the number of stacked game balls B is reduced from two layers to one layer, if the game balls B in the upper layer try to overtake the game balls B in the lower layer, the game balls B may become interlocked with each other and become stuck (so-called ball jamming). In contrast, in this embodiment, the ball straightening member 556 is provided on the upper part of the tank rail 553, so that when the game balls B are circulated while the ball straightening member 556 is abutting the game balls B stacked vertically on the tank rail 553 from above, the height of the game balls B stacked vertically changes, and the change in height causes the ball straightening member 556 to swing vertically. By the ball straightening member 556 swinging in the vertical direction, resistance is applied to the upper game ball B that is in contact with the ball straightening member 556, preventing it from overtaking the lower game ball B, and it is possible to move it downward so as to cut in behind the lower game ball B lined up in a row, preventing the game balls B from interlocking with each other. In addition, when the ball straightening member 556 moves downward, it hits the upper game ball B downward, causing the upper game ball B to collapse and breaking up the game balls B stacked up and down, preventing the game balls B from clogging, and the tank rail 553 and the ball straightening member 556 allow the game balls B stacked in the ball tank 552 to be aligned and supplied to the payout device, and the payout device 580 can pay out the game balls B smoothly.

The top plate portion 559c of the protective cover 559 covers the top of the ball straightening member 556, so that the electric wires hanging down from the external terminal board 558 do not come into contact with the ball straightening member 556 by abutting against the top plate portion 559c of the protective cover 559, and it is possible to prevent the ball straightening member 556 from being unable to swing up and down due to the electric wires abutting against it. Therefore, even if the electric wires hang down from the external terminal board 558 above the ball straightening member 556, the ball straightening member 556 is protected by the protective cover 559 and can swing up and down, so that the swinging of the ball straightening member 556 can reliably collapse the stacked game balls B, and ball clogging can be prevented.

In addition, because the top plate portion 559c of the protective cover 559 covers the top of the ball straightening member 556, even if the game ball B flows down toward the ball straightening member 556 for some reason, the top plate portion 559c of the protective cover 559 can guide the game ball B away from the external terminal board 558 and remove it before it comes into contact with the ball straightening member 556. This makes it possible to prevent the game ball B from being unable to swing up and down due to being placed on the ball straightening member 556, and the ball straightening member 556 can cause the stacked game balls B to collapse, preventing ball clogging.

In addition, because the tank rail 553 extends left and right so as to pass behind the external terminal board 558, the volume of the tank rail 553 can be increased, and together with the ball tank 552, the amount of game balls B to be paid out in this pachinko machine 1 can be maximized. Therefore, when the player is in an advantageous game state, such as a "jackpot" game in which many game balls B are paid out, the player can be prevented from feeling uncomfortable when there are no game balls B to be paid out (so-called ball shortage), and a decrease in the player's interest in the game can be suppressed.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, a box-shaped rear box 3000 having an opening 3010a penetrating from front to back is provided behind the game panel 1100, with the game area 5a on the game board 5 provided in front, and a performance display device 1600 capable of displaying a predetermined performance image is removably attached directly to the rear box 3010 at the position of the opening 3010a of the rear box 3000 when it is the same size as the opening 3010a, and is removably attached to the rear box 3010 via a set plate 1650 when it is smaller than the opening 3010a. Therefore, when the size of the performance display device 1600 is smaller than the opening 3010a, the performance display device 1600 can be attached to the rear box 3010 via the set plate 1650. In more detail, in this embodiment, the opening 3010a of the rear box 3010 is sized to accommodate a 19-inch performance display device, and the 15-inch performance display device 1600 is attached to a 19-inch set plate 1650 that corresponds to this opening 3010a, and the set plate 1650 is then fitted into the opening 3010a and attached to the rear box 3010. This allows the 15-inch performance display device 1600 to be attached to the rear box 3010 via the set plate 1650.

Therefore, when the size of the performance display device 1600 is changed due to a model change or design change, the performance display device 1600 can be attached using the set plate 1650 that matches the size of the performance display device 1600 without changing the rear box 3010, so the rear box 3010 can be used as is and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed. As a result, a performance display device 1600 of a different size than conventional ones can be provided while suppressing an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1, so that the different size of the performance display device 1600 makes it easier to make the pachinko machine 1 look different from conventional pachinko machines and strongly attract the interest of players, and a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players can be provided.

In addition, since the rear box 3010 is box-shaped and has high strength and rigidity, it can fully support even a large (heavy) performance display device 1600, making it possible to make the opening 3010a in which the performance display device 1600 is attached as large as possible, and it is possible to attach the largest performance display device 1600 (here, 19 inches) to the rear box 3010 (pachinko machine). In addition, when the range visible from the front is changed due to a model change or design change, by providing various decorative bodies and performance devices such as the rear front peripheral decorative unit 3200, the rear upper front performance unit 3300, the rear lower front performance unit 3400, the rear upper rear performance unit 3500, and the rear lower rear performance unit 3600 in front of the performance display device 1600, a performance display device 1600 of an optimal size for that range (here, 15 inches) can be attached to the rear box 3010 via the set plate 1650. Therefore, by using the set plate 1650, it is possible to attach performance display devices 1600 of various sizes, which makes it possible to avoid providing an unnecessarily large performance display device 1600 to the pachinko machine 1, thereby suppressing increases in the costs of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, since the performance display device 1600 is attached to the rear box 3010 via the set plate 1650 that is placed in the opening 3010a of the rear box 3010, if the position of the performance display device 1600 relative to the rear box 3010 needs to be changed due to a design change or the like, the position of the performance display device 1600 can be changed by simply changing the set plate 1650 without changing the rear box 3010. This prevents an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 and allows the performance display device 1600 to be placed in a more effective position, providing a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

When the size of the performance display device 1600 is smaller than the opening 3010a, the performance display device 1600 is attached to the rear box 3010 via the set plate 1650, so that the gap between the performance display device 1600 and the opening 3010a can be closed by the set plate 1650. Therefore, in the island equipment of the game hall in which this pachinko machine 1 is installed, it is possible to prevent dust, debris, game balls B, etc. from entering the pachinko machine 1 through the gap between the performance display device 1600 and the opening 3010a, and it is possible to avoid the occurrence of malfunctions that cause the game to be interrupted, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest from decreasing due to the interruption of the game, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decrease in interest.

In addition, because the set plate 1650 for mounting the performance display device 1600 to the rear box 3010 is transparent and flat, when the performance display device 1600 is mounted to the rear box 3010 via the set plate 1650, it is possible to see from the front to the rear, or from the rear to the front, through the gap between the performance display device 1600 and the opening 3010a. Therefore, it is possible to check the inside of the pachinko machine 1 from the outside, and to check the island equipment of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed from the inside of the pachinko machine 1, and by simplifying the work required for maintenance, the burden on the game hall can be reduced.

In addition, because the set plate 1650 is flat, the occupancy rate of the space in the front-to-rear direction by the set plate 1650 can be reduced, making it easier to secure space for arranging decorative objects and performance devices inside the relatively box-shaped rear box 3010. This makes it possible to provide the rear front peripheral decorative unit 3200, the rear upper front performance unit 3300, the rear lower front performance unit 3400, the rear upper rear performance unit 3500, and the rear lower rear performance unit 3600 as decorative objects and performance devices that can be expected to produce a higher effect, thereby providing a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

Furthermore, because the rear box 3010 is provided behind the game panel 1100, which has the play area 5a provided in front, the effect images displayed by the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear box 3010 can be seen through the game panel 1100 when viewed from the front, allowing the player to enjoy the effect images. Also, because the pachinko machine 1 can be made to look similar to conventional pachinko machines in which effect images can be seen within the play area 5a, it is possible to give players who are accustomed to conventional pachinko machines a sense of security based on the appearance, making it easier for them to select this pachinko machine 1 as the pachinko machine to play on.

In addition, since the pachinko machine can be characterized by the rear front peripheral decorative unit 3200, the rear upper front performance unit 3300, the rear lower front performance unit 3400, the rear upper rear performance unit 3500, and the rear lower rear performance unit 3600 which are arranged inside the rear box 3010, it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 one which easily attracts the interest of players, and it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 which is highly appealing to players. In addition, the players can be entertained by the performances provided by the rear front peripheral decorative unit 3200, the rear upper front performance unit 3300, the rear lower front performance unit 3400, the rear upper rear performance unit 3500, and the rear lower rear performance unit 3600, which are arranged inside the rear box 3010, and by appropriately combining the performances of the rear front peripheral decorative unit 3200, the rear upper front performance unit 3300, the rear lower front performance unit 3400, the rear upper rear performance unit 3500, and the rear lower rear performance unit 3600 with the performance images of the performance display device 1600, a variety of performances can be shown to the players, making it less likely for the players to become bored and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, because the performance display device 1600 is removably attached to the rear box 3010, if the performance display device 1600 breaks down, it can be easily removed from the rear box 3010, reducing the amount of maintenance work required and the burden on the gaming hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, within the game area 5a of the game board 5A where the game is played with the game ball B, there are provided a first guide passage 2580a and a second guide passage 2580b, which are provided in the left-right direction in the ball guide unit 2580 of the center role 2500 and through which the game ball B can flow, and a second large winning opening 2007, which can receive the game ball B depending on the progress of the game (the lottery result of the special pattern drawn), downstream of the first guide passage 2580a and the second guide passage 2580b. Therefore, when the second large winning opening 2007 becomes ready to receive the game ball depending on the lottery result of the special pattern drawn, a game ball is introduced into the second large winning opening 2007. In order to accept game ball B, the player can be made to shoot game ball B into the game area 5a so that it flows through the first guide passage 2580a or the second guide passage 2580b, and can be made to perform a shooting operation ("right hit") of game ball B aimed at the entrance of the first guide passage 2580a and the entrance of the second guide passage 2580b. The player can be made to feel anxious and thrilled depending on whether or not the game ball B shot into the game area 5a is guided by the desired first guide passage 2580a, which is likely to be accepted by the second large winning port 2007, thereby increasing the player's sense of anticipation and preventing a decline in interest. In addition, at the timing when the second large prize opening 2007 becomes available, the player can be prompted to shoot the game ball B into the game area 5a so that the game ball B that has passed through the first guide passage 2580a or the second guide passage 2580b will reach the second large prize opening 2007, making the player enjoy the operation of shooting the game ball B and preventing a decline in interest.

When the game ball B enters the first guide passage 2580a or the second guide passage 2580b, the game ball B is guided downward in a zigzag pattern in the front-to-rear direction by the inclined portions 2581b of the left passage member 2581 or the inclined portions 2582c of the right passage member 2582, which are provided in multiple vertical directions with the inclined sides alternately changed so that one side in the front-to-rear direction is lower, and the vertical wall portions 2581c and 2582d extending upward from the lower ends of the inclined portions 2581b and 2582c. The game ball B is guided in a serpentine manner in the left-right direction by the first protruding portion 2581e, the first protruding portion 2582b, the second protruding portion 2582f, and the second protruding portion 2583b of the passage closing plate 2583 protruding from the side wall portion 2581a and the side wall portion 2582a above the inclined portion 2582c, and the first protruding piece portion 2581f and the second protruding piece portion 2582g protruding from the side wall portion 2581a and the side wall portion 2582a at the portion between the lower end of the upper inclined portion 2581b and the inclined portion 2582c and the upper end of the lower inclined portion 2581b and the inclined portion 2582c. As a result, the game ball B is guided downward while swinging in the left-right direction and the front-back direction in a visible state, so that the player can see the movement of the game ball B that has never been seen in a conventional pachinko machine 1, and the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball B and suppress a decrease in interest.

At this time, the side wall portions 2581a, 2582a, and 2583a provided on the left and right sides of the inclined portions 2581b and 2582c can restrict the game ball B from moving outward to the left and right from the inclined portions 2581b and 2582c, and the standing wall portions 2581c and 2582d extending upward from the upper ends of the lower inclined portions 2581b and 2582c can prevent the game ball B moving from the upper inclined portions 2581b and 2582c to the lower inclined portions 2581b and 2582c from falling outward in the front-to-back direction. Therefore, the game ball B can be guided along the multiple inclined portions 2581b and 2582c, and the above-mentioned action and effect can be reliably achieved.

The first guide passage 2580a and the second guide passage 2580b have multiple inclined sections 2581b and 2582c that are inclined so that one side in the front-to-rear direction is lower. Therefore, when the game ball B guided by the inclined sections 2581b and 2582c is viewed from the front, the game ball B flows slower than if it were to flow freely, and the position of the game ball B in the front-to-rear direction appears unclear. This makes it possible for the game ball B to appear to the player as if it were flowing slowly down against gravity, allowing the player to see the movement of the game ball B that could not be seen in previous pachinko machines, entertaining the player and preventing a decline in interest.

In this way, the first guide passage 2580a and the second guide passage 2580b can guide the game ball B downward while swinging it left and right and front and rear, so the speed at which the game ball B flows can be relatively slowed (delayed) compared to when the game ball B is allowed to flow freely down. This allows the game ball B to stay in the game area 5a for a longer period of time, allowing the player to enjoy the movement of the game ball B for a longer period of time, making it less likely for the player to become bored and preventing a decline in interest.

By the way, if the guide passage is one that allows game ball B to flow down in a spiral, game ball B flowing down in a spiral passes through the frontmost part of the spiral many times, making it easy to time the flow of game ball B. Therefore, when a "small win" or the like is achieved, game ball B can be relatively easily received by the second large winning port 2007 downstream, but there is a risk that some players will quickly become bored with the operation of shooting game ball B in, causing a decrease in interest. In contrast, in the ball guide unit 2580 of this embodiment, when the game ball B is guided by the first guide passage 2580a or the second guide passage 2580b, the game ball B oscillates in the left-right and front-back directions in the first guide passage 2580a or the second guide passage 2580b, suppressing the circulation speed. Therefore, the game ball B reaches the downstream second large winning hole 2007 later than in other areas in the game area 5a, making it difficult to time the game ball B aimed at the second large winning hole 2007, and adding difficulty to the ball-hitting operation. This can arouse the player's motivation to perform the ball-hitting operation, make the game ball B enjoyable, and give a sense of accomplishment when the game ball B is accepted by the second large winning hole 2007, thereby suppressing a decline in the player's interest.

In addition, the first guide passage 2580a and the second guide passage 2580b can impart a degree of difficulty to the operation of shooting the game ball B aimed at the second large winning opening 2007, making it difficult for the game ball B to be accepted by the second large winning opening 2007. As a result, since it is difficult for the game ball B to be accepted by the second large winning opening 2007 due to the first guide passage 2580a and the second guide passage 2580b, it is possible to reduce the chances that a predetermined number of game balls B will be paid out by accepting the game ball B into the second large winning opening 2007, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Furthermore, if a game ball B gets stuck in the first guide passage 2580a or the second guide passage 2580b (if ball jam occurs), the jam can be easily cleared by inserting a thin rod-shaped member from the outside through the gap between the inclined portion 2581b of the left passage member 2581 and the top wall portion 2581d as a connecting portion, and the gap between the inclined portion 2582c of the right passage member 2582 and the top wall portion 2582e, and poking the game ball B. Therefore, even if ball jam occurs in the first guide passage 2580a or the second guide passage 2580b during play, it can be cleared early, so that the interruption time of the game can be shortened as much as possible, and the decrease in the player's interest in the game can be suppressed.

In addition, since the first guide passage 2580a and the second guide passage 2580b are provided in the left-right direction, the game ball B being guided in each of the first guide passage 2580a and the second guide passage 2580b can be seen by the player, allowing the player to enjoy the movement of the game ball B and preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when a player shoots a game ball B into the game area 5a to play a game, the game ball B moves in various ways as it flows down due to the multiple obstacle nails N planted in the game area 5a, and the game ball B that flows down to the downstream end of the game area 5a is discharged from the outlet 1008. In this game area 5a, a second large prize winning opening 2007 is provided, which opens and closes depending on the progress of the game (the lottery result of the first special pattern and the lottery result of the second special pattern drawn by the reception of the game ball B into the first start opening 2004 and the second start opening 2005). Therefore, when the game ball B is received into the second large prize winning opening 2007 when the second large prize winning opening 2007 is in a state where it can receive the game ball B, the game ball B is detected by the second large prize winning opening sensor 2561 and then circulates in the pseudo game area 2010. In the pseudo game area 2010, multiple obstacle nails N are also planted, so that the game ball B moves in various ways as it flows down, and the game ball B that flows down to the downstream end of the pseudo game area 2010 is discharged from the pseudo out-hole 2404 adjacent to the out-hole 1008. In addition, the pseudo game area 2010 is provided with a pseudo large prize opening 2402 that has a larger opening than the second large prize opening 2007, so that the pseudo large prize opening 2402 becomes capable of receiving the game ball B as the game progresses, and the game ball B received in the pseudo large prize opening 2402 is detected by the second large prize opening sensor 2561.

As a result, since multiple obstacle nails N are planted in each of the play area 5a and the pseudo play area 2010, the game ball B flows down while making a complex movement due to the multiple obstacle nails N, allowing the player to enjoy the movement of the game ball B and making it difficult for the player to get bored. In addition, since the out-hole 1008 of the play area 5a and the pseudo out-hole 2404 of the pseudo play area 2010 are adjacent to each other, the player can be given the illusion that the pseudo play area 2010 is a part of the play area 5a. Furthermore, since the second large prize winning door 2562 of the second large prize winning door 2007 is designed to move in the front-back direction, the presence of the second large prize winning door 2562 can be made difficult to notice when viewed from the front (player), and the openable and closable pseudo large prize winning door 2402 (pseudo large prize winning door 2405) can be made to stand out relatively. Furthermore, because the opening of this pseudo large prize opening 2402 is larger than the second large prize opening 2007, it creates the illusion that the game ball B received by the second large prize opening 2007 is circulating again through the game area 5a, and it also creates the illusion that the game area 5a is equipped with a huge large prize opening never seen in any pachinko machine before. This creates a strong impact on the player and strongly attracts the player's attention, and it also strongly draws the player's attention to the pseudo game area 2010 regardless of whether there is a game ball B in the pseudo game area 2010, making it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

In addition, because the opening of the pseudo large prize opening 2402 is larger than the second large prize opening 2007, the player can instantly recognize that when the pseudo large prize opening 2402 is in a state where it can accept game ball B, it can accept a large number of game balls B in a short period of time, which strongly attracts the player's attention to the pseudo large prize opening 2402 and increases the player's anticipation for the pseudo large prize opening 2402 to accept game ball B, thereby preventing a decline in interest, and also makes the player believe that the pseudo large prize opening 2402 located in the pseudo game area 2010 is a real large prize opening located in the game area 5a. In addition, when game ball B is received by pseudo large prize opening 2402, which is normally closed, the player is strongly made to believe that a certain privilege (e.g., payout of game ball B, occurrence of a favorable game state that gives the player an advantage, etc.) will be granted to the player, which can heighten the player's expectations for the game.

As a result, when the second large prize opening 2007 and the pseudo large prize opening 2402 are opened as the game progresses and are able to receive the game ball B, the player can aim the game ball B at the second large prize opening 2007 and shoot it into the game area 5a, which can be enjoyed by the player. Then, when the game ball B is received by the open second large prize opening 2007 and supplied into the pseudo game area 2010, the game ball B moves in various ways as it flows down due to the multiple obstacle nails N planted in the pseudo game area 2010, which allows the player to enjoy the movement of the game ball B, and can keep the player on edge and excited depending on whether the game ball B can be received by the pseudo large prize opening 2402, which can entertain the player and prevent a decline in interest.

In addition, when the pseudo large prize opening 2402 opens as the game progresses and game ball B can be accepted, the player can be made to believe that his chance has arrived, and can perform the operation of shooting game ball B into the pseudo large prize opening 2402 (second large prize opening 2007). In addition, the pseudo large prize opening 2402 can accept many game balls B, which entertains the player and prevents a decline in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, since the opening of the pseudo large prize opening 2402 is larger than the second large prize opening 2007, the player can be mistaken into thinking that the machine has a huge prize opening that has never been seen in a pachinko machine before, which gives a strong impact to the player and strongly attracts the interest of the pachinko machine 1, and makes it easier for the player to select the pachinko machine 1 as the pachinko machine to play, thereby providing a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players. Then, when the second large prize opening 2007 opens and closes in a predetermined opening and closing pattern due to a "jackpot" or the like and the pseudo large prize opening 2402 opens and closes, as described above, the player can perform an operation of shooting a game ball B aimed at the second large prize opening 2007 (pseudo large prize opening 2402) when a chance arrives, which greatly entertains the player and suppresses a decline in interest. At this time, since the game ball B circulating in the pseudo game area 2010 has been accepted by the second large prize opening 2007 and has finished playing (a so-called dead ball that no longer affects the game), even if it is accepted by the pseudo large prize opening 2402, the player is not given a privilege such as the payout of the game ball B, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side where the present pachinko machine 1 is installed. Also, since the payout is performed for all game balls B accepted by the second large prize opening 2007, it is possible to give the player the illusion that a payout is being performed by the acceptance of the game ball B into the pseudo large prize opening 2402, and it is possible to enjoy the acceptance of the game ball B into the pseudo large prize opening 2402. Furthermore, because all game balls B accepted by the second large prize opening 2007 are paid out, even game balls B that were not accepted by the pseudo large prize opening 2402 downstream of the second large prize opening 2007 are paid out. This gives the player the illusion that the number of game balls B paid out is greater than the number of game balls B accepted by the pseudo large prize opening 2402, making the player feel like he has made a gain and entertaining the player, preventing a decline in interest.

The pseudo large prize opening 2402 may be opened and closed to receive the game ball B as a notice of a "big win" or a favorable game state for the player. In this way, the pseudo large prize opening 2402 can open and close to suggest the arrival of a chance to the player, and the player's expectations for the game can be increased and a decline in interest can be suppressed. For example, the opening and closing speed and number of openings of the pseudo large prize opening 2402 can suggest the degree of expectation of a favorable game state. Alternatively, the pseudo large prize opening 2402 can be opened and closed to a rhythm such as 3-3-7 beats or a rhythm of music that matches the concept of the pachinko machine 1 to suggest the degree of expectation or the game state after a "big win" (for example, a time-saving state, a probability state), etc. In this way, the opening and closing action of the pseudo large prize opening 2402 can present a variety of effects to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored.

Furthermore, under normal circumstances, the second large prize opening 2007 is closed and cannot accept game ball B. Therefore, even if the pseudo large prize opening 2402 is open, game ball B cannot be circulated in the pseudo game area 2010 in which the pseudo large prize opening 2402 is located. This gives a sense of premium to the circulation of game ball B within the pseudo game area 2010, and can heighten the player's expectations that the second large prize opening 2007 will become available as the game progresses.

In addition, since the game ball B supplied from the second large prize opening 2007 to the pseudo game area 2010 is discharged from the pseudo outlet 2404 without being returned to the game area 5a, the player is strongly reminded that the pseudo game area 2010 is a special area (premium area) independent of the game area 5a, and the player is strongly encouraged to desire the circulation of game ball B within the pseudo game area 2010. When the pseudo large prize opening 2402 is opening and closing as the game progresses, the player can be encouraged to actively shoot game ball B into the second large prize opening 2007 in order to circulate game ball B within the pseudo game area 2010, which entertains the player and prevents a decline in interest.

In addition, if the game ball B that is received by the second large prize opening 2007 and supplied into the pseudo play area 2010 is not received by the pseudo large prize opening 2402, it is discharged from the pseudo outlet 2404 at the downstream end of the pseudo play area 2010, which makes the player believe that the pseudo outlet 2404 is the same as the outlet 1008 located at the downstream end of the play area 5a, and allows the player to enjoy the reception of the game ball B into the pseudo large prize opening 2402 without any sense of incongruity, in the same way as the second large prize opening 2007 that can be opened and closed and located in the play area 5a, thereby preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, the pseudo outlet 2404, which discharges game balls B that are not accepted by the pseudo large prize opening 2402, is provided adjacent to the outlet 1008 provided at the downstream end of the game area 5a, so that game balls B that are supplied from the second large prize opening 2007 to the pseudo game area 2010 and not accepted by the pseudo large prize opening 2402 appear as if they are being discharged from the outlet 1008.

Furthermore, since the pseudo game area 2010 is supplied with game ball B (a so-called dead ball that no longer affects the game) that has been detected by the second large prize opening sensor 2561 and has finished playing, game ball B that no longer affects the game is used for the presentation within the pseudo game area 2010. Therefore, for example, compared to a presentation device in which a pseudo game ball similar to game ball B is enclosed, there is no need to provide a mechanism for circulating the pseudo game ball for presentation, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

In addition, the pseudo large prize opening sensor 2403 can detect the receipt of game ball B into the pseudo large prize opening 2402, so that a predetermined performance can be executed upon detection of game ball B, providing a pachinko machine 1 that can further entertain the player and prevent a decline in interest.

In addition, because the pseudo large prize opening sensor 2403 is visible to the player, even if game ball B that has finished playing (a so-called dead ball that no longer affects the game) is allowed to circulate within the pseudo game area 2010, the player can be given the illusion that the pseudo large prize opening 2402 is a real large prize opening, which makes the player strongly desire to have game ball B accepted by the pseudo large prize opening 2402, which opens and closes as the game progresses, and allows the player to enjoy shooting game ball B aimed at the second large prize opening 2007 (pseudo large prize opening 2402), thereby preventing a decline in interest.

[11. Various control processes on the main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to Figs. 167 to 172. Fig. 167 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control side power-on process, Fig. 168 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the main control side power-on process of Fig. 167, Fig. 169 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control side timer interrupt process, Fig. 170 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting change process, Fig. 171 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting value confirmation display process, and Fig. 172 is a flowchart showing an example of the error display process. First, various random numbers used in game control will be described, followed by the movement of the initial value update type counter, the main control side power-on process, the main control side timer interrupt process, the setting change process, the setting value confirmation display process, and the error display process.

[11-1. Various random numbers]
Various random numbers used for game control include special random numbers used to determine whether or not a jackpot game or a small jackpot game will occur, initial value determination random numbers for jackpot determination used to determine the initial value of this special random number, reach determination random numbers used to determine whether or not a reach (missed reach) will occur when a jackpot game is not generated, variable display pattern random numbers used to determine the variable display pattern of the special patterns that are variably displayed on the first special pattern display device and the second special pattern display device of the function display unit 1400, pattern random numbers used to determine the jackpot pattern or small jackpot pattern (determine the type of win) that is derived and displayed on the first special pattern display device and the second special pattern display device of the function display unit 1400 when a jackpot game is generated, and initial value determination random numbers for jackpot pattern used to determine the initial value of this pattern random number. In addition to these random numbers, there are also prepared random numbers for determining whether or not to operate the variable winning port door 2521, which can guide the game ball B to the variable winning port 2003, random numbers for determining an initial value for determining a winning pattern, which are used to determine the initial value of the random numbers for determining a winning pattern, and random numbers for a variable display pattern of a normal pattern, which are displayed in a variable manner on the normal pattern display of the function display unit 1400.

Of the various random numbers used in this type of game control, special random numbers are updated by hardware, while other random numbers are updated by software.

[11-2. Operation of the initial value update type counter]
For example, the special random number is updated directly by hardware using a main control built-in hard random number circuit built in the main control MPU 1310a. When the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit first selects one value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value, and then extracts other values within the predetermined numerical range one after another at high speed based on a clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. When all values within the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, the main control built-in hard random number circuit again extracts one value within the predetermined numerical range, and then extracts other values within the predetermined numerical range one after another at high speed based on a clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. The main control built-in hard random number circuit repeatedly performs such high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a sets the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time when the main control MPU 1310a obtains a value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit as the special random number.

In contrast, the counter that updates the random number for determining whether a normal symbol is a hit is updated within a predetermined fixed range of values from the minimum to the maximum, and counts up this range by adding one value each time the main control timer interrupt process described below is performed. This counter counts up from the random number for determining the initial value for determining whether a normal symbol is a hit to the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum to the initial value for determining whether a normal symbol is a hit. When the counter finishes counting up the range of the random number for determining whether a normal symbol is a hit from the minimum to the maximum value, the initial value for determining whether a normal symbol is a hit is updated. This type of counter update method is called an "initial value update type counter." The initial value for determining whether a normal symbol is a hit can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process that draws a value from the fixed range of values of the counter that updates the random number for determining whether a normal symbol is a hit.

In this embodiment, when the RAM clear switch (RWM switch 633d) of the payout control board 633 is operated when the power is turned on, or when the checksum value (sum value) obtained by calculating the sum of various information stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a as a numerical value during the main control side power-on process described below does not match the checksum value (sum value) stored during the main control side power-off process (when the power is turned off), etc., the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number is set to the same fixed value, which is always derived from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the normal symbol hit determination random number based on the ID code by the main control MPU 1310a by executing the initial value derivation process. In other words, the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number is always overwritten and updated with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value derivation process. In this way, the value set in the initial value determination random number for determining whether a normal pattern is a winning symbol is derived using the ID code, and analysis is prevented by taking two-stage security measures: the first security measure is that the ID code cannot be rewritten even using an external device when the ID code is stored in non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a by the manufacturer who manufactured the main control MPU 1310a, and the second security measure is that an initial value derivation process is executed when clearing all areas of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area, thereby deriving the same fixed value based on the ID code.

Here, the advantage of extracting the ID code from the non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a and using the extracted ID code as the random number for determining the initial value for determining whether a normal symbol wins is determined will be explained. For example, even if a person who is trying to illegally acquire game balls paid out as prize balls obtains and disassembles the game board 5 in some way, illegally obtains the ID code pre-stored in the non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a, and is able to grasp the timing at which the counter value for updating the random number for determining whether a normal symbol wins is determined matches the normal symbol win determination value, the ID code is given a unique code for identifying the individual, so it will be completely different from the ID code pre-stored in the non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a' equipped in other game boards 5'. In other words, in other game boards 5', the timing at which the counter value for updating the random number for determining whether a normal symbol wins is determined matches the normal symbol win determination value is also completely different from that of the game board 5 obtained. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the acquired game board 5 is completely useless for other game boards 5', i.e., other pachinko machines 1', so even if a momentary power outage is generated at the predetermined intervals obtained by disassembly and analysis, and a game ball is passed through gate 2002 at each of these predetermined intervals, it is not possible to operate variable winning opening door 2521 and create a state in which game ball B can be guided to variable winning opening 2003.

[11-3. Processing when power is turned on on the main control side]
First, the main control MPU 1310a is configured so that a stack pointer is set to a predetermined address as a default when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1. This stack pointer, for example, indicates an address stored in the stack to temporarily store the contents of a memory element (register) in use, or indicates an address stored in the stack to temporarily store the return address of this routine when a subroutine is terminated and the routine is returned to, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is loaded.

Under the control of the main control MPU 1310a, the main control side power-on process is performed as shown in Figures 167 and 168. When this main control side power-on process starts, the main control MPU 1310a sets RAM access permission (step S10). This RAM access permission setting allows updates to be made to the main control's built-in RAM.

Following step S10, the main control MPU 1310a performs a power outage clear process (step S12). In this power outage clear process, a wait timer process is performed to determine whether a power outage warning signal has been input from the power outage monitoring circuit. The voltage does not rise immediately from when the power is turned on until it reaches a predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when a power outage or momentary power outage (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped) occurs, the voltage drops and becomes smaller than the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit as a power outage warning. Similarly, when the voltage becomes smaller than the power outage warning voltage from when the power is turned on until it reaches a predetermined voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit. Therefore, the wait timer process is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power outage warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on, and in this embodiment, the waiting time (wait timer) is set to 200 milliseconds (ms).

Following step S12, the main control MPU 1310a judges whether the RAM clear switch has been operated (step S14). The RAM clear switch has three functions (RAM clear switch, setting switch button, and error release switch), and in this case, it operates as a RAM clear switch function for completely erasing information stored in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM. In this judgment, when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is HI, the main control MPU 1310a judges that the RAM clear switch is not operated and judges that the RAM clear switch is to be operated, whereas when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is LOW, it judges that the RAM clear switch is operated and judges that the RAM clear switch is to be operated. Note that, since the period from the start of the main control side power-on processing, which is this routine, to the judgment of step S14 is extremely short, in reality, the person who presses the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch will turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch.

In the judgment of step S14, if the main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear switch has been operated, it sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to a value of 1 (step S16A). On the other hand, in the judgment of step S14, if the main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear switch has not been operated, it sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to a value of 0 (step S16B). In other words, the main control MPU 1310a makes the RAM clear process, which initializes the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a (i.e., the main control built-in RAM), executable for a predetermined period of time from when the power is turned on. The RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG described above is a flag that indicates whether or not to erase various information stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, including game information related to the game such as probability fluctuations and unpaid prize balls, and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the counter for determining the main prize ball number information output, etc.), and is set to a value of 1 when various information is erased, and to a value of 0 when various information is not erased. The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in steps S16A and S16B is stored in a general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S16A or S16B, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the main frame 4 is opened and the setting key is turned ON (step S18). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a performs the determination based on a detection signal from the main frame opening switch 4b for detecting the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, and a setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a when the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the setting key cylinder is turned ON by rotating the setting key switch 1311a clockwise by 60 degrees from the initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF). In addition, since the period from when the main control side power-on processing, which is this routine, begins until the judgment of step S18 is extremely short, in reality, the person who turns on the setting key switch 1311a will turn on the power to the pachinko machine 1 after turning on the setting key switch 1311a.

In the judgment of step S18, when the main control MPU 1310a judges that the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main frame opening switch 4b and judges that the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key ON based on the setting key ON signal, it sets the setting key ON flag CS-FLG to a value of 1 (step S20A). On the other hand, in the judgment of step S18, when the main control MPU 1310a judges that the main frame 4 is not open relative to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main frame opening switch 4b and/or judges that the setting key switch 1311a is not set to the setting key ON based on the setting key ON signal, it sets the setting key ON flag CS-FLG to a value of 0 (step S20B). The setting key ON flag CS-FLG is a flag that indicates whether or not to permit the setting change or confirmation display of the current setting value (the value set among setting values 1 to 6 at the time the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON) stored in a specified area (a setting value dedicated area in a specific area, described later) of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. The flag is set to a value of 1 when the setting value setting change or confirmation display is permitted, and to a value of 0 when the setting value setting change or confirmation display is not permitted. The value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG set in steps S20A and S20B is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S20A or step S20B, the main control MPU 1310a performs a wait time standby process (step S22). In this wait time standby process, the system that controls the drawing of the peripheral control board 1510 waits until it starts (boots). In this embodiment, the standby time until booting (boot timer) is set to 2.5 seconds (s). When the main control MPU 1310a completes the wait time standby process, the peripheral control board 1510 is in a state where it can receive various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a). Note that, when the main control MPU 1310a completes the wait time standby process, the dispensing control board 633 completes booting in a shorter time than the peripheral control board 1510, so the dispensing control board 633 is in a state where it can receive various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a).

Following step S22, the main control MPU 1310a judges whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input (step S24). As described above, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off or a power outage or momentary interruption occurs, if the voltage falls below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit as a power outage warning. The judgment in step S24 is made based on this power outage warning signal. In the judgment in step S24, if the main control MPU 1310a judges that a power outage warning signal has been input, it returns to the judgment in step S24 again, and repeats the judgment in step S24 as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input. A detailed explanation of the fact that the judgment in step S24 is made following the wait time standby process in step S22 will be given later.

When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S24 that no power outage warning signal has been input, it determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is equal to the value 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is equal to the value 1 (step S25). By determining that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is equal to the value 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is equal to the value 1, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is met.

When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S25 that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not equal to 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is not equal to 1, it determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is equal to 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is equal to 0 (step S26). By determining that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is equal to 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is equal to 0, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is not met, but that various information should be erased in the same manner as when the predetermined setting value change permission condition is met.

If the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S26 that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not equal to 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is not equal to 0, it calculates a checksum (step S29). This checksum is calculated by treating the various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values.

Following step S29, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the calculated checksum value (sum value) matches the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off processing (power-off) described later (step S30). In step S30, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that they match, it determines whether the backup flag BK-FLG is set to a value of 1 (step S32). This backup flag BK-FLG is a flag indicating whether game backup information such as various information, the checksum value (sum value), and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG have been stored and retained in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power-off processing described later, and is set to a value of 1 when the main control side power-off processing has been completed normally, and to a value of 0 when the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally. In addition, a detailed explanation of the calculation of the checksum in step S29 and the judgment in step S30 when the main control board 1310 is first powered on for inspection after being manufactured in the inspection process of the manufacturing line for the main control board 1310 will be provided later.

When the main control MPU 1310a judges in step S30 that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or when the main control MPU 1310a judges in step S32 that the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (is 0), that is, when the main control side power-off processing has not been normally completed, it performs an error display process (step S33) and enters an infinite loop. This infinite loop causes the state in which the error display process has been completed to be maintained, resulting in a state in which it is completely impossible to proceed with the game, and the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off and then turned on again. In this error display process, which will be described in detail later, if it is judged that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if it is judged that the main control side power-off processing has not been normally completed at the time of power-off, an error display is performed to inform the user that there is an abnormality in the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM (or that the contents cannot be trusted). In this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the alphabet E on the setting display 1310g as an error display.

After the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise from its initial position (i.e. the rotational position of the setting key cylinder which turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF) to turn it ON, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned ON while operating the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch on the payout control board 633, and this routine, the main control side power-on processing, is started again. The main control MPU 1310a determines in the above-mentioned step S14 that the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch has been operated, and in the above-mentioned step S16A, sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to a value of 1. Also, in the above-mentioned step S18, it determines that the main body frame 4 has been opened relative to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b, and determines that the setting key switch 1311a has been set to setting key ON based on the setting key ON signal, and in the above-mentioned step S20A, it sets the setting key ON flag RCL-FLG to a value of 1. To set CS-FLG to a value of 1, in the judgment of step S25 described above, it is judged that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is a value of 1, and it is judged that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is met, and following the setting change processing of step S37 described below, in the processing of step S38 described below, the RAM error is cleared by clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area, allowing the game to proceed (hereinafter referred to as the "first RAM error clearing method").

As an alternative method to this first RAM error release method, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and with the setting key cylinder in the initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a), the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch on the payout control board 633, thereby starting the main control side power-on processing, which is this routine, again. In the judgment of the above-mentioned step S14, the main control MPU 1310a judges that the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch has been operated, and in the above-mentioned step S16A, sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to a value of 1, whereas in the above-mentioned step S18, it judges that the main frame 4 has not been opened relative to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main frame open switch 4b and/or judges that the setting key switch 1311a has not been set to setting key ON based on the setting key ON signal, and in the above-mentioned step S20B, it sets the setting key ON flag CS-FLG to a value of To set it to 0, in the judgment of step S26 described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to a value of 0, meaning that the predetermined condition for allowing a change to the setting value is not met, but it is judged that various information should be erased in the same way as if the predetermined condition for allowing a change to the setting value were met, and in the processing of step S38 described below, all areas of the main control internal RAM are cleared except for a specific area, thereby canceling the RAM error and allowing the game to proceed (hereinafter referred to as the "second RAM error cancellation method").

In this embodiment, when the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S30 that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or when the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S32 that the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (is 0), that is, that the main control side power off processing has not ended normally, it displays an error in step S33 to inform the user that there is an abnormality (or that the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are unreliable), and this can be done using two methods, the first RAM error clearing method and the second RAM error clearing method. As a result, when there is no need to change the setting value at all, the RAM error can be cleared by performing the second RAM error clearing method using the RAM clear switch.

On the other hand, in the judgment of step S32, when the backup flag BK-FLG is a value of 1, that is, when the main control MPU 1310a judges that the main control side power cut processing has been normally completed, it sets the working area of the main control built-in RAM as the time of power recovery (step S34). This setting is done by reading the power recovery time information from the ROM (i.e., the main control built-in ROM) built into the main control MPU 1310a, and setting this power recovery time information in the working area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, various information is read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to this various information are stored in a specified storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, the main control MPU 1310a will proceed with the game based on the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, "power restoration" includes not only the state in which power is turned on after being cut off, but also the state in which power is restored after a power outage or momentary power outage, and the state in which the main control board 1310 is irradiated with high frequency waves from unauthorized means (for example, a high frequency output device hidden in the hem of an individual's arm) and the main control MPU 1310a itself is reset and then restored.

Following step S34, the main control MPU 1310a sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 0 (step S36). This causes various information, checksum values (sum values), etc. to change as various processes are performed thereafter. Therefore, unless the main control side power failure process described below is normally completed and the backup flag BK-FLG is not set to a value of 1, all areas of the main control built-in RAM will be cleared except for specific areas, as described below.

Following the determination in step S36, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is equal to the value 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is equal to the value 1 (step S27). By determining that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is equal to the value 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is equal to the value 1, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the predetermined setting value display permission condition is met.

When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S27 that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to a value of 1, and thus determines that the predetermined setting value display permission condition is met, it performs a setting value confirmation display process (step S28). This setting value confirmation display process, the details of which will be described later, displays the setting value stored in a dedicated setting value area in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM on the setting display 1310g.

On the other hand, in the judgment of step S25, when the main control MPU 1310a judges that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is equal to the value 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is equal to the value 1, that is, when it judges that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied, it performs a setting change process (step S37). This setting change process, the details of which will be described later, is performed based on a signal from the RAM clear switch on the dispensing control board 633. As described above, the RAM clear switch has three combined functions (RAM clear switch, setting change button, and error release switch), and here it functions as a setting change button for selecting and changing the setting value. Each time the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch is operated, a signal (setting value selection switching signal) is input to inform the user of this, the setting value is changed and displayed on the setting display 1310g, and when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned from ON to OFF, the changed setting value is determined based on the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a and stored in a specified area of the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a.

In the process of step S37 or the judgment of step S26, when the main control MPU 1310a judges that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is value 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is value 0, that is, when the predetermined setting value change permission condition is not satisfied but when it judges that various information is to be erased in the same manner as when the predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied, it clears all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for the specific area (step S38). Here, the main control MPU 1310a performs this by writing the value 0 to a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (area of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM excluding the specific area). In this embodiment, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not value 0 (value 1), that is, when it judges that various information is to be erased, and when the setting change process is terminated, it always clears all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for the specific area (predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (area of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM excluding the specific area). Here, the "specific area" is composed of a setting value dedicated area in which a setting value is stored, and an out ball count dedicated area in which the counting result (total number) of the number of game balls collected by the out port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021, and the second sub-out port 2022 provided in the game area 5a partitioned and formed on the game board 5 is stored. The setting value dedicated area stores the setting value that is changed in the setting change process described below, and the out ball count dedicated area stores the counting result (total number) of the number of game balls collected by the out port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021, and the second sub-out port 2022 that is counted in the ball counting process described below.

The main control MPU 1310a may read a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as the initial value and set it. When the logic of the signal (RAM clear signal) that indicates that the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch on the payout control board 633 has been operated indicates RAM clear and various information is erased, when the sum values do not match, or when the main control side power off processing has not ended normally, the main control MPU 1310a retrieves a unique ID code previously stored in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, and performs an initial value derivation process that always derives the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the normal pattern winning judgment random number based on this retrieved ID code, and sets this fixed value to the normal pattern winning judgment initial value determination random number to be used for determining the initial value of the normal pattern winning judgment random number described above.

Following step S38, the main control MPU 1310a sets the working area of the main control built-in RAM as the initial setting (step S40). This setting is performed by reading the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting this initial information in the working area of the main control built-in RAM. This initializes the game backup information, and for example, the value of the counter for determining the output of main prize ball count information is set to the initial value of 0. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1310a will proceed with the game based on the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S36, S28 or S40, the main control MPU 1310a sets the initial value and starts the main control built-in WDT (step S41). Here, in order to set an initial value in the main control built-in WDT that monitors whether the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a is operating normally, a timer setting value is set in the watchdog timer control register (hereinafter referred to as the "WDT control register") built into the main control MPU 1310a, and the main control built-in WDT is started to start timing until the main control MPU 1310a is reset. When the main control built-in WDT is started, timing by the main control built-in WDT is started, and if the timer clear setting value is not set in the watchdog timer clear register (hereinafter referred to as the "WDT clear register") built into the main control MPU 1310a before the timed time reaches the time set by the timer setting value, the main control built-in WDT will forcibly reset the main control MPU 1310a. In contrast, when the main control built-in WDT is started and timing begins, if the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register before the timed time reaches the time set by the timer setting value, the timing by the main control built-in WDT is cleared and timing begins again. In this way, by repeatedly clearing the timing by the main control built-in WDT before it reaches the time set by the timer setting value and then starting timing again, it is possible to monitor whether the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a is operating normally.

Following step S41, the main control MPU 1310a performs interrupt initial setting (step S42). This setting is for setting the interrupt period when the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

Following step S42, the main control MPU 1310a performs serial communication initial settings (step S44). Here, the transmission serial port prescaler corresponding to the various serial input/output ports built into the main control MPU 1310a (for example, the serial input/output ports (receiving channels and transmitting channels) for the dispensing control board 633 and the serial input/output ports (receiving channels and transmitting channels) for the peripheral control board 1510) is set to the communication speed and whether or not parity is enabled, and the transmission serial port control register is set to initialize the transmission circuit and enable transmission.

Following step S44, the main control MPU 1310a initializes the test signal output port (step S46). Here, the gaming machine testing facility initializes the test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various types of inspection information when the power is turned on (setting it to output OFF data).

Following step S46, the main control MPU 1310a performs the activation setting of the main control built-in hardware random number circuit (step S48). Here, among the various random numbers related to the game, the special random number used to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot game is updated by hardware by latching and acquiring the random number in the hardware random number control register built in the main control MPU 1310a, and the activation of the main control built-in hardware random number circuit is set in the hardware random number setting register. When the main control built-in hardware random number circuit is activated by these settings, it extracts other values in a predetermined numerical range one after another without overlapping at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a, and when all values in the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, it again extracts one value in the predetermined numerical range, and extracts other values in a predetermined numerical range one after another without overlapping at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. When the main control MPU 1310a obtains a random number (random number value) from the main control's built-in hardware random number circuit, it outputs a latch signal to the main control's built-in hardware random number circuit, and obtains the random number (random number value) extracted by the main control's built-in hardware random number circuit when this latch signal is input from a hard random number latch register built into the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a sets this obtained random number value as a special random number.

Following step S48, the main control MPU 1310a reserves the command to be sent when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, in order to inform the user that the power has been turned on (restored) based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the power-on state command, the main control return destination command at power-on, and the counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output at power-on, which are classified as power-on, are created and stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. In the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, various information may be read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to this various information may be stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In such a case, first, after the transmission of various commands corresponding to the game information among the various information is completed, the power-on state command, the main control return destination command at power-on, and the counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output at power-on are transmitted. These commands are transmitted in the main control side timer interrupt processing described later. A detailed explanation of how step S50 schedules the commands to be sent when the power is turned on will be provided later.

Following step S50, the main control MPU 1310a sets interrupt permission (step S52). This setting causes the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, to be repeated at the interrupt period set in step S42, i.e., every 4 ms.

Following step S52, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S54). When the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or a power outage or momentary interruption occurs, as described above, if the voltage falls below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit to the main control MPU 1310a as a power outage warning. The determination in step S54 is made based on this power outage warning signal.

When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S54 that no power outage warning signal has been input, it performs a non-win/lose random number update process (step S56). In this non-win/lose random number update process, the random numbers for reach determination, the random numbers for variable display patterns, the random numbers for determining the initial value for the jackpot pattern, and the random numbers for determining the initial value for the small jackpot pattern, etc., are updated. In this way, in the non-win/lose random number update process, random numbers that are not related to the win/lose determination (jackpot determination) are updated by software. Note that the random numbers for normal pattern win determination, the random numbers for determining the initial value for normal pattern win determination, and the random numbers for normal pattern variable display patterns, etc., are also updated by this non-win/lose random number update process.

After step S56, the process returns to step S54, where the main control MPU 1310a determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input. If no power outage warning signal has been input, the process performs a non-win/lose random number update process in step S56, and repeats steps S54 to S56. The process of steps S54 to S56 is referred to as the "main process on the main control side."

On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S54 that a power outage warning signal has been input, it sets the interrupt prohibition (step S58). This setting disables the main control timer interrupt process described below, prevents writing to the main control built-in RAM, and protects the above-mentioned game information and various other information, including other information, from being overwritten.

Following step S58, the main control MPU 1310a starts outputting a power outage clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process is performed as when the power outage clear signal was started to be output in the power outage clear process in step S12.

Following step S60, the main control MPU 1310a stops the drive signals output to, for example, the various displays of the functional display unit 1400, the variable prize opening solenoid 2522, the first large prize opening solenoid 2524, the second large prize opening solenoid 2563, the special monitor, etc. (step S62).

Following step S62, the main control MPU 1310a calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum is calculated by treating the game information in the working area of the main control internal RAM, excluding the storage area for the checksum value (sum value) and the backup flag BK-FLG value, as numerical values.

Following step S64, the main control MPU 1310a sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 1 (step S66). This completes the storage of the game backup information.

Following step S66, the main control MPU 1310a sets the RAM access prohibition (step S68). This RAM access prohibition setting makes it impossible to access the main control's built-in RAM, thereby preventing updates to the contents of the main control's built-in RAM.

After step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, a timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT started in step S41, and the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT is cleared and it becomes impossible to start timekeeping again, so that the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. After that, the main control MPU 1310a performs this main control side power-on processing again. The processing from step S58 to step S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power-off processing".

As described above, when the main control MPU 1310a is affected by electrical noise, it is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a cannot make the judgment of step S54 and cannot perform the main control side power off processing. For this reason, when the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, it is reset without performing the main control side power off processing, and the main control side power on processing is performed again. In other words, since the main control side power off processing is not performed, the checksum value (sum value) in the main control side power off processing based on the time immediately before the forcible reset by the built-in reset circuit is not stored, the checksum value (sum value) stored when the main control side power off processing is performed at the previous power off and the checksum value (sum value) calculated in step S28 when the built-in reset circuit is forcibly reset and restarted cannot match, and a checksum (sum value) error will always occur in the main control built-in RAM, and the entire area of the main control built-in RAM will be completely erased (cleared) except for a specific area in the processing of step S38.

The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a) is reset when there is a power outage or momentary power outage, and when power is subsequently restored, this main control side power-on processing is performed.

In step S30, it is checked whether the game backup information stored in the main control's built-in RAM is normal, and then in step S32 it is checked whether the main control's power-off processing has been completed normally. In this way, by double-checking the game backup information stored in the main control's built-in RAM, it is checked whether the game backup information has been stored due to fraudulent activity.

In addition, when the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is not 0 (is 1) in the judgment of step S25, that is, when the setting change of the setting value is permitted, the setting change processing of step S37 is performed, and in the processing of step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are completely erased (cleared) except for the specific area, and in the judgment of step S26, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (is 1), that is, when it is judged that various information is to be erased, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are completely erased (cleared) except for the specific area. In this way, when the pressing operation part is operated when the power is restored (more precisely, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch), when a setting change that can change and determine the setting value is performed (when the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change processing), the main control MPU 1310a always clears the specified area of the main control built-in RAM. This is because when the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch is pressed, for example, if the pachinko machine 1 is in a state advantageous to the player when the gaming hall closes for business (for example, a state in which a probability-varying (chance-change) hit has occurred), the above-mentioned gaming backup information needs to be erased (cleared) before the next business day begins, so a staff member or other attendant at the gaming hall needs to turn on the power to the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch. In addition, when changing the setting value, when the setting change process is performed (even if the current setting value is ultimately maintained), it is necessary to erase (clear) the game backup information, including various information such as game information obtained with the setting value before the setting change process was performed, from the main control built-in RAM. As described above, the setting key is an important key that can be used to change the setting value as well as to check the current setting value, so only limited people, including the manager of the game parlor, are allowed to possess it, and it is limited to two or three people. In this embodiment, even if the setting value is not changed, that is, even if there is no setting key that only limited specific people possess, a staff member such as a staff member of the game parlor can erase (clear) the game backup information from the main control built-in RAM by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch when it is necessary to erase (clear) the game backup information.

Here, we will explain the point that the determination of the presence or absence of a power outage warning signal in step S24 is performed following the wait time standby process in step S22. First, we will explain the problems that arise when there is no determination of the presence or absence of a power outage warning signal in step S24, that is, when the value of the RAM clear flag is determined in step S26 after the wait time standby process in step S22 and the subsequent processing is carried out.

As described above, when a power outage or momentary interruption occurs and the power supply from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off, the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as +5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the power outage or momentary interruption. In other words, even if the power supply from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off due to a momentary interruption or power outage, the charge stored in the hardware, the electrolytic capacitor MC2, is applied as +5V, so that the main control side power cut-off processing can be completed within the period of about 7 ms after the power supply from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off. This ensures that the main control side power cut-off processing can be completed reliably when a power outage or momentary interruption occurs and the power supply from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off while the player is playing, that is, while the main control side main processing or the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is being performed.

However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, when power is restored, in the wait time standby process of step S22, the system that controls the drawing of the peripheral control board 1510 starts (boots) and starts counting the waiting time (boot timer: in this embodiment, it is set to 2.5 seconds). If an instantaneous interruption or power outage occurs just before the waiting time is reached, the charge stored in the hardware, the electrolytic capacitor MC2, is applied as +5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. However, within a period of about 7 ms, the interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42, and then the interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52. This causes the main control side timer interrupt process described later to be performed, and even if the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated, the main control side power off process in the main control side power on process may not be completed. For this reason, the value calculated as the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is not stored, and the main control side power on process is started again when power is restored.

When this happens, when power is restored, the main control side power-on process is started and the wait time standby process in step S22 is completed without an instantaneous or power outage. After that, when the checksum calculated in step S28 based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is compared in step S30 with the value stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the instantaneous or power outage occurred, the checksum values will not match, and in step S38 all areas of the main control built-in RAM will be cleared except for a specific area. In other words, when power is restored, the RAM clear switch is operated by a staff member or other attendant of the game parlor, and the above-mentioned game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM will be forcibly erased (cleared) even if there is no intention from the staff member or other attendant of the game parlor to clear the RAM.

In this embodiment, therefore, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process is provided in step S24 to determine whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input. If a power outage warning signal has been input, the process returns to the determination of step S24, and the determination of step S24 is repeated as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input. This prevents the game from progressing. Although a value is set to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S16A or step S16B before the wait time standby process of step S22 is performed, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a as described above, so that the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information) are not changed at all even if RAM access permission is set in step S10.

In this way, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process of determining whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input is provided as step S24. When a power outage warning signal has been input (that is, when it is determined by the determination of step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 has been cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process of step S22), the process returns to the determination of step S24 again, and as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input, the determination of step S24 is repeated, preventing the progress of the game, and preventing various information including game information and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the counter for determining the main prize ball number information output, etc.) from being updated, and preventing fluctuations in the calculation result of the checksum. As a result, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is restarted, it determines that the calculation result of the checksum in step S28 and the calculated and stored value of the checksum in step S64 are consistent, so that the game information stored and held in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the momentary power outage or power outage occurs is not initialized. This prevents game information from being initialized immediately before a momentary or power outage occurs when power is restored.

In addition, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process is provided as step S24 for determining whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input. When a power outage warning signal has not been input (i.e., when it is determined by the judgment of step S24 that the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 has not been cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process of step S22), even if the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off while the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is progressing a game, the electrolytic capacitor MC2 supplies power to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, to output game information and other information (for example, main prize ball number information output judgment Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can complete the main control side power cut processing consisting of the processing of steps S58 to S68, which is a backup processing for storing various information including information indicating the value of a power counter for a power supply, and an infinite loop, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that the checksum calculation result of step S28 matches the checksum calculation result in the backup processing (i.e., the calculated and stored value of the checksum in step S64), when restarted, and therefore does not initialize the game information stored and held in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the momentary interruption or power outage occurs. In other words, the game information is restored to the state immediately before the momentary interruption or power outage occurs, and the main control board 1310 can be started.

Furthermore, if it is determined in step S24 that a power outage warning signal has been input immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control's built-in WDT, thereby making it possible to start the main control side power outage processing again without updating the contents of the main control's built-in RAM at all. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S24 that a power outage warning signal has not been input immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, it is possible to reliably complete the main control side power outage processing within the "power supply assurance period during momentary power outage or power outage" of approximately 7 ms defined by the hardware, as before. In other words, in this embodiment, when a momentary or power outage occurs during the main control side power-on process when power is restored, and the power from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off, and the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the power outage or momentary power outage occurs. Therefore, if the main control side power cut process cannot be completed within the "momentary or power supply securing period" of about 7 ms by the hardware electrolytic capacitor MC2, a determination is made in step S24 immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22 as to whether a power outage warning signal has been input. If a power outage warning signal has been input, the process returns to the determination of step S24, and as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input, the determination of step S24 is repeated, preventing the game from proceeding.

This software makes it impossible for the game to progress, thereby preventing progression to steps subsequent to step S24 (specifically, the control flow in which the interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42, and then interrupt permission is set in step S52 to start the main control side timer interrupt processing described below), thereby preventing the contents of the main control's built-in RAM (various information including game information and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the counter for determining the main prize ball number information output)) from being updated. In this way, when a power outage or momentary interruption occurs and the power is cut off from the island equipment of the gaming hall, the main control's built-in RAM is divided into two parts: a part that is handled by software so that the contents of the main control's built-in RAM (game information and various information including other information (e.g., information indicating the value of the counter for determining the output of main prize ball information)) are not changed at all, and a part that is handled by hardware so that the main control's power outage processing is completed reliably and the contents of the main control's built-in RAM (game information and various information including other information (e.g., information indicating the value of the counter for determining the output of main prize ball information)) are not changed at all. By configuring it in two parts, it is possible to reliably prevent the contents of the main control's built-in RAM (game information and various information including other information (e.g., information indicating the value of the counter for determining the output of main prize ball information)) from being changed.

Next, the reservation setting of the command to be sent when the power is turned on in step S50 will be described. In step S50, as described above, in order to inform the fact that the power has been turned on (restored) based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, a power-on state command classified as power-on, a main control return destination command at power-on, and a counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output at power-on are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. This main control return destination command at power-on is mainly composed of information indicating the driving state of the variable prize opening solenoid 2522, information indicating the driving state of the first large prize opening solenoid 2524, and information indicating the driving state of the second large prize opening solenoid 2563. Here, we will first explain the problem that occurs when the power-on main control return destination command does not include information indicating the drive state of the variable prize opening solenoid 2522, information indicating the drive state of the first large prize opening solenoid 2524, and information indicating the drive state of the second large prize opening solenoid 2563; in other words, the problem that occurs when the power-on main control return destination command does not reserve the command to be sent when the power is turned on in step S50.

For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 is controlling the display of a jackpot game screen (e.g., a jackpot game performance screen) in the display area of the performance display device 1600, and the main control board 1310 is driving the second large prize opening solenoid 2563 and the second large prize opening 2007 is opened by the opening/closing member, if a momentary or power outage occurs and power is subsequently restored, the main control board 1310 will start driving the second large prize opening solenoid 2563, and the second large prize opening 2007 will transition from a state in which it is closed by the opening/closing member to a state in which it is open.

However, when a momentary or power outage occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 when power is restored and returns to normal, so when a momentary or power outage occurs and power is subsequently restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can return to normal based on the probability and time-saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 when power is restored. However, when a momentary or power outage occurs while the main control board 1310 is generating a jackpot game as a game state and power is subsequently restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can return to normal by displaying a screen in the display area of the performance display device 1600 according to the probability and time-saving state based on the probability and time-saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 when power is restored, but cannot display at all which round of the jackpot game it is. In other words, even if, for example, a gaming ball enters the second large winning opening 2007 and is detected by the second large winning opening sensor 2561, and the main control board 1310 transmits a large winning opening 1 count display command to the peripheral control board 1510 to inform the peripheral control board 1510 of the number of gaming balls that have entered the second large winning opening 2007, and the peripheral control board 1510 receives it, the peripheral control board 1510 can display the number of gaming balls that have entered the second large winning opening 2007 on the screen in the display area of the performance display device 1600 according to the probability and time-saving status, but cannot display at all which round of the jackpot game it is (i.e., which round).

In such a situation, for example, when the fourth round (fourth round) of a jackpot game ends, the main control board 1310 stops driving the second large prize opening solenoid 2563 and transmits a large prize opening 1 closed display command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, which instructs the second large prize opening 2007 to transition from an open state to a closed state by the opening/closing member (i.e., the second large prize opening 2007 begins to close between rounds), and when the main control board 1310 starts the fifth round (fifth round) of a jackpot game, the main control board 1310 starts driving the second large prize opening solenoid 2563 and transmits a large prize opening 5th open display command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, which instructs the second large prize opening 2007 to transition from a closed state by the opening/closing member to an open state (i.e., the second large prize opening 2007 begins to open for the fifth round). As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches from the screen corresponding to the probability and time-saving status described above to a screen indicating the start of the 5th round of jackpot play, and displays it in the display area of the performance display device 1600.

In addition, for example, when the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of a screen informing the player that the game state is favorable to the player because the game ball can be received by the variable winning opening 2003 (for example, a screen informing the player that the variable winning opening 2003 is in an open state by the variable winning opening door 2521) in the display area of the performance display device 1600, the main control board 1310 drives the variable winning opening solenoid 2522 to operate the variable winning opening door 2521 to receive the game ball B into the variable winning opening 2003. When a momentary or power outage occurs while the game is in a state where it can be induced, and then power is restored, the main control board 1310 is restored to the game state immediately before the momentary or power outage occurred based on the power restoration information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, and the variable prize opening solenoid 2522 begins to operate, causing the variable prize opening door 2521 to move in the reverse direction and close the variable prize opening 2003.

However, when a momentary power outage or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 is designed to receive various commands from the main control board 1310 and recover when power is restored. Therefore, when a momentary power outage or power failure occurs and power is subsequently restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can recover based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 when power is restored. However, when a momentary or power outage occurs while the main control board 1310 is in a gaming state in which a gaming ball can be received by the variable winning port 2003, generating a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and power is then restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can return to normal by displaying a screen in the display area of the performance display device 1600 according to the probability and time-saving state based on the probability and time-saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration, but the peripheral control board 1510 cannot display at all in the display area of the performance display device 1600 a screen informing the player that the gaming state is now such that a gaming ball can be received by the variable winning port 2003, generating a gaming state that is advantageous to the player. For this reason, a player seated in front of the pachinko machine may be surprised by the occurrence of a momentary or power outage and forget that when power is restored, the game state immediately before the momentary or power outage occurred was one in which game balls could be received into the variable winning opening 2003. In such a case, even though the game state at the time of power restoration is restored to one in which game balls can be received into the variable winning opening 2003, the screen instructing the game to be played (i.e., the screen instructing the game to insert a game ball into the variable winning opening 2003) is not displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 at the time of power restoration, and the player may not know what game to play.

As described above, in the two examples mentioned above, there was a problem in that the game state immediately before the momentary or blackout could not be quickly restored after power was restored. In other words, there was a problem in that a player seated in front of the pachinko machine would mistakenly think that the pachinko machine's system had frozen when power was restored after a momentary or blackout.

In this embodiment, in order for the main control board 1310 to transmit a power-on status command and a power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510 when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on, but also when a power outage or momentary power outage occurs and power is restored), in step S50, the power-on status command, which is classified as power-on, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM. These commands are then transmitted during the main control side timer interrupt process described below.

As a result, based on the power-on state command and power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310, for example, in the above example, when a momentary or power outage occurs during the fourth round of a jackpot game and power is then restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can communicate to the peripheral control board 1510 that the second large prize winning port solenoid 2563 will begin to be driven as the return destination of the main control board 1310, and the second large prize winning port 2007 will transition from a state in which it is closed by the opening/closing member to a state in which it is open. Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 cannot display a screen specifying that it is the fourth round of the jackpot game (i.e., a screen showing which round it is) in the display area of the performance display device 1600, but can display a screen informing the player that it is a jackpot game, that the second large prize opening solenoid 2563 has started to be driven, and that the second large prize opening 2007 has been opened by the opening/closing member (for example, "This is a jackpot. The second large prize opening is open. Please play so that the game ball enters the second large prize opening."). A screen that conveys the message to the player that "You have won!" to the player seated in front of the pachinko machine can be displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600, and the player can be instructed to play a game in which a game ball is to be inserted into the second large winning port 2007 after power is restored. Also, for example, in the above example, in a game state in which game balls can be received into the variable winning port 2003 and the game state is advantageous to the player, if an instantaneous or power outage occurs and power is subsequently restored, the main control board 1310 can be reset to the variable winning port solenoid 2522. The peripheral control board 1510 can display a screen in the display area of the performance display device 1600 informing the player that the variable winning opening door 2521 is activated and the game ball B can be guided to the variable winning opening 2003 (for example, a screen informing the player of the message "The variable winning opening is open. Please play so that the game ball enters the variable winning opening."), and instruct the player seated in front of the pachinko machine to play a game in which the game ball will enter the variable winning opening 2003 after power is restored.

This allows the main control board 1310 to give detailed instructions on where to return the peripheral control board 1510 when power is restored after a momentary or power outage. Therefore, once power is restored, the game can be quickly restored to the state it was in immediately before the momentary or power outage. In other words, a player seated in front of the pachinko machine can be prevented from mistaking the system of the pachinko machine for a malfunction when power is restored after a momentary or power outage occurs, as if the system had frozen.

Next, the calculation of the checksum in step S28 and the judgment in step S30 when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time since it was manufactured for inspection in the main control board inspection process, which is an inspection process on the manufacturing line for the main control board 1310, will be described. When the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time since it was manufactured for inspection in the main control board inspection process, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has never executed the above-mentioned backup process of steps S58 to S68 and the main control side power off process consisting of an infinite loop. Therefore, even if a checksum is calculated based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM in step S28, the checksum values will not match in the comparison judgment in step S30, and all areas of the main control built-in RAM will be cleared in step S38 except for a specific area.

As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is performed in step S50, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, so that only three commands, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command, are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Then, in the main control side timer interrupt processing described later, the power-on state command is transmitted first, followed by the power-on main control return destination command, followed by the power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command. Using this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is turned on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, the power-on state command is transmitted as the first command from the main control board 1310 to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process.

The power-on state command is composed of information that instructs the player to clear the RAM when the RAM clear switch is operated when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on, but also when power is restored after a power outage or momentary interruption), information that instructs which state (probability and time-saving state) to return to when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on, but also when power is restored after a power outage or momentary interruption), among the above-mentioned low-probability time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state, low-probability non-time-saving state, and high-probability non-time-saving state, and information that indicates the model code of the pachinko machine. Here, we will explain the problem that occurs when the power-on state command does not include information that indicates the model code of the pachinko machine.

The model code of the pachinko machine is used to determine which copyright of the work it refers to and what kind of game specifications it has when creating the so-called max type, mid type, or sweet type of pachinko machine 1 (more precisely, the main control board 1310) (for example, in addition to game specifications in which when a probability fluctuation occurs, that state continues until the next big win occurs, there are game specifications in which the number of times the special pattern can fluctuate is limited (for example, 30 or 70 times) and the probability fluctuation occurs (so-called ST machine)).

In the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured, the main control board 1310 for multiple types of work copyrights may be mixed. In such a case, the workers on the manufacturing line may not know which of the multiple types of work copyrights (for example, the copyrights of the works Movie A, Movie B, Drama C, Movie D, Manga E, and Manga F) the main control board 1310 is being sent to the manufacturing line to manufacture for which of the multiple types of work copyrights (for example, the copyright of the work Movie D), or may mistakenly believe that the main control board 1310 is being sent to the manufacturing line to manufacture the main control board 1310 for another copyright (for example, the copyright of the work Manga F).

For this reason, when main control boards 1310 for multiple types of work copyrights are manufactured on the production line of a manufacturer that produces pachinko machines 1, if the main control boards 1310 for multiple types of work copyrights are mixed, workers on the production line will not be able to confirm which work copyright the main control board 1310 manufactured on the production line is for, and even for the same work copyright, they will not be able to confirm which model type it is (max type, middle type, sweet type, or any other type) or what the game specifications are (game specifications in which if a probability fluctuation occurs, that state will continue until the next jackpot game occurs, or ST machine).

As a result, if main control boards 1310 for multiple types of work copyrights are mixed when manufacturing the main control boards 1310 on the production line of the manufacturer that produces the pachinko machine 1, the main control boards 1310 for multiple types of work copyrights will be sent to the game board assembly line for attaching the main control boards 1310 to the game board 5 while still mixed. For this reason, workers on the game board assembly line may attach a main control board 1310 to the game board 5 that does not correspond to the game board 5 for the work copyright. This results in a problem of reduced production efficiency of the game board 5.

In this embodiment, in order for the main control board 1310 to transmit a power-on status command including information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine to the peripheral control board 1510 when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on, but also when a power outage or momentary power interruption occurs and power is restored), in step S50, a power-on status command classified as power-on, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball count information output determination counter notification command are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM. These commands are then transmitted during the main control side timer interrupt process described below.

As a result, during the main control board inspection process, which is an inspection process of the manufacturing line, an operator on the production line of the manufacturer that produces the pachinko machine 1 turns on the main control board 1310, and based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine contained in the power-on status command received by the inspection device from the main control board 1310, the inspection device 201 determines the model code of the pachinko machine, i.e., the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, including the series code for identifying which of the above-mentioned model types (max type, middle type, or sweet type) it is, the copyright code for identifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications (for example, when a probability fluctuation occurs, that state will continue until the next big win game occurs, By visually checking the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor based on the game specification code, which specifies the game specification where a probability fluctuation occurs with a limited number of times for the special symbol to change (such as an ST machine), and the game specification code, it is possible to determine which copyright of the work the main control board 1310 corresponds to, and even for the same copyright of the work, it is possible to determine which model type (max type, middle type, or sweet type) and what the game specification is (a game specification where when a probability fluctuation occurs, that state continues until the next big win occurs, or an ST machine).

As a result, even if main control boards 1310 for multiple types of work copyrights are mixed when manufacturing the main control boards 1310 on the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, the workers in the main control board inspection process of the manufacturing line can visually check the inspection monitor to accurately determine the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specifications, and can separate the main control boards 1310 for each work copyright and send them to the subsequent game board assembly line. Then, the workers on the game board assembly line can reliably attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 for the work copyright to the game board 5, and can prevent a decrease in the production efficiency of the game board 5 caused by the work of attaching the main control board 1310 that does not correspond to the game board 5 for the work copyright to the game board 5. Therefore, it can contribute to improving the production efficiency of the game board 5.

[11-4. Main control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt process on the main control side will be described. This timer interrupt process on the main control side is repeatedly performed at an interrupt period (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the power-on process on the main control side shown in Figs. 167 and 168.

When the main control side timer interrupt processing is started, the main control MPU 1310a switches the register bank as shown in FIG. 169 (step S100). The general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a has two register banks, a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing described above, while the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is this routine. In step S100, in order to use the second register bank in the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, the register bank is switched from the first register bank used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing to the second register bank. Note that in this embodiment, when the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started, the process of saving each register to a stack is not required.

Following step S100, the main control MPU 1310a performs a timer subtraction process (step S102). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time during which the first special symbol display device and the second special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 are lit according to the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and special electric role control process described later, the time during which the normal symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 is lit according to the normal symbol variable display pattern determined by the normal symbol and normal electric role control process described later, as well as the time for which the payout control board 633 receives the various commands transmitted by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) and the ACK signal input determination time set as a determination condition when determining whether or not a payout owner ACK signal has been input. Specifically, when the change time of the change display pattern or normal pattern change display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt period is set to 4 ms, so each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the change time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the subtraction result becomes a value of 0, thereby accurately measuring the change time of the change display pattern or normal pattern change display pattern.

In this embodiment, the ACK signal input judgment time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input judgment time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the ACK signal input judgment time is accurately measured when the subtraction result becomes a value of 0. Note that these various times and the ACK signal input judgment time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S102, the main control MPU 1310a performs switch input processing (step S104). In this switch input processing, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, the main control MPU 1310a reads, for example, a detection signal from the gate sensor 2601, a detection signal from the general prize opening sensor 3001, a detection signal from the first start opening sensor 3002, a detection signal from the second start opening sensor 2401, a detection signal from the variable prize opening sensor 2526, a detection signal from the first large prize opening sensor 2524, a detection signal from the second large prize opening sensor 2561, a detection signal from the out sensor 664, a detection signal from the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704, a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050, an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch, a detection signal from the door frame opening switch, a detection signal from the main frame opening switch 4b, a signal from the setting key switch 1311a, a signal from the setting switching button, and a payer ACK signal from the payout control board 633 which informs the payout control board 633 that the prize ball command sent in the prize ball control process described below has been successfully received by the payout ball control board 633, and stores these as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, when the detection signal from the first start hole sensor 3002 and the detection signal from the second start hole sensor 2401 are read, the corresponding start hole winning command classified as "other" is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In other words, when there is a detection signal from the first start hole sensor 3002, the corresponding start hole winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and when there is a detection signal from the second start hole sensor 2401, the corresponding start hole winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

In this embodiment, when the switch input process is started, the input states of all the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a (including those that have been subjected to vacant terminal processing) are first read as the first time, and after a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs) has elapsed, each is read again as the second time. Then, the result of the second read is compared with the result of the first read. It is determined whether or not any of these comparison results are the same. If the results are not the same, they are read again as the third time, and the result of the third read is compared with the result of the second read. It is determined again whether or not any of these comparison results are the same. If the results are not the same, they are read again as the fourth time, and the result of the fourth read is compared with the result of the third read. It is determined again whether or not any of these comparison results are the same. If the results are not the same, it is treated as if no game ball has entered the game, or the input is ignored.

In this way, in the switch input process, the input states of all the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a (including those for which vacant terminal processing has been applied) are read twice in total, by comparing the first to third readings and the second to fourth readings, thereby making it possible to avoid false detections due to the influence of chattering, noise, etc., and therefore the detection signal from the gate sensor 2601, the detection signal from the general winning port sensor 3001, the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 3002, the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 2401, the detection signal from the variable winning port sensor 2526, This can increase the reliability of the detection signals from the payout control board 633, the detection signal from the first large prize opening sensor 2524, the detection signal from the second large prize opening sensor 2561, the detection signals from the out sensor 664, the first ball sensor 703, and the second ball sensor 704, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050, the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch, the detection signal from the door frame open switch, the detection signal from the main frame open switch 4b, the signal from the setting key switch 1311a, the signal from the setting switch button, and the payout owner ACK signal from the payout control board 633 which informs the payout control board 633 that the prize ball command sent in the prize ball control process described below has been successfully received by the payout control board 633.

Following step S104, the main control MPU 1310a performs input terminal malfunction monitoring processing (step S105). In this input terminal malfunction monitoring processing, the state of the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a that have been subjected to vacant terminal processing is determined based on the information acquired in the switch input processing in step S104. Specifically, for example, the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a is grounded to ground (GND) as a vacant terminal processing, so that its logical state is always LOW. Therefore, in the input terminal malfunction monitoring processing, whether the logical state of the input terminals that have been subjected to vacant terminal processing among the input terminals of the various input ports is LOW or not is determined based on the information acquired in the switch input processing in step S104. When the main control MPU 1310a determines that the logical state of the input terminal to which the idle terminal processing has been applied is not LOW, it stores a malfunction command classified as a notification display that notifies the user that a malfunction has occurred in the peripheral circuitry of the main control MPU 1310a as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S105, the main control MPU 1310a performs a winning/losing random number update process (step S106). In this winning/losing random number update process, the above-mentioned pattern random number is updated. In addition to these random numbers, the random numbers for determining the initial value for the winning pattern and the random numbers for determining the initial value for the small winning pattern, which are updated in the non-winning/losing random number update process of step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. 168, are also updated. These random numbers for determining the initial value for the winning pattern and the random numbers for determining the initial value for the small winning pattern are updated in the main control side main process and this main control side timer interrupt process, respectively, to further increase randomness. In contrast, the pattern random numbers are random numbers related to winning/losing judgment (winning judgment), so the respective counters count up only each time this winning/losing random number update process is performed. In addition, the random numbers for determining whether a normal pattern is a winning combination and the random numbers for determining the initial value for determining whether a normal pattern is a winning combination are also updated by this winning/losing random number update process.

For example, as described above, the counter that updates the random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol has won is an initial value update type counter that is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and counts up this range by adding one value each time the main control side timer interrupt process is performed. It counts up from the initial value determination random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol has won toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the initial value determination random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol has won. When the counter finishes counting up the range of the random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol has won, from the minimum value to the maximum value, the initial value determination random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol has won is updated by the win/lose random number update process. The initial value determination random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol has won can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process that draws a value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol has won.

In this embodiment, the random numbers for determining the initial values for the big win symbols and the random numbers for determining the initial values for the small win symbols are updated by the non-win/lose random number update process of step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. 168, and the win/lose random number update process of step S106 in the main control side timer interrupt process, which is this routine. However, if the processing time of this routine becomes uneven each time the interrupt timer occurs and the main control side main process is repeatedly executed within the remaining time until the next interrupt timer occurs, causing the number of times the non-win/lose random number update process of step S56 is executed to become random, the random numbers for determining the initial values for the big win symbols and the random numbers for determining the initial values for the small win symbols may be updated only in the non-win/lose random number update process of step S56.

Following step S106, the main control MPU 1310a performs ball counting processing (step S107). In this ball counting processing, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and based on this input information, game balls that are discharged from the game board 5 in response to a detection signal from the out sensor 664 and circulate through the out ball passage 663 (game balls that are shot into the game area 5a and received in the winning ports such as the general winning port 2001, the variable winning port 2003, the first starting port 2004, the second starting port 2005, the second large winning port 2007, etc. and discharged from the game board 5, and game ... When the out sensor 664 detects a game ball that has been received by the out port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021, or the second sub-out port 2022 and discharged from the game board 5 without being received by any winning port after being input, a calculation is performed to add (increment) a value of 1 to the value of the total collected ball counter. When the first ball sensor 703 detects a game ball that has been received by the out port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021, or the second sub-out port 2022 and circulates through the first ball path 701 after receiving a detection signal from the first ball sensor 703, a calculation is performed to add (increment) a value of 1 to the value of the out ball counter that counts the number of game balls that have been collected by the out port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021, or the second sub-out port 2022, that is, the so-called out balls. When the second ball sensor 704 detects a game ball that has been shot into the game area 5a and has been received by the general winning port 2001, the variable winning port 2003, the first starting winning port 2004, or the like, a calculation is performed to add (increment) a value of 1 to the value of the out ball counter that counts the number of game balls that have been collected by the out port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021, or the second sub-out port 2022, that is, the so-called out balls. When the second ball sensor 704 detects a game ball that has been accepted into a winning port such as the moving winning port 2004, the second starting port 2005, the second large winning port 2007, etc. and is circulating through the second ball path 702, an operation is performed to add (increment) the value of a safe ball counter, which counts the number of game balls, so-called safe balls, that have been accepted into winning ports such as the general winning port 2001, the variable winning port 2003, the first starting port 2004, the second starting port 2005, the second large winning port 2007, etc. In other words, in the ball counting process, the out sensor 664 detects both game balls received by the general winning opening 2001, the variable winning opening 2003, the first starting opening 2004, the second starting opening 2005, the second large winning opening 2007, etc., and game balls received by the out opening 1008, the first sub-out opening 2021, and the second sub-out opening 2022, the first ball sensor 703 detects game balls collected by the out opening 1008, the first sub-out opening 2021, and the second sub-out opening 2022, and the second ball sensor 704 detects game balls received by the general winning opening 2001, the variable winning opening 2003, the first starting opening 2004, the second starting opening 2005, the second large winning opening 2007, etc.

Then, the main control MPU 1310a stores the value of the total recovered ball counter, which is the calculation result, in a dedicated area for counting total recovered balls in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM as the total number of game balls received in the general winning opening 2001, the variable winning opening 2003, the first starting opening 2004, the second starting opening 2005, the second large winning opening 2007, etc., and the game balls received in the out opening 1008, the first sub-out opening 2021, and the second sub-out opening 2022, and stores the value of the out ball counter in an area dedicated for counting total recovered balls in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM. The total number of out balls collected by the first opening 1008, the first sub-out opening 2021, and the second sub-out opening 2022 is stored in an out ball counting dedicated area in a specific area of the RAM built in the main control, and the value of the safe ball counter is stored in a safe ball counting dedicated area in a specific area of the RAM built in the main control as the total number of safe balls received by the winning openings such as the general winning opening 2001, the variable winning opening 2003, the first starting opening 2004, the second starting opening 2005, and the second large winning opening 2007. In addition, the ratio of the number of payouts (total number of prize balls paid out) to the value of the total collected ball counter, that is, the ratio of the number of payouts (total number of prize balls paid out) to the total number of game balls inserted, is calculated, and the calculation result is stored in a base calculation area in a specific area of the RAM built in the main control, and the output of the lighting signal to be displayed on the special monitor is set and stored in the output information storage area as output information.

In addition, when the value of the total collected ball counter is divisible by the value 10, that is, each time the total number of game balls collected at the winning ports such as the general winning port 2001, the variable winning port 2003, the first starting port 2004, the second starting port 2005, the second large winning port 2007, the out port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021, and the second sub-out port 2022 reaches 10 balls, the main control MPU 1310a creates a ball collection command to notify this fact and stores it in the output information storage area as transmission information. Note that when the value of the collected ball counter, the value of the out ball counter, and the value of the safe ball counter, which are the calculation results, reach their maximum values (in this embodiment, the value 65,535) and the value of the collected ball counter, the out ball counter, and the safe ball counter is further incremented by 1, the values of the collected ball counter, the out ball counter, and the safe ball counter overflow and become 0, and the calculation is performed to add from this value 0.

Following step S107, the main control MPU 1310a performs a prize ball control process (step S108). In this prize ball control process, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and a prize ball command for paying out game balls based on this input information is created, and a self-check command for checking the connection status between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is created. The created prize ball command and self-check command are then sent to the payout control board 633 as main payout serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the second large prize opening 2007, a prize ball command is created to pay out 15 prize balls, and since the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls has reached 10, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set to inform the player of this fact, and stored as output information in the output information storage area, and the prize ball command is sent to the payout control board 633. If a payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 633 has successfully received the prize ball command is not input within a specified time, a self-check command is created to check the connection status between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, and sent to the payout control board 633.

In addition, in the prize ball control process of step S108, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and based on this input information, if the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10, a main prize ball number information output command classified as "other" is created to inform the player of this fact, and is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information. The main prize ball number information output command is created based on the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter. The value of this counter for determining the main prize ball number information output is calculated by reading input information from the input information memory area described above, and counting the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls based on this input information, that is, based on the game balls that have entered the various prize openings such as the general prize opening 2001, the variable prize opening 2003, the first start opening 2004, the second start opening 2005, the second large prize opening 2007, etc. (hereinafter referred to as the ``various prize openings provided on the game board 5'').The value is stored and updated in the prize ball planned information memory area of the main control built-in RAM in the prize ball control process of step S108. In the prize ball control process of step S108, the value of the counter for determining the output of main prize ball number information stored in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the RAM built in the main control is read, and the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls is added to the value of the counter for determining the output of main prize ball number information read from the input information storage area described above based on the input information read from the input information storage area described above. When the value indicating the added number of balls exceeds the value of 10 (i.e., when the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10), a main prize ball number information output command is created to inform the user of this fact and is stored in the output information storage area as transmission information, and the value indicating the exceeded number of balls is stored and updated as the value of the counter for determining the output of main prize ball number information in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the RAM built in the main control described above.

Following step S108, the main control MPU 1310a performs a frame command reception process (step S110). The dispensing control board 633 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands classified as status indications (for example, the frame status 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame status 2 command). In the frame command reception process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information informing the payer control board 633 of this fact is stored as output information in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, the main control MPU 1310a reshapes the command normally received as payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands classified as status indications (the frame status 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame status 2 command)) and stores it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Following step S110, the main control MPU 1310a performs a fraud detection process (step S112). In this fraud detection process, an abnormal state regarding the winning ball is confirmed. If it is determined that a fraudulent act by radio wave irradiation (hereinafter referred to as "radio wave irradiation cheat") is occurring, the value of the radio wave irradiation cheat counter is incremented by a value of 1. The value of this radio wave cheat counter is incremented each time it is determined that a radio wave irradiation cheat is occurring in the fraud detection process, and when the RAM is cleared, the value 0 (zero) is set as the initial value. When the value of the radio wave irradiation cheat counter reaches the upper limit (in this embodiment, the upper limit is set to a value of 250 based on 4 ms, which is the interrupt period during which the fraud detection process performs the main control side timer interrupt process), a radio wave irradiation cheat notification command classified as a notification display that informs the user that a radio wave irradiation cheat is occurring is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

In addition, in the fraud detection process in step S112, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and when a detection signal is input from the magnetic sensor 1050, it is determined that a fraudulent act using a magnet (hereinafter referred to as "magnet goto") is occurring, and the value of the magnet goto counter is incremented by a value of 1. The value of this magnet goto counter is incremented each time it is determined that a radio wave irradiation goto is occurring in the fraud detection process, and is included in the game backup information. When the RAM is cleared, the value of 0 (zero) is set as the initial value. When the value of the magnet goto counter reaches the upper limit (in this embodiment, the upper limit is set to a value of 250 based on the interrupt period of 4 ms, which is the interrupt period in which the fraud detection process performs the main control side timer interrupt process), a magnet goto notification command classified as a notification display that informs that a radio wave irradiation goto is occurring is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. In this embodiment, by reliably detecting and notifying magnet goto using this mechanism, it is possible to contribute to the ability of staff such as game parlor staff to discover magnet goto at an early stage.

In addition, in the fraud detection process of step S112, for example, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and when a detection signal is input from the first large prize opening sensor 2525 or the second large prize opening sensor 2561 in a case where a jackpot game is not being played, such as when a game ball enters the first large prize opening 2006 or the second large prize opening 2007, an abnormal prize winning display command classified as a notification display as an abnormal state is created and stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information, or the value of the safe ball counter stored in the safe ball counting dedicated area is counted as the general prize opening sensor. If the total number of game balls detected by the sensor 3001, variable winning opening sensor 2526, first start opening sensor 3002, second start opening sensor 2401, first large winning opening sensor 2525, and second large winning opening sensor 2561 differs from the total number of game balls actually received by the winning openings such as the general winning opening 2001, variable winning opening 2003, first start opening 2004, second start opening 2005, first large winning opening 2006, and second large winning opening 2007, a winning abnormality display command classified as an abnormal condition and a notification display is created, and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

In the fraud detection process of step S112, when a radio wave irradiation and/or a magnet is detected, the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is set to a value of 1 to indicate that fraud has been detected, whereas when neither a radio wave irradiation nor a magnet is detected, the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is set to a value of 0 to indicate that no fraud has been detected. This fraud detection flag FD-FLG is included in the game backup information, and when the RAM is cleared, the initial value is set to 0 (zero). In addition, when an abnormal win at the large prize slot is detected, the fraud detection flag FD-FLG may also be set to a value of 1 to indicate that fraud has been detected.

Following step S112, the main control MPU 1310a performs a launch permission signal setting process (step S113). In this launch permission signal setting process, the logic of the launch permission signal that conveys permission to launch the game ball B to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 is set. Specifically, based on the value of the above-mentioned fraud detection flag FD-FLG, when the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is a value of 0, that is, when it is determined that no fraud has been detected, the main control MPU 1310a sets the logic of the launch permission signal to the launch permission logic and stores it in the above-mentioned output information storage area as output information, while when the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is not a value of 0 (a value of 1), that is, when it is determined that fraud has been detected, the logic of the launch permission signal is set to the launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) inverted from the launch permission logic, and stores it in the above-mentioned output information storage area as output information. In addition, the main control MPU 1310a reads input information from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, when a detection signal from the door frame opening switch is input and the door frame opening switch detects that the door frame 3 is open relative to the main frame 4, or when a detection signal from the main frame opening switch 4b is input and the main frame opening switch 4b detects that the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, the main control MPU 1310a sets the logic of the launch permission signal to a launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) that is the inversion of the launch permission logic, and stores it in the above-mentioned output information storage area as output information. The logic of the launch permission signal is configured by hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function so that it is set to the launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) that is the inversion of the launch permission logic as an initial value (default) from when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (after power is restored) until the launch permission signal setting process of step S113 in the main control side timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is started.

Following step S113, the main control MPU 1310a performs special symbol and special electric role control processing (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric role control processing, a latch signal is output to the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and the random number (random number value) extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit when the latch signal is input is obtained from the hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU 1310a, and this obtained random number value is set as a special random number. Then, it is determined whether the special random number (i.e., the random number value obtained from the hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU 1310a) matches the jackpot determination value pre-stored in the main control built-in ROM (determines whether a jackpot game is generated (referred to as a "special lottery")), or the value of the counter that updates the symbol random number is taken out and it is determined whether it matches any of the hit type determination values pre-stored in the main control built-in ROM according to the jackpot type or small hit type (determines the hit type).

If these judgment results (lottery results) are due to the first start hole sensor 3002, various commands related to the special pattern 1 synchronization performance are created, whereas if the judgment result (lottery results) are due to the second start hole sensor 2401, various commands related to the special pattern 2 synchronization performance are created and stored in the transmission information memory area as transmission information. In addition, the special pattern variable display pattern is determined based on the random number for the variable display pattern described above, and the output of a lighting signal to the first special pattern display device or the second special pattern display device of the function display unit 1400 is set so as to light up the first special pattern display device or the second special pattern display device of the function display unit 1400 in accordance with the determined special pattern variable display pattern, and the output is stored in the output information memory area described above as output information. In addition, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when a jackpot game is generated, various commands classified as jackpot-related (jackpot opening command, large prize opening 1 Nth opening display command, large prize opening 1 closing display command, large prize opening 1 count display command, jackpot ending command, and jackpot pattern display command) are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, for example, the output of a drive signal to the second large prize opening solenoid 2563 to open and close the opening/closing member is set, and stored in the output information storage area as output information, and the number of times (rounds) that the second large prize opening 2007 changes from a closed state to an open state is two. At one time, the output of a lighting signal to the 2 round indicator lamp of the round indicator of the function display unit 1400 is set to light up the 2 round indicator lamp, and this is stored in the output information storage area as output information; when there are 15 rounds, the output of a lighting signal to the 15 round indicator lamp of the round indicator of the function display unit 1400 is set to light up the 15 round indicator lamp, and this is stored in the output information storage area as output information; and the output of a lighting signal to the status indicator of the function display unit 1400 is set to light up a specified color to indicate whether or not a time reduction has occurred, and this is stored in the output information storage area as output information.

Following step S114, the main control MPU 1310a performs normal symbol and normal electric device control processing (step S116). In this normal symbol and normal electric device control processing, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and normal winning slot winning processing is performed based on this input information. In this normal winning slot winning processing, it is determined from the input information whether or not a detection signal from the gate sensor 2601 has been input to the input terminal of the input port. Based on the result of this determination, when a detection signal has been input to the input terminal of the input port, the value of the counter that updates the random number for determining whether the normal symbol has been hit described above is extracted and stored as normal winning slot winning information in the normal winning slot winning information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

This regular prize slot winning information storage area has sections 0 to 3 (four sections), and regular prize slot winning information is stored in the order of section 0, section 1, section 2, and section 3. For example, if regular prize slot winning information is stored in sections 0 to 2 of the regular prize slot winning information storage, when a detection signal from gate sensor 2601 is input to the input terminal of the input port, the regular prize slot winning information is stored in section 3 of the regular prize slot winning information storage.

The regular prize winning information stored in the 0th section of the regular prize winning information storage is set in the working area of the main control built-in RAM. When this regular prize winning information is set, the regular prize winning information in the 1st section of the regular prize winning information storage is shifted to the 0th section of the regular prize winning information storage, the regular prize winning information in the 2nd section of the regular prize winning information storage is shifted to the 1st section of the regular prize winning information storage, and the regular prize winning information in the 3rd section of the regular prize winning information storage is shifted to the 2nd section of the regular prize winning information storage, and the 3rd section of the regular prize winning information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when normal prize winning information is stored in the first and second sections of the normal prize winning information storage, the normal prize winning information in the first section of the normal prize winning information storage is shifted to the 0th section of the normal prize winning information storage, and the normal prize winning information in the second section of the normal prize winning information storage is shifted to the first section of the normal prize winning information storage, and the second section of the normal prize winning information storage and the third section of the normal prize winning information storage become free areas. Here, when normal prize winning information is stored in the first to third sections of the normal prize winning information storage, the output of the lighting signal of the normal reserve display of the function display unit 1400 is set based on the above-mentioned normal prize winning information so that the total number of stored normal prize winning information is set as a reserved ball and the normal reserve display of the function display unit 1400 is turned on, and the output information is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area.

Following the normal winning port winning process, the normal winning port winning information set in the working area of the RAM built in the main control is read out, and the value of the random number for determining whether or not the normal symbol wins is determined from the read normal winning port winning information to determine whether or not it matches the normal symbol winning determination value previously stored in the ROM built in the main control (called the "normal lottery"). This determination result (lottery result by the normal lottery) determines whether or not to operate the variable winning port door 2521. If it is decided to operate it, the variable winning port door 2521 is operated to open the variable winning port 2003, creating a game state in which game balls can be received by the variable winning port 2003, creating a game state that is advantageous to the player. The normal symbol variable display pattern corresponding to this determination is determined based on the random number for the normal symbol variable display pattern described above, and various commands classified as related to the normal symbol synchronization performance are created and stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information. In addition, the output of a lighting signal to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set to light up the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined normal symbol variable display pattern, and stored in the output information storage area described above as output information.

In addition, for example, when the value of the extracted random number for determining whether a normal symbol has won matches the normal symbol winning judgment value previously stored in the ROM built into the main control, various commands related to the normal electric role performance are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the output of a drive signal to the variable winning port solenoid 2522 is set to operate the variable winning port door 2521, and stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area as output information. On the other hand, when the value of the extracted random number for determining whether a normal symbol has won does not match the normal symbol winning judgment value previously stored in the ROM built into the main control, a normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is determined based on the above-mentioned random number for the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern, and various commands classified as related to the normal symbol synchronization performance are created and stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information. In addition, the output of a light-up signal to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set to light up the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined normal symbol fluctuation display pattern, and stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area as output information. In this example, the probability of winning the regular lottery (the probability of winning the regular lottery) is 1 in 2.

Following step S116, the main control MPU 1310a performs a port output process (step S118). In this port output process, output information is read from the output information storage area described above through the output terminals of the various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a, and various signals are output based on this output information. For example, when the main control MPU 1310a has normally received various commands from the payout control board 633 based on the output information, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a main payout ACK signal to the payout control board 633 from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a, outputs a drive signal to the first large prize opening solenoid 2524 and the second large prize opening solenoid 2563 which perform the opening and closing operation of the opening and closing members of the first large prize opening 2006 and the second large prize opening 2007 during a jackpot game, and outputs a drive signal to the variable prize opening solenoid 2522 which operates the variable prize opening door 2521 to open and close the variable prize opening 2003. It outputs various information (game information) related to the game, such as a round jackpot information output signal, a small jackpot information output signal, a special pattern display information output signal, a normal pattern display information output signal, a time-saving information output signal, and a start-hole winning information output signal, to the payout control board 633, outputs a launch permission signal set to the launch permission logic or launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) to the payout control board 633, outputs a display signal to a special monitor that displays the ratio of the number of payouts (total number of prize balls paid out) to the total number of game balls inserted, and outputs a lighting signal to display the setting value stored in a dedicated setting value area in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM on the setting display 1310g.

Following step S118, the main control MPU 1310a performs a peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the transmission information is read from the transmission information storage area described above and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. This transmission information includes various commands classified as related to special chart 1 synchronization performance, various commands classified as related to special chart 2 synchronization performance, various commands classified as related to big wins (for example, a big win port 1 count display command corresponding to a big win port count command based on a detection signal from the second big win port sensor 2561 when a game ball that has entered the second big win port 2007 is detected), various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as related to normal chart synchronization performance, various commands classified as related to normal electric role performance, various commands classified as notification display, various commands classified as status display, various commands classified as test-related, and various commands classified as others (for example, a main control board 1310 notifies the main control board 1310 of the fact that the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls based on the game balls that have entered the various winning ports provided on the game board 5 reaches 10 balls each time the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10 balls). A main prize ball number information output command that instructs the transmission of a main prize ball number information output signal as ball number information to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558) and various commands classified into specific histories (for example, a ball collection command that notifies the user each time the number of game balls collected at the winning openings such as the general winning opening 2001, the variable winning opening 2003, the first starting opening 2004, the second starting opening 2005, the first large winning opening 2006, the second large winning opening 2007, the out opening 1008, the first sub-out opening 2021, and the second sub-out opening 2022 reaches 10 balls, a setting change command that notifies the user that the setting value has been changed, an error display command that notifies the user that the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or cannot be trusted), a setting key ON operation command that notifies the user to check the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM described later, etc.) are stored. The main circuit serial data is configured of 3 bytes per packet. Specifically, the main serial data is composed of a status indicating the type of command with a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating the variation of the performance with a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a sum value calculated by treating the status and mode as numerical values and adding them up; this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data in the order of status, mode, and sum value. As described above, in the event of a power outage or momentary power outage, the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as +5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, so that the main serial transmission port built into the main control MPU 1310a can at least transfer the command set in its transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register by the serial management unit and complete transmission from the transmission shift register as main serial data. When power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, or when power is restored after a power outage or momentary interruption occurs after power is turned on, in the reservation setting of the command to be sent when power is turned on in step S50 of the main control power-on processing shown in FIG. 168, in order to inform the user that power has been restored, a power-on status command classified as power-on, a main control return destination command at power-on, and a counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output at power-on are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM.As main serial data, these are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the power-on status command, followed by the status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the main control return destination command at power-on, and then the status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output at power-on, in that order. In addition, in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, various information may be read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to the various information may be stored in the setting of the working area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 of the main control power-on processing. In such a case, after the transmission of various commands corresponding to the game information among the various information is completed, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command are transmitted.

In addition, when the number of game balls collected at the general winning opening 2001, the variable winning opening 2003, the first starting opening 2004, the second starting opening 2005, the first large winning opening 2006, the second large winning opening 2007, etc., or at the out opening 1008, the first sub-out opening 2021, and the second sub-out opening 2022 reaches 10 balls, a ball collection command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 to inform the same. The CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 then reads the ball collection command received from the general winning opening 2001, the variable winning opening 2003, the first starting opening 2004, the second starting opening 2005, the first large winning opening 2006, the second large winning opening 2007, etc. The number of game balls collected at winning ports such as the large prize port 2007, the outlet port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021, and the second sub-out port 2022 is counted, and the ball collection information stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) is updated (information correlating the counted value (i.e., the total number of game balls collected at winning ports such as the general prize port 2001, the variable prize port 2003, the first start port 2004, the second start port 2005, the first large prize port 2006, the second large prize port 2007, the outlet port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021, and the second sub-out port 2022) with the date and time of the update). In addition, if the pachinko machine 1 is powered off when the business hours of the game hall are closed without receiving the ball collection command, the ball collection information that corresponds to the last counted value (i.e., the total number of game balls collected at the general winning opening 2001, the variable winning opening 2003, the first starting opening 2004, the second starting opening 2005, the first large winning opening 2006, the second large winning opening 2007, etc., the out opening 1008, the first sub-out opening 2021, and the second sub-out opening 2022) and the updated date and time is stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on when the game hall starts business, the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 creates ball collection information again from the day business started, based on the ball collection information stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown), and the ball collection information is stored and held as ball collection history information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). The counted value stored and held as ball recovery information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) may be the value counted from a value of 0 (zero) on that day, or it may be both the value counted from a value of 0 (zero) on that day and the sum of the values counted up to that point.

Following step S120, the main control MPU 1310a clears the main control's built-in WDT (step S122) and ends this routine. The main control's built-in WDT is cleared in step S122 by setting a timer clear setting value in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a. This clears the timekeeping by the main control's built-in WDT. Then, the main control's built-in WDT restarts counting time, which avoids the main control MPU 1310a being forcibly reset by the main control's built-in WDT.

As described above, the main control board 1310 can execute and complete the above-mentioned backup process for storing game information as the game progresses before power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off while the game is in progress, and when power is restored, based on the game information for which the backup process has been executed, the main control board 1310 can output a power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510 which instructs the drive state of the variable prize opening solenoid 2522, first large prize opening solenoid 2524 and second large prize opening solenoid 2563, which are the electrical drive sources due to the port output process of step S118 in this routine, when power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, as the return destination for the game progress by the main control board 1310. In other words, in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when power is turned on in step S50 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 168, the main control board 1310 creates a power-on state command classified as power-on, a main control return destination command at power-on, and a counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output at power-on, based on the power recovery information set in the working area of the main control built-in RAM in setting the working area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the same processing shown in FIG. 167, in order to inform the user that power has been turned on (power has been restored), and stores these command in the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. This is stored in the transmission information storage area, and in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in this routine, the main serial data is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the power-on state command, followed by transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the power-on main control return destination command, followed by transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the power-on main prize ball count information output determination counter notification command.

Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 can display the destination to which the main control board 1310 will return the game when power is restored in the display area of the display device 1600 based on the main control return destination command from the main control board 1310 when power is turned on. This allows the game to be quickly restored to the game state immediately before the momentary or power outage when power is restored while the player is playing, and the destination to which the game will be returned by the main control board 1310 can be displayed in the display area of the display device 1600 to notify the player, so that the system of the pachinko machine 1 does not appear to be in a frozen state, which is a so-called frozen state, and the player is prevented from mistaking it for a malfunction. Therefore, by quickly returning to the game state immediately before the momentary or power outage after power is restored, the game can be prevented from being misunderstood for a malfunction by the player.

In addition, in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the manufacturing line for the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after being manufactured for inspection, as described above, in step S38 of the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 167, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are always cleared except for a specific area. As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be sent at power-on is made in the reservation setting of the command to be sent at power-on in step S50 of the same processing shown in FIG. 168, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, so that only the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. M's transmission information memory area, and in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in this routine, the main peripheral serial data is transmitted to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the power-on status command, followed by transmission to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the power-on main control return destination command, and then transmission to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output at power-on. The inspection device in the main control board inspection process is configured to display detailed model information on the inspection monitor in the main control board inspection process based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine contained in the power-on status command received from the main control board 1310, that is, based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, which comprises the above-mentioned series code for identifying which of the model types (max type, middle type, or sweet type) it is, the copyright code for identifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications (for example, in addition to the game specifications in which, when a probability fluctuation occurs, the state continues until the next big win occurs, the game specifications in which a probability fluctuation occurs with a limited number of times for special patterns to fluctuate (ST machine), etc.).

[11-5. Setting change processing]
Next, the setting change process will be described. This setting change process is carried out in step S37 of the main control side power-on process shown in FIG.

When the setting change process is started, the main control MPU 1310a acquires the current setting value, as shown in FIG. 170 (step S200). Here, the main control MPU 1310a acquires the setting value stored in a dedicated area for setting values in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM. This setting value may be acquired by reading or extracting it, but when the setting value is extracted, the extracted setting value is set in a specified area.

Following step S200, the main control MPU 1310a calculates a checksum (step S202). This checksum is calculated by treating the various information stored in the main control internal RAM as numerical values and calculating their sum, and is the same process as the checksum calculation performed in step S28 of the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 167.

Following step S202, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the calculated checksum value (sum value) matches the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off processing (when power is off) in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 168 (step S204). In step S204, if the main control MPU 1310a determines that they match, it determines whether the backup flag BK-FLG is 1 (step S206). The determinations in steps S204 and S206 are the same as the determinations in steps S30 and S32, respectively, in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 167. As described above, the backup flag BK-FLG is a flag that indicates whether game backup information such as various information, the checksum value (sum value), and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG has been stored in the main control's built-in RAM during the main control's power-off processing described below, and is set to a value of 1 when the main control's power-off processing has been completed normally, and to a value of 0 when the main control's power-off processing has not been completed normally.

In the judgment of step S204, when the main control MPU 1310a judges that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or in the judgment of step S206, when the backup flag BK-FLG is not value 1 (value 0), that is, when the main control side power off processing is judged not to have ended normally, the main control MPU 1310a judges whether the set value acquired in step S200 is within the normal range (step S208). Here, the "normal range" is a value that the set value can be changed to, and in this embodiment, it is preset to values of set value 1, set value 2, set value 3, set value 4, set value 5, and set value 6. When the flowchart proceeds to the judgment of step S208, it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or that the main control side power off processing has not ended normally at the time of power off, so that the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or cannot be trusted). Therefore, in the judgment of step S208, the main control MPU 1310a judges whether the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM acquired in step S200 is any value among setting values 1 to 6, which are within the normal range, and if it is determined that the setting value is within the normal range, it uses that setting value as is.

On the other hand, in the judgment of step S208, when the main control MPU 1310a judges that the set value acquired in step S200 is not within the normal range, it sets the set value 1, which is the initial value, to the set value acquired in step S200 (step S210). Note that in the judgment of step S208, it is judged whether the set value acquired in step S200 and stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is any value among set values 1 to 6, which are in the normal range. However, without making the judgment of step S208, when the main control MPU 1310a judges in the judgment of step S204 that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or when the main control MPU 1310a judges in the judgment of step S206 that the backup flag BK-FLG is not the value 1 (is the value 0), that is, when it is judged that the main control side power off processing has not ended normally, it may proceed to the processing of step S210 and set the set value acquired in step S200 to the initial value of set value 1.

When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S206 that the backup flag BK-FLG is equal to the value 1, i.e., that the processing during power failure on the main control side has been completed normally, or when the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S208 that the value is within the normal range, or following step S210, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a turn-on signal to the setting change permission lamp 1310z to turn on the setting change permission lamp 1310z (step S212).

Following step S212, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a lighting signal to the setting display 1310g to display the setting value on the setting display 1310g, thereby displaying the setting value on the setting display 1310g (step S214).

Following step S214, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the setting switching button has been operated (step S216). This determination is made by reading the detection signal from the setting switching button and determining whether a detection signal has been input from the setting switching button. The main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting switching button has been operated when a detection signal has been input from the setting switching button, and determines that the setting switching button has not been operated when a detection signal has not been input from the setting switching button.

When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S216 that the setting switch button has been operated, it performs a calculation to add (increment) the setting value by 1, updating it (step S218). At this time, when the setting value is acquired in step S200, if the setting value stored in a dedicated area for setting values in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM is retrieved and set in a predetermined area, the setting value set in this predetermined area is added (incremented) by 1.

Following step S218, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a lighting signal to the setting display 1310g to display the setting value updated in step S216 on the setting display 1310g, thereby displaying the updated setting value on the setting display 1310g (step S220).

Following step S220, or in the judgment of step S216, when the main control MPU 1310a judges that the setting switch button has not been operated, the main control MPU 1310a judges whether the enter key has been operated (step S222). In this judgment, the main control MPU 1310a judges whether the enter key has been operated (step S222). In this judgment, the main control MPU 1310a judges whether the setting key has been inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder has been rotated 120 degrees counterclockwise from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key switch 1311a on (i.e., the setting key switch 1311a is rotated counterclockwise from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key switch 1311a on to the original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by rotating it 60 degrees clockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it on a second time, and this is done based on the decision key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a, and when the decision key ON signal is input from the setting key switch 1311a, it is determined that the decision key has been operated, but when the decision key ON signal is not input from the setting key switch 1311a, it is determined that the decision key has not been operated.

In the judgment of step S222, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the decision key has not been operated, it returns to the judgment of step S216 again and determines whether the setting switch button has been operated. In the judgment of step S216, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting switch button has been operated, it performs the processing of step S218 and step S220 again, performs the judgment of step S222, and when it determines that the decision key has not been operated, it returns to the judgment of step S216 again, and when the setting switch button is operated until the decision key is operated, the setting value is added by one each time it is operated and updated and displayed on the setting display 1310g, and when the setting switch button is not operated, the setting value updated immediately before the setting switch button was operated is displayed on the setting display 1310g. In addition, even if a power outage or momentary interruption occurs and is then restored before it is determined in step S222 that the enter key has been operated, the setting value updated immediately before the power outage or momentary interruption is not stored in the dedicated setting value area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM, so it is discarded and the setting value stored in the dedicated setting value area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is not changed.

On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S222 that the Enter key has been operated, it stores the updated setting value in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM (step S224). At this time, if the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is retrieved and set in a specific area when the setting value is acquired in step S200, the setting value set in this specific area is updated, so this updated setting value is returned to the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. Even if a power outage or momentary interruption occurs and is then restored after the processing of step S224 is completed, the updated setting value when the Enter key was operated before the power outage or momentary interruption occurred is stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S224, the main control MPU 1310a judges whether the setting key has been turned OFF (step S226). In this judgment, the main control MPU 1310a judges whether the setting key has been turned OFF by inserting the setting key into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and turning the setting key switch 1311a 60 degrees clockwise to return it from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the decision key is turned ON to the initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), and the main control MPU 1310a judges that the setting key has been turned OFF when the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input, and judges that the setting key has not been turned OFF when the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is not input.

If the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S226 that the setting key has not been turned OFF, the process returns to step S226 and repeats the determination in step S226 until the setting key is turned OFF.

On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S226 that the setting key has been turned OFF, it stops outputting the lighting signal to the setting display 1310g to display the updated setting value on the setting display 1310g, and hides the updated setting value on the setting display 1310g (step S228).

Following step S228, the main control MPU 1310a stops the lighting signal to the setting change permission lamp 1310z and turns off the setting change permission lamp 1310z (step S230).

Following step S230, the main control MPU 1310a sets the setting change permission flag CS-FLG to a value of 0 (step S232). As described above, this setting change permission flag CS-FLG is a flag that indicates whether or not to permit a change to the current setting value (the value among setting values 1 to 6 set at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON for the first time) stored in the setting value dedicated area in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM, and is set to a value of 1 when a change to the setting value is permitted, and to a value of 0 when a change to the setting value is not permitted. In the process of step S232, by setting the setting change permission flag CS-FLG to a value of 0, no further changes to the setting value are permitted.

Following step S232, the main control MPU 1310a judges whether the setting value stored in step S224 is within the normal range (step S233). The "normal range" is the same as that judged in step S208, and as described above, in this embodiment, it is preset to values 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6. In the judgment of step S233, the main control MPU 1310a judges whether the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control internal RAM in step S224 is any value within the normal range of setting values 1 to 6, in order to reconfirm whether the setting value is not an abnormal value, and uses the setting value as is when it is judged to be within the normal range.

When the main control MPU 1310a judges in step S233 that the range is normal, it performs serial communication initial setting (step S234), then creates a setting change command and sets the transmission information (step S236), then performs peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing to transmit the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 to the peripheral control board 1510 as main-circuit serial data (step S238), and ends this routine. The serial communication initial setting in step S234 is the same processing as the serial communication initial setting in step S44 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 168, and the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S238 is the same processing as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 169. Here, in the serial communication initialization in step S234, the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S238, which is performed before the command to be transmitted at power-on is reserved in step S50 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 168. The setting change command is a command that conveys the changed setting value and the completion of setting value storage. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting change command, it updates the setting value history information (information that associates the setting value with the date and time) stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown).

On the other hand, if the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S233 that the value is not within the normal range, it performs an error display process (step S240) and enters an infinite loop. This infinite loop causes the state in which the error display process has ended to be maintained, making it impossible to play the game, and the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off and then turned on again. This error display process will be described in detail later, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if it is determined that the main control side power off process has not ended normally when the power was cut off, it displays an error message to that effect that there is an abnormality in the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM (or that the contents cannot be trusted). In this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error message.

[11-6. Setting value confirmation display process]
Next, the setting value confirmation display process will be described. This setting value confirmation display process is a process carried out in step S117 of the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

When the setting value confirmation display process is started, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is 0 or not (step S350), as shown in FIG. 171. This confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is a flag for confirming the setting value stored in a dedicated area for setting values in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM, and is set to 1 when the setting value is being displayed for confirmation, and to 0 when the setting value is not being displayed for confirmation.

In the judgment of step S350, when the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is a value of 0, that is, when the setting value is not being confirmed and displayed, the main control MPU 1310a judges whether the main frame 4 has been opened and the setting key has been turned ON (step S352). In this judgment, the main control MPU 1310a reads input information from the above-mentioned input information storage area and, based on this input information, detects a detection signal from the main frame opening switch 4b for detecting the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, and a setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF) to perform the first ON operation, turning the setting key switch 1311a to the setting key ON, and the setting key switch 13 11a, it is determined that the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, and the setting key ON signal has determined that the setting key switch 1311a has been set to the setting key ON, thereby determining that the predetermined setting value display permission condition is met, whereas the detection signal from the main frame open switch 4b determines that the main frame 4 is not open relative to the outer frame 2, and/or the setting key ON signal has determined that the setting key switch 1311a has not been set to the setting key ON, thereby determining that the predetermined setting value display permission condition is not met.

If the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S352 that the predetermined setting value display permission conditions are not met, it ends this routine. On the other hand, if the main control MPU 1310a determines that the predetermined setting value display permission conditions are met, it sets the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG to a value of 1 to display the setting value for confirmation (step S354), and then acquires the current setting value (step S356). Here, the main control MPU 1310a acquires the setting value stored in a dedicated area for setting values in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S356, the main control MPU 1310a judges whether the setting value acquired in step S356 is within the normal range (step S357). The "normal range" is the same as that in step S208 and step S233 in the setting change process of FIG. 170, and as described above, in this embodiment, it is preset to values 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6. In the judgment of step S357, the main control MPU 1310a judges whether the setting value acquired in step S356 (i.e., the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM) is within the normal range of setting values 1 to 6, in order to reconfirm whether the setting value is not abnormal, and uses the setting value as is when it is judged to be within the normal range.

If the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S357 that the setting value acquired in step S356 is within the normal range, it outputs a lighting signal to the setting display 1310g to display the setting value on the setting display 1310g (step S358).

Following step S360, the main control MPU 1310a creates an ON operation command for the setting key, stores it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, sets the ON operation command for the setting key (step S360), and ends this routine. This ON operation command for the setting key is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 169. The ON operation command for the setting key is a command that notifies the start of this routine, which is the setting value confirmation display process (i.e., to confirm the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM).

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives a setting key ON operation command, it updates the setting key ON operation history information (information that associates the fact that the setting value was confirmed with the date and time) stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown).

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the ON operation command of the setting key, the CPU is in a state where a predetermined specific history information display permission condition is established, which allows the display of specific history information such as the ball collection history information, the setting value history information, the error display history information, and the ON operation history information of the setting key. When this predetermined specific history information display permission condition is established, the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 controls the switching from the image that has been displayed to a specific history information display image that selectively displays the specific history information by a person who checks the specific history information by rotating the touch operation unit 302 and pressing the pressing operation unit 303, and displays it in the display area of the performance display device 1600.

On the other hand, in the judgment of step S350, when the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is not equal to 0 (is equal to 1), that is, when the setting value is being displayed for confirmation, the main control MPU 1310a judges whether the setting key has been turned OFF (step S362). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a reads input information from the input information storage area described above, and based on this input information, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the decision key ON to the initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), turning the setting key switch 1311a OFF, and this is done by an OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a. When an OFF signal is input from the setting key switch 1311a, it is determined that the setting key has been turned OFF, but when an OFF signal is not input from the setting key switch 1311a, it is determined that the setting key has not been turned OFF.

In the judgment of step S362, if the main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting key has not been turned OFF, it ends this routine as it is, whereas if it determines that the setting key has been turned OFF, it sets the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG to a value of 0 so as not to display the setting value (step S364), then stops the output of the lighting signal to the setting display 1310g to display the setting value acquired in step S356 on the setting display 1310g, and makes the acquired setting value invisible to the setting display 1310g (step S366), then creates an OFF operation command for the setting key and stores it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, sets the OFF operation command for the setting key (step S368), and ends this routine. This OFF operation command for the setting key is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 169. The setting key OFF operation command is a command that indicates that this routine, the setting value confirmation display process, has ended (i.e., that the setting values stored in the setting value dedicated area in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM have been confirmed).

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting key OFF operation command, the above-mentioned predetermined specific history information display permission condition is not met. At this time, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 was controlling the display of the above-mentioned specific history information display image in the display area of the performance display device 1600, it controls the display to switch back to the image that was displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 immediately before switching to the specific history information display image.

On the other hand, if the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S357 that the value is not within the normal range, it sets the interrupt not to be permitted (step S370). This setting stops the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 169, which is repeated every 4 ms.

Following step S370, the main control MPU 1310a performs an error display process (step S372), and then enters an infinite loop in which the main control's built-in WDT is cleared (step S374). This infinite loop causes the main control's built-in WDT to be continuously cleared, but since the main control's built-in WDT cannot be stopped once it has been started, by continuing to clear the main control's built-in WDT, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a, and the main control's built-in WDT clears the timekeeping, and the main control's built-in WDT starts counting again, so the main control MPU 1310a is not forcibly reset by the main control's built-in WDT. In addition, this infinite loop causes the state in which the error display process has ended to be maintained, resulting in a state in which the game cannot be played at all, and the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off and then turned on again. This error display process will be described in detail later, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if it is determined that the main control side power off processing did not end normally when the power was cut off, it will display an error message to inform the user that there is an abnormality in the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM (or that the contents are unreliable). In this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error message.

[11-7. Error display processing]
Next, the error display process will be described. This error display process is the process performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in Fig. 167, the process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in Fig. 167 (the process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in Fig. 170), and the process performed in step S372 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in Fig. 171.

When the error display process is started, the main control MPU 1310a stops the launch permission signal as shown in FIG. 172 (step S400). As described above, the launch permission signal conveys permission to launch the game ball B to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633, and when the logic is set to the launch permission logic, it can convey that the launch is permitted, whereas when the logic is set to the launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) which is the inverse of the launch permission logic, it can convey that the launch is stopped (not permitted).

When the error display process, which is this routine, is started as a process performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 167 or as one of the processes performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 167 (specifically, a process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 170), the main control MPU 1310a cannot perform the interrupt permission setting in step S52 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 168, so it cannot perform the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 169, and cannot perform the launch permission signal setting process in step S113 in the same process. The launch permission signal is output from the output terminal of a specified output port of the main control MPU 1310a to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with reset function, so that when power is restored, the main control output circuit with reset function is reset, and the logic is the launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) that is the inversion of the launch permission logic.

Therefore, when the error display processing, which is this routine, is started as a process performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 167 or as one of the processes performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 167 (specifically, the process performed in step S240 in the setting change processing shown in FIG. 170), the main control MPU 1310a sets the logic of the launch permission signal to launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) in step S400 to reliably prevent the game ball B from being launched even after the power is restored and the error display processing, which is this routine, is started, and outputs it from the output terminal of the specified output port to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with reset function.

When the error display process, which is this routine, is started as the process performed in step S372 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 171, the main control MPU 1310a judges that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM in the judgment of step S357 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 171. The main control MPU 1310a has already performed the interrupt permission setting in step S52 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 168, but the interrupt non-permission setting has already been performed in step S370 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 171 before the error display process, which is this routine, is started. Therefore, when the error display process, which is this routine, is ended, as described above, an infinite loop is entered, and the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 169 cannot be performed, and the launch permission signal setting process in step S113 in the same process cannot be performed.

When the error display process, which is this routine, is started as the process performed in step S372 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 171, the main control MPU 1310a, in step S400, sets the logic of the launch permission signal to launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) in order to reliably prevent game ball B from being launched when there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, and outputs it from the output terminal of the specified output port to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with reset function.

Following step S400, a lighting signal for displaying the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error indication is output to the setting display 1310g, thereby displaying an error on the setting display 1310g (step S402).

Following step S402, the main control MPU 1310a displays an error on the function display unit 1400 (step S404). In this step S404, a lighting signal for lighting all the various displays of the function display unit 1400 is output to the function display unit 1400, and an error is displayed on the function display unit 1400.

Following step S404, the main control MPU 1310a performs initial serial communication settings (step S406), then creates an error display command and sets the transmission information (step S408), and then performs peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing to transmit the transmission information (error display command) set in step S406 to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data (step S410), and ends this routine.

The serial communication initial setting in step S406 is the same process as the serial communication initial setting in step S234 in the setting change processing shown in FIG. 170 and the serial communication initial setting in step S44 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 168, and the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S410 is the same process as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S238 in the setting change processing shown in FIG. 170 and the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 169. When the error display processing routine, which is started as the processing performed in step S33 in the main control power-on processing shown in FIG. 167, the processing performed in step S37 in the main control power-on processing shown in FIG. 167 (the processing performed in step S240 in the setting change processing shown in FIG. 170), and the processing performed in step S372 in the setting value confirmation display processing shown in FIG. 171, ends, as described above, an infinite loop will occur, and due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display processing has ended will be maintained, making it impossible to progress in the game at all.

Therefore, in this embodiment, serial communication initialization is performed in step S406, and the transmission information (error display command) set in step S408 is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S410.

The error display command is a command that notifies the user that there is an abnormality (or that the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are unreliable). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the error display command, it updates the error display history information (information that associates the error display command with the date and time of receipt) stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown).

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives an error display command, it controls the display of a message image in white text on a blue background in the display area of the performance display device 1600, saying "A RAM error has occurred. Please call an attendant.", and controls the announcement "A RAM error has occurred. Please call an attendant" to be forcibly set to maximum volume and played from various speakers (top center speaker, top side speaker, main frame speaker of main frame 4, etc.) regardless of the volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510. The process of notifying a RAM error using an error display command is the process with the highest priority, and when the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives an error display command after receiving a command to notify another error, it gives top priority to notifying a RAM error.

[12. Various control processes of the dispensing control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 633 will be described with reference to Figs. 173 to 176. Fig. 173 is a flow chart showing an example of the payout control unit power-on process, Fig. 174 is a flow chart showing the continuation of the payout control unit power-on process of Fig. 173, Fig. 175 is a flow chart showing the continuation of the payout control unit power-on process following Fig. 174, and Fig. 176 is a flow chart showing an example of the payout control unit timer interrupt process. First, the payout control unit power-on process will be described, followed by the payout control unit timer interrupt process.

[12-1. Processing when power is turned on for the dispensing control unit]
First, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the payout control unit power-on process is performed under the control of the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a in the payout control board 633, as shown in Fig. 173 to Fig. 175. When this payout control unit power-on process is started, the payout control MPU sets the interrupt mode (step S500). This interrupt mode sets the priority of the payout control MPU's interrupts. In this embodiment, the payout control unit timer interrupt process described later is set to the highest priority, and when an interrupt of this payout control unit timer interrupt process occurs, the process is performed with priority.

Following step S500, the dispensing control MPU performs input/output settings (I/O input/output settings) (step S502). In this I/O input/output setting, the various input ports and various output ports of the dispensing control MPU are set, etc.

Following step S502, the payout control MPU performs wait timer process 1 (step S506) and determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S508). The voltage does not rise immediately from when the power is turned on until it reaches the specified voltage. On the other hand, when a power outage or momentary power outage (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped) occurs, the voltage drops and becomes smaller than the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 as a power outage warning. Similarly, when the voltage becomes smaller than the power outage warning voltage from when the power is turned on until it reaches the specified voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S506 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power outage warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on, and in this embodiment, 200 milliseconds (ms) are set as the waiting time (wait timer). The determination in step S508 is based on the power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310.

Following step S508, the dispensing control MPU judges whether the RAM clear switch on the dispensing control board 633 has been operated (step S512). This judgment is based on the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch. When the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch (RAM clear signal) is HI, it is judged that the operation signal does not command the RAM clear to be performed and the RAM clear switch is judged to have not been operated, whereas when the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch (RAM clear signal) is LOW, it is judged that the operation signal commands the RAM clear to be performed and the RAM clear switch is judged to have been operated.

When the payout control MPU determines in step S512 that the RAM clear switch has been operated, it sets the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG to a value of 1 (step S514). In other words, the payout control MPU is in a state in which it can execute a RAM clear process that initializes the RAM built into the payout control MPU (i.e., the payout control built-in RAM) for a predetermined period of time from when the power is turned on.

On the other hand, in the judgment of step S512, when the payout control MPU judges that the RAM clear switch has not been operated, it sets the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG to a value of 0 (step S516). This payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not to erase payout information related to the payout of, for example, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas (for example, the number of prize balls stocked PBS, the actual ball count PB, the number of drive commands DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, and the PRDY signal output setting information in which the logic state of the PRDY signal is set, etc. stored in the CR communication information storage area) stored in the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU, and is set to a value of 1 when the payout information is erased, and to a value of 0 when the payout information is not erased. The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in steps S514 and S516 is stored in the general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU.

Following step S514 or step S516, the payout control MPU performs a setting to permit access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S518). This setting allows access to the payout control built-in RAM, and allows, for example, writing (storing) or reading payout information.

Following step S518, the payout control MPU sets the stack pointer (step S520). The stack pointer, for example, indicates an address stored in the stack to temporarily store the contents of a memory element (register) in use, or an address stored in the stack to temporarily store the return address of this routine when terminating a subroutine and returning to this routine, and the stack pointer advances each time a stack is added. In step S520, the stack pointer is set to an initial address, and the contents of the register, the return address, etc. are added to the stack from this initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by reading the stacks in order from the last stacked to the first stacked.

Following step S520, the payout control MPU determines whether the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is equal to 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to 1 when the payout information is to be cleared and to 0 when the payout information is not to be cleared.

When the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to 0 in step S522, that is, when the payout control MPU determines not to erase the payout information, it calculates a checksum (step S524). This checksum is calculated by treating the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value.

Following step S524, the payout control MPU determines whether the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in the payout control unit power-off process (when power is off) described below (step S526). In step S526, when the payout control MPU determines that they match, it determines whether the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is set to a value of 1 (step S528). This payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag indicating whether payout backup information such as payout information and checksum value was stored and retained in the payout control built-in RAM in the payout control unit power-off process described below, and is set to a value of 1 when the payout control unit power-off process has been completed normally, and to a value of 0 when the payout control unit power-off process has not been completed normally.

In the judgment of step S528, when the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a value of 1, that is, when it is judged that the payout control unit power-off processing has been completed normally, the payout control MPU sets the working area of the payout control built-in RAM as the time of power recovery (step S530). In this setting, in addition to setting the payout backup flag HBK-FLG to a value of 0, the power recovery information is read from the ROM built into the payout control MPU (i.e., the payout control built-in ROM), and this power recovery information is set in the working area of the payout control built-in RAM. This sets information to be used for various processes based on the payout information related to the payout, such as the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, various flags, and various information stored in the various information storage areas (for example, the prize ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, the PRDY signal output setting information in which the logic state of the PRDY signal is set, stored in the CR communication information storage area, and the mismatch counter reset judgment time stored in the time management information storage area). Note that "power restoration" includes not only the state in which the power is turned on after being cut off, but also the state in which power is restored after a power outage or momentary power outage.

On the other hand, in the judgment of step S522, when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not a value of 0 (is a value of 1), that is, when the payout control MPU judges that the payout information should be erased, or in the judgment of step S526, when the payout control MPU judges that the checksum values do not match, or in the judgment of step S528, when the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not a value of 1 (is a value of 0), that is, when the payout control unit power off processing has not been completed normally, the payout control MPU clears the entire area of the payout control built-in RAM (step S532). This clears the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S532, the payout control MPU sets the work area of the payout control built-in RAM as the initial setting (step S534). This setting is done by reading the initial information from the payout control built-in ROM and setting this initial information in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S530 or step S534, the dispensing control MPU performs interrupt initialization (step S536). This setting sets the interrupt period when the dispensing control unit timer interrupt process described below is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 2 ms.

Following step S536, the dispensing control MPU sets interrupt permission (step S538). This setting causes the dispensing control unit timer interrupt process to be repeated at the interrupt period set in step S536, i.e., every 2 ms.

Following step S538, the dispensing control MPU sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S539). The watchdog timer is cleared by sequentially setting the values A, B, and C in this watchdog timer clear register HWCL.

Following step S539, the payout control MPU determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S540). When the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or a power outage or momentary interruption occurs, as described above, if the voltage falls below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 as a power outage warning. The determination in step S540 is made based on this power outage warning signal.

When the dispensing control MPU determines in step S540 that no power outage warning signal has been input, it determines whether the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is equal to 1 (step S542). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 2 ms in the dispensing control unit timer interrupt process that is processed every 2 ms, as described below, and is set to 1 when 2 ms have elapsed and to 0 when 2 ms have not elapsed.

In the judgment of step S542, if the dispensing control MPU determines that the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is equal to the value 0, that is, that 2 ms has not elapsed, the dispensing control MPU returns to step S540 and determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input.

On the other hand, in the judgment of step S542, if the dispensing control MPU determines that the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, that is, that 2 ms have elapsed, it sets the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG to a value of 0 (step S544).

Following step S544, the payout control MPU sets the value B in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S546). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value A set in step S539.

Following step S546, the payout control MPU performs a port output process (step S548). In this port output process, various information is read from the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and various signals based on this information are output from the output terminals of the various output ports of the payout control MPU. The output information storage area stores various information such as payer ACK information indicating that various payout-related commands (prize ball commands and self-check commands) from the main control board 1310 have been received normally, drive information for controlling the drive of the payout motor 584, prize ball number information indicating the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584, and LED display information to be displayed on the error LED indicator. Based on this output information, when various payout-related commands from the main control board 1310 have been received normally, the payout control MPU outputs a payer ACK signal to the main control board 1310 from the output terminal of a specified output port, outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 584, or outputs the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 to the external terminal board 558 as a prize ball number information output signal (in this embodiment, the payout motor 584 outputs a prize ball number information output signal to the external terminal board 558 every time the payout motor 584 actually pays out 10 game balls).

Specifically, a prize ball number information output determination counter is provided to determine whether or not to output prize ball number information. This prize ball number information output determination counter counts the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 based on a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 described below, and the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 is stored and updated in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM by a process (program) not shown in the figure for monitoring the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584.

In a process (program) not shown for monitoring the number of game balls actually paid out by this payout motor 584, the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 is added to the value of the counter for determining the output of prize ball number information stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and the value is updated based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 described below.

In the port output process of step S548, the value of the counter for determining the output of prize ball number information is read from this prize ball information storage area, and when the value of this read counter for determining the output of prize ball number information exceeds the value of 10 (i.e., when the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 reaches 10 balls), a prize ball number information output signal is output to the external terminal board 558 (at this time, the value indicating the exceeded number of balls is stored and updated as the value of the counter for determining the output of prize ball number information in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM mentioned above), and a display signal is output to the error LED indicator.

Following step S548, the dispensing control MPU performs a port input process (step S550). In this port input process, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the dispensing control MPU are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the dispensing control built-in RAM. For example, the operation signal of the RAM clear switch (RAM clear signal), the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the detection signal from the dispensing detection sensor 591, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the BRQ signal, BRDY signal, and CR connection signal from the CR unit, the main dispensing ACK signal from the main control board 1310 that informs the main control board 1310 that the various commands transmitted in the command transmission process described below have been normally received by the main control board 1310, and the like are each read and stored as input information in the input information storage area.

Following step S550, the payout control MPU performs a timer update process (step S552). In this timer update process, the ball-stuck determination time, which is set as a determination condition when determining whether or not a ball-stuck state has occurred due to the payout blade 589 to which the rotation of the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted, the skip determination time, which is set when the payout blade 589 is not in a fixed position, the full determination time, which is set as a determination condition when determining whether or not the lower tray 202 is full of stored game balls, the ball of the game ball taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 due to the detection signal from the ball-out detection sensor 574, and the ball-stuck state are determined as a determination condition when the ball-stuck state is determined by the ball-stuck state. In addition to managing the time of the ball run-out determination time, which is set as a determination condition when determining whether the number of game balls received and dispensed by the ball receiving section 589b of the dispensing blade 589 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the time management unit 100 also manages the time of the mismatch counter reset determination time, which is set as a determination condition when determining whether to reset the mismatch counter INCC, which is used to monitor whether inconsistent game balls are being repeatedly dispensed due to a mismatch between the number of game balls received and dispensed by the ball receiving section 589b of the dispensing blade 589 and the number of balls actually detected by the dispensing detection sensor 591. For example, when the ball jamming determination time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interrupt period is set to 2 ms, so that the ball jamming determination time is subtracted by 2 ms each time this timer update process is performed, and the ball jamming determination time is accurately measured by the subtraction result becoming a value of 0. Note that these various determination times are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S552, the payout control MPU performs CR communication processing (step S554). In this CR communication processing, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and based on this input information, it is determined whether various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, and CR connection signal) from the CR unit have been input. Based on the various signals from the CR unit, the payout control MPU exchanges various signals with the CR unit. In the process of setting the working area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530, as described above, information used for various processing is set based on payout information related to payout, such as payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, various flags, various information stored in the various information storage area (for example, the number of prize balls stocked PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, and the PRDY signal output setting information in which the logic state of the PRDY signal is set, etc. stored in the CR communication information storage area).

With this process, for example, even if there is a momentary or power outage, the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. at the time of power recovery can be restored to the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary or power outage, which are stored as payout backup information. As a result, even if there is a momentary or power outage while the payout device 580 is performing a payout operation of game balls and the payout operation cannot be continued due to the momentary or power outage, the payout operation can be continued when power is restored, so that the game balls can be paid out to the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 without excess or shortage. In other words, when the payout control MPU is exchanging various signals with the CR unit during CR communication processing while paying out game balls to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202, if there is an instantaneous or power outage that cuts off the exchange of various signals with the CR unit and makes it impossible to continue paying out game balls, the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. at the time of power recovery are restored to the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. immediately before the instantaneous or power outage that are stored as payout backup information. This makes it possible to continue exchanging various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit immediately before the instantaneous or power outage when power is restored, and to continue paying out game balls.

In this way, even if the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit is interrupted or stopped, when power is restored it is restored to the state it was in immediately before the interruption or stoppage, and the various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit are not altered by the effects of the interruption or stoppage. This makes it possible to increase the reliability of the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit.

In addition, the various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in the payout backup information. In the CR communication process, when power is restored, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM, which was set in the process of setting the working area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530, and if this read PRDY signal output setting information is set to a logic state of a PRDY signal that indicates, for example, that a payout operation for paying out loaned balls is impossible, the PRDY signal is output from the output terminal of a specified output port of the payout control MPU to the CR unit. Then, for example, in the retry operation monitoring process, which is performed as one process of the main operation setting process, a determination is made as to whether or not the value of the inconsistency counter INCC in the prize ball information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM, which is included in the payout backup information, is smaller than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH. If the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is not smaller than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH, it is determined that the retry operation is operating abnormally, that is, it is determined that the payout operation of the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state, and the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to a value of 1. In the payout ball operation determination setting process, the setting for outputting an error state to the CR unit is, for example, the logical state (LOW) of the PRDY signal, which informs the CR unit that the payout operation to pay out loaned balls is impossible when there is no communication with the CR unit, and this is stored in the CR communication information storage area.

In this way, in the CR communication process, at the next timer interrupt after power is restored, the logic state of this PRDY signal is read from the CR communication information storage area, and the PRDY signal is output to the CR unit from the output terminal of a specified output port of the payout control MPU. In this way, for example, if the payout operation of the payout device 580 for game balls was in an abnormal state immediately before the momentary power outage, the state is restored when power is restored, so that at an extremely early stage after power is restored, a PRDY signal informing the CR unit that the payout operation for paying out loaned balls is impossible can be output from the output terminal of a specified output port of the payout control MPU to the CR unit, and it is possible to inform the CR unit that the payout operation of the payout device 580 for game balls is in an abnormal state. This makes it possible to prevent the CR unit from outputting a useless loaned ball request signal, BRDY, at an extremely early stage after power is restored.

In the CR communication processing, in the port input processing of step S550, the CR connection signal is read from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and based on this CR connection signal, when its logic is HI, that is, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are electrically connected, the logic state of the PRDY signal is output as HI to the CR unit from the output terminal of a specified output port of the payout control MPU to inform the CR unit that a payout operation to pay out loaned balls is possible, whereas when its logic is LOW, that is, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are not electrically connected, the logic state of the PRDY signal is output as LOW to the CR unit from the output terminal of a specified output port of the payout control MPU to inform the CR unit that a payout operation to pay out loaned balls is not possible. The logic state of the EXS signal, which indicates that a single dispensing operation has started or ended, is stored in the CR communication information storage area of the dispensing control built-in RAM as EXS signal output setting information, and the CR connection signal, which indicates whether the dispensing control board 633 and the CR unit are electrically connected or not, is stored in the status information storage area as CR connection information.

Following step S554, the payout control MPU performs a full tank and ball exhaustion check process (step S556). In this full tank and ball exhaustion check process, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and based on this input information, it is determined whether the lower tray 202 described above is full of stored game balls based on a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, and whether the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 described above is equal to or greater than a predetermined number based on a detection signal from the ball exhaustion detection sensor 574. For example, the determination of whether the lower tray 202 is full of stored game balls is performed by using a timer interrupt period of 2 ms, and when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON in the current full tank and ball out check process and the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF in the previous full tank and ball out check process (2 ms ago), that is, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 transitions from OFF to ON, the timer update process of step S552 starts timing the above-mentioned full tank determination time. Then, when the full tank determination time becomes a value of 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the full tank determination time has arrived, the full tank and ball out check process determines whether the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON. In this determination, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON, the lower tray 202 is determined to be full of stored game balls, and full tank information that conveys this is stored in the above-mentioned state information storage area. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF, the lower tray 202 is not full of stored game balls, and full tank information indicating this is stored in the status information storage area.

The determination of whether the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number also uses a timer interrupt period of 2 ms. When the detection signal from the out-of-ball switch is ON in the current full tank and out-of-ball check process and the detection signal from the out-of-ball switch is OFF in the previous full tank and out-of-ball check process (2 ms ago), that is, when the detection signal from the out-of-ball detection sensor 574 transitions from OFF to ON, the timer update process of step S552 starts timing the above-mentioned out-of-ball determination time. Then, when the out-of-ball determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the out-of-ball determination time has arrived, it is determined whether the detection signal from the out-of-ball detection sensor 574 is ON in this full tank and out-of-ball check process. In this determination, when the detection signal from the ball out detection sensor 574 is ON, ball out information informing the user that the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number is stored in the status information storage area, whereas when the detection signal from the ball out detection sensor 574 is OFF, ball out information informing the user that the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is not equal to or greater than the predetermined number is stored in the status information storage area.

Following step S556, the payout control MPU performs a command reception process (step S558). In this command reception process, various commands related to payout (prize ball commands and self-check commands) are received from the main control board 1310. When these various commands are received normally, payer ACK information informing that effect is stored in the output information storage area described above. On the other hand, when the various commands are not received normally, connection abnormality information informing that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 (an abnormality has occurred in the various command signals) is stored in the status information storage area described above.

Following step S558, the dispensing control MPU performs a command analysis process (step S560). In this command analysis process, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the dispensing control's built-in RAM.

Following step S560, the payout control MPU performs a main operation setting process (step S562). In this main operation setting process, it sets the operation of prize balls, loan balls, ball removal, ball jamming, etc., judges the retry operation, and monitors the number of unpaid balls (number of prize balls in stock).

Following step S562, the payout control MPU performs an LED display data creation process (step S564). In this LED display data creation process, various information is read from the above-mentioned status information storage area, and display data to be displayed on the error LED indicator of the payout control board 633 is created and stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area as LED display information. For example, the above-mentioned ball out information is read from the status information storage area, and based on this ball out information, when the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is not equal to or greater than a predetermined number, corresponding display data (in this embodiment, display value 1 (number "1")) is created and the LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

Following step S564, the payout control MPU performs a command transmission process (step S566). In this command transmission process, various information is read from the above-mentioned state information storage area, and various commands classified as state displays (frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame state 2 command) are created based on this various information and sent to the main control board 1310. For example, when ball out information is read from the state information storage area, if the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is not equal to or greater than a predetermined number, a frame state 1 command is created and sent to the main control board 1310 based on this ball out information.

Following step S566, the dispensing control MPU sets the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S568). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value B set in step S546. As a result, the values A, B and C are set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in that order, and the watchdog timer is cleared.

Following step S568, the process returns to step S539, where the payout control MPU sets the watchdog timer clear register HWCL to a value A, and in step S540 determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input. If no power outage warning signal has been input, in step S542 it determines whether the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1. If the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, that is, if 2 ms have elapsed, in step S544 it sets the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG to a value of 0, in step S546 it sets the watchdog timer clear register HWCL to a value B, and in step S548 Port output processing is performed in step S550, port input processing is performed in step S552, timer update processing is performed in step S554, CR communication processing is performed in step S556, full tank and bulb out check processing is performed in step S558, command reception processing is performed in step S560, command analysis processing is performed in step S562, main operation setting processing is performed in step S564, LED display data creation processing is performed in step S566, command transmission processing is performed in step S568, value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, and steps S539 to S568 are repeated. The processing in steps S539 to S568 is referred to as the "dispensing control unit main processing".

The processing contents of the payout control unit main processing vary depending on the progress of the game by the main control board 1310. This causes the time required for processing by the payout control MPU to vary. Therefore, in the port output processing of step S548, the payout control MPU outputs a payout master ACK signal to the main control board 1310 as a priority, which indicates that various payout-related commands from the main control board 1310 have been successfully received. This ensures that the payout control MPU has enough processing time to perform other variable processing.

On the other hand, when the dispensing control MPU determines in step S540 that a power outage warning signal has been input, it sets the interrupt prohibition (step S570). This setting prevents the dispensing control unit timer interrupt process described below from being performed, prevents writing to the dispensing control built-in RAM, and protects the dispensing information described above from being rewritten.

Following step S570, the payout control MPU stops outputting the drive signal to the payout motor 584 (step S574). This stops the payout of game balls.

Following step S574, the dispensing control MPU clears the watchdog timer (step S576). This clearing is performed by sequentially setting values A, B, and C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, as described above.

Following step S576, the payout control MPU calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S578). This checksum is calculated by treating the payout information in the working area of the payout control internal RAM, excluding the checksum value calculated in step S524 and the storage area for the payout backup flag HBK-FLG value, as a numerical value and calculating the sum.

Following step S578, the payout control MPU sets the payout backup flag HBK-FLG to a value of 1 (step S580). This completes the storage of the payout backup information.

Following step S580, the payout control MPU sets the prohibition of access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S582). This setting prohibits access to the payout control built-in RAM, making writing and reading impossible, and protects the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S582, the dispensing control MPU enters an infinite loop. In this infinite loop, the watchdog timer is not cleared because the watchdog timer clear register HWCL is not sequentially set to values A, B, and C. This causes the dispensing control MPU to be reset, after which the dispensing control unit power-on processing is performed again. The processing from step S570 to step S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as the "dispensing control unit power-off processing."

The pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) is reset in the event of a power outage or momentary power outage, and when power is subsequently restored, the payout control unit performs power-on processing.

In step S526, it is checked whether the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is normal, and then in step S528 it is checked whether the payout control unit power-off processing has been completed normally. In this way, by doubly checking the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, it is checked whether the payout backup information has been stored due to fraudulent activity.

[22-2. Dispense control unit timer interrupt processing]
Next, the dispensing control unit timer interrupt process will be described. This dispensing control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed at the interrupt period (2 ms in this embodiment) set in the dispensing control unit power-on process shown in Figures 173 to 175.

When the payout control unit timer interrupt processing is started, the payout control MPU, as shown in FIG. 176, disables the timer interrupt and switches (saves) the register (step S590). Here, it switches from the general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) used in the payout control unit main processing described above to an auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing, the value of the general-purpose register is no longer overwritten. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose register used in the payout control unit main processing from being destroyed.

Following step S590, the payout control MPU sets the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG to a value of 1 (step S592). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 2 ms each time the payout control unit timer interrupt process is performed, that is, every 2 ms, and is set to a value of 1 when 2 ms have elapsed and to a value of 0 when 2 ms have not elapsed.

Following step S592, the payout control MPU switches (restores) the register (step S594). This restoration switches from the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing to a general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the payout control unit main processing, the value of the auxiliary register is no longer overwritten. This prevents the contents of the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing from being destroyed.

Following step S594, the dispensing control MPU sets interrupt permission (step S596) and ends this routine.

[13. Various control processes of peripheral control boards]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 1510 that receives various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) will be described with reference to Figs. 177 to 181. Fig. 177 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control board power-on process, Fig. 178 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control board V blank interrupt process, Fig. 179 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control board 1 ms timer interrupt process, Fig. 180 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control board command reception interrupt process, and Fig. 181 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control board power failure notice signal interrupt process. First, the peripheral control board power-on process will be described, followed by the peripheral control board V blank interrupt process, the peripheral control board 1 ms timer interrupt process, the peripheral control board command reception interrupt process, and the peripheral control board power failure notice signal interrupt process. In this embodiment, the priority order of the interrupt processes is set to the peripheral control board power failure notice signal interrupt process, followed by the peripheral control board 1 ms timer interrupt process, the peripheral control board command reception interrupt process, and the peripheral control board V blank interrupt process.

The peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as the "peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510"), as described above, has a CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, SATA controller, and various I/O interfaces integrated onto a single semiconductor chip.

[13-1. Processing when peripheral control unit is powered on]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on process will be described with reference to FIG. 177. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the peripheral control unit power-on process is performed under the control of the CPU of the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 as shown in FIG. 177. When this peripheral control unit power-on process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs an initial setting process (step S1000). In this initial setting process, a process of initializing the peripheral control IC itself, a process of determining whether it is a hot start or a cold start, a process of setting a wait timer after reset, a process of transferring various control information (peripheral data), and the like are performed. The CPU of the peripheral control IC first performs a process of initializing the peripheral control IC itself, but the time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control IC is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control IC can be initialized in an extremely short time. As a result, the CPU of the peripheral control IC is in a state where interrupt permission is set, and is in a state where it can receive various commands, such as commands related to the control of game performances and commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1, output from the main control board 1310 in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described later.

Following step S1000, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a current time information acquisition process (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information specifying the date and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown), and the current calendar information and current time information are set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

In this embodiment, the CPU of the peripheral control IC acquires calendar information and time information from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC only once, when the power is turned on. After performing this current time information acquisition process, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to an external WDT (not shown) to prevent the CPU of the peripheral control IC from being reset.

Following step S1002, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to a value of 0 (step S1004). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit regular processing described later, and is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit regular processing is not executed. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later, which is executed when a V blank signal that indicates that the screen data (information that specifies the screen configuration) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC is input from the VDP of the peripheral control IC. In this step S1004, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value of 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. In addition, after the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to a value of 0, it outputs a clear signal to the external WDT to prevent the CPU of the peripheral control IC from being reset.

Following step S1004, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is equal to 1 (step S1006). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not equal to 1 (is equal to 0), the CPU returns to step S1006 and repeatedly determines whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is equal to 1. By repeating such determinations, the CPU enters a standby state until the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed. After determining whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is equal to 1, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to the external WDT to prevent the CPU of the peripheral control IC from being reset.

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is equal to 1, that is, when it determines that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is to be executed, it first sets the steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG to 1 (step S1008). This steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG is set to 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, and to 0 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been executed.

Following step S1008, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a 1 ms interrupt timer start process (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer start process, a 1 ms interrupt timer for executing the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described below is started, and the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is set to a value of 1 to initialize the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer has been started and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process has been executed. This 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process.

Following step S1010, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs performance operation unit monitoring processing (step S1014). In this presentation operation unit monitoring process, in the presentation operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the presentation operation unit 300 monitors the rotation direction of the touch operation unit 302 and the presence or absence of operation of the press operation unit 303 based on the RAM of the peripheral control IC in which various information (for example, rotation (direction of rotation) history information of the touch operation unit 302 and operation history information of the press operation unit 303 created based on detection signals from various sensors provided in the presentation operation unit 300, and the like) obtained based on detection signals from various detection sensors such as the first rotation detection sensor 347, the second rotation detection sensor 348, the press detection sensor 373, and the lift detection sensor 374 (hereinafter referred to as the "various sensors provided in the presentation operation unit 300") provided in the presentation operation unit 300 is set, and it is appropriately determined whether or not to reflect the rotation direction of the touch operation unit 302 and the operation state of the press operation unit 303 in the game presentation. Specifically, if the volume is adjusted in the performance operation unit information acquisition process, the schedule data for sound generation is rewritten according to the adjusted volume, and if the brightness is adjusted, the schedule data for light emission mode generation is rewritten according to the adjusted brightness. This allows the volume and brightness adjustments to be reflected in real time, and the performance will proceed with the adjusted volume and brightness.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC also performs a lamp palette setting process as part of the performance operation unit monitoring process. In the lamp palette setting process, the luminance of the LEDs used as direct light and the luminance of the LEDs used as indirect light are set based on a lamp palette setting table consisting of a luminance designation value, a normal palette value, and a special palette value. When the lamp palette setting process is executed during the performance, and a player (or a staff member of the game hall) operates the performance operation unit 301 (touch operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to set a luminance designation value ranging from the first luminance designation value to the 31st luminance designation value which is the maximum luminance, the above-mentioned gradation information set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC can be updated to the set luminance designation value.

Here, we will briefly explain the brightness designation value, normal palette value, and special palette value that make up the lamp palette setting table. The brightness designation value is a value that can set one of 32 brightness designation values ranging from the 0th (zero) brightness designation value, which is the minimum brightness (lights off), to the 31st brightness designation value, which is the maximum brightness, and the normal palette value and special palette value, which will be described later, are each preset in correspondence with the 0th (zero) brightness designation value to the 31st brightness designation value. A player (or a staff member or other attendant at the game hall) can set one brightness designation value ranging from the 1st brightness designation value to the 31st brightness designation value, which is the maximum brightness, by operating the operable performance operation unit 301 (touch operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303).

For example, when a player (or a staff member or other attendant at an amusement hall) rotates the contact operation unit 302 clockwise and the current brightness is set to a first brightness designated value, which is the next highest brightness level after the 0th (zero) brightness designated value, which is the minimum brightness (lights off), the brightness of the LEDs used as indirect light and the brightness of the LEDs used as direct light are increased in accordance with a predetermined mathematical formula (e.g., a linear tone curve or a spline tone curve) from the first brightness designated value to the 31st brightness designated value, which is the maximum brightness, whereas when the player rotates the contact operation unit 302 counterclockwise and the current brightness is set to the maximum brightness, the brightness of the LEDs used as indirect light and the brightness of the LEDs used as direct light are decreased in accordance with a predetermined mathematical formula (e.g., a linear tone curve or a spline tone curve) from the 31st brightness designated value, which is the maximum brightness, to the first brightness designated value. When the player (or a member of staff such as a game parlor clerk) rotates the touch operation unit 302 to select the desired brightness and presses the pressing operation unit 303, the selected desired brightness is confirmed. In this embodiment, a case is prepared in advance where the player (or a member of staff such as a game parlor clerk) can set the brightness while the performance is in progress, and at this time, the player (or a member of staff such as a game parlor clerk) can set the desired brightness by operating the touch operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303. In addition, when the player (or a member of staff such as a game parlor clerk) operates the touch operation unit 302 at a predetermined position in the display area of the performance display device 1600 while the performance is in progress, a bar-shaped indicator indicating the positions from the first brightness designated value to the 31st brightness designated value is displayed, so that the degree of the desired brightness of the player (or a member of staff such as a game parlor clerk) can be visually shown as an image. In addition, in this embodiment, the 14th brightness designated value is set as the initial value (default).

Normal palette values are set as the above-mentioned gradation information for the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board side and various decorative boards provided on the door frame side that are irradiated as direct light. For normal palette values, one of 17 steps is selected in 5% increments from the minimum palette value (20%), which is the minimum value, to the maximum palette value (100%), which is the maximum value, and the palette value corresponding to one brightness specification is set according to a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline-like tone curve) within the range of 32 steps ranging from the 0th (zero) brightness specification value to the 31st brightness specification value, which are the brightness specification values described above.

The minimum palette value (20%) is 20% of the maximum palette value (100%) that corresponds to one brightness specification in the 32-step range of the brightness specification values from 0th (zero) to 31st brightness specification values described above. Similarly, for the other palette values, the values (%) written in parentheses are the values relative to the maximum palette value (100%) that corresponds to one brightness specification in the 32-step range of the brightness specification values from 0th (zero) to 31st brightness specification values described above.

In this embodiment, the normal palette value is the maximum palette value (100%) that is pre-selected and set as the above-mentioned gradation information for the various decorative boards provided on the game board side that is irradiated as direct light and the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side, and the palette value (50%) is pre-selected and set as the above-mentioned gradation information for a specific decorative board (not shown) (an LED that is dazzling to the player) among the various decorative boards provided on the game board side that is irradiated as direct light.

The special palette value is set as the above-mentioned gradation information for the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates used in light guide plates that are irradiated as indirect light. Unlike normal palette values, the special palette value has only one level, and among the 32 levels ranging from the 0th (zero) brightness designation value to the 31st brightness designation value, which are the above-mentioned brightness designation values, the palette value corresponding to one brightness designation is set as the above-mentioned gradation information according to a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline-like tone curve).

As described above, if the luminance of the LED used as indirect light is the same as that of the LED used as direct light, the indirect light from the light guide plate will be darker than the direct light. Therefore, in this embodiment, the luminance of the LED used as indirect light is set using a special palette value, rather than using the normal palette value set for the luminance of the LED used as direct light, and the first luminance designation value, which is the next highest luminance level after the 0th (zero) luminance designation value, which is the minimum luminance (light off), is set to a value approximately equal to the 18th luminance designation value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%) as the lowest luminance at which the state in which the light guide plate is emitting light by indirect light can be visually recognized, and the palette value corresponding to one luminance designation value within the range from the first luminance designation value to the 31st luminance designation value is set according to a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline tone curve).

In this way, in the lamp palette setting process, when setting the brightness of the LEDs used as direct light and the brightness of the LEDs used as indirect light based on a lamp palette setting table consisting of a brightness specification value, a normal palette value, and a special palette value, the brightness of the LEDs used as direct light is set by the player (or an attendant such as a game hall clerk) according to the normal palette value corresponding to the brightness specification value operated by the touch operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, while the brightness of the LEDs used as indirect light is set by the player (or an attendant such as a game hall clerk) according to the special palette value corresponding to the brightness specification value operated by the touch operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303. As a result, when the player feels that the brightness of the LEDs used as direct light is too dazzling and operates the touch operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 to set the brightness to a lower level, even if the brightness of the LEDs used as direct light is set to the lowest brightness (i.e., the first brightness designated value which is the next highest level of brightness after the 0th (zero) brightness designated value which is the minimum brightness (lights off)) and the brightness of the LEDs used as indirect light is also set to the lowest brightness (i.e., the first brightness designated value which is the next highest level of brightness after the 0th (zero) brightness designated value which is the minimum brightness (lights off)) in conjunction with this, the brightness of the LEDs used as indirect light is set to a value approximately equal to the 18th brightness designated value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%), so the lowest brightness at which the light guide plate can be visually recognized as emitting light by indirect light is set.

Furthermore, without having to individually set the brightness of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board and the various decorative boards provided on the door frame for the LEDs used as direct light, the programmer designing the light emission patterns can simply set the light emission patterns in accordance with the flow of the presentation, watch the flow of the presentation based on the light emission patterns of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board and the various decorative boards provided on the door frame, and then set the normal palette value to a small palette value (for example, 50%) for a specific decorative board that is too dazzling (or that a slightly darker brightness would produce a better presentation effect), and set the normal palette value to the maximum palette value (100%) for other decorative boards, thereby extremely easily changing the balance of the overall light emission patterns. In other words, even if a player (or a staff member of the game hall) operates the operable performance operation unit 301 (touch operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to set a single brightness designated value ranging from the first brightness designated value to the 31st brightness designated value which is the maximum brightness, a small palette value (for example, 50%) corresponding to the single brightness designated value is set for a specific decorative board, while a maximum palette value (100%) corresponding to the single brightness designated value is set for other decorative boards, so that brightness can be adjusted very easily without destroying the relationship between the light emission modes (bright or dark) that have been set.

Furthermore, although it is more difficult to adjust the brightness of indirect light from a light guide plate than direct light, it is possible to set the brightness for LEDs used as indirect light using special palette values that are different from the normal palette values (i.e., independent of the normal palette values). As a result, the brightness of LEDs used as indirect light is managed by the special palette values, while the brightness of LEDs used as direct light is managed by the normal palette values, making it easy to adjust the brightness of LEDs used as indirect light and the brightness of LEDs used as direct light.

Following step S1014, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output processing, the VDP of the peripheral control IC reads image data from the SDRAM based on instructions from the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the display data creation processing described later, and outputs one screen's worth (one frame's worth) of drawing data generated on the VRAM of the peripheral control IC to the liquid crystal output board 1530. As a result, various screens (images) are drawn (displayed) on the performance display device 1600. In addition, in the display data output processing, if drawing is performed that exceeds the drawing capacity of the VDP of the peripheral control IC, the output of the generated drawing data for one screen's worth (one frame's worth) is canceled. This prevents delays in processing time, but although so-called frame drops occur, it is a mechanism that allows the performance of music, sound effects, and other performance sounds that match various performances to be prioritized from various speakers such as the top center speaker, top side speaker, and the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 (hereinafter referred to as "various speakers") by the sound data output processing described later.

Following step S1016, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output processing, in the sound data creation processing described below, the sound source of the peripheral control IC reads sound data from the SDRAM based on instructions from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, and outputs the data to various speakers from the set output channel. As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects that match various performances are played from the various speakers.

Following step S1018, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a scheduler update process (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, various schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC is updated. For example, in the scheduler update process, a pointer is updated to indicate which screen data, from the first screen data, among the screen data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for screen generation, is to be output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC.

The scheduler update process also updates the pointer to indicate which light emission data, from the first light emission data, is to be output among the light emission data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for generating light emission modes.

The scheduler update process also updates a pointer to indicate which sound command data, starting from the first sound command data, should be output to the sound source of the peripheral control IC among the sound command data that indicates sound data for musical effects, sound effects, and other sound effects, and sound data for alerts and announcements, arranged in chronological order to constitute the sound generation schedule data.

In addition, in the scheduler update process, a pointer is updated to indicate which drive data from the first drive data is to be output among the drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in chronological order that constitutes the electric drive source schedule data. The drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in chronological order that constitutes the electric drive source schedule data is updated by the motor and solenoid drive process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, as described below. In this motor and solenoid drive process that is repeatedly executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids are driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, the pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in the chronological order, and the pointer is updated every time its own process is executed. In other words, the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive process is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process, so even if for some reason the pointer in the motor and solenoid drive process changes from the drive data it was originally supposed to point to to other drive data, it is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process to point to the drive data it was originally supposed to point to.

Following step S1020, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a received command analysis process (step S1022). In this received command analysis process, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 are received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described below, and the received various commands are analyzed, and the random numbers used for various settings of the performance (for example, random numbers used for performances related to reserved read-ahead) are updated. Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, and in this received command analysis process, the various commands stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are analyzed. Based on the analyzed various commands, the CPU of the peripheral control IC reads (extracts) schedule data for screen generation, schedule data for light emission mode generation, schedule data for sound generation, and schedule data for electrical drive source, etc., from the peripheral control ROM and sets them in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC also performs a lamp palette setting process as one process of the received command analysis process. In the lamp palette setting process, the luminance of the LEDs used as direct light and the luminance of the LEDs used as indirect light are set based on the lamp palette setting table consisting of the above-mentioned luminance designation value, normal palette value, and special palette value. The peripheral control IC analyzes various commands from the main control board 1310, and based on the analyzed various commands, reads (extracts) schedule data for generating light emission modes from the peripheral control ROM and executes the lamp palette setting process. When a player (or a staff member of the game hall or other attendant) operates the performance operation unit 301 (touch operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to set a luminance designation value ranging from the first luminance designation value to the 31st luminance designation value that is the maximum luminance, the above-mentioned gradation information can be updated to the set luminance designation value and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC also analyzes whether the command received from the main control board 1310 in this peripheral control unit command interrupt process is, for example, a start port winning command to instruct the start of a start port winning performance, a normal pattern memory command to identify the number of reserved normal patterns (0 to 4), a variable pattern command to instruct the start of a variable performance such as the variable display of decorative patterns on the performance display device 1600 in synchronization with the variable display of special patterns, a pattern memory command output when the start reserved number changes, or a large prize port 1 count display command output each time a game ball is received by the first large prize port 206 or the second large prize port 2007, and recognizes the current game state.

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, and the received command analysis processing analyzes the various commands stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. The various commands include various commands classified as related to special chart 1 synchronization performance, various commands classified as related to special chart 2 synchronization performance, various commands classified as related to jackpots, various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as related to normal chart synchronization performance, various commands classified as related to normal electric role performance, various commands classified as notification display, various commands classified as status display, various commands classified as test related, and various commands classified as other. In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 executes a lottery process related to notices, etc. based on the received command, and reads (extracts) schedule data for screen generation, schedule data for light emission mode generation, schedule data for sound generation, and schedule data for electrical drive source, etc. from the peripheral control ROM based on the lottery result and sets them in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. This allows the peripheral control board 1510 to execute a performance based on the lottery results.

In addition, the peripheral control ROM stores in advance the peripheral control unit 1511, various control programs for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511, various data, various control data, and various schedule data. The various schedule data include screen generation schedule data for generating a screen to be drawn on the performance display device 1600, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating the light emission modes of various LEDs, sound generation schedule data for generating performance sounds such as music and sound effects, and electrical drive source schedule data for generating the drive modes of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that specifies the configuration of the screen in chronological order, and specifies the order of the screens to be drawn on the performance display device 1600. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by arranging light emission mode data that specifies the light emission modes of various LEDs in chronological order. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in chronological order, and specifies the order in which music and sound effects are played. This sound command data specifies an output channel number for indicating which of the multiple output channels in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC to use, and a track number for indicating which of the multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects into. The electric drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data for electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids in chronological order, and specifies the operation of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

Following step S1022, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a warning process (step S1024). In this warning process, when the command analyzed in the received command analysis process in step S1022 includes various commands classified as notification displays, the schedule data for screen generation, the schedule data for light emission mode generation, the schedule data for sound generation, and the schedule data for the electrical drive source, which are set in the abnormality display mode for executing various abnormality notifications, are read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In addition, in the warning process, if multiple abnormalities occur simultaneously, the abnormality notification is performed in the order of the highest priority registered in advance, and when that abnormality is resolved, it automatically transitions to the remaining abnormality notification. This allows multiple abnormalities to be monitored simultaneously without losing information that a certain abnormality has occurred because another abnormality has occurred after the occurrence of one abnormality but before the abnormality has been resolved.

Following step S1024, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs an RTC acquisition information update process (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the calendar information and time information acquired in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are updated. This RTC acquisition information update process updates the hour, minute, and second, which are the time information stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, and updates the year, month, and date, which are the calendar information stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, based on the updated time information.

Following step S1026, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a display data creation process (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the screen data indicated by the pointer among the screen data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for screen generation is read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC.

When the VDP of the peripheral control IC receives screen data from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, it reads image data from the SDRAM based on the received screen data and generates one screen's worth of drawing data (one frame's worth) in the built-in VRAM to be drawn (displayed) on the performance display device 1600.

Following step S1030, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a sound data creation process (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and among the sound command data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for sound generation, the sound command data indicated by the pointer is read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. When sound command data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the sound source of the peripheral control IC reads the sound data from the SDRAM and incorporates sound data such as music and sound effects according to the track number specified in the sound command data, and sets the output channel to be used according to the output channel number.

In the sound data creation process, each time this sound data creation process is performed (i.e., each time the peripheral control unit performs steady-state processing), the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch is identified based on the volume adjustment operation signal from the volume adjustment switch. The CPU of the peripheral control IC controls the sound source of the peripheral control IC so that the volume corresponds to the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch, and in the sound data output process of step S1018, the sound data is output to the various speakers from the output channel set in this sound data creation process. This allows sounds such as music and sound effects that match the various performances to be played from the various speakers.

Specifically, the resistance value is changed by rotating the volume adjustment switch, and the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the volume switch is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and then converted to a value of 1024 steps from value 0 to value 1023. In this embodiment, the 1024 steps are divided into seven values and managed as board volumes 0 to 6. Board volume 0 is set to mute, and board volume 6 is set to maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from board volume 0 to board volume 6. The sound source of the peripheral control IC is controlled to the volume set to board volumes 0 to 6, and music and sound effects are played from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main frame speaker for low frequencies on the main frame 4. In this way, music and sound effects are played from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main frame speaker for low frequencies on the main frame 4 by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch.

The sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track that incorporates the sound data. In addition to the sound data for music, sound effects, and other sound effects and the sub-volume value for adjusting their volume, the multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC also incorporate sound data for notification sounds to alert parlor staff and the like of malfunctions in the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent acts against the pachinko machine 1 and the sub-volume value for adjusting their volume.

Specifically, for the sound effects, the board volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch as described above is set as the sub-volume value, and for the notification sound, the maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value, completely independent of the volume adjustment based on the rotating operation of the volume adjustment switch. The sub-volume value of the sound effects can be adjusted by operating the touch operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the sound effects operation unit 300, except for a predetermined period after power is turned on (specifically, the period until the peripheral control unit completes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) and a certain period when the special pattern display (first special pattern display unit, second special pattern display unit) starts or stops the variable display of the special pattern (first special pattern, second special pattern) (in this example, from the time the peripheral control unit receives the variable pattern command until 0.5 seconds have passed since the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern, and from the time the peripheral control unit receives the stop display command until 0.5 seconds have passed since the final display of the decorative pattern).

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, except for a predetermined period after power is turned on (specifically, the period until the peripheral control unit finishes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) and a certain period when the special pattern display (first special pattern display unit, second special pattern display unit) starts or stops the variable display of the special pattern (first special pattern, second special pattern) (in this example, from the time the peripheral control unit receives the variable pattern command until 0.5 seconds have passed since the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern, and from the time the peripheral control unit receives the stop display command until 0.5 seconds have passed since the final display of the decorative pattern), By operating the touch operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300, the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the volume adjustment switch in the sound data creation process is converted into seven levels of board volume values from 0 to 6, and by adding or subtracting a predetermined value to the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the volume adjustment switch depending on the operation of the touch operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300, the board volume value is increased or decreased to set the board volume, and the sub-volume value of the performance sound can be adjusted.

The sound specification data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel, and the multiple output channels in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC combine the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used among the multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC with a sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used, and amplify the volume of this combined effect sound to the master volume value that actually flows from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main frame speaker for low frequencies on the main frame 4, and serialize this amplified effect sound to output it as audio data.

In this embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the synthesized sound is at its maximum volume, it is amplified to the master volume value so that the volume of the sound coming from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the low-pitched main frame speaker of the main frame 4 is set to the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the sound, the sound data of the sound embedded in the track to be used among the multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC and the board volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch set as the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the sound embedded in the track to be used are synthesized, and the volume of this synthesized sound is actually amplified to the master volume value that is the volume coming from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the low-pitched main frame speaker of the main frame 4, and this amplified sound is serialized and recorded. For the alarm sound, the sound data of the alarm sound incorporated in the track being used is mixed with the maximum volume that is not dependent on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch set as a sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the alarm sound incorporated in the track being used, and the volume of this mixed alarm sound is amplified to the master volume value that is the volume that actually flows from the top center speaker, top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and the main frame speaker for low tones on the main frame 4, and this amplified alarm sound is serialized and output as audio data.

Here, to briefly explain the control of playing an alarm sound to alert parlor staff and the like of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent activity against the pachinko machine 1 when the special sound is being played from the top central speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the bass main frame speaker on the main frame 4, first the sub-volume value of the track in which the special sound is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, and the sound data of the track in which this special sound is incorporated, the sub-volume value set to mute, the sound data of the track in which the alarm sound is incorporated, and the sub-volume value for which the volume of the alarm sound is set to maximum are combined, and the volume of this combined special sound and alarm sound are amplified to the master volume value that will actually be the volume played from the top central speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the bass main frame speaker on the main frame 4, and these amplified special sound and alarm sound are serialized and output as audio data. In other words, the only sound that actually comes out of the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and the low-pitched main frame speaker on the main frame 4, is the notification sound at maximum volume. At this time, the special sound is muted, so no sound comes out of the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and the low-pitched main frame speaker on the main frame 4, but the special sound is proceeding according to the schedule data for sound generation described above.

In this embodiment, the alarm sound is played from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the low-pitched main frame speaker on the main frame 4 for a predetermined period (e.g., 90 seconds). When this predetermined period has elapsed, the volume of the sound that is being played according to the sound generation schedule data that was previously forcibly set to mute is reset to the board volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch as the sub-volume value (at this time, if the volume of the sound is adjusted by operating the touch operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the sound operation unit 300, it is set to the sub-volume value of the adjusted sound), and the alarm sound is played from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the low-pitched main frame speaker on the main frame 4.

In this way, when the sound effects are being played from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the bass main frame speaker on the main frame 4, when an alarm sound is played to notify the parlor staff of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent acts against the pachinko machine 1, the volume of the sound effects is muted and the alarm sound is played from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the bass main frame speaker on the main frame 4. However, since this muted sound effects progress according to the sound generation schedule data, when the alarm sound stops being played from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the bass main frame speaker on the main frame 4 after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the sound effects do not start playing again from the point where the alarm sound started, but start playing again from the point where the alarm sound started playing and progressed according to the sound generation schedule data until the predetermined period of time had elapsed.

Also, the notification sounds and announcement sounds are played without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch, and the CPU of the peripheral control IC can control the sound source of the peripheral control IC by a program to adjust the volume from mute to maximum volume. The volume adjusted by this program can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. For example, even if a staff member of the game hall rotates the volume adjustment switch to set the volume to a low level, the music, sound effects, and other performance sounds played from the various speakers will be low, but the notification sounds set to a high volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be played when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or a player is committing a fraudulent act. Therefore, even if the volume of the performance sounds is low, it is possible to prevent staff members of the game hall from being unable to notice the malfunction or the player's fraudulent act due to the notification sounds.

Following step S1032, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a backup process (step S1034). In this backup process, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied to a backup area for regular processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC for backup, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are copied to a backup area for regular processing provided in the SDRAM for backup.

Following step S1034, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a WDT clear process (step S1036). In this WDT clear process, a clear signal is output to the external WDT to prevent the CPU of the peripheral control IC from being reset.

Following step S1036, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG to a value of 0 as the execution of the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is completed (step S1038), returns to step S1004, sets the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to a value of 0 to initialize it, and repeats the judgment of step S1006 until the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. In other words, in step S1006, the CPU waits until the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1, and if it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a value of 1, it performs the processing of steps S1008 to S1038, and returns to step S1004 again. In this way, if it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a value of 1, the processing of steps S1008 to S1038 is performed. The processing from step S1008 to step S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit regular processing."

In this peripheral control unit regular processing, the routine starts by setting the regular processing in progress flag SP-FLG to a value of 1 in step S1008, indicating that the peripheral control unit regular processing is being executed, and then in step S1010, a 1 ms interrupt timer start process is performed, and then in step S1036, the routine is performed, and finally in step S1038, the routine processing in progress flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 0, indicating that the peripheral control unit regular processing has been completed. The peripheral control unit regular processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a value of 1 in step S1006. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process described later, which is executed when a V blank signal, which indicates that the peripheral control unit's CPU is ready to accept screen data, is input from the VDP of the peripheral control IC to the CPU of the peripheral control IC. In this embodiment, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the performance display device 1600 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, as described above, so the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). In other words, the peripheral control unit regular processing is repeated approximately every 33.3 ms.

[13-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process is explained, which is executed when a V blank signal is input from the VDP of the peripheral control IC, which indicates that the peripheral control IC is ready to receive screen data from the CPU of the peripheral control IC. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC judges whether the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is set to 0 (step S1045), as shown in Fig. 178. As described above, the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is set to 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of steps S1008 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of Fig. 177 is being executed, and is set to 0 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been executed.

In the judgment of step S1045, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is not 0 (is 1), that is, that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, it ends this routine. On the other hand, in the judgment of step S1045, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been executed, it sets the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to 1 (step S1050) and ends this routine. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady-state processing, and is set to 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed and to 0 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is not executed.

In this embodiment, in step S1045, it is determined whether the steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG is equal to 0, i.e., whether the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed. When the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed, in step S1050, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1. This is because, when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, if a V blank signal is input and the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1, the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed as determined in step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 177, and the currently executing peripheral control unit steady-state processing is forcibly canceled midway and the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is started from the beginning. In order to prevent this, the peripheral control unit power supply in FIG. 177 is turned on. In step S1008 of the power-on process (peripheral control unit steady-state process), the steady-state process flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 to inform the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which is this routine, that the peripheral control unit steady-state process is being executed, and in step S1038 of the peripheral control unit power-on process (peripheral control unit steady-state process) of FIG. 177, the steady-state process flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 0 to inform the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which is this routine, that the peripheral control unit steady-state process has been completed. In other words, this is a procedure for when the peripheral control unit steady-state process cannot be completed by the time the next V blank signal is input after the V blank signal is input, resulting in a so-called processing lag.

As a result, in the peripheral control unit regular processing, if the processing is not completed within the time of about 33.3 ms and the processing is delayed, the determination in step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 177 will result in a standby state until the next V blank signal is input. In other words, the time to execute the peripheral control unit regular processing that has been delayed will be about 66.6 ms. Normally, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing described later, which is repeatedly executed each time the 1 ms interrupt timer occurs due to the activation of the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit regular processing) in FIG. 177, is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit regular processing, but if there is a peripheral control unit regular processing that has been delayed, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed only 32 times, not 64 times. In other words, even if the peripheral control unit regular processing is delayed, the consistency between the progress of the performance by the peripheral control unit regular processing and the progress of the performance by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control, is not lost. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit's normal processing slows down, the progress of the presentation can be reliably maintained.

[13-3. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is repeatedly executed every time the 1 ms interrupt timer occurs due to the activation of the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 177, will be described. When this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC judges whether the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 times as shown in FIG. 179 (step S1100). As described above, this 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is a counter that counts the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 177 and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed. In this embodiment, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the performance display device 1600 is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above, so the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33.3 ms (=1000 ms÷30 fps). In other words, since the peripheral control unit routine process is repeatedly executed every 33.3 ms, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit routine process, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed 32 times before the next peripheral control unit routine process is executed. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit routine process, the first 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, followed by the second, ..., and 32nd 1 ms timer interrupts in sequence.

In the judgment of step S1100, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC judges that the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than 33 times, that is, when it judges that the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt has occurred and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing has started, it ends this routine as it is. In the case where the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs before the next V blank signal, in this embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is set to have a higher priority than the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing as the priority of the interrupt processing, but the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, in the case where the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs before the next V blank signal, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. Then, after the V blank signal is generated and the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit regular processing, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started again when the first 1 ms timer interrupt occurs.

On the other hand, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1100 that the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is less than 33 times, it adds (increments) the value of 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, step S1102. By adding the value of 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in the 1 ms interrupt timer start processing in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 177, and the number of times that the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, has been executed, increases by one.

Following step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the motor, solenoid, and other electric drive sources are driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data for the motors, solenoids, and other electric drive sources arranged in chronological order that constitute the electric drive source schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, and the pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in the chronological order, and the pointer is updated each time this motor and solenoid drive processing is performed. As a result, the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids managed by the CPU of the peripheral control IC (for example, the electric drive sources provided in the door frame 3 and the electric drive sources provided in various performance units provided on the game board 5) are driven according to the electric drive source schedule data.

Following step S1104, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs movable object information acquisition processing (step S1106). In this movable object information acquisition processing, history information of the detection signals from the various sensors (e.g., original position history information, movable position history information, etc.) is created by determining whether or not detection signals have been input from the various sensors provided in the various presentation units provided on the game board 5, and set this in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Based on the history information of the detection signals from the various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines the movable positions by setting the original positions (standby positions) of the various movable objects provided in the various presentation units provided on the game board 5 and acquiring the movable positions.

Following step S1106, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a performance operation unit information acquisition process (step S1108). In this performance operation unit information acquisition process, by determining whether or not detection signals are input from various sensors provided in the performance operation unit 300, history information of the detection signals from the various sensors (for example, rotation (rotation direction) history information of the touch operation unit 302 and operation history information of the pressing operation unit 303, etc.) is created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. The presence or absence of operation of the touch operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be obtained from the history information of the detection signals from the various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, by operating the performance operation unit 301, it is possible to adjust the volume of the performance sound output from the top center speaker, the top side speaker, and the main body frame speaker of the main body frame 4, and to adjust the brightness of various LEDs mounted in multiple numbers on various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5.

Following step S1108, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs backup processing (step S1110) and ends this routine. In this backup processing, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied and backed up in a 1 ms timer interrupt processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are copied and backed up in a 1 ms timer interrupt processing backup area provided in the SDRAM. Note that in this embodiment, the 1 ms timer interrupt processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC and the regular processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are set to different areas, and the 1 ms timer interrupt processing backup area provided in the SDRAM and the regular processing backup area provided in the SDRAM are set to different areas.

In this way, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, various processing related to the performance in steps S1104 to S1108 is executed as the performance progresses within a period of 1 ms. In contrast, in the peripheral control unit regular processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 177, various processing related to the performance in steps S1014 to S1032 is executed as the performance progresses within a period of approximately 33.3 ms. In the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, this routine is terminated as is. Therefore, even if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs by chance before the next V blank signal occurs, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled, and the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing by the occurrence of the V blank signal, and then the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is newly started by the occurrence of the first 1 ms timer interrupt. In other words, the consistency between the progress state of the performance by the peripheral control unit regular processing and the progress state of the performance by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control, is not lost. Therefore, the progress state of the performance can be reliably matched.

As mentioned above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal size of the performance display device 1600, and the interval at which the V blank signal is output may also vary slightly depending on the production lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control IC is mounted. In this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the occurrence of the next V blank signal, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process. In other words, in this embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly, the time lag caused by the slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output can be absorbed by forcibly canceling the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt.

[13-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, a description will be given of the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC starts transmitting various commands as serial data from the main control board 1310, this triggers the CPU to take in 1 byte (8 bits) of information from the main serial data into a reception buffer at the serial I/O port of the peripheral control IC, and when this taking is completed, this triggers an interrupt to be generated and the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is performed. One packet of the main serial data is composed of 3 bytes, with the status assigned to the first byte, the mode assigned to the second byte, and a sum value calculated by treating the status and mode as numerical values and calculating their sum to the third byte.

When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out (step S1200), as shown in FIG. 180. This 1-byte reception period timer sets the period during which 1 byte (8 bits) of information can be received from the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310.

In the judgment of step S1200, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out, that is, when it is judged that it is within the period in which 1 byte (8 bits) of information can be received from the main serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310, the CPU of the peripheral control IC takes in the 1 byte of information received from the reception buffer of the serial I/O port of the peripheral control IC (step S1202) and adds (increments) the value of the reception counter SRXC by 1, step S1204. This reception counter SRXC is a counter that indicates the number of times information has been taken out from the reception buffer, and takes a value of 1 when the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, is taken out from the reception buffer, a value of 2 when the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, is taken out from the reception buffer, and a value of 3 when the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, is taken out from the reception buffer. The reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value of 0 when the power is turned on, etc.

Following step S1204, it is determined whether the receive counter SRXC is equal to 3, i.e., whether the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, has been retrieved from the receive buffer (step S1206). In this determination, it is determined whether the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, have been retrieved from the receive buffer in that order.

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1206 that the receive counter SRXC is not equal to the value 3, that is, that the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, has not yet been retrieved from the receive buffer, followed by the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, in that order, it sets a 1-byte receive period timer (step S1208) and ends this routine. By setting the 1-byte receive period timer in step S1208, a period is set in which the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, or the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, can be received.

On the other hand, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC judges in step S1206 that the receive counter SRXC is equal to 3, that is, when it judges that the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, have been retrieved from the receive buffer in that order, it sets the receive counter SRXC to an initial value of 0 (step S1210) and calculates the sum value (step S1212). In this calculation, the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, and the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, which were already retrieved from the receive buffer in step S1202, are regarded as numerical values, and their sum (sum value) is calculated.

Following step S1212, it is determined whether the sum value of the third byte of the main loop serial data already retrieved from the receive buffer in step S1202 matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 (step S1214). The sum value of the third byte of the main loop serial data already retrieved from the receive buffer in step S1202 is the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main loop serial data from the main control board 1310, so it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with game balls from the island equipment of the game hall, and when the game balls rub against each other and become charged, they discharge electrostatically, generating noise, so the pachinko machine 1 is in an environment where it is subject to noise.

In this embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 regards the status assigned as the first byte of the received main serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main serial data as numerical values, calculates their sum (sum value), and determines whether this calculated sum value matches the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main serial data from the main control board 1310. This allows the CPU of the peripheral control IC to determine whether the main serial data between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 has been affected by noise and changed to main serial data that is different from the normal data.

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1214 that the sum value of the third byte of the main loop serial data already retrieved from the receive buffer in step S1202 matches the sum value calculated in step S1212, it stores the status assigned to the first byte of the received main loop serial data and the mode assigned to the second byte of the main loop serial data in the RAM of the peripheral control IC (step S1216), and ends this routine.

On the other hand, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1200 that the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out, that is, that the period in which 1 byte (8 bits) of the main serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received has been exceeded, or if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1214 that the sum value of the third byte of the main serial data already retrieved from the receive buffer in step S1202 does not match the sum value calculated in step S1212, it ends this routine.

[13-5. Peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, a peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process will be described, which is executed when a power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 is input from the main control board 1310. When this peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC first starts a 2 microsecond timer (step S1300) as shown in Fig. 181, and determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S1302). In the determination of step S1302, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that a power failure warning signal has not been input, it ends this routine as it is.

On the other hand, in the judgment of step S1302, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC judges that a power outage warning signal has been input, it judges whether 2 microseconds have passed (step S1304). In this judgment, the timer started in step S1300 judges whether 2 microseconds have passed. In the judgment of step S1304, when 2 microseconds have not passed, the CPU of the peripheral control IC returns to step S1302 and judges whether a power outage warning signal has been input. If it judges that a power outage warning signal has not been input, it ends this routine, but if it judges that a power outage warning signal has been input, it judges again in step S1304 whether 2 microseconds have passed. In other words, in the judgment of step S1304, it judges whether a power outage warning signal has been input continuously for 2 microseconds since the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, was started.

In the judgment of step S1304, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC judges that the power outage warning signal has been input continuously for 2 microseconds since the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, was started, it performs power saving processing (step S1306). In this power saving processing, the backlight of the performance display device 1600 is turned off, excitation to the motors and solenoids provided on the game board 5 is turned off, various LEDs are turned off, and other processes are sequentially executed to reduce the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1, thereby ensuring stable operation for a period of 20 milliseconds during which the CPU of the peripheral control IC can operate even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

Following step S1306, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a command reception standby process (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands currently being sent by the main control board 1310, the CPU waits for at least 17 milliseconds so that the peripheral control IC can receive the command being sent. When a command is received, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described above is started and the received command is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

Following step S1308, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a backup process for the command (step S1310). In the backup process for this command, the command stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC is copied and backed up in a backup area for regular processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

Following step S1310, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input (step S1312). If the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1312 that a power outage warning signal has been input, it performs a WDT clear process (step S1314). In this WDT clear process, a clear signal is output to the external WDT to prevent the CPU of the peripheral control IC from being reset.

On the other hand, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1312 that the power outage warning signal has not been input, or following step S1314, it returns to step S1312 again to determine whether the power outage warning signal has been input. In other words, it continues to determine indefinitely whether the power outage warning signal has been input. By continuing to determine indefinitely in this manner, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1312 that the power outage warning signal has not been input, it is no longer able to output a clear signal to the external WDT, and the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset. On the other hand, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1312 that the power outage warning signal has been input, it performs WDT clear processing in step S1314, and the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 177 is started again.

In this way, if the input of the power outage warning signal continues in the infinite loop as determined by step S1312, the WDT clear process is executed in step S1314 so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset just before the power outage state occurs. On the other hand, if the input of the power outage warning signal is not continued in the infinite loop as determined by step S1312 and released, the WDT clear process is not executed, so the output of the clear signal to the external WDT is interrupted. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine, is erroneously started due to noise or the like, and the noise occurs for a period exceeding 2 microseconds, and the determination of step S1302 is passed, if the input of the power outage warning signal is not continued in the infinite loop as determined by step S1312 and released, the WDT clear process of step S1314 is not executed so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset, so that it is possible to respond to such noise by automatically returning to reset.

[Game content]
Next, the game content on the game board 5 of the third embodiment in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to Fig. 182. Fig. 182 is a front view of the game board of the third embodiment.

In the game board 5 of the third embodiment, one of the three general winning openings 2001 provided in the area to the left of the center device 2500 of the first embodiment is the second starting opening 2005, and the second starting opening 2005 provided in the area to the right of the center device 2500 of the first embodiment is the general winning opening 2001. The other parts have the same configuration as the game board 5 of the first embodiment, and detailed explanations of the parts with the same configuration will be omitted.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the player rotates the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 located in the lower right corner of the front of the door frame 3, and the game ball B stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 is shot into the upper part of the game area 5a through between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5, and a game using the game ball B is started. The game ball B shot into the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left or right side of the center role 2500 depending on the shooting strength. The shooting strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 195, and the more it is rotated clockwise, the stronger the ball can be shot. Up to 100 game balls B can be shot continuously in one minute, that is, at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

In addition, in the area of the game area 5a to the left of the center role 2500, there are provided a variable winning opening 2003, a first starting opening 2004, a second starting opening 2005, and a first large winning opening 2006 as winning openings through which the game ball B can enter, and in the area to the right of the center role 2500, there is provided a second large winning opening 2007 as a winning opening through which the game ball B can enter. Of these, the first starting opening 2004 and the second starting opening 2005 are always open at the top and can always receive the game ball B, whereas the variable winning opening 2003, the first large winning opening 2006, and the second large winning opening 2007 are normally closed and become open when a predetermined condition is met, thereby allowing the game ball B to be received.

In addition, within the game area 5a, multiple obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions on the front of the game panel 1100, and when the game ball B comes into contact with the obstacle nails N, the flow speed of the game ball B is suppressed and various movements are imparted to the game ball B, allowing the player to enjoy its movements. In addition to the obstacle nails N, within the game area 5a, a windmill W that rotates when the game ball B comes into contact with it is provided above the upper left side unit 2300 and to the left of the center role 2500.

When a game ball B is shot into the top of the center role 2500 and enters the center role 2500 from the highest part of the outer periphery to the left as viewed from the front, it will come into contact with multiple obstacle nails N and flow through either the left first guide passage 2531 or the left second guide passage 2532 of the left guide passage group 2530 of the center role 2500. Near the entrance of the left second guide passage 2532, there is a first large prize opening 2006 that is normally closed by the first large prize opening door 2523 to prevent it from being accepted, and the game ball B that enters the left second guide passage 2532 rolls down the first large prize opening door 2523.

The game ball B that has flowed through the left guide passage group 2530 is released above the gate 2002, and after hitting a number of obstacle nails N planted between the left guide passage group 2530 and the gate 2002 on the left and right sides of the variable winning opening 2003, which is normally closed by the variable winning opening door 2521, there is a certain probability that the game ball B will pass through the gate 2002.

When game ball B passes through this gate 2002 and is detected by gate sensor 2601, a normal lottery is performed on main control board 1310, and if the lottery result for the normal symbol is a "normal win," variable prize opening 2003, which is closed by variable prize opening door 2521, opens for a predetermined time (e.g., 0.3 to 10 seconds), allowing game ball B to be received by variable prize opening 2003. In this example, the probability that the lottery result for the normal symbol will be a "normal win" in a normal lottery in the low probability non-time-saving state and the high probability non-time-saving state is 0/100, and the probability that the lottery result for the normal symbol will be a "normal win" in a normal lottery in other game states (high probability time-saving state, low probability time-saving state A, low probability time-saving state B, low probability time-saving state C) is 100/100. That is, in the low probability non-time-saving state and the high probability non-time-saving state, except for some special situations (situations in which the variable winning opening door 2521 continues to open and close the variable winning opening 2003 after the high probability time-saving state, the low probability time-saving state A, the low probability time-saving state B, or the low probability time-saving state C has ended), the possibility of the game ball B being accepted by the variable winning opening 2003 is set to be extremely low, whereas in the high probability time-saving state, the low probability time-saving state A, the low probability time-saving state B, or the low probability time-saving state C, the possibility of the game ball B being accepted by the variable winning opening 2003 is set to be higher than in the low probability non-time-saving state and the high probability non-time-saving state.

In this embodiment, the variable winning opening 2003 is provided near the peripheral wall 2501 of the center device 2500, so there is a higher probability that the ball will be accepted by the variable winning opening 2003 if it is circulated through the left second guide passage 2532 rather than the left first guide passage 2531. When a game ball B is accepted by the variable winning opening 2003, a predetermined number (e.g., 1 to 5 balls) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633.

In this embodiment, in the normal lottery that is performed when the game ball B passes through the gate 2002, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery to the indication of the lottery result of the normal pattern (for example, 0.01 to 120 seconds, also referred to as the normal variation time). This indication of the lottery result of the normal pattern is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The variable winning port 2003 opens after the normal variation time has elapsed. Also, in the time-saving state, a relatively short normal variation time is selected at a higher rate than in the non-time-saving state, and in the above-mentioned time-saving state, the time from the start of the normal lottery to the indication of the lottery result of the normal pattern (the time from the start of the normal pattern variation display on the normal pattern display of the function display unit 1400 to the derivation of the lottery result: normal variation time) is relatively shorter than in the non-time-saving state. (For example, in the non-time-saving state, the possibility of selecting a normal variation time of 60 seconds is higher than in the time-saving state, and in the time-saving state, the possibility of selecting a normal variation time of 0.01 seconds is higher than in the non-time-saving state, etc.)

If game ball B passes through gate 2002 between the time when game ball B passes through gate 2002 and the time when the lottery result for the normal pattern is suggested, the suggestion of the lottery result for the normal pattern cannot start, so the start of the suggestion of the lottery result for the normal pattern is reserved until the previous suggestion of the lottery result for the normal pattern has ended. Also, the number of reserved lottery results for the normal pattern is limited to four, and any more than this are discarded rather than reserved, even if game ball B passes through gate 2002. This prevents the burden on the game hall from increasing due to the accumulation of reserved results.

At the gate 2002 location, the game ball B flows down either the gate 2002, the outer left side of the gate 2002, or the outer right side of the gate 2002. The game ball B that flows down below the gate 2002 enters the warp entrance 2511 that opens into the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center device 2500. In this embodiment, due to multiple obstacle nails N planted in the area between the gate 2002 and the windmill W, the game ball B that passes through the outer right side of the gate 2002 enters the warp entrance 2511 with a high probability.

Then, game ball B that enters the warp entrance 2511 is supplied to stage 2513 from warp exit 2512. Game ball B supplied to stage 2513 rolls back and forth on stage 2513 and is released forward from the center in the left-right direction. When game ball B is released into game area 5a from central release section 2513a in the center of stage 2513, there is a high probability that it will be accepted by first starting opening 2004, since central release section 2513a is located directly above first starting opening 2004.

When the game ball B shot into the left side of the center device 2500 is received by the first starting hole 2004, a predetermined number (e.g., three) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, and a first special pattern (e.g., "miss," "small hit," "big hit," "instant short hit," etc.) is drawn on the main control board 1310. If the result of the drawn first special pattern is other than "miss," an advantageous game state in which the player is at an advantage is created. The result of the drawn first special pattern is then suggested to the player over a predetermined time period (e.g., 0.1 to 360 seconds, also known as the special variable time). In addition, in the time-saving state, a relatively short special variable time is selected at a higher rate as the special variable time of the first special symbol than in the non-time-saving state, and in the time-saving state, the period until the lottery result of the first special symbol is indicated is relatively shorter than in the non-time-saving state (for example, in the non-time-saving state, the possibility of a 60-second special variable time being selected as the special variable time of the first special symbol is higher than in the time-saving state, and in the time-saving state, the possibility of a 0.01-second special variable time being selected is higher than in the non-time-saving state, etc.).

If the game ball B that flows down to the left side of the center device 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2511, it may be pushed toward the center in the left-right direction by the shelf 2301 of the upper left side unit 2300 or the obstacle nails N, and may be accepted into the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200, the second starting opening 2005, or the first starting opening 2004 of the starting opening unit 2100. When the game ball B is accepted into the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633.

The first starting hole 2004 and the second starting hole 2005 are both always open at the top, and can always receive game ball B. However, while there is a high probability that game ball B released into the play area 5a from the stage 2513 of the center device 2500 will be received by the first starting hole 2004, there is no possibility that game ball B released into the play area 5a from the stage 2513 of the center device 2500 will be received by the second starting hole 2005. For this reason, there is a higher probability that game ball B shot into the left side of the center device 2500 will be received by the first starting hole 2004 than by the second starting hole 2005.

When the game ball B shot into the left side of the center device 2500 is received by the second starting hole 2005 or the variable winning hole 2003, a predetermined number (e.g., one) of game balls B is paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, and a lottery for a second special pattern (e.g., "miss," "small hit," "big hit," "instant short hit," etc.) is held on the main control board 1310. If the result of the lottery for the drawn second special pattern is other than "miss," a favorable game state in which the player is at an advantage is created. The result of the lottery for the drawn second special pattern is then suggested to the player over a predetermined period of time (e.g., 0.1 to 360 seconds, also known as the special variable time). In addition, in the time-saving state, a relatively short special variable time is selected at a higher rate as the special variable time of the second special pattern than in the non-time-saving state, and in the time-saving state, the period until the lottery result of the second special pattern is indicated is relatively shorter than in the non-time-saving state (for example, in the non-time-saving state, the possibility of a 60-second special variable time being selected as the special variable time of the second special pattern is higher than in the time-saving state, and in the time-saving state, the possibility of a 0.01-second special variable time being selected is higher than in the non-time-saving state, etc.).

In this embodiment, the first special symbol is drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2004, and the second special symbol is drawn by receiving the game ball B into the second starting port 2005 or the variable winning port 2003 in the order of reception into the first starting port 2004, the second starting port 2005, or the variable winning port 2003. In other words, the indication of the lottery result of the first special symbol by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2004, and the indication of the lottery result of the second special symbol by receiving the game ball B into the second starting port 2005 or the variable winning port 2003 are made in the order of reception into the first starting port 2004, the second starting port 2005, or the variable winning port 2003.

If a game ball B is received into the first starting port 2004 during the period from the start of the special lottery due to the reception of a game ball B into the first starting port 2004, the second starting port 2005, or the variable winning port 2003 until the lottery result of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is suggested (special variable time), the suggestion of the lottery result of the first special symbol cannot start, so the start of the suggestion of the lottery result of the first special symbol is suspended until the suggestion of the lottery result of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) previously drawn is completed. The number of reserved lottery results of the first special symbol is limited to four for the first starting port 2004, and for any more than this, the lottery result of the first special symbol is not reserved but discarded even if a game ball B is received into the first starting port 2004. This prevents the burden on the game hall from increasing due to the accumulation of reserved results.

Similarly, if a game ball B is received by the second starting port 2005 or the variable winning port 2003 during the period from the start of the special lottery due to the reception of a game ball B by the first starting port 2004, the second starting port 2005, or the variable winning port 2003 until the lottery result of the special pattern (first special pattern, second special pattern) drawn is suggested (special variable time), the suggestion of the lottery result of the second special pattern cannot be started, so the start of the suggestion of the lottery result of the second special pattern is suspended until the suggestion of the lottery result of the special pattern (first special pattern, second special pattern) drawn earlier is completed. The number of reserved lottery results of the second special pattern that are reserved is limited to four for the second starting port 2005 and the variable winning port 2003, and for any more than that, the lottery result of the second special pattern is not reserved but discarded even if a game ball B is received by the second starting port 2005 or the variable winning port 2003. This prevents the burden on the gaming hall from increasing due to the accumulation of reserved bets.

Under normal conditions, even if game ball B is shot into the right side of the center device 2500, there is no possibility that it will be accepted into the first starting hole 2004, the second starting hole 2005, or the variable winning hole 2003, so the player can be encouraged to actively perform shooting operations that cause game ball B to circulate on the left side of the center device 2500.

On the other hand, when a game ball B is shot into the upper part of the center device 2500 in the play area 5a and enters to the right of the highest part of the peripheral wall part 2501 of the center device 2500, it passes through either the right first guide passage 2541 or the right second guide passage 2542 of the right guide passage group 2540 of the center device 2500, and is released into the space forming part 2550 in which the specific obstacle nail group 2700 is planted.

The right guide passage group 2540 of the center role 2500 is composed of a right first guide passage 2541 whose entrance opens near the impact stopper 1006, and a right second guide passage 2542 whose entrance opens at a distance to the left of the entrance of the right first guide passage 2541. As a result, if the game ball B is hit with enough strength to hit the impact stopper 1006 (so-called right hit), it will enter the right first guide passage 2541, and if the game ball B is hit with enough strength not to hit the impact stopper 1006 (somewhat weaker strength than right hit), it will enter the right second guide passage 2542 with a high probability. In other words, the game ball B hit to the upper right side of the center role 2500 will flow through either the right first guide passage 2541 or the right second guide passage 2542 depending on the hitting strength.

In this embodiment, the game ball B that has flowed through the right first guide passage 2541 is released into the first guide area 2711 of the specific obstacle nail group 2700, and the game ball B that has flowed through the right second guide passage 2542 is released into the second guide area 2712 of the specific obstacle nail group 2700.

The game ball B released into the specific obstacle nail group 2700 flows down while meandering left and right along the guidance area 2710. As a result, the flow speed of the game ball B is suppressed in the area of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 compared to the normal area.

In the first induction area 2711 and the second induction area 2712, the game ball B may deviate from the induction area 2710, and if it deviates from the second induction area 2712 to the right, there is a high probability that it will be accepted by the first sub-outlet 2021 located below. If the game ball B is accepted by the first sub-outlet 2021, it is discharged outside the game area 5a without having the opportunity to be accepted by the second large prize opening 2007 or the second starting opening 2005 located downstream.

In this embodiment, the ball is configured to be accepted by the first sub-outlet 2021 with a higher probability if it is circulated through the right second guide passage 2542 rather than the right first guide passage 2541. This allows the player to perform an operation to shoot the game ball B so that the game ball B flows through the right first guide passage 2541 during a "right hit". In other words, during a "right hit", the player is prompted to perform an operation to rotate the handle 195 greatly so that the game ball B is shot with enough strength to abut against the impact stopper 1006, making it easier to enjoy the original gameplay of the pachinko machine 1 with a relatively easy shooting operation.

The game ball B that flows through the specific obstacle nail group 2700 (space forming portion 2550) and is not accepted by the first sub-out port 2021 passes between the guide wall portion 2552 and the attacca right wall portion 2567 and enters the second attacca portion 2560. In a normal state, the second large prize winning port 2007 provided in the second attacca portion 2560 is closed by the second large prize winning port door 2562 so that it cannot accept the game ball B, so the game ball B that passes between the guide wall portion 2552 and the attacca right wall portion 2567 flows down onto the second large prize winning port door 2562, rolls to the left on the second large prize winning port door 2562 (attacca passage 2564), and is then released downward from the second attacca portion 2560 through the right release passage 2565.

The general start port 2001 is provided below the right release passage 2565, and the second sub-out port 2022 is provided to the right of the general start port 2001, and the inclined wall portion 2418 of the lower right unit 2400 is provided to the left of the general start port 2001. In addition, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted between the outlet of the right release passage 2565 and the general start port 2001, the second sub-out port 2022, and the inclined wall portion 2418. Therefore, the game ball B released downward from the right release passage 2565 is accepted by the general start port 2001 with a certain probability. In addition, the game ball B released downward from the right release passage 2565 is accepted by the second sub-out port 2022 with a lower probability than the general start port 2001. The game ball B accepted by the second sub-out port 2022 is discharged outside the game area 5a.

Then, the game ball B that is released downward from the right release passage 2565 and is not received by the general starting port 2001 or the second sub-outlet 2022 flows down onto the inclined wall portion 2418, rolls diagonally downward and to the left along the inclination of the inclined wall portion 2418, and is released to the left at a position below the first starting port 2004 and is received by the outlet 1008.

In other words, under normal conditions, when game ball B is shot to the right side of the center device 2500 ("right hit"), there is no chance that it will be accepted by the first starting hole 2004, the second starting hole 2005, or the variable winning hole 2003. This allows the player to actively perform a shooting operation that causes game ball B to circulate on the left side of the center device 2500 under normal conditions, and also gives a sense of premium to the right side of the center device 2500 ("right hit").

As described above, depending on the result of the drawing for the first special pattern or the result of the drawing for the second special pattern, which is drawn when game ball B is received by first starting opening 2004 or second starting opening 2005, first large winning opening 2006 or second large winning opening 2007 opens or closes in a predetermined opening/closing pattern, making it possible to receive game ball B.

When the first large winning opening 2006 is ready to receive, the first large winning opening 2006 is located in the left second guide passage 2532 on the left side of the center device 2500, so the player can perform a throwing operation so that the game ball B flows through the left second guide passage 2532. When the first large winning opening 2006 is in an open state in which it can receive the game ball B, if the game ball B that has entered the left second guide passage 2532 is received by the first large winning opening 2006, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633.

On the other hand, when the second large winning opening 2007 is available, since the second large winning opening 2007 is located below the right side of the center device 2500, the player can perform a throwing operation so that the game ball B flows along the right side of the center device 2500. When the second large winning opening 2007 is in an open state in which it can receive the game ball B, if the game ball B that has entered the attack passage 2564 of the second attack section 2560 from between the guide wall section 2552 and the attack right wall section 2567 is received by the second large winning opening 2007, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633.

In this way, when the first large winning opening 2006 or the second large winning opening 2007 is capable of accepting game ball B, it is possible to have a large number of game balls B paid out by having the first large winning opening 2006 or the second large winning opening 2007 accept the game ball B, thereby entertaining the player and preventing a decline in interest in the game.

In this embodiment, if the result of the drawing for the first special symbol or the result of the drawing for the second special symbol is a "jackpot," then as a jackpot game, once either a predetermined time (e.g., 20 to 40 seconds) has elapsed after the second large winning opening 2007 has been opened to receive the game ball B, or a predetermined number of game balls B (e.g., 10) have been received by the second large winning opening 2007, the opening and closing pattern (one opening and closing pattern is referred to as one round) that closes the game so that the game ball B cannot be received is repeated a predetermined number of times (predetermined number of rounds). For example, five rounds are repeated for a "5R jackpot," and ten rounds are repeated for a "10R jackpot," generating an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player. In this case, even if a player tries to shoot game ball B into the second large winning opening 2007 at the timing when the second large winning opening 2007 opens and can receive game ball B, it is difficult to time the shooting of game ball B because a specific obstacle nail group 2700 capable of slowing down the flow speed of game ball B is provided upstream of the second large winning opening 2007. This adds difficulty to the operation of shooting game ball B, making the game more rewarding to play and entertaining the player, and preventing a decline in interest. In addition, in the above case, it is possible to make it difficult for game ball B to be received by the second large winning opening 2007, and therefore it is possible to prevent an increase in the burden on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

In addition, in the case of a "jackpot", after the end of a jackpot game, there are "wins" in which the probability of drawing the first special symbol or the second special symbol such as a "jackpot" is increased ("probable win"), or the probability of receiving the game ball B into the variable winning port 2003 is changed ("time-saving win") to be easier. For example, when a normal lottery is held, the probability that the lottery result for the normal symbol is a "normal win" is increased, or when the lottery result for the normal symbol is a "normal win", the time or number of times that the variable winning port 2003, which is closed by the variable winning port door 2521, is open is increased, making it easier to receive the game ball B into the variable winning port 2003.

In addition, if the lottery result for the first special symbol or the lottery result for the second special symbol is a "small win," the first large winning opening 2006 opens and closes rapidly in a short period of time to receive the game ball B as a small win game (for example, a small win rush).

In addition, if the lottery result for the first special symbol or the lottery result for the second special symbol is an "instant short win," the big win game or small win game is not executed, and the first big winning opening 2006 or the second big winning opening 2007 is not in an open state capable of receiving the game ball B, but the time-saving state is maintained as an advantageous game state for a specific number of predetermined fluctuations thereafter.

In this embodiment, below the second large prize opening 2007, there is a pseudo game area 2010 in which only the game ball B accepted by the second large prize opening 2007 can circulate. The game ball B accepted by the second large prize opening 2007 enters the pseudo game area 2010 after being detected by the second large prize opening sensor 2561. The game ball B that enters the pseudo game area 2010 flows down while abutting against a plurality of obstacle nails N planted in the pseudo game area 2010, and when the pseudo large prize opening 2402 can accept the game ball B, the game ball B is accepted by the pseudo large prize opening 2402. On the other hand, when the pseudo large prize opening 2402 cannot accept the game ball B, the game ball B passes in front of the pseudo large prize opening 2402 and is discharged from the pseudo outlet 2404 without being returned to the game area 5a.

This pseudo large prize opening 2402 is capable of receiving game ball B in a predetermined opening and closing pattern, for example, when the second large prize opening 2007 is capable of receiving game ball B in a predetermined opening and closing pattern due to a "jackpot" or the like as described above. This pseudo large prize opening 2402 is provided to be larger and more conspicuous than the second large prize opening 2007, so that many of the game balls B received by the second large prize opening 2007 are received by the pseudo large prize opening 2402, which keeps the player from getting bored during "jackpot" play and keeps the player entertained, thereby preventing a decline in the player's interest.

In this embodiment, the lottery results for the first special symbol and the second special symbol are suggested by the function display unit 1400 and the performance display device 1600. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest the lottery results for the special symbols (the lottery results for the first special symbol and the lottery results for the second special symbol). The lottery results for the special symbols are suggested by the function display unit 1400 by repeatedly turning on and off multiple LEDs and flashing them for a predetermined period of time, and then the combination of lit LEDs suggests the lottery results for the special symbols.

On the other hand, the performance display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and the lottery result of the special symbol is suggested as a performance image. The performance image suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol on the performance display device 1600 displays three picture rows consisting of multiple pictures lined up in the left-right direction, and changes each picture row, stops the displayed picture rows in sequence, and stops and displays each of the three picture rows so that the pictures of the stopped and displayed picture rows form a combination corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol. If the lottery result of the special symbol is other than "miss", after the three picture rows stop and each picture is stopped and displayed, a confirmation image suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed on the performance display device 1600, and an advantageous game state (for example, "small hit" game, "big hit" game, "time-saving" game, etc.) according to the lottery result of the special symbol drawn is generated.

The time indicating the result of the special pattern lottery on the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (special change time)) is different from the time indicating the result of the special pattern lottery on the performance display device 1600 (the time until the pattern row changes and the final image is displayed), and is set to a longer time on the function display unit 1400.

In addition to displaying a performance image to suggest the result of the lottery for the special symbol by the performance display device 1600, the peripheral control board 1510 can also perform a player participation type performance in which the touch operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 301 in the performance operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 are operated according to the result of the lottery for the special symbol drawn. In the player participation type performance, the pressing operation unit 303 can be raised and made more prominent by the operation button lift drive motor 367, and the player can enjoy the player participation type performance by operating the performance operation unit 301.

In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 can appropriately use the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3, the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5, the performance display device 1600, the lower right unit 2400, and the rear front peripheral decorative unit 3200, rear upper front performance unit 3300, rear lower front performance unit 3400, rear upper rear performance unit 3500, and rear lower rear performance unit 3600 of the rear unit 3000 to perform light-emitting performances and display performances, etc., allowing players to be entertained by various performances and preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, in a player-participation presentation in which the player operates the touch operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303, if the player makes a mistake or fails to perform an operation that should be performed, the peripheral control board 1510 notifies the player so that the player can perform the correct operation.

[Control process of main control board]
Next, an example of the control process executed by the main control board 1310 (particularly the main control MPU 1310a) will be described. Fig. 183 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special symbol and special electric role control process (step S114).

Now, assuming that the random numbers used in the various lottery processes have been updated (step S106), as shown in FIG. 183, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first executes a first start gate passing process, such as obtaining a first special random number of the first special symbol from the random number counter and storing it in the first special symbol reserved memory area of the RAM (step S232), on the condition that the detection signal from the first start gate sensor 3002 is in the ON state (a ball has entered the first start gate 2004) (step S231). Also, on the condition that the detection signal from the second start gate sensor 2401 is in the ON state (a ball has entered the second start gate 2005) (step S233), the main control MPU 1310a executes a second start gate passing process, such as obtaining a second special random number of the second special symbol from the random number counter and storing it in the second special symbol reserved memory area of the RAM (step S234).

Next, it is determined whether or not a jackpot execution flag indicating that control is being performed for a jackpot game is set (step S235), and if the jackpot execution flag is set, a jackpot control process (step S240) is executed to control the jackpot game. In the jackpot control process, when the result of the lottery process for the display state when the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) stops is a state suggesting "jackpot A", a process is executed to control the opening and closing of the second large prize winning port 2007 in response to a 10R jackpot game. Also, when the result is a state suggesting "jackpot B", a process is executed to control the opening and closing of the second large prize winning port 2007 in response to a 5R jackpot game, and when the result is a state suggesting "jackpot C", a process is executed to control the opening and closing of the second large prize winning port 2007 in response to a 10R jackpot game.

In addition, in the jackpot control process (step S240), after controlling the opening of the second large prize opening 2007, each of the setting processes for the high probability flag, the time-saving flag, and the time-saving count counter is executed. The high probability flag is a flag indicating a high probability state, and is set when a 10R jackpot game based on the result of the lottery process when the special symbol stops changing becomes a state suggesting "jackpot A" or when a 5R jackpot game based on the result of the lottery process becoming a state suggesting "jackpot B" is ended. Then, the high probability flag is reset at the next jackpot by the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 194 described later.

The time-saving flag is a flag indicating that the game is in the time-saving state, and is set when the 10R jackpot game ends based on the result of the lottery process when the special symbol stops changing, which is based on the result of a process suggesting a "jackpot A" or a "jackpot C", and when the state indicates an "instant short jackpot A to C". The time-saving flag is then reset by the special symbol stopping process shown in FIG. 194, which will be described later, when the next jackpot occurs, or when the counter value of the time-saving counter becomes "0".

The time-saving counter indicates the remaining number of times the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) will continue for the time-saving state, and when the 10R jackpot game ends because a state suggesting "jackpot A" or "jackpot C" has been reached, or when a state suggesting "instant short jackpot A-C" has been reached, the number of times the time-saving state will continue is set. The time-saving counter counts down each time the variable display of the special symbols is executed until the counter value reaches "0", but if the next jackpot occurs before the counter value reaches "0", it is reset by the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 194 described below (the counter value is returned to "0").

If the big win in progress flag is not set, it is determined whether or not the small win in progress flag, which indicates that control is being exercised to a small win game, is set (step S236), and if the small win in progress flag is set, a small win control process (step S239) is executed to control the small win game. Note that in the small win control process, when the result of the lottery process regarding the display state when the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) stops indicates a state that suggests a "small win", a process is executed to control the opening and closing of the first big win opening 2006 in response to the small win game.

If the small win execution flag is not set, a special symbol process including a lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) stops is executed (step S238). In this example, when the first special random number of the first special symbol is obtained from the random number counter, and when the second special random number of the second special symbol is obtained from the random number counter, both are stored in a common special symbol reserved memory area, and the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed in the order in which they were stored in the special symbol reserved memory area.

Figure 184 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first start port passing process (step S232).

Now, in the processing of step S231, if it is determined that the first start hole sensor 3002 is in the ON state and a gaming ball has entered the first start hole 2004, then as shown in FIG. 184, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first obtains the first special random number, the reach random number, the first pattern random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the processing of step S241.

Then, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 obtains the counter value of the first special reserved number counter, which indicates the number of first special random numbers stored in the special symbol reserved memory area, from the main control built-in RAM, and judges whether the first reserved memory number is its maximum value (upper limit value) of "4" based on this counter value (step S242). If it is determined in the process of this step S242 that the first reserved memory number is not its maximum value, the following steps S243 to S245 are performed to newly put the variable display control of the first special symbol into a reserved state. That is, first, as the process of the step S243, the first special reserved number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, as the process of step S244, each random number obtained in the step S241 is stored in the special symbol reserved memory area corresponding to the sum of the counter value of the first special reserved number counter and the counter value of the second special reserved number counter in the memory area of the main control built-in RAM.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 executes a performance pre-determination process to determine pre-determination information such as whether the display result of the first special pattern variable display will be a big win, a small win, or an instantaneous short win based on the first special random number, the reach random number, the first pattern random number, and the variable random number obtained in step S241, the type of big win if it is a big win, the type of small win if it is a small win, the type of instantaneous short win if it is an instantaneous short win, whether to execute a reach performance as a game performance executed by the performance display device 1600 if it is not a big win, small win, or instantaneous short win, the type of mode (type of variable pattern) of the game performance to be executed, before starting the variable display corresponding to the start winning (step S245), and then terminates the processing.

However, if it is determined in the processing of step S242 that the first reserved memory number is at its maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly reserved. In other words, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S243 to S245, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly reserved.

In addition, when the first reserved memory number changes based on a game ball entering the first starting hole 2004, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the first special reserved memory number display in the function display unit 1400 is updated to correspond to the first reserved memory number, and a command indicating the first reserved memory number (first reserved number designation command 0-4 (special symbol 1 storage command 0-4)) is set in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120) and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the first reserved memory number on the performance display device 1600 based on receiving the first reserved number designation command 0-4 (special symbol 1 storage command 0-4).

Figure 185 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the above-mentioned performance pre-judgment process (step S245). When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts the performance pre-judgment process, it compares the random numbers acquired in the above-mentioned step S241 or the random numbers acquired in step S251 described later, specifically the special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number), the pattern random numbers (first pattern random number, second pattern random number), the reach random number, and the variable random number, with a pre-judgment table (not shown) to determine whether or not to make a big win, a small win, or an immediate short win, the type of big win if it is a big win, the type of small win if it is a small win, the type of immediate short win if it is an immediate short win, and whether to execute a reach performance as a game performance executed by the performance display device 1600 or the type of the mode of the game performance to be executed (type of variable pattern) (step S261).

Then, a pre-determination command is set according to the specified pre-determination information (whether to have a big hit, a small hit, or an instantaneous short hit, the type of big hit if it is a big hit, the type of small hit if it is a small hit, the type of instantaneous short hit if it is an instantaneous short hit, whether to execute a reach effect as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600 if it is not a big hit, small hit, or instantaneous short hit, or the type of game effect to be executed (type of variation pattern), etc.), the type of special random number obtained (first special random number, second special random number), and the number of reserved memories stored corresponding to the obtained special random number (value of the reserved number counter). For example, in the performance pre-determination process for the first special symbol executed in step S245 of the first starting port passing process, a first special symbol pre-determination command is set according to the specified pre-determination information, the fact that the first special random number has been obtained, and the first reserved memory number (the value of the first special reserved number counter), and in the performance pre-determination process for the second special symbol executed in step S255 of the second starting port passing process described below, a second special symbol pre-determination command is set according to the specified pre-determination information, the fact that the second special random number has been obtained, and the second reserved memory number (the value of the second special reserved number counter) (step S262).

Then, in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120), a pre-determination command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, so that the peripheral control IC mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 can grasp pre-determination information such as the number of reserved memories stored corresponding to the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 where the start winning occurred, whether the display result of the variable display of the special pattern based on the start winning that occurred will be a big win, a small win, or an instantaneous short win, the type of big win if it is a big win, the type of small win if it is a small win, the type of instantaneous short win if it is an instantaneous short win, whether to execute a reach performance as a game performance executed by the performance display device 1600 if it is not a big win, small win, or instantaneous short win, and the type of game performance type (type of variable pattern) to be executed, before starting the variable display corresponding to the start winning.

When the peripheral control IC mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives a pre-determination command from the main control board 1310, it stores the pre-determination information indicated by the received pre-determination command. Specifically, the RAM of the peripheral control IC is provided with a reserved memory area for storing pre-determination information regarding the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol).

The reserved memory area has 1 to 8 memory areas corresponding to the reserved memory number obtained by adding up the number of first reserved memory areas and the number of second reserved memory areas, and the peripheral control IC stores the pre-determination information indicated by the received pre-determination command in order starting from the first (first) memory area. Then, when the nth (n = 1 to 7) memory area has pre-determination information stored therein, upon receiving a pre-determination command, the notified pre-determination information is stored in the n+1th (n = 1 to 7) memory area, and upon receiving a variation pattern command (first variation pattern command, second variation pattern command) notifying the start of the variable display of the special pattern (first special pattern, second special pattern), the pre-determination information stored in the first memory area of the reserved memory area is discarded in accordance with the received variation pattern command, and the pre-determination information stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 8) memory area is moved to the N-1th (N = 2 to 8) memory area (shifting the pre-determination information stored in the reserved memory area). This allows the pre-determination information for the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) to be stored in a manner that allows the order in which the suspension of the variable display start occurred to be identified, and the pre-determination information is discarded in order starting from the earliest.

In this way, when the variable display control is put on hold, even though the variable display control is maintained in an unexecuted state (on hold), the jackpot expectancy (pseudo winning probability) of the variable display control can be notified in advance at a predetermined timing, such as when the on-hold display is newly output or when the on-hold display is shifted in response to the on-hold consumption.

Figure 186 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the second starting port passing process (step S234).

Now, in the processing of step S233, if it is determined that the second start hole sensor 2401 is in the ON state and a gaming ball has entered the second start hole 2005, then as shown in FIG. 186, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first obtains the second special random number, the reach random number, the second pattern random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the processing of step S251.

Then, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 obtains the counter value of the second special reserved number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and judges whether the second reserved memory number is its maximum value (upper limit value) of "4" based on this counter value (step S252). If it is determined in the process of step S252 that the second reserved memory number is not its maximum value, the following steps S253 to S255 are executed to newly put the variable display control of the second special symbol into a reserved state. That is, first, as the process of step S253, the second special reserved number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, as the process of step S254, each random number obtained in the above step S251 is stored in the special symbol reserved memory area corresponding to the sum of the counter value of the first special reserved number counter and the counter value of the second special reserved number counter in the memory area of the main control built-in RAM.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 executes a performance pre-determination process to determine pre-determination information such as whether the display result of the variable display of the second special pattern will be a big win, a small win, or an instantaneous short win based on the second special random number, the reach random number, the second pattern random number, and the variable random number obtained in step S251, the type of big win if it is a big win, the type of small win if it is a small win, the type of instantaneous short win if it is an instantaneous short win, whether to execute a reach performance as a game performance executed by the performance display device 1600 if it is not a big win, small win, or instantaneous short win, the type of mode (type of variable pattern) of the game performance to be executed, before starting the variable display corresponding to the start winning (step S255), and then terminates the processing.

However, if it is determined in the processing of step S252 that the second reserved memory count is at its maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly reserved. In other words, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S253 to S255, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly placed on hold.

In addition, when the second reserved memory number changes based on a game ball entering the second starting hole 2005, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the second special reserved memory number display in the function display unit 1400 is updated to correspond to the second reserved memory number, and a command indicating the second reserved memory number (second reserved number designation command 0-4 (special pattern 2 storage command 0-4)) is set in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120) and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the second reserved memory number on the performance display device 1600 based on receiving the second reserved number designation command 0-4 (special pattern 2 storage command 0-4).

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the upper limit of the first reserved memory number based on a game ball entering the first starting port 2004 is set to "4", and the upper limit of the second reserved memory number based on a game ball entering the second starting port 2005 is set to "4". During the time-saving state, it is easier to receive game ball B into the variable winning port 2003 than during the normal state, so it is prevented that a period during which the second reserved memory number is at the upper limit continues for a long period of time, resulting in a disadvantageous state for the player in which the player does not get a chance to win a jackpot even if a game ball enters the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005.

Figure 187 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol process (step S238). In the special symbol process, one of the following five processes is selectively executed depending on the special symbol process flag described above.

1. A special random number (first special random number, second special random number) stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read, and a lottery process for the display mode when the variable control of the special symbol is stopped is performed based on the read special random number (step S280).
2. Special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281) in which a process of determining the mode when the variable control of the special symbol is stopped is performed based on the result of a lottery process regarding the display mode when the variable control of the special symbol is stopped.
3. A variable pattern setting process (step S282) in which a lottery process is performed for the variable mode of the special pattern displayed on the special pattern display device (first special pattern display device, second special pattern display device) of the function display unit 1400 based on the variable random number and the variable mode of the performance display executed in response to the special pattern on the performance display device 1600.
4. Special symbol variation process (step S283) in which the variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 is stopped
5. A special symbol stop process (step S284) for stopping the variable display of the special symbol so that the mode at the time of stopping the variable control of the special symbol determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of stopping the variable control of the special symbol is displayed on the special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400.

The special symbol process flag is manipulated to indicate that the normal special symbol processing (step S280) should be performed during the main control side power-on processing (see FIG. 167).

Figure 188 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal processing of the special pattern (step S280).

When the special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 188, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first determines whether there is a variable display control of the reserved special symbol (first special symbol, second special random number) based on the counter value of the first special reserved number counter and the counter value of the second special reserved number counter as the processing of step S301. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control of the reserved special symbol, then, as the processing of step S302, the random number stored in the first memory area of the random numbers related to the display mode of the special symbol (for example, special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number), pattern random numbers (first pattern random number, second pattern random number), reach random number, variable random number) stored in the special symbol reserved memory area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read from the RAM. Next, in the processing of steps S303 and S304, if the read special random number is the first special random number, the first special reserved number counter is counted down, and if it is the second special random number, the second special reserved number counter is counted down, and the random numbers related to the display mode when the variable display of the special pattern stops (special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number), pattern random numbers (first pattern random number, second pattern random number), reach random number, variable random number) stored in each memory area of the special pattern reserved memory area of the RAM of the main control MPU are shifted in a first-in first-out manner.

Specifically, the special symbol reserved memory area has eight memory areas numbered 1 to 8, and random numbers extracted in response to the occurrence of a start winning are stored in the first (earliest) area in order. Then, when a random number is stored in the nth (n=1 to 7) memory area and a start winning occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1th (n=1 to 7) memory area, and when the start condition for variable display based on the random number stored in the first memory area is met, the various random numbers stored in the first memory area are read out and the various random numbers stored in the Nth (N=2 to 8) memory area are moved to the N-1th (N=2 to 8) memory area. This allows the order in which the reservation of variable display control of the special symbols occurred to be stored in a specific order, and the reservations of variable display control are released in order starting from the earliest reservation (the reservation that occurred first).

Then, in the process of step S305, if the read special random number is the first special random number, a winning determination process is performed, which is a lottery process for determining whether the big win, small win, or instant short win is a winning result, based on the first special random number, or if the read special random number is the second special random number, based on the second special random number. Then, when the special pattern process flag is updated (step S306) so that the process is transferred to the special pattern stop pattern setting process (step S281), this process ends.

Figure 189 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the hit determination process (step S305).

If the current game state is a high probability state (high probability non-time-saving state, high probability time-saving state) (step S311), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 selects the lottery table for high probability shown in FIG. 190 (A) (step S312), and if the current game state is a low probability state (low probability non-time-saving state, low probability time-saving state) (step S311), the main control MPU 1310a selects the lottery table for low probability shown in FIG. 190 (B) (step S313), and compares the selected lottery table with the special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) read in step S302 of the normal special pattern processing (step S314).

The lottery tables shown in Figures 190 (A) and (B) are provided, for each type of special random number (first special random number, second special random number), with a lottery table for low probability used when the gaming state is low probability (low probability non-time-saving state (normal state), low probability time-saving state), and a lottery table for high probability used when the gaming state is high probability (high probability non-time-saving state, high probability time-saving state). In the low probability lottery table which is referenced for comparison with the first special random number, the first special random number is associated with the jackpot determination value indicating that the first special random number has won a jackpot with a jackpot probability of 1/319 when the setting value is 1, 1/309 when the setting value is 2, 1/299 when the setting value is 3, 1/289 when the setting value is 4, 1/279 when the setting value is 5, and 1/269 when the setting value is 6, and with the instant short hit determination value indicating that the first special random number has won an instant short hit with an instant short hit probability of 1/319 which is the same for all setting values 1 to 6, and with the miss determination value indicating that any other first special random number is a miss. In addition, in the lottery table for low probability, which is referred to for comparison with the second special random number, the second special random number is associated with the jackpot judgment value indicating that the second special random number has won a jackpot with a jackpot probability of 1/319 for set value 1, 1/309 for set value 2, 1/299 for set value 3, 1/289 for set value 4, 1/279 for set value 5, and 1/269 for set value 6, with a small jackpot judgment value indicating that the second special random number has won a small jackpot with a small jackpot probability of 144/319, which is the same for all set values 1 to 6, and with the miss judgment value indicating that the other second special random numbers are misses. In addition, the lottery table for high probability is configured to increase the jackpot probability for each set value by 10 times compared to the lottery table for low probability.

In the above, the lottery table referenced for comparison with the first special random number does not have a small win determination value, whereas the lottery table referenced for comparison with the second special random number does have a small win determination value. As a result, in the time-saving state, it becomes easier for game ball B to be received by variable winning port 2003, and the variable display of the second special pattern based on the initial winning of variable winning port 2003 is easily executed. In addition, since there is a possibility of winning a small win by the initial winning of variable winning port 2003, the game can be played without reducing the number of balls held by the player too much.

In addition, the lottery table referenced for comparison with the first special random number has an instantaneous short win determination value, whereas the lottery table referenced for comparison with the second special random number does not have an instantaneous short win determination value. As a result, in the non-time-saving state, it is difficult to receive game ball B into variable winning port 2003, and the variable display of the first special pattern based on a start winning into first starting port 2004 is mainstream, but since there is a possibility of winning an instantaneous short win by a start winning into first starting port 2004, players can play with hope even in a disadvantageous state where the game is being played in the non-time-saving state.

When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that the result of comparing the lottery table with the special random numbers (the special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) read in step S302 of the normal processing of special patterns) is a big win, a small win, or an instant short win (step S315), it sets a win flag (big win flag, small win flag, instant short win flag) indicating that the fluctuation has resulted in a big win, a small win, or an instant short win (step S316), and ends the win determination process.

On the other hand, if the player has not won any of the big win, small win, or instant short win, i.e., if it is determined that the win has been a miss, the reach determination table is compared with the reach random number read in step S302 (step S317).

The reach judgment table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and includes a reach judgment table for the time-saving state used when the game state is in the time-saving state, and a reach judgment table for the non-time-saving state used when the game state is not in the time-saving state. In the reach judgment table for the time-saving state, the reach random numbers are associated with one type of reach random number so that it matches a reach judgment value indicating a reach, and 71 types of reach random numbers match a reach judgment value indicating a non-reach.

In addition, in the reach determination table for the non-time-saving state, five types of reach random numbers, including the same reach random numbers as those set in the reach determination table for the time-saving state, are associated with the above-mentioned reach random numbers so that they match the reach determination values indicating that a reach will occur, and 67 types of reach random numbers match the reach determination values indicating that a reach will not occur. Thus, in this embodiment, in the non-time-saving state, the reach determination values indicating that a reach will occur are higher than in the time-saving state.

If the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected reach judgment table with the reach random number read in step S302 (step S317) and determines that the reach is not reached (step S318), it sets a reach flag indicating that the fluctuation is a reach and ends the process (step S319).

Figure 191 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281).

When the special symbol process flag indicates that the special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 191, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first determines the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol stops, that is, the result of the hit determination process (step S305). The lottery process result is determined by determining whether or not the big hit flag, small hit flag, or instant short hit flag is set (step S321).

If the jackpot flag is set in step S321, the main control MPU 1310a compares the pattern random numbers (first pattern random number, second pattern random number) read in step S302 of the normal processing of the special pattern with the pattern determination table at the time of a jackpot shown in Figure 190 (C) (step S322) to determine the type of jackpot, and determines the mode at the time of stopping the variable control of the special pattern corresponding to the determined type of jackpot (stopping pattern of the special pattern) (step S323).

in particular,
1. After the second large winning opening 2007 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the second large winning opening sensor 2561 detects that 10 game balls have entered the second large winning opening 2007, an opening/closing pattern is repeated 10 times (10 rounds) to control the game to a 10R jackpot game in which it is possible (easy) for the game ball to enter the second large winning opening 2007, and after the jackpot game ends, the game is controlled to a high probability time-shortened state until the next jackpot occurs.
2. A jackpot B in which the opening and closing pattern is repeated five times (five rounds) to close the second large winning opening 2007 after the second large winning opening 2007 has been opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the second large winning opening sensor 2561 detects that ten game balls have entered the second large winning opening 2007, thereby controlling the game to a 5R jackpot game in which it is possible (easy) for the game ball to enter the second large winning opening 2007, and controlling the game to a high probability non-time-saving state after the jackpot game ends until the next jackpot occurs.
3. A jackpot C in which a 10R jackpot game is controlled so that it is possible (easy) for a game ball to enter the second large winning opening 2007 by repeating an opening and closing pattern 10 times (10 rounds) after the second large winning opening 2007 has been opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the second large winning opening sensor 2561 detects that 10 game balls have entered the second large winning opening 2007, and if a jackpot is not obtained within 100 times of the variable display of the special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern) after the end of the jackpot game, the time-saving state is terminated, and the state is controlled to a low-probability time-saving state A.
4. A jackpot D in which the opening and closing pattern is repeated 10 times (10 rounds) to close the second large winning opening 2007 after the second large winning opening 2007 has been opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the second large winning opening sensor 2561 detects that 10 game balls have won the second large winning opening 2007, thereby controlling the game to a 10R jackpot game in which it is possible (easy) for the game ball to enter the second large winning opening 2007, and controlling the game to a low probability time-saving state A in which the time-saving state is ended if a jackpot is not obtained within 599 times of the variable display of the special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern) after the end of the jackpot game.
The winner will be determined from one of the four types of jackpots.

In addition, the pattern determination table at the time of a jackpot, which is compared with the first pattern random number, has judgment values allocated to jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, and jackpot D. Specifically, for the first pattern random number (for example, a random number value from 1 to 100), judgment values are allocated in a ratio of "jackpot A:jackpot B:jackpot C:jackpot D = 25:25:49:1". On the other hand, the jackpot pattern determination table, which is compared with the second pattern random number, has judgment values allocated to jackpot A and jackpot C, but has no judgment values allocated to jackpot B and jackpot D. Specifically, for the second pattern random number (for example, a random number value from 1 to 100), judgment values are allocated in a ratio of "jackpot A:jackpot C = 70:30". In addition, the pachinko machine 1 of this example is configured so that the probability of determining a jackpot A is higher in the jackpot pattern determination table which is compared with the second pattern random number than in the jackpot pattern determination table which is compared with the first pattern random number, and the player is in a more advantageous state when the variable display of the second special pattern based on the start winning entry into the second start opening 2005 or the variable winning opening 2003 is executed than when the variable display of the first special pattern based on the start winning entry into the first start opening 2004 is executed.

In addition, when the type of jackpot is determined, the stopping pattern according to the type of jackpot is determined as the manner in which the special pattern stops. Specifically, if jackpot A is determined, the jackpot A pattern is determined as the jackpot pattern, if jackpot B is determined, the jackpot B pattern is determined as the jackpot pattern, if jackpot C is determined, the jackpot C pattern is determined as the jackpot pattern, and if jackpot D is determined, the jackpot D pattern is determined as the jackpot pattern.

In addition, if the instant short hit flag is set in step S321, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the pattern random numbers (first pattern random number, second pattern random number) read in step S302 of the normal processing of the special pattern with the pattern determination table for instant short hits shown in Figure 190 (D) (step S322) to determine the type of instant short hit, and determines the mode when the variable control of the special pattern corresponding to the determined type of instant short hit is stopped (stopping pattern of the special pattern) (step S323).

in particular,
1. Instant short win A, which does not control to a big win game or a small win game, but controls to a low probability time-saving state C in which the time-saving state ends if a big win does not occur within 100 times of the variable display of the special pattern (first special pattern, second special pattern) being executed.
2. Instant short win B, which does not control to a big win game or a small win game, but controls to a low probability time-saving state C in which the time-saving state ends if a big win does not occur within 40 times of the variable display of the special pattern (first special pattern, second special pattern) being executed.
3. Instant short win C, which does not control to a big win game or a small win game, but controls to a low probability time-saving state C in which the time-saving state ends if a big win does not occur within 20 times of the variable display of the special pattern (first special pattern, second special pattern) being executed.
The player will be selected from the three types of instant short hits.

In addition, the pattern determination table for an instant short hit, which is compared with the first pattern random number, has judgment values allocated to instant short hit A, instant short hit B, and instant short hit C. Specifically, for the first pattern random number (for example, a random number value between 1 and 100), judgment values are allocated in a ratio of "instant short hit A:instant short hit B:instant short hit C = 10:20:70." On the other hand, because an instant short hit cannot be won by a lottery based on the second special random number, the pattern determination table for an instant short hit, which is compared with the second pattern random number, does not have judgment values allocated to instant short hit A, instant short hit B, and instant short hit C. However, the instant short hit may be won by a lottery based on the second special random number, and the pattern determination table for the instant short hit, which is compared with the second pattern random number, may be arranged to allocate the judgment values to instant short hit A, instant short hit B, and instant short hit C in a ratio of "instant short hit A:instant short hit B:instant short hit C = 10:20:70". In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, after winning an instant short hit by lottery based on the special random number, the pattern determination table for the instant short hit, which is compared with the pattern random number, is used to determine the type of instant short hit, but in the lottery table referenced for comparison with the special random number, the judgment value for instant short hit A, the judgment value for instant short hit B, and the judgment value for instant short hit C may be set, and it may be determined that instant short hit A, instant short hit B, or instant short hit C will be won when each judgment value matches the special pattern. In other words, the type of instant short hit may be determined only by lottery based on the special random number.

In addition, when the type of instant short hit is determined, the stopping pattern corresponding to the type of instant short hit is determined as the manner in which the special pattern stops. Specifically, if instant short hit A is determined, the instant short hit pattern is determined to be instant short hit A pattern, if instant short hit B is determined, the instant short hit pattern is determined to be instant short hit B pattern, and if instant short hit C is determined, the instant short hit pattern is determined to be instant short hit C pattern.

In addition, if the small win flag is set in step S321, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the pattern random numbers (first pattern random number, second pattern random number) read in step S302 of the normal processing of the special pattern with the pattern determination table for a small win shown in Figure 190 (E) (step S322) to determine the type of small win, and determines the mode when the variable control of the special pattern corresponding to the determined type of small win is stopped (stopping pattern of the special pattern) (step S323).

in particular,
1. An opening and closing pattern in which the first large winning opening 2006 is opened for a short time (e.g., 80 ms) and then closed is executed twice to determine a small winning game in which the game ball can (easily) enter the first large winning opening 2006.

The small win symbol determination table compared with the second symbol random number has a judgment value assigned to the small win. Specifically, a judgment value is set to select one type of "small win" for all second symbol random numbers (for example, random numbers from 1 to 100). On the other hand, since a small win cannot be won by a lottery based on the first special random number, the symbol determination table at the time of a small win compared with the first symbol random number does not have a judgment value assigned to the small win. However, it is also possible to win a small win by a lottery based on the first special random number, and to assign a judgment value to the small win for the symbol determination table at the time of a small win compared with the first symbol random number. Also, although only one type of small win is set in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, multiple types of small wins with different opening times and opening times of the first large winning opening 2006 may be set, and one of the multiple types of small wins may be determined using the symbol determination table at the time of a small win compared with the symbol random number.

In addition, when the type of small win is determined, the stopping pattern corresponding to the type of small win is determined as the manner in which the first special pattern stops. Specifically, when a small win is determined, the small win pattern is determined.

If none of the big win flag, small win flag, and instant short win flag are set, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the symbol to be a miss (step S324). After the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this way, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a judgment result notification command corresponding to each lottery result so that the lottery result (indicating the type of big win, the type of instant short win, small win, reach miss, or miss (or indicating the form of the stop symbol of the special symbol)) is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 as the process of step S328. Then, as the process of step S329, the special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the variable pattern setting process (step S282), and this process ends.

The peripheral control unit 1511 controls the display of the performance display device 1600 based on the received judgment result notification command and change pattern command (changingly displaying the left, center, and right decorative patterns and displaying them stationary in the order of left decorative pattern → right decorative pattern → center decorative pattern (note that the left, center, and right decorative patterns may also be displayed synchronously as the same pattern and displayed stationary at the same time)). Specifically, when the peripheral control unit 1511 identifies a jackpot A from the received determination result notification command, it determines the jackpot A pattern (a combination in which the left, center, and right decorative patterns are the same odd number pattern of "0" to "9") as the mode (stop pattern) when the decorative pattern displayed on the performance display device 1600 stops changing; when the peripheral control unit 1511 identifies a jackpot A from the received determination result notification command, it determines the jackpot B pattern (a combination in which the left, center, and right decorative patterns are the same odd number pattern of "0" to "9"); when the peripheral control unit 1511 identifies a jackpot B, it determines the jackpot B pattern (a combination in which the left, center, and right decorative patterns are the same even number pattern of "0" to "9"); when the peripheral control unit 1511 identifies a jackpot C, it determines the jackpot C pattern (a combination in which the left, center, and right decorative patterns are the same even number pattern of "0" to "9"); and when the peripheral control unit 1511 identifies a jackpot D, it determines the jackpot D pattern (a combination in which the left, center, and right decorative patterns are the same even number pattern of "0" to "9"). In addition, when the big win C or the big win D is determined, a common combination of even number symbols can be displayed, and when the symbol combination is displayed, the player is not informed of which one is the winning combination, but is given the expectation that it is the big win D, so that the player continues playing. In addition, when the instant short win A is determined, the instant short win A symbol (a combination in which the left, center, and right decorative symbols are "549") is determined, when the instant short win B is determined, the instant short win B symbol (a combination in which the left, center, and right decorative symbols are "549") is determined, and when the instant short win C is determined, the instant short win C symbol (a combination in which the left, center, and right decorative symbols are "549") is determined. In addition, when the instant short hit A, instant short hit B, or instant short hit C is determined, the common combination of "549" can be displayed, and when the symbol combination is displayed, the player is not informed of which winning combination it is, so that the player is given a sense of expectation that it is a more advantageous instant short hit and continues playing. In addition, when a small hit is determined, a small hit symbol (a combination in which the decorative symbols on the left, center, and right are "135") is determined. In addition, when a reach miss is identified, a miss pattern with a reach (a combination of the same patterns of "0" to "9" in which the left and right decorative patterns are the same, but with a different center decorative pattern; a reach miss pattern) is determined, and when a miss is identified, a miss pattern without a reach is determined (a combination of the left, center, and right decorative patterns in which at least the left and right decorative patterns are different; however, instant short win B pattern, instant short win C pattern, and small win pattern are excluded), and the determined stopping pattern is displayed and controlled on the performance display device 1600 when the fluctuation time specified from the fluctuation pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the game performance). In addition, as will be described in detail later, in this embodiment, even if an immediate short hit A, immediate short hit B, or immediate short hit C is determined, if the game state at that time is a game state other than the low probability non-time-saving state (high probability time-saving state, high probability non-time-saving state, low probability time-saving state), the process of setting the time-saving flag or time-saving counter corresponding to the immediate short hit A, immediate short hit B, or immediate short hit C is not executed. Therefore, in a game state other than the low probability non-time-saving state, even if an immediate short hit A, immediate short hit B, or immediate short hit C is determined, the immediate short hit A to C patterns (combinations in which the left, center, and right decorative patterns are "549") are not determined, and the above-mentioned "miss pattern without a reach" is determined.

Figure 192 is a flowchart showing the steps for the above-mentioned variation pattern setting process (step S282).

When the special symbol process flag indicates that the fluctuation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 192, if the big hit flag is set (step S341), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 selects a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) for a big hit according to the type of big hit and the game status determined in step S323 of the special symbol stopping symbol setting process (step S342); if the small hit flag is set (step S341), the main control MPU 1310a selects a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) for a small hit according to the type of small hit and the game status determined in step S325 of the special symbol stopping symbol setting process (step S342); if the immediate short hit flag is set (step S341), the main control MPU 1310a selects a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) for an immediate short hit according to the type of immediate short hit and the game status determined in step S325 of the special symbol stopping symbol setting process (step S342). Furthermore, if the reach flag is set (step S343), a fluctuation pattern table for when the reach is reached (not shown) is selected (step S344), and if none of the big win flag, small win flag, immediate short flag, or reach flag is set, i.e., if it is a normal miss (a miss where the reach effect is not executed), a fluctuation pattern table for when the miss is reached (not shown) is selected (step S345).

Then, the selected variation pattern table is compared with the variation random number read in step S302 of the normal special pattern processing to determine the variation pattern to be executed (step S348), and a variation pattern command is set to notify the peripheral control board 1510 that the determined variation pattern is to be started, to start the variation display of the special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern) displayed on the special pattern display (first special pattern display, second special display) of the function display unit 1400 (step S349). In addition, the main control MPU 1310a sets the variation time set corresponding to the determined variation pattern in the variation timer (step S350). As a result, the performance control is performed by the special pattern display of the function display unit 1400 and the performance display device 1600 for the variation time determined in this way.

In this example, multiple types of variation pattern tables are provided for each judgment result based on the special random number (first special random number, second special random number) and the pattern random number (first pattern random number, second pattern random number). In addition, multiple variation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for variable display control of the special pattern (first special pattern, second special pattern) is stored in a form associated with the variable random number, respectively, in the variation pattern set in each variation pattern table. Thus, the main control MPU 1310a compares the selected variation pattern table among multiple types of variation pattern tables according to the judgment result based on the special random number and the pattern random number with the variable random number read in step S302 of the normal processing of the special pattern, and obtains the variation time information associated with the read variable random number from this table to determine the variation pattern of the special pattern (first special pattern, second special pattern). As a result, a lottery process is performed for the variation pattern of the special pattern (first special pattern, second special pattern). The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 1310a.

In addition, in this example, the variable pattern table during a reach is set to determine the type of reach performance to be executed by comparing a judgment value indicating which reach performance to execute with a variable random number. For example, among the reach performances, the super reach performance has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the normal reach performance, and when the super reach performance is executed, the player's expectation of a jackpot game increases.

As will be described in detail later, when the special symbol variable display reaches 600 times (rescue count counter = 600) in a low probability state after power-on with RAM clear or after a jackpot game is played, a specific variable pattern table is selected when a specified condition is met, and when the specific variable pattern table is selected, a specific variable pattern (variation pattern for the help mode L premonition effect described later) is determined. When the specific variable pattern is determined, the help mode L premonition effect is executed, which can only be executed when the special symbol variable display reaches 600 times (rescue count counter = 600) in a low probability state.

When the variable display control of the special symbol is started, the next step S351 is to determine whether the counter value of the time-saving counter, which sets the number of times the time-saving state continues, is "0". If the counter value is not "0", the time-saving counter is counted down (step S352), and then it is further determined whether the counter value of the simultaneous time-saving counter is "0" (step S353). If the counter value is "0", a time-saving end flag is set (step S354) to indicate that the control of the time-saving state (time-saving control) is to be ended.

If the process in step S351 determines that the time-saving counter has a value of "0," or if the process in step S353 determines that the time-saving counter is not "0," the process proceeds to step S355. Then, when the special symbol process flag is updated so that the process proceeds to the special symbol variation process (step S283), the process ends.

Figure 193 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special pattern change process (step S283).

When the special symbol process flag indicates that the special symbol fluctuation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 193, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first subtracts 1 from the fluctuation timer in which the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined in the lottery process for the fluctuation pattern (step S282) is set as the process of step S371. Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation time timer is 0, that is, the lottery-selected fluctuation time has elapsed (step S372), the process proceeds to step S373. That is, in the process of step S373, when the special symbol process flag is updated so that the process proceeds to the special symbol stop process (step S284), this process ends.

Figure 194 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special pattern stopping process (step S284).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 194, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first performs display control to display the stop pattern determined in the special symbol stop pattern setting process on the special symbol display of the functional display unit 1400 as the process of step S381, and sets a stop display command to instruct the performance display device 1600 to derive and display the display result of the decorative pattern corresponding to the special symbol stop pattern as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S382).

Next, when the time-saving end flag is set (step S383), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 resets the time-saving end flag and also resets the time-saving flag (step S384). As a result, when the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed a predetermined number of times (e.g., 100 times, 40 times, 20 times, etc., the number of times corresponding to various time-saving states), the time-saving control (control of the time-saving state) is ended and non-time-saving control (control of the normal state) is started.

When the jackpot flag is set (step S386), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a jackpot start command indicating that the jackpot game is to start (step S387), sets a jackpot in progress flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed (step S388), and sets the waiting time until the jackpot game starts (the time to display the jackpot game start, etc.) in the interval timer (step S389). In addition, in step S389, a process is also executed to set the number of rounds according to the type of jackpot in a jackpot counter indicating the remaining number of rounds. The jackpot counter is decremented by one for each execution of a round in the jackpot control process (step S240), and when the jackpot counter becomes "0", the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that the specified number of rounds has been executed and controls to end the jackpot game. In addition, when the jackpot flag is set (step S386), if the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset, if the time-saving flag is set, the time-saving flag is reset, and further, if the counter value of the time-saving counter is not "0", the counter value is reset (returned to "0").

The jackpot start command is a command sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually according to the type of jackpot. In step S387, the jackpot start command (jackpot A start command, jackpot B start command, jackpot C start command, jackpot D start command) corresponding to the type of jackpot (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot D) is set. As a result, the performance of the jackpot game according to the type of jackpot instructed by the jackpot start command is executed by the performance display device 1600, lamps/LEDs, speakers, etc. In this embodiment, a common performance (the performance executed by the performance display device 1600, lamps/LEDs, speakers, etc. is the same performance) is set as the performance of the jackpot game according to the jackpot C start command and the jackpot D start command. Also, if the effects of the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot C start command and the jackpot D start command are to be common effects, the jackpot C start command and the jackpot D start command do not have to be separate commands, but may be set as the same command.

The jackpot in progress flag, which indicates that the jackpot game is being played, is reset when the jackpot game ends, specifically when the jackpot control process (step S240) ends the opening and closing control of the second large prize winning port 2007 according to the type of jackpot (for example, the opening and closing control in which the second large prize winning port 2007 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or the opening and closing pattern in which the second large prize winning port 2007 is closed when the second large prize winning port sensor 2525 detects that 10 game balls have entered the second large prize winning port 2007 is repeated 10 times or 5 times) (all rounds that can be played in the jackpot game). By resetting the jackpot in progress flag, the special symbol and special electric role control process (step S114) is made not to execute the jackpot control process (step S240), while the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 and the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 are made executable.

Also, if the small win flag is set (step S386), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a small win start command indicating that a small win game is to be started (step S387), sets a small win in progress flag indicating that a small win game is being played (step S388), and sets the waiting time until the start of the small win game (the time to display the start of the small win game, etc.) in the interval timer (step S389). The small win start command is a command sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually according to the type of small win. In step S389, a small win start command according to the type of small win is set. As a result, the presentation of the small win game according to the type of small win instructed by the small win start command is executed by the presentation display device 1600, lamps, LEDs, speakers, etc.

The small win in progress flag, which indicates that a small win game is being played, is reset when the small win game ends, specifically when the small win control process (step S241) ends the opening and closing control of the first large winning opening 2006 according to the type of small win (for example, opening the first large winning opening 2006 for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then closing it, repeating the opening and closing pattern twice). By resetting the small win in progress flag, the special symbol and special electric role control process (step S114) is prevented from executing the small win control process (step S2341), while the display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 and the display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 can be executed.

In addition, if the big hit flag or the small hit flag is not set, but the instantaneous short hit flag is set (step S390), it is determined whether the high probability flag or the time-saving flag is not set and the state is a low probability non-time-saving state (step S391). If the state is a low probability non-time-saving state, the time-saving flag is set, and the number of times the time-saving state continues according to the type of instantaneous short hit is set in the time-saving count counter that indicates the remaining number of times the variable display of the special pattern (first special pattern and second special pattern) as the number of times the time-saving state continues is set (step S392). Specifically, if the instantaneous short hit is A, the time-saving count counter is set to "100", if the instantaneous short hit is B, the time-saving count counter is set to "40", and if the instantaneous short hit is C, the time-saving count counter is set to "20". On the other hand, if the game state other than the low-probability non-time-saving state is a high-probability time-saving state, a high-probability non-time-saving state, or a low-probability time-saving state, the process of setting the time-saving flag or the time-saving count counter is not executed.

As described above, in the case of an immediate short win in a low probability state, control is performed to a time-saving state based on the immediate short win, whereas in the case of an immediate short state in a high probability state, control is not performed to a time-saving state based on the immediate short win. In this way, the "immediate short win" is intended to provide relief from unfavorable play in a low probability state, and in the time-saving state based on an immediate short win, it becomes easier to receive game ball B into variable winning port 2003, so that the player can play without reducing his or her balls significantly.

In addition, in the case of an immediate short hit in the time-saving state, the already controlled time-saving state is continued without being newly controlled to the time-saving state based on the immediate short hit. In this way, the "immediate short hit" is intended to provide relief for unfavorable play in a non-time-saving state, and in a state already controlled to the time-saving state, it is not newly controlled to the time-saving state based on the immediate short hit. As another example, in the case of an immediate short hit in the time-saving state, the already controlled time-saving state may be terminated and a new time-saving state based on the immediate short hit may be controlled. In addition, as another example, in the case of an immediate short hit in the time-saving state, the remaining number of time-saving times in the already controlled time-saving state may be compared with the number of time-saving times in the time-saving state based on the immediate short hit, and the number of time-saving times may be controlled to be the larger number. In addition, as another example, in the case of an immediate short hit in the time-saving state, the number of time-saving times in the time-saving state based on the immediate short hit may be added to the remaining number of time-saving times in the already controlled time-saving state.

In addition, in the case of an immediate short win in a low probability state, the immediate short win symbol is stopped and a time-saving flag is set, but the timing for setting the time-saving flag may be the start or end of the fixed time during which the immediate short win symbol is kept stopped. Of these, when the time-saving flag is set at the start of the fixed time, the time-saving state based on the immediate short win is controlled, and a state in which it is easy to receive the game ball B into the variable winning port 2003 can be quickly given. In addition, when the time-saving flag is set at the end of the fixed time, a performance that notifies the start of the time-saving state based on the immediate short win can be executed using the fixed time after the immediate short win symbol stops, and during the variable display of the special symbol before the immediate short win symbol stops, it is possible to specialize in the win/lose performance. When executing a performance that notifies the start of the time-saving state based on the immediate short win, for example, the fixed time after the immediate short win symbol stops can be set to a specific fixed time (for example, 10 seconds) longer than the normal fixed time (for example, 1 second).

Also, if the big win flag or small win flag is not set, that is, if an immediate short win or miss occurs, the big win game or small win game is not executed, so the waiting time until the next variable display of the special pattern starts (the time during which the stopped special pattern is displayed) is set in the interval timer (step S392), and the process proceeds to step S393. In this embodiment, a common waiting time is set in the interval timer when an immediate short win or miss occurs, but when an immediate short win occurs, a special waiting time that is longer than when a miss occurs may be set in the interval timer. This makes it possible to make the player aware that it is an immediate short win and not a miss due to the difference in the length of the waiting time. Also, when a special waiting time is set in this way, a performance that makes the player aware that it is an immediate short win and not a miss may be executed during this special waiting time.

When the processing of steps S386 to S393 is executed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 executes a rescue count process (step S394) to determine whether or not to control to the time-saving state when a predetermined condition regarding the number of times the special symbol changes is met, and ends this process when the special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the initial value of normal special symbol processing (step S395).

Figure 195 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the rescue count process (step S394).

After power-on with RAM clear, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets the initial value of the rescue count counter, which is counted according to the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state, to "0". Also, when the jackpot flag is set (step S3941), the count value of the rescue count counter, which indicates the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state, is reset to the initial value of "0" (step S3942).

In addition, if the jackpot flag is not set, it is determined whether the high probability flag is not set and the state is a low probability state (low probability non-time-saving state, low probability time-saving state) (step S3943). If the state is a low probability state, +1 is added to the count value of the rescue count counter (step S3944), and if the count value of the rescue count counter reaches "600" (step S3945), the time-saving flag is set and the time-saving count counter indicating the remaining number of times the variable display of the special pattern (first special pattern and second special pattern) as the number of times the time-saving state continues is set (step S3946). Specifically, when the count value of the rescue count counter reaches "600", the time-saving count counter is set to "700". Although not shown, in some of the low probability non-time-saving states among the low probability states, the count value of the rescue count counter is not added by +1.

As described above, the rescue count counter counts each time the variable display of the special symbol in the low probability state is executed, and when the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state reaches 600, the time-saving state is controlled. In addition, the rescue count counter counts the variable display of the special symbol in the low probability state, regardless of whether the state is in the non-time-saving state or the time-saving state. In addition, when the main control board 1310 transmits a pattern determination command to the peripheral control board 1510, the number of times the special symbol changes by the rescue count counter is counted up. On the other hand, the rescue count counter does not count even when the variable display of the special symbol in the high probability state is executed. In this way, the control of the time-saving state by the establishment of a predetermined condition regarding the number of times the special symbol changes is intended to provide relief from the disadvantageous game being played in the low probability state, and in the time-saving state, it is easy to receive the game ball B into the variable winning port 2003, so that the player can play without losing too many balls. In addition, the number of time-saving times is set to 700, and the probability of getting the next "big win" is very high before the special symbol variation display reaches 700 times in the time-saving state, so that the player can play with expectation in the time-saving state. In addition, the number of time-saving times of 700 is set to a number that does not necessarily mean that the next "big win" will be obtained even if it is 1/269 of the set value 6, so that the player can continue playing the game while being given a sense of tension even in a long time-saving state of 700 times. For this reason, it is preferable that the number of time-saving times given by "control of the time-saving state by the establishment of a predetermined condition regarding the number of times the special symbol varies" using the rescue number counter is set to a number that is highly likely to get the next "big win", but does not completely eliminate the sense of tension (a number of times that the possibility of not getting a big win occurs at least 3% or more). In addition, the number of time-saving times granted by "controlling the time-saving state by the establishment of a predetermined condition related to the number of times the special symbol changes" using the rescue counter can be set to the same value as the limit value of the rescue counter (the number of changes the player has performed) or to a value greater than that, thereby providing the player with a sense of satisfaction that erases the disappointment felt before the rescue counter reaches its limit value.

In addition, when a jackpot is hit, the rescue counter is reset, whereas when a small jackpot or an immediate short jackpot is hit, the rescue counter is not reset. In other words, the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state continues unless a jackpot is hit. In this way, the purpose of controlling the time-saving state by the establishment of a predetermined condition regarding the number of times the special symbol changes is to rescue a state in which a jackpot game has not been played for a long time, and since the acceptance of game ball B into the variable winning port 2003 becomes easy in the time-saving state, the player can play without losing too many balls. In addition, the number of time-saving times is set to 700, and since the probability of obtaining the next "jackpot" is very high before the special symbol change display reaches 700 times in the time-saving state, the player can play with anticipation in the time-saving state.

The rescue counter is reset not only when a jackpot is hit, but also when the power is turned on with the RAM cleared. That is, if the setting value is changed when the power is turned on, or when the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated, the main control MPU 1310a clears a specified area of its own built-in RAM (all areas of the RAM excluding a specific area), and the rescue counter is reset. In this way, the hall manager can reset the rescue counter as appropriate. On the other hand, if the setting value is checked when the power is turned on, or when the power is turned on without operating the RAM clear switch 1310f, the RAM is not cleared, so the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state is not reset, and after the power is turned on, the count is restarted from the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state that was stored when the power was turned off.

In addition, in the case where an immediate short hit occurs in a variable display in which the number of times the special symbol changes in a low probability state reaches 600, the time-saving state based on the number of times the special symbol changes in a low probability state reaches 600 is given priority over the time-saving state based on the immediate short hit. This is because the time-saving state based on an immediate short hit provides time-saving until the number of times the special symbol changes in a low probability state reaches 20 to 100, whereas the time-saving state based on the number of times the special symbol changes in a low probability state reaches 600 provides time-saving until the number of times it changes in a low probability state reaches 700, and priority is given to the time-saving state that is advantageous to the player. However, in the case where an immediate short hit occurs in a variable display in which the number of times the special symbol changes in a low probability state reaches 600, the time-saving state based on the immediate short hit may be given.

[Game state transition]
FIG. 196 is an explanatory diagram showing the transition of the game state. As shown in FIG. 196, the game state is roughly classified into a low probability state or a high probability state, and a non-time-saving state or a time-saving state. When the power is turned on, the game state is in a low probability non-time-saving state.

In the high probability state, the probability of a jackpot is set to be higher than in the low probability state. In addition, the transition from the low probability state to the high probability state can be triggered by the result of the lottery for the special symbol being a "jackpot." The jackpot probability can also be changed by switching the settings of the pachinko machine 1. On the other hand, the probability of a small jackpot or an immediate short jackpot does not change between the low probability state and the high probability state, nor does it change by switching the settings of the pachinko machine 1.

In the time-saving state, it is set so that it is easier to receive the game ball B into the variable winning port 2003 than in the non-time-saving state. For example, when a normal lottery is performed, the probability that the lottery result of the normal pattern will be a "normal win" is increased, or when the lottery result of the normal pattern is a "normal win", the time or number of times that the variable winning port 2003, which is closed by the variable winning port door 2521, is open is increased, thereby making it easier to receive the game ball B into the variable winning port 2003. As a result, in the non-time-saving state, it is difficult or impossible to receive the game ball B into the variable winning port 2003, so the main focus is on games in which the game ball B is inserted into the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005, whereas in the time-saving state, it is easier to receive the game ball B into the variable winning port 2003 than in the non-time-saving state, so the main focus is on games in which the game ball B is inserted into the variable winning port 2003. In addition, in the time-saving state, it is easier to receive game ball B into the variable winning opening 2003 than in the non-time-saving state, so the player can play without losing too many balls.

In addition, the transition from the non-time-saving state to the time-saving state is made possible when the lottery result for the special symbol is a "jackpot" or an "instant short-time hit". If the lottery result for the special symbol is a "jackpot", the time-saving state is transitioned to after the jackpot game is played, whereas if the lottery result for the special symbol is an "instant short-time hit", the time-saving state is transitioned to without playing the jackpot. In addition, even if the lottery result for the special symbol is not a "jackpot" or an "instant short-time hit", it is possible to transition from the non-time-saving state to the time-saving state by satisfying a predetermined condition regarding the number of times the special symbol changes. In this example, the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state is counted after the power is turned on or after the jackpot game is played, and it is possible to transition from the non-time-saving state to the time-saving state when the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state reaches 600.

Specifically, if the lottery result for the special pattern is "jackpot A," the game will be controlled to a high-probability time-saving state after the 10R jackpot game is played until the next jackpot. Also, if the lottery result for the special pattern is "jackpot B," the game will be controlled to a high-probability non-time-saving state after the 5R jackpot game is played until the next jackpot. Also, if the lottery result for the special pattern is "jackpot C," the game will be controlled to a low-probability time-saving state A after the 10R jackpot game is played until the special pattern's variable display reaches 100 times. However, if the lottery result for the special pattern becomes a "jackpot" before the special pattern's variable display reaches 100 times, the low-probability time-saving state A will end at that point. In addition, if the result of the special symbol lottery is "jackpot D", after the 10R jackpot game is executed, the game is controlled to the low probability time-saving state A until the variable display of the special symbol reaches 599 times. However, if the result of the special symbol lottery becomes "jackpot" before the variable display of the special symbol reaches 599 times, the low probability time-saving state A ends at that point. In addition, after the variable display of the special symbol reaches 599 times, the game is controlled to the low probability non-time-saving state, but when the variable display of the special symbol stops for the 600th time, the number of times the special symbol changes reaches 600 times, so that it is possible to transition from the non-time-saving state to the time-saving state (low probability time-saving state B) again, and although a blank period occurs in which the variable display of the special symbol becomes the low probability non-time-saving state only for the 600th time, it is possible to progress the game from the low probability time-saving state A to the low probability time-saving state B in a substantially continuous manner. Furthermore, if the result of the special pattern lottery is "Jackpot A" or "Jackpot B," the period during which control is performed to the high probability time-saving state or high probability non-time-saving state is set to the time until the next "jackpot." Such a period may be, for example, the time until the special pattern variable display reaches 10,000 times, and may be the number of times the probability of obtaining the next "jackpot" becomes very high before the special pattern variable display reaches 10,000 times.

In addition, if the lottery result for the special pattern is a "small win," after the small win game is executed, the game state is controlled to the state before the small win game. In other words, the game state does not change when the lottery result for the special pattern becomes a "small win." Note that, if the lottery result for the special pattern is a "small win," the game state before the small win game may be continuously controlled even during the small win game. In this case, too, the game state does not change when the lottery result for the special pattern becomes a "small win."

In addition, if the result of the special symbol lottery is an "instant short hit," the big hit game is not executed, and the game is controlled to low-probability time-saving state C until the variable display of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times. Here, the predetermined number of times is set to 100 times if the result of the special symbol lottery is an "instant short hit A," 40 times if the result is an "instant short hit B," and 20 times if the result is an "instant short hit C." However, if the result of the special symbol lottery becomes a "big hit" before the variable display of the special symbol reaches the predetermined number of times, the low-probability time-saving state C ends at that point.

In the above, in the low-probability non-time-saving state, only when the lottery result for the special symbol is an "instant short hit" will the game be controlled to the low-probability time-saving state C. On the other hand, in game states other than the low-probability non-time-saving state, such as the high-probability non-time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state, low-probability time-saving state A, low-probability time-saving state B, and low-probability time-saving state C, if the lottery result for the special symbol is an "instant short hit", the game is not necessarily controlled to the low-probability time-saving state C, but the game state before the lottery result for the special symbol became an "instant short hit" is maintained. In other words, for game states other than the low-probability non-time-saving state, a "instant short hit symbol invalid period" is set in which the lottery result for the special symbol becomes an "instant short hit" and the game is not controlled to the low-probability time-saving state C. In this way, the purpose of the "instant short win" is to provide relief from unfavorable play in a low-probability non-time-saving state, and in the low-probability time-saving state C triggered by an "instant short win," it becomes easier for game ball B to be accepted by variable winning port 2003, allowing the player to play without reducing the number of balls they have.

In this example, in the low-probability non-time-saving state, if the lottery result for the special symbol is an "instant short win", control is exercised to the low-probability time-saving state C. However, in some low-probability non-time-saving states, the lottery result for the special symbol is an "instant short win", which is set as an "instant short win symbol invalid period" during which control is not exercised to the low-probability time-saving state C. Details will be described later.

In the above, the low probability time-saving state C is controlled only when the lottery result of the special symbol is "instant short hit" in the low probability non-time-saving state, but it is sufficient that the low probability time-saving state C is controlled only when the lottery result of the special symbol is "instant short hit" at least in the low probability state. In other words, not only in the low probability non-time-saving state but also in the low probability time-saving states A to C, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "instant short hit", the low probability time-saving states A to C already controlled may be terminated and controlled to the low probability time-saving state C. Also, as another example, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "instant short hit" in the low probability time-saving states A to C, the remaining number of time-saving times in the already controlled low probability time-saving states A to C may be compared with the number of time-saving times in the low probability time-saving state C triggered by the lottery result of the special symbol being "instant short hit", and the number of time-saving times may be controlled to the one with the larger number. As another example, in low-probability time-saving states A to C, if the result of the lottery for the special symbol is an "instant short hit," the number of time-saving times for low-probability time-saving state C, which is triggered by the lottery result for the special symbol being an "instant short hit," may be controlled to be added to the remaining number of time-saving times for low-probability time-saving states A to C that have already been controlled.

In addition, in the above, when the lottery result for the special symbol is an "instant short win", the number of time-saving times (the number of times the special symbol changes, which controls the game to enter low-probability time-saving state C) is varied depending on the type of instant short win, but it is sufficient if the content of the low-probability time-saving state C differs depending on the type of instant short win. Specifically, the opening time or number of times that the variable winning opening 2003 that can accept game ball B when the lottery result for the normal symbol is a "normal win" may differ depending on the type of instant short win, and both the opening time or number of times that the variable winning opening 2003 is opened and the number of time-saving times may differ.

In addition, if the result of the lottery for the special pattern is an "instant short win," then in the varying display of the special pattern on the function display unit 1400, a unique instant short win pattern (which may be different among instant short win patterns A to C) different from the other stopping patterns is displayed as the stopping pattern for the special pattern, and in the varying display of the decorative pattern on the performance display device 1600, a common instant short win pattern (pattern combination of "549") is displayed as the stopping pattern for the decorative pattern. However, in a game state other than the low-probability non-time-saving state (high-probability non-time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state, low-probability time-saving state A, low-probability time-saving state B, low-probability time-saving state C) or in the ``instant short win pattern invalid period,'' if the lottery result for the special pattern is ``instant short win,'' the instant short win pattern will be displayed as a stopped pattern for the special pattern in the varying display of the special pattern on the function display unit 1400, while the instant short win pattern (pattern combination of ``549'') will not be displayed as a stopped pattern for the decorative pattern in the varying display of the decorative pattern on the performance display device 1600, and a pattern different from the instant short win pattern (in this example, a missing pattern) will be displayed as a stopped pattern for the decorative pattern. In this way, in game states other than the low probability non-time-saving state (high probability non-time-saving state, high probability time-saving state, low probability time-saving state A, low probability time-saving state B, low probability time-saving state C) or in the "instant short win pattern invalid period", if the result of the special pattern lottery is an "instant short win", the stopped decorative pattern on the performance display device 1600 does not indicate this, making it difficult for the player to notice that they have won an "instant short win" and reducing the sense of loss that comes from the "instant short win" being invalidated.

Even if the result of the special symbol lottery is not a "jackpot" or an "instant short hit," if a predetermined condition regarding the number of times the special symbol changes is met, the big hit game is not executed, and the game is controlled to low-probability time-saving state B until the special symbol change display reaches a predetermined number of times. Here, the predetermined number of times is set to 700 times. However, if the result of the special symbol lottery is a "jackpot" before the special symbol change display reaches the predetermined number of times, low-probability time-saving state B ends at that point.

In the above, after the power is turned on with RAM clear or after a jackpot game is played, the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state is counted from the initial value "0" using the rescue counter described above, and when the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state reaches 600, the game is controlled to low probability time-saving state B. Here, after the power is turned on with RAM clear or after a jackpot game is played, only the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state is counted, and in the high probability state, a "count suppression period" is set in which the number of times the special symbol changes is not counted. On the other hand, in the low probability state, the number of times the special symbol changes is counted regardless of whether the game is in the non-time-saving state or the time-saving state. In addition, when a jackpot game is played as a result of the special symbol lottery result being a "jackpot," the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state is reset. In this way, the control of the low-probability time-saving state B by the establishment of a predetermined condition regarding the number of times the special symbol changes is intended to provide relief from the unfavorable play being played in the low-probability state or the continuation of a state in which no jackpot play has been played, and in the low-probability time-saving state B, game balls B can be easily received by the variable winning port 2003, so the player can play without losing too many balls. In addition, the predetermined number is set to 700 times, and the probability of obtaining the next "jackpot" is very high before the special symbol change display reaches 700 times in the low-probability time-saving state B, so that in the low-probability time-saving state B, the player can play with anticipation.

In this example, after powering on with RAM clear or after a jackpot game is played, the number of times the special symbols change in the low probability state (the number of times the first and second special symbols change other than the jackpot) is counted, but during some of the low probability non-time-saving states within the low probability state, a "count suppression period" is set in which the number of times the special symbols change is not counted. More details will be provided later.

In addition, in this example, when the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state reaches 600 times, control is performed to switch to low probability time-saving state B, but the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state is set to be greater than the expected number of times the special symbol will change until a jackpot is reached, calculated from the jackpot probability (for example, 319 times if the jackpot probability is 1/319). As a result, after power-on with RAM clearing or after a jackpot game is played, there is a high probability that the next "jackpot" will be obtained before the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state reaches 600 times.

In this example, the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state is reset not only when a jackpot game is played, but also when the power is turned on with RAM clearing. That is, if the setting value is changed when the power is turned on, or if the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated, the main control MPU 1310a clears a specified area of the RAM built into it (the area of the entire RAM excluding a specific area), and the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state is reset. In this way, the hall manager can reset the rescue counter as appropriate. On the other hand, if the setting value is checked when the power is turned on, or if the power is turned on without operating the RAM clear switch 1310f, the RAM is not cleared, so the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state is not reset, and after the power is turned on, the count is restarted from the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state stored at the time of power interruption.

In addition, after power is turned on with RAM clear or after a jackpot game is played, in the variable display where the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state reaches 600, if the lottery result for the special symbol is a "jackpot," then after the jackpot game is played, the game state corresponding to the type of jackpot (high probability time-saving state, high probability non-time-saving state, low probability time-saving state A) will be controlled, and after the jackpot game is played, the game state will not be controlled to low probability time-saving state B.

In addition, after powering on with RAM clear or after a big win game is played, if the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state reaches 600 in the change display, and the lottery result for the special symbol is a "small win," control will be exercised to low probability time-saving state B after the small win game is played.

In addition, after powering on with RAM clear or after a jackpot game is played, if the special symbol lottery result becomes an "instant short win" in the variable display when the number of times the special symbol changes in the low-probability state reaches 600, control is provided to switch to low-probability time-saving state B. This means that low-probability time-saving state C, triggered by the special symbol lottery result becoming an "instant short win," provides time-saving until the special symbol variable display reaches 20-100 times, whereas low-probability time-saving state B, triggered by the establishment of a predetermined condition regarding the number of times the special symbol changes, provides time-saving until it reaches 700 times, giving priority to the granting of time-saving that is advantageous to the player. However, after powering on with RAM clear or after a jackpot game is played, if the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state reaches 600 in the change display, and the special symbol lottery result is an "instant short win," control may be made to the low probability non-time-saving state C triggered by the special symbol lottery result being an "instant short win."

In addition, after power-on with RAM clear or after a jackpot game is played, if the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state reaches 600, and control is performed to switch to low probability time-saving state B, the performance display device 1600 notifies the player that low probability time-saving state B will begin. For example, at the start of low probability time-saving state B or in the change display when the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state reaches 600, a notification may be given that low probability time-saving state B will begin.

The time-saving state is terminated when the termination condition for the time-saving state is met. In this example, when the variable display of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (a set number of times triggered by the lottery result of the special symbol being a "big hit" or an "instant short hit") during control of the low-probability time-saving state B or the low-probability time-saving state C, the state transitions to the low-probability non-time-saving state. In addition to this, for example, during control of the low-probability time-saving state B or the low-probability time-saving state C, a termination lottery is held each time the variable display of the special symbol is made to determine whether or not to terminate the time-saving state, and the termination condition for the time-saving state may be met when the termination lottery determines that the time-saving state will end, or when the number of times the lottery result of the special symbol is a "small hit" reaches a predetermined number.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the function display unit 1400 is equipped with a status indicator consisting of three LEDs that display the game status, a normal pattern display consisting of two LEDs that display the lottery result of the normal pattern drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B into the gate 2002, and a normal reserve display consisting of two LEDs that display the number of reserved balls related to the acceptance of the game ball B into the gate 2002. In such a status indicator, when the lottery result of the special pattern is a "big win" or a "small win", the "status display LED corresponding to the time reduction" is not illuminated at the same time as the variable display of the special pattern stops (when the big win pattern or small win pattern stops), but the "status display LED corresponding to the time reduction" is illuminated at the end of the big win game or small win game. On the other hand, if the result of the special pattern lottery is an "instant short win," the "status display LED corresponding to time reduction" will light up at the same time that the special pattern stops changing (when the instant short win pattern stops), making it easy for the outside world to recognize that it is a win other than a big win or small win.

In addition, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a "miss," the "status display LED corresponding to time reduction" is not illuminated at the same time as the display of the special symbol stops (when the missing symbol stops). On the other hand, after power-on with RAM clear or after a jackpot game is played, the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (the number of times the first special symbol and second special symbol change other than the jackpot) is counted up from the initial value of "0" using the rescue count counter described above, and when the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state reaches 600, control is performed to enter low probability time reduction state B. When a special symbol change display is executed in such a low probability state where the number of times the special symbol changes has reached 600, the "status display LED corresponding to time reduction" is illuminated at the same time as the display of the special symbol stops (when the missing symbol stops), so that it is easy for the outside to recognize that it is not a normal miss.

[Example of time-saving control when rescue attempts are reached]
In this example, after power-on with RAM clear or after a jackpot game is played, the number of times the special symbols change in the low probability state (the number of times the first and second special symbols change other than the jackpot) is counted, and when the number of times the special symbols change in the low probability state reaches 600, control is performed to enter the low probability time-saving state B, but in the period before the number of times the special symbols change in the low probability state reaches 600, a predetermined presentation is performed toward the 600th special symbol change display. Here, a specific example of the presentation until the number of times the special symbols change in the low probability state reaches 600 will be described with reference to FIG. 197.

As shown in FIG. 197(A), when a variation pattern command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the variation display of the decorative pattern 1600a is executed in the center of the performance display device 1600. Specifically, the left, center, and right decorative patterns 1600a are displayed in a varying manner until the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern command has elapsed, and are displayed stationary in the order of left decorative pattern → right decorative pattern → center decorative pattern. The decorative pattern 1600a that is displayed stationary corresponds to the lottery result.

When the main control board 1310 transmits a variation pattern command to the peripheral control board 1510, the identification pattern 1600b, which is smaller and less noticeable than the decorative pattern, is displayed in the upper right corner of the performance display device 1600. Specifically, until the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern command has elapsed, the identification pattern 1600b is displayed as a circle or an x, and is displayed as a circle or an x. The identification pattern 1600b is displayed as a stopped pattern when the lottery result is a win (big win, small win, immediate short win), and as a x when the lottery result is a miss. In addition to this example, if the purpose is to conceal the fact that the lottery result is an immediate short win as much as possible, the identification pattern 1600b may be displayed as a stopped pattern when the lottery result is a big win or small win, and as a x when the lottery result is an immediate short win or a miss, so that it is difficult to recognize that the identification pattern 1600b is an immediate short win.

In addition, the bottom of the performance display device 1600 enables the reserved display 1600c of the first special pattern (a state in which the display of the change of the first special pattern is waiting) and the reserved display 1600d of the second special pattern (a state in which the display of the change of the second special pattern is waiting). Specifically, the reserved display 1600c of the first special pattern is displayed as a circle in the bottom left of the performance display device 1600 for the number of reserved patterns, and the reserved display 1600d of the second special pattern is displayed as a square in the bottom right of the performance display device 1600 for the number of reserved patterns. Then, when the display of the change of the reserved special pattern starts, the reserved display 1600c, 1600d for the start is erased. However, the reserved display 1600c, 1600d of the special pattern may be continuously displayed from the start of the display of the change of the reserved special pattern until the display of the change of the special pattern ends.

In addition, a status display showing the current game state is executed in the upper left corner of the performance display device 1600. In this example, the current game state is a low-probability non-time-saving state, and "normal" corresponding to this low-probability non-time-saving state is displayed.

In addition, from the 500th display of the special pattern change, which is the period before the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state reaches 600, a count effect is executed in the upper part of the effect display device 1600 each time the display of the decorative pattern 1600a (special pattern) change is stopped, to notify the player of the number of times the special pattern has changed in the low probability state. In this example, when the display of the special pattern change is stopped for the 500th time, a rescue notice image A is displayed saying "500 changes", which corresponds to the number of times the special pattern has changed in the low probability state being 500. In this way, by executing the count effect, the player can play the game while looking forward to the number of times the special pattern has changed in the low probability state approaching 600.

Specifically, when the special symbol stops changing, the main control board 1310 sends a symbol determination command to the peripheral control board 1510 to stop the display of the decorative symbol 1600a changing on the performance display device 1600, but when the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state reaches 500, a rescue count command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 in addition to the symbol determination command when sending the symbol determination command. This rescue count command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 every time a symbol determination command is sent while the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state is between 500 and 600. The peripheral control board 1510 has a dedicated counter that counts the number of times the rescue count command has been received, and this is used to store the number of times the rescue count command has been received. In this way, the peripheral control board 1510 can count the number of times the relief count command is received, and by receiving the relief count command for the first time, it recognizes that the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state has reached 500, and by receiving the relief count command for the second time, it recognizes that the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state has reached 501, and so on. Based on the number of times of change thus grasped, when the display of the decorative symbol 1600a change in the performance display device 1600 is stopped, a count performance can be executed to notify the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state. In addition, the relief count command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is not limited to the above-mentioned form, and a different command may be sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 each time a symbol determination command is sent while the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state is between 500 and 600. Even in this case, the peripheral control board 1510 recognizes that the number of times the special pattern has changed in the low probability state has reached 500 by receiving rescue count command 1, and recognizes that the number of times the special pattern has changed in the low probability state has reached 501 by receiving rescue count command 2, making it possible to grasp the number of times the special pattern has changed in the low probability state, and enabling the same counting performance as described above.

As shown in Fig. 197(B) and (C), in the period before the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state reaches 600, from the 597th time the special symbol changes, each time the decorative symbol 1600a (special symbol) changes, it is stopped as a counting effect, and the decorative symbol 1600a is stopped to indicate the number of times the special symbol has changed in the low probability state. In this example, when the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state is 597, a symbol combination for a rescue notice, "597", is selected and set as the decorative symbol 1600a stopping symbol, on the condition that the special symbol lottery result is a miss, and it is stopped and displayed instead of the normal miss stopping symbol. This symbol combination for the rescue notice can be displayed both when the reach effect is not executed and when the reach effect is executed. When the reach effect is executed (when the reach is missed), the miss symbol with the reach described above (a combination of the same symbols with left and right decorative symbols of "0" to "9" but with a different central decorative symbol; a reach miss symbol) is displayed as a result of the variable display, but then it is changed to a symbol combination for the rescue notice such as "597". Also, from the 597th special symbol variable display, a rescue notice image B is displayed at the top of the effect display device 1600 saying "Help is coming soon!", indicating that the "help mode" that is executed when the number of times the special symbols change in the low probability state reaches 600 is imminent.

In addition, in the period before the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state reaches 600, if there is a reserved special pattern that will execute the 600th special pattern change display that results in a miss in the lottery, a reserved special pattern display (a reserved face displayed in the lower left of Figures 197 (C) to (G)) indicating that the special pattern is reserved for the 600th special pattern change display is displayed is displayed as the first reserved special pattern display 1600c. This allows the player to know in advance that the "help mode" will be entered when the reserved special pattern display corresponding to the reserved special pattern display is executed in the period before the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state reaches 600.

As shown in Figures 197 (D) and (E), when the number of times the special symbols change in the low probability state is 598 times, on the condition that the lottery result of the special symbols is a miss, a symbol combination for a rescue notice, "598", is selected and set as the stopping symbol of the decorative symbol 1600a, and is displayed instead of the usual missing stopping symbol.

As shown in Figures 197 (F) and (G), when the number of times the special symbols change in the low probability state is 599, on the condition that the lottery result for the special symbols is a miss, a symbol combination for a rescue notice, "599," is selected and set as the stopping symbol for the decorative symbol 1600a, and is displayed instead of the usual missing stopping symbol.

As shown in Figures 197(H) and (I), when the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state is 600, on the condition that the lottery result for the special symbol is a miss, a symbol combination for a rescue notice called "600" is selected and set as the stopping symbol of the decorative symbol 1600a, and is displayed instead of the normal missing stopping symbol. In addition, when the display of the 600th special symbol change stops, a rescue suggestion image called "CHANCE!" is displayed at the top of the performance display device 1600, indicating that the number of times the special symbol has changed in the low probability state has reached 600.

In addition, if the special symbol lottery results in a jackpot between the 500th and 600th occurrence of special symbol fluctuations in the low probability state (while the counting effect is being executed), the counting effect will end with the display of the jackpot special symbol fluctuation.

As shown in FIG. 197(J), when the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state reaches 600 times, the game is controlled to the low probability time-saving state B, and a special time-saving state is given. In this example, when the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state reaches 600 times, the game is controlled to the low probability time-saving state B until the special symbol changes 700 times (until the total number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state reaches 1300 times), and the period during which the game is controlled to the low probability time-saving state B (700 times of special symbol changes) is called "help mode L". In the performance display device 1600, when the 600th decorative symbol 1600a (special symbol) change display stops, a rescue confirmation image "Entering help mode L!!" is displayed to notify the player that the game will enter "help mode L". In Figure 197 (J), the face reservation displayed in the bottom left of Figures 197 (C) to (G) is moved and enlarged and displayed next to the text display "Entering Help Mode L!!", making it clear that the face reservation corresponds to "Help Mode L".

As shown in FIG. 197 (K), if no special symbols are reserved after entering "help mode L", the display of the decorative symbols 1600a (special symbols) does not start changing immediately, and a volume adjustment bar showing the currently set volume level and a light adjustment bar showing the currently set light level are displayed at the bottom of the performance display device 1600. The volume adjustment bar can change the memory display when the volume button is operated to change the volume level, and the light adjustment bar can change the memory display when the light button is operated to change the light level. Also, while the decorative symbols 1600a (special symbols) are changing or while the decorative symbols (special symbols) are not changing, the volume level and light level can be changed. In this way, if there are no special patterns reserved and the variable display of the decorative pattern 1600a (special pattern) is not being executed after the variable display of the decorative pattern 1600a (special pattern) has stopped, the volume adjustment bar and light adjustment bar are displayed to let you know that this is a period in which you can change the volume level and light level.

After entering "help mode L", a rescue image "in help mode L" is displayed in the upper left of the performance display device 1600 as a status display showing the current game state, indicating that the low probability time-saving state B is being controlled. In addition, in the low probability time-saving state B, it is easy to receive the game ball B into the variable winning hole 2003, so in the upper right of the performance display device 1600, an arrow bar "Hit left!" is displayed to instruct the player to fire the ball at the variable winning hole 2003 located to the left of the performance display device 1600. This rescue image and arrow bar can be continuously displayed even when the variable display of the decorative pattern 1600a (special pattern) is not being executed, and are continuously displayed in a display position that is not hidden (or does not overlap) with the volume control bar or light control bar described above, so that the player does not accidentally leave the seat even when the low probability time-saving state B is in effect. Additionally, the aforementioned rescue prediction image B "Help is on the way!" and rescue suggestion image "CHANCE!" can also be displayed continuously when the decorative pattern 1600a (special pattern) variable display is not being executed, and these images are also continuously displayed in a display position that is not hidden (or overlaps) by the volume control bar or light control bar described above, preventing the player from accidentally leaving the seat even when the low probability time-saving state B is close by.

As shown in FIG. 197 (L), after entering the "help mode L", if there are no reserved special symbols and no balls enter the various winning slots until a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed, a demo performance (demonstration) that introduces the concept of the pachinko machine 1 is executed in the performance display device 1600. At the end of the demo performance, a "prevention display for player addiction" (not shown) is also executed to prevent the player from becoming too addicted to the game. The rescue image and arrow bar described above can be continuously displayed during the demo performance, and are continuously displayed in a display position that is not hidden (or overlapped) by the demo performance or the "prevention display for player addiction" described above, so that the player does not accidentally leave the seat even when the low probability time-saving state B is in effect. Additionally, the aforementioned rescue prediction image B "Help is on the way!" and rescue suggestion image "CHANCE!" can also be displayed continuously during the demo performance, and these images are also continuously displayed in a display position that is not hidden (or overlapped) by the demo performance or the "addiction prevention display," preventing the player from accidentally leaving the seat even when the low probability time-saving state B is close by.

As shown in FIG. 197(M), after entering "help mode L", if a ball enters one of the various winning holes, such as the variable winning hole 2003, the decorative pattern 1600a is displayed in a variable manner. If a ball enters one of the various winning holes, such as the variable winning hole 2003, during the execution of the demo performance, the demo performance ends at that point, and the rescue image and arrow bar continue to be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 197 (N), when "Help Mode L" is being executed, that is, during the control of the low probability time-saving state B, when the decorative pattern 1600a (special pattern) is changed for the 700th time (when the total number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state reaches 1300), a rescue end image "Last Help!" is displayed in the upper right corner of the performance display device 1600 to notify that this is the last decorative pattern 1600a (special pattern) change display during the execution of "Help Mode L".

As shown in FIG. 197(O), after "Help Mode L" is executed, that is, after the display of the decorative pattern 1600a (special pattern) changes 700 times during the control of the low-probability time-saving state B stops (after the display of the decorative pattern 1600a (special pattern) changes 1300 times when the total number of times the special pattern changes in the low-probability state stops), the low-probability time-saving state B ends and the game moves to a low-probability non-time-saving state, so that "Normal" is displayed in the upper left corner of the performance display device 1600 to notify that the current game state is a low-probability non-time-saving state that has passed through "Help Mode L". In addition, a rescue history image "Help L: 1 time" is displayed in the upper right corner of the performance display device 1600 so that it can be known from the outside that "Help Mode L" has been executed once. In addition, while "Help Mode L" is being executed, that is, while the low probability time-saving state B is being controlled, if the lottery result is a "jackpot" before the 700th display change of the decorative pattern 1600a (special pattern) is executed, the low probability time-saving state B ends and the game state corresponding to the type of "jackpot" is entered, and "Help Mode L" ends at that point.

(Restrictions on counting when the ball enters the second starting hole)
As described above, for the 500th to 600th special symbol variation display, which is a period before the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state (the number of variations other than the jackpot of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) reaches 600, a count effect is executed to notify the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state each time the display of the decorative symbol (special symbol) variation is stopped. However, when the ball enters the second starting hole 2005, the display of the second special symbol (decorative symbol) variation is executed in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the ball entering. In addition, when the display of the second special symbol variation is stopped, the rescue count counter in the main control board 1310 is counted up, but the number of variations of the special symbol notified by the count effect is not increased. The following describes the restrictions on the count effect when the ball enters the second starting hole 2005.

In this example, in the area of the game area 5a to the left of the center role 2500, the variable winning hole 2003, the first starting hole 2004, the second starting hole 2005, and the first large winning hole 2006 are provided as ball entry holes into which the game ball B can enter. Of these, the first starting hole 2004 and the second starting hole 2005 are always open at the top, so that in the low probability non-time shortening state, the ball can enter either hole. However, while the game ball B released into the game area 5a from the stage 2513 of the center role 2500 is highly likely to be accepted into the first starting hole 2004, the game ball B released into the game area 5a from the stage 2513 of the center role 2500 is unlikely to be accepted into the second starting hole 2005. For this reason, the game ball B shot to the left of the center role 2500 will enter the first starting hole 2004 with a higher probability than the second starting hole 2005. In addition, the second starting hole 2005 has the same shape as the general winning hole 2001, and is less noticeable than the first starting hole 2004. Therefore, in the low probability non-time-saving state, there is no need to aim for the ball to enter the second starting hole 2005, and even if a ball does enter the second starting hole 2005, it is difficult to notice.

When the ball lands in the first starting hole 2004, a first special symbol is displayed, and when the ball lands in the second starting hole 2005, a second special symbol is displayed, and the display of each special symbol is performed in the order of the balls landing in the first starting hole 2004 and the second starting hole 2005.

In addition, in the low-probability non-time-saving state, when a ball enters the first starting hole 2004 and the lottery for the first special pattern is a miss, the display of the first special pattern is executed and the display of the decorative pattern is executed on the performance display device 1600. The time period for the first special pattern (decorative pattern) to change is set to about 5 to 10 seconds (in the case of a miss that does not involve a reach). In other words, in the low-probability non-time-saving state, when a ball enters the first starting hole 2004 and the lottery for the first special pattern is a miss, the display of the first special pattern (decorative pattern) is executed in a manner that makes it easy to recognize the ball entering.

On the other hand, in the low probability non-time-saving state, when the ball enters the second starting hole 2005 and the lottery for the second special pattern is a miss or a small win, the display of the second special pattern is executed, but the display of the decorative pattern is restricted on the performance display device 1600. The time period for the second special pattern to change is set to about 0.1 seconds (in the case of a miss without a reach), which is extremely shorter than the time period for the first special pattern to change. During the display of the first special pattern, the performance sound associated with the display of the decorative pattern on the performance display device 1600 is output from the speaker, whereas during the display of the second special pattern, the performance sound associated with the display of the decorative pattern on the performance display device 1600 is not output from the speaker. In other words, in the low probability non-time-saving state, when the ball enters the second starting hole 2005 and the lottery for the second special pattern is a miss or a small win, the display of the second special pattern is executed in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the ball entering. This makes it difficult to notice the ball entering the second starting hole 2005 in the low probability non-time-saving state, and makes it difficult to know how many times the special pattern has changed in the low probability state. In addition, in the low probability non-time-saving state, when the ball enters the second starting hole 2005 and the lottery for the second special pattern is a jackpot, the display device 1600 does not restrict the display of the decorative pattern changes, and instead performs the same changes that accompany a reach as with the first special pattern, and outputs a sound effect associated with the display of the decorative pattern changes on the display device 1600.

In this example, as described above, when the special symbol stops changing, the main control board 1310 sends a symbol determination command to the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control board 1510 receives the symbol determination command to stop the display of the decorative symbol changes on the performance display device 1600. However, when the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state reaches 500, a rescue count command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 in addition to the symbol determination command when sending the symbol determination command. This rescue count command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 every time a symbol determination command is sent while the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state is between 500 and 600. The peripheral control board 1510 counts the number of times the rescue count command is received to grasp how many times the special symbol has changed in the low probability state, and when the display of the decorative symbol changes on the performance display device 1600 stops, a count performance is executed to notify how many times the special symbol has changed in the low probability state.

Here, in the low probability non-time-saving state, when the ball enters the first starting hole 2004, the first special symbol is displayed as a change, but when the change of the first special symbol stops, the main control board 1310 sends a change count command A to the peripheral control board 1510 as a change count command. The main control board 1310 then counts up the change count counter, and the peripheral control board 1510 counts the number of times that the change of the first special symbol has occurred in the low probability state by counting the number of times that the change of the first special symbol has occurred, and when the change display of the first special symbol (decorative symbol) stops, the number of times that the special symbol has changed, which is notified by the count effect, is increased.

On the other hand, in the low probability non-time shortening state, when the ball enters the second starting hole 2005, the second special symbol is displayed as a variable, but when the variable of the second special symbol stops, the main control board 1310 sends the variable B command to the peripheral control board 1510 as a variable. The main control board 1310 counts up the variable counter, and the peripheral control board 1510 counts the number of times the variable of the second special symbol has changed in the low probability state, so that the variable number of the special symbol notified by the count effect is not increased when the variable display of the second special symbol stops, so that a discrepancy occurs between the variable number of the special symbol and the actual variable number of the special symbol. In other words, when the ball enters the second starting hole 2005 during the execution of the count effect, the variable number of the special symbol by the variable counter on the main control board 1310 and the variable number of the special symbol notified by the count effect on the peripheral control board 1510 do not match. In this way, when a ball lands in the second starting hole 2005 while the count effect is being performed, the rescue count counter on the main control board 1310 is counted up, but the number of times the special pattern changes, which is notified in the count effect, is not increased, making it difficult to notice that the ball has landed in the second starting hole 2005, and making it difficult to know from the count effect how many times the special pattern has actually changed.

The peripheral control board 1510 counts the number of times the rescue count command B is received, and the number of times the rescue count command B is received is added to the number of times the special symbol changes notified in the count performance at a predetermined timing during the execution of the count performance. In this example, the number of times the special symbol changes notified in the count performance is set to 520, 540, 560, 580, and 596 as the predetermined timing among the 500th to 600th times of the special symbol change display during the execution of the count performance, and when these numbers are reached, the number of times the rescue count command B is received (the difference accumulated without addition) is added to the number of times the special symbol changes notified in the count performance. That is, for example, when the number of times the special symbol changes as notified by the count effect is 520, the number of balls that enter the second starting hole 2005 during the 500th to 520th times of the special symbol change display corresponds to the "number of times the rescue count command B was received (the difference accumulated without addition)," and this number is added to the number of times the special symbol changes as notified by the count effect. As a result, the number of times the special symbol changes as notified by the count effect may suddenly increase all at once, so the count effect can be watched with anticipation. The number of times the rescue count command B was received may be calculated by a method of calculating the difference, or a method of providing a counter that counts only the number of times the rescue count command B was received and clearing the value at a predetermined timing.

In the above, the specified timing is when the number of times the special pattern changes as notified in the count performance reaches a specified number, and the number of times the rescue count command B has been received is added to the number of times the special pattern changes as notified in the count performance. However, other specified timings may also be when the number of times the special pattern changes reaches a specified number, when the number of times the rescue count command B has been received reaches a specified number, when it is decided by lottery to add the number of times the rescue count command B has been received, when a specified error or notification has been resolved, etc.

Figure 198 shows a specific example of a performance when the ball enters the second starting hole 2005 while the count performance is being performed.

As shown in FIG. 198(A), in the period before the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state reaches 600, from the 500th time the display of the special pattern changes, each time the display of the decorative pattern 1600a (special pattern) changes is stopped, a counting effect is executed in the upper part of the effect display device 1600 to notify the number of times the special pattern has changed in the low probability state. In this example, when the display of the special pattern changes for the 505th time is stopped, a rescue preview image A is displayed saying "505 changes", which corresponds to the fact that the number of times the special pattern has changed in the low probability state is 505. In addition, when a ball lands in the second starting hole 2005 during the variable display of the special pattern (decorative pattern 1600a), the second special pattern pending display 1600d (a state in which the variable display of the second special pattern is waiting) is displayed at the bottom of the performance display device 1600, but it is preferable to display the second special pattern pending display 1600d in a manner that is less noticeable than the first special pattern pending display 1600c. This makes it difficult to notice a ball lands in the second starting hole 2005 during the execution of the count performance. Also, from the viewpoint of making it even more difficult to notice a ball lands in the second starting hole 2005 during the execution of the count performance, the second special pattern pending display 1600d may not be displayed on the performance display device 1600.

As shown in Fig. 198 (B) and (C), when the second special symbol variation display based on the ball entering the second starting hole 2005 is executed as the 506th special symbol variation display during the execution of the counting performance, the decorative symbol 1600a variation display is not executed and the decorative symbol 1600a is continuously displayed in a stopped state until 0.1 seconds have elapsed as the second special symbol variation time. However, for the identification symbol 1600b displayed in the upper right part of the performance display device 1600, the variation display is executed until 0.1 seconds have elapsed as the second special symbol variation time. When the second special symbol variation display is stopped, the number of special symbol variations notified in the counting performance is not added. In other words, although the number of special symbol variations in the low probability state is 506 (rescue number counter = 506), the number of special symbol variations notified in the counting performance remains unchanged at "505 variations", and there is "1" variation that has not been added (difference).

As shown in Figures 198 (D) and (E), when the count effect is being executed, if the first special symbol change display based on the ball entering the first starting hole 2004 is executed as the 507th special symbol change display, when the first special symbol (decorative symbol 1600a) stops changing, it is added to the number of special symbol changes notified in the count effect. In other words, although the number of special symbol changes in the low probability state is 507 (rescue count counter = 507), the number of special symbol changes notified in the count effect is displayed as "506 changes." Here too, the state in which there is an unadded (difference) change of "1" is maintained.

As shown in FIG. 198(F), when the count effect is being executed, if the first special symbol variation display is executed based on the ball entering the first starting hole 2004 as the 521st special symbol variation display, when the variation of the first special symbol (decorative symbol 1600a) stops, the number of times the special symbol has changed notified in the count effect is added. In this example, the number of times the special symbol has changed in the low probability state is 521 (rescue count counter = 521), but the number of times the special symbol has changed notified in the count effect is displayed as "519 changes." In other words, here, there is a state in which there are "2" variations (difference) that have not been added.

198(G) and (H), when the first special symbol variation display based on a ball entering the first starting hole 2004 is executed as the 522nd special symbol variation display during the execution of the count effect, an increase effect image "Increase Chance!" is displayed at the top of the effect display device 1600, indicating that there is a chance that the number of times the special symbol variation notified by the count effect will increase. Then, during the special symbol variation display in which the number of times the special symbol variation notified by the count effect is 500 to 520, if the number of balls entering the second starting hole 2005 is two (if there is "2" variation that has not been added (difference)), when the variation of the first special symbol (decorative symbol 1600a) stops, +2 is added to the number of times the special symbol variation notified by the count effect. In other words, while the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state is 522 (relief count counter = 522), the number of times the special symbol changes notified in the count effect is displayed as "520 changes + 2 changes!", so the number of times the special symbol changes matches and the unadded (difference) change becomes "0".

As shown in Figures 198 (I) and (J), when the count effect is being executed, if the first special symbol change display is executed based on the ball entering the first starting hole 2004 as the 523rd special symbol change display, when the first special symbol (decorative symbol 1600a) stops changing, it is executed so that it is added to the number of times the special symbol has changed notified by the count effect. In other words, while the number of times the special symbol has changed in the low probability state is 523 (rescue count counter = 523), the number of times the special symbol has changed notified by the count effect is displayed as "523 changes."

As described above in detail, during the execution of the counting effect, in the 597th to 600th special pattern change display, each time the decorative pattern 1600a (special pattern) change display is stopped, the decorative pattern 1600a stop display (relief notice image B) indicating the number of times the special pattern has changed in the low probability state is displayed as a counting effect. During this period, even when the second special pattern change display based on the ball entering the second starting hole 2005 is executed, the decorative pattern 1600a stop display is not executed, and the decorative pattern 1600a stop display indicating the number of times the special pattern has changed in the low probability state is not displayed. However, except when the second special pattern change display is executed, the decorative pattern 1600a stop display (relief notice image B) indicating the actual number of times the special pattern has changed in the low probability state is displayed. For example, during execution of the count performance, among the 597th to 600th special pattern change displays, only the 598th special pattern change display is a second special pattern change display, and the other special pattern change displays are first special pattern change displays. In that case, the decorative pattern 1600a is displayed as stopped patterns (relief preview image B) in the order of "597" → "599" → "600", indicating the number of times the special pattern has changed in the low probability state, and the count performance proceeds excluding the 598th special pattern change display (second special pattern change display). If, during the execution of the counting effect, all of the 597th to 600th special symbol changes are second special symbol changes, the decorative symbol 1600a will not stop (rescue preview image B), indicating the number of times the special symbol has changed in the low probability state, and the 600th special symbol change will display a rescue confirmation image as shown in FIG. 197(J). In such a case, the player can be given another surprise, that the "help mode L" has suddenly started, and a decrease in interest can be avoided even if the counting effect is not executed.

As described above, during the display of the decorative pattern 1600a (special pattern) or during the non-display of the decorative pattern 1600a (special pattern), the volume button can be operated to change the volume level, and the light level can be changed by operating the light intensity button. In this regard, if there is no special pattern reserved after the display of the decorative pattern 1600a (special pattern) has stopped, the display of the decorative pattern 1600a is not being performed, and when the volume button or light intensity button is operated, the operation sound is output from the speaker. In contrast, when the display of the second special pattern based on the ball entering the second starting hole 2005 is being performed during the execution of the count performance, the operation sound is restricted so that it is not output from the speaker when the volume button or light intensity button is operated, even though the display of the decorative pattern 1600a is not being performed. As a result, when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner based on the ball entering the second starting hole 2005 while the counting effect is being performed, the sound produced during the game is not hindered by the operation sound made when the volume button or light intensity button is operated. Also, when the decorative symbol 1600a is not being displayed in a variable manner, it is possible to check whether the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner by checking whether the operation sound is output from the speaker when the volume button or light intensity button is operated.

In this example, when a ball enters the first starting hole 2004, a first special symbol is displayed, and when a ball enters the second starting hole 2005, a second special symbol is displayed. The display of the special symbols is performed in the order of the balls entering the first starting hole 2004 and the second starting hole 2005. In contrast, the display of the first special symbol and the display of the second special symbol may be configured to be performed at the same time. Specifically, the second starting hole 2005 is arranged so that a large number of balls enter the hole in a low probability non-time-saving state. At this time, balls enter the second starting hole 2005 frequently, but the time for which the second special symbol changes based on the ball entering the second starting hole 2005 is set to an extremely long time (for example, 180 seconds) in a low probability non-time-saving state. In other words, the second special symbol variable display based on the ball entering the second starting hole 2005 is not frequently performed in the low probability non-time shortening state, so the mainstream of the game is to make the ball enter the first starting hole 2004 and execute the variable display of the first special symbol. In this configuration, when executing the variable display of the second special symbol, the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol 1600a on the performance display device 1600 is restricted, and when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped, the number of times the special symbol is changed that is notified in the count performance is not increased. In addition, the number of times the second special symbol is changed that is not notified in the count performance is added to the number of times the special symbol is changed that is notified in the count performance at a predetermined timing during the execution of the count performance. This can achieve the same effect as above. Then, after a special jackpot game (a jackpot that is controlled to a non-time-saving state after a jackpot game) or after the number of times the special symbol changes reaches a predetermined number (for example, 600 changes after power-on), the time for the second special symbol to change based on the ball entering the second starting hole 2005 is shortened, and the display of the change of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second starting hole 2005 is executed frequently. This makes it possible to transition from the non-time-saving state to the time-saving state by the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state reaching 600 times (rescue count counter = 600), but after a special jackpot game (a jackpot that is controlled to a non-time-saving state after a jackpot game) or after the number of times the special symbol changes reaches a predetermined number (for example, 600 changes after power-on), the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state easily approaches 600 times (rescue count counter = 600), and the game can be continued with anticipation.

In the above, the probability that the lottery result for a normal pattern in a normal lottery in the low-probability non-time-saving state and the high-probability non-time-saving state will be a "normal hit" is set to 0/100, and the probability that the lottery result for a normal pattern in a normal lottery in other game states (high-probability time-saving state, low-probability time-saving state A, low-probability time-saving state B, low-probability time-saving state C) will be a "normal hit" is set to 100/100, but this is not limited to this, and the probability that the lottery result for a normal pattern in a normal lottery in the low-probability non-time-saving state and the high-probability non-time-saving state will be a "normal hit" may be set to 1/100, and the probability that the lottery result for a normal pattern in a normal lottery in other game states (high-probability time-saving state, low-probability time-saving state A, low-probability time-saving state B, low-probability time-saving state C) will be a "normal hit" may be set to 100/100. In this case, the possibility that the game ball B will be accepted by the variable winning port 2003 in the low probability non-time-saving state increases slightly, and the frequency of sending the rescue count command B increases (the rescue count command B is sent not only when the variable display of the second special symbol associated with the ball entering the second starting port 2005 stops, but also when the variable display of the second special symbol associated with the ball entering the variable winning port 2003 stops). As a result, as described above, the range of addition in the performance in which the number of times the rescue count command B is received is increased at a predetermined timing, and the interest in the game can be further increased. Also, for those in which the game ball B may be accepted by the variable winning port 2003 in the low probability non-time-saving state, it is not necessary to provide the second starting port 2005 whose upper part is always open, and it is also possible to perform a performance in which only the rescue count command B resulting from the ball entering the variable winning port 2003 is used and the number of times it is received is added at a predetermined timing.

In the above, the gate 2002, the variable winning hole 2003, the first start hole 2004, and the second start hole 2005 are provided in the area to the left of the center role 2500 in the game area 5a, but the gate 2002, the variable winning hole 2003, and the second start hole 2005 may be provided in the area to the right of the center role 2500 in the game area 5a. Even in this case, a shot ball or the like that is accidentally hit to the right by the player during normal play (low probability non-time-saving state) may enter the variable winning hole 2003 or the second start hole 2005. When the variable display of the second special symbol associated with such a shot stops, the rescue count command B is sent, and the number of times the rescue count command B is received is added at a predetermined timing as described above, thereby achieving a game effect equivalent to that described above.

In addition, in the above, when the display of the second special symbol stops, the number of times the special symbol changes, which is notified by the counting performance, is not increased, and a discrepancy occurs between the actual number of times the special symbol changes, and it is desirable to make the player not aware of this discrepancy as much as possible. In view of this point, it is preferable to configure the device so that the general data display installed in the game hall is difficult for the player to see when the player is in the normal position seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. For example, since the general data display installed in the game hall is located above the pachinko machine 1, it is preferable to decorate the door frame top unit 450 of this pachinko machine 1 so that its upper side cannot be seen through, and to design the amount of protrusion toward the player side (front side) to the extent that it blocks the line of sight of the player looking up when seated in front of this pachinko machine 1, making it difficult to see the data display. Furthermore, if the door frame top unit 450 is protruded to the extent that it makes the data display difficult to see, it is conceivable that the attendant call button that is typically provided on data displays will also become difficult to operate, so it is desirable to provide an attendant call button on the door frame 3 of this pachinko machine 1 so that the operation signal can be sent to the data display via the external terminal board 558.

(Modification)
Next, a modified example that is partially different from the above-mentioned presentation example will be described below. In the modified example, after power-on with RAM clear or after a big win game is played, the number of times the special symbols fluctuate in the low probability state (the number of times the first special symbol and the second special symbol fluctuate other than the big win) is counted against the rescue counter, and when the number of times the special symbols fluctuate in the low probability state reaches 600 (rescue counter = 600), the low probability time-saving state B is controlled. However, the rescue counter can be counted not only when the special symbols are fluctuating, but also when the special symbols are not fluctuating.

In the modified example, when the special symbol stops changing, the display of the decorative symbol changes on the performance display device 1600 is stopped by sending a symbol determination command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, but when the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state reaches 500, a rescue count command A is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 in addition to the symbol determination command when sending the symbol determination command. This rescue count command A is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 every time a symbol determination command is sent while the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state is between 500 and 600. The peripheral control board 1510 has a dedicated counter that counts the number of times rescue count command A is received, and this is used to store the number of times rescue count command A is received. In this way, the peripheral control board 1510 counts the number of times that the rescue count command A is received, and recognizes that the number of times the special pattern has changed in the low probability state has reached 500 by receiving the rescue count command the first time, and recognizes that the number of times the special pattern has changed in the low probability state has reached 501 by receiving the rescue count command the second time, and so on, and is able to grasp the number of times that the special pattern has changed in the low probability state, and based on this grasped number of changes, is able to increase the number of times that the special pattern has changed that is notified in the count performance when the display of the decorative pattern changes on the performance display device 1600 stops.

In the modified example, when a specific condition is met, such as a ball entering a winning hole that does not display the special symbol (for example, the general winning hole 2001), the special symbol is not displayed, but the main control board 1310 counts up the rescue count counter. In other words, in the modified example, since the special symbol is not displayed, the decorative symbol is not displayed, and the rescue count counter can count up the number of times the special symbol has changed simply by meeting a specific condition. At this time, the symbol determination command is not sent, but the main control board 1310 sends a rescue count command B to the peripheral control board 1510. This rescue count command B is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 each time the specific condition is met while the number of times the special symbol has changed in the low probability state is between 500 and 600 times. The main control board 1310 counts up the number of times the special symbol changes using the rescue counter, and the peripheral control board 1510 counts the number of times the rescue count command B is received, thereby grasping the number of times the specific condition has been met, but when the specific condition is met, the number of times the special symbol changes notified in the count performance is not increased, and a discrepancy occurs between this and the actual number of times the special symbol changes. In other words, when a specific condition is met during the execution of the count performance, the number of times the special symbol changes using the rescue counter in the main control board 1310 and the number of times the special symbol changes notified in the count performance in the peripheral control board 1510 will not match. In this way, when a specific condition is met while the count performance is being performed, the number of times the special symbol has changed is counted up by the rescue counter on the main control board 1310, but the number of times the special symbol has changed notified by the count performance is not increased, making it difficult to notice that the specific condition has been met and making it difficult to know from the count performance how many times the special symbol has changed as measured by the rescue counter on the main control board 1310.

In the above, the specific condition is met when the ball enters a winning port that does not execute the variable display of the special pattern (for example, the general winning port 2001). However, the specific condition may also be met when a lottery is drawn to count up the rescue count counter, regardless of whether the ball enters a winning port.

The peripheral control board 1510 counts the number of times the rescue count command B is received, and the number of times the rescue count command B is received is added to the number of times the special symbol changes notified in the count performance at a predetermined timing during the execution of the count performance. In this example, the number of times the special symbol changes notified in the count performance is set to 520, 540, 560, 580, and 596 as the predetermined timing among the 500th to 600th times of the special symbol change display during the execution of the count performance, and when these numbers are reached, the number of times the rescue count command B is received (the difference accumulated without addition) is added to the number of times the special symbol changes notified in the count performance. That is, for example, when the number of times the special symbol changes notified by the count effect is 520, the number of times the specific condition is met during the 500th to 520th special symbol change display corresponds to the "number of times the rescue count command B was received (the difference accumulated without addition)," and this number is added to the number of times the special symbol changes notified by the count effect. As a result, the number of times the special symbol changes notified by the count effect may suddenly increase all at once, so you can look at the count effect with anticipation. The number of times the rescue count command B was received may be calculated by a method of calculating the difference, or a method of providing a counter that counts only the number of times the rescue count command B was received and clearing the value at a specified timing.

In the above, the specified timing is when the number of times the special pattern changes as notified in the count performance reaches a specified number, and the number of times the rescue count command B has been received is added to the number of times the special pattern changes as notified in the count performance. However, other specified timings may also be when the number of times the special pattern changes reaches a specified number, when the number of times the rescue count command B has been received reaches a specified number, when it is decided by lottery to add the number of times the rescue count command B has been received, when a specified error or notification has been resolved, etc.

When the variation of the special symbols and decorative symbols stops, the main control board 1310 counts up the number of times the special symbols have changed, and information on the number of times the special symbols have changed, is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 via the external terminal board 558. Similarly, when a specific condition is met, the main control board 1310 counts up the number of times the special symbols have changed, and information on the number of times the special symbols have changed, is output to the outside via the external terminal board 558. As a result, when a specific condition is met, the rescue counter counts up the number of times the special symbols have changed, but the count effect does not increase the number of times the special symbols have changed, so that the count effect does not tell how many times the special symbols have changed, and the rescue counter on the main control board 1310 can tell how many times the special symbols have changed, but it can tell from the outside how many times the special symbols have changed, and the rescue counter on the main control board 1310. In other words, the hall manager can monitor whether any illegal attempts to achieve specific conditions are being made by checking whether the number of times the special symbol changes, as measured by the rescue counter on the main control board 1310, is abnormally increasing.

In addition, when a special abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 1, such as when a magnet or vibration is detected, the progress of the game is stopped. In other words, when a special abnormality occurs, even if a ball enters the first starting hole 2004 or the second starting hole 2005, the display of the variation of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is not executed, and the number of times the special symbol changes by the rescue count counter in the main control board 1310 is not counted up, and the information before the special abnormality occurs (the number of times the special symbol changes by the rescue count counter in the main control board 1310) is retained. Similarly, when a special abnormality occurs, even if a specific condition is established, the number of times the special symbol changes by the rescue count counter in the main control board 1310 is not counted up, and the information before the special abnormality occurs (the number of times the special symbol changes by the rescue count counter in the main control board 1310) is retained. In this way, when a special abnormality occurs, it is possible to prevent an act of illegally counting up the number of times the special symbol changes by the rescue count counter in the main control board 1310.

[Example of instant short hit]
In this example, in the low-probability non-time-saving state, when the lottery result is an "instant short win", the state is controlled to the low-probability time-saving state C. Here, a specific example of the performance until the lottery result is an "instant short win" will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 199(A), when a variation pattern command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the variation display of the decorative pattern 1600a is executed in the center of the performance display device 1600. Specifically, the left, center, and right decorative patterns 1600a are displayed in a varying manner until the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern command has elapsed, and are displayed stationary in the order of left decorative pattern → right decorative pattern → center decorative pattern. The decorative pattern 1600a that is displayed stationary corresponds to the lottery result.

When the main control board 1310 transmits a variation pattern command to the peripheral control board 1510, the identification pattern 1600b, which is smaller and less noticeable than the decorative pattern, is displayed in the upper right corner of the performance display device 1600. Specifically, until the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern command has elapsed, the identification pattern 1600b is displayed as a circle or an x, and is displayed as a circle or an x. The identification pattern 1600b is displayed as a stopped pattern when the lottery result is a win (big win, small win, or instant short win), and as a x when the lottery result is a miss. In addition to this example, if the purpose is to conceal the fact that the lottery result is an instant short win as much as possible, the identification pattern 1600b may be displayed as a stopped pattern when the lottery result is a big win or small win, and as a x when the lottery result is an instant short win or a miss, so that it is difficult to recognize that the identification pattern 1600b is an instant short win.

In addition, the bottom of the performance display device 1600 enables the reserved display 1600c of the first special pattern (a state in which the display of the change of the first special pattern is waiting) and the reserved display 1600d of the second special pattern (a state in which the display of the change of the second special pattern is waiting). Specifically, the reserved display 1600c of the first special pattern is displayed as a circle in the bottom left of the performance display device 1600 for the number of reserved patterns, and the reserved display 1600d of the second special pattern is displayed as a square in the bottom right of the performance display device 1600 for the number of reserved patterns. Then, when the display of the change of the reserved special pattern starts, the reserved display 1600c, 1600d for the start is erased. However, the reserved display 1600c, 1600d of the special pattern may be continuously displayed from the start of the display of the change of the reserved special pattern until the display of the change of the special pattern ends.

In addition, a status display showing the current game state is executed in the upper left corner of the performance display device 1600. In this example, the current game state is a low-probability non-time-saving state, and "normal" corresponding to this low-probability non-time-saving state is displayed.

As shown in Fig. 199 (B) and (C), when a special pattern that will enter the first starting hole 2004 and result in an "instant short hit" is reserved during the variable display of the decorative pattern 1600a (special pattern), a reserved display of a special pattern (a reserved face displayed in the lower left of Fig. 199 (B) and (C)) is displayed as the reserved display of the first special pattern 1600c, suggesting that the reserved special pattern will result in an "instant short hit". In addition, a comment in a speech bubble saying "Shall I help you?" is displayed for the reserved display of the special pattern, making it easier to notice that the reserved special pattern will result in an "instant short hit". As a result, during the period before the variable display of the special pattern that will result in an "instant short hit" is started, the variable display of the special pattern corresponding to the reserved display of the special pattern is executed, so that the player can know in advance that the "help mode" will be entered. In this example, the reserved special pattern display (the reserved face displayed at the bottom left of Fig. 197(C)-(G)) indicating that the reserved special pattern will be the 600th special pattern variation display described above, and the reserved special pattern display (the reserved face displayed at the bottom left of Fig. 199(B) and (C)) indicating that the reserved special pattern will be the "instant short hit" lottery result, use a common "reserved face" image, but the presence or absence of a comment in the speech bubble saying "Shall I help you?" makes it possible to distinguish whether the "600th special pattern variation display" or the "instant short hit" is intended. Note that, if it is possible to more reliably distinguish whether the "600th special pattern variation display" or the "instant short hit" is intended, it is preferable to use reserved images with a common pattern but with different color patterns, or to use reserved images with different shapes.

In this example, as a specific example of displaying a reserved display of a special pattern suggesting that a special pattern that will result in an "instant short hit" is reserved, when the ball enters various winning holes such as the first starting hole 2004, a pre-determination command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control board 1510 specifies pre-determination information (whether to select a big hit, a small hit, or an instant short hit, the type of big hit if a big hit, the type of small hit if a small hit, the type of instant short hit if an instant short hit, whether to execute a reach effect as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600 if it is not a big hit, small hit, or instant short hit, or the type of game effect to be executed (type of variation pattern), etc.). Then, when it is specified as a pre-determination information that an instant short hit will occur, when the reserved display is displayed, a reserved display of a special pattern is displayed, and a pre-reading effect is executed that suggests that a special pattern that will result in an "instant short hit" is reserved. In addition, the reserved display of the special pattern may be different depending on the type of immediate short win. In addition, the reserved display of the special pattern may be displayed not only when it is specified as an immediate short win as pre-determination information, but also when it is not an immediate short win, and a false performance that does not result in an immediate short win even if such a reserved display of the special pattern is displayed may be executed. In addition, when it is specified as an immediate short win as pre-determination information and a reserved display of a special pattern is displayed, the reserved display of the special pattern may be displayed immediately on the performance display device 1600, or a normal reserved image (such as the reserved image of the "○" described above) may be displayed on the performance display device 1600 once, and then a predetermined change performance accompanied by sound, vibration, character image, etc. may be performed at a predetermined timing, and the normal reserved image may be changed to a reserved display of a special pattern through such a change performance. In addition, if the advance judgment information does not specify that an immediate short win will occur, a normal reserved image (such as the reserved image of a circle mentioned above) may be displayed once, and then a predetermined change effect accompanied by sound, vibration, character image, etc. may be performed at a predetermined timing, and after such a change effect, a false effect may be performed in which the normal reserved image is maintained (without changing to the reserved display of a special image).

As described above, when the advance judgment information specifies that an immediate short win will occur, when the reserved display is displayed, a pre-reading effect is executed that suggests that the lottery result is a reserved special pattern that will result in an "immediate short win", but such pre-reading effects that suggest an "immediate short win" are restricted from being executed for a certain period of time. Specifically, when an immediate short win occurs in a low probability non-time-saving state, the game is controlled to a low probability time-saving state C until the variable display of the special pattern reaches a predetermined number of times (in this example, either 20 times, 40 times, or 100 times), but after the immediate short win pattern corresponding to such an immediate short win stops, the execution of the pre-reading effect that suggests an "immediate short win" is restricted. Here, in the game states other than the low probability non-time-saving state, such as the high probability non-time-saving state, high probability time-saving state, low probability time-saving state A, low probability time-saving state B, and low probability time-saving state C, a "period in which an immediate short win pattern is invalid" is set in which the game is not controlled to the low probability time-saving state C when an immediate short win occurs. That is, in the low probability time-saving state C after the instantaneous short win pattern corresponding to the instantaneous short win stops, although the lottery result may be "instantaneous short win," the lottery result becoming "instantaneous short win" will not again control to the low probability time-saving state C. Also, in the case of an instantaneous short win during the instantaneous short win pattern invalid period, the instantaneous short win pattern is displayed as a stopped pattern of the special pattern in the variable display of the special pattern on the function display unit 1400, while the instantaneous short win pattern is not displayed as a stopped pattern of the decorative pattern in the variable display of the performance display device 1600, and a pattern different from the instantaneous short win pattern (in this example, a miss pattern) is displayed as a stopped pattern of the decorative pattern. In this example, even if the advance judgment information indicates that an immediate short hit will occur after the instant short hit pattern corresponding to the instant short hit stops, by not executing a pre-reading effect suggesting an "instant short hit", the player will not know that the instant short hit will be invalidated during the instant short hit pattern invalidation period, and the sense of loss due to the instant short hit being invalidated can be reduced.

In addition, in game states other than the low-probability non-time-saving state set as an "instant short win pattern invalid period" that is not controlled to the low-probability time-saving state C (high-probability non-time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state, low-probability time-saving state A, low-probability time-saving state B, low-probability time-saving state C), the execution of the pre-reading effect suggesting an "instant short win" is also restricted for the reserves in the first start port 2004 that will be displayed after the final display of the variation. For example, when the game is controlled to the low-probability time-saving state C 100 times in response to the instant short win A, even if four game balls enter the first start port 2004 during the display of the special pattern in the final time (100th time), and the reserved special pattern that results in an "instant short win" is included among them, the pre-reading effect suggesting an "instant short win" is not executed for all the reserves that occurred during the display of the variation in the final time. However, for the reservation of the first starting port 2004, which will be displayed after the final display, the display will be performed after the end of the "instant short hit pattern invalid period", so the execution of the pre-reading performance suggesting an "instant short hit" is restricted, but if an instant short hit occurs after the end of the "instant short hit pattern invalid period", the instant short hit pattern is displayed as a stopped pattern of the special pattern in the display of the special pattern in the function display unit 1400, and the instant short hit pattern (the combination of "547") is displayed as a stopped pattern of the decorative pattern 1600a in the display of the decorative pattern 1600a in the display display device 1600. As a result, while the pre-reading performance suggesting an "instant short hit" is not executed during the "instant short hit pattern invalid period", after the end of the "instant short hit pattern invalid period", the player can be made to understand the occurrence of an instant short hit in the same way as when an instant short hit occurs during normal play.

When an immediate short hit occurs in the low probability non-time-saving state, the state is controlled to low probability time-saving state C until the variable display of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (in this example, either 20 times, 40 times, or 100 times), but after the variable display of the special symbol reaches the predetermined number of times, the state transitions to the low probability non-time-saving state. After the immediate short hit symbol corresponding to the immediate short hit stops and the variable display of the special symbol reaches the predetermined number of times, if it is determined as advance judgment information that an immediate short hit will occur, it is possible to execute a pre-reading effect suggesting an "immediate short hit". As a result, after the immediate short hit symbol corresponding to the immediate short hit stops and the variable display of the special symbol reaches the predetermined number of times, attention can be drawn to whether a pre-reading effect suggesting an "immediate short hit" will be executed.

In addition, as for the look-ahead performance, when the advance judgment information specifies that an immediate short hit will occur, not only is a look-ahead performance that suggests that a special pattern that results in an "immediate short hit" is reserved when the reserved display 1600c, 1600d is displayed, but also, when the advance judgment information specifies that a jackpot will occur, a look-ahead performance that suggests that a special pattern that results in a "jackpot" is reserved when the reserved display 1600c, 1600d is displayed. After the immediate short hit pattern corresponding to the immediate short hit stops, the execution of the look-ahead performance that suggests an "immediate short hit" is restricted, but the execution of the look-ahead performance that suggests a "jackpot" is not restricted. In this way, after the immediate short hit pattern corresponding to the immediate short hit stops, the look-ahead performance is not restricted in its entirety, and only the look-ahead performance that suggests an "immediate short hit" is restricted, so that the player can pay attention with anticipation to whether the look-ahead performance will be executed.

As shown in Figures 199 (D) and (E), when the decorative pattern (special pattern) that results in an "instant short win" is displayed in a variable manner, the decorative pattern 1600a is displayed as "547" (a specific pattern among the losing patterns) when it stops, and the picture pattern associated with the number pattern is displayed as the same pattern.

As shown in FIG. 199(F), when the lottery result is "instant short hit" in the low probability non-time-saving state, the game is controlled to the low probability time-saving state C and time-saving is granted. In this example, when the lottery result is "instant short hit" in the low probability non-time-saving state, the game is controlled to the low probability time-saving state C until the variable display of the special pattern reaches a predetermined number of times, and the period during which the game is controlled to the low probability time-saving state C is called "help mode S". In the performance display device 1600, when the variable display of the decorative pattern 1600a (special pattern) where the lottery result is "instant short hit" stops, a rescue confirmation image "Entering help mode S!!" is displayed to notify that the game will enter "help mode S". The predetermined number of times is set as follows: 100 times when the lottery result is "instant short hit A", 40 times when the lottery result is "instant short hit B", and 20 times when the lottery result is "instant short hit C".

As shown in FIG. 199(G), if no special symbols are reserved after entering "help mode S", the display of the decorative symbols 1600a (special symbols) does not start immediately, and a volume adjustment bar indicating the currently set volume level and a light adjustment bar indicating the currently set light level are displayed at the bottom of the performance display device 1600. The volume adjustment bar can change the memory display when the volume button is operated to change the volume level, and the light adjustment bar can change the memory display when the light button is operated to change the light level. Also, while the decorative symbols 1600a (special symbols) are being displayed in a variable manner or while the decorative symbols 1600a (special symbols) are not being displayed in a variable manner, the volume level and light level can be changed. In this way, if there are no special patterns reserved and the variable display of the decorative pattern 1600a (special pattern) is not being executed after the variable display of the decorative pattern 1600a (special pattern) has stopped, the volume adjustment bar and light adjustment bar are displayed to let you know that this is a period in which you can change the volume level and light level.

After entering "help mode S", a rescue image "in help mode S" is displayed in the upper left of the performance display device 1600 as a status display showing the current game state, indicating that the low probability time-saving state C is being controlled. In addition, in the low probability time-saving state C, it is easy to receive the game ball B into the variable winning hole 2003, so in the upper right of the performance display device 1600, an arrow bar "Hit left!" is displayed to instruct the player to fire the ball at the variable winning hole 2003 located to the left of the performance display device 1600. This rescue image and arrow bar can be continuously displayed even when the variable display of the decorative pattern 1600a (special pattern) is not being executed, and are continuously displayed in a display position that is not hidden (or does not overlap) with the volume control bar or light control bar described above, so that the player does not accidentally leave the seat even when the low probability time-saving state C is in effect.

As shown in FIG. 199(H), after entering the "help mode S", if there are no reserved special symbols and no balls enter the various winning slots until a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed, the performance display device 1600 executes a demo performance (demonstration) that introduces the concept of the pachinko machine 1. At the end of the demo performance, a "prevention display (not shown)" is also executed to prevent the player from becoming too absorbed in the game. The rescue image and arrow bar described above can continue to be displayed during the demo performance, and are displayed continuously in a display position that is not hidden (or overlapped) by the demo performance or the "prevention display" described above, so that the player does not accidentally leave the seat even when the low probability time-saving state C is in effect.

As shown in FIG. 199(I), after entering "Help Mode S", if a ball enters one of the various winning holes, such as the variable winning hole 2003, the decorative pattern 1600a is displayed in a variable manner. If a ball enters one of the various winning holes, such as the variable winning hole 2003, during the execution of the demo performance, the demo performance ends at that point, and the rescue image and arrow bar continue to be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 199 (J), when "Help Mode S" is being executed, that is, during the control of the low probability time-saving state C, when the decorative pattern 1600a (special pattern) is displayed for a predetermined number of times (for example, the 100th time when the lottery result is "Instant Short Hit A"), a rescue end image "Last Help!" is displayed in the upper right corner of the performance display device 1600 to notify that this is the last decorative pattern 1600a (special pattern) display during the execution of "Help Mode S".

As shown in FIG. 199(K), after "Help Mode S" is executed, that is, after the variable display of the decorative pattern (special pattern) stops for a predetermined number of times during the control of the low-probability time-saving state C (for example, the 100th time when the lottery result is "Instant Short Hit A"), the low-probability time-saving state C ends and a transition to a low-probability non-time-saving state is made, so that "Normal" is displayed in the upper left corner of the performance display device 1600 to notify that the current game state is a low-probability non-time-saving state that has passed through "Help Mode S". In addition, a rescue history image "Help S: 1 time" is displayed in the upper right corner of the performance display device 1600 so that it can be known from the outside that "Help Mode S" has been executed once. In addition, while "Help Mode S" is being executed, that is, while the low-probability time-saving state C is being controlled, if the lottery result is a "jackpot" before the decorative pattern 1600a (special pattern) is displayed in a predetermined number of changes, the low-probability time-saving state C ends and the game state transitions to the type of "jackpot," and "Help Mode S" ends at that point.

[About the count suppression period]
In this example, after power-on with RAM clear or after a jackpot game is played, the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (relief counter) is counted, and when the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief counter = 600), the state is controlled to the low probability time-saving state B. Here, after power-on with RAM clear or after a jackpot game is played, only the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state is counted, and in the high probability state, a "count suppression period" is set in which the number of times the special symbol changes is not counted. On the other hand, in the low probability state, the number of times the special symbol changes is counted regardless of whether the state is a non-time-saving state or a time-saving state, but a part of the low probability non-time-saving state in the low probability state is set as a "count suppression period" in which the number of times the special symbol changes is not counted. The count suppression period set in a part of the low probability non-time-saving state in such a low probability state will be described with reference to FIG. 200. FIG. 200 is a time chart showing a count suppression period.

First, during the count valid period, when a ball enters the first starting hole 2004 or the second starting hole 2005 in the low-probability non-time-saving state and a variable display of a special symbol is executed, the rescue count counter on the main control board 1310 is counted up and updated to approach rescue count counter = 600, which will result in control to low-probability time-saving state B. On the other hand, during the count suppression period, when a ball enters the first starting hole 2004 or the second starting hole 2005 in the low-probability non-time-saving state and a variable display of a special symbol is executed, the rescue count counter on the main control board 1310 is not counted up, and updated so as not to approach rescue count counter = 600, which will result in control to low-probability time-saving state B.

There are also multiple types of count suppression periods. In the count suppression period A, when a ball enters the first start hole 2004 or the second start hole 2005 in the low-probability non-time-saving state and a variable display of a special symbol is executed, the rescue count counter in the main control board 1310 is not counted up, but is maintained. In addition, in the count suppression period B, when a ball enters the first start hole 2004 or the second start hole 2005 in the low-probability non-time-saving state and a variable display of a special symbol is executed, the rescue count counter in the main control board 1310 is counted down, and is updated so as to move away from the rescue count counter = 600, which would control the low-probability time-saving state B. In other words, the count suppression period B is a period that is more disadvantageous than the count suppression period A because it moves away from the rescue count counter = 600, which would control the low-probability time-saving state B, and it becomes difficult to reach the rescue count counter = 600 after that.

In addition, when it is decided by lottery to generate a count suppression period in a low-probability non-time-saving state, the start condition of the count suppression period is met, and the count suppression period is generated. In this example, when it is decided by lottery to generate a count suppression period, the count suppression period is generated suddenly by not notifying the user of this fact. Therefore, at the start of the count suppression period, it is difficult to notice whether the count suppression period has started. However, when it is decided by lottery to generate a count suppression period, a notification of this fact may be given. In addition, in this example, when it is decided by lottery to generate a count suppression period in a low-probability non-time-saving state, the start condition of the count suppression period is met. In addition, for example, when the number of times that the special pattern changes in the low-probability non-time-saving state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 200 times), the start condition of the count suppression period may be met.

Furthermore, after the start of the count suppression period, when the number of times the special pattern changes reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 10 times), the end condition of the count suppression period is met, and the count suppression period is ended. However, in addition to this, for example, the end condition of the count suppression period may be met when it is decided by lottery to end the count suppression period after the start of the count suppression period.

As shown in FIG. 200, during the counting effective period in the low probability non-time-saving state, the rescue count counter on the main control board 1310 is counted up each time the ball enters the first starting hole 2004 or the second starting hole 2005 and the variable display of the special symbol is executed. In this example, when the variable display of the special symbol A to C is executed, the rescue count counter on the main control board 1310 is counted up, and the rescue count counter changes from 450 to 451 to 452.

In addition, during the count valid period in the low probability non-time shortening state, each time a ball enters the first starting hole 2004 or the second starting hole 2005 and a special symbol variation display is executed, information regarding the number of times the special symbol has changed is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 via the external terminal unit 558. Specifically, an external information device installed in the hall computer or the island equipment of the game hall is connected via the external terminal unit 558. The external display device is located at the top of the pachinko machine 1 and displays the game history, such as information regarding the number of times the special symbol has changed and information regarding the number of jackpots. In this example, when special symbol variation displays A to C are executed, information regarding the number of times the special symbol has changed is output to the external display device, and the number of times the special symbol has changed displayed on the external display device changes from 450 to 451 to 452.

In addition, during the count valid period in the low probability non-time-saving state, each time the ball enters the first starting hole 2004 or the second starting hole 2005 and a special pattern variation display is executed, the performance display device 1600 executes a normal performance when executing a performance corresponding to the variation pattern.

Next, in count suppression period A, which starts when the start condition for count suppression period A is satisfied, each time a ball enters the first starting hole 2004 or the second starting hole 2005 and a variable display of a special symbol is executed, the rescue count counter on the main control board 1310 is not counted up, but is maintained at 452. In this example, when variable displays of special symbols D, E, etc. are executed during count suppression period A, the rescue count counter on the main control board 1310 is not counted up, but is maintained at 452.

In addition, during count suppression period A, each time the ball enters the first starting hole 2004 or the second starting hole 2005 and the special pattern variation display is executed, information regarding the number of times the special pattern changes is output to the external display device. In this example, during count suppression period A, when special pattern variation displays D, E, etc. are executed, information regarding the number of times the special pattern changes is output to the external display device, and the number of times the special pattern changes displayed on the external display device changes from 453 → 454 → (+1 per variation).

In addition, in the count suppression period A, the performance display device 1600 executes different performances, such as special pattern variable display D, which is the first special pattern variable display, and special pattern variable display E, which is the second and subsequent special pattern variable display. Here, during the count suppression period A, during the execution of special pattern variable display D, which is the execution of the first special pattern variable display, a common performance that is the same as the special pattern variable displays A to C in the count valid period in terms of background image, etc., is executed when executing a performance corresponding to the variable pattern. In this way, since there is no clear notification at the start of the count suppression period A, it is difficult to recognize whether it is the count valid period or the count suppression period A, and it is possible to make it difficult to notice that a period less favorable than the count valid period has begun.

On the other hand, during the count suppression period A, when the special symbol variable display E is being executed, which is the second or subsequent times that the special symbol variable display is being executed, a pinch effect 1 (specific effect) that suggests that it is the count suppression period A is executed when executing the effect corresponding to the variable pattern. Here, as the pinch effect 1, an effect is executed in which a background image (a background image different from the special symbol variable displays A to C during the count valid period) or a mini character is displayed that suggests that it is the count suppression period A, or sound or light is emitted that suggests that it is the count suppression period A. In this way, since the count suppression period A suggests that it is the count suppression period A except for the first special symbol variable display, it can be inferred that it is the count suppression period A. Also, by not executing the pinch effect 1 only during the execution of the first special symbol variable display during the count suppression period A, it is possible to prevent the start of the count suppression period A from being noticed too early.

In the above, pinch effect 1 (specific effect) is not executed at the start of count suppression period A (while the variable display D of the special pattern is being executed), but pinch effect 1 may be executed from the start of count suppression period A.

Next, during the count valid period that begins when the end condition of the count suppression period A is met, the rescue count counter on the main control board 1310 is incremented each time the ball enters the first starting hole 2004 or the second starting hole 2005 and the variable display of the special symbol is executed. In this example, when the variable display of the special symbol F to H is executed, the rescue count counter on the main control board 1310 is incremented, and the rescue count counter changes from 453 to 454 to 455.

In addition, during the count valid period, each time the ball enters the first starting hole 2004 or the second starting hole 2005 and the special pattern variation display is executed, information regarding the number of times the special pattern has changed is output to the external display device. In this example, during the count valid period, when the special pattern variation display F to H is executed, information regarding the number of times the special pattern has changed is output to the external display device, and the number of times the special pattern has changed displayed on the external display device changes from 463 to 464 to 465.

In addition, during the count valid period, each time the ball enters the first starting hole 2004 or the second starting hole 2005 and a special pattern variation display is executed, the performance display device 1600 executes a normal performance when executing a performance corresponding to the variation pattern.

Next, in count suppression period B, which begins when the start condition for count suppression period B is met, the rescue count counter on the main control board 1310 is counted down each time a ball enters the first start hole 2004 or the second start hole 2005 and a special symbol variation display is executed. In this example, in count suppression period B, when a special symbol variation display I or the like is executed, the rescue count counter on the main control board 1310 is counted down, and the rescue count counter changes from 454 to (-1 per variation).

In addition, during count suppression period B, each time the ball enters the first starting hole 2004 or the second starting hole 2005 and the special pattern variation display is executed, information regarding the number of times the special pattern changes is output to the external display device. In this example, during count suppression period B, when special pattern variation display I is executed, information regarding the number of times the special pattern changes is output to the external display device, and the number of times the special pattern changes displayed on the external display device changes from 466 to (+1 per variation).

In addition, during count suppression period B, each time the ball enters the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005 and the special pattern variable display is executed, an effect corresponding to the variable pattern is executed, but when the effect corresponding to the variable pattern is executed, a common effect is executed that is the same as the variable display of special patterns F to H during the count valid period in terms of background image, etc. In this way, since there is no clear notification when the count suppression period B is executed, it is difficult to recognize whether it is the count valid period or count suppression period B, and it is possible to make it difficult to notice that a period less favorable than the count valid period is being executed.

Next, during the count effective period that begins when the end condition of the count suppression period B is met, the rescue count counter on the main control board 1310 is counted up each time a ball enters the first starting hole 2004 or the second starting hole 2005 and a special symbol variable display is executed. In this example, when a special symbol variable display J is executed, the rescue count counter on the main control board 1310 is counted up and changes to 443.

In addition, during the count valid period, each time the ball enters the first starting hole 2004 or the second starting hole 2005 and the special pattern change display is executed, information regarding the number of times the special pattern changes is output to the external display device. In this example, during the count valid period, when the special pattern change display J is executed, information regarding the number of times the special pattern changes is output to the external display device, and the number of times the special pattern changes displayed on the external display device changes to 476.

In addition, during the count valid period, each time the ball enters the first starting hole 2004 or the second starting hole 2005 and a special pattern variation display is executed, the performance display device 1600 executes a normal performance when executing a performance corresponding to the variation pattern.

As described above, when count suppression period A or count suppression period B occurs, the information on the number of times the special symbol changes, displayed on the external display device, will not match the rescue count counter on the main control board 1310. In other words, even if the information on the number of times the special symbol changes, displayed on the external display device, is visually recognized, it is not possible to know what number of changes the rescue count counter has reached relative to the rescue count counter = 600, which will control the game to low-probability time-saving state B. For this reason, the information on the number of times the special symbol changes, displayed on the external display device, is only a guideline for the rescue count counter = 600, which will control the game to low-probability time-saving state B, and it is possible to have fun guessing what number of changes the rescue count counter has reached.

In addition, during the count suppression period B, the rescue count counter in the main control board 1310 is counted down each time the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 and the variable display of the special symbol is executed, but the count suppression period B is configured so that the execution rate is higher (the probability of the start condition being established is higher) during control of the low-probability non-time-saving state after the rescue count counter reaches 600 than during control of the low-probability non-time-saving state before the rescue count counter reaches 600. Here, the rescue count counter counts the number of times the special symbol changes during the count effective period in the low-probability non-time-saving state, and when the rescue count counter reaches 600 in the low-probability non-time-saving state, control is performed to the low-probability time-saving state B. Then, in the low-probability time-saving state B, if the variable display of the special symbol is executed 700 times without a jackpot, control is again performed to the low-probability non-time-saving state, and the rescue count counter can be counted up. In this regard, in the low-probability non-time-saving state after the rescue count counter reaches 600 and control is placed into the low-probability time-saving state B, control of the low-probability time-saving state B has already been achieved once, so achieving the low-probability time-saving state B a second time is more difficult than the first time. In other words, in the low-probability non-time-saving state after the rescue count counter reaches 600 and control is placed into the low-probability time-saving state B, by increasing the execution rate of the count suppression period B, it becomes more difficult to achieve the low-probability time-saving state B than the first time, and excessive rescue can be suppressed.

In addition, count suppression period A or count suppression period B can be forcibly ended by the operation of the hall manager. Specifically, if the power is turned off during count suppression period A or count suppression period B, and then turned on again with the RAM cleared, the count valid period will be resumed. As a result, if a player is avoiding playing because of count suppression period A or count suppression period B, the hall manager can simply end count suppression period A or count suppression period B by operation, and by returning to the count valid period, players can be encouraged to participate in the game for the first time with high hopes.

[About the period when instant short-time winning symbols are invalid]
In this example, in the low probability non-time-saving state, when an immediate short hit occurs, the state is controlled to the low probability time-saving state C. Here, in the high probability non-time-saving state, the high probability time-saving state, the low probability time-saving state A, the low probability time-saving state B, and the low probability time-saving state C as game states other than the low probability non-time-saving state, a "period of immediate short hit pattern invalidity" is set in which the state is not controlled to the low probability time-saving state C in the event of an immediate short hit. In addition, a portion of the low probability non-time-saving state is also set as a "period of immediate short hit pattern invalidity" in which the state is not controlled to the low probability time-saving state C in the event of an immediate short hit. The period of immediate short hit pattern invalidity set in a portion of such a low probability non-time-saving state will be described with reference to FIG. 201. FIG. 201 is a time chart showing a period of immediate short hit pattern invalidity.

First, during the period when the instantaneous short hit pattern is valid, if an instantaneous short hit occurs in the low-probability non-time-saving state, control is performed to low-probability time-saving state C. On the other hand, during the period when the instantaneous short hit pattern is invalid, if an instantaneous short hit occurs in the low-probability non-time-saving state, control is not performed to low-probability time-saving state C, but the low-probability non-time-saving state is maintained as the game state before the instantaneous short hit.

In addition, there are multiple types of instantaneous short win symbol invalid periods. Instantaneous short win symbol invalid period A has the same start conditions as instantaneous short win symbol invalid period B, but different end conditions.

In addition, in the low-probability non-time-saving state, when it is decided by lottery to generate an immediate short win pattern invalid period, the start condition of the immediate short win pattern invalid period is met, and the immediate short win pattern invalid period is generated. In this example, when it is decided by lottery to generate an immediate short win pattern invalid period, no notification is given, so that the immediate short win pattern invalid period occurs suddenly. For this reason, at the start of the immediate short win pattern invalid period, it is difficult to notice whether the immediate short win pattern invalid period has started. However, when it is decided by lottery to generate an immediate short win pattern invalid period, a notification of that effect may be given. Also, in this example, the start condition for the immediate short win pattern invalid period is met when it is decided by lottery to generate an immediate short win pattern invalid period in a low probability non-time-saving state, but other than this, for example, the start condition for the immediate short win pattern invalid period may be met when the number of times the special pattern changes reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 200 times) in a low probability non-time-saving state.

In addition, during the instant short win pattern invalid period, after the start of instant short win pattern invalid period A, when the number of times the special pattern changes reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 times), the end condition of instant short win pattern invalid period A is met, and instant short win pattern invalid period A is terminated. On the other hand, after the start of instant short win pattern invalid period B, when it is decided by lottery to end instant short win pattern invalid period B, the end condition of instant short win pattern invalid period B is met, and instant short win pattern invalid period B is terminated.

In addition, if an immediate short win occurs during the immediate short win pattern valid period, the immediate short win pattern is displayed as a stopped pattern for the special pattern in the variable display of the special pattern on the function display unit 1400, and the immediate short win pattern is displayed as a stopped pattern for the decorative pattern in the variable display of the decorative pattern on the performance display device 1600. On the other hand, if an immediate short win occurs during the immediate short win pattern invalid period, the immediate short win pattern is displayed as a stopped pattern for the special pattern in the variable display of the special pattern on the function display unit 1400, but the immediate short win pattern is not displayed as a stopped pattern for the decorative pattern in the variable display of the decorative pattern on the performance display device 1600, and a pattern different from the immediate short win pattern (in this example, a miss pattern) is displayed as a stopped pattern. In this way, during the period when the instant short win pattern is invalid, if an instant short win occurs, the stopped decorative pattern on the performance display device 1600 does not indicate this, so the sense of loss caused by the instant short win being invalidated can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 201, during the immediate short win pattern valid period in the low probability non-time shortening state, the special pattern variation display A to C is executed every time a ball enters the first start hole 2004 or the second start hole 2005. During such an immediate short win pattern valid period, information regarding the immediate short win pattern stop can be output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 via the external terminal unit 558. In other words, during the immediate short win pattern valid period, if an immediate short win occurs, information regarding the immediate short win pattern stop is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1, whereas if an immediate short win does not occur, information regarding the immediate short win pattern stop is not output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, a hall computer and an external information device provided on the top of the pachinko machine 1 are connected via the external terminal unit 558. The external display device is configured to display information regarding the number of times the special pattern varies, information regarding the number of jackpots, information regarding the number of immediate short wins, and the like. In this way, by outputting information about the stopping of the immediate short win symbol to the hall computer, the hall manager can know that an immediate short win has occurred, and by outputting information about the stopping of the immediate short win symbol to an external display device, the player can know that an immediate short win has occurred.

In addition, during the immediate short win pattern valid period in the low probability non-time shortening state, each time the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 and the special pattern variation display A to C is executed, the normal variation is executed when the variation display device 1600 executes the variation corresponding to the variation pattern.

Next, in the instant short hit symbol invalid period A, which starts when the start condition of the instant short hit symbol invalid period A is satisfied, the variable display D, E of the special symbol is executed every time the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005. In such instant short hit symbol invalid period A, information regarding the stop of the instant short hit symbol cannot be output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 via the external terminal unit 558. In other words, if an instant short hit occurs during the instant short hit symbol invalid period A, information regarding the stop of the instant short hit symbol is not output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1. In this way, even if an instant short hit occurs during the instant short hit symbol invalid period A, the hall manager cannot know that an instant short hit has occurred because information regarding the stop of the instant short hit symbol is not output to the hall computer, and the player cannot know that an instant short hit has occurred because information regarding the stop of the instant short hit symbol is not output to the external display device.

In addition, in the instant short hit symbol invalid period A, the effect display device 1600 executes different effects between the special symbol variable display D, which is the first special symbol variable display, and the special symbol variable display E, which is the second and subsequent special symbol variable display. Here, during the instant short hit symbol invalid period A, during the execution of the special symbol variable display D, which is the execution of the first special symbol variable display, a common effect that is the same as the special symbol variable displays A to C in the instant short hit symbol valid period in terms of background images, etc., is executed when executing an effect corresponding to the variable pattern. In this way, since there is no clear notification at the start of the instant short hit symbol invalid period A, it is difficult to recognize whether it is the instant short hit symbol valid period or the instant short hit symbol invalid period A, and it is possible to make it difficult to notice that a period less favorable than the instant short hit symbol valid period has begun.

On the other hand, during the instant short hit symbol invalid period A, during the execution of the special symbol variable display E during the second or subsequent special symbol variable display, a pinch effect 2 (invalid corresponding effect) is executed when executing an effect corresponding to the variable pattern, which indicates that it is the instant short hit symbol invalid period A. Here, as the pinch effect 2, a background image (a background image different from the special symbol variable displays A to C during the instant short hit symbol valid period) or a mini character is displayed indicating that it is the instant short hit symbol invalid period A, or a sound or light is output indicating that it is the instant short hit symbol invalid period A is executed. In this way, during the instant short hit symbol invalid period A, it is suggested that it is the instant short hit symbol invalid period A, except for the first special symbol variable display, so it can be inferred that it is the instant short hit symbol invalid period A. Also, by not executing the pinch effect 2 only during the execution of the first special symbol variable display during the instant short hit symbol invalid period A, it is possible to prevent the start of the instant short hit symbol invalid period A from being noticed early.

In the above, pinch effect 2 (invalidation response effect) is not executed at the start of the instant short win pattern invalid period A (while the special pattern variable display D is being executed), but pinch effect 2 may be executed from the start of the instant short win pattern invalid period A.

In addition, when the number of times the special pattern changes reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 10 times), the end condition of the instant short hit pattern invalid period A is met and the instant short hit pattern invalid period A ends, but in the few special pattern changes (e.g., 4 changes) before the end condition of the instant short hit pattern invalid period A is met, the performance display device 1600 displays a count display indicating the remaining number of times the special pattern changes until the instant short hit pattern invalid period A ends. This allows you to continue playing with anticipation until the instant short hit pattern invalid period A ends.

Next, during the immediate short hit symbol valid period that begins when the end condition of the immediate short hit symbol invalid period A is met, the variable display of special symbols F to H is executed each time a ball enters the first starting hole 2004 or the second starting hole 2005. During such an immediate short hit symbol valid period, information regarding the stopping of the immediate short hit symbol can be output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 via the external terminal unit 558. In other words, during the immediate short hit symbol valid period, if an immediate short hit occurs, information regarding the stopping of the immediate short hit symbol is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1, whereas if an immediate short hit does not occur, information regarding the stopping of the immediate short hit symbol is not output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, during the effective period of the instantaneous short winning pattern, each time the ball enters the first starting hole 2004 or the second starting hole 2005 and the special pattern variation display F to H is executed, the normal variation is executed when the variation corresponding to the variation pattern is executed on the variation display device 1600.

Next, in the instant short hit symbol invalid period B, which starts when the start condition of the instant short hit symbol invalid period B is satisfied, the special symbol variable display I and the like are executed every time a ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005. In such instant short hit symbol invalid period B, information regarding the instant short hit symbol stopping cannot be output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 via the external terminal unit 558. In other words, if an instant short hit occurs during the instant short hit symbol invalid period B, information regarding the instant short hit symbol stopping is not output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1. In this way, even if an instant short hit occurs during the instant short hit symbol invalid period B, the hall manager cannot know that an instant short hit has occurred because information regarding the instant short hit symbol stopping is not output to the hall computer, and the player cannot know that an instant short hit has occurred because information regarding the instant short hit symbol stopping is not output to the external display device.

In addition, in the instant short hit symbol invalid period B, the effect display device 1600 executes different effects between the special symbol variable display I, which is the first special symbol variable display, and the special symbol variable display, which is the second or subsequent special symbol variable display. Here, during the instant short hit symbol invalid period B, during the special symbol variable display I, which is the first special symbol variable display being executed, a common effect that is the same as the special symbol variable display F to G in the instant short hit symbol valid period in terms of background image, etc., is executed when executing an effect corresponding to the variable pattern. In this way, since there is no clear notification at the start of the instant short hit symbol invalid period B, it is difficult to recognize whether it is the instant short hit symbol valid period or the instant short hit symbol invalid period B, and it is possible to make it difficult to notice that a period less favorable than the instant short hit symbol valid period has begun.

On the other hand, during the instant short hit symbol invalid period B, when the special symbol variable display is being executed for the second or subsequent times, a pinch effect 2 (invalid corresponding effect) is executed to indicate that the instant short hit symbol invalid period B is in effect when executing an effect corresponding to the variable pattern. Here, as the pinch effect 2, a background image (a background image different from the variable display A to C of the special symbol during the instant short hit symbol valid period) or a mini character is displayed indicating that the instant short hit symbol invalid period B is in effect, or a sound or light is emitted indicating that the instant short hit symbol invalid period B is in effect. In this way, the instant short hit symbol invalid period B is inferred to be the instant short hit symbol invalid period B, since it is indicated except for the first special symbol variable display. Also, by not executing the pinch effect 2 only during the first special symbol variable display of the instant short hit symbol invalid period A, it is possible to prevent the start of the instant short hit symbol invalid period B from being noticed early. In addition, the pinch effect 2 indicating that the instantaneous short win pattern is invalid period B is the same as the pinch effect 2 indicating that the instantaneous short win pattern is invalid period A, but the content of the effect may be different.

In the above, pinch effect 2 (invalidation response effect) is not executed at the start of the instant short win pattern invalid period B (while the special pattern variable display I is being executed), but pinch effect 2 may be executed from the start of the instant short win pattern invalid period B.

In addition, when it is decided by lottery to end the immediate short hit pattern invalid period B, the end condition of the immediate short hit pattern invalid period B is met and the immediate short hit pattern invalid period B is ended, but before the end condition of the immediate short hit pattern invalid period B is met, the performance display device 1600 does not display the count display that is executed before the end of the immediate short hit pattern invalid period A. This is because the end condition of the immediate short hit pattern invalid period B is when it is decided by lottery to end the immediate short hit pattern invalid period B, and therefore the end timing of the immediate short hit pattern invalid period B cannot be determined in advance.

Next, during the immediate short hit symbol valid period that begins when the end condition of the immediate short hit symbol invalid period B is met, the variable display J of the special symbol is executed when the ball enters the first starting hole 2004 or the second starting hole 2005. During such an immediate short hit symbol valid period, information regarding the stopping of the immediate short hit symbol can be output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 via the external terminal unit 558. In other words, during the immediate short hit symbol valid period, if an immediate short hit occurs, information regarding the stopping of the immediate short hit symbol is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1, whereas if an immediate short hit does not occur, information regarding the stopping of the immediate short hit symbol is not output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, during the effective period of the instantaneous short winning pattern, when the ball enters the first starting hole 2004 or the second starting hole 2005 and the special pattern change display J is executed, the normal effect is executed when the effect corresponding to the change pattern is executed on the effect display device 1600.

As described above, when the number of times the special pattern changes reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 times), the end condition of the immediate short hit pattern invalid period A is satisfied, and the immediate short hit pattern invalid period A is terminated. However, if it is decided by lottery to end the immediate short hit pattern invalid period A before the end condition of the immediate short hit pattern invalid period A is satisfied, the end condition of the immediate short hit pattern invalid period A may be satisfied and the immediate short hit pattern invalid period A may be forcibly terminated. In this example, in the several times of special pattern change display (for example, 4 changes) before the end condition of the immediate short hit pattern invalid period A is satisfied, the performance display device 1600 displays a count display indicating the remaining number of times the special pattern change display will end until the immediate short hit pattern invalid period A ends, but when the immediate short hit pattern invalid period A is forcibly terminated, it is forcibly terminated even if the count display is in the middle, without waiting for the count display to end.

In addition, the instant short win symbol invalid period A and the instant short win symbol invalid period B can be forcibly ended by the operation of the hall manager. Specifically, if the power is turned off during the instant short win symbol invalid period A or the instant short win symbol invalid period B, and then the power is turned on with the RAM cleared, the instant short win symbol valid period is restored. As a result, if a player is avoiding playing because the instant short win symbol invalid period A or the instant short win symbol invalid period B has occurred, the instant short win symbol invalid period A or the instant short win symbol invalid period B can be ended by the operation of the hall manager, and the instant short win symbol invalid period can be restored to the instant short win symbol valid period, allowing new players to participate in the game with high hopes.

As described above, some of the low probability non-time-saving states among the low probability states are set as "count suppression periods" in which the number of times the special symbol changes is not counted. Among the count suppression periods, in count suppression period A, when the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 in the low probability non-time-saving state and the special symbol change display is executed, the rescue number counter in the main control board 1310 is not counted up, and the rescue number counter is maintained. In such count suppression period A, even if an immediate short hit occurs, an "instant short hit symbol invalid period" in which the game is not controlled to the low probability time-saving state C may be generated at the same time. The case in which such a count suppression period A and an immediate short hit symbol invalid period are used together will be described with reference to FIG. 202. FIG. 202 is a time chart showing the combined use of the count suppression period A and the immediate short hit symbol invalid period.

As shown in FIG. 202, during the count valid period, the immediate short win pattern valid period occurs at the same time, so if an immediate short win occurs during such a count valid period, the game is controlled to low probability time-saving state C.

In addition, during the count suppression period A, the instant short win pattern invalid period is generated at the same time. In other words, when an instant short win occurs during the count suppression period A, the game is not controlled to the low probability time-saving state C, but is maintained in the low probability non-time-saving state as the game state before the instant short win. Here, during the count suppression period A and the instant short win pattern invalid period, during the execution of the special pattern variable display D during which the first special pattern variable display is being executed, a common effect that is the same as the special pattern variable display A to C during the count valid period in terms of background image, etc. is executed when executing an effect corresponding to the variable pattern. On the other hand, during the count suppression period A and the instant short win pattern invalid period, during the execution of the special pattern variable display E during which the second or subsequent special pattern variable display is being executed, a pinch effect 2 (invalid corresponding effect) that suggests that it is the count suppression period A and the instant short win pattern invalid period is executed when executing an effect corresponding to the variable pattern.

On the other hand, in count suppression period B, the immediate short win pattern invalid period is not generated at the same time. In other words, if an immediate short win occurs during count suppression period B, it is controlled to low probability time-saving state C. Here, in count suppression period B, each time the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 and the special pattern variable display is executed, a performance corresponding to the variable pattern is executed, but when the performance corresponding to the variable pattern is executed, a common performance that is the same as the special pattern variable display F to H during the count valid period in terms of the background image, etc. is executed.

As described above, in the count suppression period B, when the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 in the low probability non-time-saving state and the variable display of the special pattern is executed, the rescue count counter in the main control board 1310 is counted down and updated to move away from the rescue count counter = 600, which will control to the low probability time-saving state B. In other words, the count suppression period B is a more unfavorable period than the count suppression period A because it moves away from the rescue count counter = 600, which will control to the low probability time-saving state B, and it becomes difficult to reach the rescue count counter = 600 after that. And, in the count suppression period B, if the immediate short hit pattern invalid period occurs at the same time, not only will it be difficult to reach the rescue count counter = 600, but even if an immediate short hit occurs, it will not be controlled to the low probability time-saving state C, and the probability of obtaining the low probability time-saving state (low probability time-saving state B, low probability time-saving state C) will be extremely low. In this example, by not allowing the immediate short win pattern invalid period to occur at the same time during count suppression period B, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of extremely unfavorable periods.

[Regarding RTC production priority]
In this example, when the peripheral control board 1510 is powered on, it acquires calendar information specifying the date and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown), and sets the current calendar information and current time information in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Then, the peripheral control board 1510 uses such RTC (real-time clock) information to execute an RTC performance separately from the pattern change performance (performance corresponding to the change pattern) every time a predetermined period (for example, 3 hours) has passed since the power was turned on. In this RTC performance, a dedicated performance separate from the pattern change performance (performance corresponding to the change pattern) is executed by the performance display of the performance display device 1600, the operation of the movable bodies A to C, the lamp light emission, and the sound output, so that it is possible to provide a different enjoyment from the pattern change performance (performance corresponding to the change pattern), and it is expected that the operation rate of the pachinko machine 1 will be increased.

Both the RTC effect and the pattern change effect (the effect corresponding to the change pattern) execute the effect display of the effect display device 1600, the operation of the movable bodies A to C, the lamp illumination and the sound output, and the effect elements used in the effects overlap (at least partially overlap). Here, since the RTC effect is executed every time a predetermined period (for example, 3 hours) has passed since the power was turned on, the execution timing of the RTC effect and the execution timing of the effect before and after the variable display of the special pattern that will control the low probability time-saving state B reaches 600 times (rescue count counter = 600) may overlap. Similarly, the execution timing of the effect before and after the instant short win that will control the low probability time-saving state C may overlap. In such a case, the execution of the RTC effect is prioritized, and the effect before and after the variable display of the special pattern reaches 600 times (rescue count counter = 600) and some of the effects before and after the instant short win are restricted. Here, we will first explain the RTC effects and the effects before and after the special symbol changing display reaches 600 times (rescue counter = 600), then explain the case where the RTC effect start condition is met before the special symbol changing display reaches 600 times (rescue counter = 600) and the case where the RTC effect start condition is met after the special symbol changing display reaches 600 times (rescue counter = 600). Then, we will explain the effects before and after an immediate short win, and then explain the case where the RTC effect start condition is met before an immediate short win and the case where the RTC effect start condition is met after an immediate short win.

Figure 203 is a time chart showing the progress of the RTC performance. As shown in Figure 203, before t1 when a predetermined time (e.g., 3 hours) has passed since the power is turned on and the start condition of the RTC performance is met, the RTC performance is not executed, and the normal performance state is set so that a pattern change performance (performance corresponding to a change pattern) can be executed. In the normal performance state, when a pattern change (e.g., pattern change A) is executed, a performance corresponding to the change pattern is executed as a pattern change performance. In the pattern change performance, the performance display of the performance display device 1600, the operation of the movable bodies A to C, the lamp light emission, the sound light emission, and other performance contents are set to a change pattern determined by the main control board 1310, and the performance display of the performance display device 1600, the operation of the movable bodies A to C, the lamp light emission, the sound light emission, and other performance contents are executed based on the change pattern.

The performance display device 1600 executes a decorative pattern change display as a pattern change performance, and also executes a performance display suggesting the lottery result. The movable bodies A to C are configured to operate at a predetermined timing linked to the performance display suggesting the lottery result. For lamp illumination, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and door frame 3 are configured to emit light at a predetermined timing linked to the performance display suggesting the lottery result. For audio output, background music is output from the speaker while the performance display suggesting the lottery result is being displayed.

Next, at t1, when a predetermined time (e.g., 3 hours) has elapsed since power-on and the conditions for starting the RTC performance are met, the device is put into an RTC performance state in which the RTC performance is executed. If t1 arrives while the pattern change B is being executed, the execution of the pattern change performance is restricted and the RTC performance is executed with priority. In the RTC performance, the performance content for the RTC is executed with respect to the performance display of the performance display device 1600, the operation of the movable bodies A to C, the lamp lighting, the sound lighting, and other performance content. The RTC performance state continues to be executed from t1, when the conditions for starting the RTC performance are met, until t4, when a predetermined time (e.g., 10 minutes) has elapsed and the conditions for ending the RTC performance are met, at which point the device transitions from the RTC performance state to the normal performance state at t4.

Specifically, the performance display device 1600 first executes an RTC countdown display that counts down (for example, 3 → 2 → 1) until the start of the RTC performance from t1 to t2. The RTC countdown display starts at t1 without depending on the pattern change, and ends at t2, when 3 seconds have passed since t1, without depending on the pattern change. In other words, the RTC countdown display is executed for 3 seconds, from t1 to t2. Then, from t2 to tx, an RTC start display is executed to notify the start of the RTC performance. The RTC start display starts at t2 without depending on the pattern change, and is executed for at least t3, when 5 seconds have passed since t2, and ends at tx, when the first pattern change (pattern change D) starts after t3, depending on the pattern change. In other words, the RTC start display is executed for a variable time of 5 seconds + α, from t2 to tx. If there is a period after t3 during which the pattern change (pattern change performance) does not start, the RTC start display ends after waiting for the pattern change D to start after t3.

Then, in the effect display device 1600, from tx to t4 when the end condition of the RTC effect is met, an effect display for RTC that is not executed except for the RTC effect is executed. The effect display for RTC is started after waiting for the first start of the pattern change (pattern change D) after t3, so that the player can play with the desire to start the pattern change D as soon as possible after t3.

Moveable bodies A to C are also configured to operate sequentially from t2 to t3 in response to the execution of the RTC start display on the performance display device 1600. Specifically, from t2 to t3, the RTC start operation of movable body A, the RTC start operation of movable body B, and the RTC start operation of movable body C are executed sequentially. Meanwhile, during the RTC performance state of t1 to t4, except for the period from t2 to t3, movable bodies A to C are not used in the RTC performance, and movable bodies A to C execute the operation specified in the pattern change performance (performance corresponding to the change pattern).

In addition, for lamp illumination, from t1 to t4, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and door frame 3 are illuminated in an RTC illumination pattern in conjunction with the execution of the RTC performance. In addition, for audio output, from t1 to t4, background music for the RTC is output from the speaker in conjunction with the execution of the RTC performance.

(Limitation of Help Mode L effects)
FIG. 204 is a time chart showing the progress of the presentation before and after the variable display of the special symbol reaches 600 times (rescue count counter = 600). As shown in FIG. 204, after power-on with RAM clear or after a big win game, when a symbol change B is performed in which the variable display of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (rescue count counter = 600), at the time t5 when the symbol change B stops, the low probability non-time-saving state is shifted to the low probability time-saving state B. Also, before t5, the state is changed to a help mode L premonition presentation state in which a "help mode L premonition presentation" is executed, which suggests that the "help mode L" is imminent, whereas from t5, the state is changed to a help mode L presentation state in which a "help mode L presentation" is executed, which indicates that the "help mode L" is being executed. In this example, when the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state reaches 600 times (rescue count counter = 600), the special symbol change display is controlled to the low probability time-saving state B until it reaches 700 times, and the period during which the special symbol change display is controlled to the low probability time-saving state B is called "help mode L". And, the help mode L presentation state is configured to transition from the low probability time-saving state B to the low probability non-time-saving state and transition from the help mode L presentation state to the normal presentation state at the time t6 when the 700th pattern change X stops if there is no big win, and at the time t6 when the pattern change that results in the big win stops if there is a big win, until the special symbol change display in the low probability time-saving state B reaches 700 times.

In the above-mentioned performance example, when the display of the decorative pattern changes on the performance display device 1600 stops, a counting performance is executed to notify the number of times the special pattern has changed in the low probability state until the display of the special pattern changes in the low probability state reaches 500 to 600 times, and such a counting performance corresponds to a "help mode L precursor performance." In addition, after control of the low probability time-saving state B begins, the performance display device 1600 displays "help mode L in progress," which indicates that the low probability time-saving state B is being controlled, and such a display corresponds to a "help mode L performance."

Specifically, before t5, the effect display device 1600 executes an effect display for a help mode L precursor that counts down until the start of the help mode L effect (for example, a count effect that notifies the player of the number of times the special pattern has changed in the low probability state). Then, after t5, an effect display for help mode L is executed, indicating that help mode L is being executed (low probability time-saving state B is being controlled). Note that even if there is a period after t5 during which pattern change (pattern change effect) does not start (for example, between pattern change C and pattern change D), the effect display for help mode L continues to be executed during that period.

In addition, movable bodies A to C are not used in the Help Mode L precursor performance before t5 and in the Help Mode L performance after t5, and instead perform the action specified in the pattern change performance (performance corresponding to the change pattern).

In addition, for lamp illumination, before t5, in conjunction with the execution of the help mode L precursor performance, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and door frame 3 are made to emit light in a lighting pattern for the help mode L precursor, and after t5, in conjunction with the execution of the help mode L performance, they are made to emit light in a lighting pattern for the help mode L. In addition, for audio output, before t5, in conjunction with the execution of the help mode L precursor performance, background music for the help mode L precursor is output from the speaker, and after t5, in conjunction with the execution of the help mode L performance, background music for the help mode L is output from the speaker.

Figure 205 is a time chart showing the progress of the presentation when the conditions for starting the RTC presentation are met before the variable display of the special symbol reaches 600 times (rescue count counter = 600). In this example, at time t1 when the conditions for starting the RTC presentation are met after a predetermined time (e.g., 3 hours) has elapsed since power was turned on, it is determined whether the presentation is in the help mode L premonition presentation state, the help mode L presentation state, or a normal presentation state that is neither the help mode L premonition presentation state nor the help mode L presentation state. The above describes the case where it is determined to be in the normal presentation state at time t1, and the following describes the case where it is determined to be in the help mode L premonition presentation state or the help mode L presentation state at time t1.

As shown in FIG. 205, if the state is in the Help Mode L Premonition state when t1 arrives, at which the condition for starting the RTC effect is met, the state transitions from the Help Mode L Premonition state to the RTC effect state. Also, after power-on with RAM clear or after a jackpot game is played, if pattern change B is executed in which the special pattern change display reaches 600 times (rescue count counter = 600) in the low probability state, the state transitions from the low probability non-time-saving state to the low probability time-saving state B at t5, at which point pattern change B stops.

Specifically, at time t1, the effect display device 1600 is executing an effect display for the help mode L precursor that counts down until the start of the help mode L effect (for example, a count effect that notifies the number of times the special pattern has changed in the low probability state), and from t1 to t5, when the pattern change B stops and the display of the special pattern change in the low probability state reaches 600 times (rescue count counter = 600), the effect display for the help mode L precursor is continuously executed. Then, after t5, control is made to the low probability time-saving state C, and thus the effect display for the help mode L is executed, which indicates that the help mode L is being executed (low probability time-saving state B is being controlled). In other words, between t1 and tx, the RTC countdown display and RTC start display as RTC effects are not executed.

In addition, in the effect display device 1600, from tx to t4 when the end condition of the RTC effect is met, in addition to the effect display for help mode L, an effect display for RTC that is not executed except for the RTC effect is executed. The effect display for RTC is set to start after waiting for the first start of the pattern change (pattern change D) after t3. In such a state, for example, the effect display for RTC is executed using the entire display area, and the effect display for help mode L is executed so as to display "Help mode L in" in the upper left corner of the display area, indicating that the low probability time-saving state B is being controlled.

Furthermore, between t2 and t3, movable bodies A to C are set to operate sequentially even though the RTC start display is not executed on the performance display device 1600. Specifically, between t2 and t3, the RTC start operation of movable body A, the RTC start operation of movable body B, and the RTC start operation of movable body C are executed sequentially. In this way, during the execution of pattern change B, in which the variable display of the special pattern in the low probability state reaches 600 times (rescue count counter = 600), when t2 arrives at which the RTC start operation of movable bodies A to C is started, the operation specified in the pattern change performance (performance corresponding to the variation pattern) is terminated, and the RTC start operation of movable bodies A to C is forcibly started. During the RTC start operation of movable bodies A to C, when the time t5 arrives, which is the time when the pattern change B stops and the display of the special pattern change in the low probability state reaches 600 times (rescue count counter = 600), the RTC start operation of movable bodies A to C that is being executed continues without ending. Also, among the RTC performance states t1 to t4, for t2 to t3, the operation specified in the pattern change performance (performance corresponding to the change pattern) is not executed for movable bodies A to C, but except for the period t2 to t3, movable bodies A to C are not used in the RTC performance, and the operation specified in the pattern change performance (performance corresponding to the change pattern) is executed for movable bodies A to C.

In addition, in terms of lamp illumination, even though the RTC countdown display or RTC start display is not being executed on the performance display device 1600 from t1 to t3, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and door frame 3 are made to emit light in the RTC light pattern, and continue to emit light in the RTC light pattern until t4. In other words, even though the performance display device 1600 is executing a performance display for a help mode L precursor or a performance display for a help mode L from t1 to t3, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and door frame 3 are not made to emit light in the help mode L precursor or the help mode L light pattern. In addition, in terms of audio output, even though the performance display device 1600 is not executing a RTC countdown display or RTC start display from t1 to t3, background music for the RTC is output from the speaker, and background music for the RTC is output continuously until t4. In other words, between t1 and t3, even though the performance display device 1600 is displaying the premonitions of help mode L and the premonitions of help mode L, the speaker is not outputting background music for the premonitions of help mode L and background music for help mode L.

As described above, during the execution of the RTC start operation of movable bodies A to C, when t5 arrives, which is the time when pattern change B stops when the display of the special pattern change in the low probability state reaches 600 times (rescue count counter = 600), the RTC start operation of movable bodies A to C that is being executed continues to be executed without being terminated. As a result, the RTC start display on the performance display device 1600 is not executed between t1 and t2, but by executing the RTC start operation of movable bodies A to C in its entirety without being terminated halfway through, it is possible to notify the outside world that the RTC performance is about to start, and it is possible to prevent the start of the RTC performance from going unnoticed.

In addition, both the RTC performance and the pattern change performance (the performance corresponding to the change pattern) execute the performance display of the performance display device 1600, the operation of movable bodies A to C, the lamp illumination and the sound output, and the performance elements used in the performance overlap (at least partially overlap). In this case, if the help mode L premonition performance state is in effect at the time t1 arrives, when the start condition of the RTC performance is met, the performance display of the performance display device 1600 used in the help mode L premonition performance is executed, but the operation of movable bodies A to C, the lamp illumination and the sound output used in the help mode L premonition performance are restricted. In other words, the execution of some of the performance elements used in the help mode L premonition performance is restricted. Similarly, after t1, when t5 arrives, which is the time when the pattern change B stops and the display of the special pattern change in the low probability state reaches 600 times (rescue count counter = 600), it is time to execute the help mode L performance. However, while the display of the performance of the performance display device 1600 used in the help mode L performance is executed, the operation of the movable bodies A to C used in the help mode L performance, the lamp light emission, and the sound output are restricted. In other words, the execution of some of the performance elements used in the help mode L performance is restricted. As a result, from the point in time t1 when the start condition of the RTC performance is established, the operation of the movable bodies A to C, the lamp light emission, and the sound output can be used in the RTC performance, so it is possible to notify the outside that the RTC performance is being executed, and it is possible to prevent the execution of the RTC performance from going unnoticed.

On the other hand, from the point when t1 arrives, at which the start condition of the RTC effect is met, the effect display device 1600 is used for the help mode L precursor effect and the help mode L effect. The effect display device 1600 is located in the center of the game board 5, so it is the part that the player pays the most attention to, and since the help mode L precursor effect display and the help mode L effect display are executed on such effect display device 1600, it is not overlooked that the special pattern change display in the low probability state has reached 600 times (rescue count counter = 600) and control is to be made to the low probability time-saving state B, and it is possible to prevent the start of control of the low probability time-saving state B from going unnoticed.

The above-mentioned movable bodies A to C include movable bodies that the player can contact and movable bodies that the player cannot contact. Specifically, movable body A is the back-upper front performance unit 3300 attached to the game board 5, and movable body B is the back-lower front performance unit 3400 attached to the game board 5, and these movable bodies are not accessible to the player. On the other hand, movable body C is the performance operation part 301 of the performance operation unit 300 attached to the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, and is accessible to the player. Then, movable bodies A to C sequentially execute the RTC start operation during the execution of the RTC performance, so that each movable body operates. Here, movable bodies A to C are monitored for normal operation, but if an abnormality occurs in movable body C that does not operate normally, there is a high possibility that movable body C will not operate normally due to the player's mischief. For this reason, if an abnormality occurs during the execution of the RTC performance, in which the movable body C does not operate normally, the period during which the execution of some of the performance elements used in the help mode L premonition performance and the help mode L performance is restricted is extended as a penalty to the player. In other words, even after t4, when the end condition of the RTC performance is satisfied, the state in which the execution of some of the performance elements used in the help mode L premonition performance and the help mode L performance is restricted, is continued. Note that the penalty to the player may be any penalty that increases the degree of restriction in the state in which the execution of some of the performance elements used in the help mode L premonition performance and the help mode L performance is restricted. For example, during the execution of the RTC performance, the execution of the performance display device 1600, whose execution is not restricted as the help mode L premonition performance and the help mode L performance, may also be restricted. In this way, if an abnormality occurs during the execution of the RTC performance, in which the movable body C does not operate normally, a penalty is given to the player, so that the player is encouraged not to play with the movable body C.

Figure 206 is a time chart showing the progression of the presentation when the conditions for starting the RTC presentation are met after the display of the special symbol changes 600 times (rescue count counter = 600). As shown in Figure 206, if the help mode L presentation state is in effect when time t1 arrives, at which the conditions for starting the RTC presentation are met, the presentation state transitions from the help mode L presentation state to the RTC presentation state. Also, when time t1 arrives, at which the conditions for starting the RTC presentation are met, the presentation state is already in the low probability time-saving state B.

Specifically, in the effect display device 1600, at time t1, an effect display for the help mode L is being executed (low probability time-saving state B is being controlled), but between t1 and t2, in addition to the effect display for the help mode L, an RTC countdown display is executed, which counts down (for example, 3 → 2 → 1) until the start of the RTC effect. Also, between t2 and tx, an RTC start display is executed, which notifies the start of the RTC effect. Then, between tx and tx, in addition to the effect display for the help mode L, from tx to t4, when the end condition of the RTC effect is established, an effect display for the RTC that is not executed except for the RTC effect is executed. The effect display for the RTC is set to start after waiting for the first start of the pattern change (pattern change D) after t3. In this state, for example, the entire display area is used to display the RTC countdown, the RTC start, and RTC effects, and the upper left corner of the display area displays "Help mode L in progress," indicating that low-probability time-saving state B is being controlled, and effects for help mode L are displayed.

In addition, between t2 and t3, movable bodies A to C are made to operate sequentially in response to the execution of the RTC start display on the performance display device 1600. Specifically, between t2 and t3, the RTC start operation of movable body A, the RTC start operation of movable body B, and the RTC start operation of movable body C are executed sequentially. In this way, when t2 arrives, which is the start of the RTC start operation of movable bodies A to C, during the execution of pattern change B in the execution of help mode L (during control of low probability time-saving state B), the operation specified in the pattern change performance (performance corresponding to the change pattern) is terminated, and the RTC start operation of movable bodies A to C is forcibly started. Also, during the RTC performance state from t1 to t4, during t2 to t3, the action specified in the pattern change performance (performance corresponding to the change pattern) is not performed on the movable bodies A to C, but except for the period from t2 to t3, the movable bodies A to C are not used in the RTC performance, and the action specified in the pattern change performance (performance corresponding to the change pattern) is performed on the movable bodies A to C.

In addition, for lamp illumination, from t1 to t4, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and door frame 3 are set to emit light in an RTC illumination pattern in conjunction with the execution of the RTC performance. In other words, from t1 to t3, even though the performance display device 1600 is executing the performance display for help mode L, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and door frame 3 are not emitting light in an RTC illumination pattern. In addition, for audio output, from t1 to t4, BGM for RTC is output from the speaker in conjunction with the execution of the RTC performance. In other words, from t1 to t3, even though the performance display device 1600 is executing the performance display for help mode L, the BGM for help mode L is not output from the speaker.

As described above, the RTC performance and the pattern change performance (performance corresponding to the change pattern) both execute the performance display of the performance display device 1600, the operation of the movable bodies A to C, the lamp light emission, and the sound output, and the performance elements used in the performance overlap (at least partially overlap). In this case, if the help mode L performance is in the state when t1 arrives, at which the start condition of the RTC performance is satisfied, the performance display of the performance display device 1600 used in the help mode L performance is executed, but the operation of the movable bodies A to C used in the help mode L performance, the lamp light emission, and the sound output are restricted. In other words, the execution of some of the performance elements used in the help mode L performance is restricted. As a result, from the time t1 arrives, at which the start condition of the RTC performance is satisfied, the operation of the movable bodies A to C, the lamp light emission, and the sound output can be used in the RTC performance, so it is possible to inform the outside that the RTC performance is being executed, and it is possible to prevent the execution of the RTC performance from going unnoticed.

On the other hand, when help mode L is being executed (low probability time-saving state B is being controlled), from the point in time t1 when the RTC effect start condition is met, the effect display device 1600 is used for the help mode L effect. As the effect display device 1600 is located in the center of the game board 5, it is the part that the player pays the most attention to, and since the help mode L effect display is executed on such effect display device 1600, the fact that help mode L is being executed (low probability time-saving state B is being controlled) is not overlooked, and it is possible to prevent the fact that help mode L is being executed (low probability time-saving state B is being controlled) from not being recognized.

(Restrictions on Help Mode S effects)
FIG. 207 is a time chart showing the progress of the performance before and after the instant short hit. As shown in FIG. 207, when executing the pattern change B which results in the instant short hit, at the time t5 when the pattern change B stops, the low probability non-time-saving state is shifted to the low probability time-saving state C. Also, before t5, during the execution of the pattern change B which results in the instant short hit, the help mode S premonition performance state is executed in which the "help mode S premonition performance" which suggests that the "help mode S" will be entered is executed, whereas from t5, the help mode S performance state is executed in which the "help mode S performance" which indicates that the "help mode S" is being executed is executed. In this example, the instant short hit causes the special pattern to be controlled to the low probability time-saving state C until the variable display of the special pattern reaches 20 to 100 times, and the period during which the low probability time-saving state C is controlled is called the "help mode S". Then, in the help mode S presentation state, if a jackpot is not reached during the period until the varying display of the special symbol in the low-probability time-saving state C reaches 20 to 100 times, at time t6 when the 20th to 100th symbol variation X stops, and if a jackpot is reached, at time t6 when the symbol variation resulting in a jackpot stops, the help mode S presentation state transitions from the low-probability time-saving state C to a low-probability non-time-saving state and also transitions from the help mode S presentation state to a normal presentation state.

In the above-mentioned example of the performance, a decorative pattern change display is executed as a pattern change performance (performance corresponding to a change pattern) that results in an immediate short win, and a performance display is executed that stops at the stopping pattern for an immediate short win, and such a pattern change performance that results in an immediate short win corresponds to the "Help mode S precursor performance". In addition, after control of the low probability time-saving state C begins, the performance display device 1600 displays "Help mode S in progress", which indicates that control of the low probability time-saving state C is in progress, and such a display corresponds to the "Help mode S performance".

Specifically, in the effect display device 1600, before t5, during the execution of pattern change B, which results in an immediate short win, an effect display for a help mode S precursor is executed as a pattern change effect. Then, after t5, an effect display for help mode S is executed, which indicates that help mode S is being executed (low probability time-saving state C is being controlled). Note that even if there is a period after t5 during which pattern change (pattern change effect) does not start (for example, between pattern change C and pattern change D), the effect display for help mode S is continuously executed during that period.

Furthermore, moving bodies A to C are not used in the Help Mode S performance after t5, and instead perform the action specified in the pattern change performance (the performance corresponding to the change pattern).

In addition, in terms of lamp illumination, before t5, in conjunction with the execution of the help mode S precursor performance during the execution of the pattern change B, which results in an immediate short win, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and door frame 3 are made to emit light in a lighting pattern for the help mode S precursor, and after t5, in conjunction with the execution of the help mode S performance, the LEDs are made to emit light in a lighting pattern for the help mode S. In addition, in terms of audio output, before t5, in conjunction with the execution of the help mode S precursor performance during the execution of the pattern change B, which results in an immediate short win, the background music for the help mode S is output from the speaker, and after t5, in conjunction with the execution of the help mode S performance, the background music for the help mode S is output from the speaker.

Figure 208 is a time chart showing the progression of the presentation when the conditions for starting the RTC presentation are met before an immediate short hit occurs. In this example, at time t1 when the conditions for starting the RTC presentation are met after a predetermined time (e.g., 3 hours) has elapsed since power was turned on, it is determined whether the presentation is in the Help Mode S premonition presentation state, the Help Mode S presentation state, or a normal presentation state that is neither the Help Mode S premonition presentation state nor the Help Mode S presentation state. The above describes the case where it is determined that the normal presentation state is in place at time t1, and the following describes the case where it is determined that the Help Mode S premonition presentation state or the Help Mode S presentation state is in place at time t1.

As shown in FIG. 208, if the state is in the Help Mode S premonition state when t1 arrives, at which the condition for starting the RTC effect is met, the state transitions from the Help Mode S premonition state to the RTC effect state. Also, if pattern change B, which results in an immediate short win, is executed, the state transitions from the low probability non-time-saving state to the low probability time-saving state C at t5, at which point pattern change B stops.

Specifically, at time t1, the effect display device 1600 is executing the effect display for the help mode S precursor as a pattern change effect, and continues to execute the effect display for the help mode S precursor from t1 to t5, which is the time when the pattern change B, which results in an immediate short win, stops. Then, after t5, control is performed to the low probability time-saving state C, and thus the effect display for the help mode S, which indicates that the help mode S is being executed (low probability time-saving state C is being controlled), is executed. In other words, between t1 and tx, the RTC countdown display and RTC start display as RTC effects are not executed.

In addition, in the effect display device 1600, from tx to t4 when the end condition of the RTC effect is met, in addition to the effect display for help mode S, an effect display for RTC that is not executed except for the RTC effect is executed. The effect display for RTC is set to start after waiting for the first start of the pattern change (pattern change D) after t3. In such a state, for example, the effect display for RTC is executed using the entire display area, and the effect display for help mode S is executed so that "Help mode S in" is displayed in the upper left corner of the display area, indicating that the low probability time-saving state C is being controlled.

In addition, for movable bodies A to C, even though the RTC start display on the performance display device 1600 is not being executed between t2 and t3, movable bodies A to C are made to operate sequentially. Specifically, between t2 and t3, the RTC start operation of movable body A, the RTC start operation of movable body B, and the RTC start operation of movable body C are executed sequentially. In this way, when t2 arrives, at which the RTC start operation of movable bodies A to C is started during the execution of pattern change B, which results in an immediate short hit, the operation specified in the pattern change performance (performance corresponding to the change pattern) is terminated, and the RTC start operation of movable bodies A to C is forcibly started. Then, when t5 arrives, at which the pattern change B, which results in an immediate short hit, is stopped, during the execution of the RTC start operation of movable bodies A to C, the RTC start operation of movable bodies A to C that is being executed is continued without being terminated. Also, during the RTC performance state from t1 to t4, during t2 to t3, the action specified in the pattern change performance (performance corresponding to the change pattern) is not performed on the movable bodies A to C, but except for the period from t2 to t3, the movable bodies A to C are not used in the RTC performance, and the action specified in the pattern change performance (performance corresponding to the change pattern) is performed on the movable bodies A to C.

In addition, in terms of lamp illumination, even though the RTC countdown display or RTC start display is not being executed on the performance display device 1600 from t1 to t3, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and door frame 3 are made to emit light in the RTC light pattern, and continue to emit light in the RTC light pattern until t4. In other words, even though the performance display device 1600 is executing the help mode S precursor display or the help mode S performance display from t1 to t3, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and door frame 3 are not made to emit light in the help mode S precursor display or the help mode S light pattern. In addition, in terms of audio output, even though the performance display device 1600 is not executing the RTC countdown display or RTC start display from t1 to t3, the RTC background music is output from the speaker, and the RTC background music is output continuously until t4. In other words, between t1 and t3, even though the performance display device 1600 is executing the performance display for the Help Mode S precursor or the Help Mode S performance display, the speaker is not outputting the BGM for the Help Mode S precursor or the BGM for the Help Mode S.

As described above, when the RTC start operation of movable bodies A to C is being performed and t5 arrives, which is the time when pattern change B, which results in an immediate short win, stops, the RTC start operation of movable bodies A to C that is being performed continues without being terminated. As a result, the RTC start display on the performance display device 1600 is not executed between t1 and t2, but by executing the RTC start operation of movable bodies A to C in its entirety without being terminated halfway through, it is possible to notify the outside world that the RTC performance is about to start, and it is possible to prevent the start of the RTC performance from going unnoticed.

In addition, both the RTC performance and the pattern change performance (the performance corresponding to the change pattern) execute the performance display of the performance display device 1600, the operation of movable bodies A to C, the lamp illumination and the sound output, and the performance elements used in the performance overlap (at least partially overlap). In this case, if the help mode S premonition performance state is in effect at the time t1 arrives, when the start condition of the RTC performance is met, the performance display of the performance display device 1600 used in the help mode S premonition performance is executed, but the operation of movable bodies A to C, the lamp illumination and the sound output used in the help mode S premonition performance are restricted. In other words, the execution of some of the performance elements used in the help mode S premonition performance is restricted. Similarly, when t5 arrives after t1, when the pattern change B, which results in an immediate short win, stops, it is time to execute the Help Mode S effect. However, while the effect display of the effect display device 1600 used in the Help Mode S effect is executed, the operation of the movable bodies A to C used in the Help Mode S effect, the lamp light emission, and the sound output are restricted. In other words, the execution of some of the effect elements used in the Help Mode S effect is restricted. As a result, from the point in time t1, when the start condition for the RTC effect is met, the operation of the movable bodies A to C, the lamp light emission, and the sound output can be used in the RTC effect, so it is possible to notify the outside that the RTC effect is being executed, and it is possible to prevent the execution of the RTC effect from going unnoticed.

On the other hand, from the point when t1 arrives, at which the start condition of the RTC effect is met, the effect display device 1600 is used for the help mode S precursor effect and the help mode S effect. The effect display device 1600 is located in the center of the game board 5, so it is the part that the player pays the most attention to, and since the help mode S precursor effect display and the help mode S effect display are executed on such effect display device 1600, the fact that control to the low probability time-saving state C will be made due to an immediate short hit will not be overlooked, and it is possible to prevent the start of control of the low probability time-saving state C from going unnoticed.

The above-mentioned movable bodies A to C include movable bodies that the player can contact and movable bodies that the player cannot contact. Specifically, movable body A is the back-upper front performance unit 3300 attached to the game board 5, and movable body B is the back-lower front performance unit 3400 attached to the game board 5, and these movable bodies are not accessible to the player. On the other hand, movable body C is the performance operation part 301 of the performance operation unit 300 attached to the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, and is accessible to the player. Then, movable bodies A to C sequentially execute the RTC start operation during the execution of the RTC performance, so that each movable body operates. Here, movable bodies A to C are monitored for normal operation, but if an abnormality occurs in movable body C that does not operate normally, there is a high possibility that movable body C will not operate normally due to the player's mischief. For this reason, if an abnormality occurs during the execution of the RTC performance, in which the movable body C does not operate normally, the period during which the execution of some of the performance elements used in the help mode S premonition performance and the help mode S performance is restricted is extended as a penalty to the player. In other words, even after t4, when the end condition of the RTC performance is satisfied, the state in which the execution of some of the performance elements used in the help mode S premonition performance and the help mode S performance is restricted, is continued. Note that, as a penalty to the player, in the state in which the execution of some of the performance elements used in the help mode S premonition performance and the help mode S performance is restricted, the degree of restriction may be strengthened. For example, during the execution of the RTC performance, the execution of the performance display device 1600, whose execution is not restricted as the help mode S premonition performance and the help mode S performance, may also be restricted. In this way, if an abnormality occurs during the execution of the RTC performance, in which the movable body C does not operate normally, a penalty is given to the player, so that the player is encouraged not to play with the movable body C.

Figure 209 is a time chart showing the progression of the presentation when the conditions for starting the RTC presentation are met after an immediate short win. As shown in Figure 209, if the help mode S presentation state is in effect when t1 arrives, at which the conditions for starting the RTC presentation are met, the presentation state transitions from the help mode S presentation state to the RTC presentation state. Also, when t1 arrives, at which the conditions for starting the RTC presentation are met, the presentation state is already in the low probability time-saving state C.

Specifically, in the effect display device 1600, at time t1, an effect display for the help mode S is being executed (low probability time-saving state C is being controlled), but between t1 and t2, in addition to the effect display for the help mode S, an RTC countdown display is executed, which counts down (for example, 3 → 2 → 1) until the start of the RTC effect. Also, between t2 and tx, an RTC start display is executed, which notifies the start of the RTC effect. Then, between tx and tx, in addition to the effect display for the help mode S, from tx to t4, when the end condition of the RTC effect is established, an effect display for the RTC that is not executed except for the RTC effect is executed. The effect display for the RTC is set to start after waiting for the first pattern change (pattern change D) to start after t3. In this state, for example, the entire display area is used to display the RTC countdown, the RTC start, and RTC effects, and the upper left corner of the display area displays "Help mode S in progress," indicating that low-probability time-saving state C is being controlled, and effects for help mode S are displayed.

In addition, between t2 and t3, movable bodies A to C are made to operate sequentially in response to the execution of the RTC start display on the performance display device 1600. Specifically, between t2 and t3, the RTC start operation of movable body A, the RTC start operation of movable body B, and the RTC start operation of movable body C are executed sequentially. In this way, when t2 arrives, at which the RTC start operation of movable bodies A to C is started, during the execution of pattern change B in the execution of help mode S (during control of low probability time-saving state C), the operation specified in the pattern change performance (performance corresponding to the change pattern) is terminated, and the RTC start operation of movable bodies A to C is forcibly started. Also, during the RTC performance state from t1 to t4, during t2 to t3, the action specified in the pattern change performance (performance corresponding to the change pattern) is not performed on the movable bodies A to C, but except for the period from t2 to t3, the movable bodies A to C are not used in the RTC performance, and the action specified in the pattern change performance (performance corresponding to the change pattern) is performed on the movable bodies A to C.

In addition, for lamp illumination, from t1 to t4, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and door frame 3 are set to emit light in an RTC illumination pattern in conjunction with the execution of the RTC performance. In other words, from t1 to t3, even though the performance display device 1600 is executing the performance display for Help Mode S, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and door frame 3 are not emitting light in an RTC illumination pattern. In addition, for audio output, from t1 to t4, BGM for RTC is output from the speaker in conjunction with the execution of the RTC performance. In other words, from t1 to t3, even though the performance display device 1600 is executing the performance display for Help Mode S, the BGM for Help Mode S is not output from the speaker.

As described above, the RTC performance and the pattern change performance (performance corresponding to the change pattern) both execute the performance display of the performance display device 1600, the operation of the movable bodies A to C, the lamp light emission, and the sound output, and the performance elements used in the performance overlap (at least partially overlap). In this case, when the time t1 arrives at which the start condition of the RTC performance is satisfied, if the help mode S performance state is in effect, the performance display of the performance display device 1600 used in the help mode S performance is executed, but the operation of the movable bodies A to C used in the help mode S performance, the lamp light emission, and the sound output are restricted from execution. In other words, the execution of some of the performance elements used in the help mode S performance is restricted. As a result, from the time t1 arrives at which the start condition of the RTC performance is satisfied, the operation of the movable bodies A to C, the lamp light emission, and the sound output can be used in the RTC performance, so it is possible to notify the outside that the RTC performance is being executed, and it is possible to prevent the execution of the RTC performance from going unnoticed.

On the other hand, when help mode S is being executed (when low-probability time-saving state C is being controlled), from the point in time t1 when the RTC effect start condition is met, the effect display device 1600 is used for the help mode S effect. As the effect display device 1600 is located in the center of the game board 5, it is the part that the player pays the most attention to, and since the help mode S effect display is executed for such effect display device 1600, the fact that help mode S is being executed (when low-probability time-saving state C is being controlled) is not overlooked, and it is possible to prevent the fact that help mode S is being executed (when low-probability time-saving state C is being controlled) from going unnoticed.

(Limitation of the premonition effects in Help Mode L)
As explained in FIG. 204, after the power is turned on with RAM clear or after a big win game is played, when the pattern change B is executed in which the variable display of the special pattern in the low probability state reaches 600 times (rescue count counter = 600), the low probability non-time-saving state is shifted to the low probability time-saving state B at the time t5 when the pattern change B stops. Also, before t5, the state is changed to the help mode L premonition state in which the "help mode L premonition effect" is executed, which indicates that the "help mode L" is close, whereas from t5, the state is changed to the help mode L effect state in which the "help mode L effect" is executed, which indicates that the "help mode L" is being executed. In this example, when the variable display of the special pattern in the low probability state reaches 600 times (rescue count counter = 600), the state is controlled to the low probability time-saving state B until the variable display of the special pattern reaches 700 times, and the period in which the state is controlled to the low probability time-saving state B is called the "help mode L".

In the above-mentioned example of the performance, when the display of the decorative pattern stops, a count performance is executed to inform the user of the number of times the special pattern has changed in the low probability state until the display of the special pattern changes 500 to 600 times in the low probability state, and such a count performance corresponds to the "help mode L premonition performance". For such a count performance, the main control board 1310 counts up the rescue count counter when the special pattern stops changing in the low probability state, and transmits information (rescue count command) related to the rescue count counter from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, so that the peripheral control board 1510 knows how many times the special pattern has changed in the low probability state, and executes a count performance that informs the user of the number of times the special pattern has changed in the low probability state when the display of the special pattern (decorative pattern) stops changing. In other words, the count performance is executed as a performance determined by the peripheral control board 1510, separate from the performance instructed by the change pattern determined by the main control board 1310.

In this example, after power-on with RAM clear or after a jackpot game is played, when executing a pattern change B in which the special pattern change display reaches 600 times (rescue counter = 600) in the low probability state, the change pattern for the help mode L premonition effect can be determined as the change pattern determined by the main control board 1310. Here, when executing a pattern change in which the special pattern change display does not reach 600 times (rescue counter = 600) in the low probability state, the normal change pattern is determined as the change pattern determined by the main control board 1310, and no change pattern for the help mode L premonition effect is determined. Then, when the change pattern for the help mode L premonition effect is determined, the help mode L premonition effect, which is only executed in the pattern change B in which the special pattern change display reaches 600 times (rescue counter = 600) in the low probability state, is executed, so that it is possible to know in advance that the "help mode L" controlled to the low probability time-saving state B will be executed.

In addition, when the above-mentioned counting effect is not executed as the "help mode L premonition effect", when executing the pattern change B in which the special pattern change display in the low probability state reaches 600 times (rescue count counter = 600), if a change pattern for the help mode L premonition effect is determined, it is possible to know in advance that the "help mode L" controlled to the low probability time-saving state B will be executed by executing the effect corresponding to that change pattern (help mode L premonition effect), whereas if a normal change pattern is determined without determining the change pattern for the help mode L premonition effect, it is not possible to know in advance that the "help mode L" controlled to the low probability time-saving state B will be executed by executing the effect corresponding to that change pattern (effect that is not the help mode L premonition effect). In this example, the above-mentioned counting effect is not executed as the "help mode L premonition effect", but the above-mentioned counting effect may be executed regardless of whether or not the change pattern for the help mode L premonition effect is determined. Also, in this example, when executing pattern change B in which the special pattern change display in the low probability state reaches 600 times (rescue count counter = 600), it is possible to determine a change pattern for the help mode L premonition performance, but it is sufficient if the pattern change occurs before the special pattern change display in the low probability state reaches 600 times (rescue count counter = 600), and for example, it is also possible to determine a change pattern for the help mode L premonition performance across multiple pattern changes (for example, 597 to 600 times or 500 to 600 times).

In this example, when executing the pattern change B in which the special pattern change display in the low probability state reaches 600 times (rescue count counter = 600), a specific change pattern execution button (not shown) is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 as a special operation unit for determining the change pattern (specific change pattern) for the help mode L premonition performance. Note that the specific change pattern execution button may be an operation unit provided in a location that is not operated or visible by the player, separate from the power switch 630a for powering on, and examples of the specific change pattern execution button include a rotary switch type operation unit, a push switch type operation unit, or an operation unit that is operated by inserting a special tool (such as a thin rod) or a key owned by the administrator. Of these, an operation unit that is operated by inserting a special tool (such as a thin rod) or a key owned by the administrator can also prevent unintentional erroneous operation in the hall.

Specifically, if the specific variation pattern execution button is operated when the power is turned on, the variation pattern for the help mode L premonition effect is determined when executing the pattern variation B in which the variation display of the special pattern in the low probability state reaches 600 times (rescue count counter = 600). On the other hand, if the specific variation pattern execution button is not operated when the power is turned on, the variation pattern for the help mode L premonition effect is not determined and a normal variation pattern is determined when executing the pattern variation B in which the variation display of the special pattern in the low probability state reaches 600 times (rescue count counter = 600). In other words, depending on whether the hall manager operates the specific variation pattern execution button when the power is turned on, it is possible to select whether or not to determine the variation pattern for the help mode L premonition effect when executing the pattern variation B in which the variation display of the special pattern in the low probability state reaches 600 times (rescue count counter = 600). In this way, if the specific variation pattern execution button is not operated when the power is turned on, when pattern variation B is executed in which the variation display of the special pattern in the low probability state reaches 600 times (rescue count counter = 600), the help mode L premonition effect corresponding to the variation pattern for the help mode L premonition effect is not executed, and the help mode L effect indicating that help mode L is being executed (low probability time-saving state B is being controlled) is suddenly executed at the next pattern variation C, so that it is possible to give a strong impact of time saving being granted without hitting a win.

During the execution of the help mode L (while the low probability time-saving state B is being controlled), the change pattern for the help mode L effect is determined as the change pattern determined by the main control board 1310 when the pattern change is executed. In other words, after the control of the low probability time-saving state B starts, the change pattern for the help mode L effect is determined for the pattern change until the change display of the special pattern in the low probability time-saving state B reaches 700 times. The change pattern for this help mode L effect is determined during the execution of the help mode L (while the low probability time-saving state B is being controlled), regardless of whether the specific change pattern execution button is operated when the power is turned on. In other words, when the specific change pattern execution button is operated when the power is turned on, the help mode L premonition effect is executed before the transition to the low probability time-saving state B, and the help mode L effect is executed after the transition to the low probability time-saving state B, around the time when the change display of the special pattern in the low probability state reaches 600 times (rescue count counter = 600). On the other hand, if the specific variation pattern execution button is not operated when the power is turned on, before and after the variable display of the special pattern in the low probability state reaches 600 times (rescue count counter = 600), the help mode L precursor effect is not executed before the transition to the low probability time-saving state B, and the help mode L effect is executed after the transition to the low probability time-saving state B. In this way, if the specific variation pattern execution button is not operated when the power is turned on, the help mode L precursor effect is not executed before the transition to the low probability time-saving state B, and the help mode L effect is suddenly executed after the transition to the low probability time-saving state B, so that it is possible to give a strong impact of time-saving being granted without hitting a win.

In addition, even if the power switch 630a is operated while operating the RAM clear switch 1310f when the power is turned on and the power is turned on with RAM clear, if a specific variation pattern execution button other than the RAM clear switch 1310f or the power switch 630a is not operated when the power is turned on, the variation pattern for the help mode L premonition effect is not determined (the normal variation pattern is determined) when executing the pattern variation B in which the variation display of the special pattern in the low probability state reaches 600 times (rescue count counter = 600). In other words, whether or not the hall manager turns on the power with RAM clear does not change whether or not the variation pattern for the help mode L premonition effect is determined when executing the pattern variation B in which the variation display of the special pattern in the low probability state reaches 600 times (rescue count counter = 600). Therefore, the hall manager can operate the specific variation pattern execution button when the power is turned on as necessary and determine the variation pattern for the help mode L premonition effect when executing the pattern variation B.

In the above, whether or not the change pattern for the help mode L premonition effect is determined when executing the pattern change B in which the change display of the special pattern in the low probability state reaches 600 times (rescue count counter = 600) is made different depending on whether the hall manager operates the specific change pattern execution button when the power is turned on, but it may be configured as follows. Specifically, if a jackpot (jackpot game) has already been obtained after the power is turned on and the change display of the special pattern in the low probability state reaches 600 times (rescue count counter = 600) thereafter, the change pattern for the help mode L premonition effect is determined when executing the pattern change B in which the change display of the special pattern in the low probability state reaches 600 times (rescue count counter = 600). On the other hand, if a jackpot (jackpot game) has not been obtained after the power is turned on and the change display of the special pattern in the low probability state reaches 600 times (rescue count counter = 600), the change pattern for the help mode L premonition effect is not determined and a normal change pattern is determined when executing the pattern change B in which the change display of the special pattern in the low probability state reaches 600 times (rescue count counter = 600). In other words, depending on whether or not a jackpot (jackpot game) has already been obtained before the variable display of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (rescue count counter = 600), whether or not a variable pattern for the help mode L premonition effect is determined when executing the symbol variation B that reaches 600 times (rescue count counter = 600) is determined. In this configuration, it is possible to execute the help mode L premonition effect before transitioning to the low probability time-saving state B as compensation for the jackpot (jackpot game) that has already been obtained, and the help mode L premonition effect can be enjoyed.

In the above, if the specific variation pattern execution button is not operated when the power is turned on, when executing the pattern variation B in which the variation display of the special pattern in the low probability state reaches 600 times (rescue count counter = 600), the variation pattern for the help mode L premonition effect is not determined and a normal variation pattern is determined, but it may be configured as follows. Specifically, after the power is turned on, when the variation display of the special pattern in the low probability state reaches 600 times (rescue count counter = 600), the low probability non-time-saving state transitions to the low probability time-saving state B. In the first low probability time-saving state B (help mode L) after the power is turned on, the variation pattern for the help mode L premonition effect is not determined (the normal variation pattern is determined) before transitioning to the low probability time-saving state B, whereas in the second or subsequent low probability time-saving state B (help mode L) after the power is turned on, the variation pattern for the help mode L premonition effect is determined before transitioning to the low probability time-saving state B. In other words, depending on whether it is the first low-probability time-saving state B (help mode L) after power-on, whether or not to determine the change pattern for the help mode L precursor effect when executing the pattern change B before transitioning to the low-probability time-saving state B differs. In this configuration, it is known that in the first low-probability time-saving state B (help mode L) after power-on, it is already possible to transition from the low-probability non-time-saving state to the low-probability time-saving state B, and in the second or subsequent low-probability time-saving state B (help mode L) after power-on, the help mode L precursor effect is newly executed before transitioning to the low-probability time-saving state B, thereby preventing the presentation from becoming monotonous.

[Resetting the rescue counter]
In the above, after power-on with RAM clear or after a jackpot game is played, the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state is counted from the initial value "0" using the rescue counter in the main control board 1310, and when the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state reaches 600 (rescue counter = 600), the game is controlled to the low probability time-saving state B. Regarding such a rescue counter, the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state is reset when power-on with RAM clear or when a jackpot game is played. However, since the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state is directly related to whether or not the low probability non-time-saving state transitions to the low probability time-saving state B, it is preferable that the hall manager be able to select whether or not to reset the count of the rescue counter when power is turned on, regardless of whether or not the power is turned on with RAM clear. In this example, a configuration that enables whether or not to reset the count of the rescue counter when power is turned on will be described below.

In this example, a rescue maintenance button (not shown), which is a special operation unit for resetting the rescue counter when the power is turned on, is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. The rescue maintenance button may be any operation unit provided in a location that cannot be operated or seen by the player, separate from the power switch 630a for turning on the power, and examples of such operation units include a rotary switch type operation unit, a push switch type operation unit, or an operation unit that is operated by inserting a special tool (such as a thin rod) or a key possessed by the administrator. Of these, an operation unit that is operated by inserting a special tool (such as a thin rod) or a key possessed by the administrator can also prevent unintentional erroneous operation in the hall.

Specifically, if the rescue maintain button is operated when the power is turned on, the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue count counter) is maintained without being reset. On the other hand, if the rescue maintain button is not operated when the power is turned on, the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue count counter) is reset. In other words, the hall manager can choose whether or not to reset the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue count counter) depending on whether or not he operates the rescue maintain button. In this way, if the rescue maintenance button is operated when the power is turned on, the count of the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state (rescue count counter) is maintained, so the special pattern will only need to be displayed changing a few times in the low probability state until the transition from the low probability non-time-saving state to low probability time-saving state B. On the other hand, if the rescue maintenance button is not operated when the power is turned on, the count of the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state (rescue count counter) is reset, so more special patterns will need to be displayed changing in the low probability state until the transition from the low probability non-time-saving state to low probability time-saving state B, and the hall manager can choose whether or not to reset depending on the hall environment.

Figure 210 is a list of RAM clear conditions showing the operation at power-on to execute RAM clear. In this example, when the RAM clear operation of operating the RAM clear switch 1310f is performed at power-on (when the power switch 630a is operated), or when the setting change operation of turning on the setting key switch 1311a (which may be a setting change operation of turning on the RAM clear switch 1310f and the setting key switch 1311a) is performed, RAM clear is executed to initialize the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a, and the game state is initialized (set to a low probability non-time-saving state). In addition, the setting value is stored in a specific area of the RAM built into the main control board 1310a, and when a setting change operation is performed, the already set setting value (the setting value at the time of power off before power-on) can be changed. In addition, the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in a low probability state (rescue count counter) is stored in a second specific area of the RAM built into the main control board 1310a, and the count can be maintained if the rescue maintain button is operated when the power is turned on.

As shown in FIG. 210, if the rescue maintenance button is operated during the RAM clear operation, a RAM clear is executed to initialize the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a, and the game state is initialized. Also, since a backup is not created for the RAM of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 when the power is cut off, the presentation state is returned to the initial state. Also, no setting changes or confirmation displays are made to the setting values, and the setting values already set (the setting values at the time of power cut before power is turned on) are maintained. Also, the count of the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state (rescue count counter) is maintained. Also, the initialization of the game state is executed when the RAM clear signal input to the main control MPU 1310a is determined to be ON after the RAM clear operation. As a notification method to the outside, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and door frame 3 are made to emit blue light and a voice is output from the speaker saying "The game state has been cleared. The set value and rescue count have been maintained" from the timing when the RAM clear signal is judged to be ON until a predetermined period of time has elapsed. Therefore, when the rescue maintain button is operated during the RAM clear operation, the already set value is maintained, and the count of the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state (rescue count counter) is continued from when the power was cut off.

In addition, since the RAM of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 is not backed up when the power is cut off, information about the performance currently being performed is lost when the power is cut off. When the power is turned on again, the performance is performed in the initial state, and the performance state is restored when a command related to the performance is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510.

If the rescue maintenance button is not operated during the RAM clear operation, a RAM clear is executed to initialize the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a, and the game state is initialized. As no backup is created for the RAM of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 when the power is cut off, the presentation state is returned to the initial state. Furthermore, no setting changes or confirmation displays are made to the setting values, and the setting values already set (the setting values at the time of power cut before power is turned on) are maintained. Furthermore, the count of the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state (rescue count counter) is reset. Furthermore, the game state is initialized and the count is reset when the RAM clear signal input to the main control MPU 1310a is determined to be ON after the RAM clear operation. As a notification mode to the outside, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and door frame 3 are made to emit yellow light and a voice is output from the speaker saying "The game state and rescue count have been cleared. The set values are being maintained" until a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the time the RAM clear signal is determined to be ON. Therefore, if the rescue maintain button is not operated during the RAM clear operation, the already set value is maintained, and the count for the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state (rescue count counter) is counted from the initial value of "0".

On the other hand, when the rescue maintenance button is operated during the setting change operation, a RAM clear is executed to initialize the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a, and the game state is initialized. In addition, since the RAM of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 is not backed up when the power is cut off, the presentation state is returned to the initial state. In addition, the setting value can be changed, and when the setting value is changed, the value increases by 1 each time the setting switch button 1311b is operated from the state in which the already set value (the setting value at the time of power cut before power is turned on) is maintained, and when it reaches the maximum value of 6, it returns to the initial value of 1, and it is possible to increase the value by 1 again. In addition, the count of the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state (the rescue counter) is maintained. In addition, the game state is initialized when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF after the setting change operation and it is determined that the setting change operation has ended (the timing when the setting key OFF signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a). When it is determined that the setting change operation is complete, the set value determined by the setting change is stored in a specific area of the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a. As a notification mode for the outside, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and door frame 3 are made to emit green light and a voice is output from the speaker saying, "The setting value has been changed and the game state has been cleared. The number of rescue attempts has been maintained." Therefore, when the rescue maintain button is operated during the setting change operation, the setting value can be changed, and the count of the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state (the rescue attempt counter) is continued from the time of power interruption.

In addition, if the rescue maintenance button is not operated during the setting change operation, a RAM clear is executed to initialize the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a, and the game state is initialized. In addition, since the RAM of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 is not backed up when the power is cut off, the presentation state is returned to the initial state. In addition, the setting value can be changed, and in the setting value change, the value increases by 1 each time the setting switch button 1311b is operated from the state in which the already set setting value (the setting value at the time of power cut before power is turned on) is maintained, and when the maximum setting value 6 is reached, the value returns to the initial setting value 1, and the value can be increased by 1 again. In addition, the count of the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state (the rescue counter) is reset. In addition, the initialization of the game state and the reset of the count are executed when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF after the setting change operation and it is determined that the setting change operation has ended (the timing when the setting key OFF signal input to the main control MPU 1310a is input). When it is determined that the setting change operation is complete, the set value determined by the setting change is stored in a specific area of the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a. As a notification mode for notifying the outside, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and door frame 3 are made to emit white light and a voice is output from the speaker saying, "The setting value has been changed, and the game state and rescue count have been cleared." Therefore, when the rescue maintenance button is not operated during the setting change operation, the setting value can be changed, and the count for the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state (rescue count counter) is counted from the initial value of "0".

As described above in detail, when the contents of the main control built-in RAM are judged to be abnormal when the power is turned on, or when the main control side power off processing is judged to have not ended normally when the power is turned off, an error message is displayed to inform the user that the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or cannot be trusted). When such a RAM error occurs, the specific abnormality flag is turned ON, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned off, and when the power is turned on again, a setting change operation is performed, so that the RAM error can be canceled and the game can be continued. Specifically, when a setting change operation is performed when the specific abnormality flag is ON (when a RAM error occurs), the game state is initialized and the setting value can be changed regardless of whether the rescue maintenance button is operated during the setting change operation. When changing the setting value, the setting value is temporarily set to the minimum setting value 1, which is the initial value, and the value increases by 1 each time the setting switch button 1311b is operated, and when the maximum setting value 6 is reached, the value returns to the initial setting value 1, and it is possible to increase the value by 1 again. In addition, the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue counter) is reset. The game state is initialized and the count is reset when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF after the setting change operation and it is determined that the setting change operation has ended (when the setting key OFF signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a). When it is determined that the setting change operation has ended, the setting value determined by the setting change is stored in a specific area of the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a.

In the above, if a setting change operation is performed when the specific abnormality flag is ON (when a RAM error occurs), the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue count counter) is reset regardless of whether the rescue maintenance button is operated during the setting change operation. This is because when a RAM error occurs, there is an abnormality in the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM, and there is a possibility that there is also an abnormality in the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue count counter), so by resetting the count, fairness in the game can be maintained. Note that if the power is turned on without a setting change operation when the specific abnormality flag is ON (when a RAM error occurs), the specific abnormality flag remains ON without clearing the RAM error.

In this example, when the rescue maintenance button is operated when the power is turned on, if the rescue maintenance button is operated during the RAM clear operation, the already set value is maintained and the count for the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue counter) continues from where it was when the power was turned off, whereas when the rescue maintenance button is operated during the setting change operation, the count for the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue counter) continues from where it was when the power was turned off, while allowing the setting value to be changed. Also, when the rescue maintenance button is not operated when the power is turned on, if the rescue maintenance button is not operated during the RAM clear operation, the already set value is maintained and the count for the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue counter) starts from the initial value "0", whereas when the rescue maintenance button is not operated during the setting change operation, the count for the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue counter) starts from the initial value "0" while allowing the setting value to be changed. In other words, when the power is turned on, the hall manager only needs to operate a predetermined operation unit depending on whether or not he wants to change the setting value, and whether or not he wants to maintain the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue count counter), and the hall manager can selectively execute one of four patterns according to the hall environment. For example, if the rescue maintenance button is operated when the power is turned on at the start of business of the hall, the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue count counter) is maintained, so that the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state until the transition from the low probability non-time-saving state to the low probability time-saving state B is reduced, and the player can expect the transition to the low probability time-saving state B soon after the opening of the hall. On the other hand, if the rescue maintenance button is not operated when the power is turned on at the opening of the hall, the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue count counter) is reset, so that the special symbol must change and display many times in the low probability state before transitioning from the low probability non-time-saving state to low probability time-saving state B. This means that the hall will not transition to low probability time-saving state B too soon after opening, and player expectations will not rise too soon.

Regardless of whether the rescue maintenance button is operated when the power is turned on, if the power is turned on normally (only the power switch 630a is operated without turning on the RAM clear switch 1310f and the setting key switch 1311a), without turning on the RAM, the RAM clear that initializes the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a is not executed, and the game state is restored to the state at the time of power off based on the backup created at the time of power off. In addition, since no backup is created at the time of power off for the RAM of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510, the presentation state is restored to the initial state. In addition, no setting change or confirmation display is performed for the setting value, and the setting value that has already been set (the setting value at the time of power off before power on) is maintained. In addition, the count of the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state (the rescue counter) is maintained. As a notification mode to the outside, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are made to emit purple light during a predetermined period from the time when the RAM clear signal is judged to be OFF, and a voice is output from the speaker saying, "The game state has been restored. The setting value and the number of rescue attempts are maintained." Therefore, when the power is turned on normally, the already set setting value is maintained, and the count for the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state (the rescue attempt counter) is counted from where it was when the power was turned off, and the game state is also restored to the state it was in when the power was turned off. Note that, regardless of whether the rescue maintain button is operated when the power is turned on, when a setting confirmation operation is performed in which a confirmation display of the setting value is displayed, the same as when the power is turned on normally, except that a confirmation display of the setting value is displayed.

In addition, in this example, when the game state is initialized, the notification mode for notifying the outside world differs depending on whether the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue count counter) is maintained or reset. As a result, even if, for example, a hall manager mistakenly operates the rescue maintenance button when turning on the power and the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue count counter) is maintained, the mistake can be noticed by the notification mode for notifying the outside world, and it is possible to prevent the hall manager from unintentionally maintaining the count.

In the above, a rescue maintenance button is provided, but even if a rescue maintenance button is not provided, it is preferable that the hall manager can select whether or not to maintain the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue counter) when the power is turned on, depending on the hall environment. In such a configuration, for example, when a RAM clear operation is performed without turning on the setting key switch 1311a, the already set setting value is maintained and the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue counter) is counted from the point where the power was turned off, whereas when a setting change operation is performed by turning on the setting key switch 1311a, the setting value can be changed and the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue counter) is counted from the initial value "0". As a result, the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue counter) can be maintained without resetting only when the hall manager performs a RAM clear operation rather than a setting change operation, which can meet the needs of the hall manager.

Even in the case where the rescue maintenance button is not provided, it is preferable that the hall manager operates some kind of operation unit when the number of times the special symbol fluctuates in the low probability state (rescue counter) is to be maintained when the power is turned on. Specifically, the operation unit may be the ON operation of the setting key switch 1311a as a setting change operation. In such a configuration, when the setting change operation of turning on the setting key switch 1311a is performed when the power is turned on, the count of the number of times the special symbol fluctuates in the low probability state (rescue counter) continues from the time when the power was turned off while allowing the setting value to be changed, whereas when the RAM clear operation is performed without turning on the setting key switch 1311a, the count of the number of times the special symbol fluctuates in the low probability state (rescue counter) continues from the initial value "0" while maintaining the already set setting value. This means that unless the hall manager turns on the setting key switch 1311a when the power is turned on, the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in a low probability state (relief counter) will be reset, preventing the hall manager from unintentionally maintaining the count.

When the pachinko machine is configured to include a rescue maintenance button, the hall manager can select from four patterns depending on whether to operate the RAM clear operation or the setting change operation, and whether to operate the rescue maintenance button or not. In contrast, when the pachinko machine is not configured to include a rescue maintenance button, the hall manager can only select from two patterns, either to operate the RAM clear operation or the setting change operation. For this reason, if the pachinko machine 1 does not include a rescue maintenance button, an operation unit that can be operated on the hall side may be provided, increasing the number of patterns that the hall manager can choose from.

In this example, the special symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol in the variable display of the special symbol on the function display unit 1400, and the decorative symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol in the variable display of the decorative symbol on the performance display device 1600. The number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (the rescue counter) is counted when the special symbol stops. In addition, in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol of the special symbol in the variable display of the special symbol on the function display unit 1400, and the jackpot symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol of the decorative symbol in the variable display of the decorative symbol on the performance display device 1600. After the jackpot symbol stops, the jackpot game is executed, but the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (the rescue counter) is reset when the jackpot symbol stops, which is before the jackpot game starts. In this configuration, if the power is cut off while the special symbol is being displayed, and then when the power is turned on, a RAM clear operation or a setting change operation is performed, which initializes the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a, is performed, and the changing state is initialized (set to a state where no changing is displayed), so that when the power is turned on, the display does not return to the changing special symbol display that is currently being displayed. Also, if the power is cut off while the special symbol is being displayed based on a jackpot prior to the execution of a jackpot game, and then when the power is turned on, a RAM clear operation or a setting change operation is performed, which initializes the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a, is performed, and the changing state is initialized (set to a state where no changing is displayed), so that the display does not return to the changing special symbol display based on the jackpot that is currently being displayed, and the jackpot game that was scheduled afterwards is not executed.

In the above configuration, if the power is cut off while the variable display of the special pattern based on a jackpot is in progress, and the rescue maintain button is operated when the RAM is cleared when the power is subsequently turned on, the variable display of the special pattern based on the ongoing jackpot is initialized when the game state is initialized, and the already set value is maintained, while the count of the number of times the special pattern has changed in the low probability state (rescue count counter) continues from where it left off when the power was turned off, whereas if the rescue maintain button is operated when the setting is changed when the power is turned on, the variable display of the special pattern based on the ongoing jackpot is initialized when the game state is initialized, and the setting value can be changed, while the count of the number of times the special pattern has changed in the low probability state (rescue count counter) continues from where it left off when the power was turned off. In addition, if the power is cut off while the variable display of the special pattern based on a jackpot is being executed, and the rescue maintain button is not operated when the RAM is cleared when the power is subsequently turned on, the variable display of the special pattern based on the ongoing jackpot is initialized when the game state is initialized, and the already set value is maintained, while the count for the number of times the special pattern has changed in the low probability state (rescue count counter) starts from the initial value of "0", whereas if the rescue maintain button is not operated when the setting is changed when the power is turned on, the variable display of the special pattern based on the ongoing jackpot is initialized when the game state is initialized, and the setting value can be changed, while the count for the number of times the special pattern has changed in the low probability state (rescue count counter) starts from the initial value of "0". In other words, if the power is cut off while the variable display of the special symbol based on a jackpot is in progress, and then the power is turned on again (when the RAM is cleared or the settings are changed), the game state is initialized and the variable display of the special symbol based on the jackpot that is in progress is initialized, but the hall manager only needs to operate a specified operation unit depending on whether or not he wants to change the setting value or whether or not he wants to maintain the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue count counter), and the hall manager can select from four patterns depending on the hall environment.

In addition, in this example, the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state (the number of times the special pattern changes other than the jackpot of the first and second special patterns) is counted, and when the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state reaches 600, the system is controlled to enter low probability time-saving state B. However, if a configuration is added that initializes all controls related to the progress of the game, such as the RAM clearing process of conventional pachinko machines 1, the RAM clearing process performed while the special pattern is being displayed, would reset the count of the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state (rescue count counter), and it may be difficult to confirm that the pachinko machine 1 has transitioned to low probability time-saving state B during its manufacturing process, etc. In this example, even if a jackpot occurs and the special symbol variable display based on the jackpot is executed before the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state reaches 600, by cutting off the power while the special symbol variable display based on the jackpot is being executed, and then operating the rescue maintenance button when the power is turned on again (when the RAM is cleared or the settings are changed), the game state is initialized by initializing the active special symbol variable display based on the jackpot, but the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue counter) can be counted from where it was when the power was cut off. This makes it possible to re-execute the special symbol variable display during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, making it easier to confirm the transition to low probability time-saving state B.

In addition, if you want to check the various effects that occur when the machine transitions to low-probability time-saving state B during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, even if you miss, you can turn off the power during the display of the special symbol fluctuations in the low-probability state when it reaches 600 times, or during the display of the special symbol fluctuations immediately before that, regardless of whether you win a jackpot or not, and then operate the rescue maintenance button when you turn the machine on again (when you clear the RAM or change the settings). This will initialize the display of the special symbol fluctuations that are currently being performed, but will allow you to continue counting the number of times the special symbol fluctuations in the low-probability state (rescue counter) from where it left off when the power was turned off, making it possible to display the special symbol fluctuations for the 600th time again during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, making it easier to check the effects that occur when the machine transitions to low-probability time-saving state B.

When initializing the display of the currently active special symbols, various reserved information (reserved lottery results for the first special symbol and reserved lottery results for the second special symbol) is also initialized. This allows the operator to select either the first or second special symbol to be executed when confirming the transition to low probability time-saving state B or the performance of the process of transitioning to low probability time-saving state B, and to execute the 600th display of the variation or the display immediately prior to that at any time, thereby increasing the flexibility of the confirmation work. This work can also be executed repeatedly by operating the rescue maintenance button when the power is turned on (when performing a RAM clear operation or a setting change operation), which also increases the flexibility of the confirmation work.

In the above, a rescue maintenance button is provided, but even if a rescue maintenance button is not provided, it is preferable to cut off the power while the special symbol change display reaches 600 times or while the special symbol change display based on a jackpot is in progress, and when the power is turned on again (when the RAM is cleared or the settings are changed), the hall manager can select whether or not to maintain the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue counter) depending on the hall environment. In such a configuration, only when the hall manager performs either the setting change operation or the RAM clear operation, the ongoing change display is erased, while the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue counter) is maintained without being reset, thereby meeting the needs of the hall manager.

In this example, if the power is cut off while controlling the time-saving state, and the rescue maintain button is operated when the RAM is cleared when the power is subsequently turned on, the currently running display of changes is initialized, the already set setting value is maintained, and the count for the number of times the special pattern has changed in the low probability state (rescue count counter) continues from where it left off when the power was turned off, whereas if the rescue maintain button is operated when the setting is changed when the power is turned on, the currently running display of changes is initialized from the time-saving state to the low probability non-time-saving state, allowing the setting value to be changed, and the count for the number of times the special pattern has changed in the low probability state (rescue count counter) continues from where it left off when the power was turned off. In addition, if the power is cut off while controlling the time-saving state and the rescue maintain button is not operated when the RAM is cleared when the power is subsequently turned on, the display of the ongoing changes is initialized from the time-saving state to the low-probability non-time-saving state, and the already set setting value is maintained, while the count for the number of times the special pattern changes in the low-probability state (rescue count counter) starts from the initial value of "0", whereas if the rescue maintain button is not operated during the setting change operation when the power is turned on, the display of the ongoing changes is initialized from the time-saving state to the low-probability non-time-saving state, and the setting value can be changed, while the count for the number of times the special pattern changes in the low-probability state (rescue count counter) starts from the initial value of "0". In other words, if the power is cut off while the time-saving state is being controlled, and the power is then turned on again (when the RAM is cleared or the settings are changed), the display of the changes being performed is initialized from the time-saving state to the low-probability non-time-saving state, but the hall manager only needs to operate a specified operation unit depending on whether or not he wants to change the setting value or whether or not he wants to maintain the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low-probability state (the rescue counter), and can select from four patterns depending on the hall environment.

In the above, in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot game is executed after the jackpot symbol stops, and the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (the rescue counter) is reset when the jackpot symbol stops. However, as an alternative example, only in the case of a jackpot, the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (the rescue counter) may be reset not when the jackpot symbol stops, but at the end of the jackpot game (for example, when the ending period set after the end of the final round has elapsed). In other words, in the case of a miss or a small win, the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (the rescue counter) is counted when the special symbol stops, but in the case of a jackpot, the timing of resetting the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (the rescue counter) may be delayed from when the special symbol stops until the end of the jackpot game thereafter. In this configuration, if the power is cut off while a jackpot game is in progress, and then the RAM is cleared or settings are changed when the power is turned on, a RAM clear is executed to initialize the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a, and the game state is initialized (set to a low-probability non-time-saving state) to erase the jackpot game, so that the game does not return to the jackpot game in progress.

In the above configuration, if the power is cut off while a jackpot game is in progress and the rescue maintain button is operated when the RAM is cleared when the power is subsequently turned on, the jackpot game in progress is initialized when the game state is initialized, and the already set setting value is maintained, while the count of the number of times the special pattern has changed in the low probability state (rescue count counter) continues from where it left off when the power was turned off, whereas if the rescue maintain button is operated when the setting is changed when the power is turned on, the jackpot game in progress is initialized when the game state is initialized, and the setting value can be changed, while the count of the number of times the special pattern has changed in the low probability state (rescue count counter) continues from where it left off when the power was turned off. In addition, if the power is cut off while a jackpot game is in progress and the rescue maintain button is not operated when the RAM is cleared when the power is subsequently turned on, the jackpot game in progress is initialized when the game state is initialized, and the already set setting value is maintained, while the count for the number of times the special pattern has changed in the low probability state (rescue count counter) starts from the initial value of "0", whereas if the rescue maintain button is not operated when the setting change operation is performed when the power is turned on, the jackpot game in progress is initialized when the game state is initialized, and the setting value can be changed, while the count for the number of times the special pattern has changed in the low probability state (rescue count counter) starts from the initial value of "0". In other words, if the power is cut off while a jackpot game is in progress, when the power is turned on again (when the RAM is cleared or the settings are changed), the jackpot game in progress is initialized when the game state is initialized, but the hall manager only needs to operate a specified operation unit depending on whether or not they want to change the settings or whether or not they want to maintain the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue count counter), and the hall manager can select from four patterns depending on the hall environment.

In addition, in this example, the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state (the number of times the special pattern changes other than in the jackpot of the first and second special patterns) is counted, and when the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state reaches 600, the system is controlled to enter low probability time-saving state B. However, if a configuration were added that initializes all controls related to the progress of the game, as in the RAM clearing process of conventional pachinko machines 1, the RAM clearing process performed during jackpot play would reset the count of the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state (the rescue count counter), which could make it difficult to confirm that the pachinko machine 1 has transitioned to low probability time-saving state B during its manufacturing process, etc. In this regard, if a jackpot occurs and a jackpot game is played before the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state reaches 600, the power can be cut off while the jackpot game is being played, and when the power is turned on thereafter (when the RAM is cleared or the settings are changed), the rescue maintenance button can be operated to initialize the game state. While initializing the jackpot game being played, the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state (rescue count counter) can be counted from where it was when the power was cut off, making it easier to confirm the transition to low probability time-saving state B during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1.

In the above, a rescue maintenance button is provided, but even if a rescue maintenance button is not provided, it is preferable to have a configuration in which the power is cut off during a jackpot game and the hall manager can select whether or not to maintain the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue count counter) when the power is turned on again (when the RAM is cleared or the setting is changed) depending on the hall environment. In such a configuration, the needs of the hall manager can be met by clearing the jackpot game but maintaining the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue count counter) without resetting it only when the hall manager performs either a setting change operation or a RAM clear operation.

As described above in detail, the effect display device 1600 executes a "help mode L precursor effect" that notifies the user of the number of times the special symbol has changed in the low probability state until the number of times the special symbol has changed in the low probability state reaches 500-600. The current count of the number of times the special symbol has changed in the low probability state (rescue counter) is displayed and can be checked by the hall manager even during periods when the setting values are being changed or the display of the setting values is being checked, so that the hall manager can check whether or not to reset the count even when the number of times the special symbol has changed in the low probability state is not between 500 and 600. The history display that is displayed during periods when the setting values are being changed or the display of the setting values is being checked is described below.

Figure 211 shows the history display that can be displayed during the period when the setting value is changed or the display confirmation of the setting value is being performed. In this example, a setting change operation is performed without operating the rescue maintain button when the power is turned on, and the setting value is changed. When a setting change operation is performed, the already set setting value (the setting value at the time of power off before power is turned on) can be changed.

Figures 211(A) and (B) show the display screen of the performance display device 1600 when a change to the setting value is being made. Figure 211(A) shows the display screen immediately after the setting change of the setting value has begun, with a message image saying "Setting change in progress" being displayed in the center of the screen, and below that a guide image (operation image showing the performance operation unit 310) for switching to history display is displayed. Figure 211(B) shows the history display image switched from the display screen of Figure 211(A) when the performance operation unit 310 is operated.

In FIG. 211(B), the first history display section is displayed, which allows the past 12 history to be checked line by line on one screen, and records, from the left, "date and time information" based on RTC information, "information on the game state" indicating whether the game state including the above-mentioned variable display of special symbols and jackpot play has been initialized, "information on the setting value" indicating the current setting value, "information on the count value of the rescue counter", and "operation information such as RAM clear operation and setting change operation". This information is stored in a specific memory area of the main control board 1310 so that it will not be erased even if a RAM clear operation or setting change operation is performed. In other words, the display in FIG. 211(A) and (B) is a performance image that is generated and developed by the peripheral control board 1510 by transmitting various information stored by the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 during the period when the setting value is changed or the display of the setting value is confirmed.

In addition, in FIG. 211(B), the history shown in the bottom row of the first history display section (2020/3/9 7:15:00) is a display related to the current setting change operation, with the information "changing" recorded in the "information regarding the setting value" section, and updated when the setting value is confirmed. In addition, a guide image (operation image showing the performance operation section 310) for returning to the display screen shown in FIG. 211(A) is displayed in the lower left of the first history display section, and the current "information regarding the count value of the rescue count counter" is displayed in an emphasized manner in the lower right of the first history display section.

There are two types of information about the current count value of the rescue counter: "number of changes after RAM clear" and "number of changes after jackpot". "Number of changes after RAM clear" displays the total number of changes counted from the initial value when the rescue counter count value is reset to its initial value by performing a RAM clear operation or a setting change operation without operating the rescue maintain button. "Number of changes after jackpot" displays the number of changes counted from the initial value when a jackpot game is played during the progress of the game and the rescue counter count value is reset to its initial value. In other words, if a jackpot game is not played during the progress of the game, "number of changes after jackpot" displays zero, and a value is recorded only in "number of changes after RAM clear". In the example of FIG. 211(B), which shows a case where a jackpot game is executed during the progress of the game, "412" is recorded in the "number of changes after jackpot" and only "2995" is recorded in the "number of changes after RAM clear". The hall manager can recognize the count value of the rescue count counter from "412", which is the "number of changes after jackpot".

In this example, since the setting change operation is performed without operating the rescue maintenance button when the power is turned on, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF to end the setting change operation, the RAM is cleared and the count value of the rescue counter is reset to the initial value. In other words, before the count value of the rescue counter is reset to the initial value, the hall manager can recognize the count value of the rescue counter (count value before initialization) from "412", which is the "number of fluctuations after a jackpot". Then, if the manager wants to maintain the count value of the rescue counter after recognizing the count value of the rescue counter (count value before initialization), he or she can shut off the power without ending the setting change operation (without turning OFF the setting key switch 1311a), and then operate the rescue maintenance button when the power is turned on to maintain the count value of the rescue counter.

Figure 211 (C) shows the display screen of the performance display device 1600 in a state where the setting change operation has been completed, and the history display image is displayed continuously from the display screen of Figure 211 (B). In addition, the display screen of Figure 211 (C) is displayed for a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) after the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF and the setting change operation is completed, and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the history display screen is erased. In addition, in the "information regarding the setting value" section in the history (2020/3/9 7:15:00) shown in the bottom row of the first history display section in Figure 211 (C), since the setting value has been confirmed by the end of the setting change operation, the confirmed value (in this example, "4") is updated and displayed. This example shows a case where the setting change operation is performed without operating the rescue maintenance button when the power is turned on, and when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF to end the setting change operation, the RAM is cleared and the count value of the rescue count counter is reset to the initial value, so the "number of fluctuations after RAM clear" and "number of fluctuations after big win" are updated to their initial values of zero and displayed. Note that the date and time information may also be updated and displayed when the setting change operation is ended.

If the rescue maintenance button is operated during the setting change operation, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF to end the setting change operation, the RAM is cleared but the count value of the rescue counter is maintained, so the "number of changes after RAM clear" and "number of changes after jackpot" continue to display the values that were displayed during the setting change operation ("2995" for "number of changes after RAM clear" and "412" for "number of changes after jackpot") without being updated.

As described above, during the period when the setting value is being changed or the display of the setting value is being checked, the hall manager can check the current count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue counter) by performing any operation, and can decide whether or not to reset the count value of the rescue counter without inadvertently revealing to those around him. In other words, if the hall manager wants to reset the count value of the rescue counter, he can simply reset the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue counter) without operating the rescue maintenance button when turning the power back on after cutting off the power, and if he does not want to reset the count value of the rescue counter, he can operate the rescue maintenance button when turning the power back on after cutting off the power, and the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue counter) can be maintained.

In addition to the above, the second history display section may also display, for example, the number of times the low probability state has been changed to the low probability time-saving state B when the number of times the special pattern has changed in the low probability state has reached 600 (rescue count counter = 600).

In addition, during the period when the setting value is changed or the display of the setting value is being checked, the ball launcher 540 is set in a state where it cannot perform launch control to launch the game ball B. This is because during the period when the setting value is changed or the display of the setting value is being checked, the current count (the count at the start of the setting value change or the display check of the setting value) of the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state (the rescue counter) is displayed. If the ball launcher 540 is allowed to launch the game ball B during such a period, the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state (the rescue counter) is counted up when the ball enters the first start hole 2004 or the second start hole 2005, resulting in a discrepancy with the displayed count. In this regard, by setting the ball launcher 540 in a state where it cannot perform launch control to launch the game ball B during the period when the setting value is changed or the display check of the setting value is being checked, there is no discrepancy with the displayed count, and the hall manager can accurately grasp the current count.

(Regarding the handling of normal symbols when the power is turned on)
In this example, the time-saving state is set so that the variable winning port 2003 can receive the game ball B more easily than the non-time-saving state. However, the state in which the variable winning port 2003 can receive the game ball B easily may be executed across the timing of transition from the time-saving state to the non-time-saving state, and the state in which the variable winning port 2003 can receive the game ball B easily may continue immediately after transition from the time-saving state to the non-time-saving state. Similarly, even in the case of a specification in which only the time-saving state is initialized by an administrator operation to return to the low-probability non-time-saving state, if the state in which the variable winning port 2003 can receive the game ball B easily continues immediately after returning to the low-probability non-time-saving state, the state does not correspond to the game state, and a sense of incongruity occurs. For this reason, when the time-saving state is initialized and returned to the low-probability non-time-saving state by the administrator's operation, it is preferable to simultaneously erase the state in which the variable winning port 2003 easily receives the game ball B, but it is preferable to make it possible to maintain the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low-probability state (rescue count counter). In this way, a configuration that makes it possible to initialize the time-saving state and return to the low-probability non-time-saving state while maintaining the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low-probability state (rescue count counter) will be described below.

In the time-saving state, it is set so that it is easier to receive the game ball B into the variable winning port 2003 than in the non-time-saving state. For example, when a normal lottery is performed, the probability that the lottery result of the normal pattern will be a "normal win" is increased, or when the lottery result of the normal pattern is a "normal win", the time or number of times that the variable winning port 2003 closed by the variable winning port door 2521 is open is increased, thereby making it easier to receive the game ball B into the variable winning port 2003. As a result, in the non-time-saving state, since it is difficult or impossible to receive the game ball B into the variable winning port 2003, the main game is to have the game ball B enter the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005, whereas in the time-saving state, since it is easier to receive the game ball B into the variable winning port 2003 than in the non-time-saving state, the main game is to have the game ball B enter the variable winning port 2003. In addition, in the time-saving state, it is easier to receive game ball B into the variable winning opening 2003 than in the non-time-saving state, so the player can play without losing too many balls.

In addition, after power-on with RAM clearing or after a jackpot game is played, the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue count counter) is counted, and when the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state reaches 600 times (rescue count counter = 600), control is made to the low probability time-saving state B. Here, in the time-saving state (for example, low probability time-saving state A), it is easier to receive the game ball B into the variable winning port 2003 than in the non-time-saving state, so that it is possible to execute more special symbol changes per unit time, and the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue count counter) can be progressed quickly. As a result, in the time-saving state (for example, low probability time-saving state A), it becomes easier for the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state to reach 600 times (rescue count counter = 600), and the period until control is made to the low probability time-saving state B can be shortened.

Specifically, when game ball B passes through gate 2002 and is detected by gate sensor 2601, a normal lottery is performed in main control board 1310. In this example, the probability that the lottery result of a normal pattern in a normal lottery in a non-time-saving state (low probability non-time-saving state, high probability non-time-saving state) is a "normal hit" is set to 0/100, and the probability that the lottery result of a normal pattern in a normal lottery in a time-saving state (high probability time-saving state, low probability time-saving state A, low probability time-saving state B, low probability time-saving state C) is a "normal hit" is set to 100/100. However, the probability of the lottery result of a normal pattern being a "normal hit" may be set higher in the time-saving state than in the non-time-saving state, for example, it may be 1/100 in a normal lottery in a non-time-saving state and 99/100 in a normal lottery in a time-saving state.

When the normal lottery is performed in the main control board 1310, the function display unit 1400 executes the normal pattern variable display based on the lottery result of the normal pattern drawn, and suggests the lottery result of the normal pattern. The normal pattern variable display may be executed in the performance display device 1600 in addition to the function display unit 1400. If the lottery result of the normal pattern is "normal hit", the normal hit pattern corresponding to "normal hit" is displayed when the normal pattern variable display stops, and if the lottery result of the normal pattern is "miss", the normal miss pattern corresponding to "miss" is displayed when the normal pattern variable display stops. The normal pattern variable display time from the start of the normal pattern variable display to the suggestion of the normal pattern lottery result is 60 seconds in the non-time-saving state and 0.01 seconds in the time-saving state. In other words, in the time-saving state, the normal pattern variable display can be executed frequently.

In addition, when the normal winning pattern is stopped and displayed while the variable display of the normal pattern is stopped, the variable winning port 2003, which is closed by the variable winning port door 2521, opens for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 to 10 seconds), and the variable winning port 2003 can receive the game ball B. In this example, when the normal winning pattern is stopped and displayed in the non-time-saving state, the variable winning port 2003 opens for 0.5 seconds and executes an opening and closing pattern once, and when the normal winning pattern is stopped and displayed in the time-saving state, the variable winning port 2003 opens for 1.5 seconds and executes an opening and closing pattern twice. The opening and closing pattern of the variable winning port 2003 is determined depending on whether the game state at the time when the normal winning pattern is stopped and displayed is the non-time-saving state or the time-saving state. For example, even if the normal pattern is in a non-time-saving state when the variable display of the normal pattern starts, if the normal pattern is changed from the non-time-saving state to the time-saving state during the variable display of the normal pattern, and the normal winning pattern is in the time-saving state when the normal winning pattern is stopped and displayed, the opening and closing pattern of the variable winning port 2003 in the time-saving state is executed, and even if the normal pattern is in a time-saving state when the normal pattern is changed, if the normal pattern is changed from the time-saving state to the non-time-saving state during the variable display of the normal pattern, and the normal winning pattern is in the non-time-saving state when the normal winning pattern is stopped and displayed, the opening and closing pattern of the variable winning port 2003 in the non-time-saving state is executed. As a result, the opening and closing pattern of the variable winning port 2003 can be prevented as much as possible from a situation where the variable winning port 2003 opens and closes in an advantageous opening and closing pattern (opening and closing pattern of the time-saving state) despite the change to the non-time-saving state, and the opening and closing of the variable winning port 2003 can be executed in a manner that does not cause discomfort in accordance with the game state.

In addition, if game ball B passes through gate 2002 while the normal symbol is being displayed, the normal symbol cannot be displayed, so the start of the normal symbol display is suspended until the previous normal symbol display has finished (until the previous normal symbol lottery result suggestion has finished). In addition, the number of reserved normal symbol lotteries is limited to four, and any more than this are discarded rather than reserved, even if game ball B passes through gate 2002. This prevents the burden on the game hall from increasing due to reserved numbers accumulating.

Figure 212 is a time chart showing the behavior related to normal symbols when the power is turned on. As shown in Figure 212 (A), after the power switch 630a is turned off to cut off the power, if a normal power-on operation (only the power switch 630a is operated without turning on the RAM clear switch 1310f and the setting key switch 1311a) is performed without a RAM clear operation or a setting change operation, the RAM clear that initializes the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a is not executed, and the game state is restored to the state at the time of power-off based on the backup created at the time of power-off. In other words, if the power is cut off in a time-saving state (for example, low-probability time-saving state A, low-probability time-saving state B, low-probability time-saving state C) and then a normal power-on is performed, the game state is restored to the time-saving state at the time of power-off.

In addition, when normal power-on is performed after a power cut (power failure), the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a is not cleared to initialize the RAM, and the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue counter) is maintained at the time of power-off, based on the backup created at the time of power-off. In other words, when normal power-on is performed, the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue counter) continues from the time of power-off. For example, if the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue counter) is 105 at the time of power-off, the count is maintained when the power is turned on normally, and the display of the special symbol changes after normal power-on is stopped, so that the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue counter) is incremented by +1 and updated to 106. In this example, the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue counter) is counted, and when the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state reaches 600 (rescue counter = 600), the system is controlled to switch to low probability time-saving state B. For example, when the power is turned on normally when the hall opens for business, the game state is restored to the state when the power was turned off, and the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue counter) is maintained. This means that the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state until the low probability non-time-saving state transitions to low probability time-saving state B is reduced, and players can expect the transition to low probability time-saving state B to occur soon after the hall opens for business.

In addition, if the normal pattern is being displayed when the power is cut off, the RAM clear to initialize the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a is not executed when the power is turned on normally thereafter, so that the display of the normal pattern is resumed from where it left off based on the backup created when the power was cut off. In addition, if the opening and closing pattern of the variable winning opening 2003 is being executed when the power is cut off, the RAM clear to initialize the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a is not executed when the power is turned on normally thereafter, so that the opening and closing pattern of the variable winning opening 2003 is resumed from where it left off based on the backup created when the power was cut off. In addition, if there are normal patterns reserved when the power is cut off, the RAM clear to initialize the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a is not executed when the power is turned on normally thereafter, so that the number of reserved normal patterns is restored to the number at the time of the power cut off based on the backup created when the power was cut off. Therefore, when the power is turned on normally, the game state is restored to the state it was in when the power was turned off, and the behavior related to normal symbols is also restored to the state it was in when the power was turned off.

In addition, the performance control according to the game state is executed for the performance display device 1600, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3, and the sound output from the speaker. For example, during the period when the game is controlled to the low probability time-saving states A to C, the performance control corresponding to each time-saving state is executed. Then, when the power is turned on normally after the power is cut off, the behavior related to the game state and the normal pattern is restored and the restart control is executed to notify that the count of the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state (the rescue count counter) is maintained during the period from the timing when the RAM clear signal is judged to be OFF. Specifically, as a notification mode to notify the outside, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are made to emit purple light, an image of "The game state has been restored. The rescue count is being maintained" is output to the performance display device 1600, and a sound of "The game state has been restored. The rescue count is being maintained" is output from the speaker.

212(B) illustrates a case where the RAM clear operation (operation of the RAM clear switch 1310f) is performed without operating the rescue maintenance button when the power switch 630a is turned off and the power is turned on after the power switch 630a is turned off and the power is turned off, and FIG. 212(C) illustrates a case where the RAM clear operation (operation of the RAM clear switch 1310f) is performed while operating the rescue maintenance button when the power switch 630a is turned off and the power is turned on after the power switch 630a is turned off and the power is turned off. As described above in detail, when the rescue maintenance button is not operated during the RAM clear operation, the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue count counter) is reset, whereas when the rescue maintenance button is operated during the RAM clear operation, the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue count counter) is maintained without being reset. In other words, the hall manager can select whether or not to reset the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue count counter) depending on whether or not to operate the rescue maintenance button. The count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue count counter) is stored in a second specific area (a specific area different from the set value) of the RAM built into the main control board 1310a, and the count can be maintained if the rescue maintain button is operated during the RAM clear operation.

As shown in FIG. 212 (B), if the power switch 630a is turned OFF to cut off the power, and then a RAM clear operation is performed without operating the rescue maintain button, a RAM clear is executed to initialize the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a, and the game state is initialized (set to a low-probability non-time-saving state). In other words, if the power is cut off in a time-saving state (e.g., low-probability time-saving state A, low-probability time-saving state B, low-probability time-saving state C), and then a RAM clear operation is performed, the game state is initialized to a low-probability non-time-saving state.

In addition, if the RAM clear operation is performed without operating the rescue maintenance button after the power is cut off (power failure), a RAM clear is performed to initialize the RAM (including the second specific area) built into the main control MPU 1310a, and the count for the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue counter) is reset. The initialization of the game state and the reset of the count are performed when the RAM clear signal input to the main control MPU 1310a is determined to be ON after the RAM clear operation. For example, if the count for the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue counter) is 105 at the time of power cut, the count is reset to the initial value of "0" by not operating the rescue maintenance button during the subsequent RAM clear operation, and then the display of the special symbol changes is stopped, so that the count for the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue counter) is incremented by +1 and starts from 1. In this example, the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue count counter) is counted, and when the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state reaches 600 (rescue count counter = 600), control is performed to switch to low probability time-saving state B. However, for example, if the RAM clear operation is performed without operating the rescue maintenance button when the hall opens for business, the game state is initialized and the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue count counter) is reset, so that many special symbol changes are required in the low probability state before transitioning from the low probability non-time-saving state to low probability time-saving state B, and the hall does not transition to low probability time-saving state B too soon after opening, and player expectations do not rise too soon.

In addition, if the normal pattern is being displayed while changing when the power is cut off, the RAM clear operation without operating the rescue maintenance button thereafter executes a RAM clear to initialize the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a, erases the normal pattern display that was being displayed while the power was cut off, and prevents the game from returning to the state before the power was cut off. In addition, if the opening and closing pattern of the variable winning opening 2003 is being executed while the power is cut off, the RAM clear operation without operating the rescue maintenance button thereafter executes a RAM clear to initialize the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a, erases the opening and closing pattern of the variable winning opening 2003 that was being executed while the power was cut off, and prevents the game from returning to the state before the power was cut off. In addition, if the normal pattern is reserved while the power is cut off, the RAM clear operation without operating the rescue maintenance button thereafter executes a RAM clear to initialize the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a, erases the number of reserved normal patterns that were reserved while the power was cut off, and prevents the game from returning to the state before the power was cut off. Therefore, when a RAM clear operation is performed without operating the rescue maintenance button, the game state is initialized, the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue count counter) is reset, and the state at the time of power interruption is also erased for behavior related to normal symbols.

In addition, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the performance display device 1600, the game board 5 and the door frame 3, and the sound output from the speaker are controlled according to the game state. For example, during the period when the game is controlled to the low probability time-saving states A to C, the performance control corresponding to each time-saving state is executed. Then, when a RAM clear operation is performed without operating the rescue maintenance button after the power is cut off, the erase control 1 is executed to notify that the game state, behavior related to normal symbols, and the count of the number of times that special symbols change in the low probability state (rescue count counter) have been erased during the period from the time when the RAM clear signal is determined to be ON until a predetermined period has elapsed. Specifically, as a notification mode for notifying the outside, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are made to emit yellow light, an image stating "The game state and rescue count have been cleared" is output to the performance display device 1600, and a sound stating "The game state and rescue count have been cleared" is output from the speaker.

As shown in FIG. 212(C), after the power switch 630a is turned OFF to cut off the power, if the RAM clear operation (operation of the RAM clear switch 1310f) is performed while operating the rescue maintenance button, a RAM clear is executed to initialize the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a, and the game state is initialized (set to a low-probability non-time-saving state). In other words, if the power is cut off in a time-saving state (for example, low-probability time-saving state A, low-probability time-saving state B, low-probability time-saving state C) and then a RAM clear operation is performed, the game state is initialized to a low-probability non-time-saving state. Note that the initialization of the game state is executed at the timing when the RAM clear signal input to the main control MPU 1310a is determined to be ON after the RAM clear operation.

In addition, if a RAM clear operation is performed while operating the rescue maintenance button after a power cut (power failure), a RAM clear is performed to initialize the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a, but the second specific area of the RAM is not initialized, and the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue counter) is maintained at the time of power cut based on the backup created at the time of power cut. In other words, in the case of a RAM clear operation by operating the rescue maintenance button, the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue counter) is counted from the time of power cut. For example, if the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue counter) is 105 times at the time of power cut, the count is maintained during the subsequent RAM clear operation by operating the rescue maintenance button, and the display of the special symbol changes is stopped after the RAM clear operation by operating the rescue maintenance button, so that the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue counter) is updated to +1 and 106 times. In this example, the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue count counter) is counted, and when the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state reaches 600 (rescue count counter = 600), the game is controlled to low probability time-saving state B. For example, when the RAM clear operation is performed while operating the rescue maintenance button at the opening of the hall, the game state is initialized, but the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue count counter) is maintained, so that the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state until the transition from the low probability non-time-saving state to the low probability time-saving state B is reduced, and the player can expect the transition to the low probability time-saving state B to occur soon after the opening of the hall.

In addition, if the normal pattern is being displayed while changing when the power is cut off, the RAM clear operation performed by operating the rescue maintenance button thereafter executes a RAM clear to initialize the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a, erases the display of the normal pattern changes that were being displayed while the power was cut off, and prevents the game from returning to the state before the power was cut off. In addition, if the opening and closing pattern of the variable winning opening 2003 is being executed while the power is cut off, the RAM clear operation performed by operating the rescue maintenance button thereafter executes a RAM clear to initialize the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a, erases the opening and closing pattern of the variable winning opening 2003 that was being executed while the power was cut off, and prevents the game from returning to the state before the power was cut off. In addition, if the normal pattern is reserved while the power is cut off, the RAM clear operation performed by operating the rescue maintenance button thereafter executes a RAM clear to initialize the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a, erases the number of reserved normal patterns that were reserved while the power was cut off, and prevents the game from returning to the state before the power was cut off. Therefore, when the rescue maintenance button is operated to clear the RAM, the game state is initialized and the state at the time of power interruption is erased for behavior related to normal symbols.

In addition, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3, and the sound output from the speaker are controlled according to the game state. For example, during the period when the game is controlled to the low-probability time-saving states A to C, the performance control corresponding to each time-saving state is executed. Then, when the RAM clear operation is performed while operating the rescue maintenance button after the power is cut off, the behavior related to the game state and the normal pattern is erased and the count of the number of times the special pattern changes in the low-probability state (rescue count counter) is maintained is notified during the predetermined period from the time when the RAM clear signal is determined to be ON. In particular, as a notification mode to notify the outside, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are made to emit blue light, an image saying "The game state has been cleared. The rescue count is being maintained" is output to the performance display device 1600, and a sound saying "The game state has been cleared. The rescue count is being maintained" is output from the speaker.

In this example, when the power is turned on normally after a power cut, the game state is restored to the state it was in when the power was cut, and the behavior related to the normal symbols is also restored to the state it was in when the power was cut. In contrast, when the RAM clear operation is performed after the power is cut, regardless of whether the rescue maintenance button is operated or not, the game state is initialized, and the state at the time of power cut is also erased for the behavior related to the normal symbols. This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which advantageous behavior (for example, the variable winning port 2003 opens and closes in the opening and closing pattern of the time-saving state) continues for the behavior related to the normal symbols even though the game state has been initialized and transitioned to a non-time-saving state, and the behavior related to the normal symbols can be executed without feeling unnatural in accordance with the game state.

In this example, if the RAM clear operation is performed while the rescue maintenance button is operated after the power is cut off, the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue counter) is maintained when the game state is initialized. In contrast, if the RAM clear operation is performed without operating the rescue maintenance button after the power is cut off, the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue counter) is reset when the game state is initialized. In other words, after the power is cut off, when the RAM clear operation is performed, the behavior related to the normal symbol being executed is initialized when the game state is initialized, but the hall manager only needs to operate a specified operation unit depending on whether or not he wants to change the setting value or whether or not he wants to maintain the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue counter), and the hall manager can selectively execute according to the hall environment.

In addition, in this example, when a RAM clear operation is performed, the notification mode for notifying the outside is different depending on whether the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue count counter) is maintained or reset when the game state is initialized. As a result, even if, for example, a hall manager mistakenly operates the rescue maintenance button when turning on the power and the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue count counter) is maintained, the mistake can be noticed by the notification mode for notifying the outside, and it is possible to prevent the hall manager from unintentionally maintaining the count.

In this example, when a RAM clear operation is performed after a power cut, regardless of whether the rescue maintenance button is operated, the game state is initialized and the state at the time of power cut is erased for behavior related to normal symbols. However, when a setting change operation is performed after a power cut, regardless of whether the rescue maintenance button is operated, the game state is initialized and the state at the time of power cut is erased for behavior related to normal symbols. However, the difference is that a RAM clear operation maintains the setting values that have already been set, whereas a setting change operation allows the setting values to be changed.

In addition, in this example, regardless of whether the rescue maintenance button is operated after the power is cut off, if the RAM clear operation is performed, the game state is initialized and the state at the time of power cut is erased for the behavior related to the normal symbols. However, as described above in detail, when the game state is initialized, the display of the changing special symbols and the jackpot game that were in progress at the time of the power cut are also erased, so there is no return to the display of the changing special symbols or the jackpot game that was in progress.

(RAM clear during low probability time-saving state)
In this example, the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (relief counter) is counted, and when the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief counter = 600), control is performed to switch to the low probability time-saving state B. For example, if the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (relief counter) is prepared to be close to 600 times (relief counter = 600) before the opening of the hall, the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state until the transition from the low probability non-time-saving state to the low probability time-saving state B after the opening of the hall will be small, and players can expect the transition to the low probability time-saving state B soon after the opening of the hall. On the other hand, if the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (relief counter) is prepared to be far from 600 (relief counter = 600) before the opening of the hall, many times of display of the special symbol changes in the low probability state are required until the low probability non-time-saving state transitions to the low probability time-saving state B after the opening of the hall, and the low probability time-saving state B is not transitioned to early after the opening of the hall, and the expectations of the players are not raised early. However, if the low probability non-time-saving state transitions to the low probability time-saving state A or the low probability time-saving state C at the stage of preparing the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (relief counter) before the opening of the hall, if the hall starts operating in the low probability time-saving state A or the low probability time-saving state C, the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (relief counter) will proceed too favorably. For this reason, before the opening of the hall, when the low-probability non-time-saving state is shifted to the low-probability time-saving state A or the low-probability time-saving state C, it is preferable to initialize the low-probability time-saving state A or the low-probability time-saving state C to return to the low-probability non-time-saving state while maintaining the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low-probability state (the rescue count counter). In this way, a configuration that enables the low-probability time-saving state A or the low-probability time-saving state C to be initialized and returned to the low-probability non-time-saving state while maintaining the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low-probability state (the rescue count counter) is described below.

Figure 213 is a time chart showing the change in the game state when a RAM clear operation is performed during a time-saving state. Figure 213(A) describes the case where a RAM clear operation is performed during low-probability time-saving state C, Figure 213(B) describes the case where a RAM clear operation is performed during low-probability time-saving state A, and Figure 213(C) describes the case where a RAM clear operation is performed during low-probability time-saving state B. Note that in this example, each time a special symbol is displayed in a low-probability state, the rescue count counter is counted up when the special symbol stops changing.

As shown in FIG. 213(A), in the pattern change C where the special pattern change display in the low probability state is the 353th time (rescue count counter = 353), if an immediate short win occurs and the immediate short win pattern is stopped and displayed, the low probability non-time-saving state transitions to the low probability time-saving state C, and after the immediate short win pattern is stopped and displayed, the low probability time-saving state transitions to the low probability time-saving state C. Also, during the control of the low probability time-saving state C, if the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state reaches 600 times (rescue count counter = 600), the low probability time-saving state B is controlled until the special pattern change display reaches 700 times. In other words, during the control of the low probability time-saving state C, if the pattern change Z where the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state reaches 600 times (rescue count counter = 600) is executed, the low probability time-saving state transitions to the low probability time-saving state B, and after the pattern change Z is stopped and displayed, the low probability time-saving state B is controlled.

As an external device, an external information device that conveys game information to the player is provided above the pachinko machine 1. Here, the external device displays the number of times the special symbol changes after a jackpot, but the number of times the special symbol changes displayed on the external device is counted up when the special symbol stops changing, just as the rescue counter is counted up when the special symbol stops changing, and is reset when a jackpot is hit, just as the rescue counter is reset when a jackpot is hit. Therefore, when the low probability state is controlled when a jackpot is hit, the number of times the special symbol changes displayed on the external device will match the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue counter). In such a case, by visually checking whether the number of times the special symbol changes displayed on the external device reaches 600 times, it is possible to determine whether the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state reaches 600 times (rescue counter = 600) and transitions to low probability time-saving state B.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, information about the game can be transmitted to an external device such as a hall computer via the external output terminal 558a of the external terminal board 558 according to the progress of the game. The external device is, for example, a hall computer that manages the information of the game hall or an external information device installed above each pachinko machine 1 in an island facility, and based on the information transmitted via the external output terminal 558a, it is possible to grasp the number of game balls B paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and information about the pachinko machine 1, monitor whether or not an illegal game is being played, and provide the player with information about the history of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, information about the number of jackpots per day, information about the number of times the pattern has changed until each jackpot, information about the number of prize balls at each jackpot, information about the number of times the time-saving change has continued, etc.) in the form of a numerical value or a graph. Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when a transition occurs to a special game state such as low-probability time-saving state B or low-probability time-saving state C, which is controlled in the new manner described above, information relating to these special game states is appropriately transmitted to an external device via the external output terminal 558a.

The external output terminal 558ad outputs, for example, a pattern determination signal corresponding to the stop display of the special symbol to an external device, as will be described in detail later. The main control board 1310 described above transmits a pattern determination command to the peripheral control board 1510 when the variation of the special symbol stops, and also counts up the rescue count counter described above. The pattern determination signal output via the external output terminal 558ad is output to an external device every time the variation of the special symbol stops, including when the pattern determination command is not transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 or when the rescue count counter described above is not counted up. The pattern determination signal is an electrical signal that is output for a time shorter than the shortest variation time of the special symbol, and in this embodiment, it is an electrical signal that is output for, for example, 0.128 seconds. As a result, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, even when the special symbol continuously varies, the pattern determination signal can be reliably input to an external device, and the number of variations of the special symbol (so-called start count) can be appropriately managed on the hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

In the pattern change D in the low-probability time-saving state C, the special pattern change display in the low-probability state is the 354th time (rescue count counter = 354), but if the power is cut off after the stop display of the pattern change D and then the RAM clear operation (operation of the RAM clear switch 1310f) is performed while operating the rescue maintenance button, a RAM clear is executed to initialize the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a, and the game state is initialized (set to a low-probability non-time-saving state). In other words, if the power is cut off in the low-probability time-saving state C and then the RAM clear operation is performed while operating the rescue maintenance button, the game state is initialized to a low-probability non-time-saving state. Note that the initialization of the game state is executed at the timing when the RAM clear signal input to the main control MPU 1310a is determined to be ON after the RAM clear operation.

In addition, if a RAM clear operation is performed while operating the rescue maintenance button after the power is cut off, a RAM clear is performed to initialize the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a, but the second specific area of the RAM is not initialized, and the count of the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state (rescue count counter) is maintained at the time of power cut based on the backup created at the time of power cut. In other words, in the case of a RAM clear operation by operating the rescue maintenance button, the count of the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state (rescue count counter) is counted from the time of power cut. Here, in the pattern change E' after initialization to the low probability non-time-saving state, since the rescue count counter at the time of power cut was 354 times, the rescue count counter at the time of power cut is counted up, and the display of the change of the special pattern in the low probability state becomes the 355th time (rescue count counter = 355). In this way, when the power is cut off in the low-probability time-saving state C, and then the RAM clear operation is performed while operating the rescue maintenance button, the low-probability time-saving state C can be initialized and returned to the low-probability non-time-saving state while maintaining the count of the number of times the special pattern changes in the low-probability state (rescue count counter). Therefore, even if the low-probability non-time-saving state transitions to the low-probability time-saving state C at the stage of preparing to count the number of times the special pattern changes in the low-probability state (rescue count counter) before the opening of the hall, the low-probability time-saving state C can be initialized and returned to the low-probability non-time-saving state by operating the rescue maintenance button after the power is cut off and performing the RAM clear operation, and the count of the number of times the special pattern changes in the low-probability state (rescue count counter) can be maintained without resetting the count, making it easier for the hall manager to operate in the preparation stage.

In addition, during control of the low-probability non-time-saving state, if the number of times the special symbol changes in the low-probability state reaches 600 (rescue count counter = 600), control is made to low-probability time-saving state B until the special symbol change display reaches 700 times. In other words, during control of the low-probability non-time-saving state, if pattern change Z' is executed such that the number of times the special symbol changes in the low-probability state reaches 600 (rescue count counter = 600), the state transitions from the low-probability non-time-saving state to the low-probability time-saving state B, and after the stopped display of pattern change Z', control is made to the low-probability time-saving state B.

In addition, when the power is cut off and then the RAM clear operation (operation of the RAM clear switch 1310f) is performed while operating the rescue maintenance button, the RAM clear is executed to initialize the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a, and the number of times the special symbol changes displayed on the external device is initialized (set to the initial value "0"). In other words, when the power is cut off, 354 times is displayed as the number of times the special symbol changes on the external device, but when the RAM clear operation (operation of the RAM clear switch 1310f) is performed while operating the rescue maintenance button, 0 times is displayed as the number of times the special symbol changes on the external device. Therefore, when the RAM clear operation (operation of the RAM clear switch 1310f) is performed while operating the rescue maintenance button, the number of times the special symbol changes displayed on the external device will not match the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue number counter). For example, when the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief counter = 600) when the pattern change Z' is stopped and displayed, 246 times is displayed on the external device as the number of times the special pattern changes. In such a case, just by visually checking the number of times the special pattern changes displayed on the external device, it is not possible to determine whether the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief counter = 600) and a transition to the low probability time-saving state B will occur. Therefore, even though 246 times is displayed as the number of times the special pattern changes on the external device, after the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief counter = 600) when the pattern change Z' is stopped and displayed, it is possible to make it appear as if a transition has suddenly occurred from the low probability non-time-saving state to the low probability time-saving state B.

As described above in detail, until the display of the special symbol changes in the low probability state reaches 500 to 600 times (rescue count counter = 500 to 600), when the display of the decorative symbol changes in the effect display device 1600 stops, a count effect is executed to notify the number of times the special symbol has changed in the low probability state. Such a count effect is restricted so as not to be executed during the symbol change in the low probability time-saving state C, and in the low probability time-saving state C, a time-saving effect corresponding to that low probability time-saving state C is executed. On the other hand, if the power is cut off in the low probability time-saving state C and then a RAM clear operation is performed while operating the rescue maintenance button, the low probability time-saving state C is initialized and returned to the low probability non-time-saving state, but the count effect can be executed during the symbol change in that low probability non-time-saving state. For this reason, the number of times the special symbol has changed in the low probability state (rescue count counter) cannot be determined based on the number of times the special symbol has changed as displayed on the external device; however, by executing a count effect until the display of the special symbol's changes in the low probability state reaches 500-600 times (rescue count counter = 500-600), it becomes possible to determine the number of times the special symbol has changed in the low probability state while the count effect is being executed.

As shown in FIG. 213(B), in the event of a jackpot D, control is performed to low-probability time-saving state A after the jackpot D symbol is stopped and displayed. Also, during control of low-probability time-saving state A, if the number of times the special symbol changes in the low-probability state reaches 600 (rescue count counter = 600), control is performed to low-probability time-saving state B, continuing from low-probability time-saving state A, until the special symbol change display reaches 700 times. In other words, during control of low-probability time-saving state A, if pattern change Z is executed such that the number of times the special symbol changes in the low-probability state reaches 600 (rescue count counter = 600), the low-probability time-saving state A transitions to low-probability time-saving state B, and after the pattern change Z is stopped and displayed, control is performed to low-probability time-saving state B.

In addition, the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state (rescue count counter) is reset when a jackpot is hit, so when control is exercised in low probability time-saving state A when jackpot D is hit, the number of times the special pattern changes displayed on the external device will match the count of the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state (rescue count counter). In such a case, by visually checking whether the number of times the special pattern changes displayed on the external device has reached 600, it is possible to determine whether the number of times the special pattern has changed in the low probability state has reached 600 (rescue count counter = 600) and whether a transition to low probability time-saving state B will occur.

In the pattern change D in the low-probability time-saving state A, the special pattern change display in the low-probability state is the 354th time (rescue count counter = 354), but if the power is cut off after the stop display of the pattern change D and then the RAM clear operation (operation of the RAM clear switch 1310f) is performed while operating the rescue maintenance button, a RAM clear is executed to initialize the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a, and the game state is initialized (set to a low-probability non-time-saving state). In other words, if the power is cut off in the low-probability time-saving state A and then the RAM clear operation is performed while operating the rescue maintenance button, the game state is initialized to a low-probability non-time-saving state. Note that the initialization of the game state is executed at the timing when the RAM clear signal input to the main control MPU 1310a is determined to be ON after the RAM clear operation.

In addition, if a RAM clear operation is performed while operating the rescue maintenance button after a power cut, a RAM clear is performed to initialize the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a, but the second specific area of the RAM is not initialized, and the count of the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state (rescue count counter) is maintained at the time of power cut based on the backup created at the time of power cut. In other words, in the case of a RAM clear operation by operating the rescue maintenance button, the count of the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state (rescue count counter) is counted from the time of power cut. Here, in the pattern change E' after initialization to the low probability non-time-saving state, since the rescue count counter at the time of power cut was 354 times, the rescue count counter at the time of power cut is counted up, and the display of the change of the special pattern in the low probability state becomes the 355th time (rescue count counter = 355). In this way, when the power is cut off in the low-probability time-saving state A, and then the RAM clear operation is performed while operating the rescue maintenance button, the low-probability time-saving state A can be initialized and returned to the low-probability non-time-saving state while maintaining the count of the number of times the special pattern changes in the low-probability state (rescue count counter). Therefore, even if the low-probability non-time-saving state transitions to the low-probability time-saving state A at the stage of preparing to count the number of times the special pattern changes in the low-probability state (rescue count counter) before the opening of the hall, the low-probability time-saving state A can be initialized and returned to the low-probability non-time-saving state by operating the rescue maintenance button after the power is cut off and the count of the number of times the special pattern changes in the low-probability state (rescue count counter) can be maintained without resetting the count, making it easier for the hall manager to operate in the preparation stage.

In addition, during control of the low-probability non-time-saving state, if the number of times the special symbol changes in the low-probability state reaches 600 (rescue count counter = 600), control is made to low-probability time-saving state B until the special symbol change display reaches 700 times. In other words, during control of the low-probability non-time-saving state, if pattern change Z' is executed such that the number of times the special symbol changes in the low-probability state reaches 600 (rescue count counter = 600), the state transitions from the low-probability non-time-saving state to the low-probability time-saving state B, and after the stopped display of pattern change Z', control is made to the low-probability time-saving state B.

In addition, regarding the number of times the special symbol changes on the external device, when the power is cut off and then the RAM clear operation (operation of the RAM clear switch 1310f) is performed while operating the rescue maintenance button, the RAM clear is executed to initialize the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a, and the number of times the special symbol changes on the external device is initialized (set to the initial value "0"). In other words, when the power is cut off, 354 times is displayed as the number of times the special symbol changes on the external device, but when the RAM clear operation (operation of the RAM clear switch 1310f) is performed while operating the rescue maintenance button, 0 times is displayed as the number of times the special symbol changes on the external device. Therefore, when the RAM clear operation (operation of the RAM clear switch 1310f) is performed while operating the rescue maintenance button, the number of times the special symbol changes on the external device will not match the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue number counter). For example, when the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief counter = 600) when the pattern change Z' is stopped and displayed, 246 times is displayed on the external device as the number of times the special pattern changes. In such a case, just by visually checking the number of times the special pattern changes displayed on the external device, it is not possible to determine whether the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief counter = 600) and a transition to the low probability time-saving state B will occur. Therefore, even though 246 times is displayed as the number of times the special pattern changes on the external device, after the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief counter = 600) when the pattern change Z' is stopped and displayed, it is possible to make it appear as if a transition has suddenly occurred from the low probability non-time-saving state to the low probability time-saving state B.

As described above in detail, until the display of the special symbol changes in the low probability state reaches 500 to 600 times (rescue count counter = 500 to 600), when the display of the decorative symbol changes in the effect display device 1600 stops, a count effect is executed to notify the number of times the special symbol has changed in the low probability state. Such a count effect is restricted so as not to be executed during the symbol change in the low probability time-saving state A, and in the low probability time-saving state A, a time-saving effect corresponding to that low probability time-saving state A is executed. On the other hand, if the power is cut off in the low probability time-saving state A and then a RAM clear operation is performed while operating the rescue maintenance button, the low probability time-saving state A is initialized and returned to the low probability non-time-saving state, but the pattern change in that low probability non-time-saving state allows the execution of the count effect. For this reason, the number of times the special symbol has changed in the low probability state (rescue count counter) cannot be determined based on the number of times the special symbol has changed as displayed on the external device; however, by executing a count effect until the display of the special symbol's changes in the low probability state reaches 500-600 times (rescue count counter = 500-600), it becomes possible to determine the number of times the special symbol has changed in the low probability state while the count effect is being executed.

As shown in FIG. 213(C), when the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state reaches 600 (rescue count counter = 600), control is performed to switch to low probability time-saving state B. Also, when the number of times the special symbol changes reaches 700 during control of low probability time-saving state B, control is performed to switch back to the low probability non-time-saving state. In other words, when pattern change Z is executed during control of low probability time-saving state B, which causes the special symbol to change 700 times, control is performed to switch from low probability time-saving state B to the low probability non-time-saving state, and after the stopped display of pattern change Z, control is performed to switch back to the low probability non-time-saving state.

In addition, the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue counter) is reset when a jackpot is hit, so the count is not reset when the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state reaches 600 (rescue counter = 600). Therefore, after the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state reaches 600 (rescue counter = 600), the game is controlled to low probability time-saving state B, but during the control of low probability time-saving state B, the count for the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue counter) continues to be counted against the 600 times already counted. In addition, the count for the number of times the special symbol changes displayed on the external device is not reset when the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state reaches 600 (rescue counter = 600). Therefore, during the control of low probability time-saving state B, the number of times the special symbol changes in the external device matches the count for the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue counter). For example, during control of probability time-saving state B, when pattern change Z is executed, which causes the number of times the special pattern changes to reach 700, the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state is 1400 (rescue count counter = 1400), and the number of times the special pattern is displayed on the external device is 1400.

In the pattern change D in the low-probability time-saving state B, the special pattern change display in the low-probability state is the 900th (rescue count counter = 900), but if the power is cut off after the stop display of the pattern change D and then the RAM clear operation (operation of the RAM clear switch 1310f) is performed while operating the rescue maintenance button, a RAM clear is executed to initialize the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a, and the game state is initialized (set to a low-probability non-time-saving state). In other words, if the power is cut off in the low-probability time-saving state B and then the RAM clear operation is performed while operating the rescue maintenance button, the game state is initialized to a low-probability non-time-saving state. Note that the initialization of the game state is executed at the timing when the RAM clear signal input to the main control MPU 1310a is determined to be ON after the RAM clear operation.

In addition, if a RAM clear operation is performed while operating the rescue maintenance button after a power cut, a RAM clear is performed to initialize the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a, but the second specific area of the RAM is not initialized, and the count of the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state (rescue count counter) is maintained at the time of power cut based on the backup created at the time of power cut. In other words, in the case of a RAM clear operation by operating the rescue maintenance button, the count of the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state (rescue count counter) is counted from the time of power cut. Here, in the pattern change E' after initialization to the low probability non-time-saving state, since the rescue count counter at the time of power cut was 900 times, the rescue count counter at the time of power cut is counted up, and the display of the change of the special pattern in the low probability state becomes the 901st time (rescue count counter = 901). In this way, when the power is cut off in the low-probability time-saving state B, and then the RAM clear operation is performed while operating the rescue maintenance button, the low-probability time-saving state B can be initialized and returned to the low-probability non-time-saving state while maintaining the count of the number of times the special pattern changes in the low-probability state (rescue count counter). Therefore, even if the low-probability time-saving state B is controlled before the opening of the hall, the low-probability time-saving state B can be initialized and returned to the low-probability non-time-saving state by performing the RAM clear operation while operating the rescue maintenance button after the power is cut off, and the count of the number of times the special pattern changes in the low-probability state (rescue count counter) can be maintained without being reset, making it easier for the hall manager to operate in the preparation stage.

In addition, if the power is cut off in low-probability time-saving state B, and then a RAM clear operation is performed while operating the rescue maintenance button, low-probability time-saving state B is initialized and returned to the low-probability non-time-saving state, but the rescue count counter continues counting from when the power was cut off, so even if the number of times the special pattern changes in the low-probability state reaches 600 after transitioning from low-probability time-saving state B to the low-probability non-time-saving state, the rescue count counter will be 1500 at that point. In this way, when transitioning from low-probability time-saving state B to the low-probability non-time-saving state, even if the number of times the special pattern changes in the low-probability state reaches 600 during control of the low-probability non-time-saving state, the rescue count counter does not equal 600, but equals 1500, so there is no transition from the low-probability non-time-saving state to the low-probability time-saving state B. In other words, even if pattern change Z' is executed during control of the low-probability non-time-saving state, which causes the number of times the special pattern changes in the low-probability state to reach 600, the low-probability non-time-saving state does not transition to low-probability time-saving state B, and the low-probability non-time-saving state continues to be controlled even after the stopped display of pattern change Z'.

In the above-mentioned configuration, if the power is cut off in low-probability time-saving state B and then a RAM clear operation is performed while operating the rescue maintenance button, low-probability time-saving state B is initialized and returned to the low-probability non-time-saving state, and the rescue count counter continues counting from where it left off when the power was cut off. Therefore, even if the number of times the special pattern has changed in the low-probability state reaches 600 after transitioning from low-probability time-saving state B to the low-probability non-time-saving state, the rescue count counter does not equal 600, and there is no transition from the low-probability non-time-saving state to the low-probability time-saving state B. In contrast, if the power supply is cut off in the low-probability time-saving state B and then a RAM clear operation is performed without operating the rescue maintenance button, the low-probability time-saving state B is initialized and returned to the low-probability non-time-saving state, and the count for the rescue counter is reset, so that after transitioning from the low-probability time-saving state B to the low-probability non-time-saving state, when the number of times the special symbol changes in the low-probability state reaches 600, the rescue counter = 600, and the low-probability non-time-saving state transitions to the low-probability time-saving state B. For this reason, if the power supply is cut off in the low-probability time-saving state B and then a RAM clear operation is performed, the player will not know whether or not the rescue maintenance button was operated at the time of the RAM clear operation, and for example, when the number of times the special symbol changes in the low-probability state reaches 600 after the opening of the hall, it is possible to make it impossible to determine whether or not to transition to the low-probability time-saving state B.

In addition, when the power is cut off and then the RAM clear operation (operation of the RAM clear switch 1310f) is performed while operating the rescue maintenance button, the RAM clear is executed to initialize the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a, and the number of times the special symbol changes displayed on the external device is initialized (set to the initial value "0"). In other words, when the power is cut off, 900 times is displayed as the number of times the special symbol changes on the external device, but when the RAM clear operation (operation of the RAM clear switch 1310f) is performed while operating the rescue maintenance button, 0 times is displayed as the number of times the special symbol changes on the external device. Therefore, when the RAM clear operation (operation of the RAM clear switch 1310f) is performed while operating the rescue maintenance button, the number of times the special symbol changes displayed on the external device will not match the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue number counter). For example, if the power is cut off in the low-probability time-saving state B, and then the RAM clear operation is performed while operating the rescue maintenance button, the low-probability time-saving state B is initialized and returned to the low-probability non-time-saving state, and after transitioning to the low-probability non-time-saving state, when the pattern change Z' in which the number of times the special pattern changes in the low-probability state reaches 600 is displayed, the rescue count counter = 1500, but the external device displays 600 times as the number of times the special pattern changes. In such a case, since the external device displays 600 times as the number of times the special pattern changes, after transitioning to the low-probability non-time-saving state, it appears as if the low-probability non-time-saving state is transitioning to the low-probability time-saving state B after the pattern change Z' in which the number of times the special pattern changes in the low-probability state reaches 600 times is displayed, but in reality, the rescue count counter = 1500, and there is no transition to the low-probability time-saving state B. Therefore, it is possible to make it impossible to determine whether or not the low-probability time-saving state B will be transitioned to by simply visually checking the number of times the special pattern changes displayed on the external device.

As described above in detail, until the display of the special pattern changes in the low probability state reaches 500 to 600 times (rescue count counter = 500 to 600), when the display of the decorative pattern changes in the effect display device 1600 stops, a count effect is executed to notify the number of times the special pattern has changed in the low probability state. Here, if the power is cut off in the low probability time-saving state B and then the RAM clear operation is performed while operating the rescue maintenance button, the low probability time-saving state B is initialized and returned to the low probability non-time-saving state, but there is no transition to the low probability time-saving state B afterwards, and the count effect is restricted from being executed in the pattern change in the low probability non-time-saving state. On the other hand, if the power is cut off in the low probability time-saving state B and then the RAM clear operation is performed without operating the rescue maintenance button, the low probability time-saving state B is initialized and returned to the low probability non-time-saving state, but there is a possibility of transitioning to the low probability time-saving state B afterwards, and the count effect is enabled in the pattern change in the low probability non-time-saving state. For this reason, depending on the number of times the special symbol changes displayed on the external device, the count of the rescue count counter cannot be determined, and when the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state reaches 600, it is not possible to determine whether or not to transition to low probability time-saving state B. However, if a count effect is executed during control of the low probability non-time-saving state, it becomes possible to determine that a transition to low probability time-saving state B will occur when the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state reaches 600.

In this example, the case where the power is cut off in any of the low probability time-saving states A to C, and then the RAM clear operation is performed while the rescue maintenance button is operated is described. If the rescue maintenance button is not operated during the RAM clear operation, the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue counter) is reset. In addition, if the power is cut off in any of the low probability time-saving states A to C and then the RAM clear operation is performed, it is preferable that at least the initial performance display (combination of decorative symbols, background image, etc. displayed on the performance display device 1600) and the light emission patterns of various lamps be the same a predetermined time after the RAM clear operation, regardless of whether the rescue maintenance button was operated. As a result, after the hall opens for business, depending on the initial performance display, etc., players cannot tell whether the hall manager has operated the rescue maintenance button, i.e., whether the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue counter) has been reset.

In addition, within a specified time after the RAM clear operation (before business starts), since there are no players, the hall manager may be notified in a manner according to the type of RAM clear operation (whether the rescue maintenance button was operated or not). For example, if the RAM clear operation is performed without operating the rescue maintenance button after the power is cut off, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and door frame 3 are made to emit yellow light, an image of "The game status and rescue count have been cleared" is output to the performance display device 1600, and a sound of "The game status and rescue count have been cleared" is output from the speaker, as a notification mode to notify the outside. On the other hand, if the RAM clear operation is performed while operating the rescue maintenance button after the power is cut off, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and door frame 3 are made to emit blue light, an image of "The game status has been cleared. The rescue count has been maintained" is output to the performance display device 1600, and a sound of "The game status has been cleared. The rescue count has been maintained" is output from the speaker, as a notification mode to notify the outside.

(Delay in the start of the low probability time-saving state B due to RAM clear operation: When counting the number of rescues counter at the start of fluctuation)
In the above, the rescue counter is counted up when the special symbol stops changing every time the special symbol changes in the low probability state, but as a modified example, the rescue counter may be counted up when the special symbol starts changing every time the special symbol changes in the low probability state. In this configuration, at the start of the pattern change when the special symbol changes in the low probability state reach 600 times, the rescue counter is counted up to rescue counter = 600, and after the pattern change is stopped, the low probability time-saving state B is controlled. In other words, the timing when the rescue counter is counted up to rescue counter = 600 is different from the timing when the low probability time-saving state B is changed to. Then, when the power is cut off during the execution of a pattern change in which the display of the special pattern in the low probability state reaches 600 times, and the RAM clear operation is performed while operating the rescue maintenance button, the pattern change that was being executed when the power was cut off is erased while maintaining the count of the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state (rescue count counter), but in the pattern change that is executed afterwards in which the display of the special pattern in the low probability state reaches 601 times, control is not performed to the low probability time-saving state B, and the start timing of the low probability time-saving state B is delayed. This configuration will be described below.

Figure 214 is a time chart showing the change in the game state when a RAM clear operation is performed during the execution of a pattern change in which the special pattern display reaches 600 times in the low probability state. Figure 214 (A) describes the case where a RAM clear operation is not performed during the execution of a pattern change in which the special pattern display reaches 600 times in the low probability state, and the case where a RAM clear operation is performed, Figure 214 (B) describes the details of the case where a RAM clear operation is not performed during the execution of a pattern change in which the special pattern display reaches 600 times in the low probability state, and Figure 214 (C) describes the details of the case where a RAM clear operation is performed during the execution of a pattern change in which the special pattern display reaches 600 times in the low probability state. Note that, in this example, each time the special pattern display is executed in the low probability state, the rescue counter is counted up at the start of the special pattern display, and after the stop display of the pattern change in which the special pattern display reaches 600 times (rescue counter = 600) in the low probability state, the low probability time-saving state B is controlled.

As shown in FIG. 214(A), when the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state reaches 600 (rescue count counter = 600) during control of the low probability non-time-saving state, control is performed to low probability time-saving state B until the special symbol change display reaches 700 times. In this example, during control of the low probability non-time-saving state, at the start of pattern change D when the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state reaches 600, if the rescue count counter is counted up to rescue count counter = 600 during control of the low probability non-time-saving state, a transition is made from the low probability non-time-saving state to the low probability time-saving state B after the stopped display of pattern change D.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 214(B), when starting pattern change D, which causes the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state to reach 600 times during control of the low probability non-time-saving state, the rescue count counter is counted up at the start to set the rescue count counter to 600. Then, when the pattern change D is stopped and the fixed time t (fixed stop time) of the stopped pattern has elapsed, the rescue count counter is referenced, and if it is determined that the rescue count counter = 600 and that it is the start timing of the low probability time-saving state B, the low probability time-saving state B flag indicating that control is to be made to the low probability time-saving state B is turned ON, and control is made to the low probability time-saving state B. Then, if there is no hold at the time when the fixed time t of the stopped pattern has elapsed after the stopped display of the pattern change D, the pattern change A1 during control of the low probability time-saving state B is started after waiting for a start winning. In addition, if there is a hold when the fixed time t for the stopped pattern has elapsed after the stopped display of the pattern change D, the pattern change A1 during the control of the low probability time-saving state B is started immediately when the fixed time t has elapsed.

As an external device, an external information device that conveys game information to the player is provided above the pachinko machine 1. Here, the external device displays the number of times the special symbol changes after a jackpot. The number of times the special symbol changes displayed on the external device is counted up when the special symbol starts changing, but is counted up when the special symbol stops changing, and is reset when a jackpot is hit, just as the rescue counter is reset when a jackpot is hit. Therefore, when the low probability state is controlled when a jackpot is hit, the number of times the special symbol changes displayed on the external device will match the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue counter) when the special symbol stops changing. In such a case, by visually checking whether the number of times the special symbol changes displayed on the external device reaches 600 times, it is possible to determine whether the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state reaches 600 times (rescue counter = 600) and transitions to the low probability time-saving state B.

As shown in FIG. 214(A), at the start of the pattern change D when the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state reaches 600, the rescue counter is counted up to reach rescue count counter = 600, and then, if the power is cut off during the execution of the pattern change D and then a RAM clear operation (operation of the RAM clear switch 1310f) is performed while operating the rescue maintenance button, a RAM clear is executed to initialize the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a, and the game state is initialized (set to a low probability non-time-saving state). In this example, since the game state at the time of power cut is a low probability non-time-saving state, if a RAM clear operation is performed thereafter while operating the rescue maintenance button, there will be no change in the game state. Also, if the power is cut off during the execution of the pattern change D and then a RAM clear operation is performed while operating the rescue maintenance button, a RAM clear is executed to initialize the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a, and the pattern change D that was being executed at the time of power cut is erased, so that the state before the power cut is not restored. In addition, initialization of the game state and erasure of pattern changes are performed when the RAM clear signal input to the main control MPU 1310a is determined to be ON after the RAM clear operation.

In addition, if a RAM clear operation is performed while operating the rescue maintenance button after the power is cut off, a RAM clear is performed to initialize the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a, but the second specific area of the RAM is not initialized, and the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue counter) is maintained at the time of power cut off based on the backup created at the time of power cut off. In other words, in the case of a RAM clear operation by operating the rescue maintenance button, the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue counter) is counted from the time of power cut off. Here, at the start of the pattern change E after the RAM clear operation is performed while operating the rescue maintenance button, the rescue counter at the time of power cut off is counted up, and the display of the change of the special symbol in the low probability state is the 601st time (rescue counter = 601). Then, after the display of the stopped pattern change E, the low probability non-time-saving state is transitioned to the low probability time-saving state B.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 214(C), when starting pattern change D, which causes the number of times that the special pattern changes in the low probability state to reach 600 times during control of the low probability non-time-saving state, the rescue count counter is counted up at the start to set the rescue count counter to 600. If the power is cut off during the execution of pattern change D and then a RAM clear operation (operation of the RAM clear switch 1310f) is performed while operating the rescue maintenance button, RAM clear is executed to initialize the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a, so that the pattern change D that was being executed at the time of power cut is erased and is not stored as reserved. However, the count for the number of times that the special pattern changes (rescue count counter) in the low probability state is maintained at the rescue count counter = 600 at the time of power cut. Then, waiting for a start winning, the pattern change E is started, and at the start, the rescue count counter is counted up to set the rescue count counter to 601. Then, when the symbol variation E is stopped and the fixed time t (fixed stop time) of the stopped symbol has elapsed, the rescue counter is referred to, and if it is determined that the low probability time-saving state B is not being controlled even though the rescue counter is 601, the low probability time-saving state B flag indicating that the state is to be controlled to the low probability time-saving state B is turned ON, and the state is controlled to the low probability time-saving state B. In other words, the end point of the symbol variation when the rescue counter is 600 is originally the start timing of the low probability time-saving state B, and at the end point of the symbol variation when the rescue counter is 601, the state should be controlled to the low probability time-saving state B unless there is a win, but if it is determined that the low probability time-saving state B is not being controlled, the low probability time-saving state B flag indicating that the state is to be controlled to the low probability time-saving state B is turned ON, and the state is controlled to the low probability time-saving state B. If there is no hold at the time when the fixed time t of the stopped symbol has elapsed after the symbol variation E is stopped, the pattern variation A1 is started while the low probability time-saving state B is being controlled. In addition, if there is a hold when the fixed time t for the stopped pattern has elapsed after the stopped display of the pattern change E, the pattern change A1 during the control of the low probability time-saving state B is started immediately after the fixed time t has elapsed.

As described above, if the power supply is not cut off during the execution of pattern change D, when the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state reaches 600, the state transitions to low probability time-saving state B after the stop display of pattern change D. However, if the power supply is cut off during the execution of pattern change D and then a RAM clear operation (operation of RAM clear switch 1310f) is performed while operating the rescue maintenance button, the pattern change D that was being executed at the time of power cut is erased, and the timing to transition to low probability time-saving state B is lost. For this reason, if the power supply is cut off during the execution of pattern change D and then a RAM clear operation is performed while operating the rescue maintenance button, the display of the change in the special pattern in the low probability state will be the 601st (rescue count counter = 601) at the start of the subsequent pattern change E, and the state transitions from the low probability non-time-saving state to the low probability time-saving state B after the stop display of pattern change E. In other words, normally, after the display of the stopped pattern change D, which causes the rescue count counter to reach 600, the game should transition to low-probability time-saving state B. However, if the power is cut off while the pattern change D is in progress, and then the RAM clear operation is performed while the rescue maintenance button is being operated, the game will transition to low-probability time-saving state B at a delayed timing after the display of the stopped pattern change E, which causes the rescue count counter to reach 601.

By the way, before the opening of the hall, when the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state (rescue count counter) reaches 600, if the pattern change D is started, after the pattern change D stops, the hall will transition to the low probability time-saving state B, and the hall will start operating in a seemingly advantageous state in the low probability time-saving state B. In this respect, in this example, by cutting off the power during the execution of the pattern change D, in which the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state reaches 600, and then operating the rescue maintenance button while performing a RAM clear operation, the low probability non-time-saving state can be maintained, and there will be no transition to the low probability time-saving state B, and a seemingly advantageous state will not be achieved. In addition, while the count of the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state (rescue count counter) is maintained without resetting the count, the hall can transition to the low probability time-saving state B at a delayed timing after the stop display of the pattern change E, in which the rescue count counter becomes 601. In this way, before the hall opens for business, the power is cut off during pattern change D, when the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state reaches 600, and then the RAM is cleared while the rescue maintenance button is being operated. Although the low probability non-time-saving state does not at first glance seem advantageous after the hall opens for business, the special pattern change display in the low probability state only needs to be displayed a small number of times (once) before the transition from the low probability non-time-saving state to the low probability time-saving state B occurs, and players can expect the transition to the low probability time-saving state B to occur soon after the hall opens for business.

In addition, regarding the number of times the special symbol changes on the external device, when the power is cut off and then the RAM clear operation (operation of the RAM clear switch 1310f) is performed while operating the rescue maintenance button, the RAM clear is executed to initialize the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a, and the number of times the special symbol changes on the external device is initialized (set to the initial value "0"). In other words, when the power is cut off, 600 times is displayed as the number of times the special symbol changes on the external device, but when the RAM clear operation (operation of the RAM clear switch 1310f) is performed while operating the rescue maintenance button, 0 times is displayed as the number of times the special symbol changes on the external device. Therefore, when the RAM clear operation is performed while operating the rescue maintenance button, the number of times the special symbol changes on the external device does not match the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue counter). For example, when the RAM clear operation is performed while operating the rescue maintenance button, during the execution of the pattern change E in which the rescue counter = 601 thereafter, 1 time is displayed as the number of times the special symbol changes on the external device. In such a case, simply by visually checking the number of times the special symbol changes displayed on the external device, it is not possible to determine whether or not a transition to low-probability time-saving state B will occur after the display of the stopped symbol change E, which results in the rescue count counter = 601. Therefore, even though the external device displays 1 as the number of times the special symbol changes, it can be made to appear as if a transition has suddenly occurred from the low-probability non-time-saving state to the low-probability time-saving state B after the display of the stopped symbol change E, which results in the rescue count counter = 601.

As described above in detail, until the display of the special symbol changes in the low probability state reaches 500 to 600 times (rescue count counter = 500 to 600), a count effect is executed when the display of the decorative symbol changes in the effect display device 1600 stops, which notifies the number of times the special symbol has changed in the low probability state. Here, if the power is cut off during the execution of the symbol change D in which the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state reaches 600 times, and then the RAM clear operation is performed while operating the rescue maintenance button, the state transitions to the low probability time-saving state B after the stop display of the symbol change E in which the rescue count counter = 601 is reached, but the count effect is restricted not to be executed in the symbol change E. On the other hand, if the power is cut off in the low probability time-saving state B, and then the RAM clear operation is performed without operating the rescue maintenance button, the low probability time-saving state B is initialized and returned to the low probability non-time-saving state, but there is a possibility of transitioning to the low probability time-saving state B after that, and the count effect can be executed in the symbol change in the low probability non-time-saving state. For this reason, depending on the number of times the special pattern changes displayed on the external device, the count of the rescue count counter cannot be determined, and after the stopped display of pattern change E, where the rescue count counter = 601, it is not possible to determine whether or not a transition to low-probability time-saving state B will occur. However, since the counting effect is not executed in pattern change E, it is not possible to determine whether or not a transition to low-probability time-saving state B will occur even by the counting effect.

(Maintaining the Relief Count Counter When a RAM Error Occurs (Modification))
In the above, when a RAM error occurs, the specific abnormality flag is turned ON, the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and when the power supply is turned on again, the RAM error can be released and the game can be continued by performing a setting change operation. When such a RAM error occurs and a setting change operation is performed, the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (the rescue counter) is reset regardless of whether the rescue maintenance button is operated during the setting change operation. However, as a modified example, the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (the rescue counter) may be maintained depending on whether the rescue maintenance button is operated during the setting change operation. Such a configuration will be described below.

Figure 215 shows a modified example of the RAM clear condition indicating the operation at power-on to execute a RAM clear. The cases where the rescue maintain button is operated during a RAM clear operation, where the rescue maintain button is not operated during a RAM clear operation, where the rescue maintain button is operated during a setting change operation, and where the rescue maintain button is not operated during a setting change operation are as described with reference to Figure 210.

As described above in detail, when the contents of the main control built-in RAM are judged to be abnormal when the power is turned on, or when the main control side power off processing is judged to have not ended normally when the power is turned off, an error message is displayed to inform the user that the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or cannot be trusted). When such a RAM error occurs, the specific abnormality flag is turned ON, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned off, and when the power is turned on again, a setting change operation is performed, so that the RAM error can be canceled and the game can be continued. Specifically, when a setting change operation is performed when the specific abnormality flag is ON (when a RAM error occurs), the game state is initialized and the setting value can be changed regardless of whether the rescue maintenance button is operated during the setting change operation. When changing the setting value, the setting value is temporarily set to the minimum setting value 1, which is the initial value, and the value increases by 1 each time the setting switch button 1311b is operated, and when it reaches the maximum setting value 6, it returns to the initial setting value 1, and it is possible to increase the value by 1 again. In addition, if the specific abnormality flag is ON (when a RAM error occurs), and the power is turned on without changing the settings, the specific abnormality flag will remain ON without clearing the RAM error.

Here, when the rescue maintenance button is operated during the setting change operation when the specific abnormality flag is ON (when a RAM error occurs), the count of the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state (the rescue count counter) is maintained. In addition, the initialization of the game state is performed when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF after the setting change operation and it is determined that the setting change operation has ended (the input timing of the setting key OFF signal input to the main control MPU 1310a). In addition, when it is determined that the setting change operation has ended, the setting value determined by the setting change is stored in a specific area of the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a. In addition, as a notification mode to the outside, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are made to emit orange light until a predetermined period has elapsed from the timing when it is determined that the setting change operation has ended, and a sound is output from the speaker saying, "Because an abnormality has been detected, the setting value has been changed and the game state has been cleared. The rescue count has been maintained." Therefore, if the rescue maintenance button is operated during a setting change operation when the specific abnormality flag is ON (when a RAM error occurs), the setting value can be changed, and the count of the number of times the special pattern changes in a low probability state (rescue count counter) continues from where it was when the power was cut off.

On the other hand, if the rescue maintenance button is not operated during a setting change operation when the specific abnormality flag is ON (when a RAM error occurs), the count of the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state (rescue count counter) is stored in a second specific area of the RAM built into the main control board 1310a, but the count is reset. In addition, the game state is initialized and the count is reset when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF after the setting change operation and it is determined that the setting change operation has ended (when the setting key OFF signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a). Note that, when it is determined that the setting change operation has ended, the setting value determined by the setting change is stored in a specific area of the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a. As a notification mode to the outside, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and door frame 3 are made to emit red light for a predetermined period of time from the timing when it is determined that the setting change operation has ended, and a voice is output from the speaker saying, "Because an abnormality has been detected, the setting value has been changed and the game state has been cleared. The number of rescue attempts has also been cleared." Therefore, if the rescue maintenance button is not operated during the setting change operation when the specific abnormality flag is ON (when a RAM error occurs), the setting value can be changed, and the count for the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state (rescue attempt counter) is counted from the initial value of "0."

In this example, when the rescue maintenance button is operated during a setting change operation when the specific abnormality flag is ON (when a RAM error occurs), the setting value can be changed, while the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue counter) continues from when the power was cut off. In other words, if it is desired to maintain the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue counter) when a RAM error occurs, the hall manager only needs to operate a specified operation unit (rescue maintenance button) when the RAM error is released (when a setting change operation is performed), and this can be adapted to the needs of the hall manager. For example, when the rescue maintenance button is operated during a setting change operation when the specific abnormality flag is ON (when a RAM error occurs), the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue counter) is maintained, so that the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state until the transition from the low probability non-time-saving state to the low probability time-saving state B is reduced, and the player can expect the transition to the low probability time-saving state B to occur soon after the RAM error is released.

In this example, when the specific abnormality flag is ON (when a RAM error occurs) and the setting change operation is performed, if the rescue maintenance button is operated, the setting value can be changed and the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue count counter) continues from where it was when the power was cut off, whereas if the rescue maintenance button is not operated, the setting value can be changed and the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue count counter) continues from where it was when the power was cut off. In other words, when the RAM error is released (when the setting change operation is performed), the hall manager only needs to operate a specified operation unit (rescue maintenance button) depending on whether or not he wants to maintain the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue count counter), and the hall manager can select from two patterns depending on the hall environment. For example, if the rescue maintenance button is not operated during a setting change operation when the specific abnormality flag is ON (when a RAM error occurs), the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (the rescue count counter) is reset, which requires many times of special symbol changes in the low probability state before transitioning from the low probability non-time-saving state to low probability time-saving state B. As a result, the game does not transition to low probability time-saving state B too soon after the RAM error is released, and the player's expectations do not rise too soon.

In addition, in this example, when the RAM error is cleared, the notification mode used to notify the outside world differs depending on whether the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue count counter) is maintained or reset. This allows, for example, even if the hall manager accidentally operates the rescue maintenance button when clearing the RAM error (during a setting change operation) and the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue count counter) is maintained, the mistake can be noticed by the notification mode used to notify the outside world, and it is possible to prevent the hall manager from unintentionally maintaining the count.

When a rescue maintenance button is provided, the hall manager can select from two patterns when clearing the RAM error (when changing the settings) depending on whether or not he operates the rescue maintenance button. However, when a rescue maintenance button is not provided, the hall manager can only execute one pattern when clearing the RAM error by simply changing the settings. For this reason, if the pachinko machine 1 is not provided with a rescue maintenance button, an operation unit that can be operated from the hall side can be provided, increasing the number of patterns that the hall manager can select from.

[Resetting the rescue counter in the event of an unauthorized power outage]
In this example, the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (relief counter) is counted, and when the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief counter = 600), the game is controlled to the low probability time-saving state B. However, in such a configuration, there is a risk of fraud against the rescue counter. As a fraudulent method, for example, a fraudulent board (so-called hanging board) capable of fraudulently counting up the rescue counter is connected to the main control board 1310, and an illegal value (for example, an illegal value close to 600) is stored in the rescue counter contrary to the original game. In addition, such a fraudulent board may be connected using any of a plurality of wirings connected to the main control board 1310 by a connector, and for example, a predetermined wiring may be detached from the main control board 1310, and the fraudulent board may be connected to the main control board 1310 by relaying the fraudulent board to the wiring.

In addition, in this example, to prevent such fraud, the ON/OFF operation status of the power switch 630a and the connection status of all or specific wires among the multiple wires connected to the main control board 1310 via connectors are monitored, and if an abnormality (insertion or removal) occurs in the connection status of the wires while the power switch 630a is ON, the count value of the rescue count counter is initialized.

As a specific configuration, for example, the power supply path from the power source to the memory area (RAM) in which the count value of the rescue counter in the main control board 1310 is stored is made to go through the connector parts and circuit patterns of the wiring (all wiring or specific wiring) to be monitored among the multiple wirings connected to the main control board 1310, and even if the power switch 630a is not turned off (not turned off), when a power drop is detected when at least a part of the power supply path is cut off, it is determined that at least a part of the power supply path has been cut off illegally, and the count value of the rescue counter stored in the RAM of the main control board 1310 is initialized. As a result, even if an illegal board (a so-called hanging board) that can illegally count up the rescue counter is connected to the main control board 1310, or even if the count value of the rescue counter is rewritten to an illegal value, the value can be forcibly cleared, and damage to the hall caused by illegal acts can be prevented in advance. In this example, the count value of the rescue counter is initialized when the unauthorized interruption of the power supply path is resolved, i.e., when the reconnection of the wiring being monitored is confirmed, in order to complete the unauthorized act and leave evidence of the unauthorized act.

Also, as in this example, if it is possible to monitor the insertion and removal of wires connected to the main control board 1310 while the power switch 630a is ON (without being turned OFF), it is not necessary to configure it to be part of the power supply path. As another example, it is possible to monitor the connection status (whether connected or not) of all or specific wires among the multiple wires connected to the main control board 1310 with at least the power switch 630a ON, determine whether these wires have been inserted or removed unauthorizedly, and initialize the count value of the rescue count counter stored in the RAM of the main control board 1310. In such a case, it is possible to achieve the same fraud prevention effect as described above.

In addition, it is preferable for the hall to be able to detect such fraudulent acts as soon as possible, and a configuration that can appropriately detect such fraudulent acts and further increase the deterrent effect against fraud will be described below. For the sake of convenience, the following implementation configuration will be mainly described, including its detailed aspects, as described above: "The power supply path from the power source to the memory area (RAM) in which the count value of the rescue count counter of the main control board 1310 is stored is made to go through the connector parts and circuit patterns of the wiring (all wiring or specific wiring) that is to be monitored among the multiple wirings connected to the main control board 1310, and when a power drop caused by at least a part of the power supply path being cut off is detected even though the power switch 630a is not turned off, it is determined that at least a part of the power supply path has been illegally cut off, and the count value of the rescue count counter stored in the RAM of the main control board 1310 is initialized."

Figure 216 is a time chart showing the change in the game state when the power supply to the main control board 1310 is restored after it has been cut off. Figure 216 (A) illustrates a case where the power supply to the main control board 1310 is normally cut off by turning the power switch 630a OFF, and then the power supply is restored in a normal manner by normal power-on (power switch 630a is turned ON), while Figure 216 (B) illustrates a case where the power supply to the main control board 1310 is illegally cut off without turning the power switch 630a OFF, and then the power supply is restored in an abnormal manner by reconnecting the wiring (power switch 630a remains ON).

In this example, the main control board 1310 is supplied with power from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, and the wiring used for the power supply is the "specific wiring" that is the subject of monitoring described above. In addition, the main control board 1310 monitors the ON/OFF operation of the power switch 630a, and when a power drop (such as a drop in voltage) for the main control board 1310 is detected, it is possible to determine whether the power drop for the main control board 1310 occurred by turning off the power switch 630a (whether the power to the main control board 1310 was cut off) or whether the power drop for the main control board 1310 occurred without turning off the power switch 630a (whether the power to the main control board 1310 was cut off). Specifically, in this example, when the power switch 630a is not turned off, the power to the main control board 1310 is cut off by disconnecting a specific wire connecting the power supply board 630 and the main control board 1310, and then the power to the main control board 1310 is restored by reconnecting the specific wire (power to the main control board 1310 is cut off and restored by disconnecting and reconnecting the specific wire). With regard to such disconnection of the wire, after disconnecting the specific wire described above, a fraudulent board (a so-called hanging board) capable of illegally counting up the rescue count counter is connected to the main control board 1310 via the specific wire, which may be a fraudulent act that stores (rewrites) an illegal value (e.g., an illegal value close to 600) in the rescue count counter contrary to the normal game.

As shown in FIG. 216(A), when the power switch 630a is turned OFF to normally cut off the power to the main control board 1310 during control of the low probability non-time-saving state, there is no disconnection of any wiring, so at that point, the illegal power flag described later is not turned ON (maintained OFF). Then, the state of the illegal power flag is determined when the power is restored by normal power-on without RAM clear operation (only operating the power switch 630a without turning ON the RAM clear switch 1310f or the setting key switch 1311a), and if the illegal power flag is OFF, the RAM clear to initialize the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a is not executed, and the game state at the time of power cut is maintained based on the backup created at the time of power cut (RAM information is maintained by a specified backup power source). In addition, the count of the number of times the special pattern changes (rescue counter) in the low probability state is also stored in a second specific area of the RAM built in the main control board 1310a, and the count at the time of power cut is maintained based on the backup created at the time of power cut. Here, in the pattern change that starts after normal power-on, the rescue counter at the time of power-off is held at 105 times, so the rescue counter at the time of power-off is counted up, and the display of the special pattern change in the low probability state is set to the 106th time (rescue counter = 106). In this way, when the power to the main control board 1310 is normally cut off by turning off the power switch 630a, the count of the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state (rescue counter) is held by the subsequent normal power-on, and the count of the number of times the special pattern changes (rescue counter) can continue. Also, as in the example shown in FIG. 216(A), when the power switch 630a is turned off and the power to the main control board 1310 is normally cut off, the administrator notification described below is not executed by the subsequent normal power-on.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 216(B), when the power to the main control board 1310 is illegally cut off without turning off the power switch 630a during control of the low probability non-time-saving state (when a power drop occurs to the main control board 1310), an illegal power flag (a flag that stores the fact that the power to the main control board 1310 has been cut off without turning off the power switch 630a) is set to ON as a flag that stores the fact that the wiring connecting the power supply board 630 and the main control board 1310 has been unplugged at that time. Then, when the wiring between the power supply board 630 and the main control board 1310 is reconnected, etc., the state of the illegal power flag is determined when the power is restored, and if the illegal power flag is ON, the game state at the time of the power cut is maintained based on the backup created at the time of the power cut, while the count of the number of times the special pattern has changed in the low probability state (the number of times the game has been saved) is initialized. In other words, the count of the number of times the special symbol changes (rescue counter) in the low probability state is held in a second specific area of the RAM built into the main control board 1310a by a specified backup power source, but in this example, only the count of the number of times the special symbol changes (rescue counter) held in the second specific area of the RAM is initialized (reset) by a process separate from the normal RAM clear. The reset of the rescue count is performed immediately based on the fact that the illegal power flag is ON when power is restored, and is performed regardless of whether the rescue maintenance button is operated at the time of power restoration. In this way, if the power supply to the main control board 1310 is illegally cut off without turning off the power switch 630a, and then the power supply is restored in an abnormal manner by reconnecting the wiring (the power switch 630a remains ON), when power is restored, the count of the number of times the special symbol changes (rescue counter) in the low probability state is counted from the initial value "0" when power is restored.

As described above, in this example, the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue counter) is managed by the main control board 1310, and if power is cut off to such a main control board 1310 without turning off the power switch 630a, it is determined that the power has been cut off illegally, and when power is restored thereafter, the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue counter) is reset. In addition, the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue counter) is reset regardless of whether the rescue maintenance button is operated at the time of power restoration. As a result, if it is detected that power has been cut off illegally to the main control board 1310 without turning off the power switch 630a, the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue counter) will not progress from the illegal count after power is restored, and it is possible to exert a deterrent effect against fraud against the main control board 1310.

In this example, when the power is restored, if the unauthorized power supply flag is ON, the power switch 630a is not turned OFF to notify the outside that the power has been cut off unauthorizedly, as an administrator notification. In addition, as a notification mode to notify the outside, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are made to flash in red from the time when the power is restored until a specific administrator operation is performed, and a voice is output from the speaker saying, "Because an abnormality in the power supply has been detected, the number of rescue attempts has been cleared." Here, the administrator notification can be terminated by operating a part (a part that cannot be operated by a player) located on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 that can be operated by the hall administrator as a specific administrator operation, for example. This makes it difficult for the person who has illegally cut off the power to terminate the administrator notification, and the hall administrator can be notified reliably. In addition, the unauthorized power flag is turned off when a specific administrator operation is performed, but it may remain on even after the specific administrator operation, and a history may be kept of the unauthorized power cutoff without turning off the power switch 630a.

In this example, if the unauthorized power flag is ON when power is restored, the game state is maintained, but only the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue count counter) is reset. As another example, if the unauthorized power flag is ON when power is restored, a RAM clear is executed to initialize the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a, and in addition to the count of the number of times the special symbol changes (rescue count counter), the game state may also be initialized (set to low probability non-time-saving state). In this way, if it is detected that the power has been illegally cut off to the main control board 1310 without turning off the power switch 630a, the game will not proceed in a game state that is advantageous to the fraudster after power is restored, and a deterrent effect against fraud against the main control board 1310 can be exerted.

In the explanation of FIG. 216(A), when the power switch 630a is turned off to cut off the power to the main control board 1310, the administrator notification described below is not executed when the power is turned on normally. However, instead, even when the power is turned on normally, the administrator notification may be set to notify the user that the power has been turned on normally, and the administrator notification may end when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, regardless of the operation of the hall manager. In such a case, for example, when the power is turned on normally, the notification mode for notifying the outside world may be set to cause the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and door frame 3 to emit purple light for a predetermined period of time from when the power is restored, and a sound may be output from the speaker saying, "The game state has been restored. The number of rescue attempts has been maintained.", so that this can be differentiated from cases where the power has been cut off illegally.

In addition, in this example, the rescue count is reset immediately when power is restored based on the fact that the unauthorized power supply flag is ON. However, as another example, the rescue count may be initialized when the hall manager performs a specified clear operation (operation of an administrator switch or the like located on the back of the gaming machine where players and fraudsters cannot touch) after the unauthorized interruption of the power supply path is resolved.

[Initialization of settings and reset of rescue counter when invalid setting key is entered]
In this example, the power-on operation is performed by turning on the power switch 630a while the setting key switch 1311a is kept ON, so that the setting value can be confirmed. Specifically, the power switch 630a is turned OFF, a setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder, and the setting key cylinder is turned to the first ON position to set the setting key switch 1311a as the setting key ON. When the power switch 630a is turned ON with the setting key ON, a setting key ON signal is input to the main control board 1310, making it possible to confirm the setting value. However, in such a configuration, there is a risk that the setting value confirmation may be rigged by leaving the power switch 630a ON without turning it OFF. As a method of rigging, for example, as in the above example, an unauthorized board may be connected to the main control board 1310, and when the unauthorized board is connected, the power to the main control board 1310 may be cut off/returned, and the unauthorized board may illegally input a setting key ON signal to the main control board 1310, thereby rigging the setting confirmation operation. In addition, in these cases of fraud, there is a possibility that the value of the above-mentioned rescue count counter may be rewritten to an illegal value while the setting value is being checked. In addition, there is a possibility that, without using the setting key, fraudulent radio waves or the like may be emitted to cause the main control board 1300 to malfunction, cutting off/restoring power to the main control board 1310, and a setting key ON signal may be fraudulently input to the main control board 1310 to fraudulently execute a setting check operation.

In order to prevent such fraud, in this example, as explained in the above [Regarding Resetting the Relief Count Counter in the Event of an Unauthorized Power Outage], the ON/OFF state of the power switch 630a is monitored when the power to the main control board 1310 is cut off, and unauthorized confirmation of the set value is prevented. In other words, a case where the state is changed to a state where the set value can be confirmed without any operation related to turning the power switch 630a ON/OFF is considered to be fraud, and in such a case, the set value stored in the first specific area of the RAM built into the main control board 1310 is forcibly initialized to the most unfavorable set value, and the count value stored in the second specific area of the RAM built into the main control board 1310 is also initialized. It is preferable that such fraudulent acts be made detectable by the hall side, and a configuration that can appropriately detect such fraudulent acts and further increase the deterrent effect against fraud will be described below. Note that some of the configurations described below include the same configuration as the embodiment of the above [Regarding Resetting the Relief Count Counter in the Event of an Unauthorized Power Outage], and some explanations will be omitted.

In this example, as in the embodiment of [Resetting the rescue counter in the event of an unauthorized power outage] described above, the main control board 1310 is supplied with power from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, and the wiring used for the power supply is the specific wiring to be monitored as described above. In addition, the main control board 1310 monitors the ON/OFF of the power switch 630a, and when a power drop to the main control board 1310 is detected, it is possible to determine whether the power drop to the main control board 1310 occurred by turning off the power switch 630a (whether the power to the main control board 1310 was cut off) or whether the power drop to the main control board 1310 occurred without turning off the power switch 630a (whether the power to the main control board 1310 was cut off). Specifically, when the power switch 630a is not turned off, power to the main control board 1310 is cut off by disconnecting a specific wire that connects the power supply board 630 and the main control board 1310, and then power is restored to the main control board 1310 by reconnecting the specific wire (power to the main control board 1310 is cut off and restored by disconnecting and reconnecting the specific wire). Such disconnection and insertion of a specific wire may be an illegal act that may result in the unauthorized confirmation of the setting value described above or an illegal act that may cause an illegal value to be stored in the rescue count counter.

In addition, in this example, even if the insertion or removal of a specific wire is not detected, there is a possibility that the power supply may be abnormally manipulated by irradiating unauthorized radio waves, etc., so in addition to monitoring the insertion or removal of the specific wire as described above, a special circuit configuration is provided that can detect a drop in power (drop in voltage) to the main control board 1310, and this, combined with monitoring the ON/OFF of the power switch 630a, makes it possible to determine whether a drop in power to the main control board 1310 has occurred (whether power to the main control board 1310 has been cut off) by turning off the power switch 630a regardless of the insertion or removal of a specific wire, or whether a drop in power to the main control board 1310 has occurred (whether power to the main control board 1310 has been cut off) without turning off the power switch 630a. Specifically, if the power to the main control board 1310 falls below a predetermined value while the power switch 630a is not turned OFF, the power required to start up the main control board 1310 is cut off, and if the power to the main control board 1310 subsequently rises to or exceeds the predetermined value, the power required to start up the main control board 1310 is restored. If the power to the main control board 1310 falls below a predetermined value while the power switch 630a is not turned OFF, this may indicate the possibility of an unauthorized check of the setting value described above or an unauthorized act in which an unauthorized value is stored in the rescue count counter.

Figure 217 is a time chart showing the change in the game state when the power supply to the main control board 1310 is cut off, the power supply is restored, and a setting key ON signal is input. Figure 217 (A) illustrates a normal state in which the power supply to the main control board 1310 is normally cut off by turning off the power switch 630a, and then the setting key ON signal is input when the power is restored by turning the power switch 630a ON. Figure 217 (B) illustrates an abnormal state in which the power supply to the main control board 1310 is illegally cut off without turning off the power switch 630a, and then the setting key ON signal is input when the power is restored due to illegal radio waves or reconnection of a specific wiring (the power switch 630a remains ON and unchanged).

As shown in FIG. 217(A), when the power switch 630a is turned OFF and power to the main control board 1310 is normally cut off during control of the low-probability non-time-saving state, there is no possibility of any abnormality, so at that point the unauthorized power supply flag described below is not turned ON (it is kept OFF). Then, when power is restored by the normal setting confirmation operation of turning ON the power switch 630a while turning ON the setting key switch 1311a, the state of the unauthorized power supply flag is determined, and if the unauthorized power supply flag is OFF, the setting value that has already been set is displayed on the display unit on the main control board 1310, allowing the administrator to check the setting value.

The count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue counter) is stored in a second specific area of the RAM built into the main control board 1310a, but when the power is restored, a setting key ON signal is input, and if the illegal power supply flag is OFF, the count at the time of power cut can be maintained. The game state is stored in the RAM built into the main control board 1310a, but when the power is restored, a setting key ON signal is input, and if the illegal power supply flag is OFF, the game state at the time of power cut is maintained. In other words, since no processing such as RAM clearing is performed during the setting confirmation operation, the rescue counter at the time of power cut is 105 times, and the symbol change that begins after the setting confirmation operation is performed counts up against the rescue counter at the time of power cut, so that the display of the special symbol change in the low probability state is the 106th time (rescue counter = 106). In this way, when the power to the main control board 1310 is cut off by turning off the power switch 630a, the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (relief counter) can be maintained when the power is restored after the setting confirmation operation. Also, when the power to the main control board 1310 is normally cut off by turning off the power switch 630a, and then the normal setting confirmation operation is performed by turning on the power normally, the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the game state or low probability state (relief counter) is maintained, and the administrator can check the default setting value. The period during which the setting value can be checked ends when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off.

In this example, when power is restored to the main control board 1310, a setting key ON signal is input, and if the unauthorized power flag is OFF, an administrator notification 1 is sent to the outside to inform the outside that the setting value can be checked. As a notification mode for the outside, from the time when power is restored until the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF and the setting check operation is completed, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and door frame 3 are turned off, and a sound message "Checking the setting value" is output from the speaker. Then, as described above in detail, from the time when it is determined that the setting check operation is completed until a predetermined period has elapsed, as a notification mode for the outside, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and door frame 3 are illuminated in green, and a sound message "The setting value has been checked. The number of rescues is being maintained" is output from the speaker.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 217(B), when power to the main control board 1310 is cut off without turning off the power switch 630a during control of the low-probability non-time-saving state (when a power drop occurs to the main control board 1310), at that point, for example, an unauthorized power supply flag (a flag that stores a history of unauthorized irradiation of radio waves to the main control board 1310 or unplugging of wiring connected to the main control board 1310) is turned ON as a flag that stores the fact that power to the main control board 1310 was cut off without turning off the power switch 630a. Then, even if an attempt is made to check the settings by inputting a setting key ON signal when the power is restored, if the unauthorized power supply flag is ON, a RAM clear is executed to initialize the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a, even though the situation is equivalent to the setting check operation, and the game state is initialized (set to the low-probability non-time-saving state).

In addition, even if a setting key ON signal is input when power is restored, if the unauthorized power supply flag is ON, the setting is forcibly initialized to the initial value, the minimum setting value of 1. Furthermore, in such a case, unlike normal setting change operations, it is not possible to change the setting from the initial value, the minimum setting value of 1.

The count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue counter) is stored in a second specific area of the RAM built into the main control board 1310a, but when power is restored, a setting key ON signal is input and if the illegal power flag is ON, the count at the time of power interruption is reset. Specifically, regardless of whether the above-mentioned rescue maintenance button is operated when power is restored, the count at the time of power interruption is reset. The count is reset when the RAM is cleared. Here, when power is restored with the setting key switch 1311a ON, the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue counter) is counted from the initial value of "0" after the game suspension state ends.

The initialization of the game state, the forced change to the minimum setting value of 1, and the reset of the number of times the special symbol changes (rescue counter) in a low probability state are performed immediately when power is restored, based on the fact that the unauthorized power supply flag is ON.

When the power is restored, a setting key ON signal is input, and if the illegal power supply flag is ON, a forced game stop flag that controls the game to a game stop state in which it is impossible to play is turned ON at that time, and a game stop state is generated. In this game stop state, even if a ball enters the starting hole, the special symbol variation display is not executed, and no prize balls are paid out. In addition, the game stop state can be ended by turning off the forced game stop flag and operating a part (a part that cannot be operated by a player) located on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 that can be operated by the hall manager as a specific administrator operation. In other words, after the game stop state occurs, it is possible to make it impossible for the person who illegally shut off the power (the person who illegally input the setting key ON signal) to proceed with the counting of the number of times the special symbol varies in the low probability state (the rescue counter) unless a specific administrator operation is performed.

In this example, the setting values are managed by the main control board 1310 (setting change board 1311). In the above, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are separate boards, but the functions of the setting change board 1311, such as the setting key switch 1311a and the display unit, may be mounted on the main control board 1310. If the power is cut off without turning off the power switch 630a, it is determined that the power has been cut off illegally, and if a setting key ON signal is input when the power is restored, it is determined that an attempt was made to illegally check the setting value, and the setting value is forcibly initialized to the initial value, the minimum setting value 1. In addition, the count of the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state (the rescue count counter) is reset regardless of whether the rescue maintenance button is operated at the time of power restoration. As a result, if the power supply to the main control board 1310 is illegally cut off without turning off the power switch 630a, and then when power is restored and a setting key ON signal is detected, the setting value will not be confirmed after power is restored, and the count of the number of times the special symbol changes (rescue count counter) in a low probability state will not progress from a favorable count, thereby providing a deterrent to fraud against the main control board 1310.

In addition, in this example, when power is restored, a setting key ON signal is input, and if the unauthorized power flag is ON, a RAM clear is executed to initialize the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a, and the game state is also initialized (set to a low probability non-time-saving state). As a result, if the input of a setting key ON signal is detected when power is restored after unauthorized power is cut off to the main control board 1310 without turning off the power switch 630a, game play will not proceed in an advantageous game state after power is restored, and a deterrent effect against unauthorized use of the main control board 1310 can be achieved.

When the power is restored, the setting key ON signal is input, and if the unauthorized power flag is ON, the administrator notification 2 is sent to the outside to inform the public that the power may have been illegally cut off without turning off the power switch 630a and that an attempt was made to illegally check the setting value. As a form of notification to the outside, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and door frame 3 are made to flash strongly in red from the time when the power is restored until a specific administrator operation is performed, and a voice is output from the speaker saying, "Because an abnormality regarding the power supply and the setting value has been detected, the game state and the setting value have been cleared. The number of rescue attempts has also been cleared." Here, the administrator notification 2 can be terminated by operating a part (a part that cannot be operated by the player) located on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 that can be operated by the hall administrator as a specific administrator operation, for example. This makes it difficult for a person who has illegally cut off the power and attempted to illegally check the setting value to terminate the administrator notification 2, and the hall administrator can be notified reliably. In addition, the unauthorized power flag is turned off when a specific administrator operation is performed, but it may remain on even after the specific administrator operation, and a history may be kept of the unauthorized power cutoff without turning off the power switch 630a.

In addition, in this example, the initialization of the game state described above, the forced change to the minimum setting value of 1, and the reset of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue counter) are performed immediately when the illegal power supply flag is ON when power is restored. However, as another example, the initialization of the game state described above, the forced change to the minimum setting value of 1, and the reset of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue counter) may be performed when a specific administrator operation is performed to resolve the game stop state described above.

[About recovery after a game stop occurs]
In this example, when an immediate short win occurs, a pattern change resulting in the immediate short win is executed, and after the immediate short win pattern is stopped and displayed, control is performed to a low probability time-saving state C. Also, the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state (relief count counter) is counted, and when the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600), control is performed to a low probability time-saving state B after the pattern change is stopped and displayed when the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief count counter = 600). During the execution of such pattern fluctuations resulting in an immediate short win, or during the execution of pattern fluctuations in which the number of times the special pattern changes in a low probability state reaches 600 (relief counter = 600), if some abnormality is detected and a game stop state occurs to stop the game, the hall manager must shut off the power once and then turn it on again, and after the power is turned on, it is possible to resume the game, but whether or not the pattern fluctuations that were being executed when the game stop state occurred after the power is turned on depends on the type of game stop state. This configuration will be explained below.

First, the main control board 1310 detects whether an abnormality has occurred in the pachinko machine 1, and when detecting the abnormality, it determines whether it is a minor or major abnormality. If a minor abnormality is detected, a weak game stop flag is turned ON, which controls the state to a weak game stop state in which it is not possible to play and in which it is possible to return to the game being played when the abnormality occurs, and a weak game stop state is generated. On the other hand, if a major abnormality is detected, a strong game stop flag is turned ON, which controls the state to a weak game stop state in which it is not possible to play and in which it is not possible to return to the game being played when the abnormality occurs, and a strong game stop state is generated.

In this example, when a magnet is detected by the magnetic sensor 1050, which detects the magnetism applied to the pachinko machine 1 by bringing a magnet close to the pachinko machine 1, or when a vibration sensor detects the vibration applied to the pachinko machine 1 by shaking or hitting the pachinko machine 1, it is possible that fraudulent activity is being performed due to the magnetism or vibration. When a weak magnetism or a weak vibration is detected, it is possible that a magnetism or vibration that is not related to fraudulent activity has been detected, and it is determined that a minor abnormality has occurred, and the weak game stop flag is set to ON. When an opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2 is detected, it is possible that the main frame 4 has simply been opened relative to the outer frame 2 during the work of the hall manager, but it is also possible that a fraudulent activity is being attempted against the main control board 1310 or the like provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and it is determined that a minor abnormality has occurred, and the weak game stop flag is set to ON. On the other hand, if a strong magnetic field or strong vibration is detected, it is highly likely that a magnetic field or vibration related to fraudulent activity has been detected, so it is determined that a serious abnormality has occurred and the strong play stop flag is set to ON. Also, if the setting key switch 1311a is detected to be turned ON/OFF even when power is being supplied, it is highly likely that fraudulent activity such as changing or checking the setting value has been attempted, so it is determined that a serious abnormality has occurred and the strong play stop flag is set to ON.

(When a game stop occurs during the execution of a symbol change that results in an immediate short win)
FIG. 218 is a time chart showing the performance progress when the game stop state does not occur during the execution of the pattern change that results in an immediate short hit. As shown in FIG. 218, when the pattern change B that results in an immediate short hit is executed, the low probability non-time-saving state is shifted to the low probability time-saving state C at the time tx, which is the time when the pattern change B stops. Also, before tx, during the execution of the pattern change B that results in an immediate short hit, a "help mode S premonition performance" that suggests that the "help mode S" will be entered is executed, whereas from tx, a "help mode S performance" that indicates that the "help mode S" is being executed is executed. In this example, the immediate short hit causes the special pattern to be controlled to the low probability time-saving state C until the display of the special pattern change reaches 20 to 100 times, and the period during which the special pattern is controlled to the low probability time-saving state C is called the "help mode S". If no big win occurs during the period when the varying display of the special symbol in the low-probability time-saving state C reaches 20 to 100 times, the help mode S presentation is changed from the low-probability time-saving state C to a low-probability non-time-saving state at the time when the varying symbol stops for the 20th to 100th time, and the help mode S presentation is returned to the normal presentation.

In the above-mentioned example of the performance, a decorative pattern change display is executed as a pattern change performance (performance corresponding to a change pattern) that results in an immediate short win, and a performance display is executed that stops at the stopping pattern for an immediate short win, and such a pattern change performance that results in an immediate short win corresponds to the "Help mode S precursor performance". In addition, after control of the low probability time-saving state C begins, the performance display device 1600 displays "Help mode S in progress", which indicates that control of the low probability time-saving state C is in progress, and such a display corresponds to the "Help mode S performance".

Specifically, in the effect display device 1600, before tx, during the execution of pattern change B, which results in an immediate short win, an effect display for the help mode S precursor is executed as a pattern change effect. Then, after tx, an effect display for the help mode S is executed, which indicates that the help mode S is being executed (low probability time-saving state C is being controlled). Note that even if there is a period after tx during which the pattern change (pattern change effect) does not start (for example, between pattern change C and pattern change D), the effect display for the help mode S is executed continuously during that period.

Furthermore, with regard to the movable bodies (for example, the movable bodies A to C mentioned above), the movable bodies are not used in the Help Mode S precursor performance before tx and the Help Mode S performance after tx, and the operation specified in the pattern change performance (performance corresponding to the change pattern) is performed.

In addition, in terms of lamp illumination, before tx, in conjunction with the execution of the help mode S precursor performance during the execution of the pattern change B, which results in an immediate short win, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and door frame 3 are made to emit light in a lighting pattern for the help mode S precursor, and after tx, in conjunction with the execution of the help mode S performance, the LEDs are made to emit light in a lighting pattern for the help mode S. In addition, in terms of audio output, before tx, in conjunction with the execution of the help mode S precursor performance during the execution of the pattern change B, which results in an immediate short win, the BGM for the help mode S is output from the speaker, and after tx, in conjunction with the execution of the help mode S performance, the BGM for the help mode S is output from the speaker.

Figure 219 is a time chart showing the progression of the presentation when a weak game stop state occurs during the execution of a pattern change that results in an immediate short win. In this example, a case is explained in which at time t1, during the execution of a pattern change B that results in an immediate short win, the main control board 1310 detects a minor abnormality and determines that the weak game stop flag has been turned ON.

As shown in FIG. 219, if it is determined that the weak game stop flag is ON at time t1 during the execution of the pattern change B which results in an immediate short win, the game transitions from the low probability non-time-saving state to the weak game stop state. In this weak game stop state, the game cannot be played, and a game stop notification 1 is executed to notify the outside that the weak game stop state has occurred.

Specifically, if the pattern change B that results in an immediate short win is being executed at time t1, the pattern change B that results in an immediate short win that is being executed at time t1 is suspended from t1 to t2, when the power is cut off. In addition to the pattern change B that results in an immediate short win, if the special pattern change display, special pattern reservation, normal pattern change display, normal pattern reservation, execution of the opening and closing pattern of the variable winning port 2003 by the normal winning pattern, and the payout of game balls B are being executed at time t1, the special pattern change display, special pattern reservation, normal pattern change display, normal pattern reservation, opening and closing pattern of the variable winning port 2003 by the normal winning pattern, and the payout of game balls B that are being executed at time t1 are all suspended from t1 to t2. As a result, it is impossible to proceed with the game in the weak game stop state from t1 to t2.

In addition, in the effect display device 1600, as a result of the occurrence of a weak game stop state between t1 and t2, the effect display for game stop notification 1 is executed instead of the effect display for the help mode S precursor. In such game stop notification 1, for example, a display saying "Please wait for confirmation by an attendant" is executed.

As for the movable body, when a weak game stop state occurs between t1 and t2, instead of the operation specified in the pattern change performance (performance corresponding to the change pattern), an operation for game stop notification 1 (for example, an operation that is not executed except for game stop notification 1) is executed. As for the lamp illumination, when a weak game stop state occurs between t1 and t2, instead of the illumination pattern for the help mode S precursor, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are illuminated with an illumination pattern for game stop notification 1 (for example, weak flashing in red). As for the audio output, when a weak game stop state occurs between t1 and t2, instead of the background music for the help mode S precursor, a sound for game stop notification 1 (for example, a sound saying "Please wait for confirmation by an attendant") is output from the speaker.

After the weak game stop state occurs, the hall manager must shut off the power at time t2, check the state, and then turn the power back on at time t3. The weak game stop flag is turned OFF at time t3 when the power is turned back on, and the weak game stop state is restored to the low probability non-time-saving state. In this example, when the power is turned back on at time t3 after the weak game stop state occurs, the pattern change B that results in an immediate short win is restored to the state it was in when the weak game stop state occurred, but the performance display device 1600, the operation of the movable body, the lamp light emission, and the sound output are not restored to the state it was in when the weak game stop state occurred, and are controlled to a unique state at the time of return from the weak game stop state until the stop display of the pattern change B that results in an immediate short win.

Specifically, at the time t3 when the power is turned on again, the pattern change B which results in an immediate short win that was suspended at the time t1 is resumed. Also, after the pattern change B which results in an immediate short win is resumed, at the time tx when the pattern change B stopped, the state transitions from the low probability non-time-saving state to the low probability time-saving state C. Also, at the time t3 when the power is turned on again, the display of special patterns which was suspended at the time t1, the reservation of special patterns, the display of normal patterns which was suspended at the time t1, the reservation of normal patterns, the opening and closing pattern of the variable winning port 2003 due to the normal winning pattern, and the payout of game balls B are also resumed.

As described above, if a minor abnormality is detected during the execution of pattern change B, which results in an immediate short win, and a weak game stop state occurs, the hall manager will be required to shut off the power once and then turn it back on, but after the power is turned on, pattern change B, which results in an immediate short win, will resume. In this way, although minor abnormalities may raise suspicion of fraud, there is a high possibility that it is not fraud, so after the weak game stop state is resolved, the pattern change that was in progress when the weak game stop state occurred is restored, allowing the player to resume play without any penalty.

In addition, the performance display device 1600 executes warning display 1 at time t3 when the power is turned on again. In this warning display 1, for example, a display saying "Please stop any suspicious acts such as fraud" is executed. In addition, since the warning display 1 was a minor abnormality, it is terminated after a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed, and is terminated without requiring a specific administrator operation by the hall manager, as in the warning display 2 described later. Then, after the execution of warning display 1, an apology performance display is executed. In this apology performance display, for example, a display saying "Please wait for a while until the help mode S. Please enjoy a rare action as an apology." is executed. In this example, when a weak game stop state occurs, if a pattern change that results in an immediate short win is being executed, or if a pattern change is being executed while there is a reserved ball that results in an immediate short win, an apology performance that is not executed otherwise is executed as an apology for interrupting the performance related to the pattern change. In this apology performance, a rare action (an action that is rarely executed during play) is executed using a movable body or lamp light.

The movable body is made to wait until a predetermined period of time has passed since t3 when the power is turned on again, until the performance display device 1600 starts displaying the apology performance, and after the performance display device 1600 starts displaying the apology performance, a rare operation (an operation that is rarely performed during play) is executed as the apology operation. The lamp illumination is made to wait until a predetermined period of time has passed since t3 when the power is turned on again, until the performance display device 1600 starts displaying the apology performance, and after the performance display device 1600 starts displaying the apology performance, a rare operation (an operation that is rarely performed during play) is executed as the apology operation. The apology operation is made to end when a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) has passed, and if tx, which is the time when the pattern change B that results in an immediate short win has stopped at the time the apology operation ends, has not arrived, the movable body operation and the lamp illumination are made to wait until tx arrives. On the other hand, if the time tx, which is the time when the pattern change B stops and an immediate short win occurs when the apology operation ends, there is no waiting for the movable body to operate or the lamp to light up.

As for the audio output, the system is set to wait without outputting audio for the apology performance from t3, when the power is turned back on, until tx, when the pattern change B, which results in an immediate short win, stops. In this way, while apology actions are performed for the moving body and lamp light, by not performing an apology action for audio output, it is possible to make it less noticeable to those around and to perform it as an apology action for the player who is playing.

After the resumption of the pattern change B, which results in an immediate short win, the performance proceeds after tx, which is the time when the pattern change B stops, in the same way as when the weak game stop state does not occur during the execution of the pattern change B, which results in an immediate short win. In other words, the performance display device 1600 executes a performance display for the help mode S, which indicates that the help mode S is being executed (low probability time-saving state C is being controlled), after tx. In addition, the movable body is not used in the help mode S performance after tx, and the operation specified in the pattern change performance (performance corresponding to the change pattern) is executed. In addition, in the lamp emission, the lamp is illuminated with a lighting pattern for the help mode S in conjunction with the execution of the help mode S performance after tx. In addition, in the audio output, the BGM for the help mode S is output from the speaker in conjunction with the execution of the help mode S performance after tx.

Figure 220 is a time chart showing the progression of the presentation when a strong play stop state occurs during the execution of a pattern change that results in an immediate short win. In this example, a case is explained in which at time t1 during the execution of pattern change B that results in an immediate short win, the main control board 1310 detects a serious abnormality and determines that the strong play stop flag has been turned ON.

As shown in FIG. 220, if it is determined that the strong play stop flag is ON at time t1 during the execution of the pattern change B which results in an immediate short win, the game transitions from the low probability non-time-saving state to the strong play stop state. In this strong play stop state, the game cannot be played, and a game stop notification 2 is executed to notify the outside that the strong play stop state has occurred.

Specifically, if the pattern change B that results in an immediate short win is being executed at time t1, the pattern change B that results in an immediate short win that is being executed at time t1 is suspended from t1 to t2, when the power is cut off. In addition to the pattern change B that results in an immediate short win, if the special pattern change display, special pattern reservation, normal pattern change display, normal pattern reservation, execution of the opening and closing pattern of the variable winning port 2003 by the normal winning pattern, and the payout of game balls B are being executed at time t1, the special pattern change display, special pattern reservation, normal pattern change display, normal pattern reservation, opening and closing pattern of the variable winning port 2003 by the normal winning pattern, and the payout of game balls B that are being executed at time t1 are all suspended from t1 to t2. As a result, it is impossible to proceed with the game in the strong game stop state from t1 to t2.

In addition, in the effect display device 1600, as a result of the occurrence of a strong game stop state between t1 and t2, an effect display for game stop notification 2 is executed instead of an effect display for the help mode S precursor. In such game stop notification 2, for example, a display saying "This is a serious abnormality. Please reset the game." is executed.

As for the movable body, when a strong game stop state occurs between t1 and t2, instead of the operation specified in the pattern change performance (performance corresponding to the change pattern), an operation for game stop notification 2 (for example, an operation that is not executed except for game stop notification 2) is executed. As for the lamp illumination, when a strong game stop state occurs between t1 and t2, instead of the illumination pattern for the help mode S precursor, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and door frame 3 are illuminated with an illumination pattern for game stop notification 2 (for example, strong flashing red). As for the audio output, when a strong game stop state occurs between t1 and t2, instead of the background music for the help mode S precursor, a sound for game stop notification 2 (for example, a sound saying "This is a serious abnormality. Please reset the game.") is output from the speaker.

After the strong game stop state occurs, the hall manager cuts off the power at time t2, and when the power is turned on again at time t3, a RAM clear operation is required to operate the RAM clear switch 1310f, and a setting change operation is required to turn on the setting key switch 1311a (setting change operations of turning on the RAM clear switch 1310f and the setting key switch 1311a may also be performed). The strong game stop flag is not turned off at time t3 when the power is turned on again, and the strong game stop state is maintained until a specific administrator operation is performed at time t4. In other words, the strong game stop state is in a state in which it is impossible to play between t3 and t4, and the state returns to a state in which it is possible to play after t4.

In this example, when the power is turned on again at time t3 after the occurrence of the strong game stop state, a RAM clear operation or a setting change operation is performed, and the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a is cleared to initialize the RAM, except when the strong game stop state flag is ON, and the game state is initialized (set to low probability non-time-saving state). The setting value is stored in a specific area of the RAM built into the main control board 1310a, and when a setting change operation is performed, the already set setting value (the setting value at the time of power off before power is turned on) can be changed. The count of the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state (rescue count counter) is stored in a second specific area of the RAM built into the main control board 1310a, but when the power is turned on again at time t3 after the occurrence of the strong game stop state, if a RAM clear operation or a setting change operation is performed, the count is reset.

In the above, initialization of the game state and resetting of the count are performed at the timing of a specific administrator operation at t4 after the RAM clear operation or setting change operation. In addition, when initializing the game state, the state at the time when the strong game stop state occurred is erased, so the pattern change B, which results in an immediate short win, the performance display device 1600, the operation of the movable body, the lamp light emission, and the sound output do not return to the state at the time when the strong game stop state occurred. In addition, from t3 to t4 when the strong game stop state is resolved, the performance display device 1600, the operation of the movable body, the lamp light emission, and the sound output are controlled to the specific state at the time when the strong game stop state occurred.

Specifically, at the time t3 when the power is turned on again, the pattern change B that results in an immediate short win that was suspended at the time t1 is not resumed but remains non-fluctuating, and at the time t4 when a specific administrator operation is performed, the pattern change B that results in an immediate short win that was suspended at the time t1 is erased, and after t4, when a new starting winning occurs at the time t5, it is possible to start a new pattern change. Also, at the time t4 when a specific administrator operation is performed, the display of the special pattern change that was suspended at the time t1, the reserved special pattern, the display of the normal pattern change, the reserved normal pattern, the opening and closing pattern of the variable winning port 2003 due to the normal winning pattern, and the payout of the game balls B are also erased.

As described above, if a severe abnormality is detected during the execution of pattern change B, which results in an immediate short win, and a strong play stop state occurs, the power will be cut off and then turned back on, requiring the hall manager to perform operations such as clearing the RAM and changing settings, but after the power is turned on, pattern change B, which results in an immediate short win, will be erased. As such, since a severe abnormality is likely to be fraudulent behavior, play can be resumed after the strong play stop state is resolved, but the pattern change that was in progress when the weak play stop state occurred will not return, and a penalty will be imposed on the player.

In addition, the performance display device 1600 executes the warning display 2 at the time t3 when the power is turned on again. In this warning display 2, for example, a display of "Fraud has been committed, so everything will be reset." is executed. In addition, since the warning display 2 was a severe abnormality, it is made to continue to be displayed until a specific administrator operation is performed at the time t4, and is made to end at the time t4. Here, the specific administrator operation requires, for example, the operation of a part (a part that cannot be operated by a player) located on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 that can be operated by the hall administrator. This makes it impossible for a fraudster to easily end the warning display 2 even if he turns off the power once after the strong play stop state occurs and turns the power on again, and it is possible to ensure that the hall administrator is not notified. In addition, when the above-mentioned weak play stop state occurs, an apology performance is executed after the execution of the warning display 1, but such an apology performance is not executed after the execution of the warning performance 2 in this example because a severe abnormality is detected.

The movable body is set to wait from t3 when the power is turned on again until a new start win occurs at t5. As for the lamp illumination, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and door frame 3 are set to emit a warning illumination pattern (e.g., strong red flashing) as a warning illumination from t3 when the power is turned on again until a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed. Note that the warning illumination does not end at t4 when a specific administrator operation is performed, and is always executed to continue until the predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed, even if a specific administrator operation is performed soon after t3 when the power is turned on again. This means that even if a fraudster performs a specific administrator operation soon after t3 when the power is turned on again, the warning illumination cannot be ended, and the hall manager can be notified reliably.

Similarly, for audio output, a warning sound (e.g., "There has been fraud, so everything will be reset") is output from the speaker as a warning sound for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 30 seconds) from t3, when the power is turned back on. The warning sound does not end at t4, when a specific administrator operation is performed, and is always executed to continue until the predetermined period of time (e.g., 30 seconds) has passed, even if a specific administrator operation is performed soon after t3, when the power is turned back on. This means that a fraudster cannot end the warning sound, even if a specific administrator operation is performed soon after t3, when the power is turned back on, and it is possible to ensure that the hall manager is notified.

Then, at time t4 when a specific administrator operation is performed, the strong play stop state is returned to the low probability non-time-saving state, and after t4, when a new start winning occurs at time t5, it is possible to start a new pattern change, but while such a low probability non-time-saving state is being controlled, a normal presentation is being executed. In other words, for the presentation display device 1600, the operation of the movable body, the lamp illumination, and the sound output, a normal presentation corresponding to the low probability non-time-saving state is being executed while the pattern change is being executed.

In this example, if the main control board 1310 detects a minor abnormality during the pattern change that results in an immediate short win, the low probability non-time-saving state is switched to the weak game stop state, but if the main control board 1310 detects a severe abnormality in the weak game stop state, the weak game stop state is switched to the strong game stop state. In other words, when the main control board 1310 detects a severe abnormality in the weak game stop state, the weak game stop flag is turned OFF and the strong game stop flag is turned ON, and the strong game stop state is generated preferentially. As a result, if a fraudulent act that detects a severe abnormality is performed after the weak game stop state is generated, the weak game stop state is switched to the strong game stop state, so that such a fraudulent act will not be overlooked. In addition, when the weak game stop state is switched to the strong game stop state, the game can be resumed after the strong game stop state is resolved, but the pattern change that was being executed at the time the weak game stop state occurred is not restored, and a penalty can be given to the player.

(When a game stop occurs during the execution of special symbol fluctuations that reach 600 times in a low probability state)
FIG. 221 is a time chart showing the performance progress when a game stop state does not occur during the execution of the pattern change in which the variable display of the special pattern in the low probability state reaches 600 times (rescue counter = 600). As shown in FIG. 221, when the pattern change B is executed in which the variable display of the special pattern in the low probability state reaches 600 times (rescue counter = 600), the low probability non-time-saving state is shifted to the low probability time-saving state B at the time tx when the pattern change B stops. Also, before tx, during the execution of the pattern change B in which the variable display of the special pattern in the low probability state reaches 600 times (rescue counter = 600), a "help mode L premonition performance" that suggests entering the "help mode L" is executed, whereas from tx, a "help mode L performance" that indicates that the "help mode L" is being executed is executed. In this example, when the variable display of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (rescue count counter = 600), the variable display of the special symbol is controlled to the low probability time-saving state B until it reaches 700 times, and the period during which it is controlled to the low probability time-saving state B is called "help mode L." And, in the help mode L presentation, if there is no big win until the variable display of the special symbol in the low probability time-saving state B reaches 700 times, at the time when the 700th pattern change stops, the low probability time-saving state B is switched to the low probability non-time-saving state, and the help mode L presentation is returned to the normal presentation.

In the above-mentioned performance example, when the display of the decorative pattern changes on the performance display device 1600 stops, a counting performance is executed to notify the number of times the special pattern has changed in the low probability state until the display of the special pattern changes in the low probability state reaches 500 to 600 times, and such a counting performance corresponds to the "help mode L precursor performance". In addition, after control of the low probability time-saving state B begins, the performance display device 1600 displays "help mode L in progress", which indicates that the low probability time-saving state B is being controlled, and such a display corresponds to the "help mode L performance".

Specifically, the effect display device 1600 executes an effect display for a precursor to the help mode L, which counts down to the start of the help mode L effect (for example, a count effect that notifies the player of the number of times the special pattern has changed in the low probability state) before tx. Then, after tx, an effect display for the help mode L is executed, which indicates that the help mode L is being executed (low probability time-saving state B is being controlled). Note that even if there is a period after tx during which the pattern change (pattern change effect) does not start (for example, between pattern change C and pattern change D), the effect display for the help mode L continues to be executed during that period.

Furthermore, with regard to the movable bodies (for example, the movable bodies A to C mentioned above), the movable bodies are not used in the help mode L precursor performance before tx and the help mode L performance after tx, and the operation specified in the pattern change performance (performance corresponding to the change pattern) is performed.

In addition, for lamp illumination, before tx, in conjunction with the execution of the help mode L precursor performance, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and door frame 3 are made to emit light in a lighting pattern for the help mode L precursor, and after tx, in conjunction with the execution of the help mode L performance, they are made to emit light in a lighting pattern for the help mode L. In addition, for audio output, before tx, in conjunction with the execution of the help mode L precursor performance, background music for the help mode L precursor is output from the speaker, and after tx, in conjunction with the execution of the help mode L performance, background music for the help mode L is output from the speaker.

Figure 222 is a time chart showing the progress of the presentation when a weak game stop state occurs during the execution of a pattern change in which the variable display of the special pattern in the low probability state reaches 600 times (rescue count counter = 600). In this example, a case is explained in which at time t1 during the execution of pattern change B in which the variable display of the special pattern in the low probability state reaches 600 times (rescue count counter = 600), the main control board 1310 detects a minor abnormality and determines that the weak game stop flag has been turned ON.

As shown in FIG. 222, when the low probability non-time-saving state is in a state of pattern change B at time t1 during which the display of the special pattern change reaches 600 times (rescue count counter = 600), if it is determined that the low probability non-time-saving state has been turned ON, the state transitions from the low probability non-time-saving state to the low game stop state. In this low game stop state, it is not possible to play the game, and game stop notification 1 is executed to notify the outside that the low game stop state has occurred.

Specifically, if at time t1, pattern change B is being executed, in which the display of the special pattern in the low probability state reaches 600 times (rescue count counter = 600), pattern change B being executed at time t1 is suspended from t1 to t2, when the power is cut off. In addition to pattern change B, if at time t1, the display of the special pattern change, the reservation of the special pattern, the display of the normal pattern change, the reservation of the normal pattern, the execution of the opening and closing pattern of the variable winning port 2003 by the normal winning pattern, and the payout of the game ball B are being executed, then from t1 to t2, all of the following are suspended at time t1: the display of the special pattern change, the reservation of the special pattern, the display of the normal pattern change, the reservation of the normal pattern, the opening and closing pattern of the variable winning port 2003 by the normal winning pattern, and the payout of the game ball B. As a result, in the weak game stop state from t1 to t2, it is impossible to proceed with the game.

In addition, in the effect display device 1600, as a result of the occurrence of a weak game stop state between t1 and t2, the effect display for game stop notification 1 is executed instead of the effect display for the help mode L precursor. In such game stop notification 1, for example, a display saying "Please wait for confirmation by an attendant" is executed.

As for the movable body, when a weak game stop state occurs between t1 and t2, instead of the operation specified in the pattern change performance (performance corresponding to the change pattern), an operation for game stop notification 1 (for example, an operation that is not executed except for game stop notification 1) is executed. As for the lamp illumination, when a weak game stop state occurs between t1 and t2, instead of the illumination pattern for the help mode L precursor, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are illuminated with an illumination pattern for game stop notification 1 (for example, weak flashing red). As for the audio output, when a weak game stop state occurs between t1 and t2, instead of the background music for the help mode L precursor, a sound for game stop notification 1 (for example, a sound saying "Please wait for confirmation by an attendant") is output from the speaker.

After the weak game stop state occurs, the hall manager must shut off the power at time t2, check the state, and then turn the power back on at time t3. The weak game stop flag is turned OFF at time t3 when the power is turned back on, and the weak game stop state is restored to the low probability non-time-saving state. In this example, when the power is turned back on at time t3 after the weak game stop state occurs, the pattern change B in which the special pattern change display in the low probability state reaches 600 times (rescue count counter = 600) is restored to the state it was in when the weak game stop state occurred, but the performance display device 1600, the operation of the movable body, the lamp light emission, and the sound output are not restored to the state it was in when the weak game stop state occurred, and are controlled to a unique state at the time of return from the weak game stop state until the stop display of the pattern change B.

Specifically, at the time t3 when the power is turned on again, the pattern change B that was suspended at the time t1 (pattern change B in which the display of the special pattern changes in the low probability state reaches 600 times (rescue count counter = 600)) is resumed. In addition, after the pattern change B is resumed, at the time tx when the pattern change B is stopped, the state transitions from the low probability non-time-saving state to the low probability time-saving state B. In addition, at the time t3 when the power is turned on again, the display of the special pattern changes that was suspended at the time t1, the reservation of the special pattern, the display of the normal pattern changes, the reservation of the normal pattern, the opening and closing pattern of the variable winning port 2003 due to the normal winning pattern, and the payout of the game balls B are also resumed.

As described above, if a minor abnormality is detected during the execution of pattern change B, in which the display of the special pattern changes in the low probability state reaches 600 times (rescue count counter = 600), and a weak game stop state occurs, the hall manager must shut off the power once and then turn it back on, but after the power is turned on, pattern change B is resumed. In this way, although a minor abnormality may be suspected as cheating, since it is highly likely that it is not cheating, after the weak game stop state is resolved, the pattern change that was in progress when the weak game stop state occurred is restored, and the player is able to resume playing without any penalty.

In addition, the performance display device 1600 executes warning display 1 at the time t3 when the power is turned on again. In such warning display 1, for example, a display of "Please stop any suspicious acts such as fraud" is executed. In addition, since the warning display 1 was a minor abnormality, it is terminated when a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has passed, and it is terminated without requiring a specific administrator operation by the hall manager, as in warning display 2 described later. Then, after the execution of warning display 1, an apology performance display is executed. In such an apology performance display, for example, a display of "Please wait for a while until the help mode L. Please enjoy a rare action as an apology." is executed. In this example, when the weak game stop state occurs, if the pattern change display of the special pattern in the low probability state reaches 600 times (rescue count counter = 600) or the pattern change display is being executed with a reserved state in which the special pattern change display in the low probability state reaches 600 times (rescue count counter = 600), an apology performance that would not be executed otherwise is executed as an apology for interrupting the performance related to those pattern changes. In this type of apology performance, a rare action (an action that is rarely performed during play) is performed using a movable object or lamp illumination.

The movable body is made to wait until a predetermined period has elapsed since t3 when the power is turned on again and the performance display device 1600 starts displaying the apology performance, and after the performance display device 1600 starts displaying the apology performance, a rare operation (an operation that is rarely performed during play) is executed as the apology operation. The lamp light is made to wait until a predetermined period has elapsed since t3 when the power is turned on again and the performance display device 1600 starts displaying the apology performance, and after the performance display device 1600 starts displaying the apology performance, a rare operation (an operation that is rarely performed during play) is executed as the apology operation. The apology operation is made to end when a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed, and if tx, which is the time when the pattern change B at which the special pattern change display in the low probability state reaches 600 times (rescue count counter = 600) has not arrived at the time when the apology operation ends, is the time when the movable body operation and the lamp light emission are made to wait until tx arrives. On the other hand, if the time tx, which is the time when the pattern change B stops, has arrived when the apology operation ends, there is no waiting for the movable body to operate or the lamp to light up.

As for the audio output, the system is set to wait without outputting audio for the apology performance from t3, when the power is turned back on, until tx, when the pattern change B stops and the display of the special pattern changes in the low probability state reaches 600 times (rescue count counter = 600). In this way, while apology actions are performed for the moving body and lamp light, by not performing an apology action for the audio output, it is possible to make it less noticeable to those around and to perform it as an apology action for the player who is playing.

After the resumption of the pattern change B when the display of the special pattern change in the low probability state reaches 600 times (rescue count counter = 600), the performance proceeds after tx, which is the time when the pattern change B stops, in the same way as when the weak game stop state does not occur during the execution of the pattern change B. In other words, in the performance display device 1600, after tx, a performance display for the help mode L is executed, which indicates that the help mode L is being executed (low probability time-saving state B is being controlled). In addition, the movable body is not used in the help mode L performance after tx, and the operation specified in the pattern change performance (performance corresponding to the change pattern) is executed. In addition, in the lamp emission, after tx, the lamp is illuminated with a lighting pattern for the help mode L in conjunction with the execution of the help mode L performance. In addition, in the audio output, after tx, the BGM for the help mode L is output from the speaker in conjunction with the execution of the help mode L performance.

Figure 223 is a time chart showing the progress of the presentation when a strong play stop state occurs during the execution of a pattern change in which the display of the special pattern in the low probability state reaches 600 times (rescue count counter = 600). In this example, a case is described in which at time t1 during the execution of pattern change B in which the display of the special pattern in the low probability state reaches 600 times (rescue count counter = 600), the main control board 1310 detects a serious abnormality and determines that the strong play stop flag has been turned ON.

As shown in FIG. 223, when the strong game stop flag is determined to be ON at time t1 during the execution of pattern change B in which the display of the special pattern change in the low probability state reaches 600 times (rescue count counter = 600), the state transitions from the low probability non-time-saving state to the strong game stop state. In this strong game stop state, it is made impossible to play, and game stop notification 2 is executed to notify the outside that the strong game stop state has occurred.

Specifically, if at time t1, pattern change B is being executed in which the display of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (rescue count counter = 600), pattern change B being executed at time t1 is suspended from t1 to t2, when the power is cut off. In addition to pattern change B, if at time t1, the display of the special symbol change, the reservation of the special symbol, the display of the normal symbol change, the reservation of the normal symbol, the execution of the opening and closing pattern of the variable winning port 2003 by the normal winning symbol, and the payout of the game ball B are being executed, then from t1 to t2, all of the following are suspended at time t1: the display of the special symbol change, the reservation of the special symbol, the display of the normal symbol change, the reservation of the normal symbol, the opening and closing pattern of the variable winning port 2003 by the normal winning symbol, and the payout of the game ball B. As a result, in the strong game stop state from t1 to t2, it is impossible to proceed with the game.

In addition, in the effect display device 1600, as a result of the occurrence of a strong game stop state between t1 and t2, an effect display for game stop notification 2 is executed instead of an effect display for the help mode L precursor. In such game stop notification 2, for example, a display saying "This is a serious abnormality. Please reset the game." is executed.

As for the movable body, when a strong game stop state occurs between t1 and t2, instead of the operation specified in the pattern change performance (performance corresponding to the change pattern), an operation for game stop notification 2 (for example, an operation that is not executed except for game stop notification 2) is executed. As for the lamp illumination, when a strong game stop state occurs between t1 and t2, instead of the illumination pattern for the help mode L precursor, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and door frame 3 are illuminated with an illumination pattern for game stop notification 2 (for example, strong flashing red). As for the audio output, when a strong game stop state occurs between t1 and t2, instead of the background music for the help mode L precursor, a sound for game stop notification 2 (for example, a sound saying "This is a serious abnormality. Please reset the game.") is output from the speaker.

After the strong play stop state occurs, the hall manager cuts off the power at time t2, and when the power is turned on again at time t3, a RAM clear operation is required to operate the RAM clear switch 1310f, and a setting change operation is required to turn on the setting key switch 1311a (setting change operations of turning on the RAM clear switch 1310f and the setting key switch 1311a may also be performed). The strong play stop flag is not turned off at time t3 when the power is turned on again, and the strong play stop state is maintained until a specific administrator operation is performed at time t4. In other words, the strong play stop state is in a state in which play is not possible between t3 and t4, and the state returns to a state in which play is possible after t4.

In this example, when the power is turned on again at time t3 after the occurrence of the strong game stop state, a RAM clear operation or a setting change operation is performed, and the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a is cleared to initialize the RAM, except when the strong game stop state flag is ON, and the game state is initialized (set to low probability non-time-saving state). The setting value is stored in a specific area of the RAM built into the main control board 1310a, and when a setting change operation is performed, the already set setting value (the setting value at the time of power off before power is turned on) can be changed. The count of the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state (rescue count counter) is stored in a second specific area of the RAM built into the main control board 1310a, but when the power is turned on again at time t3 after the occurrence of the strong game stop state, if a RAM clear operation or a setting change operation is performed, the count is reset.

In the above, initialization of the game state and resetting of the count are performed at the timing of a specific administrator operation at time t4 after the RAM clear operation or setting change operation. In addition, when initializing the game state, the state at the time when the strong game stop state occurred is erased, so the pattern change B in which the special pattern change display in the low probability state reaches 600 times (rescue count counter = 600), the performance display device 1600, the operation of the movable body, the lamp light emission, and the sound output do not return to the state at the time when the strong game stop state occurred. In addition, from t3 to t4 when the strong game stop state is resolved, the performance display device 1600, the operation of the movable body, the lamp light emission, and the sound output are controlled to the specific state at the time when the strong game stop state occurred.

Specifically, at the time t3 when the power is turned on again, the pattern change B that was suspended at the time t1 (pattern change B where the special pattern change display in the low probability state reaches 600 times (rescue count counter = 600)) is not resumed and is made non-changing, and at the time t4 when a specific administrator operation is performed, the pattern change B that was suspended at the time t1 is erased, and after t4, when a new starting winning occurs at the time t5, it is possible to start a new pattern change. Also, at the time t4 when a specific administrator operation is performed, the special pattern change display that was suspended at the time t1, the special pattern reservation, the normal pattern change display, the normal pattern reservation, the opening and closing pattern of the variable winning port 2003 due to the normal winning pattern, and the payout of the game balls B are also erased.

As mentioned above, if a severe abnormality is detected during the execution of pattern change B, in which the display of the special pattern changes in the low probability state reaches 600 times (rescue count counter = 600), and a strong game stop state occurs, the power is cut off and then turned back on, requiring the hall manager to perform operations such as clearing the RAM and changing settings, but after the power is turned on, pattern change B is erased. As such, since a severe abnormality is highly likely to be fraudulent behavior, play can be resumed after the strong game stop state is resolved, but the pattern change that was in progress when the strong game stop state occurred is not restored, and a penalty is imposed on the player.

In addition, the performance display device 1600 executes the warning display 2 at the time t3 when the power is turned on again. In this warning display 2, for example, a display saying "Fraud has been committed, so everything will be reset." is executed. In addition, since the warning display 2 was a severe abnormality, it is made to continue to be displayed until a specific administrator operation is performed at the time t4, and is made to end at the time t4. Here, the specific administrator operation requires, for example, the operation of a part (a part that cannot be operated by a player) located on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 that can be operated by the hall administrator. This makes it impossible for a fraudster to easily end the warning display 2 even if he turns off the power once after the strong play stop state occurs and turns the power on again, and it is possible to ensure that the hall administrator is not notified. In addition, when the above-mentioned weak play stop state occurs, an apology performance is executed after the execution of the warning display 1, but such an apology performance is not executed after the execution of the warning performance 2 in this example because a severe abnormality is detected.

The movable body is set to wait from t3 when the power is turned on again until a new start win occurs at t5. As for the lamp illumination, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and door frame 3 are set to emit a warning illumination pattern (e.g., strong red flashing) as a warning illumination from t3 when the power is turned on again until a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed. Note that the warning illumination does not end at t4 when a specific administrator operation is performed, and is always executed to continue until the predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed, even if a specific administrator operation is performed soon after t3 when the power is turned on again. This means that even if a fraudster performs a specific administrator operation soon after t3 when the power is turned on again, the warning illumination cannot be ended, and the hall manager can be notified reliably.

Similarly, for audio output, a warning sound (e.g., "There has been fraud, so everything will be reset") is output from the speaker as a warning sound for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 30 seconds) from t3, when the power is turned back on. The warning sound does not end at t4, when a specific administrator operation is performed, and is always executed to continue until the predetermined period of time (e.g., 30 seconds) has passed, even if a specific administrator operation is performed soon after t3, when the power is turned back on. This means that a fraudster cannot end the warning sound, even if a specific administrator operation is performed soon after t3, when the power is turned back on, and it is possible to ensure that the hall manager is notified.

Then, at time t4 when a specific administrator operation is performed, the strong play stop state is returned to the low probability non-time-saving state, and after t4, when a new start winning occurs at time t5, it is possible to start a new pattern change. However, the count of the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state (rescue count counter) is reset at time t4, so it counts up from the initial value of "0". Also, during the control of such a low probability non-time-saving state, a normal presentation is executed. In other words, for the presentation display device 1600, the operation of the movable body, the lamp illumination, and the sound output, a normal presentation corresponding to the low probability non-time-saving state is executed during the pattern change.

In this example, if the main control board 1310 detects a minor abnormality during the execution of the pattern change in which the display of the special pattern in the low probability state reaches 600 times (rescue count counter = 600), the low probability non-time-saving state is switched to the weak game stop state, but if the main control board 1310 detects a severe abnormality in the weak game stop state, the weak game stop state is switched to the strong game stop state. In other words, when the main control board 1310 detects a severe abnormality in the weak game stop state, the weak game stop flag is turned OFF and the strong game stop flag is turned ON, so that the strong game stop state is generated preferentially. As a result, if a fraudulent act that detects a severe abnormality is performed after the weak game stop state is generated, the weak game stop state is switched to the strong game stop state, so that such a fraudulent act will not be overlooked. Furthermore, if the weak game stop state transitions to a strong game stop state, the player can resume playing after the strong game stop state is resolved, but the pattern change that was in progress when the weak game stop state occurred will not return, and the player may be penalized.

[About restoring time-saving effects when power is cut off]
In the above, low probability time-saving states A to C are set as the low probability time-saving state. Specifically, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "jackpot C", after the execution of the 10R jackpot game, the low probability time-saving state A is controlled until the next "jackpot". In addition, after the power is turned on with RAM clear or after the execution of the jackpot game, the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (relief counter) is counted, and if the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state does not become a jackpot until it reaches 600 times (relief counter = 600), even though the lottery result of the special symbol is not a jackpot, the low probability time-saving state B is controlled until the number of times the special symbol changes thereafter reaches a predetermined number (700 times in this example). In addition, if the result of the lottery for the special pattern is an "instant short win," the jackpot game is not executed, and the game is controlled to a low-probability time-saving state C until the number of times the special pattern changes after the instant short win pattern stops reaches a predetermined number (in this example, 20 to 100 times).

In addition, during the period when the low probability time-saving state A to C are controlled, a performance corresponding to each time-saving state is executed. Specifically, as a performance corresponding to the low probability time-saving state A, a "time-saving performance" is executed, which indicates that the low probability time-saving state A is being controlled, and for example, "time-saving game in progress" is displayed in the upper left corner of the display area of the performance display device 1600. As a performance corresponding to the low probability time-saving state B, a "help mode L performance" is executed, which indicates that the help mode L is being executed (low probability time-saving state B is being controlled), and for example, as shown in the above-mentioned performance example, "help mode L in progress" is displayed in the upper left corner of the display area of the performance display device 1600. As a performance corresponding to the low probability time-saving state C, a "help mode S performance" is executed, which indicates that the help mode S is being executed (low probability time-saving state C is being controlled), and for example, as shown in the above-mentioned performance example, "help mode S in progress" is displayed in the upper left corner of the display area of the performance display device 1600. In addition to this, the "Time Saving Effect," "Help Mode L Effect," and "Help Mode S Effect" make it possible to display background images and mini characters specific to each effect, as well as output sound and light.

In this example, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off (power failure), the type of low-probability time-saving state being executed is stored in the main control built-in RAM, and when the power supply is turned on again, a command corresponding to the type of low-probability state being executed before the power failure is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, after the power supply is turned on again, the performance corresponding to the time-saving state being executed before the power failure is restored, and even after the power supply is turned on again, it is possible to know which of the low-probability time-saving states A to C the machine is being controlled to. Specifically, if a "time-saving performance" is being executed as a performance corresponding to the low-probability time-saving state A at the time of power failure, when the power supply is turned on again, a command corresponding to the low-probability time-saving state A is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and after the power supply is turned on again, the "time-saving performance" is restored. Also, if the "help mode L effect" is being executed as an effect corresponding to low-probability time-saving state B when the power is cut off, a command corresponding to low-probability time-saving state B is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 when the power is turned on again, and the "help mode L effect" is restored after the power is turned on again. Also, if the "help mode S effect" is being executed as an effect corresponding to low-probability time-saving state C when the power is cut off, a command corresponding to low-probability time-saving state C is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 when the power is turned on again, and the "help mode S effect" is restored after the power is turned on again.

In addition, when the power is cut off and the "Help mode S effect" is being executed as the effect corresponding to the low probability time-saving state C among the low probability time-saving states A to C, the "Help mode S effect" is executed to return after the power is turned on again, but when the "Help mode S effect" is returned, some of the effects of the "Help mode S effect" are not returned. For example, during the execution of the "Help mode S effect", as shown in the above-mentioned effect example, "Help mode S in progress" is displayed in the upper left corner of the display area of the effect display device 1600, but when the "Help mode S effect" is returned, the "Help mode S in progress" is restricted from being displayed, whereas the display of the background image and mini character specific to the effect, and the output of sound and light emission are returned. This is because, during the period when the low probability time-saving state C is controlled, the number of times the special pattern changes during the time-saving state control is small, at 20 to 100 times, and compared to the low probability time-saving state A and the low probability time-saving state B, a game that is disadvantageous to the player is being played. In this regard, by restricting the display of "Help mode S in progress" on the performance display device 1600 when the "Help mode S performance" returns, it becomes difficult to understand that control has returned to the low-probability time-saving state C, and dissatisfaction with unfavorable gameplay in the low-probability time-saving state C can be suppressed.

After the power is turned on again, the effect corresponding to the time-saving state executed before the power failure is returned to, but before returning to the effect corresponding to the time-saving state, the effect display device 1600 temporarily displays a common return image (in this example, the display of the arrow bar "Hit left!" and the message "Returning to time-saving") for a predetermined period of time. In other words, regardless of whether the effect corresponding to the time-saving state is to return to the "time-saving effect", the "help mode L effect", or the "help mode S effect", the common return image is temporarily displayed, so at that point in time, it is not possible to know which effect will be returned to. In this way, at the time when the common return image is temporarily displayed, it is not possible to know whether the low probability time-saving state A is being controlled, the low probability time-saving state B is being controlled, or the low probability time-saving state C is being controlled, so that the player can be motivated to start playing as soon as possible in order to know which time-saving state it is by returning to either the "time-saving effect", the "help mode L effect", or the "help mode S effect". It is preferable that the timing for returning to either the "time-saving effect", "help mode L effect", or "help mode S effect" is when the display of the next special symbol begins to change after the common return image is displayed. This common return image will not be displayed after the power is turned off and then turned on in a state other than the time-saving state.

As described above in detail, when the contents of the main control's built-in RAM are judged to be abnormal when the power is turned on, or when the main control's power-off processing is judged to have not ended normally when the power is turned off, an error message is displayed to inform the player that there is an abnormality (or that the contents stored in the main control's built-in RAM are unreliable). When the power is turned off and a performance corresponding to the time-saving state is being executed, and such a RAM error occurs after the power is turned on again, the game is prevented from returning to the performance corresponding to the time-saving state executed before the power is turned off. This is because a RAM error may have occurred when the power was turned on by illegally shifting the game state before the power was turned off, and when such a RAM error occurs, the game is penalized by not returning to the performance corresponding to the time-saving state executed before the power was turned off and not informing the player of which time-saving state the game state is, thereby discouraging players from committing fraudulent acts such as illegally shifting the game state.

[About handling of instant short hits during time-saving control]
In the above, when an immediate short hit occurs in the time-saving state, the already controlled time-saving state is continued without being controlled to a new time-saving state based on the immediate short hit. However, as a modified example, when an immediate short hit occurs in the time-saving state, the remaining number of times that the special symbol variable display can be executed in the already controlled time-saving state is compared with the number of times that the special symbol variable display can be executed in the new time-saving state based on the immediate short hit, and the subsequent game progress mode may be determined according to the comparison result. Specifically, when the remaining number of times that the special symbol variable display can be executed in the already controlled time-saving state is greater than the number of times that the special symbol variable display can be executed in the new time-saving state based on the immediate short hit, a control to switch from the already controlled time-saving state to the new time-saving state based on the immediate short hit can be exemplified. Such a modified example will be described below.

Figure 224 shows a lottery table and a pattern determination table of a modified example. As shown in Figure 224 (A), the lottery table at low probability, which is referred to for comparison with the second special random number, is provided with an immediate short hit judgment value, which is different from Figure 190 (A), and the lottery table at low probability, which is referred to for comparison with the first special random number, and the lottery table at low probability, which is referred to for comparison with the second special random number, have the same judgment values (big hit judgment value, small hit judgment value) other than the immediate short hit judgment value in the lottery table at low probability, which is referred to for comparison with the first special random number, and the lottery table at low probability, which is referred to for comparison with the second special random number, are the same as Figure 190 (A). Similarly, as shown in Figure 224 (B), the lottery table at high probability, which is referred to for comparison with the second special random number, has the same judgment values (big hit judgment value, small hit judgment value) other than the immediate short hit judgment value in the lottery table at low probability, which is referred to for comparison with the first special random number, and the lottery table at low probability, which is referred to for comparison with the second special random number, are the same as Figure 190 (B). As a result, in the time-saving state, it becomes easier for game ball B to be received by variable winning port 2003, and the variable display of the second special pattern based on the initial winning of variable winning port 2003 is easier to execute. In addition, since there is a possibility of winning an immediate short win by initial winning of variable winning port 2003, even when advantageous play is being played in the time-saving state, the game can be played with even more hope.

Also, as shown in FIG. 224(D), the symbol determination table for instant short hits, which is compared with the second symbol random number, is different from FIG. 190(D) in that the judgment values are assigned to instant short hits A, instant short hits B, and instant short hits C, whereas the symbol determination table for instant short hits, which is compared with the first symbol random number, is the same as FIG. 190(D). In other words, after winning an instant short hit by lottery based on the second special random number, the type of instant short hit (instant short hit A, instant short hit B, or instant short hit C) is determined using the symbol determination table for instant short hits, which is compared with the second symbol random number. Note that the symbol determination table for big hits shown in FIG. 224(C) and the symbol determination table for small hits shown in FIG. 224(E) are the same as the symbol determination table for big hits shown in FIG. 190(C) and the symbol determination table for small hits shown in FIG. 190(E). In addition, in the pattern determination table for instant short hits that is compared with the second pattern random number, judgment values are allocated to the second pattern random number (for example, a random number value between 1 and 100) in a ratio of "instant short hit A:instant short hit B:instant short hit C = 10:20:70" in the same manner as in the pattern determination table for instant short hits that is compared with the first pattern random number. In addition, the ratio of judgment values allocated to the pattern determination table for instant short hits that is compared with the first pattern random number may be made different from the ratio of judgment values allocated to the pattern determination table for instant short hits that is compared with the second pattern random number.

In this example, low-probability time-saving states A to C are set as the low-probability time-saving states. Specifically, if the result of the special symbol lottery is "jackpot C," the low-probability time-saving state A is maintained after a 10R jackpot game is played until the number of times the special symbol changes reaches 100. Also, if the result of the special symbol lottery is "jackpot D," the low-probability time-saving state A is maintained after a 10R jackpot game is played until the number of times the special symbol changes reaches 599. In addition, after power-on with RAM clearing or after a jackpot game is played, the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue counter) is counted, and if a jackpot is not won before the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state reaches 600 (rescue counter = 600), and if the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state reaches 600 (rescue counter = 600), the system is controlled to low probability time-saving state B until the number of times the special symbol changes thereafter reaches a predetermined number (700 in this example) even though a jackpot game is not played. In addition, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "instant short win", the system is controlled to low probability time-saving state C until the number of times the special symbol changes after the instant short win symbol stops reaches a predetermined number (in this example, 20 times, 40 times, 100 times according to the type of instant short win symbol) even though a jackpot game is not played. In addition, the number of times the special symbol changes and is displayed in the low probability time-saving state C based on an instant short hit is set to 100 times for an "instant short hit A," 40 times for an "instant short hit B," and 20 times for an "instant short hit C."

Figure 225 is a time chart showing an instantaneous short hit during control of low-probability time-saving state B. First, when an instantaneous short hit occurs during control of low-probability time-saving state B, the remaining number of times that the variable display of the special pattern can be executed in low-probability time-saving state B is compared with the number of times that the variable display of the special pattern can be executed in low-probability time-saving state C based on the instantaneous short hit. Then, if the number of times that the variable display of the special pattern can be executed in low-probability time-saving state C based on the instantaneous short hit is greater than the remaining number of times that the variable display of the special pattern can be executed in low-probability time-saving state B, control is performed to switch from low-probability time-saving state B to low-probability time-saving state C after the instantaneous short hit pattern stops (enabling the switch to low-probability time-saving state C). In addition, when switching from the low-probability time-saving state B to the low-probability time-saving state C, the remaining number of times of variable display of special symbols that can be executed in the low-probability time-saving state B is discarded, and the number of times of variable display of special symbols that can be executed in the low-probability time-saving state C (20 times, 40 times, 100 times according to the type of the instantaneous short hit symbol) is newly counted. In other words, when switching from the low-probability time-saving state B to the low-probability time-saving state C, the period of control to the low-probability time-saving state is extended beyond the number of times of variable display of special symbols that would have been executed in the low-probability time-saving state B. On the other hand, if the remaining number of times that the special symbol can be displayed in the low-probability time-saving state B is greater than the number of times that the special symbol can be displayed in the low-probability time-saving state C based on the instantaneous short hit, the low-probability time-saving state B is maintained without switching to the low-probability time-saving state C after the instantaneous short hit symbol stops, and the low-probability time-saving state B is controlled to continue for the remaining number of times that the special symbol can be displayed in the low-probability time-saving state B (disabling switching to the low-probability time-saving state C). In this way, if an instantaneous short hit occurs during the control of the low-probability time-saving state B, the low-probability time-saving state with the greater number of times that the special symbol can be displayed is selected and executed, so that the player can maintain the advantageous state for as long as possible without feeling any disappointment or loss, and can continue playing with anticipation.

As shown in FIG. 225, during the control of low-probability time-saving state B, if the Nth special pattern variable display results in "instant short hit A," when the switching condition of "700-N<100" (N=number of times the special pattern variable display has already been executed in low-probability time-saving state B) is met, control is exercised to switch from low-probability time-saving state B to low-probability time-saving state C after the instant short hit A pattern stops. In other words, if "instant short hit A" occurs during the execution of the 601st to 700th special pattern variable display in low-probability time-saving state B, control is exercised to switch from low-probability time-saving state B to low-probability time-saving state C after the instant short hit A pattern stops. On the other hand, if "instant short hit A" occurs during the execution of the 1st to 600th special pattern variable display in low-probability time-saving state B, control is exercised to maintain low-probability time-saving state B after the instant short hit A pattern stops. In this way, while the 1st to 600th special symbol variable display is being executed in low-probability time-saving state B, the period is set as a period in which switching to low-probability time-saving state C becomes invalid if "instant short hit A" is obtained, whereas while the 601st to 700th special symbol variable display is being executed in low-probability time-saving state B, the period is set as a period in which switching to low-probability time-saving state C becomes valid if "instant short hit A" is obtained.

In addition, during the control of low-probability time-saving state B, if the Nth special symbol variable display results in "instant short hit B," when the switching condition of "700 - N < 40" (N = number of times the special symbol variable display has already been executed in low-probability time-saving state B) is met, control is performed to switch from low-probability time-saving state B to low-probability time-saving state C after the instant short hit B symbol stops. In other words, if "instant short hit B" occurs during the execution of the 661st to 700th special symbol variable display in low-probability time-saving state B, control is performed to switch from low-probability time-saving state B to low-probability time-saving state C after the instant short hit B symbol stops. On the other hand, if "instant short hit B" occurs during the execution of the 1st to 660th special symbol variable display in low-probability time-saving state B, control is performed to maintain low-probability time-saving state B after the instant short hit B symbol stops. In this way, while the 1st to 660th special symbol variable display is being executed in low-probability time-saving state B, the period is set as a period in which switching to low-probability time-saving state C becomes invalid if an "instant short hit B" is obtained, whereas while the 661st to 700th special symbol variable display is being executed in low-probability time-saving state B, the period is set as a period in which switching to low-probability time-saving state C becomes valid if an "instant short hit B" is obtained.

In addition, during the control of low-probability time-saving state B, if the Nth special symbol variable display results in "instant short hit C," when the switching condition of "700 - N < 20" (N = number of times the special symbol variable display has already been executed in low-probability time-saving state B) is met, control is performed to switch from low-probability time-saving state B to low-probability time-saving state C after the instant short hit C symbol stops. In other words, if an "instant short hit C" occurs during the execution of the 681st to 700th special symbol variable display in low-probability time-saving state B, control is performed to switch from low-probability time-saving state B to low-probability time-saving state C after the instant short hit C symbol stops. On the other hand, if an "instant short hit C" occurs during the execution of the 1st to 680th special symbol variable display in low-probability time-saving state B, control is performed to maintain low-probability time-saving state B after the instant short hit C symbol stops. In this way, while the 1st to 680th display of special symbols is being executed in low-probability time-saving state B, the period is set as a period in which switching to low-probability time-saving state C becomes invalid if an "instant short hit C" is obtained, whereas while the 681st to 700th display of special symbols is being executed in low-probability time-saving state B, the period is set as a period in which switching to low-probability time-saving state C becomes valid if an "instant short hit C" is obtained.

Next, we will explain the performance progression before and after an instantaneous short hit while the low-probability time-saving state B is under control. In this example, we will explain a case where, among the 601st to 700th special pattern change displays while the low-probability time-saving state B is under control, an "instantaneous short hit A" occurs at the time of the Nth special pattern change display (pattern change Z), and after the instantaneous short hit A pattern stops, the low-probability time-saving state B is switched to the low-probability time-saving state C.

Specifically, during the 1st to 600th execution of the variable display of the special symbol while under the control of the low-probability time-saving state B, it is set as a period during which switching to the low-probability time-saving state C is invalid if an "instant short hit A" is reached. During the period during which switching to the low-probability time-saving state C is invalid, the remaining number of times the variable display of the special symbol is displayed while under the control of the low-probability time-saving state B is maintained when an "instant short hit A" is reached, and the period during which control is in the low-probability time-saving state is not extended, so it is set as a period during which the extended acquisition effect described below cannot be executed. During the period during which switching to the low-probability time-saving state C is invalid, the "help mode L effect" is executed, which indicates that "help mode L" is being executed (low-probability time-saving state B is being controlled).

In addition, during the execution of the 681st or later variable display of the special pattern during the control of the low probability time-saving state B, the period is set as a period during which switching to the low probability time-saving state C becomes effective when "instant short hit A" is reached. During the period during which switching to the low probability time-saving state C becomes effective, control is performed to switch from the low probability time-saving state B to the low probability time-saving state C when "instant short hit A" is reached, and the period during which control is performed to the low probability time-saving state is extended, so that the period is set as a period during which the extension acquisition effect described later can be executed. During the period during which switching to the low probability time-saving state C becomes effective, in addition to executing the "help mode L effect" indicating that "help mode L" is being executed (under control of the low probability time-saving state B), the effect display device 1600 executes an "extension chance display" indicating that the period during which control is performed to the low probability time-saving state can be extended. Here, the "extension chance display" can be exemplified by an effect display in which a message image regarding extension (a message image saying "If character X appears, the time-saving may be extended...") is displayed on the effect display device 1600 (not shown). This allows players to pay attention to whether or not the "extension chance display" (described later) will be performed, and to enjoy whether or not the period during which the game is controlled to a low-probability time-saving state will be extended.

In addition, during the 681st and subsequent special symbol change displays during control of the low-probability time-saving state B, if an immediate short win occurs during the execution of symbol change Z, which is the Nth special symbol change display, an "extended acquisition effect" is executed, and after the immediate short win A symbol stops, control is performed to switch from the low-probability time-saving state B to the low-probability time-saving state C, and the period controlled to the low-probability state is extended. Here, the "extended acquisition effect" is an effect in which a display is displayed to tease whether or not character X will appear from the edge of the screen of the effect display device 1600, and either a successful pattern in which character X appears in the center of the screen of the effect display device 1600 (an effect in which the period controlled to the low-probability time-saving state is successfully extended) or a failed pattern in which character X does not appear from the edge of the screen of the effect display device 1600 (an effect in which the period controlled to the low-probability time-saving state is not successfully extended) is performed (not shown). In addition, during the execution of the pattern change Z, the period during which the extended acquisition effect can be executed is set, and an "extended acquisition effect" is executed to notify whether the period controlled to the low-probability time-saving state will be extended, and in the "extended acquisition effect" that is executed when an immediate short hit occurs, an effect is executed in which the period controlled to the low-probability time-saving state is successfully extended (successful pattern extended acquisition effect). This allows the player to pay attention with anticipation to whether the period controlled to the low-probability time-saving state will be extended during the execution of the "extended acquisition effect".

If an immediate short win occurs while the low probability non-time-saving state is under control, the game is controlled to low probability time-saving state C after the immediate short win symbol stops, but the "extended win effect" is an effect that is not executed when an immediate short win occurs while the low probability non-time-saving state is under control. This allows you to enjoy an effect that is different from the low probability non-time-saving state while the low probability time-saving state B is under control.

In addition, during the execution of the 681st and subsequent special symbol change displays during the control of the low-probability time-saving state B, the extended win effect can be set as an executable period, and even if an immediate short win does not occur, an "extended win effect" that notifies whether the period controlled to the low-probability time-saving state is extended can be executed. In this example, during the execution of the symbol change X, which is the N-2th special symbol change display during the control of the low-probability time-saving state B, an "extended win effect" is executed even though an immediate short win does not occur, and in the "extended win effect" that is executed when an immediate short win does not occur, a false effect (failed extended win effect) is executed in which the period controlled to the low-probability time-saving state fails to be extended. During the execution of such symbol change X, an "extended win effect" is executed, but since an immediate short win does not occur, an immediate short win symbol is not stopped and displayed.

In addition, after switching from the low probability time-saving state B to the low probability time-saving state C, the period is set as the period during which switching to the new low probability time-saving state C becomes effective if an "instant short hit" occurs. Even in such a case, the remaining number of times that the variable display of the special symbol can be executed in the low probability time-saving state C is compared with the number of times that the variable display of the special symbol can be executed in the new low probability time-saving state C based on the instant short hit, and if the number of times that the variable display of the special symbol can be executed in the new low probability time-saving state C based on the instant short hit is greater, control is performed to switch from the low probability time-saving state C to the new low probability time-saving state C after the instant short hit symbol stops. In other words, if the number of times that the variable display of the special symbol can be executed in the new low probability time-saving state C based on the instant short hit is greater, the period during which the control is performed in the low probability time-saving state is extended. In addition, the period during which switching to the new low probability time-saving state C becomes effective is set as the period during which an extended winning performance can be executed.

In addition, when switching from low probability time-saving state B to low probability time-saving state C, during the control of the low probability time-saving state C, the "help mode S effect" indicating that the "help mode S" corresponding to the low probability time-saving state C is being executed is not switched to, and the "help mode L effect" executed in the low probability time-saving state B is continued. In this way, since there is no change in the fact that the "help mode L effect" is being executed before and after switching from the low probability time-saving state B to the low probability time-saving state C, it is possible to make it appear as if the control of the low probability time-saving state B has continued (extended). In addition, after switching from the low probability time-saving state B to the low probability time-saving state C, the period is set as a period in which switching to a new low probability time-saving state C becomes effective if an "instant short hit" occurs, so the "extension chance display" is continued in the effect display device 1600.

Figure 226 is a time chart showing an instantaneous short hit during control of 100 times of low-probability time-saving state A, which was started by a big hit C. First, during control of low-probability time-saving state A, when an instantaneous short hit occurs, the remaining number of times that the variable display of the special pattern can be executed in low-probability time-saving state A is compared with the number of times that the variable display of the special pattern can be executed in low-probability time-saving state C based on the instantaneous short hit. Then, when the remaining number of times that the variable display of the special pattern can be executed in low-probability time-saving state A is greater than the remaining number of times that the variable display of the special pattern can be executed in low-probability time-saving state C based on the instantaneous short hit, control is performed to switch from low-probability time-saving state A to low-probability time-saving state C after the instantaneous short hit pattern stops (enabling the switch to low-probability time-saving state C). In addition, when switching from the low-probability time-saving state A to the low-probability time-saving state C, the remaining number of times of variable display of special symbols that can be executed in the low-probability time-saving state A is discarded, and the number of times of variable display of special symbols that can be executed in the low-probability time-saving state C (20 times, 40 times, 100 times according to the type of the instantaneous short hit symbol) is newly counted. In other words, when switching from the low-probability time-saving state A to the low-probability time-saving state C, the period of control to the low-probability time-saving state is extended beyond the number of times of variable display of special symbols that would have been executed in the low-probability time-saving state A. On the other hand, if the remaining number of times that the special symbol can be displayed in the low-probability time-saving state A is greater than the number of times that the special symbol can be displayed in the low-probability time-saving state C based on the instantaneous short hit, the low-probability time-saving state A is maintained without switching to the low-probability time-saving state C after the instantaneous short hit symbol stops, and the low-probability time-saving state A is controlled to continue for the remaining number of times that the special symbol can be displayed in the low-probability time-saving state A (disabling switching to the low-probability time-saving state C). In this way, if an instantaneous short hit occurs during the control of the low-probability time-saving state A, the low-probability time-saving state with the greater number of times that the special symbol can be displayed is selected and executed, so that the player can maintain the advantageous state for as long as possible without feeling any disappointment or loss, and can continue playing with anticipation.

As shown in FIG. 226, during the control of the low probability time-saving state A, if the Nth time the special symbol variable display results in "instant short hit A," when the switching condition of "100-N<100" (N=number of times the special symbol variable display has already been executed in the low probability time-saving state B) is met, the low probability time-saving state A is controlled to switch to the low probability time-saving state C after the instant short hit A symbol stops. In other words, if "instant short hit A" occurs during the execution of the 1st to 100th special symbol variable display in the low probability time-saving state A, the low probability time-saving state A is controlled to switch to the low probability time-saving state C after the instant short hit A symbol stops. In this way, during the execution of the 1st to 100th special symbol variable display in the low probability time-saving state A, the period during which the switch to the low probability time-saving state C becomes effective when "instant short hit A" occurs is set.

In addition, during the control of low-probability time-saving state A, if the Nth variable display of the special symbol results in "instant short hit B," when the switching condition of "100-N<40" (N=the number of times the variable display of the special symbol in low-probability time-saving state A has already been executed in low-probability time-saving state B) is met, control is performed to switch from low-probability time-saving state A to low-probability time-saving state C after the immediate short hit B symbol stops. In other words, if "instant short hit B" occurs during the execution of the 61st to 100th variable display of the special symbol in low-probability time-saving state A, control is performed to switch from low-probability time-saving state A to low-probability time-saving state C after the immediate short hit B symbol stops. On the other hand, if "instant short hit B" occurs during the execution of the 1st to 60th variable display of the special symbol in low-probability time-saving state A, control is performed to maintain low-probability time-saving state A after the immediate short hit B symbol stops. In this way, while the 1st to 60th display of special symbols is being executed in low-probability time-saving state A, the period is set as a period in which switching to low-probability time-saving state C becomes invalid if an "instant short hit B" is obtained, whereas while the 61st to 100th display of special symbols is being executed in low-probability time-saving state A, the period is set as a period in which switching to low-probability time-saving state C becomes valid if an "instant short hit B" is obtained.

In addition, during the control of low-probability time-saving state A, if the Nth display of the special pattern becomes "instant short hit C," when the switching condition of "100-N<20" (N=number of times the special pattern has been displayed in low-probability time-saving state B) is met, the low-probability time-saving state A is controlled to switch to low-probability time-saving state C after the instant short hit C pattern stops. In other words, if the "instant short hit C" occurs during the 81st to 100th display of the special pattern in low-probability time-saving state A, the low-probability time-saving state A is controlled to switch to low-probability time-saving state C after the instant short hit C pattern stops. On the other hand, if the "instant short hit C" occurs during the 1st to 80th display of the special pattern in low-probability time-saving state A, the low-probability time-saving state A is controlled to be maintained after the instant short hit C pattern stops. In this way, while the 1st to 80th display of special symbols is being executed in low-probability time-saving state A, the period is set as a period in which switching to low-probability time-saving state C becomes invalid if an "instant short hit C" is obtained, whereas while the 81st to 100th display of special symbols is being executed in low-probability time-saving state A, the period is set as a period in which switching to low-probability time-saving state C becomes valid if an "instant short hit C" is obtained.

Next, we will explain the performance progression before and after an instantaneous short hit occurs while the low-probability time-saving state A is under control. In this example, we will explain a case where, among the 1st to 100th special pattern change displays while the low-probability time-saving state A is under control, an "instantaneous short hit A" occurs at the time of the Nth special pattern change display (pattern change Z), and after the instantaneous short hit A pattern stops, the low-probability time-saving state A is switched to the low-probability time-saving state C.

Specifically, during the execution of the 1st to 100th variable display of the special pattern during the control of the low-probability time-saving state A, the period is set as a period during which switching to the low-probability time-saving state C becomes effective when "instant short hit A" is reached. During the period during which switching to the low-probability time-saving state C becomes effective, control is performed to switch from the low-probability time-saving state A to the low-probability time-saving state C when "instant short hit A" is reached, and the period during which control is performed to the low-probability time-saving state is extended, so that the period is set as a period during which an extension acquisition effect can be executed. Also, during the period during which switching to the low-probability time-saving state C becomes effective, in addition to executing a "pullback mode effect" indicating that the low-probability time-saving state A is being controlled, the effect display device 1600 executes an "extension chance display" indicating that the period during which control is performed to the low-probability time-saving state can be extended. Here, the "extension chance display" can be exemplified by an effect display in which a message image regarding extension (a message image saying "If character X appears, the time-saving may be extended...") is displayed on the effect display device 1600 (not shown). This allows players to pay attention to whether or not an extension acquisition effect will be performed while the "extension chance display" is being displayed, and to enjoy whether or not the period during which the low-probability time-saving state is controlled will be extended.

In addition, during the 1st to 100th display of special symbols during control of the low-probability time-saving state A, if an immediate short win occurs during the execution of symbol change Z, which is the Nth display of the special symbol change, an "extended acquisition effect" is executed, and after the immediate short win A symbol stops, the low-probability time-saving state A is controlled to switch to the low-probability time-saving state C, and the period controlled to the low-probability state is extended. Here, the "extended acquisition effect" is an effect in which a display is displayed to tease whether or not character X will appear from the edge of the screen of the effect display device 1600, and either a successful pattern in which character X appears in the center of the screen of the effect display device 1600 (an effect in which the period controlled to the low-probability time-saving state is successfully extended) or a failed pattern in which character X does not appear from the edge of the screen of the effect display device 1600 (an effect in which the period controlled to the low-probability time-saving state is not successfully extended) is performed (not shown). In addition, during the execution of the pattern change Z, the period during which the extended acquisition effect can be executed is set, and an "extended acquisition effect" is executed to notify whether the period controlled to the low-probability time-saving state will be extended, and in the "extended acquisition effect" that is executed when an immediate short hit occurs, an effect is executed in which the period controlled to the low-probability time-saving state is successfully extended (successful pattern extended acquisition effect). This allows the player to pay attention with anticipation to whether the period controlled to the low-probability time-saving state will be extended during the execution of the "extended acquisition effect".

If an immediate short win occurs while the low probability non-time-saving state is under control, the game is controlled to low probability time-saving state C after the immediate short win symbol stops, but the "extended win effect" is an effect that is not executed when an immediate short win occurs while the low probability non-time-saving state is under control. This allows you to enjoy an effect that is different from the low probability non-time-saving state while the low probability time-saving state A is under control.

In addition, during the execution of the 1st to 100th special symbol change display during the control of the low-probability time-saving state A, the period during which the extended win effect can be executed is set, and even if an immediate short win does not occur, an "extended win effect" that notifies whether the period controlled to the low-probability time-saving state is extended or not is executable. In this example, during the execution of the symbol change X, which is the N-2th special symbol change display during the control of the low-probability time-saving state A, an "extended win effect" is executed even though an immediate short win does not occur, and in the "extended win effect" that is executed when an immediate short win does not occur, a false effect (failed extended win effect) that fails to extend the period controlled to the low-probability time-saving state is executed. During the execution of such a symbol change X, an "extended win effect" is executed, but since an immediate short win does not occur, an immediate short win symbol is not stopped and displayed.

In addition, after switching from the low probability time-saving state A to the low probability time-saving state C, the period is set as the period during which switching to the new low probability time-saving state C becomes effective if an "instant short hit" occurs. Even in such a case, the remaining number of times that the variable display of the special symbol can be executed in the low probability time-saving state C is compared with the number of times that the variable display of the special symbol can be executed in the new low probability time-saving state C based on the instant short hit, and if the number of times that the variable display of the special symbol can be executed in the new low probability time-saving state C based on the instant short hit is greater, control is performed so that the low probability time-saving state C is switched to the new low probability time-saving state C after the instant short hit symbol stops. In other words, if the number of times that the variable display of the special symbol can be executed in the new low probability time-saving state C based on the instant short hit is greater, the period during which the control is made to the low probability time-saving state is extended. In addition, the period during which switching to the new low probability time-saving state C becomes effective is set as the period during which an extended winning performance can be executed.

In addition, when switching from low probability time-saving state A to low probability time-saving state C, during the control of the low probability time-saving state C, the "help mode S effect" indicating that the "help mode S" corresponding to the low probability time-saving state C is being executed is not switched to, and the "pullback mode effect" executed in the low probability time-saving state A is continued. In this way, since there is no change in the fact that the "pullback mode effect" is being executed before and after switching from the low probability time-saving state A to the low probability time-saving state C, it is possible to make it appear as if the control of the low probability time-saving state A has continued (extended). In addition, after switching from the low probability time-saving state A to the low probability time-saving state C, the period is set as a period in which switching to a new low probability time-saving state C becomes effective if an "instant short hit" occurs, so the "extension chance display" is continued in the effect display device 1600.

In the above, when an immediate short hit occurs during the execution of pattern change Z, which is the Nth special pattern change display during the control of low-probability time-saving state A or low-probability time-saving state B, an "extended acquisition effect" (extended acquisition effect of a successful pattern) is executed at the time of pattern change Z where the immediate short hit occurs, to notify that the period of control to the low-probability time-saving state will be extended. However, the "extended acquisition effect" may be executed at the following timing. In other words, instead of executing the "extended acquisition effect" at the time of pattern change Z where an immediate short hit occurs, after switching to low-probability time-saving state C, the "extended acquisition effect" (extended acquisition effect of a successful pattern) may be executed at the timing when the number of times the special pattern change display that can be executed in low-probability time-saving state A or low-probability time-saving state B that is set before the immediate short hit occurs is reached. For example, the number of times that the special symbol variable display can be performed in the low-probability time-saving state A is set to 100 times, and if an immediate short hit occurs during the execution of the symbol variable Z, which is the 80th time that the special symbol variable display is performed during the control of the low-probability time-saving state A, an "extended time-saving effect" is executed when the number of times that the special symbol variable display can be performed in the low-probability time-saving state A set before the immediate short hit reaches 100 times after switching to the low-probability time-saving state C, and the remaining number of times that the special symbol variable display can be performed in the low-probability time-saving state C at that time is notified. This makes it possible to make it appear as if the period controlled to the low-probability time-saving state has been suddenly extended without the player realizing that an immediate short hit has occurred until the "extended time-saving effect" is executed.

In addition, if an immediate short hit occurs during the execution of pattern change Z, which is the Nth special pattern change display during the control of low-probability time-saving state A or low-probability time-saving state B, an "extended acquisition effect" (success pattern extended acquisition effect) is executed at the time of pattern change Z where the immediate short hit occurs, to notify that the period controlled to the low-probability time-saving state will be extended. If a power interruption occurs during the execution of the "extended acquisition effect", a return process for the execution of the "extended acquisition effect" is executed after the power is turned on again. In this way, even if a power interruption occurs during the execution of the "extended acquisition effect", it is possible to recognize that the period controlled to the low-probability time-saving state will be extended by executing the "extended acquisition effect" after the power is turned on again, and it is possible to prevent a situation where the player is unable to grasp how long the period controlled to the low-probability time-saving state will continue.

Next, we will explain the instantaneous short hit during the control of the 599 times low-probability time-saving state A triggered by jackpot D. To avoid confusion with the previously explained "100 times low-probability time-saving state A triggered by jackpot C," for the sake of convenience, in the following, the 599 times low-probability time-saving state A triggered by jackpot D will be referred to as "low-probability time-saving state A2."

During control of the low-probability time-saving state A2, if an immediate short win occurs, regardless of the remaining number of times that the variable display of the special pattern that can be executed in the low-probability time-saving state A2 is executed, the low-probability time-saving state A2 is maintained without switching to the low-probability time-saving state C after the immediate short win pattern stops, and the low-probability time-saving state A2 is controlled to continue for the remaining number of times that the variable display of the special pattern that can be executed in the low-probability time-saving state A2 (disabling switching to the low-probability time-saving state C). In other words, during control of the low-probability time-saving state A2, the same control as the above-mentioned "instant short win pattern invalid period (period during which control to the low-probability time-saving state C is not executed in response to the lottery result of the special pattern being "instant short win")" is executed. As mentioned above, the low-probability time-saving state A2 is a state that continues continuously to the low-probability time-saving state B after 599 times of special symbol variation display, and if the low-probability time-saving state A2 switches to the low-probability time-saving state C in the middle of this state, depending on the timing, there is a risk that the continuity with the low-probability time-saving state B may be broken, but in this example, it is possible to avoid such a disadvantageous situation for the player. Also, for example, if the low-probability time-saving state C switches to 100 times in the special symbol variation display after the 501st time, the disadvantageous situation described above does not occur, but since it becomes a low-probability time-saving state C with no benefit, there is a concern that the original interest of the low-probability time-saving state C may be reduced, but in this example, it is possible to avoid such a concern for such a player.

In the above, the low probability time-saving state A and the low probability time-saving state C, and the low probability time-saving state B and the low probability time-saving state C are set to the same time-saving performance. In other words, in the low probability time-saving states A to C, when a normal lottery is performed, the probability that the lottery result of the normal pattern will be a "normal hit" is increased, and when the lottery result of the normal pattern is a "normal hit", the time and number of times that the variable winning port 2003, which is closed by the variable winning port door 2521, is in an open state is increased, thereby making it easier to accept the game ball B into the variable winning port 2003, but the probability that the lottery result of the normal pattern will be a "normal hit" and the time and number of times that the variable winning port 2003 is in an open state are set to be the same. In contrast, the low probability time-saving state A and the low probability time-saving state C, and the low probability time-saving state B and the low probability time-saving state C may be configured to be set to different time-saving performance. In this configuration, the higher the probability that the lottery result for the normal symbol will be a "normal win," and the longer or more times the variable winning opening 2003 is open, the easier it is for the variable winning opening 2003 to receive the game ball B, and the higher the time-saving performance is.

Specifically, a first time-saving control in low-probability time-saving state A or low-probability time-saving state B and a second time-saving control in low-probability time-saving state C are set, and for example, when the second time-saving control has a higher time-saving performance than the first time-saving control, if an immediate short hit occurs during control of low-probability time-saving state A or low-probability time-saving state B, the state is controlled to switch from low-probability time-saving state A or low-probability time-saving state B to low-probability time-saving state C after the immediate short hit pattern stops. On the other hand, when the first time-saving control has a higher time-saving performance than the second time-saving control, if an immediate short hit occurs during control of low-probability time-saving state A or low-probability time-saving state B, the state is controlled to maintain low-probability time-saving state A or low-probability time-saving state B without switching to low-probability time-saving state C after the immediate short hit pattern stops. This allows the player to enjoy whether or not the state can be switched to low-probability time-saving state C, which has advantageous time-saving performance, during control of low-probability time-saving state A or low-probability time-saving state B.

In the above, when the first time-saving control has a higher time-saving performance than the second time-saving control, if an immediate short hit occurs during control of low-probability time-saving state A or low-probability time-saving state B, the control is such that low-probability time-saving state A or low-probability time-saving state B is maintained after the immediate short hit pattern stops. In addition, at the time of an immediate short hit, the remaining number of times that the variable display of the special pattern can be executed in low-probability time-saving state A or low-probability time-saving state B is compared with the number of times that the variable display of the special pattern can be executed in low-probability time-saving state C based on an immediate short hit, and if the number of times that the variable display of the special pattern can be executed in low-probability time-saving state C based on an immediate short hit is greater, the control may be such that the low-probability time-saving state A or low-probability time-saving state B is switched to low-probability time-saving state C after the immediate short hit pattern stops. This allows you to have fun seeing whether you can switch to low-probability time-saving state C, which extends the period of control in the low-probability time-saving state, when there are only a few remaining times for the variable display of special symbols that can be executed in low-probability time-saving state A or low-probability time-saving state B.

In addition, in the above, the low-probability time-saving state C is controlled for the same period and with the same time-saving performance when an immediate short hit occurs in a low-probability non-time-saving state and when an immediate short hit occurs in a low-probability time-saving state A or a low-probability time-saving state B. However, the period and time-saving performance of the low-probability time-saving state C may be made different depending on the game state when an immediate short hit occurs. For example, when an immediate short hit A occurs in a low-probability non-time-saving state A of 100 times triggered by a jackpot C, the low-probability time-saving state C based on this immediate short hit A may be switched to the low-probability time-saving state C of 100 times as described above, while when an immediate short hit A occurs in a low-probability non-time-saving state B, the low-probability time-saving state C based on this immediate short hit A may be switched to the low-probability time-saving state C of 120 times. Also, for example, if an instantaneous short hit A occurs in a low-probability non-time-saving state A after 100 hits triggered by a jackpot C, the state may be controlled to switch to the low-probability time-saving state C accompanied by the first time-saving control described above as a low-probability time-saving state C based on this instantaneous short hit A, while if an instantaneous short hit A occurs in a low-probability non-time-saving state B, the state may be controlled to switch to the low-probability time-saving state C accompanied by the second time-saving control as a low-probability time-saving state C based on this instantaneous short hit A.

As another example, if a jackpot C triggers a 100-time low-probability non-time-saving state A and then an instantaneous short hit A occurs, the low-probability time-saving state C based on this instantaneous short hit A can be switched to the 100-time low-probability time-saving state C as described above, while if an instantaneous short hit A occurs again in the low-probability time-saving state C based on instantaneous short hit A, the low-probability time-saving state C based on this second instantaneous short hit A can be switched to the 120-time low-probability time-saving state C. Also, for example, if an instantaneous short hit A occurs after 100 low-probability non-time-saving state A triggered by a jackpot C, the low-probability time-saving state C based on this instantaneous short hit A may be switched to the low-probability time-saving state C accompanied by the second time-saving control described above, while if an instantaneous short hit A occurs again in the low-probability time-saving state C based on this instantaneous short hit A, the low-probability time-saving state C based on this second instantaneous short hit A may be switched to the low-probability time-saving state C accompanied by the third time-saving control (time-saving control with higher time-saving performance than the second time-saving control).

In this way, by varying the duration and time-saving performance of low-probability time-saving state C depending on the game state when an immediate short win occurs, the gameplay using immediate short wins can be made even more diverse, and interest can be increased.

[Detailed Description of External Terminal Board 558]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, information about the game can be transmitted to an external device such as a hall computer through the external output terminal 558a of the external terminal board 558 according to the progress of the game. The external device is, for example, a hall computer that manages the information of the game hall or an external information device installed above each pachinko machine 1 in an island facility, and based on the information transmitted through the external output terminal 558a, it is possible to grasp the number of game balls B paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and information about the pachinko machine 1, monitor whether or not an illegal game is being played, and provide the player with information about the history of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, information about the number of jackpots per day, information about the number of times the pattern has changed until each jackpot, information about the number of prize balls at each jackpot, information about the number of times the time-saving change has continued, etc.) in the form of a numerical value or a graph. In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when a game transitions to a special game state such as the low probability time-saving state B or the low probability time-saving state C controlled in the above-mentioned new manner, information about the special game state is appropriately transmitted to an external device via the external output terminal 558a, and even in the case of such a special game, a situation advantageous to the player can be appropriately transmitted to an external device, and the game store where the game machine is installed can appropriately manage the game machine and provide a game machine that is easy to operate in the game store. This point will be explained below.

First, the external terminal board 558 in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 227 is a block diagram showing the connection between the pachinko machine 1 and an external device. As shown in FIG. 227, the external terminal board 558 of this embodiment is connected to the payout control board 633 and the main control board 1310, and outputs various signals to the external device based on various signals input to the external terminal board 558 (signals related to the payout of game balls, signals related to the opening of the door frame 3 or the main frame 4, signals related to the determination of the pattern, signals related to balls entering each starting hole, signals related to various hits, signals related to special states, signals related to security, etc.). In this embodiment, the various signals output from the external terminal board 558 are input to each of the hall computer and the external information device, but the various signals output from the external terminal board 558 may be, for example, input to the hall computer and input from the hall computer to the external information device, or conversely, input to the external information device and input from the external information device to the hall computer.

As shown in FIG. 113(a), ten external output terminals 558ab to 558ak are mounted on the external terminal board 558. In this embodiment, the ten external output terminals 558ab to 558ak are arranged horizontally in the order of external output terminal 558ab, external output terminal 558ac, external output terminal 558ad, external output terminal 558ae, external output terminal 558af, external output terminal 558ag, external output terminal 558ah, external output terminal 558ai, external output terminal 558aj, and external output terminal 558ak from the left in the figure, and each of them is capable of transmitting different information to an external device. Note that the configuration of the external terminal board 558 is not limited to this, and the ten external output terminals 558ab to 558ak may be arranged in a different order from this embodiment, and the external terminal board 558 may be configured with more than ten or fewer external output terminals.

The ten external output terminals 558ab to 558ak are each colored a different color. Specifically, the external output terminal 558ab is colored white, the external output terminal 558ac is colored green, the external output terminal 558ad is colored gray, the external output terminal 558ae is colored yellow, the external output terminal 558af is colored black, the external output terminal 558ag is colored pink, the external output terminal 558ah is colored blue, the external output terminal 558ai is colored red, the external output terminal 558aj is colored orange, and the external output terminal 558ak is colored light blue. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the external output terminals 558ab-558ak are each colored a different color, making it easy to visually distinguish between the external output terminals 558ab-558ak. When connecting the pachinko machine 1 to an external device via the external terminal board 558, incorrect connections between the external output terminals 558ab-558ak and the input terminals of the external device are reduced, preventing the external device from malfunctioning.

The types of information transmitted via external output terminals 558ab to 558ak are described below. As described above, in this embodiment, external terminal board 558 is connected to payout control board 633 and main control board 1310, and under the control of payout control board 633 and main control board 1310, various signals (signals related to the payout of game balls, signals related to the opening of door frame 3 or main frame 4, signals related to pattern determination, signals related to balls entering each starting hole, signals related to various wins, signals related to special states, signals related to security, etc.) are transmitted (output) to external devices via external terminal board 558.

Note that, although electrical signals are always output from the external output terminals 558ab-ak, the electrical signals are switched depending on the progress of the game. In this example, the electrical signals can be switched between an electrical signal having a predetermined first voltage (an electrical signal in the ON state) and an electrical signal having a predetermined second voltage (an electrical signal in the OFF state), and the signals with various names (symbol determination signal, advantageous state start signal, game state signal, etc.) described below refer to electrical signals with the predetermined first voltage (electrical signals in the ON state). In the following, the output of an electrical signal having a predetermined first voltage will be referred to simply as "outputting signals with various names (symbol determination signal, advantageous state start signal, game state signal, etc.)" and the output of an electrical signal having a predetermined second voltage will be referred to simply as "not outputting signals with various names (symbol determination signal, advantageous state start signal, game state signal, etc.)" or "stopping output of signals with various names (symbol determination signal, advantageous state start signal, game state signal, etc.)".

First, the external output terminal 558ab outputs a prize ball number information output signal corresponding to the actual number of prize balls to an external device. In detail, in the port output process of the payout control board 633 described above, when the value of the prize ball number information output judgment counter exceeds 10 (that is, when the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 reaches 10 balls), a prize ball number information output signal is output from the payout board 633 to the external terminal board 558, and a prize ball number information output signal is output to the external device via the external output terminal 558ab of the external terminal board 558. The prize ball number information output signal is an electrical signal that is output for a short time within the range that can be received by the external device when the number of game balls actually paid out reaches 10 balls, and in this embodiment, it is an electrical signal that is output for, for example, 0.106 seconds. As a result, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the prize ball number information output signal can be reliably input to the external device, and even if the prize ball number information output signal is transmitted multiple times in succession, the transmission of the prize ball number information output signal can be completed in a short time, and the hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed can properly manage the pachinko machine 1. When the number of game balls actually paid out reaches 10 consecutive balls, the prize ball number information output signal is preferably output from the external terminal board 558 with an interval of, for example, 0.106 seconds or more, and the prize ball number information output signal input to the external device can be input continuously to the external device to prevent the number of prize balls from being erroneously counted, and the hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed can properly manage the pachinko machine 1.

The external output terminal 558ac outputs a detection signal corresponding to the opening of the door frame 3 and the main frame 4 to an external device. In detail, the detection signal from the door frame opening switch when the door frame 3 is opened and the detection signal from the main frame opening switch when the main frame 4 is opened are input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, and when each detection signal is input, the main control board 1310 outputs a detection signal to an external device from the external output terminal 558ac of the external terminal board 558. The detection signal is an electrical signal that is output while the door frame 3 or the main frame 4 is opened and a detection signal from the door frame opening switch or the main frame opening switch is input, and the state of the door frame 3 or the main frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 can be appropriately managed on the hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

The external output terminal 558ad outputs, for example, a pattern determination signal corresponding to the stop display of the special pattern to an external device. The above-mentioned main control board 1310 transmits a pattern determination command to the peripheral control board 1510 when the variation of the special pattern stops, and also counts up the above-mentioned rescue count counter. The pattern determination signal output via the external output terminal 558ad is output to an external device every time the variation of the special pattern stops, including when the pattern determination command is not transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 or when the above-mentioned rescue count counter is not counted up. The pattern determination signal is an electrical signal that is output for a time shorter than the shortest variation time of the special pattern, and in this embodiment, it is an electrical signal that is output for, for example, 0.128 seconds. As a result, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, even when the special pattern continuously varies, the pattern determination signal can be reliably input to an external device, and the number of variations of the special pattern (so-called start count) can be appropriately managed on the hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

The external output terminal 558ae outputs, for example, a winning signal corresponding to the game ball entering each starting hole to an external device. In detail, the main control board 1310 reads the detection signal from the first starting hole sensor 3002 and the detection signal from the second starting hole sensor 2401, respectively, and stores the corresponding starting hole winning command classified as other as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In other words, when there is a detection signal from the first starting hole sensor 3002, the corresponding starting hole winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and when there is a detection signal from the second starting hole sensor 2401, the corresponding starting hole winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and a winning signal corresponding to these transmission information is output to the external device from the external output terminal 558ae of the external terminal board 558. The winning signal is an electrical signal that is output for a short time within a range that can be received by the external device when the game ball enters each starting hole, and in this embodiment, the electrical signal is output for, for example, 0.128 seconds. As a result, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the winning signal can be reliably input to the external device, and even if the winning signal is transmitted multiple times in succession, the transmission of the winning signal can be completed in a short time, and the pachinko machine 1 can be properly managed on the hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Note that, when game balls enter each starting hole consecutively, the winning signal is preferably output from the external output terminal 558ae of the external terminal board 558 at intervals of, for example, 0.128 seconds or more, and the winning signal input to the external device is output to the external device consecutively, which prevents the number of winnings from being erroneously counted, and allows the pachinko machine 1 to be properly managed on the hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

The external output terminal 558af outputs an advantageous state start signal to an external device, for example, when a state advantageous to the player is started. The external device receives this advantageous state start signal and is able to count the number of times the advantageous state for the player has been started (number of special prizes), etc. In this embodiment, the trigger for signal output from the external output terminal 558af is set to be not only when the result of the lottery for the special symbol is a jackpot as in the past, but also when the result of the lottery for the special symbol is a miss. Specifically, the trigger for signal output from the external output terminal 558af is as follows:
(a) When the game is controlled to a jackpot based on the stopping result of the special symbol,
(b) When the game is controlled to the low-probability time-saving state B based on the count value of the above-mentioned rescue count counter,
(c) When the special symbol is stopped and displayed as an immediate short-win symbol, the game is controlled to a low-probability time-saving state C.
The advantageous state start signal is output to the external device when triggered by one of the triggers (a) to (c). In order to avoid the need to add an external output terminal, the advantageous state start signal is output by using the external output terminal 558af for triggers (a) to (c), and the external device recognizes it as a single signal. However, in this embodiment, the advantageous state start signal can be output at different times depending on each trigger, and it is also possible to distinguish and recognize which trigger the input is related to based on the time. In this embodiment, in the case of trigger (a), the advantageous state start signal is continuously output during the period during which the jackpot game is controlled (such as until all openings of the first large winning port 2006 or the second large winning port 2007 are completed) (hereinafter referred to as the jackpot period), and the output of the advantageous state start signal is stopped upon the end of the jackpot game. In the case of trigger (b), the advantageous state start signal is continuously output for 0.128 seconds from the start of the low-probability time-saving state B (for example, after the determination of the variable pattern that makes the count value of the rescue count counter 600), and the output of the advantageous state start signal is stopped after the lapse of 0.128 seconds. In the case of trigger (c), The advantageous state start signal is output continuously for 0.256 seconds from the start of state C (for example, from the instantaneous short win pattern (when the instantaneous short win A to C patterns are displayed), and the output of the advantageous state start signal stops after 0.256 seconds has elapsed. Note that in general gaming machines, including the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the total time during which control is exercised for jackpot play during the jackpot period at trigger (a) (such as the time until all of the first large winning port 2006 or the second large winning port 2007 have been opened) is long, being longer than 0.256 seconds, and therefore the advantageous state start signal output when control is exercised for jackpot play is not mistaken for the low-probability time-saving states B and C.

In addition, in this embodiment, the output time of the advantageous state start signal output at the time of the trigger (b) (c) is set to be shorter than that of the advantageous state start signal output when controlled to a jackpot game. In addition to the above-mentioned purpose of making the external device distinguish and recognize which trigger the input is related to, the purpose is also to increase the reliability of the count of the number of special prizes. That is, in this embodiment, the higher the importance of the target of the count of the number of special prizes, the longer the output time is, and specifically, the importance and the length of the advantageous state start time are set so that the relationship is "jackpot game > low probability state C > low probability state B" with emphasis on whether it is based on the lottery result. And by setting the output time to be longer for the higher importance, for example, even if the output of the advantageous state start signal output when controlled to a jackpot game is interrupted midway due to some noise, etc., it is possible to count the number of special prizes on the external device side by regarding it as a substitute for the advantageous state start signal output at the time of the trigger (b) (c) depending on the timing of the interruption. In other words, the likelihood that the external device will not input the required amount of time and the information will be discarded is reduced in the order of "jackpot game > low probability state C > low probability state B," preventing a decrease in the reliability of the information on the external device.

In addition, since the needs of each hall may differ with regard to whether or not to distinguish between triggers (a) to (c) and recognize the information, for example, if you want to distinguish between triggers (a) to (c) and recognize the information (for example, if you want to recognize the jackpot game and low probability time-saving state B and C as separate special prize numbers A, B, and C, or if you do not want to recognize some special prize numbers), the external device should determine the output time of the advantageous state start signal described above (0.128 seconds, 0.256 seconds, jackpot period longer than 0.256 seconds). On the other hand, if you want to recognize information without distinguishing between the triggers (a) to (c) (for example, if you want to recognize the jackpot game and the low-probability time-saving states B and C as the same number of special prizes), you can set the external device to count the number of special prizes, etc., regardless of the output time of the advantageous state start signal described above (0.128 seconds, 0.256 seconds, jackpot period longer than 0.256 seconds). Also, if you want to recognize information by distinguishing between the triggers (a) and (b) and (c) without distinguishing between the triggers (b) and (c) (for example, if you want to recognize the low-probability time-saving states B and C as the same number of special prizes A and distinguish them from the number of special prizes B of the jackpot game), you can set the external device to consider inputs of advantageous state start signals of 0.256 seconds or less as the same input. In addition to triggers (a) to (c), the external output terminal 558af may also be used when a small win game is being played. In this case, the output time of the advantageous state start signal can be set to an output time (such as 0.100 seconds) that is different from any of the big win periods of 0.128 seconds, 0.256 seconds, or longer than 0.256 seconds, so that the information can be recognized as a separate trigger.

The external output terminal 558ag and the external output terminal 558ah output a fluctuation reset signal to an external device, which is a trigger for resetting the number of symbol fluctuations (so-called start count) displayed on the external device (particularly an external information device installed above the pachinko machine 1) at turning points during the game. In this embodiment, the external output terminal 558ag outputs a fluctuation reset signal 1, and the external output terminal 558ah outputs a fluctuation reset signal 2, and the fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2 are output with different triggers. The fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2 are provided separately from the advantageous state start signal described above, and are used primarily for resetting the number of symbol fluctuations, etc., separate from the special prize count. The fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2 are also set to be output not only when the lottery result for the special symbol is a jackpot as in the past, but also when the lottery result for the special symbol is a miss.

First, the fluctuation reset signal 1 will be described. The timing for outputting the fluctuation reset signal 1 in this embodiment is set to the same timing as the timings (a) and (b) described in the advantageous state start signal, and the output time is also set to the same output mode as the timings (a) and (b) described in the advantageous state start signal (two patterns of jackpot periods longer than 0.128 seconds and 0.256 seconds). In other words, the fluctuation reset signal 1 is started to be output based on the occurrence of a jackpot game or a low probability time-saving state B, and the number of pattern fluctuations, etc. can be reset on the external device side (especially an external information device installed above the pachinko machine 1) upon receiving this fluctuation reset signal 1, and the player can be made to recognize the number of pattern fluctuations from the initial value in a new game state. Regarding the fluctuation reset signal 1, since the needs of each hall may differ with regard to whether or not to distinguish between triggers (a) and (b) and recognize information, for example, if you want to distinguish between triggers (a) and (b) and recognize information (for example, if you do not want to reset the fluctuation count in either a jackpot game or low-probability time-saving state B), the external device can determine the output time of the fluctuation reset signal 1 (a jackpot period longer than 0.128 seconds or 0.256 seconds) and select whether or not to reset the target on the external device based on the result. Conversely, if you want to reset the fluctuation count without distinguishing between triggers (a) and (b) (for example, if you want to reset the fluctuation count in each of a jackpot game and low-probability time-saving state B), you can set the external device to reset the fluctuation count upon receiving the output of the fluctuation reset signal 1, regardless of the output time of the above-mentioned fluctuation reset signal 1 (a jackpot period longer than 0.128 seconds or 0.256 seconds).

Next, the fluctuation reset signal 2 will be described. The timing for outputting the fluctuation reset signal 2 in this embodiment is set to the same timing as the timings (a) and (c) described in the advantageous state start signal, and the output time is also set to the same output mode (two patterns of 0.256 seconds and a time longer than 0.256 seconds) as the timings (a) and (c) described in the advantageous state start signal. In other words, the fluctuation reset signal 2 is output based on the occurrence of a jackpot game or a low probability time-saving state C, and this fluctuation reset signal 2 makes it possible to reset the number of pattern fluctuations, etc. on the external device side (especially an external information device installed above the pachinko machine 1), allowing the player to recognize the number of pattern fluctuations from the initial value in a new game state. Regarding the fluctuation reset signal 2, since the needs of each hall may differ with regard to whether or not to distinguish between triggers (a) and (c) and recognize information, for example, if you want to distinguish between triggers (a) and (c) and recognize information (for example, if you do not want to reset the fluctuation count in either a jackpot game or low-probability time-saving state C), the external device can determine the output time of the fluctuation reset signal 2 (0.256 seconds, a jackpot period longer than 0.256 seconds) and select whether or not to reset the target on the external device based on the result. Conversely, if you want to reset the fluctuation count without distinguishing between triggers (a) and (c) (for example, if you want to reset the fluctuation count in each of a jackpot game and low-probability time-saving state C), you can set the external device to reset the fluctuation count upon receiving the output of the fluctuation reset signal 2, regardless of the output time of the above-mentioned fluctuation reset signal 2 (0.256 seconds, a jackpot period longer than 0.256 seconds).

Fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2 are also common in that they are both triggered by trigger (a), and if both external output terminals 558ag and 558ah are connected to an external device, then the arrival of trigger (a) will cause fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2 to be output from the respective terminals. At first glance, this raises the concern that the fluctuation count will be reset multiple times on the external device side. However, in this embodiment, even if fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2 are output from the respective terminals upon the arrival of trigger (a), all of the output periods of fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2 are made to completely overlap, so that even if each of fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2 is output, the fluctuation count will only be reset once on the external device side.

Apart from this embodiment, the external output terminal 558ag and the external output terminal 558ah may be configured as a single external output terminal ax, without being separated, and the fluctuation reset signal X may be configured to be output from the triggers (a) to (c). For example, the trigger for outputting the fluctuation reset signal X via the external output terminal 558ax may be set to the same trigger as the advantageous state start signal, which is the same as the above-mentioned triggers (a) to (c), and the output time may be set to the same output mode as the advantageous state start signal. Regarding the fluctuation reset signal X, since the needs of each hall may differ with regard to whether or not to distinguish between triggers (a) to (c) and recognize information, for example, if you want to distinguish between triggers (a) to (c) and recognize information (for example, if you do not want to reset the fluctuation count for some triggers such as a jackpot game or low-probability time-saving states B and C), the external device can determine the output time of the fluctuation reset signal X (a jackpot period longer than 0.128 seconds, 0.256 seconds, or 0.256 seconds), and select whether or not to reset the target on the external device based on the result. Conversely, if you want to reset the fluctuation count without distinguishing between triggers (a) to (c) (for example, if you want to reset the fluctuation count for each of a jackpot game and low-probability time-saving states B and C), you can set the external device to reset the fluctuation count in response to the output of the fluctuation reset signal X, regardless of the output time of the fluctuation reset signal X (a jackpot period longer than 0.128 seconds, 0.256 seconds, or 0.256 seconds).

The external output terminal 558ai outputs a game status signal to an external device while the pachinko machine 1 is in a state advantageous to the player. This game status signal allows the external device to know that the state advantageous to the player is continuing, and in this example, it is output when the game is controlled to either a time-saving state, a high probability state, or a jackpot game. Specifically, the same triggers as the above-mentioned triggers (a) to (c) can be exemplified as triggers for signal output from the external output terminal 558ai, and these triggers start outputting the game status signal to the external device. This game status signal is output by using the external output terminal 558ai at the triggers (a) to (c) in order to avoid the need to add additional external output terminals. In addition, for example, when the jackpot game is ended and the game is controlled to transition to the low probability time-saving state A after the jackpot game is ended, when the game is controlled to transition to the low probability time-saving state C during the low probability time-saving state A, when the game is controlled to transition to the low probability time-saving state C during the low probability time-saving state B, when the jackpot game or the small jackpot game is started during the low probability time-saving state A, B, or C, when the game is controlled to transition to the low probability time-saving state B during the low probability time-saving state C, when the game is controlled to transition from the low probability time-saving state A that continues for 559 times to the low probability time-saving state B, etc., the game state signal is continuously output without stopping the output of the game state signal. As a result, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, a series of advantageous states can be continuously recognized on the external device side, and the advantageous states can be continuously notified to the outside by the external information device installed above the pachinko machine 1.

The external output terminal 558aj outputs, for example, a planned prize ball signal corresponding to the number of prize balls to be paid out to an external device. In detail, in the above-mentioned prize ball control process, based on the input information read from the input information storage area, when the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10 balls, the main control board 1310 creates a main prize ball number information output command classified as other, and stores it in the transmission information storage area as transmission information. The main prize ball number information output command is created based on the value of the counter for determining the output of main prize ball number information, and the value of the counter for determining the output of main prize ball number information is read from the input information memory area described above, and counts the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls based on this input information, that is, based on the game balls that have entered the various winning ports such as the general winning port 2001, the variable winning port 2003, the first starting port 2004, the second starting port 2005, the second large winning port 2007, etc. (hereinafter referred to as the ``various winning ports provided on the game board 5'') provided on the game board 5, and is stored and updated in the planned prize ball information memory area of the main control built-in RAM. In the prize ball control process, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter stored in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls is added to the read value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter based on the input information read from the input information storage area described above. When the value indicating the added number of balls exceeds the value of 10 (i.e., when the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10), a main prize ball number information output command is created to inform the user of this fact and is stored in the output information storage area as transmission information, and the value indicating the exceeded number of balls is stored and updated as the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM described above.

The main control board 1310 also outputs the transmission information stored in the output information storage area to an external device as a planned prize ball signal via the external output terminal 558aj of the external terminal board 558. This planned prize ball signal is an electrical signal that is output for a short time within a range that can be received by the external device when the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10 balls, and in this embodiment, it is an electrical signal that is output for, for example, 0.128 seconds. As a result, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the transmission information can be reliably input to the external device, and even in cases where the main control board 1310 transmits the planned prize ball signal multiple times in succession, the transmission of the transmission information can be completed in a short time, and the pachinko machine 1 can be appropriately managed by the hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. When the number of prize balls scheduled to be paid out reaches 10 consecutively, it is desirable for the scheduled prize ball signal to be output from the external output terminal 558aj of the external terminal board 558 at intervals of, for example, 0.128 seconds or more. By continuously outputting the scheduled prize ball signal to the external device, it is possible to prevent the scheduled number of prize balls from being counted incorrectly, and the hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed can manage the pachinko machine 1 more appropriately.

The external output terminal 558ak outputs, for example, a security signal related to security to an external device. In detail, the main control board 1310 outputs various signals (for example, a detection signal from the gate sensor 2601, a detection signal from the general prize opening sensor 3001, a detection signal from the first start opening sensor 3002, a detection signal from the second start opening sensor 2401, a detection signal from the variable prize opening sensor 2526, a detection signal from the first large prize opening sensor 2524, a detection signal from the second large prize opening sensor 2561, a detection signal from the out sensor 664, a detection signal from the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704, a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050, a detection signal from the vibration sensor, a detection signal from the safe switch, an operation signal from the RAM clear switch (RAM clear signal), a setting key switch, a detection signal from the ... If it is determined that there is an abnormality (for example, a magnetic abnormality related to the magnetic sensor, a vibration abnormality related to the vibration sensor, a normal electric device winning abnormality when a game ball wins in a normal electric device under normal conditions, a large prize opening winning abnormality when a game ball wins in a large prize opening under normal conditions, a safe switch abnormality related to the safe switch, a probability variable area passing abnormality when a game ball passes through a probability variable area under normal conditions, a specified pattern route abnormality when the RAM is cleared, a RAM error, etc.) based on the signal from the switch 1311a, the signal from the setting change button, and the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 633 that informs the payout control board 633 that the prize ball command sent by the prize ball control process has been normally received by the payout control board 633, a security signal is output to an external device from the external output terminal 558ak of the external terminal board 558.

The security signal of this embodiment is an electric signal that is output for a period of time that can be reliably received by the external device, for example, an electric signal that is output for 30,000 seconds. As a result, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the security signal can be reliably input to the external device, and the hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed can properly manage the pachinko machine 1. If it is determined again that there is an abnormality during the output of the security signal (for example, a magnetic abnormality related to the magnetic sensor, a vibration abnormality related to the vibration sensor, a normal electric role winning abnormality when a game ball wins in a normal electric role during normal times, a large prize winning port winning abnormality when a game ball wins in a large prize port during normal times, a safe switch abnormality related to the safe switch, a probability variable area passing abnormality when a game ball passes through a probability variable area during normal times, when the RAM is cleared, a specified pattern route abnormality, a RAM error, etc.), the security signal is output again from that point. Specifically, if it is determined that there is an abnormality and the security signal is output, and then, for example, 15 seconds later, it is determined that there is an abnormality again, the security signal is output for another 30,000 seconds from that point.

Next, referring to Fig. 228 and Fig. 229, a detailed description will be given of the pattern determination signal output from the external output terminal ad each time a special pattern stops during game progress, the advantageous state start signal output from the external output terminal 558af when a state advantageous to the player starts, and the game state signal output from the external output terminal 558ai while the pachinko machine 1 is in a state advantageous to the player. Fig. 228 shows the situation when the pachinko machine 1 transitions from a low-probability non-time-saving state to a low-probability time-saving state C via a low-probability time-saving state B, and Fig. 229 shows the situation when the pachinko machine 1 transitions from a low-probability non-time-saving state to a low-probability time-saving state C, and further transitions to a new low-probability time-saving state C during the low-probability time-saving state C.

228 and 229, the symbol determination signal output from the external output terminal 558ad is an electrical signal output from the external output terminal 558ad to an external device each time the fluctuation of the special symbol stops (each time the determination time of the special symbol starts), regardless of the game state of the low probability non-time-saving state, low probability time-saving state B, and low probability time-saving state C. In this embodiment, each time the symbol determination signal is output from the external output terminal 558ad to the external device, the display of the number of fluctuations of the external device is incremented by one. In addition, the symbol determination signal output from the external output terminal 558ad is output for 0.128 seconds at one trigger, and after the 0.128 seconds have elapsed (after the output of the symbol determination signal has been stopped), a new symbol determination signal is not output until a predetermined output prohibition period A (0.15 seconds) has elapsed. The output period of the pattern confirmation signal and the output prohibition period A are set to a time shorter than the shortest special variation time of the special pattern in the pachinko machine 1 (2 seconds in this example), so that even if the variation display of the special pattern is performed continuously, the pattern confirmation signal corresponding to each variation display of the special pattern can be reliably transmitted to the external device.

Next, FIG. 228 will be described. In FIG. 228, the advantageous state start signal output from the external output terminal 558af is output when the low probability non-time-saving state transitions to the low probability time-saving state B based on the count value of the rescue count counter (count value of the rescue count counter = 600) (t1 in FIG. 228), and when the special symbol stops and displays as an immediate short-time winning symbol and transitions from the low probability time-saving state B to the low probability time-saving state C (t2 in FIG. 228). t1 in FIG. 228 corresponds to the case of the above-mentioned trigger (b), and the advantageous state start signal is continuously output for 0.128 seconds from the start of the low probability time-saving state B. In the external information device installed above the pachinko machine 1, when the low probability non-time-saving state transitions to the low probability time-saving state B, "1" is added to the display of the special prize count upon receiving the advantageous state start signal. Also, t2 in FIG. 228 corresponds to the above-mentioned trigger (c), where the advantageous state start signal is continuously output for 0.256 seconds from the start of low-probability time-saving state C. The external information device installed above the pachinko machine 1 also receives the advantageous state start signal when transitioning from low-probability time-saving state B to low-probability time-saving state C, and adds "1" to the display of the number of special prizes.

Furthermore, these advantageous state start signals are output regardless of whether the variable display of special symbols starts after the low-probability time-saving states B and C are started. For example, advantageous state start signals will also be output if there are no reserved special symbols (the number of reserved lottery results for the first and second special symbols is zero) at the start of the low-probability time-saving states B and C, and the game enters a standby state in which the symbols are not being displayed in a variable manner. This allows players who are unaware of the existence of the low-probability time-saving states B and C to recognize that an advantageous situation has occurred through the behavior of the external device, and prevents players from overlooking the low-probability time-saving states B and C and leaving their seats.

In addition, for any advantageous state start signal, after the respective output time has elapsed (after the output of the advantageous state start signal has been stopped), no duplicate output of a new advantageous state start signal is performed until a specified output prohibition period B (0.15 seconds) has elapsed. The output period of the advantageous state start signal and the output prohibition period B are set to a time shorter than the shortest special change time of the special symbol in the pachinko machine 1 (2 seconds in this example), similar to the relationship between the output period of the symbol determination signal and the output prohibition period A. As a result, even if, for example, the special symbol change display is performed twice in succession and the low probability time-saving states B and C occur consecutively due to the change display of each special symbol (when the special symbol change display immediately after the low probability time-saving state B is started causes the immediate short win symbol to be displayed in a stopped state, transitioning to the low probability time-saving state C, when the special symbol change display immediately after the low probability time-saving state C is started causes the rescue count counter to reach 600 times, transitioning to the low probability time-saving state B, or when the special symbol change display immediately after the low probability time-saving state C is started causes a new immediate short win symbol to be displayed in a stopped state, transitioning to the new low probability time-saving state C, etc.), the advantageous state start signal corresponding to each state can be reliably transmitted to the external device without overlapping.

As shown in FIG. 228, the fluctuation reset signal 1 output from the external output terminal 558ag and the fluctuation reset signal 2 output from the external output terminal 558ah are output when the low probability non-time-saving state transitions to the low probability time-saving state B based on the count value of the rescue count counter (t1 in FIG. 228) and when the special symbol is stopped and displayed as an immediate short-time winning symbol, transitioning from the low probability time-saving state B to the low probability time-saving state C (t2 in FIG. 228). t1 in FIG. 228 corresponds to the case of the above-mentioned trigger (b), and the fluctuation reset signal 1 is continuously output for 0.128 seconds from the start of the low probability time-saving state B. In the external information device installed above the pachinko machine 1, when the low probability non-time-saving state transitions to the low probability time-saving state B, the external information device receives the output of the fluctuation reset signal 1, resets the display of the fluctuation count to 0, and can notify the current information of the pachinko machine 1 to the outside, such as the player, from the external information device. Also, t2 in FIG. 228 corresponds to the above-mentioned trigger (c), where the fluctuation reset signal 2 is continuously output for 0.256 seconds from the start of low-probability time-saving state C. When there is a transition from low-probability time-saving state B to low-probability time-saving state C, the external information device installed above the pachinko machine 1 receives the output of the fluctuation reset signal 2, resets the display of the number of fluctuations to 0, and can notify the current information of the pachinko machine 1 to the outside, such as the player, from the external information device.

In addition, like the advantageous state start signal, these fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2 are output regardless of whether the variable display of the special symbol starts after the low probability time-saving state B or C starts. For example, the fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2 are output even when there are no reserved special symbols (the number of reserved lottery results for the first and second special symbols is zero) at the start of the low probability time-saving state B or C and the game enters a standby state in which the symbols are not being displayed. This allows players who are unaware of the existence of the low probability time-saving state B or C to recognize that an advantageous situation has occurred due to the behavior of the external device, and prevents players from overlooking the low probability time-saving state B or C and leaving their seats. In addition, for both fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2, after the elapse of their respective output times (after the output of the fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2 is stopped), new fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2 are not output until a predetermined output prohibition period C (0.15 seconds) has elapsed. The output period of the fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2 and the output prohibition period C are set to a time shorter than the shortest special fluctuation time of the special symbol in the pachinko machine 1 (2 seconds in this example), similar to the relationship between the output period of the symbol determination signal and the output prohibition period A. As a result, even if, for example, the special symbol fluctuation display is performed twice in succession and the low probability time-saving states B and C occur consecutively due to the fluctuation display of each special symbol (when the immediate short-winning symbol is displayed as a stop in the special symbol fluctuation display immediately after the low probability time-saving state B is started, and the state transitions to the low probability time-saving state C, when the rescue count counter reaches 600 times in the special symbol fluctuation display immediately after the low probability time-saving state C is started, and the state transitions to the low probability time-saving state B, when the special symbol fluctuation display immediately after the low probability time-saving state C is started and a new immediate short-winning symbol is displayed as a stop in the special symbol fluctuation display, and the state transitions to the new low probability time-saving state C, etc.), the fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2 corresponding to each state can be reliably transmitted to the external device side.

The game status signal output from the external output terminal 558ai is set as an output trigger when the low probability non-time-saving state transitions to the low probability time-saving state B based on the count value of the rescue count counter (the above-mentioned trigger (b)) and when the special symbol stops and displays as an immediate short-win symbol, transitioning from the low probability time-saving state B to the low probability time-saving state C (the above-mentioned trigger (c)). In FIG. 228, the output is started at the preceding trigger (b), but a new output is not started at the subsequent trigger (c). Specifically, for the "N fluctuation" in the "fluctuation/stop of special symbols" in FIG. 228, when the trigger (c) arrives, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 judges whether or not a game status signal is output, and if a game status signal is not being output, it starts outputting a new game status signal, and if a game status signal is being output, it is controlled to continue outputting the game status signal without stopping it. In this way, by continuously outputting the game status signal from low probability time-saving state B to low probability time-saving state C without stopping the output of the game status signal midway, the series of advantageous states described above can be continuously recognized by the external device.

In addition, for the "N Fluctuation" in "Fluctuation/Stop of Special Symbols" in Fig. 228, even in the case of the 700th fluctuation display in low-probability time-saving state B (the lottery result of the special symbol is an immediate short hit), output is started at the preceding trigger (b), but a new output is not started at the subsequent trigger (c). In other words, as shown by t3 in Fig. 228, the timing for stopping the output of the game status signal is set to a predetermined timing (a specific surplus period of 0.5 seconds has passed after the fixed time (for example, 0.128 seconds) has passed after the final fluctuation stop of the special symbol in low-probability time-saving state B or low-probability time-saving state C, so that the output of the game status signal continues for a while even after the end of low-probability time-saving state B or low-probability time-saving state C. For this reason, even if the final stop of the special pattern in low-probability time-saving state B causes an immediate short-win pattern to stop and transition to low-probability time-saving state C, if low-probability time-saving state C begins within the specific surplus period, the output of the game state signal will be processed in the same manner as when the game is controlled to transition to low-probability time-saving state C during low-probability time-saving state B (assuming that the game state signal is being output when trigger (c) arrives), and slight errors will be regarded as a continuation of a series of advantageous states, so that the external device can recognize this in the same way as during low-probability time-saving states B to C.

In addition, in the case where the "N change" in "Change/Stop of Special Symbols" in FIG. 228 is related to the change display after the 700th time in the low probability time-saving state B (the lottery result of the special symbol is an immediate short win), even if the low probability time-saving state B is controlled to transition to the low probability time-saving state C after the end of the low probability time-saving state B, the output of the game state signal will be newly started. In this regard, as another example, if the specific surplus period is set relatively long (for example, 10 seconds during which the special symbol may be performed multiple times in the low probability non-time-saving state), if the timing at which the immediate short win symbol is stopped and displayed is within the specific surplus period, the output of the game state signal may be processed in the same manner as when the low probability time-saving state B is controlled to transition to the low probability time-saving state C (considering that the game state signal is output when the trigger (c) arrives). In this way, the error in the number change of the special symbols can also be considered as a series of advantageous states continuing, and can be recognized by the external device in the same way as during the low probability time-saving states B to C. In this embodiment, the low probability time-saving state A (which continues until the special symbol variation display is performed 559 times) caused by the jackpot D described above is also set. For this reason, for example, when going through this low probability time-saving state A (559 times of special symbol variation display) and reaching the trigger (b) (the 600th special symbol variation display) to transition to the low probability time-saving state B, if a time longer than the "combined time of the 600th special symbol variation time and the determination time" is set as the specific surplus period, the game state signal can be continuously output from the low probability time-saving state A caused by the jackpot D to the low probability time-saving state B, and the series of advantageous states can be considered to be continuing, making it possible to recognize it on the external device side in the same manner as described above.

Next, FIG. 229 will be described. In FIG. 229, the free state start signal output from the external output terminal 558af is output when the special symbol stops as an instantaneous short win symbol and transitions from a low-probability non-time-saving state to a low-probability time-saving state C (t1 in FIG. 229), and when the special symbol stops as an instantaneous short win symbol and transitions from a low-probability time-saving state C to a new low-probability time-saving state C (t2 in FIG. 229). Both t1 and t2 in FIG. 229 correspond to the above-mentioned trigger (c), and the advantageous state start signal is continuously output for 0.256 seconds from the start of the low-probability time-saving state C. An external information device installed above the pachinko machine 1 receives the output of an advantageous state start signal when there is a transition from a low-probability non-time-saving state to a low-probability time-saving state C, and adds "1" to the display of the number of special prizes, and also receives the output of an advantageous state start signal when there is a transition from a low-probability time-saving state C to a new low-probability time-saving state C, and adds "1" to the display of the number of special prizes.

The fluctuation reset signal 2 output from the external output terminal 558ah is output when the special symbol stops as an immediate short win symbol and transitions from the low probability non-time-saving state to the low probability time-saving state C (t1 in FIG. 229), and when the special symbol stops as an immediate short win symbol and transitions from the low probability time-saving state C to a new low probability time-saving state C (t2 in FIG. 229). Both t1 and t2 in FIG. 229 correspond to the above-mentioned trigger (c), and the fluctuation reset signal 2 is continuously output for 0.256 seconds from the start of the low probability time-saving state C. In the external information device installed above the pachinko machine 1, when the low probability non-time-saving state transitions to the low probability time-saving state C, the external information device receives the output of the fluctuation reset signal 2, resets the display of the fluctuation count to 0, and can notify the current information of the pachinko machine 1 to the outside, such as the player, from the external information device. Also, when a transition is made from low-probability time-saving state C to a new low-probability time-saving state C, the display of the number of changes can be reset to 0 upon output of the change reset signal 2, and the current information of the pachinko machine 1 can be notified to the player or other external parties from the external information device. Note that since FIG. 229 does not show the above-mentioned trigger (b) for transitioning to low-probability time-saving state B based on the count value of the rescue count counter, the change reset signal 1 is not output from the external output terminal 558ag.

In addition, the game state signal output from the external output terminal 558ai is set as an output trigger when the special symbol stops as an immediate short-win symbol and transitions from the low-probability non-time-saving state to the low-probability time-saving state C (the above-mentioned trigger (c)) and when the special symbol stops as an immediate short-win symbol and transitions from the low-probability time-saving state C to a new low-probability time-saving state C (the above-mentioned trigger (c)). In FIG. 229, the output is started when the low-probability non-time-saving state transitions to the low-probability time-saving state C, but when the low-probability time-saving state C transitions to the new low-probability time-saving state C, a new output is not started. Specifically, the "N change" in "Change/stop of special symbol" in FIG. 229 is illustrated as being related to the change display in the low-probability time-saving state C (the lottery result of the special symbol is an immediate short-win), and represents the time when the low-probability time-saving state C is controlled to transition to the new low-probability time-saving state C in the middle of the low-probability time-saving state C. Regarding the game status signal of FIG. 229, when the trigger (c) arrives as described above, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines whether or not a game status signal is being output, and if a game status signal is not being output, it starts outputting a new game status signal, and if a game status signal is being output, it is controlled so that the game status signal continues to be output without being stopped. In this way, the game status signal is continuously output from the low probability time-saving state C to the new low probability time-saving state C without stopping the output of the game status signal midway, so that the series of advantageous states can be continuously recognized by the external device as described above.

In addition, for the "N fluctuation" in "fluctuation/stop of special symbols" in FIG. 229, even when targeting a fluctuation display in low-probability time-saving state C (the lottery result of the special symbol is an immediate short win), output is started when the low-probability non-time-saving state transitions to the low-probability time-saving state C at the preceding trigger (c), but new output is not started when the low-probability time-saving state C transitions to a new low-probability time-saving state C at the subsequent trigger (c). In other words, as shown by t3 in FIG. 229, the timing for stopping the output of the game state signal is set to a predetermined timing (a specific surplus period of 0.5 seconds has elapsed after the fixed time (for example, 0.128 seconds) has elapsed after the final fluctuation stop of the special symbol in the low-probability time-saving state C, as in the above, and the output of the game state signal is continued for a while even after the end of the low-probability time-saving state C. For this reason, even if the final stop of the special pattern in the low-probability time-saving state C causes the immediate short-win pattern to stop and transition to the low-probability time-saving state C, if the low-probability time-saving state C starts within the specific surplus period, the output of the game state signal will be processed in the same manner as when the game is controlled to transition to the low-probability time-saving state C anew in the middle of the low-probability time-saving state C, and even slight errors will be recognized by the external device as a continuation of a series of advantageous states.

Although not shown in Figures 228 and 229, in this embodiment, when a "specific error state" occurs, the output of the advantageous state start signal and the fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2 described above is controlled in a unique manner. This will be explained below.

In this embodiment, the "specific error state" is a state in which a specific abnormality occurs that triggers the output of a security signal from the external output terminal 558ak to an external device. Here, the trigger for outputting a security signal from the external output terminal 558ak to an external device is, for example, a magnetic abnormality related to the magnetic sensor, a vibration abnormality related to the vibration sensor, a normal electric role winning abnormality when a game ball wins a normal electric role during normal times, a large prize winning port winning abnormality when a large prize winning port is won during normal times, a safe switch abnormality related to the safe switch, a probability variable area passing abnormality when a game ball passes through a probability variable area during normal times, a designated pattern route abnormality when the RAM is cleared, a RAM error, etc., and the state in which such a judgment is made is considered to be a "state in which a specific abnormality has occurred". In this "state in which a specific abnormality has occurred", it is highly likely that either a malfunction has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal game has been played, and it is highly likely that the game is not proceeding normally, and it is important to transmit information about such a situation to an external device through a security signal. However, if the external output terminal 558ak is not connected to an external device for some reason, there is a risk that information cannot be transmitted to the external device through the security signal. In this regard, in this embodiment, when a specific abnormality occurs when all of the above-mentioned advantageous state start signals and fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2 are stopped, or when a specific abnormality occurs when either the advantageous state start signal or the fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2 are being output, control is performed in a manner different from when the game is proceeding normally (when no specific error state has occurred), and the fact that the game is not proceeding normally is transmitted to the external device separately from the security signal.

First, we will explain the case where a specific abnormality occurs in a state where all outputs of the advantageous state start signal and the fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2 are stopped. In this embodiment, all outputs of the advantageous state start signal and the fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2 are stopped until the above-mentioned triggers (b) and (c) occur in the low-probability non-time-saving state. If a specific abnormality occurs in this state, a security signal will be output from the external output terminal 558ak to an external device, but in addition, even if the above-mentioned triggers (b) and (c) occur during the period in which the specific abnormality occurs, the advantageous state start signal and the fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2 are not output, and they are controlled to maintain their stopped state.

In other words, under normal circumstances, when the triggers (b) and (c) occur, the output of the game state signal is started, and the advantageous state start signal and the fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2 are output. However, under circumstances where a specific abnormality occurs, even if the triggers (b) and (c) occur, the output of only the game state signal is started, but the output of the advantageous state start signal and the fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2 is restricted, so that from the external device side, a unique input situation is created in which the advantageous state start signal and the fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2 are not input, and only the game state signal is input. As mentioned above, if the external output terminal 558ak is connected to an external device, the specific abnormality can be detected by the external device through the security signal, but if the external output terminal 558ak is not connected to an external device, the security signal is not input to the external device, and the external device cannot detect it. Regarding this, in this embodiment, when a specific abnormality occurs, when trigger (b) or (c) occurs in a low-probability non-time-saving state, a unique input situation that would not occur under normal circumstances (a situation in which the advantageous state start signal and variable reset signals 1 and 2 are not input, and only the game state signal is input) is generated, and because this unique input situation can occur, even if a security signal is not input to the external device, it is possible for the external device to detect a situation in which either a malfunction has occurred in pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent play has occurred.

Next, a case where a specific abnormality occurs when either the advantageous state start signal or the fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2 are being output will be described. In this embodiment, when the above-mentioned triggers (b) and (c) occur during normal operation, the advantageous state start signal and the fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2 are output for a predetermined output period, respectively, and the output is stopped when the output period has elapsed. However, in this embodiment, when a specific abnormality occurs during the output period of the advantageous state start signal and the fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2, although the output of both the advantageous state start signal and the fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2 should normally be stopped when the respective output periods have elapsed, the output of both the advantageous state start signal and the fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2 is continued even after the respective output periods have elapsed, and the output state is maintained.

In other words, under normal circumstances, when the triggers (b) and (c) occur, the advantageous state start signal and the fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2 are output for a predetermined output period, but if a specific abnormality occurs within that output period, the output of both the advantageous state start signal and the fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2 is not stopped indefinitely even after the respective output periods have elapsed, and in the meantime, an unusual input situation occurs in which the input continues beyond the maximum value of the jackpot period, which is the output period of the trigger (a). As mentioned above, if the external output terminal 558ak is connected to an external device, the specific abnormality can be detected by the external device through the security signal, but if the external output terminal 558ak is not connected to an external device, the security signal is not input to the external device and the external device cannot detect it. Regarding this, in this embodiment, if a specific abnormality occurs while the advantageous state start signal and the fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2 are being output, a unique input situation that would not normally occur (a situation in which the input period of the advantageous state start signal and the fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2 continues beyond the maximum value of the jackpot period, which is the output period of the trigger (a)) is generated, and this unique input situation makes it possible for the external device to detect a situation in which either a malfunction has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent play has occurred, even if a security signal has not been input to the external device.

In this embodiment, all of the above-mentioned peculiar input situations are resolved by resolving the specific abnormality, but if the condition for resolving the specific abnormality is to power the pachinko machine 1 back on, it is preferable to allow the peculiar input situation to continue until the power is powered back on.

In addition, in this embodiment, an unusual input situation is generated using both the advantageous state start signal and the fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2, which are output at the same time under normal circumstances, but it is possible to generate a situation equivalent to the unusual input situation described above by using only one of the advantageous state start signal and the fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2. However, by generating an unusual input situation using both the advantageous state start signal and the fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2, even if one of the advantageous state start signal and the fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2 is not input to the external device, it becomes possible for the external device to detect a situation in which either a malfunction has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal game has been played due to the input of the other, and the reliability of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved when transmitting information to the external device.

In addition, in this embodiment, the "specific error state" is set to include all specific abnormalities that trigger the output of a security signal from the external output terminal 558ak to an external device as described above, but is not limited to this and may include some of the specific abnormalities that trigger the output of a security signal. In this case, in consideration of detecting a situation in which a malfunction has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal game has been played, the gaming machine designer may set conditions that correspond to specific abnormalities among the abnormalities that trigger the output of a security signal, or the hall may be allowed to arbitrarily set conditions that correspond to specific abnormalities among the abnormalities that trigger the output of a security signal.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the case where the low probability time-saving state B transitions to the low probability time-saving state C and the low probability time-saving state continues, and the case where the low probability time-saving state C transitions to a new low probability time-saving state C and the low probability time-saving state continues have been described in detail, but the present invention is not limited to these, and for example, even when the low probability time-saving state A transitions based on the above-mentioned jackpot and transitions to the low probability time-saving state B or C and the low probability time-saving state continues, or when the low probability time-saving state C transitions to the low probability time-saving state B and the low probability time-saving state continues, the four signals, the advantageous state start signal, the variable reset signals 1 and 2, and the game state signal, are similarly output. Of these, the game state signal is output continuously after the output is started at the earliest trigger such as the start of the jackpot game state, until the timing for output stop arrives. As a result, the external device can recognize that the pachinko machine 1 continues to be in an advantageous state for the player. For example, the external information device installed above the pachinko machine 1 can continuously notify the player or others outside that the pachinko machine 1 is in an advantageous state for the player without the notification from the external information device being stopped even once, thereby preventing the player from misunderstanding the game state of the pachinko machine 1.

In the present embodiment, the external terminal board 558 is provided with ten external output terminals 558ab to 558ak, but the external terminal board 558 may further be provided with at least one external output terminal that outputs the variable reset signal X, such as the external output terminal ax described above. This external output terminal ax may be provided, for example, on the game board 5, and more specifically, on the main control board 1310 provided on the game board 5. Therefore, when adding an external output terminal ax, by providing a game board 5 (main control board 1310) according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1, whether or not the external output terminal ax is required, the external output terminal ax can be added without replacing the external terminal board 558 and the main body frame 4, thereby reducing the cost of adding the external output terminal ax and facilitating design changes.

Furthermore, among the ten external output terminals 558ab to 558ak, all or at least some of the external output terminals 558af, 558ag, 558ah, and 558ai used in a unique gaming machine such as this embodiment may be arranged, for example, on the gaming board 5, and more specifically, may be arranged on the main control board 1310 provided on the gaming board 5. For the external output terminals 558af, 558ag, 558ah, and 558ai used in such a unique gaming machine, by making changes to each gaming board 5 (main control board 1310) according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to add external output terminals as necessary without replacing the external terminal board 558 and thus the main body frame 4, and to facilitate design changes.

In addition, when the special pattern change display that triggers the start of low-probability time-saving state B, i.e. the 600th special pattern change display in the low-probability state, results in an immediate short hit that triggers the start of low-probability time-saving state C, the external signal corresponding to low-probability time-saving state B (in this example, the advantageous state start signal and change reset signal 1) and the external signal corresponding to low-probability time-saving state C (in this example, the advantageous state start signal and change reset signal 2) are not output, but only one of the signals is output. Specifically, when an immediate short hit is won in the variable display of a special pattern that is the trigger for starting the low probability time-saving state B, if the low probability time-saving state C is controlled in preference to the low probability time-saving state B, an external signal corresponding to the low probability time-saving state C (in this example, the advantageous state start signal and the variable reset signal 2) is output, and when an immediate short hit is won in the variable display of a special pattern that is the trigger for starting the low probability time-saving state B, if the low probability time-saving state B is controlled in preference to the low probability time-saving state C, an external signal corresponding to the low probability time-saving state B (in this example, the advantageous state start signal and the variable reset signal 1) is output. Note that, when an immediate short hit is won in the variable display of a special pattern that is the trigger for starting the low probability time-saving state B, which of the low probability time-saving state B or the low probability time-saving state C is controlled in preference may be set appropriately according to the game characteristics.

[LED Light Emitting Mode of Functional Display Unit 1400]
FIG. 230 is a front view showing the function display unit 1400. The LED light emission mode of the above-mentioned function display unit 1400 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 230 and the like. As shown in FIG. 230, the function display unit 1400 includes a first special symbol display 1400a consisting of eight LEDs 1400aa to 1400ah for displaying the result of the drawing of the first special symbol drawn by the reception of the game ball B into the first starting port 2004, a first special reserved number display 1400b consisting of two LEDs 1400ba and 1400bb for displaying the reserved number related to the reception of the game ball B into the first starting port 2004, and eight LEDs 1400ca to 1400c for displaying the result of the drawing of the second special symbol drawn by the reception of the game ball B into the second starting port 2005. a second special pattern display 1400c consisting of two LEDs 1400da, 1400db which displays the number of reserved balls relating to the acceptance of game ball B into the second starting port 2005; a normal pattern display 1400e consisting of two LEDs 1400ea, 1400eb which displays the result of the lottery for the normal pattern drawn by the acceptance of game ball B into gate 2002; and a normal reserve display 1400f consisting of two LEDs 1400fa, 1400fb which displays the number of reserved balls relating to the acceptance of game ball B into gate 2002. The first special pattern display 1400a, the second special pattern display 1400c, and the normal pattern display 1400e, for example, indicate that each pattern is being selected by blinking each of the LEDs 1400aa to 1400ah, 1400ca to 1400ch, 1400ea, and 1400eb, and display the selection result for each pattern by the lighting and extinguishing patterns of each of the LEDs 1400aa to 1400ah, 1400ca to 1400ch, 1400ea, and 1400eb, and the player can confirm that each pattern is being selected or the selection result for each pattern by checking the function display unit 1400.

In addition, the first special reserve number display 1400b, the second special reserve number display 1400d and the normal reserve number display 1400f display each reserve number, for example, by the off, on and blinking patterns of each LED 1400ba, 1400bb, 1400da, 1400db, 1400fa and 1400fb, and the player can check the reserve number corresponding to each pattern by checking the function display unit 1400. Specifically, in the case of the first special hold number indicator 1400b, when each of the LEDs 1400ba and 1400bb is off, it indicates that the hold number is 0, when the LEDs 1400ba are on and the LEDs 1400bb are off, it indicates that the hold number is 1, when each of the LEDs 1400ba and 1400bb are on, it indicates that the hold number is 2, when the LEDs 1400ba are flashing and the LEDs 1400bb are on, it indicates that the hold number is 3, and when each of the LEDs 1400ba and 1400bb are flashing, it indicates that the hold number is 4.

The function display unit 1400 also includes a status indicator 1400g consisting of two LEDs 1400ga, 1400gb which indicates the game status of the pachinko machine 1, a right-hit indicator 1400h consisting of two LEDs 1400ha, 1400hb which indicates that the pachinko machine 1 is in a right-hit state, and a round indicator 1400i consisting of four LEDs 1400ia to 1400id which indicates the number of times the opening and closing pattern of the first large winning opening 2006 or the second large winning opening 2007 is repeated (number of rounds) when the lottery result for the first special pattern or the lottery result for the second special pattern is a "hit", etc. The right-hit indicator 1400h indicates that the machine is in a right-hit state, which requires a right-hit, for example, when a jackpot is hit or during a time-saving period, by turning on or off each of the LEDs 1400ha and 1400hb, and the player can check whether the pachinko machine 1 is currently in a right-hit state by checking the function display unit 1400. Specifically, when each of the LEDs 1400ha and 1400hb is turned on, it indicates that the machine is in a right-hit state, and when each of the LEDs 1400ha and 1400hb is turned off, it indicates that the machine is not in a right-hit state.

In addition, the round display 1400i displays, for example, the number of times (number of rounds) that the opening and closing pattern of each large prize opening will be repeated when the lottery result for each special symbol is a "win" or the like, by using the lighting and extinguishing patterns of each LED 1400ia to 1400id, and the player can check the number of times (number of rounds) that the opening and closing pattern of the large prize opening will be repeated by checking the function display unit 1400 when the lottery result for each special symbol is a "win" or the like. Specifically, when LED 1400ia is lit and each of LEDs 1400ib to 1400id is off, this indicates that the number of repetitions (number of rounds) is 2; when LEDs 1400ia and 1400ic are lit and each of LEDs 1400ib and 1400id are off, this indicates that the number of repetitions (number of rounds) is 3; when LEDs 1400ia to 1400ic are lit and LED 1400id is off, this indicates that the number of repetitions (number of rounds) is 5; and when LEDs 1400ia to 1400id are lit, this indicates that the number of repetitions (number of rounds) is 10.

The status indicator 1400g indicates that the pachinko machine 1 is in one of the above-mentioned low-probability non-time-shortening state, low-probability time-shortening state (each of the low-probability time-shortening states A, B, and C), high-probability time-shortening state, and high-probability non-time-shortening state, for example, by turning on and off each of the LEDs 1400ga and 1400gb, and the player can check the game status of the pachinko machine 1 by checking the function display unit 1400. Specifically, when each of the LEDs 1400ga and 1400gb is off, it indicates that it is in the low-probability non-time-shortening state, when the LED 1400ga is off and the LED 1400gb is on, it indicates that it is in the low-probability time-shortening state (each of the low-probability time-shortening states A, B, and C), when the LED 1400ga is on and the LED 1400gb is off, it indicates that it is in the high-probability non-time-shortening state, and when each of the LEDs 1400ga and 1400gb is on, it indicates that it is in the high-probability time-shortening state.

[LED light emission mode of the function display unit 1400 when the time-saving state continues]
Next, the light emission mode of the status indicator 1400g when the time-saving state continues will be described in detail. In conventional pachinko machines, the LED 1400gb of the status indicator 1400g of the function display unit 1400 is controlled to be in the on state every time the time-saving state occurs. In other words, when a jackpot occurs during the time-saving state and the time-saving state is again controlled after the jackpot game (when the time-saving state continues), the LED 1400gb of the status indicator 1400g of the function display unit 1400 is controlled to be in the off state once and then to be in the on state again. However, in this embodiment, unlike the conventional control via the jackpot, the game has a playability due to a unique control that directly continues the time-saving state, and in a game machine having such playability, if the LED 1400gb of the status indicator 1400g of the function display unit 1400 is controlled to be turned off/on every time the time-saving state occurs as in the conventional case, there is a risk of the following problems occurring. That is, even though the time-saving state occurs directly and continuously without a jackpot, the LED 1400gb of the status indicator 1400g of the function display unit 1400 is temporarily turned off, which may mislead the player into thinking that the time-saving state has ended, and may reduce the interest in the game. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when the time-saving state occurs directly and continuously without a jackpot, the light-emitting state of the LED 1400gb of the status indicator 1400g of the function display unit 1400 prevents the player from misunderstanding, as will be specifically explained below. Figure 231 shows the situation when the pachinko machine 1 transitions from the low-probability time-saving state B to the low-probability time-saving state A via a jackpot, and further transitions to the low-probability time-saving state C during the low-probability time-saving state A.

As shown in FIG. 231, when the pachinko machine 1 is controlled to the low-probability time-saving state B, a game state signal is sent from the external output terminal 558af to an external device, and a pattern determination signal is output each time the variation of the special pattern stops (each time the determination time for the special pattern starts). Also, since the low-probability time-saving state B is a time-saving state, the LED 1400gb of the status indicator 1400g of the function display unit 1400 is controlled to an lit state. Note that in FIG. 231, the LED 1400ga of the status indicator 1400g is maintained in an unlit state because the pachinko machine 1 has not transitioned to the high-probability state.

As described above, the game state signal is output when the game is controlled to either the time-saving state, the high probability state, or the jackpot game, and is output continuously while the game is in an advantageous state (in this example, while the game is controlled to either the time-saving state, the high probability state, or the jackpot game). In other words, in FIG. 231, the game state signal starts to be output when the game is controlled to the low probability time-saving state B, which is the preceding trigger, but it is not output again when the game is controlled to the jackpot game based on the stop result of the special pattern, which is the subsequent trigger (t1 in FIG. 231), or when the game transitions from the low probability time-saving state A to the low probability time-saving state C (t3 in FIG. 231). In other words, when each trigger for outputting the game state signal arrives, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 judges whether or not the game state signal is output, and if the game state signal is not output, it starts outputting a new game state signal, and if the game state signal is output, it is controlled to continue outputting the game state signal without stopping it. This allows external devices (particularly hall computers) to recognize that a series of favorable conditions is continuing.

In addition, the pattern determination signal is output from the external output terminal 558ad to an external device every time the special pattern stops changing (every time the special pattern determination time starts), regardless of the game state of the low probability non-time-saving state, each low probability time-saving state A, B, C, high probability time-saving state, and high probability non-time-saving state, and when the pattern determination signal output from the external output terminal 558ad is input to the external device (particularly the external information device installed above the pachinko machine 1), the display of the number of changes is incremented by one.

In addition, when the game is controlled to a jackpot game based on the result of the special symbol stopping (t1 in FIG. 231), or when the special symbol stops and displays as an immediate short-win symbol, transitioning from low-probability time-saving state A to low-probability time-saving state C (t3 in FIG. 231), an advantageous state start signal is output from the external output terminal 558af to an external device. t1 in FIG. 231 corresponds to the case of the above-mentioned trigger (a), and the advantageous state start signal is continuously output during the jackpot period while the game is controlled to a jackpot game (such as until all openings of the first large winning hole 2006 or the second large winning hole 2007 are completed), and the output of the advantageous state start signal is stopped by the end of the jackpot game. In addition, t3 in FIG. 231 corresponds to the case of the above-mentioned trigger (c), and the advantageous state start signal is continuously output for 0.256 seconds from the start of the low-probability time-saving state C, and is not output even if the game is controlled to the low-probability time-saving state C after that. In the external information device installed above the pachinko machine 1, when an advantageous state start signal is input based on control from the low-probability time-saving state B to a jackpot game, in other words, when the advantageous state start signal is input over the jackpot period, "1" is added to the display of the special prize count, and when an advantageous state start signal is input based on a transition from the low-probability time-saving state A to the low-probability time-saving state C, in other words, when the advantageous state start signal is input for only 0.256 seconds, "1" is added to the display of the special prize count. On the other hand, in the hall computer, when an advantageous state start signal is input based on control from the low-probability time-saving state B to a jackpot game, in other words, when the advantageous state start signal is input for more than 0.256 seconds, "1" is added to the display of the special prize count, but when an advantageous state start signal is input based on a transition from the low-probability time-saving state A to the low-probability time-saving state C, in other words, when the advantageous state start signal is input over the jackpot period, "1" is not added to the display of the special prize count, and the special prize count is maintained. In this way, the hall computer accurately displays the number of times that the machine has been controlled to play a jackpot game, while the external information device installed above the pachinko machine 1 displays not only the number of times that the machine has been controlled to play a jackpot game, but also the total number of times that the machine has been controlled to play in the low-probability time-saving state B. This allows players to see a larger number of times that the machine has been controlled to play a jackpot game than the actual number, which can stimulate their desire to play, and allows the hall manager to accurately grasp the number of times that the machine has been controlled to play a jackpot game from the display on the hall computer.

When the game is controlled to a jackpot based on the result of the special symbol stopping (t1 in FIG. 231), in addition to the advantageous state start signal and game state signal described above, a fluctuation reset signal 1 and a fluctuation reset signal 2 are output from the external output terminal 558ah to an external device. t1 in FIG. 231 corresponds to the case of the above-mentioned trigger (a), in which the fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2 are continuously output throughout the jackpot period, and the output of the fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2 is stopped upon the end of the jackpot game. In addition, the external information device installed above the pachinko machine 1 resets the display of the number of fluctuations to 0 when the fluctuation reset signals 1 and 2 are input throughout the jackpot period based on the control to a jackpot game from the low probability time-saving state B.

In this example, the LED 1400gb of the status indicator 1400g of the function display unit 1400 is controlled to be off throughout the jackpot period to prevent the player from being disadvantaged. In other words, the jackpot game involves controlling the opening and closing of the second large prize winning opening 2007 multiple times, but since it is possible to win a large number of game balls (prize balls) by having game balls enter the second large prize winning opening 2007, which has a significant impact on the player's profits, if the LED 1400gb of the status indicator 1400g of the function display unit 1400 is lit, the player may mistakenly believe that a time-saving state has occurred and may not be able to concentrate on the jackpot game, including the launch mode of the game balls. In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, regardless of whether or not the machine is controlled to the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game, the LED 1400gb of the status indicator 1400g of the function display unit 1400 is controlled to an off state while the machine is controlled to the jackpot game, so that attention is not drawn to the LED 1400gb of the status indicator 1400g of the function display unit 1400 while the machine is controlled to the jackpot game (jackpot period) and the player can concentrate on the jackpot game. This makes it possible to prevent any disadvantage from being caused to the player.

In addition, when transitioning to low-probability time-saving state A after the end of a jackpot game, the output of the advantageous state start signal, the fluctuation reset signal 1, and the fluctuation reset signal 2 is stopped (t2 in FIG. 231). On the other hand, the game state signal is not stopped and continues to be output even when transitioning to low-probability time-saving state A. In addition, when transitioning to low-probability time-saving state A, the LED 1400gb of the status indicator 1400g of the function display unit 1400, which was controlled to an off state when the jackpot game started, is controlled to an on state again to notify that it is being controlled to the time-saving state.

Also, t3 in Figure 231 corresponds to the above-mentioned trigger (c), where the fluctuation reset signal 2 is continuously output for 0.256 seconds from the start of low-probability time-saving state C. Also, in this example, when the low-probability time-saving state A transitions to low-probability time-saving state C, the external information device installed above the pachinko machine 1 receives the output of the fluctuation reset signal 2 and resets the display of the number of fluctuations to 0.

The LED 1400gb of the status indicator 1400g is controlled to be in a lit state when the game transitions from a jackpot game to a low-probability time-saving state A (t2 in FIG. 231), but when a special symbol is stopped and displayed as an immediate short-win symbol during the low-probability time-saving state A, and the game transitions from the low-probability time-saving state A to the low-probability time-saving state C (t3 in FIG. 231), the lit state is maintained without being changed to an unlit state. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the game transitions to the low-probability time-saving state C without executing a jackpot game, if the time-saving state control has already been executed, the LED 1400gb of the status indicator 1400g is maintained in a lit state without being changed to an unlit state. As described above, if the game is controlled to a jackpot game, there is a risk of causing a disadvantage to the player, so even if the game is controlled to a time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game, the LED 1400gb of the status indicator 1400g is controlled to be in an unlit state while the game is controlled to a jackpot game. On the other hand, when the special symbol is displayed as a stop symbol for an immediate short win and the game transitions to low-probability time-saving state C, the big win game is not executed, so there is no risk of causing a disadvantage to the player, and temporarily changing the LED 1400gb of the status indicator 1400g to an off state may confuse the player or make the player feel uneasy or distrustful because he or she believes that the game will transition to low-probability time-saving state C because the immediate short win symbol is displayed. Therefore, in this example, when the game transitions to low-probability time-saving state C without executing a big win game, the LED 1400gb of the status indicator 1400g is kept on without being changed to an off state, so as not to confuse the player and not to make the player feel uneasy or distrustful.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 231, the lighting and extinguishing states of the LED 1400gb of the status indicator 1400g are described as transitioning from the low-probability time-saving state B to the low-probability time-saving state A via a jackpot game. However, even in the case of transitioning from the low-probability time-saving state A to a new low-probability time-saving state A via a jackpot game, or transitioning from the low-probability time-saving state C to the low-probability time-saving state A via a jackpot game, the LED 1400gb of the status indicator 1400g is controlled to be in an extinguished state during a jackpot game in opposition to the game state signal output from the external output terminal 558ai. Therefore, the player can concentrate on the jackpot game without paying attention to the light emission of each LED 1400ga, 1400gb of the status indicator 1400g, thereby preventing the player from being disadvantaged. In addition, in a mode in which the low-probability non-time-saving state transitions to the low-probability time-saving state A via jackpot play, the LED 1400gb of the status indicator 1400g is controlled to an off state in opposition to the game status signal output from the external output terminal 558ai between the low-probability non-time-saving state and the jackpot play, allowing the player to concentrate on the jackpot play without paying attention to the illumination of the LEDs 1400ga, 1400gb of the status indicator 1400g.

In addition, in the mode of transitioning from the low probability non-time-saving state shown in FIG. 228 described above to the low probability time-saving state C via the low probability time-saving state B, when the state is controlled to the low probability non-time-saving state, the LED 1400gb of the state indicator 1400g is controlled to the off state, and each time the variation of the special symbol stops (each time the determination time of the special symbol starts), a symbol determination signal is output from the external output terminal 558ad to the external device, and when the symbol determination signal output from the external output terminal 558ad is input to the external device (particularly the external information device installed above the pachinko machine 1), the display of the number of variations is incremented by one. Note that in FIG. 228, the LED 1400ga of the state indicator 1400g is maintained in the off state because the pachinko machine 1 has not transitioned to the high probability state.

In addition, when a transition is made from the low-probability non-time-saving state to the low-probability time-saving state B based on the count value of the rescue count counter described above (t1 in FIG. 228), LED 1400gb of the status indicator 1400g is controlled to be in a lit state, and an advantageous state start signal and a fluctuation reset signal 1 are output from the external output terminal 558af to the external device for 0.128 seconds, and a game state signal is further output from the external output terminal 558af to the external device. The lit state of LED 1400gb of the status indicator 1400g is maintained at least during the low-probability time-saving state B (t1 to t2 in FIG. 228), and the game state signal is maintained at least during the low-probability time-saving state B (t1 to t2 in FIG. 228). An external information device installed above the pachinko machine 1 is configured to receive an advantageous state start signal when a transition occurs from a low-probability non-time-saving state to low-probability time-saving state B, add "1" to the display of the special prize count, and receive a fluctuation reset signal 1 to reset the display of the fluctuation count to 0.

As described above, the display of the number of variations displayed on the external information device installed above the pachinko machine 1 is also reset when the jackpot game ends or when the instant short win symbol is stopped and displayed. That is, in this example, the number of times the special symbol variable display was performed after the jackpot game ended, the number of times the special symbol variable display was performed after the instant short win symbol was stopped and displayed, and the number of times the special symbol variable display was performed after the count value of the rescue count counter reached "600" are notified. Note that the display of the number of variations displayed on the external information device may be reset only when a jackpot game is played, and the display of the number of variations displayed on the external information device may not be reset when a jackpot game is not played (when an instant short win occurs or when the count value of the rescue count counter reaches "600"). In addition, the rescue counter counts the number of times the special symbol changes in a low probability state, but does not count the number of times the special symbol changes in a high probability state. However, the number of changes displayed on the external information device is set to display not only the number of times the special symbol changes in a low probability state, but also the number of times the special symbol changes in a high probability state.

In addition, when the special symbol stops as an instant short win symbol and transitions from low probability time-saving state B to low probability time-saving state C (t2 in FIG. 228), LED 1400gb of status indicator 1400g is maintained in the on state without being changed to the off state, and an advantageous state start signal and variable reset signal 2 are output from external output terminal 558af to the external device for 0.256 seconds, and further a game state signal is continuously output from external output terminal 558af to the external device.

When the instantaneous short win symbol is stopped and the game state transitions to the low-probability time-saving state C while the game is in the low-probability time-saving state B, the big win game is not executed, and the game state does not change from the low-probability time-saving state. Therefore, there is no risk of causing a disadvantage to the player even if the player is not notified when the game transitions from the low-probability time-saving state B to the low-probability time-saving state C. However, by temporarily turning off the LED 1400gb of the status indicator 1400g when ending the low-probability time-saving state B, and turning on the LED 1400gb of the status indicator 1400g again when starting the low-probability time-saving state C, it may confuse the player or make the player feel uneasy or distrustful because the instantaneous short win symbol is stopped and the game state transitions to the low-probability time-saving state C. Therefore, when the game is controlled to low-probability time-saving state B and an immediate short-win pattern is displayed in a stopped state, transitioning to low-probability time-saving state C, the LED 1400gb of the status indicator 1400g is not turned off but remains lit, thereby avoiding confusion for the player and causing anxiety or distrust.

In addition, when the low-probability time-saving state C ends and transitions from the low-probability time-saving state C to a low-probability non-time-saving state (t3 in FIG. 228), the LED 1400gb of the status indicator 1400g is controlled from a lit state to an unlit state, and the output of the game status signal is stopped when the specific surplus time has elapsed. Thus, in this example, when the LED 1400gb of the status indicator 1400g is controlled from an unlit state to a lit state, the output of the game status signal also starts at the same time, but when the LED 1400gb of the status indicator 1400g is controlled from a lit state to an unlit state, the timing of stopping the output of the game status signal is delayed. As a result, even if the final fluctuation stop of the special symbols in low-probability time-saving states A, B, and C causes an immediate short-win symbol to stop and transition to low-probability time-saving state C, if low-probability time-saving state C begins within the specific surplus period, the output of the game state signal will be processed in the same manner as when the game is controlled to transition to low-probability time-saving state C midway through low-probability time-saving states A, B, and C, and slight errors will be regarded as a continuation of a series of advantageous states, making it possible to recognize this on the external device in the same way as during low-probability time-saving states C to C. This makes it possible to make the duration of the advantageous state appear longer, which can increase interest in the game.

When the final fluctuation stop of the special symbols in low-probability time-saving states A, B, and C causes an immediate short-win symbol to stop and transition to low-probability time-saving state C, the LED 1400gb of the status indicator 1400g is controlled to remain lit without being turned off. This makes it possible to avoid confusing the player and to prevent anxiety or distrust as to whether or not the transition to low-probability time-saving state C will occur.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 229 above, when transitioning from low-probability time-saving state C to a new low-probability time-saving state C, LED 1400gb of status indicator 1400g is maintained in the on state without being changed to the off state, and an advantageous state start signal and a fluctuation reset signal 2 are output from external output terminal 558af to an external device for 0.256 seconds, and further a game state signal is continuously output from external output terminal 558af to the external device.

When the instantaneous short-time winning pattern is displayed as a stop when the low-probability time-saving state C is controlled and the game transitions to a new low-probability time-saving state C, the big win game is not executed and the game state does not change from the low-probability time-saving state, just as when the instantaneous short-time winning pattern is displayed as a stop when the game transitions to the low-probability time-saving state C when the game is controlled to the low-probability time-saving state B described above. Therefore, when the game transitions from the low-probability time-saving state C to the low-probability time-saving state C, that is, when the game is controlled continuously to the low-probability time-saving state C, there is no risk of causing a disadvantage to the player even if the notification is not given, and when the low-probability time-saving state C being controlled is ended, the LED 1400gb of the status indicator 1400g is temporarily turned off, and when a new low-probability time-saving state C is started, the LED 1400gb of the status indicator 1400g is turned on again, which may confuse the player or may cause anxiety or distrust to the player who recognizes that the low-probability time-saving state C will continue because the instantaneous short-time winning pattern is displayed as a stop. Therefore, when the game is controlled to low-probability time-saving state C and an immediate short-win pattern is displayed in a stopped state, transitioning to a new low-probability time-saving state C, the LED 1400gb of the status indicator 1400g is not turned off but remains lit, thereby avoiding confusion for the player and causing anxiety or distrust.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, as shown in Figure 231 described above, during a big win game (t1 to t2 in Figure 231), the LED 1400gb of the status indicator 1400g is controlled to an off state, but when controlling to a small win game during the time-saving state, the LED 1400gb of the status indicator 1400g can be kept on even during a small win game, thereby preventing the LED 1400gb of the status indicator 1400g from being turned off due to the rare occurrence of a small win game, and preventing the player from feeling uneasy or distrustful. Specifically, during the above-mentioned low-probability non-time-saving state (LED 1400gb is off) when a small win occurs and a small win game is played, the LED 1400gb of the status indicator 1400g is controlled to be kept off, and during the low-probability time-saving states A to C (LED 1400gb is on) when a small win occurs and a small win game is played, the LED 1400gb of the status indicator 1400g is controlled to be kept on. As a result, even if a small win game that is less profitable than a big win game and ends in a short period of time occurs during the game progress in the time-saving state, it is possible to continuously notify the player that the pachinko machine 1 is in the time-saving state without mistaking the player for the non-time-saving state, and it is possible to suppress the player from mistaking the game state of the pachinko machine 1. In the above, the LED 1400gb of the status indicator 1400g is kept on during a small win game. However, as another example, when a specific light emission condition is met during a jackpot game, such as when a specific jackpot game among a plurality of types of jackpot games (for example, a jackpot game that ends in a short period of time, such as two rounds) is being played, or when a specific condition is met during a jackpot game (for example, when the jackpot ends early without the game ball entering the so-called V winning hole), the impact of the problem of the player misinterpreting the game status of the pachinko machine 1 is not significant, and the LED 1400gb of the status indicator 1400g may be kept on during a jackpot game.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the time-saving state occurs directly and continuously without a jackpot, the LED 1400gb of the status indicator 1400g of the function display unit 1400 is maintained in an illuminated state to avoid misunderstandings by the player. In addition, the illumination/off state of the right-hit indicator 1400h consisting of two LEDs 1400ha and 1400hb that indicate that the pachinko machine 1 is in a right-hit state may also be maintained when the time-saving state occurs directly and continuously without a jackpot. Specifically, in this embodiment, right-hitting is recommended during jackpot play in order to win the second large prize winning port 2007, so the LEDs 1400ha and 1400hb are controlled to be illuminated. In addition, in this embodiment, the variable winning hole 2003 that opens and closes in the time-saving state is provided on the left side of the center gadget 2500, and since hitting from the left is recommended when aiming to win at the variable winning hole 2003, in the time-saving state, the LEDs 1400ha and 1400hb are controlled in an off state. For this reason, for example, when the low-probability time-saving state B is controlled to transition to the low-probability time-saving state A through a jackpot game, the LEDs 1400ha and 1400hb in the off state are controlled to be turned on based on the start of the jackpot game, and then turned off based on the time-saving state. On the other hand, when the low-probability time-saving state B is controlled to stop displaying the immediate short-win pattern and transitioning to the low-probability time-saving state C, the LEDs 1400ha and 1400hb in the off state are controlled to be maintained in the off state, including before and after the immediate short-win pattern is stopped. In this way, when the instantaneous short winning pattern is stopped and the game transitions to a new low-probability time-saving state, the right-hit indicator 1400h is kept in an unchanged on/off state, so that the player can be continuously informed that the pachinko machine 1 is in a time-saving state without being mistakenly recognized as a non-time-saving state, and the player can be prevented from misunderstanding the game state of the pachinko machine 1. Note that the right-hit indicator 1400h is not limited to the same configuration as in this embodiment, and may be controlled to turn on the LEDs 1400ha and 1400hb in a red light state when right-hitting is recommended, and to turn on the LEDs 1400ha and 1400hb in a blue light state when left-hitting is recommended, and may be controlled in a similar manner to the above (maintaining the blue light state when the instantaneous short winning pattern is stopped and the game transitions to a new low-probability time-saving state). Alternatively, when right-hand hitting is recommended, only LED 1400ha may be controlled to be lit, and when left-hand hitting is recommended, only LED 1400hb may be controlled to be lit, and control similar to the above (when the instant short win symbol stops and transitions to a new low probability time-saving state, only LED 1400hb may be kept lit) may be performed.

[Assist Mode L Entry Count Notification]
Next, a modified example that is partially different from the above-mentioned help mode L performance will be described below. In the help mode L performance of the modified example, when the number of times of variation of the special symbol in the low probability state (the number of times of variation other than the jackpot of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600), the low probability time-saving state B is controlled at the time of stopping the variation display of the special symbol. However, when the number of times of variation of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches a predetermined specific notification number (a number of times less than 600 times that triggers the start of the low probability time-saving state B), the peripheral control board 1510 executes a "help mode L entry number notification performance" that notifies the remaining number of times of variation of the special symbol up to 600 times, for which transition control from the low probability non-time-saving state to the low probability time-saving state B (execution of "help mode L") is scheduled. Note that both the above-mentioned "help mode L precursor performance" and the "help mode L entry number notification performance" described below may be executed, or only one of them may be executed.

The "help mode L entry count notification effect" in this example is an effect that is executed when the number of times that the special symbol variation display performed in a low probability state without a jackpot game occurring since the power was turned on reaches a specific predetermined number of notifications (200 times in this example), regardless of the value (count value) stored (maintained) in the rescue count counter when the power was turned on. The specific number of notifications that will result in the "help mode L entry count notification effect" is counted using a notification-only counter provided in the peripheral control board 1510, rather than a rescue count counter provided in the main control board 1310, and the peripheral control board 1510 counts based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 every time a special symbol variation display performed in a low probability state since the power was turned on, thereby suppressing the burden on the main control board 1310. The value of the notification-only counter is initialized when the power is cut off or the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, and the value is not stored (maintained) like the rescue count counter. Below, we will use a time chart to explain the progression of the "Help Mode L Entry Count Notification" presentation.

Figure 232 (a) is a time chart showing the progress of the presentation when the rescue counter is set (maintained) to 350 when the power is turned on (i.e., when the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state is 350). As shown in Figure 232 (a), in the low probability state after the power is turned on, if the special symbol change display is executed 200 times after the power is turned on without the occurrence of a jackpot game (rescue counter = 550, notification only count counter = 200), the 200th special symbol change display (Z change) executes a "help mode L entry count notification presentation" that notifies the remaining number of changes (in this example, "50 times") up to 600 times of the special symbol change, for which transition control from the low probability non-time-saving state to the low probability time-saving state B (execution of "help mode L") is scheduled. In the "Help Mode L Entry Count Notification Effect," for example, a message such as "50 times remaining until Help Mode L" is displayed on the effect display device 1600 to notify the player that there are 50 remaining changes before Help Mode L begins. Note that the counting (updating) of the notification-only count counter is stopped when the "Help Mode L Entry Count Notification Effect" is executed, and thereafter, counting will not be continued even if the special symbol is displayed in a changing state.

Incidentally, an external information device that is installed in the island equipment of an amusement hall and displays the game history can display information regarding the number of times that special symbols have changed; specifically, it displays information regarding the number of times that special symbols have changed during the day, in other words, information regarding the number of times that special symbols have changed during one business day from when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on when the amusement hall opens for business to when the pachinko machine 1 is turned off when the hall closes for business, and players usually refer to the information regarding the number of changes on the external information device to understand and confirm their current game situation. Also, when a new business day begins, the information regarding the number of changes displayed on the external information device is generally reset to "0."

In other words, when the game state after power-on is a low probability state and the 200th special symbol variation display is executed without a jackpot since power-on, the external information device will display "200 times" as information on the number of times the special symbol variation was executed during the day, regardless of whether the value of the rescue counter was maintained when power-on (there is a slight difference depending on the settings of the external information device). Here, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the value of the rescue counter was maintained when power-on, and it is difficult for the player to grasp the actual timing of the transition to the low probability time-saving state B. However, the execution timing of the "help mode L entry count notification performance" is when the 200th special symbol variation display is executed without a jackpot since power-on, so the player can easily grasp it by visually checking the external information device. This allows players who are unsure of the actual timing of transition to the low-probability time-saving state B and feel anxious to continue playing until the timing of notification of the remaining number of special symbol variations up to 600 variations at which transition control to the low-probability time-saving state B is scheduled (the execution timing of the "help mode L entry number notification effect") is reached, thereby preventing a decrease in the operating rate. Also, when the "help mode L entry number notification effect" is executed to allow the player to understand that there are only a few remaining number of special symbol variations up to 600 variations at which transition control to the low-probability time-saving state B is scheduled, it is possible to increase the player's motivation to continue playing. Furthermore, the content of the game history displayed on the external information device can be switched by the player's operation on the external information device (for example, the information regarding the number of times the special symbol has changed can be switched from a state in which the number of times the special symbol has changed during the day is displayed to a state in which the final number of times the special symbol has changed on the previous day is displayed), and by taking this game history into consideration, in addition to the motivation to play of "aiming to transition to low probability time-saving state B in the hope that the value of the rescue count counter will be maintained when the power is turned on," the player can be given a new motivation to play of "aiming to execute the presentation informing the player of the number of times entry into help mode L."

In another embodiment, for example, when the rescue count counter is "0" when the power is turned on (the rescue count counter is initialized), and in the low probability state after the power is turned on, 200 special symbol variations are displayed without a jackpot being generated (rescue count counter = 200, notification only count counter = 200), the execution of the "help mode L entry count notification effect" allows the player to understand that there are many remaining variations up to the 600 special symbol variations at which transition control to the low probability time-saving state B is scheduled. Even in such a case, in this example, the execution timing of the "help mode L entry count notification effect" is set to the "200" special symbol variation display, and the transition timing from the execution timing of the "help mode L entry count notification effect" to the low probability time-saving state B is set to 1/3 of the 600 special symbol variations at which transition control to the low probability time-saving state B is scheduled. This allows the player to choose whether to end or continue playing without losing interest in the transition to low-probability time-saving state B. It is desirable to set the timing of the "help mode L entry count notification effect" to a value that maintains the player's desire to continue playing, and for example, it is preferable to set it to within 1/2 to 1/3 of the 600 special symbol fluctuations that are scheduled to trigger transition control to low-probability time-saving state B.

In addition, in the above, an example of the "Help Mode L Entry Number Notification Display" is an embodiment that clearly indicates the start time of the low-probability time-saving state B, such as by displaying "XX times remaining until Help Mode L", but this is not limited to this, and the display may be an embodiment that abstractly notifies the start time of the low-probability time-saving state B. For example, a display mode may be displayed according to the remaining number of fluctuations up to 600 of the special pattern for which transition control from the low-probability non-time-saving state to the low-probability time-saving state B is scheduled (for example, if the remaining number of fluctuations is 1 to 100, a star may be displayed on the performance display device 1600, if the remaining number of fluctuations is 101 to 200, a double circle may be displayed on the performance display device 1600, if the remaining number of fluctuations is 201 to 300, a circle may be displayed on the performance display device 1600, and if the remaining number of fluctuations is 301 to 599, a triangle may be displayed on the performance display device 1600, making it difficult to determine the exact number of remaining fluctuations, etc.). In this way, even after the "help mode L entry number notification display" has been executed, the player can continue to be given a sense of expectation and tension regarding the start timing of the low-probability time-saving state B, allowing the game to proceed. In addition, in this case, the remaining number of times up to 600 special pattern variations, at which transition control from the low probability non-time-saving state to the low probability time-saving state B is scheduled, is notified with a predetermined range, making it difficult to grasp the exact number of remaining variations, so that it becomes possible to continue playing not only when the remaining number of variations is small, but also when the remaining number of variations is large, thereby preventing a decrease in the operating rate.

In addition, in the above, the display on the display device 1600 is used as an example of the execution mode of the "help mode L entry count notification effect", but this is not limited to this, and the "help mode L entry count notification effect" may be executed using a light-emitting effect using LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3, or a sound effect using sound output from a speaker. Also, when the "help mode L entry count notification effect" is executed using a light-emitting effect or a sound effect, the LED light-emitting effect or sound output may be used for another purpose depending on other effects or the game situation (such as some kind of error) (the LED light-emitting effect and sound output may be used at the same time), but even in such a case, the priority of the "help mode L entry count notification effect" using a light-emitting effect or a sound effect may be set lower than the other purpose. In this way, even if the time for the "Help Mode L Entry Count Notification Effect" to be executed arrives, the "Help Mode L Entry Count Notification Effect" will not be executed depending on other effects or the game situation (such as some kind of error), and players who are looking forward to the "Help Mode L Entry Count Notification Effect" can progress through the game with a sense of tension by having them pay close attention to the LED lighting and sound output usage during the execution time.

Also, before executing the "help mode L entry count notification performance", a "help mode L entry count notification premonition performance" similar to the above-mentioned help mode L premonition performance (which may be in a form that is distinguishable from the help mode L premonition performance, or in a form that is difficult to distinguish from the help mode L premonition performance) may be executed to indicate that the "help mode L entry count notification performance" is imminent. In this case, the "help mode L entry count notification premonition performance" may notify the number of remaining changes until the help mode L entry count notification performance, or a form according to the number of remaining changes until the help mode L entry count notification performance (a form in which it is difficult to determine the exact number of remaining changes) may be displayed to make it difficult to grasp the exact number of remaining changes. Also, in the "help mode L entry count notification premonition performance", the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and door frame 3 may be made to emit light in a light emission pattern for the help mode L entry count notification premonition performance, or background music for the help mode L entry count notification premonition performance may be output from the speaker. This allows the player to be aware that the Help Mode L entry count notification precursor effect is being executed, and the effect can be enhanced by sound and light.

In the above example, information regarding the number of times the special symbol changes is displayed on an external information device installed on the island equipment of the game hall, but a display (e.g., the performance display device 1600) installed on the pachinko machine 1 may display the game history including information regarding the number of times the special symbol changes, separately from or in addition to the external information device installed on the island equipment of the game hall. In this case, a separate counter may be newly installed on the peripheral control board 1510 side to control the counting and display of information regarding the number of times the special symbol changes, and may be initialized (reset) independently of the count value of the rescue counter when the power is cut off or turned on. This allows the player to be guided to continue playing until the timing is reached to notify the remaining number of times the special symbol changes up to 600 times, when the transition control from the low probability non-time-saving state to the low probability time-saving state B is scheduled, and the decrease in the operating rate can be suppressed. In this case, the game history may be displayed based on the operation of the performance operation unit 301, etc. of the performance operation unit 300 when a specific condition is met, such as the display of the special symbol change not being performed, or the game history may be displayed at all times (except for special conditions such as when an abnormality occurs). Also, the content of the game history displayed on the display provided in the pachinko machine 1 may be switched by operating the performance operation unit 301, etc. of the performance operation unit 300 (for example, from a state in which the number of times the special symbol changes during the day is displayed as information regarding the number of times the special symbol changes, to a state in which the number of times the special symbol changes after the jackpot game state is displayed, etc.).

Next, a case where the timing of transition to the low-probability time-saving state B arrives before the execution timing of the "help mode L entry count notification performance" will be described. FIG. 232(b) is a time chart showing the performance progress when the rescue count counter is set (maintained) to 450 when the power is turned on (i.e., when the number of times the special symbol changes in the low-probability state is 450). In this example, in the low-probability state after power is turned on, if the special symbol change display is executed 150 times after the power is turned on without the occurrence of a jackpot game (rescue count counter = 600, notification-only count counter = 150), transition control from the low-probability non-time-saving state to the low-probability time-saving state B is scheduled at the time when the 150th special symbol change display stops. In other words, when the special symbol change display is executed 150 times after power is turned on, the special symbol change display in the low-probability state reaches 600 times, and transition control from the low-probability non-time-saving state to the low-probability time-saving state B (execution of "help mode L") is performed before the special symbol change display is executed 200 times after power is turned on. In addition, the counting (updating) of the notification-only counter is stopped when the game transitions to low-probability time-saving state B, and thereafter, counting will not be continued even if the special symbol changes and is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 232(b), in the case where the count value of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue count counter) is maintained when the power is turned on, and transition control from the low probability non-time-saving state to the low probability time-saving state B (execution of "Help mode L") is scheduled before the 200th special symbol change display is executed after the power is turned on without the occurrence of a jackpot game, the above-mentioned "Help mode L entry count notification performance" is not executed, and a sudden notification is given that "Help mode L" will be entered when the 600th special symbol change display, when transition control from the low probability non-time-saving state to the low probability time-saving state B is scheduled, is stopped.

In addition, in this example, when the count value of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue counter) is maintained when the power is turned on, and if the transition control from the low probability non-time-saving state to the low probability time-saving state B (execution of "help mode L") is scheduled before the 200th special symbol change display is executed after the power is turned on without the occurrence of a jackpot game, the above-mentioned "help mode L precursor effect", "help mode L entry count notification precursor effect", and "help mode L entry count notification effect" are all not executed. In other words, the player can visually check the information on the number of times the special symbol changes displayed on the external information device installed in the island equipment of the game hall or the display device (e.g., the performance display device 1600) installed on the pachinko machine 1 to grasp the number of times the special symbol changes remaining until the 200th special symbol change display after the power is turned on, but the player is notified of the sudden entry into "help mode L" without any warning, before the 200th special symbol change display after the power is turned on, earlier than the timing expected by the player. Therefore, the transition control from the low-probability non-time-saving state to the low-probability time-saving state B (execution of "Help Mode L") is executed suddenly without going through a jackpot, creating a strong impact, and it can surprise and be unexpected for players who knew that the "Help Mode L Entry Count Notification Presentation" would be executed, and the transition control to a favorable state, i.e., the granting of time saving, can increase interest in the game.

Next, we will explain the case where the timing to transition to the low probability time-saving state C arrives before the execution of the "Help Mode L Entry Count Notification Presentation." Figure 232 (c) is a time chart showing the presentation progression when the rescue count counter is set (maintained) at 350 when the power is turned on (i.e., when the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state is 350). In this example, in the low probability state after power-on, if the special pattern variable display is executed 250 times after power-on without a jackpot game occurring (relief count counter = 600, notification-only count counter = 250), when the 250th special pattern variable display stops, the special pattern variable display in the low probability state will reach 600 times, and transition control from the low probability non-time-saving state to the low probability time-saving state B was planned. However, in the low probability state after power-on, the special pattern variable display is executed 155 times after power-on without a jackpot game occurring (relief count counter = 505, notification-only count counter = 155), so that the "instant short win A" is won in the 155th special pattern variable display, and when the 155th special pattern variable display stops, a notification is issued that "help mode S" will be entered, and transition control is performed from the low probability non-time-saving state to the low probability time-saving state C. In this case, the counting (updating) of the notification-only counter is not stopped when the game transitions to low-probability time-saving state C, and counting continues thereafter due to the variable display of the special symbol until the game transitions to low-probability time-saving state B.

As described above, if the result of the special symbol lottery is an "instant short hit" and the type of instant short hit is determined to be "instant short hit A," the game will be controlled to a low-probability time-saving state C ("help mode S") until the special symbol variable display has been executed 100 times. In other words, in FIG. 232(c), the game is controlled to transition to low-probability time-saving state C when the 155th time the special symbol variable display stops after the power is turned on, so it is planned that the low-probability time-saving state C will end and the game will be controlled to transition to a low-probability non-time-saving state when the 255th time the special symbol variable display stops after the power is turned on.

On the other hand, if the special symbol changes 250 times after the power is turned on, the special symbol changes 600 times in the low probability state, and the condition for transitioning to low probability time-saving state B is met. In other words, the condition for transitioning to low probability time-saving state B is met before the number of times the special symbol changes in low probability time-saving state C reaches 100, in other words, before the condition for terminating low probability time-saving state C is met.

In this example, if the transition condition to the low-probability time-saving state B is satisfied before the end condition of the low-probability time-saving state C is satisfied, that is, when the 600th time of the special symbol change display stops in the low-probability state, the player is notified that the game will enter "help mode L", and the game ends the low-probability time-saving state C ("help mode S") and controls the game to transition to the low-probability time-saving state B ("help mode L"). As described above, the low-probability time-saving state B continues until the special symbol change display reaches 700 times. On the other hand, the low-probability time-saving state C continues until the special symbol change display reaches 20 to 100 times. In other words, the low-probability time-saving state C provides time-saving until the special symbol change display reaches 20 to 100 times, while the low-probability time-saving state B provides time-saving until the special symbol change display reaches 700 times, and the low-probability time-saving state B is considered to be more advantageous to the player than the low-probability time-saving state C. In this way, if the conditions for transitioning to low-probability time-saving state B are met while low-probability time-saving state C is being controlled, low-probability time-saving state B is given priority, thereby providing advantageous time saving to the player.

Also, in this example, before the 200th special symbol change display is executed after the power is turned on, the low-probability non-time-saving state is controlled to transition to the low-probability time-saving state C ("help mode S"), and the 200th special symbol change display is reached when the above-mentioned "help mode L entry count notification effect" is scheduled to be executed during control of the low-probability time-saving state C. However, since the low-probability time-saving state C, which is advantageous for the player, is already in place, in this example the "help mode L entry count notification effect" is not executed, and the player's attention is focused on the low-probability time-saving state C (the player is made to forget the existence of the low-probability time-saving state B). Similarly, when controlled to the low-probability time-saving state C, the above-mentioned "help mode L precursor effect" and "help mode L entry count notification effect" are not executed. This allows the player to focus their attention on the low-probability time-saving state C, and if the game is controlled to low-probability time-saving state B consecutively from low-probability time-saving state C, the player will be surprised and their interest in the game will be increased.

As described above, the "Help Mode L Entry Count Notification Effect" is executed when the special pattern changes and is displayed 200 times after the power is turned on. However, there are a certain number of players who do not require the "Help Mode L Entry Count Notification Effect" and want to maintain a sense of anticipation and tension at all times regarding the start timing of the low probability time-saving state B. Therefore, for such players, a "Help Mode L Concealed Effect" may be added that allows the player to make part or all of the Help Mode L Entry Count Notification Effect displayed on the effect display device 1600 difficult or impossible to recognize at their discretion.

Specifically, as a "help mode L concealment effect," when a predetermined operation means provided in the pachinko machine 1, such as the effect operation section 301 of the effect operation unit 300, is operated, a concealment image (for example, a special still image in which the public notice is obscured by being filled in white) different from the display of the remaining number of changes until the help mode L is started, which is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in the "help mode entry count notification effect," may be displayed in an upper layer, so that at least a part of the display of the remaining number of changes until the help mode L is started is concealed and made visible to the player. This makes it possible to meet the needs of players who do not require the "help mode L entry count notification effect," and to prevent a decline in interest in the game. In addition, after a confidential image is displayed on the performance display device 1600 by operating a predetermined operation means provided in the pachinko machine 1, such as the performance operation section 301 of the performance operation unit 300, the state of the confidential image may be changed by further operating a predetermined operation means provided in the pachinko machine 1, such as the performance operation section 301 of the performance operation unit 300. For example, a confidential image may be displayed in a first display state displayed across a first display area on the performance display device 1600 by operating a predetermined operation means provided in the pachinko machine 1, such as the performance operation section 301 of the performance operation unit 300, and while the confidential image is displayed, a predetermined operation means provided in the pachinko machine 1, such as the performance operation section 301 of the performance operation unit 300, is again operated to display the confidential image in a second display state displayed across a second display range wider than the first display area, or the confidential image may be displayed in a third display state displayed across a third display range narrower than the first display area. By configuring it in this manner, the player can determine the extent to which the display of the remaining number of changes until the help mode L displayed on the performance display device 1600 is to be concealed, making it possible to obscure only the information that the player does not want to know, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game. In addition, when a confidential image is displayed on the performance display device 1600 by operating a predetermined operation means provided on the pachinko machine 1, such as the performance operation section 301 of the performance operation unit 300, or when a confidential image is displayed in the second display mode or the third display mode by operating a predetermined operation means provided on the pachinko machine 1, such as the performance operation section 301 of the performance operation unit 300, again while the confidential image is being displayed, if the predetermined operation means provided on the pachinko machine 1, such as the performance operation section 301 of the performance operation unit 300, is not operated for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 30 seconds) or if a specific operation is performed on the predetermined operation means provided on the pachinko machine 1, such as the performance operation section 301 of the performance operation unit 300, the display of the confidential image on the performance display device 1600 may be terminated when the varying display of the special patterns is stopped (which may be when the varying display of the special patterns is stopped, or may be immediately before the varying display of the special patterns is stopped (e.g., 1 second before)). This prevents the results of the changing display of the decorative patterns displayed on the performance display device 1600 from becoming difficult to see.

In addition, a mode for meeting the needs of players who do not require the "Help Mode L Entry Number Notification Effect" is not limited to the addition of the above-mentioned "Help Mode L Hidden Effect", but may be as follows. For example, it may be possible to select whether or not to execute the "Help Mode L Entry Number Notification Effect" by operating a predetermined operation means provided on the pachinko machine 1, such as the effect operation section 301 of the effect operation unit 300, while the decorative pattern (special pattern) is not being displayed in a variable manner. In this case, too, it is possible to meet the needs of players who do not require the "Help Mode L Entry Number Notification Effect", and to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, in the above, a case was described in which the low-probability time-saving state B has not yet been entered when the 200th special symbol change display is executed after the power is turned on without a jackpot game occurring. In addition, in cases in which the low-probability time-saving state B has already ended when the 200th special symbol change display is executed after the power is turned on without a jackpot game occurring and there is no subsequent transition control to the low-probability time-saving state B, the following may be done.

In other words, when the count value of the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state when the power is turned on (rescue count counter) is maintained, and when the 200th special pattern change display is executed after the power is turned on without the occurrence of a jackpot game, if the low probability time-saving state B has already ended (for example, the notification-only count counter = 200, but the rescue count counter has exceeded 600 times and the low probability time-saving state B has ended and returned to the low probability non-time-saving state), all of the above-mentioned "Help mode L precursor effect", "Help mode L entry count notification precursor effect", and "Help mode L entry count notification effect" are not executed. In other words, the player visually checks information regarding the number of times the special symbol will change, displayed on an external information device installed in the island equipment of the gaming hall or on a display (e.g., the performance display device 1600) installed on the pachinko machine 1, to grasp the number of times the special symbol will change remaining until the 200th time the special symbol change display is executed after the power is turned on. However, if the low probability time-saving state B has already ended when the 200th time the special symbol change display is executed after the power is turned on, the above-mentioned "Help mode L precursor display," "Help mode L entry count notification precursor display," and "Help mode L entry count notification display" would give the player false expectations, so they are restricted from being executed to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable or uneasy due to false effects. In the above example, the counting (updating) of the notification-only count counter is stopped when the low probability time-saving state B is entered, and thereafter, even if the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, counting (updating) of the notification-only count counter may be performed in order to restrict the execution of the above-mentioned "help mode L precursor effect", "help mode L entry count notification effect", and "help mode L entry count notification effect" when the low probability time-saving state B has already ended when the power is turned on (so that the pachinko machine 1 can recognize that the 200th special symbol display has been reached in a state where the low probability time-saving state B has already ended after the power is turned on). Also, instead of the notification-only count counter, a separate count may be provided so that the pachinko machine 1 can recognize that the 200th special symbol display has been reached in a state where the low probability time-saving state B has already ended after the power is turned on.

In addition, in such a case, instead of executing all of the above-mentioned "help mode L precursor effect", "help mode L entry count notification precursor effect", and "help mode L entry count notification effect", a "help mode L completed effect" may be performed when the 200th special symbol change display is performed after the power is turned on, or at a predetermined time before the 200th special symbol change display is performed after the power is turned on (for example, multiple timings when the notification dedicated count counter = 50, 100, 150, or the entire period after the notification dedicated count counter = 150, etc.), which indicates that the low probability time-saving state B has already ended. An example of the "help mode L completed effect" is to display "help mode L has already ended" on the effect display device 1600, which notifies the player that help mode L has been completed and allows the player to recognize the current game situation, thereby avoiding excessive expectations.

In addition, in the above, an example was described in which the "help mode L entry count notification effect" is not executed, but in the case where the count value of the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state when the power is turned on (rescue count counter) is maintained, and the 200th special pattern change display is executed after the power is turned on without a jackpot game occurring, if the low probability time-saving state B has already ended when the 200th change display of the special pattern is executed after the power is turned on (for example, the notification-only count counter = 200, but the rescue count counter has exceeded 600 times and the low probability time-saving state B has ended and returned to the low probability non-time-saving state), the "help mode L entry count notification effect" may also be executed, while a mode corresponding to the fact that the low probability time-saving state B has already ended may be set as the mode of the "help mode L entry count notification effect", and the "help mode L entry count notification effect" may be executed. In this case, normally, the "Help mode L entry count notification effect" would be set to display a message such as "XX times remaining until Help mode L" to clearly indicate the start time of the low-probability time-saving state B, but if the low-probability time-saving state B has already ended, it would be sufficient to display a message such as "Help mode L has already ended" as in the "Help mode L completed effect" described above. Even in such a case, it is possible to avoid raising excessive expectations by notifying the player that help mode L has been completed and letting the player recognize the current game situation.

[Modification of variable winning opening opening mode]
Next, a modified example of the opening and closing mode of the variable winning port 2003 that allows the reception of game balls according to the lottery result of the normal pattern will be described. In the above example, the same time-saving performance is set as the low probability time-saving state C that controls the instant short win A, the instant short win B, and the instant short win C, but the time-saving performance may be different for the instant short win A, the instant short win B, and the instant short win C. Note that the "time-saving performance" here refers mainly to the performance related to the winning frequency to the variable winning port 2003, and can mainly be exemplified by the opening and closing pattern of the variable winning port 2003. Below, the difference in the time-saving performance related to the winning frequency to the variable winning port 2003 will be described.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when an immediate short hit A occurs, the game is not controlled to a big hit game or a small hit game, but is controlled to a low-probability time-saving state C1 in which the time-saving state ends if a big hit does not occur within 100 times of the variable display of the special pattern (first special pattern, second special pattern), and when an immediate short hit B occurs, the game is not controlled to a big hit game or a small hit game, but is controlled to a low-probability time-saving state C2 in which the time-saving state ends if a big hit does not occur within 40 times of the variable display of the special pattern (first special pattern, second special pattern), and when an immediate short hit C occurs, the game is not controlled to a big hit game or a small hit game, but is controlled to a low-probability time-saving state C3 in which the time-saving state ends if a big hit does not occur within 20 times of the variable display of the special pattern (first special pattern, second special pattern).

In addition, when the detection signal from the gate sensor 2601 is input to the input terminal of the input port from the input information read from the input information storage area in the normal winning port winning process, that is, when the game ball passes through the gate 2002, the counter value that updates the normal pattern random number used to determine the winning normal pattern (the lighting state of the two LEDs) that is derived and displayed on the normal pattern display of the function display unit 1400 is extracted and stored in the normal winning port winning port winning information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as the normal winning port winning information. Then, when the lottery result of the normal pattern is "normal win", it is determined to be either the winning normal pattern A, the winning normal pattern B, or the winning normal pattern C based on the normal pattern random number. In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the lottery result of the normal pattern is "normal win", the type of normal win (the type of winning normal pattern) is determined.

As shown in FIG. 233(a), in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the lottery result of the normal pattern is a "normal win", if the game state is a low probability non-time-saving state or a high probability non-time-saving state, in other words, if the time-saving state control is not being executed, the variable winning port door 2521 of the variable winning port 2003 is controlled to open and close in opening and closing pattern 1 (opening and closing P1) regardless of the type of normal win (type of winning normal pattern), and when the lottery result of the normal pattern is a "normal win", the game state is a high probability time-saving state or a low probability non-time-saving state. When it is in either the high probability time-saving state A or the low probability time-saving state B, that is, when the time-saving state control is being executed in response to a jackpot (high probability time-saving state, low probability time-saving state A) or when the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state has reached 600 (low probability time-saving state B), the variable winning port door 2521 of the variable winning port 2003 is controlled to open and close in opening and closing pattern 2 (opening and closing P2) regardless of the type of normal win (type of winning normal symbol).

In addition, when the result of the lottery for the normal pattern is a "normal win" and the game state is in the low probability time-saving state C1, in other words, when the result of the lottery for the special pattern is an "instant short win" and the time-saving state is controlled based on the determination of the type of the instant short win as "instant short win A", the variable winning port door 2521 of the variable winning port 2003 is controlled to open and close with opening and closing pattern 3 (opening and closing P2) regardless of the type of normal win (type of winning normal pattern). On the other hand, when the lottery result of the normal symbol is "normal hit", and the game state is in the low probability time-saving state C2, that is, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "instant short hit" and the type of the instant short hit is "instant short hit B", the time-saving state control is executed based on the fact that the lottery result of the normal symbol is "normal hit A", the variable winning hole door 2521 of the variable winning hole 2003 is controlled to open and close in the opening and closing pattern 2 (opening and closing P2), and when the lottery result of the normal symbol is "normal hit B" or "normal hit C", the variable winning hole door 2521 of the variable winning hole 2003 is controlled to open and close in the opening and closing pattern 3 (opening and closing P3). If the game state is in the low probability time-saving state C3 when the lottery result for the normal symbol is a "normal hit", that is, if the lottery result for the special symbol is an "instant short hit" and the type of the instant short hit is "instant short hit C", the time-saving state is being controlled based on this. If the lottery result for the normal symbol is a "normal hit A" or a "normal hit B", the variable winning hole door 2521 of the variable winning hole 2003 is controlled to open and close in opening and closing pattern 2 (opening and closing P2), and if the lottery result for the normal symbol is a "normal hit C", the variable winning hole door 2521 of the variable winning hole 2003 is controlled to open and close in opening and closing pattern 3 (opening and closing P3).

That is, in the low probability non-time-saving state and the high probability non-time-saving state (when the time-saving state control is not being executed), the variable winning port door 2521 of the variable winning port 2003 is controlled to open and close in the same opening and closing pattern (opening and closing pattern 1) regardless of the type of normal win and whether the state is low or high probability, and in the high probability time-saving state, the variable winning port door 2521 of the variable winning port 2003 is controlled to open and close in the same opening and closing pattern (opening and closing pattern 2) regardless of the type of normal win, whether the state is low or high probability, and further regardless of the type of time-saving state. On the other hand, in the low probability time-saving state C1, the low probability time-saving state C2, and the low probability time-saving state C3, the proportions of the opening and closing patterns that control the opening and closing of the variable winning port door 2521 of the variable winning port 2003 are different depending on the type of normal win and the type of time-saving state.

Also, as shown in FIG. 233(b), in opening/closing pattern 1 (opening/closing P1), the variable winning opening door 2521 operates once to open the variable winning opening 2003 for 0.5 seconds, in opening/closing pattern 2 (opening/closing P2), the variable winning opening door 2521 operates twice to open the variable winning opening 2003 for 1 second, and in opening/closing pattern 3 (opening/closing P3), the variable winning opening door 2521 operates twice to open the variable winning opening 2003 for 1.5 seconds. Also, among opening/closing patterns 1 to 3, opening/closing pattern 1 is the most disadvantageous opening/closing mode to the player, and it is more difficult to get a game ball into the variable winning opening 2003 than opening/closing patterns 2 and 3. Opening/closing pattern 2 is an opening/closing mode that is more advantageous to the player than opening/closing pattern 1, but is less advantageous to the player than opening/closing pattern 3, and although it is more difficult to get game balls to enter the variable winning opening 2003 than opening/closing pattern 3 (or fewer balls enter the variable winning opening 2003 than opening/closing pattern 3), it is easier to get game balls to enter the variable winning opening 2003 than opening/closing pattern 1. Opening/closing pattern 3 is the most advantageous opening/closing mode to the player among opening/closing patterns 1 to 3, and it is easier to get game balls to enter the variable winning opening 2003 than opening/closing patterns 1 and 2.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the time-saving performance (game control mode during the time-saving state including at least the opening and closing pattern of the variable winning port 2003) related to the frequency of winning into the variable winning port 2003 can be made different depending on the type of the time-saving state. Also, the high probability time-saving state, low probability time-saving state A, low probability time-saving state B, low probability time-saving state C1, low probability time-saving state C2, and low probability time-saving state C3 in which the control of the time-saving state is executed are configured to control the opening and closing of the variable winning port door 2521 of the variable winning port 2003 in an opening and closing pattern that is advantageous to the player when the lottery result for the normal pattern is a "normal hit" compared to the low probability non-time-saving state and high probability non-time-saving state in which the control of the time-saving state is not executed. In addition, the high probability time-saving state, the low probability time-saving state A, the low probability time-saving state B, the low probability time-saving state C1, the low probability time-saving state C2, and the low probability time-saving state C3 are all states in which control of the time-saving state is executed, but the low probability time-saving state C1, the low probability time-saving state C2, and the low probability time-saving state C3, which are controlled when an immediate short win occurs, are configured to have a higher probability of controlling the opening and closing of the variable winning port door 2521 of the variable winning port 2003 in an opening and closing pattern advantageous to the player when the lottery result for the normal pattern is a "normal win" compared to the high probability time-saving state, the low probability time-saving state A, and the low probability time-saving state B (configured to have a higher probability of executing opening and closing pattern 3). In other words, the low probability time-saving state C1, the low probability time-saving state C2, and the low probability time-saving state C3, which are controlled when an immediate short win occurs, are configured to have higher time-saving performance related to the frequency of winning into the variable winning port 2003 than the high probability time-saving state, the low probability time-saving state A, and the low probability time-saving state B.

In addition, all of the low-probability time-saving states C1 to C3 are controlled when an immediate short hit occurs, but the low-probability time-saving state C1 controlled when an immediate short hit A occurs is configured to have a higher probability of controlling the opening and closing of the variable winning port door 2521 of the variable winning port 2003 in the opening and closing pattern 3 that is most advantageous to the player when the lottery result for the normal pattern is a "normal hit" compared to the low-probability time-saving state C2 controlled when an immediate short hit B occurs and the low-probability time-saving state C3 controlled when an immediate short hit C occurs, and the low-probability time-saving state C2 controlled when an immediate short hit B occurs is configured to have a higher probability of controlling the opening and closing of the variable winning port door 2521 of the variable winning port 2003 in the opening and closing pattern 3 that is most advantageous to the player when the lottery result for the normal pattern is a "normal hit" compared to the low-probability time-saving state C1 controlled when an immediate short hit A occurs. The variable winning port door 2521 of the variable winning port 2003 is configured to have a lower probability of being opened and closed in the opening and closing pattern 3 that is most advantageous to the player when the lottery result for the normal pattern is a "normal win" compared to the low-probability time-saving state C3 controlled when the instant short win C occurs, but is configured to have a higher probability of being opened and closed in the opening and closing pattern 3 that is most advantageous to the player when the lottery result for the normal pattern is a "normal win" compared to the low-probability time-saving state C1 controlled when the instant short win A occurs and the low-probability time-saving state C2 controlled when the instant short win B occurs.

In this way, the low probability time-saving states C1 to C3 are configured to have higher time-saving performance related to the frequency of winning at the variable winning port 2003 compared to the high probability time-saving state, the low probability time-saving state A, and the low probability time-saving state B. Specifically, the time-saving performance related to the frequency of winning into the variable winning port 2003 is set to have a relationship of "low probability time-saving state C1 (instant short win A) > low probability time-saving state C2 (instant short win B) > low probability time-saving state C3 (instant short win C)" among the low probability time-saving states C1 to C3, and more specifically, it is configured so that when an instant short win A occurs, the time-saving performance is always set to high, and when an instant short win B occurs, the probability of the time-saving performance being set to higher than when an instant short win A occurs is low but the probability of the time-saving performance being set to higher than when an instant short win C occurs is high, and when an instant short win C occurs, the probability of the time-saving performance being set to higher than when an instant short win B occurs is low but the probability of the time-saving performance being set to higher than the high probability time-saving state, the low probability time-saving state A, and the low probability time-saving state B is high. In this way, in this example of pachinko machine 1, the opening/closing pattern determination rate, in other words the rate at which high time-saving performance is set, differs depending on the type of low-probability time-saving state that is controlled when an instantaneous short win occurs, making it possible to vary the player's advantage depending on the type of instantaneous short win.

As shown in FIG. 233(a), in this example, when the lottery result for the normal symbols is "normal hit", there is a 100/200 chance of determining the winning normal symbol A, a 50/200 chance of determining the winning normal symbol B, and a 50/200 chance of determining the winning normal symbol C. By configuring it in this way, in the low probability time-saving state C1, the rate at which opening and closing pattern 3 is determined is 100%, in the low probability time-saving state C2, the rate at which opening and closing pattern 3 is determined is 50% and the rate at which opening and closing pattern 2 is determined is 50%, and in the low probability time-saving state C3, the rate at which opening and closing pattern 3 is determined is 25% and the rate at which opening and closing pattern 2 is determined is 75%, so that the balls held are less likely to be reduced in the order of low probability time-saving state C1 > low probability time-saving state C2 > low probability time-saving state C3, and the degree of advantage of each of the low probability time-saving states C1 to C3 can be changed in stages.

In this way, by making the period of the low probability time-saving state C and the time-saving performance related to the frequency of winning into the variable winning port 2003 different depending on the type of immediate short win, the playability using the immediate short win can be further diversified and the interest can be increased. Note that the pattern determination table for a normal win shown in FIG. 233(a) is an example, and the selection ratio of the opening and closing pattern and the opening and closing pattern are not limited to the ratio shown in the pattern determination table for a normal win. For example, it may be configured so that opening and closing pattern 2 is determined even when a normal win occurs in the low probability time-saving state C1, and in this case, the ratio of opening and closing pattern 3 determined in the low probability time-saving state C1 may be set to be higher than the ratio of opening and closing pattern 3 determined in the low probability time-saving states C2 and C3. In addition, the relationship between the number of times that the special symbols can be changed before the low probability time-saving state C1, C2, C3 is ended and the time-saving performance is not limited to the above. For example, when the proportion of times that the high time-saving performance is set is high, the number of times that the special symbols can be changed before the low probability time-saving state C is ended may be reduced (for example, when the instantaneous short hit A is obtained, the transition to the low probability time-saving state C3 is controlled), and when the proportion of times that the high time-saving performance is set is low, the number of times that the special symbols can be changed before the low probability time-saving state C is ended may be increased (for example, when the instantaneous short hit C is obtained, the transition to the low probability time-saving state C1 is controlled). In this case, even if the number of times that the special symbols can be changed before the low probability time-saving state C is ended is low, the proportion of times that the high time-saving performance is set can be increased, and the player's advantage can be increased and the interest in the game can be improved. On the other hand, when the number of times that the special symbols can be changed before the low probability time-saving state C is ended is high, the proportion of times that the special symbols can be changed before the low probability time-saving state C is ended is low, but the game can be controlled to the low probability time-saving state for a longer period of time, so that the interest in the game can be prevented from decreasing.

In addition, when the low-probability time-saving state C1, C2, or C3 is controlled, if the special pattern lottery result becomes "instant short hit" and the type of the instant short hit is determined to be "instant short hit A", "instant short hit B", or "instant short hit C" before the variable display of the special pattern reaches a predetermined number of times (in this example, 20 times, 40 times, or 100 times), the controlled low-probability time-saving state C1, C2, or C3 may be terminated and the low-probability time-saving state C1, C2, or C3 may be controlled to transition to the low-probability time-saving state C1, C2, or C3 according to the type of "instant short hit" according to the lottery result and determination result of the special pattern, or the controlled low-probability time-saving state C1, C2, or C3 may be continued without being terminated. By continuing the controlled low-probability time-saving state C1, C2, or C3 without being terminated, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to switching to a low-probability time-saving state with a high probability of executing a time-saving performance that is disadvantageous to the player (details will be explained later). Regarding this point, for example, when the low-probability time-saving state C1, C2, or C3 is controlled, before the variable display of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (in this example, 20 times, 40 times, or 100 times), if the lottery result of the special symbol becomes an "instant short hit" and the type of the instant short hit is determined to be one of "instant short hit A", "instant short hit B", and "instant short hit C", if this determination result corresponds to a low-probability time-saving state C (C1, C2, C3) that has a higher time-saving performance than the low-probability time-saving state C (C1, C2, C3) being controlled (low-probability time-saving state C3 → low-probability In the case of the low-probability time-saving state C2, the low-probability time-saving state C3 → low-probability time-saving state C1, the low-probability time-saving state C2 → low-probability time-saving state C1, etc.), a change to the low-probability time-saving state C having a high time-saving performance is permitted, and if the determination result corresponds to a low-probability time-saving state C (C1, C2, C3) having a lower time-saving performance than the low-probability time-saving state C (C1, C2, C3) being controlled (low-probability time-saving state C1 → low-probability time-saving state C3, low-probability time-saving state C1 → low-probability time-saving state C2, low-probability time-saving state C2 → low-probability time-saving state C3, etc.), a change to the low-probability time-saving state C having a low time-saving performance may be restricted. By doing so, if the low-probability time-saving state C3 or the low-probability time-saving state C2 is being controlled, the player can enjoy whether or not it is possible to switch to the low-probability time-saving state C1, which has a high probability of executing the time-saving performance advantageous to the player.

As mentioned above, the pachinko machine 1 of this example is not only controlled to a low-probability time-saving state after a jackpot game as in the conventional case, but also has a special game progress control in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed as an immediate short win symbol, without executing a jackpot game, and the game immediately transitions to a low-probability time-saving state corresponding to the immediate short win symbol (a low-probability time-saving state with different time-saving performance for each immediate short win symbol). When such a special game progress control is used, the following problems may occur.

Conventionally, there is known a configuration in which a first special symbol (a symbol that mainly changes in the non-time-saving state) corresponding to a ball entering a fixed starting hole and a second special symbol (a symbol that mainly changes in the non-time-saving state) corresponding to a ball entering a variable starting hole are provided, and the second special symbol (a symbol that mainly changes in the non-time-saving state) is configured to give a greater gaming profit to the player than the first special symbol. In such a configuration, in order to prevent fraudulent play and to prevent game behavior that is not intended by the designer, it is common to perform control related to the normal symbols so as to suppress the ball entering the variable starting hole in the non-time-saving state. As an example of control related to the normal symbols, the normal fluctuation time (the time from when the variable display of the normal symbols starts to when it ends (the time when the lottery result of the normal symbols is derived)) determined based on the result of the normal lottery described above is set to be longer (for example, 120 seconds) in the non-time-saving state than in the time-saving state, thereby reducing the frequency of lottery of the normal symbols in the non-time-saving state and suppressing the ball entering the variable starting hole in the non-time-saving state. It is known that the normal fluctuation time in non-time-saving mode is kept long regardless of whether the result of the normal lottery (the result of the lottery for the normal pattern) is a win or a miss.

In this regard, in the case of a special game progress control as in this example (in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed as an immediate short-win symbol without executing a jackpot game, and the game is immediately controlled to the low-probability time-saving state C), if the normal variable time is set to be longer in the non-time-saving state than in the time-saving state using the same control as in the previous paragraph, it is possible to suppress the ball entering the variable starting hole in the non-time-saving state, but there is a risk that it will hinder smooth game progress in the time-saving state when the immediate short-win symbol is stopped and displayed. To explain this point in relation to this example, for example, during the variable display of the normal symbol that started in the low-probability non-time-saving state of this example, if the variable display of the special symbol is stopped and displayed as an immediate short-win symbol and controlled to the low-probability time-saving state C, the variable display of the normal symbol that started in the low-probability non-time-saving state may continue during the low-probability time-saving state C across the period of the special symbol stopped and displayed by the immediate short-win symbol. In this case, during the normal pattern variable display based on the long-term normal variable time set in the low-probability non-time-saving state, the game state will shift from a relatively unfavorable game state (low-probability non-time-saving state) to a relatively favorable game state (low-probability time-saving state C), but since the normal variable time is a long-term time set in the low-probability non-time-saving state, the variable start port (the variable winning port 2003 having the variable winning port door 2521) will not be opened quickly even after the game has shifted to the low-probability time-saving state C until the long-term normal variable time ends. In the unlikely event that the low-probability time-saving state C ends early with the variable display of the first special pattern before the long-term normal variable time has elapsed (for example, if the variable display of the first special pattern based on the variable time shortened in the relatively short-term low-probability time-saving state C3 has met the 20-time end condition), there is a risk that the game will return to the low-probability non-time-saving state without the variable winning port door 2521 of the variable winning port 2003 being operated even though the game has shifted to the low-probability time-saving state C. In such a case, not only will the player not be able to experience the excitement of the suddenly starting low-probability time-saving state C, or the time-saving performance corresponding to the low-probability time-saving states C1, C2, and C3, but the player will become frustrated, which may hinder smooth gameplay in the low-probability time-saving state C and lead to a decline in interest in the game.

In this regard, the present example has the following unique feature, which prevents the smooth progress of the game in the low-probability time-saving state C from being impeded and prevents a decline in interest in the game. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the following special time is set as the normal fluctuation time from when the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner until it stops. That is, although the normal fluctuation time set in the pachinko machine 1 of this example in the low-probability non-time-saving state has multiple times, in each of them, a time limited to be shorter than the "minimum time until the variable display of the special symbol in the low-probability time-saving state C1, C2, C3 reaches a predetermined number of times (100 times, 40 times, or 20 times in this example) and ends (in this example, the shortest time required for the low-probability time-saving state C3 is 20 seconds)" is set (in this example, the maximum normal fluctuation time set in the low-probability non-time-saving state is 19 seconds). In addition, the normal variation time, which is limited to be shorter than the "shortest time until the variable display of the special symbol in the low-probability time-saving state C1, C2, C3 reaches a predetermined number of times (in this example, either 100 times, 40 times, or 20 times) and ends," is selectable in all game states, not just in the low-probability non-time-saving state.

This ensures that even if the special symbol stops during the normal symbol variable display based on the normal variable time set in the low probability non-time-saving state and transitions to any of the low probability time-saving states C1, C2, and C3 due to the immediate short win symbol stopping, the low probability time-saving state C1, C2, and C3 will end before the normal symbol variable display ends. In addition, the variable winning gate 2521 is reliably controlled to open and close at least once with the time-saving performance corresponding to the low probability time-saving state C1, C2, and C3 described above, preventing the smooth progress of the game in the low probability time-saving state C from being hindered and suppressing a decline in interest in the game. In addition, this normal variable time is particularly effective when controlling to a "low probability time-saving state CX in which the variable display of the special symbol ends after a few times (for example, fewer times than the number of reserved special symbols)" other than the low probability time-saving states C1, C2, and C3 based on an immediate short hit, and even in such a case, the variable winning gate 2521 can be reliably controlled to open and close, preventing a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, in this example, the following control is added to ensure that smooth game progress is not impeded in the low probability time-saving state C. That is, in this example, if the game state is controlled to transition before the variable display of the normal pattern stops after the variable display of the normal pattern has started on the normal pattern display device of the function display unit 1400, the game state at the time the normal pattern stops as shown in FIG. 233(A) is determined, and the variable winning port door 2521 of the variable winning port 2003 is controlled to open and close with the opening and closing pattern set in the pattern determination table corresponding to that game state.

For example, as shown in FIG. 234(A), when the display of the normal pattern change is started during the control of the low-probability time-saving state C3 and the normal pattern display of the function display unit 1400 is driven to display "Winning normal pattern A" during the control of the low-probability time-saving state C3, the variable winning port door 2521 of the variable winning port 2003 is controlled to open and close with the opening and closing pattern 2 by referring to the pattern determination table corresponding to the low-probability time-saving state C3 in FIG. 234(A), while the display of the normal pattern change during the control of the low-probability time-saving state C3 is controlled to display "Winning normal pattern A" on the normal pattern display of the function display unit 1400. If the display has started but the "winning normal pattern A" is not derived to the normal pattern display of the function display unit 1400 during control of the low probability time-saving state C3, and the "winning normal pattern A" is derived to the normal pattern display of the function display unit 1400 after control transitions to the low probability time-saving state C1, the variable winning port door 2521 of the variable winning port 2003 is controlled to open and close in opening and closing pattern 3 by referring to the pattern determination table corresponding to the low probability time-saving state C1 in FIG. 234 (A).

Also, as shown in FIG. 234(B), when the variable display of the normal pattern is started during the control of the low-probability time-saving state C1 and the "winning normal pattern B" is derived on the normal pattern display of the function display unit 1400 during the control of the low-probability time-saving state C1, the variable winning port door 2521 of the variable winning port 2003 is controlled to open and close with the opening and closing pattern 3 by referring to the pattern determination table corresponding to the low-probability time-saving state C1 in FIG. 234(A), while the variable display of the normal pattern is controlled during the control of the low-probability time-saving state C1, If the dynamic display has started but the "winning normal pattern B" is not derived to the normal pattern display of the function display unit 1400 during control of the low probability time-saving state C1, and the "winning normal pattern B" is derived to the normal pattern display of the function display unit 1400 after control to transition to the low probability time-saving state B, the variable winning port door 2521 of the variable winning port 2003 is controlled to open and close in opening and closing pattern 2 by referring to the pattern determination table corresponding to the low probability time-saving state B in FIG. 234 (A).

234(C), if the variable display of normal symbols is started during control of the low-probability time-saving state C2 and a "winning normal symbol C" is derived on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 during control of the low-probability time-saving state C2, the variable winning hole door 2521 of the variable winning hole 2003 is controlled to open and close in opening and closing pattern 3 by referring to the symbol determination table corresponding to the low-probability time-saving state C2 of FIG. 234(A). On the other hand, if the variable display of normal symbols is started during control of the low-probability time-saving state C2 but a "winning normal symbol C" is not derived on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 during control of the low-probability time-saving state C2 and a "winning normal symbol C" is derived on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 during control of the jackpot game state, the variable winning hole door 2521 of the variable winning hole 2003 is controlled to open and close in opening and closing pattern 1 by referring to the symbol determination table corresponding to the low-probability non-time-saving state of FIG. In this example, the jackpot game state is a state in which a large number of game balls (prize balls) can be won by having game balls enter the first large winning opening 2006 or the second large winning opening 2007, and since the variable winning opening door 2521 of the variable winning opening 2003 is controlled to open and close without providing any advantage to the player, the variable winning opening door 2521 of the variable winning opening 2003 is controlled to open and close in the opening and closing pattern 1 which is the most disadvantageous to the player. Note that during the jackpot game state, it may be controlled to a low probability non-time-saving state, in which case the actual game state and the opening and closing control mode of the variable winning opening door 2521 of the variable winning opening 2003 can be matched.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the variable winning port door 2521 of the variable winning port 2003 is controlled to open and close with an opening and closing pattern corresponding to the game state when the normal pattern stops, not the game state when the normal pattern starts to change. As a result, as described above, even if the normal pattern changes to any of the low probability time-saving states C1, C2, and C3 during the normal pattern change display after the normal pattern change display starts based on the normal change time set in the low probability non-time-saving state, the low probability time-saving state C1, C2, and C3 are terminated before the normal pattern change display ends. In addition, the variable winning port door 2521 is reliably controlled to open and close at least once with the time-saving performance corresponding to the low probability time-saving state C1, C2, and C3, preventing the smooth progress of the game in the low probability time-saving state C from being hindered, and suppressing a decline in interest in the game. In addition, the game status can be matched with the opening and closing control mode of the variable winning opening door 2521 of the variable winning opening 2003, so that the player does not feel distrustful.

In addition, the normal pattern change results may also be displayed on the performance display device 1600. In this case, only information regarding winning or losing (for example, ○ × ) may be displayed in the normal change area at the edge of the screen of the performance display device 1600, and the type of normal win (type of winning normal pattern) may not be displayed. Specifically, when the normal pattern display device of the function display unit 1400 starts to display the normal pattern, a variable display is started in which "o" and "x" are alternately displayed in the normal variable area of the performance display device 1600, and when the normal pattern display device stops displaying the normal pattern, if the result of the lottery for the normal pattern is a "normal win", the normal variable area of the performance display device 1600 stops with "o" displayed, and if the result of the lottery for the normal pattern is a "miss", the normal variable area of the performance display device 1600 stops with "x" displayed. If the lottery result for the normal pattern is a "normal win", the type of normal win (type of winning normal pattern) may be made difficult to distinguish by displaying "o" in the normal variable area of the performance display device 1600 regardless of the type of normal win (type of winning normal pattern). This makes it difficult to determine the type of normal win (the type of winning normal pattern) from the stopping mode of the normal pattern displayed on the performance display device 1600, which is what the player pays most attention to, and when a normal win occurs, the player can focus on the type of normal win, that is, the opening and closing control mode of the variable winning port door 2521 of the variable winning port 2003, and it prevents the control of the main control board 1310 and peripheral control board 1510 of the pachinko machine 1 from becoming complicated, improving reliability and preventing the occurrence of errors.

Although not shown in the figure, in this example, for example, during control of the low-probability time-saving state C1, the lottery result for the normal symbol becomes "normal hit", and the variable display of the normal symbol is started in response to the lottery result, but during control of the low-probability time-saving state C1, the low-probability time-saving state C1 ends without deriving "win normal symbol A" or "win normal symbol B" on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400, and the variable display of the normal symbol may continue even during control of the low-probability non-time-saving state. In that case, depending on the variable display result of the special symbol during control of the low-probability non-time-saving state, it is also possible to further transition from the low-probability non-time-saving state to the low-probability time-saving state C2 or C3, or to a new low-probability time-saving state C1. In such a case, if an extremely long time (such as 10 minutes) is set as the normal variable time, the variable display of the normal pattern that started during control of the low probability time-saving state C1 will continue through the low probability time-saving state C1 and the low probability non-time-saving state to the low probability time-saving state C2 or C3, or even during control to the new low probability time-saving state C1. If the variable winning gate 2521 of the variable winning gate 2003 is controlled to open and close in an opening and closing pattern that corresponds to the game state when the normal pattern stops, it becomes difficult to design a game that takes into account the opening and closing timing of the variable winning gate 2521, and there is a risk that gameplay that properly reflects the designer's intentions will not be realized.

Therefore, in this example, for example, if the result of the lottery for the normal pattern during control of the low-probability time-saving state C1 is a "normal win", and the display of the normal pattern variations is started in response to that lottery result, but the low-probability time-saving state C1 ends during control of the low-probability time-saving state C1 without deriving "win normal pattern A" or "win normal pattern B" on the normal pattern display of the function display unit 1400, and the display of the normal pattern variations continues even during control of the low-probability non-time-saving state, then the display of the normal pattern variations is restricted so that it does not continue across any further changes in the game state thereafter. Specifically, when the variable display of the normal symbol started during the control of the low probability time-saving state C1 continues during the control of the low probability non-time-saving state, the normal variable time started during the control of the low probability time-saving state C1 is set to a specific normal variable time less than a specific time (e.g., less than 5 seconds), and the special variable time when the lottery result of the first special symbol after the control of the low probability non-time-saving state is an immediate short win is set to a special variable time for limiting a time longer than the specific normal variable time (e.g., 5 seconds or more). As a result, when the variable display of the normal symbol started during the control of the low probability time-saving state C1 continues during the control of the low probability non-time-saving state, the variable display of the normal symbol can be always ended while being controlled in the low probability non-time-saving state, and for example, when "win normal symbol A" and "win normal symbol B" are derived on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 after the transition control to the low probability non-time-saving state, it becomes possible to predict that the variable winning port door 2521 of the variable winning port 2003 will be controlled to open and close in the opening and closing pattern 1 by referring to the symbol determination table. As a result, it becomes easier to design a game that takes into account the timing of opening and closing of the variable prize entrance door 2521, making it easier to realize gameplay that reflects the designer's intentions.

[Transition of game state in modified example of opening and closing manner of variable winning port]
Next, the transition of the game state in the modified opening and closing mode of the variable winning opening described above will be explained. Figure 235 is an explanatory diagram showing the transition of the game state in the modified opening and closing mode of the variable winning opening. Note that the transition of the game state shown in Figure 235 is partially different from the transition of the game state shown in Figure 196, so only the parts that are different from the transition of the game state shown in Figure 196 will be explained, and the parts that are common to the transition of the game state shown in Figure 196 will not be explained repeatedly.

Even in the modified opening and closing mode of the variable winning port, it is possible to transition from the non-time-saving state to the time-saving state when the lottery result for the special symbol is a "jackpot" or an "instant short-time win". If the lottery result for the special symbol is a "jackpot", the game will transition to the time-saving state after the jackpot game is played, whereas if the lottery result for the special symbol is an "instant short-time win" or if a predetermined condition regarding the number of times the special symbol changes is met (in this example, the game state does not change from a low probability state to a high probability state and the number of times the special symbol changes in that low probability state reaches 600), the game will transition to the time-saving state without playing the jackpot game.

In addition, when the lottery result for the special pattern is an "instant short hit," if the type of the instant short hit is determined to be "instant short hit A," the game will be controlled to a low-probability time-saving state C1 until the changing display of the special pattern reaches 100 times without a jackpot game being played, if the type of the instant short hit is determined to be "instant short hit B," the game will be controlled to a low-probability time-saving state C2 until the changing display of the special pattern reaches 40 times without a jackpot game being played, and if the type of the instant short hit is determined to be "instant short hit C," the game will be controlled to a low-probability time-saving state C3 until the changing display of the special pattern reaches 20 times without a jackpot game being played. However, if the special symbol lottery result is a "jackpot" or if a predetermined condition regarding the number of times the special symbol changes is met before the special symbol changes a predetermined number of times (in this example, when the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state reaches 600), the low probability time-saving state C will end at that point.

In addition, when the game is controlled to one of the low-probability time-saving states C1, C2, or C3, if the result of the lottery for the special symbol becomes an "instant short hit" before the variable display of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (in this example, 20, 40, or 100 times), and the type of the instant short hit is determined to be one of "instant short hit A," "instant short hit B," or "instant short hit C," the determined type of instant short hit will have a high probability of being executed with a higher time-saving performance (higher advantage for the player) than the low-probability time-saving state C1, C2, or C3 being controlled. On the condition that the instantaneous short hit is an instantaneous short hit that causes control to a low-probability time-saving state C1, C2, C3, the controlled low-probability time-saving state C1, C2, C3 is terminated, and control is made to the low-probability time-saving state C1, C2, C3 according to the type of the determined instantaneous short hit, while if the type of the determined instantaneous short hit is an instantaneous short hit with a high probability of executing a time-saving performance (low advantage for the player) lower than the controlled low-probability time-saving state C1, C2, C3, the controlled low-probability time-saving state C1, C2, C3 is continued without terminating it.

For example, as shown in FIG. 235, when the low probability time-saving state C3 is in control and the result of the lottery for the special pattern is an "instant short hit," if the type of the instant short hit is determined to be "instant short hit A" or "instant short hit B," the low probability time-saving state C3 is ended and the transition to the low probability time-saving state C1 or the low probability time-saving state C2 is controlled, and when the low probability time-saving state C2 is in control and the result of the lottery for the special pattern is an "instant short hit," if the type of the instant short hit is determined to be "instant short hit A," the low probability time-saving state C2 is ended and the low probability time-saving state C3 is controlled to transition to the low probability time-saving state C1 or the low probability time-saving state C2. While controlling the transition to the probability time-saving state C1, when controlling the low-probability time-saving state C1, if the result of the lottery for the special symbol is "instant short hit", and the type of the instant short hit is determined to be "instant short hit B" or "instant short hit C", the low-probability time-saving state C1 continues without ending, and when controlling the low-probability time-saving state C2, if the result of the lottery for the special symbol is "instant short hit", and the type of the instant short hit is determined to be "instant short hit C", the low-probability time-saving state C2 continues without ending. Therefore, when controlling the low-probability time-saving state C1, C2, C3, it becomes possible to play with anticipation as to whether the transition will be controlled to the low-probability time-saving state C1, C2, C3, which has a higher probability of executing a higher time-saving performance (higher advantage for the player) than the low-probability time-saving state C1, C2, C3 being controlled.

In this case, a promotion acquisition effect may be executed to notify whether or not to promote to a low-probability time-saving state C in which a higher time-saving performance is executed than the low-probability time-saving state C being controlled, and interest in the game can be increased when the promotion acquisition effect is executed. In addition, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "instant short hit", even if the type of the instant short hit is not determined to be an instant short hit that causes control to the low probability time-saving state C1, C2, C3 with a high probability of executing a higher time-saving performance (higher advantage for the player) than the low probability time-saving state C1, C2, C3 currently being controlled, a promotion acquisition effect may be executed. In this case, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "instant short hit", if the type of the instant short hit is determined to be an instant short hit that causes control to the low probability time-saving state C1, C2, C3 with a high probability of executing a higher time-saving performance (higher advantage for the player) than the low probability time-saving state C1, C2, C3 currently being controlled, a display is performed as a "promotion acquisition effect" to tease whether or not the character Y will appear from the edge of the screen of the effect display device 1600, and a display is performed in the center of the screen of the effect display device 1600. A success pattern in which character Y appears (an effect in which promotion to a low-probability time-saving state C with a high probability of executing a time-saving performance higher than the low-probability time-saving state C being controlled) is executed, and when the result of the lottery for the special symbol is an "instant short hit," if the type of instant short hit is not determined to be an instant short hit that causes control to the low-probability time-saving state C1, C2, C3 with a high probability of executing a time-saving performance higher than the low-probability time-saving state C1, C2, C3 being controlled, a display is displayed to tease whether character Y will appear from the edge of the screen of the effect display device 1600 at a predetermined rate, and a failure pattern in which character Y does not appear from the edge of the screen of the effect display device 1600 (an effect in which promotion to a low-probability time-saving state C with a high probability of executing a time-saving performance higher than the low-probability time-saving state C being controlled) may be executed. This allows players to pay attention with anticipation to whether the player will be promoted to the low-probability time-saving state C with a high probability of executing a time-saving performance higher than the low-probability time-saving state C being controlled when the promotion acquisition effect is executed.

In addition, when the result of the lottery for the special pattern is an "instant short hit," if the type of the instant short hit is determined to be an instant short hit that causes the execution of the same low-probability time-saving state C1, C2, C3 as the low-probability time-saving state C1, C2, C3 currently being controlled, that is, if the type of the instant short hit is determined to be instant short hit A during control of the low-probability time-saving state C1, if the type of the instant short hit is determined to be instant short hit B during control of the low-probability time-saving state C2, and if the type of the instant short hit is determined to be instant short hit C during control of the low-probability time-saving state C3, the period during which the low-probability time-saving state C1, C2, C3 can be controlled may be extended. For example, when the special symbol is displayed for the 20th time after being controlled to the low probability time-saving state C1, and the lottery result of the special symbol is "instant short hit", if the type of the instant short hit is determined to be "instant short hit A", the number of times the special symbol changes after the transition control to the low probability time-saving state C1 is reset (set to 0), and when the lottery result of the special symbol is "instant short hit", the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability time-saving state C1 after the stop of the variable display determined to be "instant short hit A" as the type of the instant short hit is counted from 0 again, and when the number of times the special symbol changes reaches 100, the low probability time-saving state C1 may be continued, and in this case, it becomes possible to control the low probability time-saving state C1 until the number of times the special symbol changes reaches 120, which is 20 times more than usual. In this case, the successful pattern of the extended winning performance may be executed, and when the extended winning performance is executed, the interest in the game can be increased. In addition, even if the instantaneous short hit A, instantaneous short hit B, and instantaneous short hit C are not won during the control of the low probability time-saving state C1, C2, and C3, the failure pattern of the extended win effect may be executed at a predetermined rate. This allows players to pay attention with anticipation to whether the period of control to the low probability time-saving state will be extended when the extended win effect is executed.

In addition, when the low probability time-saving state C1, C2, or C3 is controlled, if a predetermined condition regarding the number of times the special symbol changes is satisfied (in this example, if the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state reaches 600 times) before the number of times the special symbol changes when the low probability time-saving state C1, C2, or C3 is controlled, the control of the low probability time-saving state C1, C2, or C3 may be continued without ending. In this case, when the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability time-saving state C1, C2, or C3 reaches a predetermined number (in this example, if the number of times the special symbol changes is 20, 40, or 100 times), the low probability time-saving state C1, C2, or C3 may be ended and the state may be controlled to transition to the low probability non-time-saving state B. In this case, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game caused by switching to the low probability time-saving state C2 or the low probability time-saving state C3, which have a high probability of executing a time-saving performance disadvantageous to the player, before the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability time-saving state C1 reaches a predetermined number. In addition, when the low probability time-saving state C1, C2, C3 is configured to be transitioned to the low probability time-saving state B after it is terminated, the low probability time-saving state B may be terminated when the result of the special symbol lottery is a "jackpot" or the number of times the special symbol changes after transition control to the low probability time-saving state B reaches a predetermined number (700 times in this example), or the low probability time-saving state B may be terminated when the result of the special symbol lottery is a "jackpot" or the number of times the special symbol changes after a predetermined condition regarding the number of times the special symbol changes is met (in this example, the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state reaches 600) reaches a predetermined number (700 times in this example) (the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state C1, C2, C3 after the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state reaches 600 is counted as the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability time-saving state B).

In the above example, the proportion of judgment values allocated to the pattern determination table at the time of an immediate short win compared to the first pattern random number and the proportion of judgment values allocated to the pattern determination table at the time of an immediate short win compared to the second pattern random number are the same, but these proportions may be made different. For example, as shown in FIG. 236 (D), in the pattern determination table at the time of an immediate short win compared to the first pattern random number, the proportion determined to be an immediate short win C, which causes control to a low probability time-saving state C3 with a low probability of high time-saving performance being executed, The ratio of the instantaneous short hit A that causes control to the low probability time-saving state C1 where the high time-saving performance is executed at a high rate is the highest, and the ratio of the instantaneous short hit C that causes control to the low probability time-saving state C3 where the high time-saving performance is executed at a low rate is the lowest, while the ratio of the instantaneous short hit A that causes control to the low probability time-saving state C1 where the high time-saving performance is executed at a high rate is the highest in the pattern determination table at the time of the instantaneous short hit that is compared with the second pattern random number, and the ratio of the instantaneous short hit C that causes control to the low probability time-saving state C3 where the high time-saving performance is executed at a low rate is the lowest. By configuring in this way, although there is a possibility of an instantaneous short hit in both normal time (non-time-saving state) and time-saving state, the probability of being controlled to a time-saving state that is more advantageous to the player than normal time is increased during the time-saving state, and the advantageous degree of the time-saving state can be improved, so that the interest in playing in the time-saving state can be improved.

In addition, in the lottery table for low probability and the lottery table for high probability, the probability of winning an immediate short win based on the instant short win judgment value compared with the second special random number and the probability of winning an immediate short win based on the instant short win judgment value compared with the first special random number may be made different. For example, as shown in FIG. 236 (A), in the lottery table for low probability and the lottery table for high probability, the probability of winning an immediate short win based on the instant short win judgment value compared with the second special random number may be set to be higher than the probability of winning an immediate short win based on the instant short win judgment value compared with the first special random number. In this case, although there is a possibility of an immediate short win in both normal time (non-time-saving state) and time-saving state, the probability of an immediate short win is higher than normal in the time-saving state, and the time-saving state can be continuously generated, and when the time-saving state is entered, it can be expected that the transition control to the time-saving state will be more advantageous. In addition, the probability of winning an instant short win may be different only in one of the lottery tables for low probability and the lottery table for high probability shown in FIG. 224(B).

In addition to differentiating the ratio of judgment values allocated between the pattern determination table for an instant short win that is compared with the first pattern random number and the pattern determination table for an instant short win that is compared with the second pattern random number as shown in FIG. 236 (D), it is also possible to make the probability of being judged to have won an instant short win different between the lottery table for the first special random number and the lottery table for the second special random number as shown in FIG. 236 (A).When configured in this way, the advantage of the time-saving state is further increased, and interest in playing in the time-saving state can be improved.

In addition, the pattern determination table for an instant short hit may be made different depending on the game state. For example, as shown in Figures 237 (A) and (B), if an instant short hit occurs and the state is not time-saving (low probability time-saving state, high probability time-saving state), an instant short hit C may be determined which causes control to a low probability time-saving state C3 in which the execution rate of an opening and closing pattern advantageous to the player (in this example, opening and closing P1) is low (time-saving performance is low); and if the state is time-saving (low probability time-saving states A, B, C1-C3 and high probability time-saving state), an instant short hit A may be determined which causes control to a low probability time-saving state C1 in which the execution rate of an opening and closing pattern advantageous to the player (in this example, opening and closing P1) is high (time-saving performance is high), or an instant short hit B may be determined which causes control to a low probability time-saving state C2. By configuring it this way, if an immediate short hit occurs in a non-time-saving state, the system controls the transition to a low-probability time-saving state C3, which has a lower degree of advantage. However, if the system controls the transition to the low-probability time-saving state C3, the system can be controlled to transition to a low-probability time-saving state C1 or low-probability time-saving state C2, which are more advantageous than the low-probability time-saving state C3, by winning an immediate short hit, so the degree of advantage can be changed in stages.

In addition, when controlled to a high probability state (high probability non-time-saving state, high probability time-saving state), the lottery result for the special symbol may be set as an "instant short-win pattern invalid period" during which control is not performed to the low probability time-saving state C when the lottery result for the special symbol is an "instant short win". By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to falling from a high probability state to a low probability state. Also, only when controlled to a low probability time-saving state, the lottery result for the special symbol may be set as an "instant short win" to control to the low probability time-saving state C, thereby improving the advantageous degree of the low probability time-saving state.

[Modification of game properties using low probability time-saving state C]
Next, a modified example in which the game characteristics are partially different from the above-mentioned embodiment will be described below. In the above-mentioned embodiment, when the variable display of the decorative pattern 1600a (special pattern) in which the lottery result of the first special pattern is "instant short hit" is stopped, the effect display device 1600 displays a rescue confirmation image of "help mode S entry!!" to notify the player that the game will enter "help mode S", and after entering "help mode S", a rescue image of "help mode S in" indicating that the low probability time-saving state C is being controlled is displayed in the upper left corner of the effect display device 1600 as a status display indicating the current game state. However, depending on the type of "instant short hit", the transition control to the low probability time-saving state C (the rescue confirmation image of "help mode S entry!!") or the fact that the low probability time-saving state C is being controlled (the rescue image of "help mode S in") may not be notified, and a new game characteristic in which the low probability time-saving state C is concealed and the game progresses may be achieved. Below, such a modified example of the new game characteristic will be described.

As shown in Fig. 238 (A) and (B), in this example, in the lottery of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, a "specific instant short win" is set in addition to the instant short win described above as a trigger for controlling to the low probability time-saving state C, and a lottery is held to see whether or not this specific instant short win will be won. In this example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a specific instant short win, the specific instant short win symbol is determined as the mode when the special symbol stops (the stop pattern of the special symbol), and when the specific instant short win symbol is derived and displayed, it is configured to be controlled to the time-saving state in the same way as when the instant short win A symbol, the instant short win B symbol, and the instant short win C symbol are derived and displayed. Note that when the specific instant short win symbol is derived and displayed, unlike the low probability time-saving states C1 to C3 described above, it is configured to be controlled to the low probability time-saving state C4, which can continue until the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed twice. In addition, the lottery table and the symbol determination table shown in FIG. 238 are partially different from the lottery table and the symbol determination table shown in FIG. 224, so only the parts that are different from FIG. 224 will be explained, and the common parts will be omitted to avoid redundant explanation. Also, in the example shown in FIGS. 238(A) and (B), the lottery for whether or not to win an immediate short win and the lottery for whether or not to win a specific immediate short win are configured separately, but it is also possible not to hold a lottery for whether or not to win an immediate short win (i.e., it is not necessary to provide an immediate short win that notifies that a transition to low-probability time-saving state C has been controlled (the rescue confirmation image of "Entering help mode S!!") or that the low-probability time-saving state C is being controlled (the rescue image of "in help mode S")), and the lottery for whether or not to win an immediate short win and the lottery for whether or not to win a specific immediate short win may be held separately. A lottery is carried out together with a lottery to see whether or not an instant short win will be won (for example, when a lottery is carried out to see whether or not an instant short win will be won and a lottery result of an instant short win is obtained, the type of instant short win symbol may be determined to be one of instant short win A symbol, instant short win B symbol, instant short win C symbol, and specific instant short win symbol, and in this case, the ratio of specific instant short win symbols to be determined may be made significantly higher than the other types (for example, instant short win A symbol: instant short win B symbol: instant short win C symbol: specific instant short win symbol = 1:2:7:90, etc.)).

238(A) and (B), in the lottery table for low probability and the lottery table for high probability, which are referenced for comparison with the first special random number, the first special random number is associated with an instant short win judgment value indicating that the first special random number has won an instant short win at a specific instant short win probability of 10/319, which is the same for all setting values 1 to 6, and other first special random numbers are associated with a miss judgment value indicating that the first special random number has missed. On the other hand, in the lottery table referenced for comparison with the second special random number, no specific instant short win judgment value is provided. As a result, in a non-time-saving state where the variable display of the first special pattern based on the start winning at the first start port 2004 is the mainstream, specific instant short wins can be made to occur more frequently than in a time-saving state.

In this way, in this example, the specific instantaneous short hit probability is configured so that it does not change between the low probability state and the high probability state, and does not change even when the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is switched. In addition, the specific instantaneous short hit probability is set to be a much higher probability than the jackpot probability or the instantaneous short hit probability, so that specific instantaneous short hits can occur frequently before a jackpot or instantaneous short hit occurs.

In addition, in the jackpot pattern determination table for the non-time-saving state shown in Figure 238 (C), the jackpot pattern determination table referenced for comparison with the first pattern random number assigns judgment values to jackpot C and jackpot D, but does not assign judgment values to jackpot A and jackpot B, and assigns judgment values in a ratio of "jackpot C:jackpot D = 99:1" for the first pattern random number (for example, a random number value from 1 to 100). In addition, the jackpot pattern determination table compared with the second pattern random number, like the jackpot pattern determination table compared with the first pattern random number, allocates judgment values only to jackpot C and jackpot D, and does not allocate judgment values to jackpot A and jackpot B, but allocates judgment values to the second pattern random number (for example, a random number value from 1 to 100) in a ratio of "jackpot C: jackpot D = 80:20", and is configured so that the ratio of determining a more advantageous jackpot (in this case, jackpot D) is higher than when a jackpot is determined with the first pattern random number, and the player is in a more advantageous state when the variable display of the second special pattern based on the start winning at the second start port 2005 or the variable winning port 2003 is executed rather than the variable display of the first special pattern based on the start winning at the first start port 2004.

In contrast, in the time-saving jackpot pattern determination table shown in Figure 238 (D), which is referenced for comparison with the first pattern random number, judgment values are assigned to all of jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, and jackpot D, and the judgment values are assigned in a ratio of "jackpot A: jackpot B: jackpot C: jackpot D = 25:25:49:1" for the first pattern random number (for example, a random number value from 1 to 100). In addition, in the jackpot pattern determination table that is compared with the second pattern random number, judgment values are assigned only to jackpot A and jackpot C, and judgment values are not assigned to jackpot B and jackpot D, but judgment values are assigned to the second pattern random number (for example, a random number value from 1 to 100) in a ratio of "jackpot A: jackpot D = 80:20", and it is configured so that the ratio of a jackpot with a higher degree of advantage (jackpot A in this case) is higher than when a jackpot is determined with the first pattern random number, and the player is in a more advantageous state when the variable display of the second special pattern based on the start winning at the second start port 2005 or the variable winning port 2003 is executed than when the variable display of the first special pattern based on the start winning at the first start port 2004 is executed.

The jackpot pattern determination table shown in Fig. 238 (C) and (D) is configured so that in the time-saving state, the probability of a jackpot being determined to be more favorable than in the non-time-saving state, for example, the probability of a jackpot being determined to be jackpot A or jackpot B which is controlled to a high probability state until the next jackpot, or the probability of a jackpot being determined to be jackpot A or jackpot D which is granted a long-term time-saving state, is higher. In other words, in the time-saving state, if the result of a special lottery based on a game ball being received by the second starting port 2005 or the variable winning port 2003 is a jackpot, the degree of advantage is higher than when the result of a special lottery based on a game ball being received by the second starting port 2005 or the variable winning port 2003 is a jackpot during the non-time-saving state. Therefore, in the time-saving state, if the result of the special lottery based on the reception of a game ball into the second starting port 2005 or the variable winning port 2003 is a jackpot, a more favorable jackpot can be generated than if the result of the special lottery based on the reception of a game ball into the second starting port 2005 or the variable winning port 2003 is a jackpot in the non-time-saving state, and the advantageous degree of the time-saving state can be increased, thereby improving interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 239(A), in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the lottery result of the normal symbol is "normal hit", if the game state is in the low probability time-saving state C4, that is, if the time-saving state control is being executed based on the specific immediate short hit, the variable winning hole door 2521 of the variable winning hole 2003 is controlled to open and close in opening and closing pattern 4 (opening and closing P4) regardless of the type of normal hit (type of winning normal symbol). Also, as shown in FIG. 239(B), opening and closing pattern 4 (opening and closing P4) is a one-time operation of the variable winning hole door 2521 that opens the variable winning hole 2003 for 0.51 seconds, and is configured to open and close in the same manner as opening and closing pattern 1 (opening and closing P1) executed when the game state is in the low probability non-time-saving state and the high probability non-time-saving state, that is, when the time-saving state control is not being executed. In this way, in the low-probability non-time-saving state C4, which is controlled to transition based on a specific immediate short-time win, the opening and closing of the variable winning gate 2521 of the variable winning gate 2003 is controlled in the same manner as when the time-saving state control is not being executed when the lottery result for the normal symbol is a "normal win", and it is difficult to determine whether or not the low-probability time-saving state C4 has been entered based on the opening and closing state of the variable winning gate 2521 of the variable winning gate 2003.

As described above, the low-probability time-saving state C4 is a state that can continue until the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed twice. More specifically, the low-probability time-saving state C4 is a state that continues until the variable display of the first special symbol is executed twice, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed twice, or the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed once each, except when a jackpot game is executed. In other words, since the above-mentioned opening and closing pattern 4 (opening and closing P4) does not significantly increase the possibility of the ball entering the variable winning hole 2003 like the opening and closing patterns 2 and 3 (opening and closing P2 and P3), the low-probability time-saving state C4 does not necessarily guarantee the variable display of the second special symbol, and it is more likely that the variable display of the first special symbol is executed twice and ends than that the variable display of the second special symbol is executed twice and ends, and it is a state in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed once each and ends.

In addition, in this example, if an immediate short hit occurs during the time-saving state, the type of immediate short hit (instant short hit pattern) is determined so that the game is controlled to a low-probability time-saving state in a more advantageous manner than if an immediate short hit occurs during a non-time-saving state. Specifically, as shown in Figures 239 (C) and (D), if the lottery result for the first special pattern is an immediate short hit in a non-time-saving state (low-probability non-time-saving state, high-probability non-time-saving state), the opening and closing pattern and control period of the variable winning gate 2521 are configured to be determined with a high probability to be an immediate short hit C (instant short hit C pattern), which causes the game to be controlled to a relatively unfavorable low-probability time-saving state C3. In addition, if the lottery result for the second special symbol is an immediate short hit in a non-time-saving state (low probability non-time-saving state, high probability non-time-saving state), it is possible to determine an immediate short hit B (instant short hit B symbol) which causes control to the low probability time-saving state C2, but the opening and closing pattern of the variable winning gate 2521 and the control period are configured to determine an immediate short hit C (instant short hit C symbol) with a high probability which causes control to the relatively unfavorable low probability time-saving state C3.

On the other hand, when the lottery result for the first special pattern is an instant short hit in the time-saving state (low-probability time-saving state A to C), it is configured so that it will not be determined to be instant short hit C (instant short hit C pattern), and is configured so that the opening and closing pattern and control period of the variable prize-winning door 2521 are highly likely to determine instant short hit A (instant short hit A pattern), which causes control to the relatively advantageous low-probability time-saving state C1, and instant short hit B (instant short hit B pattern), which causes control to the low-probability time-saving state C2. In addition, even if the lottery result of the second special symbol is an immediate short hit in the time-saving state (low-probability time-saving state A to C), it is configured not to be determined as an immediate short hit C (immediate short hit C symbol), and the opening and closing pattern and control period of the variable winning port door 2521 are configured to be determined at a high rate as an immediate short hit A (immediate short hit A symbol) which causes control to the relatively advantageous low-probability time-saving state C1, and an immediate short hit B (immediate short hit B symbol) which causes control to the low-probability time-saving state C2. Note that in the time-saving state, when an immediate short hit occurs with the second special symbol, the immediate short hit symbol is determined in a more advantageous manner than when an immediate short hit occurs with the first special symbol. By configuring it this way, when an immediate short hit occurs in a non-time-saving state, there is a high probability that the state will transition to a low-probability time-saving state C3, which has a lower degree of advantage. However, if an immediate short hit occurs while controlled to the low-probability time-saving state C3, the state can be controlled to transition to a low-probability time-saving state C1 or low-probability time-saving state C2, which are more advantageous than the low-probability time-saving state C3, so the degree of advantage can be changed in stages.

In addition, in the non-time-saving state (low-probability time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state), if the lottery result for the first special symbol is an instantaneous short hit, it is configured so that among instantaneous short hit A, instantaneous short hit B, and instantaneous short hit C, the instantaneous short hit C, which has the shortest period (number of time-saving times) that can be controlled to the low-probability time-saving state, is determined, and in the non-time-saving state (low-probability time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state), if the lottery result for the second special symbol is an instantaneous short hit, it is configured so that among instantaneous short hit A, instantaneous short hit B, and instantaneous short hit C, the instantaneous short hit B and instantaneous short hit C, which have the longest period (number of time-saving times) that can be controlled to the low-probability time-saving state, other than instantaneous short hit A, are determined, but the instantaneous short hit C, which has the shortest period (number of time-saving times) that can be controlled to the low-probability time-saving state, is determined most frequently.

On the other hand, in the time-saving state, if the lottery result of the first special symbol is an immediate short hit, the instant short hit C, which has the shortest period (time-saving number of times) that can be controlled to the low-probability time-saving state among the instant short hit A, instant short hit B, and instant short hit C, is not determined, and in the time-saving state, if the lottery result of the second special symbol is an immediate short hit, the instant short hit C, which has the shortest period (time-saving number of times) that can be controlled to the low-probability time-saving state among the instant short hit A, instant short hit B, and instant short hit C, is not determined. By configuring in this way, when an immediate short hit occurs in the non-time-saving state, the transition to the low-probability time-saving state C3, which has the shortest period (time-saving number of times) that can be controlled to the low-probability time-saving state, is controlled with a high probability, but if an immediate short hit is won after the transition control to the low-probability time-saving state C3, the transition to the low-probability time-saving state C1 or low-probability time-saving state C2, which has a longer period (time-saving number of times) that can be controlled to the low-probability time-saving state than the low-probability time-saving state C3, can be controlled, so that the degree of advantage can be changed in stages.

In addition, in the non-time-saving state and the time-saving state, when the second special symbol is selected as an immediate short hit, the immediate short hit is determined to be more favorable than when the first special symbol is selected as an immediate short hit. In other words, when the lottery result of the first special symbol in the non-time-saving state is an immediate short hit, the execution rate of the opening and closing pattern favorable to the player (opening and closing P1 in this example) is determined only to be an immediate short hit C, which causes the low probability time-saving state C3, which is the lowest among the low probability time-saving state C1, the low probability time-saving state C2, and the low probability time-saving state C3, whereas when the lottery result of the second special symbol in the non-time-saving state is an immediate short hit, the execution rate of the opening and closing pattern favorable to the player (opening and closing P1 in this example) is determined to be an immediate short hit B, which causes the low probability time-saving state C2, which is different from the low probability time-saving state C1, the low probability time-saving state C2, and the low probability time-saving state C3, which is the lowest among the low probability time-saving state C3. In addition, when the lottery result for the first special symbol is an instantaneous short hit in a non-time-saving state, it is determined to be only instantaneous short hit C, which has the shortest period (number of time-saving times) that can be controlled to a low-probability time-saving state among instantaneous short hit A, instantaneous short hit B, and instantaneous short hit C, whereas when the lottery result for the second special symbol is an instantaneous short hit in a non-time-saving state, it is configured to be determined to be instantaneous short hit B, which has a longer period (number of time-saving times) that can be controlled to a low-probability time-saving state than instantaneous short hit C, which has the shortest period (number of time-saving times) that can be controlled to a low-probability time-saving state among instantaneous short hit A, instantaneous short hit B, and instantaneous short hit C.

In addition, when the lottery result of the second special symbol in the time-saving state is an immediate short hit, the ratio of the opening and closing pattern (opening and closing P1 in this example) advantageous to the player to be executed is higher than when the lottery result of the first special symbol in the time-saving state is an immediate short hit, and is determined to be immediate short hit A, which causes control to the lowest probability time-saving state C1, which is the highest among the low probability time-saving state C1, the low probability time-saving state C2, and the low probability time-saving state C3. In addition, when the lottery result of the second special symbol in the time-saving state is an immediate short hit, the ratio of the lottery result of the second special symbol in the time-saving state is higher than when the lottery result of the first special symbol in the time-saving state is an immediate short hit, which causes control to the lowest probability time-saving state C1, which has the longest period (number of time-saving times) among the immediate short hit A, the immediate short hit B, and the immediate short hit C. In this way, in addition to differentiating the degree of advantage when an immediate short hit occurs between the non-time-saving state and the time-saving state, by differentiating the degree of advantage (opening/closing pattern, number of time-saving times) between the result of drawing the second special symbol, which is mainly displayed in a variable manner in the time-saving state, to an immediate short hit and the result of drawing the first special symbol, which is mainly displayed in a variable manner in the non-time-saving state, to an immediate short hit, it is possible to increase the advantage in the time-saving state and improve interest in playing.

Next, we will explain the transition of the game state when using a "specific instant short win." Figure 240(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the transition of the game state when the specific instant short win is not won in the drawing of the first special pattern, and Figure 240(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the transition of the game state when the specific instant short win is won in the drawing of the first special pattern.

As shown in FIG. 240(a), in the low probability non-time-saving state, when a game ball passes through gate 2002 during a game process mainly involving the variable display of the first special symbol, the normal symbol is displayed variable on the normal symbol display device of function display unit 1400, and the lottery result for the normal symbol is derived after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. As described above, in the non-time-saving state, the normal variation time (the time from when the variable display of the normal symbol starts to when it ends (until the lottery result for the normal symbol is derived)) is set to a longer time (e.g., 120 seconds) than in the time-saving state. Then, when either "Winning normal pattern A", "Winning normal pattern B", or "Winning normal pattern C" is output to the normal pattern display of the function display unit 1400, the table of opening and closing patterns during a normal win corresponding to the low probability non-time-saving state of FIG. 239(A) is referenced, and the variable winning port door 2521 of the variable winning port 2003 is controlled to open and close in pattern 1, that is, to open the variable winning port 2003 only once for 0.5 seconds as shown in FIG. 239(B).

When the variable winning port sensor 2526 detects a game ball received in the variable winning port 2003, the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 starts to display the second special symbol in a variable manner. Note that FIG. 240(a) illustrates a case where an "instant short win" is won during control of the low probability non-time-saving state, and the type of the instant short win is determined to be instant short win C. When the second special symbol stops and is displayed as an instant short win C (instant short win C symbol) at "D" in FIG. 240(a), when the variable display of the decorative symbol that is the lottery result stops, a symbol combination corresponding to the instant short win C symbol is displayed in which the left, center, and right decorative symbols are "549", and a rescue confirmation image (in this example, "Victory! Entering help mode!") is displayed on the performance display device 1600 to notify that "Help mode S" will be entered (Help mode S entry notification), and after entering "Help mode S", a rescue in progress image indicating that the low probability time-saving state C3 is being controlled is displayed (help mode S performance display) as shown in "E" to "H" in FIG. 240(a), to actively notify the player that the low probability time-saving state C3 has been entered.

In this example, when the normal pattern display of the function display unit 1400 is displaying a variable normal pattern or when the variable winning port 2003 is controlled to be in an open state, an opening suggestion image (in this example, "Aim for the open/closed winning port!") is displayed at a predetermined rate (which may be executed whenever the normal pattern is displayed in a variable manner, or may be executed only when the lottery result of the normal pattern is an immediate short win, or may be executed at a higher rate when the lottery result of the normal pattern is an immediate short win than when the lottery result of the normal pattern is not an immediate short win) in a specific performance area (which may be near the normal variable area that displays information regarding the winning or losing of the normal pattern) different from the area where the decorative pattern of the performance display device 1600 is displayed.

In addition, as described above, when a game ball enters the variable winning port 2003 and the game ball accepted by the variable winning port sensor 2526 is detected, a start port winning command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 to instruct the start of the start port winning presentation. The start port winning command is provided for each of the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2401, and the variable winning port sensor 2526, and includes pre-determination information such as the result of the pre-selection of the special pattern based on various random numbers obtained when the game ball received in the variable winning port 2003 is detected (the result of the pre-selection of whether or not to select a big win, a small win, or an instantaneous short win), the type of big win if it is a big win, the type of small win if it is a small win, the type of instantaneous short win if it is an instantaneous short win, whether to execute a reach performance as a game performance executed by the performance display device 1600 if it is not a big win, small win, or instantaneous short win, or the type of game performance type (type of variation pattern) to be executed.

In this example, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC receives a start winning command in response to detection of either the first start opening sensor 3002, the second start opening sensor 2401, or the variable winning opening sensor 2526 (any one of the first start opening sensor 3002, the second start opening sensor 2401, and the variable winning opening sensor 2526 (for example, the variable winning opening sensor 2526) or any combination (it may be all of them, or it may be a sensor related to the second special pattern (the second start opening sensor 2401 and the variable winning opening sensor 2526) etc.), a predetermined ratio (which may be always executed when the start opening winning command is received, or may be executed when the preliminary lottery result is an immediate short win) is received. It may be executed only when the preliminary lottery result is an immediate short win, or may be executed at a higher rate when the preliminary lottery result is an immediate short win than when the preliminary lottery result is not an immediate short win), and executes a mini-character battle effect in which the mini-character Z fights an enemy character in a specific performance area of the performance display device 1600. In this example, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed based on the entry of a game ball into the variable winning opening 2003, the mini-character battle effect is executed from before the variable display of the second special symbol begins to the duration of the variable display of the second special symbol, and displays a performance mode according to the lottery result of the second special symbol.

Specifically, when the result of the lottery for the second special pattern in the low probability non-time-saving state is an instant short hit (in this example, when the display result of the second special pattern is derived and displayed as "instant short hit B pattern" or "instant short hit C pattern"), after the variable winning opening 2003 is closed, a mini character battle effect is executed in a specific performance area of the performance display device 1600 in which the mini character Z fights a mid-boss as an enemy character ("C" in Figure 240(a)), and when the display result of the second special pattern is derived and displayed, a state in which the mini character Z wins against the mid-boss as an enemy character is displayed, and when the variable display of the decorative pattern stops, a rescue confirmation image (in this example, "Victory! Entering help mode!") is displayed on the performance display device 1600 to notify that "Help mode S" will be entered ("D" in Figure 240(a)). On the other hand, in the low probability non-time shortening state, if the lottery result of the second special symbol is not an immediate short win but a miss (in this example, the display result of the second special symbol is a "miss"), that is, if there is no immediate short win, the display result of the second special symbol is displayed in a manner in which the mini-character Z is defeated by the mid-boss as an enemy character, and when the display of the decorative symbol variations stops, the performance display device 1600 is notified that entry into "Help Mode S" has failed. This makes it possible to actively notify and make the player aware of the possibility of entering "Help Mode S" or that "Help Mode S" will occur, and to draw attention to the performance executed by the performance display device 1600 and the display of the decorative symbol variations.

In addition, if there is no immediate short win in the low probability non-time-saving state, a mini character battle performance may be executed only if the result of the lottery for the special pattern (one or both of the first special pattern and the second special pattern) is neither a big win nor a small win, thereby preventing a big win or a small win after displaying the state in which the mini character Z is defeated by the mid-boss or big boss as an enemy character in the mini character battle performance, and the lottery result of the special pattern and the display result of the mini character battle performance may be associated to execute the mini character battle performance to avoid confusing the player, or a mini character battle performance may be executed at a predetermined rate even if there is no immediate short win, or a mini character battle performance may be executed at a predetermined rate if there is a specific lottery result (for example, a big win A) even if there is no immediate short win, by displaying the state in which the mini character Z is defeated by the mid-boss or big boss as an enemy character in the mini character battle performance to disappoint the player, and then deriving and displaying a lottery result that is favorable to the player, thereby doubling the joy.

In this way, when the result of the special symbol lottery in the low-probability non-time-saving state is an immediate short hit (in this example, when the display result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is the derived display of "instant short hit B symbol" or "instant short hit C symbol"), a mini-character battle effect is executed in a specific effect area of the effect display device 1600 to suggest that an immediate short hit will occur, and a rescue confirmation image is displayed to actively notify that "Help Mode S" will be entered, that is, that a transition to low-probability time-saving state C2 or low-probability time-saving state C3 will be controlled; furthermore, during the control of low-probability time-saving state C2 and low-probability time-saving state C3, a background display for Help Mode S (in this example, "Help Mode S effect") is executed as the background display of the effect display device 1600 (the background of a landscape or the like displayed in the lower layer of the decorative symbol) to actively notify that "Help Mode S" is being executed.

In contrast, in Figure 240 (b), a specific instantaneous short win and a low probability time-saving state C4 are used to progress the game in a more advantageous manner than in Figure 240 (a). Specifically, in FIG. 240(b), in the low-probability non-time-saving state, when the result of the lottery for the first special symbol during the game process mainly involving the variable display of the first special symbol is a specific immediate short win, the fact that it is a specific immediate short win is concealed by not executing the mini-character battle effect in the specific performance area of the performance display device 1600, and when the variable display of the decorative symbols stops, a combination of decorative symbols different from the immediate short win symbols is displayed as a symbol combination corresponding to the specific immediate short win symbol, for example a combination that results in the symbol "378" that is the same as when the left, center, and right decorative symbols miss, and even if the decorative symbols stop, a rescue confirmation image is not displayed, thereby concealing the control of the transition to the low-probability time-saving state C4, and further, even during the control of the low-probability time-saving state C4, the same background display (which may be partially different) as in normal times (non-time-saving state) is displayed, thereby concealing the fact that it is being controlled to the low-probability time-saving state C4.

In other words, if the result of the lottery for the first special symbol in the low-probability non-time-saving state is a specific immediate short win, the mini-character battle effect is not executed in the specific effect area of the effect display device 1600, and when the display of the decorative symbols stops, a combination of the left, center, and right decorative symbols with the symbol "378" is displayed as a symbol combination corresponding to the specific immediate short win symbol, so as not to remind the player of the specific immediate short win, and even when the display of the decorative symbols stops changing, the rescue confirmation image is not displayed, so that the transition control to the low-probability time-saving state C4 is concealed ("B" in FIG. 240(b)), and further, during the control of the low-probability time-saving state C4, the background of normal time (non-time-saving state) is displayed on the effect display device 1600, so that the control to the low-probability time-saving state C4 is concealed.

As mentioned above, in order to conceal from the player the fact that the game is being controlled to the low-probability time-saving state C4, it is desirable to make the time (special fluctuation time) during which the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) in the low-probability time-saving state C4 fluctuate and display closely resemble the special fluctuation time of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) in the low-probability non-time-saving state. In other words, it is difficult to recognize that the game is being controlled to the low-probability time-saving state C4 even from the special fluctuation time of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) in the low-probability time-saving state C4, and by performing the mini-character battle performance in parallel with this special fluctuation time, it is possible to conceal the fact that the game is being controlled to the low-probability time-saving state C4.

When the change pattern command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 as described above, the change display of the identification pattern 1600b, which is smaller and less noticeable than the decorative pattern, is executed in the upper right part of the performance display device 1600. In this change display of the identification pattern 1600b, "O" and "X" are displayed alternately as the identification pattern 1600b, and when the decorative pattern stops, it stops with either "O" or "X" displayed. Also, if the lottery result of the special pattern is a hit (big hit, small hit, immediate short hit), "O" is displayed as the display result (stop pattern) of the change display of the identification pattern 1600b, and if the lottery result is a miss, it stops with "X" displayed as the display result (stop pattern) of the change display of the identification pattern 1600b. In this example, if the lottery result for the special symbol is a specific instantaneous short win, the display result (stopping pattern) of the variable display of the identification symbol 1600b stops in the same state as when the lottery result for the special symbol is a miss, displaying an "X". In this way, in this example, it is difficult to tell from the display result (stopping pattern) of the variable display of the identification symbol 1600b that an instantaneous short win has occurred, which keeps the transition control to the low probability time-saving state C4 secret.

In addition, the low-probability time-saving state C4, which is controlled to transition when a specific immediate short win occurs, ends when the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed twice, and transition is controlled to the low-probability non-time-saving state. In other words, when a specific immediate short win occurs, not only is it not suggested that a specific immediate short win will occur, it is not entered into the help mode S, and it is not notified that it is being controlled to the low-probability time-saving state C, but it is only controlled to the low-probability time-saving state C4 for a short period of time until the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed twice, and even when the lottery result of the normal symbol becomes a "normal win", the variable winning port door 2521 of the variable winning port 2003 is controlled to open and close with an opening and closing pattern 4 that is very similar to the normal time (non-time-saving state) (see Figure 239), so even if the time-saving state control is being executed, it is actually very similar to the low-probability non-time-saving state, so it is difficult for the player to notice that it is being controlled to the low-probability time-saving state C4. That is, in this example, the time-saving performance of the low-probability time-saving state C4 is set to be a time-saving performance that closely resembles the game progress in the low-probability non-time-saving state, and it is made difficult for the player to distinguish between the low-probability time-saving state C4 and the low-probability non-time-saving state based on the frequency of winning into the variable winning port 2003, etc. In this example, when controlled to the low-probability time-saving state C4, the time until the lottery result of the normal pattern is derived is configured to be shorter than in normal times (non-time-saving state), but by setting the time until the lottery result of the normal pattern is derived to the same time as in the non-time-saving state (for example, 119 seconds), it may be made difficult to determine whether or not the low-probability time-saving state C4 is being controlled depending on the time until the lottery result of the normal pattern is derived.

In addition, in the low-probability time-saving state C4, no control is performed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the variable winning port 2003, and the variable winning port door 2521 of the variable winning port 2003 is controlled to open and close in an opening and closing pattern 4 that is very similar to normal (non-time-saving state); however, as shown in the pattern determination table for an immediate short win in the non-time-saving state in Figures 239 (C) and (D) and the pattern determination table for an immediate short win in the time-saving state, in the time-saving state, an immediate short win is determined to be more advantageous than in the non-time-saving state, and if an immediate short win occurs during control of the low-probability time-saving state C4, the state transitions to a more advantageous state than if an immediate short win occurred in the non-time-saving state, which is more advantageous than the normal state (non-time-saving state). In this way, when controlling the transition to the low-probability time-save state C4 which is more advantageous than the normal state (non-time-save state), by concealing the fact that the transition to the low-probability time-save state C4 and the control to the low-probability time-save state C4 are being controlled, it is possible to control to the low-probability time-save state C4 without the player being aware of it, and to grant an advantageous gaming benefit such as an instant short win A which is not determined in the non-time-save state, thereby surprising the player and increasing his or her interest in the game. That is, when a specific immediate short hit occurs, it becomes difficult for the player to notice that the game is being controlled to the low probability time-saving state C4, and the game is controlled to the low probability time-saving state C4 without the player noticing, and the low probability time-saving state C4 ends without the player noticing, so that when the variable winning gate 2521 opens, it is difficult for the player to tell whether this opening is the result of the lottery result of the normal pattern in the normal lottery in the non-time-saving state being a "normal hit" or the result of the lottery result of the normal pattern in the normal lottery in the time-saving state being a "normal hit". Therefore, for a player who does not realize that the game has been controlled to the low probability time-saving state C4, if the player wins a jackpot (jackpot A, jackpot B in this example) or an immediate short hit (instantaneous short hit A in this example), the player can be surprised, and the game can be progressed by giving the player a sense of expectation that the game is actually being controlled to the low probability time-saving state C4.

In this example, after controlling the transition to the low probability time-saving state C4, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC receives a start winning command (any one of the first start opening sensor 3002, the second start opening sensor 2401, and the variable winning opening sensor 2526 (for example, the variable winning opening sensor 2526) or any combination (it may be all of them, or it may be a sensor related to the second special pattern (the second start opening sensor 2401 and the variable winning opening sensor 2526)) in response to the detection of any one of the first start opening sensor 3002, the second start opening sensor 2401, and the variable winning opening sensor 2526) during the control of the low probability time-saving state C4, a mini character battle performance in which the mini character Z fights an enemy character in a specific performance area of the performance display device 1600 is executed at a predetermined rate (which may be executed always when the start opening winning command is received, or may be executed only when the lottery result is an immediate short win, or may be executed at a higher rate when the lottery result is an immediate short win than when the lottery result is not an immediate short win).

Specifically, when the result of the lottery for the second special pattern in the low probability time-saving state C4 is an instant short hit (in this example, when "instant short hit A pattern" or "instant short hit B pattern" is derived and displayed as the display result for the second special pattern), after the variable winning opening 2003 is closed, a mini character battle effect is executed in a specific performance area of the performance display device 1600 in which the mini character Z fights against a big boss as an enemy character ("C" in Figure 240 (b)), and when the display result of the second special pattern is derived and displayed, a state in which the mini character Z wins against the big boss as an enemy character is displayed, and when the variable display of the decorative pattern stops, a rescue confirmation image (in this example, "Victory! Entering help mode!") is displayed on the performance display device 1600 to notify that "help mode S" will be entered ("D" in Figure 240 (b)). On the other hand, in the low-probability time-saving state C4, if the lottery result of the second special symbol is not an immediate short hit but a miss (in this example, the display result of the second special symbol is a "miss"), that is, if the result is not an immediate short hit, the display result of the second special symbol is displayed as a display of the mini-character Z being defeated by the big boss as an enemy character, and when the display of the decorative symbol variations stops, the performance display device 1600 is notified of the failure to enter the "help mode S". In this way, when controlling the transition to the low-probability time-saving state C4, which executes control substantially similar to the normal state (non-time-saving state), the game state is controlled so that it is difficult for the player to realize, and when controlling the transition to the low-probability time-saving state C1 to C3, which controls the state to be more advantageous than the normal state (non-time-saving state), the player is actively notified to be aware of it, and attention is paid to the performance executed by the performance display device 1600 and the display of the decorative symbol variations.

In addition, in this example, when executing the mini character battle performance, the enemy character is made different depending on the advance judgment information included in the start port winning command. That is, when the lottery result of the special pattern is "instant short hit", if the type of the instant short hit is determined to be "instant short hit C" which has the lowest degree of advantage among "instant short hit A", "instant short hit B", and "instant short hit C", a mid-boss appears as the enemy character (Fig. 240 (a)), while when the lottery result of the special pattern is "instant short hit", if the type of the instant short hit is determined to be "instant short hit A" which has the highest degree of advantage among "instant short hit A", "instant short hit B", and "instant short hit C", a big boss higher in rank than the mid-boss appears as the enemy character (Fig. 240 (b)). In this way, since the degree of advantage at the time of winning differs depending on the type of enemy character to be fought in the mini character battle performance, the lottery result of the special pattern and the type of instant short hit can be expected depending on the type of enemy character. In addition, the type of enemy character is not limited to being different depending on the result of the special pattern lottery or the type of instant short win, but may be different depending on whether the game state is a non-time-saving state (in this case, including the low probability non-time-saving state C4) or a time-saving state, or the type of enemy character may be different depending on whether the command is a start port entry command corresponding to the first start port sensor 3002, a start port entry command corresponding to the second start port sensor 2401, or a start port entry command corresponding to the variable entry port sensor 2526.

In the above example, whether or not to execute the mini-character battle performance is determined depending on whether or not an immediate short hit occurs, but whether or not to execute the mini-character battle performance may be determined depending on whether or not a big hit occurs, regardless of whether or not an immediate short hit occurs, or whether or not to execute the mini-character battle performance may be determined depending on whether or not a small hit occurs, or whether or not to execute the mini-character battle performance may be determined by combining one or more (or all) of whether or not an immediate short hit occurs, whether or not a big hit occurs, and whether or not a small hit occurs. In other words, if a mini-character battle performance is not executed in the case of a specific immediate short hit, the type of lottery that causes the execution of the mini-character battle performance may be set arbitrarily. In this case, the type of enemy character that appears in the mini-character battle performance may be different depending on the result of the lottery for the special pattern or the type of hit (big hit, small hit, immediate short hit) to suggest the degree of advantage.

In addition, when the low-probability time-saving state C4 is controlled, the performance display device 1600 may display a time-saving latent suggestion image (e.g., "Big boss appearance rate high!!") for a predetermined period at a predetermined rate, and during the period when the time-saving latent suggestion image is displayed, the player is made to recognize that the low-probability time-saving state C4 is controlled, that is, that if an immediate short hit occurs, the player has a high probability of winning advantageously, and expectations for an immediate short hit may be increased. In addition, even when the low-probability non-time-saving state is controlled, the performance display device 1600 may display a time-saving latent suggestion image (e.g., "Big boss appearance rate high!!") for a predetermined period at a predetermined rate (so-called false), and in this case, if the low-probability time-saving state C4 is controlled, the performance display device 1600 may display a time-saving latent suggestion image (e.g., "Big boss appearance rate high!!") for a predetermined period at a higher rate than when the low-probability non-time-saving state is controlled. This can add variety to the monotonous gameplay when the game is controlled to the low-probability non-time-saving state or the low-probability time-saving state C4, making it possible to prevent players from becoming bored with the game.

[Start of low probability time-saving state B during variable display of first special symbol (variation example)]
In the above, when a ball enters the first starting hole 2004, a variable display of the first special symbol is executed, and when a ball enters the second starting hole 2005 and the variable winning hole 2003, a variable display of the second special symbol is executed, but the variable display of each special symbol is executed in the order of the balls entering the first starting hole 2004, the second starting hole 2005 and the variable winning hole 2003, and the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed sequentially. In contrast to this, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol may be executed simultaneously. In such a configuration, when the pattern change is stopped, the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state (relief count counter) is counted, and after the pattern change is stopped and the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state reaches 600 (relief count counter = 600), a transition from the low probability non-time-saving state to the low probability time-saving state B is made. During the display of the change of the first special pattern when the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state reaches 600 (relief count counter = 600), the display of the change of the second special pattern may begin as the 601st pattern change, and a sense of discomfort may arise that the transition to the low probability time-saving state B has not occurred even though the 601st pattern change has begun. For this reason, when the display of the first special symbol and the display of the second special symbol are configured to be executed at the same time, it is preferable to count the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (relief counter) at the start of the symbol change, and to transition from the low probability non-time-saving state to the low probability time-saving state B at the start of the symbol change when the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state reaches 600 (relief counter = 600). Such a configuration will be described below.

Figure 241 is a time chart showing the change in the game state when the display of the first and second special symbols can be executed simultaneously. Figure 241 (A) explains the case where the display of the second special symbol is not performed while the display of the first special symbol is in progress, and Figure 241 (B) explains the case where the display of the second special symbol is started while the display of the first special symbol is in progress.

In this example, the count of the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue counter) is incremented when the display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol starts changing. Also, when the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state reaches 600 (rescue counter = 600), the low probability non-time-saving state transitions to low probability time-saving state B, and the timing of the transition to low probability time-saving state B is the start of the symbol change (display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol changing) when the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state reaches 600 (rescue counter = 600).

As shown in FIG. 241(A), when pattern changes A to D of the first special pattern are executed during control of the low-probability non-time-saving state, the number of times the special pattern changes in the low-probability state (rescue count counter) is counted at the start of pattern changes A to D of the first special pattern. Then, when pattern change A1 of the first special pattern is executed as the next pattern change, the number of times the special pattern changes in the low-probability state (rescue count counter) is counted at the start of pattern change A1 of the first special pattern, and when the number of times the special pattern changes in the low-probability state reaches 600 (rescue count counter = 600), the state transitions from the low-probability non-time-saving state to the low-probability time-saving state B at the start of pattern change A1 of the first special pattern.

As an external device, an external information device that conveys game information to the player is provided above the pachinko machine 1. Here, the external device displays the number of times the special symbol changes after a jackpot, but the number of times the special symbol changes displayed on the external device is counted up when the special symbol starts to change, just as the rescue counter is counted up when the special symbol starts to change, and is reset when a jackpot is hit, just as the rescue counter is reset when a jackpot is hit. Therefore, when the low probability state is controlled when a jackpot is hit, the number of times the special symbol changes displayed on the external device will match the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue counter) when the special symbol starts to change. In such a case, by visually checking whether the number of times the special symbol changes displayed on the external device reaches 600 times, it is possible to determine whether the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state reaches 600 times (rescue counter = 600) and transitions to low probability time-saving state B.

In addition, in the low probability non-time-saving state, since it is difficult or impossible to receive the game ball B into the variable winning port 2003, the main game is to have the game ball B enter the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005, and among these, the rate at which the game ball B enters the first starting port 2004 is high, and the main game is to have the first special symbol change display executed. For this reason, the performance display device 1600, lamp illumination, and sound output execute a symbol change display (a display corresponding to a change pattern) on the first special symbol side. On the other hand, after transitioning to the low probability time-saving state B, since it is easier to receive the game ball B into the variable winning port 2003 than in the non-time-saving state, the main game is to have the game ball B enter the variable winning port 2003, and the main game is to have the second special symbol change display executed. For this reason, the performance display device 1600, lamp illumination, and sound output execute a symbol change display (a display corresponding to a change pattern) on the second special symbol side.

In addition, in the effect display device 1600, before the pattern change A1 in which the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state reaches 600 (rescue count counter = 600), when the pattern changes A to D of the first special pattern are executed, a help mode L precursor effect is executed, which counts down to the start of the help mode L effect (for example, a count effect that notifies the number of times the special pattern has changed in the low probability state). Then, at the start of pattern change A1 in which the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state reaches 600 (rescue count counter = 600), a help mode L start effect is executed, which indicates the start of help mode L (start of low probability time-saving state B), and after the execution of the help mode L start effect, a help mode L effect is executed, which indicates that help mode L is being executed (low probability time-saving state B is being controlled). In this example, when the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state reaches 600, the game is controlled to low probability time-saving state B until the special symbol changes 700 times (until the total number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state reaches 1300), and this period of control to low probability time-saving state B (700 changes in the special symbol) is called "help mode L."

Similarly, in the case of lamp illumination and sound output, before the pattern change A1 in which the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state reaches 600 (rescue count counter = 600), when pattern changes A to D of the first special pattern are being executed, a help mode L precursor effect is executed, which counts down to the start of the help mode L effect (for example, a count effect that notifies the number of times the special pattern has changed in the low probability state). Then, at the start of pattern change A1 in which the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state reaches 600 (rescue count counter = 600), a help mode L start effect is executed, which indicates the start of help mode L (start of low probability time-saving state B), and after the execution of the help mode L start effect, a help mode L effect is executed, which indicates that help mode L is being executed (low probability time-saving state B is being controlled).

The Help Mode L start performance is executed from the start of the pattern change A1 when the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state reaches 600 (rescue count counter = 600) until a predetermined time has elapsed. The predetermined time is preferably set to about the change time for one pattern change. However, as a modified example, the Help Mode L start performance may be switched to the Help Mode L performance at the timing when the pattern change is stopped after the start of the Help Mode L start performance (for example, the timing when the pattern change A1 is stopped when the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state reaches 600 (rescue count counter = 600)).

As shown in FIG. 241(B), when pattern changes A to D of the first special pattern are executed during control of the low-probability non-time-saving state, the number of times the special pattern changes in the low-probability state (rescue count counter) is counted at the start of pattern changes A to D of the first special pattern. Then, when pattern change X of the second special pattern is started during execution of pattern change D of the first special pattern, the number of times the special pattern changes in the low-probability state (rescue count counter) is counted at the start of pattern change X of the second special pattern, and when the number of times the special pattern changes in the low-probability state reaches 600 (rescue count counter = 600), the state transitions from the low-probability non-time-saving state to the low-probability time-saving state B at the start of pattern change X of the second special pattern.

As described above, in a configuration in which the display of the first special symbol and the display of the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously, if the pattern change X of the second special symbol is started while the pattern change D of the first special symbol is being executed, and the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state reaches 600 (rescue count counter = 600), the game will transition from the low probability non-time-saving state to the low probability time-saving state B at the start of the pattern change X of the second special symbol, even though the pattern change D of the first special symbol is being executed. In this way, if the pattern change X of the second special symbol is started as the 600th pattern change while the pattern change D of the first special symbol is being executed, a situation will not occur in which the game has not transitioned to the low probability time-saving state B despite the start of the 600th pattern change, and the game can be played without any discomfort. For example, if the low probability non-time-saving state transitions to the low probability time-saving state B after the stop display of the pattern change X of the second special pattern when the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state reaches 600 (rescue count counter = 600), during the execution of that pattern change X, the pattern change A1 of the first special pattern will have started as the 601st pattern change, and an awkward feeling will arise that the transition to the low probability time-saving state B has not occurred even though the 601st pattern change A1 has started.

The external device also displays the number of times the special symbol changes after a jackpot, but the number of times the special symbol changes displayed on the external device is counted up when the special symbol starts to change, just as the rescue counter is counted up when the special symbol starts to change, and is reset when a jackpot is hit, just as the rescue counter is reset when a jackpot is hit. Therefore, when the low probability state is controlled when a jackpot is hit, the number of times the special symbol changes displayed on the external device will match the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (rescue counter) when the special symbol starts to change. In such a case, at the start of the pattern change X of the second special symbol, when the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state reaches 600 (rescue counter = 600), the number of times the special symbol changes displayed on the external device will be 600, and the game will transition from the low probability non-time-saving state to the low probability time-saving state B, allowing for a natural gameplay experience.

In addition, the effect display device 1600 starts the help mode L start effect at the start of the pattern change X of the second special pattern when the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state reaches 600 times (rescue count counter = 600), i.e., at the transition to the low probability time-saving state B. Similarly, the lamp illumination and sound output start the help mode L start effect at the start of the pattern change X of the second special pattern when the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state reaches 600 times (rescue count counter = 600), i.e., at the transition to the low probability time-saving state B. In this way, although the help mode L precursor effect is being executed during the execution of the pattern change D of the first special pattern, the help mode L precursor effect is suddenly switched to the help mode L start effect during the execution of the pattern change D of the first special pattern, making it appear as if the transition to the low probability time-saving state B has suddenly occurred.

In this example, in a configuration in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be displayed simultaneously, the second special symbol starts to change while the first special symbol is changing, and when the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state reaches 600 (rescue count counter = 600), the low probability non-time-saving state transitions to the low probability time-saving state B at the start of the second special symbol's change X. First, a specific example of presentation when there is no second special symbol display during the first special symbol display will be described with reference to FIG. 242. FIG. 241(A) shows a time chart showing the change in the game state when there is no second special symbol display during the first special symbol display, and FIG. 242 shows a specific example of presentation when the time chart progresses.

As shown in FIG. 242 (A), when a first variation pattern command (a command notifying the start of the variation display of the first special pattern) is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the variation display of the first decorative pattern 1600a1 is executed in the upper area of the performance display device 1600. Similarly, when a second variation pattern command (a command notifying the start of the variation display of the second special pattern) is sent, the variation display of the second decorative pattern 1600a2 is executed in the lower area of the performance display device 1600. Specifically, until the variation time corresponding to the first variation pattern command or the second variation pattern command has elapsed, the left, center, and right first decorative patterns 1600a1 and second decorative patterns 1600a2 are displayed in a variable manner, and are displayed in the order of left decorative pattern → right decorative pattern → center decorative pattern. As the stopped pattern of the first decorative pattern 1600a1 or the second decorative pattern 1600a2, the pattern corresponding to the lottery result is displayed in a stopped state. In addition, in this example, it is possible to simultaneously execute the display of the first special symbol and the display of the second special symbol. In other words, it is possible to start the display of the second decorative symbol 1600a2 while the display of the first decorative symbol 1600a1 is being executed, and it is also possible to start the display of the first decorative symbol 1600a1 while the display of the second decorative symbol 1600a2 is being executed.

In addition, when the first variation pattern command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, a variation display of the first identification pattern 1600b1, which is smaller and less noticeable than the first decorative pattern 1600a1, is executed in the upper right part of the upper area of the performance display device 1600. Similarly, when the second variation pattern command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, a variation display of the second identification pattern 1600b2, which is smaller and less noticeable than the second decorative pattern 1600a2, is executed in the upper right part of the lower area of the performance display device 1600. Specifically, until the variation time corresponding to the first variation pattern command or the second variation pattern command has elapsed, a circle or an x is displayed as the first identification pattern 1600b1 or the second identification pattern 1600b2, and the display stops at either a circle or an x. The first identification pattern 1600b1 and the second identification pattern 1600b2 are stopped with a circle when the lottery result is a win (big win, small win, or instant short win), and with an x when the lottery result is a miss. In addition to this example, if the purpose is to conceal as much as possible that the lottery result is an instant short win, the first identification pattern 1600b1 and the second identification pattern 1600b2 may be stopped with a circle when the lottery result is a big win or small win, and with an x when the lottery result is an instant short win or a miss, so that it is difficult to recognize that it is an instant short win from the stopped patterns of the first identification pattern 1600b1 and the second identification pattern 1600b2.

In addition, the bottom of the performance display device 1600 enables the reserved display 1600c of the first special pattern (a state in which the display of the change of the first special pattern is waiting) and the reserved display 1600d of the second special pattern (a state in which the display of the change of the second special pattern is waiting). Specifically, the reserved display 1600c of the first special pattern is displayed as a circle in the bottom left of the performance display device 1600 for the number of reserved patterns, and the reserved display 1600d of the second special pattern is displayed as a square in the bottom right of the performance display device 1600 for the number of reserved patterns. Then, when the display of the change of the reserved special pattern starts, the reserved display 1600c, 1600d for the start is erased. However, the reserved display 1600c, 1600d of the special pattern may be continuously displayed from the start of the display of the change of the reserved special pattern until the display of the change of the special pattern ends.

In addition, a status display showing the current game state is executed in the upper left corner of the performance display device 1600. In this example, the current game state is a low-probability non-time-saving state, and "normal" corresponding to this low-probability non-time-saving state is displayed.

In addition, from the 500th display of the special pattern changes, which is the period before the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state reaches 600, a count effect is executed in the center of the effect display device 1600 to notify the player of the number of times the special pattern has changed in the low probability state each time the display of the first decorative pattern 1600a1 (first special pattern) and the second decorative pattern 1600a2 (second special pattern) changes is stopped (or may be started). In this example, when the display of the special pattern changes for the 500th time is stopped, a rescue notice image A is displayed with the message "500 changes", which corresponds to the number of times the special pattern has changed in the low probability state being 500. In this way, by executing the count effect, the player can play the game while looking forward to the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state approaching 600.

Specifically, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol stops changing, the main control board 1310 sends a symbol determination command to the peripheral control board 1510 to stop the display of the first decorative symbol 1600a1 and the second decorative symbol 1600a2 on the performance display device 1600. When the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state reaches 500, a rescue count command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 in addition to the symbol determination command when the symbol determination command is sent. This rescue count command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 every time a symbol determination command is sent while the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state is between 500 and 600. The peripheral control board 1510 has a dedicated counter that counts the number of times the rescue count command has been received, and this is used to store the number of times the rescue count command has been received. In this way, the peripheral control board 1510 can count the number of times the relief count command is received, and by receiving the relief count command for the first time, it recognizes that the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state has reached 500, and by receiving the relief count command for the second time, it recognizes that the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state has reached 501, and so on. Based on the number of times of change as determined, when the display of the first decorative pattern 1600a1 and the second decorative pattern 1600a2 changes in the performance display device 1600 is stopped, a count performance can be executed to notify the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state. In addition, the relief count command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is not limited to the above-mentioned form, and a different command may be sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 each time a pattern determination command is sent while the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state is between 500 and 600. Even in this case, the peripheral control board 1510 recognizes that the number of times the special pattern has changed in the low probability state has reached 500 by receiving rescue count command 1, and recognizes that the number of times the special pattern has changed in the low probability state has reached 501 by receiving rescue count command 2, making it possible to grasp the number of times the special pattern has changed in the low probability state, and enabling the same counting performance as described above.

As shown in Fig. 242 (B) and (C), in the period before the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state reaches 600, from the 597th time the special symbol changes, each time the first decorative symbol 1600a1 (first special symbol) or the second decorative symbol 1600a2 (second special symbol) stops changing, the first decorative symbol 1600a1 or the second decorative symbol a2 is displayed as a stop pattern indicating the number of times the special symbol has changed in the low probability state, as a counting effect. In this example, when the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state is 597, a relief notice pattern combination of "597" is selected and set as the stop pattern of the first decorative symbol 1600a1, on the condition that the lottery result of the first special symbol is a miss, and the stop pattern is displayed instead of the normal miss stop pattern. This symbol combination for the rescue notice can be displayed both when the reach effect is not executed and when the reach effect is executed. When the reach effect is executed (when the reach is missed), the miss symbol with the reach described above (a combination of the same symbols with left and right decorative symbols of "0" to "9" but with a different central decorative symbol; a reach miss symbol) is displayed as a result of the variable display, but then it is changed to a symbol combination for the rescue notice such as "597". Also, from the 597th special symbol variable display, a rescue notice image B is displayed in the center of the effect display device 1600 saying "Help is coming soon!", indicating that the "help mode" that is executed when the number of times the special symbols change in the low probability state reaches 600 is imminent.

In addition, in the period before the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state reaches 600, if there is a reserved special pattern that will execute the 600th special pattern change display that results in a miss in the lottery, a reserved special pattern display (a reserved face displayed in the lower left of Figures 242 (C) to (G)) indicating that the reserved special pattern is a reserved special pattern that will execute the 600th special pattern change display is displayed as the first reserved special pattern display 1600c. This allows the player to know in advance that the "help mode" will be entered when the reserved special pattern display corresponding to the reserved special pattern display is executed in the period before the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state reaches 600.

As shown in Figures 242 (D) and (E), at the start of the display of the first decorative pattern 1600a1 (first special pattern), the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state (rescue counter) is counted up, and if it is determined that the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state is 598, then, on the condition that the lottery result for the first special pattern is a miss, a pattern combination for a rescue notice, "598", is selected and set as the stopping pattern for the first decorative pattern 1600a1, and is displayed as a stop pattern instead of the normal missing stopping pattern, provided that the lottery result for the first special pattern is a miss.

As shown in Fig. 242 (F) and (G), when the first decorative pattern 1600a1 (first special pattern) starts to change, the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state (rescue counter) is counted up, and if it is determined that the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state is 599, a relief notice pattern combination of "599" is selected and set as the stopping pattern of the first decorative pattern 1600a1, on the condition that the lottery result of the first special pattern is a miss, and it is stopped and displayed instead of the usual missing stopping pattern. Also, when the 599th time the first decorative pattern 1600a1 (first special pattern) stops changing, a rescue suggestion image "CHANCE!" is displayed in the center of the performance display device 1600, indicating that the next special pattern change will enter "Help Mode L".

As shown in FIG. 242(H), at the start of the display of the first decorative pattern 1600a1 (first special pattern), the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state (rescue count counter) is counted up, and if it is determined that the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state is 600, at the start of the display of the first decorative pattern 1600a1 (first special pattern), a transition from the low probability non-time-saving state to low probability time-saving state B has occurred. Then, at the start of the display of the first decorative pattern 1600a1 (first special pattern), i.e., at the transition to low probability time-saving state B, the performance display device 1600 starts the help mode L start performance using lamp illumination and sound output.

Specifically, the performance display device 1600 displays a rescue confirmation image saying "Entering Help Mode L!!" to notify the player that "Help Mode L" will be entered when the Help Mode L start performance starts. In FIG. 242(H), the face reservation displayed in the lower left of FIG. 242(C)-(G) is moved and enlarged and displayed next to the text display "Entering Help Mode L!!", to clearly show that the face reservation corresponds to "Help Mode L". In addition, during the execution of the Help Mode L start performance, the display of the change in the first decorative pattern 1600a1 (first special pattern) being executed is displayed small in the upper right part of the upper area of the performance display device 1600, and the display of the change in the second decorative pattern 1600a2 (second special pattern) being executed is displayed small in the lower right part of the lower area of the performance display device 1600.

As shown in FIG. 242(I), during the execution of the Help Mode L start performance, the variable display of the first decorative pattern 1600a1 (first special pattern) being executed displays the normal missing stopping pattern "854" as the stopping pattern of the first decorative pattern 1600a1, provided that the lottery result for the first special pattern is a miss. Also, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the Help Mode L start performance, i.e., the transition to the low probability time-saving state B, the Help Mode L start performance is terminated.

As shown in FIG. 242(J), after the Help Mode L start effect ends, the Help Mode L effect starts. Specifically, while the Help Mode L effect is being executed, a rescue image "In Help Mode L" is displayed in the upper left corner of the effect display device 1600 as a status display showing the current game state, indicating that the low probability time-saving state B is being controlled. Also, since the low probability time-saving state B makes it easier to receive the game ball B into the variable winning hole 2003, an arrow bar "Hit Left!" is displayed in the upper right corner of the effect display device 1600 to instruct the player to fire the ball at the variable winning hole 2003 located to the left of the effect display device 1600.

If neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is reserved during the execution of the Help Mode L performance, the variable display of the first decorative symbol 1600a1 (first special symbol) or the second decorative symbol 1600a2 (second special symbol) does not start, and a volume adjustment bar indicating the currently set volume level and a light adjustment bar indicating the currently set light intensity level are displayed at the bottom of the performance display device 1600. The volume adjustment bar can change the memory display as the volume level is changed by operating the volume button, and the light intensity adjustment bar can change the memory display as the light intensity level is changed by operating the light intensity button. In addition, the volume level and light intensity level can be changed during the variable display and non-variable display of the first decorative symbol 1600a1 (first special symbol) and the second decorative symbol 1600a2 (second special symbol). In this way, after the variable display of the first decorative pattern 1600a1 (first special pattern) and the second decorative pattern 1600a2 (second special pattern) has stopped, if the first special pattern and the second special pattern are not reserved and the variable display of the first decorative pattern 1600a1 (first special pattern) and the second decorative pattern 1600a2 (second special pattern) is not being executed, the volume adjustment bar and the light intensity adjustment bar are displayed, so that the player can know that it is a period during which the volume level and the light intensity level can be changed. In addition, the above-mentioned rescue image and arrow bar can be continuously displayed even when the variable display of the first decorative pattern 1600a1 (first special pattern) and the second decorative pattern 1600a2 (second special pattern) is not being executed, and are continuously displayed at a display position that is not hidden (or does not overlap) by the above-mentioned volume adjustment bar and light intensity adjustment bar, so that the player does not mistakenly leave the seat even in the low probability time-saving state B. Additionally, the aforementioned rescue prediction image B "Help is on the way!" and rescue suggestion image "CHANCE!" can also be displayed continuously when the variable display of the first decorative pattern 1600a1 (first special pattern) and the second decorative pattern 1600a2 (second special pattern) is not being executed, and these images are also continuously displayed in a display position that is not hidden (or overlaps) by the volume control bar or light control bar described above, so that the player will not mistakenly leave their seat even when the low probability time-saving state B is close by.

In addition, during the execution of the help mode L performance, if neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is reserved, and furthermore, no balls enter the various winning slots until a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed, a demo performance (demonstration) that introduces the concept of the pachinko machine 1 is executed on the performance display device 1600. At the end of the demo performance, a "prevention display for player addiction" (not shown) is also executed to prevent the player from becoming too addicted to the game. The rescue image and arrow bar described above can be continuously displayed during the demo performance, and are continuously displayed in a display position that is not hidden (or overlapped) by the demo performance or the "prevention display for player addiction" described above, so that the player does not accidentally leave the seat even though the low probability time-saving state B is in effect. In addition, the aforementioned rescue prediction image B "Help is on the way!" and rescue suggestion image "CHANCE!" can also be displayed continuously during the demo performance, and these images are also continuously displayed in a display position that is not hidden (or overlapped) by the demo performance or the "addiction prevention display", so that the player does not accidentally leave the seat even when the low probability time-saving state B is close by. Note that if a ball enters any of the various winning holes such as the variable winning hole 2003 while the demo performance is being executed, only the demo performance ends at that point, and the rescue image and arrow bar continue to be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 242 (K), when the Help Mode L effect is being executed, that is, when the low probability time-saving state B is being controlled, and the 700th changing display of the first decorative pattern 1600a1 (first special pattern) or the second decorative pattern 1600a2 (second special pattern) is executed (when the total number of changes of the special patterns in the low probability state reaches 1300), a rescue end image saying "Last Help!" is displayed in the upper right corner of the effect display device 1600 to notify that this is the last changing display of the first decorative pattern 1600a1 (first special pattern) or the second decorative pattern 1600a2 (second special pattern) during the execution of "Help Mode L".

As shown in FIG. 242(L), after the execution of the help mode L effect, that is, after the 700th stopping of the display of the first decorative pattern 1600a1 (first special pattern) and the second decorative pattern 1600a2 (second special pattern) during the control of the low-probability time-saving state B (after the display of the special pattern stops changing for the 1300th time when the total number of times the special pattern changes in the low-probability state has been reached), the low-probability time-saving state B ends and the game moves to a low-probability non-time-saving state, so that "Normal" is displayed in the upper left corner of the effect display device 1600 to notify that the current game state is a low-probability non-time-saving state that has passed through "help mode L". In addition, a rescue history image "Help L: 1 time" is displayed in the upper right corner of the effect display device 1600 so that it can be understood from the outside that "Help mode L" has been executed once. In addition, while the Help Mode L effect is being executed, that is, while the low probability time-saving state B is being controlled, if the lottery result is a "jackpot" before the 700th variable display of the first decorative pattern 1600a1 (first special pattern) and the second decorative pattern 1600a2 (second special pattern) is executed, the low probability time-saving state B ends and the game state transitions to the type of "jackpot," so the Help Mode L effect ends at that point.

Next, a specific example of the presentation when the variable display of the second special symbol starts while the variable display of the first special symbol is in progress will be described with reference to Figure 243. Figure 241(B) shows a time chart showing the change in the game state when the variable display of the second special symbol starts while the variable display of the first special symbol is in progress, and Figure 243 shows a specific example of the presentation as the time chart progresses. Note that Figures 243(A)-(F) are the same as Figures 242(A)-(F), and Figures 243(K)-(M) are the same as Figures 242(J)-(L), so explanations are omitted and only the differences are described.

As shown in FIG. 243(F), during the control of the low probability non-time-saving state, at the start of the display of the first decorative pattern 1600a1 (first special pattern), the count of the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state (relief counter) is counted up, and after it is determined that the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state is 599 times, as shown in FIG. 243(G), when the display of the second decorative pattern 1600a2 (second special pattern) starts during the execution of the display of the first decorative pattern 1600a1 (first special pattern), the count of the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state (relief counter) is counted up, and it is determined that the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state is 600 times. Then, when the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state reaches 600 times, the low probability non-time-saving state is transitioned to the low probability time-saving state B at the start of the display of the second decorative pattern 1600a2 (second special pattern).

In addition, during the execution of the variable display of the first decorative pattern 1600a1 (first special pattern), at the start of the variable display of the second decorative pattern 1600a2 (second special pattern), i.e., at the transition to the low probability time-saving state B, the effect display device 1600 starts the help mode L start effect using lamp illumination and audio output. In this example, a count effect (help mode L precursor effect) that counts down to the start of the help mode L effect is executed using the stopped pattern of the first decorative pattern 1600a1, but even though the count effect is not executed to the end, the help mode L start effect is suddenly started during the execution of the variable display of the first decorative pattern 1600a1 (first special pattern), making it appear as if a sudden transition to the low probability time-saving state B has occurred.

Specifically, the performance display device 1600 displays a rescue confirmation image saying "Entering Help Mode L!!" to notify players that they will enter "Help Mode L" when the Help Mode L start performance begins. Also, while the Help Mode L start performance is being executed, the display of the changes in the first decorative pattern 1600a1 (first special pattern) being executed is displayed small in the upper right corner of the upper area of the performance display device 1600, and the display of the changes in the second decorative pattern 1600a2 (second special pattern) being executed is displayed small in the lower right corner of the lower area of the performance display device 1600.

As shown in FIG. 243(H), during the execution of the help mode L start performance, the variable display of the first decorative pattern 1600a1 (first special pattern) being executed is displayed as a normal miss stop pattern of "599" as the stop pattern of the first decorative pattern 1600a1, provided that the lottery result of the first special pattern is a miss. Also, as shown in FIG. 243(I), after the stop display of the first decorative pattern 1600a1, if there is a reserved first special pattern, a variable display of a new first decorative pattern 1600a1 (first special pattern) is started. Also, as shown in FIG. 243(J), regarding the variable display of the second decorative pattern 1600a2 (second special pattern) being executed, the variable display of the second decorative pattern 1600a2 is displayed as a normal miss stop pattern of "219" as the stop pattern of the second decorative pattern 1600a2, provided that the lottery result of the second special pattern is a miss. In addition, if a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the Help Mode L start performance, i.e., since the transition to the low probability time-saving state B, the Help Mode L start performance will end.

In this example, the first decorative pattern 1600a1 is displayed in the upper area of the performance display device 1600, and the second decorative pattern 1600a2 is displayed in the lower area of the performance display device 1600. However, since the main game is to display the first special pattern during the control of the low probability non-time-saving state, the performance display device 1600 may display the first decorative pattern 1600a1 in a visible manner and the second decorative pattern 1600a2 in a difficult or impossible manner. In such a case, during the display of the first decorative pattern 1600a1 (first special pattern), it is not clear whether the second special pattern has started to display the second special pattern, and when the number of times the special pattern has changed in the low probability state reaches 600 due to the start of the display of the second special pattern, the help mode L start performance is suddenly started, and it can be made to look as if the game has suddenly moved to the low probability time-saving state B.

In the above, when the second special symbol variable display is started while the first special symbol variable display is being executed, the help mode L start effect is started at the start of the second special symbol variable display (the transition to the low probability time-saving state B). However, while the first special symbol variable display is being executed, a count effect (help mode L precursor effect) is executed using the stopped pattern of the first decorative pattern 1600a1 to count down to the start of the help mode L effect. Therefore, if the second special symbol variable display is started while the first special symbol variable display is being executed and the help mode L start effect is started, the count effect will not be executed to the end. For this reason, for example, the effect display device 1600 may wait until the count effect is executed to the end before starting the help mode L start effect. Such a configuration will be described below.

Figure 244 is a time chart showing the change in the game state when the start of the Help Mode L start effect is delayed. Figure 241 (B) explains the case where the Help Mode L start effect starts at the start of the variable display of the second special pattern (the point of transition to low probability time-saving state B), but Figure 244 explains only the parts that are different from that.

As shown in FIG. 244, when transitioning from the low probability non-time-saving state to the low probability time-saving state B, the effect display device 1600 executes the help mode L start effect using lamp illumination and audio output. Of these, the effect display device 1600 does not start the help mode L start effect at the start of the pattern change X of the second special pattern when the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state reaches 600 (rescue count counter = 600), i.e., at the time of transition to the low probability time-saving state B, but starts the help mode L start effect after the stopped display of the pattern change D of the first special pattern that was being executed at the start of the pattern change X of the second special pattern. Here, before the pattern change X of the second special pattern, when the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state reaches 600 times (rescue count counter = 600), the pattern change D of the first special pattern is started as the 599th pattern change, and when the pattern change D of the first special pattern is executed, a help mode L precursor effect is executed, which counts down to the start of the help mode L effect (for example, a count effect that notifies the number of times the special pattern has changed in the low probability state). In this regard, by not starting the help mode L start effect and continuing to execute the help mode L precursor effect until the pattern change D of the first special pattern is stopped and displayed, the countdown to the start of the help mode L effect does not suddenly end, and a game can be played without discomfort. However, with respect to the effect display device 1600, a cut-in image or the like may be displayed during the execution of the help mode L precursor effect at the time of transition to the low probability time-saving state B, so that the player is aware that the game has transitioned to the low probability time-saving state B.

On the other hand, in the case of lamp illumination and sound output, the help mode L start effect is started at the start of the pattern change X of the second special pattern when the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state reaches 600 (rescue count counter = 600), that is, at the transition to the low probability time-saving state B. In other words, in the case of lamp illumination and sound output, the help mode L start effect is started prior to the effect display device 1600. In this way, in the effect display device 1600, the help mode L start effect is not started at the transition to the low probability time-saving state B, whereas in the case of lamp illumination and sound output, the help mode L start effect is started at the transition to the low probability time-saving state B. Therefore, even if the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state reaches 600 (rescue count counter = 600) during the execution of the pattern change D of the first special pattern, it is possible to be aware that the transition to the low probability time-saving state B has occurred.

Next, a specific example of the presentation when the start of the Help Mode L start presentation is delayed will be described with reference to FIG. 245. FIG. 244 shows a time chart showing the change in the game state when the start of the Help Mode L start presentation is delayed, and FIG. 245 shows a specific example of the presentation as the time chart progresses. Note that FIG. 243(A)-(F) is the same as FIG. 242(A)-(F), and FIG. 243(M)-(O) is the same as FIG. 242(J)-(L), so explanations are omitted and only the differences are described.

As shown in FIG. 245(F), during the control of the low probability non-time-saving state, at the start of the display of the first decorative pattern 1600a1 (first special pattern), the count of the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state (relief counter) is counted up, and after it is determined that the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state is 599 times, as shown in FIG. 245(G), when the display of the second decorative pattern 1600a2 (second special pattern) starts during the execution of the display of the first decorative pattern 1600a1 (first special pattern), the count of the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state (relief counter) is counted up, and it is determined that the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state is 600 times. Then, when the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state reaches 600 times, the low probability non-time-saving state is transitioned to the low probability time-saving state B at the start of the display of the second decorative pattern 1600a2 (second special pattern).

Although not shown, at the start of the variable display of the second decorative pattern 1600a2 (second special pattern), i.e., at the transition to the low probability time-saving state B, the help mode L start performance is started using lamp illumination and audio output. On the other hand, the performance display device 1600 does not start the help mode L start performance at the start of the variable display of the second decorative pattern 1600a2 (second special pattern), i.e., at the transition to the low probability time-saving state B.

As shown in FIG. 245(H), after the transition to the low probability time-saving state B, the variable display of the first decorative pattern 1600a1 (first special pattern) being executed is selected and set as the stop pattern of the first decorative pattern 1600a1 for a rescue notice, on the condition that the lottery result of the first special pattern is a miss, and the stop pattern is displayed instead of the normal miss stop pattern. Also, when the variable display of the first decorative pattern 1600a1 (first special pattern) stops for the 599th time, a rescue suggestion image "CHANCE!" is displayed in the center of the performance display device 1600, indicating that the next special pattern will enter "Help Mode L". In this example, a counting effect (Help Mode L Premonition effect) that counts down to the start of the Help Mode L effect is executed using the stopped pattern of the first decorative pattern 1600a1, but the start of the Help Mode L start effect in the performance display device 1600 is delayed so that the counting effect is executed to the end. In this way, the Help Mode L start effect does not start until the 599th changing display of the first decorative pattern 1600a1 (first special pattern) is stopped, and the count effect (Help Mode L precursor effect) continues to be executed, so that the countdown to the start of the Help Mode L effect does not suddenly end, allowing for a comfortable gameplay experience.

As shown in FIG. 245(I), after the display of the changing first decorative pattern 1600a1 (first special pattern) is stopped, the display of the changing new first decorative pattern 1600a1 (first special pattern) is started, and after the display of the changing first decorative pattern 1600a1 (first special pattern) is stopped, the performance display device 1600 is used to start the help mode L start performance. In addition, the performance display device 1600 is configured to execute the help mode L start performance until the display of the changing new first decorative pattern 1600a1 (first special pattern) is stopped.

Specifically, the performance display device 1600 displays a rescue confirmation image saying "Entering Help Mode L!!" to notify players that they will enter "Help Mode L" when the Help Mode L start performance begins. Also, while the Help Mode L start performance is being executed, the display of the changes in the first decorative pattern 1600a1 (first special pattern) being executed is displayed small in the upper right corner of the upper area of the performance display device 1600, and the display of the changes in the second decorative pattern 1600a2 (second special pattern) being executed is displayed small in the lower right corner of the lower area of the performance display device 1600.

As shown in FIG. 245(J), during the execution of the Help Mode L start performance, the variable display of the second decorative pattern 1600a2 (second special pattern) being executed is displayed as a normal missing stop pattern of "513" as the stopped pattern of the second decorative pattern 1600a2, provided that the lottery result of the second special pattern is a miss. Then, as shown in FIG. 245(K), after the variable display of the second decorative pattern 1600a2 (second special pattern) is stopped, the variable display of a new second decorative pattern 1600a2 (second special pattern) is started.

As shown in FIG. 245(L), during the execution of the Help Mode L start performance, the variable display of the first decorative pattern 1600a1 (first special pattern) being executed displays the normal missing stopping pattern "854" as the first decorative pattern 1600a1 stopping pattern, provided that the lottery result for the first special pattern is a miss. Also, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the Help Mode L start performance, i.e., the transition to the low probability time-saving state B, the Help Mode L start performance is terminated.

In a configuration such as this example in which the display of the first special pattern and the display of the second special pattern can be executed simultaneously, the display of the second special pattern may start while the display of the first special pattern is changing, and the second special pattern may be displayed stationary before the display of the first special pattern is stopped. Unlike this example, if the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state (relief count counter) is counted at the start of the pattern change, and after the pattern change is stopped when the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state reaches 600 (relief count counter = 600), a transition from the low probability non-time-saving state to the low probability time-saving state B is made, during the change display of the first special pattern when the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state reaches 600 (relief count counter = 600), the change display of the second special pattern is started and the second special pattern is stopped (visually the 600th pattern change is stopped), but the first special pattern, for which the relief count counter = 600, has not yet been stopped and the transition to the low probability time-saving state B has not occurred, which may create an awkward feeling. However, in this example, at the start of the pattern change, the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state (rescue count counter) is counted, and at the start of the pattern change when the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state reaches 600 (rescue count counter = 600), the game transitions to low probability time-saving state B. Therefore, even though the second special pattern as described above is stopped and displayed (visually stopping the 600th pattern change), there is no sense of incongruity that the game has not transitioned to low probability time-saving state B.

In this example, the number of times the special symbol changes displayed on the external device is counted up when the special symbol starts to change, just as the rescue counter is counted up when the special symbol starts to change. In other words, at the start of the pattern change when the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state reaches 600 times (rescue counter = 600), the number of times the special symbol changes displayed on the external device is displayed as 600 times, and it can be determined that the game will move to the low probability time-saving state B. In contrast, as another example, the number of times the special symbol changes displayed on the external device may be counted up when the special symbol stops changing. In such a case, at the start of the pattern change when the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state reaches 600 times (rescue counter = 600), the game will move to the low probability time-saving state B, and at the end of the pattern change, the number of times the special symbol changes displayed on the external device will be displayed as 600 times, but since the game has moved to the low probability time-saving state B before the external device displays 600 times, the player will not have the impression that he or she has suffered a disadvantage. Also, as described above, during the variable display of the first special symbol when the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state reaches 600 (rescue count counter = 600), if the variable display of the second special symbol is started and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed before the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the number of times the special symbol changes displayed on the external device will be displayed as 600 at the time the second special symbol is stopped and displayed. However, in this example, since the transition to the low probability time-saving state B occurs at the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, which is before the external device displays 600 times, the player does not get the impression that he or she has suffered a disadvantage.

[Limitation of setting suggestion effects when ID codes do not match]
(About the ID code)
In this embodiment, a game board 5 that allows the game area 5a to be viewed from the front is attached to the main body frame 4, and a door frame top unit 450 (decorative member) that is attached to the upper front part of the door frame base unit 100 and a performance operation unit 300 (operation device) that is attached to the front of the plate decoration unit 250 and the plate base unit 210 and can be operated by a player are attached to the door frame 3. As shown in FIG. 246, the game board 5, the door frame top unit 450, and the performance operation unit 300 can be attached and detached respectively while the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the island equipment of the game hall, and it is possible to install a set of a predetermined game board 5, a door frame top unit 450, and a performance operation unit 300 as one group for each series of the model. In other words, when changing to a new model series, the game board 5, door frame top unit 450, and presentation operation unit 300 corresponding to the previous model series are removed while the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the island equipment of the game hall, and then the game board 5, door frame top unit 450, and presentation operation unit 300 corresponding to the new model series are attached. With this configuration, when it is desired to completely renew not only the gameplay but also the appearance of the game machine when changing the model, the cost of changing the main frame 4 and door frame 3 (door frame base unit 100) can be suppressed, and the gameplay and appearance of the game machine can be efficiently renewed.

The peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5 is electrically connected to the door frame top relay board (not shown) attached to the door frame top unit 450. The door frame top relay board is for relaying the connection between the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, the door frame top right decorative board 457, the top center speaker, and the top side speaker and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame base unit 100. This allows the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 to control the illumination of various LEDs mounted on, for example, the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457 via the door frame top relay board.

The peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5 is electrically connected to the operation unit relay board 332 attached to the performance operation unit 300. The operation unit relay board 332 is for relaying the connection between the performance operation unit outer decorative board 320 (front decorative board 321 and rear decorative board 322), the button outer decorative board 355, the vibration motor 356, the contact detection sensor main body 358, the button middle decorative board 364, the operation button lifting drive motor 367, the pressure detection sensor 373, the lifting detection sensor 374, the protruding force detection sensor 375, and the protruding force adjustment drive motor 381 and the plate unit relay board 214 of the plate base unit 210. As a result, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 can control the illumination of various LEDs mounted on the front decorative board 321 and the rear decorative board 322, for example, via the operation unit relay board 332.

247, the door frame top relay board attached to the door frame top unit 450 and the operation unit relay board 332 attached to the performance operation unit 300 are pre-stored with a unique ID code, which is special information with a unique code (a code that exists only once in the world) for identifying the series of the machine. This ID code is unique for each series of the machine and cannot be rewritten even by using an external device. The peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 is capable of retrieving and referencing the ID code from the door frame top relay board and the operation unit relay board 332. The RAM built into the peripheral control unit 1511 stores a table for referencing the ID code attached to the door frame top relay board and the operation unit relay board 332. The ID code stored in this table matches the ID code of the door frame top relay board attached to the door frame top unit 450 that matches the series of the machine for the game board 5, and the ID code of the operation unit relay board 332 attached to the performance operation unit 300 that matches the series of the machine.

When the power is turned on, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 judges within a predetermined judgment period whether the ID code stored in the reference table matches the ID code of the door frame top relay board attached to the door frame top unit 450, and whether the ID code stored in the reference table matches the ID code of the operation unit relay board 332 attached to the performance operation unit 300. Here, when a door frame top unit 450 of a matching model series (in a regular relationship) is attached to the game board 5, the ID code stored in the reference table matches the ID code of the door frame top relay board attached to the door frame top unit 450, while when a door frame top unit 450 of a non-matching model series (not in a regular relationship) is attached to the game board 5, the respective ID codes do not match. Similarly, when a presentation operation unit 300 of a matching model series (regular relationship) is attached to the game board 5, the ID code stored in the reference table will match the ID code of the operation section relay board 332 attached to the presentation operation unit 300; on the other hand, when a presentation operation unit 300 of a mismatched model series (not regular relationship) is attached to the game board 5, the ID code stored in the reference table will not match the ID code of the operation section relay board 332 attached to the presentation operation unit 300.

In addition, if only the ID code of the door frame top unit 450 does not match the game board 5, the performance display device 1600 is used to execute error notification pattern 1 (for example, display "Please check the type of door frame top unit") to notify that a performance operation unit 300 that does not match the model series is installed. In addition, if only the ID code of the performance operation unit 300 does not match the game board 5, the performance display device 1600 is used to execute error notification pattern 2 (for example, display "Please check the type of performance operation unit") to notify that a performance operation unit 300 that does not match the model series is installed. In addition, if neither the ID code of the door frame top unit 450 nor the ID code of the performance operation unit 300 match the game board 5, the performance display device 1600 is used to execute error notification pattern 3 (for example, display "Please check the type of door frame top unit and performance operation unit") to notify that a door frame top unit 450 that does not match the model series and a performance operation unit 300 that does not match the model series are installed.

On the other hand, if the door frame top unit 450 or the performance operation unit 300 is not attached to the door frame 3, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 cannot retrieve and refer to the ID code from the door frame top relay board or the operation unit relay board 332 when the power is turned on. In such a case, when the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 determines whether the ID code stored in the reference table matches the ID code of the door frame top relay board attached to the door frame top unit 450, and whether the ID code stored in the reference table matches the ID code of the operation unit relay board 332 attached to the performance operation unit 300, the ID code is not input to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, and the ID code cannot be confirmed. Specifically, when the power is turned on, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the ID code is not connected if the ID code is not input from the door frame top relay board or the operation unit relay board 332 even after a predetermined judgment period has passed.

In addition, if only the ID code of the door frame top unit 450 cannot be confirmed (cannot be obtained) for the game board 5, the performance display device 1600 is used to execute error notification pattern 4 (for example, display "Please check the connection of the door frame top unit") to notify that the performance operation unit 300 is not attached. In addition, if only the ID code of the performance operation unit 300 cannot be confirmed (cannot be obtained) for the game board 5, the performance display device 1600 is used to execute error notification pattern 5 (for example, display "Please check the connection of the performance operation unit") to notify that the performance operation unit 300 is not attached. In addition, if neither the ID code of the door frame top unit 450 nor the ID code of the performance operation unit 300 can be confirmed (cannot be obtained) for the game board 5, the performance display device 1600 is used to execute error notification pattern 6 (for example, display "Please check the connection of the door frame top unit and the performance operation unit") to notify that the door frame top unit 450 and the performance operation unit 300 are not attached.

Here, for the game board 5, regardless of whether the ID code of the door frame top relay board attached to the door frame top unit 450 and the ID code of the operation unit relay board 332 attached to the performance operation unit 300 match, the various LEDs mounted on the light-emitting board of the game board 5 can be controlled to emit light when normal performances (changing performances and non-changing performances) are being performed. Similarly, for the game board 5, even if there are parts of the door frame top unit 450 or the performance operation unit 300 whose ID codes cannot be confirmed, the various LEDs mounted on the light-emitting board of the game board 5 can be controlled to emit light when normal performances (changing performances and non-changing performances) are being performed.

In addition, for the door frame top unit 450, if the ID code stored in the reference table matches the ID code of the door frame top relay board attached to the door frame top unit 450, during normal performance (changing performance or non-changing performance), the various LEDs mounted on, for example, the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457 can be controlled to emit light via the door frame top relay board, whereas if they do not match, the various LEDs mounted on the light-emitting board of the door frame top unit 450 that does not match the model series (not in a regular relationship) are not controlled to emit light, and the various LEDs are turned off. In addition, if the door frame top unit 450 is not attached and the ID code of the door frame top relay board cannot be confirmed, the various LEDs mounted on the light-emitting board of the door frame top unit 450 are not controlled to emit light.

Similarly, for the performance operation unit 300, if the ID code stored in the reference table matches the ID code of the operation unit relay board 332 attached to the performance operation unit 300, the various LEDs mounted on, for example, the front decorative board 321 and the rear decorative board 322 can be controlled to emit light via the operation unit relay board 332 during normal performance (changing performance or non-changing performance), whereas if they do not match, the various LEDs mounted on the light-emitting board of the performance operation unit 300 that does not match the model series (not in a regular relationship) are not controlled to emit light, and the various LEDs are turned off. Also, if the performance operation unit 300 is not attached and the operation unit relay board 332 cannot be confirmed, the various LEDs mounted on the light-emitting board of the performance operation unit 300 are not controlled to emit light.

In addition, when a predetermined execution condition is met, when controlling the illumination of the various LEDs mounted on the illumination board of the game board 5, the various LEDs mounted on the illumination board of the door frame top unit 450 and the various LEDs mounted on the illumination board of the performance operation unit 300, which are components located around the game board 5, are controlled in cooperation with each other. This allows an integrated illumination performance to be performed using not only the game board 5 but also the door frame top unit 450 and the performance operation unit 300. However, for parts of the door frame top unit 450 and the performance operation unit 300 whose ID codes do not match those of the game board 5, the various LEDs mounted on the illumination board of the mismatched parts are not controlled to illuminate, and therefore cannot participate in the illumination performance. Similarly, for parts of the door frame top unit 450 and the performance operation unit 300 that are not attached to the door frame 3 and whose ID codes have not been confirmed, the various LEDs mounted on the illumination board of the parts that have not been confirmed are not controlled to illuminate, and therefore cannot participate in the illumination performance.

In this example, the game board 5 can be attached and detached to the main body frame 4, and the game board 5 can be installed in a predetermined main body frame 4. The peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5 is electrically connected to the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4. The interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 is connected to the left dish decorative board 273, the right dish decorative board 278, the upper left side decorative board 422, the lower left side decorative board 423, the upper right side decorative board 432, the lower right side decorative board 433, the central top decorative board 455, the top left decorative board 456, and the top right decorative board 457 of the door frame, which are provided around the door window 101a in the door frame 3, via the main relay board 104 and the sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3. As a result, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 can control the illumination of various LEDs mounted on the left dish decorative board 273, the right dish decorative board 278, the upper left side decorative board 422, the lower left side decorative board 423, the upper right side decorative board 432, the lower right side decorative board 433, the top center decorative board 455, the top left decorative board 456, and the top right decorative board 457 of the door frame, which are arranged around the door window 101a in the door frame 3, via the interface board 635 of the main frame 4, and the main and secondary relay boards 104 and 105 of the door frame 3.

As shown in FIG. 247, the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 is pre-stored with a unique ID code, which is special information with a unique code (a code that exists only once in the world) to identify the model series. This ID code is unique to each model series and cannot be rewritten even by an external device. The peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 is capable of retrieving and referencing the ID code from the interface board 635. The RAM built into the peripheral control unit 1511 stores a table for referencing the ID code attached to the interface board 635. The ID code stored in this table matches the ID code of the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 that is in the same model series.

When the power is turned on, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 judges whether the ID code stored in the reference table matches the ID code of the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 within a predetermined judgment period. Here, if the game board 5 is attached to a main body frame 4 with a matching model series (regular relationship), the ID code stored in the reference table matches the ID code of the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4, while if the game board 5 is attached to a main body frame 4 with a mismatched model series (not regular relationship), the ID code stored in the reference table does not match the ID code of the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4. If the ID code stored in the reference table does not match the ID code of the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4, the game board 5 is attached to a main body frame 4 with a mismatched model series (not regular relationship), so launch control to launch the game ball B from the ball launcher 540 cannot be performed, and the game is stopped.

As mentioned above, when a specific execution condition is met, the various LEDs mounted on the light-emitting board of the game board 5 are controlled to emit light, and the various LEDs mounted on the light-emitting board of the door frame top unit 450 and the various LEDs mounted on the light-emitting board of the performance operation unit 300, which are components located around the game board 5, are controlled to emit light in cooperation with each other. However, the various LEDs mounted on the light-emitting board of the door frame 3 can also be controlled to emit light in cooperation with each other. This makes it possible to execute an integrated light-emitting performance using not only the game board 5, the door frame top unit 450, and the performance operation unit 300, but also the door frame 3.

(About the setting suggestion)
In this embodiment, while the patterns are changing or not changing, various LEDs mounted on the light-emitting board of the game board 5, various LEDs mounted on the light-emitting board of the door frame top unit 450, various LEDs mounted on the light-emitting board of the performance operation unit 300, various LEDs mounted on the light-emitting board of the door frame 3, etc. are used to execute a setting suggestion performance that suggests the currently set setting value. The currently set setting value is stored in the RAM on the main control board 1310 side, and by sending a command related to the currently set setting value to the peripheral control board 1510 side at a predetermined timing (when the setting value change is completed, when the patterns start to change, etc.), the currently set setting value can be grasped on the peripheral control board 1510 side.

In the setting suggestion effect, one of the suggestion effects A to D is executed as an effect according to the currently set setting value. Specifically, an execution decision (execution lottery) is made as to which of the suggestion effects A to D will be executed, and in this execution decision, when it is decided to execute the suggestion effect, a predetermined random value X is obtained by the peripheral control MPU, and one of the following is determined according to the currently set setting value and the random value X: suggestion effect A suggesting a setting value of 6, suggestion effect B suggesting that a high setting value (setting values 4 to 6) is highly likely, suggestion effect C suggesting that an even setting value (setting values 2, 4, 6) is highly likely, or suggestion effect D suggesting that an odd setting value (1, 3, 5) is highly likely.

Here, when the currently set value is set value 1, the suggestive performance distribution table 1, which determines the suggestive performance D with a high probability (suggestive performance A:suggestive performance B:suggestive performance C:suggestive performance D = 0:1:1:8), is referenced to determine the performance according to the random number value X. Also, when the currently set value is set value 2, the suggestive performance distribution table 2, which determines the suggestive performance C with a high probability (suggestive performance A:suggestive performance B:suggestive performance C:suggestive performance D = 0:1:8:1), is referenced to determine the performance according to the random number value X. Also, when the currently set value is set value 3, the suggestive performance distribution table 3, which determines the suggestive performance D with a high probability (suggestive performance A:suggestive performance B:suggestive performance C:suggestive performance D = 0:1:1:8), is referenced to determine the performance according to the random number value X. Also, when the currently set value is set value 4, the suggestive performance distribution table 4, which determines the suggestive performance B and suggestive performance C with a high probability (suggestive performance A:suggestive performance B:suggestive performance C:suggestive performance D = 0:5:4:1), is referenced to determine the performance according to the random number value X. In addition, when the currently set value is set value 5, the suggestive performance distribution table 5, which determines the suggestive performance B and the suggestive performance D with a high probability (suggestive performance A:suggestive performance B:suggestive performance C:suggestive performance D = 0:5:1:4), is referenced to determine the performance according to the random number value X. In addition, when the currently set value is set value 6, the suggestive performance distribution table 6, which determines the suggestive performance A to D with a certain probability (suggestive performance A:suggestive performance B:suggestive performance C:suggestive performance D = 3:4:2:1), including the suggestive performance A that suggests the setting value 6 that cannot be determined when the setting value is 1 to 5, is referenced to determine the performance according to the random number value X. In other words, since the suggestive performances A to D may be output regardless of the current setting value, the setting value is not determined, but when the suggestive performance A is executed, it is determined that the currently set setting value is set value 6. In this way, when the suggestive performance is executed, expectations can be held according to the suggestion of the setting value that can be grasped from the suggestive performance.

When the suggestive effects are executed, the various LEDs mounted on the light-emitting board of the game board 5, the various LEDs mounted on the light-emitting board of the door frame top unit 450, the various LEDs mounted on the light-emitting board of the effect operation unit 300, the various LEDs mounted on the light-emitting board of the door frame 3, etc. are controlled to emit light using effect data that causes each type of suggestive effect to emit light in a predetermined light-emitting color. Specifically, the light is controlled so that the suggestive effect A, which suggests a setting value of 6, lights up in a rainbow light-emitting pattern (rainbow colors), the suggestive effect B, which suggests that a high setting value (setting values 4 to 6) is highly likely, flashes red, the suggestive effect C, which suggests that an even setting value (setting values 2, 4, 6) is highly likely, flashes blue, and the suggestive effect D, which suggests that an odd setting value (1, 3, 5) is highly likely, flashes green.

As shown in Figures 248 and 249, the various LEDs mounted on the light-emitting board of the game board 5, the various LEDs mounted on the light-emitting board of the door frame top unit 450, the various LEDs mounted on the light-emitting board of the performance operation unit 300, and the various LEDs mounted on the light-emitting board of the door frame 3 can be divided into multiple groups and the light emission can be controlled for each group, and each group can be made to emit light in a specified light color.

First, as described in detail above, the rear-front peripheral decorative unit 3200 attached to the game board 5 comprises a rear-front peripheral decorative body 3201 which is formed in a ring shape along the periphery of the game area 5a when assembled to the game board 5, and a rear-front peripheral decorative substrate (not shown) on which a number of LEDs are mounted for illuminating and decorating the rear-front peripheral decorative body 3201, and the rear-front peripheral decorative body 3201 is divided into a number of circumferential sections which can each be independently illuminated and decorated by the multiple LEDs on the rear-front peripheral decorative substrate. As shown in FIG. 248, the multiple LEDs mounted on the rear front peripheral decorative board as the light-emitting board of the game board 5 are divided into LED1, the multiple LEDs mounted on the rear front peripheral decorative board for lighting and decorating the upper left part of the rear front peripheral decorative body 3201, LED2, the multiple LEDs mounted on the rear front peripheral decorative board for lighting and decorating the lower left part, LED3, the multiple LEDs mounted on the rear front peripheral decorative board for lighting and decorating the lower right part, and LED4, the multiple LEDs mounted on the rear front peripheral decorative board for lighting and decorating the upper right part, and it is possible to control the light emission of the LEDs for each group of LED1 to 4 to control the light emission of the LEDs of the same group to the same color.

As shown in Figure 249, the various LEDs mounted on the light-emitting board of the door frame top unit 450 are divided into LED5, which consists of multiple LEDs mounted on the door frame top left decorative board 456, LED6, which consists of multiple LEDs mounted on the door frame top center decorative board 455, and LED7, which consists of multiple LEDs mounted on the door frame top right decorative board 457. It is possible to control the light emission of the LEDs for each group of LED5 to 7 so that the LEDs in the same group emit the same light color.

The various LEDs mounted on the light-emitting board of the performance operation unit 300 are divided into LED8, with the multiple LEDs mounted on the front decorative board 321 of the performance operation unit outer periphery decorative board 320 being divided into LED9, and the multiple LEDs mounted on the rear decorative board 322 being divided into LED9, etc., and it is possible to control the light emission of the LEDs for each group of LED8-9 so that the LEDs in the same group emit the same light color.

The various LEDs mounted on the light-emitting board of the door frame 3 are divided into LED10, which are the multiple LEDs mounted on the upper left side decorative board 422 of the door frame left side unit 420, LED11, which are the multiple LEDs mounted on the lower left side decorative board 423 of the door frame left side unit 420, LED12, which are the multiple LEDs mounted on the left decorative board 273 provided behind the left decorative lens 272 and the right decorative board 278 provided behind the right decorative lens 277, LED13, which are the multiple LEDs mounted on the lower right side decorative board 433 of the door frame right side unit 430, and LED14, which are the multiple LEDs mounted on the upper right side decorative board 432 of the door frame right side unit 430. It is possible to control the light emission of the LEDs for each group of LED11 to 14 so that the LEDs of the same group are controlled to emit the same color.

In addition to the above-mentioned back front peripheral decorative board, the light-emitting board of the game board 5 includes a variable winning hole decorative board (not shown) for lighting and decorating the variable winning hole 2003, a first starting hole decorative board (not shown) for lighting and decorating the first starting hole 2004, and a second starting hole decorative board (not shown) for lighting and decorating the second starting hole 2005. In this example, among the various LEDs mounted on the light-emitting board of the game board 5, the multiple LEDs mounted on the variable winning hole decorative board are divided into LED15, the multiple LEDs mounted on the first starting hole decorative board are divided into LED16, and the multiple LEDs mounted on the second starting hole decorative board are divided into LED17, and the LEDs can be controlled to emit light for each group of LED15-17, so that the LEDs in the same group can be controlled to emit light of the same color.

Figure 250 is a timing chart showing an example of a suggestive effect executed as an effect while the symbols are changing. Here, we will explain a case where, when the power is turned on, the ID codes of the door frame top unit 450 and the effect operation unit 300 match with the game board 5, and a light-emitting effect in which the lights are lit in a rainbow light pattern is executed as suggestive effect A, which suggests the set value 6, while the symbols are changing.

First, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives a variation pattern command from the main control board 1310, it starts a variation display such as a decorative pattern variation display on the performance display device 1600 in synchronization with the special pattern variation display as a performance corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command, and controls the illumination of LEDs 1-4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5-7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8-9 on the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10-14 on the door frame 3 in conjunction with the display on the performance display device 1600 (timing t0). Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the decorative pattern variation display reaches a predetermined timing, a button operation promotion performance is executed in which the performance display device 1600 displays a message prompting the performance operation unit 301 of the performance operation unit 300 (for example, "Press the performance operation button!").

Then, at timing t1, when the player presses the performance operation section 301 of the performance operation unit 300, or when the button effective period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed without the performance operation section 301 of the performance operation unit 300 being pressed, the LEDs 1-2 of the game board 5 are illuminated in "red," the LEDs 3-4 of the game board 5 are illuminated in "purple," the LEDs 5-6 of the door frame top unit 450 are illuminated in "blue," the LEDs 7 of the door frame top unit 450 and the LEDs 8 of the door frame 3 are illuminated in "green," the LEDs 9 of the door frame 3 and the LEDs 10 of the door frame 3 are illuminated in "orange," the LEDs 11-12 of the door frame 3 are illuminated in "yellow," and the LEDs 13-14 of the door frame 3 are illuminated in "white." In other words, the LEDs 1-4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5-7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8-9 of the performance operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10-14 of the door frame 3 are illuminated in different colors for each of the two groups.

And for LEDs 1-4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5-7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8-9 on the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10-14 on the door frame 3, every predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds), the LEDs emitting "red" light are changed to "purple," the LEDs emitting "purple" light to "blue," the LEDs emitting "blue" light to "green," the LEDs emitting "green" light to "orange," the LEDs emitting "orange" light to "yellow," the LEDs emitting "yellow" light to "white," and the LEDs emitting "white" light to "red." In this way, for LEDs 1-4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5-7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8-9 on the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10-14 on the door frame 3, the light emission color of the LEDs in each of the two groups is changed in a predetermined order of "red → purple → blue → green → orange → yellow → white → red" every specified period (for example, 0.1 seconds), and such regular changes are repeated until timing t10 is reached (for example, for 5 seconds).

In this way, the LEDs 1-4 on the game board 5, the LEDs 5-7 on the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8-9 on the performance operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10-14 on the door frame 3 are controlled to switch between multiple light colors in sequence in a short unit of light emission time, making it possible to visually recognize that these LEDs are working together to emit light in a rainbow light pattern, and it is possible to execute a light emission performance with impact. Also, the LEDs 1-4 on the game board 5, the LEDs 5-7 on the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8-9 on the performance operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10-14 on the door frame 3 are controlled in a linked manner so that the LEDs 1-14 emit light in multiple colors so that the LEDs 1-14 emit different light colors for each of the two groups, and by switching the light colors in a short period of time, it is possible to execute a light emission performance with more impact than usual.

In this example, multiple LEDs are used to emit seven colors simultaneously in a rainbow light emission pattern, and each emitted color is switched regularly, but the emitted colors do not have to be seven colors that appear simultaneously, and it is sufficient if three or more predetermined colors appear simultaneously.

On the other hand, when a light-emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light-emitting pattern is executed as suggestive effect A that suggests setting value 6, LEDs 1-4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5-7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8-9 on the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10-14 on the door frame 3 are involved, but LEDs 15-17 on the game board 5 are not involved. And, for LEDs 15-17 on the game board 5, during the execution period of suggestive effect A, the light-emitting effect continues according to the change pattern, regardless of the light-emitting colors that make up the rainbow light-emitting pattern.

In addition, as a suggestive effect A suggesting the setting value 6, during the execution period of the light-emitting effect in which the light is lit in a rainbow light-emitting mode, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is divided into multiple display areas, and a rainbow-mode effect image is displayed in which each of the multiple display areas is displayed in a different display color as the effect A, which indicates the setting value 6. In such a rainbow-mode effect image, the display color displayed in each of the multiple display areas is changed in a predetermined order of "red → purple → blue → green → orange → yellow → white → red" every predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds), and such regular changes are repeated until timing t10 is reached (for example, 5 seconds). Note that the target for displaying the rainbow-mode effect image may be an effect image displayed in the entire display area of the effect display device 1600, such as a background image, or an effect image displayed in a part of the display area of the effect display device 1600, such as an effect image of a character or item.

As described above in detail, the back-upper front performance unit 3300 attached to the game board 5 includes a back-upper front decorative body 3310 that is rectangular and long in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, a back-upper front decorative board (not shown) that is provided behind the back-upper front decorative body 3310 and has multiple LEDs mounted on the front, and a back-upper front lifting unit (not shown) that raises and lowers the back-upper front decorative body 3310. The back-upper front decorative body 3310 is provided so that the seven sumo rankings such as "yokozuna", "ozeki", and "sekiwake" are lined up from the left, and the seven rankings can be independently illuminated and decorated by the LEDs of the back-upper front decorative board. In this example, as a suggestion performance A suggesting the setting value 6, during the execution period of the illumination performance in which the illumination is lit in a rainbow illumination mode, the seven ranking display bodies are each lit in a rainbow illumination mode that emits different illumination colors. In such a rainbow light-emitting display, the color of the light emitted for each of the seven numbers changes in a predetermined order: "red → purple → blue → green → orange → yellow → white → red," and this regular change is repeated until timing t10 is reached (for example, for five seconds).

As explained above, when suggestion effect A, which suggests set value 6, is executed while the patterns are changing, LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3 are involved in executing a light-emitting effect in which they light up in a rainbow light pattern; similarly, when suggestion effects B to D are executed, LEDs 1 to 14 are involved in executing a light-emitting effect. In other words, when suggesting effect B, which suggests that a high setting value (setting values 4 to 6) is highly likely, LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3 are involved in a red flashing light effect, when suggesting effect C, which suggests that an even setting value (setting values 2, 4, 6) is highly likely, LEDs 1 to 14 are also involved in a blue flashing light effect, and when suggesting effect D, which suggests that an odd setting value (1, 3, 5) is highly likely, LEDs 1 to 14 are also involved in a green flashing light effect.

Specifically, when executing suggestive performance B, which suggests that a high setting value (setting values 4 to 6) is highly likely, the player presses the performance operation section 301 of the performance operation unit 300 at timing t1, or when the button effective period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed without pressing the performance operation section 301 of the performance operation unit 300, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the performance operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are illuminated to flash in "red". In addition, when executing suggestive performance C, which suggests that an even setting value (setting values 2, 4, 6) is highly likely, the LEDs 1 to 14 are also illuminated to flash in "blue". In addition, when executing suggestive performance D, which suggests that an odd setting value (1, 3, 5) is highly likely, the LEDs 1 to 14 are also illuminated to flash in "green". In other words, LEDs 1-4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5-7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8-9 on the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10-14 on the door frame 3 are illuminated to flash with the same light color for each group.

(Restrictions on setting suggestion effects when ID codes do not match)
In the above, a case has been described where the ID codes of the door frame top unit 450 and the performance operation unit 300 match with the game board 5 when the power is turned on, but if either or both of the ID codes of the door frame top unit 450 and the performance operation unit 300 do not match with the game board 5, at least a part of the light emitting effects in the light emitting colors corresponding to the suggestive effects A to D are restricted when a suggestive effect is executed. Similarly, if either or both of the door frame top unit 450 and the performance operation unit 300 are not connected to the door frame 3, at least a part of the light emitting effects in the light emitting colors corresponding to the suggestive effects A to D are restricted when a suggestive effect is executed.

In this example, when the ID code of the door frame top unit 450 matches the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450 can be controlled to emit light, whereas when the ID codes do not match, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450 are not controlled to emit light, and the LEDs 5 to 7 are turned off. Similarly, when the ID code of the performance operation unit 300 matches the game board 5, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the performance operation unit 300 can be controlled to emit light, whereas when the ID codes do not match, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the performance operation unit 300 are not controlled to emit light, and the LEDs 8 to 9 are turned off. In other words, for parts of the door frame top unit 450 and the performance operation unit 300 whose ID codes do not match the game board 5, the various LEDs mounted on the light-emitting boards of the parts that do not match are not controlled to emit light, and the LEDs are turned off during and during the changing and non-changing of the patterns.

Figure 251 is a timing chart showing an example of a suggestive effect that is executed as an effect during the change of the pattern when there is a part whose ID code does not match the game board 5. Here, the case where, when the power is turned on, the ID code of the door frame top unit 450 of the door frame top unit 450 and the effect operation unit 300 does not match the game board 5, and it is decided to execute a light-emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light-emitting mode as suggestive effect A suggesting set value 6 during the change of the pattern is described below. Note that similar control is performed during the execution period of the suggestive effect even when the ID code of the effect operation unit 300 does not match the game board 5, or when the ID codes of both the door frame top unit 450 and the effect operation unit 300 do not match the game board 5.

First, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives a variation pattern command from the main control board 1310, it starts a variation display such as a variation display of a decorative pattern in the performance display device 1600 in synchronization with the variation display of the special pattern as a performance according to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command, and controls the light emission of LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 8 to 9 of the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 in conjunction with the display of the performance display device 1600 (timing t0). At this time, for the door frame top unit 450 whose ID code does not match the game board 5, the light emission of LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450 is not controlled, and the LEDs 5 to 7 are turned off. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variation display of the decorative pattern reaches a predetermined timing, a button operation promotion performance is executed in which a display (for example, "Press the performance operation button!") is displayed on the performance display device 1600 to encourage operation of the performance operation unit 300's performance operation unit 301 (timing tA).

When the button operation promotion performance starts at timing tA, not only LEDs 5-7 of the door frame top unit 450 whose ID code does not match that of the game board 5, but also LEDs 8-9 of the performance operation unit 300 whose ID code matches that of the game board 5, LEDs 1-4 of the game board 5, and LEDs 10-14 of the door frame 3 are turned off. In other words, if the ID code of the door frame top unit 450 does not match that of the game board 5, LEDs 1-4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5-7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8-9 of the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10-14 of the door frame 3 are turned off so that not only the door frame top unit 450 but also the performance operation unit 300 whose ID code matches that of the game board 5 are included.

Then, when the player presses the performance operation section 301 of the performance operation unit 300 at timing t1 or the button effective period (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed without the performance operation section 301 of the performance operation unit 300 being pressed, it is the timing to execute a light-emitting performance in which the lights are lit in a rainbow light-emitting mode as a suggestion performance A that suggests the set value 6, but the light-emitting performance in which the lights are lit in the rainbow light-emitting mode is not executed until timing t10 is reached (e.g., 5 seconds). Specifically, among LEDs 1-4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5-7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8-9 of the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10-14 of the door frame 3, not only LEDs 5-7 of the door frame top unit 450 whose ID code does not match that of the game board 5, but also LEDs 8-9 of the performance operation unit 300 and LEDs 1-4 of the game board 5 whose ID code matches that of the game board 5 are turned off. In other words, if the ID code of the door frame top unit 450 does not match the game board 5, LEDs 1-4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5-7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8-9 on the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10-14 on the door frame 3 will be turned off, so that not only the door frame top unit 450 but also the performance operation unit 300 whose ID code matches the game board 5 will be included.

Meanwhile, between timing t1 and timing t10, LEDs 1-4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5-7 on the door frame top unit 450, and LEDs 8-9 on the performance operation unit 300 are turned off, while LEDs 10-14 on the door frame 3 are turned on in red. In other words, if the ID code of the door frame top unit 450 does not match that of the game board 5, instead of the light-emitting effect in which LEDs 1-4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5-7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8-9 on the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10-14 on the door frame 3 are lit in rainbow light, a light-emitting effect is executed in which LEDs 10-14 on the door frame 3 are lit in red.

As described above, if there are no parts with ID codes that do not match the game board 5 (all parts match), then during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of suggestion performance A suggesting set value 6, a light-emitting performance is executed in which LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3 are lit up in a rainbow light-emitting pattern, whereas if there are parts with ID codes that do not match the game board 5, the execution of a light-emitting performance in which LEDs 1 to 14 are lit up in a rainbow light-emitting pattern is suppressed during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of suggestion performance A suggesting set value 6. Here, if the ID code of the door frame top unit 450 does not match the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450 cannot be controlled to emit light. Therefore, if an attempt is made to execute a light-emitting effect in which the other LEDs (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) are lit up in a rainbow light-emitting mode, the light-emitting colors that constitute the rainbow light-emitting mode will be partially missing, resulting in an incomplete state in which the rainbow light-emitting mode is not established. For this reason, if there is a part whose ID code does not match the game board 5, during the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the suggestion effect A that suggests the set value 6, the execution of the light-emitting effect in which the parts whose ID code matches the game board 5 are lit up in a rainbow light-emitting mode is suppressed, thereby preventing light from being emitted in a manner that does not establish the rainbow light-emitting mode, and preventing the occurrence of a situation in which it is impossible to determine whether the suggestion effect A that suggests the set value 6 is being executed.

Also, as described above, when there are no parts with ID codes that do not match the game board 5 (all parts match), the execution of the performance according to the variation pattern specified from the variation pattern command is stopped at timing t1 when the suggestive performance A suggesting the set value 6 is executed, whereas when there are parts with ID codes that do not match the game board 5, the execution of the performance according to the variation pattern specified from the variation pattern command is stopped at timing tA before timing t1 when the suggestive performance A suggesting the set value 6 is executed, and LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, and LEDs 8 to 9 on the performance operation unit 300 are turned off. This makes it possible to inform the player in advance that the light-emitting performance in which LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the performance operation unit 300 are lit in a rainbow light-emitting mode cannot be executed during the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the suggestive performance A suggesting the set value 6.

As described above, when there are no parts with ID codes that do not match the game board 5 (all parts match), during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of suggestive performance A suggesting set value 6, the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are illuminated to change to some of the colors that make up the rainbow illumination pattern, whereas when there are parts with ID codes that do not match the game board 5, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of suggestive performance A suggesting set value 6, the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are illuminated to light up in red without changing the illumination color. Here, when there are no parts with ID codes that do not match the game board 5 (all parts match), when suggestive performance B suggesting a high possibility of a high setting value (setting value 4 to 6) is executed, the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are illuminated to flash red. In other words, if there is a part whose ID code does not match the game board 5, instead of lighting up the LEDs 10-14 of the door frame 3 in a rainbow light pattern as suggestion effect A, a light-emitting effect is executed in which the LEDs 10-14 are lit in red, similar to suggestion effect B. As a result, during the execution period (timings t1-t10) of suggestion effect A suggesting setting value 6, the light-emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light pattern is not executed, so it is not possible to inform the player that the setting value is 6. However, by executing a light-emitting effect that lights up in red using the LEDs 10-14 of the door frame 3, it is possible to inform the player that there is a high possibility of a high setting value (setting value 4-6), and it is possible to prevent a situation in which no hope is raised from occurring.

In addition, if there is a part whose ID code does not match the game board 5, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of suggestion effect B, which suggests that a high setting value (setting value 4 to 6) is highly likely, instead of the light-emitting effect that flashes red involving LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3, a light-emitting effect is executed in which LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3 light up red. In addition, if there is a part whose ID code does not match the game board 5, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of suggestion effect C, which suggests that an even setting value (setting values 2, 4, 6) is highly likely, instead of the light-emitting effect that flashes blue involving LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3, a light-emitting effect is executed in which LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3 light up blue. Also, if there are no parts with ID codes that do not match the game board 5 (all parts match), during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of suggestive effect D, which suggests that an odd setting value (1, 3, 5) is highly likely, instead of the green light flashing effect involving LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3, a light emission effect is executed in which LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3 light up green.

In this example, if there are no parts with ID codes that do not match the game board 5 (all parts match), during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the suggestion performance A that suggests the set value 6, LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3 are involved in the execution of a light-emitting performance in which they light up in a rainbow light-emitting mode, while LEDs 15 to 17 on the game board 5 continue to light up according to the fluctuation pattern regardless of the light-emitting color that constitutes the rainbow light-emitting mode. In contrast, even if there are parts with ID codes that do not match the game board 5, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the suggestion performance A that suggests the set value 6, LEDs 15 to 17 on the game board 5 do not turn off like LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, and LEDs 8 to 9 on the performance operation unit 300, and continue to light up according to the fluctuation pattern. As a result, during the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of suggestive effect A, which suggests setting value 6, the light-emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light pattern is not executed, but the light-emitting effect corresponding to the fluctuation pattern continues for LEDs 15 to 17 on the game board 5, so it is possible to maintain a situation in which players can look forward to the light-emitting effect corresponding to that fluctuation pattern.

Of the various LEDs mounted on the light-emitting board of the game board 5, the multiple LEDs mounted on the variable winning opening decorative board are divided into LED15, the multiple LEDs mounted on the first starting opening decorative board are divided into LED16, and the multiple LEDs mounted on the second starting opening decorative board are divided into LED17. The LED mounting surfaces of these decorative boards are coated with white solder resist (protective material) to increase the reflection efficiency. Therefore, even if multiple full-color LEDs are made to emit a wide variety of colors, it is possible to uniformly reflect all the light and produce vivid colors, and the variable winning opening 2003 can be decorated with LED15, the first starting opening 2004 with LED16, and the second starting opening 2005 with LED17, all of which can be decorated with brighter and more vivid (clear) illumination, thereby enhancing the presentation effect. Additionally, LEDs 15-17 may be LEDs that emit only a single color (e.g., red). Even when such LEDs are used, LED 15 can be used to decorate the variable winning opening 2003, LED 16 can be used to decorate the first starting opening 2004, and LED 17 can be used to decorate the second starting opening 2005 with brighter and more vivid (clear) illumination, enhancing the presentation effect.

In this example, when there is a part whose ID code does not match the game board 5, the display area of the performance display device 1600 is divided into multiple display areas and a rainbow-style performance image is displayed in which each of the multiple display areas is displayed in a different color during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of suggestion performance A suggesting the set value 6, just as when there is no part whose ID code does not match the game board 5 (all parts match). In other words, when there is a part whose ID code does not match the game board 5, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of suggestion performance A suggesting the set value 6, a light-emitting performance in which LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are not executed, whereas the performance display device 1600 displays a rainbow-style performance image. As a result, as long as one focuses on the light-emitting area (light emitted by LEDs 1-14) surrounding the display area of the performance display device 1600, one cannot tell whether suggestion performance A, which suggests setting value 6, is being executed; however, by focusing on the display area of the performance display device 1600, one can understand that setting value 6 is being suggested by the rainbow-like performance image.

In this example, when there is a part whose ID code does not match the game board 5, the seven numbered display bodies on the back upper front decorative body 3310 are lit in a rainbow light emission mode that emits different light colors during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the suggestive performance A that suggests the set value 6, just as when there is no part whose ID code does not match the game board 5 (all parts match). In other words, when there is a part whose ID code does not match the game board 5, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the suggestive performance A that suggests the set value 6, the light emission performance that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode is not executed using LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3, whereas the seven numbered display bodies on the back upper front decorative body 3310 are lit in a rainbow light emission mode that emits different light colors. As a result, as long as one focuses on the light-emitting area (light emitted by LEDs 1-14) surrounding the display area of the performance display device 1600, one cannot tell whether suggestion performance A, which suggests a set value of 6, is being executed; however, by focusing on the back-upper front decorative body 3310 hanging above the display area of the performance display device 1600, one can understand that the rainbow light emission pattern is suggesting a set value of 6.

In addition, in this example, if there is a part whose ID code does not match the game board 5, the execution of the presentation corresponding to the variation pattern identified from the variation pattern command is stopped at timing tA prior to timing t1 at which suggestive presentation A suggesting set value 6 is executed, and LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, and LEDs 8 to 9 on the presentation operation unit 300 are turned off; however, it is sufficient if this is at least at a stage prior to timing t1 at which suggestive presentation A suggesting set value 6 is executed, and for example, LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, and LEDs 8 to 9 on the presentation operation unit 300 may be turned off from the time (timing t0) when the pattern that will execute the suggestive presentation begins to vary. In such a configuration, even if the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the LEDs 8 to 9 of the performance operation unit 300 are controlled to emit light as a notice performance that anticipates a light-emitting performance that lights up in a rainbow light-emitting mode from the time when the pattern starts to change until the suggestive performance is executed, such a notice performance is not executed, and it is possible to suppress the player's expectation of a light-emitting performance that lights up in a rainbow light-emitting mode. Also, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the LEDs 8 to 9 of the performance operation unit 300 may be turned off from the display of the change in the pattern before the display of the change in the pattern that will execute the suggestive performance. In this configuration, even if LEDs 1-4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5-7 on the door frame top unit 450, and LEDs 8-9 on the performance operation unit 300 are controlled to emit light as a look-ahead performance that anticipates a light-emitting performance that lights up in a rainbow light-emitting pattern before the changing display of the patterns that will execute the suggestive performance, such a look-ahead performance is not executed, and it is possible to prevent the player from having expectations of a light-emitting performance that lights up in a rainbow light-emitting pattern.

In addition, in this example, if there is a part whose ID code does not match the game board 5, LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, and LEDs 8 to 9 on the performance operation unit 300 are turned off during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of suggestive performance A suggesting set value 6, but LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, and LEDs 8 to 9 on the performance operation unit 300 may remain turned off even after the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of suggestive performance A suggesting set value 6 has ended. In this configuration, even if, for example, a light-emitting effect is executed in which the lights are lit in a rainbow light-emitting mode again when the symbols stop changing and become a winning symbol after the symbol has become a winning symbol after the symbol has become a winning symbol after the symbol has become a winning symbol after the symbol has become a winning symbol after the symbol has become a winning symbol after the symbol has become a winning symbol, LEDs 1-4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5-7 on the door frame top unit 450, and LEDs 8-9 on the effect operation unit 300 are turned off, so that the light-emitting effects that light up in a rainbow light-emitting mode can be prevented from emitting light in a manner that does not result in a rainbow light-emitting mode.

In this example, when the power is turned on, it is determined whether the ID codes of the door frame top unit 450 and the performance operation unit 300 match with the game board 5, but even if the door frame top unit 450 and the performance operation unit 300 are not connected to the game board 5, the same processing is performed as when there is a part with an ID code that does not match the game board 5. In other words, when the door frame top unit 450 and the performance operation unit 300 are not connected to the game board 5 when the power is turned on, the execution of the light-emitting performance that lights up in a rainbow light-emitting mode using LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 is suppressed during the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the suggestion performance A that suggests the setting value 6, just as when there is a part with an ID code that does not match the game board 5.

Regarding the above, when the power is turned on, it is determined whether the ID codes of the door frame top unit 450 and the performance operation unit 300 match with the game board 5 (including whether they are connected). Since it is not determined whether the ID codes of the door frame top unit 450 and the performance operation unit 300 match with the game board 5 after the power is turned on, if the door frame top unit 450 or the performance operation unit 300 is removed from the game board 5 after the power is turned on, it is not possible to detect that it has been removed. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the LEDs of the parts that have been removed from the game board 5 are turned off, but the LEDs of the other parts become the targets of the light-emitting performance that lights up in a rainbow light-emitting mode during the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the suggestion performance A that suggests the setting value 6, and they will light up in a mode in which the rainbow light-emitting mode is not established. In other words, when the ID codes of the door frame top unit 450 and the performance operation unit 300 do not match (including when they are not connected) with respect to the game board 5 when the power is turned on, the execution of the light-emitting performance in which the light is lit in a rainbow light-emitting mode is restricted during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the suggestive performance A suggesting the set value 6, whereas when the door frame top unit 450 and the performance operation unit 300 are removed from the game board 5 after the power is turned on (including when they are not connected), the light is emitted in a manner that does not establish the rainbow light-emitting mode during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the suggestive performance A suggesting the set value 6. As a result, when the door frame top unit 450 and the performance operation unit 300 are removed from the game board 5 after the power is turned on (including when they are not connected), the traces are notified to the outside, and it is possible to inform the outside that a problem has occurred with the connection of the door frame top unit 450 and the performance operation unit 300.

In addition, even if a part with an ID code matching the game board 5 is connected to the removed part after the door frame top unit 450 or the performance operation unit 300 is removed from the game board 5 after the power is turned on, it is not possible to detect that the part with the ID code matching is connected. For this reason, the LEDs of the parts with the ID code matching the game board 5 connected to the game board 5 are turned off, but the LEDs of the other parts become targets for the light-emitting performance that lights up in a rainbow light-emitting mode during the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the suggestion performance A that suggests the setting value 6, and emit light in a mode in which the rainbow light-emitting mode is not established. On the other hand, if a part with an ID code that does not match the game board 5 is connected to the removed part after the door frame top unit 450 or the performance operation unit 300 is removed from the game board 5 after the power is turned on, it is not possible to detect that the part with the ID code that does not match the game board 5 is connected. For this reason, the LEDs of the parts connected to the game board 5 that do not match the ID code are turned off, but the LEDs of the other parts are the targets of the light-emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light-emitting mode during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the suggestion effect A that suggests the setting value 6, and light up in a mode in which the rainbow light-emitting mode is not established. As a result, if the door frame top unit 450 or the performance operation unit 300 is removed from the game board 5 after power is turned on (including the case where it is not connected), even if a part with a matching ID code or a part with a mismatching ID code is subsequently connected to the game board 5, the traces that the door frame top unit 450 or the performance operation unit 300 has been removed from the game board 5 will be notified to the outside, and it can be notified to the outside that measures must be taken to prevent problems from occurring again with the connection of the door frame top unit 450 or the performance operation unit 300.

In this example, when the power is turned on, it is determined whether the ID codes of the door frame top unit 450 and the performance operation unit 300 match the game board 5 (including whether they are connected). However, after the power is turned on, the ID codes of the door frame top unit 450 and the performance operation unit 300 may be input to the game board 5, and it may be determined whether the ID codes of the door frame top unit 450 and the performance operation unit 300 match the game board 5 (including whether they are connected). Also, an operation switch for determining whether the ID codes of the door frame top unit 450 and the performance operation unit 300 match the game board 5 (including whether they are connected) may be provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and when the operation switch is operated after the power is turned on, it may be determined whether the ID codes of the door frame top unit 450 and the performance operation unit 300 match the game board 5 (including whether they are connected). According to this configuration, if the door frame top unit 450 or the performance operation unit 300 is removed from the game board 5 after the power is turned on, the removal can be detected by operating the operation switch afterwards. In other words, if the door frame top unit 450 or the performance operation unit 300 is not connected to the game board 5 at the time the operation switch is operated, the light-emitting performance that lights up in a rainbow light-emitting mode using LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3 is suppressed from being executed during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the suggestion performance A that suggests the setting value 6, just as when there is a part with an ID code that does not match the game board 5.

In addition, in this example, when suggestive effect A suggesting set value 6 is executed, a light-emitting effect is executed in which LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3 light up in a rainbow light-emitting pattern; however, such a light-emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light-emitting pattern may also be executed in effects other than suggestive effects, for example, it may be executed in a high expectation effect that suggests a high possibility of a win while the changing patterns are being displayed. Even with this configuration, if there are no parts with ID codes that do not match the game board 5 (all parts match), then during the execution period of the high expectation effects, LEDs 1-4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5-7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8-9 on the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10-14 on the door frame 3 are used to execute light-emitting effects that light up in a rainbow light-emitting pattern, whereas, if there are parts with ID codes that do not match the game board 5, then during the execution period of the high expectation effects, light-emitting effects that light up in a rainbow light-emitting pattern are suppressed from being executed.

In addition, in this example, the game board 5, the door frame top unit 450, and the performance operation unit 300 can be changed when changing the model, but other aspects may be used. For example, not only the door frame top unit 450 and the performance operation unit 300 for the door frame 3 (door frame base unit 100) but also other decorative units may be changed when changing the model. As an example, at least four decorative units such as an upper decorative unit (similar to the door frame top unit 450 in the above embodiment) located above the door window 101a provided in the door frame 3, a right decorative unit located to the right of the door window 101a, a left decorative unit located to the left of the door window 101a, and a lower decorative unit (similar to the performance operation unit 300 in the above embodiment) located below the door window 101a may be changed when changing the model. This makes it possible to further increase the change in the appearance of the game machine associated with the model change, and to give the player even more freshness. Furthermore, by providing multiple LEDs on each of these four decorative units and assigning an ID code to each, and then determining whether they match/mismatch/not attached in the same manner as described above, it becomes possible to perform the same processing as described above for the light-emitting effects such as the rainbow light-emitting mode described above, and to achieve the same gaming effect as described above.

[Winning or losing button effect when rainbow effect is executed]
In this embodiment, a rainbow effect (a light-emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light-emitting mode) is executed as a high expectation effect that suggests a high possibility of a win during the variable display of the symbols. Then, while the rainbow effect is executed, it is not possible to determine whether or not a win will occur, but when a specific operation unit is operated during the execution of the rainbow effect, a player operation effect (button effect) is executed that allows the player to determine whether or not a win will occur.

In this example, as an effect according to the fluctuation pattern, a rainbow effect can be executed as a high expectation effect during the fluctuation display of the pattern, and a rainbow effect at the time of a win in which a win is derived as a result of the fluctuation display of the pattern, and a rainbow effect at the time of a miss in which a miss is derived as a result of the fluctuation display of the pattern are set, in other words, at the time of a win, it is possible to determine a fluctuation pattern that executes the rainbow effect at the time of a win, and at the time of a miss, it is possible to determine a fluctuation pattern that executes the rainbow effect at the time of a miss. Then, at the time of a miss, the frequency of execution of the rainbow effect at the time of a miss is made lower than that of other effects at the time of a miss by lowering the rate at which the fluctuation pattern that executes the rainbow effect at the time of a miss is determined. As a result, when a rainbow effect is executed, it is not possible to distinguish whether it is a rainbow effect at the time of a win or a rainbow effect at the time of a miss, but the rate at which the rainbow effect at the time of a win is executed is high, suggesting that there is a high possibility of a win.

In addition, in this example, while the symbols are being displayed in a changing manner, it is possible to execute an effect suggesting set value 6 as the above-mentioned suggestive effect A, which is the same as the rainbow effect as a high expectation effect in that it executes a light-emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light-emitting mode. In other words, when the rainbow effect as a high expectation effect is executed, a light-emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light-emitting mode is executed in conjunction with the display of the effect display device 1600, just like when suggestive effect A is executed. Specifically, when the time elapsed since the start of the display of the decorative pattern changes reaches a predetermined timing (a timing different from the execution timing of the suggestive performance A that suggests the set value 6) (timing t1), LEDs 1-2 on the game board 5 are illuminated in "red," LEDs 3-4 on the game board 5 are illuminated in "purple," LEDs 5-6 on the door frame top unit 450 are illuminated in "blue," LEDs 7 on the door frame top unit 450 and LEDs 8 on the door frame 3 are illuminated in "green," LEDs 9 on the door frame 3 and LEDs 10 on the door frame 3 are illuminated in "orange," LEDs 11-12 on the door frame 3 are illuminated in "yellow," and LEDs 13-14 on the door frame 3 are illuminated in "white." In other words, LEDs 1-4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5-7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8-9 on the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10-14 on the door frame 3 are illuminated in different colors for each of the two groups.

And for LEDs 1-4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5-7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8-9 on the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10-14 on the door frame 3, every predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds), the LEDs emitting "red" light are changed to "purple," the LEDs emitting "purple" light to "blue," the LEDs emitting "blue" light to "green," the LEDs emitting "green" light to "orange," the LEDs emitting "orange" light to "yellow," the LEDs emitting "yellow" light to "white," and the LEDs emitting "white" light to "red." In this way, for LEDs 1-4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5-7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8-9 on the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10-14 on the door frame 3, the light emission color of the LEDs in each of the two groups is changed in a predetermined order of "red → purple → blue → green → orange → yellow → white → red" every specified period (for example, 0.1 seconds), and such regular changes are repeated until timing t10 is reached (for example, for 10 seconds).

In this way, the LEDs 1-4 on the game board 5, the LEDs 5-7 on the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8-9 on the performance operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10-14 on the door frame 3 are controlled to switch between multiple light colors in sequence in a short unit of light emission time, making it possible to visually recognize that these LEDs are working together to emit light in a rainbow light pattern, and it is possible to execute a light emission performance with impact. Also, the LEDs 1-4 on the game board 5, the LEDs 5-7 on the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8-9 on the performance operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10-14 on the door frame 3 are controlled in a linked manner so that the LEDs 1-14 emit light in multiple colors so that the LEDs 1-14 emit different light colors for each of the two groups, and by switching the light colors in a short period of time, it is possible to execute a light emission performance with more impact than usual.

In this example, multiple LEDs are used to emit seven colors simultaneously in a rainbow light emission pattern, and each emitted color is switched regularly, but the emitted colors do not have to be seven colors that appear simultaneously, and it is sufficient if three or more predetermined colors appear simultaneously.

During the execution period of the rainbow effect, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is divided into multiple display areas, and a rainbow-style effect image is displayed in which each of the multiple display areas is displayed in a different display color. In such a rainbow-style effect image, the display color displayed in each of the multiple display areas is changed in a predetermined order of "red → purple → blue → green → orange → yellow → white → red" every predetermined period (e.g., 0.1 seconds), and such regular changes are repeated until timing t10 is reached (e.g., 5 seconds). The target for displaying the rainbow-style effect image may be an effect image displayed in the entire display area of the effect display device 1600, such as a background image, or an effect image displayed in a portion of the display area of the effect display device 1600, such as an effect image of a character or item.

In this example, in order to further increase the excitement of the rainbow effect and to further increase interest in the game, when a specific operation unit is operated during the execution of the rainbow effect, a button effect is executed that can determine whether or not a win will occur, and one of button effects A to C is executed. Here, the cases in which a rainbow effect with button effect A, a rainbow effect with button effect B, and a rainbow effect with button effect C are executed will be described below.

(Rainbow effect with button effect A)
First, the plate unit 200 is provided with a light amount adjustment button 228 that can be operated by the player on the right side of the performance operation section 301 in the performance operation unit 300. As for the LEDs of the light-emitting decoration provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the performance operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, the light amount adjustment operation is performed using the light amount adjustment button 228, so that the light amount can be adjusted in stages. For example, it is possible to adjust the stage of the light amount of the LED from 1 (minimum light amount) → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 (maximum light amount), and the light amount of the LED increases as the stage becomes larger by operating the light amount adjustment button 228 upward, and the light amount of the LED decreases as the stage becomes smaller by operating the light amount adjustment button 228 downward. In addition, the light amount of the LED of the light-emitting decoration can be adjusted both during and during the change and non-change of the pattern.

In button performance A, when the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated during the execution of a rainbow performance, a performance is executed to determine whether or not the light intensity of at least the LEDs that make up the rainbow light emission pattern (LEDs 1-4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5-7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8-9 on the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10-14 on the door frame 3) among the LEDs of the illuminating decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 can be adjusted, and it can be determined whether or not a win has been obtained. In this example, when a rainbow performance is being executed upon a win, the light intensity can be adjusted when the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated, and it is possible to know that a win has been obtained, whereas when an in-bow performance is being executed upon a miss, the light intensity cannot be adjusted when the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated, and it is possible to know that a miss has been obtained.

Figure 252 is a timing chart showing an example of button performance A during execution of a rainbow performance. First, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives a variation pattern command from the main control board 1310, it starts a variation performance such as a variation display of a decorative pattern in the performance display device 1600 in synchronization with the variation display of a special pattern as a performance according to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command. Then, when a variation pattern at the time of a win for executing a rainbow performance at the time of a win has been determined, or when a variation pattern at the time of a loss for executing a rainbow performance at the time of a loss has been determined, when the elapsed time from the start of the variation display of the patterns reaches a predetermined timing (timing t1) that is determined in advance, a light-emitting performance (rainbow performance) in which LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are lit up in a rainbow light-emitting mode is started, and the light-emitting performance in which the light-emitting mode is lit up is continued until timing t10 is reached (for example, for 10 seconds).

In addition, during the execution period of the rainbow effect (timing t1 to t10), the effect display device 1600 executes a button operation promotion effect in which a display is displayed to encourage the player to operate the light intensity adjustment button 228 (e.g., "Press the light intensity adjustment button!"), and an explanatory effect is executed in which a display is displayed explaining that if the light intensity can be adjusted by operating the light intensity adjustment button 228, the player wins, and if the light intensity cannot be adjusted, the player loses (e.g., "If you can adjust the light intensity, you win! If you cannot adjust the light intensity, you lose!").

When the variation pattern at the time of winning that executes the rainbow effect at the time of winning has been determined, the period during which the rainbow effect is executed at the time of winning (timing t1 to t10) is set to a period during which the light intensity can be adjusted by operating the light intensity adjustment button 228. During this period during which the light intensity can be adjusted, when the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated, the light intensity of at least the LEDs that constitute the rainbow light emission mode (LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3) among the LEDs of the illuminating decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 changes. As a result, when the light intensity can be adjusted during the execution period of the rainbow effect (timing t1 to t10), it is possible to know that the variable display of the pattern being executed will be a win, and it is possible to encourage active operation of the light intensity adjustment button 228 to know whether or not a win will occur.

On the other hand, when a variation pattern for executing a rainbow effect when a loss has been determined, the period during which the rainbow effect is executed when the loss occurs (timing t1 to t10) is set to a period during which the light intensity cannot be adjusted by operating the light intensity adjustment button 228. During this period during which the light intensity cannot be adjusted, when the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated, the light intensity of at least the LEDs that constitute the rainbow light emission pattern (LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3) among the LEDs of the illuminating decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 does not change. As a result, when the light intensity cannot be adjusted during the execution period of the rainbow effect (timing t1 to t10), it is possible to know that the variable display of the pattern being executed will be a loss, and it is possible to encourage the player to actively operate the light intensity adjustment button 228 to know whether or not it will be a win.

In this example, among the LEDs of the luminous decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, the light intensity of the LEDs that constitute the rainbow light emission mode (LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3) can be adjusted, whereas the light intensity of the LEDs that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode (LEDs 15 to 17 on the game board 5) cannot be adjusted and always emit a constant amount of light. As a result, when the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated during the execution period of the rainbow performance (timing t1 to t10), if the rainbow performance is being executed at the time of a win, the light intensity of the LEDs that can change the light intensity (LEDs that constitute the rainbow light emission mode) changes relatively to the LEDs that do not change the light intensity (LEDs that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode), whereas if the rainbow performance is being executed at the time of a loss, the light intensity of the LEDs that can change the light intensity (LEDs that constitute the rainbow light emission mode) changes relatively to the LEDs that do not change the light intensity (LEDs that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode). Because of this, when the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated during the execution period of the rainbow effect (timings t1 to t10), it is easy to recognize whether the light intensity has been adjusted, and it is possible to clearly grasp whether the changing display of the pattern being executed will result in a win.

In addition, if the light intensity cannot be adjusted despite the operation of the light intensity adjustment button 228 during the execution period of the rainbow effect when a miss occurs (timing t1 to t10), the effect display device 1600 displays a specific image that does not allow the player to recognize that the changing display of the symbols being executed will be a win after the execution of the rainbow effect when a miss occurs. Specifically, the effect display device 1600 displays a display that notifies the player that the changing display of the symbols being executed is a miss, resulting in an unfortunate outcome (e.g., "Too bad!"), or displays a display that notifies the player that the state in which the light intensity could not be adjusted when the light intensity adjustment button 228 was operated has been restored to a state in which the light intensity can be adjusted (e.g., "You can now adjust the light intensity!"). As a result, even if the player is unable to recognize whether the light intensity could be adjusted when the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated during the execution period of the rainbow effect (timing t1 to t10), the specific image that is displayed after the execution of the rainbow effect makes it clear that the changing display of the symbols being executed is a miss.

In this example, if a rainbow effect is executed when a miss occurs during the execution period of the rainbow effect (timing t1 to t10), the pattern of fluctuations at the time of a miss that executes the rainbow effect when a miss occurs is not determined until a specific period (e.g., 3 minutes) has elapsed since the end of the rainbow effect when a miss occurs, and the rainbow effect when a miss occurs is restricted from being executed again. On the other hand, during the specific period (e.g., 3 minutes) since the end of the rainbow effect when a miss occurs, it is possible to determine the pattern of fluctuations at the time of a win that executes the rainbow effect when a hit occurs, and the execution of the rainbow effect when a hit occurs is not restricted. As a result, the rainbow effect when a miss occurs is not repeated in a short period such as the specific period, and there is no loss of trust in the rainbow effect that is executed as a high expectation effect that suggests a high possibility of a win, and the player can look forward to the execution of the next rainbow effect.

In this example, during the execution period of the rainbow effect (timings t1 to t10), the rainbow effect ends when a predetermined time has elapsed regardless of whether the light intensity adjustment button 228 has been operated or not. However, when a rainbow effect is being executed upon a miss, the miss rainbow effect may end at the point at which it is recognized that the light intensity could not be adjusted by operating the light intensity adjustment button 228 (the point at which the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated) even before the predetermined time has elapsed. In this way, once it is recognized that the light intensity could not be adjusted by operating the light intensity adjustment button 228, the rainbow effect does not continue, and it is possible to reduce the discomfort of the rainbow effect being executed even when the changing display of the ongoing pattern is a miss.

In addition, in this example, during the execution period of the rainbow performance (timings t1 to t10), the performance display device 1600 executes a button operation promotion effect in which a display is displayed to encourage the user to operate the light adjustment button 228 (e.g., "Press the light adjustment button!"), but this is not limited to the above. During the execution period of the rainbow performance (timings t1 to t10), the performance display device 1600 may enable operation of the light adjustment button 228, but may not execute a button operation promotion effect in which a display is displayed to encourage the user to operate the light adjustment button 228 (e.g., "Press the light adjustment button!"). This allows the above-mentioned effects to function as "hidden effects" during the execution period of the rainbow effect (timings t1 to t10), allowing players who normally actively operate the light adjustment button 228 to know early on whether they will win, while players who normally do not actively operate the light adjustment button 228 can focus on whether a win result (which may be a warning message when a win occurs, as described below, or a warning message when a loss occurs) is displayed as a result of the changing display of the patterns after the execution of the rainbow effect, allowing them to enjoy the process of whether they will win or not.

In this example, if the light amount cannot be adjusted despite the operation of the light amount adjustment button 228 during the execution period of the rainbow effect when a loss occurs (timing t1 to t10), the effect display device 1600 displays a specific image after the execution of the rainbow effect when a loss occurs, preventing the player from recognizing that the changing display of the symbols being executed is a win. In addition, if the volume adjustment button 227 located near the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated during the execution period of the rainbow effect when a loss occurs (timing t1 to t10), the specific image may also be displayed in the same way as when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated. As a result, even if the player mistakenly operates the volume adjustment button 227 instead of the light amount adjustment button 228 during the limited execution period (timing t1 to t10), the effect can be continued assuming that the player intended to operate the light amount adjustment button 228, and the same effect as when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated can be achieved. In this case, if the volume adjustment button 227 is operated instead of the light adjustment button 228 during the execution period of the rainbow effect when a win occurs (timing t1 to t10), the light intensity of the LEDs that make up the rainbow light emission pattern (LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3) will not change. In this case, however, it is preferable to issue a special notification (for example, "That's not a light adjustment!") that is not issued when the light adjustment button 228 is operated, to alert the player that this is an incorrect operation.

In addition, in this example, a rainbow effect accompanied by button effect A is executed as an effect while the changing patterns are displayed, but this is not limited to the above, and a rainbow effect accompanied by button effect A may be executed during a specific period such as during a winning game when the changing patterns are not displayed. In this case, depending on the status of the rainbow effect by button effect A (whether the light intensity is adjusted or not), the player can be made aware of whether or not some kind of game benefit (probability change, time saving, etc.) will be awarded after the winning game being executed.

In this example, a rainbow effect accompanied by button effect A is executed as an effect during the display of the changing pattern associated with the start winning, but this is not limited to this, and a rainbow effect accompanied by button effect A may be executed as an effect that is executed without the start winning. Specifically, if a situation where a start winning does not occur for a long time continues, it causes a player to feel disgusted and irritated, so as a part of alleviating this, an example is to start a dummy effect that imitates the changing display of the pattern when a certain period of time has passed without the start winning, and execute a rainbow effect accompanied by button effect A in that effect. In this case, a rainbow effect when a miss occurs is executed as a rainbow effect accompanied by button effect A, and during the execution period of the rainbow effect (timings t1 to t10), the light amount cannot be adjusted even if the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated, so that the player is made aware that a win will not occur as a result of the dummy effect.

(Rainbow effect with button effect B)
In button performance B, when the performance operation unit 301 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated during the execution of a rainbow performance, a performance is executed to determine whether or not to continue a rainbow performance using the LEDs (LEDs 1-4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5-7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8-9 of the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10-14 of the door frame 3) that constitute the rainbow light emission pattern among the LEDs of the luminous decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, and it is possible to determine whether or not a win has been obtained. In this example, when a rainbow performance is being executed upon a win, the rainbow performance does not end when the performance operation unit 301 is operated, but continues until a predetermined time has elapsed, and it is possible to grasp that a win has been obtained, whereas when an in-bow performance is being executed upon a loss, the rainbow performance ends when the performance operation unit 301 is operated, and it is possible to grasp that a loss has been obtained.

Figure 253 is a timing chart showing an example of button effect B during execution of the rainbow effect. First, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives a variation pattern command from the main control board 1310, it starts a variation effect such as a variation display of a decorative pattern in the effect display device 1600 in synchronization with the variation display of the special pattern as an effect corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command. Then, when a variation pattern at the time of a win for executing a rainbow effect at the time of a win has been determined, or when a variation pattern at the time of a loss for executing a rainbow effect at the time of a loss has been determined, when the elapsed time from the start of the variation display of the patterns reaches a predetermined timing (timing t1) that is determined in advance, a light-emitting effect (rainbow effect) in which LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are lit up in a rainbow light-emitting mode is started, and the light-emitting effect in which the light-emitting effect is lit up in the rainbow light-emitting mode is continued until timing t10 is reached (for example, for 10 seconds).

In addition, during the execution period of the rainbow effect (timing t1 to t10), the effect display device 1600 executes a button operation promotion effect in which a display is displayed to prompt the user to operate the effect operation unit 301 (for example, "Press the effect operation button!"), and an explanatory effect is executed in which a display is displayed to explain that a win has occurred if the currently executing rainbow effect continues after the effect operation unit 301 is operated, and that a miss has occurred if the currently executing rainbow effect ends while the effect operation unit 301 is being operated (for example, "If the rainbow continues, you win! If the rainbow does not continue, you miss!").

When the variation pattern for executing the rainbow effect when a win has been determined, even if the effect operation unit 301 is operated during the execution period of the rainbow effect when the win occurs, the rainbow effect using the LEDs that make up the rainbow light emission pattern (LEDs 1-4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5-7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8-9 on the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10-14 on the door frame 3) among the LEDs of the illuminating decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 is continued without ending. As a result, during the execution period of the rainbow effect (timing t1-t10), if the rainbow effect being executed continues even after the operation of the effect operation unit 301, it is possible to know that the variable display of the pattern being executed will result in a win, and it is possible to encourage the player to actively operate the effect operation unit 301 to find out whether or not a win will occur.

On the other hand, if a variation pattern for executing a rainbow effect when a miss is determined, when the performance operation unit 301 is operated during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect when a miss occurs, the rainbow effect using the LEDs (LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3) that constitute the rainbow light-emitting mode among the LEDs of the light-emitting decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 is terminated, and the LEDs that constitute the rainbow light-emitting mode are switched from emitting light in the rainbow light-emitting mode to emitting no light or emitting light in a single color. As a result, when the rainbow effect being executed during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) is terminated when the performance operation unit 301 is operated, it is possible to know that the variable display of the pattern being executed will be a miss, and it is possible to actively operate the performance operation unit 301 to know whether it will be a win or not.

In this example, during the execution period of the rainbow effect (timing t1 to t10), LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3 are involved in executing a light-emitting effect in which they light up in a rainbow light-emitting pattern, whereas LEDs 15 to 17 on the game board 5 execute a light-emitting effect according to the variation pattern, regardless of the light-emitting colors that make up the rainbow light-emitting pattern. During the execution period of the rainbow effect when a miss occurs (timing t1 to t10), when the effect operation unit 301 is operated, the LEDs that make up the rainbow light-emitting pattern (LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3) switch from emitting light in the rainbow light-emitting pattern to not emitting light or to emitting light in a single color, whereas the LEDs that do not make up the rainbow light-emitting pattern (LEDs 15 to 17 on the game board 5) continue to emit light in a predetermined pattern by executing a light-emitting effect according to the variation pattern. As a result, when the effect operation unit 301 is operated during the execution period of the rainbow effect when a miss occurs (timing t1 to t10), for example, if all of the LEDs of the illuminating decorative elements on the door frame 3 and game board 5 are switched from illuminating in a rainbow light-emitting mode to not illuminating, all of the LEDs may be turned off, giving the mistaken impression that the pachinko machine 1 has broken down; however, by continuing to emit light in a predetermined mode by executing a light-emitting effect according to the variation pattern for at least some of the LEDs of the illuminating decorative elements on the door frame 3 and game board 5, this mistaken impression can be prevented.

In this example, during the execution period of the rainbow effect (timing t1 to t10), the player can confirm whether or not to continue the currently running rainbow effect by operating the effect operation unit 301. However, in addition to the effect operation unit 301, multiple operation units for the effect that the player can operate may be provided, and all of these may be targets for operation of the button effect B. This makes it possible to avoid the player accidentally operating anything other than the effect operation unit 301 during the execution period of the rainbow effect (timing t1 to t10), which would prevent the player from being unable to appreciate the fun of the button effect B. The multiple operation units for the effect may include, for example, a light intensity adjustment button 228 that the player can operate to adjust the light intensity, and a volume adjustment button 227 that the player can operate to adjust the volume, and by operating these, the player may be able to confirm whether or not to continue the currently running rainbow effect.

In this example, when the rainbow effect with the button effect A is executed, if the light amount cannot be adjusted despite the operation of the light amount adjustment button 228, the effect display device 1600 displays a specific image that does not allow the player to recognize that the changing display of the pattern being executed will be a hit after the execution of the rainbow effect when it is a miss. Similarly, when the rainbow effect with the button effect B is executed, if the rainbow effect is ended by operating the effect operation unit 301, a specific image that does not allow the player to recognize that the changing display of the pattern being executed will be a hit may be displayed. Specifically, the effect display device 1600 may execute a display (for example, "Too bad!") that notifies the player that the changing display of the pattern being executed is a miss and that the result is unfortunate. As a result, even if the player operates the effect operation unit 301 just before the end of the execution period of the rainbow effect (timing t1 to t10) and is unable to recognize whether the rainbow effect has ended by operating the effect operation unit 301, the player can clearly understand that the changing display of the pattern being executed is a miss by the specific image displayed after the execution of the rainbow effect.

In addition, in this example, during the execution period of the rainbow performance (timing t1 to t10), the performance display device 1600 executes a button operation promotion performance in which a display is displayed to prompt the user to operate the performance operation unit 301 (e.g., "Press the performance operation button!"). However, without being limited to this, during the execution period of the rainbow performance (timing t1 to t10), the performance display device 1600 may enable operations on the performance operation unit 301, but may not execute a button operation promotion performance in which a display is displayed to prompt the user to operate the performance operation unit 301 (e.g., "Press the performance operation button!"). This allows the above-mentioned effects to function as "hidden effects" during the execution period of the rainbow effect (timings t1 to t10), allowing players who normally actively operate the effect operation unit 301 to know early on whether they will win, while players who normally do not actively operate the effect operation unit 301 can focus on whether a win result (which may be a warning message when a win occurs, as described below, or a warning message when a loss occurs) is displayed as a result of the changing display of the patterns after the execution of the rainbow effect, allowing them to enjoy the time it takes to see whether they will win or not.

In addition, in this example, a rainbow effect accompanied by button effect B is executed as an effect while the changing patterns are displayed, but this is not limited to the above, and a rainbow effect accompanied by button effect B may be executed during a specific period such as during a winning game when the changing patterns are not displayed. In this case, depending on the status of the rainbow effect by button effect B (whether it ends midway or not), the player can be made aware of whether or not some kind of game benefit (such as probability fluctuation or time saving) will be awarded after the winning game being executed.

In this example, a rainbow effect accompanied by button effect B is executed as an effect during the display of the changing pattern associated with the start winning, but this is not limited to this, and a rainbow effect accompanied by button effect B may be executed as an effect that is executed without the start winning. Specifically, if a situation where a start winning does not occur for a long time continues, it may cause the player to feel disgusted or irritated, so as a part of alleviating this, an example is to start a dummy effect that imitates the changing display of the pattern when a certain period of time has passed without the start winning, and execute a rainbow effect accompanied by button effect B in that effect. In this case, a rainbow effect when a miss occurs is executed as a rainbow effect accompanied by button effect B, and during the execution period of the rainbow effect (timing t1 to t10), the rainbow effect ends when the effect operation unit 301 is operated, so that the player is made aware that the dummy effect is not a win.

(Rainbow effect with button effect C)
First, the plate unit 200 is provided with a volume control button 227 that can be operated by the player on the right side of the performance operation section 301 in the performance operation unit 300. The volume control operation using the volume control button 227 allows the volume to be adjusted stepwise for the sounds output from various speakers (such as the main frame speaker 622). For example, the volume levels output from the various speakers can be adjusted from 1 (lowest volume) to 2 to 3 to 4 to 5 (highest volume), and the higher the level is when the volume control button 227 is operated upward, the higher the volume output from the various speakers increases, and the lower the level is when the volume control button 227 is operated downward, the lower the volume output from the various speakers decreases. In this example, the volume at the lowest level (1) is zero, and all performance sounds are inaudible. In addition, the volume of the sounds output from the various speakers can be adjusted both during and during the change or non-change of the patterns.

In this example, during the execution of the rainbow effect accompanied by the button effect C, the volume is forcibly set to the lowest level (1) regardless of the volume adjustment button 227 by the player, and with the start of this rainbow effect, the sound effects, including the BGM and other sound effects corresponding to the rainbow effect, are forcibly changed to an inaudible state in which the player cannot recognize them. As will be described in detail later, in the button effect C of this example, when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated upward in such an inaudible state to raise the volume level, an effect is executed in which the sound effects, such as the BGM and other sound effects corresponding to the rainbow effect, change from an inaudible state to an audible state, thereby making it possible to determine whether or not a win has been obtained. In this example, when the rainbow effect is being executed upon a win, the sound effects, such as the BGM and other sound effects corresponding to the rainbow effect, change from an inaudible state to an audible state when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated, thereby enabling the player to know that a win has been obtained, whereas when the inbow effect is being executed upon a loss, the sound effects, such as the BGM and other sound effects corresponding to the rainbow effect, remain inaudible even if the volume adjustment button 227 is operated, thereby enabling the player to know that a loss has been obtained.

In addition to the above, in this example, when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated to change the volume level, a specific sound (e.g., beep, beep) is output as an operation confirmation sound, but in the rainbow effect involving button effect C, whether or not an operation confirmation sound is output when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated is also used to determine whether or not a win has occurred. In this example, when a rainbow effect is being executed upon a win, no specific sound (e.g., beep, beep) is output from the various speakers even if the volume adjustment button 227 is operated, which allows the player to know that a win has occurred, whereas when an inbow effect is being executed upon a miss, a specific sound (e.g., beep, beep) is output from the various speakers when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated, which allows the player to know that a miss has occurred.

In other words, in this example, when a rainbow effect is being performed upon a win, the sound effects such as background music corresponding to the rainbow effect change from an inaudible state to an audible state when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated, but in this case, a specific sound (e.g., a beep) that is an operation confirmation sound is not output in response to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227. On the other hand, when an inbow effect is being performed upon a miss, the sound effects such as background music corresponding to the rainbow effect remain inaudible even when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated, but in this case, only a specific sound (e.g., a beep) that is an operation confirmation sound is output in response to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227. Details of these effects are explained below.

Figure 254 is a timing chart showing an example of the button effect C during execution of the rainbow effect. First, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives a variation pattern command from the main control board 1310, it starts a variation effect such as a variation display of a decorative pattern in the effect display device 1600 in synchronization with the variation display of the special pattern as an effect corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command. Then, when a variation pattern at the time of a win for executing a rainbow effect at the time of a win has been determined, or when a variation pattern at the time of a loss for executing a rainbow effect at the time of a loss has been determined, when the elapsed time from the start of the variation display of the patterns reaches a predetermined timing (timing t1) that is determined in advance, a light-emitting effect (rainbow effect) in which LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are lit up in a rainbow light-emitting mode is started, and the light-emitting effect in which the light-emitting effect is lit up in the rainbow light-emitting mode is continued until timing t10 is reached (for example, for 10 seconds).

In addition, during the execution period of the rainbow effect (timing t1 to t10), the effect display device 1600 executes a button operation promotion effect in which a display (e.g., "Press the volume adjustment button!") is displayed to encourage the user to operate the volume adjustment button 227, and an explanatory effect is executed in which a display is displayed explaining that a win has occurred when the effect sound such as background music corresponding to the rainbow effect changes from an inaudible state to an audible state by operating the volume adjustment button 227, and that a miss has occurred when the effect sound such as background music corresponding to the rainbow effect remains inaudible (does not change to an audible state) even when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated (for example, "If it changes to an audible state, you win! If it does not change to an audible state, you miss!").

When a variation pattern for executing the rainbow effect at the time of a win has been determined, during the execution period of the rainbow effect at the time of the win (timing t1 to t10), when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated, the effect sound such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect changes from an inaudible state to an audible state. In other words, in order to check whether the effect sound such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect changes from an inaudible state to an audible state, it is necessary to operate the volume adjustment button 227. Note that a specific sound (e.g., a beep) is not output as an operation confirmation sound when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated. As a result, when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated during the execution period of the rainbow effect (timing t1 to t10) and the effect sound such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect changes from an inaudible state to an audible state, it is possible to know that the variable display of the pattern being executed will be a win, and it is possible to encourage the player to actively operate the volume adjustment button 227 to know whether a win will be generated.

On the other hand, when a variation pattern for executing the rainbow effect when a miss is determined, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect when the miss occurs, the sound effects such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect are maintained in an inaudible state (do not change to an audible state) when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated. In other words, in order to check whether the sound effects such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect are maintained in an inaudible state (do not change to an audible state), it is necessary to operate the volume adjustment button 227. In addition, when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated, a specific sound (e.g., beep beep) is output as an operation confirmation sound. As a result, when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect, when the sound effects such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect are maintained in an inaudible state (do not change to an audible state) and a specific sound (e.g., beep beep) is output as an operation confirmation sound, it is possible to know that the variable display of the pattern being executed will be a miss, and it is possible to encourage the player to actively operate the volume adjustment button 227 to know whether a miss will occur.

As described above, when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated during the execution period of the rainbow effect when a miss occurs (timing t1 to t10), not only are the sound effects such as background music corresponding to the rainbow effect maintained in an inaudible state (do not become audible), but a specific sound (e.g., a beep, beep) is output as an operation confirmation sound. As a result, if no sound is output when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated during the execution period of the rainbow effect when a miss occurs (timing t1 to t10), it is impossible to confirm whether the operation has been accepted, but by outputting a specific sound (e.g., a beep, beep) as the operation confirmation sound, such confirmation can be made appropriately.

In this example, during the execution period of the rainbow effect (timing t1 to t10), the rainbow effect ends when a predetermined time has elapsed regardless of whether the volume adjustment button 227 has been operated or not. However, when a rainbow effect is being executed when a miss occurs, the rainbow effect when a miss occurs may be ended even before the predetermined time has elapsed when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated to make the player aware that the sound effects such as background music corresponding to the rainbow effect will remain inaudible (will not change to an audible state) (when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated). In this way, after the volume adjustment button 227 is operated to make the player aware that the sound effects such as background music corresponding to the rainbow effect will remain inaudible (will not change to an audible state), the rainbow effect does not continue, and the discomfort of the rainbow effect being executed despite the display of the changing symbols being executed being a miss can be reduced.

In this example, as the button effect C during the execution of the rainbow effect, an effect is executed in which the sound effect such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect changes from an inaudible state to an audible state when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated, and if the sound effect such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect does not change from an inaudible state to an audible state, a specific sound (e.g., beep beep) is output as the operation confirmation sound. However, without being limited to this, it may be configured to execute only the effect of whether or not the sound effect such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect changes from an inaudible state to an audible state, and whether or not a specific sound (e.g., beep beep) is output as the operation confirmation sound when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated. In such a configuration, when the rainbow effect is being executed upon a win, a specific sound (e.g., beep beep) is not output as the operation confirmation sound when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated, and it is possible to know that it is a win, whereas when the inbow effect is being executed upon a miss, a specific sound (e.g., beep beep) is output as the operation confirmation sound when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated, and it is possible to know that it is a miss. In addition, in order to determine whether or not a specific sound (e.g., beep beep) is output as an operation confirmation sound, the volume control button 227 may be used, but multiple operation units including the volume control button 227 (the operation operation unit 301, the light control button 228, and the volume control button 227) may also be used. In this configuration, when a rainbow effect is being performed upon winning, no specific sound (e.g., beep beep) is output as an operation confirmation sound regardless of which of the multiple operation units (the operation operation unit 301, the light control button 228, and the volume control button 227) is operated, and it is possible to know that it is a win, whereas when an inbow effect is being performed upon losing, a specific sound (e.g., beep beep) is output as an operation confirmation sound when any of the multiple operation units (the operation operation unit 301, the light control button 228, and the volume control button 227) is operated, and it is possible to know that it is a loss.

In the above configuration, during the execution period of the rainbow effect when a winning combination occurs (timing t1 to t10), no matter which of the multiple operation units (the performance operation unit 301, the light intensity adjustment button 228, the volume adjustment button 227) is operated, a specific sound (e.g., a beep, beep) is not output from the various speakers. Similarly, during the execution period of the rainbow effect when a losing combination occurs (timing t1 to t10), no matter which of the multiple operation units (the performance operation unit 301, the light intensity adjustment button 228, the volume adjustment button 227) is operated, except for the operation unit that outputs a specific sound from the various speakers. For this reason, in the performance display device 1600, when each of the multiple operation units (the performance operation unit 301, the light intensity adjustment button 228, the volume adjustment button 227) is operated, a display corresponding to the operation (e.g., "The button was operated") is displayed. As a result, during the execution period of the rainbow performance (timings t1 to t10), if no sound is output when any of the multiple operation units (performance operation unit 301, light intensity adjustment button 228, volume adjustment button 227) is operated, it is not possible to confirm whether the operation has been accepted, but by displaying a message corresponding to the operation, such confirmation can be performed appropriately.

In addition, in this example, during the execution period of the rainbow performance (timing t1 to t10), the performance display device 1600 executes a button operation promotion performance in which a display is displayed to encourage the user to operate the volume adjustment button 227 (e.g., "Press the volume adjustment button!"). However, this is not limited to this, and during the execution period of the rainbow performance (timing t1 to t10), the performance display device 1600 may enable operation of the volume adjustment button 227, but may not execute a button operation promotion performance in which a display is displayed to encourage the user to operate the volume adjustment button 227 (e.g., "Press the volume adjustment button!"). This allows the above-mentioned effects to function as "hidden effects" during the execution period of the rainbow effect (timings t1 to t10), allowing players who normally actively operate the volume control button 227 to know early on whether they will win, while players who normally do not actively operate the volume control button 227 can focus on whether a win result (which may be a warning message when a win occurs, as described below, or a warning message when a loss occurs) is displayed as a result of the changing display of the patterns after the execution of the rainbow effect, allowing them to enjoy the time it takes to see whether they will win or not.

In this example, when the rainbow performance with button performance A is executed, if the light adjustment button 228 is operated but the light adjustment button 228 is not operated to adjust the light amount, the performance display device 1600 displays a specific image that does not allow the player to recognize that the changing display of the pattern being executed will be a winning combination after the execution of the rainbow performance when the player misses. Similarly, when the rainbow performance with button performance C is executed, if the performance sound such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow performance does not change from an inaudible state to an audible state despite the volume adjustment button 227 being operated, a specific image that does not allow the player to recognize that the changing display of the pattern being executed will be a winning combination may be displayed after the execution of the rainbow performance when the player misses. Specifically, the performance display device 1600 may execute a display that notifies the player that the changing display of the pattern being executed is a losing combination, resulting in an unfortunate result (for example, "Too bad!"), or a display that notifies the player that the state in which the volume could not be adjusted when the volume adjustment button 227 was operated has been returned to a state in which the volume can be adjusted (for example, "You can now adjust the volume!"). As a result, even if the player is unable to recognize whether the background music or other sound effects corresponding to the rainbow effect have changed from an inaudible state to an audible state when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated during the execution period of the rainbow effect (timings t1 to t10), the player can clearly understand that the changing display of the pattern being executed is off due to the specific image that is displayed after the execution of the rainbow effect.

In the above configuration, if the sound of the BGM or other sound corresponding to the rainbow effect does not change from an inaudible state to an audible state despite the operation of the volume control button 227 during the execution period of the rainbow effect when a loss occurs (timing t1 to t10), the effect display device 1600 displays a specific image that does not allow the player to recognize that the changing display of the symbols being executed is a win after the execution of the rainbow effect when a loss occurs. In addition, if the light control button 228 located near the volume control button 227 is operated during the execution period of the rainbow effect when a loss occurs (timing t1 to t10), a specific image may also be displayed in the same way as when the volume control button 227 is operated. As a result, even if the player mistakenly operates the light control button 228 instead of the volume control button 227 during the limited execution period (timing t1 to t10), the effect can be progressed by regarding it as the player's intention to operate the volume control button 227, and the same effect as when the volume control button 227 is operated can be achieved. In this case, if the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated instead of the volume adjustment button 227 during the execution period of the rainbow effect (timing t1 to t10) when a winning combination is achieved, the background music or other sound effects corresponding to the rainbow effect will not change from an inaudible state to an audible state. In such a case, it is preferable to issue a special notification (for example, "That's not a volume adjustment!") that is not issued when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated, to alert the player that this is an incorrect operation.

In addition, in this example, a rainbow effect accompanied by button effect C is executed as an effect while the changing patterns are displayed, but this is not limited to the above, and a rainbow effect accompanied by button effect C may be executed during a specific period such as during a winning game when the changing patterns are not displayed. In this case, the player can be made aware of whether or not some kind of game benefit (such as probability fluctuation or time saving) will be awarded after the winning game currently being played, depending on the status of the sound output by button effect C (whether or not the sound effect such as background music corresponding to the rainbow effect changes from an inaudible state to an audible state, and whether or not a specific sound (e.g., beep beep) is output as an operation confirmation sound).

In this example, the rainbow effect accompanied by the button effect C is executed as an effect during the display of the changing pattern associated with the start winning, but this is not limited to this, and the rainbow effect accompanied by the button effect C may be executed as an effect that is executed without the start winning. Specifically, if the start winning continues to not occur, the player feels disgust and irritation, so as a part of alleviating this, when a certain period of time has passed without the start winning, a dummy effect that imitates the changing display of the pattern is started, and a rainbow effect accompanied by the button effect C is executed in that effect. In this case, the rainbow effect when a miss occurs is executed as the rainbow effect accompanied by the button effect C, and during the execution period of the rainbow effect (timing t1 to t10), the effect sound such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect is not changed from an inaudible state to an audible state even if the volume adjustment button 227 is operated, or a specific sound (e.g., a beep beep) is output as an operation confirmation sound when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated, so that the player is made aware that the dummy effect is not a win.

In the above, the rainbow effect with button effect A, the rainbow effect with button effect B, and the rainbow effect with button effect C were each executed as separate effects, but it would also be possible to execute a rainbow effect that combines these button effects. For example, it would be possible to execute a rainbow effect with composite button effect D that includes elements of button effect A and button effect B, a rainbow effect with composite button effect E that includes elements of button effect A and button effect C, a rainbow effect with composite button effect F that includes elements of button effect B and button effect C, and a rainbow effect with composite button effect G that includes elements of button effect A, button effect B, and button effect C. To explain more specifically, for example, in the rainbow effect with the composite button effect G, depending on the object operated by the player among the multiple operation parts (light amount adjustment button 228, effect operation part 301, volume adjustment button 227), the effect of whether or not the light amount changes (an element of the button effect A using the light amount adjustment button 228), the effect of whether or not the rainbow effect is continued (an element of the button effect B using the effect operation part 301), or the effect of whether or not the effect sound such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect changes from an inaudible state to an audible state (an element of the button effect C using the volume adjustment button 227) is executed, and the effect ends when one of the multiple operation parts (light amount adjustment button 228, effect operation part 301, volume adjustment button 227) is operated and the result of the effect corresponding to that operation is derived. Other composite button effects are those in which some of the effect elements are missing from the composite button effect G, and the object operated by the player is more limited than that of the composite button effect G. In other words, only when some of the multiple operation units (light intensity control button 228, effect operation unit 301, volume control button 227) are operated will the result of the effect corresponding to that operation be derived. Such composite button effects give the player some room to choose which button effect to execute for the rainbow effect (which button effect to use to progress the rainbow effect), allowing the player to freely select the progress mode of the rainbow effect. This not only provides the same effect as the various button effects described above, but also makes the rainbow effect even more interesting.

(Specific warning message after button animation)
As described above in detail, in the button performance B among the button performances A to C, when the performance operation unit 301 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated during the execution of the rainbow performance, a performance is executed to determine whether or not to continue the rainbow performance using the LEDs (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) that constitute the rainbow light emission mode among the LEDs of the luminous decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, and it is possible to determine whether or not a win has been obtained. In this example, when the rainbow performance at the time of a win is being executed, when the performance operation unit 301 is operated, the rainbow performance does not end, but continues until a predetermined time has elapsed, and it is possible to grasp that it is a win, whereas when the in-bow performance at the time of a loss is being executed, when the performance operation unit 301 is operated, the rainbow performance ends and it is possible to grasp that it is a loss.

Figure 255 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where the presentation operation unit 301 is not operated during button presentation B during execution of a rainbow presentation. In the above, when a winning variation pattern for executing a rainbow presentation at the time of a win has been determined, when the presentation operation unit 301 is operated during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow presentation at the time of the win, the rainbow presentation using the LEDs (LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the presentation operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3) that constitute the rainbow light-emitting mode among the LEDs of the luminous decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 continues without ending, whereas even when the presentation operation unit 301 is not operated, the rainbow presentation ends after the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow presentation at the time of the win has elapsed. In addition, when a variation pattern for executing a rainbow effect when a loss has been determined, when the effect operation unit 301 is operated during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect when a loss occurs, the rainbow effect using the LEDs (LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3) that constitute the rainbow light emission pattern among the LEDs of the illuminating decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 is terminated, whereas when the effect operation unit 301 is to be operated, the rainbow effect is terminated after the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect when a loss occurs. In other words, when the effect operation unit 301 is not operated during the execution period (timing t1 to t10), the rainbow effect is terminated after the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect has elapsed, so that it is not possible to recognize at the end of the rainbow effect whether it was a winning rainbow effect or a losing rainbow effect.

In this regard, in this example, without operating the effect operation unit 301 during the execution period of the rainbow effect when a loss occurs (timing t1 to t10), after the execution period of the rainbow effect when a loss occurs (timing t1 to t10) has elapsed, the effect display device 1600 notifies the player that the rainbow effect that was being executed is a rainbow effect when a loss occurs, and also displays a warning message when a loss occurs that corresponds to the rainbow effect when a loss occurs (for example, "This rainbow is fake, so don't complain to the store clerk"). In this way, without operating the effect operation unit 301, after the execution period of the rainbow effect when a loss occurs (timing t1 to t10) has elapsed, by notifying the player that the rainbow effect that was being executed is a rainbow effect when a loss occurs, there is no mistaken belief that it is a rainbow effect when a winning combination occurs. Furthermore, because the rainbow effect is executed as a high expectation effect that indicates a high probability of a win, simply notifying the player that it is a rainbow effect when they lose may cause the player to feel dissatisfied and direct it at others (the hall staff); however, by notifying the player of a warning message when they lose, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling dissatisfied and directing it at others (the hall staff).

As described above, after the execution period of the rainbow effect when a loss has occurred (timings t1 to t10) has elapsed without operating the effect operation unit 301, the effect display device 1600 notifies the player that the rainbow effect that was being executed is a rainbow effect when a loss has occurred, and also displays a warning message when a loss has occurred corresponding to the rainbow effect when a loss has occurred (for example, "This rainbow is fake, so don't complain to the store clerk"). However, such a warning message when a loss has occurred is composed of fewer colors than the number of colors that make up the rainbow light emission mode (7 colors in this example). As a result, while the rainbow effect when a loss has occurred is being executed, the player's motivation to play is increased by the number of colors that make up the rainbow light emission mode (7 colors in this example). However, after the rainbow effect when a loss has occurred, the player's motivation to play is reduced by displaying fewer colors than the number of colors that make up the rainbow light emission mode (7 colors in this example), and the display of a warning message when a loss has occurred can be effectively notified. During the rainbow effect execution period (timing t1 to t10), the display area of the effect display device 1600 is divided into multiple display areas, and a rainbow-style effect image is displayed in each of the multiple display areas in a different display color, and after the rainbow effect execution period (timing t1 to t10) has elapsed, the rainbow-style effect image is erased.

In this example, after the execution period of the rainbow effect when a loss has occurred (timings t1 to t10) has elapsed without operating the effect operation unit 301, the effect display device 1600 notifies the player that the rainbow effect that was being executed is a rainbow effect when a loss has occurred, and also displays a warning message when a loss has occurred that corresponds to the rainbow effect when a loss has occurred (for example, "This rainbow is fake, so don't complain to the store clerk"). However, when the effect operation unit 301 is operated while such a warning message when a loss has occurred is being displayed, it is possible to erase the display of the warning message when a loss has occurred. As a result, while a warning message when a loss has occurred is being displayed, a state of decreased motivation to play continues, but such a state can be ended by operating the effect operation unit 301 at the player's will. In this example, when the performance operation unit 301 is operated while a warning message for a loss is being displayed, the display of the warning message for a loss is erased. However, when the performance operation unit 301 is operated, the performance display device 1600 may be configured to display a predetermined display object (a display corresponding to the operation of the performance operation unit 301) in front of the display of the warning message for a loss, and at least a portion of the display of the warning message for a loss may be concealed, making the display of the warning message for a loss difficult or impossible for the player to see. Even with this configuration, the player can operate the performance operation unit 301 at his will to make the display of the warning message for a loss difficult or impossible for the player to see, thereby ending the state in which the player's motivation to play is diminished.

On the other hand, during the execution period of the rainbow effect when a win occurs (timing t1 to t10), regardless of whether the effect operation unit 301 is operated or not, after the execution period of the rainbow effect when that win occurs (timing t1 to t10) has elapsed, a display is executed to notify that the variable display of the ongoing pattern will result in a win ("This rainbow is a win!"). Then, after a prescribed period has elapsed, a display is executed to prevent the player from becoming overly absorbed in the game (for example, "This rainbow is a win, but don't get too absorbed") as a warning message for the win corresponding to the rainbow effect when a win occurs. As a result, the rainbow effect is executed as a high expectation effect that suggests a high probability of a win, and by notifying the player that this rainbow effect is a rainbow effect that occurs when a win occurs, a state occurs in which the player's motivation to play is excessively increased. However, after the execution of the rainbow effect when a win occurs, a display is executed to notify the player that the changing display of the symbols being executed will result in a win, and then a warning message for when a win occurs is displayed, thereby preventing the player from becoming overly absorbed in the game during subsequent games.

As described above, after the execution of the rainbow effect when a loss occurs, the effect display device 1600 executes a display to notify a warning message when a loss occurs, whereas after the execution of the rainbow effect when a win occurs, the effect display device 1600 executes a display to notify a warning message when a win occurs. However, after the execution of the rainbow effect when a loss occurs, the display to notify a warning message when a loss occurs is executed immediately thereafter, whereas after the execution of the rainbow effect when a win occurs, the display to notify a warning message when a win occurs is executed after the display to notify that the changing display of the symbols being executed will be a win. As a result, if the display to notify a warning message when a win occurs is executed immediately after the execution of the rainbow effect when a win occurs, the player will not be able to enjoy the afterglow of knowing that the rainbow effect was the rainbow effect when a win occurs, but by executing the display to notify a warning message when a win occurs after a predetermined period of time has passed (after the display to notify that the changing display of the symbols being executed will be a win) it is possible to prevent such an impediment to the enjoyment of the afterglow.

In this example, when the performance operation unit 301 is operated while a warning message or the like is being displayed upon a win, the performance display device 1600 may be configured to display a predetermined display object (a display corresponding to the operation of the performance operation unit 301) in front of the display of the warning message or the like upon a win, and at least a portion of the display of the warning message or the like upon a win may be concealed so that the display of the warning message or the like upon a win may be difficult or impossible for the player to see. With this configuration, the state in which the player's motivation to play is excessively increased while a warning message or the like upon a win is being displayed is ended, but the player may operate the performance operation unit 301 at his/her will to make the display of the warning message or the like upon a win difficult or impossible for the player to see, so that such a state does not continue for too long.

In this example, the case where button performance B is executed while the rainbow performance is being executed has been described, but similarly, when button performance A or button performance C is executed, the performance display device 1600 may be configured to display a warning message for when a miss occurs, corresponding to the rainbow performance when a miss occurs, after the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow performance when a miss has elapsed, without operating the performance operation unit 301.

In this example, during the execution period of the rainbow effect when a win occurs (timing t1 to t10), regardless of whether the effect operation unit 301 is operated or not, after the execution period of the rainbow effect when that win occurs (timing t1 to t10) has elapsed, a display is executed to notify that the variable display of the ongoing pattern will be a win, and then a display is executed to notify a win-time attention message corresponding to the rainbow effect when a win occurs. However, it is preferable to configure the execution period of the display notifying the attention message when a loss occurs to be longer than the execution period of the display notifying the attention message when a win occurs. In this way, without operating the effect operation unit 301, after the execution period of the rainbow effect when a loss occurs (timing t1 to t10) has elapsed, the attention message when a loss occurs is notified, allowing the player to recognize that the rainbow effect that was being executed is the rainbow effect when a loss occurs, but by extending the execution period of the display notifying the attention message when a loss occurs, such recognition can be ensured. In addition, it is preferable to configure the execution period of the display that notifies the attention message when a win occurs and the execution period of the display that notifies the attention message when a loss occurs to be shorter than the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect that is executed before that. As a result, while the attention message when a win occurs or the attention message when a loss occurs is displayed, the state of decreased willingness to play continues, but by shortening the execution period for displaying these attention messages, it is possible to prevent the state of excessively decreased willingness to play from continuing.

[Simulated rainbow effect]
There are many effects (such as the rainbow effect described above) that players rarely encounter or experience during the variable display of the symbols, and in recent years, the operation of gaming machines has declined without players experiencing the fun of these effects. Therefore, in this embodiment, a "performance introduction period" is generated during the standby state during the non-variable display of the symbols as a specific period during which such effects can be recognized by the player. In the performance introduction period of this embodiment, in addition to the model introduction such as the specifications of the pachinko machine 1, a simulated rainbow performance is executed in which the lights are lit in a rainbow light emission mode that imitates the rainbow performance at the time of a win, even though the symbols are not displayed in a variable manner. This performance introduction period starts when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) has passed after the variable display of the symbols has ended and the state in which the symbols are not displayed in a variable manner has passed, and the simulated rainbow performance is executed at a predetermined time during that period.

In this example, during the display of the changing patterns, it is possible to execute an effect suggesting set value 6 as the above-mentioned suggestive effect A, which is the same as the rainbow effect and simulated rainbow effect when a win occurs in that it executes a light-emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light-emitting mode. In other words, when executing a rainbow effect or simulated rainbow effect when a win occurs, a light-emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light-emitting mode is executed in conjunction with the display of the effect display device 1600, just like when suggestive effect A is executed, using LEDs 1-4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5-7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8-9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10-14 of the door frame 3. Specifically, when the rainbow effect is being executed upon a win, when the elapsed time from when the display of the decorative patterns began to change reaches a predetermined timing (timing t1), LEDs 1-2 on the game board 5 are illuminated in "red," LEDs 3-4 on the game board 5 are illuminated in "purple," LEDs 5-6 on the door frame top unit 450 are illuminated in "blue," LED 7 on the door frame top unit 450 and LED 8 on the door frame 3 are illuminated in "green," LED 9 on the door frame 3 and LED 10 on the door frame 3 are illuminated in "orange," LEDs 11-12 on the door frame 3 are illuminated in "yellow," and LEDs 13-14 on the door frame 3 are illuminated in "white." Also, when the simulated rainbow effect is being executed, when the time elapsed since the start of the effect introduction period reaches a predetermined timing (timing t1), LEDs 1-2 on the game board 5 are illuminated in "red," LEDs 3-4 on the game board 5 are illuminated in "purple," LEDs 5-6 on the door frame top unit 450 are illuminated in "blue," LEDs 7 on the door frame top unit 450 and LEDs 8 on the door frame 3 are illuminated in "green," LEDs 9 on the door frame 3 and LEDs 10 on the door frame 3 are illuminated in "orange," LEDs 11-12 on the door frame 3 are illuminated in "yellow," and LEDs 13-14 on the door frame 3 are illuminated in "white." In other words, LEDs 1-4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5-7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8-9 on the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10-14 on the door frame 3 are illuminated in different colors for each of the two groups.

And for LEDs 1-4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5-7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8-9 on the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10-14 on the door frame 3, every predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds), the LEDs emitting "red" light are changed to "purple," the LEDs emitting "purple" light to "blue," the LEDs emitting "blue" light to "green," the LEDs emitting "green" light to "orange," the LEDs emitting "orange" light to "yellow," the LEDs emitting "yellow" light to "white," and the LEDs emitting "white" light to "red." In this way, for LEDs 1-4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5-7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8-9 on the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10-14 on the door frame 3, the light emission color of the LEDs in each of the two groups is changed in a predetermined order of "red → purple → blue → green → orange → yellow → white → red" every specified period (for example, 0.1 seconds), and such regular changes are repeated until timing t10 is reached (for example, for 10 seconds).

In this way, the LEDs 1-4 on the game board 5, the LEDs 5-7 on the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8-9 on the performance operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10-14 on the door frame 3 are controlled to switch between multiple light colors in sequence in a short unit of light emission time, making it possible to visually recognize that these LEDs are working together to emit light in a rainbow light pattern, and it is possible to execute a light emission performance with impact. Also, the LEDs 1-4 on the game board 5, the LEDs 5-7 on the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8-9 on the performance operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10-14 on the door frame 3 are controlled in a linked manner so that the LEDs 1-14 emit light in multiple colors so that the LEDs 1-14 emit different light colors for each of the two groups, and by switching the light colors in a short period of time, it is possible to execute a light emission performance with more impact than usual.

In this example, multiple LEDs are used to emit seven colors simultaneously in a rainbow light emission pattern, and each emitted color is switched regularly, but the emitted colors do not have to be seven colors that appear simultaneously, and it is sufficient if three or more predetermined colors appear simultaneously.

The display contents displayed on the performance display device 1600 may be different when a rainbow performance is being performed when a winning combination is activated and when a simulated rainbow performance is being performed. For example, when a rainbow performance is being performed when a winning combination is activated, a pattern may be displayed in parallel, but when a simulated rainbow performance is being performed, a pattern may not be displayed in parallel. This prevents the user from mistaking that a winning combination is being performed when a simulated rainbow performance is being performed. Note that the display contents displayed on the performance display device 1600 are not limited to this, and for example, when a simulated rainbow performance is being performed, a message such as "simulation in progress" may be displayed.

The rainbow effect and the simulated rainbow effect when a win occurs are the same in that they execute a light-emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light-emitting mode using LEDs 1-4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5-7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8-9 on the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10-14 on the door frame 3, but it is preferable to set them up as control programs for separate effects rather than as control programs for the same effect, and execute these control programs. In other words, the control program for the rainbow effect when a win occurs and the control program for the simulated rainbow effect are stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510 as control programs for separate effects. As a result, even if an abnormality occurs in either the control program for the rainbow effect when a win occurs or the control program for the simulated rainbow effect, the control program for the other can be executed normally, and the non-execution of effects when an abnormality occurs can be minimized.

In this way, even during the standby state when the patterns are not being displayed in a changing manner, a simulated rainbow effect is executed in which the lights are lit in a rainbow light pattern that mimics the rainbow effect that occurs when a winning combination is activated. This allows the player to experience a rainbow effect that is rarely encountered or experienced during the standby state when the patterns are not being displayed in a changing manner, and makes the player aware that a rainbow effect that occurs when a winning combination is activated can be executed.

(Regarding the display of a warning message to prevent addiction after the simulated rainbow performance ends)
In addition, when the simulated rainbow effect is performed during the effect introduction period as described above, there is a risk that the player's motivation to play may be excessively increased beyond the effect introduction, such as "I'll keep playing until I encounter that effect," and that the player may become "addicted" to the game. Therefore, in this example, the following special processing is performed to prevent the simulated rainbow effect from causing the player to become "addicted" to the game.

Figure 256 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where an anti-addiction display is executed after the execution of a simulated rainbow effect. In this example, while the symbols are being displayed in a changing manner, a rainbow effect is executed at the time of a win as a winning confirmation effect that confirms a win, and as the rainbow effect at the time of a win, one of the rainbow effects A to C is executed. Also, while the symbols are not being displayed in a changing manner, during the execution of the effect introduction period, a simulated rainbow effect is executed, and as the simulated rainbow effect, one of the simulated rainbow effects A to C is executed. Furthermore, each of the rainbow effects A to C produced when a winning jackpot is generated and each of the simulated rainbow effects A to C are the same in that, during the execution period of that rainbow effect, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used to produce a light-emitting effect in which the LEDs are lit up in a rainbow light-emitting mode; however, they differ in whether or not the rear upper front decorative body 3310 is moved from its initial position to its appearance position, and whether or not each of the seven numbered display bodies on the rear upper front decorative body 3310 is lit up in a rainbow light-emitting mode in which different light colors are emitted. As described above in detail, the back-upper front performance unit 3300 attached to the game board 5 comprises a back-upper front decorative body 3310 that is rectangular and elongated in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, a back-upper front decorative board (not shown) that is provided behind the back-upper front decorative body 3310 and has multiple LEDs mounted on the front, and a back-upper front lifting unit (not shown) that raises and lowers the back-upper front decorative body 3310. When a specified performance condition is met, the back-upper front decorative body 3310 can be moved from the initial position to the appearance position, allowing the back-upper front decorative body 3310 to appear on the front side of the performance display device 1600.

Specifically, in rainbow performance A and simulated rainbow performance A when a winning combination occurs, during the execution period of the rainbow performance (timing t1 to t10), the back upper front decorative body 3310 does not move from the initial position to the appearance position, but is maintained in the initial position, and the back upper front decorative body 3310 is not illuminated in a rainbow light-emitting mode using each of the seven numbered display bodies. Also, in rainbow performance B and simulated rainbow performance B when a winning combination occurs, during the execution period of the rainbow performance (timing t1 to t10), the back upper front decorative body 3310 moves from the initial position to the appearance position, and the back upper front decorative body 3310 is illuminated in a rainbow light-emitting mode using each of the seven numbered display bodies. In addition, in the rainbow effect C when a winning combination occurs or the simulated rainbow effect C, during the execution period of the rainbow effect (timing t1 to t10), the upper back front decorative body 3310 is maintained in its initial position without moving from its initial position to its appearance position, and the upper back front decorative body 3310 is lit up in a rainbow light emission mode using each of the seven numbered display bodies.

In this example, after the end of the display of the changing patterns, when a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed without changing the patterns, the performance introduction period is started. During the performance introduction period, the performance display device 1600 is used to execute a display (movie) of the model introduction of the pachinko machine 1, and at the end of the period, the logo display of the model title of the pachinko machine 1 is executed. At this time, while the logo of the model title of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed, one of the simulated rainbow performances A to C is executed, and during the execution period of the simulated rainbow performances A to C, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the performance operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used to execute a light-emitting performance that lights up in a rainbow light-emitting mode. Note that, while the logo of the model title of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed, a rainbow-mode performance image is displayed for the logo display of the model title. In other words, the logo display of the machine title is divided into multiple display areas, and a rainbow-style presentation image is displayed in which each of the multiple display areas is displayed in a different display color. In such a rainbow-style presentation image, the display color displayed in each of the multiple display areas is changed in a predetermined order of "red → purple → blue → green → orange → yellow → white → red" every predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds), and such regular changes are repeated until timing t10 is reached (for example, 5 seconds).

Next, when the display of the model title logo ends, one of the simulated rainbow effects A to C that was being executed is terminated, and after the display of the model title logo ends, the effect display device 1600 executes the display of the logo of the manufacturer that produced the pachinko machine 1, and then a warning message regarding "preventing addiction" to prevent players from becoming overly addicted to the game (for example, "Pachinko should be enjoyed in moderation. Take care not to become addicted") is displayed. The effect introduction period is then terminated by displaying the warning message regarding "preventing addiction". Here, when the simulated rainbow effects A to C are executed, they are similar to the rainbow effects A to C executed when a win is confirmed, which may result in the player becoming overly motivated to play. However, after the simulated rainbow effects A to C are executed, the logo of the manufacturer that produced the pachinko machine 1 is displayed, followed by a warning message regarding "preventing addiction," which can prevent the player from becoming overly addicted to the game during subsequent play.

As described above, in the simulated rainbow performance A, during the execution period of the simulated rainbow performance A (timing t1 to t10), the back upper front decorative body 3310 is maintained in the initial position without moving from the initial position to the appearance position, and the back upper front decorative body 3310 is not illuminated in a rainbow light-emitting mode using each of the seven numbered display bodies. As a result, after the execution of the simulated rainbow performance A, there is no need to move the back upper front decorative body 3310 from the appearance position to the initial position, and the period until the start of displaying the warning message regarding "addiction prevention" is short. In other words, after the execution of the simulated rainbow performance A, the execution period for displaying the logo of the manufacturer that manufactured the pachinko machine 1 is short, and the start timing of displaying the warning message regarding "addiction prevention" is early.

On the other hand, in the simulated rainbow performance B, during the execution period of the simulated rainbow performance B (timing t1 to t10), the back upper front decoration 3310 moves from the initial position to the appearance position, and the back upper front decoration 3310 is illuminated in a rainbow light-emitting manner using each of the seven numbered display bodies. Here, after the execution of the simulated rainbow performance B, an operation is required to return the back upper front decoration 3310 from the appearance position to the initial position, and an operation to return the back upper front decoration 3310 from the appearance position to the initial position is executed during the execution period of the logo display of the model title executed before the display of the warning message regarding "addiction prevention". For this reason, after the execution of the simulated rainbow performance B, the period until the start of the display of the warning message regarding "addiction prevention" is long. In other words, after the execution of the simulated rainbow performance B, the execution period of the logo display of the manufacturer that manufactured the pachinko machine 1 is long, and the start timing of displaying the warning message regarding "addiction prevention" is late.

In addition, in the simulated rainbow performance C, during the execution period of the simulated rainbow performance C (timing t1 to t10), the back-upper front decorative body 3310 is maintained at the initial position without moving from the initial position to the appearance position, and the back-upper front decorative body 3310 is lit in a rainbow light-emitting mode using each of the seven numbered display bodies. Here, the simulated rainbow performance C is the same as the simulated rainbow performance B in that each of the seven numbered display bodies in the back-upper front decorative body 3310 is lit in a rainbow light-emitting mode, so when the simulated rainbow performance C is executed, the back-upper front decorative body 3310 is maintained at the initial position, but attention is paid to whether the back-upper front decorative body 3310 moves from the initial position to the appearance position. For this reason, after the execution of the simulated rainbow performance C, there is a possibility that attention is paid to the back-upper front decorative body 3310, and if a warning message regarding "prevention of addiction" is displayed at an early timing, the warning message regarding "prevention of addiction" may be missed. In this regard, after the execution of the simulated rainbow performance C, no action is required to return the upper back front decoration 3310 from its appearance position to its initial position during the execution period of the model title logo display, but, just like after the execution of the simulated rainbow performance B, the period until the start of displaying the warning message regarding "addiction prevention" is long. In other words, after the execution of the simulated rainbow performance C, the execution period of the logo display of the manufacturer that produced the pachinko machine 1 is long, and by delaying the start timing of displaying the warning message regarding "addiction prevention," it is possible to prevent the warning message regarding "addiction prevention" from being overlooked.

In this example, in the simulated rainbow performances A to C, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the simulated rainbow performances A to C, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used to perform a light-emitting performance in which the lights are lit in a rainbow light-emitting mode. In addition, in the simulated rainbow performance A, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the simulated rainbow performance A, the seven numbered display bodies in the back upper front decorative body 3310 are not lit in a rainbow light-emitting mode, whereas in the simulated rainbow performances B and C, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the simulated rainbow performances B and C, the seven numbered display bodies in the back upper front decorative body 3310 are lit in a rainbow light-emitting mode. In other words, the simulated rainbow effects B and C are configured so that there are more components (light-emitting areas) involved in the light-emitting effects that light up in a rainbow light-emitting mode than in the simulated rainbow effect A. The simulated rainbow effects B and C are also configured so that the start timing of displaying the warning message regarding "prevention of addiction" is delayed compared to the simulated rainbow effect A. In this way, when the simulated rainbow effects B and C are being performed, the start timing of displaying the warning message regarding "prevention of addiction" that is subsequently performed is delayed, so that the player's motivation to play is heightened due to the larger number of components (light-emitting areas) involved in the light-emitting effects that light up in a rainbow light-emitting mode, and the player can enjoy the state until the warning message is displayed.

In this example, in the simulated rainbow performance B, the back-upper front decorative body 3310 is moved from the initial position to the appearance position during the execution period of the simulated rainbow performance B (timing t1 to t10), but the distance that the back-upper front decorative body 3310 moves from the initial position as the appearance position can be changed in multiple stages. Therefore, after the execution of the simulated rainbow performance B, the distance that the back-upper front decorative body 3310 moves to return from the appearance position to the initial position is different, so the period until the start of displaying the warning message regarding "addiction prevention" (execution period of displaying the logo of the model title) is made variable according to the distance that it moves. For example, if the distance that the back-upper front decorative body 3310 moves from the initial position as the appearance position during the execution period of the simulated rainbow performance B (timing t1 to t10) is long, the period until the start of displaying the warning message regarding "addiction prevention" after the execution of the simulated rainbow performance B is extended. In contrast, in the simulated rainbow performance A, during the execution period of the simulated rainbow performance A (timings t1 to t10), the rear upper front decorative body 3310 does not move from its initial position to its appearance position, but is maintained in its initial position, so that after the execution of the simulated rainbow performance A, there is no need to move the rear upper front decorative body 3310 from its appearance position to its initial position, and the period until the start of the display of the warning message regarding "addiction prevention" (the execution period for displaying the model title logo) is fixed.

In this example, the simulated rainbow performance A and the simulated rainbow performance B have the same execution period, and the period for executing the light-emitting performance that lights up in a rainbow light-emitting mode is the same, but in the simulated rainbow performance B, since the back upper front decoration 3310 moves from the initial position to the appearance position, the execution period may be longer than that of the simulated rainbow performance A. Also, as described above, after the execution of the simulated rainbow performance B, the period until the start of displaying the warning message regarding "addiction prevention" (execution period of the model title logo display) is made variable according to the distance moved to return the back upper front decoration 3310 from the appearance position to the initial position. In this way, even if the execution period of the simulated rainbow performance B becomes long, by making the period until the start of displaying the warning message regarding "addiction prevention" (execution period of the model title logo display) variable, the timing of completion of the series of performance introduction periods due to the end of the display of the warning message regarding "addiction prevention" can be made as early as possible, and the execution period of the series of performance introduction periods can be prevented from becoming unnecessarily long.

In addition, in this example, after the execution of the simulated rainbow effects A to C, a predetermined period of time has passed before a warning message regarding "preventing addiction" is displayed, but after the execution of the rainbow effects A to C when a player wins, a warning message regarding "preventing addiction" is also displayed after a predetermined period of time has passed. As a result, when the rainbow effects A to C when a player wins are executed, they are executed as a winning confirmation effect that confirms a win, so a situation may arise in which the player's motivation to play is excessively increased, but by displaying a warning message regarding "preventing addiction" after the execution of the rainbow effects A to C when a player wins, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming overly addicted to the game in subsequent games.

In the above, after the execution of rainbow effects A to C when a win occurs, a warning message regarding "prevention of addiction" is displayed, but it is preferable to configure the execution period of the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of addiction" after the execution of simulated rainbow effects A to C to be longer than the execution period of the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of addiction" after the execution of rainbow effects A to C when a win occurs. As a result, when the simulated rainbow effects A to C are executed, the player's motivation to play may be excessively increased even though the performance is not a confirmed win, but by extending the execution period of the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of addiction", such an excessive increase in motivation to play can be reliably reduced. In addition, it is preferable to configure the execution period of the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of addiction" to be shorter than the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect executed before it. This will reduce the excessive increase in motivation to play while the warning message regarding "preventing addiction" is displayed, but by shortening the execution period during which the warning message is displayed, it is possible to prevent the motivation to play from decreasing too much.

(Regarding the deletion of the warning message regarding "prevention of addiction" after the end of the simulated rainbow performance A)
In this example, in the simulated rainbow performance A, during the execution period of the simulated rainbow performance A (timing t1 to t10), the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the performance operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used to perform a light-emitting performance in which the LEDs are lit up in a rainbow light-emitting mode, but the back upper front decorative body 3310 is maintained in its initial position without moving from its initial position to its appearance position, and the back upper front decorative body 3310 is not lit up in a rainbow light-emitting mode using each of the seven numbered display bodies. During the execution of this simulated rainbow performance A, the player's motivation to play is not excessively increased compared to the simulated rainbow performances B and C, and there is no need to display a warning message regarding "prevention of addiction" after the execution of the simulated rainbow performance A. Therefore, in this example, only after the execution of the simulated rainbow effect A, when the effect operation unit 301 is operated while the warning message regarding "preventing addiction" is being displayed, it is possible to erase the display of the warning message regarding "preventing addiction."

Figure 257 is a timing chart showing an example of erasing the addiction prevention display after the execution of the simulated rainbow performance. As described above, after the execution of the simulated rainbow performance A, the display of the warning message regarding "addiction prevention" is executed, but when the performance operation unit 301 is operated while such a warning message regarding "addiction prevention" is displayed, it is possible to erase the display of the warning message regarding "addiction prevention". As a result, while the simulated rainbow performance A is being executed, the desire to play is increased by the execution of the light-emitting performance that lights up in a rainbow light-emitting mode, but after the execution of the simulated rainbow performance A, the increased desire to play can be reduced by executing the display of the warning message regarding "addiction prevention", and the display of the warning message regarding "addiction prevention" can be effectively notified. In addition, while the warning message regarding "preventing addiction" is being displayed, the player can operate the presentation operation unit 301 at their own will to erase the display of the warning message regarding "preventing addiction," thereby preventing the player's desire to play from being excessively reduced from continuing.

Meanwhile, in the simulated rainbow performance B, during the execution period of the simulated rainbow performance B (timing t1 to t10), not only is a light-emitting performance performed in which LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are lit up in a rainbow light-emitting mode, but the back upper front decorative body 3310 is also moved from its initial position to its appearance position, and the back upper front decorative body 3310 is lit up in a rainbow light-emitting mode using each of the seven numbered display bodies. In other words, during the execution of the simulated rainbow performance B, there are more components (light-emitting areas) involved in the light-emitting performance that is lit up in a rainbow light-emitting mode than in the simulated rainbow performance A, which excessively increases the desire to play. For this reason, after the execution of the simulated rainbow performance B, a warning message regarding "prevention of addiction" is displayed, but while such a warning message regarding "prevention of addiction" is displayed, it is impossible to erase the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of addiction" even if the performance operation unit 301 is operated. As a result, after the execution of the simulated rainbow performance B, regardless of whether the performance operation unit 301 is operated or not, the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of addiction" is displayed for a predetermined period of time, thereby reliably reducing the state in which excessive motivation to play is increased, and the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of addiction" can be effectively notified.

In this example, when the performance operation unit 301 is operated after the execution of the simulated rainbow performance A while the warning message regarding "prevention of addiction" is being displayed, it is possible to erase the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of addiction", but it is also possible to erase (not execute) the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of addiction" by operating the performance operation unit 301 during the period from the execution of the simulated rainbow performance A until the start of the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of addiction" (the execution period of the model title logo display). As a result, by operating the performance operation unit 301 at the player's will before the start of the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of addiction", the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of addiction" can be made non-display, and a situation in which a decrease in motivation to play due to the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of addiction" can be prevented in advance. Similarly, when the performance operation unit 301 is operated while the simulated rainbow performance A is being executed, it is possible to erase (not execute) the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of addiction" after the execution of the simulated rainbow performance A. Even with this configuration, the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of addiction" can be made to disappear by operating the performance operation unit 301 at the player's will before the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of addiction" begins, thereby preventing a situation in which a decrease in motivation to play occurs due to the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of addiction".

(Restrictions on the execution of simulated rainbow effects)
In this example, during the performance introduction period during which the symbols are not displayed variably, a light-emitting performance in which the simulated rainbow performances A to C are lit in a rainbow light-emitting manner is executed, and after the execution of the simulated rainbow performances A to C, a warning message regarding "prevention of addiction" is displayed. Since the player's motivation to play is increased during the execution of such simulated rainbow performances A to C, there is a risk of executing a light-emitting performance in which the light is lit in a rainbow light-emitting manner for a player who is prone to addiction. Therefore, in this example, a predetermined operation unit that can be operated by the player is newly provided in addition to the performance operation unit 301, and when a specific action is detected on the predetermined operation unit, the execution of the simulated rainbow performances A to C is restricted, thereby making it possible to prevent the player from being in a state where their motivation to play is increased.

Figure 258 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where the execution of the simulated rainbow effect is restricted. First, a "super-addiction prevention switch" (not shown) that can be operated by the player is provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 1. The super-addiction prevention switch is a knock-type switch that is configured to maintain the depressed position when pressed all the way in the first time and to return to the initial position when pressed all the way in the second time. If the super-addiction prevention switch is operated to maintain the depressed position and specific action A is detected, the simulated rainbow effects A to C are not executed when the timing for executing the simulated rainbow effects A to C arrives, and the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are restricted from being executed to light up in a rainbow light-emitting mode. In addition, if specific behavior A is not detected, a warning message regarding "preventing addiction" is displayed after the execution of simulated rainbow performance A, but if specific behavior A is detected, the display of the warning message regarding "preventing addiction" is restricted so that it is not executed. Also, if specific behavior A is detected, the game is controlled to a state in which it is not possible to play, for example, a state in which game ball B is not launched from ball launcher 540 even when handle 195 is operated, and a state in which the display of changing patterns is not started even if game ball B enters various ball entry ports such as first starting port 2004.

The addiction prevention switch is provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 and can be operated by the player, but it is assumed that it will be operated by the player's family or a hall official. If the player's family or a hall official judges that the player is addicted to playing, they can operate the addiction prevention switch to stop the player from playing. During the execution of the simulated rainbow effects A to C, the player's motivation to play is increased by the execution of the light-emitting effects that light up in a rainbow light-emitting mode, but by operating the addiction prevention switch, the simulated rainbow effects A to C are not executed, and the player can be prevented from becoming addicted to playing in advance. In addition, when the addiction prevention switch is operated by the player's family or a hall official, not only are the simulated rainbow effects A to C not executed, but the warning message regarding "addiction prevention" after the execution of the simulated rainbow effects A to C is also not displayed, since the purpose is to stop the player from playing in the first place.

In addition, a "super-addiction prevention switch" (not shown) that can be operated by the player is provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 1, separate from the "super-addiction prevention switch." The super-addiction prevention switch is of a knock type, which, like the super-addiction prevention switch, is configured to maintain the depressed position when pressed all the way the first time and to return to the initial position when pressed all the way the second time. When specific action B is detected by operating the super-addiction prevention switch to maintain it in the depressed position, the super-addiction prevention switch is restricted from performing the simulated rainbow effects A to C when the timing for performing the simulated rainbow effects A to C arrives, as in the case of operating the super-addiction prevention switch to maintain it in the depressed position, and the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the performance operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are not performed. However, when specific behavior B is detected by operating the anti-addiction switch to maintain it in the pressed position, a warning message regarding "addiction prevention" will be displayed, unlike when specific behavior A is detected by operating the anti-addiction switch to maintain it in the pressed position.

The addiction prevention switch is provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 and is intended to be operated by the player. If the player fears that he or she may become addicted to playing, he or she may operate the addiction prevention switch himself or herself to prevent the occurrence of an effect that would cause the player to become addicted to playing. Here, while the simulated rainbow effects A to C are being performed, the player's motivation to play is increased by the execution of the light-emitting effects that light up in a rainbow light-emitting mode. However, if the player operates the addiction prevention switch himself or herself, the simulated rainbow effects A to C will not be executed, and the player can be prevented from becoming addicted to playing in advance. In addition, while not executing the simulated rainbow effects A to C, by displaying a warning message regarding "addiction prevention" after the execution of the simulated rainbow effects A to C, the player's motivation to play will be reduced by the display of the warning message regarding "addiction prevention," and the player can be prevented from becoming addicted to playing.

In this example, a "strong addiction prevention switch" and a "weak addiction prevention switch" are provided as "addiction prevention switches" that restrict the execution of simulated rainbow effects A to C. The strong addiction prevention switch is maintained in the pressed position when it is pressed all the way down the first time, and even if it is pressed all the way back to its initial position a second time in a state in which it restricts the execution of simulated rainbow effects A to C, the state in which it restricts the execution of simulated rainbow effects A to C is not released and continues unless the power is turned back on. This means that even if the player's family or hall personnel operate the addiction prevention switch after the addiction prevention switch is operated by the player, the simulated rainbow effects A to C will not be executed and the state in which it is not possible to play will continue, so that the game can be stopped reliably. On the other hand, when the weak anti-dip switch is pressed all the way down the first time, it remains in the pressed position, restricting the execution of simulated rainbow effects A to C, and when it is pressed all the way down a second time to return it to its initial position, the restriction that prevents the execution of simulated rainbow effects A to C can be released.

The addiction prevention switch is provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 1, and can be operated not only by the player's family or hall staff, but also by the player himself. However, it is preferable to configure the switch so that the player cannot operate it, by having the hall staff prepare a remote control or the like, and to enable the specific action A to be detected from a position away from the pachinko machine 1. This allows the player's family or hall staff to operate the remote control or the like from a position away from the pachinko machine 1 to detect the specific action A, even if the player is seated at the pachinko machine 1. In addition, if the addiction prevention switch is provided on the remote control or the like, rather than on the front side of the pachinko machine 1, the player cannot operate the addiction prevention switch at will, and therefore the player cannot release the state that restricts the execution of the simulated rainbow effects A to C, and the game is stopped.

In addition, in this example, the "weak addiction prevention switch" and "addiction prevention switch" are maintained in the pressed position when pressed all the way in for the first time, restricting the simulated rainbow effects A to C from being executed, and when pressed all the way in for the second time to return to the initial position, the restricted state is not immediately released, but the restricted state is released after a predetermined period (e.g., 10 seconds) has passed. In other words, the state of restricting the execution of the simulated rainbow effects A to C continues from the time when the switch is pressed all the way in for the second time to return to the initial position until the predetermined period has passed. As a result, even if the switch is pressed all the way in for the second time to return to the initial position just before the execution timing of the simulated rainbow effects A to C, the simulated rainbow effects A to C will not be executed, and it is possible to effectively prevent the player from becoming addicted to the game.

In addition, when the "addiction prevention switch" or "addiction prevention switch" is being operated (when not released), the simulated rainbow effects A to C are not executed, and restrictions are imposed such that light-emitting effects that light up in a rainbow light-emitting mode using LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3 are not executed. However, for example, instead of light-emitting effects that light up in the rainbow light-emitting mode, at least some of LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3 may be configured to light up in a single color to notify the outside world that the "addiction prevention switch" or "addiction prevention switch" is being operated. Also, the color of light emitted by at least some of the LEDs 1-4 on the game board 5, the LEDs 5-7 on the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8-9 on the performance operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10-14 on the door frame 3 may be different for each type of "addiction prevention switch" or "addiction prevention switch." This makes it easy to know from the outside that the simulated rainbow performances A-C are restricted from being executed when the "addiction prevention switch" or "addiction prevention switch" is being operated.

[Checking for rainbow light emission]
In this embodiment, a rainbow effect (light-emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light-emitting mode) is executed as a winning confirmation effect that confirms a win during the variable display of the pattern, but if the rainbow effect is not executed properly due to some malfunction, it may become a factor that reduces interest in the game. In particular, since the appearance rate of the rainbow effect during a win is extremely low, it is difficult to check whether the light-emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light-emitting mode can be executed normally even in a hall or factory. Therefore, in this example, the rainbow light-emitting mode can be confirmed at a timing different from that of the rainbow effect during a winning. Specifically, during the execution of the effect introduction period during which the pattern is not variable, a light-emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light-emitting mode as the simulated rainbow effect is executed, so that it is possible to easily check whether the light-emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light-emitting mode can be executed normally in a hall or factory. The effect introduction period is an effect that starts when a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed after the end of the variable display of the symbols, and a simulated rainbow effect is executed in addition to the model introduction of the pachinko machine 1. In this example, the simulated rainbow effect is the same as the rainbow effect at the time of a win in that a light-emitting effect is executed in which LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are lit up in a rainbow light-emitting mode during the execution period of the rainbow effect, but is different in that the timing of regularly switching the light-emitting colors that make up the rainbow light-emitting mode is made faster or slower.

In this example, during the display of the changing patterns, it is possible to execute an effect suggesting set value 6 as the above-mentioned suggestive effect A, which is the same as the rainbow effect and simulated rainbow effect when a win occurs in that it executes a light-emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light-emitting mode. In other words, when executing a rainbow effect or simulated rainbow effect when a win occurs, a light-emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light-emitting mode is executed in conjunction with the display of the effect display device 1600, just like when suggestive effect A is executed, using LEDs 1-4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5-7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8-9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10-14 of the door frame 3. Specifically, when the rainbow effect is being executed upon a win, when the elapsed time from when the display of the decorative patterns began to change reaches a predetermined timing (timing t1), LEDs 1-2 on the game board 5 are illuminated in "red," LEDs 3-4 on the game board 5 are illuminated in "purple," LEDs 5-6 on the door frame top unit 450 are illuminated in "blue," LED 7 on the door frame top unit 450 and LED 8 on the door frame 3 are illuminated in "green," LED 9 on the door frame 3 and LED 10 on the door frame 3 are illuminated in "orange," LEDs 11-12 on the door frame 3 are illuminated in "yellow," and LEDs 13-14 on the door frame 3 are illuminated in "white." Also, when the simulated rainbow effect is being executed, when the time elapsed since the start of the effect introduction period reaches a predetermined timing (timing t1), LEDs 1-2 on the game board 5 are illuminated in "red," LEDs 3-4 on the game board 5 are illuminated in "purple," LEDs 5-6 on the door frame top unit 450 are illuminated in "blue," LEDs 7 on the door frame top unit 450 and LEDs 8 on the door frame 3 are illuminated in "green," LEDs 9 on the door frame 3 and LEDs 10 on the door frame 3 are illuminated in "orange," LEDs 11-12 on the door frame 3 are illuminated in "yellow," and LEDs 13-14 on the door frame 3 are illuminated in "white." In other words, LEDs 1-4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5-7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8-9 on the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10-14 on the door frame 3 are illuminated in different colors for each of the two groups.

And for LEDs 1-4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5-7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8-9 on the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10-14 on the door frame 3, every predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds), the LEDs emitting "red" light are changed to "purple," the LEDs emitting "purple" light to "blue," the LEDs emitting "blue" light to "green," the LEDs emitting "green" light to "orange," the LEDs emitting "orange" light to "yellow," the LEDs emitting "yellow" light to "white," and the LEDs emitting "white" light to "red." In this way, for LEDs 1-4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5-7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8-9 on the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10-14 on the door frame 3, the light emission color of the LEDs in each of the two groups is changed in a predetermined order of "red → purple → blue → green → orange → yellow → white → red" every specified period (for example, 0.1 seconds), and such regular changes are repeated until timing t10 is reached (for example, for 10 seconds).

In this example, not only is a rainbow effect performed when a winning symbol is displayed while the symbols are changing, but also during the performance introduction period during which the symbols are not changing, a simulated rainbow performance in which the light is lit in the same rainbow light emission mode as the winning rainbow performance is performed. In this way, when the simulated rainbow performance is performed, it is possible to check whether the light emission performance in which the light is lit in the rainbow light emission mode can be performed normally using LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3. Also, when the simulated rainbow performance is performed, by constantly observing the state in which the light emission color of the LEDs is changed in a predetermined order of "red → purple → blue → green → orange → yellow → white → red", it is possible to check whether each of LEDs 1 to 14 can normally emit light in each of the light emission colors that make up the rainbow light emission mode, and it is easy to find out whether any abnormality has occurred in the light emission of any of the LEDs.

In addition, in the rainbow effect when a win occurs, if there is no abnormality in the light emission of any of the LEDs LED1-4 on the game board 5, LED5-7 on the door frame top unit 450, LED8-9 on the effect operation unit 300, and LED10-14 on the door frame 3, by controlling the respective light emission colors to switch between multiple light emission colors in sequence in a short unit light emission time, it becomes possible to visually recognize that these LEDs are working together to emit light in a rainbow light emission pattern, and it is possible to execute a light emission effect with impact. In addition, LED1-4 on the game board 5, LED5-7 on the door frame top unit 450, LED8-9 on the effect operation unit 300, and LED10-14 on the door frame 3 are controlled in conjunction with LED1-14 to emit light in multiple colors so that LED1-14 emits different light emission colors for each of the two groups, and by switching the light emission colors in a short time, it is possible to execute a light emission effect with more impact than usual.

In this example, multiple LEDs are used to emit seven colors simultaneously in a rainbow light emission pattern, and each emitted color is switched regularly, but the emitted colors do not have to be seven colors that appear simultaneously, and it is sufficient if three or more predetermined colors appear simultaneously.

The display contents displayed on the performance display device 1600 may be different when a rainbow performance is being performed when a winning combination is activated and when a simulated rainbow performance is being performed. For example, when a rainbow performance is being performed when a winning combination is activated, a pattern may be displayed in parallel, but when a simulated rainbow performance is being performed, a pattern may not be displayed in parallel. This prevents the user from mistaking that a winning combination is being performed when a simulated rainbow performance is being performed. Note that the display contents displayed on the performance display device 1600 are not limited to this, and for example, when a simulated rainbow performance is being performed, a message such as "simulation in progress" may be displayed.

The rainbow effect and the simulated rainbow effect when a win occurs are the same in that they execute a light-emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light-emitting mode using LEDs 1-4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5-7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8-9 on the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10-14 on the door frame 3, but it is preferable to set them up as control programs for separate effects rather than as control programs for the same effect, and execute these control programs. In other words, the control program for the rainbow effect when a win occurs and the control program for the simulated rainbow effect are stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510 as control programs for separate effects. As a result, even if an abnormality occurs in either the control program for the rainbow effect when a win occurs or the control program for the simulated rainbow effect, the control program for the other can be executed normally, and the non-execution of effects when an abnormality occurs can be minimized.

Figure 259 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where LED illumination confirmation is performed when a simulated rainbow effect is executed. In this example, for LEDs 1-4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5-7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8-9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10-14 of the door frame 3, the light emission color of the LEDs for each of the two groups is changed in a predetermined order of "red → purple → blue → green → orange → yellow → white → red" every predetermined period. When a rainbow effect is executed when a winning combination is generated, the LEDs' light emission color is switched at a normal speed (e.g., 0.1 seconds), whereas when a simulated rainbow effect is executed, the LEDs' light emission color is switched at a slower speed (e.g., 1 second) than the normal speed. In other words, when a simulated rainbow effect is executed, the LEDs' light emission color is switched at a longer interval than when a winning combination is executed, so that the LEDs' light emission color is switched at a slower speed (e.g., 1 second). Then, after the simulated rainbow performance starts, the LEDs' light colors are switched, and after all of the light colors that make up at least the rainbow light emission mode have appeared for each of LEDs 1 to 14, a light emission performance is executed in which the LEDs are lit in the rainbow light emission mode so that the light emission colors of the LEDs are switched at the normal speed (for example, 0.1 seconds), just like the rainbow performance when a win occurs. In this way, at the start of the simulated rainbow performance, since the interval at which the LEDs' light colors are switched is long, it is possible to slowly check whether each of LEDs 1 to 14 can normally emit light in each of the light emission colors that make up the rainbow light emission mode, and it is easy to find out whether any of the LEDs are emitting abnormal light. Also, after the simulated rainbow performance starts, it is possible to confirm that the LED light color can be switched at the normal speed (for example, 0.1 seconds), just like the rainbow performance when a win occurs, by returning the interval at which the LEDs' light colors are switched.

As described above in detail, the performance introduction period starts when the display of the changing patterns ends (or may be after the power is turned on) and a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed without the changing patterns being displayed. During the performance introduction period, the performance display device 1600 is used to execute a display (movie) of the model introduction of the pachinko machine 1, and at the end of the period, the logo display of the model title of the pachinko machine 1 is executed. At this time, a simulated rainbow performance is executed while the logo of the model title of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed, and during the execution period of the simulated rainbow performance, a light-emitting performance is executed in which the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the performance operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are lit up in a rainbow light-emitting mode. In contrast, during the execution of the rainbow performance at the time of a win, the logo display of the model title of the pachinko machine 1 is not executed in the performance display device 1600. As a result, when a light-emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light-emitting mode is being executed, by visually checking whether the logo display of the model title of the pachinko machine 1 is being executed on the effect display device 1600, it is possible to know whether the rainbow effect being executed is a simulated rainbow effect, and by extension, to know that it is an effect to check whether any abnormalities have occurred in the LED light emission.

In this example, when a rainbow effect is being performed at the time of a win, a rainbow-type effect image is displayed for the effect image (e.g., background image) displayed in the entire display area of the effect display device 1600 and the effect image (e.g., effect image of a character, item, etc.) displayed in a portion of the display area of the effect display device 1600. In contrast, when a simulated rainbow effect is being performed, the effect display device 1600 is configured not to display rainbow-type effect images for the logo display of the machine title, background image, characters, items, etc. As a result, when a light-emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light-emitting mode is being performed, it is easy to know whether the rainbow effect being performed is a simulated rainbow effect by visually checking whether a rainbow-type effect image is being displayed on the effect display device 1600, and therefore it is easy to know that it is an effect to check whether there is an abnormality in the LED light emission.

In this example, during the execution of the rainbow performance at the time of winning, the back-upper front decorative body 3310 is allowed to move from the initial position to the appearance position, and the back-upper front decorative body 3310 is configured to light up in a rainbow light-emitting mode using each of the seven numbered display bodies. In contrast, during the execution of the simulated rainbow performance, the back-upper front decorative body 3310 is maintained in its initial position without moving from its initial position to the appearance position, and the back-upper front decorative body 3310 is configured not to light up in a rainbow light-emitting mode using each of the seven numbered display bodies. As described above in detail, the back-upper front performance unit 3300 attached to the game board 5 comprises a back-upper front decorative body 3310 which is rectangular and elongated in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, a back-upper front decorative board (not shown) which is provided behind the back-upper front decorative body 3310 and has multiple LEDs mounted on its front side, and a back-upper front lifting unit (not shown) which raises and lowers the back-upper front decorative body 3310.When a specified performance condition is met, the back-upper front decorative body 3310 can be moved from its initial position to an appearance position, allowing the back-upper front decorative body 3310 to appear on the front side of the performance display device 1600. As a result, when a light-emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light-emitting mode is being performed, by visually checking whether the rear upper front decorative body 3310 is moved from the initial position to the appearance position, and whether each of the seven numbered display bodies on the rear upper front decorative body 3310 is lit up in a rainbow light-emitting mode that emits light in a different light color, it is easy to know whether the rainbow effect being performed is a simulated rainbow effect, and therefore it is easy to know that it is an effect to check whether there is an abnormality in the LED light emission.

In this way, during the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of winning or the simulated rainbow effect, the LEDs 1-4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5-7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8-9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10-14 of the door frame 3 are used to execute a light-emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light-emitting mode, but they differ in whether or not a rainbow-light-emitting image is displayed on the effect display device 1600, whether or not the back upper front decorative body 3310 is moved from the initial position to the appearance position, and whether or not each of the seven numbered display bodies on the back upper front decorative body 3310 is lit up in a rainbow light-emitting mode that emits light in a different light color. In other words, during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect, the effect is executed with incomplete effect content so that part of the effect content executed in the rainbow effect at the time of winning is missing. As a result, when a light-emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light-emitting mode is being executed, it is easy to see whether the rainbow effect being executed is a simulated rainbow effect by visually checking whether the effect is being executed with incomplete effect content, and it is easy to see that it is an effect to check whether there is an abnormality in the LED light emission. Also, when a rainbow effect is executed at the time of a win, the operation of the back upper front decorative body 3310 and the lighting of the back upper front decorative body 3310 in a rainbow light-emitting mode are added as effects related to the light-emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light-emitting mode using LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, and an integrated effect is executed so that there are more related parts, which makes the effect more interesting than a simulated rainbow effect and can attract the player's attention.

In the above, the rainbow effect at the time of winning and the simulated rainbow effect are the same in that the light-emitting effect is performed by lighting up in a rainbow light-emitting mode using LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3. However, during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect, some of the LEDs that make up the rainbow light-emitting mode (LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3) may be configured not to light up. In such a configuration, during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect, some of the light-emitting colors that make up the rainbow light-emitting mode are missing, resulting in an incomplete state where the light is emitted in a state in which the rainbow light-emitting mode is not established, so that the visual difference is clear and it is easy to understand whether the rainbow effect being executed is a simulated rainbow effect.

As described above in detail, the plate unit 200 is provided with a light intensity adjustment button 228 that can be operated by the player on the right side of the performance operation section 301 in the performance operation unit 300. The light intensity adjustment operation using the light intensity adjustment button 228 is performed for the LEDs of the luminous decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, namely LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3, making it possible to adjust the light intensity in stages. For example, it is possible to adjust the light intensity of the LEDs from 1 (minimum light intensity) to 2 to 3 to 4 to 5 (maximum light intensity), and the light intensity of the LEDs increases as the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated upward to increase the step, and the light intensity of the LEDs decreases as the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated downward to decrease the step. Note that the light intensity of the LEDs of the luminous decorations can be adjusted both when the pattern is changing and when it is not changing.

Regarding the above, when a rainbow effect or a simulated rainbow effect is being performed upon winning, the light intensity adjustment button 228 can be operated to adjust the light intensity of at least the LEDs that make up the rainbow light emission pattern (LEDs 1-4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5-7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8-9 on the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10-14 on the door frame 3) among the LEDs of the light-emitting decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5. This allows you to check whether the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission pattern using LEDs 1-4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5-7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8-9 on the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10-14 on the door frame 3 can be performed normally during the simulated rainbow effect, as well as whether the light intensity of each of LEDs 1-14 can be adjusted normally.

In this example, at least during the execution of the simulated rainbow performance, the light intensity of the LEDs of the luminous decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 that constitute the rainbow light emission pattern (LEDs 1-4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5-7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8-9 on the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10-14 on the door frame 3) can be adjusted, whereas the light intensity of the LEDs that do not constitute the rainbow light emission pattern (LEDs 15-17 on the game board 5) cannot be adjusted, and they are always maintained in a constant light intensity state. In other words, when the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated during the execution of the simulated rainbow performance, the light intensity of the LEDs whose light intensity can be changed (LEDs that constitute the rainbow light emission pattern) changes relative to the LEDs whose light intensity is constant (LEDs that do not constitute the rainbow light emission pattern). This makes it easy to check whether the light intensity of the LEDs that constitute the rainbow light emission pattern can be adjusted normally when the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated during the execution of the simulated rainbow performance. It is preferable to make it impossible to adjust the light intensity of the LEDs that do not form part of the rainbow light emission mode (LEDs 15-17 on the game board 5), and to maintain a constant light intensity and maintain the color of the light they emit. This allows the player to not focus on the LEDs that do not form part of the rainbow light emission mode while the simulated rainbow effect is being performed, but to focus on the LEDs that form the rainbow light emission mode, and to check whether the light emission color of each LED is switching normally.

On the other hand, even during the execution of the rainbow effect when a winning combination occurs, the light intensity of the LEDs of the light-emitting decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 that constitute the rainbow light-emitting pattern (LEDs 1-4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5-7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8-9 on the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10-14 on the door frame 3) can be adjusted, whereas the light intensity of the LEDs that do not constitute the rainbow light-emitting pattern (LEDs 15-17 on the game board 5) cannot be adjusted, and when they are lit, they always emit a constant amount of light, but there is no need to keep them lit all the time; for example, they can be in a blinking state, so that the decorativeness is not lost during the display of the changing patterns. As with the execution of the simulated rainbow effect, it is preferable that the light intensity of the LEDs that do not constitute the rainbow light-emitting pattern (LEDs 15-17 on the game board 5) cannot be adjusted, and when they are lit, they not only always emit a constant amount of light, but also maintain the color of the light emitted. This allows you to focus on the LEDs that do not form a rainbow light-emitting pattern during the rainbow effect when you win, and instead focus on the LEDs that form a rainbow light-emitting pattern, which are lighting up in the rainbow light-emitting pattern.

In this example, while the simulated rainbow performance is being performed, it is checked whether the light-emitting performance that lights up in the rainbow light-emitting mode can be performed normally, and it is possible to end the simulated rainbow performance by operating the performance operation unit 301 while the simulated rainbow performance is being performed. Specifically, when the performance operation unit 301 is operated while the simulated rainbow performance is being performed, the rainbow performance using the LEDs that make up the rainbow light-emitting mode (LEDs 1-4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5-7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8-9 on the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10-14 on the door frame 3) among the LEDs of the light-emitting decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 is ended, and the LEDs that make up the rainbow light-emitting mode are switched from emitting light in the rainbow light-emitting mode to not emitting light or to emitting light in a single color. As a result, during manufacturing checks at the factory, after executing the simulated rainbow performance to check whether the light emission performance in which the light is lit in the rainbow light emission mode can be executed normally, the simulated rainbow performance can be ended at any time during the execution of the simulated rainbow performance by operating the performance operation unit 301 at any time, and it is possible to prevent the execution of unnecessary rainbow performances after that check from affecting other manufacturing checks, etc. Furthermore, after the simulated rainbow performance ends, the LEDs that make up the rainbow light emission mode can be switched from emitting light in the rainbow light emission mode to not emitting light or to emitting light in a single color, making it possible to clearly inform the user that the simulated rainbow performance has ended.

On the other hand, while the rainbow effect at the time of a win is being executed, the rainbow effect at that time will not end even if the effect operation unit 301 is operated. This ensures that the rainbow effect at the time of a win will not end midway while it is being executed, and it is possible to reliably inform the player that a confirmation effect that confirms a win is being executed.

As a modified example, at least while the simulated rainbow effect is being performed, the LEDs of the illuminating decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 that constitute the rainbow light-emitting pattern (LEDs 1-4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5-7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8-9 on the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10-14 on the door frame 3) may be configured to change their light emission with the light color that constitutes the rainbow light-emitting pattern, while the LEDs that do not constitute the rainbow light-emitting pattern (LEDs 15-17 on the game board 5) may be configured to not emit light, or to emit light without changing the light color (not blinking). In this way, while the simulated rainbow effect is being performed, the player does not need to pay attention to the LEDs that do not constitute the rainbow light-emitting pattern, and can instead focus on the LEDs that constitute the rainbow light-emitting pattern to check whether the light color of each LED is switching properly.

In the above modified example, when the performance operation unit 301 is operated at least while the simulated rainbow performance is being performed, the simulated rainbow performance is terminated, and the LEDs that make up the rainbow light-emitting mode (LEDs 1-4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5-7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8-9 on the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10-14 on the door frame 3) are switched from emitting light in the rainbow light-emitting mode to emitting no light or emitting light in a single color. In contrast, when the performance operation unit 301 is operated, the LEDs that do not make up the rainbow light-emitting mode (LEDs 15-17 on the game board 5) are maintained in a state where they do not emit light, or in a state where the color of the light they emit does not change (they do not blink). As a result, when the performance operation unit 301 is operated while the simulated rainbow performance is being performed, only the light-emitting state of the LEDs that make up the rainbow light-emitting mode changes, making it possible to clearly inform the player that the simulated rainbow performance has ended.

On the other hand, as a modified example, during the execution of the rainbow effect when a winning combination occurs, among the LEDs of the illuminating decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, the LEDs that constitute the rainbow light-emitting pattern (LEDs 1-4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5-7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8-9 on the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10-14 on the door frame 3) may be configured so that their light emission changes to the light color that constitutes the rainbow light-emitting pattern, while the LEDs that do not constitute the rainbow light-emitting pattern (LEDs 15-17 on the game board 5) may be configured to be in a flashing state or to have their light color change. In this way, during the execution of the rainbow effect when a winning combination occurs, the decorativeness of the LEDs that do not constitute the rainbow light-emitting pattern is not lost during the changing display of the patterns.

In addition, in this example, when the simulated rainbow effect is being performed and the display of the varying patterns is started by a ball entering the various starting holes (first starting hole 2004 or second starting hole 2005), the simulated rainbow effect is terminated (the effect introduction period is terminated). However, even if no ball enters the various starting holes (first starting hole 2004 or second starting hole 2005) during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect, the simulated rainbow effect can be terminated by operating the effect operation unit 301. As a result, when it is desired to terminate the rainbow effect being performed during manufacturing checks at the factory, it is not necessary to cause a ball to enter the various starting holes, and it is sufficient to simply operate the effect operation unit 301. In addition to the effect operation unit 301, the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is provided with multiple operation units such as the light intensity adjustment button 228 and the volume adjustment button 227, but it is possible to terminate the rainbow effect being performed only when the effect operation unit 301 is operated among the multiple operation units. This allows you to, for example, operate the light intensity adjustment button 228 without terminating the simulated rainbow effect that is currently running, and allows you to thoroughly check whether the light intensity of each of the LEDs that make up the rainbow light-emitting pattern (LEDs 1-4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5-7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8-9 on the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10-14 on the door frame 3) can be adjusted normally.

In this example, during the performance introduction period that begins when a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed without the display of changing patterns, a simulated rainbow performance is executed, and it is checked whether the light-emitting performance in which the symbols are lit up in a rainbow light-emitting mode can be executed normally. However, a simulated start operation unit, which is a special operation unit for forcibly starting the simulated rainbow performance after power-on, is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and when the simulated start operation unit is operated after power-on, it is possible to start the simulated rainbow performance and check whether the light-emitting performance in which the symbols are lit up in a rainbow light-emitting mode can be executed normally. Also, the simulated rainbow performance is not started until a predetermined period (e.g., 10 seconds) has elapsed since the simulated start operation unit was operated after power-on, and the simulated rainbow performance is started after the predetermined period has elapsed. This allows the simulated rainbow effect to be started at any time by operating the simulated start operation unit at any time after power-on during production checks in line work at a factory, eliminating problems (check errors, missed checks, etc.) caused by the time difference between the work process of turning on the power and operating the simulated start operation unit and the work process of checking the lighting, and improving the efficiency of the check work to see if the light-emitting effect lit in the rainbow light-emitting mode can be executed normally. In addition, during the period from when the simulated start operation unit provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is operated until a predetermined period has elapsed (while waiting for the start of the simulated rainbow light-emitting mode), a light-emitting effect that lights up in a light-emitting mode other than the rainbow light-emitting mode (for example, a single-color light-emitting mode or a light-emitting mode with fewer colors than the rainbow light-emitting mode) may be executed on the front side of the pachinko machine 1, and these checks may be made possible by utilizing the above-mentioned time difference depending on the mode of line work. This not only prevents check errors and missed checks of the light-emitting effect lit up in the rainbow light-emitting mode executed on the front side of the pachinko machine 1, but also makes it possible to further improve the efficiency of the check work. The simulated start operation unit may be any operation unit that is separate from the power switch 630a for turning on the power and that is located in a place that cannot be operated or seen by the player, and examples of such operation units include a rotary switch type operation unit, a push switch type operation unit, or an operation unit that is operated by inserting a special tool (such as a thin rod) or a key possessed by the manager. Of these, if the operation unit is the type that is operated by inserting a special tool (such as a thin rod) or a key possessed by the manager, the action of the simulated start operation unit can be made to function only in the factory, and unintentional erroneous operation in the hall can be prevented.

In the above, the simulation start operation unit for forcibly starting the simulated rainbow effect is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, whereas the effect operation unit 301 for ending the simulated rainbow effect is provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 1. As a result, after turning on the power and operating the simulation start operation unit to start the simulated rainbow effect, it is necessary to go around to the front side of the pachinko machine 1 to operate the effect operation unit 301, and when checking the manufacturing process at the factory, there is no need to forget to check whether the light emission effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode executed on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 can be executed normally, and it is possible to prevent the end of the simulated rainbow effect by operating the effect operation unit 301.

(Regarding confirmations other than rainbow luminescence)
As described above, in this embodiment, in addition to executing the rainbow effect (light-emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light-emitting mode) at the time of winning as a winning confirmation effect that confirms a win during the variable display of the pattern, a simulated rainbow effect is executed at a timing different from the rainbow effect at the time of winning, so that the light emission in the rainbow light-emitting mode can be confirmed. In other words, among the LEDs of the light-emitting decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, the LEDs that constitute the rainbow light-emitting mode (LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3) can be confirmed to be lit normally during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect, but the LEDs that do not constitute the rainbow light-emitting mode (LEDs 15 to 17 on the game board 5) can be confirmed to be lit normally at a timing different from the simulated rainbow effect. In addition, it is possible to confirm whether the contact with the handle 195 is detected normally at a timing different from the simulated rainbow effect.

Figure 268 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where a confirmation period other than the simulated rainbow effect is set after power is turned on. In this example, after power is turned on, all of the LEDs of the illuminating decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 that do not constitute a rainbow light emission mode (LEDs 15-17 of the game board 5) are kept lit. In addition, the light emitted by the LEDs that do not constitute a rainbow light emission mode (LEDs 15-17 of the game board 5) is set to emit a single color (e.g., red or blue). As a result, after power is turned on, it is possible to visually check whether the LEDs that do not constitute a rainbow light emission mode (LEDs 15-17 of the game board 5) are lit or not to check whether there is an abnormality in the light emission of the LEDs.

After the power is turned on, the light intensity of the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode cannot be adjusted, and the LEDs are always maintained in a constant light emission state. In other words, even if the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated after the power is turned on, the light intensity of the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode does not change. As a result, after the power is turned on, the light intensity of the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode does not become too dim, and it is possible to check whether there is an abnormality in the light emission of the LEDs. Note that, it is preferable that the light intensity of the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode cannot be adjusted, and the LEDs are not only always maintained in a constant light emission state, but also that the light emission color is maintained. As a result, after the power is turned on, attention is focused only on whether the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode are lit normally.

After power is turned on, all of the LEDs of the illuminating decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 that do not form a rainbow light-emitting pattern (LEDs 15-17 on the game board 5) are kept lit, but the LEDs that form the rainbow light-emitting pattern (LEDs 1-4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5-7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8-9 on the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10-14 on the door frame 3) are restricted from executing light-emitting effects that light up in the rainbow light-emitting pattern. Specifically, at least some of the LEDs that form the rainbow light-emitting pattern (LEDs 1-4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5-7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8-9 on the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10-14 on the door frame 3), for example LEDs 10-14 on the door frame 3, are kept lit. In addition, the LEDs that make up the rainbow light-emitting pattern (LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3) emit a single color (for example, green or yellow) that is different from the LEDs that do not make up the rainbow light-emitting pattern (LEDs 15 to 17 on the game board 5), thereby notifying that a check period is in progress to see if there are any abnormalities in the light emitted by the LEDs that do not make up the rainbow light-emitting pattern (LEDs 15 to 17 on the game board 5). In this way, during the period in which it is checked whether or not there is any abnormality in the light emission of LEDs that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode (LEDs 15 to 17 on the game board 5), the LEDs that constitute the rainbow light emission mode (LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3) do not execute a light emission performance in which they light up in the rainbow light emission mode, so attention is not paid to the change in light emission in the rainbow light emission mode, and attention can be directed to checking whether each of the LEDs that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode (LEDs 15 to 17 on the game board 5) is lighting up normally. In addition, the light intensity of the LEDs that make up the rainbow light emission pattern (LEDs 1-4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5-7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8-9 on the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10-14 on the door frame 3) is set to not change even when the amount adjustment button 228 is operated, preventing any effect on checking whether the LEDs that do not make up the rainbow light emission pattern (LEDs 15-17 on the game board 5) are lit normally.

In this example, after power is turned on, it is possible to check whether contact with the handle 195 is detected normally. In other words, after power is turned on, a confirmation period is provided for whether contact with the handle 195 is detected normally. In the pachinko machine 1, the handle touch sensor 192 detects whether the player is touching the handle 195 on the main control board 1310 side, and when contact with the handle 195 is detected, the handle rotation detection sensor 189 detects on the main control board 1310 side by operating the handle 195 by the player, making it possible to shoot the game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5 (shoot the game ball B from the ball launcher 540). In other words, even if the player touches the handle 195, if the contact with the handle 195 is not detected normally, the game ball B cannot be shot. For this reason, a confirmation period for whether contact with the handle 195 is detected normally is provided after power is turned on, so that the hall manager or the like can touch the handle 195 and check whether contact with the handle 195 is detected normally.

In addition, during the period to check whether contact with the handle 195 is detected normally, if contact with the handle 195 is detected normally when the hall manager or the like contacts the handle 195, that fact is notified to the outside. Specifically, in addition to the LEDs of the illuminating decoration provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, an LED is provided to notify that contact with the handle 195 is detected normally. Also, if contact with the handle 195 is detected normally when the hall manager or the like contacts the handle 195, a confirmation sound is output from the speaker. This allows the hall manager or the like to properly check whether contact with the handle 195 is detected normally when he or she contacts the handle 195 after the power is turned on.

Also, as described above, after the power is turned on, among the LEDs of the illuminating decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, the LEDs that constitute the rainbow light-emitting pattern (LEDs 1-4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5-7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8-9 on the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10-14 on the door frame 3) are restricted from performing a light-emitting effect in which they light up in a rainbow light-emitting pattern. In other words, after the power is turned on, during the period to check whether contact with the handle 195 is detected normally, the LEDs that constitute the rainbow light-emitting pattern (LEDs 1-4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5-7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8-9 on the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10-14 on the door frame 3) are restricted from performing a light-emitting effect in which they light up in a rainbow light-emitting pattern. In this way, during the period in which it is confirmed whether contact with the handle 195 has been detected correctly, the LEDs that make up the rainbow light-emitting mode (LEDs 1-4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5-7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8-9 on the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10-14 on the door frame 3) do not perform a light-emitting effect in which they light up in the rainbow light-emitting mode, so the player can focus on confirming whether contact with the handle 195 has been detected correctly without paying attention to the change in light emission in the rainbow light-emitting mode.

As described above in detail, in this example, a simulated start operation unit, which is a special operation unit for forcibly starting the simulated rainbow effect after power-on, is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and when the simulated start operation unit is operated after power-on, the simulated rainbow effect is started, and it is possible to check whether the light emission effect in which the light is lit in a rainbow light emission mode can be executed normally. In addition, the simulated rainbow effect is not started until a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has passed since the simulated start operation unit was operated after power-on, and the simulated rainbow effect is started after the predetermined period has passed. As a result, after power-on, after checking whether there is any abnormality in the light emission of the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode, or after checking whether contact with the handle 195 is detected normally, the simulated rainbow effect can be started at any timing by operating the simulated start operation unit at any timing during the confirmation period. In addition, because the simulated rainbow effect starts a specified period of time after the simulated start operation is operated, this eliminates problems (misconfirmation, oversight, etc.) that arise due to the time difference between the work process of operating the simulated start operation unit and the work process of checking the lighting during production checks, such as during line work at a factory, and increases the efficiency of the check process to see whether the light-emitting effect that lights up in the rainbow light-emitting mode can be executed normally in the LEDs that make up the rainbow light-emitting mode (LEDs 1-4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5-7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8-9 on the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10-14 on the door frame 3).

In the above, the confirmation period that is being executed before the simulation start operation unit is operated continues until the specified period has elapsed (while waiting for the start of the simulated rainbow effect), and ends when the specified period has elapsed (when the simulated rainbow effect starts). In other words, the simulated rainbow effect has not started and the light emission effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode has not been executed until the specified period has elapsed (while waiting for the start of the simulated rainbow effect) after the simulation start operation unit is operated, so that the player can pay attention to whether the LEDs that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) are lit normally and whether contact with the handle 195 is detected normally, just as before the simulation start operation unit was operated.

Specifically, during the predetermined period of time from when the simulated start operation unit is operated (while waiting for the simulated rainbow performance to begin), all of the LEDs of the illuminating decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 that do not constitute a rainbow light-emitting mode (LEDs 15-17 of the game board 5) are kept lit, just as they were before the simulated start operation unit was operated, and once the predetermined period of time has elapsed (the time when the simulated rainbow performance begins), the lit state of all of the LEDs that do not constitute a rainbow light-emitting mode (LEDs 15-17 of the game board 5) is ended. This makes it possible to use the time difference that occurs between the work process of operating the simulated start operation unit and the work process of checking that the LEDs are lit to check whether any abnormalities have occurred in the light emission of the LEDs that do not constitute a rainbow light-emitting mode (LEDs 15-17 of the game board 5). Also, for example, even if it is not confirmed whether the light-emitting effect in which the light is lit in the rainbow light-emitting mode can be executed normally before operating the simulated start operation unit, it is possible to confirm whether the light-emitting effect in which the light is lit in the rainbow light-emitting mode can be executed normally after operating the simulated start operation unit, so that confirmation errors and omissions can be prevented. However, the light-emitting mode of the LEDs that do not constitute the rainbow light-emitting mode (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) is set to emit light in a different light-emitting mode (for example, a different light-emitting color, or a flashing state instead of a constant light state) from the light-emitting mode executed before operating the simulated start operation unit. This makes it possible to clearly know whether the simulated start operation unit has been operated based on the light-emitting mode of the LEDs that do not constitute the rainbow light-emitting mode (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5).

Similarly, during the period from when the simulated start operation unit is operated until a predetermined period has elapsed (while waiting for the start of the simulated rainbow performance), the confirmation period as to whether or not contact with the handle 195 is detected normally continues, just as before the simulated start operation unit was operated, and when the predetermined period has elapsed (when the simulated rainbow performance is to be started), the confirmation period as to whether or not contact with the handle 195 is detected normally ends. In other words, when the hall manager or the like contacts the handle 195 during the period from when the simulated start operation unit is operated until a predetermined period has elapsed (while waiting for the start of the simulated rainbow performance), if the contact with the handle 195 is detected normally, the fact that it has been detected normally is notified to the outside. In this way, it is possible to confirm whether or not contact with the handle 195 is detected normally by utilizing the time difference that occurs between the work process of operating the simulated start operation unit and the work process of checking that the light is on. In addition, for example, even if it is not confirmed whether contact with the handle 195 is detected normally before operating the simulation start operation unit, it is possible to confirm whether contact with the handle 195 is detected normally after operating the simulation start operation unit, thereby preventing confirmation errors, omissions, etc.

In addition, if the simulated start operation unit is not operated after power is turned on, the confirmation period executed after power is turned on is terminated when a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since power is turned on. In other words, if the simulated start operation unit is not operated after power is turned on, the confirmation period for whether or not the LEDs that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode (LEDs 15-17 of the game board 5) light up normally and the confirmation period for whether or not contact with the handle 195 is detected normally are terminated when a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since power is turned on. In addition, the predetermined period for terminating the confirmation period executed after power is turned on is set to be a period in which it is possible to sufficiently check whether or not the LEDs that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode (LEDs 15-17 of the game board 5) light up normally and whether or not contact with the handle 195 is detected normally. In this way, if the simulation start operation unit is not operated after power is turned on, the simulated rainbow effect will not start immediately after the confirmation period that is executed after power is turned on. However, since the simulated rainbow effect is executed during the execution of the effect introduction period that starts when a predetermined period (e.g. 30 seconds) has elapsed without any changing display of the patterns, during such execution, it is possible to check whether the light-emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light-emitting mode can be executed normally.

In addition, even after the simulated rainbow performance has started, it may be possible to check whether or not the touch of the handle 195 is detected normally by touching the handle 195. Specifically, if the simulation start operation unit is not operated after the power is turned on, the confirmation period executed after the power is turned on ends when a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the power was turned on, but an extended confirmation period may be generated after the confirmation period ends, and it may be possible to check whether or not the touch of the handle 195 is detected normally by touching the handle 195 during the extended confirmation period. Note that if an extended confirmation period is provided, it is possible that the execution condition for the simulated rainbow performance is satisfied during the extended confirmation period, and the extended confirmation period and the simulated rainbow performance are executed in parallel. In such a case, if the handle 195 is touched within the extended confirmation period, just as when the effect operation unit 301 is operated, the rainbow effect using the LEDs that make up the rainbow light emission pattern among the LEDs of the illuminating decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 (LEDs 1-4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5-7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8-9 on the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10-14 on the door frame 3) will end, and the LEDs that make up the rainbow light emission pattern will be switched from emitting light in the rainbow light emission pattern to not emitting light or emitting light in a single color.

The main purpose of terminating the simulated rainbow effect by operating the performance operation unit 301 is to terminate an unnecessary simulated rainbow effect, while the main purpose of terminating the simulated rainbow effect by touching the handle 195 is not to terminate an unnecessary simulated rainbow effect, but to confirm whether or not touching the handle 195 is detected correctly. In order to clarify this difference, it is preferable to perform some different processing in a control part other than light emission (e.g., sound control) when operating the performance operation unit 301 and when touching the handle 195. For example, a unique performance end sound is output only when the simulated rainbow effect is terminated by operating the performance operation unit 301. This allows the operator to reliably recognize whether or not an unnecessary simulated rainbow effect has ended, even though the operation of the performance operation unit 301 and the touching of the handle 195 are the same.

In the above example, a confirmation sound (different from the performance end sound) is output when the handle 195 is touched. If this confirmation sound is output when the handle 195 is touched during the extended confirmation period, the difference between the performance end sound and the confirmation sound can reliably allow the operator to recognize whether or not the touch is a confirmation of whether or not the touch on the handle 195 is detected normally. In addition, the confirmation sound may be a confirmation sound A when the handle 195 is touched during the extended confirmation period, and a confirmation sound B when the handle 195 is touched during the confirmation period preceding the extended confirmation period. The difference between the confirmation sounds A and B can reliably allow the operator to recognize not only whether or not the touch on the handle 195 is detected normally, but also whether or not the touch is during the extended confirmation period.

In addition, in this example, if the power is turned off while the pattern is changing or a reserved item for which the pattern has not yet been changed is stored, such information is stored, and after the power is turned on, such information is restored and the display of the changing patterns is resumed. After the power is turned on, there is no confirmation period for whether the LEDs that do not constitute a rainbow light-emitting mode (LEDs 15-17 of the game board 5) are lit normally, or whether contact with the handle 195 is detected normally. As a result, if the power is turned off while the pattern is changing or a reserved item for which the pattern has not yet been changed is stored, the display of the changing patterns can be resumed quickly after the power is turned on, preventing any impact on the resumption of play.

In this example, when a vibration sensor detects vibrations applied to the pachinko machine 1 by shaking or hitting the pachinko machine 1, or when a magnetic sensor 1050 detects magnetism applied to the pachinko machine 1 by bringing a magnet close to the pachinko machine 1 detects magnetism, it is possible that fraudulent activity is being performed due to vibration or magnetism, and the occurrence of such an abnormality is notified to the outside. After power is turned on, if an abnormality occurs due to vibration or magnetic detection during a period to check whether the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode are lit normally or during a period to check whether contact with the handle 195 is detected normally, such a check period is forcibly ended. As a result, during the period to check whether the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode are lit normally or during the period to check whether contact with the handle 195 is detected normally, which is performed by the hall manager, it is possible to prevent fraudulent activity from being performed due to vibration or magnetism by targeting such a check period.

After the power is turned on, in order to check whether the back-upper front decorative body 3310 operates normally, the back-upper front decorative body 3310 is moved from the initial position to the appearance position, and an initial operation is performed in which the back-upper front decorative body 3310 appears on the front side of the performance display device 1600. In such a case, after the back-upper front decorative body 3310 has moved from the initial position to the appearance position, a return control is performed to return it from the appearance position to the initial position, and if the back-upper front decorative body 3310 has not returned to the initial position, it is determined that an initial position error has occurred on the peripheral control board 1510 side. After the power is turned on, there is a confirmation period for whether the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute a rainbow light-emitting mode are lit normally, and a confirmation period for whether contact with the handle 195 is detected normally, but if these confirmation periods are performed in parallel with the initial operation of the back-upper front decorative body 3310, attention may be focused on the initial operation of the back-upper front decorative body 3310, and confirmation during the confirmation period may be neglected. For this reason, it is preferable to perform the initial operation of the back-upper front decorative body 3310 after the confirmation period for whether the LEDs that do not form a rainbow light emission pattern (LEDs 15-17 of the game board 5) are lit normally, and the confirmation period for whether contact with the handle 195 is detected normally, has ended. This allows the operator to reliably perform the confirmation during the confirmation period and the confirmation during the initial operation of the back-upper front decorative body 3310.

(About the rainbow-only decorative part for checking rainbow light emission)
As described above, in this embodiment, in addition to executing the rainbow effect (light-emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light-emitting mode) at the time of winning as a winning confirmation effect that confirms a win during the variable display of the pattern, it is possible to confirm the light emission in the rainbow light-emitting mode at a timing different from the rainbow effect at the time of winning. Specifically, during the performance introduction period during which the pattern is not displayed in a variable manner, a light-emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light-emitting mode as a simulated rainbow effect is executed, as the same as the rainbow effect at the time of winning, so that it is possible to check in the hall, factory, etc. whether the light-emitting effect that lights up in the rainbow light-emitting mode can be executed normally. Note that the performance introduction period is a performance that starts when a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed after the variable display of the pattern has ended, and the simulated rainbow performance is executed in addition to the model introduction of the pachinko machine 1, etc. However, when the simulated rainbow performance is performed, if the light-emitting performance that lights up in a rainbow light-emitting mode can be performed normally, it is possible to know that it is time to perform the simulated rainbow performance, but if the light-emitting performance that lights up in a rainbow light-emitting mode cannot be performed normally, it is not possible to know whether the timing to perform the simulated rainbow performance has arrived. Therefore, in this example, when the simulated rainbow performance is performed, in addition to performing the light-emitting performance that lights up in a rainbow light-emitting mode using the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the performance operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, a rainbow independent decorative part 1700 that can be attached separately from these multiple components is provided, and a notification performance is performed in which the LEDs of the rainbow independent decorative part 1700 are lit up in a rainbow light-emitting mode to notify that the simulated rainbow performance is being performed, so that it is clear that it is the time to check in the hall, factory, etc. whether the light-emitting performance that lights up in a rainbow light-emitting mode can be performed normally.

Figure 260 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of mounting a rainbow single decorative part 1700 to a game board 5. The rainbow single decorative part 1700 is provided so that it can be mounted to the game board 5 from the front side. Specifically, a connection terminal for connecting the rainbow single decorative part 1700 is exposed in the lower right area of the game board 5 (play area 5a), and by connecting the rainbow single decorative part 1700 to this connection terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 can control the light emission of the LED provided in the rainbow single decorative part 1700.

In this example, the rainbow single decorative part 1700 is attached to the game board 5 from the front side, so that the rainbow single decorative part 1700 can be easily detached even when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4. For this reason, when the simulated rainbow performance is performed, the light-emitting performance is performed in a rainbow light-emitting mode using LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3. However, the rainbow single decorative part 1700 may be attached to the game board 5 only when checking in a hall or factory whether the light-emitting performance in the rainbow light-emitting mode can be performed normally, in order to know the execution timing of the simulated rainbow performance. Note that the rainbow single decorative part 1700 is not attached to the game board 5 and is configured to maintain the decorativeness of the front side of the game board 5 even when it is removed.

As described below, the rainbow single decorative section 1700 is equipped with a board on which a total of 21 LEDs are mounted, three vertically and seven horizontally, and a transparent cover (not shown) is provided in front of the LEDs to reduce direct light from the LEDs. When removing the rainbow single decorative section 1700 from the game board 5, it is possible to remove the entire board on which the LEDs are mounted, but it is also possible to remove only the cover without removing the board on which the LEDs are mounted. This allows, for example, that when it is difficult to see the LEDs in the rainbow single decorative section 1700, it is sufficient to remove only the cover, making it easy to know that the simulated rainbow performance is being performed.

The rainbow single decorative part 1700 is provided in the game area 5a on the front side of the game board 5. Therefore, even when the door frame 3 is closed to the main body frame 4, the rainbow single decorative part 1700 can be easily seen from the front of the pachinko machine 1 through the door window 101a. When the simulated rainbow performance is performed, a light-emitting performance is performed in which LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are lit up in a rainbow light-emitting manner, but the light-emitting decoration on which LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5 are provided is located behind the area where the game ball B flows down, whereas the rainbow single decorative part 1700 is located in front of the area where the game ball B flows down. In other words, the luminous decoration on which LEDs 1-4 of the game board 5 are mounted allows game ball B to flow down the front side, whereas the rainbow single decorative section 1700 is configured so that game ball B does not flow down the front side. As a result, when the LEDs of the rainbow single decorative section 1700 are lit in a rainbow luminous mode, visibility is not obstructed by the flow of game ball B, and it is easy to know that a simulated rainbow effect is being performed.

Figure 261 is an explanatory diagram showing the rainbow single decorative part 1700. The rainbow single decorative part 1700 has a board on which a total of 21 LEDs are mounted, three in each vertical direction and seven in each horizontal direction. When the simulated rainbow performance is executed, a notification performance is executed in which the LEDs of the rainbow single decorative part 1700 are lit up in a rainbow light emission mode. In other words, when the simulated rainbow performance is executed, a notification performance is executed in which the LEDs of the rainbow single decorative part 1700 are lit up in a rainbow light emission mode in synchronization with the execution of a light emission performance in which the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the performance operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are lit up in a rainbow light emission mode. Specifically, when the simulated rainbow effect is being performed, when the time that has elapsed since the start of the effect introduction period reaches a predetermined timing (timing t1), the three LEDs in row A of the rainbow independent decorative section 1700 are caused to emit light in "red, purple, and blue," respectively. In other words, the three LEDs in row A of the rainbow independent decorative section 1700 are caused to emit light so that the three predetermined colors appear at the same time.

The LEDs of the rainbow single decorative section 1700 are switched to emit light in the following order every predetermined period (e.g., 0.1 seconds): row A → row B → row C → row D → row E → row F → row G. The three LEDs of row A of the rainbow single decorative section 1700 emit light in "red, purple, blue", the three LEDs of row B emit light in "purple, blue, green", the three LEDs of row C emit light in "blue, green, orange", the three LEDs of row D emit light in "green, orange, yellow", the three LEDs of row E emit light in "orange, yellow, white", the three LEDs of row F emit light in "yellow, white, red", and the three LEDs of row G emit light in "white, red, purple". In this way, the LEDs of the rainbow single decorative portion 1700 are controlled to change one of the three colors every predetermined period (e.g., 0.1 seconds), and the light colors that appear at the same time are switched, so that it appears as if these LEDs are working together to emit light in a rainbow light pattern. Then, while the simulated rainbow performance is being performed, this regular switching of light colors (switching between the rows in which the three LEDs emit light) is repeated.

Figure 262 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where a simulated rainbow effect is executed when the rainbow single decorative part 1700 is attached. In this example, when the simulated rainbow effect is executed, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used to execute a notification effect in which the LEDs of the rainbow single decorative part 1700 are lit in a rainbow light-emitting mode in synchronization with the execution of a light-emitting effect in which the LEDs are lit in a rainbow light-emitting mode when the simulated rainbow effect is executed. In this way, the rainbow single decorative part 1700 is lit in a rainbow light-emitting mode like the simulated rainbow effect (light-emitting effect that is lit in a rainbow light-emitting mode), so that it is possible to know that the simulated rainbow effect is being executed, and it can be used as a guide for the timing to check whether the light-emitting effect that is lit in a rainbow light-emitting mode can be executed normally in the hall, factory, etc. In addition, when the simulated rainbow effect is being performed, if an abnormality occurs in some of the LEDs that make up the rainbow light-emitting mode (LEDs 1-4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5-7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8-9 on the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10-14 on the door frame 3) that do not light up, some of the light colors that make up the rainbow light-emitting mode are missing, resulting in an incomplete state in which the rainbow light-emitting mode is not established, making it difficult to know whether the simulated rainbow effect is being performed. However, regardless of whether such an abnormality occurs, the rainbow single decorative part 1700 is configured to perform a notification effect in which it lights up in the rainbow light-emitting mode. As a result, if an abnormality occurs in some of the LEDs that make up the rainbow light-emitting mode when the simulated rainbow effect is being performed, a visual difference occurs with the rainbow single decorative part 1700, so it is easy to know that the light-emitting effect that lights up in the rainbow light-emitting mode is not being performed normally even though the simulated rainbow effect is being performed.

The rainbow single decorative part 1700 may be attached to the game board 5 not only when the simulated rainbow effect is executed during the effect introduction period when the pattern is not being displayed in a variable manner, but also when the rainbow effect is executed when a win occurs during the variable display of the pattern. In other words, the rainbow single decorative part 1700 may always be attached to the game board 5. In this case, when a rainbow effect is executed when a win occurs, a notification effect is executed in which the LEDs of the rainbow single decorative part 1700 are lit in a rainbow light-emitting manner in synchronization with the execution of a light-emitting effect in which LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are lit in a rainbow light-emitting manner. In this way, the rainbow single decorative part 1700 lights up in a rainbow light emission mode, just like the rainbow effect (light emission effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode) when a win occurs, so it is possible to know that the rainbow effect is being performed when a win occurs, and it can be used as a guide for whether a hit confirmation effect is being performed in which a win is confirmed. Also, when a rainbow effect is being performed when a win occurs, if an abnormality occurs in some of the LEDs (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) that make up the rainbow light emission mode, in which the LEDs do not light up, a part of the light emission colors that make up the rainbow light emission mode is missing, resulting in an incomplete mode in which the rainbow light emission mode is not established, making it difficult to know whether a rainbow effect is being performed when a win occurs. However, regardless of whether such an abnormality occurs or not, the rainbow single decorative part 1700 is configured to perform a notification effect in which it lights up in a rainbow light emission mode. As a result, even if an abnormality occurs in which some of the LEDs that make up the rainbow light emission pattern do not light up when the rainbow effect is being performed upon a win, the player can see the light emitted in the rainbow light emission pattern of the rainbow single decorative part 1700 and understand that the rainbow effect is being performed upon a win, ensuring that the player does not miss out on useful information.

As described above in detail, during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect, after confirming whether the light-emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light-emitting mode can be executed normally, the simulated rainbow effect can be ended by operating the effect operation unit 301. As a result, during the manufacturing check at the factory, after executing the simulated rainbow effect and confirming whether the light-emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light-emitting mode can be executed normally, the simulated rainbow effect can be ended at any timing by operating the effect operation unit 301 at any timing during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect, and it is possible to prevent the execution of unnecessary rainbow effects after the confirmation from affecting other manufacturing checks, etc. Also, when the effect operation unit 301 is operated during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect, not only is the light-emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light-emitting mode using the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the performance operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 ended, but the notification effect that lights up in a rainbow light-emitting mode using the LEDs of the rainbow single decoration unit 1700 is also ended. Specifically, the LEDs of the rainbow single decorative part 1700 are switched from illuminating in a rainbow light-emitting mode to non-illuminating. In this way, when the performance operation unit 301 is operated during the execution of the simulated rainbow performance, the LEDs of the rainbow single decorative part 1700 are switched from illuminating in a rainbow light-emitting mode to non-illuminating, thereby clearly informing the user that the simulated rainbow performance has ended.

Even when the rainbow single decorative part 1700 is not attached to the game board 5, the peripheral control board 1510 does not determine that an abnormality has occurred, and when a rainbow effect or a simulated rainbow effect is executed upon a win, the light-emitting effect is executed as usual, lighting up in a rainbow light-emitting mode using LEDs 1-4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5-7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8-9 on the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10-14 on the door frame 3. This allows the rainbow single decorative part 1700 to be attached to the game board 5 only when checking in a hall or factory whether the light-emitting effect lighting up in a rainbow light-emitting mode can be executed normally, in order to know the timing of the execution of the simulated rainbow effect, and allows the rainbow single decorative part 1700 to be removed at other times. Furthermore, even if the notification effect in which the rainbow single decorative part 1700 is lit in a rainbow light emission mode cannot be executed normally, for example, when some of the LEDs of the rainbow single decorative part 1700 do not light up while the rainbow single decorative part 1700 is attached to the game board 5, it is not determined that an abnormality has occurred on the peripheral control board 1510 side. In other words, when executing a rainbow effect or a simulated rainbow effect at the time of a win, a light emission effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode is executed as usual using LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, and it is possible to prevent any influence on the execution of the rainbow effect or the simulated rainbow effect at the time of a win. Furthermore, even if an abnormality occurs in which some of the LEDs that make up the rainbow light emission pattern (LEDs 1-4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5-7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8-9 on the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10-14 on the door frame 3) are not lit, the peripheral control board 1510 does not determine that an abnormality has occurred, and when a rainbow performance or simulated rainbow performance is performed upon a win, the LEDs are illuminated in an incomplete manner (a manner in which the rainbow light emission pattern is not established) with some of the light colors that make up the rainbow light emission pattern missing.

The rainbow single decorative part 1700 is capable of lighting up in a rainbow light-emitting mode as a single component without using multiple components, and the back-upper front decorative body 3310 is also capable of lighting up in a rainbow light-emitting mode using each of the seven numbered display bodies as a single component without using multiple components. However, during the execution of the simulated rainbow performance, the back-upper front decorative body 3310 is maintained in its initial position without moving from its initial position to its appearance position, and the back-upper front decorative body 3310 is not illuminated in a rainbow light-emitting mode using each of the seven numbered display bodies. For this reason, although the back-upper front decorative body 3310 can light up in a rainbow light-emitting mode, it is not possible to know that the simulated rainbow performance is being executed, and it is not possible to use it as a guide for the timing to check whether the light-emitting performance in which the rainbow light-emitting mode is lit can be executed normally in the hall, factory, etc. In addition, since the back-upper front decorative body 3310 is attached to the back side of the game board 5, when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, the back-upper front decorative body 3310 cannot be detached from the game board 5. In other words, the back-upper front decorative body 3310 cannot be easily detached from the front side of the game board 5 like the rainbow single decorative part 1700, and it is difficult to attach the back-upper front decorative body 3310 to the game board 5 only when checking in a hall or factory whether the light-emitting performance that lights up in a rainbow light-emitting mode can be performed normally. In addition, when the back-upper front decorative body 3310 is removed from the game board 5, the decorativeness of the front side of the game board 5 is not maintained, so the back-upper front decorative body 3310 is not suitable as a member for checking the execution timing of the simulated rainbow performance like the rainbow single decorative part 1700.

As described above, the rainbow single decorative part 1700 is equipped with a board on which 21 LEDs are mounted. Specifically, top-view type LEDs are mounted on the front surface (the surface facing the player) of the board of the rainbow single decorative part 1700. The top-view type LEDs are capable of emitting light toward the front (the player side) of the rainbow single decorative part 1700. Therefore, when a simulated rainbow performance is performed, when a notification performance in which the LEDs of the rainbow single decorative part 1700 are used to light up in a rainbow light-emitting mode is performed, each of the light-emitting colors that make up the rainbow light-emitting mode can be brightly visually recognized.

The substrate used for the rainbow single decorative portion 1700 is a white substrate, with at least the front surface (the surface facing the player and facing the player) painted white. When a white substrate is used as the substrate on which the LEDs are mounted on the front surface, it is possible to reflect light with a higher reflectance than when a substrate other than a white substrate (e.g., a black substrate or a green substrate) is used. Therefore, when a simulated rainbow effect is performed, when a notification effect in which the LEDs of the rainbow single decorative portion 1700 are used to light up in a rainbow light emission mode is performed, each of the light emission colors that make up the rainbow light emission mode can be brightly visually recognized.

In addition, on the front surface of the substrate of the rainbow independent decorative section 1700 (the surface facing the player toward the front), a coating film made of solder resist of the same color as the light emitting color that constitutes the rainbow light emission mode is formed around each of the mounted LEDs. In other words, each of the 21 LEDs mounted on the front surface of the substrate of the rainbow independent decorative section 1700 is designed to emit light in one of the light emitting colors that constitute the rainbow light emission mode, namely "red, purple, blue, green, orange, yellow, and white," but the coating film made of solder resist is designed to use the same color as the light emitting color of the LED. Specifically, among the light emitting colors constituting the rainbow light emission mode, a coating film made of a red solder resist is formed around an LED that emits "red", a coating film made of a purple solder resist is formed around an LED that emits "purple", a coating film made of a blue solder resist is formed around an LED that emits "blue", a coating film made of a blue solder resist is formed around an LED that emits "green", a coating film made of a green solder resist is formed around an LED that emits "orange", a coating film made of an orange solder resist is formed around an LED that emits "yellow", and a coating film made of a yellow solder resist is formed around an LED that emits "white". Here, when the same color as the light emitting color constituting the rainbow light emission mode is used as the coating film made of solder resist, it is possible to reflect the light emitting color constituting the rainbow light emission mode with a higher reflectance than when a color different from the light emitting color constituting the rainbow light emission mode is used. Therefore, when performing a simulated rainbow effect, when performing a notification effect in which the LEDs of the rainbow single decorative part 1700 are lit up in a rainbow light emission pattern, each of the light colors that make up the rainbow light emission pattern can be clearly seen.

In addition, the coating film made of the solder resist described above is made by adding solder resist of the same color as the light emitting color that constitutes the rainbow light emission mode to a white solder resist as a base. When white solder resist is used as the coating film made of solder resist, it is possible to reflect light with a higher reflectance than when a solder resist other than white is used. Therefore, when performing a simulated rainbow performance, when performing a notification performance in which the LED of the rainbow single decorative part 1700 is used to light up in a rainbow light emission mode, each of the light emitting colors that constitute the rainbow light emission mode can be brightly visually recognized. In addition, since the higher the proportion of the base white solder resist in the coating film made of solder resist, the higher the reflectance of the light can be reflected, it is preferable to increase the proportion of the base white solder resist in the coating film made of solder resist rather than the solder resist of the same color as the light emitting color that constitutes the rainbow light emission mode.

In this example, when performing a rainbow effect or a simulated rainbow effect at the time of winning, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used to perform a light-emitting effect in which the LEDs are lit up in a rainbow light-emitting mode. Each LED is set to emit light in the order of the light-emitting colors that make up the rainbow light-emitting mode, "red → purple → blue → green → orange → yellow → white." However, like the LEDs of the rainbow single decoration part 1700, each LED may be set to emit light in any of the light-emitting colors that make up the rainbow light-emitting mode, "red, purple, blue, green, orange, yellow, white." In other words, for LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, instead of full-color LEDs, single-color LEDs may be used as in the rainbow single decoration part 1700. Then, as in the rainbow single decoration part 1700, for example, three predetermined colors are made to appear at the same time, and the three colors are regularly switched to realize the rainbow light emission mode. In such a case, as in the rainbow single decoration part 1700, a white board with at least the front surface (the surface facing the player) painted white is used as the board for the LEDs involved in the rainbow light emission mode. Also, as in the rainbow single decoration part 1700, a coating film made of solder resist of the same color as the light emission color constituting the rainbow light emission mode is formed around each of the mounted LEDs on the front surface (the surface facing the player) of the board for the LEDs involved in the rainbow light emission mode. Also, as for the coating film made of solder resist, a white solder resist is used as a base, and solder resist of the same color as the light emission color constituting the rainbow light emission mode is added. As a result, when a rainbow effect or a simulated rainbow effect is performed when LEDs 1-4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5-7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8-9 on the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10-14 on the door frame 3 are used to perform a light-emitting effect in which the LEDs are lit up in a rainbow light-emitting mode, the same effect as the rainbow single decorative part 1700 can be achieved. Also, on the front surface (the surface facing the player) of the board for the LEDs involved in the rainbow light-emitting mode, a coating film made of solder resist of the same color as the light-emitting color that constitutes the rainbow light-emitting mode is formed around each of the mounted LEDs, so that if the light-emitting color of the LED does not match the color of the solder resist, it can be determined that the LED is not installed in the correct position.

In the above, a white board with at least the front surface (the surface facing the player) painted white is used as the board for the LEDs involved in the rainbow light emission mode, but a board painted a color (e.g., black or green) different from the light emission color that constitutes the rainbow light emission mode is used as the board for the LEDs not involved in the rainbow light emission mode. As a result, while the LEDs involved in the rainbow light emission mode are able to reflect light with high reflectivity, it is difficult for the LEDs not involved in the rainbow light emission mode to reflect light with high reflectivity, resulting in a difference in light visibility, and allowing the light emission color that constitutes the rainbow light emission mode to be clearly visible when a rainbow effect or a simulated rainbow effect is being performed upon a win.

The rainbow single decorative part 1700 is configured such that LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the board (the surface facing the player) and the player can see the direct light from the LEDs, but this is not limited to the above, and a light guide section that guides the light from the LEDs may be provided and the player can see the indirect light from the light guide section. Such an alternative example will be described with reference to FIG. 263. FIG. 263 is an explanatory diagram showing the rainbow single decorative part 1700 of the alternative example. The rainbow single decorative part 1700 of the alternative example has a board on which seven LEDs are mounted in a horizontal line, and the board is provided perpendicular to the surface of the game board 5. The seven LEDs mounted on the front surface of the board of the rainbow single decorative part 1700 of the alternative example are each configured to emit light in one of the light emitting colors that constitute the rainbow light emitting mode: red, purple, blue, green, orange, yellow, and white. In such a case, for example, a rainbow light emission mode can be realized by making three predetermined colors appear at the same time and regularly switching between the three colors. Also, a light guide is provided close to the seven LEDs, and the light of the LEDs can be irradiated from the side of the light guide to cause the light guide to emit light in the color of the LEDs. The front side of the board on which the seven LEDs are mounted (the front side facing the player) is covered with a cover to prevent the player from seeing the direct light from the LEDs. In this way, by providing a light guide that guides the light from the LEDs and configuring the player to see the indirect light from the light guide, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the direct light of the LEDs involved in the rainbow light emission mode becomes a strain on the eyes when viewing it.

The rainbow single decorative part 1700 of the alternative example can be easily attached and detached to the game board 5, but it is also possible to remove only the light guide without removing the board on which the LED is mounted. If only the light guide is removed, the light from the LED will no longer be guided by the light guide, and the LED's light emission (light emission color) cannot be recognized. For this reason, the light guide is attached only during the confirmation period in which the hall or factory checks whether the light emission performance that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode can be performed normally, in order to know the execution timing of the simulated rainbow performance, and the light guide can be removed during other periods. Even if the light guide is removed, the decorativeness of the front side of the game board 5 can be maintained, so in the rainbow single decorative part 1700 of the alternative example, it is preferable to remove only the light guide, rather than removing the entire rainbow single decorative part 1700 of the alternative example, including the board on which the LED is mounted.

[Limits on rainbow light emission when an abnormality is detected]
In this embodiment, while the symbols are being displayed in a variable manner, it is possible to execute at least the rainbow effect (illumination effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode) when a player wins, but if the rainbow effect when a player wins is not executed properly due to some malfunction or abnormality, it may become a factor that reduces interest in the game. Therefore, in this example, if some malfunction or abnormality occurs, the execution of the light-emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode using LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 is restricted when executing the rainbow effect when a player wins.

In this example, it is sufficient that the rainbow effect can be performed at least when a winning combination occurs during the display of changing patterns. In addition, as a rainbow effect that performs a light-emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light-emitting mode, it is possible to perform a rainbow effect when a losing combination occurs during the display of changing patterns, perform a combination that suggests a setting value of 6 as a suggestion combination A during the display of changing patterns, or perform a simulated rainbow effect during a non-changing display of patterns, as described above. Such rainbow effects are the same in that they perform a light-emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light-emitting mode. In other words, when a rainbow effect is performed, a light-emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light-emitting mode is performed using LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 in conjunction with the display of the performance display device 1600. Specifically, when a rainbow effect is being executed, when the time elapsed since the start of the display of the decorative symbols has reached a predetermined timing (timing t1), LEDs 1-2 on the game board 5 are illuminated in "red," LEDs 3-4 on the game board 5 are illuminated in "purple," LEDs 5-6 on the door frame top unit 450 are illuminated in "blue," LEDs 7 on the door frame top unit 450 and LEDs 8 on the door frame 3 are illuminated in "green," LEDs 9 on the door frame 3 and LEDs 10 on the door frame 3 are illuminated in "orange," LEDs 11-12 on the door frame 3 are illuminated in "yellow," and LEDs 13-14 on the door frame 3 are illuminated in "white." In other words, LEDs 1-4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5-7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8-9 on the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10-14 on the door frame 3 are illuminated in different colors for each of the two groups.

And for LEDs 1-4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5-7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8-9 on the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10-14 on the door frame 3, every predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds), the LEDs emitting "red" light are changed to "purple," the LEDs emitting "purple" light to "blue," the LEDs emitting "blue" light to "green," the LEDs emitting "green" light to "orange," the LEDs emitting "orange" light to "yellow," the LEDs emitting "yellow" light to "white," and the LEDs emitting "white" light to "red." In this way, for LEDs 1-4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5-7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8-9 on the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10-14 on the door frame 3, the light emission color of the LEDs in each of the two groups is changed in a predetermined order of "red → purple → blue → green → orange → yellow → white → red" every specified period (for example, 0.1 seconds), and such regular changes are repeated until timing t10 is reached (for example, for 10 seconds).

In this way, the LEDs 1-4 on the game board 5, the LEDs 5-7 on the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8-9 on the performance operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10-14 on the door frame 3 are controlled to switch between multiple light colors in sequence in a short unit of light emission time, making it possible to visually recognize that these LEDs are working together to emit light in a rainbow light pattern, and it is possible to execute a light emission performance with impact. Also, the LEDs 1-4 on the game board 5, the LEDs 5-7 on the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8-9 on the performance operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10-14 on the door frame 3 are controlled in a linked manner so that the LEDs 1-14 emit light in multiple colors so that the LEDs 1-14 emit different light colors for each of the two groups, and by switching the light colors in a short period of time, it is possible to execute a light emission performance with more impact than usual.

In this example, multiple LEDs are used to emit seven colors simultaneously in a rainbow light emission mode, and each emitted color is switched regularly, but the emitted colors do not have to be seven colors that appear simultaneously, and it is sufficient if three or more predetermined colors appear simultaneously.

During the execution period of the rainbow effect, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is divided into multiple display areas, and a rainbow-style effect image is displayed in which each of the multiple display areas is displayed in a different display color. In such a rainbow-style effect image, the display color displayed in each of the multiple display areas is changed in a predetermined order of "red → purple → blue → green → orange → yellow → white → red" every predetermined period (e.g., 0.1 seconds), and such regular changes are repeated until timing t10 is reached (e.g., 5 seconds). The target for displaying the rainbow-style effect image may be an effect image displayed in the entire display area of the effect display device 1600, such as a background image, or an effect image displayed in a portion of the display area of the effect display device 1600, such as an effect image of a character or item.

(When an abnormality is detected in the back upper front decoration (movable body))
As described above in detail, the back-upper front performance unit 3300 attached to the game board 5 includes a back-upper front decorative body 3310 that is rectangular and long in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, a back-upper front decorative board (not shown) that is provided behind the back-upper front decorative body 3310 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front, and a back-upper front lifting unit (not shown) that raises and lowers the back-upper front decorative body 3310. When a predetermined performance condition is met, the back-upper front decorative body 3310 is moved from the initial position to the appearance position, making it possible for the back-upper front decorative body 3310 to appear on the front side of the performance display device 1600. In addition, after the back-upper front decorative body 3310 is moved from the initial position to the appearance position and used for performance, when a predetermined performance end condition is met, a return control is performed to return it from the appearance position to the initial position. In such return control, a detection sensor is used to detect whether the back-upper front decorative body 3310 has returned to its initial position, and if the back-upper front decorative body 3310 has not returned to its initial position, it is determined that an initial position error has occurred on the peripheral control board 1510 side. If it is determined that an initial position error has occurred for the back-upper front decorative body 3310, even if a predetermined performance condition is subsequently established, the control of movement for moving the back-upper front decorative body 3310 from its initial position to its appearance position is restricted. In addition, if it is determined that an initial position error has occurred for the back-upper front decorative body 3310, return control for returning the back-upper front decorative body 3310 from its appearance position to its initial position is performed multiple times, and if the back-upper front decorative body 3310 has returned to its initial position, the determination that an initial position error has occurred on the peripheral control board 1510 side is eliminated.

In the above, when a certain performance condition is met during the changing or non-changing display of the pattern, the back-upper front decorative body 3310 is moved from the initial position to the appearance position, making it possible for the back-upper front decorative body 3310 to appear on the front side of the performance display device 1600. In addition, for example, when the power is turned on, in order to check whether the back-upper front decorative body 3310 is operating normally, the back-upper front decorative body 3310 is moved from the initial position to the appearance position, making it possible for the back-upper front decorative body 3310 to appear on the front side of the performance display device 1600. Even in such a case, after the back-upper front decorative body 3310 has been moved from the initial position to the appearance position, return control is performed to return it from the appearance position to the initial position, and similarly, if the back-upper front decorative body 3310 has not returned to the initial position, it is determined that an initial position error has occurred on the peripheral control board 1510 side.

Figure 264 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where a rainbow effect is executed when there is an initial position error in the back-upper front decorative body 3310. In this example, when a rainbow effect is executed, LEDs 1-4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5-7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8-9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10-14 of the door frame 3 are used to execute a light-emitting effect in a rainbow light-emitting mode in conjunction with the display of the effect display device 1600. In addition to this, when a rainbow effect is executed, a light-emitting effect is executed in a rainbow light-emitting mode using the seven ranking display bodies in the back-upper front decorative body 3310. Here, the back-upper front decorative body 3310 is provided so that the seven sumo rankings such as "yokozuna", "ozeki", and "sekiwake" are lined up from the left, and each of the seven rankings can be independently illuminated and decorated by the LEDs of the back-upper front decorative board. Then, when a rainbow effect is executed, the seven ranking display bodies are each illuminated in a rainbow light-emitting mode that emits light in a different light color. In such a rainbow light-emitting display, the color of the light emitted for each of the seven numbers changes in a predetermined order: "red → purple → blue → green → orange → yellow → white → red," and this regular change is repeated until timing t10 is reached (for example, for five seconds).

And, when an initial position error does not occur for the back-up front decorative body 3310, a light-emitting performance is executed in which the seven numbered display bodies on the back-up front decorative body 3310 are lit up in a rainbow light-emitting mode when a rainbow performance is executed, whereas when an initial position error occurs for the back-up front decorative body 3310, a light-emitting performance is not executed in which the seven numbered display bodies on the back-up front decorative body 3310 are lit up in a rainbow light-emitting mode when a rainbow performance is executed, and the seven numbered display bodies on the back-up front decorative body 3310 are turned off. In other words, when an initial position error occurs for the back-up front decorative body 3310, the execution of a light-emitting performance in which the seven numbered display bodies on the back-up front decorative body 3310 are lit up in a rainbow light-emitting mode is restricted when a rainbow performance is executed. For example, when an initial position error occurs for the back-upper front decorative body 3310, if a light-emitting effect is executed in which the seven numbered display elements on the back-upper front decorative body 3310 are lit up in a rainbow light-emitting manner, the light-emitting effect lit up in the rainbow light-emitting manner stands out, making it easier to notice that an initial position error has occurred for the back-upper front decorative body 3310. However, in this example, when an initial position error occurs for the back-upper front decorative body 3310, by not executing a light-emitting effect in which the seven numbered display elements on the back-upper front decorative body 3310 are lit up in a rainbow light-emitting manner, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which it is easier to notice that an initial position error has occurred for the back-upper front decorative body 3310.

In addition, if no initial position error has occurred for the rear upper front decorative body 3310, when the rainbow performance is executed, a light-emitting performance is executed in which LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3 are lit up in a rainbow light-emitting mode, whereas if an initial position error has occurred for the rear upper front decorative body 3310, when the rainbow performance is executed, a light-emitting performance is not executed in which LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3 are lit up in a rainbow light-emitting mode, and LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3 are turned off. In other words, when an initial position error occurs for the back upper front decorative body 3310, not only is the execution of the light-emitting performance in which the seven numbered display bodies in the back upper front decorative body 3310 are used to light up in a rainbow light-emitting mode during execution of the rainbow performance restricted, but also the execution of the light-emitting performance in which the seven numbered display bodies in the back upper front decorative body 3310 are used to light up in a rainbow light-emitting mode is restricted. For example, when an initial position error occurs for the back upper front decorative body 3310, if only the light-emitting performance in which the seven numbered display bodies in the back upper front decorative body 3310 are used to light up in a rainbow light-emitting mode, a sense of incongruity will be generated because the light-emitting performance in which the seven numbered display bodies in the back upper front decorative body 3310 are used to light up in a rainbow light-emitting mode will not be executed, and it will be easy to notice that an initial position error has occurred for the back upper front decorative body 3310. However, in this example, when an initial position error occurs for the rear upper front decorative body 3310, the light-emitting effect of lighting up in a rainbow light pattern using LEDs 1-4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5-7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8-9 on the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10-14 on the door frame 3 is not executed, thereby preventing the occurrence of a situation in which it becomes easy to notice that an initial position error has occurred for the rear upper front decorative body 3310.

In the above, if an initial position error occurs for the rear upper front decorative body 3310, when the rainbow effect is executed, LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3 are turned off. However, as another example, instead of a light-emitting effect in which LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3 are lit in a rainbow light-emitting pattern, a light-emitting effect in which LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3 are lit in a single color (for example, red or blue) may be executed. As a result, if an initial position error occurs with the upper back front decorative body 3310, the rainbow lighting effect will not be performed when the rainbow effect is being performed, but the LEDs 10-14 on the door frame 3 will be lit in a single color (e.g., red or blue), thereby maintaining a situation in which the light-emitting effect can be expected.

In addition, in the above, when the rainbow effect is executed, a light-emitting effect is executed using the seven numbered indicators on the back upper front decorative body 3310 in a rainbow light-emitting mode, in addition to the light-emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light-emitting mode using LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3, but such light-emitting effects that light up in a rainbow light-emitting mode may be executed as a whole, rather than being executed separately. In other words, when the rainbow effect is executed, LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the effect operation unit 300, LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3, and the back upper front decorative body 3310 may be integrated to emit light in a manner that creates a rainbow light-emitting mode. In such a configuration, for example, when an initial position error occurs with respect to the upper back front decorative body 3310, if only the light-emitting performance in which the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the performance operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used to light up in a rainbow light-emitting mode, some of the light-emitting colors that make up the rainbow light-emitting mode are missing, resulting in light emission in a mode in which the rainbow light-emitting mode is not established. For this reason, in this example, when an initial position error occurs with respect to the upper back front decorative body 3310, by not executing the light-emitting performance in which the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the performance operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used to light up in a rainbow light-emitting mode, light emission in a mode in which the rainbow light-emitting mode is not established can be prevented, and a situation in which it is impossible to determine whether or not a rainbow light-emitting mode is being executed can be prevented.

In this example, if an initial position error occurs for the back-upper front decorative body 3310, the seven numbered display bodies on the back-upper front decorative body 3310 are not used to light up in a rainbow light-emitting mode when a rainbow effect is performed. However, if an initial position error occurs for the back-upper front decorative body 3310 after a predetermined time, such as several hours, has elapsed since the power was turned on, the seven numbered display bodies on the back-upper front decorative body 3310 are used to light up in a rainbow light-emitting mode when a rainbow effect is subsequently performed. In such a case, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are also used to light up in a rainbow light-emitting mode when a rainbow effect is performed. For example, if a light-emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light-emitting mode is being executed for a predetermined time, such as several hours, from when the power is turned on, and the light-emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light-emitting mode is suddenly not executed after the predetermined time has passed while playing, a sense of incongruity will be felt because the light-emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light-emitting mode is not being executed. However, in this example, if an initial position error occurs for the back upper front decorative body 3310 after a predetermined time, such as several hours, has passed from when the power is turned on, a light-emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light-emitting mode is executed, thereby preventing such a sense of incongruity from being felt.

In this example, when an initial position error occurs for the back-upper front decorative body 3310, the seven numbered display bodies on the back-upper front decorative body 3310 are not used to perform a light-emitting performance in which the seven numbered display bodies are lit in a rainbow light-emitting mode when a rainbow performance is performed. However, after a predetermined time, such as several hours, has elapsed since the occurrence of such an initial position error, a light-emitting performance in which the seven numbered display bodies on the back-upper front decorative body 3310 are lit in a rainbow light-emitting mode is performed when a rainbow performance is subsequently performed. In such a case, a light-emitting performance in which the LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 on the performance operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3 are also performed when a rainbow performance is performed. In such a case, no work is performed to resolve the initial position error until a predetermined time, such as several hours, has elapsed since the occurrence of the initial position error for the back-upper front decorative body 3310. In this regard, in this example, after a predetermined time, such as several hours, has elapsed since an initial position error occurred for the back-upper front decorative body 3310, a light-emitting effect is executed in which the back-upper front decorative body 3310 is lit up in a rainbow light-emitting pattern during the execution of the rainbow effect. This makes the back-upper front decorative body 3310 stand out, making it easier to notice that an initial position error has occurred for the back-upper front decorative body 3310, and prevents a situation from continuing in which no work is being done to resolve the initial position error.

In addition, in this example, if an initial position error occurs for the rear upper front decorative body 3310, when a rainbow effect is executed, in addition to the light-emitting effect in which the seven numbered display elements on the rear upper front decorative body 3310 light up in a rainbow light-emitting mode, light-emitting effects in which LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3 are not executed; however, the LEDs that make up the rainbow light-emitting mode (the rear upper front decorative body 3310, LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3) are also used in effects other than the rainbow effect. In addition, when an initial position error occurs for the back upper front decorative body 3310, the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emission mode are not turned on when a performance other than a rainbow performance is executed during the display of the pattern variation that determines the pattern variation that executes the rainbow performance (the rainbow performance when a win occurs or the rainbow performance when a loss occurs) and executes the rainbow performance. In contrast, when a pattern variation that does not execute the rainbow performance is determined and the pattern variation that does not execute the rainbow performance is displayed, the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emission mode are turned on when a performance other than a rainbow performance is executed. In this configuration, even if the back upper front decorative body 3310, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the LEDs 8 to 9 of the performance operation unit 300 are controlled to emit light as a notice performance that anticipates a rainbow performance between the start of the pattern variation and the execution of the rainbow performance, such a notice performance is not executed, and it is possible to suppress the player's expectations for the rainbow performance.

In addition, in this example, when a rainbow effect (a rainbow effect when a win occurs or a rainbow effect when a loss occurs) is executed, the back upper front decorative body 3310, LEDs 1-4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5-7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8-9 on the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10-14 on the door frame 3 are involved in executing an illumination effect in which they light up in a rainbow illumination mode, while LEDs 15-17 on the game board 5 continue to emit illumination according to the fluctuation pattern, regardless of the illumination color that constitutes the rainbow illumination mode. In contrast, if an initial position error occurs for the back upper front decorative body 3310, when a rainbow effect is executed, LEDs 15-17 on the game board 5 do not enter an off state like the back upper front decorative body 3310, LEDs 1-4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5-7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8-9 on the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10-14 on the door frame 3, and continue to emit illumination according to the fluctuation pattern. As a result, if an initial position error occurs for the rear upper front decorative body 3310, when the rainbow effect is being executed, the light-emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light-emitting pattern is not executed, but the light-emitting effect according to the fluctuation pattern continues for the LEDs 15 to 17 on the game board 5, so that a situation can be maintained in which the light-emitting effect according to the fluctuation pattern can be expected.

In addition, in this example, when an initial position error occurs for the back-upper front decorative body 3310, the display area of the performance display device 1600 is divided into multiple display areas, and a rainbow-style performance image is displayed in which each of the multiple display areas is displayed in a different display color, just as when an initial position error does not occur. In other words, when an initial position error occurs for the back-upper front decorative body 3310, when a rainbow performance is performed, a light-emitting performance in which the back-upper front decorative body 3310, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved and lit up in a rainbow light-emitting mode is not performed, whereas the performance display device 1600 displays a rainbow-style performance image. As a result, as long as you focus on the light-emitting area around the display area of the performance display device 1600 (light emitted by the upper back front decorative body 3310 and LEDs 1-14), you cannot tell if a rainbow performance is being performed. However, by focusing on the display area of the performance display device 1600, you can tell that a rainbow performance is being performed by the rainbow-style performance image.

(When a situation occurs in which the rainbow-like effect image cannot be seen)
As described above, when a rainbow effect is executed, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is divided into a plurality of display areas, and a rainbow-style effect image is displayed in which each of the plurality of display areas is displayed in a different display color, but if another image is displayed in front of the rainbow-style effect image, the player will not be able to see it. In this way, when a situation occurs in which the rainbow-style effect image on the effect display device 1600 cannot be seen, the back upper front decorative body 3310, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved to restrict the execution of the light-emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light-emitting mode.

Specifically, the rainbow-like presentation image on the presentation display device 1600 cannot be seen when the light adjustment button 228 is used to adjust the light amount, or when the volume adjustment button 227 is used to adjust the volume. In this example, the plate unit 200 is provided with a light adjustment button 228 that can be operated by the player on the right side of the presentation operation section 301 in the presentation operation unit 300. The light adjustment button 228 is used to adjust the light amount of the LEDs of the illuminating decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, including LEDs 1-4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5-7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8-9 on the presentation operation unit 300, and LEDs 10-14 on the door frame 3, allowing the light amount to be adjusted in stages. For example, the light intensity of the LED can be adjusted from 1 (lowest light intensity) → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 (highest light intensity), and the light intensity of the LED increases as the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated upward, and the light intensity of the LED decreases as the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated downward. The dish unit 200 is provided with a volume adjustment button 227 that can be operated by the player on the right side of the performance operation section 301 in the performance operation unit 300. The volume of the sound output from the various speakers (such as the main frame speaker 622) can be adjusted in stages by performing a volume adjustment operation using the volume adjustment button 227. For example, the volume of the sound output from the various speakers can be adjusted from 1 (lowest volume) → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 (highest volume), and the volume of the sound output from the various speakers increases as the volume adjustment button 227 is operated upward, and the volume of the sound output from the various speakers decreases as the volume adjustment button 227 is operated downward. The light intensity and volume can be adjusted whether the image is changing or not.

When the light adjustment button 228 is used to adjust the light intensity, a light adjustment image is displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 to indicate the level of the light intensity of the LED, and when the volume adjustment button 227 is used to adjust the volume, a volume adjustment image is displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 to indicate the level of the volume output from the various speakers. These light adjustment images and volume adjustment images are displayed in front of the rainbow-style performance image on the performance display device 1600. For this reason, when the light adjustment button 228 is used to adjust the light intensity, or when the volume adjustment button 227 is used to adjust the volume, the light adjustment image and volume adjustment image make it impossible to visually recognize at least a portion of the rainbow-style performance image, and therefore it is determined that a situation has occurred in which the rainbow-style performance image cannot be visually recognized on the peripheral control board 1510 side. In addition, when the light adjustment operation using the light adjustment button 228 or the volume adjustment operation using the volume adjustment button 227 is completed, the light adjustment image or the volume adjustment image is erased after a predetermined time (e.g., 2 to 3 seconds) has elapsed, and the situation returns to one in which the rainbow-style performance image can be viewed, eliminating the determination on the peripheral control board 1510 side that a situation in which the rainbow-style performance image cannot be viewed has occurred.

In addition, a situation in which the rainbow-shaped performance image on the performance display device 1600 cannot be seen may occur when the back-upper front decorative body 3310 abnormally stops moving to the appearance position on the front side of the performance display device 1600. When a specified performance condition is met, the back-upper front decorative body 3310 in this example moves from the initial position to the appearance position, making it possible for the back-upper front decorative body 3310 to appear on the front side of the performance display device 1600. In addition, after the back-upper front decorative body 3310 is moved from the initial position to the appearance position and used for a performance, when a specified performance end condition is met, return control is performed to return it from the appearance position to the initial position, but in such return control, there are cases in which the back-upper front decorative body 3310 abnormally stops moving to the appearance position and the back-upper front decorative body 3310 does not return to the initial position. In such a case, the abnormal stop of the back upper front decorative body 3310 makes it impossible to see at least a part of the rainbow-mode performance image, and therefore the peripheral control board 1510 determines that a situation has occurred in which the rainbow-mode performance image cannot be seen. Also, if it is determined that the back upper front decorative body 3310 has abnormally stopped at the appearance position, return control is performed multiple times to return the back upper front decorative body 3310 from the appearance position to the initial position, and when the back upper front decorative body 3310 returns to the initial position, the situation returns to one in which the rainbow-mode performance image can be seen, and therefore the determination that a situation has occurred in which the rainbow-mode performance image cannot be seen on the peripheral control board 1510 is eliminated.

Figure 265 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where a rainbow effect is executed when a situation occurs where the rainbow-mode effect image cannot be seen on the effect display device 1600. In this example, if a situation where the rainbow-mode effect image cannot be seen on the effect display device 1600 does not occur, the back upper front decorative body 3310, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved in executing a light-emitting effect in which they light up in a rainbow light-emitting mode when a rainbow effect is executed, whereas if a situation occurs where the rainbow-mode effect image on the effect display device 1600 cannot be seen, the back upper front decorative body 3310, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved in executing a light-emitting effect in which they light up in a rainbow light-emitting mode when a rainbow effect is executed, and they are turned off. In other words, when a situation occurs in which the rainbow-like performance image on the performance display device 1600 cannot be seen, the execution of a light-emitting performance in which the light-emitting area around the display area of the performance display device 1600 (light-emitting by the upper back front decorative body 3310 and LEDs 1 to 14) is lit in a rainbow light-emitting mode is restricted during execution of the rainbow performance. For example, when a situation occurs in which the rainbow-like performance image on the performance display device 1600 cannot be seen, if only a light-emitting performance in which the light-emitting area around the display area of the performance display device 1600 is lit in a rainbow light-emitting mode is executed, an awkward feeling will arise because the rainbow-like performance image cannot be seen. However, in this example, when a situation occurs in which the rainbow-like performance image on the performance display device 1600 cannot be seen, such an awkward feeling can be prevented by not executing a light-emitting performance in which the light-emitting area around the display area of the performance display device 1600 is lit in a rainbow light-emitting mode.

In addition, in this example, if a situation occurs in which the rainbow-mode performance image on the performance display device 1600 cannot be seen, the rear upper front decorative body 3310, LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3 are involved in not executing a light-emitting performance in a rainbow light-emitting mode when the rainbow performance is being executed, but even if the situation returns to one in which the rainbow-mode performance image can be seen during the execution period of the rainbow performance, the situation in which the light-emitting performance in the rainbow light-emitting mode is not executed is continued for the remaining time. For example, if the remaining time after the rainbow effect is returned to a state in which the rainbow-style effect image can be seen is too short during the execution period of the rainbow effect, even if the back upper front decorative body 3310, LEDs 1-4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5-7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8-9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10-14 of the door frame 3 are involved in executing a light-emitting effect in which the light is lit in a rainbow light-emitting mode, it may not be possible to determine whether the rainbow effect is being executed. For this reason, in this example, even if the rainbow effect is returned to a state in which the rainbow-style effect image can be seen during the execution period of the rainbow effect, by continuing the state in which the light-emitting effect in which the rainbow light-emitting mode is lit is not executed during the remaining time, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which it is not possible to determine whether the rainbow effect is being executed.

In the above, if a situation occurs in which the rainbow-mode performance image on the performance display device 1600 cannot be seen, LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3 are turned off when the rainbow performance is executed. However, as another example, instead of a light-emitting performance in which LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3 are lit in a rainbow light-emitting mode, a light-emitting performance in which LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3 are lit in a single color (for example, red or blue) may be executed. As a result, if a situation occurs in which the rainbow-style performance image on the performance display device 1600 cannot be seen, the light-emitting performance in which the light is lit in a rainbow light-emitting mode is not executed when the rainbow performance is executed, but the LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3 are lit in a single color (e.g., red or blue), thereby maintaining a situation in which the light-emitting performance can be expected.

In addition, in this example, when a rainbow effect (a rainbow effect when a win occurs or a rainbow effect when a loss occurs) is executed, the LEDs 1-4 on the back upper front decoration 3310, the LEDs 1-4 on the game board 5, the LEDs 5-7 on the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8-9 on the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10-14 on the door frame 3 are involved in executing an illumination effect in which they light up in a rainbow illumination mode, whereas the LEDs 15-17 on the game board 5 continue to emit illumination according to the fluctuation pattern, regardless of the illumination color that constitutes the rainbow illumination mode. In contrast, if a situation occurs in which the rainbow-mode performance image on the performance display device 1600 cannot be seen, the LEDs 15-17 on the game board 5 do not turn off like the LEDs 1-4 on the back upper front decoration 3310, the LEDs 1-4 on the game board 5, the LEDs 5-7 on the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8-9 on the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10-14 on the door frame 3 when a rainbow effect is executed, but continue to emit illumination according to the fluctuation pattern. As a result, if a situation occurs in which the rainbow-style performance image on the performance display device 1600 cannot be seen, the light-emitting performance that lights up in a rainbow light-emitting mode will not be executed when the rainbow performance is being executed, but the light-emitting performance according to the fluctuation pattern will continue for the LEDs 15-17 on the game board 5, thereby maintaining a situation in which players can expect a light-emitting performance according to that fluctuation pattern.

In addition, in this example, in a situation where the rainbow-like performance image on the performance display device 1600 can be seen, even if an abnormality such as ball jamming (for example, a state in which many game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the upper tray 201 is full of game balls B) occurs, when the rainbow performance is executed, the rear upper front decorative body 3310, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved in executing a light-emitting performance that lights up in a rainbow light-emitting mode. For example, in a situation where the rainbow-like performance image on the performance display device 1600 can be seen, if a light-emitting performance that lights up in a rainbow light-emitting mode in the light-emitting area surrounding the display area of the performance display device 1600 is not executed, a sense of incongruity will be created by the fact that the light-emitting performance that lights up in a rainbow light-emitting mode is not executed. However, in this example, in a situation where the rainbow-patterned performance image on the performance display device 1600 can be viewed, a light-emitting performance that lights up in a rainbow-patterned light-emitting mode is executed, thereby preventing such discomfort from occurring.

(When an abnormality is detected in a pachinko machine)
As described above, when the rainbow effect is executed, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are lit up in a rainbow light emission mode in conjunction with the display of the effect display device 1600, and the light emission effect is executed in a rainbow light emission mode using the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 in conjunction with the display of the effect display device 1600. In addition, depending on the type of abnormality in the pachinko machine 1, the execution of the light emission other than that of the LEDs (the back upper front decoration 3310, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) that constitute the rainbow light emission mode is also restricted.

Specifically, there are three types of abnormalities in the pachinko machine 1: a first abnormality, which is unlikely to indicate that fraudulent activity is occurring; a second abnormality, which is likely to indicate that fraudulent activity is occurring; and a third abnormality, which is likely to indicate that fraudulent activity is occurring. The first abnormality is a state in which many game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580, and the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 become full of game balls B, making it impossible to release game balls B to the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202. In this state, many game balls B have simply been paid out from the payout device 580, and the main control board 1310 determines that the first abnormality has occurred. In addition, when balls are removed from the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 and the state is returned to one in which game balls B can be released to the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202, the main control board 1310 cancels the determination that the first abnormality has occurred.

A second abnormality occurs when the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2. In this state, it is possible that a waiting staff member has simply opened the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, and the main control board 1310 determines that a second abnormality has occurred. If the main frame 4 is closed relative to the outer frame 2, the main control board 1310 eliminates the determination that a second abnormality has occurred.

The third abnormality may be a state where vibration is detected by a vibration sensor that detects vibrations applied to the pachinko machine 1 by shaking or hitting the pachinko machine 1, or a state where magnetism is detected by the magnetic sensor 1050 that detects magnetism applied to the pachinko machine 1 by bringing a magnet close to the pachinko machine 1. In such a state, there is a possibility that fraudulent activity is being committed due to vibration or magnetism, and when a detection signal is input from the vibration sensor or magnetic sensor, it is determined that the third abnormality has occurred on the main control board 1310 side. Even if the state is returned to one where vibration or magnetism is not being detected, the determination that the third abnormality has occurred on the main control board 1310 side is not eliminated, and the determination that the third abnormality has occurred on the main control board 1310 side is eliminated by turning the power back on.

Figure 266 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where a rainbow effect is executed when the first to third abnormalities occur. In this example, when the first to third abnormalities do not occur, the back upper front decorative body 3310, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved in executing a light-emitting effect in which they light up in a rainbow light-emitting mode when a rainbow effect is executed. In contrast, when the first abnormality occurs, an error notification effect is executed in which only LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 light up in a single color (e.g., red or blue), and the remaining back upper front decorative body 3310, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 are lit up in a rainbow light-emitting mode when a rainbow effect is executed. This allows users to be aware that some kind of abnormality has occurred with the pachinko machine 1 while still maintaining a promising lighting effect that lights up in a rainbow light pattern.

In addition, when the second or third abnormality occurs, the back upper front decorative body 3310, LEDs 1-4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5-7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8-9 of the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10-14 of the door frame 3 are not involved in the rainbow light-emitting performance during the execution of the rainbow performance, and an error notification performance is executed in which the LEDs (back upper front decorative body 3310, LEDs 1-14) that constitute the rainbow light-emitting performance are lit in a single color (e.g., red or blue). In other words, when the second or third abnormality occurs before the execution of the rainbow performance, the execution of the light-emitting performance that lights up in the rainbow light-emitting mode in the light-emitting area (back upper front decorative body 3310, LEDs 1-14) around the display area of the performance display device 1600 is restricted. This creates a situation where it is not possible to know that the rainbow performance is being executed, and it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 aware of the occurrence of some abnormality.

In this example, when the first to third abnormalities do not occur, the back upper front decorative body 3310, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved in the rainbow light-emitting performance during the execution of the rainbow light-emitting performance (rainbow performance during a win or a miss), while the LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5 continue the light-emitting performance according to the fluctuation pattern regardless of the light-emitting color that constitutes the rainbow light-emitting mode. In contrast, when the first abnormality occurs, the LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5 do not enter an error notification state like the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 during the execution of the rainbow performance, and the light-emitting performance according to the fluctuation pattern continues. In this way, when the first abnormality occurs, the light-emitting performance according to the fluctuation pattern continues during the execution of the rainbow performance, so that a situation in which one can expect a light-emitting performance according to the fluctuation pattern can be maintained.

Similarly, if a second abnormality occurs, when the rainbow effect is being executed, LEDs 15-17 on the game board 5 do not enter an error notification state like the LEDs that make up the rainbow light-emitting mode (rear upper front decorative body 3310, LEDs 1-14), but continue to emit light according to the fluctuation pattern. As a result, when a second abnormality occurs, the light-emitting effect that lights up in the rainbow light-emitting mode is not executed when the rainbow effect is being executed, but LEDs 15-17 on the game board 5 continue to emit light according to the fluctuation pattern, so that it is possible to maintain a situation in which one can expect light-emitting effects according to the fluctuation pattern while notifying the pachinko machine 1 that some abnormality has occurred.

On the other hand, if the third abnormality occurs, when the rainbow effect is being executed, the LEDs 15-17 on the game board 5 are lit in a single color (e.g., red or blue) like the LEDs that make up the rainbow light-emitting pattern (the upper back front decorative body 3310, LEDs 1-14), to notify the error, and the light-emitting effect according to the fluctuation pattern is stopped. As a result, when the third abnormality occurs, not only is the light-emitting effect that lights up in the rainbow light-emitting pattern not executed when the rainbow effect is being executed, but also LEDs 15-17 on the game board 5 are not executed in a light-emitting effect according to the fluctuation pattern, eliminating a situation in which one would expect a light-emitting effect according to the fluctuation pattern, and making the player aware that some kind of fraudulent activity is being performed on the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, in this example, when a rainbow effect is being performed, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is divided into multiple display areas, and a rainbow-type effect image is displayed in which each of the multiple display areas is displayed in a different display color, but if the first to third abnormalities occur, the effect display device 1600 displays an image notifying the type of abnormality. However, if the first abnormality occurs, the rainbow-type effect image remains visible even when the image notifying the type of abnormality is displayed, whereas if the second or third abnormality occurs, the rainbow-type effect image is not visible when the image notifying the type of abnormality is displayed, and the rainbow-type effect image makes it impossible to know that a rainbow effect is being performed.

Figure 267 is a timing chart showing an example of the first to third abnormalities occurring during the execution of the rainbow effect. In this example, during the execution period of the rainbow effect, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the back upper front decoration 3310, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved in the execution of the light-emitting effect in which they light up in a rainbow light-emitting mode. Then, when the first abnormality occurs during the execution period of the rainbow effect, an error notification effect is executed in which only the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 light up in a single color (for example, red or blue), and the remaining LEDs 1 to 4 of the back upper front decoration 3310, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 continue to light up in a rainbow light-emitting mode. This allows the player to be aware that some abnormality has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 while maintaining a situation in which they can expect a light-emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light-emitting mode.

In addition, if the second or third abnormality occurs during the execution of the rainbow effect, the light-emitting effect in which the back upper front decorative body 3310, LEDs 1-4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5-7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8-9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10-14 of the door frame 3 are involved and lit in a rainbow light-emitting mode is stopped, and an error notification effect is executed in which the LEDs that constitute the rainbow light-emitting mode (back upper front decorative body 3310, LEDs 1-14) are lit in a single color (e.g., red or blue). In other words, if the second or third abnormality occurs during the execution of the rainbow effect, the execution of the light-emitting effect in which the light-emitting area (back upper front decorative body 3310, LEDs 1-14) around the display area of the effect display device 1600 is lit in a rainbow light-emitting mode is restricted. This creates a situation in which it is not possible to know that the rainbow effect is being executed, and it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 aware of the occurrence of some abnormality.

In this example, during the execution period of the rainbow performance (rainbow performance when winning or losing), the back upper front decorative body 3310, LEDs 1-4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5-7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8-9 of the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10-14 of the door frame 3 are involved in executing the light-emitting performance in which they light up in a rainbow light-emitting mode, while LEDs 15-17 of the game board 5 continue the light-emitting performance according to the fluctuation pattern regardless of the light-emitting color that constitutes the rainbow light-emitting mode. In contrast, if a first abnormality occurs during the execution period of the rainbow performance, LEDs 15-17 of the game board 5 do not enter a state in which the LEDs notify an error like LEDs 10-14 of the door frame 3, and continue the light-emitting performance according to the fluctuation pattern. In this way, if a first abnormality occurs during the execution period of the rainbow performance, the light-emitting performance according to the fluctuation pattern is continued, thereby maintaining a situation in which one can expect a light-emitting performance according to the fluctuation pattern.

Similarly, if a second abnormality occurs during the execution of the rainbow effect, LEDs 15-17 on the game board 5 will not enter an error notification state like the LEDs that make up the rainbow light-emitting mode (rear upper front decorative body 3310, LEDs 1-14), but will continue to emit light according to the fluctuation pattern. As a result, if a second abnormality occurs during the execution of the rainbow effect, the light-emitting mode will be stopped, but LEDs 15-17 on the game board 5 will continue to emit light according to the fluctuation pattern, so that while the pachinko machine 1 is notified that some abnormality has occurred, a situation can be maintained in which one can expect light-emitting effects according to the fluctuation pattern.

Meanwhile, if a third abnormality occurs during the execution of the rainbow effect, the LEDs 15-17 on the game board 5 are lit in a single color (e.g., red or blue) like the LEDs that make up the rainbow light-emitting mode (rear upper front decorative body 3310, LEDs 1-14) to notify of the error, and the light-emitting effect according to the fluctuation pattern is stopped. As a result, if a third abnormality occurs during the execution of the rainbow effect, not only is the light-emitting effect that lights up in the rainbow light-emitting mode stopped, but the light-emitting effect according to the fluctuation pattern for LEDs 15-17 on the game board 5 is also stopped, eliminating the situation in which one would expect a light-emitting effect according to the fluctuation pattern, and making the player aware that some kind of fraudulent activity is occurring with the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, in this example, when a rainbow effect is being performed, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is divided into multiple display areas, and a rainbow-type effect image is displayed in which each of the multiple display areas is displayed in a different display color. However, if the first to third abnormalities occur during the performance of the rainbow effect, the effect display device 1600 displays an image notifying the user of the type of abnormality. However, if the first abnormality occurs, the rainbow-type effect image remains visible even when the image notifying the user of the type of abnormality is displayed, whereas if the second or third abnormality occurs, the rainbow-type effect image is not visible when the image notifying the user of the type of abnormality is displayed, and the rainbow-type effect image makes it impossible to know that a rainbow effect is being performed.

In addition, in this example, when the second abnormality occurs, the back upper front decorative body 3310, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are not executed during the execution of the rainbow performance, in which the light-emitting performance is lit in a rainbow light-emitting mode by the involvement of the back upper front decorative body 3310, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3. Similarly, when the second abnormality occurs during the execution period of the rainbow performance, the light-emitting performance is stopped, in which the back upper front decorative body 3310, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are executed. Under such circumstances, even if the second abnormality is resolved during the execution period of the rainbow performance, the situation in which the light-emitting performance is not executed in a rainbow light-emitting mode is continued for the remaining time. For example, if the remaining time during the execution period of the rainbow effect after the rainbow-mode effect image is returned to a state in which it is possible to see it is too short, even if the back upper front decorative body 3310, LEDs 1-4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5-7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8-9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10-14 of the door frame 3 are involved in executing a light-emitting effect in which the light is lit in a rainbow light-emitting mode, it may not be possible to determine whether or not the rainbow effect is being executed. For this reason, in this example, even if the second abnormality is resolved during the execution period of the rainbow effect, by continuing the situation in which the light-emitting effect in which the light is lit in a rainbow light-emitting mode is not executed for the remaining time, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which it is not possible to determine whether or not the rainbow effect is being executed.

[Rainbow effect with increasing and decreasing rainbow-emitting LEDs]
In the above, a rainbow effect is executed as a high expectation effect that suggests a high possibility of a win during the display of the changing patterns, and when the rainbow effect is executed, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are lit up in a rainbow light emission mode in conjunction with the display of the effect display device 1600, but in this example, a ring-shaped decorative part 1710 in which multiple LEDs are arranged in a ring is provided as a light-emitting decoration involved in the rainbow light emission mode, and when the rainbow effect is executed, a light-emitting effect is executed in which the LEDs of the ring-shaped decorative part 1710 are lit up in a rainbow light emission mode, as described below. With such a ring-shaped decorative part 1710, it is possible to increase or decrease the number of LEDs involved in the rainbow light emission mode, so that the impact on the light-emitting effect that lights up in the rainbow light emission mode can be changed.

Figure 269 is an explanatory diagram showing the annular decorative part 1710. The annular decorative part 1710 has a first annular decorative part 1710A on the inside where seven LEDs are arranged in a ring shape, and a second annular decorative part 1710B on the outside where 14 LEDs, which is more than the number of LEDs in the first annular decorative part 1710A, are arranged. The annular decorative part 1710 allows each of the first annular decorative part 1710A and the second annular decorative part 1710B to be lit in a rainbow light emission mode. The annular decorative part 1710 is provided as one of the light-emitting decorative bodies provided in the play area 5a on the front side of the play board 5.

In this example, during the execution period of the light-emitting performance in which the LEDs of the first annular decorative part 1710A are involved and light up in a rainbow light-emitting mode, each of the LEDs of the first annular decorative part 1710A is lighted up in a rainbow light-emitting mode, emitting different light colors. In this type of first annular decorative part 1710A with a rainbow light-emitting mode, the light colors emitted by each of the LEDs of the first annular decorative part 1710A are changed in a predetermined order of "red → purple → blue → green → orange → yellow → white → red," and such regular changes are repeated.

In addition, during the execution period of the light-emitting performance in which the LEDs of the second annular decorative part 1710B are involved and light up in a rainbow light-emitting mode, two adjacent LEDs in the second annular decorative part 1710B are treated as one group, and the two groups of LEDs are each lighted up in a rainbow light-emitting mode in which the two groups of LEDs each emit a different light color. In the second annular decorative part 1710B with such a rainbow light-emitting mode, the light colors emitted by each of the two groups of LEDs are changed in a predetermined order of "red → purple → blue → green → orange → yellow → white → red," and such regular changes are repeated.

In this way, the LEDs of the first annular decorative part 1710A and the LEDs of the second annular decorative part 1710B can be controlled to switch between multiple light emission colors in sequence in a short unit light emission time, making it possible to visually recognize that these LEDs are working together to emit light in a rainbow light emission pattern, and a light emission performance with more impact can be performed. In addition, the LEDs of the first annular decorative part 1710A can be controlled in a linked manner, with seven LEDs emitting light in multiple colors so that the seven LEDs emit different light emission colors, and the light emission colors can be switched in a short period of time, to perform a light emission performance with more impact than usual. Similarly, the LEDs of the second annular decorative part 1710B can be controlled in a linked manner, with fourteen LEDs emitting light in multiple colors so that the two groups of LEDs each emit different light emission colors, and the light emission colors can be switched in a short period of time, to perform a light emission performance with more impact than usual.

In this example, multiple LEDs are used to emit seven colors simultaneously in a rainbow light emission mode, and each emitted color is switched regularly, but the emitted colors do not have to be seven colors that appear simultaneously, and it is sufficient if three or more predetermined colors appear simultaneously.

In this example, as an effect according to the fluctuation pattern, a rainbow effect can be executed as a high expectation effect during the fluctuation display of the pattern, and a rainbow effect at the time of a win in which a win is derived as a result of the fluctuation display of the pattern, and a rainbow effect at the time of a miss in which a miss is derived as a result of the fluctuation display of the pattern are set, in other words, at the time of a win, it is possible to determine a fluctuation pattern that executes the rainbow effect at the time of a win, and at the time of a miss, it is possible to determine a fluctuation pattern that executes the rainbow effect at the time of a miss. Then, at the time of a miss, the frequency of execution of the rainbow effect at the time of a miss is made lower than that of other effects at the time of a miss by lowering the rate at which the fluctuation pattern that executes the rainbow effect at the time of a miss is determined. As a result, when a rainbow effect is executed, it is not possible to distinguish whether it is a rainbow effect at the time of a win or a rainbow effect at the time of a miss, but the rate at which the rainbow effect is executed at the time of a win is high, suggesting that there is a high possibility of a win.

Figure 270 is a timing chart showing an example of a rainbow effect using the annular decorative part 1710. First, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives a variation pattern command from the main control board 1310, it starts a variation effect such as a variation display of the decorative pattern in the effect display device 1600 in synchronization with the variation display of the special pattern as an effect corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command. Then, when a variation pattern at the time of a win for executing a rainbow effect at the time of a win has been determined, or a variation pattern at the time of a loss for executing a rainbow effect at the time of a loss has been determined, when the elapsed time from the start of the variation display of the pattern reaches a predetermined timing, a light-emitting effect (rainbow effect) is started in which the first annular decorative part 1710A of the annular decorative part 1710 is lit up in a rainbow light-emitting mode.

In addition, during the execution period of the rainbow effect using the first annular decorative part 1710A, the effect display device 1600 executes an explanatory effect in which a display is displayed to explain that a win has occurred when the subsequent rainbow effect (rainbow effect using the second annular decorative part 1710B) is executed, and that a miss has occurred when the subsequent rainbow effect (rainbow effect using the second annular decorative part 1710B) is not executed (for example, "If the second annular decorative part 1710B emits rainbow light, it's a win! If the second annular decorative part 1710B does not emit rainbow light, it's a miss!").

When the variation pattern at the time of winning is determined, after starting the light-emitting performance in which the first annular decorative part 1710A is lit in a rainbow light-emitting mode, at a predetermined timing, in addition to the light-emitting performance in which the first annular decorative part 1710A is lit in a rainbow light-emitting mode, the light-emitting performance in which the second annular decorative part 1710B is lit in a rainbow light-emitting mode is executed. In other words, both the LED of the first annular decorative part 1710A and the LED of the second annular decorative part 1710B will execute a light-emitting performance in which the first annular decorative part 1710A is lit in a rainbow light-emitting mode. As a result, when the light-emitting performance in which the second annular decorative part 1710B is lit in a rainbow light-emitting mode is executed after the start of the light-emitting performance in which the first annular decorative part 1710A is lit in a rainbow light-emitting mode, it is possible to know that the variation display of the pattern being executed will be a win, and in order to know whether or not a win will be executed, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the light-emitting performance in which the second annular decorative part 1710B is lit in a rainbow light-emitting mode is executed.

In addition, as a rainbow effect when a win occurs, after starting a light-emitting effect in which the first annular decorative part 1710A is lit up in a rainbow light-emitting mode, if a light-emitting effect in which the second annular decorative part 1710B is lit up in a rainbow light-emitting mode is executed at a predetermined timing, the effect display device 1600 displays a specific image that allows the player to recognize that the changing display of the symbols being executed is a win. Specifically, the effect display device 1600 executes a display (for example, "Congratulations!") that notifies the player that the changing display of the symbols being executed is a win and that a happy result has been achieved. As a result, even if a malfunction or abnormality occurs in the second annular decorative part 1710B and the player is unable to recognize that a light-emitting effect in which the second annular decorative part 1710B is lit up in a rainbow light-emitting mode has been executed, the player can clearly understand that the changing display of the symbols being executed is a win by the specific image displayed on the effect display device 1600.

In addition, as a rainbow effect at the time of winning, after starting a light-emitting effect in which the first annular decorative part 1710A is lit in a rainbow light-emitting mode, when a light-emitting effect in which the second annular decorative part 1710B is lit in a rainbow light-emitting mode is executed at a predetermined timing, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is divided into a plurality of display areas, and a rainbow-mode effect image is displayed in which each of the plurality of display areas is displayed in a different display color. In such a rainbow-mode effect image, the display color displayed in each of the plurality of display areas is changed in a predetermined order of "red → purple → blue → green → orange → yellow → white → red" every predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds), and such regular changes are repeated. The target for displaying the rainbow-mode effect image may be an effect image displayed in the entire display area of the effect display device 1600, such as a background image, or an effect image displayed in a part of the display area of the effect display device 1600, such as an effect image of a character or an item. As a result, even if a malfunction or abnormality occurs in the second annular decorative part 1710B and it is not possible to recognize that a light-emitting effect has been performed in which the second annular decorative part 1710B is lit up in a rainbow light-emitting manner, the specific image displayed on the effect display device 1600 allows the player to clearly understand that the changing display of the pattern being performed is a win.

On the other hand, when a variation pattern for executing a rainbow effect when a miss is determined, after starting the light-emitting effect of lighting in a rainbow light-emitting mode using the first annular decorative part 1710A, the light-emitting effect of lighting in a rainbow light-emitting mode using the second annular decorative part 1710B is not executed. In other words, even if the specified timing is reached after starting the light-emitting effect of lighting in a rainbow light-emitting mode using the first annular decorative part 1710A, the light-emitting effect of lighting in a rainbow light-emitting mode using the second annular decorative part 1710B is not executed, the LED of the second annular decorative part 1710B remains off, and only the LED of the first annular decorative part 1710A continues to be lit in the rainbow light-emitting mode. As a result, if a light-emitting effect using the second annular decorative part 1710B to light up in a rainbow light-emitting manner is not executed after the start of the light-emitting effect using the first annular decorative part 1710A, the player can know that the changing display of the pattern being executed will be a miss, and can pay attention to whether or not a light-emitting effect using the second annular decorative part 1710B to light up in a rainbow light-emitting manner is executed to know whether or not a win will occur.

In addition, as a rainbow effect when a miss occurs, if the light-emitting effect of lighting in a rainbow light-emitting mode using the first annular decorative part 1710A is started and then the light-emitting effect of lighting in a rainbow light-emitting mode using the second annular decorative part 1710B is not executed, a specific image is displayed in the performance display device 1600 at a predetermined timing to prevent the player from recognizing that the changing display of the pattern being executed is a win. Specifically, the performance display device 1600 executes a display (for example, "Too bad!") to notify the player that the changing display of the pattern being executed is a miss and that the result is unfortunate. As a result, even if a malfunction or abnormality occurs in the second annular decorative part 1710B and the player is unable to recognize that the light-emitting effect of lighting in a rainbow light-emitting mode using the second annular decorative part 1710B will not be executed, the specific image displayed on the performance display device 1600 allows the player to clearly understand that the changing display of the pattern being executed is a miss.

In addition, as a rainbow effect when a miss occurs, if a light-emitting effect in which the first annular decorative part 1710A is lit up in a rainbow light-emitting mode is started, and then a light-emitting effect in which the second annular decorative part 1710B is lit up in a rainbow light-emitting mode is not executed, the effect display device 1600 will not display a rainbow-mode effect image at a specified timing.

In this example, when a rainbow effect is executed in a winning state, the first annular decorative part 1710A is used to light up in a rainbow light emission mode, and then, at a predetermined timing, a light emission effect in a rainbow light emission mode using the second annular decorative part 1710B is additionally executed. On the other hand, when a rainbow effect is executed in a losing state, the first annular decorative part 1710A is used to light up in a rainbow light emission mode, and then, at a predetermined timing, a light emission effect in a rainbow light emission mode using the second annular decorative part 1710B is not executed, and the light emission effect in a rainbow light emission mode using the first annular decorative part 1710A is continued. In other words, when a rainbow effect is executed in a winning state, not only the LEDs of the first annular decorative part 1710A but also the LEDs of the second annular decorative part 1710B are lit up in a rainbow light emission mode, and the number of LEDs involved in the rainbow light emission mode is increased. As a result, depending on whether the number of LEDs involved in the rainbow light emission mode is increased, it is easy to grasp whether the variable display of the pattern being executed is a winning state. In addition, by increasing the number of LEDs involved in the rainbow light emission mode, combined with the fact that the changing display of the ongoing patterns will become a winning combination, the player's desire to play can be excessively increased.

In this example, when the rainbow effect is performed when a winning combination is selected, the LED of the first annular decorative part 1710A and the LED of the second annular decorative part 1710B are each configured to light up in a rainbow light emission mode, but the first annular decorative part 1710A and the second annular decorative part 1710B may be configured to light up in a rainbow light emission mode as a single unit. Also, when the rainbow effect is performed when a winning combination is selected, in addition to the state in which the LED of the first annular decorative part 1710A is lit up in a rainbow light emission mode, the LED of the second annular decorative part 1710B is lit up in a rainbow light emission mode, but the LED of the first annular decorative part 1710A may be switched from the state in which the LED of the first annular decorative part 1710A is lit up in a rainbow light emission mode to the state in which the LED of the second annular decorative part 1710B is lit up in a rainbow light emission mode. Even in this configuration, the second annular decorative part 1710B has a greater number of LEDs than the first annular decorative part 1710A, so when the rainbow effect is performed upon winning, the number of LEDs involved in the rainbow light emission pattern increases.

As a rainbow effect when a winning combination occurs, after the first annular decorative part 1710A and the second annular decorative part 1710B are illuminated in a rainbow illumination mode, the winning result (winning pattern) is notified as a result of the display of the changing patterns. However, during the notification of the winning result, only the illumination effect using the first annular decorative part 1710A is executed without executing the illumination effect using the second annular decorative part 1710B in a rainbow illumination mode. In other words, when the rainbow effect occurs when a winning combination occurs, both the LED of the first annular decorative part 1710A and the LED of the second annular decorative part 1710B are illuminated, whereas during the notification of the winning result after the execution of the rainbow effect when a winning combination occurs, the LED of the second annular decorative part 1710B is turned off, and only the LED of the first annular decorative part 1710A is illuminated in a rainbow illumination mode. In such a case, during the notification of the winning result after the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of winning, the number of LEDs involved in the rainbow light emission mode is reduced compared to when the rainbow effect at the time of winning is executed. Here, during the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of winning, a state in which the player's motivation to play is excessively increased is generated because a light emission performance that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode using the first annular decorative part 1710A and the second annular decorative part 1710B is executed, but during the notification of the winning result after the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of winning, only the light emission performance that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode using the first annular decorative part 1710A is executed, thereby reducing the state in which the player's motivation to play is excessively increased, and it is possible to prevent the player from becoming excessively absorbed in the game in the subsequent game.

In the above, during notification of the winning result after the execution of the rainbow performance upon winning, a light-emitting performance is executed in which the first annular decorative part 1710A is lit up in a rainbow light-emitting mode, and a performance similar to the light-emitting performance in which the first annular decorative part 1710A is lit up in a rainbow light-emitting mode in the rainbow performance upon losing is executed, but it does not have to be the same performance, and it is sufficient if it is configured to have less impact on the rainbow light-emitting mode than when the rainbow performance upon winning is executed. Also, during notification of the winning result after the execution of the rainbow performance upon winning, the number of LEDs involved in the rainbow light-emitting mode is reduced compared to when the rainbow performance upon winning is executed, but this is not limited to this, and it is sufficient if it is configured to have less impact on the rainbow light-emitting mode than when the rainbow performance upon winning is executed. For example, when executing a rainbow effect at the time of winning, the LED's light color may be switched at a normal speed (e.g., 0.1 seconds) when executing a light-emitting effect in which the LED is lit in a rainbow light-emitting mode, whereas when executing a light-emitting effect in which the LED is lit in a rainbow light-emitting mode during notification of the winning result after the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of winning, the LED's light color may be switched at a slower speed (e.g., 1 second) than the normal speed. In other words, during notification of the winning result after the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of winning, the light-emitting effect in which the LED is lit in a rainbow light-emitting mode may be executed so that the interval at which the LED's light color is switched is longer than when the rainbow effect at the time of winning is executed. Even with this configuration, the interval at which the LED's light color is switched is longer during notification of the winning result after the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of winning, which reduces the player's excessive motivation to play and prevents the player from becoming overly absorbed in the game in subsequent games.

Also, for example, when a rainbow effect is executed upon a win, the light intensity of the LED may be increased when executing the light-emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light-emitting mode, whereas when the win result is notified after the execution of the rainbow effect upon a win, the light intensity of the LED may be decreased when executing the light-emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light-emitting mode. In other words, when the win result is notified after the execution of the rainbow effect upon a win, the light-emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light-emitting mode may be executed so that the light intensity of the LED is lower compared to when the rainbow effect upon a win is executed. Even with this configuration, the light intensity of the LED is lowered during the notification of the win result after the execution of the rainbow effect upon a win, thereby reducing the player's excessive motivation to play and preventing the player from becoming overly absorbed in the game in subsequent games.

In addition, when the rainbow effect is executed upon winning, the LED of the first annular decorative part 1710A lights up in a rainbow light emission mode, and the LED of the second annular decorative part 1710B lights up in a rainbow light emission mode, and the effect display device 1600 displays a rainbow-mode effect image. However, during the notification of the winning result after the execution of the rainbow effect upon winning, the LED of the first annular decorative part 1710A only lights up in a rainbow light emission mode, and the LED of the second annular decorative part 1710B does not light up in a rainbow light emission mode, and the effect display device 1600 does not display a rainbow-mode effect image. Even with this configuration, during the notification of the winning result after the execution of the rainbow effect upon winning, the effect display device 1600 does not display a rainbow-mode effect image, which reduces the player's excessive motivation to play and prevents the player from becoming overly absorbed in the game in subsequent games.

As described above in detail, the rainbow single decorative part 1700 can be attached to the game board 5, and during the execution of rainbow effects such as simulated rainbow effects and rainbow effects at the time of winning, it is possible to execute a notification effect in which the LEDs of the rainbow single decorative part 1700 are lit in a rainbow light-emitting mode in synchronization with the execution of a light-emitting effect in which LEDs 1-4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5-7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8-9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10-14 of the door frame 3 are lit in a rainbow light-emitting mode. As a result, even if an abnormality occurs in some of the LEDs that make up the rainbow light-emitting mode during the execution of a rainbow effect, it is possible to know that a rainbow effect is being executed by visually checking the light emission in the rainbow light-emitting mode of the rainbow single decorative part 1700. In this example, when the rainbow performance is executed upon a win, a light-emitting performance is executed in which the first annular decorative part 1710A and the second annular decorative part 1710B are lit up in a rainbow light-emitting mode, and in synchronization with this, a notification performance is executed in which the LED of the rainbow alone decorative part 1700 is lit up in a rainbow light-emitting mode, whereas during the notification of the win result after the execution of the rainbow performance upon a win, a light-emitting performance is executed in which the first annular decorative part 1710A is lit up in a rainbow light-emitting mode, but the notification performance in which the LED of the rainbow alone decorative part 1700 is lit up in a rainbow light-emitting mode is not executed. Regarding this, since it is important that when the rainbow effect is being performed upon a win, the player is made aware that the rainbow effect is being performed upon a win, and that the player does not miss out on useful information, the configuration is such that even if an abnormality occurs in which some of the LEDs of the first annular decorative part 1710A or the second annular decorative part 1710B do not light up, the player can visually confirm the light emission in the rainbow light emission mode of the rainbow single decorative part 1700 that the rainbow effect is being performed upon a win. In contrast, during the notification of the win result after the execution of the rainbow effect upon a win, the first annular decorative part 1710A is used to perform the light emission effect in the rainbow light emission mode, but since this is not useful information for the player and is not necessarily information that should be conveyed to the player, the configuration is such that the LEDs of the rainbow single decorative part 1700 do not light up in the rainbow light emission mode, regardless of whether an abnormality occurs in which some of the LEDs of the first annular decorative part 1710A do not light up.

In this example, when a rainbow effect is executed when a player loses, the pattern of variation when a player loses is not determined for a specific period (e.g., 3 minutes) after the end of the rainbow effect when a player loses, and the rainbow effect when a player loses is not executed again. On the other hand, the pattern of variation when a player wins is determined for a specific period (e.g., 3 minutes) after the end of the rainbow effect when a player loses, and the execution of the rainbow effect when a player wins is not restricted. This prevents the rainbow effect when a player loses from being repeated in a short period such as a specific period, and does not cause the player to lose confidence in the rainbow effect that is executed as a high expectation effect that suggests a high possibility of a win, allowing the player to look forward to the execution of the next rainbow effect. In addition, if a light-emitting effect that uses the first annular decorative part 1710A to light up in a rainbow light-emitting mode is started as a rainbow effect before a specific period of time has elapsed after the rainbow effect that occurs when a player loses is finished, the player can know that the rainbow effect that occurs when a player wins is being executed without waiting for an additional light-emitting effect that uses the second annular decorative part 1710B to light up in a rainbow light-emitting mode and is executed.

In addition, in this example, a rainbow effect (a rainbow effect when a winning symbol is displayed, and a rainbow effect when a losing symbol is displayed) is executed as an effect during the changing display of the symbol, but this is not limited to this. In a specific period such as during a winning game when the changing display of the symbol is not in progress, after the execution of a light-emitting effect in which the first annular decorative part 1710A is lit in a rainbow light-emitting mode, a rainbow effect may be executed in which the second annular decorative part 1710B is lit in a rainbow light-emitting mode. In this case, the player may be made aware of whether or not some game benefit (such as probability fluctuation or time reduction) will be granted after the winning game being executed, depending on the situation of the rainbow effect of whether or not the light-emitting effect in which the second annular decorative part 1710B is lit in a rainbow light-emitting mode is executed after the execution of a light-emitting effect in which the first annular decorative part 1710A is lit in a rainbow light-emitting mode. In addition, since the player has obtained useful information after the second annular decorative part 1710B is used to light up in a rainbow light-emitting mode, the device can be configured to only light up in a rainbow light-emitting mode using the first annular decorative part 1710A without light-emitting in a rainbow light-emitting mode using the second annular decorative part 1710B. This configuration reduces the player's excessive motivation to play and prevents the player from becoming overly absorbed in the game in subsequent games.

As described above in detail, during the execution of a rainbow effect (rainbow effect when a win occurs, rainbow effect when a loss occurs), a rainbow effect with button effect A, a rainbow effect with button effect B, and a rainbow effect with button effect C may be performed as button effects that make it possible to determine whether or not a win occurs when a specific operation unit is operated. Also, during the execution of a rainbow effect (rainbow effect when a win occurs, rainbow effect when a loss occurs), the effect display device 1600 may be configured not to execute a button operation promotion effect that displays a message encouraging the user to operate a specific operation unit (for example, "Press the light adjustment button!"), and button effects A to C may function as "hidden effects" during the execution of a rainbow effect (rainbow effect when a win occurs, rainbow effect when a loss occurs). For example, in the case of button performance A, when a rainbow performance is being executed upon a win, operating the light intensity adjustment button 228 changes the light intensity of at least the LEDs that constitute the rainbow light emission pattern (LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3) among the LEDs of the luminous decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, whereas operating the light intensity adjustment button 228 during execution of a rainbow performance does not change the light intensity of at least the LEDs that constitute the rainbow light emission pattern (LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3) among the LEDs of the luminous decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5. In other words, after starting the light-emitting effect in which the first annular decorative part 1710A is lit in a rainbow light-emitting mode as a rainbow effect, when the light intensity can be adjusted, the rainbow effect is not a rainbow effect when a miss occurs, and it is possible to know that the rainbow effect when a hit occurs is being executed without waiting for the light-emitting effect in which the second annular decorative part 1710B is lit in a rainbow light-emitting mode to be added and executed. This allows players who usually actively operate the light intensity adjustment button 228 to know early on whether they will win, and players who usually do not actively operate the light intensity adjustment button 228 to focus on whether the light-emitting effect in which the second annular decorative part 1710B is lit in a rainbow light-emitting mode to be added and executed, allowing them to enjoy carefully whether they will win or not.

In addition, in this example, when the rainbow performance is executed upon winning, the light-emitting performance is executed in the rainbow light-emitting mode using the first annular decorative part 1710A and the second annular decorative part 1710B, whereas during the notification of the winning result after the execution of the rainbow performance upon winning, only the light-emitting performance is executed in the rainbow light-emitting mode using the first annular decorative part 1710A, but during the notification of the winning result after the execution of the rainbow performance upon winning, the execution period of the light-emitting performance in the rainbow light-emitting mode is longer than when the rainbow performance upon winning is executed. Here, during the notification of the winning result after the execution of the rainbow performance upon winning, the number of LEDs involved in the rainbow light-emitting mode is reduced compared to when the rainbow performance upon winning is executed, making it difficult to recognize whether the light is lit in the rainbow light-emitting mode, but by making the execution period of the light-emitting performance in the rainbow light-emitting mode longer than when the rainbow performance upon winning is executed, it is possible to reliably recognize whether the light is lit in the rainbow light-emitting mode.

Regarding the rainbow effects of the present invention, various rainbow effects are described individually as necessary, but only one of these rainbow effects may be executed, or a combination of these rainbow effects may be executed in parallel. For example, the rainbow effects may be configured to execute a rainbow effect when a win occurs, a rainbow effect when a loss occurs, and a simulated rainbow effect in parallel. In addition, in the rainbow effects of the present invention, not only LEDs 1 to 4 on the game board 5 but also LEDs on members other than the game board 5 (LEDs 5 to 7 on the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 on the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 on the door frame 3) are used to execute a light-emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light-emitting mode, but it is sufficient to use multiple LEDs to achieve the rainbow light-emitting mode, and for example, a light-emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light-emitting mode may be executed using only the LEDs on the game board 5.

The present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, but the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements and design changes are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention, as described below.

In other words, in the above embodiment, the invention is applied to a pachinko machine 1 or a slot machine as a gaming machine, but it is not limited to this and may be applied to a pachislot machine or a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine, and in this case, the same effects as those described above can be achieved. It can also be applied to so-called enclosed gaming machines in which the player does not touch the gaming ball B, and gaming machines called managed gaming machines.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance display device 1600 is attached to the center of the set plate 1650, but this is not limited to this, and the performance display device 1600 may be attached to an eccentric position relative to the center of the set plate 1650. Also, in this embodiment, one performance display device 1600 is attached to the set plate 1650, but this is not limited to this, and multiple performance display devices may be attached to the set plate 1650.

1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 1000 Front component 1100 Game panel 2000 Front unit 2500 Center role 2555 Center right front plate (holding plate)
2555a First storage section (storage section)
2555b Second storage section (storage section)
2555c Peel hole 2555d Front of protrusion (protrusion)
2700: specific obstacle nail group 2701: set nail section 2710: induction area 2711: first induction area 2712: second induction area N: obstacle nail

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine that can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state advantageous to a player when a lottery result is a jackpot result,
a special game state control means for controlling the game state to a special game state in which a frequency of a predetermined start condition being satisfied is higher than that of a normal game state without controlling the game state to the jackpot game state when the result of the lottery is a non-jackpot result other than the jackpot result;
an external terminal board having a plurality of external output terminal units;
An external output means capable of transmitting the status of the gaming machine to an external device using the external terminal board;
Equipped with
The external output means includes:
When the special game state is entered, it is possible to transmit to an external device that a situation advantageous to the player has occurred.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images